01 07-2

ANNUAL BOOK OF
STANDARDS
SECTION 1
Iron and Steel Products
VOLUME 01.07
Ships and Marine Technology
0
Includes standards of the following committee(s):
F25 on Ships and Marine Technology
INTERNATIONAL
ASTM Stock Number: 8010713
This volume includes only those standards available for publication at the time of this printing. Additional
and more current versions of standards within this volume may be available. To identify or obtain the most
current standards, visit the Standards page at www.astm.org.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL 1111 100 BARR HARBOR DRIVE, PO BOX C700, WEST CONSHOHOCKEN, PA 19428-2959
TEL: 610-832-9500 1111 FAX: 610-832-9555 1111 EMAIL: service@astm.org Ill WEBSITE: www.astm.org
Director:
Vernice A. Mayer
Editors:
Sean J. Bailey
Nicole C. Baldini
Scott Emery

INTERNATIONAL
Editorial Staff
Joe Ermigiotti
Dan Gallagher
Kristin Hanratty
Christine M. Leinweber
Emily Moore
Emilie A. Olcese
Kathleen A. Peters
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 83-641658
ISBN 978-1-6220-4271-5 (set)
ISBN 978-1-6220-4273-9 (section)
ISBN 978-1-6220-4287-6 (volume)
Jessica L. Rosiak
Todd J. Sandler
David A. Terruso
Julie Wright
Publishing Assistant Coordinator:
Nicholas Furcola
Copyright 2013 ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA. Prior editions copyrighted 2012 and earlier,
by the American Society for Testing and Materials. All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced
or copied, in whole or in part, in any printed, mechanical, electronic, film, or other distribution and storage
media, without the written consent of the publisher.
ORDER INFORMATION: Additional copies of this book in print, on CD-ROM, or reprints (single or multiple
copies) of individual standards may be obtained by contacting ASTM International at 100 Barr Harbor Drive,
PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax),
service@astm.org (email), or through www.astm.org (website).
Photocopy Rights
Authorization to photocopy items for internal, or educational classroom use, or the internal,
personal, or educational classroom use of specific is granted ASTM International provided
that the appropriate fee is paid to ASTM 100 Barr Harbor PO Box C700, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, Tel: 610-832-9634; online: http://www.astm.o:rg/copy:right/
Printed in Eagan, MN, U.S.A.
Designation: F1387- 99 (Reapproved 2012)
'4u11
7
An American National Standard
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Specification for
Performance of Piping and Tubing Mechanically Attached
Fittings
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation F1387; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification establishes the performance chasac-
teristics required for mechanically attached fittings (MAFs) for
use in piping and tubing systems. These fittings directly attach
to pipe or tube by mechanical deformation of the pipe or tube
or fitting, or a combination thereof, creating a seal and a
restrained joint. The seal may be created via the mechanical
deformation or created independently. Successful completion
of the tests described constitutes completion of the technical
portion of the qualification process.
1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use when
additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall apply
only when specified in part or whole by the purchaser in the
order. Unless otherwise specified, U.S. Navy contracts shall
invoke the supplementary requirements in whole.
1.3 Unless specific MAF types are specified, the term
"MAF' shall apply to all types described herein.
1.4 The tests specified in Section 13 and described in Annex
A 1 and Supplementary Requirements are applicable only to
ascertain the performance characteristics of MAFs. These tests
are not intended for use in the evaluation of non-MAF
products.
1.5 A fire performance test is specified in Supplementary
Requirement S7. This test provides general guidelines to
determine the responsiveness of MAFs when subjected to fire.
This test should not be considered for use to evaluate non-MAF
products.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.7 The following safety hazards caveat applies only to the
tests listed in Section 13 and the tests described in the
Supplementary Section and the Annex of this specification:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25. 1 I on
Machinery and Piping Systems.
Current edition approved May 1, 2012. Published May 2012. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2005 as F1387- 99 (2005).
DOl: 10.1520/F1387-99R12.
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A105/A105M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for
Piping Applications
A106/A106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service
Al08 Specification for Steel Bar. Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
Finished
Al09/A109M Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25
Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled
A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
A182/A182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and
Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service
A213/A213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Aus-
tenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler. Superheater, and Heat-
Exchanger Tubes
A234/ A234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought
Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service
A240/A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications
A249/A249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel
Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser
Tubes
A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
A269 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
A276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard's Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C?OO, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
941
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
A312/ A312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
A380 Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems
A403/ A403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings
A450/ A450M Specification for General Requirements for
Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Tubes
A479/A479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels
A530/A530M Specification for General Requirements for
Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
A564/ A564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
A576 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,
Special Quality
A 766/ A 766M Specification for Forgings, Leaded, and Re-
sulfurized Carbon Steel, for Pressure-Containing Applica-
tions (Withdrawn 1989)
3
B 16/B 16M Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar
and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines
B21/B21M Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and
Shapes
B lll!BlllM Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy
Seamless Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock
B 117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
B122/Bl22M Specification for Copper-Nickel-Tin Alloy,
Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloy (Nickel Silver), and Copper-
Nickel Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar
B124/Bl24M Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy
Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes
B 154 Test Method for Mercurous Nitrate Test for Copper
Alloys
B 164 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Wire
B251 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube
B37l/B371 M Specification for Copper-Zinc-Silicon AHoy
Rod
B564 Specification for Nickel AHoy Forgings
B633 Specification for E1ectrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel
B696 Specification for Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically
Deposited
B766 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cad-
mium
E51 1 Test Method for Measuring Heat Flux Using a Copper-
Constantan Circular Foil, Heat-Flux Transducer
E1529 Test Methods for Determining Eft'ects of Large
drocarbon Pool Fires on Structural Members and Assem-
blies
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
942
2.2 Federal Specifications:
4
QQ-P-35 Passivation Treatments for Corrosion-Resisting
Steels
QQ-N-281 Nickel-Copper Alloy Bar, Rod, Plate, Sheet,
Strip, Wire, Forgings and Structural and Special Shaped
Sections
QQ-N-286 Nickel-Copper-Aluminum Alloy, Wrought (UNS
N05500)
QQ-P-416 Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)
QQ-B-626 Brass, Leaded and Nonleaded Rods, Shapes,
Forgings and Flat Product, TH Finished Edges (Bar and
Strip)
QQ-S-763 Steel Bars, Wire, Shapes, and Forgings, Corro-
sion Resisting
2.3 Military Specifications:
4
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact) Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment, and Systems, Requirements for
MIL-T-1368 Tube and Pipe, Nickel Copper Alloy Seamless
and Welded
MIL-H-5606 Hydraulic Fluid, Petroleum Based, Aircraft,
Missile, and Ordinance
MIL-L-7808 Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Syn-
thetic Base, NATO Code Number 0-148
MIL-T-8606 Tubing, Steel Corrosion-Resistant (18-8 Stabi-
lized and Extra Low Carbon)
AND 10102 Tubing-Standard Dimensions for Round Al-
loy Steel
MIL-C-15726 Copper-Nickel Alloy, Rod, Flat Products
(Flat Wire, Strip, Sheet, Bar, and Plate) and Forgings
DOD-P-16232 Phosphate Coatings, Heavy, Manganese or
Zinc Base (for Ferrous Metals)
MIL-T-164 20 Tube, Copper Nickel Alloy, Seamless and
Welded (Copper Alloy Numbers 715 and 706)
MlL-F-18866 Fittings Hydraulic Tube, Flared, 37 and
Flareless Steel
MIL-C-20159 Copper-Nickel Alloy Castings
M1L-T-24107 Tube, Copper, (Seamless) (Copper Numbers
102, 103, l 08, 120, 122, and 142)
MIL-P-24691/1 Pipe and Tube, Carbon Steel, Seamless
MIL-P-24691/2 Pipe and Tube, Chromium-Molybdenum
SteeL Seamless
MIL-P-24691/3 Pipe and Tube, Corrosion-Resistant, Stain-
less Steel, Seamless or Welded
M1L-R-83248/l Rubber, Fluorocarbon Elastomer, High
Temperature, Fluid and Compression Set Resistant,
0-Rings, Class 1, 75 Hardness
MIL-H-83282 Hydraulic Fluid, Fire Resistant, Synthetic
Hydrocarbon Base. Aircraft, Metric, NATO Code Number
H-537
4
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, http://
dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
F1387 - 99 (2012)
2.4 Military Standards:
4
MIL-STD-1 05 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Attributes
MIL-STD-167 Mechanical Vibration of Shipboard Equip-
ment
MIL-STD-271 Nondestructive Testing Requirements of
Metals
MIL-STD-278 Welding and Casting Standard
MIL-STD-753 Corrosion-Resistant Steel Parts, Sampling,
Inspection and Testing for Surface Passivation
MIL-STD-777 Schedule of Piping Valves, Fittings, and As-
sociated Piping Components for Naval Surface Ships
MIL-STD-889 Dissimilar Metals
MIL-STD-1235 Single- and Multi-Level Continuous Sam-
pling Procedures and Table for Inspection Attributes
MIL-STD-2175 Castings, Classification and Inspection of
MS 33531 T<)lerances, Welded Corrosion-Resistant Steel
Tubing
MIL-STD-45662 Calibration System Requirements
2.5 American National Standards Institute (ANS/):
5
B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B 46. I Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness and
Lay)
2.6 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
6
AMS 5643 Bars, Forgings, Tubing and Rings-16 Cr 4.0 Ni
0.30 (Cb + Ta) 4.0 Cu
J 514 Hydraulic Tube Fittings
J 515 Hydraulic "0" Ring
SAE 1010 Carbon Steel: Nonsulfurized Manganese lO%
Minimum
2.7 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
7
ASME Code, Section IX
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 class, n-a group of MAFs of a particular design with
the dimensions proportional to pipe or tube outside diameters,
made from the same material grade (or combination of grades),
for the same rated pressure, or for a rated pressure inversely
proportional to the diameter.
3.1.1.1 Discussion-Class designation for MAF is assigned
based upon the rated pressure used to test the MAF design.
3.1.2 failure, n-any leakage or joint separation unless
otherwise determined to be due to a tubing/pipe or fitting
defect.
3.1.3 fitting, n-connecting device used to join multiple
pipes or tubes or other MAFs together to create a working
system.
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
6
Available from SAE International (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale,
PA 15096-0001, http://www.sae.org.
7
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
International Headquarters, Three Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990, http://
www.asme.org.
943
3.1.3.1 Discussion-Shapes such as couplings, unions,
elbows, tees, crosses, plugs, adapters, reducers, flanges, and
special shapes are used as needed to fulfill MAF system design
specifications.
3.1.4 joint, n-interface between pipe or tube and MAFs
where the seal is maintained or mechanical holding strength is
applied or maintained within the overall MAF design.
3.1.5 leakage, n-the escape of fluid or gas from any point
of the MAF, including the MAF joint interface, sufficient to
drop or flow from the point of formation or gas bubbles rising
to the surface after the first minute of submersion.
3.1.6 mechanically attached fitting ( MAF), n-a fitting that
is directly attached to pipe or tube by mechanical deformation
of the pipe/tube or fitting, or both, creating a seal and a
restrained joint. The seal may be created via the mechanical
deformation or created independently.
3.1.7 penalty run, n-a penalty run is performed with
penalty run MAF specimens when the original MAF test
specimen leaks or separates during testing as a result of any
cause that is not related to the design of the MAF being
qualified.
3.1.8 penalty run MAF specimens, n-additional speci-
men(s) that are tested in the place of the original specimen(s)
(see 3.1.7).
3.1.8.1 Discussion-These additional MAF specimen(s) are
assembled using the same methods along with additional
MAFs of the same type, grade, class, and configuration and
additional pipe or tube with the same wall thickness and
material conditions as the original test specimen.
3.1.9 permanent MAF, n-a fitting whose joint(s) attach
directly to the pipe or tube to join two or more pipes or tubes
or other MAFs in a combination of pipes or tubes and
components. In either case, the permanent MAFs cannot be
disassembled and reused after initial assembly.
3.1.10 pipe, n-hollow round product conforming to the
dimensional requirements for nominal pipe size (NPS) as
tabulated in ANSI B36.1 0, Table 2.
3 .1.11 rated pressure, n-the manufacturer's recommended
in-service pressure assigned to the MAF (see 3. 1. 15).
3.1.12 separable MAF, n-a fitting whose joint(s) attach
directly to the pipe or tube to join two or more pipes or tubes
or other MAFs in a combination of pipes or tubes and
components. Once assembled, the separable MAFs can be
disassembled and reassembled a multiple number of times.
3 .1.12.1 Discussion-Some subcomponents of separable
MAFs may become permanently attached to the pipe or tube
without affecting the function of the joint.
3 .1.13 specimen, n-a prepared assembly consisting of a
MAF assembled onto a preselected pipe or tube. The specimen
is placed into a controlled environment and tested to determine
if the MAF assembly meets the requirements specified in the
test being performed.
3 .1.14 test pressure, n-a selected pressure used during
testing, which is based upon the rated pressure (see 3.1.13) of
<4@f F1387 - 99 (2012)
the MAF or pipe or tube, whichever is lower, times the factor
specified for each test (that is, 1.25, 1.50, 2.00, 4.00, and so
forth).
3.1.15 tube, n-hollow round product which is usually
specified with respect to outside diameter and wall thickness.
4. Classification
4.1 MAFs are classified into the following design types:
NoTE l-Each MAF type may consist of more than one material and
class.
4.1.1 Type I: Radially Swaged MAF (Permanent)-A por-
tion of the MAF diameter is reduced mechanically by means of
an installation tool through radial compression to provide an
intimate joint. The properly installed MAF has a circumferen-
tial deformation of predetermined dimensions.
4.1.2 Type II: Flared MAF (Separable)-An assembly that
consists of a body, nut, and sleeve. The MAF is designed to
mate with a tube or other component which has been flared or
machined to a specific angle. The flared tube end is positioned
onto the MAF body cone or seat. The nut is then tightened to
the body thread, thus providing a tube-to-MAF seal through
mechanical retention.
4.1.3 Type III: Flareless (Bite-Type) MAF (Separable) -An
assembly having a ferrule, nut, and body. The ferrule penetrates
the outside of the tubing, thus providing a pressure seal and
holding mechanism.
4.1.4 Type IV: Grip-Type MAF (Separable)-An assembly
having one or two ferrules that are compressed into the surface
of the tube. In the case of the two-ferrule MAF, the forward
ferrule provides the primary seal through radial compression
around the outer diameter of the tube. The rear ferrule acts as
the primary mechanical holding device. In the case of the
single-ferrule design, the ferrule is used to seal and act as the
primary mechanical holding device.
4.1.5 Type V: Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) MAF
(Permanent)-Mechanically attached fittings that use SMA to
provide the mechanical force required to produce a metal-to-
metal seal between the pipe or tube and the MAE The
metal-to-metal seal that is formed is a "live crimp" since the
pipe or tube and the SMA are in a state of dynamic equilibrium.
The SMA maintains a permanent inward radial force on the
pipe or tube at all times. The MAF body itself may be
manufactured from a nonshape memory metal and used in
conjunction with a driver made from SMA.
4.1.6 Type VI: Axially Swaged MAF (Permanent)-
Mechanically attached fittings that have machined swaging
rings telescopically "press fit" from the extremities toward the
center of the MAF body. An installation tool advances the
swaging rings axially over the MAF body into a seated and
locked position. The swage rings compress the MAF body onto
the pipe or tube forming a metal-to-metal seal. The seal is
permanently maintained by the force radially exerted by the
swaging rings onto the sealing interface.
4.2 The MAFs shall be made from one or more of the
following material grades:
NOTE 2-When multiple components resulting in more than one
material grade are specified within a MAF assembly, the combination of
grades used shall be galvanically compatible.
944
4.2.1 Grade A-Carbon steel.
4.2.2 Grade B-Stainless steel.
4.2.3 Grade C-Nickel-copper.
4.2.4 Grade D-Copper-nickel.
4.2.5 Grade -Brass.
4.2.6 Grade F-Nickel titanium.
4.3 The MAF rated pressure may be one of the following
classes:
NOTE 3-The rated pressure may differ within the size range of a MAF
being qualified (see 3.1.1).
4.3.1 Class I-1.38 MPa (200 psi) maximum.
4.3.2 Class 2-2.76 MPa (400 psi) maximum.
4.3.10 Class J0-41.37 MPa (6000 psi) maximum.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for MAFs under this specification shall include
the following:
5.1.1 ASTM designation, title, number, and year of issue;
5.1.2 Quantity of fittings (MAF);
5.1.3 Size, nominal pipe size (NPS), or outer diameter
(OD);
5.1.4 Type (I, II, III, IV, V, or VI);
5.1.5 Material grade (see 4.2, 6.1, or Table I),
5.1.6 Class (see 3.1.1 and 4.3);
5.1.7 MAF shape (that is, straight, elbow, cross, union,
coupling, and so forth) (see 3.1.3);
5.1.8 Supplementary requirements, if any;
5.1.9 Other requirements agreed to between the purchaser
and the manufacturer; and
5.1.10 Inspection and acceptance of MAFs as agreed upon
between the purchaser and the supplier (see Section 14).
5.2 Optional Ordering Requirements :
5.2.1 Certification (see Section 15).
5.2.2 Special marking requirements (see Section 16 and
S1.5).
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 MAF Material-The MAF material used may be
specified in Table 1 or may be other materials not specified
Table 1, as agreed to between the manufacturer and th1
purchaser.
6.1.1 All types may be manufactured from wrought bars
forgings, castings, pipe, or tube.
6.1.2 Flow of Grain-MAPs machined from hot- or cold
drawn bars shall have their longitudinal axis parallel to th
longitudinal axis of the bar with at least the center one third
the bar removed during the manufacturing process unles
testing shows the center material to be free of injurious d e f e t ~
F1387 - 99 (2012)
TABLE 1 Material Specifications for MAFs
Type Straight
I A108A
II A108
Ill A108
IV A108
VI A108A
I A312/A3i2MF
II A479/A479M
Ill A479/A479M
IV A479/A479M
VI A312/A312MF
II 8164
Ill 8164
IV Bi64L
I MIL-C-15726M
II B122/B122M
Ill Bi22/B122M
VI MIL-C-15726M
II B16/B16M
IV B16/Bi6MP
v
Q
Shape
A576
A576
A576
A576
8
A576E
QQ-S-763G
A182/A182M
A182/A182M
A182/A182M
A182/Ai82MK
8564
A564/A564M
B564L
MIL-C-20159M
B122/B122M
B122/8122M
MIL-C-20159M
8124/Bi24M
B124/B124MP
Q
Grade A: Carbon Steel
A108
A576
8
A576
A576
A108A
Grade B: Stainless Steel
A312/A312MF
A479/A479MH
A479/A479MH
A479/A479M
A312/A3i2MF
Grade C: Nickel Copper
8164
8164
8164L
Grade D: Copper Nickel
MIL-C-15726M
Bi22/B122M
8122/B122M
MIL-C-15726M
Grade E: Brass
816/816MN
B16/B16MP
Grade F: Nickel Titanium
Q
A Alternate material in conformance to Specification A 1 06/A i 06M (Grade B) may be used.
8
Alternate material in conformance to Specification A 108 may be used.
Sleeve or Ferrule
A108
A108
A108
A479/A479MH
A564/ A564MJ
A276
A240/A240M
8164
8164
8164L
QQ-N-286
Bi22/Bi22M
A564/A564M
1
B111/B111M
0
Bi6/816MP
c When required by the MAF design, 0-rings in accordance with SAE J515 shall be used to connect the MAF end.
0
No 0-rings used to connect the MAF end.
E Alternate material in conformance to Specification A234/A234M may be used.
F Alternate material in conformance to MIL-P-24691/3 may be used.
G 304, 304L or 316, 316L material may be used.
H Alternate material in conformance to Specification A276 may be used.
1
Grade 302.
J Alternate material in conformance to AMS 5643 may be used.
KAiternate material in conformance to Specification A403/A403M may be used.
L Alternate material in conformance to QQ-N-281 may be used.
M Alternate material in conformance to MIL-T-16420 may be used.
N Alternate material in conformance to Specification B21/821M may be used.
0
Alternate material in conformance to Specification B371/B371M may be used.
P Alternate material in conformance to QQ-B-626 may be used.
0
In accordance with the manufacturer's specification.
Backup Washer
A109/A109M
A109/A109M
A109/A109M
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
A167
1
Seal Material
MIL-R-83248/1
c
D
D
D
MIL-R-83248/1
c
D
D
D
c
D
D
MIL -R-83248/1
c
D
D
c
D
D
6.2 Material Quality-The material shall be of such quality
and purity that the finished product shall have the properties
and characteristics to meet the performance requirements of
this specification.
6.2.1 The manufacturer is encouraged to use materials
produced from recovered materials to the maximum extent
practicable without jeopardizing the intended use. Used or
rebuilt products shall not be used.
945
cf.tf F1387 - 99 (2012)
NoTE 4--The term "recovered materials" is interpreted as those
materials that have been collected or recovered from solid waste and
reprocessed to become a source of raw material, as opposed to extra virgin
raw materials.
6.3 Seal Materials-Seals used with MAPs shall be as
specified in Table 1.
6.4 Surface Applications and Coatings-Surface applica-
tions and coatings if applicable, shall be applied and tested in
accordance with the requirements specified in Table 2.
6.5 MAF Fabrication-MAPs fabricated from two or more
parts may be welded. The use of brazing or soldering is not
permitted.
6.5.1 Welding procedure qualification and welding operator
performance qualification shall be in accordance with }\.S:ME
Section IX. Welding process shall be in accordance with
MIL-STD-278. Welded MAPs shall be tested in accordance
with the requirements as specified in 13.4.3.
6.5.2 The welding procedure qualification test shall dupli-
cate the joint configuration to be used in production.
6.6 Processing Stainless Steel Forgings-Austenitic stain-
less steel components manufactured by hot forge or other
sensitizing processes shall be solution annealed and certified
free of intergranular precipitation. Practice A262 shall be used
to evaluate carbide precipitation in stainless steels.
7. Performance Requirements
7.1 Testing Requirements-MAPs shall be subjected to the
standard performance tests specified in 13.1 and Table 3. The
tests are described in the Annexes. Supplementary tests speci-
fied in 13.2 and TableS l.l shall be performed when invoked in
the order or contract by the purchaser.
7 .1.1 These tests shall be repeated any time changes are
made in the design, material, or manufacturing process, which
in the opinion of the purchaser, may degrade the performance
of MAPs.
7.2 Intermixing of MAF Subcomponents-The intermixing
by the purchaser of subcomponents of the same design, but of
different brands or trade names, is not permitted unless
specifically authorized by the manufacturer.
7 .2.1 When subcomponents of different brands, trade
names, or manufacturers are used, the manufacturer testing the
MAP design shall specify this information in the test report.
TABLE 2 Finishes and
Material Grade Document
A Cadmium Coating
8
.c
A Zinc Sur- 8633
TABLE 3 Specimen Geometry and Testing RequirementsA
Description of Number of Specimens Applicability of Test
Test
Permanent Separable Permanent Separable
Examination of 22 28 yes yes
specimen
Pneumatic 22 28 yes yes
proof test
Hydrostatic 22 28 yes yes
proof test
Impulse test
8
6
6c
yes yes
Flexure fatigue 6
6c
yes yes
test
8
Tensile test 6 6 yes yes
Burst test
8
0
4 4 yes yes
Repeat
c
no yes
assembly
test
8
Rotary flexure 6 no yes
test
8
Mercurous 2 2
E E
nitrate test
A Number of specimens does not include any specimens for supplementary tests
(see Table S1.1 ). When supplementary requirements in S1.3.8 are invoked, the
number of specimens for all tests (annex and supplementary) shall be as specified
in the supplementary requirements section.
8
Specimens can be reused for other primary tests as long as all requirements
herein are complied with for each test.
c A minimum of 50 % of specimens selected for impulse and flexure fatigue testing
shall be subjected to repeat assembly testing.
0
When the Supplementary Requirements of this standard are invoked, burst test
specimens shall be comprised only with passed specimens from elevated tem-
perature soak (see S3) and shock test (see S6). When the Supplementary
Requirements are not invoked, new or passed specimens from other tests in the
Annex can be used. In any event, the minimum quantity of specimens used for this
test shall be as specified.
E Two MAFs from each size and shape made from either copper zinc alloys
containing more than 15 % zinc or copper-aluminum alloys shall be tested. These
specimens shall be assembled onto pipe or tube, but do not have to be capped for
pneumatic and hydrostatic testing before performing the mercurous nitrate test.
7.3 Qualification Requirements-MAPs shall be tested us-
ing specimens of the same type, grade (or combination of
grades), and class. The pipe or tube selected for the technical
qualification to this specification shall meet the requirement
specified in 7 .3.4. Technical qualification of the MAP assembly
shall be based upon successful completion of all required
testing. Each MAF design is only qualified for use with the
or tube material and minimum to maximum wall thickness
tested or extended by interpolation (see 7.3.2 and 7.3.3).
Document Test Results
Salt Spray (Fog) B117 72 h before red rust
Salt Spray (Fog) 8117 72 h before red rust
Salt Spray (Fog) 8117 32 h before red rust
-----'-A-'---------'P-'h-'o'-=s""p'-'-ha::..:t.;:_e_:C:...:o.:::.a.:_t
8
-'C::..:I::::.as:..:s:.-1.:.___ _____:D.:_O.::._D=-..:-P-i62::.:3:.=2'-------=.:=;..:...=:="'---";_.:;_;""------:;;;_;,_'-'--------"'=...;..;....::...::.:..::..:...:....:.::c.:;_;..=;..;__,
B Passivation A380
QQ-P-35
Copper Sulphate Test MIL-STD-753
Method 102
A Other finishes or coatings not specified herein may be used upon mutual agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
8
Coating shall be a minimum of 0.0002 followed by a chromate treatment or with a phosphate coating with oil finish.
c Cadmium plating shall not be used on MAFs intended for use on U.S. Navy vessels.
Federal Specification QQ-P-416 plating may also be used.
946
pass copper sulphate test
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
7.3.1 Except as required by Annex All (Mercurous Nitrate
Test), all MAFs tested shall be comprised of an equal number
of specimens from the smallest and largest sizes within the size
range of the MAF type, grade, and class being tested.
7 .3.1.1 Test one or more intermediate sizes if the ratio of the
minimum and maximum pipe or tube outside diameter to be
tested is equal to or more than five.
7.3.2 Through reasonable interpolations between the MAF
sizes tested, all other sizes of MAFs within the same type,
(or combination of and class, wiH be considered
if the MAF pass all of the testing
requirements specified by the purchaser. Extrapolation is not
acceptable.
7.33 of tees, elbows, and other within
the same class, may be accomplished analysis
(see 7.3.3.1 ), as agreed to between the manufacturer and the
purchaser based on the acceptance of couplings.
7.3.3.1 If tees, elbows, and other shapes are made from a
different raw material form than the coupling (for example,
tees and elbows manufactured from castings versus couplings
manufactured from solid bar or round tube), this alternate
material form shall undergo the same test regimen as the
coupling. Once this is complete, parametric analysis may be
used to qualify the remainder of the shapes as agreed to
between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
7 .3.4 Recommended pipe or tube for use with MAFs may be
qualified throughout its wall thickness range, when pipe ortube
of a minimum and maximum wall thickness are used within the
test specimens being qualified.
7.3.5 The MAFs may incorporate non-MAF features (that
is, bolted flanges, and so forth). Those non-MAF features that
are part of a MAF configuration shall meet the current issue of
existing military and commercial documents (as applicable).
Qualification of the non-MAF features are not within the scope
of this specification.
7.4 Test Report-Upon completion of testing, a test report
shall be written and maintained on file during the life cycle of
the design. A copy of this report shall be made available upon
request from the purchasing activity.
7 .4.1 A failure during shall be analyzed and the
failure analysis (see 11.3.1 and 11.3.2) and corrective action
shall be included in the test report.
7 .4.2 A retest as specified in Section 1 may be allowed
when failure of the original assembly occurs testing.
When is permitted, the failure analysis and corrective
action shall be included in the test report as specified in 7.4.1.
7.5 Test Equipment and Inspection Facilities-The manu-
facturer shall ensure that test equipment and inspection facili-
ties of sufficient accuracy, quality, and quantity are established
and maintained to permit the performance of inspec-
tions.
7.5 .1 Calibration System Requirements-The manufacturer
shall maintain a calibration system for all measuring and test
equipment (M & TE) in accordance with MIL-STD-45662
with traceability to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
947
7.5 .1.1 Accuracy of the M & TE used to measure allowable
variables during testing shall be within one third of the
tolerances permitted (see 7.6).
7.6 Test Conditions-Unless otherwise specified in the test,
the following tolerances shall be used to control conditions of
the tests specified in the Annex:
7.6.1 Ambient Conditions-When ambient is specified, stan-
dard ambient conditions shall be maintained at 25 1 ooc (77
l8F).
7.6.2 Pressure-Unless otherwise specified, the tolerance
for the internal pressure applied to the test specimen during
testing shall be maintained at 5 %.
7.6.3 Test Fluids--Unless otherwise specified, the test fluids
used in the testing of MAF shall include those fluids specified
within the test. Water and other fluids such as SAE Grade lOW,
MIL-H-5606, MIL-L-7808, or MIL-H-83282 may be used
without affecting the validity of the test.
7 .6.4 Temperature-Unless otherwise specified, the allow-
able tolerance for temperature applied to the test specimen
during testing shall be 5C ( l0F).
7.7 Pass or Fail Criteria-Pass or fail criteria for each test
shall be based upon meeting or exceeding the performance
requirements specified in each test.
8. Dimensions
8.1 MAF Dimensions:
8.1.1 Type I MAF dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.
8.1.2 Types II and HI MAF dimensions shall be as specified
in MIL-F-18866 or SAE J514 or as to between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
8.1.3 Type IV MAF dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.
8.1.4 Type V MAF dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.
8.1.5 Type VI MAF dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 Machined Suifaces--Machined surfaces shaH be free
from burrs, cracks, laps, or seams which would affect the
suitability for the intended service.
9.1.1 All machined surfaces shall be 3.2-llm roughness,
average (Ra) ( 125-l..lin. Ra) as specified in ANSI B46.1 or
duplicate of that qualified.
9.1.1.1 External surfaces that do not affect the overal1
function of MAFs shall be excluded from the requirement
specified in 9 .1.1.
9.2 Unmachined Suifaces-Unmachined surfaces, such as
or casting surfaces and bar stock flats, shall be free
from scale, blisters, fins, folds, seams, laps, segregations, or
cracks which may be injurious to personnel or equipment or
affect MAF performance.
10. m n p l l i n ~ for Testing
10. l Inspection Sampling of Raw Material--Except when
specified herein, the number of samples required for inspection
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
of raw materials for conformance of products during manufac-
turing and processing shall be in accordance with established
quality assurance procedures maintained by the manufacturer
and approved by the purchaser.
10.2 In-Process Inspection Sampling of MAPs-Inspection
sampling plans of MAFs being manufactured or processed
shall be mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer and
the purchaser. MIL-STD-1 05 shall be used when specified in
the purchase order or contract. Level of inspection and accept-
able quality level (AQL) shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's quality assurance procedures.
10.3 Lot Acceptance-Lot acceptance sampling plans shall
be mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser. MIL-STD-1 05 shall be used when specified in the
purchase order or contract.
10.4 Sampling for Inspection of Type III Ferrules -A
random sample of ferrules shall be selected from each lot in
accordance with MIL-STD-105, Special Inspection Level S-2,
AQL of 2.5, and tested in accordance with 13.4.1. Other
inspection or sampling plans may be used upon mutual
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
10.4.1 A minimum of five ferrules shall be randomly
selected from each lot and subjected to the testing specified in
13.4.2.
10.5 Sampling for Inspection of Fabricated MAFs-A mini-
mum of four samples shall be selected at random from each lot
of welded products and subjected to the tests specified in
13.4.3.
11. Number of Tests and Retests
11.1 Number of Test Specimens-The tests used to qualify
MAFs and the number of specimens required for each test shall
be as specified in Table 3.
11.2 Replacement of Test Specimens-When untested speci-
mens are rejected as a result of overtightening, inferior
workmanship or materials, or assembly, the specimens shall be
dispositioned in accordance with the manufacturer's quality
assurance procedures.
11.2.1 The original unique numbers assigned in accordance
with 12.3.1 shall be recorded in the test report along with the
reason for rejection.
11.2.1.1 New test specimens with MAFs of the same type,
grade, and class, and pipe or tube of the same outside diameter
and wall thickness shall be prepared in accordance with
Section 12.
11.3 Penalty Runs-In the event of a test failure, the
manufacturer shall proceed with one of the following options:
11.3.1 If the failure is determined to be design related, the
manufacturer shall redesign the MAF and start all tests from
the beginning. The requirements in 11.3.2 shall not apply to
redesigned MAF.
11.3.2 If the failure is determined to be unrelated to the
design, the test specimen shall be rerun. A replacement test
specimen shall be prepared in accordance with the require-
ments in 11.2 and Section 12.
948
11.3 .3 If the failure cannot be determined to be either design
related or not design related, the manufacturer shall test three
additional penalty specimens. The requirements specified in
11.3.2 shall apply.
11.4 Penalty Run Specimen Preparation-Penalty run
specimens shall be prepared when MAF has failed any of the
tests specified in the Annexes.
11.4.1 The MAF used for penalty runs shall be of the same
type, grade, and class as the failed MAF being replaced.
11.4.2 The pipe or tube used in penalty runs shall be of the
same material (inlcuding form and condition), outer diameter,
and wall thicknesses as the pipe or tube being replaced.
11.4.3 Preparation of the penalty run specimens shall be in
accordance with Section 12.
11.4.4 Penalty run specimens shall be identified in accor-
dance with 12.3 and 11.4.5.
11.4.5 In addition to the part number and test specimen
number, a designator shall be placed after the test specimen
number which would allow the specimen to be identified as
penalty run specimen. The method used to identify penalty run
specimens shall be at the manufacturer's option.
12. Specimen Preparation
12.1 Specimen preparation and installation of MAFs on
appropriate testing apparatus shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
12.1.1 Permanent MAFs shall be assembled at the minimum
allowable insertion depth permitted by the manufacturer's
recommended procedure.
12.1.2 Separable MAFs shall be assembled using the mini-
mum value (that is, torque, nut rotation, and so forth) permitted
by the manufacturer's recommended procedure.
12.2 Assembly of Specimens-MAPs qualified under the
requirements of this specification shall be tested and qualified
as a completed assembly. The acceptance of similar, bu1
different, MAF designs shall not permit the intermixing of theil
subcomponents such as sleeves, nuts, and ferrules.
12.2.1 Test specimens used in testing shall be assemblec
using a MAF of a single type, grade (or combination oJ
grades), and pipe or tube material.
12.2.2 The wall thickness and outer diameter size of
pipe or tube shall be selected in accordance with the MAF
(see 7.3.4) being qualified.
12.2.3 The test specimens shall be assembled using th{
specimen geometry specified in Fig. 1.
12.3 Identification of Test Specimens-Each test specimei
shall be identified with a unique number to provide traceabilit;
back to the test records.
12.3.1 Identification of test specimens shall be permanent
In those cases in which size or design does not permi
permanent markings, tagging or bagging may be used.
12.3.2 When, as a result of testing, a test specimen
sectioned into two or more pieces, the identification metho1
shall be as specified in 12.3.1.
cO F1387 - 99 (2012)
FIGURE 1C
& CAPPED END WITH PORT (2 PLACES TYP.)
& TENSILE SPECIMENS DO NOT REQUIRE CAPPED ENDS
8 MAF TEST SPECIMEN
FIGURE 1B
ffi { STRAIN GAGE LOCATED ON THE HIGH STRESS SIDE OF THE
PIPE/TUBE 4.6 MM (.1B IN.) FROM MAF /2 PLACES) /AS REQUIRED)
& FIRE TEST SPECIMENS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF TEN TIMES I10X) PIPE/TUBE O.D.
VIBRATION TEST SPECIMEN LENGTH SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN TABLE 58. SPECIMEN
GEOMETRY SHALL BE AS SHOWN IN FIGURE SB.
& FREE PIPE/TUBE LENGTH {MIN) FIVE TIMES /5X) PIPE/TUBE O.D.
FIG. 1 Typical Specimen Geometries
13. Test Methods
13.1 Standard Qualification Tests-All tests used to qualify
MAFs shall be as specified in the Annexes. The following
primary tests are described:
Name of Test
Performance Tests for MAFs
Examination of Specimen
Pneumatic Proof Test
Hydrostatic Proof Test
Impulse Test
Flexure Fatigue Test
Tensile Test
Hydrostatic Burst Test
Repeated Assembly Test
Rotary Flexure Test
Mercurous Nitrate Test
Section
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A?
A8
A9
A10
A11
13.2 Supplementary Tests-When one or more of the
supplementary requirements are requested by the purchaser
(see 1.2), the following applicable test(s) shall also be per-
formed:
Name of Test Section
General Requirements S1
Thermal Cycling Test S2
Elevated Temperature Soak Test S3
Stress Corrosion Test S4
Torsion Test S5
Shock Test S6
Fire Test S7
Vibration Test SB
13.3 Certification of Test Results-If certified test results are
required, a certification shall be provided to the purchaser as
specified in the contract or purchase order.
949
13.4 In-Process Inspection Tests-The following tests shall
be performed by the manufacturer in accordance with in-house
practices and when specified in the contract or purchase order:
13.4.1 Metallographically prepare, microexamine, and test
for hardness and microstructural conformance to the manufac-
turer's appropriate specification a random sample of Type III
ferrules, as specified in l 0.4.1. An appropriate specification is
defined as the documented procedures that the manufacturer
uses on a continuing basis to produce ferrules. Such ferrules
shall be of the same quality as those used in the assemblies that
were previously tested and found to satisfy the performance
requirements of this specification.
13.4.2 Randomly select a minimum of five Type III ferrules
from each lot as specified in 10.5 and test for cut bite quality.
13.4.2.1 Preset the Type III ferrules onto tubing as specified
in 13.4.2.2. After disassembly, drive back each ferrule to
expose the ring cut for examination. The cut bite shall
completely encircle the periphery of the tube. The cut bite shall
be clean, smooth, and uniform. A jagged irregular cut bite is
unacceptable. There shall be no longitudinal or circumferential
cracks on the ferrule before driving it back.
13.4.2.2 Use Type 304 tubing in accordance with Specifi-
cations A213/A213M, A249/A249M, or A269 for testing
corrosion-resistant steel MAFs. Use SAE 1010 tubing to test
carbon steel MAFs. The tubing materials as specified will
assure consistent results of testing. Preset Type III ferrules onto
the tubing in accordance with the manufacturer's recom-
mended procedures using either a presetting machine, preset-
ting tool, or the MAF.
13.4.2.3 When the Type III ferrules are manufactured from
materials other than those specified in 13.4.2.2, conduct the test
using tubing material as recommended by the manufacturer.
13.4.3 Fracture test a minimum of four MAFs selected at
random from each lot of welded MAFs as specified in 13.4.3.1
and then either crush test in accordance with 13.4.3.2 or
macroexamine in accordance with 13.4.3.3.
13.4.3.1 Test two MAFs. Cut each MAF into two or more
sections. Cut the sections so that the weld is perpendicular to
the longitudinal axis of the section. The total width of the
sections taken from each MAF shall be equal to or exceed one
fourth of the circumference of the MAF. Remove all weld
flashing. Load each section laterally in such a way that the root
of the weld is in tension. Bend the section until it fractures or
is bent 90. If the specimen fractures, the fractured surface
shall show no evidence of preexisting cracks or incomplete
fusion, and the sum of the lengths of inclusions and porosity
visible on the fractured surface shall not exceed 10 % of the
total area. Cracking or tearing of the parent material is
acceptable.
13.4.3.2 Two MAFs shall be tested. Remove all weld
flashing. Position each MAF between two parallel plates in a
manual or hydraulic press, or between the jaws of a multiple-
jaw hydraulic press. The weld shall be located 3.2 mm (Vs in.)
from the face of the plates or jaws. Flatten the MAF against
itself between the parallel plates or crush the MAF to within
50 % of its original diameter between the multiple jaws. There
shall be no indication of cracking or tearing in the weld joints.
Cracking or tearing of parent material is acceptable.
<0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
13.4.3.3 Test two MAFs. Take a cross section of the weld
from each MAF. Smooth and etch one face of each cross
section to give a clear definition of the weld metal and
heat-affected zone. When examined, the weld and the heat-
affected zone shall show complete fusion and freedom from
cracks.
14. Inspection
14.1 Terms of Inspection-Unless otherwise specified in the
contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is responsible for
the performance of all inspection requirements (examination
and tests) specified herein.
14.2 Raw Material Inspection-Each lot of raw material
used to oroduce MAFs in accordance with this specification
shall be inspected for conformance to the applicable material
specification. A lot of raw material shall consist of bars, pipe,
tube, forgings, or castings of the same heat, produced at
essentially the same time and submitted for inspection at the
same time.
14.3 Quality Conformance Inspection-MAPs shall be vi-
sually and dimensionally examined to verify compliance with
the appropriate drawings. Quality conformance inspection
shall be performed on each lot of MAFs produced under this
specification.
14.3.1 The inspection lot of MAFs shall include MAPs of
the same size and shape manufactured under essentially the
same conditions from the same lot of material and submitted
for inspection at one time.
14.4 Process Control Impection-MAFs shall be inspected
throughout the entire manufacturing and processing cycle.
Methods of inspection shall be in compliance with the manu-
facturer's quality assurance procedures.
14.5 Inspection Records-Inspection records shall be main-
tained by the manufacturer. The length of time on file shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's quality assurance pro-
cedures.
14.6 Performance Testing Records-The manufacturer shall
maintain a record of all performance tests throughout the life of
the MAF design.
14.6.1 The original test specimens, as well as replacement
or penalty run specimens, used in performance testing to meet
qualification shall be maintained by the manufacturer for a
minimum of two years.
14.6.2 Inspection records relating to the performance tests
shall be maintained in accordance with 14.5.
15. Certification
15.1 Certification of Testing or Inspection-When requested
by the purchaser, the manufacturer shall supply written certi-
fications that the MAF has been tested and qualified in
accordance with this specification.
15.2 Certification of Raw Material-A certificate of com-
pliance or mill certificate shall be obtained from the material
supplier. This certificate shall state that all applicable require-
ments of the raw material are met. As a minimum, the material
shall specify the chemical and mechanical
quirements of the material.
16. Product Marking
16.1 Product Marking-Each MAF shall be marked with
the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, and material
(material marking is not required for Type V MAF). When
shape or size does not permit inclusion of all required
markings, the information may be omitted in the reverse order
presented.
16.1.1 When MAFs are comprised of multiple components
that are assembled, the marking methods used to identify the
assembly (and each of its components) shall be as agreed to
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
16.2 Additional Markings-When specified in the contract
or purchaser order, additional markings other than those
specified shall be applied.
17. Keywords
17.1 axially swaged; bite-type; elastic strain preload (esp);
fittings; flared; flareless; grip type; mechanically attached
fittings (MAFs); piping; radially swaged; shape memory alloy
(SMA); tubing
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in part or whole by the
purchaser in the contract or purchase order.
950
F1387 - 99 (2012)
Sl.l Scope
S 1.1.1 This section covers the general requirements that,
unless otherwise specified, apply to the Annex or this section
whenever invoked individually or collectively by the purchaser
of MAFs in the contract or purchase order. The testing
requirements specified herein are applicable to all the tests
described in Sections S2 through S8 (see Table S 1.1). The
requirements covered herein are outlined as follows:
81.3 Testing Requirements
S1.4 Quality Assurance Requirements
S1.5 Product Marking Requirements
S 1.1.2 Cadmium plating shall not be used on MAFs in-
tended for use on U.S. Navy vessels.
S 1.1.3 This section is applicable to MAFs that are designed
for the foliowing pipe or tube sizes:
Sl.1.3.1 This supplementary section is to MAFs
suitable for outside diameters for NPS 3.2 mm (1/s in.)
through 63.5 mm (2
1
/z in.).
S 1.1.3.2 This supplementary section is applicable to MAFs
suitable for tube outside diameters from 6.4 mm (0.250 in.) to
73.0 mm (2.875 in.).
S1.1.3.3 Other pipe or tube sizes, with supporting data, may
be submitted to the purchaser for evaluation and approval.
S 1.1.4 The following supplementary tests listed herein are
as follows:
Test Section
Thermal Cycling Test S2
Elevated Temperature Soak Test 83
Stress-Corrosion Test 84
Torsion Test 85
Shock Test 86
Fire Test 87
Vibration Test 88
S 1.1.5 The sections listed below from the main body of this
specification apply to the test specimens used to perform the
tests specified in S1.5 (see Sl.8). MAFs shall have met the
requirements of Annex Al and Annex A1 before performing
any test, unless otherwise specified herein.
TABLE
of Test
Examination of specimen (Annex A2)
Pneumatic proof test (Annex
Hydrostatic proof test (Annex
Thermal cycling test (S2)
0
E
Elevated temperature soak test (S3)c
Stress-corrosion test (S4)
Torsion test (S5)
Shock test (S6)c
Fire test (87)c
Vibration test
0
40
40
40
10
5
5
5
5
5
Passed specimens shall be used for burst testing (see Annex A8).
8
The number of specimens shown is the minimum amount required for each test
per family of MAF. The number of specimens may increase when various pipe or
tube grades, forms, conditions, and outer diameter wall thickness combinations
are tested, unless exempted parametrically (see The total minimum amount
of specimens required for all tests (including Annex) be as specified in 81.3.8.
c Fire test specimens shall be hydrostatically proof tested using water only.
0
Specimens may be reused for other primary tests as long as all requirements
herein are complied with for each test (see 81. 1.9).
E An equal number of specimens (four minimum) shall be used lor the high- and
low-temperature cycle test.
951
Title
Scope
Referenced Documents
Terminology
Classification
Materials and Manufacture
Performance Requirements
Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
Number of Tests and Retest
Specimen Preparation
Test Methods
Inspection
Certification
Performance Tests for MAFs
Section
2
3
4
6
7
9
11
12
13
14
15
Annex Ai
Annex A2
S1.1.6 Unless otherwise specitled, the requirements speci-
fied in the main body and Annex A 1 and Annex A2 of this
specification shall apply.
S 1.1.6.1 In the event of a conflict between this supplement
and the requirements specitl.ed in the main body of this
specification and Annex A 1 and Annex or both, the
requirements specified herein shall take precedence, unless
otherwise invoked in the contract or purchase order by the
purchaser.
S 1.1.7 Before beginning performance testing, the manufac-
turer shall obtain approval from the purchaser of the test plan
to be used. The plan shall include the following information:
Sl.l.7.1 A matrix showing the MAF grade(s) (or different
combination(s) of grades) (see 4.2) and MAF class(es) (see
4.3) to be qualified,
Sl.l.7.2 MAF sizes selected to qualify every size within its
range (see S 1.1.3),
S 1.1.7 .3 Compatible pipe or tube materials to be in assem-
bly with the MAFs to be tested (see Table S l
S 1.1. 7.4 Pipe or tube wall thicknesses and sizes selected to
qualify the pipe or tube throughout its range (see 7 .3.5),
S 1.1. 7.5 The manufacturer's recommended procedure cov-
ering the assembly of the MAFs onto pipe or tube (see 12.1 ),
and
Sl.l.7.6 Test fluids used for each test (see 7.6.3).
S 1.1.8 After verification, the purchaser shall approve the
matrix or specify any additional tests required for each MAF
family for the manufacturer to include in the program.
S1.2 Significance and Use
S 1.2.1 The significance of this section allows the purchaser
of MAFs to invoke those general, testing, or quality assurance
requirements individually or collectively to meet their existing
TABLE S1.2 Pipe or Tube Material, Size, and Tolerances
Material Type
Material
Material Size Material Tolerance
Carbon steel MIL-P-24691/1 ANSI 836.10 A530/A530M
A450/A450M
Chromium MIL-P-24691/2 ANSI B 36.10 A530/A530M
molybdenum A450/A450M
Stainless steel MIL-P-24691/3 ANSI B 36.10 A530/A530M
A450/A450M
MIL-T-8606 AND 10102 MS 33531
Copper-nickel Mll-T-16420 MIL-T-16420 MIL-T-16420
Nickel-copper MIL-T-1368 MIL-T-1368 MIL-T-1368
MIL-T-24107 MIL-T-24107 B251
F1387 - 99 (2012)
requirements. The purchaser may use this section as a guide to
make out an agreement with the manufacturer to fulfill their
requirements for MAFs.
S1.3 Testing Requirements
S 1.3.1 MAF test specimens shall be selected for qualifica-
tion in accordance with the requirements specified herein and
in 7.3.
S 1.3 .1.1 Each and every pipe or tube size (both outside
diameter and wall thickness) and each and every material
combination of both pipe or tube (including annealed and
drawn conditions) and MAFs may be qualified in accordance
with this specification. If the manufacturer can demonstrate by
parametric or test data that some tests are not necessary, the
purchaser may exempt the manufacturer from the test require-
ment on a case-by-case basis.
Sl.3.2 The test MAFs shall be of the same base material as
the pipe or tube. Other combinations of materials, approved for
use by the purchaser, must be shown to be galvanically
compatible, or in accordance with MIL-STD-889.
S1.3.2.1 MAFs shall be shown to meet the requirements of
this specification over the full range of pipe or tube tolerances
(see Sl.3.3.1) either experimentally or by parametric.
S 1.3.3 Pipe or tube materials used with MAFs shall con-
form to the specifications listed in Table S 1 .2.
Sl.3.3.1 Pipe or tube tolerances shall be in accordance with
the requirements specified in Table S 1.2.
Sl.3.3.2 In no case shall the pipe or tube used fortesting be
machined or otherwise changed from its original mechanical or
chemical properties unless otherwise specified in the manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
Sl.3.3.3 The cut pipe or tube ends may be deburred, but not
tapered or otherwise reduced, below the minimum wall thick-
ness.
Sl.3.4 Strain gages (as required) shall be placed at a
distance not to exceed 4.6 mm (0.18 in.) from the end(s) of the
MAF pipe or tube joint (see Fig. 1).
S 1.3.5 The test specimens shall be marked using the same
methods which will be applied to MAFs sold subsequent to
qualification.
S1.3.5.1 All test specimens shall be identified in accordance
with the requirements specified in 12.3.
Sl.3.6 A test specimen shall consist of one or several pipe(s)
or tube(s) joined to MAFs.
Sl.3.6.1 MAFs installed on the test apparatus shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures
as approved by the purchaser. No other means of joining the
test connector to the pipe shall be permitted.
Sl.3.6.2 Unless otherwise specified in the individual test,
(see S7) the specimen geometry (Fig. 1) shall be no less than
five pipe or tube diameters (outside diameter) long on the end
of the MAFs being tested.
Sl.3.6.3 After approval of the test plan (see Sl.l.7), the test
specimens shall be assembled in accordance with the require-
ments specified in 12.2.
S 1.3. 7 The minimum amount of specimens required for
each supplementary test shall be as specified in Table S I .1 (see
Sl.3.8). A family of MAFs shall consist of a manufacturer's
952
single combination of: pressure rating (class), design (type),
and material (grade) including form and condition. A family
requires tests as follows:
S1.3.7.1 Test each MAF shape. Shapes may be test ex-
empted only if it can be shown to the purchaser's satisfaction
that they are equivalent to those shapes tested.
Sl.3.7.2 Test the range ofMAF sizes, including the smallest
and largest. Test one or more intermediate sizes if the ratio of
the minimum to the maximum pipe or tube outside diameter to
be tested is equal to or more than ten.
Sl.3.7.3 Any nonproportional MAF sizes shall be tested
unless they can be shown parametrically to be equivalent to the
sizes tested.
Sl.3.7.4 Test each pipe or tube material for all material
conditions of intended use (that is, annealed and drawn).
S1.3.7.5 For each pipe or tube size being tested, test the
minimum and maximum nominal wall thickness of pipe or tube
materials selected from Table S 1.2.
S 1.3.8 A minimum of 60 specimens shall be prepared to
cover the unique combinations of a MAF family (see Sl.3.7).
Each primary test shall have a minimum of five specimens
representing all of the unique combinations of a MAF family.
When the total amount of specimens (including Annex) is
below 60, additional specimens shall be added to attain the
minimum of 60 total specimens for all tests (see S 1.3.8.5).
S 1.3.8.1 The total number of test assemblies must each pass
their designated tests successfully to meet the requirements of
this performance specification.
S1.3.8.2 The proposed test plan covering unique combina-
tions of test assemblies used in qualification testing shall be
submitted to the purchaser for approval (see S 1.1. 7).
Sl.3.8.3 The pneumatic test (see Annex A3), the hydrostatic
test (see Annex A4), and the hydrostatic burst test (see Annex
A8) (when performed separately or in combination before or
after another primary test) are not to be used as a part of the
total specimens used for testing because they are connected
with the pass and fail criteria of the primary test. In all
instances, they are considered to be a part of the primary test
and not a separate mechanical test for this calculation.
S1.3.8.4 Also, comparison tests of pipe or tube without
MAFs do not count as part of these totals.
Sl.3.8.5 Specimens may be reused for other primary tests as
long as all of the requirements herein are complied with for
each test (see S 1.1. 7).
Sl.3.9 In the event of a test failure, the manufacturer shall
proceed in accordance with 11.3.
Sl.3.10 At the option of the purchaser, the test laboratory
shall cut open or otherwise prepare specimens for detailed
examination following any failure.
S 1.3.11 Unless otherwise specified within the test, the
conditions for testing shall be as specified in 7.6 and as
follows:
S 1.3.11.1 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
pressures applied during testing shall be calculated based upon
the class (rated pressure) assigned by the manufacturer in the
test plan (see 4.3). The purchaser may also designate a class no1
specified in 4.3 to fulfill end-system requirements (see 3.1.1).
F1387 - 99 (2012)
Sl.3.11.2 The test temperature shall be maintained to within
:'::5C (:':: l0F), unless otherwise specified by the purchaser
(see Table S 1.3). The test temperature is maintained when the
test specimen attains the temperature designated by the test.
The temperature shall be stabilized for a period of 1 h or more.
S 1.3 .12 All testing shall be done at a test laboratory
acceptable to the purchaser. The test laboratory shall verify that
specimens to be tested are as identified and certify results.
S 1.3.12.1 The test laboratory must establish a mutually
convenient testing schedule when the purchaser specifies that a
witness is to be present during testing.
S 1.3.13 Unless otherwise specified, the test report shall
contain the following information:
Sl.3.13.1 Identification number, a description of each
specimen, and the fabrication process.
Sl.3.13.2 Description of the test apparatus including instru-
mentation and their settings during the test.
Sl.3.13.3 Photographs of test setup including specimen.
S1.3.13.4 Graphical printout of all data for those tests that
record a waveform (if requested by the purchaser).
S1.3.13.5 Leakage rate during testing, if any.
Sl.3.13.6 Video tape(s) (fire test only).
TABLE S1.3 Test Temperatures
Test
Thermal Cycling Test
Thermal Cycling (high)
Thermal Cycling (low)
Elevated Temperature Soak
Stress Corrosion Test
Torsion Test
Shock Test
Fire Test
Vibration Test
Test
Section
S2
S2.4.1
S2.4.2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
88
Low
Temper
atureA,a
X
3/
...
c
Ambient
3/
X
X
c
X
A The allowable tolerance for all test temperatures is 5C (10F).
High
Temper-
atureAB
X
X
3/
...
c
8
The temperatures given correspond to the category and group system tempera-
tures specified in MIL-STD-777.
c See test procedure for test temperature requirements.
S 1.3 .13. 7 A record of any unusual observations during
testing.
S 1.3.13.8 Summary of test results, including but not limited
to the following data in tabular form:
{1) A description of the specimen shape, pressure rating,
material, and method of fabrication,
(2) Nominal size, actual pipe outside diameter, actual MAF
inside diameter,
(3) Pipe material (condition and form), class, and wall
thickness,
( 4) Pressure and temperature, or both, applied during and at
the completion of testing,
(5 ) Number of cycles or time at specific atmospheric
conditions,
( 6) Reason for termination of any test,
(7) Hydrostatic leakage rate and description, (if any),
( 8) Summary of pass or fail results, and
(9) Calculations (only when requested) to support test data
submitted in the test report.
S1.4 Quality Assurance Requirements
S 1.4.1 Mill Certification-When specified in the contract or
purchase order, a mill certification shall be obtained from the
suppliers of all raw materials used in the manufacturing or
fabrication of MAFs. The raw material shall be impounded
until required testing or verification, or both, is completed. The
types of tests used to verify mechanical, chemical, and physical
properties shall be at the option of the manufacturer.
S1.5 Product Marking Requirements
S 1.5 .1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
chase order, the rated pressure of MAFs shall be marked in
addition to the markings specified in 16.1.1.
S1.6 Precision and Bias
S1.6.1 No statement is made about the precision or bias
herein since the requirements only apply when invoked by the
purchaser in the purchase order or contract.
S2. THERMAL CYCLING TEST
S2.1 Scope
S2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, MAFs shall be subjected
to a thermal cycling test. The number of specimens used shall
be as specified in S 1. 1.
S2.2.1 This test determines the ability of MAFs to withstand
changes in temperature while being pressurized to the rated
pressure of the MAFs or pipe or tube, whichever is lower. The
test is conducted in high temperature and low temperature.
This test is used to duplicate conditions that could occur during
in-service use.
953
S2.3 General Testing Requirements
S2.3.1 The test specimens may be tested pneumatically (see
A3) and hydrostatically (see Annex A4) at the option of
the manufacturer.
S2.3.2 An equal number of specimens shall be used for
high-temperature thermal cycling (see S2.4.1) and low-
temperature thermal cycling (see S2.4.2).
S2.3.3 The tests shall be conducted using the temperatures
specified in Table S 1.3. The specimen may be tested in an
environmental chamber held at test temperature.
S2.3.4 The rated test pressure selected for high- and low-
temperature thermal cycling shall be as specified in Sl.3.11.1.
F1387 - 99 (2012)
S2.3.5 The time for the temperature of the test fluid to
change from high or low to ambient conditions (and back
again) shall be a maximum of 2 min.
S2.3.6 The test specimens shall be monitored continuously
for leakage throughout the test.
S2.3.7 If there is any leakage during the thermal cycling
tests or subsequent hydrostatic proof tests, the specimens fail
and the test shall be discontinued at that point. If failure occurs,
follow the instructions specified in Sl.3.9.
S2.4 Procedure
S2.4.1 High- Temperature Thermal Cycling:
S2.4.1.1 Mount the test specimens in an environment suit-
able for the conditions stated herein.
S2.4.1.2 The duration of the test shall be three cycles as
specified in S2.4.1.4 through S2.4.1.6.
S2.4.1.3 Fill the specimen with fluid (see and pres-
surize it to the rated pressure specified in S 1.3 .11.1. Maintain
this pressure throughout the test period.
S2.4.1.4 Increase the specimen temperature to the maxi-
mum specified in Table S 1.3 within 1 h (see S2.3.5).
S2.4.1.5 Stabilize the specimen at the high temperature and
rated pressure for a period of 2 h.
S2.4.1.6 At the conclusion of the high-stabilization period,
lower the specimen temperature (while maintaining the rated
pressure) to ambient conditions within 1 h and stabilize for an
additional 2 h (see S2.3.5).
S2.4.1. 7 The steps specified in S2.4.1.4 through S2.4.1.6
constitute one cycle. Repeat these steps until three cycles have
been completed (see S2.4.1.2).
S2.4.1.8 After the completion of the third subject the
test specimens to a hydrostatic proof test (see Annex A4).
S2.4.1.9 After completing the hydrostatic proof test, and if
there was no leakage during the test period, the specimens have
passed the high-temperature cycling test.
S2.4.2 Low-Temperature Cycling Test:
S2.4.2.1 Mount the test specimens in an environment suit-
able for the conditions stated herein.
S2.4.2.2 The duration of the test shall be three cycles as
specified in S2.4.2.4 through S2.4.2.6.
S2.4.2.3 Pressurize the specimen with a fluid that will meet
the low-temperature requirements for this test. The fluid shall
be maintained at the rated pressure as specified in S 1.3.11.1
throughout the test period.
S2.4.2.4 Lower the specimen temperature to the tempera-
ture specified in Table S1.3 within 1 h (see S2.3.5).
S2.4.2.5 Stabilize the specimen at the low temperature and
rated pressure for a period of 2 h.
S2.4.2.6 At the conclusion of the low-stabilization period,
raise the specimen temperature (while maintaining the rated
pressure) to ambient conditions within 1 h and stabilize for an
additional 2 h (see S2.3.6).
S2.4.2.7 The steps specified in S2.4.2.4 through S2.4.2.6
constitute one cycle and shall be repeated until three cycles
have been completed (see S2.4.2.2).
S2.4.2.8 After the completion of the third cycle, subject the
test specimens to a hydrostatic proof test (see Annex
S2.4.2.9 After completing the hydrostatic proof test, and if
there was no leakage during the test period, the specimens have
passed the low-temperature cycling test.
S2.5.1 The precision of the high- and low-temperature
cycling test is established by the accuracy of the measuring and
test equipment (M & TE) and their permissible tolerances
during the test (see 7.5). There is no bias in the high- and
low-temperature cycling test when the M & TE used is
calibrated properly.
S3. ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SOAK TEST
S3.1 Scope
S3.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, MAFs shal1 be subjected
to an elevated temperature soak test. The number of specimens
used shall be as specified in Table l. A minimum of two
passed specimens must be submitted for burst test (see Annex
A8).
a constant temperature level while pressurized to the rated
pressure of the MAFs or pipe or tube, whichever is lower. After
100 h, the specimens are cooled to ambient temperature and
subjected to further tests. This test is used to duplicate
conditions which could occur during in-service use.
S3.3.1 The test may be tested pneumatically (see
Annex and hydrostatically (see Annex A4) at the option of
the manufacturer.
954
specified in Table S .3 for this test.
S3.3.3 The test pressure selected for the elevated tempera-
ture soak test shall be as specified in S 1.3.11.1.
S3.3.4 The specimen shall be filled with fluid (see 7.6.3) and
pressurized to the rated pressure specified in S 1.3 .11.1. This
pressure shall be maintained throughout the test period.
S3.3.5 If there is any leakage during the elevated tempera-
ture soak test, or proof or burst tests, the
fail and the test shall be discontinued at that point. If failure
occurs, follow the instructions specified in S 1.3.9.
S3.4 Procedure
S3.4.1 Maintain the test specimens at the rated pressure and
at the temperatures in 1.3 for the material
tested, for a minimum of 100 h, in an air environment.
S3.4.2 At the of 100 h, air-cool the test
men to ambient temperature.
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
S3.4.3 After ambient temperature is attained, subject the test
specimens to a hydrostatic proof test as specified in Annex A4.
S3.4.4 Upon completion of the hydrostatic proof test, sub-
ject a minimum of two test specimens to a burst test
in accordance with the requirements specified in Annex A8.
S3.4.5 The specimens successfully pass when there is no
visible evidence of leakage during the elevated temperature
soak test or during the hydrostatic proof and burst test.
S3 .5 .1 The precision of the elevated temperature soak test is
established by the accuracy of the measuring and test equip-
ment (M & TE) and their permissible tolerances during the test
(see 7 .5). There is no bias in the elevated temperature soak test
when theM & TE used is properly calibrated.
S4. STRESS-CORROSION TEST
S4.1 Scope
to a stress-corrosion test. The number of used shall
be as specified in Table S 1.1.
S4.2 Sie:nHiicaJnce and Use
the effects of corrosion while being subjected to a bending
stress. Upon completion of 50 h, the specimens are examined
and then subjected to a hydrostatic proof test (see Annex A4).
This test is used to duplicate conditions that could occur during
in-service use.
Annex A3) and hydrostatically (see Annex A4) at the option of
the manufacturer.
specified in Test Method B 117 for this test.
S4.3.3 The performance test pressure selected for the stress-
corrosion test shall be as specified in S 1.3 .11.1.
S4.3.4 A combined axial stress (bending and internal pres-
sure) applied during the test shall be a minimum of two thirds
of the yield strength of the pipe or tube materials specified in
Table S 1.2. The axial stress as a result of the applied internal
pressure shall be calculated using the following formula:
PeP
S = D2- d2
where:
S stress,
P pressure,
D outside diameter, and
d inside diameter.
S4.3.4.1 When other materials are used, cite reference used
for yield values.
S4.3.5 The apparatus shall be equipped with calibrated
gages (see 7.5.1) which permit visual of the strain
The apparatus shall be designed to shut down in
the event that pressure is lost the of the test.
S4.3.6 Calibrated strain gages shall be located on the
stress side of the pipe or tube as shown in the geometries in
L
955
S4.3.7 If there is any leakage during the stress-corrosion test
or hydrostatic proof test, the specimens fail and the test shall be
discontinued at that point. If failure occurs, follow the instruc-
tions specified in Sl.3.9.
S4.4 Procedure
S4.4.1 Install the test specimens in a test fixture which can
impose a stress level equivalent to two thirds of the yield
of the pipe or the tube material less the axial stress as
a result of the internal pressure (see S4.3.4).
S4.4.2 Apply bending stress to the MAF and or tube
interface. Take and record a strain gage reading.
S4.4.3 Pressurize the test specimen to the rated pressure (see
Sl.3.11.1).
S4.4.4 With the applied stress locked into place, subject the
specimen to the standard salt spray test in accordance with Test
Method B 117 for 50 h.
S4.4.5 After testing, subject the test specimen to a hydro-
static proof test (see Annex A4).
S4.4.6 Clean and metallurgically examine the test specimen
including sectioning of the MAF and pipe or tube throughout
the high-stress area. The following conditions shall be checked
and shall not have occurred:
S4.4.6.1 Indication of cracking or pitting of the exposed
surfaces of MAF and tubing within one diameter of the MAF
greater than that exhibited on the remainder of the tubing when
visually examined with lOx power magnification.
S4.4.6.2 Leakage or burst at a value less than the specified
test pressure (see S4.4.3).
S4.4.6.3 Indications of inter- or trans-granular stress corro-
sion paths during metallurgical examination of longitudinal
and transverse sections of the MAF and pipe or tube junction.
S4.4.7 The specimens successfully pass this test when they
complete the stress-corrosion test without showing any of the
indications specified in S4.4.6 and successfully complete the
hydrostatic proof test requirements specified in Annex A4.
S4.5.l The of the stress-corrosion test is estab-
lished by the accuracy of the measuring and test equipment (M
& TE) and their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7 .5).
There is no bias in the stress-corrosion test when the M & TE
used is calibrated properly.
~ F1387 - 99 (2012)
SS. TORSION TEST
S5.1 Scope
to a torsion test. The number of specimens used shall be as
specified in ~ l h l e S I .1.
S5.2.1 This test determines the ability ofMAFs to withstand
displacement of the MAFs and pipe or tube joint through the
application of torque. After creating this displacement between
the MAF and the pipe or tube, the test assembly is subjected to
a hydrostatic proof test in accordance with the requirements
specified in Annex A4. This test is used to simulate environ-
mental conditions that could occur during end-service use.
Annex A3) and hydrostatically (see Annex at the option of
the manufacturer.
S5.3.2 The tests shall be conducted at ambient temperature
as specified in Table S 1.3 for this test.
S5.3.3 If there is any leakage during the hydrostatic proof
test, the specimen fails and the test shall be discontinued at that
point. If failure occurs, follow the instructions specified in
S1.3.9.
S5.4 Procedure
S5.4.1 Draw a straight line from end to end on the specimen
to be tested.
S5.4.2 Secure one end of the specimen in a vise. Do not
pressurize the specimen.
S5.4.3 Using an appropriate tool, clamp onto the specimen
and rotate the opposite end until permanent deformation or
displacement of the pipe or tube occurs relative to the MAE
Deformation or displacement occurs when:
S5.4.3.1 The spring-back position shows permanent angular
deflection of the straight line. The line should deflect no less
than 1.6 mm (0.0625 in.) at four pipe or tube diameters from
near the end of the MAF joint or,
S5.4.3.2 Relative displacement occurs between the MAF
and the pipe or tube when the line remains straight but rotates
with respect to MAF. The pipe or tube shall be rotated
minimum of 30 from the original position in the MAF joint
S5.4.3.3 In any event, the maximum torque applied shall be
542 Nm (400 ft-lbf).
S5.4.4 After displacement or deformation has occurred, or
maximum torque has been applied, subject the test specimen
a hydrostatic proof test in accordance with the requirements
specified in A4.
S5.4.5 The specimens successfully pass when the following
conditions are met:
S5.4.5.1 Permanent MAF completes the hydrostatic proof
test without any leakage. If leakage occurs see S5.3.3.
S5.4.5.2 Separable MAF completes the hydrostatic proof
test without any leakage. If leakage occurs in the initial test, the
specimen may be tightened no more than one-fourth turn
(record this occurrence in accordance with Sl.3.13.8, (7) and
(8)). After tightening, the hydrostatic proof test shall be
performed from the beginning without any leakage. If leakage
occurs during the secondary test, see S5.3.3.
S5.5.1 The precision of the torsion test is established by the
accuracy of the measuring and test equipment (M & TE) and
their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7 .5). There may
be bias in the results of the torsion test if the line drawn h a ~
irregular edges or is too thick or is thick and thin, which may
make it difficult to measure the amount of actual displacement
S6. HIGH IMPACT SHOCK TEST
S6.1 Scope
to a high impact shock test. The number of specimens used
shall be as specified in Table S I .1. A minimum of two passed
specimens shall be used for burst test (see Annex A8).
S6.2.1 This test verifies the ability of MAFs to withstand a
series of impacts while being pressurized to the rated pressure
of the MAFs or pipe or tube, whichever is lower. This test is
used to duplicate in-service conditions that could occur.
956
86.3 General Testing Requirements
S6.3.1 The test specimens may be tested pneumatically (set
Annex A3) and hydrostatically (see A4) at the option o
the manufacturer.
S6.3.2 The tests shall be conducted using the temperature
specified in Table S 1 for this test.
S6.3.3 The rated pressure selected for the high-impac
shock test shall be as specified in S 1.3 .11.1.
S6.3.4 If there is any leakage during the high-impact shocl
test or subsequent hydrostatic proof test, the specimens fail an1
the test shall be discontinued at that point. If failure occun
follow the instructions specified in Sl.3.9.
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
S6.4 Procedure
S6.4.1 Fill each test specimen with fluid in accordance with
7.6.3 before installation onto the shock test fixture.
S6.4.2 Pressurize the test specimens to the rated pressure of
the MAF or pipe or tube, whichever is lower (see S1.3.11.1).
S6.4.3 With the test specimen pressurized, subject it to
impacts from hammer drop heights of 304.8 mm (1 ft), 914.4
mm (3 ft), and 1524 mm (5 ft). The test criteria shall be in
conformance with MIL-S-901 (for Grade A, Class I, Type A,
lightweight hull-mounted equipment).
S6.4.4 After completion of high-impact shock test, subject
the specimens to a hydrostatic proof test (see Annex A4)
followed by a burst test (see Annex A8).
S6.4.5 The test specimens successfully pass high-impact
shock testing when they do not show evidence of leakage
during the shock test, hydrostatic proof test, and burst test.
S6.5.1 The precision of the high-impact shock test is estab-
There is no bias in the high-impact shock test when the M &
TE used is calibrated properly.
S7. FIRE TEST
S7.1 Scope
S7.l.l Unless otherwise specified, MAFs shall be subjected
to a fire test. The amount of specimens required for testing shall
be as specified in (see Sl.3.7).
S7.1.2 This test should be used to measure and describe the
response of materials, products, or assemblies to heat and flame
under controlled conditions and should not be used to describe
or appraise the fire hazard or the fire risk of materials, products,
or assemblies under actual fire conditions. However, results of
this test may be used as elements of a fire hazard assessment or
a fire risk assessment which takes into account all the factors
that are pertinent to an assessment of the fire hazard or the fire
risk of a particular end use.
S7 .1.3 Limitation-This fire test is a part of a set of tests
used for evaluating the performance characteristics of MAFs. It
is not intended for use independently in part or whole (see .5).
NoTE S7.1-High pressures created during this test can result in
catastrophic failure of the test specimen. Precautions shall be taken to
protect personnel and facilities.
S7 .2.1 This test establishes a combined exposure of internal
pressure and external heat flux to determine the ability of
MAFs to withstand a 30-min simulated fire condition. Heat
ftux instead of temperature was selected because it is a better
measure of fire exposure. The pressure and heat flux exposure
specified herein represents a specific fire condition that could
occur on board ship. The specified exposure is not sufficient to
predict the survival of MAFs during all types and sizes of
shipboard fires. After the fire test, MAF specimens are sub-
to proof tests. MAFs are graded according to
the amount of during the hydrostatic tests. The fire test
may be used to determine the acceptability of MAFs for use in
fire hazardous areas on board where fire conditions such as
those caused by a flammable fire could occur.
S7.3 General Testing IJ'p,oniirPlrnPntll':
S7 .3.1 The test specimens may be pneumatically tested (see
A3) and hydrostatically tested with water (see Annex
A4) at the option of the manufacturer.
957
S7.3.2 All testing shall be done at a test laboratory accept-
able to the purchaser (see Sl.3.12).
S7 .3.2.1 The fitting manufacturer must submit advance
proof of ability of the independent test laboratory to meet the
requirements specified by the purchaser (including: facilities,
equipment, personnel, instrumentation, and sample data).
S7.3.3 The fire test laboratory shall verify that specimens to
be tested are identified properly, conduct all tests, and
results.
S7.3.3.1 Fire test laboratory personnel shall witness test
specimen installation and provide certification of fabrication in
accordance with approved written fabrication techniques and
procedures.
S7.3.4 After verification of the unique combinations of the
fitting family (see S 1.3.7), the purchaser may specify one
additional random fire test for each manufacturer to include in
its test plan.
S7.3.5 The specimens to be tested shall be assembled in
accordance with the geometries shown in 1, except that the
minimum pipe or tube length shall be as specified in S7 .4.2.
S7.3.5.1 Connection of each MAF to pipe or tube shall be
done using the manufacturer's approved assembly procedures
(see Sl.3.6).
S7.3.5.2 The MAFs assembled into fire test specimens shall
be the same in all respects as the MAFs subjected to other tests
herein and in the Annex.
S7 .3.6 Any furnace or other apparatus large enough to
expose the minimum length of specimen (see 7.4.2) to the
required heat flux may be used.
S7.3.6.1 If an electric furnace is used, a thin coat of flat
black paint must be applied to each before the fire
test
S7.3.6.2 Multiple specimens may be tested at the same time
if the required heat flux exposure of each specimen is assured.
S7.3.7 fuel that achieves the required heat flux may be
used.
S7.3.8 Install sufficient total heat-flux gages within a 15-cm
(6-in.) radial distance of each centerline to measure
a spatial average of the total cold wall heat flux at all '-"A''"N''-'U
F1387 - 99 (2012)
surfaces of each specimen during all tests. Alternatively,
precalibrate the furnace or other apparatus as specified in
S7.3.11.
S7 .3.8.1 Measure the required heat flux using circular foil
heat-flux gages (often call Gardon gages after the developer).
The gage must be calibrated and water cooled and must sense
total heat flux (radiant and convective).
NoTE S7 .3-Test Methods E511 and E 1529 describe the design and use
of circular foil heat flux gages.
S7.3.9 Furnace thermocouples, if used, are to be fabricated
by fusion welding the twisted ends of 1.63-mm (0.064-in.)
diameter chromel-alumel wires having a time constant of 2 min
or less and mounting the wires in porcelain insulators.
57.3.9.1 The furnace thermocouple assembly is to be in-
serted through a standard weight 12.7-mm (1/2-in.) steel or
chrome-nickel alloy pipe. The thermocouple junction is to
protrude 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) from the open end of the pipe.
S7.3.10 Heat flux (or temperature) and pressure shall be
monitored continuously and recorded at intervals not exceed-
ing 10 s during the first 5 min and every 30 s thereafter.
S7 .3.10.1 Measure the internal pressure of MAF specimens
with transducers appropriate to each specimen's test pressure.
S7 .3.11 Instead of continuous heat-flux measurement, the
furnace or other apparatus may be calibrated to establish a
time-temperature curve that provides the required heat flux to
each specimen. The calibrated time-temperature conditions
must be measured and successfully reproduced in every
subsequent material test. Measure temperature and heat flux
and follow:
S7.3.11.1 For each specimen location, measure a spatial
average of the total cold wall heat flux that would exist at all
exposed surfaces of the longest specimen to be tested in that
location. Position the heat-flux gages within a 115-cm (6-in.)
radial distance of the specimen centerline.
S7 .3.11.2 Measure the heating environment temperature
with not less than six furnace thermocouples as specified in
S7 .3.9 symmetrically distributed at the outer boundaries of, but
not in contact with, the test specimen(s). Any cage or other
safety barrier must be included in the calibration test.
S7 .3 .11.3 If the furnace or other apparatus has provision for
multiple specimens, calibrate each position with all other
positions occupied to assure specimens are not shielded from
direct impingement of the required flux.
S7.3.11.4 The furnace or apparatus must be recalibrated
each time it is repaired or modified or once per year or every
300 test h, whichever is first.
S7 .4 Procedure
S7 .4.1 Pressurize and instrument each specimen separately,
except that the specimens requiring the same test pressure may
be manifolded. When a manifold is used, any leakage invali-
dates the fire test for all specimens manifolded. See Sl.3.9 for
further instructions.
S7.4.1.1 Specimens shall be unrestrained at one end to
allow for expansion.
S7 .4.1.2 Assembly supports shall be beyond the minimum
specimen exposure length specified in S7 .4.2.
958
S7 .4.2 Expose a fitting with pipe or tube length at each
outlet as follows:
S7 .4.2.1 If the entire pipe or tube length is exposed to the
required heat flux, the minimum length of that pipe or tube
shall be three outside diameters.
S7 .4.2.2 If any pipe or tube extends beyond the area of
required heat flux, the length of the pipe or tube actually
exposed to the required heat flux shall be a minimum of ten
outside diameters.
S7 .4.2.3 Less pipe or tube length may be exposed if
screening tests prove that the fitting heats at the same rate with
less pipe exposed to the required heat flux.
S7.4.3 The specimen test pressure shall be the rated pressure
of the MAF or the temperature-adjusted rated pressure (
PTEMP) of the pipe or tube, whichever is lower.
S7 .4.3.1 Calculate the temperature-adjusted rated pressure
for the appropriate pipe or tube material being tested using the
following formula:
2 t min (j TEMP t min (j TEMP
PTEMP = Fs X OD OD
where:
OD
0.5 factor of safety,
minimum wall thickness,
temperature-adjusted yield strength of the pipe or
tube at 927C (1700F) (see S7.4.3.2), and
outside diameter of pipe or tube.
S7 .4.3.2 Use the following temperature-adjusted yield
strength (crTEMP) values for the calculation of PTEMP specified
in S7.4.3.1:
Material
Carbon steel
CRES (3xx/3xxL)
CUNI (70/30)
CUNI (90/10)
Copper
14.00 MPa (2.000 ksi)
41.00 MPa (6.000 ksi)
11.00 MPa (1.600 ksi)
8.00 MPa (1.200 ksi)
1.00 MPa (0.150 ksi)
S7.4.4 Pressurize the specimens with nitrogen (N
2
) or dry
air. Control the pressure of the gas as follows:
S7 .4.4.1 Before the fire exposure, precharge each specimen
with an estimated mass of gas such that after 5 min the total
pressure of expanding gas inside the heated specimen will
reach 100 10 % of the specimen test pressure. Verify there is
no leakage.
S7.4.4.2 During the first 5 min of fire exposure, allow
specimen pressure to rise uncontrolled up to 110 % of the test
pressure. If necessary, bleed out gas to maintain 100 10 % of
the test pressure.
S7 .4.4.3 After 5 min of fire exposure, control specimen
pressure to maintain 100 5 % of the test presssure until 20
min of fire exposure.
S7 .4.4.4 After 20 min of fire exposure, close the valves
controlling specimen pressure to seal the specimens.
S7 .4.4.5 A safety relief valve may be used throughout the
fire exposure. If a relief valve is used, the opening pressure
setting shall be at least 10% above the test pressure. Instru-
ment the relief valve and record the opening times.
cO F1387 - 99 (2012)
S7 .4.4.6 After 20 min of fire exposure, pressure variations
within each MAF specimen as a result of variations in
specimen gas temperature or specimen volume shall be within
:: 10 % of the specimen test pressure.
S7 .4.5 Conduct the fire test in a manner that will allow for
a rapid temperature rise to attain the required heat flux.
NOTE S7.4-See Test Method El529 for background information on the
fire exposure.
S7 .4.5 .1 The fire exposure shall provide a spatial average
total cold wall heat flux of at least 120 kW/m
2
within 3 min to
all exposed surfaces of each specimen and maintain +20 and
-0 % of that flux throughout the remainder of the test.
S7.4.5.2 Expose each specimen in an environment meeting
the fire requirements (see S7 .4.5) for 30 min.
S7.4.6 If there is any leakage during the 30-min fire period,
the fire test is invalid. See S 1.3.9 for further instructions.
S7.4.7 Immediately after completing the fire exposure, al-
low the test specimens to cool to ambient temperature. Upon
attaining room temperature, subject the test specimens to a
hydrostatic proof test.
S7.4.7.1 Conduct the hydrostatic proof test in accordance
with the requirements specified in Annex A4 except for the
following:
(1) Fill the specimens with clean fresh water.
(2) Pressurize the test specimen to 150% of rated pressure
and maintain pressure for at least 30 min.
(3) Perform the hydrostatic proof test in the same test
laboratory as the fire test.
( 4) Measure the total accumulated leakage of the hydro-
static proof test.
S7.4.7.2 Total accumulated leakage from the fitting for the
duration of the hydrostatic proof test shall be classified with the
following grades:
Grade
L-0
L-10
L-50
Failure
Amount of Leakage, mL A
0 (None)
>0 and <10
8
>10 and <50
>50
A Total accumulated leakage lor the duration of the postfire hydrostatic test.
8
Symbol ">" means "greater than." Symbol "<" means "less than or equal to."
S7 .4.8 The test specimen fails if there is leakage greater
than or equal to 50 mL at the fitting joint or within one
diameter of the fitting joint during the post-fire or hydrostatic
test.
S7 .4.8.1 Failure of the pipe away from the fitting does not
disqualify a fitting. Failure within one diameter of the fitting
constitutes failure of the fitting unless it is shown by tests of
pipe alone that the fitting is not likely to have contributed to the
pipe failure.
S7.4.9 Complete the test report for the fire test in accor-
dance with S1.3.13.
S7.5.1 The precision of the fire test is established by the
accuracy of the test equipment (see 7 .5) and permissible
tolerances used during the test. There is no bias when the
equipment used is properly calibrated to measure accurate
results.
S8. VIBRATION TEST
S8.1 Scope
S8.1.1 When invoked by the purchaser, MAFs shall be
subjected to a vibration test. The number of specimens used
shall be as specified in Table S 1.1.
the effects of vibration while being pressurized. After comple-
tion of this test, the specimen is subjected to a hydrostatic proof
test. This test is used to duplicate conditions that could occur
during in-service use.
S8.3.1 The test specimen geometry may be in accordance
with Fig. 1. The location of strain gages shall be on the high
side of the specimen to within 4.6 mm (0.18 in.) as shown in
1.
S8.3.2 Before beginning the vibration test, the test speci-
mens may be tested pneumatically (see Annex A3) and
hydrostatically (see Annex A4) at the option of the manufac-
turer.
959
S8.3.3 The selected specimens shall be filled with fluid in
accordance with 7 .6.3 before being placed onto the appropriate
test fixture.
S8.3.3.1 The test fixture shall be equipped with supports to
be attached to the test specimen during testing. The supports
shall be spaced as shown in Fig. S8.1. The distance between
supports shall be as specified in Table S8.1.
S8.3.4 The testing frequency ranges applied and vibration
amplitudes attained shall be recorded in the test report for each
of the tests performed.
S8.3.5 The specimens shall show no evidence of leakage
during or at the completion of the test.
FIG. S8.1 Vibration Test Specimen Geometry
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
TABLE S8.1 Distance Between Supports
Designation
OD, in. OD,mm F, in. F, mm
OD/NPS
%0D 0.250 6.35 16.4 417
3/sOD 0.375 9.53 18.0 457
1/sNPS 0.405 10.29 18.0 457
%0D 0.500 12.70 19.0 483
1
/4NPS 0.540 13.72 19.0 483
5/eOD 0.625 15.88 21.0 533
3/sNPS 0.675 17.15 21.0 533
%0D 0.750 19.05 23.0 584
V2NPS 0.840 21.34 23.0 584
1 OD 1.000 25.40 25.0 635
%NPS 1.050 26.67 25.0 635
1%0D 1.250 31.75 28.0 711
1 NPS 1.315 33.40 28.0 711
1V2 OD 1.500 38.10 31.0 787
1%NPS 1.660 42.16 31.0 787
1112 NPS 1.900 48.26 34.0 864
20D 2.000 50.80 39.0 991
2 NPS 2.375 60.33 39.0 991
2%NPS 2.875 73.66 44.0 1118
S8.3.6 At completion of testing, the test specimens shall be
subjected to a hydrostatic proof test in accordance with the
requirements specified in Annex A4.
S8.3.7 The specimens successfully pass the vibration test
after meeting the test requirements herein and passing the
subsequent hydrostatic proof test (see Annex
S8.4 Procedure
S8.4.1 Subject MAF to a vibration test in accordance with
MIL-STD-167 (Type I: Environmental).
S8.4.2 Conduct the test in each of the three principle
directions (X, Y, and Z).
S8.4.3 Conduct and complete testing in one direction before
proceeding to the other.
S8.4.4 Pressurize the specimens to 100% of the rated
pressure of the pipe or tube or fitting, whichever is lower (see
s 1.3.11.1).
S8.4.5 The test apparatus shall be able to record any drop in
pressure throughout the duration of the test. If pressure is lost
at any time during the test and is due to leakage at the MAP
joint, the specimens have failed (see S 1.3.9).
S8.4.5.1 If there is a loss of pressure through faulty equip-
ment or on the test specimen in any area other than the MAP
joint, note this occurrence in the test report, but it is not to be
considered as a failure of the MAF.
S8.4.6 Perform the following tests: exploratory vibration
test, variable frequency test, and endurance test.
S8.5.1 The precision of the vibration test is established by
the accuracy of the test equipment (7 .5 .1.1) and permissible
tolerances used during the test. There is no bias when the
equipment used is calibrated properly to measure accurate
results.
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
Al. PERFORMANCE TESTS FOR MAF
Al.l Scope
A 1.1. 1 This section lists the tests to be used to verify
whether MAFs meet the performance characteristics of this
specification. In addition, any statements that would apply to
all tests are specified in this section to minimize redundancy.
A 1.1.2 The test procedures appear in the following order:
Procedure
Impulse Test
Flexure Fatigue Test
Tensile Test
Repeated Assembly Test
Rotary Flex Test
Mercurous Nitrate Test
Section
Annex A2
Annex A3
Annex A4
Annex A5
Annex A6
Annex A7
Annex A8
Annex A9
Annex A10
Anrex A1i
Al.1.3 The sections of the main body of this specification
listed below apply to the test specimens used to perform the
tests listed in A 1.1.2.
Title Section
Scope
960
Terminology
Classification
Performance Requirements
Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
Test Methods
Inspection
Certification
A1.2 Significance & Use
3
6
7
9
12
13
14
15
Al.2.1 List ofAll Tests-Section 1.1 and Table 1 provide
a listing of all tests specified herein. The requirements for each
test are as specified in Annex A2-Anncx All.
Al.2.2 General Information-All of the general informa-
tion which applies to the tests described shall be as specified in
Al
A1.3 General Requirements
Al.3.1 The test temperatures shall be as specified in each
individual test.
cO F1387 - 99 (2012)
Al.3.2 Tests may be performed by the manufacturer or by a
test facility designated by the manufacturer and approved by
the purchaser. In all cases, the testing apparatus used to test
MAFs shall be calibrated in accordance with the requirements
specified in 7.5 .I.
Al.3.3 End caps or adapters used to connect the test
specimen assembly to the test apparatus, or plugs used to block
off a specimen end, shall be an optional design designated by
the manufacturer. The end caps or adapters shall be constructed
as to prevent their failure during testing.
A1.3.4 Failure of any test specimen which is related to
separation or leakage at the joint of the end cap or adapter and
pipe or tube shall be recorded in the test report but shall not be
considered a failure of the MAF pipe or tube combination
being tested. Replacement test specimens shall be prepared in
Al.3.5 Failure of the MAF during testing through causes
which are determined to be related to the MAF design shall be
dispositioned in accordance with the requirements specified in
11.3.1. When penalty specimens are used, they shall be
prepared and identified in accordance with 11.3.2. If the
penalty specimens successfully pass all required testing, the
initial failure shall be reported but shall not be considered an
issue against the approval for technical qualification of the
MAF design.
Al.3.6 MAF test specimen(s) shall be assembled in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.
Al.3.7 When multiple tests are performed on individual
specimens, the sequence of testing shall be as specified in the
test description.
Al.3.8 MAFs meet the requirements of this specification
after successfully passing all of tests described in Annex
A2-Annex AlO. When required, the mercurous nitrate test
specified in .Annex A 1 ! shall also be passed.
A1.4 Precision and Bias
A 1.4.1 No statement is made about either the precision or
bias of Annex A 1, since the result merely states whether there
is conformance to the criteria for success specified in the
procedure.
A2. EXAMINATION OF SPECIMEN
A2.1 Scope
A2.1.1 This procedure covers the inspection and examina-
tion of test specimens prepared in accordance with the require-
ments specified in Section 12.
A2.2 Significance and Use
A2.2.1 MAFs are attached to and onto pipe(s) or tube(s), or
both, using a variety of methods (see 1.1 ). To ascertain the
integrity of each MAF type covered, it becomes important to
subject all types of MAFs to essentially the same tests. When
the same tests are used, the assembly of the test specimens
becomes critical to the results of each test performed. The
usefulness of this procedure lies in the examination of MAF
test specimens to ensure that resulting geometries duplicate
appropriate stresses on all types of MAFs qualified using the
tests specified herein.
A2.3 Procedure
A2.3.1 Assemble MAF test specimens in accordance with
the manufacturer's assembly procedures as approved by the
purchaser (see 12.1 ).
A2.3.2 Inspect the test specimen dimensionally to ensure
that it is in compliance with the specimen geometry specified
in 1.
A2.3.3 Inspect strain gages (when required) to ensure their
location on the test specimen as shown in Fig. 1. They shall be
calibrated to assure their ability to transmit accurate readings
and data to the equipment being used during the appropriate
test.
961
A2.3.4 The materials used to assemble the test specimens
shall be in accordance with Section 12. The schedule or the
nominal wall thickness of the pipe or tube may vary as
recommended by the manufacturer for a single MAF size. This
will permit the compatible pipe or tube throughout its given
size range to be qualified along with the MAF.
A2.3.5 Quality and workmanship of the test specimens shall
be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 9.
A2.3.6 End caps or adapters used to connect the test
specimen to subsequent testing apparatus shall be designed by
the manufacturer or its designated testing facility.
A2.3.6.1 MAF specimens prepared for mercurous nitrate
testing do not require end caps to be installed.
A2.3.7 During visual examination of the test specimens,
record any unusual circumstances in accordance with the
requirements specified in 14.6.
A2.3.8 Record the following information in the test report
(or form) at the time of examination: date examined, MAF part
number, specimen part number, pipe or tube material, outside
diameter, wall thickness, and intended use.
A2.4.1 Precision is based upon the accuracy of the MAF
dimensions in accordance with applicable drawings. The pipe
or tube used in conjunction with MAF must be in accordance
with the raw material specification recommended by the
manufacturer. There may be bias for the examination of
specimens based upon the human elements involved in the
visual inspection methods used.
cO F1387 - 99 (2012)
A3. PNEUMATIC PROOF TESTING (OPTIONAL)
8
A3.1 Scope
A3.1.1 This section covers pneumatic proof testing of all
MAF test specimens (except mercurous nitrate) as specified in
Table 3. All specimens approved for testing shall be subjected
to this test.
A3.2.1 This test is the initial test of all MAF specimens
prepared for testing. The test is performed by pressurizing the
test specimen(s) using dry air or nitrogen (N
2
). The initial
pressure of 0.690 MPa (100 psi) is applied. If there is no
leakage, the pressure is gradually increased to 125 % rated
pressure of the pipe or tube or 3.45 MPa (500 psi), whichever
is lower. If the specimen still shows no evidence of leakage
after the second pressurization period, the specimen has
successfully passed the test. This test is useful in determining
if the MAF pipe or tube connection has been assembled
correctly or if the MAF design performs as intended at elevated
pressure.
A3.3 Procedure
A3.3.1 Place the test specimen in an appropriate chamber
and secure it in place in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
A3.3.2 Equip the chamber with calibrated pressure gages
(see 7.5.1) to permit visual readings of the actual pressure
being applied.
A3.3.3 Completely submerge the test specimen in water
(H
2
0) before beginning the test.
8
This test is optional as to whether it is performed before all other testing.
A3.3.4 Perform the pneumatic proof test at ambient tem-
perature.
A3.3.5 Initially use nitrogen (N
2
) or dry air to pressurize the
test specimens to 0.690 MPa (100 psi) 5% (shedding of
surface bubbles during the first 1 min is acceptable) for a total
period of 5 min. There shall be no evidence of leakage during
the remaining 4-min period. If leakage occurs during the last 4
min of this pressurized period, discontinue the test. The
affected specimens have failed. Fill out the test report noting
the reason for discontinuing the test. See A 1.3.4 and A1.3.5 for
further information.
A3.3.6 If there is no evidence of leakage after the initial
pressurization period (see A3.3.5) gradually increase the pres-
sure to 125 % of the rated pressure of the pipe or tube or MAF
or 3.45 MPa (500 psi) 5 %, whichever is lower. Maintain this
pressure for an additional period of 5 min. There shall be no
evidence of leakage during this 5-min period. If leakage
occurs, discontinue the test. The affected specimens have failed
the test. Fill out the test report noting the reason for discon-
tinuing the test. See Al.3.4 and A1.3.5 for further information.
A3.3.7 If there is no evidence of leakage during both
pressurized periods (except allowable shedding of surface
bubbles during initial pressurization), the test specimens have
passed the pneumatic proof test.
A3.4.1 The precision of the pneumatic proof test is estab-
There is no bias in the pneumatic proof test when the M & TE
A4. HYDROSTATIC PROOF TESTING (OPTIONAL)
8
A4.1 Scope
A4.1.1 This section covers hydrostatic proof testing of
selected MAF test specimens (except mercurous nitrate) as
specified in Table 3. All specimens prepared for testing shall be
subjected to this test.
NoTE A4J-Those specimens selected for fire testing shall be hydro-
statically proof tested using water only.
A4.2.1 This test is performed by pressunzmg the test
specimens using hydraulic fluid or water (see Note A4. l ). The
initial pressure applied, 0.690 MPa (100 psi), tests the as-
962
sembled specimen to determine if it can retain fluid without
leakage at the pipe or tube and MAF joint. If there is no
leakage, the pressure is gradually increased to a second
pressurization period of 150% rated pressure of the pipe or
tube or MAF, whichever is lower. This elevated pressure level
tests the ability of the specimens to hold fluid without leakage.
A4.2.2 If the specimen still shows no evidence of leakage
after the second pressurization period, the specimens have
passed the test. This test is useful in determining the "'t'"'""'''h'
of the MAF joint to hold fluid at an elevated pressure without
leakage. After successful completion of this test, the test
specimens are for additional testing.
F1387 - 99 (2012}
A4.3 Procedure
A4.3.1 Fill the test specimens with fluid which meets the
requirements of 7.6.3 before installation onto the appropriate
testing apparatus.
A4.3.2 Place the test specimens in a burst chamber and
secure into place in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures. One end of the test specimen shall
be free to move.
(see 7.5.1) to permit visual readings of actual pressure being
applied.
A4.3.4 Perform the hydrostatic proof test at ambient tem-
perature.
A4.3.5 pressurize the test specimens to 0.690 MPa
( 100 psi) :!::: 5 % for a total period of 5 min. There shall be no
evidence of leakage during this 5-min period. If leakage
tinuing the test. See Al.3.4 or Al.3.5 for further information.
A4.3.6 If there is no evidence of leakage after the initial
5-min period (see A4.3.5), gradually increase the pressure at an
average rate not to exceed 172 MPa/min (25 000 psig/min) to
150 5 % of the rated pressure of the pipe or tube or MAF,
whichever is lower. Maintain this pressure for an additional
period of 5 min. There shall be no evidence of leakage during
this 5-min period. If leakage occurs, discontinue the test. The
affected specimens have failed the test. Fill out the test report
noting the reason for discontinuing the test. See A 1.3.4 and
A 1.3.5 for further information (as applicable).
A4.3.7 If there is no evidence of leakage within the MAF or
MAF joint during both pressurized periods, the test specimens
have passed the hydrostatic proof test. The specimens are ready
for further testing.
A4.4.1 The precision of the hydrostatic proof test is estab-
& TE) and their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7.5).
There is no bias in the hydrostatic proof test when the M & TE
AS. IMPULSE TESTING
A5.1 Scope
A5.1.1 This section covers impulse testing of selected MAF
test specimens. The number of specimens tested shall be as
specified in Table 3 using the applicable specimen geometries
shown in 1.
A5.1.1.1 At least 50% of the separable specimens (Types
II, III, and IV) shall be used for repeat assembly testing before
testing begins, during the testing period, and after the test is
concluded (see Annex A9).
A5.2.1 This test is performed by filling the test specimens
with hydraulic fluid or water. The maximum pressure attained
during the impulse cycle shall be 133% of the performance
pressure. The specimen is then depressurized to a pressure not
greater than 20 5 % of the performance pressure. Each
period of pressurization/depressurization is equal to one im-
pulse cycle. The test specimens must be subjected to one
million (106) cycles without leakage.
AS .2.2 If the test specimens show no evidence of leakage
after completion of the impulse testing, they have passed. If
any specimens fail during the course of this test, the test for the
failed must be discontinued and the reason for the
failure noted in the test report (see A1.3.5).
A5.2.3 All passed shall then be subjected to a
hydrostatic test as specified in Annex A4. This impulse
test is useful to verify the ability of the MAF joint to maintain
integrity in the presence of fluctuating system pressure. The
occurrences during testing simulate environments that
963
may exist in hydraulic or hydrostatic piping or tubing systems
for which MAF is designed.
A5.3 Procedure
A5.3.1 Fill the test specimens with hydraulic fluid which
meets the requirements of 7 .6.3 before installation onto the
appropriate test apparatus.
A5.3.2 Perform the test at ambient conditions throughout
the testing period.
A5.3.3 Connect the test specimens onto a testing apparatus
that is capable of applying a pressure of 133 5% of the
performance pressure of the pipe or tube or MAF, whichever is
lower, followed by a depressurization to a pressure not greater
than 20 5 % of the performance pressure.
A5.3.4 Equip the apparatus with calibrated instruments (see
7.5 .l) which permit visual readings of the actual pressures
being applied to the specimens throughout the test period.
A5.3.5 Subject the test specimens to impulse pressures at
the range specified in A5.3.3. Each application of maximum
and minimum pressure shall be equal to one impulse cycle.
A5.3.6 The duration of impulse testing shall be 10
6
cycles at
a rate not to exceed 75 cycles per minute (CPM).
A5.3.7 After the completion of the impulse test, hydrostati-
proof test the test specimens in accordance with the
requirements specified in Annex A4.
A5.3.8 There shall be no evidence of leakage during im-
pulse testing or hydrostatic proof testing. If leakage occurs
during either testing period, discontinue the test. The affected
F1387 - 99 (2012)
specimens have failed the test. Fill out the test report noting the
reason for discontinuing the test. See Al.3.4 and A1.3.5 for
further information.
A5.3.9 If there is no evidence of leakage at the conclusion
of impulse or hydrostatic proof testing, the specimens have
passed.
A5.4.1 The precision of the impulse test is established by
the accuracy of the measuring and test equipment (M & TE)
and their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7 .5). There
is no bias in the impulse test when the M & TE used is
calibrated properly.
A6. FLEXURE FATIGUE TEST
A6.1 Scope
A6.1.1 This section covers the requirements for flexure
fatigue testing of selected test specimens as specified in Table
3. The specimen geometry used shall be as selected from Fig.
1.
A6.l.l.l At least 50 % of the separable specimens (Types
II, III, and IV) shall be used for repeat assembly testing
specified in Annex A9.
A6.2.1 The significance of this test is to verify the capability
of the MAF joint to perform adequately at rated pressure in a
flexure environment. The test specimen is subjected to flexure
while being pressurized to the maximum rated pressure of the
pipe or tube or MAF, whichever is lower. The specimen is
subjected to a bidirectional flexure whose plus ( +) and minus
(-) magnitudes are equal to within 2 %. This test is useful in
simulating environmental conditions which may exist in fluid
systems for which MAF is designed.
A6.2.2 If the specimens do not show signs of leakage, they
are subjected to a hydrostatic proof test as specified in Annex
A4. The specimen passes when there is no evidence of leakage
after the flexure fatigue test and hydrostatic proof test.
A6.3 Procedure
A6.3.1 Fill the test specimens with hydraulic fluid which
meets the requirements of 7.6.3 before installation onto the
appropriate testing apparatus.
A6.3.2 Equip the apparatus with calibrated gages (see 7.5.1)
which permit visual readings of the actual pressures being
applied. The apparatus shall be designed to shut down in the
event that pressure is lost during the period of the test.
A6.3.3 Locate calibrated strain gages on the high stress side
of the pipe or tube as shown in the geometries in Fig. 1. They
shall be able to transmit accurate data to calibrated equipment
which will be capable of displaying visual data or recording
physical data, or both, throughout the period of the test.
A6.3.4 Conduct the test at ambient conditions throughout
the testing period.
A6.3.5 Calculate the axial stress introduced as a result of the
internal pressure to be applied using the following formula:
PJ2
S = Dz- dz
964
where:
s
p
D
d
stress,
pressure,
outside diameter (OD), and
inside diameter.
A6.3.6 Introduce a bending moment which will obtain an
average strain gage reading across the unpressurized specimen
equivalent to the stress level specified in Table A6.1 less the
axial stress calculated (see A6.3.5).
A6.3.7 After the bending moment is established, pressurize
the specimen to the rated pressure of the MAF or pipe or tube,
whichever is lower. The total axial stress (as a result of bending
and internal pressure) shall be a minimum of the values
specified in Table A6.1.
A6.3.7.1 The flexure rate during the test shall be at the
option of the manufacturer.
A6.3.8 One cycle shall consist of an excursion from neutral
(zero strain) to the maximum positive strain position, to the
maximum negative strain position, and return to neutral.
Maximum positive strain and maximum negative strain shall
be equal to within 2 %.
A6.3.9 Subject the specimens to a minimum of 80 000 total
cycles (30 000 total cycles for stainless steel (CRES) speci-
mens). Record the average cycle rate used on the test report.
Leakage during the test shall result in the automatic shut down
of the apparatus.
A6.3.10 If there is no evidence of leakage at the conclusion
of flexure fatigue testing, subject the passed specimens to a
hydrostatic proof test as specified in Annex A4.
A6.3.11 There shall be no evidence of leakage during
flexure fatigue testing or hydrostatic proof testing. If leakage
TABLE A6.1 Minimum Combined Total Axial Stress ValuesA
Material
CRES (Type 3XX)
CRES (Type 3XXL)
CuNi (70-30)
CuNi (90-10)
CuNi (90-iO)
Copper
Copper
Carbon steel
Chromium-molybdenium
Temper
annealed
light drawn
annealed
drawn
Test Stress Value, ksi
259 MPa (38.00)
259 MPa (38.00)
124 MPa (18.00)
83 MPa (12.00)
72 MPa (10.50)
93 MPa (13.50)
41 MPa (6.00)
152 MPa (22.00)
152 MPa (22.00)
A Total axial stress as a result of combined pressure and bending.
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
tinuing the test. See A 1.3.4 and A 1.3.5 for further information.
A6.3.12 The specimens pass when there is no evidence of
leakage during the flexure fatigue test and hydrostatic proof
test.
A6.4.1 The precision of the flexure fatigue test is estab-
& TE) and their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7.5).
There is one area of bias for this test. If there is equipment
malfunction, or leakage in the facility, or leakage in an area of
the specimen other than the MAF or MAF joint, which results
in loss of pressure and the automatic shutdown does not occur,
it may be possible to achieve a given amount of cycles before
the loss of pressure is detected. If this occurs, replacement test
specimens (see Al.3.4) shall be required. The affected test
specimens cannot be considered for further testing and must be
discarded. The reason for this is because the original specimens
may have completed the test. If the same specimens were used
and cycled an additional 80 000 cycles (30 000 cycles for
stainless steel (CRES)) and failure occurred, absolute verifica-
tion of whether it was because of the design or overstress could
not be determined clearly.
A 7. TENSILE TEST
A7.1 Scope
A 7 .1.1 This section covers the requirements for tensile
testing selected specimens as specified in Table 3. The number
of specimens for this test shall be as specified in Table 3, using
the specimen geometries as shown in Fig. 1.
A 7 .2.1 The significance of this test is to apply a tensile load
at a controlled separation speed to establish how much load is
needed to separate the test specimen. The minimum tensile
load occurs during separation of the pipe or tube and MAF
joint. The amount of tensile load applied depends upon the
cross-section area and the yield strength of the pipe or tube.
The formula specified in A7.3.3 constitutes the criterion for the
pass or fail requirements of this test. When the minimum
tensile load is calculated, the result should be equal to or less
than the minimum tensile load required to achieve separation
of the specimen joint. Failure occurs when separation takes
place at a point before the calculated tensile load is applied. If
failure occul'S, the test shall be discontinued, and the test report
shall be noted with the reason for discontinuing the test.
A 7 .2.2 The specimens pass this test when the calculated
tensile load is achieved without separation of the joint. Move-
ment within the area of the joint is acceptable as long as actual
separation does not occur. This test is useful in determining the
strength of the pipe or tube or MAF joint. Based upon the
strength of the joint, the pipe or tube material and wall
thickness can be tailored to withstand failure within the adverse
environments present in fluid systems for which MAF is
designed.
A 7.3 Procedure
A7.3.1 Before tensile testing, the specimens may be sub-
jected to a pneumatic test (see Annex A3) and a hydrostatic test
(see Annex A4) at the option of the manufacturer.
965
A 7.3 .2 Install each test specimen in a constant strain rate
tensile machine. The gripping jaws shall be located a minimum
of three pipe or tube diameters from the MAF joint.
A 7 .3.3 The constant strain rate tensile machine shall have
the capability to apply a constant tensile loo.d which will result
in establishing a speed of approximately 1.3 mm/min (0.05
in./min) at which cross head minimum tensile pull out force (as
separation occurs) will be attained. Minimum allowable tensile
load is based upon being equal to or greater than the values
stated in the following formula:
Calculated tensile load= (Kt) X (Ap) X (Sy)
where:
Kt = tensile constant of 1.0;
Ap actual cross-section area of the pipe, mm
2
(in?) based
on wall thickness; and
Sy minimum specified yield strength of pipe or tube.
A 7.4 Precision and Bias
A 7 .4.1 The precision for the tensile test is established by the
accuracy of the measuring and test equipment (M & TE) and
their permissible tolerances during the test (see 7 .5). There may
be bias in the tensile test when separation occurs at a point
other than at the MAF joint. If the pipe or tube were to yield
before the MAF pipe or tube joint, this would establish that the
pipe or tube is weaker than the MAE In this case, a stronger
yield of pipe or tube may be needed to determine the strength
of the joint. In another instance, the MAF may yield before the
joint or pipe or tube. If this is the case, reevaluation of the pipe
or tube selected may have to be reconsidered to establish the
true strength of the MAF joint.
F1387 - 99 (2012)
AS. HYDROSTATIC BURST TEST
A8.1 Scope
A8.1.1 This section covers the test requirements for burst
testing. The number of specimens to be tested shall be as
specified in Table 3.
A8.1.1.1 When the Supplementary Section is invoked,
passed specimens from the elevated temperature soak test (S3)
and shock test (S6) shall be used instead of new or previously
tested specimens from tests specified in the Annex.
A8.2.1 The significance of this test is two-fold. The first
significant aspect is the burst test itself. This test verifies the
integrity of the pipe or tube and MAF joint to withstand,
without leakage or burst, a minimum pressure equal to four
times the rated pressure of the pipe or tube or MAF, whichever
is lower. To pass this test, the pipe or tube and MAF joint
cannot leak or burst below four times the rated pressure.
A8.2.2 The second significant aspect of this test is the test
specimens used. All test specimens are comprised of those
specimens which have passed other tests as specified in A8.1.l.
The use of this test determines whether the MAF design may
ultimately receive technical approval for in-service systems by
the purchaser.
A8.3 Procedure
A8.3.1 Fill the test specimens with water or hydraulic fluid
which meets the requirements of 7 .6.3 before installation onto
the appropriate testing apparatus.
A8.3.2 Place the test specimens into a burst chamber and
secure them into place in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures. One end must be free to move.
(see 7.5 .1) to permit visual readings of actual pressure being
applied.
A8.3.4 Perform the hydrostatic burst test at ambient tem-
perature.
A8.3.5 Subject the test specimens to a gradual increase of
pressure at an average rate not to exceed 127 MPa/min (25 000
psig/min) to four times the rated pressure of the specimen
assembly and hold for a minimum of 1 min. If leakage or burst
occurs below four times the rated pressure of the specimen
assembly, discontinue the test. The affected test specimens
have failed the test. Fill out the test report noting the reason for
discontinuing the test. See Al.3.4 and Al.3.5 for further
information.
A8.3.6 The test specimens have passed the hydrostatic burst
test when four times the rated pressure of the specimen
assembly has been attained.
A8.4.1 The precision of the hydrostatic burst test is estab-
& TE) and their permissible tolerances during the test (see
There may be bias in this test if the pipe or tube selected burst
below four times its rated pressure. If this should occur, the test
specimens shall be replaced in accordance with Al.3.4. There
may be no bias in this test if the precision of the gages used is
the only determining factor. The gages used to apply a gradual
increase pressure to a maximum of four times the rated
pressure of the specimen assembly, can be read accurately
during the test period.
A9. REPEATED ASSEMBLY TEST
A9.1 Scope
A9 .1.1 This section covers the requirements for repeat
assembly testing of selected test specimens as specified in
Table 3. This test is only applicable to separable MAFs, Types
II, III, and IV. Test specimens selected for repeat assembly
shall be comprised of at least 50 % of the specimens from
impulse (see Annex A5) and flexure fatigue (see Annex A6)
tests.
A9 .2.1 The significance of this test is to verify the integrity
of the separable MAF joint to withstand ten repeated assem-
blies. The disassembly and reassembly shall be performed
using the manufacturer's recommended assembly procedures.
The test specimens used for repeat assembly shall be selected
from the impulse and :flexure tests. An equal amount of
specimens shall be selected from each of these tests. Scoring,
966
distortion, damage, or modification of the mating parts of the
MAF joint as a result of repeated assembly shall not be cause
for failure.
A9 .2.2 If the specimens show no evidence of leakage during
impulse and flexure testing (or their posttest requirements),
they pass the repeat assembly test.
A9.3 Procedure
A9.3.1 Before beginning the impulse or flexure fatigue test,
disassemble and reassemble the separable MAF assembly one
time.
A9.3.1.1 Each assembly shall have the sealing face rotated
by hand 60 to 90 before each reasse:mbly
A9.3.1.2 each
maximum values recommended the manufacturer's assem-
bly procedure.
0 F1387 - 99 (2012)
A9.3.2 At the conclusion of 25% of the test cycles for
impulse and flexure fatigue test, interrupt the test and disas-
semble and reassemble the test specimens two more times (see
A9.3.l.l).
A9.3.l.l).
A9.3.1.1 ).
A9.3.5 At the conclusion of the impulse and flexure fatigue
test (before post testing), disassemble and reassemble the test
specimens an additional two times (see A9.3.1.1 ).
A9.3.6 If the test specimens show no evidence of leakage
after the post-test requirements for impulse and flexure fatigue,
they have passed the repeated assembly test.
A9.3.7 If the specimens leak any time during the test,
discontinue the test. The affected specimens have failed the
test. Note the reason for discontinuing the test in the test report.
See AI .3.4 and Al.3.5 for further information (as applicable).
A9.4.1 There is no precision and bias for the repeated
assembly test because scoring, distortion, damage, or modifi-
cation of the sealing surfaces are not causes for failure of this
test The precision and bias statements for subsequent hydro-
static proof, impulse, and flexure fatigue tests apply.
AlO. ROTARY FLEX TEST
AlO.l Scope
AlO.l.l When invoked by the purchaser, Types H, III, and
IV MAFs shall be subjected to a rotary flex test. This test shall
only apply to MAFs with tube diameters of 25.4 mm inclusive
(l in. inclusive) or less. The number of specimens used shall be
as specified in Table 3.
A10.2.1 This test determines the ability of separable MAFs
to withstand the effects of rotary flex while being pressurized.
After completion of this test, the specimen is subjected to a
hydrostatic proof test. This test is used to duplicate conditions
that could occur during in-service use.
A10.3 General Testing Requirements
A10.3.1 The test specimen geometry shall be in accordance
with Fig. 1. The location of strain gages shall be on the high
side of the specimen to within 4.6 mm (0.18 in.) as shown.
Al0.3.2 Before beginning the test, the specimens may be
tested pneumatically (see Annex A3) and hydrostatically (see
Annex A4) at the option of the manufacturer.
Al0.3.3 The selected specimens shall be filled with fluid in
accordance with 7.6.3 before being placed onto the appropriate
test fixture.
Al0.3.4 The testing frequency ranges applied and ampli-
tudes attained shall be recorded in the test report for each of the
tests performed.
Al0.3.5 The specimens shall show no evidence of leakage
during or at the completion of the test.
A10.3.6 completion of testing, the test shall be
sutnec:ted to a test in accordance with the
A10.3.7 The specimens su<:ce:ssf11lly the
rotary flex test and
test (see Annex. A4).
967
A10.4 Procedure
Al0.4.1 Subject selected separable test specimens to a
rotary flexure test. The general test requirements specified in
Al0.3 apply before beginning the test.
A 1 0.4.2 Fill the specimen with fluid in accordance with
7.6.3, and install the specimen onto the appropriate test
apparatus which will allow for a bending moment to be
introduced along with the application of pressure (see Fig.
AIO.l).
A10.4.3 With the specimen unpressurized, a bending mo-
ment equivalent to a minimum of 35 % of the ultimate tensile
strength (of the tubing material) shall be introduced and locked
into place. Record the bending moment selected in the test
report.
A 1 0.4.4 With the bending moment locked into place, pres-
surize the specimen to a static pressure of 3.45 MPa (500 psi)
minimum. Maintain the bending moment and pressure for the
duration of the test.
A 1 0.4.5 Select the amplitude to be used and record it in the
test report.
Al0.4.6 Flex the specimen in a rotary motion at a minimum
of 1750 rpm for a minimum of 1 x 10
6
cycles maintaining the
specified bending stress level (see Al 0.4.3) and pressure (see
A 10.4.4) at all times.
Al0.4.7 The test apparatus shall be able to record any loss
of pressure throughout the duration of the test.
A10.4.8 If pressure is lost at any time during the test, the
has failed. See A 1.3 .4 and A 1.3 .5 for further instruc-
tions (as applicable).
Al 0.4.9 At the conclusion of the rotary flex test, subject the
to a hydrostatic proof test (see Annex A4) as
in AI0.3.6. Specimens pass the test upon successfully
completing the rotary flex test and the hydrostatic test without
any leakage.
F1387 - 99 (2012)
ROTATING HEAD WITH ADJUSTABLE OFF-SET MECHANISM
OFF-SET TO PROPER
STRAIN GAGE STRESS
FREE PIPE/TUBE LENGTH (MIN.)
FIVE TIMES (5X} PIPE/TUBE 0.0.
STRAIN GAGE - LOCATED ON THE
HIGH STRESS SIDE OF THE PIPE/TUBE
4.6 mm (.18 in.l 2 PLACES TYPICAL
{AS REQUIREDj
~
~
1
ROTARY DIRECTION
TO LOOSEN NUT
2 STRAIN GAGES
go APART
FIG. A10.1 Test Setup for Rotary Flex (MAF Types II, Ill, and IV)
Al0.5.1 The precision of the rotary flexure test is estab-
There is no bias in the rotary flexure test when the M & TE
AU. MERCUROUS NITRATE TEST
All.l Scope
A11.1.1 This section covers the requirements for conduct-
ing a mercurous nitrate test of selected MAF specimens as
specified in Table 3. The selection of specimens for this testis
restricted to those specimens that are manufactured using either
copper-zinc (containing more than 15 % zinc) or copper-
aluminum alloys. (Warning-All appropriate safety
precautions, such as the use of rubber gloves, should be taken
while handling and testing with mercury. Care should be taken
to prevent mercury contamination of other test specimens.)
A 11.2.1 The significance of this test is to determine the
susceptibility to stress-corrosion cracking of MAFs manufac-
tured from materials specified in A 11 .1.
A11.3 Procedure
A11.3.1 Use two MAFs from the same material lot from
which the specimens are selected to conduct this test.
968
A11.3.2 Assemble the specimens onto pipe or tube to
duplicate the geometries shown in l. End caps are not
required.
A11.3.3 Immerse the MAF specimen for 30 min in a
standard mercurous nitrate solution as specified in Test Method
Bl54.
A11.3.4 Rinse and dry the MAF before immediate exami-
nation. There shall be no cracks.
A11.3.5 MAFs successfully pass this test when no cracks
are observed during the examination.
A11.4.1 The precision of this test is the solution and the
material tested. There may be bias if the solution is not
properly mixed in accordance with Method B 154.
F1387 - 99 (2012)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
969
A Designation: F1431-92 (Reapproved 2010)

INTERNATIONAl.
Water Trap for Diesel Exhaust
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation Fl431; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the material, dimensions, and
constmction of diesel exhaust water traps, which shall be
required whenever the exhaust is to be expelled through the
hull of the vessel.
1.2 The traps are designed to prevent sea backwash from
entering the diesel exhaust system.
1.3 The values stated in SI (metric) units shall be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
B443 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-
Columbium Alloy(UNS N06625) and Nickel-Chromium-
Molybdenum-SiliconAiloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
Fl 04 Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materi-
als
2.2 Military Standard:
3
MJL-S-901 Requirements for Shock Tests, High Impact,
Shipboard Machinery, Equipment and ."\v-.or'"'
2;3 Other Documents:
Rules Building and
Classing Steel
American Welding A WS D 1.1 Struc-
tural Welding Code
5
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F:!5. l l on
Current edition approved May 1, 2010. Published June 2010. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as Fl431 -92 (2004).
DOl: 10.1520/Fl43l-92R!O.
2
Standards volume infom1ation, refer to the standard's Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
4
Available from American Bureau of Shipping (ABS). ABS Plaza, 16855
Northchase Dr., Houston, TX 77060, http://www.eagle.org.
5
Available from American Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW LeJeune Rd.,
Miami, FL 33126, http://www.aws.org.
3.1 Water traps ordered under this specification shall in-
clude the follo\ving information:
3 .1.1 ASTM designation, title and date of this specification,
3 .1.2 Quantity,
3.1.3 Size,
3.1.4 Shock test and grade (see Supplementary Requirement
Sl),
3.1.5 Handhole shall be at 45 unless otherwise specified,
and
3.1.6 Flange dimensions shall be indicated for gaskets.
4.1 Materials:
4.1.1 The tank and baffles shall be of nickel-chromium-
molybdenum-columbium alloy and tested in accordance with
Specification B443.
4.1.2 Gaskets-Gaskets shall be ASTM Classification F 104
(F712100-A9B4-E22K5M6) and shall withstand temperatures
of 650 oc (1200 F).
4.2 Manufacture:
4.2.1 Constmction of the water traps shall be in accordance
with this specification and I.
4.2.2 Welding shall be in accordance with the American
Bureau of Shipping Rules for Building and Classing Steel
Vessels or the American Welding Society Publication AWS
Dl.l.
5. Requirements
5.1 Water traps for diesel exhaust systems shall be designed
for maximum temperatures of 650 oc (1200 F).
5.2 Baffles:
5.2.1 No less than three baffles shall be installed. The
bottom baffle shall not extend below the top of the outlet
as shown in 1 .
5.2.2 The inlet may be rotated about the centerline of the
trap to suit the installations. The top baffle shall also be rotated
to retain the same relation with the inlet as shown in 1.
5.3 Trap Size:
5.3.1 The trap size shall be a minimum of 1 m (3 ft)
5.3.2 The diameter shall equal twice the diameter of the
inlet exhaust line.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive. PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
970
F1431 - 92 (201 0)
HAIII>iOlECOVER%'
_[
INLET-
D2 Min.=Dl
D3 Min.,. 2 X Dl
0
I
;:..,
FIG. 1 Water Trap for Exhaust
5.3.3 The minimum free area through the trap shall equal
twice the area of the outlet exhaust line.
5.4 Hand Hole-The hand hole shall be configured as
indicated in 1 .
6. Dimensions
6.1 The dimensions in
dimensions.
I are recommended nominal
7. and Appe.::aralnce
W<Jrkrmmship on traps and
to prevent dirt accumulation.
'-''"'' .. '""''"M' free of and spatter.
7.2 The trap shall be free of
8. Test Method
8.1 Each trap be
with no visible seam
shall be of sufficient
shall have small,
tested 35 (5
971
9. Packaging
9.1 The water traps shaH be crated or ,nrt""'t1""'
for shipment by a commercial common carrier.
9 .1.1 Talc and talcum used in the process of
items shall be free of asbestos and asbestiform-like materials.
10. Marking
10.1 Each water trap shall bear a
the purchase order number, ASTM aesagr1at1on,
of manufacturer. The
approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.)
11. Quality Assurance Provisions
11.1
12.
12.1 diesel exhaust systems; systems
0 F1431 - 92 (2010)
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract order.
S 1. Provisions to withstand high shock. The grade will be
specified by the navy requirements.
S 1.1 When specified, the diesel exhaust water trap shall
meet the requirements set forth in MIL-S-901.
COPYRIGHt!).
972
& Designation: F1433 - 97 (Reapproved 201 0)
'4uaJ
7
INTERNATIONAL
Mechanically Refrigerated Shipboard Air Conditioner
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers self-contained mechanically
refrigerated air conditioners for shipboard use in air circula-
tion, air cooling, and dehumidification.
1.2 These air conditioners are intended for use in compart-
ments and areas where central system air conditioning is not
provided.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A569/A569M Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maxi-
mum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial
(Withdrawn 2000)
3
B16/B16M Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar
and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines
861 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
B75 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
Bl48 Speci.fication for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings
B209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.J 1 on
DOl: 10.1520/F1433-97R10.
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
2.2 Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) . .4
ARI 210 Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
2.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
5
ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ASHRAE 37 Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-
Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment
2.4 American Water Works Association (A WWA):
6
AWWA C504 Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves
2.5 National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA):
7
NEMA MG I Motors and Generators
NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control and
Systems
2.6 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
8
UL 465 Standard for Safety, Central Cooling, and Air
Conditioning
UL 873 Standard for Safety Temperature-Indicating and
Regulating Equipment
2.7 Federal Specification:
9
FF-B-171 Bearings, Ball, Annular (General Purpose)
2.8 Federal Regulations:
9
Code of Federal Regulations. Title 46
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3 .1.1 inspection-the process of measuring, exammmg,
testing, gaging, or otherwise comparing the unit with the
applicable requirements.
3.1.2 lot-all units of the same type, service, and size
offered for delivery at one time.
4
Available from Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, 1501 Wilson
Blvd., Arlington, VA 22209.
5
Available from American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE), 1791 Tullie Circle, NE, Atlanta, GA
30329, http://www.ashrae.org.
6
Available from American Water Works Association (AWWA), 6666 W. Quincy
Ave., Denver, CO 80235, http://www.awwa.org.
7
Available from National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), 1300
N. 17th St., Suite 1752, Rosslyn, VA 22209, http://www.nema.org.
8
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd., North-
brook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
9
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
973
cO F1433 - 97 (201 0)
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 air discharge plenum-an enclosure (housing) con-
taining guide vanes and a grill or louvers in the outlet opening
for directing the airflow.
3.2.2 air handling/evaporator section-an enclosed compo-
nent consisting of an air filter, fan with drive motor, evaporator
(cooling coil), refrigerant flow control, and condensate collec-
tor and drain.
3.2.3 condensing unit-contains refrigerating components,
consisting of a compressor with a drive motor, condenser,
receiver, operating and safety controls, and interconnecting
piping and wiring. The controls include a condenser water
regulating valve, high and low refrigerant pressure switches,
refrigerant relief device, and motor overload protection.
3.2.4 cooling effect-the net room sensible cooling effect of
a unit is defined as the difference between the net total cooling
effect and the dehumidifying effect, expressed in watts. The net
total cooling effect is the total useful capacity of the unit for
removing heat from the space to be treated, expressed in watts.
The net dehumidifying effect is the difference between the
moisture content in kilograms per hour of the entering and
leaving air, multiplied by 685, expressed in watts.
4. Classification
4.1 The air conditioners should be of the following types,
services, arrangements, and size as specified:
Type I drip-proof protected
Type II explosion-proof enclosed
Service 1 440-V 60-Hz alternating current (ac)
Service 2 230-V direct current (de)
Service 3 115-V de
Service 4 220-V 60-Hz alternating current ( ac)
Arrangement A with air discharge plenum
Arrangement B without air discharge plenum
Size 2 minimum cooling capacity 7000 W
Size 3 minimum cooling capacity 10 500 W
Size 5 minimum cooling capacity 17 500 W
Size 7V2 minimum cooling capacity 26 000 W
5.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following:
5.1.1 Title, number, and year of issue of this specification.
5.1.2 Type, service, arrangement, and size of unit (see 4.1).
5.1.3 Air discharge plenum required (see 6.1 and 6.5.10).
5.1.4 Type of power supply for equipment and motors (see
6.5.14.1 and 6.5.14.2).
5.1.5 When drip-proof protected or explosion-proof equip-
ment is required (see 4.1, 6.5.14.1, and 6.5.14.2).
5.1.6 When certification and test reports are required (see
14.1).
6.1 General-Air conditioners covered by this specification
shall consist of a condensing unit section, an air handling/
evaporator section, and a motor controller. An air discharge
plenum may be included, if specified. These air conditioners
974
shall be self-contained and shall perform as specified in this
specification when connected to cooling water, drainage, and
electric power in accordance with UL 465 and ARI 210. The
refrigerant system shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirement of ASHRAE 15. Every component, including
interconnecting wiring and piping, shall be enclosed within the
cabinet, except where external mounting is permitted by this
specification. The air conditioner shall be factory assembled,
complete, self-contained, with the refrigerant system and
components dehydrated and charged with the operating quan-
tities of refrigerant and oil. The air conditioner shall be ready
for operation after removal of the shipping protection, opening
of valves, adjustment of belts, and connection to services.
Valves, controls, and equipment subject to service and repair
shall be readily accessible for servicing tr...rough removable
panels. Where panels are provided for access to equipment,
machine screws may be used for fastening.
6.2 Refrigerant System-Every component, including pip-
ing, controls, and accessories by the refrigerant system, shall
be constructed for use with Refrigerant-22 (monochlorodifl.uo-
romethane) or other specified refrigerant.
6.3 Materials--Materials shall be as specified in this speci-
fication.
6.3.1 Dangerous Materials-Mercury and materials which
may produce dangerous gases or cause other harmful effects
under conditions, including fire, shall not be used. Magnesium
and its alloys shall not be used in the manufacture of the air
conditioners or in any component parts.
6.3.2 Corrosion Protection-Corrosion-resisting steel, cop-
per, brass, bronze, chromium, copper-nickel, and copper-nickel
alloys as specified in this specification are considered
corrosion-resisting materials. Where corrosion-resisting steel is
used, it shall be type 316 or 347 in accordance with Specifi-
cation A276. Corrosion-resisting steel, when fabricated by any
method that tends to reduce corrosion-resisting properties,
shall be normalized to restore those properties before being
used in the assembly of any unit.
6.3.2.1 Noncorrosion-Resisting Materials-Noncorrosion-
resisting materials are to be protected against corrosion by the
use of the chemicals, electrolytic processes, plating, or paints
and enamels.
6.3.2.2 Fastenings or Fittings-Bolts, nuts, studs, pins,
screws, and such other fastenings or fittings shall be of
corrosion-resisting material. Self-tapping screws with machine
screw threads may be used in the cabinet assembly. Sheet metal
screws with sheet metal threads shall not be permitted.
6.3.3 Galvanic Corrosion-Direct contact of electrolytically
dissimilar materials shall be avoided to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
6.4 Piping System-The construction of the piping system
shall include inlet and outlet Schedule 40 copper-nickel con-
denser water piping of the proper diameter, extending horizon-
tally outside of the air conditioner cabinet. Construction shall
also include the proper size and type of drain from
drain connection of the air conditioner through the cabinet
down to the deck level.
6.5 Air Conditioner Components:
F1433 - 97 (201 0)
6.5 .1 Compressor-The compressor shall be of the hermetic
type for service 1 and service 4 air conditioners and of the open
type for service 2 and service 3 air conditioners. Provision shall
be made for adequate lubrication of the rubbing and wearing
surfaces, including operation under ship motion, as specified in
7.3. Compressors shall be provided with a crankcase heater.
Crankcase heaters shall be replaceable without having to
remove oil or refrigerant from the compressor and shall be
arranged to provide compressor oil heating before start-up and
at any time the compressor is in the off cycle. Compressors
shall be provided with suction and discharge compressor
service shutoff valves and means for charging.
6.5.1.1 Open Compressor-The open compressor shall be of
the positive displacement type. The shaft seal and main
bearings shall be replaceable in their entirety without the
necessity of replacing or refurbishing the crankshaft or crank-
case. Compressor speeds for open compressors shall not
exceed 1800 revolutions per minute (r/min).
6.5.1.2 Hermetic Compressor-The hermetic compressor
shall be of the positive displacement type.
6.5.2 Condenser-The condenser shall be seawater cooled
and constructed in accordance with the criteria shown in Table
1. The condenser shall be sized so that the compressor motor
shall not be overloaded when the air conditioner is experienc-
ing overload conditions. The condenser shall be a shell and
tube construction with water in the tubes and refrigerant in the
shell and shall have an even number of water passes. The
condenser shall be mechanically cleanable in place with
removable water boxes or heads to permit tubes to be exam-
ined, cleaned, or replaced as necessary. The condenser shall be
cleanable from either side of the cabinet. Means shall be
provided to remove entrained air from each inlet pass. Con-
denser heat drains shall be provided. Zinc anodes shall be
installed in the condenser heads (seawater side). The condenser
shall have a means for purging air and noncondensable gases
and a relief valve to prevent overpressurization of the refrig-
TABLE 1 Air Conditioner
Maximum seawater design pressure
Seawater entering pressure
Seawater entering temperature
Seawater velocity through condenser tubes
Refrigerant condensing temperature
Ambient temperature (entering air)
Air Quantity and Static Pressure Air Quantity
Conditions
1.38 MPa
241 to 345 kPa
35C
1.8 m/s (max)
46C (max)
27C dry bulb
1 goc wet bulb
External Static Pres-
sure With External
Duct Pa
Size 2 air conditioner 0.28 (minimum) 250
250
250
250
Size 3 air conditioner
Cooling effect ratio (sensible
cooling effect to net total
0.425 m
3
/s
0.708 rn
3
/s
1.06 m
3
/s
65 to 70%
Overload Conditions
38C
38C bulb-29C wet bulb
975
erant side. The tube sheets shall be of copper-nickel (90-1 0)
UNS C70600. The condenser heads shall be of valve bronze,
Specification B6 I, or nickel-aluminum--bronze, Specification
B 148, alloy 95800, heat treated at 650C for 1 h, to inhibit
de-aluminization in accordance with A WWA C504. The tubes
shall be 19-mm outside diameter, constructed of copper-nickel
(90-10) UNS C70600. The tubes shall be extruded fin type.
Drain and vent fittings and zinc anode holders shall be
nickel-copper (70-30) UNS C71500.
6.5.3 Liquid Receiver-The liquid receiver shall have an
internal volume at least 25 % greater than the volume of the
complete refrigerant charge. The receiver shall contain an
outlet shutoff valve and pressure relief device.
6.5.4 Cooling Coil-The cooling coil (evaporator) shall be
of finned-tube construction and shall be composed of copper
tubes, in accordance with Specification B75, or aluminum
tubes with copper fins. Fins shall be firmly bonded to the tube.
A drip pan and drain for collecting the condensate shall be
furnished.
6.5.5 Water-Regulating Valves-A water-regulating valve
shall be provided at the outlet to each condenser. The valve
shall be direct-acting or pilot-controlled actuated by condenser
gas pressure to modulate the flow of water required for the
condenser. The valve shall withstand seawater inlet pressures
up to 1.37 MPa. The valve shall be constructed of nonferrous
or corrosion-resisting material. The valve shall be constructed
to prevent the entry of seawater into the refrigerant system in
the event of derangement.
6.5.6 Strainer-A strainer shall protect the condenser and
water-regulating valve. The strainer shall be not less than 19
mm n.p.s. However, it shall be sized as to not restrict seawater
flow during overload conditions. The strainer shall be shipped
loose for installation in the seawater piping during air condi-
tioner installation.
6.5.7 Expansion Valve-Refrigerant flow to the cooling coil
(evaporator) shall be controlled by a thermostatic valve. The
valve shall be an adjustable superheat, externally equalized
type. The valve body shall be of cast or forged brass or bronze,
and the inlet and outlet connections shall be an integral part of
the valve body.
6.5.8 Piping--Any piping necessary for the operation of the
equipment shall be provided up to and including fittings at each
unit required for interconnection to supplementary service.
Exterior connection fittings shall be capped or plugged to
safeguard against damage before installation. The water regu-
lating valve shall be installed in the condenser water discharge
line and shall be readily accessible for adjustment and main-
tenance. Condenser water supply piping and drain piping shall
be copper-nickel alloy 706. Water pipe fittings and seawater
connections shall be 90-10 copper-nickel, valve bronze in
accordance with Specification B61 or monel. No tapered pipe
threads shall be used anywhere in the unit. Refrigerant piping
shall have readily accessible test fittings for high and low
pressure and for charging and draining refrigerant. Refrigerant
pipe fittings shall be in accordance with Specification B 16/
16M. Refrigerant piping and evaporator condensate drain
tube shall be copper in accordance with Specification B75,
alloy 12200.
F1433 - 97 (201 0)
6.5.8.1 Disposable Dehydrator-A disposable dehydrator
shall be provided in the refrigerant circuit. The dehydrator shall
be equipped with an auxiliary screen or other protective means
at the dehydrator outlet to prevent passage of the dehydrating
agent in the event of rupture of the cartridge screen 0utlet.
Dehydrator connections shall be flared.
6.5.8.2 Strainer-A fine mesh (80 to 100-mesh) strainer
shall be located upstream from the expansion device.
6.5.8.3 Moisture Indicator-A combination sight flow mois-
ture indicator shall be installed between the strainer and the
expansion valve. The moisture indicator elements shall be
replaceable without removing the body from the refrigerant
piping.
6.5.9 Cabinet-The cabinet enclosure shall be constructed
of steel or aluminum protected against corrosion. Aluminum
shall be Specification B209, alloy 5052, temper H-321!4 hard.
Steel shall be low carbon steel, Specification A569/ A569M or
equivalent. The cabinet shall incorporate framing, chassis, and
support for any component of the air conditioner. The cabinet,
framing, and chassis shall support and maintain proper align-
ment and arrangement of every component under the ship
operational conditions as specified in 7 .4. The air handling
section of the cabinet shall be constructed for front air intake
and top air discharge. The air intake shall be provided with a
protective grill. The front of the machinery compartment shall
be provided with a removable panel for servicing the equip-
ment. The back of the machinery compartment shall be
enclosed with an expanded metal screen for service 2 and
service 3 air conditioners. After fabrication, the cabinet shall be
galvanized or coated with one coat of metal primer and enamel
topcoat to protect from corrosion. Brackets or integral frame
members shall be provided for mounting and fastening the air
conditioner to a deck foundation.
6.5.9.1 Drip Pan-A condensate drip pan shall collect
condensate from the cooling coil (evaporator). The pan shall be
constructed from corrosion-resistant material. The pan shall
have depth and baftles and multiple drain outlets to prevent
overflow of the condensate and provide for draining of the
condensate under conditions as specified in 7 .4. The drip pan
outlets shall be interconnected to a common drain tube.
6.5.10 Plenum-An air discharge plenum shall be provided
when specified. The plenum shall be detachable and con-
structed to mount on top of the cabinet. The plenum shall
contain air guide vanes and louvers as required for directing the
air flow. The outlet louvers shall permit adjustable directional
air flow in both horizontal and vertical planes. Corrosion
protection of the plenum shall be identical to that for the
cabinet.
6.5.11 Insulation-Thermal insulation shall be applied as
necessary to the cabinet, piping, and components to prevent
sweating, dripping, running off, or blowing off of moisture.
Acoustical insulation shall be applied to minimize the trans-
mission of noise generated by the air conditioner to surround-
ing areas.
6.5.12 Fans-Fans shall be of the centrifugal type and be
quiet in operation. They shall be secured to shafts and shall be
supported by not less than two self-aligning bearings. Bearings
shall be replaceable permanently lubricated ball bearing type in
976
accordance with Federal Specification FF-B-171. Bearings
shall be replaceable, without removal of the blower, from the
front or sides of the unit after removal of the service panel.
6.5.13 Air Filter-Air filters shall be arranged to filter
ventilation or recirculated air before it enters the evaporator.
Filters shall be of the permanent washable type. Materials used
in the construction of the filters shall be corrosion-resisting or
aluminum. The air filters shall be arranged so they shall not
come in contact with condensate from the cooling coils.
6.5.14 Electrical Equipment-The electrical equipment
shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and NEMA ICS 1
and shall operate in a 50 oc ambient temperature. No portion
of the electrical circuit shall be grounded. The frames or
enclosures of all electrical components shall be grounded to the
frame of the air conditioning unit to eliminate hazard from
shorts or grounds within the equipment. The air conditioner
shall be provided with a motor controller for remote mounting.
Electrical equipment for Type II air conditioners shall meet the
requirements of Code of Federal Regulations, Title 46, Sub-
chapter J, Subpart 111.105.
6.5.14.1 Motors-Motors shall be constant speed, continu-
ous duty, with a maximum speed of 3600 r/min, and shall be
for the power supply specified. The temperature rise of motors
in accordance with NEMA MG 1 shall not exceed 21 oc and
they shall be provided with built-in thermal protectors installed
in accordance with NEMA MG 1. The motors shall be drip-
proof or explosion-proof enclosed. Motors shall start the
compressor with the maximum refrigerant pressure differential.
6.5.14.2 Motor Controls-Enclosure of the compressor and
fan motor controllers shall be one of the following types, as
specified.
(1) Drip-proof (45), watertight, submersible (4.5 m).
(2) Explosion-proof.
(3) Splash-proof.
For hermetic units, overload relays shall be in addition to, and
coordinated with, thermal protectors built into the motor. Fans
shall be protected with an overload relay or built-in thermal
protector. The compressor shall not start or run unless the fan
is operating and the compressor shall stop if the fan motor
circuit is interrupted. A time delay circuit shall be provided to
prevent restarting of the compressor manually or automatically
within 5 min of having been stopped for any reason. Delay
shall not preclude initial starting of the air conditioner.
6.5.14.3 Controls-A selector switch shall permit operation
of the fan only, or of the fan and refrigerating equipment. High
pressure and low pressure safety switches and a temperature
control shall be provided. The selector switch shall be of a
three-position type with an off position to secure both the fan
and refrigerating equipment. The temperature control shall
provide for automatic compressor control. It shall provide for
manual adjustment and operate within a temperature range of
18 to 29 C, with a plus or minus 3 oc tolerance. The selector
switch shall be readily accessible. The temperature control
shall be located within the machinery compartment. The unit
shall have separate pressure switches properly set to stop the
compressor when the refrigerant discharge pressure rises too
high, or suction pressure becomes too low. The pressure
controls shall be individual units of the lock open, manual reset
F1433 - 97 (201 0)
type. Pressure and temperature controls shall be in accordance
with UL 873. A terminal block or blocks shall be provided with
the remote motor controller enclosure for the interconnection
of all electrical circuits. The internal wiring within the air
conditioner cabinet shall be completed to an enclosure contain-
ing the necessary terminal blocks, within the cabinet, for
interconnection to the motor controller enclosure. Control
switches or other electrical devices located external to the
motor controller enclosure shall not have protruding or unpro-
tected electrical connection lugs or terminals. Control switches
requiring mechanical adjustment shall not be located within the
motor controller enclosure unless provision is made so that the
necessary adjustments can be made without removing the
enclosure cover. When these control switches are located
within the air conditioner cabinet, they shall be mounted
directly or indirectly, by means of mounting brackets or
mounting plates, to the cabinet structure to minimize the effect
of vibration from the rotating machinery. They shall be located
to minimize the possibility of personnel coming in contact with
live electrical parts when servicing the controls.
7.1 Operation-Operation shall automatically maintain the
environmental conditions for which the equipment is set as
specified in Table l.
7.2 Air-Circulating Equipment-The unit shall have the
capacity for circulating air through the air conditioning unit at
not less than 0.7 m
3
/min per 290 W of cooling capacity.
7.3 Ship Inclination-The air conditioner shall operate on a
surface ship while withstanding 15 permanent, or 45 cyclic,
inclination.
7.4 Capacity-Air conditioner shall deliver not less than its
specified capacity when operating at the rating conditions as
shown in Table 1. The net capacity shall be exclusive of all
electrical energy (heat energy) required to operate the com-
pressor, fan, and other units. The air flow quantity shall be at
least that specified in Table 1.
7.5 Overload-The temperature rise for motors shall not
exceed 70 C for motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
7.6 Condensation-The air conditioner shall operate with-
out dripping, running, or blow off of moisture either inside or
outside the cabinet.
8. Other Requirements
8.1 Manuals-Manuals shall be prepared in accordance
with the manufacturer's commercial practice. Photo views of
the equipment shall be included as part of the general descrip-
tion. A section shall be included containing reduced copies of
all drawings required to amplify or illustrate the text, including
diagram and assembly drawings. The manual shall contain a
parts list and all data necessary to install, operate, repair, and
maintain the equipment.
9. Dimensions
9.1 Maximum dimensions of the air conditioner cabinets,
including mounting brackets and plenums, shall be as shown in
Table 2.
977
TABLE 2 Cabinets and Plenum Dimensions
m
Cabinet without plenum
Size 2 1.65 0.91 0.56
3 1.65 1.02 0.61
5 1.65 1.14 0.64
7112 1.65 1.22 0.64
Plenums
Size 2 0.255 0.91 0.56
3 0.255 1.02 0.61
5 0.255 1.14 0.64
?V2 0.255 1.22 0.64
10. Sampling
10.1 When first article inspection is specified, the first air
conditioner of each type, service, and size produced under the
contract or order shall be selected for testing.
11.1 Responsibility for Inspection-Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the contractor is
responsible for the performance of all inspection requirements
(examinations and tests) as specified in this specification.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order,
the contractor may use his own or any other facilities suitable
for the performance of the inspection requirements specified in
this specification. The purchaser reserves the right to perform
any of the inspections set forth in the specification where such
inspections are deemed necessary to assure supplies and
services conform to prescribed requirements.
11.2 Responsibility for Compliance-All items shall meet
all specification requirements. The absence of any inspection
requirements in the specification shall not relieve the contractor
of the responsibility of assuring that all products or supplies
submitted comply with all requirements of the contract. Sam-
pling inspection, as part of the manufacturing operations, is an
acceptable practice to ascertain conformance to requirements,
however this does not authorize submission of known defective
material, either indicated or actual.
12. Test Methods
12.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection require-
ments specified in this specification are classified as follows:
(1) First article inspection (see 12.2)
(2) Quality conformance inspection (see 12.3)
12.2 First Article Inspection-When specified in the con-
tract or purchase order, first article inspection shall consist of
the tests and examinations as specified in 12.4 and
12.5-12.5.4.3.
12.3 Quality Conformance Inspection-Quality confor-
mance inspection of each air conditioner shall consist of the
tests and examinations as specified in 12.4 and 12.6-12.6.2.
12.4 Visual Examination-Each sample unit shall be exam-
ined for adjustments, fits, leaks, material, finish, and general
conformance to this specification as follows:
(1) The external fittings shall be properly secured.
(2) Bolts, nuts, and screws shall be tight; equipment and
parts shall be properly fastened and secured.
0 F1433 - 97 (201 0)
(3) No parts shall be fractured, split, torn, dented, or
otherwise damaged such as to affect serviceability.
( 4) There shall be no sharp or ragged edges on the sheeting
that may be injurious to personnel.
(5) Cold lines shall be properly insulated.
(6) The limiting and mounting dimensions shall be in
accordance with drawings and Table 2.
(7) The temperature control shall be properly set and
functioning.
(8) The selector switch shall operate satisfactorily.
(9) There shall not be any dripping, running, or blowing off
of moisture.
( 1 0) The low pressure and high pressure switch shall be
functioning and properly set in accordance with the manufac-
turer's specification.
( 11) There shall be no refrigerant leakage at any brazed,
welded, or mechanical joint as measured using an electronic
halide leak detector adjusted to detect a leak of 14 g per year.
12.5 First Article Test Procedures:
12.5.1 General-Before testing, the air conditioner shall
have successfully passed the visual examination specified in
12.4. For first article tests, fresh water may be used in lieu of
seawater for cooling.
12.5.2 Inclination-The unit shall be inclined at an angle of
15 each side of the vertical in each of two vertical planes at
right angles to each other and operated at least 1 h or cycled at
45 for 1 h, under applied rating conditions as specified in
Table 1. Test information shall be monitored at 10-min inter-
vals throughout the test. The unit shall be acceptable if there is
no spillage of fluids inside or outside the cabinet, no abnormal
noise, and no loss of capacity.
12.5.3 Capacity Rating-Capacity rating tests shall be con-
ducted in accordance with the procedures and requirements
indicated in ASHRAE 37 and ARI 210. A standard rating test
shall be conducted using standard rating conditions in accor-
dance with ARI 210. An application rating test shall be
conducted using the operating conditions as shown in Table l.
12.5.4 Performance-The unit to be tested shall be given
the continuous operating tests as specified in 12.5.4.1-12.5.4.3
under the average temperature conditions as indicated with a
tolerance of 0.55 oc dry bulb, wet bulb, and condenser
water temperature. Observations and readings shall be taken at
intervals not greater than 10 min.
12.5.4.1 Overload-The unit shall be operated with 38 oc
dry bulb temperature, 30 oc wet bulb temperature unit-
ambient-air and room air entering-air-inlet, and 38 oc water to
the condenser. The test shall be continued until steady condi-
tions have been observed for not less than 4 h. The unit shall
operate normally without any interruption caused by tripping
of motor-overload devices, without damage to motors as a
result of overheating, and without injury to any other compo-
nent part from any operational cause. The temperature rise of
the compressor motor winding shall be determined at the end
of this test. The temperature rise shall be not greater than that
as specified in 6.5.14.!. The temperature rise of the windings
shall be measured and computed by the resistance method. In
addition, the air conditioner shall be tested to determine actual
capacity under overload conditions as shown in Table 1.
978
12.5.4.2 Condensation-The unit shall be operated continu-
ously for 4 h with 35 oc condenser inlet water, 27 oc dry bulb
temperature, and 24 oc wet bulb temperature unit-ambient-air
and room air entering-air-inlet. The air conditioning unit shall
perform satisfactorily during the test without dripping, running,
or blowing off of moisture either inside or outside the cabinet.
12.5.4.3 Air Delivery-The unit shall be provided with a
means of restricting the outlet air to produce the minimum
outlet resistance as specified in Table 1. The air flow quantity
shall be not less than that specified in Table 1.
12.6 Operating Tests-Each air conditioner shall be oper-
ated for a period of at least 1 h with controls set to allow
continuous compressor operation as shown in Table 1. During
this test, inlet air temperature to the evaporator shall be not less
than 24 oc dry bulb. At the conclusion of this operation test, the
entire refrigerant circuit connections under refrigerant pressure
shall be tested to determine leakage. In the event of leakage,
the leaks shall be repaired and the operating test shall be
repeated.
12.6.1 Controls-During this test it shall be verified that the
controls are adjusted and functioning properly.
12.6.2 Electrical Power-The electrical power input shall
be recorded during operating tests and compared with the input
of all other units which have been tested. If any unit requires
7 % more power than the average of all the acceptable units, it
shall be rejected.
13. Rejection and Rehearing
13.1 Test Failure-Failure of the first article air conditioner
to pass any of the tests or examinations specified in this
specification shall constitute rejection of the air conditioner
design. The resumption of tests and examinations will be
considered by the contracting activity after receipt of informa-
tion substantiating that the deficiencies found have been
corrected satisfactorily.
13.2 Acceptance Criteria-Production units failing to meet
the tests specified in 12.6-12.6.2 shall be repaired, defective
parts and components replaced, and retested until specification
requirements are met before offering the air conditioner for
acceptance.
14. Certification
14.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and the requirements have been met When
specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
results shall be furnished.
15. Product Marking
15.1 Identification plates shall be made of brass, aluminum,
or steel. Information plates shall be made of
laminated aluminum, or corrosion-resisting steel. The
shall be located in the front of the rnachin
ery compartment. Identification plates shall be secured to
equipment with electrolytically compatible fasteners and shall
contain the information:
(1) Name of equipment: Air conditioner,
F1433- 97 (2010)
(2) Manufacturer's name and address,
(3) Manufacturer's model, type, capacity,
(4) Manufacturer's serial number,
(5) Date of manufacture,
(6) Contract or purchase order number, and
(7) Specification number and appropriate type, service,
class, size (cooling capacity), and power supply.
15.2 A warning plate shall be mounted on the motor
controller enclosure with the following engraving in red letters:
"WARNING: DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE"
15.3 In addition to the identification plate, equipment for
explosion-proof applications shall have a warning plate. The
warning plate shall be located on the front of the cabinet.
Lettering shall be readily legible, reading as follows:
"Caution: This Equipment is for Explosion-Proof Application.
Disconnect Power Supply Before Opening Electrical Box
Covers. Do Not Energize Unless the Equipment is Fully
Assembled and All Electrical Enclosures are Properly
Closed."
16. Packaging and Package Marking
16.1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accordance
with Practice D3951.
16.2 For government packaging and package marking, see
Supplementary Requirements.
17. Keywords
17.1 air conditioner; air discharge plenum; compressor;
condensing unit; evaporator; liquid receiver; mechanically
refrigerated
The following supplementary requirements are applicable to Department of Defense procurements
and shall apply only when specified in the contract or order.
Sl. Referenced Documents
Sl.l ASTM Standards:
2
D3951 Standard Practice for Commercial Packaging
Sl.2 Federal Specifications:
9
TT-P-664 Primer Coating, Alkyd, Corrosion-Inhibiting,
Lead and Chromate Free, VOC Compliant
PPP-F-320 Fiberboard: Corrugated and Solid Sheet Stock
(Container Grade) and Cut Shapes
Sl.3 Military Specijications:
9
MIL-P-116 Preservation, Methods of
MIL-L-19140 Lumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treated
Sl.4 Military Standards:
9
MIL-STD-1186 Cushioning, Anchoring, Bracing, Blocking
and Waterproofing; With Appropriate Test Methods
MIL-STD-2073-1 DoD Material Procedures for Develop-
ment and Applications of Packaging Requirements
S2. Ordering Information
S2.1 Orders for equipment using this supplement shall
include the following information in addition to the ordering
information from the basic specification:
S2.1.1 Fire-retardant material requirements (see S3.1.1).
S2.1.2 Preservation requirements (see S3.2).
S2.1.3 Packing (see S3.3).
S2.1.4 Required waterproofing (see S3.3.5).
S2.1.5 requirements (see S3.4).
S3.
S3.1 Fire Retardant Ke,awtreJneJvtts:
S3.l.l Treated Lumber and otherwise
specmea, all lumber and plywood laminated veneer
material used in containers and pallet construction,
979
members, blocking, bracing, and reinforcing shall be fire-
retardant treated material conforming to MIL-L-19140 as
follows:
Levels A and B
Level C
Type 11-weather resistant
Category 1-general use
Type 1-nonweather
resistant
Category 1-general use
S3.1.2 Fiberboard-Fiberboard used in the construction of
class-domestic, nonweather-resistant fiberboard, cleated fiber-
board boxes, including interior packaging forms, shall meet the
flame spread index and the specific optic density requirements
of PPP-F-320 and amendments thereto.
S3.1.3 Cushioning and Wrapping Materials-The use of
excelsior, newspaper, shredded paper (all types), and similar
hygroscopic or nonneutral materials and all types of loose fill
materials for packaging applications, such as cushioning, fill,
stuffing, and dunnage is prohibited. Materials selected for
cushioning and wrapping shall have properties (characteristics)
for resistance to fire. Cushioning or wrapping materials, as
applicable, shall be provided to prevent item and package
damage and to prevent free movement of the container
contents.
S3.2 Preservation-Preservation shall be level A or com-
mercial as specified.
S3.2.1 Level A-Each complete unit shall be unit nrr.I'Af'tArl
in accordance with Method I requirements of MIL-P-116 and
as follows: exterior unpainted ferrous metal surfaces shall be
coated with P-19 preservative in accordance with MIL-P-116.
The water cooling system shall be thoroughly drained and
blown out by the application of clean, dry compressed air. To
prevent the entrance of foreign material, all shall be
sealed with the use of metal or plastic plugs or waterproof
pressure-sensitive tape. Drive belts shall be removed,
uncoated ferrous metal surfaces of pulleys and shafts shall be
0 F1433 - 97 (201 0)
cleaned and coated with primer in accordance with TT-P-664.
When the primer is thoroughly dry, drive belts shall be
remounted in place with tension on the belts relaxed.
S3.2.2 Commercial-Commercial preservation shall be in.
accordance with Practice D395l.
S3.3 Packing-Packing shall be Level A, B, C, or commer-
cial as specified.
S3.3.1 General -Shipping containers shall contain identi-
cal quantities of identical material and shall be of minimum
weight and cube, similar construction, and of uniform size.
S3.3.2 Level A, B, and C Containers-Material preserved as
specified shall be packed in shipping containers, cleated
plywood, or nailed and locked corner boxes or covered crates,
for the level of packing specified, in accordance with MIL-
STD-2073-1, Appendix C, Table 7. Unless otherwise specified,
container selection shall be at the contractor's option.
S3.3.3 Closure-Container closure, reinforcing, or banding
shall be in accordance with the applicable container specifica-
tion or appendix thereto except that class weather resistant
fiberboard boxes shall be closed in accordance with MIL-STD-
2073-1, Method V, and reinforced with nonmetallic or tape
banding, and nonweather resistant fiberboard boxes shall be
closed in accordance with Method I using pressure-sensitive
tape.
S3.3.4 Weight-Wood, plywood, and cleated-type contain-
ers exceeding 90-kg gross weight shall be modified by the
addition of skids in accordance with MIL-STD-2073-1 and the
applicable container specification or appendix thereto.
S3.3.5 Waterproofing-Unless otherwise specified, level A
and when specified, level B, shipping containers shall be
provided with caseliners, linings, wraps, or shrouds in accor-
dance with the waterproofing requirements of MIL-STD-11 00.
S3.3.6 Commercial-Material preserved as specified shall
be packed for shipment in accordance with Practice D3951.
Shipping containers exceeding 90-kg gross weight shall be
provided with the minimum of 0.08 by 0.1-m nominal wood
skids laid flat, or a skid- or sill-type base that will support the
material and facilitate handling by mechanical handling equip-
ment during shipment.
S3.4 Marking
S3.4.1 Level A, B, and C and Commercial Marking-In
addition to any special marking required, level A, B, and C
interior packs and shipping containers shall be marked in
accordance with MIL-STD-2073-1, Appendix F, and commer-
cial interior packs and shipping containers shall be marked in
accordance with Practice D3951. In addition, bar coding shall
be applied in accordance with the marking requirements of
MIL-STD-2073-1 and the shipment marking information shall
be provided on interior packages and exterior shipping con-
tainers and shall include the following:
(1) Nomenclature,
(2) National stock number,
(3) Manufacturer's part number,
Size,
(5) Contract or order number,
(6) Contractor's name, and
(7) Destination.
S3.5 Technical Manuals-Technical manuals that accom-
pany shipment shall be packaged in a transparent waterproof
plastic bag, minimum 4 mil thick. Closure shall be by heat
sealing. The copy(s) of the manual shall be placed in the
shipping container housing the main unit. Packing lists shall
indicate which container contains the technical manual(s) and
shall state the approximate location therein. The manual shall
be readily accessible when the container is opened. Technical
manuals, when shipped in bulk quantities, shall not be indi-
vidually wrapped, but shall be packed in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable technical manual specifications.
COPYRIGHT/).
980
Last ASTM Designation: F1437- 06
Standard Practice for
Inclined Cargo Tank Ladders
This practice provided design, construction, and installation criteria for inclined ladders to be installed within cargo tanks.
Formerly under the jurisdiction of Committee F25 on Ships and Marine Technology, this practice was withdrawn in March 2010 due
to Practice F1166 for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities superseding its requirements.
1
1
Standards volume information, refer to the standard's Docurnent Surnrnary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
981
a Designation: F1455-92 (Reapproved 2011)
.. gll
7
INTERNATIONAL
1. Scope
Standard Guide for
Selection of Structural Details for Ship Construction
1
INTRODUCTION
The principal aim of this guide is to depict recommended practices related to the design of ship
structural details. The importance of structural details is clear:
1) Their layout and fabrication represent a sizable fraction of hull construction costs.
2) Details are often the source of cracks and other failures which, under certain circumstances,
could lead to serious damage to the ship hull girder.
3) The trend toward decreasing ship hull scantlings (that is, increasing average hull stresses) has the
potential of increasing the damage to details.
4) Researchers have largely neglected the analysis of structural details at least in part because the
configuration and purpose of these details vary greatly and are not commonly described or discussed
in the literature.
Due to lack of analytical and experimental effort devoted to structural details, their determination
has been left up to draftsmen and designers, with very little engineering input.
In two comprehensive reviews
2
3
of the performance of structural details, 86 ships were surveyed.
These included naval and commercial ship types. The commercial ships included both U.S. and
foreign built. The vessels ranged from 428 to 847 feet in length, from 18,000 to 90,000 tons in
displacement, and from five to twenty-six years in age. The details obtained were grouped into 12
typical families. Knife Edge Crossings (Family No. 6) and Structural Deck Cutout Details (Family No.
9) are shown but not covered in detail in this guide. The remaining ten detail families were further
categorized into 53 groups comprising a total of 611 detail configurations. A number of these
configurations are very similar to others in detail geometry and such duplicates have been excluded
from this guide. A number of others were eliminated because of relatively infrequent observed use. As
a result, a total of 414 details are included herein. However, all 611 details can be found in "Structural
Details,"
4
if desired.
In total, 607,584 details were observed with a total of 6,856 failures. Failures were attributed to one
or a combination of five categories: design, fabrication, welding, maintenance, and operation (see 4.1
through 4.1.5). This extensive, well documented research, together with engineering judgement,
provides the principal support for this guide.
1.1 This guide provides a recommended list of selected ship
structure details for use in ship construction.
1.2 Structural details which have failed in service and are
not recommended for use in ship construction are included as
well.
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships and
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.01 on
Structures.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2011. Published November 2011. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as F1455- 92(2007).
DOl: 10.1520/Fl455-92R ll.
2
Jordan, C. R., and Cochran, C. S., "In-service Performance of Structural
Details," SSC-272, Ship Structure Committee Report, March 1977, available
through the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161.
3
Jordan, C. R., and L. T., "Further Survey of In-service Performance of
Structural Details," Ship Structure Committee May 1979, avail-
able through the National Technical Information Service, VA 22161.
1.3 This guide is intended to convey the lessons learned on
different configurations of ship structure details, not the dimen-
sions, thickness, or construction methods which would result
from structural calculations.
4
2.
2.1.1 Terms:
4
Jordan, C. R., and Krumpen, P., Jr., "Structural Details," American Welding
Society Welding Journal, Vol 63, No. 1, January 1984.
982
F1455- 92 (2011)
2.1.2 beam bracket-a bracket at the end of framing or
stiffening members that is used for increased strength, conti-
nuity and end constraint.
2.1.2.1 Discussion-see l.
2.1.3 clearance cut-outs-a hole or opening in a pierced
member to allow passage of a piercing member.
2.1.3.1 Discussion-see 2.
2.1.4 gunwale connection-the connection of the sheer
strake to the stringer strake of the uppermost deck of the hull.
2.1.5 knife edge crossing-the projected point intersection
of members (plate members, stiffeners or bulkheads) on
opposite sides of an intervening plate member. An undesirable
condition to be avoided.
2.1.5 .1 Discussion-Included for information only, see 3 .1.
2.1.6 miscellaneous cut-out-small holes or openings of a
variety of sizes and shapes used for access, drainage, ease of
fabrication, stress relief, and so forth.
2.1.7 non-tight collar-a fitting at the cut-outs in way of the
intersection of two continuous members that provides lateral
support for the piercing member which does not fully fill the
cut-out area of the pierced member. May be a lug.
2.1. 8 panel stijfeners-intercostal, non-load-carrying mem-
bers used to reduce the size of plate panels.
2.1.9 stanchion ends--structural fittings at the ends (top and
bottom) of a stanchion to transfer loads from the supported
member to the supporting member.
2.1.9.1 Discussion-see Fig. 8.
2.1.1 0 stijfener ends-the configuration of the end of an
unbracketed, non-continuous stiffener.
2.1.10.1 Discussion-see Fig. 9.
2.1.11 structural deck cuts-allow passage through decks
for access, tank cleaning, piping, cable, and so forth.
2.1.11.1 Discussion-Included for information only, see 3 .1.
2.1.12 tight collar-as per non-tight collar but the cut-out in
the pierced member is fully filled and is air-, oil-, or watertight
as required. Tight collars may be lapped or flush fitted.
FIG. 1 Beam Brackets (Family No.1)
983
FIG. 2 Clearance Cut-outs (Family No. 8)
FIG. 3 Gunwale Connections (Family No. 5)
+
FIG. 4 Knife Edge Crossing (Family No. 6)
f
FIG. 5 Miscellaneous Cut-outs (Family No. 7)
FIG. 6 Non-Tight Collars (Family No. 3)
2.1.13 tripping bracket-a bracket or chock that provides
lateral support to framing and stiffening members. Support
may be provided to either the web or the flange, or to both.
2.2 Symbols:
2.2.1 Symbols are as indicated in 13. The detail
identification symbol 13, 1-J-1 for example) is the same
as that assigned in the original research reports and is retained
throughout for all details for ease in referring back to the
reports if desired.
0 F1455- 92 (2011)
FIG. 7 Panel Stiffeners (Family No. 12)
FIG. 8 Stanchion Ends (Family No. 1 0)
FIG. 9 Stiffener Ends (Family No. 11)
FIG. 10 Structural Deck Cuts (Family No. 9)
y
FIG. 11 Tight Collars (Family No. 4)
3. Summary of Guide
3.1 In this guide, details are shown for the ten families of
structural details identified above and as shown in Fig. 1-3,
5-9, 11 and 12. Knife Edge Crossings, Fig. 4, are not discussed
further in this guide since none were observed in the research
and fortunately so. This detail represents very undesirable
structural conditions and is to be avoided. Structural Deck
Cuts, Fig. 1 0, are not discussed in this guide since this detail
must be considered in relation to the size of the opening and its
proximity to primary structures.
3.2 Evaluation of details shown in 14-23 is based on
in-service experience as described in "Design Guide for
984
FIG. 12 Tripping Brackets (Family No. 2)
Structural Details".
5
Data for over 400 details is summarized
and rated in the figures by observed relative successful
performance. Each of the ten families of details include
configurations with no signs of failures. The details without
failures within each family group are shown in descending
order of numbers observed. Those details with failures are
shown in ascending order of failures (percentage are indicated
for each). Thus the first detail shown in each family group has
the best observed service performance and is most highly
recommended while the last has the highest failure rate and
therefore least desirable.
3.3 These details, rated as indicated above, provide guid-
ance in the selection of structural detail configurations in future
design and repair of such details.
4. Failure Causes
4.1 Failures in the details shown in 14-23 were
attributed to either one or a combination of five categories:
design, fabrication, welding, maintenance, and operation.
4.1.1 Design:
4.1.1.1 Design failures generally resulted from the omission
of engineering principles and resulted in a buckled plate or
flange; the formation of a crack in a plate, flange or web; or the
rupture of the bulkhead, deck or shell. Each of the families,
with the exception of tight collars, had detail failures attributed
to design.
4.1.1.2 Failures directly related to design in structural de-
tails and supporting members were the result of being sized
without adequate consideration of applied forces and resulting
deflections.
4.1.1.3 In the beam bracket configurations of family no. 1
(Fig. 14), 20% of the surveyed failures attributed to design
were caused by instability of the plate bracket edge or by
instability of the plate bracket panel. This elastic instability,
which resulted from loads that produce critical compressive or
shear stresses, or both, in unsupported panels of plating, can be
eliminated when properly considered in the design process.
4.1.1.4 The failures of beam brackets by cracking occurred
predominately where face plates had been sniped, at the
welded connections, at the ends of the brackets, at cutouts in
the brackets, and where the brackets were not properly backed
up at hatch ends. The sniping of face plates on brackets
prevents good transition of stress flow, creates hard spots and
produces fatigue cracks due to the normally cyclic stresses of
these members. Care must be taken to ensure proper transition
5
Jordan, C. R., and Krumpin, R. P., Jr., "Design Guide for Structural Details,"
SSC 331, Ship Structure Committee Report, August 1990, available through the
National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161.
F1455- 92 (2011)
d4iltafl n ~ r
h11111 I I y group
f f i y n ~
-sign location of failure by cracking
of -.ld or base material
FiG. 13 Symbols
with the addition of chocks, back-up structure, reinforcement
of hole cuts, and the elimination of notches.
4.1.1.5 To reduce the potential for lamellar tearings and
fatigue cracks in decks, bulkheads, and beams, transition
brackets should be made continuous through the plating or
supported by stiffeners rigid enough to transmit the loads.
4.1.1.6 The greater number of failures in the tripping
bracket configurations of family no. 2 15), occurred at
hatch side girders, particularly in containerships. This will be a
continuing problem unless the brackets are designed to carry
the large lateral loads due to rol1ing when containers are
stacked two to four high on the hatches. The brackets must, in
turn, be supported by properly designed backing structure to
transmit the loads to the basic ship structure.
4.1.1.7 Tripping brackets supported by panels of plating can
be potential problems depending on the plate thickness. Brack-
ets landing on thick plating in relationship to its own thickness
may either buckle in the panel of the bracket, produce fatigue
cracks along the toe of the weld, or cause lamellar tearing in
the supporting plate. Brackets landing on plating with a
thickness equal to, or less than its own thickness, may cause
either fatigue cracks to develop or buckling of an unsupported
panel of plating.
4.1.1.8 The non-tight collar configurations of family no. 3
17) experienced only a few failures. There are consider-
ations, however, that must be used by the designer to ensure the
continuation of this trend. The cutouts should be provided with
smooth well rounded radii to reduce stress risers. Where collars
are cut in high stress areas, suitable replacement material
should be provided to eliminate the overstressing of the
adjacent web plating. These considerations should reduce the
incidents of plate buckling, fatigue cracking, and stress corro-
sion observed in this family.
4.1.1.9 For detail family no. 7, miscellaneous cutouts,
20), the reasons for failure were as varied as the types of
cutouts. Potential problems can be eliminated by the designer
if, during detail design, proper consideration is given to the
following:
1) Use generous radii on all cuts.
2) Use cuts of sufficient size to provide proper welding
clearances.
3) Avoid locating holes in high tensile stress areas.
985
4) Avoid square corners and sharp notches.
5) Use adequate spacing between cuts.
6) Properly reinforce cuts in highly stressed areas.
7) Locate cuts on or as near the neutral axis as possible in
beam structures.
8) Avoid cuts at the head or heel of a stanchion.
9) Plug or reinforce structural erection cuts when located in
highly stressed areas.
4.1.1.10 The most damaging crack observed during the
survey was in the upper box girder of a containership. This
structure is part of the longitudinal strength structure of the
ship in addition to being subjected to high local stresses due to
the container loading in the upper deck. Openings in this
structure must be located, reinforced, and analyzed for second-
ary bending stresses caused by high shear loads.
4.1.1.11 The clearance cutouts of family no. 8 (Fig. 16) are
basically non-tight collars without the addition of the collar
plate. Suggestions made for non-tight collars and miscella-
neous cutouts are applicable for this family.
4.1.1.12 Well rounded corners with radii equivalent to 25 %
of the width perpendicular to the primary stress flows should be
used. Special reinforcements in the form of tougher or higher
strength steel, inserts, coamings, and combinations of the
above should be used where fatigue and high stresses are a
problem.
4.1.1.13 In general, failures in stanchion ends, family no. 10
21), were cracks which developed in or at the connection
to the attachment structure. The addition of tension brackets,
shear chocks, and the elimination of snipes would reduce the
incidents of structural failure. All stanchion end connections
should be capable of carrying the full load of the stanchion in
tension or compression. Stanchions used for container stands
or to support such structure as deckhouses on the upper deck
should be attached to the deck with long tapered chocks to
reduce stress flows from hull induced loads, and in no case
should "V" notches be designed into such connections.
4.1.1.14 The stiffener ends in family no. 11 (Fig. 22) with
webs or flanges sniped, or a combination of both, or square cut
ends sustained failures. In nearly all cases, the failures occurred
in the attached bulkhead plating, the web connection when the
flange was sniped, or the shear clip used for square cut stiffener
ends.
l-A-1
'T.fi'O'N>
F1455- 92 (2011)
FIG. 14
F1455- 92 (2011)
l-D-3 1-D-8 l-H-7
"1.10
100il <i'll
m.:
3 3 [ ? . ~ :
'
'
6.01
l-F-2 l-JC-6 1-F-S
~
~
...
-----
- ---------
FIG. 14 Performance of Beam Bracket Details (Family No.1) (continued)
Stiffeners that support bulkheads to wave
bulkheads on upper deck, or tank
be and suitable structure
transmit the end reaction of the stiffen-
987
4.1.1.16 While sniping stiffeners ensures easier fabrication,
any stiffeners subject to tank pressures or impact type
should be restrained at the ends and checked for
under load.
F1455- 92 (2011)
\.Jfl
. "'

1-K-5
170/2
AT STRUC'I'URAL u
SECTIONS
PLATES AT
RIGID STR.
AT
RIGID STR.
1-B-12
cu
1-K-9
-76
L
1-M-1
1-B-8 1-K-2 1-N-5
246/S
9572 130/21
9

1-B-14 1-H-3 1-B-2

-m;-
t

/
o.n 1.4\
1-H-1 1-H-13 1-K-8
-788/6 1335/19 472/8

/
/
+ /
1-M-7 1-M-3 1-M-5 1-H-4 1-M-2
,.1111"'

..!::!::!'\
70/13

1-H-5

.A
...
16\ Jl
1-H-15
166/27

1-M-6
- - -
160
A9Wl
-
780 470 200 1223/37
BOlLT-OP AT

lF
lP

RIGID STR.
1-P-2
1-N-4 1-N-3 1-P-3 1.-P-1
-
TfiON>
1S"5Nr -so-- 270)39
310
- - - - -
- - - - - -
..........
-
FIG. 14 Performance of Beam Bracket Details (Family No.1) (continued)
988
F1455- 92 (2011)
FIG. 14 Performance of Beam Bracket Details (Family No. 1) (continued)
4.1.1.17 Panel stiffeners, family no. 12 23) while
classified as not being direct load carrying members, should be
designed for the anticipated service load. For instance, panel
stiffeners on tank bulkheads, as with any other stiffeners
subject to pressure head loads, should be treated the same as
other local stiffening.
4.1.1.18 Panel stiffeners used as web stiffeners on deep
girders should not be expected to restrain the free flange from
buckling in the lateral direction unless they are designed as
lateral supports.
4.1.1.19 The design of panel stiffeners should be the same
as other local stiffeners with respect to cutouts, notches, and
other structural irregularities.
4.1.2 Fabrication:
4.1.2.1 Unexpected stress concentrations produced cracks
that initiated from structural cuts, details with poor alignment,
and improperly worked materials. Fabrication techniques that
ensure proper continuity of structural parts and eliminate
jagged edges and undercut welds would eliminate such fail-
ures. The failures caused by fabrication resulted from:
1) Poor cutting techniques (hand cutting or rough cutting
with no follow-up dressing).
2) Failure to edge prep cutouts and plate edges after flame
cutting.
3) Improper alignment of intercostal structures.
4) High residual stresses due to poor workmanship.
4.1.2.2 The following list should be considered during the
fabrication process as an aid to reducing subsequent failures:
1) Consult with the designer before deviating from the
design details.
2) Where hard spots, knife edge crossings, or improper
tapers occur, consult with the designer to resolve the problem.
3) Avoid misaligned structure.
4) Properly dress the edge of all cuts.
5) Eliminate notches in any structure whether primary or
secondary.
6) Only use heat for straightening when approved by design
or fabrication documents.
7) Only use cold working in areas approved by design or
989
fabrication documents and then only to the minimum extent
possible.
8) Avoid improper edge distances that must be filled with
weld.
9) Never leave erection cuts in the structure that are not on
the detail plans or approved by the designer.
10) Don't use improper or defective materials.
11) Avoid leaving weld splatters, gouges or other imperfec
tions.
4.1.3 Welding:
4.1.3.1 Cracks in structural welds developed in the heat
affected zones, in the weld metal, and in the base metal where
irregular weld configurations caused stress concentrations.
Proper design and controlled welding procedures would ensure
the quality of structural welds and reduce failures associated
with welding.
4.1.3.2 Welding was identified as a cause of failure in many
cases. Undersized welds, poor deposits or undercutting at the
weld toe in areas of poor accessibility were the most common
causes of weld failures. Other aspects of welding that are not
easily recognized by visual inspection, but influence the
formation of weld faults are:
1) Using the wrong type of electrode (this is especially true
in ship structures where different material types are mixed).
2) Using the wrong heat input (either too high or too low for
the electrode or filler metal being used).
3) Using an improper weld sequence that causes excessive
distortion.
4) Using oversized welds by design, or to make up for poor
fabrication.
5) Improper weld edge preparation on the plating or s t i ~
ener webs.
6) Improper weld cleaning before and between weld
passes.
7) Improper back gouging in full penetration welds.
4.1.3.3 The weld and inspection requirements for primary
structure is fully covered by the classification societies and the
U.S. Navy. However, the requirements for secondary structure
such as tripping stiffeners, panel stiffeners, miscellaneous
~ F1455- 92 (2011)
2 B ~ l 6
C21otd
2-A-24
16os/5l
F1455- 92 (2011)
FIG. 15 Performance of Tripping Bracket Details (Family No.2) (continued)
and reinforcements are left to the riAc'"" .. ""''
nent. Failures in these welds could lead to
'ailures. Therefore, it is during and fabrica-
ion that for proper be given full consid-
Every effort must be made to ensure that sufficient
:learances are maintained, that cutouts are sufficiently sized for
he and that aU special applications are noted
controls and weld contours. Access
nrrnro;-,pn to allow the welder to reach in corners and
weld contours, and avoid blobs,
which could become the
is
991
with buckles developing from instability and cracks from
excessive stress. owners and operators could eliminate
structural failures from such causes if they maintained protec-
tive coatings on structures subjected to the corrosive action of
the sea.
4.1.4.2 Throughout the design and fabrication process, ev-
ery effort should be made to eliminate:
1) Areas that allow standing water.
2) Areas that are inaccessible.
3) Areas with ineffective coating materials.
4) Areas with improper location of miscellaneous
5) Areas with high "residual stresses.
4.1.4.3 Specific failures were attributed to maintenance. The
rn!!rn:"'"..,. are suggested corrective measures for comt,atin}!
cause of such failures:
1) Areas used for water ballast, or subject to casual
and/or salt spray should be coated with anti-corrosive
2) Pockets and low spots should have drain holes,
and drain to ensure that water does not stand or
0 F1455- 92 (2011)
' ~
s-c-6&7 e-E-1,2&3 8-E-1&2 8-E-6 8-E-5 8-C-1,2,3,4&5
3682/75 5754 6417/29 8823/41 2990/19 26SQi2B
D 2.6' '1J4.n
... ~ t
8-D-1&2 8-o-s ,6&8
1909/49 12,357/544
w
FIG. 16 Performance of Stiffener Clearance Cutout Details (Family No.8)
decks, behind structure or tanks. At the same time, the location
of these openings should be judiciously considered to eliminate
openings in high stress areas where possible and to reinforce
those openings when they cannot be located out of those areas.
This will reduce the effects of stress corrosion that lead to
buckled plates and flanges, and the increase in stress that
causes fatigue cracks.
3) Personnel access should be provided to all areas of the
ship to afford the opportunity to conduct the necessary inspec-
tions and, where required, the preventive maintenance that will
reduce costly repairs later.
4) Areas subjected to severe corr-osion condition should be
designed and fabricated to reduce areas of potential high stress
which accelerate corrosion due to stress and fatigue.
4.1 .5 Operations:
4.1.5.1 Details in the forward shell and forecastle areas of
several ships sustained damage resultipg from driving the ship
at high speed in heavy weather. With the uncertainty of the
slamming loads produced by such conditions, extreme care
should be used in the selection, design, fabrication and
maintenance of all structural connections and details used in
the forward area of the ship.
4.1.5.2 The majority of these failures were caused by
operators trying to maintain a predetermined schedule based on
992
a set course and speed. Other more obvious operations failm
causes included cargo handling abuse, docking (dry docking
wel1 as pier side operations), and minor collisions (includin
other ships, tugs and large floating objects).
4.1.5.3 The most prominent detail failures attributed
operations were to family no. 1 beam brackets, 14 ). Of tl
beam bracket failures 67 % were attributed to operation (heav
weather). Possible fixes for the beam brackets included the
of face plates or panel stiffeners to increase panel stability,
use of heavier plating to increase the corrosion margin
increase panel stability, and the elimination of the indiscrim
nate use of lighting holes and miscellaneous cutout in are:
subject to potentially high operational loading.
4.1.5.4 Tripping brackets, detail family no. 2 15) we
the source of numerous operational failures especially in
areas of hatch side girders and bulwark brackets. These girde1
which carry high concentrated loads from containers s t o w ~
two to four high, must be provided with scantlings and trippil
brackets to ensure proper support and load transfer duri1
severe weather.
5. Keywords
5.1 fabrication details; ship construction; structural detai
~
D
I}t.s,
3-C-3
!4'i07s
ll I
it
qg
3-A-18
262
tpi.9t
.........
3-A-3
5i6i!
'W'
u
3-C-2
"'2.iT'
-92
1.1\
3-A-25
264/J
3-C-12
250/l
crln
1W1
r! I ! l
J-B-5 J-A-11 J-C-6 J-A-12 3-C-S
~ 1740(1680N) ~ N 450(160N) ~
UJt[]
3-C-9 3-A-24
(llON) :: 104
I 8
w

3-C:-15
24
FIG. 17 Performance of Non-Tight Collar Details (Family No. 3)
993
I
v
2.9\ l.lt
3-C-10 3-A-17
140/4 130/4
lWJ

IQjl
J-c-8 J-A-13
'"i2'iON>
(160N)
F1455- 92 (2011)
FIG. 18 Performance of Tight Collar Details (Family No.4)
FIG. 19 Performance of Gunwale Connection Details (Famliy No. 5)
F1455- 92
0 .. 05%
No.
(70N)
7-C-1,
7-C-3, 7-F-7
BOTTOM OF
CIRctJI..AR
STANCHIONS
f"l455- 92
10-A-10
SO(JON}
10-A-21
(40N)
'
0.2,
+
10-A-2
470/l
1o-B-B lo-B-1
310(280N) 170(SON)
10-B-10
102(30N)
lD-A-12
362/36
lo-B-13
60(20N)
Jl &, J?;'
1D-B-11 10-B-7 10-B-14 1Q-B-2
(40N) (40N) 20 146l/2(360N)
10-A-l
40/8
10-B-12
S0(10N)
10-B-9
30/30
--------------
FIG. 21 Performance of Stanchion End Details (family No. 1 0)
996
BOTTOM OF
81
H"
STANCHIONS
10-C-7 lO-C-6 lO-c-35
84/2 r 2o/2 s/1

1Q-B-l6

\ 10,
+
lD-B-25
10/l
10-B-18 10-B-17
k
1o-B-2B 10-B-22
10/2 10/2
10-C-1 10-C-5
10/2 l0/6
ftt
6
' s.o
10-B-15 10-B-21
350/2(150N) 40/2
J!k
10-B-26
14/6
10-B-24
10/6
FIG. 21 Performance of Stanchion End Details (Family No. 10) (continued)
997
F1455- 92
998
F1455- 92
FIG. 23 Performance of Panel Stiffener Details (Family No.
999
ASTM International takes no
this standard. Users of this
)
rights asserted in connection with
del'errninaticm of the validity of any such and the risk
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be
if not revised, eitl'ler re<31Jl)rovecf 01 withcfra\rvn V.'lur r.n.rnrT!Ants
and should be Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
feel have not received a fair hearing you should
shown below.
address or at 610832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
COPYRIGHT/).
1000
Designation: F1476- 07
Performance of
Piping Applications
1
Couplings for Use in
superscript epsilon (s) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification provides the performance character-
istics and qualification tests required for gasketed mechanical
couplings including grooved-type mechanical couplings for
grooved end pipe, mechanical restraint couplings for plain end
pipe and mechanical compression couplings for plain end pipe.
These couplings are for use at temperatures within the recom-
mended temperature range of their respective gaskets. Consult
manufacturer for details.
1.2 The values stated in metric units (SI) are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses (inch/pound)
are provided for information purposes.
1.3 Measuring and test equipment (M&TE) used in the
performance of the tests described herein shall be calibrated
using equipment which is traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST) or calibrated in accordance
with the requirements detailed in BS 5781 Part 1 against
standards traceable to National Standards.
1.4 As this is not a dimensional standard, nor does it contain
component dimensions, the intermixing of sub-components
such as gaskets and housings between manufacturers is not
recommended and constitutes non-conformance with this stan-
dard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.ll on
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2007. Published January 2008. Originally
DOI: 10.1520/F1476-07.
2
the ASTM website.
A47/A47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Cast-
ings
A53/ A53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
A 135 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel
and Steel Hardware
Al83 Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
A 193/ Al93M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure
Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
A 194/ A 194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
or Both
A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
1201105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
/\395/ A395M Specification for Ferri tic Ductile Iron
Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Tempera-
tures
/\536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
A563 Specitication for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
A574 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws
A 743/A 743M Specifl.cation for Castings, Iron-Chromium,
Iron-Chromium-NickeL Corrosion Resistant, for General
Application
B26/B26M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Cast-
ings
B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
B580 Specification for Anodic Oxide Coatings on Alumi-
num
B633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel
D2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Auto-
motive Applications
F837 Specification for Stainless Steel Socket Head Cap
Screws
2.2 ANSI, ANSI/ASQC, or ANSI/A WWA Standards:
3
B 36.10-Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B 36.19 -Stainless Steel Pipe
3
1001
0 F1476-07
C151/A21.51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in
Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other
C606 -Grooved and Shouldered Joints
Procedures and Tables for
550) Measurement and Calibration
BS 6104 Mechanical of Fasteners
BS 6105 (ISO 3506) Corrosion Resistant Stainless Steel
Fasteners
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 class-differentiates joint characteristics such as
flexible, restrained and unrestrained.
3.1.2 failure-any leakage or joint separation, unless other-
wise determined to be due to a pipe or fitting defect.
3.1.3 .fitting--a device used to change direction, size or
to other joining methods. This device is used with pipe or
other to create a working system. Shapes such as
elbows, tees, crosses, reducers and special are used as
needed to fulfill system design specifications.
3.1.4 flexible--characteristic of a joint wherein there is
available limited and axial pipe movement.
3.1.5 gasketed mechanical coupling (GMC)-a device used
to join pipe to pipe, pipe to fitting, or fitting to fitting wherein
an elastomeric (gasket) is used to seal the joint. Coupling may
or may not provide mechanical restraint of the pipe or fitting.
3.1.6 grade-the joint working pressure as established by
tests using representative pipe or tube and the gasketed
mechanical coupling (GMC). Test pipe or tube shall be:
NPS-Standard Weight Steel Pipe per ANSI B 36.10 and
Specification A53/ A53 M Grade B, or Specification A 1
Grade B.
AWWA-Class 53 Ductile Iron Pipe per ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51 for 3 to 16 in. For other sizes, consult manufac-
turer.
Tubing-Type K Copper Tube per Specification B88.
Other-As agreed to GMC manufacturer and purchaser.
3.1.7 grooved mechanical I)-a device
which consists of two or more housings, closure members such
as sets of bolts and nuts or pins, and a pressure-responsive
It is used to and seal grooved pipe or
4
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471, http://www.nfpa.org.
5
Available from British Standards institute (BSI), 389 Chiswick High Rd.,
London W4 4AL, U.K., http://www.bsi-global.com.
fitting, forming a JOmt. Grooves conform to ANSIJAWWA
Standard C606-87 as applicable. Groove dimensions for tub-
and other sizes and types of pipes shall be as
the manufacturer. See l.
devices are
or fittings. See
Il-Class 3 )-Device co1nsi:stirtg
sleeve, end and threaded fasteners as
cable. Tightening of the fasteners compresses the
creating a seal on the outside of the end pipe. See
3.1.9 joint-interface formed between pipe and pipe,
and fitting, or fitting and fitting where a GMC is used to seal
within a specified working pressure this interface and where
applicable, provide mechanical holding strength.
3.1.10 joint pressure rating-the working pressure for the
joint on the pipe or fitting material and thickness to be used in
the actual piping application.
3.1.11 leakage-the escape of fluid (gaseous or liquid) from
any point of the specimen.
3.1.12 penalty run-a penalty run is performed with
run specimens when the original test specimen leaks or
separates during testing as a result of any cause which is not
related to the design of the GMC being qualified.
1002
3.1.13 penalty run specimens--additional specimen(s)
which are tested in the place of the original specimen(s). These
additional specimen(s) are assembled using the same methods
along with additional GMC' s of the same type, grade, class,
FIG. Type I Typical Construction
0 F1476-07
Type 11-Ciass Typical Construction
FIG. 3 Type 11-Ciass 2 Typical Construction
and configuration; and additional or with the
same sizes, nominal wall thickness material and material
condition as the original test
3.1.14 pipe-hollow tubular to ANSI
B 36.10 and B 36.19, ANSI/AWWA Cl51/A21.51 Nominal
Dimensions, or O.D. tube sizes.
1003
placed into a controlled environment and tested to determine
the joint performs to the standards established the
3.1.19
Classification
tied into various successful
defined herein. Grades range from aPJJroxirnat:elv
to 4000 and vary GMC manufacturer.
manufacturer for grades available.
4.3 The gasketed mechanical (GMC) are
tied the characteristics:
5.
4.3.1 Class and restrained.
4.3.2 Class 2-ftexible and restrained.
4.3.3 Class 3-ftexible and unrestrained.
5.1 Orders for GMC (Gasketed Mechanical
under this shaH include the toli0'011D:2::
5.1.1 ASTM title, number and year
5.1.2 Quantity (number of mechanical cot:tphngs
5.1.3 Size and suffix 8
mm OD),
5.1.4 Type (I, H),
5.1.5 Grade (consult GMC manufacturer),
5.1.6 Class (joint characteristic),
5 .1. 7 Housing material and finish,
5.1.8 Gasket material,
5.1.9 Bolt (stud) and nut material and finish,
5.1.10 Supplementary requirements, any,
5.1.11 Other agreed to between purclltast;r
GMC manufacturer.
5.2 Optional Ordering He.auzrnne11ts:
5.2.1 Certification req1uirements,
5.2.2 Special ,...,.,. ...
6.1
6.1
of ductile iron in accordance with Sp1ecilic<:tticm
Grade 60-40-18 or 65-45-15, A536,
65-45-12 or malleable iron in accordance with Sp(eCiliC<ltlcm
A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or 35018.
6.1.1.2 Grooved mechanical
or at the purchaser's option,
shall
preparaticm and
F1476-07
FIG. 4 Type 11-Ciass 3 Typical Construction
with Specification A153/A153M, or other finish as agreed
upon between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.1.1.3 Aluminum Alloy Materials-Housings shall be con-
structed of aluminum alloy in accordance with Specification
B26/B26M, Grade 356-T6 or A 356-T6.
6.1.1.4 Finish for aluminum alloy housings shall be bare,
anodized in accordance with Specification or as other-
wise agreed between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.1.1.5 Iron-chromium-nickel, corrosion resistant material:
Housings shall be constructed of iron-chromium-nickel alloy in
accordance with Specification A743/A743M, Grade CF-8 or
Grade CF-8M.
6.1.1.6 Finish for iron-chromium-nickel shall be bare or
otherwise agreed between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Coupling-Gaskets shall be of
materials suitable for the intended service. Elastomers shall
comply with Classification System D2000.
6.1.3 Grooved Mechanical Coupling-Bolting:
6.1.3.1 Carbon Steel Material-Bolts shall be in accordance
with Specification A 183, Grade 2, Oval Neck. Nuts shall be in
accordance with Specification A 194/ A 194M, Grade 2. Finish
shall be black or at the purchaser's option, zinc electroplated to
Specification B633.
6.1.3.2 Corrosion Resistant Material-Bolts shall be in
accordance with Specification A 193/ A J 93M, Grade B8, Class
2 (AISI Type 304) or Specification A193/A 193M, Grade B8M,
Class 2 (AISI Type 316). Nuts shall be in accordance with
Specification A194/A194M Grade 8.
6.2 Type If-Plain End Mechanical Coupling:
6.2.1 Plain End Mechanical Coupling Housings or Center
Sleeves:
6.2.1.1 Cast Ferrous Materials-Cast housings or center
sleeves shall be constructed of ductile iron in accordance with
Specification A395/A395M Grade 60-40-18 or 65-45-15,
Specification A536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron in
accordance with Specification A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or
35018.
6.2.1.2 Steel Materials-End rings and sleeves made from
carbon or stainless steel shall be made from material with a
minimum yield strength of 172 MPa (25,000 PSI).
6.2.1.3 Plain end mechanical couplings shall be coated with
the manufacturer's standard preparation and paint or other
finish as agreed upon between the purchaser and manufacturer.
Finish for iron chromium-nickel parts shall be bare or other-
wise agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.2.2 Plain End Mechanical Coupling-Gaskets shall be of
materials suitable for the intended service (consult manufac-
turer for recommendation). Elastomer shall comply with Clas-
sification System or BS 2494.
1004
6.2.3 Plain End Mechanical Coupling-Bolting:
6.2.3.1 Carbon Steel Material-Bolts shall be in accordance
with Specification AJ 83, Grade 2, Oval Neck or Specification
A325-Type 2 Heavy Hex; Cap screws shall be in accordance
with Specification or BS 61 04; Female threaded parts,
other than nuts, shall be in accordance with Specification
A183, Grade 2; Nuts, if required, shall conform to Specifica-
tion A 183, Grade 2 or Specification A563-Grade C
3
or DH
3
,
or as otherwise agreed by purchaser and manufacturer. Finish
shall be zinc electroplated to Specification B633 or BS 1706.
6.2.3.2 Corrosion Resistant Material-Bolts or threaded
female parts other than nuts shall be in accordance with
Specification A193/A193M, Grade B8, Class 2 (AISI Type
304) or Grade B8M, Class 2 (AISI Type 316); Cap screws shall
be in accordance with orBS 6105; Nuts, if required, shall
be in accordance with Specification A 194/ A 194M, Grade 8 or
as agreed upon by purchaser and manufacturer.
F1476 -07
6.3 Other Materials-Where other materials are required,
the material and mechanical properties of the product shaH be
as agreed upon by the GMC manufacturer and the purchaser.
6.4 Material Quality:
6.4.1 The material shall be of such quality and purity that
the finished product shall have the properties and characteris ..
tics to ,meet the performance requirements of this standard.
practicable without jeopardizing the intended use. The term
"recovered materials" means: "Materials which have been
collected or recovered from solid waste and reprocessed to
become a source of raw material, as opposed to virgin raw
materials." Used or rebuilt products shall not be used.
7.1 Testing Requirements:
7 .1.1 GMC shall be subjected to the tests described in the
Annex for the purpose of qualifying the GMC design.
7.1.2 These tests shall be repeated when changes are made
in the design, material, or manufacturing process that degrade
the performance of the GMC. Degradation determination is to
be made by the manufacturer or at agreement between the
manufacturer and purchaser.
7.2 Qualification Requirements:
7.2.1 GMC shall be qualified using specimens of the same
type, grade and class. Each type, grade, and class shall be
tested in order to qualify the design. Qualification of the GMC
requires successful completion of required testing. Each GMC
design is only qualified for use on the pipe or fitting material
and wall thickness on which it was tested.
7.2.2 All GMC's tested shall be comprised of an equal
number of specimens from the smallest, most intermediate
size, and largest sizes within the size range of the GMC being
qualified.
7 .2.3 Through reasonable interpolations between the GMC
sizes tested, other sizes of GMC' s within the same type, grade
and class will be considered qualified if the specimens accord-
ing to pass the testing requirements. Extrapolation shall
not be used for qualification purposes.
7.3 Qualification Test Report:
7.3.1 Upon completion of testing, a qualification test report
shall be written and maintained on file during the life cycle of
the design. A copy of this report shall be made available for
inspection at the manufacturer's facility.
7.3.2 Any failure during qualification testing shall be ana-
lyzed and the failure analysis and corrective action shall be
included in the qualification test report.
7.3.3 A retest as specified in Section JJ (number of tests and
retests) may be allowed when failure to the original joint
occurs during qualification testing. When retesting is permit-
ted, the failure analysis and corrective action shall be included
in the qualification test report specified in 7.3.1.
7.4 Test Equipment and Inspection Facilities:
7.4.1 Test equipment and inspection facilities shall be of
sufficient accuracy and quality to permit performance of
required inspections and tests.
1005
7.4.2 Calibration System Requirements-The testing and
inspection facilities shall maintain a calibration system for
Measuring and Test Equipment (M&TE) in accordance with
ANSI Z 540.1 with traceability to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST), or shall maintain a calibra-
tion system in accordance with the requirements detailed in BS
5781 Part 1 against standards traceable to National Standards.
7.5 Test Conditions:
7.5.1 Test pressures as specified within each test shall be
used.
7.5.2 Fluid used in the testing of GMC shall be water or air,
as specified.
7.5.3 Unless otherwise specified herein, GMC shall be
tested within the temperature range stated by the type of test
being performed.
NoTE 1-When no temperature is specified within a test, the test shall
be conducted at ambient conditions.
7.6 Performance Requirements:
7.6.1 Pass criteria for each test shall require meeting or
exceeding the performance requirements specified in each test.
8. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
8.1 GMC Dimensions:
8.1.1 Type I GMC dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer and shall provide the degree of axial and angular
deflection (as applicable) specified by the manufacturer when
used on pipe grooved in accordance with ANSI/ A WWA
C606-87, as applicable, or manufacturer's recommendation(s).
8.1.2 Type II GMC dimensions shall be as specified by the
manufacturer. Type II Class 2 shall provide angular deflection
as specified by the manufacturer. Type II Class 3 GMC shall
provide axial movement and angular deflection as specified by
the manufacturer.
9.1 GMC Machined Surfaces:
9 .1.1 Machined surfaces shall be free from burrs, cracks,
laps, and seams which would affect the suitability for the
intended service.
9.1.2 Machined surface finishes shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.
9.2 Unmachined Surfaces:
9.2.1 Unmachined surfaces, such as forging or casting
surfaces, shall be free from scale, blisters, fins, folds, seams,
laps, segregations and cracks which would affect suitability for
the intended service.
10. Sampling
10.1 In-process Inspection Sampling of GMC Products:
10.1.1 Inspection samples of GMC being manufactured or
processed shall be selected in accordance with ANSI/ ASQC
Z 1.4. Level of inspection and acceptable quality level (AQL)
shall be in accordance with the GMC manufacturer's quality
assurance procedures. Other inspection or sampling plans may
be used upon mutual agreement between the manufacturer and
the purchaser.
10.2 Lot Acceptance:
F1476-07
10.2.1 Lot acceptance shall be based upon meeting the
sampling and pass/fail requirements of ANSI/ ASQC Z 1.4.
Other inspection or sampling plans may be used upon mutual
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
H. Number of Tests and Retest, for Qualification Testing
11.1 Number of Test Specimens:
11.1.1 Each test shall be performed on specimens as de-
noted in Table AL 1.
11.2 Replacement of Test Specimens:
1.2.1 When untested specimens are rejected as a result of
inferior workmanship or materials, or assembly, the specimens
shall be dispositioned in accordance with the manufacturer's
quality assurance procedures.
11.2.1.1 New test specimens of the same type, grade, and
class, and pipe or fittings of the same O.D. size and wall
thickness shall be prepared in accordance with Section 12.
11.3 Penalty Runs:
11.3.1 In the event of not passing a test, the manufacturer
shall proceed with one of the following options:
11.3.1.1 If the leak or separation is determined to be design
related, the manufacturer shall redesign the GMC and start all
tests from the beginning.
11.3 .1.2 If the leak or separation is determined to be
unrelated to the design, the test specimen shall be rerun. A
replacement test specimen shall be prepared in accordance with
the requirement specified in 11 .2.
11.3 .1.3 If the leak or separation cannot be shown to be
either design related or non-design related, the manufacturer
shall test three (3) additional penalty specimens. The require-
ments specified in 11.3.2 shall apply.
11.3.2 Penalty run specimens shall be prepared when GMC
has failed any of the tests specified in the Annex.
11.3.2.1 The GMC's used for penalty run(s) shall be of the
same type, grade, and class as the failed GMC being replaced.
11.3.2.2 The pipe or fitting used in penalty runs shall be of
the same material, O.D., and wall thicknesses as the pipe or
fitting being replaced.
11.3.2.3 Preparation of the penalty run specimens shall be in
11.3.2.4 Penalty run specimens shall be identified in accor-
dance with 12.3 and 11.3.2.5.
11.3.2.5 In addition to the part number and test specimen
number, a designator shall be placed after the test specimen
number which allows the specimen to be identified as a penalty
run specimen. The method used to identify penalty run
specimens shall be at the manufacturer's option.
12.1 Specimen Preparation. and Installation:
12.1.1 Specimen preparation and installation on appropriate
testing apparatus shall be in accordance with the manufactur-
er's recommended procedures.
12.2 Assembly of Specimens:
12.2.1 GMC qualified under the requirements of this speci-
fication shall be tested and qualified as a completed assembly;
that is,
12.2.2 The intermixing of sub-components of the same type,
grade, and class, but of different brands or trade name,
constitutes non-compliance with this standard.
12.2.3 Test specimens used in testing shall be assembled
using a GMC of a single type, grade and class.
12.2.4 The wall thickness and O.D. size of the pipe or fitting
shall be as specified for the GMC joint being qualified.
12.3 Identification of Test Specimens:
12.3.1 Each test specimen shall be identified with a
number to provide traceability back to the test records.
12.3.2 Identification of test specimens shall be permanent.
In those cases where size or design does not permit permanent
markings, tagging or bagging may be used.
12.3.2.1 When, as a result of testing, a test is
sectioned into two or more pieces, each piece shall be
marked with the original unique identification number.
12.4 Test may be of following
of the qualification test report by the GMC manufacturer.
13. Test Methods
13.1 Standard Qualification Tests for GMC shall be as
specified in the Annex. The following tests described herein are
required for GMC qualification as applicable to the type, grade
and class.
Name of Test
Performance Tests for GMC
Vacuum Test
Flexibility Test
Rigidity Test
Bending Moment Proof Test
Bending Moment Ultimate Test
13.2 Certification of Test Results:
Annex
Annex A1
Annex A2
Annex A3
Annex A4
Annex A5
Annex A6
Annex A?
Annex A8
Annex A9
Annex AIO
13.2.1 When specified in the purchase order or the contract,
the purchaser shal1 be furnished certification that samples
representing the GMC have been tested as directed in this
specification and the requirements have been met. When
specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the
results shall be available for inspection at the manufacturer's
facility.
13.3 In-Process Material Tests-In-Process Material Tests
shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's standard
in-process test procedures.
14. Inspection
14.1 Terms ofinspection:
14.1.1 Inspection of GMC shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's standard inspection procedure or as
upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer or
as part of the contract
14.2 Raw Material msvec:uon:
14.2.1 Raw material shall be for compliance witl'
its material A certificate compliance or mill
certificate shaH be obtained from the material as
1006
F1476-07
14.3 Quality Conformance Inspection:
14.3.1 GMC samples shall be visually and dimensionally
examined to verify compliance with the manufacturer's appro-
priate drawu12:s.
14.4 Process Control Inspection:
14.4.1 GMC shall be throughout the entire manu-
facturing and processing cycle. Methods of inspection shall be
in with manufacturer's quality assurance proce-
dures.
14.5
14.5.1 records shall be maintained the manu-
of time on file shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's assurance on>cedmres.
15. Certification
15.1 (see 13.2).
15.2 Certification of Material.
15.2.1 A certificate of compliance shall be obtained from
the material supplier, when applicable. This certificate shall
state that applicable requirements for the raw material have
been met. As a minimum, the material specification shall
specify the chemical and mechanical requirements of the
material, as applicable.
16. Product Marking
16.1 Product Marking:
16.1.1 Each GMC shall be marked with the manufacturer's
name or trademark, size, and markings traceable to the type,
grade and class. When shape or size does not permit inclusion
of all required markings, the information may be omitted in the
reverse order presented.
16.2 Additional Markings:
16.2.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
additional markings other than those specified shall be
provided purchaser and have upon such
issuance of the contract or purchase order.
17. Packaging
17.1 The GMC shall be boxed, crated, and other-
wise protected shipment and storage in accordance
manufacturer's standard practice. Care shall be taken to
protect the GMC from distortion and other damage
shipment and storage. GMC' s may be shipped assembled;
bolts and gaskets may be packaged separately in suitable
containers to withstand handling and storage.
18. Keywords
18.1 coupling; flexible; gasketed; grooved; plain end;
GASKETED MECHANICAL COUPLINGS FOR USE IN PIPING APPLICATIONS
VAL SHIPBOARD USE)
The following supplementary requirements established for naval shipboard application shall
when specified in the contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between the standard and this
supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence for equipment acquired this
supplement.
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 This supplement covers Gasketed Mechanical Cou-
plings (GMC) for use in non-critical, non-nuclear U.S. Navy
surface ship piping systems.
Sl.2 The U.S. government preferred system of measurement
is the metric (SI) system. However, since this item was
originally designed using inch-pound units of measurement, in
the event of conflict between the metric and inch-pound units,
the inch-pound units shall take precedence.
S2. Referenced Documents
S2.1 Commercial Documents: ANSIJASQC 9001, Quality
Systems-Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Develop-
ment, Production, Installation, and Servicing; ASTM Dll41
1007
Specification for Substitute Ocean Water; ASTM B 117 Stan-
dard Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; ASTM
Standard Practice for Commercial Pac:kaJgmg.
S2.2 Military Documents:
S2.2.1 Military Standards: MIL-STD-167 -1 Mechanical
brations of Shipboard Equipment (Type I Environmental
II - Internally Excited); MIL-STD-777 Piping
nents C-1, C-2, D-1, D-3, M-1, R-1, R-3, R-4
S2.2.2 Military Specifications: MIL-S-90 1 Shock Tests,
(High Impact); Shipboard Machinery, Equipment and Systems,
Requirements for
S3.
S3.1 See Section 3.
cO F1476-07
S4. Classification
S4.1 Designation--GMC designation shall consist of a
series of designations which shall be assigned and listed in the
format as presented in the main body of F 14 7 6 and represented
below is a size that might be used by the Navy (See Table S4.1)
S4.2 Equipment Designator-The gasketed mechanical
coupling shall be designated as GMC-Gasketed Mechanical
Coupling.
S4.3 Type-The type of GMC shall be specified as follows:
ASTM F1476-07, Type 2, Class 2 Plain end mechanical
coupling
S4.4 Grade--GMC grades are related to pressure ratings.
As coupling size increases, pressure rating decreases. The
typical naval installation will require a coupling design pres-
sure between vacuum and 150-200 psig. Consult system
requirements and manufacturer specifications for determining
Grade designation (see S5.2).
S4.5 Class-GMCs are classified by joint characteristics.
The Class 2 joint addressed by this addendum is: Flexible and
Restrained.
S4.6 Size- GMCs accommodate the outside diameter of
standard piping. The following nominal pipe sizes (NPS) in
inches represent shipboard piping system applications: %, 1,
1
1
14, 1 V2, 2, 2
1
/2, 3, 3
1
12, 4, 5, 6, 8. Nominal pipe size and
appropriate suffix shall be specified in the ordering information
in inches (see S5.2).
S4.7 Application-GMCs may be used, but are not limited
to the following applications:
Fresh water systems
Plumbing and sanitary systems
Sewage (CHTNCHT) systems
Tank vents
Chilled water
SS. Ordering Information
S5.1 The buyer shall provide the manufacturer with all of
the pertinent application data shown in accordance with S5.2.
If special application operating conditions exist that are not
shown in the acquisition requirements, they shall also be
described.
S5.2 Acquisition Requirements -Acquisition documents
should specify the following:
S5.2.1 Title, number and date of this specification,
S5.2.2 Quantity and designation of GMC (see S4.1),
S5.2.3 Type (see S4.3),
S5.2.4 Grade: Consult manufacturer for proper identification
of required Grade (see S4.4),
S5.2.5 Class: Flexible and Restrained (see S4.5),
S5.2.6 Size (see S4.6),
S5.2.7 Housing material and finish,
TABLE S4.1 Example: F1476S1-GMC-II-150 PSI-2-6 NPS
F1476S1 GMC II 150 PSI 2 6 NPS
Specification Equipment Type Grade Class Size
designator
(see (see (see (see (see
S4.2) S4.3) S4.4) S4.5) S4.6)
1008
S5.2.8 Gasket material and shelf life,
S5.2.9 Bolt (stud) and nut material and finish (see S6.3),
S5 .2.1 0 System fluid (operating media), system pressure and
system temperature,
S5.2.ll Supplementary requirements, if any,
S5.2.12 When qualification testing is required,
S5 .2.13 Final disposition of qualification test samples,
S5.2.14 National Stock Number (NSN) if available,
S5.2.15 Unique product marking requirements,
S5.2.16 Unique packaging requirements.
S6. Materials and Manufacture
Materials used in the construction of GMCs shall be com-
patible with the intended service piping, operating media and
the rigors of the marine environment.
S6.1 Material exclusions-All GMCs under this specifica-
tion shall be certified to be free of functional mercury. Asbestos
and cadmium plating are not permitted. Materials used in the
manufacture of GMCs shall have no adverse effect on the
health of personnel when used for its intended purpose
including handling, installation use and removal. The materials
shall not cause any environmental problems during waste
disposaL
S6.2 Housing Material and Finish-Housing material shall
be corrosion resistant (see Section 6). Finishes, paint or coating
systems shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and the
manufacturer. Housing material and finish shall be specified in
the ordering information (see S5.2.7).
S6.3 Gasket Material-Gasket material shall be suitable for
the intended service. Gasket material sha11 be specified in the
ordering information (see S5.2.8).
S6.3.1 Gasket material shelf life Shelf life is a limiting
consideration for many gasket materials. Gasket shelf life shall
be specified in the ordering information (see S5.2.8).
S6.4 Bolt (Stud) and Nut Material and Finish-Bolt (stud)
and nut material shall be corrosion resistant. Fasteners shall be
of a type, strength and grade suitable for the intended service.
Bolt (stud) and nut material and finish shall be specified in the
ordering information (see S5.2.9).
S6.5 Pipe Sealing Compounds-GMCs shall be installed
directly on piping without the necessity of primers, adhesives
or sealing compounds.
S6.6 Thread Compounds-Where required, the manufac-
turer shall recommend thread lubricants, sealants, and locking
compounds.
S6.7 Recovered Materials-Unless otherwise specified
herein, all equipment, material and articles incorporated in the
products covered by this specification shall be new and shall be
fabricated using materials produced from recovered materials
to the maximum extent practicable without jeopardizing in-
tended use. The term "recovered materials" means materials
that have been collected or recovered from solid waste and
reprocessed to become a source of raw materials, as opposed to
virgin raw materials. None of the above shall be interpreted to
mean that the use of used or rebuilt products is allowed under
this specification unless specified.
<0 F1476- 07
S7. Physical Properties
S7.1 Design and Construction -GMCs shall be constructed
in accordance with the classes and types described in Section
3.
S7.1.1 Strip or Band Inserts-For Type II, Class 2 GMCs, a
strip or band insert made of a material compatible with the
intended fluid, is required for vacuum service, applications
where external pressure exists or installation where excessive
gap space exists between pipes being coupled. Strip or band
inserts shall be specified in the ordering information (see
S5.2.11). Strip or Band type inserts must be a minimum of 10%
wider than the maximum allowable gap between the pipes as
stated in the manufacturer's specifications.
S7 .2 Temperature -GMCs shall not be used in applications
beiow -20C (4F) nor above lOOoc (2l2F).
S7 .3 Working Pressure-Maximum working pressure for
GMCs shall be 16 Bar (232 lb/in.
2
) at 100C (212F).
S7 .4 Service Life-GMCs shall be designed for a minimum
service life of 15 years. GMCs shall be reusable without
replacing gasket material with each removal and reinstallation.
S7 .5 Interchangeability -Parts, components and attach-
ments shall be interchangeable with parts and components of
the same types and classes produced by the same manufacturer.
S8. Performance
S8.1 Salt Spray-GMCs shall withstand exposure to a salt
spray marine environment when tested as specified in S12.10.
S8.2 Shock-GMCs shall show no signs of damage when
exposed to grade A, class I, Type A shock in accordance with
MIL-S-901 as specified in S12;11.
S8.3 Vibration-GMCs shall show no signs of damage when
exposed to type I vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-
167 -1 as specified in S 12.12.
S9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
S9.1 See section 9.
SlO.
S 10.1 Inspection System-The testing set forth in this
specification shall become a part of the manufacturer's overall
inspection system or quality program. The manufacturer's
quality system shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/
ASQC 9001-1994, Quality Systems - Model for Quality
Assurance in Design, Development, Production, Installation,
and Servicing. Certification and registration is highly desired
but not required.
S10.2 Classification of Inspections- The inspection require-
ments specified herein are classified as fo11ows:
(a) Qualification testing
(b) Quality conformance testing
S 10.3 Qualification Testing-Qualification testing shall con-
sist of two samples of each type and size GMC subjected to the
examinations and tests in accordance with Table S I 0.1 in the
order shown. Failure of any GMC to meet the requirements of
this specification shall be cause for rejection.
S 10.4 Quality Conformance Testing-GMCs which are
produced in the same facilities, using identical materials,
manufacturing and assembly procedures shall be subjected to
1009
Examination Requirement Qualification Quality
lor Test Test Method Conformance
Test Method
Salt spray 88.9 812.10
Shock 88.10 812.11
!vibration 88.11 812.12
the quality conformance tests specified in Table S 1 0.1. GMCs
of the same type, class and size offered for delivery at one time
shall be considered a lot for purposes of inspections and tests.
Sll. Number of Tests and Retests
Sll.l The number of tests and retests, if any, shall be
specified in the acquisition requirements.
S12. Test Methods
S 12.1 Salt Spray-The complete GMC assembly shall be
subjected to a salt spray in accordance with ASTM B 117. No
appreciable corrosion or other damage shall. be evident after
exposure to the salt spray.
S12.2 Shock-GMCs shall be subjected to shock in accor-
dance with MIL-S-901, class I, grade A. The GMC shall be
tested as a complete assembly mounted on an approved
mounting fixture. The shock test shall be performed as follows:
The GMC shall be installed in a suitable test rig filled to 100
percent fluid level and pressurized to normal working pressure.
A total of nine blows shall be applied; three blows shall be
applied parallel to each of the three principal axes. After
exposure to shock, the coupling assembly shall show no
evidence of damage, leakage, or loose or missing fasteners.
S12.3 Vibration -The complete GMC assembly shall be
subjected to vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-167 -1,
type I. The GMC assembly shall be filled to the 100 percent
fluid level and pressurized to normal working pressure during
exposure to vibration. After exposure to vibration, the GMC
assembly shall show no evidence of damage, leakage, or loose
or missing fasteners.
S13. Quality Assurance Provisions
S13.1 Warranty -Special warranty requirements shall be
specified in the acquisition requirements. Otherwise, the stan-
dard commercial warranty applies.
S14. Certification
S 14.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
buyer shall be furnished certification that samples representing
each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed in this
result shall be furnished. It is recommended that all test data
remain on file for three years at the manufacturer's facility for
review by buyer upon request
S15. Product Marking
S15.1 Unique product marking or identification plate re-
quirements shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
<0 F1476- 07
S16. Packaging and Package Marking
S16.1 Unless otherwise specified, package in accordance
with the requirements of Section 17 and ASTM D3951. Unique
preservation, packaging and package requirements shall be
ANNEXES
Al. PERFORMANCE TESTS FOR GMC
Al.l Scope
Al.l.1 This section lists the tests to be used in the qualifi-
cation of GMC. In addition, statements that apply to all tests
are specified to minimize redundancy.
A 1.1.2 The values stated in acceptable metric units are to be
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses (inch/
pound) are provided for information purposes only.
Al.1.3 The tests required to qualify GMC may involve
hazardous materials, operations and equipment. This standard
does not purport to address all of the safety problems associ-
ated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
and determine the applicability of regulations/limitations prior
to use.
A 1.1.4 The test procedures appear in the following order:
Procedure Section
Examination of Specimen Annex A2
Pneumatic Proof Test Annex A3
Vacuum Test Annex A4
Hydrostatic Proof Test Annex A5
Flexibility Test Annex A6
Hydrostatic Burst Test Annex A7
Rigidity Test Annex A8
Bending Moment Proof Test Annex A9
Bending Moment Ultimate Test Annex A 1 0
Al.1.5 The sections listed below are from the main body
of this standard and apply to the test specimens used in the
performance of the tests listed in A 1.1.4.
Title
Scope
Terminology
Classification
Other Requirements
Workmanship, Finish,
and Appearance
Test Methods or Analytical
Methods
Inspection
Certification
Section
i
2
3
4
6
7
9
i1
12
13
14
Al.2.1 List of All Tests Required to Qualify GMC
additional tests customer)-A 1.1.4 provides a
listing of all standard tests specified. The requirements for each
standard test shall be as specified in Annex A2 through Annex
AlO.
Al.2.2 General Information-All of the general informa-
tion which applies to the tests described shall be as specified in
Al.3.
Al.3 General Testing Requirements:
Al.3.1 Table A 1.1 provides information on the tests that
shall be performed and the number of specimens for each test.
Al.3.2 Ambient temperature tests shall be performed at 24
5C (75 10F).
Al.3.3 Tests may be performed by the manufacturer or by a
test facility designated by the manufacturer. In all cases, the
testing apparatus used to test GMC shall be calibrated in
accordance with the requirements specified in 7.4.2.
Al.3.4 Pipe or shall be prepared and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
TABLE A 1.1 Testing Requirements
NoTE l-As far as practical, specimens may be used for more than one
test.
Num-
Description of Test
ber of
Applicability of Test
Speci-
mens
Section A2-Examination of All Type I & 11-Ciass 1, 2, 3
Specimens
Section A3-Pneumatic 5 Type I & 11-Ciass 1, 2, 3
Proof Test
Section A4-Vacuum Proof 5 Type I & 11-Ciass 1, 2, 3
Test
Section AS-Hydrostatic 5 Type I & 11-Ciass 1, 2, 3
Proof Test
Section A6-Flexibility 5 Type I & 11-Giass 2
Proof Test and 3
Section -Hydrostatic 5 Type I & 11-Ciass 1, 2, 3
Burst Test
Section AS-Rigidity Proof 5 Type I & 11-Ciass 1
Test
Section A9-Bending 5 !-Glass 1, 2 and
Moment Proof Test II Class 1
Section A 1 a-Bending 5 1-Giass 1, 2 and
Moment Ultimate Test II Class 1
1010
0 F1476-07
A1.3.5 When pressure testing with water, test specimens
shall be purged of air prior to pressurizing.
A1.3.6 End caps, adapters, and plugs used to block off a
pipe or end shall be of design(s) designated by the
manufacturer. The end caps, adapters, and plugs shall be
constructed to preclude their failure during
A1.3.7 Failure of any test specimen which related to
.,.,,.,"' .. ,,t;,.,., or at the end cap, adapter or mr>e/ltlttlm!!
shall be recorded in the test report, but shall not be considered
a failure of the GMC pipe or fitting combination tested.
ReplatceJ:ne:nt test specimens shall be prepared in accordance
with Section 12.
A1.3.8 Failure of any test at the GMC pipe or
joint proof tested constitutes failure of the GMC
Al.3.9 GMC shall be assembled in accordance with manu-
facturer's recommended procedures.
Al.3.10 Qualification of GMC shall be based upon a
successful passing of the tests described in Annex A2 through
Annex AlO. The flexibility test (see Annex A6) does not apply
to Class 1 GMC's, the rigidity test (see Annex A8) does not
apply to Class 2 and 3 GMC' s and the bending moment proof
test (see Annex A 9) does not apply to Type II Class 2 or 3
GMC's.
Al.4.1 No statement is made about either the precision or
bias of SectionAl "Performance Tests for GMC" since this
section contains general information only.
A2. EXAMINATION OF SPECIMEN
A2.1 Scope
A2.1.1 This covers the inspection and examina-
tion of test specimens prepared in accordance with the require-
ments specified in Section 12.
A2.2.1 GMC's are comprised of couplings which are at-
tached to or onto pipes or fittings using a variety of methods.
In order to ascertain the integrity of each GMC type covered,
it becomes important to subject all types of GMC to essentially
the same tests. When the same tests are used, the assembly of
some of the test specimens may become critical to the results
of the test The usefulness of this procedure lies in
the examination of GMC test specimens to ensure that resulting
assemblies duplicate appropriate stresses for all types of GMC
qualified using the tests specified herein.
A2.3 Procedure
A2.3.1 GMC test shall be assembled in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's assembly procedures.
A2.3.2 The materials used to assemble the test specimens
shall be in accordance with Section 12. The pipe or
dimensions may vary (tolerances), as allowed by the manufac-
turer.
1011
A2.3.3 Quality and workmanship of the test specimens shall
be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
A2.3.4 End caps or adapters used to close off pipe or
ends shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer or
nated testing facility (see AL3.6).
A2.3.5 During visual examination of the test any
unusual findings in accordance with the requirements specified
in Section 14 shall be recorded.
A2.3.6 The following information shall be recorded in the
test report (or form) at the time of examination: Date exam-
ined, GMC specimen number, pipe or fitting material and
finish, measured pipe or fitting O.D. and wall thickness.
A2.4.1 Precision is based upon the accuracy of the GMC
dimensions in accordance with applicable drawings. The
or fitting used in conjunction with GMC shall be in accordance
with specification(s) recommended by the manufacturer. There
may be bias for the examination of specimen based upon the
human elements involved in the visual inspection and mea-
surement methods used.
F1476-07
A3. PNEUMATIC PROOF TESTING
A3.1 Scope
A3.1.1 This section covers pneumatic proof testing of GMC
test specimens.
A3.2.1 This test is the initial test of all GMC specimens
prepared for qualification. The test is performed by internally
pressurizing the test specimen(s) using dry air or nitrogen (N
2
).
A pressure of 0.55 MPa (80 psi) is applied. If the specimen
shows no evidence of leakage, the specimen has successfully
passed the test. This test is useful in determining if the GMC
pipe or fitting connection has been assembled correctly, if the
gasket is seated and installed correctly, and if the GMC design
performs as proposed at this pressure.
A3.3 Procedure of Test
A3.3.1 The test specimen shall be placed in an appropriate
chamber and secured in place in accordance with the manu-
facturer's recommended procedures. Classes 1 and 2 shall not
be longitudinally restrained. Class 3 shall be longitudinally
restrained.
A3.3.2 The chamber shall be equipped with calibrated
pressure gauges (see AI.3.3) to permit visual readings of the
actual internal pressure being applied.
A3.3.3 The test shall be performed by one of the following
methods.
Method 1
The test joint shall be completely submerged in water (H
2
0)
prior to beginning the test. Uppermost portion of GMC shall be
no more than one foot below the surface of the water.
Method 2
Where submersion under water is impractical, leak detection
using a soap type leak detecting fluid may be substituted.
A3.3.4 The pneumatic proof test shall be performed at
ambient (see A 1.3.2) temperature.
A3.3.5 Nitrogen (N
2
) or dry air shall be used to internally
pressurize the test specimens to 0.55 MPa 0.03 MPa (80 psi
[4.3 psi]). A stabilization period shall be allowed to remove
surface bubbles. The test period following stabilization shall be
five minutes. There shall be no evidence of leakage during the
test period. If leakage occurs during the test period, the test
shall be discontinued and the affected specimens shall have
failed the test. The test report shall be filled out noting the
reason for discontinuing the test (see Al.3.7 and Al.3.8 for
A3.3.6 If there is no evidence of leakage during the test
period, the test specimens shall have passed the pneumatic
proof test. If specimens do not pass this test, proceed per
Section 11.
A3.4.1 The precision of this test is the calibrated accuracy
of the pressure gauges. The gauge(s) used to measure the
internal pressures applied shall be calibrated to 1 % through-
out the range shown on the gauge(s). There shall be no bias for
Annex A3. Pneumatic Proof Testing, as the allowable test
pressure tolerances of 0.03 MPa (4.3 psi) are well above the
range of accuracy required to attain accurate readings.
A4. VACUUM PROOF TEST
A4.1 Scope
A4.1.1 This section covers Vacuum Proof Test of GMC test
specimens.
A4.2.1 This test is performed by drawing an internal
vacuum in the GMC test specimen, isolating the GMC by
closing shut off valves and checking for loss of vacuum. The
vacuum is internally applied to the assembled specimen to
1012
determine if it can maintain specified vacuum. If the specimen
shows no loss of vacuum after 5 minutes, it shall pass the test.
A4.3.1 The test specimen shall be placed in an appropriate
test area and secured in place in accordance with the m n u ~
facturer' s recommended practice. Classes 1 and 2 shall not be
longitudinally restrained. Class 3 shall be longitudinally r e ~
strained.
F1476-07
A4.3.2 The test set up shall be equipped with a calibrated
vacuum gauge(s) to permit visual readings of the actual
vacuum being applied.
A4.3.3 The Vacuum Proof Test shall be performed at
ambient temperature (see A1.3.2).
A4.3.4 An internal vacuum shall be drawn on the test
specimen using a suitable vacuum pump. The test specimen
shall be drawn down to 635 mm (25 in.) of mercury [Hg]
vacuum 5% and then isolated using appropriate isolation
valves. Following a stabilization period, the vacuum of 635
mm (25 in.) Hg shall be re-established, if necessary, and
monitored for 5 min. There shall be no evidence of loss of
vacuum. If leakage (loss of vacuum) occurs during the
5-minute time test period, the specimen shall fail the test.
Proceed per Section ll .
A4.3.5 If there is no evidence of loss of vacuum during the
5-minute test period, the test specimen shall pass the vacuum
test.
A4.4.1 The precision of this test shall be the calibrated
accuracy of the vacuum gauges. The gauge(s) used to measure
the vacuum applied shall be calibrated to 1 % or better
throughout the range shown on the gauge(s). There shall be no
bias for A4 Vacuum Test, as the allowable vacuum tolerances
of 5 % are well above the range of accuracy required to attain
accurate readings.
AS. HYDROSTATIC PROOF TESTING
A5.1 Scope
A5.1.1 This section covers hydrostatic proof testing of
GMC test specimens.
A5.2.1 This test is performed by internally pressurizing the
test specimens using water. The initial pressure applied, 0.690
MPa ( 100 psi), tests the assembled specimen to determine if it
can retain fluid without wetting of the external surface or
leakage at the GMC joint. If there is no leakage, the pressure
is gradually increased to 150% of the proposed rated pressure
of the pipe or fitting GMC joint. This elevated pressure level
tests the ability of the specimens to hold fluid without wetting
of the surface, and not to leak or fail structurally. Holding time
for this pressure test shall be 10 min.
A5.2.2 If the specimen still shows no evidence of leakage
after this test, the specimens shall pass the test. This test is
useful in determining the integrity of the fitting joint to hold
fluid at an elevated pressure without any wetting of the surface
or leakage. After successful completion of this test, the test
specimens are ready for additional testing (see Table Test
Sequence).
A5.3.1 Test specimens shall be installed onto an appropriate
testing apparatus, filled with water and purged of all air.
A5.3.2 The test specimens shall be placed in a burst
chamber and secured into place in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures. Class 1 and 2 GMC
shall be tested with no longitudinal restraint provided by the
test operator. Class 3 GMC shall be longitudinally restrained.
A5.3.3 The chamber shall be equipped with calibrated
pressure gauges (see Al.3.3) to permit visual readings of actual
internal pressure being applied.
A5.3.4 The hydrostatic proof test shall be performed at
ambient temperature (see A 1.3.2).
A5.3.5 The test specimens shall be initially pressurized to
0.690 MPa (100 psi) 0.03 MPa (4.3 psi) for a total period of
5 min. There shall be no evidence of wetting of the surface or
leakage during this 5-min period. If wetting of the surface or
leakage occurs, the test shall be discontinued and the affected
specimens shall fail the test. Proceed per Section 11.
A5.3.6 If there is no evidence of leakage after the initial 5
min period, the internal pressure shall be gradually increased at
a rate not to exceed 138 MPa/min (20 000 psi/min) to 150% ::
5% of the proposed rated pressure of the pipe or fitting GMC
joint. This pressure shall be maintained for an additional period
of 10 min. There shall be no evidence of wetting of the external
surface or leakage during this 10-min period. If wetting of the
surface or leakage occurs, the test shall be discontinued and the
affected specimens shall fail the test. Proceed per Section 11.
1013
A5.3.7 If there is no evidence of wetting of the external
surface or leakage within the fitting area or joint during both
pressurized periods, the test specimens shall pass the hydro-
static proof test.
accuracy of the pressure gauges. The gauges used to measure
the pressures applied shall be calibrated to 1 % or better
throughout the range shown on the gauges. There shall be no
bias for A5 hydrostatic proof test, as the allowable tolerances
(5 %) are well above the range of accuracy required to attain
accurate readings during both pressurized periods.
F1476-07
A6. FLEXIBILITY PROOF TEST
A6.1 Scope
A6.1.1 This section covers flexibility proof testing of Types
I & II Class 2 and Type II Class 3 GMC.
A6.2.1 The significance of this test is to verify the axial pipe
and angular pipe movement available with Types I & II Class
2 and Type II Class 3 couplings.
A6.2.1.1 Type I Class 2-The test for axial movement is
performed by assembling the GMC with the pipe or fitting ends
inboard and then to extend the joint to its
furthest extended position. The test for angular movement is
performed by applying bending moment from Table A6.1
Note 2) to the joint and measuring the resultant angular
deflection.
A6.2.1.2 Type /1 Class 2-The test for angular movement is
performed by filling and pressurizing the GMC with water to
the proposed working pressure, then deflecting the joint to the
test angle. The test angle shall be the maximum deflection
angle specified by the manufacturer. No leakage shall be
allowed during or after this deflection. No permanent damage
shall occur to the GMC.
A6.2.1.3 Type ll Class 3-The test for axial movement shall
be performed by assembling the GMC in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The joint shall then be pressurized
to its proposed working pressure, while allowing the pipe to
move longitudinally to the maximum allowable movement
specified by the manufacturer. No leakage shall be allowed
during or after this movement. The test for angular movement
shall be performed by assembling the GMC at the test angle
and pressurizing to the proposed working pressure. Deflection
angles shall be as recommended oy the manufacturer.
A6.3.1 Type I Class 2-Pipe shall be grooved (roll or cut as
applicable) in accordance with ANSI C606-87 as applicable or
maufacturer's recommendation(s) and a line scribed 1 in. from
each groove away from pipe end. The GMC shall be assembled
with the pipe ends touching or as fully inboard as the GMC
permits. The distance between the two scribe lines shall be
measured and recorded. The specimen shall not be longitudi-
nally restrained. The specimen shall be filled with water and
pressurized to 0.69 MPa (100 psi) or 25% of GMC proposed
rating, whichever is larger. The new distance between the
scribe lines shall be measured and recorded. The difference
between the two scribe line measurements is the measured
axial movement. The test for angular movement consists of
applying a small bending moment per Table A6.1 (see Note 2)
to the same assembled specimen from above with no internal
pressure and measure the total deflected angle achieved. The
TABLE A6.1 Bending Moments for Flexibility (Note 2) Rigidity (Note 3) and Proof Test Pipe Schedule
NoTE l-For sizes and wall thicknesses not listed.
METHOD FOR CALCULATING TEST MOMENT
M = F (L)
F = Weight of Pipe + Weight of Water
L = (Yz) (Hanger Spacing)
EX: For 2 in. Schedule 40 steel pipe with NFPA Hanger Spacing where L = 7
1
/z ft
F = 3.653 (15) + 40.27 (15) (0.036) Where 3.653 is the pounds per foot of 2 in. Schedule 40 pipe, 40.27 is the cubic inches of water per foot
of 2 in. Schedule 40 pipe, 0.036 is the pounds per cubic inch of water, 15 is total length of pipe in feet.
F = 54.796 + 21.746 = 76.542 pounds
M = F (L); M = (76.542) (7Yz); M = 574 Ff-LBS for Rigidity and Proof Test
Moment= 2M= 1148 Ff-LBS for Ultimate Test
NoTE 2-Use 10% of Moments listed for flexibility tests.
NoTE 3-Use 25 % of Moments listed for rigidity tests.
NoTE 4-Values in table are for NFPA 13
Schedules
Nominal Size
1112 358 264 464 342
2 507 374 644 475
2% 759 560 899 663
3 1039 767 1492 893
4 1572 1159 1797 1325
5 2454 1810 2639 1946
6 3286 2424 3512 2590
8 5179 3820 6114 4509
10 8024 5918 8817 6503
12
14
16
7146 5271
10540 7774
14262 10519
17435 12859
21614 15942
1014
549 405
780 575
1200 885
1645 1213 2240 1652
2471 1823 3000 2213
3551 2619
4803 3543 5262 3881
7663 5652 8176 6030
11379 8393 11516 8494
15558 11475 15467 11408
18609 19962 14738
24299 24847 18326
~ - ~ - ~ ' - - ~ - - ' ' ~ ' ' ' '
, .... ,,,.,...,._,'"'-
0 F1476-07
angle shall be measured using an inclinometer or by measuring
the deflection and distance between the support points and
calculating the angle.
A6.3.2 Type II Class 2-Prepare the pipe in accordance with
the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The test for
movement shall be by assembling the GMC
the filling and pressurizing with water to the
pressure, and deflecting the to the test
shall be the maximum deflection angle
the manufacturer. No to the GMC or
shall be allowed during the test.
test shall be no less than lO min. The deflection
measured an inclinometer or
and distance between the support
measuring the deflection
and the
A6.3.3 Type II Class 3-The shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda-
tions. The GMC shall be assembled with at their most
in-board position. A line shall be scribed in. from the outside
of the on each The distance between the two
scribed lines shall be measured and recorded. The specimen
shall be pressurized and filled with water to its working
pressure. The restraint on the shall be to provide
10 mm (3fs in.) of total longitudinal movement for 254 mm (10
in.) and larger pipe. Smaller size shall be tested in accordance
with manufacturer's published limits. No leakages shall be
allowed during this test. Movement shall be determined by
measuring between the two scribed lines and subtracting the
original line spacing. The test for angular movement shall be
performed by assembling the GMC with the pipe in the
deflected position, and filling and pressurizing with water to
the working pressure. The deflection angles shal1 be the
maximum deflection angle specified by the manufacturer. No
leakage shall be allowed when the GMC is pressurized. The
deflection angle shall be measured using an inclinometer or
measuring the deflection and distance between the support
points and calculating the angle. Holding time at pressure for
axial and angular test shall be no less than 10 min for each test.
A6.3.4 The flexibility proof test shall be performed at
ambient temperature (see A 1.3.2).
A6.4.1 The precision of this test shall be the calibration
accuracy of the measuring equipment. The used
measure the movement shall be calibrated to 0.03 mm (0.001
in.) throughout its range. The inclinometer shall be zeroed
to each reading. The accuracy of the readings is dependent
solely on the ability to read the scales typically :: 1 o. There
may be bias for the examination of the movement based upon
the human elements involved in the visual inspection used.
A7. HYDROSTATIC BURST TEST
A7.1 Scope
A 7 .1.1 This section covers the test requirements for burst
testing.
A 7 .2.1 This test verifies the mechanical integrity of the pipe
or and GMC to withstand, without leakage or burst, a
minimum pressure equal to three times the proposed rated
pressure of the pipe or fitting and GMC, which fom1 a joint. To
successfully pass this test, the pipe or fitting and GMC shall not
leak or burst.
A 7.3 Procedure of Test
A 7. 3.1 Test specimens shall be filled with water prior to
installation onto the appropriate testing apparatus and purged
of air.
A 7.3 .2 The test shall be placed in a burst
chamber. Class 1 and 2 GMC shall not be longitudinally
restrained.
A7.3.3 The chamber shall be
pressure gauges (see AI .3.3) to
pressure
with calibrated
reatdu1gs of actual
burst test shall be
temperature (see A 1.3.2).
at
A7.3.5 Class 1 test specimens shall be subjected to a gradual
increase of pressure at a rate not to exceed 138 MPa/min to
three times the proposed rated pressure of the specimen
assembly. If leakage or burst occurs below three times the
proposed rated pressure of the specimen assembly, the test
shall be discontinued and the affected test specimens shall fail
the test for the proposed rating. The test report shall be filled
out noting the reason for discontinuing the test. See A 1.3 .4 or
AJ .3.5 for further information. If there is no evidence of
leakage or burst when three times the proposed rated pressure
of the specimen assembly is attained, the pressure shall be
gradually increased until burst occurs. The test specimens have
passed the hydrostatic burst test when three times the proposed
rated pressure of the specimen assembly has been attained.
Pressure attained at the time of burst shall be recorded in the
Qualification Test Results.
A7.3.6 For Class 2 and Class 3 GMC's, the specimen shaH
be mounted in a test fixture such that the joint is held fixed at
its maximum angular deflected position (determined from the
test in Annex A6). This test specimen shall then be subjected to
a gradual increase of pressure at a rate not to exceed 138
MPa/min (20 000 psi/min) to three times the rated
pressure of the specimen assembly. If leakage or burst occurs
before three times the proposed rated pressure of the specm1en
assembly, the test shall be discontinued and the affected test
shall fail thetest for the proposed rating. If there
1015
F1476-07
no evidence of leakage or burst when three times the proposed
rated pressure of the specimen assembly is attained, the
pressure shall be gradually increased until burst occurs. The
test specimens have passed the hydrostatic burst test when
three times the proposed rated pressure of the specimen
assembly has been attained. Pressure attained at the time of
burst shall be recorded in the Qualification Test results.
A 7.4 Precision and Bias
A 7 .4.1 The precision of this test shall be the calibrated
the pressures applied shall be calibrated to 1 % or better
throughout the range shown on the gauges. There may be bias
in this test if the pipe or fitting selected bursts below three
times its proposed rated pressure. If this occurs, the test
specimens may be replaced in accordance with A1.3.7. There
also may be bias based upon the human elements involved in
the visual inspection used.
AS. RIGIDITY PROOF TEST
A8.1 Scope
A8.1.1 This section covers rigidity proof testing of Class
GMC specimens.
A8.2.1 The significance of this test is to demonstrate the
suitability of the GMC for use when the piping system is
supported as a rigid system. The test is performed by applying
a moment to the specimen equal to the maximum moment
generated by the pipe when filled with water and supported at
the maximum allowable hanger spacing (see Table A6.1, Note
3). The GMC is to be pressurized with water to its rated
pressure during application of the bending moments. The GMC
shall pass this test if the included angle of the pipe sections
adjacent to the GMC does not change by more than angle 8
with the test moment applied at the GMC, and there is no
evidence of leakage. e shall be calculated as follows: e = 60'
(minutes) - [2' (minutes) x (nominal pipe size in inches)].
A8.3.1 The test shall be conducted with a specimen using
test pipe not less than 0.38 m (15 in.) in length. The support
points for the pipe shall be not less than 0.305 m (12 in.) from
the GMC. The test load may be applied directly to the GMC or
to the pipe adjacent to the GMC with appropriate load
adjustment. The joint shall be internally pressurized to the
proposed rated pressure (5 %) of the GMC pipe or fitting
whichever is lower. The initial included angle shall
be measured and recorded. Do not apply any bending moment
while measuring the initial angle. The bending moment listed
in Table A6.1 shall be applied (see Note 3) to the joint. The
final included angle shall then be measured and recorded. The
deflection angle shall be determined either by measuring the
movement of the GMC and calculating the angle or by direct
measurement. The test shall be conducted at ambient tempera-
ture (see Al.3.2). If there is no evidence of leakage and the
included angle has not changed more than angle 0, the GMC
shall pass the test. e shall be calculated as follows: eo = 60'
(minutes)- [2' (minutes) x (nominal pipe size in inches)]. The
deflection angle e shall be defined as the difference between the
initial and final included angles above.
accuracy of the pressure gauges and the accuracy of the reading
of the inclinometer or dial gauge. The gauges used to measure
the pressure applied shall be calibrated to 1 % or better
throughout the range used for the test. The inclinometer shall
be zeroed prior to each reading. Therefore, the accuracy of the
readings is dependent solely on the ability to read the scales,
typically 1 %. There may be bias for the visual reading of the
inclinometer or dial gauge based upon the human elements
involved in the visual reading of the meter(s).
1016
F1476-07
A9. BENDING MOMENT PROOF TEST
A9.1 Scope
A9.1.1 This section covers the bending moment proof test
for Type I Class 1 and 2 and Type II Class 1 GMC specimens.
A9.2.1 This test verifies the ability of the GMC to resist a
bending moment equal to the bending moment generated by
the pipe when filled with water, supported at one side of the
GMC by a hanger and with the next hanger broken on the
maximum allowable hanger spacing. The GMC is to be
pressurized to its proposed rated pressure :::5 %during the test.
The GMC shall have passed this test if it withstands this
moment without failing and no evidence of leakage is ob-
served.
A9.3 Procedure for Test
test pipe at least 0.38 meters (15 inches) in length. The support
points for the pipe shall be a minimum of 0.305 meters ( 12
inches) from the GMC. The test load may be applied directly
to the GMC or on the pipe adjacent to the GMC. In either case,
the applied load shall be such that the test moment acts at the
GMC. The joint shall be pressurized to the proposed rated
pressure (:::5 %) of the specimen. The moment (see Table
A6.l) shall be applied to the joint and held for not less than one
minute. The test shall be conducted at ambient temperature
(see AL3.2). If the GMC withstands this moment and shows
no e v i d ~ n e of leakage, it shall pass this test.
A9.4 Precision. and Bias
the pressure applied to the specimen and to the bending
moment apparatus, as applicable, shall be calibrated to ::: 1 %
or better throughout the range used for the test. There is no bias
for this test because the allowable tolerance of ::: 5 % is well
above the range of accuracy required to attain accurate
readings.
AlO. BENDING MOMENT ULTIMATE TEST
A10.1 Scope
AIO.l.l This section covers the bending moment ultimate
test for Type I Class 1 and 2 and Type II Class I GMC
specimens.
Al0.2.1 This test verifies the safety factors available in the
GMC when tested with the bending moment from Annex AS
and Annex A9. This test is performed by pressurizing the
specimen to its proposed rated pressure and then applying a
bending moment to cause failure. The pressure is maintained at
the proposed rated pressure throughout the test. The test is
conducted at ambient temperature (see A 1.3.2). A specimen
that withstands two times the bending moment for Annex
without failure has passed this test.
A10.3 Procedure for Test
test pipe not less than 0.38 meters (15 inches) in length. The
support points for the pipe shall be not less than 0.305 meters
(12 inches) from the GMC. The test load may be applied
1017
directly to the GMC or on the pipe adjacent to the GMC. In
either case, the applied load shall be such that the described test
moment acts at the GMC. This test shall be conducted at
ambient temperature (see A1.3.2). The joint shall be internally
pressurized to the proposed rated pressure ( ::: 5 %) of the
specimen. Increasing moments shall be applied to the GMC
while maintaining the internal pressure at the proposed rated
pressure until failure occurs. This bending moment shall be
applied at a rate not to exceed 27,116 Newton meters (20,000
Ft-Lbs) per minute. GMCs that withstand two times the test
moment from Annex A9 without evidence of leakage shall pass
the test. The moment at failure shall be recorded.
A 1 0.4.1 The precision of this test shall be the calibrated
the pressure applied to the specimen and to the bending
apparatus, as applicable, shall be calibrated to ::: 1 % or better
throughout the range used for the test. There is no bias for this
test because the allowable tolerance of :::5% is well above the
range of accuracy required to attain accurate readings.
F1476-07
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility
United States. Individual repn'nts (s1'ngle or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
COPYRIGHT/).
1018
cd!lltf Designation: F1507 - 99 (Reapproved 2011)

/!!TER!!_ATIONAE:
Surge Suppressors Shipboard Use
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification establishes performance requirements
of surge suppressors for use on shipboard ac power circuits.
1.2 Surge suppressor shall be a protective device for limit-
ing voltage transients on equipment by discharging, dissipating
internally, bypassing surge current, or a combination thereof
and which prevents continued flow of follow current to ground
and is capable of repeating these functions.
1.3 suppressors covered this specification may
consist of a circuit element or may be a hybrid device
using several suppression devices.
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the
date of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 American National Standards:
2
ANSI/IEEE Std 4 IEEE Standard Technique'> for High
Voltage Testing
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge Volt-
age in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
ANSI/IEEE C62.45 Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
ANSI/IEEE C84.1 Electrical Power Systems and
Equipment-Voltage Ratings
3
MlL-STD-1399 Section 300; Military Standard Interface
Standard for Shipboard Systems, Section 300, Electric
Power, Alternating Current
2.4 Underwriters Laboratories Standard:
4
UL 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, 2nd Edition
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.10 on
Electrical.
Current edition approved April 1, 2011. Published April 2011. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as F1507 -99(2006).
DOl: l0.1520/Fl507-99RIJ.
2
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 25 W. 43rd St.,
from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19Jll-5098, http://
4
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 2600 N.W. Lake Rd., Camas,
WA 98607-8542, http://www.ul.com.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
NoTE 1-These definitions other than specific to the standard are taken
from UL 1449, ANSI/IEEE C62.41, and MIL-STD 1399 to provide for
hannonization of tenns.
3.2 power interface-The electrical points where the surge
suppression device is electrically connected to the ac power
system.
3.3 combination wave-A surge delivered by an instrument
that has the inherent capability of applying a voltage
wave across an open circuit and delivering an current
wave into a short circuit. The exact wave that is delivered is
determined by the instantaneous impedance to which the
combination wave is applied. (Also called combination
voltage/current surge or combination VII surge.)
3.4 crest (peak) value (of a wave, surge or impulse)-The
maximum value that a wave, surge, or impulse attains.
3.5 electric power source-The electric power that is sup-
plied for testing.
3.6 electric power system ground-Ground is a plane or
surface used by the electric power system as a common
reference to establish zero potential. Usually, this surface is the
metallic hull of the ship. On a nonmetallic hull ship, a special
ground system is installed for this purpose.
3.7 follow (power) current-The current from the connected
power source that flows through a surge protective device
following the passage of discharge current.
3.8 frequency tolerance-Frequency tolerance is the maxi-
mum permitted departure from nominal frequency during
normal operation, excluding transient and cyclic frequency
variations. This includes variations such as those caused
load changes, switchboard frequency meter error, and drift.
Unless specified otherwise, frequency tolerance shall be con-
sidered to be 10 % of nominal frequency.
3.9 inrush current-The inrush current is a sudden change
in line current that occurs during startup or as a result of
change to the operating mode. Inrush current is dependent on
the type of load connected to the surge suppressor, and
.. '""'<"'" will rise to a maximum value in a few milliseconds
to rated value in several milliseconds to several
seconds.
Copyright ASTM !n<,,rnational, 100 Barr Harbor Drive. PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1019
F1507- 99 (2011)
3.10 leakage current-Line current drawn, either line-to-
line or line-to-ground, by the suppressor when operated at the
maximum continuous operating voltage.
3.11 maximum continuous operating voltage-Maximum
sinusoidal rms voltage which may be continuously applied
without degradation or deleterious effects.
3.12 measured limiting voltage-The crest (peak) value of
the voltage measured at the leads, terminals, receptacle con-
tacts and the like, intended for connection to the load(s) to be
protected, and resulting from application of a specified surge.
3.13 nominal frequency-the nominal frequency is the des-
ignated frequency in Hz.
3.14 nominal system voltage-A nominal value assigned to
designate a system of a given voltage class in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE C84.1. For the purpose of this standard, nominal
system voltages are 120, 208, 240, and 480 vac. All voltages in
this standard are root-mean-square (rms) unless stated other-
wise. All tolerances are expressed in percent of the nominal
system voltage.
3.15 one-port transient voltage surge suppressor-A TVSS
having one set of electrical connections (terminals, leads and
the like) intended only for shunt-connection to the ac power
circuit, such that load current in the ac power circuit bypasses
the TVSS.
3.16 peak overshoot voltage-Maximum voltage above the
voltage protection level (peak voltage minus suppression
voltage rating) across the suppressor output terminals during
initial response to a voltage spike.
3.17 rated rms voltage (varistor)-Maximum continuous
sinusoidal rms voltage which may be applied to a varistor.
3.18 response time (varistor)-The time between the point
at which the wave exceeds the voltage protection level (sup-
pression voltage rating) and the peak of the voltage overshoot.
For the purpose of this definition, voltage protection level is
defined with an 8/20-!ls current waveform of the peak current
amplitude as the waveform used for this response time.
3.19 secondary surge arrestor-A surge protector device
acceptable ahead of the service entrance equipment on circuits
not exceeding 1000-V rms (location category C as described in
ANSI/IEEE C62.41).
3.20 surge-A transient overvoltage superimposed on the ac
power circuit. A voltage surge is generally one in which the
superposition of the surge and normal power frequency voltage
involves peak voltage levels of twice or more the normal
voltage of the ac power system and generally lasting not more
than one-half period of the nominal system voltage waveform.
3.21 surge protective device (SPD)-A protective device
composed of any combination of linear or non-linear circuit
elements and intended for limiting surge voltages on equip-
ment by diverting or limiting surge current; it prevents contin-
ued flow of follow (power) current and is capable of repeating
these functions as specified.
3.22 temporary overvoltage (TOV)-A voltage swell from a
sudden change in voltage which goes outside the voltage
tolerance limits but does not exceed 120 % of nominal system
voltage and returns to and remains within these limits within 2
s after the initiation of the disturbance.
3.23 transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS)-A surge
protective device intended for connection electrically on the
load side of the main overcurrent protection in circuits not
exceeding 600 V. (Location Categories A and B as described in
ANSI/IEEE C62.41.)
3.24 two-port transient voltage surge suppressor-A TVSS
having one set of electrical connections (terminals, leads and
the like) intended for connection to the ac power circuit and
one or more separate sets of electrical connections (terminals,
leads, outlet receptacles, and so forth) intended for connecting
the load( s) to be protected. This device is series-connected such
that load current will flow through the transient voltage surge
suppressor.
3.25 voltage drop-Voltage differential measured from in-
put terminals to output terminals under conditions of rated load
current for two-port surge suppressors.
3.26 protection level-A suppression rating (or
in volts or kilovolts, selected by the manufacturer that
is based on the measured limiting voltage determined during
surge testing. Also referred to as the suppression voltage rating.
3.27 voltage spike-A voltage spike is a voltage change of
very short duration ( 100 !lS to V2 cycle). The standard 1.2/50-f..ls
lightning impulse, as defined by ANSI/IEEE Std 4, is the
characteristic voltage spike used for test purposes.
3.28 voltage tolerance-Voltage tolerance is the maximum
permitted departure from nominal system voltage during nor-
mal operation, excluding transient voltage variations. Voltage
tolerance includes variations such as those caused by load
changes, switchboard meter error, and drift. Unless otherwise
specified, voltage tolerance shall be considered to be :::':: 10 % of
nominal system voltage.
4. Classification
4.1 Surge suppressors covered in this specification shall be
classified by class and type.
4.2 The two classes of surge suppressors covered in this
specification are based on and reflect ANSI/IEEE C62.41
locations.
4.2.1 Class A-Surge suppressor associated with long cir-
cuit branch that being greater than 30-ft cable distance from the
distribution panel and usually installed as a series-connected
TVSS at the distribution system receptacle (wall outlet).
4.2.2 Class B-Surge suppressor for short branch circuit,
either installed at loads within 30-ft cable distance from the
circuit breaker distribution panel or within the distribution
panel.
4.3 Type designations for surge suppressors covered in this
specification are as follows:
4.3.1 Type /; Permanent Connected Type-A suppressor
designed for hard-wired or panel-mount applications. This type
surge suppressor is the only one-port-type TVSS.
4.3.2 Type II; Plug-In Type-A suppressor provided with
blades for direct connection at a receptacle and with integral
1020
cO F1507- 99 (2011)
output receptacle(s). By nature of its design, a plug-in suppres-
sor is inserted into the circuit as a series connection.
4.3.3 Type Ill; Cord-Connected Type-A suppressor that is
connected to a receptacle through a flexible cord that is
permanently attached to the suppressor device. The cord shall
be in accordance with requirements of UL 1449. Cord-
connected devices shall not have means for permanent mount-
ing.
4.3.4 Type IV; Power Director (Power Center) Type-A
suppressor unit with two-pole main circuit breaker, a master
switch for controlling all receptacle outlets, and individual
switches for controlling all outlets.
5.1 Orders for suppressors under this specification shall
include the following:
5 .1.1 This specification number;
5.1.2 Nominal system voltage-120, 208, 240, and 480 V;
5.1.3 Frequency-50, 60, and 400 Hz;
5 .1.4 Service-single-phase, three-phase delta, three-phase
wye;
5.1.5 Load current;
5.1.6 Surge suppressor--class and type;
5.1.7 Protection modes;
5.1.8 Voltage protection level (suppression rating), if
known;
5.1.9 Quantity;
5 .1.1 0 Testing requirements-include only if tests other
than the production tests required by this specification are to be
performed;
5 .1.11 Certification requirements; and
5.1.12 Packaging and shipping requirements.
6.1 Materials-All materials used in the construction of
these surge suppressors shall be of a quality suitable for the
purpose intended and shall conform to the requirements of this
specification.
6.1.1 All metallic enclosures shall be either painted or
coated with corrosion resistant material.
6.2 Manufacture-Plastic, when used, shall be a suitable
thermoplastic or thermosetting material so molded as to
produce a dense solid structure, uniform in texture, finish, and
mechanical properties.
7. Requirements
Maximum continuous operating
voltage
Temporary overvoltage withstand
Voltage dropA
System frequency tolerance
Voltage protection level
8
120-V nominal suppressor
208-V, 240-V nominal
suppressor
480-V nominal suppressor
1 i 0 % of nominal voltage
i 20 % of nominal voltage for
2s
Less than 0.25 % of nominal
voltage at rated current
10 % of nominal frequency
350 v
700 v
1200 v
1021
Maximum peak overshoot voltage
Response time
Maximum leakage current
Inrush current
Peak surge current
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Minimum insulation resistance to
case
Humidity resistance
Minimum life
Less than 250-V overvoltage
protection level for voltage
spike with 5 kV/IJS or lower
rate of rise
Less than 50 ns
Less than 30-mA line-line or line-
ground
1 0 times rated current for 1 0
cycles
3000A
-10 to 60C
-40 to 85C
10 MQ at 500 VDC
0 to 100%
2000 operations
A For two-port (plug-in and series-connected) suppressors only.
8
Measured iine-to-iine and iine-to-neutral with an 8/20-IJS, 3000-A peak wave-
form per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 applied.
7.2 Operating Requirements:
7 .2.1 Protection modes for all two-port hybrid surge protec-
tive devices shall provide protection for common mode (line-
to-ground and neutral-to-ground) and normal mode (line-to-
line) transients.
7.2.2 Fails to an open (versus short) circuit unless otherwise
specified and provides indication (visual) of failure.
7 .2.3 Capable of installation into a dedicated container for
mounting or as an assembly or component of a switchboard or
power supply.
7.2.4 Maximum voltage drop for two-port devices at full
current/voltage shall not exceed 0.25 % of nominal system
voltage.
7.3 Grounding Requirements:
7.3.1 The surge suppressor shall be provided with a means
for grounding all exposed dead-metal parts that might become
energized. Grounding shall be accomplished in accordance
with the requirements of UL 1449.
7.3.2 Type I (permanently connected) suppressors requiring
grounding shall have a field-wiring terminal or an insulated
ground lead that is intended solely for connection of a
grounding conductor.
7.3.3 The flexible cord of Types III and IV suppressors
which requires grounding shall have a grounding conductor
connected to the suppressor enclosure. Type II, direct plug-in,
suppressors requiring grounding shall be provided with a
grounding pin as one of the attachment plug contacts.
7.3.4 Any leads emanating from a suppressor are to be of
color coded insulated wire. The color green shall be used for
the grounding conductor and shall not be used for any other
purpose.
7.4 Supplementary Protection:
7.4.1 Surge protective devices that are series-connected
(Types II, III, and IV) shall have supplementary overcurrent
protection and overtemperature protection.
7 .4.2 Supplementary overcurrent protection using fuses
shall be readily replaceable while circuit breaker protected
devices shall be resettable.
7 .4.3 Supplementary overcurrent protection shall interrupt
all phases of the source circuit plus the circuit neutral where
applicable to assure suppressor isolation of the load.
F1507- 99 (2011)
7 .4.4 Overtemperature protection shall sense suppressor
enclosure or suppression device overtemperature condition and
initiate opening of the voltage supply.
7 .4.5 Suppressor supplementary protection shall provide a
visual or audible indication or both of the opening of the
protective device.
8. Enclosures
8.1 Unless specified differently by the purchaser, the sup-
pressor shall be packaged in a safety grounded enclosure with
foundation attachments that meets the requirements of UL
1449.
8.1.1 The enclosure shall be capable of confining any
material that may be expelled during a catastrophic failure of
any suppression device.
9. Receptacles
9.1 Receptacles provided as part of a suppressor shall have
a current rating not more that the current rating of the
suppressor and a voltage rating consistent with rating of the
suppressor.
9.2 All receptacles shall be of the grounding type.
10. Design Tests
10.1 Insulation Withstand Test-The assembled insulating
members of the surge suppressor shall withstand impulse and
power-frequency voltages applied between each pair of line
terminals and between each line terminal and the grounded
case. Internal parts designed to conduct to discharge impulses
shall be removed or rendered inoperative to permit these tests.
1 0.1.1 Impulse Insulation Withstand-A 1.2/50-fJS impulse
voltage wave, as defined by ANSI/IEEE Std 4, shall be applied
between each set of line terminals and between each line
terminal and ground. The magnitude of the impulse voltage
shall be at least 1.2 times the sum of the voltage protection
level (suppression rating) and the maximum peak overshoot
voltage, but need not exceed 6 K v.
10.1.2 Power Frequency Insulation Withstand-An ac po-
tential of the nominal system frequency shall be applied for a
period of 1 min between each set of line terminals and between
each line terminal and The magnitude of the test
voltage shall be 1000 V plus twice nominal system voltage.
The same test magnitude shall be for line-to-
line and line-to-ground tests.
10.2 Power Frequency Withstand Test--Power frequency
withstand tests shall be performed to demonstrate the of
the surge suppressor to withstand sustained periods of opera-
tion at the maximum continuous and
of transient power overvoltage without degn:tdatlOn.
The power supply measured at the terminals of
the suppressor, shall be maintained as close as to,
not less than, the test Three suppressors
shall be connected across a power within tolerances
the nominal The power shall have a short
circuit measured at the suppressor terminals, of
at least 500 amps. For suppressors, tests shaH be
for the assembled suppressor and power trequenc:y
shall be all
10.2.1 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage-The three
test samples shall be placed in a controlled-temperature cham-
ber with an ambient temperature of 85C soc and the rated
maximum continuous operating voltage shall be applied for a
period of 1000 h. The suppressor leakage currents shall be
measured at the beginning of the test (after the suppressor
temperature has stabilized), and again after 1000 h. The
leakage currents at the conclusion of the test shall be less than
30 rnA and shall be less than 110 % of the initial
current for each sample.
10.2.2 Maximum Line-to-Ground Voltage---Rated maximum
continuous operating voltage shall be applied to the three test
suppressors between each line terminal and ground for a
of 1 h. A single-phase voltage source may be applied between
all line terminals (in parallel) and ground for this test. '-''"'"""'"'I'S'"'
current to ground shall not increase by more than 10 % at the
conclusion of this test.
10.2.3 Temporary Overvoltage-The three test samples
shall be exposed to ten cycles of temporary overvoltage. Each
overvoltage cycle shall consist of 120 % of rated nominal
voltage for a period of 2 s followed by the maximum
continuous operating voltage for a period of 1 min. The leakage
currents shall not exceed 30 Ma and the leakage current
immediately following the 1-min period of the last cycle shall
not exceed 110 % of the value obtained at the conclusion of the
maximum continuous operating voltage test.
10.3 Impulse Voltage-Time Tests-The impulse voltage-time
tests demonstrate the suppressor's ability to limit overvoltage
in response to varying voltage spike rates of rise. Voltage
impulses with fast (5-kV/fJs) and slow (150-VI!J.s) rates of rise
and of both polarities shall be applied between each set of input
line terminals and between each line terminal and ground.
Normal operating voltage need not be applied for these tests.
The tests shall be performed on three samples, and the
crest voltage recorded at the output terminals shall be less than
the maximum peak voltage (voltage protection level plus
overshoot). The response time shall also be less than 50 ns. For
one-port type suppressors, input and output terminals are the
same terminals. Where three-phase suppressors consist of three
identical circuits, these tests need only be performed on one of
the three circuits in each sample. If the suppressor
current exceeds 3000 amps, a resistance of up to 2 Q. may be
added in series with the surge generator to limit the current
1022
after suppressor operation to 3000 amps.
10.3.1 Fast-Front Impulse Suppression Tests-A
each
impulse wave a crest
rate of rise) shall be used for the fast-front test.
iffilpulses of each shall be applied to each set of
and response time
shall be recorded.
0 F1507- 99 (2011)
maximum voltage and response time obtained line-to-line and
line-to-ground shall be recorded.
10.4 Voltage Protection Level Tests-The purpose of this
test is to determine the voltage protection by the
suppressor when passing a surge current. The protec-
tion level shall be measured at the output terminals of the
8/20-j.lS current impulse waveforms of both
to the input terminals. Three
shall be to five 1500-amp
followed by one surge of
between each set of terminals and
terminal and The time interval
1m1pulses shaH not exceed 1 20 s. In the event
developed the current
generator exceeds 6 kV after the initial suppressor overshoot,
the current may be limited to a value which
produces a 6-kV The maximum value of
line-to-line and voltage level at each
current level shall be recorded and shall be less than the rated
maximum voltage rating. The range of voltage
protection level values obtained with the series of 1500-amp
impulses across the same set of terminals on any one unit shall
not vary by more than 10 %.
10.5 Duty Cycle Tests-The duty cycle test establishes the
ability of the suppressor to interrupt follow current successfully
and repeatedly. Duty cycle tests shall be using one
of the three suppressors previously used in the power fre-
quency withstand tests. The suppressor shall be connected
across a power supply within the tolerances of the nominal
frequency. The power supply voltage, measured at the input
terminals of the suppressor, shall be maintained as close as
practicable to, but not less than, the rated maximum continuous
operating voltage. The power supply shall have a short circuit
capacity, measured at the suppressor input terminals, of at least
500 amps.
10.5.1 A series of ten 8/20-!JS current impulse waves with a
crest value of 1500 A and constant shall be applied
line-to-line with a time interval between surges of 50 to 60 s.
The first surge shall be timed to occur 30 after zero in
the power-frequency half-cycle of the same polarity as the
uul-'u'"'-' The second will be timed to occur at 60, and
will be increased an additional 30 for each
sut>seqw:ont surge. A second series of ten current shall
line to ground, with the first surge of this series
occurring within 2 min of the tenth line-to-line surge. The
current before the first and
the last impulse of each series of and the
each surge shall be mea-
currents shall be less than 30 rnA.
current the last shall not
have increased more than 10 % of the value obtained before
The measured sur>pr1ess1on
rated
1023
overvoltages and clamping overvoltages determined by the
previous tests are within 10 % for all three phases, only one
line-to-line and one line-to-ground test need be performed.
10.6 Life Cycle Tests-Life cycle tests establish the ability
of the suppressor to retain its voltage limiting function follow-
exposure to a number of impulses equivalent to the
life expectancy.
10.6.1 Voltage Impulses-Upon successful completion of
the cycle tests, the suppressor selected for duty cycle
shall have a series of 1000 voltage impulses with a
1.2/50-!JS waveshape and 6-kV magnitude applied between one
and ground (or between the same two phases if no
connection is used). Power frequency voltage need not
be applied during these tests. If the suppressor discharge
current for these tests exceeds 7 50 A, a resistance of up to 8 Q
may be added in series with the surge generator to limit the
current after suppressor operation to 750 A. Surges shall be
applied at 5-s intervals. Measurements of the maximum
(voltage protection level plus peak overshoot) shaH be
taken for the first ten surges and for the last ten surges. The
average of the maximum peak voltage for the first ten surges
and for the last ten surges shall not vary by more than 10 %.
10.6.2 Current Impulses-Following the 1000 voltage im-
pulses, 1000 current impulses with an 8/20-!JS waveshape and
7 50-A magnitude shall be. applied to the same set of terminals
as were used for the 1000 voltage surges. If the voltage
developed at the input terminals exceeds 6 kV, the current
impulse magnitude may be limited to a value which produces
an input voltage of 6 kV. Nominal frequency voltage shall be
applied to the suppressor immediately before and for at least 10
s following application of the current impulse. Current surges
shall be applied at 5-s intervals. The value of voltage
level and the leakage current through the suppressor 10 s
following the impulse shall be measured for the first ten surges
and the last ten surges. The average of these two parameters for
the first ten and last ten measurements shall not vary more
than 10%.
10.7 Load Current and Voltage Drop Tests-For two-port
surge suppressors, tests of the ampacity and voltage shall
be conducted on one sample. A reduced voltage source may be
used for the performance of these tests. For
suppressors, tests shall be performed using the assembled
suppressor and the specified magnitude of test current shall be
conducted through all phases simultaneously.
10.7.1 Rated Current and Voltage Drop-A current not less
than the rated current of the suppressor shall be passed
the device (from "input" to "output" terminals) for a
1 h. The maximum voltage between corresponding input and
output terminals shall be measured with rated current
through the suppressor at the end of the 1-h test period and
shall not exceed 0.25 % of the nominal system The
temperature rise of the suppressor case and any internal
,.,,-,-,..T"-''''-'rr""''" components shall not exceed 20C.
10.7.2 Inrush Current-A current equal to ten times rated
current shall be passed through the suppressor (from input to
output terminals) for ten without loss of c011tirmi:ty
(including interruption of fuses or other protective devices),
the suppressor to shunt or limit current, or "'l"'""t'n"
cO F1507- 99 (2011)
the temperature of the suppressor or any of its cmTent-carrying
components by more than 20C. Maximum continuous oper-
ating voltage shall be applied immediately following the
application of the inrush current, and the measured leakage
current shall be less than 30 mA.
11. Conformance and Production Tests
11.1 Conformance testing of a random sample may be
requested by the purchaser to verify that selected performance
characteristics demonstrated in the design tests have been
maintained in the production suppressors supplied. These tests
would not normally be performed unless specifically required.
Production tests are routine tests performed on production units
(or samples thereof) to ensure that basic safety requirements
are met.
11.1.1 Conformance Tests-Conformance tests shall be per-
formed only as required by the purchaser on a representative
sample, selected at random, of the units supplied by the
manufacturer. When required, testing shall be performed on the
assembled suppressor. Sample size, testing required, and pass/
fail criteria must all be specified by the purchaser. The
following sample sizes and tests are suggested for conformance
testing.
11.1.1.1 Sample Size:
No. Supplied
1-20
21-50
51-100
101 and above
Test Sample Size
1
3
5
5% of total
11.1.1.2 Power Frequency Test-Each sample would be
placed in an ambient temperature of at least 25C, and the rated
maximum continuous operating voltage would be applied for a
period of two hours. Five cycles of 120 % of nominal system
voltage for a period of 2 s, followed by 1 min at the maximum
continuous operating voltage would then be applied. The
leakage current at the beginning and end of this test would be
measured to verify that it is less than the 30 rnA rated leakage.
Leakage current at the conclusion of the test should be less than
110 % of the initial leakage to demonstrate no permanent
degradation. Additionally, the maximum continuous operating
voltage should be applied between the line terminals and the
ground connection for a period of 5 min. The leakage current
after 5 min should be less than 30 rnA and should not have
increased by more than 10 % from the initial value at the
beginning of the power frequency test.
11.1.1. 3 Impulse Voltage Test-A single 1.2/50-!ls voltage
impulse wave having a prospective crest voltage of 6 kV would
be applied between each pair of input line terminals and
between each input line terminal and ground for each sample.
The maximum peak voltage and response time measured for
each impulse should not exceed the rated maximum values.
11.1.1.4 Impulse Current Test-Each sample would be con-
nected across a power supply with the nominal system voltage
and frequency. A single 8/20-!ls current impulse with a peak
amplitude of 750 A would be applied between one pair of input
line terminals and between one line terminal and ground
(selected at random) for each sample. If the voltage at the input
1024
terminals of the suppressor exceeds 6 kV, the amplitude of the
current impulse could be reduced to that value which produces
an input voltage equal to, but not less than, 6 kV. The voltage
protection level and response time at the output terminals and
the suppressor leakage current would be measured and should
be less than the rated maximum values.
11.1.2 Production Tests:
11.1.2.1 Insulation Withstand-Each suppressor shall with-
stand, without electrical breakdown, a voltage applied between
the line terminals and the grounded case (including accessible
dead metal parts). The voltage applied shall be 1000-V ac plus
twice rated maximum continuous operating voltage for a
period of l minute or 1200-V ac plus 2.4 times rated maximum
continuous operating voltage for a period of 1 s. This test shall
be performed when the suppressor is fuliy assembled. Alter-
natively, where the test voltage can damage solid-state com-
ponents, the insulating structures of the suppressor may be
tested before assembly of internal components, provided the
test is representative of the completed suppressor and a random
sample representing at least 1 % and at least three suppressors
from the day's completed production are tested with any
internal components which may be damaged by the test
disconnected.
11.1.3 Ground Continuity-Each suppressor provided with
a means for grounding (for example, ground terminal or pin)
shall be tested using an ohmmeter, battery !buzzer circuit tester,
or similar device to determine continuity between the ground-
ing connection and all accessible dead metal parts.
12. Certification Requirements
12.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
producer's or supplier's certification shall be furnished to the
purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
furnished.
13. Marking Requirements
13.1 The product shall be labeled or tagged to show:
13.1.1 Manufacturer's name, model, serial number, and
country of origin,
13.1.2 Product name,
13.1.3 Surge suppressor class and type,
13.1.4 Nominal rated voltage, current, frequency, and ser-
vice,
13.1.5 Voltage protection level (in volts or kilovolts) for
each protective mode.
14. Packaging Requirements
14.1 Product shall be packaged, boxed, crated, or wrapped
to provide suitable protection during shipment and storage.
15. Keywords
15.1 ac power; circuits; surge current; surge suppression;
surge suppressors; voltage transients
cO F1507- 99 (2011)
The following supplementary requirements are applicable to Navy procurements and shall apply
only when specified by the purchaser in the contract or purchase order.
Sl. Performance
S 1.1 The surge suppressors shall meet the performance
requirements of 7. 1 except for voltage protection level at 480
V and minimum life which shall be in accordance with 'l'able
S 1.1. In addition, the surge suppressors shall meet the perfor-
mance requirements for minimum energy capability and mini-
mum average power capability specified in Table S 1.1.
S2. Life Cycle Test Requirements
TABLE S1.1 Performance Requirements
Protection Level at 480 V
Minimum life
Minimum energy capability
Minimum average power capability
1600 v
5000 operations
450 J/phase
2W
S2.1 The surge suppressors shall meet all the life cycle
requirements specified in 10.6 with the following exceptions:
S2.1.1 Number of applied voltage impulses as described in
10.6.1 shall be 2500. Surges shall be applied at 12-s intervals.
S2.1.2 Number of applied current impulses as described in
I 0.6.2 shall be 2500. Surges shall be applied at 12-s intervals.
S3. Testing-The supplier is responsible for the perfor-
mance of all testing and inspections. Except as otherwise
specified, the supplier may use his own facilities or any
commercial laboratory acceptable to the Government. The
Government may reserve the right to perform any of the testing
or inspections set forth in the specification requirements. This
testing shall assure qualification on a one-time basis unless the
manufacturer makes a significant change in materials or
process.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
Xl. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS
Xl.l Shipboard Electrical Systems Environment:
Xl.l.l Transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) devices
work better and can more effectively shunt damaging transient
overvoltages and current pulses to electronic equipment, if
system grounding is done properly and has good integrity.
Therein lies the major problem with TVSS devices for ship-
board use. Unlike industrial or commercial electrical systems
which have an ac supply ground and an equipment ground,
most shipboard electrical systems are "ungrounded." Without a
system ground (normally referred to as the neutral or com-
mon), then shipboard TVSS devices have protective modes
that are limited to line-to-line and/or line-to-ground shunting of
transients. Equipment (safety) grounds are achieved by proper
mounting of equipment to the ship's metal hull or structure or
installation of grounding straps between the hull and isolated
equipment. The effectiveness of shipboard TVSS will be highly
dependent on the equipment grounding techniques.
X1.2 Single Component Versus Hybrid Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressors:
Xl.2.1 Activated by transient voltage and current, a TVSS
component redirects or shunts a portion of the transient current
through the device and away from the load. A number of TVSS
components are available with each having distinct advantages
and disadvantages. These components consist of two basic
types of protector: clamps and crowbars. Clamps (metal-oxide
varistors and silicon avalanche suppressors) simply limit, while
crowbars (gas tubes and carbon-block arrestors) exhibit steep
1025
negative resistance characteristics that result in voltage protec-
tion levels well below their striking potential.
X 1.2.2 Hybrid transient voltage surge suppressors are de-
signed to take advantage of several different types of compo-
nents thereby enhancing overall performance and reliability.
Hybrids usually incorporate a high energy capable, primary
suppression section and tighter clamping, lower energy section.
A hybrid design appears simple, however the proper compo-
nent selection by the manufacturer is critical so that they
function together as a coordinated system. A properly designed
hybrid TVSS will vastly outperform any single component
suppressor.
Xl.3 Series Versus Parallel Devices:
X1.3.1 Surge suppressor components are inherently parallel
or "across the line" components making them insensitive to
load currents. However, because any impedance between the
surge suppressor component and the transient-carrying line
greatly reduces their effectiveness, lead length is an important
consideration. The ideal one-port (parallel or shunt-connected)
surge suppressor configuration is one with leads as short as
possible. Longer leads, especially those excessive in length,
may entirely negate the capability of the surge suppressor.
Unfortunately, most transient voltage suppressors are parallel
in design and require long wire-up leads.
X1.3.2 Series-connected (two-port) TVSS systems require
load current sensitivity because all load currents pass through
them. However, leads may be minimized in two-port designs,
thereby significantly enhancing performance. Additionally,
F1507- 99 (2011)
most two-port surge suppressors offer hybrid designs that
incorporate multiple components and a coupling inductor.
Xl.4 Envelope Clamping Versus Sine Wave Clamping:
X1.4.1 There are two main types of surge suppressors,
envelope or threshold clamping devices and sine-wave clamp-
ing devices. Envelope devices, which represents the majority
of surge suppressors available today, use only solid-state
protection components such as metal oxide varistors (MOVs)
or silicon avalanche diodes and operate by limiting or clamping
the voltage across their terminals. This voltage protection level
depends on the transient current and waveshape and must be
chosen high enough not to interfere with the normal operation
of the protected line.
Xl.4.2 Envelope clamping devices are very effective at
preventing transient damage from occurring to simple devices
such as motors or power supplies, where insulation breakdown
from high voltage would occur. They are not effective at
keeping transient energy from low-voltage supplies to sensitive
electronics or microprocessors.
X1.4.3 Sine-wave clamping suppressors consist of complex
hybrid filter/suppressor circuits that effectively attenuates high
frequency transients at whatever phase angle it occurs. Sine-
wave clamping devices create lower clamping levels ensuring
that any residual transient which propagates through low
voltage power supplies is too small to cause circuit damage or
logic disruption at the circuit board level.
Xl.4.4 Although more costly than single-component or
envelope (threshold clamping) devices, the use of hybrid surge
suppressors that offer high-energy suppression, high-speed
suppression and a EMIIRFI filter be adopted. Such devices
should be installed at power distribution panels and critical
electronic equipment and computers.
X1.5 Networking Surge Suppressors:
Xl.5.1 Networking surge suppressors gives superior perfor-
mance and reduced costs over the application of single devices.
Suppression networks are built by distribution of components
at more that one point within as electrical system. Networks do
more than just protect more loads at more places; they actually
improve the performance of individual components, by taking
advantage of the wire's self-inductance between surge suppres-
sors. Suppressor networks result in superior performance at a
lower cost since the very best single point devices are no longer
needed for effective protection.
X1.5.2 Networked surge suppressors reduce the amplitude
of the transient step by step. The relationship of voltage
protection level to current for suppression devices like MOV s
is that the lower the current the lower the voltage protection
level and, therefore the lower the residual voltage getting
through to the load you are trying to protect. Transients act like
waves in a transmission line. When the wave encounters a
change of impedance (which occurs with the introduction of
suppression component such as an MOV or silicon avalanche
diode), then a portion of the transient is reflected (bounces
back) in the opposite direction with an opposite polarity. That
portion of energy which finds its way in between two suppres-
sion devices separated by (wire) inductance, bounces back and
forth until it is dissipated or escapes into other forms of energy.
Xl.6 Safety Features:
X 1.6.1 There is a fire hazard with surge suppressors. Surge
suppressors can and do catch fire. Suppressors used to protect
sensitive electronic equipment in home, office, industry, Naval
and marine against transient voltages on ac circuits have failed
in service, some overheating seriously, melting and even
catching on fire. The theoretical cause has been debated and
fire hazard tests proposed, however the most practical solution
is to include provisions in the equipment design to preclude the
devices catching fire. Those recommended for consideration by
the purchaser would include:
X 1.6.1.1 Enclosure shall be metallic.
Xl.6.1.2 Two-port devices shall include a circuit breaker
that interrupts all phases (and neutral where applicable) of the
supply circuit.
Xl.6.1.3 Thermal protection ofTVSS shall interrupt supply
circuit for overtemperature condition.
Xl.6.1.4 Fail open circuit that automatically shuts off power
to connected equipment in the event of a suppression compo-
nent failure and protects equipment from being exposed to
unfiltered "raw" power.
Xl.6.2 Thermal failure modes of gapless, varistor-based
surge suppressors is considered significantly more likely than
failure to a surge suppressor during a large, single energy
transient. Them1al failure involves thermal runaway from one
of three sets of circumstances:
X1.6.2.1 Following a large transient that elevated the tem-
perature of MOV beyond point of recoverable thermal equi-
librium.
Xl.6.2.2 During an extended temporary overvoltage (some-
times referred to as a "voltage swell").
Xl.6.2.3 At the end of the life of a device previously
exposed to repetitive temporary overvoltages or surges, when
the rated number and magnitude of pulses for that device has
been exceeded and the standby current has slowly increased to
a point where thermal mnaway develops.
Xl.6.3 Surge suppressors, as recommended in this standard,
should include a thermal cutoff device (in addition to an
overcurrent protective device) that will sense the varistor
temperature and the supply source during the initial
part of the thermal runaway. In reality, the thermal failure
modes of X1.6.2.1 and X1.6.2.2 may happen too fast for
cut-off device to act before terminal thermal
failure mode defined in Xl.6.2.3 is the most
coupled cutoff device.
1026
F1507- 99 (2011)
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed evefY five years and
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box ClOD, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
COPYRIGHT!).
1027
Designation: F1508- 96 (Reapproved 201 0)
Angle Style, Pressure Relief Valves for Steam, Gas, and
Liquid Services
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers spring-loaded, angle style,
pressure relief valves for steam, gas, and liquid system
applications (excluding boiler safety and hydraulic system
relief valves).
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. No other units of measurement are included in
standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A!05/Al05M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for
Piping Applications
A 125 Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated
AI 82/Al82M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and
and Patts for High-Temperature Service
A193/Al93M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel for Temperature or High Pressure
A 194/ A 194M for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for Pressure or High Temperature Service,
or Both
A216/A216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suit-
able for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service
A217/ A 217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic
Stainless and for Pressure-Containing Parts. Suit-
able for Service
A227/A227M for Steel Wire, Cold-Drawn for
,:)p<3crnc:mcm for Steel Wire, Quenched and
Tempered for Mechanical Springs
1
Current edition approved May !, 2010. Published June 2010. Originally
approved in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as Fl508- 96 (2004).
DOI: 10.1520/Fl508-96Rl0.
2
the ASTM website.
A231/A231M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy
Steel Spring Wire
A313/A313M Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire
A351/A351M Specifkation for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts
A479/A479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and
for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels
A494/A494M Specification for Castings, Nickel and Nickel
Alloy
A689 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars for
Springs
B21/B21M Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and
Shapes
B61 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings
B 148 Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings
B J 64 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Wire
B637 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening and Cold
Worked Nickel Alloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock
for Moderate or High Temperature Service
D5204 Classification System for Polyamide-Imide (PAl)
Molding and Extrusion Materials
F467 Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use
F468 Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
and Studs for General Use
2.2 ANSI Standards:
3
ANSI B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ANSI B 16.34 Valves--Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
2.3 ASME Standard:
4
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St,
4
www.asme.org.
1028
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
2.4 API Standards:
5
API 526 Flanged Steel Safety-Relief Valves
API RP 520, Part 1 Recommended Practice for the Design
and Installation of Pressure-Relieving Systems in Refin-
eries
6
QQ-N-281 Nickel-Copper Alloy Bar, Rod, Plate, Sheet,
Strip, Wire, Forgings, and Structural and Special Shaped
Sections
QQ-N-286 Nickel-Copper-Aluminum Alloy, Wrought (UNS
N05500)
2.6 Military Standards and Specifications:
6
MIL-STD-167- 1 Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment (Type !--Environmental and Type II-
Intemally Excited)
MIL-STD-1330 Cleaning and Testing of Shipboard Oxygen,
Nitrogen and Hydrogen Gas Piping Systems
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze, Silver Brazing,
General Specification for
MIL-F-20042 Flanges, Pipe and Bulkhead, Bronze (Silver
Brazing)
MIL-P-46122 Plastic Molding Material and Plastic Extru-
sion Material, Polyvinylidene Fluoride Polymer and Co-
polymer
MlL-R-17131 Rods, Welding, Surfacing
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.L (High-Impact); Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment and Systems, Requirements for
MS 16142 Boss, Gasket-Seal Straight Thread Tube Fitting,
Standard Dimensions for
MS 51840 Plug, Machine Thread, 0-ring
2.7 Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA):
6
Drawings:
803-1385884 Unions, Fittings and Adapters, Butt and Socket
Welding, 6000 PSI, WOG IPS
803-1385943 Unions, Silver Brazing, 3000 PSI, WOG IPS,
for UT Inspection
803-1385946 Unions, Bronze Silver Brazing. WOG, for UT
[nspection
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3 .1.1 accumulation-the increase in static pressure above
the set pressure during discharge through the valve, when the
valve passes the rated flow. Accumulation is expressed in
pound-force per square inch or as a percent of the set pressure.
3.1.2 accumulation pressure-the set pressure plus the ac-
cumulation. Accumulation pressure is expressed in pound-
force per square inch gage.
3.1.3 blowdown-the difference between the set pressure
and the reseating pressure. Blowdown is expressed in pound-
force per square inch or a percent of the set pressure. The
accumulation and blowdown establish the operating band of
the pressure relief valve at a particular set pressure.
5
Available from American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L. St., NW, Wash-
ington, DC 20005-4070, http://www.api.org.
6
3.1.4 blowdown pressure-the set pressure minus the blow-
down. Blowdown pressure is expressed in pound-force per
square inch gage.
3.1.5 built-up backpressure-the static discharge pressure at
the outlet of a pressure relief valve caused by the pressure drop
in the discharge piping while the valve is discharging.
3.1.6 gagging device-a device, normally a screw (also
called test gag), used to prevent the pressure relief valve from
opening during a hydrostatic pressure test of the equipment on
which it is installed.
3.1.7 inlet piping-when used in this specification, refers to
all piping and fittings between the source and the inlet
connection to the pressure relief valve.
3.1.8 instability (chatter, fiutter)-an unstable operation of
the pressure relief valve characterized by rapid seating and
unseating of the disk during discharge. This hammering of the
disk on the seat can cause high loading forces, which can lead
to damage and rapid failure of the seating and sliding surfaces.
3.1.9 maximum system operating pressure-the highest
pressure that can exist in a system, vessel, or component under
normal (noncasualty) operating conditions. This is a normal
(noncasualty) pressure that the pressure relief valve is not
intended to protect against. This pressure can be the result of
influences such as pump or compressor shutoff pressure,
pressure regulating valve lockup (no flow) pressure, and so
forth.
3.1.10 opening pressure-the value of increasing inlet static
pressure of a pressure relief valve at which there is a measur-
able lift, or at which the discharge becomes continuous by
seeing, feeling, or hearing.
1029
3.1.11 outlet piping (or discharge piping)-when used in
this specification, refers to all piping and fittings between the
pressure relief valve outlet connection and the main, tank, or
atmosphere to which the pressure relief valve relieves.
3 .1.12 popping pressure-the value of increasing inlet static
pressure at which the disk moves in the opening direction at a
faster rate as compared with the corresponding movement at
higher or lower pressures. It generally applies to valves with
compressible fluid service such as steam, gas, and so forth.
3.1.13 pressure reliefvalve-an automatic pressure reliev-
ing device actuated by the static pressure upstream of the valve
and characterized by either rapid opening (pop action for gas,
vapor, or steam) or gradual opening (for liquids).
3.1.14 primary and secondary pressure zones of pressure
relief valve-primary pressure zone refers to all portions of the
pressure-containing envelope subject to inlet pressure; second-
ary pressure zone refers to all portions of the pressure-
containing envelope subject to outlet or discharge pressure
(includes spring housing of nonvented valves).
3 .1.15 relieving capacity (also called flow capacity )-the
pressure relief valve is defined as the quantity of pressure
medium relieving through the pressure relief valve at the
accumulation pressure, such as pound per hour of steam, gallon
per minute of water at 70F, or SCFM (standard cubic feet per
minute at 60F and 14.7 psia) of air, as applicable.
0 F1508 - 96 (201 0)
3 .1.16 set pressure-the value of increasing inlet static
pressure at which a pressure relief valve displays one of the
operational characteristics as defined under opening pressure,
or start-to-leak pressure. Set pressure is expressed in pound:-
force per square inch gage.
3.1.17 set pressure range-the range over which the set
pressure can be adjusted with the installed spring.
3.1.18 set pressure tolerance-the permissible plus or minus
deviation from the specified set pressure. Set pressure tolerance
is expressed in pound-force per square inch or as a percent of
the set pressure.
3 .1.19 source-when used in this specification, refers to the
pressure container being protected from overpressure by the
pressure relief valve, for example, piping main, pressure vessel
or tank, casing, and so forth.
3.1.20 start-to-leak pressure-the value of increasing inlet
static pressure at which the first bubble occurs when a pressure
relief valve for compressible fluid service of the resilient disk
design is tested by means of air under a specified water seal on
the outlet.
3.1.21 superimposed backpressure-the static pressure on
the discharge side of a pressure relief valve prior to the opening
of the pressure relief valve. This pressure exists where the
pressure relief valve discharges into a common pipeline shared
with other pressure sources such as pressure relief valves, or
into a pressurized or closed system. This pressure may have the
effect of changing the set pressure of the pressure relief valve.
3.1.22 top-guided valve-this type of valve has all the
guiding, rubbing, or contacting surfaces on the discharge side
of the seat.
4. Classification
4.1 Pressure relief valves shall be of the following types and
material grades:
4.1.1 Type 1-For Steam Service:
4.1.1.1 Grade A-Alloy steel construction (for steam ser-
vice temperatures up to 1000F) (see Table 8).
4.1.1.2 Grade B-Carbon steel construction (for steam ser-
vice temperatures up to 775F) (see Table 8).
4.1.2 Type ll-For Air, Gas Service:
4.1.2.1 Grade C-Bronze or stainless steel construction (for
air, gas service excluding oxygen) (see Table 9).
4.1.2.2 Grade D-Ni-Cu alloy construction (for oxygen)
(see Table 9).
4.1.3 Type Ill-For Liquid Service (except hydraulic oil):
4.1.3.1 Grade -Ferrous construction (for noncorrosive
liquids, such as fuel oil, water, steam condensate, and so forth)
(see Table 9).
4.1.3.2 Grade F'--Nonferrous construction (for corrosive
liquids, such as seawater, and so forth) (see Table 9).
'-"""''"'''"F. documentation for valves under this specifica-
tion shall include the following information, as required, to
describe the equipment adequately.
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue.
5.1.2 Valve specification code (see 6.2).
5.1.3 Quantity of valves.
5.1.4 Maximum inlet temperature.
5.1.5 Set pressure.
5.1.6 Required relieving capacity (flow) at the accumulation
pressure.
5.1.7 Installation limitations data, if different than specified
in 7.9.
5.1.8 Blowdown limits, if different than specified in 7.7.
5.1.9 Envelope dimensions, if not covered in Table 13 and
Table 14.
5 .1.1 0 Supplementary requirements, if any (see S 1 through
S5).
6. Valve Coding and Construction
6.1 Valves shall incorporate the design features specified in
6.2 and 6.3.
6.2 Valve Specification Coding-Basic valve design features
shall be specified and recorded using the following valve
coding system. The valve specification code contains nine
fields of information, which describe the construction features
of the valve. Each of these nine fields are further assigned their
respective codes in accordance with Tables 1-7.
r ASTM FXXX-90
(Table 5) Valve Type & Material Code
Inlet Size Cede (Table 6)
Outlet Size Cede (Table 6)
lnlet End Connection Code
Outlet End Connection Code
Bonnett Construction Code
Hand Lifting Device Code
Gagging Devioe Code (Tab
Envelope Dimensions Code
(Table 7)
(Table?)
(Table 8)
(Table9)
le 10)
(Table 11)
l I I I 1 I I I I
I J I
6.3 Construction-Valve construction shall be in accor-
dance with the requirements specified in 6.3.1-6.3.19.
6.3.1 The materials of construction for various valve com-
ponents are detailed in Table 8 for Type I valves and Table 9 for
Types II and HI valves.
6.3.2 General Requirements-The valve shall be self-
contained, single-seated, and spring-loaded where the inlet
pressure is directly sensed under the spring-loaded disk. The
valve shall incorporate only a single inlet and a single outlet
connection.
6.3.3 Pressure-Temperature Ratings-The pressure-
temperature ratings of a pressure relief valve consist of ratings
for the primary and secondary pressure zones.
6.3.3.1 Pressure-Temperature Rating of the Primary Pres
sure Zone-This shall correspond to the rating of the inlet end
connection, and is given in Table 10.
TABLE 1 Valve and Material Code
Valve Classification
Valve Type and Material
Valve Material Grade
Code
I A
I B 2
II c 3
II D 4
Ill E 5
Ill F 6
As 9
1030
0 F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 2 Codes for Valve Inlet/Outlet Pipe Size
Nominal valve inlet or
outlet size, in. 0.25 0.38 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.5
Code A B c D E F G
TABLE 3 End Connection Codes for Valve inlet and Outlet Ports
NoTE 1-Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order (Code W), all
ANSI flanges shall have raised faces.
Ill
Type of End Connection
Grades Grade Grade Giade Grade
A and c D E F
B
ANSI Flanged per ANSI 816.5 A
Class 150
ANSI Flanged per ANSI 816.5 B B
Class 300
ANSI Flanged per ANSI 816.5 c c
Class 600
ANSI Flanged per ANSI 816.5 D
Class 900
ANSI Flanged per ANSI 816.5 E
Class 1500
S8U, per MIL-F-1183 (400 psi) F F
Union-End, per Drawing G
803-1385946 (1500 psi)
Union-End, per Drawing H
803-1385943 (3000 psi)
Union-End, per Drawing
803-1385884 (6000 psi)
6-in. Long nipple welded (400 psi) K
6-in. Long nipple welded (1500 psi) L
6--in. Long nipple welded (3000 psi) M
6--in. Long nipple welded (6000 psi) N
Navy flanged, per MIL-F-20042,
p
150 lb
Navy flanged, per MIL-F-20042, R
250 lb
Navy flanged, per MIL-F-20042, T
400 lb
As w w w w w
6.3.3.2 Pressure-Temperature Rating of the Secondary Pres-
sure Zone-The secondary pressure zone shall withstand the
higher of the following:
(1) 150% of maximum backpressure buildup specified in
7.9.
(2) 600 psig (for Type II, Grade C and Type III, Grade F
valves only).
(3) ANSI B16.34, Class 150 pressure rating (for Type I,
Grades A and B and Type III, Grade E valves only).
6.3.4 Construction-The valve shall be of the angle-
It shall be constructed so that the seat will not
relative to the disk, and valve operation is not
affected by internal pressure and temperature.
6.3.5 Bonnet Construction (Spring Housing):
6.3.5.1 I valves, the bonnet shall be attached to the
with bolted flanges. Type I, Grade A valves must have
bonnets-the discharge flow released through
shall be minimaL For II and Type III
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
As
specified
H K L M N
p
R T w
1031
valves, the bonnet shall be attached to the body with bolted
flanges, or a threaded union connection.
6.3.5.2 For pressure-tight (nonvented) bonnet construction
valves (for air/gas and liquid applications), there shall be no
discharge of pressure medium into the atmosphere from the
bonnet or from the body-to-bonnet joint.
6.3.5.3 Vented-bonnet construction valves shall incorporate
a threaded vent hole in the bonnet for the discharge of pressure
medium into the atmosphere. The discharge flow released
through the vent hole shall be minimal. The vent hole shall be
capable of attaching a pressure-tight MS straight-threaded tube
fitting to divert the pressure relief to a distant location. The
nominal tube fitting size shall be in accordance with Table 11.
The vent hole shall be in accordance with MS 16142. Valves
shall be furnished with a vent plug in accordance with MS
51840 to keep the dirt away and to allow hydro testing. A
warning tag instructing the mandatory removal of the vent plug
after valve installation must also be attached to the valve vent
plug.
6.3.5.4 There shall be one bonnet for each valve body of a
particular nominal inlet size and pressure-temperature rating. It
shall be capable of housing any of the springs required to span
the applicable set pressure ranges.
6.3.6 Internal Trim:
6.3.6.1 For Type I valves, valves shall be provided with a
threaded seat ring, which shall be welded or nickel-brazed
circumferentially to the body. The valve body shall have
sufficient metal at the seat section to permit installation of a
separate seat ring, if required as a service repair. When the seat
ring is a part of the inlet flange raised face, such as in full
nozzle valves, no welding or brazing is required.
6.3.6.2 For Types II and III valves, the valve shall have a
replaceable seat ring. The seat ring shall be either threaded-in
or retained by a cage construction and shall be easily replace-
able, using hand tools, after extended service.
6.3.6.3 The valve disk to valve seat sealing must be metal to
metal for Type I valves and metal to nonmetal for Type II and
Type III valves.
6.3.6.4 The disk or the disk holder assembly shall be
top-guided. Bottom-guided valves (also known as wing-guided
valves), or other construction valves where all or part of the
guiding surfaces are under the disk, are not permitted. Guiding
surfaces (bushings and posts) shall have the proper hardness,
finish, concentricity, parallelism, clearances, length, and
to prevent binding or seizing and to ensure proper seating
under all operating conditions. These alignment requirements
shall be maintained with interchangeable parts and under any
tolerance stackup.
6.3.7 Interchangeability-In no case shall the parts be
physically interchangeable in a valve unless such parts are also
interchangeable with regard to function, performance, and
strength. Where machining is required after installation of a
0 F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 4 Bonnet Construction Codes
Type of Bonnet
Construction
Code for Type I Valve for Type II Valve Code for Type Ill Valve
Grade A Grade B Grade C GradeD Grade E Grade F
Vented bonnet
Pressure-tight
bonnet
not applicable
not applicable
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
c not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable
TABLE 5 Hand-Lifting Device Codes
Is Hand-Lifting Code for Type I Code for Type II Code for Type Ill
Device Required Valves Valves Valves
With the Valve?
Yes
No not appiicable 2 not applicable
TABLE 6 Gagging Device Codes
Is Gagging Device Code for Type I Code for Type II Code for Type Ill
Required With the Valves Valves Valves
Valve?
Yes 1 1 1
No 2 2 2
TABLE 7 Valve Envelope Dimensions Code
to Meet Listed Dimensions
The valve meets the envelope dimensions listed in
Table 12 and Table 13.
The valve does not meet the envelope dimensions
listed in Table 12 and Table 13.
Code
2
seat ring or guide to maintain critical concentricity or align-
ment dimensions, detailed instructions must be provided with
each repair part.
6.3.8 Spring-The spring shall be designed so that the full
lift spring compression shall be no greater than 80 % of the
nominal solid deflection. The permanent set of the spring
(defined as the difference between the free height and height
measured 10 min after the spring has been compressed solid
four times at room temperature) shall not exceed 0.5% of the
free height. Spring ends shall be squared and ground.
6.3.9 Threads-Threads shall conform to ANSI B 1.1. Pro-
visions shall be incorporated to prevent the accidental loosen-
ing of threaded parts. Pipe threads and lock-washers shall not
be used.
6.3.10 Bearing Sufjaces-Nut- and bolt-bearing surfaces
and their respective mating surfaces on the valves shall be
machine finished.
6.3.11 Stem Packing-A stuffing box, 0-rings, or any other
nonmetallic materials shall not be permitted on the stem/disk
guiding surfaces.
6.3.12 Hand-Lifting Device-When specified (see 6.2),
valves shall be provided with a hand-lifting device so that they
may be operated by hand for testing purposes with an inlet
pressure of 75 % of the set pressure. Type I and Type III valves
must be furnished with a hand-lifting device. The necessary
lever or tool shall be furnished as part of the valve. For valves
requiring pressure-tight (nonvented) bonnets, a stuffing box or
TABLE 8 Materials of Construction for Type I Valves
Name of Part
Body, bonnet,
and yoke
Metallic disk
and seat ring
Stem
Springs
Body bolts
and nuts
Grade A Grade B
Specification A 182/ A 182M Specification A 1 05/ A 105M
Grade F11, F22 Specification Ai82/A182M
Grade F11, F22
Specification A217/A217M Specification A2i6/A216M
Grade WC6, WC9 Grade WCB
Haynes 25 or Stellite
(wrought Stellite 68,
cast)
Specification A217/A217M
Grade WC1, WC6
Specification A351/ A351 M
Grade CF3, CF3M,
CF8, CF8M
Specifications A276,
A479/A479M Types
302, 304, 316, 410,
430
Stellite 6 or an inlay of Specification A35i/A351M
Stellite not less than Grades CF3, CF3M,
3
/32 in. thick. Where CF8, CF8M
inlays are used, welding
rod shall be in accord- QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286
ance with Type MIL- Specification A494/A494M
RCoCr-A of MIL-R-
17131 and base
materials shall be one
of the following:
Specification A351/
A351 M Grade CF3,
CF3M, CF8, CFSM
Specification A276 Types
302,304,316,347
A479/A479M Types
302, 304, 316, 410,
430
A479/A479M Types
302, 304, 316, 410,
430
Specification 8637
onel X750)
(Inc- Specification A 125A
Specification A227/
A227MA
Specification A229/
A229MA
Specification A231/
A231MA
Specification A276
Specification A689A
Specification A3i3/A313M
Specification 8637 (lnc-
onel X750)
Specification A 193/ A 193M Specification A 193/ A 193M
Grade B16 Grade B7, B16 Specifi-
Specification A194/A194M cation A194/A194M
Grade 4 Grade 4
A Electroless nickel plated (ENP) or zinc plated.
1032
a seal on the shaft of the hand-lifting device which will have no
effect on the valve set pressure and the valve lift, shall be
required.
6.3.13 Gagging Device-When specified for system test
purposes (see 6.2), a gagging device shall be supplied with the
valve. Valves shall be constructed to be gagged without
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 9 Materials of Construction for Types II and Ill Valves
Name of Part Grade C GradeD Grade E Grade F
Body, bonnet, and yoke Specification 861, 862 QQ-N-281, Specification A494/ Specification A 1 05/ A 1 05 M Specification 861 , 862
A494M Specification A216/ A216M Specification 8148 Grade 958
Grade WCB
Specifications A276/ QQ-N-281,
A479/A479M Types 302, 304, Specifications A276/ Specification A494/A494M
316, 410, 430 A479/A479M Types 302, 304,
316, 410, 430
Specification A351 I A351 M Specification A351 I A351 M
Grade CF3, CF3M, CF8, Grade CF3, CF3M, CF8,
CF8M CF8M
Metallic disk and seat ring Specifications 861, 862 QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286 Specifications A276/ QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286
QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286, Specification A494/ A494M A479/A479M Types 302, 304, Specification A494/A494M
316, 410, 430
Specification A494/A494M Specification A351 I A351 M
Specifications A276/A479/ Grade CF3, CF3M, CF8,
A479M Types 302, 304, 316, CF8M
410, 430
Specification A351 I A351 M
Grade CF3, CF3M, CF8,
CF8M
Stem QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286 QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286 Specifications A276/ QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286
Specification 821/821 M A479/A479M Types 302, 304, Specification 821 /821 M
316, 410, 430
Specifications A276/A479/
A479M Types 302, 304, 316,
410, 430
Springs Specification A 125A QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286 Specification A 125A QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286
Specification A227/A227MA Specification A227/A227MA
Specification A229/ A229MA Specification A229/ A229MA
Specification A231/A231 MA Specification A231/A231 MA
Specifications A276, A313/ Specifications A276, A313/
A313M A313M
Specification A689A specification A689A
Body bolts and nuts Specifications A 193/ A 193M, QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286 Specification A i 93/ A 193M QQ-N-281, QQ-N-286
A194/A194M, 8164 Specification 8164 Specification A 194/ A 194M Specifications 8164, F467,
Specifications F467, F468 F468
Diaphragm, gasket, TFE or reinforced TFE, nitrile TFE or reinforced TFE TFE or reinforced TFE, nitrile TFE or reinforced TFE, nitrile
and so forth (Buna-N), fluorocarbon- (Buna-N), fluorocarbon- (Buna-N), fluorocarbon-
rubber (viton) rubber rubber
Nonmetallic disk insert TFE or reinforced TFE TFE or reinforced TFE TFE or reinforced TFE TFE or reinforced TFE
Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with
MIL-P-46122 MIL-P-46122 MIL-P-46122 MIL-P-46122
Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with Plastic in accordance with
Classification System 05204 Classification System 05204 Classification System 05204 Classification System 05204
A Electroless nickel plated (ENP).
TABLE 10 Pressure Temperature Ratings of Valve
End Connection Code
(See Table 3)
A thru E
F
G
H
I
K
L
M
N
P, R, T
w
ANSI Flanged
SBU, MIL-F-1183 (400 psi)
Union-End, Drawing 803-1385946 (1500 psi)
6-in. long nipple welded (400 psi)
Navy flanged, MIL-F-20042
as specified
alteration of the set point. The gagging screw shall be provided
with a knurled or wing nut-type head to discourage the use of
wrenches when gagging the valve. The gagging device shall be
constructed to minimize the possibility of overlooking its
removal after test and shall include a tag or other warning to
this effect. The gagging device shall be designed to prevent the
installation of a valve cap over the gagging device.
Nominal
Pressure,
psi
400
1500
3000
6000
Pressure-Temperature Rating (see 6.3.3)
Refer to ANSI 816.5
Design Design
Pressure,

psiq
480 165
1800 165
3600 165
7200 165
refer to MIL-F-20042
as specified
Shell Test
Pressure,
psig
800
2250
4500
9000
6.3.14 Accessibility-Valves shall permit adjustment and
repair without removal from the line.
1033
6.3.15 Valve Adjustment:
6.3.15.1 Means shall be provided for adjusting the set
pressure setting with the valve under pressure. The adjusting
screw shall have right-hand threads so that clockwise rotation
increases the set pressure. The adjusting device shall be
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 11 Nominal Tube Sizes (Inches) for Vented-Bonnet Valves
Valve Inlet Size Nominal Tube Size
0.250
0.375
0.500
0.750
1.000
1.250
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
8.000

(a) SBU End
Connections
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.500
0.500
0.625
0.625
0.750
0.750
1.000
1.000
1.250
1.250
c
(MAX)
provided with a locknut and cap, or other suitable means, to
prevent accidental change of adjustment.
6.3.15.2 Valves shall have adjustable blowdown using
blowdown ring(s). Positive means shall be used to lock the
adjusting ring(s) in place by use of adjustable ring pins(s). The
pin(s) shall be installed through the penetration hole in the
lower valve body.
6.3.16 Valve Envelope Dimensions-Unless otherwise
specified in the ordering data, valves must meet the overall
envelope dimensions shown in Table 12 for Type I valves and
Table 13 for Types II and III valves.
IN
OUi
c
(MAX)
T
l
i
I

. t
(b) Flanged End
Connections
NoTe-Pictorial representations are for illustrative purposes only, and do not imply design. Dimensions for SBU end valves do not include length of nut or tailpiece.
FIG. 1 Typical End Connections
6.3.17 Cleaning-Type II, Grade D valve parts (for oxygen
service) shall be cleaned in accordance with MIL-STD-1330
and maintained oxygen clean.
6.3.18 Sealing-Means shall be provided in the design of all
valves for sealing all external adjustments such as set pressure.
Seals shall be installed by the manufacturer or assembler at the
time of initial shipment and after field adjustment or repair of
the valves by either the manufacturer, his authorized represen-
tative repairer, or the user. Seals shall be installed in such a
manner as to prevent changing the adjustment without breaking
the seal and, in addition, shall serve as a means of identifying
the manufacturer, assembler, repairer, or user making the
adjustment.
6.3.19 Asbestos material is not permitted in the valve
construction.
7.1 All valves shall meet the requirements of 7 IO.
7.2 Range of Set Pressure Adjustment-For Type I and Type
III valves, the set pressure shall be adjustable over a range of
at least 10 %of the specified set pressure, for set pressures up
to 250 psig; and when the specified set pressure exceeds 250
this range shall be 5 %. For Type II valves, the set
pressure shall be adjustable over the set pressure range
specified in 'Htble 14. If required, more than one may be
used to accomplish this.
1034
7.3 Operation--Valves shall operate without
Umonl:l'ho:ut their full range of Types I and II valves
shall open with a clear, pop. Valve closure shall be clear
and when the inlet pressure is reduced to the blowdown
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 12 Valve Envelope Dimensions (Inches) for Type I Valves (See Fig. 1)
NorE 1-Variations for A and B dimensions are 0.06 in. C is the maximum dimension shown.
Outlet ANSI300 x ANSI600 x
Size Size ANSI150 ANSI150
A 8 c A B c A B c A 8 c A B c A B c A 8 c A B c
0.25 0.25
0.25 0.50
0.50 0.50 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.5
0.50 1.00
0.75 0.75 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.5
1.00 i.OO 3.5 3.5 3.4 3.7
1.00 2.00
1.25 1.25 3.7 3.7 3.7 4.0
1.50 1.50 4.7 4.7 4.7 5.0
1.50 2.00
1.50 2.50
2.00 2.00 4.7 4.7 4.7 5.0
2.00 3.00
2.50 2.50 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.7
3.00 3.00 6.4 6.0 6.4 6.2
3.00 4.00
3.50 3.50
4.00 4.00 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.2
4.00 5.00
4.00 6.00
5.00 5.00
6.00 8.00
8.00 10.0
TABLE 13 Valve Envelope Dimensions (Inches) for Type II, Grade C, and Type Ill Valves (see Fig. 1) (Without Tailpieces and Nuts)
NoTE !-Variations for A and B dimensions are 0.06 in. Cis the maximum dimension shown.
NoTE 2-Dimensions do not include length of nut or tailpiece.
NoTE 3-Dimensions not shown in the table should be
Inlet Outlet MILF-1183 SBU- 803-1385946 803-1385943 803-1385884 MIL-F-20042 MILF-20042 ANSI Class 150 ANSI Class 300
Size Size 400 PSI Union Union Union Flanged, 150# Flanged, 250# Flanged Flanged
1500 PSI 3000 PSI 6000 PSI
A B c A B c A B c A B c A B c A B c A B A B c
0.25 0.25 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0
0.37 0.37 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0
0.50 0.50 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0
0.50 1.00 3.0 3.5 13.0 3.0 3.5 13.0 3.0 3.5 13.0
0.75 0.75 2.6 2.6 12.0 2.6 2.5 12.0 2.6 2.6 13.0 2.6 2.5 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 3.0 13.0
1.00 1.00 3.1 3.1 15.0 3.1 3.1 15.0 3.1 3.1 16.0 3.1 3.1 16.0 3.5 3.5 15.0 3.5 3.5 15.0 3.5 3.5 15.0
1.00 2.00
1.25 1.25 3.2 3.2 15.5 3.2 3.2 15.5 3.2 3.2 16.5 3.2 3.2 16.5 3.8 3.8 16.0 3.8 3.8 16.0 3.8 3.8 16.0
1.50 1.50 4.0 4.0 17.0 4.0 4.0 17.0 4.0 4.0 18.0 4.0 4.0 18.0 4.7 4.7 17.0 4.7 4.7 17.0 4.7 4.7 17.0
1.50 2.00 4.5 4.0 19.0 4.5 4.0 19.0 4.5 4.0 20.0 4.5 4.0 20.0 4.7 4.7 18.0 4.7 4.7 18.0 4.7 4.7 18.0
1.50 2.50 5.5 4.7 18.5 5.5 4.7 18.5 5.5 4.7 18.5
2.00 2.00 4.5 4.5 18.5 4.5 4.5 18.5 4.5 4.5 19.5 4.5 4.5 19.5 4.7 4.7 18.0 4.7 4.7 18.0 4.7 4.7 18.0
2.00 3.00
2.50 2.50 5.5 5.5 21.0 5.5 5.5 21.0 5.5 5.5 22.0 5.5 5.5 22.0 5.5 5.5 19.0 5.5 5.5 19.0 5.5 5.5 19.0
3.00 3.00 6.0 5.5 19.5 6.0 5.5 19.5 6.0 5.5 19.5
3.00 4.00
3.50 3.50 6.0 5.5 19.5 6.0 5.5 19.5 6.0 5.5 19.5
4.00 4.00 6.5 6.5 24.0 7.0 7.0 24.5 7.0 7.0 24.5
4.00 5.00
4.00 6.00 9.0 6.5 30.0 9.0 6.5 30.0 9.0 6.5 30.0
5.00 5.00 6.5 6.5 24.0 7.0 7.0 24.5 7.0 7.0 24.5
6.00 8.00 10.0 9.5 28.0 10.0 9.6 28.0 10.0 9.6 28.0
8.00 8.00 10.0 10.0 28.0 10.0 10.0 28.0 10.0 10.0 28.0
1035
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
TABLE 14 Range of Set Pressure Adjustment for Type II Valves
Nominal Pressure Rating,
lb/in.
2
gage
400
1500
3000
6000
Minimum Required Set
Pressure, lb/in.
2
gage
460
1725
3450
Maximum Required Set
Pressure, lb/in.
2
gage
460
1725
3450
6875
pressure. Type III valves shall open/close gradually, without
instability, in response to the increase/decrease in pressure over
the opening pressure.
7.4 Hydrostatic Shell Test Pressure-The valve shall show
no signs of external leakage, permanent deformation, or
structural failure when subjected to the hydrostatic shell test
pressure specified in 8.2.
7.5 Set Pressure Tolerance-For all types of valves, the set
pressure tolerance, plus or minus, shall not exceed the follow-
ing: 2 psi for set pressures up to 70 psig, 3 % for set pressures
over 70 psig up to 300 psig, 10 psi for set pressures over 300
psig up to 1000 psig, and 2 % for set pressures over 1000 psi g.
7.6 Accumulation-Valves shall be sized to pass the speci-
fied flow (see 5.1.6) without permitting the inlet pressure
(source static pressure) to rise beyond the accumulation pres-
sure. The accumulation (overpressure) shall not exceed 10 %
of set pressure, or 3 psi, whichever is greater. The valve shall
show no signs of instability.
7.7 Blowdown Limits-Unless otherwise specified in the
ordering data (see 5.1.8), valves shall operate satisfactorily
with the following blowdown pressure setting:
7.7.1 For Type I and Type II valves, the maximum blow-
down limit shall be 3 psi or 7 % of the set pressure, whichever
is greater.
7.7.2 For Type III valves, the maximum blowdown limit
shall not exceed 15 %of the set pressure or 3 psi, whichever is
greater.
7.8 Seat Tightness-With an inlet pressure at or above the
minimum allowable blowdown pressure setting, the valve shall
seat tightly. No through seat leakage under this condition shall
be allowed (see Table 15).
7.9 Installation Limitation-Valve operation shall not be
adversely affected (loss of capacity or instability) by an inlet
piping pressure loss of up to 25 % of the relief valve maximum
TABLE 15 Allowable Seat Leakage Rates
Valve Test Type of Maximum Allowable Seat
Type Medium Seat Leakage Over a Period of
Minimum 3 min
steam metallic no visible evidence of steam
leakage when the valve
outlet is viewed against
a dark background
air or nitrogen nonmetallic no visible leakage as
gas indicated by a sub-
merged underwater or
a soap bubble test
Ill water nonmetallic no visible leakage
permitted blowdown or an outlet piping breakpressure buildup
of up to 10 % of the set pressure, or both. Where the
installation will subject the valve to more severe piping
restrictions, this information shall be noted in the ordering data
(see 5.1.7).
7.10 Effective Discharge Area (A)-Valves shall meet the
effective discharge areas (A) specified in based on
flow tests and neglecting any inlet/outlet losses (in accordance
with API RP 520, Part 1, Appendix C).
NoTE 1-To calculate the required effective discharge area for a given
relief capacity requirement, see the following examples for steam, gas,
and liquid services (for additional details, refer to API RP 520, Part 1,
Appendix C):
NoTE 2-The formulae shown in Examples 1, 2, and 3 are for valves
with ventediexposed spring construction bonnets. Nonvented bonnet
valves generally have much lower capacity and the valve manufacturer
should be consulted to obtain their capacities. Also, the calculated
effective discharge area does not include impact as a result of installation
limitation in accordance with 7.9.
where:
Example 1, Steam Service:
Given: Flow medium = saturated steam
Upstream pressure = i 00 psig
Accumulation i 0 %
Required flow through valve= 1774 lb/h
Calculate: A (effective discharge area of valve)
For steam service, use formula "C-1 0" in API RP 520,
Part 1 , Appendix C
A effective discharge area of valve, in.
2
;
W required flow through valve, lb/h;
( 1)
P
1
upstream relieving pressure, psia = 124.7 at 100-psig
set pressure; and
KsH correction factor as a result of amount of superheat in
steam = 1.0 for saturated steam.
1036
Then substituting these values in Eq 1 ,
1774
A
50 X 124.7 X 1.0
0.285 in.
2
TABLE 16 Effective Discharge Areas (A),A in.
2
Valve
Inlet Size
0.250
0.375
0.500
0.750
1.000
1.250
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
4.000
(A) for Steam
Valves
0.018
0.041
0.132
0.162
0.285
0.444
0.638
1.140
1.780
2.560
4.550
(A) for Air/Gas
Valves
0.016
0.035
0.141
0.141
0.249
0.389
0.559
0.998
1.560
2.250
3.990
A Variation allowed on the discharge areas is + 15 %, -0 %.
0.011
0.024
0.096
0.096
0.160
0.280
0.432
0.834
1.372
2.000
3.727
(2)
c4@f F1508 - 96 {201 0)
where:
Example 2, Air Service:
Given: Flow medium = air
Upstream pressure = 100 psig
Accumulation 10 %
Temperature 60 oF
Required flow through valve = 556 SCFM
For air service, use formula "C-3" in API RP 520, Part
1, Appendix C
(3)
A effective discharge area of valve, in?;
C coefficient determined by ratio of specific heats, for air
c = 356;
K effective coefficient of discharge = 0.975 for formula
"C-3;"
V required flow through valve, standard cubic feet per
min at 14.7 psia and 60 F;
P
1
upstream relieving pressure, psia = 124.7 at 100-psig
set pressure;
Kb correction factor as a result of back pressure = 1.0 from
"Figure C-1 ; "
T absolute temperature of the inlet air, F + 460 = 520 F
for given data;
Z = compressibility factor, assume Z = 1.0 for air; and
G specific gravity of gas referred to air = 1.0 for rated
data.
where:
A
gpm
G
Then substituting these values in the formula,
556Y 520 X 1.0 X 1.0
A= 1.175 X 356 X 0.975 X 124.7 X 1.0 =
0
249
in.
2
Example 3, Liquid Service:
Given: Flow medium = water
Upstream pressure = 1 00 psig
Accumulation 10 %
Required flow through valve = 25.2 gpm
For liquid (water), use formula "C-7" in API RP 520,
Part 1, Appendix C
effective discharge area of valve, in.
2
;
(4)
(5)
flow rate required through the valve, gal/min;
specific gravity of the liquid at flowing temperature=
1.0 for water at rated conditions;
coefficient of discharge = 0.62;
capacity correction factor because of 10 % overpres-
sure = 0.6 at 10 % accumulation, see "Figure C-4;"
capacity for correction factor as a result of back
pressure = 1.0, see "Figure C-5;"
capacity correction factor as a result of viscosity =
1.0, see "Figure C-6;"
set pressure, psig = 1 00; and
back pressure, psig = 0.0 for given data.
Then substituting these values in the formula,
1037
(6)
=0.160 in.
2
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each production valve must pass the tests outlined in 8.2
and 8.3.
8.2 Hydrostatic Shell Test-Valve shall be gagged shut or
disk and spring assembly removed and seat blanked off. The
following two separate hydrostatic shell tests for a minimum of
3 min shall be performed: (a) Water or air/nitrogen at a test
pressure (see Table 1 0) shall be applied to the valve inlet
(primary pressure zone) to verify conformance to 7.4. (b) For
valves with pressure-tight bonnet construction only, water or
air/nitrogen at a test pressure specified in 6.3.3.2 shall be
applied to the valve outlet (secondary pressure zone) to verify
conformance to 7 .4.
8.3 Set Pressure, Blowdown, and Seat Tightness Test-Inlet
pressure (see Table 15 for test medium) shall be increased until
the valve opens. Inlet pressure shall be reduced until the valve
reseats. Leakage shall be checked over a 3-min period at an
inlet pressure equal to the minimum allowable blowdown
pressure setting. There shall be no damage to seating surfaces
and no instability (chatter). The valve shall conform to the
requirements in accordance with 7.5, 7.7, and 7.8.
9. Marking
9.1 Each valve shall be plainly and permanently marked by
the manufacturer with the required data in such a way that the
marking will not be obliterated in service. The marking may be
placed on the valve or on a corrosion-resistant plate perma-
nently attached to the valve. The following data is required:
9.1.1 Name of the manufacturer,
9.1.2 Manufacturer's design or type number,
9.1.3 Valve specification code,
9.1.4 Size __ in. (nominal pipe size of the valve inlet),
9.1.5 Set pressure __ psi,
9.1.6 Rated relieving capacity (as applicable):
NoTE 3-The information listed in 9.1.5 and 9.1.6 must be placed on a
corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached to the valve.
9.1.6.1 Pounds per hour of saturated steam at an overpres-
sure of 10 % of set pressure or 3 psi, whichever is greater, for
valves used in steam service; or
9.1.6.2 Gallon per minute of water at 70 op at an overpres-
sure of 10 % of set pressure or 3 psi, whichever is greater, for
valves used in water service; or
9.1.6.3 SCFM (standard cubic feet per minute at 60F and
14.7 psia) of air at an overpressure of 10% of set pressure or
3 psi, whichever is greater, for valves used in air or gas service.
9.1.6.4 For Type I valves (where the outlet size is larger than
the inlet size), the effective orifice area letter designation in
accordance with API 526 must be stamped.
9 .1. 7 Service fluid (line medium),
9.1.8 Manufacturers' serial number identifying the valve.
The serial number should be stamped on the body and placed
adjacent to the nameplate, and
F1508- 96 (2010)
9 .1. 9 Range of set pressure adjustment.
9.2 All connections (inlet, outlet, drain, and so forth) shall
be permanently marked to aid in correct installation of the
pressure relief valve.
10. Quality Assurance System
10.1 The manufacturer shall establish and maintain a quality
assurance system which will ensure that all the requirements of
this specification are satisfied. This system shall also ensure
that all valves will perform in a similar manner to those
representative valves subjected to original testing for determi-
nation of the operating and flow characteristics.
10.2 A written description of the system the manufacturer
will use shall be available for review and acceptance by the
purchaser or his designee.
NoTE 4--If supplementary requirement S4 is specified in 5.1.10, an
outline of subjects described in S4 shall be provided by the manufacturer.
10.3 The purchaser or his designee reserves the right to
witness the production tests and inspect the valves in the
manufacturer's plant to the extent specified on the purchase
order.
11. Keywords
11.1 angle style valves; pressure relief valves; spring-loaded
valves; valves
One or more of the following supplementary requirements Sl, S2, S3, S4, or S5 shall be applied
only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of those supplementary
requirements shall be agreed upon in writing between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Supplementary requirements shall in no way negate any requirement of the specification itself.
Sl. Examinations
S 1.1 Examination of Materials-Materials used in the
manufacture of valves shall be examined to determine confor-
mance to 6.3.1. Contracting agencies or their representatives
shall normally accept certifications that the material complies
with the specification; however, testing to demonstrate com-
pliance may be required.
S 1.2 Visual and Dimensional Examination-Visual and di-
mensional examination on sample valves shall be conducted to
determine conformance with the ordering data, interface di-
mensions, and workmanship without disassembly.
S1.3 Nondestructive Tests-When nondestructive tests such
as radiography, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant tests are
''"''-li'"'U"'u, they shall be specified in the ordering information
(see 5.1.10).
S2. Initial Qualification Testing
S2.1 Rated Relieving Capacity Test-The valve-rated re-
capacity data shall be obtained and certified by the
manufacturer by following the procedures outlined in Section
VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
S2.2 Endurance Test-The valve shall be cycled with the
test medium (see Table 15 for the test medium) 50
times. After each ten cycles, the set pressure and the leakage
shall be checked. Valve shall conform to the requirements
specified in 7.5 and 7 .8. There shall be no of instability
or damage to the seating surface.
S2.3 Mechanical Shock Test-The valve shall be tested in
accordance with the requirements of Grade A, Class I of
MIL-S-901. The valve shall be pressurized during test. There
shall be no structural damage or degradation to performance
capability.
S2.4 Vibration Test-The valve shall be tested in accor-
dance with Type I of MIL-STD-167 -1. At frequencies up to and
mc:imjm,g 33 Hz (unless otherwise in the ordering
information, see Section 5), there shall be no structural damage
or degradation to performance.
S2.5 Stuck Valve Test-With the valve set at the specified
set pressure, and not subjected to any inlet pressure, the valve
shall be left in the closed position for a minimum of 72 h. After
this 72-h period, the inlet pressure (see Table 15 for test
medium) shall be increased until the valve opens. Valve shall
conform to the requirement specified in 7 .5.
S3. Valve With Imposed Installation Limitations
S3.1 The test set up shall impose an inlet piping pressure
loss of 25 % of the blow down (or the maximum inlet
pressure loss, when specified in 5 .1. 7), and an outlet
pressure buildup of 10 % of set pressure (or the maximum
outlet piping pressure buildup, when specified in 5.1.7). Tests
outlined in 8.3 and S2.1 should be conducted to
conformance to 7.5-7.9.
S4. Quality Assurance
S4.1 Scope of Work-The written of the
assurance system shall include the scope and locations of the
work to which the system is ap]pli<;at,le.
S4.2 and Responsibility-The and re
sponsibility of those in charge of the quality assurance system
shall be established.
S4.3 Organization -An organization chart
relationship between management and the en;gin:ee1rm.g,
chasing, manufacturing, construction, inspection, and
control groups is required. The purpose of this chart to
and associate the various groups with
paJrtlc:ul::tr functions for which
rec1uiJren1entts are intended to
to establish, and from
form of organization
for its work. Persons peJrioJrmmg
have a well-defined respm1si1Jili1ty
1038
0 F1508 - 96 (201 0)
and the organizational freedom to identify quality control
problems, and to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
54.4 Review of Quality Assurance manufac-
turer shall ensure and demonstrate the continuous effectiveness
of the assurance system.
54.5 Design Calculations, and Specification
Control-The manufacturer's quality assurance system shall
include to ensure that the latest drawings,
calculations, specifications, and instructions, including
all authorized changes, are used for manufacture, examination,
inspection, and
54.6 Purchase Control-The manufacturer shall ensure that
all purchased material and services conform to specified
requirements and that all purchase orders give full details of the
material and services ordered.
54.7 Material Control-The manufacturer shall include a
system for material control which ensures that the material
received is properly identified and that any documen-
tation is present, identified to the material, and verifies com-
to The material control
system shall ensure that the intended material is used in
manufacture. The manufacturer shall maintain control of ma-
terial during the manufacturing process by a system that
identifies inspection status of material throughout all stages of
manufacture.
54.8 Manufacturing Control-The manufacturer shall en-
sure that manufacturing operations are carried out under
controlled conditions using documented work instructions. The
manufacturer shall provide for inspection, where appropriate,
for each operation that affects quality or shall arrange an
appropriate monitoring
S4.9 Quality Control Plan-The manufacturer's
control plan shall describe the fabrication utclutdmtg
examinations and inspections.
54.10 Welding-The quality control system shall include
provisions for ensuring that is in accordance with
specified requirements. Welders shall be to the
appropriate standards and the qualification records shall be
made available to the inspection authority if req1mred.
54.11 Nondestructive Examination-Provisions shall be
made to use nondestructive examination as necessary to ensure
that material and components with the
recJmJrenaerlts. Nondestructive examination shall be
conducted a national and their quali!tic<l-
tion records shaH be made available to
if required.
S4.12 Nonconforming Items-The manufacturer shall es-
tablish procedures for controlling items not in accordance with
the specified requirements.
S4.13 Heat Treatment-The manufacturer shall provide
controls to ensure that all required heat treatments have been
Means should be provided by which heat treatment
requirements can be verified.
54.14 Inspection Status-The manufacturer shall maintain
a system for identifying the inspection status of material during
all stages of manufacture and shall be able to distinguish
between inspected and noninspected material.
S4.15 Calibration of Measurement and Test Equipment-
The manufacturer shall provide, control, calibrate, and main-
tain inspection, measuring, and test equipment to be used in
verifying accordance with the specified requirements. Such
calibration shall be traceable to a national standard and
calibration records shall be maintained.
54.16 Records Maintenance-The manufacturer shall have
a system for the maintenance of inspection records, radio-
graphs, and manufacturer's data reports that describe the
achievement of the required quality and the effective operation
of the quality system.
54.17 Sample Forms-The forms used in the quality control
system and any detailed procedures for their use shall be
available for review. The written description of the quality
assurance system shall make reference to these forms.
S4.18 Inspection Authority-The manufacturer shall make
available to the inspection authority at the manufacturer's plant
a current copy of the written description of the quality
assurance system. The manufacturer's quality assurance sys-
tem shall provide for the inspection authority at the manufac-
turer's plant to have access to all drawings, calculations,
specifications, procedures, process sheets, repair procedures,
records, test results, and any other documents as necessary for
the inspection authority to perform its duties in accordance
with this supplementary requirement. The manufacturer may
1039
for such access by furnishing the inspection authority
with originals or copies of such documents.
S5. High-Integrity Body Valves
S5.1 These valves shall meet all the requirements of
HI construction. In addition, they shall have
bonnet construction and not have any penetrations in the valve
An accumulation of 25 % is permissible. The maximum
blowdown limit shall not exceed 15 % of the set pressure or 8
whichever is greater. These valves need not have the
adjustable blowdown feature.
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
APPENDIX
Xl. GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
X1.1 Scope-This appendix provides general guidance for
the selection and installation of pressure relief valves for
shipboard use, and therefore, its use does not in any way
relieve a shipbuilder of the final responsibility in the selection
and installation of pressure relief valves. This appendix does
not apply to boiler safety valves or hydraulic system relief
valves.
Xl.2 General-A properly designed, applied, and installed
pressure relief valve will begin to lift at a definite pressure (set
pressure), attain rated lift at a definite overpressure (accumu-
lation pressure), and subsequently reseat at a definite lower
pressure (blow down pressure) once the overpressure condition
at the source is corrected. For the pressure relief valve to
function properly, the pressure at the source and the pressure
differential that tends to hold the pressure relief valve disk in
the open position must be the same (within certain limits)
under all flowing conditions. Unstable operation (chatter) of a
properly designed but improperly installed relief valve will
occur when the pressure differential across the valve is not
maintained during flowing conditions. This can result from any
one of the following (or a combination of the following)
causes:
X 1.2.1 Restricted Inlet Piping-The inlet piping restricts
flow to the pressure relief valve, and sufficient flow from the
source to the pressure relief valve cannot be sustained.
X1.2.2 Restricted Source-The flow generated by the
source because of a particular failure is not sufficient to sustain
the required pressure at the pressure relief valve inlet.
X1.2.3 Restricted Discharge-The outlet piping restriction
results in a high backpressure buildup in the pressure relief
valve outlet section to affect valve operation.
X1.3 Restricted Inlet Piping-The pressure relief valve is
intended to control or limit the source pressure; however, the
only pressure that it actually senses, and therefore, reacts to at
any given instant, is the pressure immediately under the disk.
Actually, it responds to the pressure differential between the
valve inlet and valve outlet acting across the unbalanced disk
area. The effect of any valve outlet pressure will be considered
in Xl.5. Therefore, for the pressure relief valve to function
properly in response to a source condition, the pressure under
the pressure relief valve disk must accurately reflect the
pressure at the source at all times and under all flowing
conditions. Before lift, the source pressure and the pressure
under the disk are identical, since there is no flow of pressure
medium. However, once the valve lifts and begins to relieve
(discharge) fluid, there will be a pressure differential or
pressure drop between the source pressure and the pressure
under the disk, caused by the head loss through the inlet piping.
If this pressure drop is small relative to the blowdown of the
valve, the valve will remain open and continuously discharge
fluid until the pressure at the source is reduced below the set
pressure and normal and stable valve operation should result.
X1.3.1 However, where the relief operation is limited by the
inlet piping, the pressure drop during discharge may exceed the
valve blow down. If the pressure under the disk drops below the
blowdown setting, the valve will immediately reseat as soon as
it opens, even though the source pressure may still be above the
set pressure or continuing to rise. Once the valve reseats, the
valve stops relieving the fluid, and the pressure under the disk
will immediately rise to match the source pressure. Assuming
that the quantity of fluid discharged during this brief opening
was not sufficient to bring the source pressure down below the
set pressure, the valve will immediately reopen and a rapid
cycle will begin. The chattering will continue until
the pressure at the source is reduced, in stages, to a value below
the set pressure. Note that the rated capacity of the pressure
relief valve, and not the available source supply, is critical
since the pressure relief valve actually establishes the instan-
taneous or transient flow rate. Therefore, if the installation of a
pressure relief valve results in a pressure drop in the inlet
piping at the rated flow of the valve which approaches or
exceeds the blowdown value of the valve, and the valve
responds to an overpressure condition of any duration, chat-
tering may occur. A chattering operation of a pressure relief
valve will have the following detrimental effects:
X1.3.1.1 Damage to the valve (particularly the seating
surfaces) and the attached piping.
X1.3.1.2 Lowered Capacity-The actual effective relieving
capacity of a chattering pressure relief valve will be far below
its rated capacity, which is based on a continuous open valve.
X1.3.2 To prevent instability, the following criteria for
pressure relief valve inlet piping installation should be fol-
lowed: The inlet piping connecting a pressure vessel, tank, pipe
main, and other equipment being protected to the pressure
relief valve inlet should have a streamlined entrance and should
be as large in diameter, short in length, and direct as possible.
Any changes in direction (elbows, bends, and so forth) should
be avoided. The inlet piping should be arranged and sized so
that the total pressure drop in the inlet piping does not exceed
25 % of the blowdown of the pressure relief valve with a flow
rate equal to the rated capacity of the pressure relief valve. For
example, if a pressure relief valve is set at 100 psig and has
10% blowdown and a capacity rating of 50 gpm at 10 kJ
accumulation, then the inlet piping should be arranged and
sized so that it will pass a flow of 50 gpm with a pressure
1040
not exceeding 2.5 psi.
X1.3.3 From the above, it can be seen that a pressure relief
valve with very precise or narrow blowdown characteristics
generally requires an installation with a very short and direct
connection to the source. On the other hand, in
installations in which the inlet connection is restrictive, a wide
F1508 - 96 (201 0)
blowdown setting (where practical, based on other consider-
ations) can improve stability. Another solution, in cases in
which existing restrictive inlet piping cannot be replaced,
would be the installation of a pilot-operated valve sensing
directly to the source pressure. Since such a sensing line is
always a very low-flow system, the valve will normally
respond to the actual system pressure. As such, the pressure
under the valve disk should have little effect on operating
stability.
X1.3.4 Another possible solution to a chattering problem in
an existing installation is the substitution of a smaller size
pressure relief valve, where permissible, based on other con-
siderations. From a pressure drop standpoint, decreasing the
capacity of the pressure relief valve has the same relative effect
as increasing the size of the iniet piping. Where such a
substitution results in a stable operating pressure relief valve, it
can actually increase rather than decrease the effective protec-
tive capacity of a pressure relief valve installation.
Xl.4 Restricted Source-Chatter or unstable operation can
occur when the rate of excess flow generated by the source is
insufficient to sustain the valve in the open position during an
overpressure condition. The mechanics and effects of this
condition are the same as those resulting from restricted inlet
piping, the only difference being the basic cause. This condi-
tion of insufficiency can be the result of oversizing the pressure
relief valve in error or by deliberately oversizing the pressure
relief valve in an effort to be on the "safe side." This condition
can also result from applications in which the pressure relief
valve size is based on some maximum excess flow condition
(for example, wide open failure of an upstream regulating
valve) and the overpressure condition in most cases is caused
by a lesser failure (for example, damage to the regulating valve
seat) which results in far less excess flow requiring discharge.
When the pressure relief valve is merely oversized, it should be
replaced with a valve of the correct capacity. As noted earlier,
if such a substitution results in the elimination of a chattering
condition, the result could be an increase in the effective relief
protection capacity. In cases in which a variety of failures can
require widely differing relief capacities, consideration should
be given to installing two or more smaller size pressure relief
valves with staggered settings.
Xl.5 Restricted Discharge-The backpressure at the outlet
section of a pressure relief valve can have a detrimental effect
on valve operation. Under backpressure conditions, the pres-
sure relief valve capacity is reduced because the valve lift is
reduced by the increased pressure over the valve disk. Ideally,
a pressure relief valve should only respond to the inlet (or
source) pressure. However in valves that do not have a special
balanced construction, any increase in the backpressure (which
will have the effect of decreasing the pressure differential
available to hold the disk in the open position) can have a
similar effect on valve operation as a drop in the valve inlet
pressure. Also, superimposed backpressure can shift the effec-
tive set pressure of a pressure relief valve. The following
criteria for pressure relief valve discharge piping installation
should be followed: The discharge piping should be arranged
and sized so that the built-up backpressure does not cause
1041
unsatisfactory pressure relief valve operation, either from a
stability or capacity standpoint. In cases in which a built-up
backpressure in excess of 10 % of the set pressure, or where a
superimposed backpressure can exist in the discharge line, a
pressure relief valve of balanced design should be used.
Xl.6 Pressure Relief Valve Setting-To ensure good valve
operation, the spread between the maximum system operating
pressure and the pressure relief valve set pressure should
always be as wide as possible, consistent with economical and
safe system design. Pressure relief valves are generally set to
open at 10 % above the operating pressure. This margin will
improve seat tightness (by permitting a greater normal seating
load), decrease the number of times the valve is required to
operate, and decrease valve maintenance. It will permit using a
wider blowdown band, which can result in a more stable valve
operation.
X1.6.1 The two critical performance points in any pressure
relief valve installation are the accumulation pressure and the
blowdown pressure. The accumulation pressure (the maximum
overpressure which the pressure relief valve will permit the
source to reach) establishes the required design rating of the
equipment being protected. Therefore, the accumulation pres-
sure must be compatible with economical and practical system
and component design or with the ratings of systems and
components already designed or installed. The blowdown
pressure (the pressure, below the set pressure, to which the
source must drop before the pressure relief valve will reseat)
must always be above the maximum system operating pres-
sure.
X1.6.2 From an economical point of view, the blowdown
should be as short as possible. However, from the point of
stable valve operation, a high blowdown is desirable. A
compromise may therefore have to be accepted.
Xl.6.3 Ifthe blowdown pressure and the maximum system
operating pressure are too close together, or if they can cross
over, there is the possibility that a condition can be set up
where, after responding to an overpressure, the system must be
secured to stop the discharging of the pressure medium before
the pressure relief valve will reseat. The higher the valve set
pressure can be set above the maximum system operating
pressure, the wider (or less precise) the spread between the
accumulation and blowdown limits which can be permitted,
and therefore, the less critical pressure relief valve operation
becomes.
Xl.6.4 Therefore, the selection and installation of pressure
relief valve protection always involves compromises between
system design considerations and pressure relief valve design
considerations. As stated previously, the blowdown and accu-
mulation are the only critical pressure relief valve performance
points from a system standpoint. The actual set pressure is of
little importance aside from providing a reference for setting
and checking the valve. If the blowdown pressure and accu-
mulation pressure meet system requirements, the set pressure
can fall anywhere in between.
X1.7 Installation Forces-Forces transmitted to a pressure
relief valve by thermal stresses, forced alignment of piping,
F1508- 96 (2010)
and inadequate supports tend to distort the valve body. These
forces should be avoided since the operation of pressure relief
valves is particularly sensitive to such influences. The piping
must also be designed and adequately supported to withstand
the reactive forces associated with pressure relief valve
discharge.
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
COPYRIGHT/).
1042
Designation: F1510- 07 An American National Standard
6/NTERNJI.TIONJU.
-----
Positive Pumps, Ships Use
1
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapprovaL
and construction of rotary positive pumps
shJlDborucd use. The classes of service are shown in Section
4.
1.2 This specification will not include pumps for hydraulic
service or cargo unloading applications.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A27/ A 27M Specification for Steel Carbon, for
General Application
A36/ A36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A48/ A48M Specification for Gray Iron Castings
A53/ A53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
A 159 Specification for Automotive Gray Iron Castings
AI93/Al93M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Service and. Other Special Purpose Applications
A 194/Al94M Specification for Carbon and AHoy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
or Both
A322 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades
A354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
A395/A395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron
tures
A434 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or
Cold-Finished, Quenched and Ternpe:red
A449 for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,
Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use
1
Current edition approved Dec. l, 2007. Published December 2007. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as FlSl0-01(2006).
DOl: 10.1520/Fl510-07.
2
the ASTM website.
A515/A515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Car-
bon Steel, for Intermediate- and Ser-
vice
A536 Specification for Ductile Iron
A563 Specification for Carbon and AHoy Steel Nuts
A564/A564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
A574 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws
A582/ A582M Specification for Free-Machining Stainless
Steel Bars
A 743/ A 743M Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium,
Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General
Application
B 150M Specification for Aluminum Bronze, Rod, Bar, and
Shapes [Metric] (Withdrawn 2002)
3
B584 Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications
D 1418 Practice for Rubber and Rubber Latices-
Nomenclature
motive Applications
F104 Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materi-
als
F912 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket Set Screws
F15ll Specification for Mechanical Seals for Shipboard
Pump Applications
2.2 ANSI Standard:
4
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
2.3 SAE Standards:
5
AS 568A Aerospace Size Standard for
J 429 Mechanical and Material Requirements for LA.Lv!.IJ<u . l
Threaded Fasteners
2.4 AMS Standard:
5
3215 Acrylonitrile Butadiene (NBR) Rubber Aromatic Fuel
Resistant 65-75
3
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St...
5
Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001, http://www.sae.org.
Copyright ASTM ln!tO>rnational, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1043
0 F1510-07
2.5 ABMA Standards:
6
9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
2.6 AGMA Standard?
390.03 Gear Classification, Materials and Measuring Meth-
ods for Unassembled Gears
2.7 API Standard:
8
676 Positive Displacement Pumps-Rotary
9
MIL-S-901
MIL-STD-167
MIL-STD-740
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3 .1.1 capacity-the quantity of fluid actually delivered per
unit of time at the rated speed, including both the liquid and
dissolved or entrained gases, under stated operating conditions.
In the absence of any gas or vapor entering or forming within
the pump, the capacity is equal to the volume displaced per unit
of time, less slip.
3.1.2 capacity, maximum-the quantity of fluid delivered
that does not exceed the limit determined by the formula in 9 .2.
3.1.3 displacement-the volume displaced per revolution of
the rotor(s). In pumps incorporating two or more rotors
operating at different speeds, the displacement is the volume
displaced per revolution of the driving rotor. Displacement
depends only on the physical dimensions of the pumping
elements.
3 .1.4 dry operation-a brief run during priming or stripping
with suction and discharge lines unrestricted and pump cham-
ber wet with liquid but pumping only air or vapor available
from the suction.
3.1.5 efficiency, mechanical-the ratio of the pump power
output (hydraulic horsepower) to the pump power input (brake
horsepower) expressed in percent.
3.1.6 efficiency, volumetric-the ratio of the pump's capac-
ity to the product of the displacement and the speed expressed
in percent.
3.1.7 fuel, clean-fuel purified for direct use.
3.1.8 fuel, dirty-fuel before purification which may contain
water and some solids.
3.1.9 net positive inlet pressure available (NPIPA)-the
total inlet pressure available from the system at the pump inlet
connection at the rated flow, minus the vapor pressure of the
liquid at the pumping temperature.
3.1.10 net positive inlet pressure required (NPIPR)-the net
pressure above the liquid vapor pressure at rated flow and
6
Available from American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA), 2025
M Street, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036, http://www.abma-dc.org/.
7
Available from American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA), 500
Montgomery St., Suite 350, Alexandria, VA 22314-1581, http://www.agma.org.
8
Available from American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L. St., NW, Wash-
ington, DC 20005-4070, http://api-ec.api.org.
9
Available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing
Office, Washington, DC 20402.
pumping temperature and at the pump inlet connection re-
quired to avoid performance impairment due to cavitation.
3.1.11 pressure, cracking-sometimes called set pressure,
start-to-discharge pressure, or popping pressure-the pressure
at which the relief valve just starts to open. This pressure
cannot be determined readily if the relief valve is internal to the
pump and it bypasses the liquid within the pump.
3.1.12 pressure, differential-the difference between dis-
charge pressure and inlet pressure.
3.1.13 pressure, discharge-the pressure at the outlet of the
pump. Discharge pressure is sometimes called outlet pressure.
3.1.14 pressure, inlet-the total pressure at the inlet of the
pump. Inlet pressure is sometimes called suction pressure.
3.1.15 pressure, maximum allowable working-the maxi-
mum continuous pressure for which the manufacturer has
designed the equipment (or any part to which the term is
referred) when handling the specified fluid at the specified
temperature. This pressure should not be greater than 213 of the
hydn>st<:ttic test pressure of the pressure containing parts.
3 .1.16 rated condition-defined by discharge pressure, inlet
pressure, capacity, and viscosity.
3.1.17 rotary pump-a positive displacement pump consist-
ing of a casing containing gears, screws, lobes, cams, vanes,
shoes, or similar elements actuated by relative rotation between
the drive shaft and the casing. There are no inlet and outlet
valves. These pumps are characterized by their close running
clearances.
3.1.18 slip-the quantity of fluid that leaks through the
internal clearances of a rotary pump per unit of time. Slip
depends on the internal clearances, the differential pressure, the
characteristics of the fluid handled and in some cases, the
speed.
3.1.19 speed, maximum allowable (in revolutions per
minute )-the highest speed at which the manufacturers' design
will permit continuous operation.
3.1.20 speed, minimum allowable (in revolutions per
minute)-the lowest speed at which the manufacturers' design
3.1.21 speed, rated-the number of revolutions per minute
of the driving rotor required to meet the rated conditions.
3.1.22 suction lift-a term used to define a pump's capabil
ity to induce a partial vacuum at the pump inlet.
3.1.23 temperature, maximum allowable-the maximum
continuous temperature for which the manufacturer has de-
signed the equipment (or any part to which the term is referred)
when handling the specified fluid at the specified pressure.
4. Classification
1044
4.1 Pumps will be classified as follows:
4.1.1 Types:
4.1.1.1 Type //-Screws with timing gears.
4.1.1.2 Type ///-Screws without timing gears.
4.1.1.3 Type /V-Impellers with timing gears.
4.1.1.4 Type V-External gear (spur, helical, herringbone,
lobe).
<0 F1510- 07
4.1.1.5 Type VIII-Internal gear, internal rotary lobe.
4.1.1.6 Type X-Vane (sliding).
4.1.1. 7 Type XI-Sliding shoe.
4.1.2 Classes:
4.1.2.1 Class A-Aqueous film forming foam, AFFF.
4.1.2.2 Class B-Bromine.
4.1.2.3 Class CD-Clean distillate fuel, viscosity 32 to 100
SSU (2 to 21 centistokes) (for example, jet fuel, JP-5, fuel).
4.1.2.4 Class CH-Clean heavy fuel, viscosity 100 to 1500
SSU (21 to 325 centistokes) (propulsion fuel).
4.1.2.5 Class DD-Dirty distillate fuel, viscosity 32 to 100
SSU (2 to 21 centistokes) (for example, transfer, stripping,
purifier feed, leak-off).
4.1.2.6 Class DH-Dirty heavy oil, viscosity 32 to 4000
SSU (2 to 863 centistokes) (for example, waste oil, transfer,
stripping, purifier feed, drains).
4.1.2.7 Class G-Gasoline, aviation gasoline, gasohol.
4.1.2.8 Class LM-Lube oil, viscosity 130 to 4000 SSU (27
to 863 centistokes) (for example, propulsion, SSTG, control,
L.O. service).
4.1.2.9 Class !A-Auxiliary L.O. 130 to 4000 SSU (27 to
863 centistokes) service and L.O. transfer.
4.1.2.1 0 Class M-Miscellaneous.
4.1.2.11 Class W-Heavily contaminated seawater, viscos-
ity 32 to 4000 SSU (2 to 863 centistokes) (bilge stripping, oily
waste transfer).
5. Ordering Data
5.1 The ordering activity shall provide manufacturers with
all of the following information:
5 .1.1 Title, number, and date of specification,
5.1.2 Type and classification, see Section 4,
5.1.3 Capacity in gallons per minute or litres per minute at
rated discharge pressure,
5.1.4 Discharge pressure in pound-force per square inch
gauge (psig) or kilopascal (kPa) gauge.
5.1.5 Airborne noise levels (if different than 7.5),
5.1.6 Viscosity (only if different than Section 4),
5.1.7 Mounting configuration (vertical, horizontal),
5.1.8 Driver type (motor, turbine, engine, attached),
5.1.9 Driver characteristics or specifications, or both,
5.1.10 Relief valve cracking pressure and full-flow bypass
pressure,
5.1.11 Packaging and boxing requirements (immediate use,
domestic; storage, domestic; overseas),
5.1.12 Quantity of pumps,
5.1.13 Quantity of drawings,
5.1.14 Quantity of technical manuals,
5.1.15 Quantity of test reports,
5.1.16 Performance test, if required,
5.1.17 Certified data required, and
5.1.18 Instruction plates and locations, if required.
6. Materials
6.1 Pump component parts shall be constructed of the
materials shown in Table 1.
1045
6.2 Materials other than shown in Table I are considered
exceptions and are subject to approval by the purchaser before
usage.
7. General Requirements
7.1 Pumps shall be designed for a 20-year service life.
7.2 Pumps shall be capable of sustained operation during
inclinations up to 45 in any direction.
7.3 The pumps shall be capable of withstanding environ-
mental vibration induced by shipboard machinery and equip-
ment in the frequency range from 4 to 25 Hz.
7.4 The internally excited vibration levels of the pump shall
not exceed 0.003-in. (0.00762-mm) displacement peak to peak
during rated operation when readings are measured on the
pump case near the coupling perpendicular to the pump shaft.
7.5 At normal operating conditions, the airborne noise level
of the pump shall not exceed 85 dBA.
7.6 The pump driver (electric motor, air motor, turbine,
hydraulic motor, diesel engine, attached) shall be as specified
in the ordering data. The driver shall be sized for maximum
flow at the relief valve full-flow bypass pressure, at maximum
viscosity. If a two-speed motor is specified for high-viscosity
Class LM applications, the motor size shall be based on power
required at low speed, which is used during cold startup.
7.7 If a reduction gear is required between the driver and the
pump, it shall be provided by the pump manufacturer. Reduc-
tion gears shall meet the requirements of AGMA 390.03. Gears
shall be AGMA Class 7 or better, pinions shall be AGMA Class
8 or better, and bearings shall be designed for a L 10 life of
15 000 h.
7.8 Horizontal pumps may be mounted on a common
horizontal bedplate with the driving unit or mounted directly to
the driver. Vertical pumps may be mounted with a bracket to
the driving unit or mounted directly to the driver.
7.9 All pump units shall incorporate guards over couplings,
belts, and other external rotating parts.
7.10 The mounting arrangement shall be sufficiently rigid to
assure alignment is maintained between the pump and the
driver in accordance with the conditions in 7 .2, 7.3, and 8.1.
7.11 Seating surfaces of mounting bedplates, bracket
mounting plates, or other mounting arrangements shall be
machined.
7.12 Mounting bedplates, brackets, and plates shall be
provided with holes of sufficient size and quantity to assure
adequate attachment to shipboard foundation or mounting
structure.
7.13 Vertical units with face mounted motors shall be
arranged so there are four ( 4) possible orientations of motor
driver to pump. Other drivers are to be oriented in accordance
with the ordering information.
7.14 Vertical units that are motor driven shall be assembled
with the conduit box mounted over the pump inlet flange,
unless otherwise specified.
Component
Casings, heads, and
covers
Shafts
Rotors
Rotor housings,
liners, and disks
Glands
Bedplates and
brackets
Timing gears
Class A, B, CD, G
ductile iron
ductile iron
leaded tin bronze
carbon steel
steel
carbon steel
stainless steel
alloy steel
cast gray iron
ductile iron (80-55-
06
only)
leaded tin bronze
cast gray iron
ductile iron
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
tin bronze
stainless steel
structural steel
ductile iron
nitrided steel
Class CH, LM, LA
ductile iron
ductile iron
cast steel
leaded tin bronze
carbon steel
steel
carbon steel
stainless steel
alloy steel
cast gray iron
ductile iron
alloy steel
leaded tin bronze
cast gray iron
ductile iron
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
tin bronze
stainless steel
structural steel
ductile iron
carbon steel
nitrided steel
aluminum bronze
0 F1510-07
TABLE 1 Materials
Class DD, DH
ductile iron
leaded tin bronze
carbon steel
stainless steel
cast gray iron
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
cast gray iron
ductile iron
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
tin bronze
stainless steel
structural steel
nitrided steel
stainless steel
Class W Specification (UNS)
ASTM A395/A395M or A536, Gr. 60-40-18
ASTM A536, Br. 80-55-06
ASTM A27/A27M, Gr. 65-35
leaded tin bronze ASTM B584 (C93700)
ASTM A53/ A53M
ASTM A434, Gr. 4140, CI.BC
AISI1141
stainless steel ASTM A582/A582M (S41600) and ASTM
A564/A564M Gr. 630
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
stainless steel
leaded tin bronze
stainless steel
structural steel
nitrided steeiA
stainless steel
(817400)
ASTM A322
ASTM A159, Gr. G3500 or ASTM A48/A48M,
Cl. 35-50
or 25-50
ASTM A536, Gr. 60-40-18, 80-55-06, or 120-
90-02
AISI 4150 RS, H.T.
ASTM A582/A582M (S41600)
ASTM B584 (C93700)
ASTM A 1 59, Gr. G3500
ASTM A536, Gr. 60-40-18
ASTM A564/A564M, Gr. 630 (817400)
ASTM 8584 (C93700)
ASTM 8584 (C90300)
ASTM A743/A743M, Gr. CF8M (J92900)
ASTM A36/ A 36M
ASTM A395/A395M 5, Gr. 60-40-18
ASTM A515/A515M
ASTM A434, Gr. 4140, CI.BC
ASTM 8150M
ASTM A582/ A582M
THE FOLLOWING MATERIALS ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL CLASSES
bolts, screws, nuts)
0-rings and other
elastomers
Gaskets
Vanes and shoes
medium carbon alloy steel nuts
austenitic stainless steel (304/316)
austenitic stainless steel (304/316)
medium carbon steel bolts and studs
medium carbon steel nuts
high-strength alloy steel bolts and studs
high-strength alloy steel nuts
alloy steel socket-head cap screws
alloy steel socket set screws
fluorocarbon (viton, fluorel, or equal)
plant and animal fiber
fluorocarbon
nitrile (Buna-N or equal)
leaded tin bronze
thermoset
AOutside of pumpage when separately lubricated.
7.15 Couplings between the pump and the driver shall be
keyed to both shafts.
7. 16 Alignment between the pump and the driver shall not
exceed 0.005-in. (0.13-mm) offset and 0.0005-in./in. (0.01-
mrnlmm) angularity.
7.17 An external (separate) relief valve shall not be pro-
vided with the pump unless otherwise The
shall provide the pressure and the fullftow
pressure of the system relief valve to the pump manufacturer.
1046
ASTM A194/Ai94M, Gr. 7
ASTM A193/Ai93M, Gr. 88/BBM
ASTM Ai94/A194M, Gr. 8/8M
ASTM A449, Gr 1 (equivalent to SAE Gr 5)
ASTM A563, Gr B (equivalent to SAE Gr 5)
ASTM A354, Gr. BD (equivalent to SAE Gr
8)
ASTM A563, Gr. DH (equivalent to SAE Gr
B)
ASTM A574
ASTM F912
SAE J 429, Gr. 5, 5.1, 8, or 8.1
ASTM 01418 Class: FKM, AS 568A, ASTM
02000 Type and Class: HK
ASTM F104, I.D. No. P 3313B
ASTM 02000 Type and Class: HK, ASTM
01418 Class: FKM
AMS 3215
ASTM B584 (C93700)
None
7.18 Direction of rotation shall be indicated an
cast into the pump or a label attached to the pump.
7.19 Inlet and outlet connections shall be indicated
label plate attached to each
F1510-07
be in accordance with ANSI B 16.5 flat face, unless otherwise
stated in the ordering data. Flanged connections shall meet the
requirements in API Standard 676, Paragraph 2.4.7. Spool
piece adapters (threaded and seal welded, or 0-ring sealed to
the pump case on one end and flanged on the other end) may
be furnished to meet the flanged inlet and outlet requirement.
8.2 Pump cases shall be equipped with vent, drain, inlet, and
outlet gauge connections. The connection shall straight
thread with an seal. Tapered pipe thread connections are
prohibited. Small pumps do not require vent, drain, and gauge
connections.
8.3 Materials for the pump shall be with the
fluid being and the operating parameters to be
encountered maximum pressure and temperature
extremes stated in the ordering data.
8.4 shall be equipped with radial and thrust bearings
as necessary to counteract any unbalanced forces in the pump
and to ensure that the pump will operate satisfactorily in
accordance with 7.2.
8.5 Bearings shall be securely fitted (by snap rings, shoul-
ders, or other means) to prevent axial movement. Bearing
housings shall be integral to the pump case or secured to the
pump case in such a manner as to ensure alignment. Usage of
bolts alone is not considered sufficient to ensure alignment.
8.6 Bearings may be sealed and self-lubricated or externally
lubricated or may be lubricated by the liquid being pumped.
8.7 Rolling contact bearings shall be selected in accordance
with AFBMA standards and shall have a minimum L 10 life of
15 000 has calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9
or 11 as aptJfOIPri::tte.
8.8 Pumps shall be equipped with mechanical shaft seals, in
accordance with Specification Fl511. The installation shall
ensure that adequate circulation of liquid at the seal faces
occurs to minimize deposit of foreign matter and provide
adequate lubrication of the seal faces.
8.9 Mechanical seals shall be positioned or located on the
shaft axially, a positive means such as a stub, step, or
shoulder positively located on the pump shaft. Set screws shall
not be used to position seals or seal sleeves axially. An
antirotation may be provided to prevent the mechanical
seal-mating from rotating.
8.10 When required by the ordering data, the pump shall be
eQlllPJJed with a backup packing box. The design shall allow
for installation two or more rings of packing for use in the
event of a mechanical seal failure. The packing shall be
able to be inserted without having to remove the mechanical
seaL
head or end covers, or both, shall be located to
a means such as rabbet, dowels, or to
8.13 Fasteners shall be selected from Table l taking into
consideration temperature of operation, mechanical properties,
and corrosion resistance.
9.1 Pumps shall deliver the rated capacity at 10-psia (69-
k:Pa absolute) inlet pressure while operating at the parameters
specified in the ordering data.
9.2 The maximum capacity of the pump shall not exceed the
amount determined by the following formula:
Qmax 7" Q [ 1 + J (1)
where:
Q rated capacity and
maximum allowable capacity, at minimum viscos-
ity. Qmax shall be rounded to the nearest whole
number.
9.3 Capacity of all classes (except DH) pumps shall not be
less than the value stated in 5 .1.3 at the rated conditions, with
minimum viscosity.
9.4 Class DH pumps shall meet the capacity requirements at
4000 SSU (863 centistokes) and shall not be damaged
continuous operation at 32 SSU (2 centistokes).
9.5 Class LM & LA pumps shall meet the capacity require-
ments at 130 SSU (27 centistokes) and driver horsepower shall
be determined based on 4000 SSU (863 centistokes).
10. Painting and Coatings
10.1 Painting-External unmachined and nonmating ma-
chined surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted.
10.2 Painting external surfaces of nonferrous parts and
components is not required but is permissible to avoid exces-
sive masking. Identification and information plates shall not be
painted or oversprayed.
11. Equipment Identification and Instruction Plates
11.1 Identification plates shall be made of brass or stainless
steel and furnished on each pump unit.
11.2 Instruction plates shall be made of brass, stainless steel,
or plastic when furnished on each pump unit.
11.3 Plates shall be secured to equipment with corrosion-
resistant metallic fasteners.
1047
11.4 Pump unit identification plates shall contain data as
follows:
11.4.1 Manufacturer's name.
11.4.2 Manufacturer's model or type and size.
11.4.3 Service application.
11.4.4 Manufacturer's serial number.
11.4.5 Salient design characteristics if applicable.
11.4.5.1 Capacity.
11.4.5.2 Discharge pressure.
11.4.5.3 Pump rated (RPM).
units such as the driver, controller, pump,
and shall have an identification in accordance
F1510-07
with the applicable equipment specification. If not specified,
the manufacturer shall use its commercial nameplate.
12. Testing Requirements
12.1 General-All equipment shall be tested in accordance
with 12.2 and 12.3. The first unit of a new design or size shall
be tested in accordance with 12.4 and I 2.5.
12.1.1 Equipment for specified tests shall be provided by
the manufacturer.
12.1.2 Acceptance of tests does not constitute a waiver of
requirements to meet performance under specified operating
conditions, nor does inspection relieve the manufacturer of his
responsibilities.
12.1.3 The manufacturer shall maintain a complete log of
the tests performed and shall prepare the required number of
copies of the test report, certified as to correctness.
12.2 Hydrostatic Test-Pressure-containing parts shall be
tested hydrostatically with liquid at a minimum of 1 V2 times
the maximum allowable working pressure but at not less than
50-lb/in.
2
(345-kPa) gauge. The hydrostatic test shall be
considered satisfactory when no leaks are observed for a
minimum of 5 min. Seepage past internal closures required for
segmented casing testing and operating of the hydrostatic test
pump to maintain pressure will be accepted.
12.3 Mechanical Running Test-The pump manufacturer
shall conduct a test on all pumps to ensure that rated capacity
is achieved at the rated condition. Such tests may be performed
with other than the specified liquid if the viscosity is equal to
the minimum viscosity for the class of pump being tested. A
viscosity up to 50 SSU greater than the minimum viscosity
may be used. Differential pressure may be measured in lieu of
inlet pressure and discharge pressure.
12.4 Performance Test-The pump manufacturer shall op-
erate a pump at the manufacturing facility or approved test
facility to obtain complete test data when required by the
ordering document (5.1.15). The pump shall be tested at rated
speed, discharge pressure, viscosity, and 10-psia (69-kPa
absolute) inlet pressure. The pump shall meet rated capacity at
this condition and shall meet the airborne noise levels in 7.5.
This test is normally required for new types, new designs, or
new applications of pumps.
12.5 Certified Data-Certified performance data or curves
shall be supplied when required, see 1.16.
13. Technical Documents
13.1 An outline or top drawing of the unit (pump and driver)
shall be furnished. Length, width, height, mounting details, and
connections shall be dimensioned.
13.2 Complete performance curves shall be furnished. The
curves may be on graphs which can be printed on notebook
size paper.
1048
13.3 Pump drawings shall include a sectional assembly
drawing. The sectional assembly drawing shall contain a
complete list of materials or reference to a list of materials
drawing, which shall be provided.
13.4 Brackets, bedplates, guards, couplings, identification
plates, rotation arrows, and so forth shall be shown on the
outline drawing.
13.5 Any subassembly made up of parts that require special
alignment or assembly methods that cannot be disassembled,
repaired, and reassembled onboard ship without the use of
special tools and jigs shall be indicated as a &ubassembly in the
list of material.
13.6 Drawings for driver and associated equipment shall be
in accordance with their respective specifications.
13.7 The weight and center of gravity (calculated or actual)
of the unit shall be indicated on the outline drawing.
13.8 Instruction books or technical manuals shall be pre-
for each different type or size of pump installed. A single
shall contain not more than one type or size of pump.
However, when several pumps are installed in a ship that are
identical except for type of driver, they may be included in a
single manual.
13.9 Piece (item or find) numbers of parts referred to in
technical manuals shall match the piece numbers shown on
pump drawings.
13.10 Technical manuals shall contain reproductions of
pump drawings.
13.11 Quantities of technical manuals shall be in accordance
with the order.
14. Packaging and Preservation
14.1 Pumps, pump units, and accessories shall be packaged
and preserved in accordance with Practice D3951, and the
following:
14.2 Preservation-Items susceptible to deterioration or
damage from environmental elements shall be preserved.
Noncoated ferrous surfaces shall be preserved.
14.3 Cushioning and Bracing-Items susceptible to damage
during shipment and handling shall be cushioned or shall be
securely braced or blocked, or both, within the shipping
container, to avoid damage.
14.4 Container Marking-Containers, boxes, or packages
shall be clearly marked with the ship to address, contract or
purchase order number, shipping point address, and item
nomenclature.
15. Keywords
15.1 positive displacement pump; pump; rotary pump;
shipboard pump
0 F1510 -07
The following supplementary requirements established by the U.S. Navy, Commander Naval Sea
Systems Command (NAVSEA) shall apply when specified in the contract or purchase order. When
there is a conflict between the specifications and this section, requirements of this section shall take
precedence.
S 1.1 Materials other than shown in 1 are considered
exceptions and are subject to approval by NAVSEA.
S 1.2 The pumps shall be capable of withstanding environ-
ment in the frequency range of 4 to 25 Hz and be in accordance
with MIL-STD-167, Type 1. Maximum single frequency dis-
placement (double amplitude) in the 4- to 15-Hz range is 0.060
in. (1.524 mm) and in the 16- to 25-Hz range is 0.040 in. (1.016
mm).
S 1.3 The internally excited vibration levels of the pump shall
be in accordance with MIL-STD-167, Type II and shall not
exceed 0.003-in. (0.076-mm) displacement peak to peak during
rated operation when readings are measured on the pump case
near the coupling perpendicular to the pump shaft.
S 1.4 At the conditions in Section the airborne noise level
of the pump unit shall meet the requirements in .1 (see
MIL-STD-7 40-1).
S 1.5 At the conditions in Section the structure borne noise
level of the pump unit shall meet the requirements in
S 1 (see MIL-STD-740-2).
Sl.6 Pumps shall meet the requirements of MIL-S-901 HI
(High Impact) Shock, Grade A.
S 1. 7 Mechanical shaft seals shall be in accordance with
Specification F 1511 , including Supplement S l. An anti-
rotation pin shall be provided for seal 0-ring mating rings in
shaft sizes 1 in. and larger, when the pump will be handling
viscosus fluids over 130 ssu (27 centistrokes). Pin diameter and
length shall be compatible with the slot in the ring.
S 1.8 Qualification Tests-The first pump of each size, type,
or design shall meet the following qualification tests. All tests
shall be performed with the motor size required at rated
condition as indicated in Section 9.
S 1.9 Performance Test-The pump shall be tested at the
conditions in Section 9 to demonstrate that the pump is capable
of delivering the required capacity. Record all test data
including electrical power input for comparision to perfor-
mance retest results (see S 1.15).
S.l.10 Vibration Type II Test-The pump shall be tested to
demonstrate the ability to meet the requirements of Sl.3.
Record all test data, including electrical power input, for
comparison to performance retest results (see Sl.15).
S 1. 11 Noise Tests-The pump shall be tested to demonstrate
the ability to meet the requirements of S 1.4 and S 1.5. Record
all test data, including electrical power input, for comparison to
performance retest results (see S1.15).
S1.12 Vibration Type I Test-The pump shall be tested to
demonstrate the ability to meet the requirements of S 1.2.
S 1.13 Shock Test-The pump shall be tested to demonstrate
the ability to meet the requirements of S 1.6.
S 11.14 Endurance Test-The endurance test shall consist of
a running test of not less than 500 h of actual running time at
rated condition. The 500 h shall be broken by at least three rest
periods of 8 h or more each. A minimum of ten start -stop cycles
shall be performed during the course of the test.
S 1.15 Performance Retest-Upon completion of the tests in
Sl.9 through Sl.l4, repoeat the performance test (Sl.9), the
Vibration Type II test (S 1.10), and the noise test (S 1.11 ).
Record all test data.
S 1.16 Test Reports-A test report shall be submitted for each
test conducted. Quantity and format as defined in the ordering
data.
TABLE S1.1 Octave Band Sound Pressure levels
31.5
91
63
88
125
85
Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz
250 500 1000
82 79 76
2000
73
4000
70
8000
67
TABLE S1.2 Acceptable Structureborne Vibratory Acceleration Acceptance Criteria in Adb re 10 1Jm/s
2
(Reference Mll-STD-74Q-2)
Octave Band Center in Hz
31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Resiliently 85 88 90 93 95 98 100 103 105
mounted
pumps
Solidly 75 78 80 83 85 88 90 93 95
mounted
pumps
1049
0 F1510-07
COPYRIGHT/).
1050
Designation: F1511 -11

INTERNATIOIJAII.
Mechanical Seals for Shipboard Pump Applications
1
1.
1.1 This specification covers mechanical end-face seals for
ceiiltfjifu.gal and positive displacement pumps for shipboard use.
1.2 The following types of seals are not included in this
specification: lip seals, oil seals, circumferential seals, or
labyrinth seals.
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard. A companion hard metric
standard is in the process of preparation.
1.4 Special requirements for U.S. Navy Shipboard Pump
Applications are included in Supplement S 1.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A 108 Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
Finished
Al82/Al82M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and
A240/ A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
A313/ A313M Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire
A351/A351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts
A436 Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings
1
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as F1511- 09. DOI:
IO.l520/Fl511-ll.
2
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book ofASTM
the ASTM website.
A494/A494M Specification for Castings. Nickel and Nickel
Alloy
A564/A564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
A579/ A579M Specification for Superstrength Steel
Forgings
A693 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening Stainless
and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and
A7 44/ A 7 44M Specification for Castings, , Iron-Chromium-
Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service
B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings
B 127 Specification for Nickel-Copper AHoy (UNS N04400)
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
B 164 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Wire
B 166 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS
N06600, N0660 L N06603, N06690, N06693, N06025,
N06045, and N06696), Nickel-Chromium-Cobalt-
Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N06617), and Nickel-Iron-
Chromium-Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06674) Rod, Bar, and
Wire
B 168 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS
N06600. N06601, N06603, N06690, N06693. N06025,
N06045, and N06696), Nickel-Chromium-Cobalt-
Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N06617), and Nickel-Iron-
Chromium-Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06674) Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
B27l Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Centrifugal Cast-
ings
B333 Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
B335 Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum Alloy Rod
B338 Specification for Seamless and Welded Titanium and
Titanium Alloy Tubes for Condensers and Heat
ers
B348 Specification for Titanium and Titanium Alloy Bars
and Billets
B367 Specification for Titanium and Titanium Alloy Cast-
1051
0 F1511 -11
B443 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-
Columbium N06625) and Nickel-Chromium-
Molybdenum-SiliconAlloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
B446 Xr>c>;>.ct''"'"'"''"
N06625), Nickel-Chromium-
(UNS N06219), and Nickel-
Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06650)
Rod and Bar
B472 for Nickel Alloy Billets and Bars for
B473 for UNS N08020, UNS N08024, and
UNS N08026 Nickel Bar and Wire
B505/B505M Continuous
B584 Specification for Copper Sand Castings for
B637 for
Bars. Stock
for Moderate or High Service
B670 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening Nickel
(UNS N07718) Plate, Sheet, and for
Temperature Service
D 1141 Practice for the
Water
of Substitute Ocean
Dl418 Practice for Rubber and Rubber Latices-
Nomenclature
D3294 for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Resin Molded Sheet and Molded Basic Shapes
03951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
2.2 ASQ Standards:
3
ZL4 American Society of Quality, Quality Confor-
mance
2.3 ANSI Standards:
4
ANSI Y 14.1 Drawing Sheet Size and Format
ANSI Y14.2 Line Convention and Lettering
ANSI Y14.3 Multi and Sectional View Drawings
ANSI Y 14.5 and Tolerancing for Engineering
Drawings
ANSI Y14.6 Screw Thread
ANSI Y 14.26.3 Computer-Aided Preparation of Production
Definition Data, Terms and Definitions
5
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.l. Impact); Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment & Systems, Requirements for
MIL-P-16789 Packaging of Pumps, Including Prime Movers
and Associated Repair Parts
MIL-STD-167 -1 Environmental Vibration
2.5 ISO Standard:
4
ISO 9001 for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Ser-
vice
3
Available from American Society for Quality (ASQ), 600 N. Plankinton Ave.,
Milwaukee, WI 53203, http://www.asq.org.
4
5
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, Attn: NPODS.
2.6 SAE Standards:
6
AMS 7259 Rings, Sealing, Fluorocarbon Rubber
High-Temperature---Fluid Resistant Low
Set 85 to 95
AMS 7276 Fluorocarbon (FKM) Rubber
High-Temperature-Fluid Resistant Low
Set 70 to 80
AMS 3216 Fluorocarbon (FKM) Rubber,
Temperature-Fluid Resistant, Low ComT)re.ssliDn, Set 70
to 80
AMS 3218 Fluorocarbon (FKM) Hubber,
Temperature-Fluid Resistant, Low Set 85
to 95
J 1926-1 Standard Dimensions for Gasket Seal
Thrcad Tube
2. 7 Other Document:
DS56I Metals and in the Unified
3. Terminology
3.1 Refer to Annex Al for terminology relating to mechani-
seals.
4. Classification of Seal Arrangements
4.1 For this specification, mechanical seals shall be classi--
fied by type, grade, and class. The categories are divided by
application arrangement in the equipment in which it is
installed:
4.1.1 Type A-Inside Single Mounted Seals
4.1.2 Type B-Outsidc Single Mounted Seals
4.1.3 Type C-Double Seals
4.1.4 TypeD-Tandem Seals
4.1.5 Type E-Gas Seals
4.1.6 Type F-Special Arrangements/Applications Vacuum
or Gas Seal
4.1.7 Grade 1-Basic End Face Seal
4.1.8 Grade 2-Cartridge Seal
4.1.9 Grade 3-Split Seal
4.1.10 Class 0-Nonsplit Seal Assembly
1052
4.1.11 Class 1-Partial Split Seal Assembly, Solid Gland
4.1.12 Class 2-Partial Split Seal Assembly, Split Gland
4.1.13 Class 3-Fully Split Seal Assembly, Solid Gland
4.1.14 Class 4-Fully Split Seal Assembly, Split Gland
4.2 1-6 give general orientation information for vari-
ous types of seals. The specific design of seal shown is not
limited to that particular application.
5.1 The purchaser (buyer) shall provide the manufacturer
with all of the pertinent application data shown in 7-9. If
special operating conditions exist that arc not shown in the
checklist, they shall also be described.
6. Material
6.1 Mechanical seals shall be constructed of materials
selected from Tables 1-3 after reviewing temperature, pressure/
6
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001, http://www.sae.org.
F1511 -11
VENT & DRAIN OR QUENCH CONNECTION
FLUSH CONNECTION
LI OU I D -t---7"--T--->"--7"'-----1
STUFFING BOX -JL---r<---r-.
I
-- --1-'---g------
THROAT BUSHING L .
--OPERATING
LENGTH
ATMOSPHERE
FIG. 1 Single Seal-Inside Bellows Secondary Seal, Classification Type A Grade 1
VENT & DRAIN OR QUENCH CONNECTION
FLUSH CONNECTION
STUFF I NG BOX -t---7'---T-->"----cr'--1
L1 OU I D --t------c.r----r---,
ATMOSPHERE
L
- - '------+--SECONDARY SEAL
OPERATING
LENGTH
FIG. 2 Single Seal-Inside 0-Ring Secondary Seal, Classification Type A Grade 1
velocity (PV), and corrosion resistance requirements for all
parts for each application.
6.2 Metal Components:
1053
6.2.1 Mechanical seal metal parts in contact with the
pumped liquid shall be compatible with their environment.
6.2.2 Table 1 identifies metal component compatibility.
F1511 -11
STUFFING BOX
STATIC SEAL
~
SEAL
FIG. 3
1----OPERA Tl NG LENGTH _________,.j
Single Seal-Outside Mounted Classification Type B Grade 1
SECONDARY SEALS
(METAL BELLOWS)
BUFFER FLUID CONNECTION
PRIMARY SEAL RING
GLAND PLATE
LIQUID
MAT I NG R I NG -
FIG. 4 Double Seals-Back to Back Classification Type C Grade 1
6.2.3 Material specifications:
1054
F1511 -11

BUFFER FLUID CONNECTIONS
GLAND PLATE
RING
ATMOSPHERE
/
I SECONDARY SEAL __I
LENGTH
L
L SECONDARY SEAL I
OPERATING LENGTH ____j
Ll QUID MAT I NG RING
FIG. 5 Double Seals-Face to Face Classification Type C Grade 1
SEAL FLUSH
SECONDARY SEAL
BUFFER FLUID CONNECTION
SECONDARY SEAL
PRIMARY SEAL RING
FIG. 6 Tandem Seals Classification Type D Grade 1
1055
0 F1511 -11
1.1 Seal Description
Type _____ Grade-----
1.2 Pump Description
Pump Mfg. _____ Model _____ Size
Pump S/N -----
Pump Type (Horizontal, Vertical, etc.)-------
No. of Stages-------
Sleeve or Shaft Mat' I __ Casting Mat'l __
Cooling Water Available? __ F __ GPM
Stuffing Box Water Jacketed? Yes No
Is Face of Stuffing Box Machined? Yes No
FILL OUT STUFFING BOX DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON FIG. 8
2.1 Liquid Pumped
Fluid _____ Concentration----- Specify for unique
Pumping Temperature (F)
cargo pump fluid
application
Normal ____ _
Max ____ _
Min ___ _
Specific Gravity at Operating Condition-----
Viscosity Range at Operating Conditions/Temp. SSU
Vapor Pressure at Operating Conditions/Pressure psig
Corrosion/Erosion Caused by: % Solids
Abrasive Separator To be Supplied-Yes __ No __
2.2 Operating Conditions
Rated Discharge Pressure Max (psig) -------
Suction Box Pressure Range (psig) -------
Stuffing Box Pressure Range (psig) -------
Stuffing Box Temperature Max (F) -------
Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig) -------
Speed (rpm)-------
Direction of Rotation From Drive End CW or CCW -----
3.1 Preservation and Packaging
Special Preservation & Packaging for Storage & Shipment -----
Special Marking------------
4.1 Other Special Requirements
Seal Manufacturer's Certification of
Compliance Required-Yes __ No __
5.1 US Navy Application Requirements
Supplement S1, ------ Yes __ No __
Check applicable dimensional Table below:
Table No. S1, Standard Long Mechanical Seal __
Table No. S2, Standard Short Mechanical Seal __
Table No. S3, Special Cartridge Seals Grade 2 __
Table No. S4, Special Seals Grade 1
FIG. 7 Ordering Data Checklist
Copper alloy
Bronze
Alloy 20
Material
316 stainless steel
304 stainless steel
Alloyed stainless steel (cast)
17-4 PH
AM 350
NiCuA
NiMo
NiMo
8
(Alloy B)
NiCrFe
0
NiCrMoCo
NiCr
NiCrMoCb
0
Steel
Austenetic grey iron
Titanium
Nickel cast iron (ductile nodular
or graphitic)
ASTM
B27i, 8584, 8505/B505M
862
8472 and 8473 (UNS N08020, N08026}
A240/A240M, A276, and A313/A313M
(UNS S316XX)
A182/Ai82M, A3i3/A313M (UNS
S304XX),A351/A351M (CF3, 3A; CF8,
SA; CF8C; CF1 0)
A744/A744M (CN-7M, CN-7MS)
A564/A564M and A693 (UNS S17400)
A579/A579M (Grade 61)
8164 (UNS N04400, N04405), 8127,
A494/A494M (Grades M35-1, M35-2,
M-30H, M-25S)
A494/A494M (Grades CW-2M, N-12 MV)
8333 and 8335 (UNS N10001, N10665,
N10675)
8166, 8168
8637, 8670
8443, 8446
Ai08
A436
8338, 8348, 8367
A436 Type 1
A Monel
7
or equivalent has been found satisfactory for this purpose.
8
Hastelloy B or equivalent has been found satisfactory for this purpose.
c lnconel X750
8
0
lnconel 625
8
6.3 Face Materials-Mechanical seal-wearing faces shall
be selected to provide the desired performance and corrosion
resistance for the specified design life of the seal.
6.3.1 Performance ranges for face combinations are listed in
1ltble 2.
6.3.2 Face materials shall be of solid construction only; no
overlays, deposited coatings, or sprayed on coatings arc
permitted.
6.3.3 Carbon is preferred for one of the faces unless the
service is abrasive, dirty, or chemically active.
6.3.4 For special service requirements, hard on hard seaJ
face combinations may be required. Face material
combinations, such as silicon carbide versus silicon carbide,
silicon carbide versus tungsten carbide, and tungsten carbide
versus tungsten carbide, may be used as similar or dissimilar
cOJ1ta4;;tnlg face materials when recommended by the supplier
and approved by the user.
6.4 Face Material Specifications:
6.4.1 Carbon-Suitable for service as recommended by the
manufacturer. A carbon seal grade is a material having carbo-
naceous filler system comprised of pitch and resins, compacted
and baked to a final temperature. These grades are subse
quently impregnated with resin until they become impervious.
All available carbons may not be suitable for a particular
application. Carbons considered for use in a particular appli-
cation shall be checked for suitability in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
6.4.2 Tungsten Carbide-6 to 10% nickel or cobalt-bound
solid tungsten carbide.
6.4.3 Ceramic-99.5% minimum alumina ceramic suitable
for the service as recommended by the manufacturer.
6.4.4 Silicon Carbide-(a) Reaction-Bonded-Solid fine-
grained reaction-bonded silicon carbide 8 to 12% free silicon,
essentially free of carbon, impervious structure requiring no
impregnant. (b) Reaction-Bonded With Graphite-A compos-
ite material of fine-grain reaction-bonded silicon carbide; 5 to
10 % free silicon and 10 to 30 % graphite; impervious structure
requiring no impregnant. (c) Direct Sintered-Solid homoge-
neous silicon carbide essentially free of silicon and carbon,
impervious structure requiring no impregnant. (d) Direct Sin-
tered Silicon Carbide-Contains 10% free graphite. (e) Sili-
conized Carbon Graphite-Approximately 0.025-in. (0.64-
mm) thick conversion of silicon carbide on carbon substructure
and impregnated with thermosetting resin.
6.5 Elastomeric Materials:
1056
6.5.1 Special care should be given to the selection and
installation of elastomeric components, such as bellows and
7
The term "Monel" and the Monel logo are trademarks of the Special Metals
Corporation, Huntington, WV, USA.
8
The term "Inconel" and the Inconel logo are trademarks of the Special Metals
Corporation, Huntington, WV, USA.
KEY OR ANTI-
ROTATION PIN
DETAIL OR SIZE
KEY OR ANTI-
ROTATION PIN
DETAIL OR SIZE
GASKET
AAAANGEI'IEHT
& SLEEVE EHO
011'1 DETAlLS
REO"O.
F!G. 8. 1
CLAI'IPEO SLEEVE
FCG. 8.3
HOOK TYPE SLEEVE
F1511 -11
IMPORTANT
SEE'r'TG"B.6FOR
GLANO SOL T l N6
KEY OR ANTI-
ROTATION PIN
DETAIL OR SIZE
.ElL!!:.l.
SOLID SHAFT
FIG. 8.4
SLEEVE WITH NUT

SEE FIG 8. 6 FOR
GI..ANO SOL T!NG
IMPORTANT
Sff'FIG8.SFOR
GLANO 801.. T I N6
STATE SlZE, NUIR ANO LOCATION
OF GLANO SOL TS
I
STATE PROPER LOCA Tl OH OF AUlC ILl ARY
PIPE TAPS SUCH AS FLUSH!H$, COOI.lH$,
VENT & DRAIN COHECTlOHS
IF ROONO GI..MO IS NOT SUIT All.E
STATE DESIRED CCH"IGI.RATlOH
FIG. 8 Stuffing Box Arrangement
1057
0 F1511 -11
Refer to Fig. 8
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
N.P.T.
Bolt Holes or Stud Loc .
. Thread SizA

FIG. 9 Stuffing Box Dimensions
TABLE 1 Metal Component Compatibility
NoTE 1-For fluids or materials not covered here, seal selection to be mutually agreed upon by seal manufacturer, pump supplier, and end user.
NoTE 2- X = Suitable for use as seal components.
Fluid
Fresh Water
Demineralized water
Boiler feed
Potable
Salt Water
Seawater
Distiller brine
Fuel Oil
Navy distillate
JP-5
Lube oil
Sewage
Brass
X
A See Section 6 for material specifications.
316 Stainless
Steel
Ni-Cu
0-rings. One of the most important considerations for elasto-
mers is fluid compatibility. Table 3 references most shipboard
applications. Consult the seal manufacturer for fluids not listed.
6.5.2 Material Classification/Specification:
6.5.2.1 Nitrile-Practice 01418, Class Designation NBR.
6.5 .2.2 Chloroprene-Practice D I 418, Class Designation
CR.
6.5.2.3 Fluorocarbon-Practice Dl418, Class Designation
FKM.
1058
MaterialsA
Alloy 20
Highly Alloyed
Stainless
Steel
Ni-Mo Ni-Cr-Mo-Cb Ni-Cr-Fe
6.5.2.4 Ethylene Propylene (EP)-Practice D1418, Class
Designation EPM/EPDM.
6.5.2.5 Perftuoroelastomer-Practice 01418, Class
nation FFKM.
6.5.2.6 Polytetrafluorethylene
D3294.
6.5.2.7
F1511 -11
TABLE 2 Seal Face Materials
NoTE 1-Faces for chemically active materials and special applications
shall be agreed upon by seal manufacturer and end user.
Seal Face Compatibility Chart
Primary Ring Mating Ring
PV Limit, A lb/
in.
2
x fVmin
(MPam/s)
Carbon Tungsten carbide 500 000 (17.75)
Carbon Silicon carbide 500 000 (17.75)
Carbon Ceramic
8
100 000 (3.55)
Siliconized carbon Tungsten carbide 350 000 (12.43)
Siliconized carbon Silicon carbide 350 000 (12.43)
Silicon carbide Tungsten carbide 300 000 (10.65)
Silicon carbide Silicon carbide 350 000 (12.43)
Tungsten carbide Tungsten carbide 120 oooc (4.26)
A Values of PV apply to aqueous solutions at 120F (49C). For lubricating liquids,
such as oil, 60% higher can be used. Given limits are to be used as a general
guide in material selection. Values used consider a pressure drop across the seal
faces as 0.5.
8
Limited to chemical service requirements only.
c PV limit of 185 000 (6.57) can be used with two different grades of tungsten
carbide, that is, cobalt versus nickel binders.
6.5.3 (EP) rubber shaH not be lubricated
with any petroleum base substances. Check Section 11 and
Appendix XI or manufacturer's recommendations before using
any lubricant
7.1 Seal life shall be defined in terms of the time period in
which the mechanical seal functions properly under its speci-
fied service.
7 .1.1 The minimum operational life of a mechanical seal
shall be 16 000 statistical hours provided that the equipment is
maintained and operated in accordance with the requirements
of Section 8.
7 .1.2 During any portion of the service life, the dynamic
leakage shall not exceed five drops per minute for Class 0
seals. After initial installation, hydrostatic leakage shall be zero
for a 5-min period, when the equipment is subjected to system
pressure.
7 .1.3 All split mechanical seals, Classes 1 through 4, may
experience higher leakage rates than Class 0, solid mechanical
seals. A leakage rate of five drops per minute shall be
acceptable after completion of the manufacturer's recom-
mended break-in period.
7 .1.4 In special applications of extreme environmental
parameters, such as high temperature with limited cooling,
high pressure/velocity, extreme abrasion, unusual equipment
vibration, shaft end-play, or run-out, the pump and seal
manufacturers shall agree upon the best achievable minimum
operating life requirements and leakage performance.
7 .1.5 Double or special seal arrangements may be required
in applications in which zero product leakage to the environ-
ment is required such as hazardous fluids, fuel oil, acids,
chemicals, and sewage. Consult the seal manufacturer for
recommendations.
8. Design Requirement;;
8.1 Installation Arrangements:
8.1.1 Type A mechanical seals shall be provided unless
otherwise specified.
8.1.2 Tandem or double mechanical seals may be installed
in special applications in which it is determined that a buffer
fluid system is required for lubrication, containment, or safety.
8.2 Finish and tolerance requirements for primary seal ring
and mating ring surface flatness of Class 0 mechanicals seals
shall be three light bands or better as measured under a
monochromatic, helium light source.
8.3 Requirements for Installation of Classes 1 Through 4
Split Mechanical Seals:
8.3.1 Classes 1 through 4, split mechanical seals, may be
furnished for shaft/sleeve diameters of 1 V2 in. (38.1 mm) and
above.
8.3.2 For split mechanical seal installations, a minimum of
3 in. (76.2 mm) of axial space, measured from the stuffing box
face to the first obstruction, shall be provided for Classes 2 and
4 seals. Additional space, at least equal to the gland thickness,
may be required for Classes 1 and 3 seals.
8.3.3 Classes 1 through 4, split mechanical seals, shall be
designed to operate under a minimum reverse differential
pressure condition of 15-in. Hg (50.8 kPa).
8.4 The requirement for a balanced or unbalanced seal will
vary dependent upon the combination of various design and
performance factors. Balanced seals shall normally be supplied
for pressures greater than 150 psi (1.03 MPa) unless the seal
manufacturer provides alternative recommendations for spe-
cific applications. Selection of a balanced or unbalanced seal
design must satisfy the performance requirements of Section 7.
8.5 The mechanical seal shall be designed to operate satis-
factorily under the following:
8.5.1 Shaft sleeve surface finish for pusher-type seals shall
be 32 rms (0.80 f-lm) maximum. Shaft sleeve surface finish for
non pusher seals shall be 64 rms ( 1.60 f-1m) maximum.
8.5.2 Shaft radial run-out 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) TIR maxi-
mum.
8.5.3 Shaft end-play maximum :::0.015 in. (0.38 mm).
8.5.4 Concentricity of stuffing box bore to shaft axis 0.005
in. (0.13 mm) TIR maximum. Gland plate design must accom-
modate eccentricity stated herein.
8.5.5 Perpendicularity of stuffing box face to shaft axis
0.003 in. (0.08 mm) TIR maximum.
8.6 Environmental Controls-Environmental control
considerations, such as flushing, cooling, heating, and quench-
ing shall be specified by the seal manufacturer.
9.1 Quality Systems-Mechanical seals shall be supplied in
accordance with ISO 9001.
1059
9.2 Responsibility for Inspection-Unless otherwise
the manufacturer is responsible for the performance
of all inspection requirements. The manufacturer may use his
own or any other facilities suitable for inspection. The pur-
chaser (buyer) reserves the right to perform any of the
inspections set forth in the specification where such inspections
F1511 -11
TABLE 3 Elastomer Compatibility
NoTE 1-X =Suitable for fluids within temperature range indicated.
Fluid Nitrile-N
FluorocarbonA PTFE
8
Corrugated Graphite
EP Chloroprene
Ribbon
Temp. Limits: Min -50F (-46C) -25F (-32C) -150F (-101C)
-400F (-46C)
-50F (-46C) -50F (-46C)
Max +250F (121C)
+400F (204 C) +500F (260C)
+750F (400C)
+300F (149C) +200F (93C)
Fresh Water
Demineralized water X X X X X X
Boiler feedwater X X X X
Potable water X X X X X X
Salt Water
I I I I I I
Seawater X X X X X X
Distiller brine X X X X
Fuel and Lubricants
I
I
I I Navy distiiiate X X X X X
JP-5 X X X X
I I
X
Bunker C X X X X
Diesel oil X X X X X
Kerosene X X X X X
Lube oil (mineral base) X X X
Sewage
I
X
I
X
I
X
I
X
I
X
I
X
A Fluorocarbon shall be limited to 275F (135C) in water.
8
Care should be used in selecting PTFE. Its use is only dictated when other elastomers are not suitable and PTFE is acceptable. PTFE is not acceptable for nuclear
service, or in a radiation area. Glass-filled PTFE has a temperature range of -350F (-212C) to +500F (260C).
are deemed necessary to assure supplies and services conform
to prescribed requirements.
9.3 Material Inspection-The manufacturer shall be respon-
sible for ensuring that materials used are manufactured,
examined, and tested in accordance with the specifications and
standards as applicable.
ments specified herein shall be classified as follows:
9.4.1 Quality Conformance Inspection.
9.4.2 Inspection of Packaging.
9.5 Quality Conformance Inspection-All seal components
shall be inspected in accordance with ASQC Zl.4 listing
critical, major, and minor characteristics and type of inspection
equipment used to determine said characteristics.
9.5.1 Acceptable Quality Level for Characteristics-The
acceptable quality levels for characteristics, as per ASQC Z1.4,
shall be as follows:
9.5.1.1 Critical-1.5 AQL.
9.5.1.2 Major-2.5 AQL.
9.5.1.3 Minor-4.0 AQL.
9.5.2 Tests-All tests shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM, ASME, or manufacturer's standards as specified.
9.5.3 Test Data-All test data shall remain on file at the
manufacturer's facility for review by buyer upon request. It
shall be retained in the manufacturer's files for at least three
years.
9.6 Inspection of Packaging:
9.6.1 Unit of Product-For the purpose of inspection, a
completed package prepared for shipment shall be considered
as a unit of product.
9.6.2 Sampling-Sampling for examination shall be in ac-
cordance with ASQC Zl.4. The AQL shall be 4.0% defective.
9.6.3 Examination-Samples selected in accordance with
9.5.2 shall be examined for the following defects:
9.6.3.1 Materials, methods, container,
9.6.3.2 Strapping,
9.6.3.3 Consolidated seals not of like description, and
9.6.3.4 Marking illegible, incorrect, incomplete, or missing.
9.7 Warranty:
9.7 .1 Responsibility for Warranty-Unless otherwise
specified, the manufacturer is responsible for the following:
9. 7 .1.1 All materials used to produce a unit,
9.7.1.2 Workmanship, and
9. 7 .1.3 Manufacturer will warrant his product to be free
from defect of workmanship.
9.8 Certification-When specified in the purchase order or
contract, the purchaser (buyer) shall be furnished certification
that samples representing each lot have been either tested or
inspected as directed in this specification and the requirements
have been met. When specified in the purchase order or
contract, a report of the test results shall be furnished.
10. Packing and Preparation for Delivery
10.1 Unit of Product-For the purpose of inspection, a
completed package prepared for shipment shall be considered
as a unit of product.
1060
10.2 Packaging of Product for Delivery-Product should be
packaged for shipment in accordance with standard industry
practice.
10.3 Instructions-Instructions and manufacturer's special
provisions for handling shall be included in complete package.
10.3.1 Each of Classes 1 through 4, split mechanical seals,
shall be supplied with detailed assembly and installation
instructions.
F1511 -11
10.3.2 All special or nonstandard tools and fixtures required
to assemble and install the seal in the pump shall be identified
and supplied with each seal package.
10.4 Any special packaging requirements for shipment or
storage shall be identified in the ordering data. See Section 5.
10.5 Marking and Coding-When specified, a mechanical
seal marking and coding system shall be used in accordance
with X2.
11. Installation of the Seal Assembly
11.1 Seal suppliers shall provide instructions for each me-
chanical seal installation to include the applicable information
required herein as a minimum.
11.2 Because of the variety of seal types and designs,
Appendix Xl is provided for general guidance.
11.3 For specific detailed instructions, consult the seal
supplier's installation procedures. For reference to component
identification terms, see Section 3 and Annex A 1.
Systems Command (NAVSEA), shall apply when specified in the contract or purchase order. When
there is a conflict between the specifications and this Supplement S 1, the requirements of Supplement
S 1 shall take precedence.
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 This supplementary requirement applies to mechanical
end face seals for use in U.S. Navy shipboard pumps.
S 1.2 Magnetic seals shall not be used.
S2.1 ASTM Standards:
D 1141 Specification for Substitute Ocean Water
S2.2 Military Standards:
5
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact); Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment & Systems, Requirements for
MIL-P-16789 Packaging of Pumps, Including Prime Movers
and Associated Repair Parts
MIL-STD-167 -1 Environmental Vibration Testing
S2.3 SAE Standards:
6
AMS 7259, AMS 7276, AMS 3216, and AMS 3218 Rubber
Fluorocarbon Elastomer, High Temperature, Fluid, and Com
pression Resistant
J1926-l Standard Dimensions for Gasket Seal Straight
Thread Tube Fitting
S3. Terminology:
S3.1 See Annex A 1.
S4. Classification and Seal Arrangements:
S4.1 See Section 4.
SS. Design Requirements
S5.1 All mechanical seals shall meet the dimensional re-
quirements from the applicable Tables S 1-S4. Guidelines for
seal/pump for S5 and S6 seals for cartridge and split mechani-
1061
cal seals are provided in Tables S5 and S6. Mechanical seals as
shown in Table S 1 Standard Long Mechanical Seals and Table
S2 Standard Short Mechanical Seals, shall be of the single
spring elastomeric bellows type. Slot details for antirotation
pins applicable to Table S 1 and Table S2 are shown in Fig. S2.
ANT I ROT AT ION
SLOT
RING GROOVE
NoTE 1-For shaft sizes less than 1 in., not including 1 in. The
anti-rotation slot is not required.
FIG. S1 Standard Mating Ring Anti-Rotation Slot Detail
F1511 -11
Table S1 Standard Long Mechanical Seal
NoTE 1-Standard (long) mechanical seal dimensions for Navy shipboard pump applications (low pressure, 150 psi (1.03 MPa) max, for new or
SEAL LOCATING
SHOULDER
lll
RDIA
B DIA
D DIA
C DIA
E DIA
A D (D') (E') L (L') (M) (M') (N) (N')
0.002 min min max max 0.020 -0.5 0.005 0.12 0.15 0.38
0.375 9.52 0.875 22.23 0.438 11.13 1.062 26.98 0.937 23.80 1.188 30.2 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92
0.500 12.70 1.000 25.40 0.563 14.30 1.187 30.15 1.062 26.97 1.188 30.2 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92
0.625 15.87 1.250 31.75 0.688 17.48 1.343 34.12 1.218 30.93 1.312 33.3 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.31
0.750 19.05 1.375 34.93 0.813 20.65 1.468 37.29 1.343 34.11 1.312 33.3 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.31
0.875 22.22 1.500 38.10 0.938 23.83 1.656 42.07 1.531 38.88 1.375 34.9 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.31
1.000 25.40 1.625 41.28 1.063 27.00 1.750 44.45 1.625 41.27 1.562 39.7 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.125 28.57 1.750 44.45 1:188 30.18 1.870 47.50 1.745 44.32 1.625 41.3 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.250 31.75 1.875 47.63 1.313 33.35 2.000 50.80 1.875 47.62 1.625 41.3 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.375 34.92 2.000 50.80 1.438 36.53 2.125 53.98 2.000 50.80 1.687 42.9 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.500 38.10 2.125 53.98 1.563 39.70 2.250 57.15 2.125 53.97 1.687 42.9 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.625 41.27 2.375 60.33 1.688 42.88 2.500 63.50 2.375 60.32 2.000 50.8 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
1.750 44.45 2.500 63.50 1.813 46.05 2.625 66.68 2.500 63.50 2.000 50.8 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
1.875 47.62 2.625 66.68 1.938 49.23 2.750 69.85 2.625 66.67 2.125 54.0 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
2.000 50.80 2.750 69.85 2.063 52.40 2.937 74.60 2.812 71.42 2.125 54.0 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
2.125 53.97 3.000 76.20 2.188 55.58 3.125 79.38 3.000 76.20 2.375 60.3 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.250 57.15 3.125 79.38 2.313 58.75 3.250 82.55 3.125 79.37 2.375 60.3 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.375 60.32 3.250 82.55 2.438 61.93 3.375 85.73 3.250 82.55 2.500 63.5 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.500 63.50 3.375 85.73 2.563 65.10 3.500 88.90 3.375 85.72 2.500 63.5 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.625 66.67 3.375 85.73 2.688 68.28 3.750 95.25 3.625 92.07 2.750 69.8 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
2.750 69.85 3.500 88.90 2.813 71.45 3.875 98.43 3.750 95.25 2.750 69.8 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
2.875 73.02 3.750 95.25 2.938 74.63 4.000 101.60 3.875 98.42 2.875 73.0 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
3.000 76.20 3.875 98.43 3.125 79.38 4.187 106.35 4.062 103.17 2.875 73.0 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
3.125 79.37 4.000 101.60 3.250 82.55 4.437 112.70 4.250 107.95 3.125 79.4 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.250 82.55 4.125 104.78 3.375 85.73 4.562 115.88 4.375 111.12 3.125 79.4 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.375 85.72 4.250 107.95 3.500 88.90 4.687 119.05 4.500 114.30 3.125 79.4 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.500 88.90 4.375 111.13 3.625 92.08 4.812 122.23 4.625 117.47 3.125 79.4 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.625 92.07 4.500 114.30 3.750 95.25 4.937 125.40 4.750 120.65 3.250 82.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.750 95.25 4.625 117.48 3.875 98.43 5.062 128.58 4.875 123.82 3.250 82.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.875 98.42 4.750 120.65 4.000 101.60 5.187 131.75 5.000 127.00 3.375 85.7 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
4.000 101.60 4.875 123.83 4.125 104.78 5.312 134.93 5.125 130.17 3.375 85.7 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
Notes:
A toN English units. A' to N' = 81 (metric) units.
I) For mating ring antirotation slot detail see Fig. 82
II) B-Giand counterbore
C-Min shaft clearance bore recommended tolerance +0.030 (0.076)/-0.000
D-Min stuffing box bore
E-Max seal O.D. (within stuffing box)
1062
F1511 -11
TABLE S2 Standard Short Mechanical Seal
NoTE !-Standard (short length), mechanical seal dimensions for Navy shipboard pump applications (low pressure, 150 psi (1.03 MPa) max, for new
or
SEAL LOCATING
SHOULDER
8 DIA lll
0 DIA
C DIA
E DIA
A (A') B (B') c D (D') E (E') L (L') (M) (M') (N) (N')
0.002 0.05 0.002 -0.05 REF min min max max 0.020 -0.5 0.005 0.12 0.15 0.38
0.375 9.52 0.875 22.23 0.438 11.13 1.218 30.94 1.031 26.18 0.812 20.7 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92
0.500 12.70 1.000 25.40 0.563 14.30 1.375 34.93 1.187 30.15 0.812 20.7 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92
0.625 15.87 1.250 31.75 0.688 17.48 1.562 39.68 1.375 34.92 0.875 22.7 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.31
0.750 19.05 1.375 34.93 0.813 20.65 1.687 42.85 1.500 38.10 0.875 22.7 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.31
0.875 22.22 1.500 38.10 0.938 23.83 1.812 46.03 1.625 41.27 0.937 23.8 0.344 8.74 0.406 10.3'!
1.000 25.40 1.625 41.28 1.063 27.00 2.000 50.80 1.812 46.02 1.000 25.4 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.125 28.57 1.750 44.45 usa 30.18 2.125 53.98 1.937 49.20 1.062 27.0 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.250 31.75 1.875 47.63 1.313 33.35 2.250 57.15 2.062 52.37 1.062 27.0 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.375 34.92 2.000 50.80 1.438 36.53 2.437 61.90 2.250 57.15 1.125 28.6 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.500 38.10 2.125 53.98 1.563 39.70 2.562 65.08 2.375 60.32 1.125 28.6 0.375 9.53 0.438 11.13
1.625 41.27 2.375 60.33 1.688 42.88 2.937 74.60 2.718 69.03 1.375 34.9 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
1.750 44.45 2.500 63.50 1.813 46.05 3.062 77.78 2.750 69.85 1.375 34.9 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
1.875 47.62 2.625 66.68 1.938 49.23 3.187 80.95 2.875 73.02 1.500 38.1 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
2.000 50.80 2.750 69.85 2.063 52.40 3.312 84.13 3.000 76.20 1.500 38.1 0.438 11.13 0.500 12.70
2.125 53.97 3.000 76.20 2.188 55.58 3.625 92.08 3.250 82.55 1.687 42.9 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.250 57.15 3.125 79.38 2.313 58.75 3.750 95.25 3.375 85.72 1.687 42.9 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.375 60.32 3.250 82.55 2.438 61.93 3.875 98.43 3.500 88.90 1.812 46.0 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.500 63.50 3.375 85.73 2.563 65.10 4.000 101.60 3.625 92.07 1.812 46.0 0.500 12.70 0.562 14.27
2.625 66.67 3.375 85.73 2.688 68.28 4.312 109.53 3.875 98.42 1.937 49.2 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
2.750 69.85 3.500 88.90 2.813 71.45 4.437 112.70 4.000 101.60 1.937 49.2 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
2.875 73.02 3.750 95.25 2.938 74.63 4.562 115.88 4.125 104.77 2.062 52.4 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
3.000 76.20 3.875 98.43 3.125 79.38 4.687 119.05 4.250 107.95 2.062 52.4 0.562 14.30 0.625 15.87
3.125 79.37 4.000 101.60 3.250 82.55 5.000 127.00 4.562 115.87 2.187 55.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.250 82.55 4.125 104.78 3.375 85.73 5.125 130.18 4.687 119.05 2.187 55.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.375 85.72 4.250 107.95 3.500 88.90 5.250 133.35 4.812 122.22 2.187 55.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.500 88.90 4.375 111.13 3.625 92.08 5.500 139.70 4.937 125.40 2.187 55.6 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.625 92.07 4.500 114.30 3.750 95.25 5.687 144.45 5.125 130.17 2.312 58.8 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.750 95.25 4.625 117.48 3.875 98.43 5.812 147.63 5.250 133.35 2.312 58.8 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
3.875 98.42 4.750 120.65 4.000 101.60 6.000 152.40 5.437 138.10 2.437 61.9 0.656 16.66 0.781 19.84
A to N = English units. A' to N' = Sl (metric) units.
I) For mating ring antirotation slot detail see Fig. S2
II) B-Giand counterbore
C-Min shaft clearance bore recommended tolerance +0.030 (0.076)/-0.000
D-Min stuffing box bore
E-Max seal O.D. (within stuffing box)
1063
F1511 -11
TABLE S3
POS I T I VE DRIVE RECESS
FOR STATIONARY SEAL RING
VIEW /A "/A
8 DIA
(A') B (B') c (C') D
0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05 Ref Ref min
1.186 30.12 3.066 77.88 2.726 69.24 2.44
1.377 34.98 3.066 77.88 2.726 69.24 2.44
1.436 36.47 3.877 98.48 3.416 86.77 2.94
1.771 44.98 3.877 98.48 3.416 86.77 2.94
J (J') K (K') L (L')
min min min min 020 0.5
2.82 71.63 00 00 0.741 18.82
2.82 71.63 0.18 4.57 0.794 20.17
3.56 90.42 00 00 0.820 20.83
3.56 90.42 00 00 0.877 22.28
Notes:
A to R = English units. A' to R' = 81 (metric) units.
B-Giand counterbore
C-Seal support shoulder tolerance +0.030 (0.76)/-0.000
D-Minimum stuffing box bore
E-Maximum seal O.D. (within stuffing box)
F-Positive drive recess for seal assembly drive lug. 2 each 180 apart
G-Positive drive recess for seal assembly drive lug. 2 each 180 apart
H-Maximum pin length shown, max pin diameter 0.125
J-Positive drive recess for stationary seal ring
K-Ciearance required between seal and seal locating shoulder
A-Four lugs equally spaced at 90
A OIA
(D')
min
61.98
61.98
74.68
74.68
M
0.005
0.340
0.340
0.380
0.380
Seals Grade 2
SEAL LOCATING
SHOULDER
/A 't__,.. a
1
~
J DIA
E
max
2.348
2.420
2.763
2.861
(M')
0.13
8.64
8.64
9.65
9.65
_j_K SEAL LOCATING
(E')
max
59.64
61.47
70.18
72.67
N
0.015
0.408
0.408
0.408
0.408
E
min
SHOULDER
'/
(F')
min
G
min
1.29 32.77 0.19
1.51 38.35 0.31
1.54 39.12 0.19
2.00 50.80 0.12
(N') Q
0.38 min
10.36
10.36
10.36
10.36
0.25
0.31
0.31
0.31
(G')
min
4.83
7.87
4.83
3.05
(Q')
min
6.35
7.87
7.87
7.87
H
max
0.50
0.50
0.62
0.62
R
max
0.38
0.38
0.50
0.50
1064
(H')
max
12.70
12.70
15.75
15.75
(R')
max
9.65
9.65
12.70
12.70
A F1511 -11
ull
TABLE S4
B D!A
I
A DIA
~ J
J DIA
rrs-
C DIA
Seals Grade 1
~
JLK
WHEN K=O
SEAL LOCATING
SHOULDER
VIEW FOR 0.811(20.60) SHAFT SIZE ONLY
A (A') B (8') c (C') D (D') E (E') E
0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05 Ref Ref min min max max min
0.811 20.60 1.851 47.02 1.605 40.77 1.67 42.42 1.583 40.21 0.94
1.000 25.40 1.877 47.68 1.100 27.94 2.09 53.09 2.011 51.08 1.10
1.876 47.65 2.752 69.90 2.100 53.34 3.36 85.34 3.315 84.20 2.00
2.162 54.91 3.127 79.43 2.218 56.34 3.60 91.44 3.252 82.60 2.38
2.750 69.85 4.002 10.17 2.875 73.03 4.47 113.54 4.310 109.47 3.05
(J') K (K') L (L') M (M') N (N') Q
min min min min 020 0.5 0.005 0.13 0.015 0.38 min
NA NA 0.190 4.83 0.679 17.25 0.280 7.11 0.362 9.19 0.19
1.44 36.58 000 000 0.590 14.99 0.250 6.35 0.317 8.05 0.25
2.34 59.44 0.250 6.35 0.868 22.05 0.250 6.35 0.437 11.10 0.31
2.70 68.58 0.595 15.11 0.770 19.56 0.280 7.11 0.375 9.53 0.31
3.44 87.38 0.250 6.35 1.002 25.45 0.280 7.11 0.500 12.70 0.44
Notes:
A to S = English units. A' to S' = Sl (metric) units.
B-Giand counterbore
C-Seal support shoulder tolerance+ 0.030 (0.76)/-0.000
D-Minimum stuffing box bore
E-Maximum seal O.D. (within stuffing box)
F-Positive drive recess for seal assembly drive lug. 2 each 180 apart
G-Positive drive recess for seal assembly drive lug. 2 each 180 apart
H-Maximum pin length shown, max pin diameter 0.125
J-Positive drive recess for stationary seal ring
K-Ciearance required between seal and seal locating shoulder 2 each 180 apart
A-One recess only
N/A-Not applicable
1065
VIEW !A .. !A
(F') G (G') H (H')
min min min max max
23.88 0.12 3.02 NA NA
27.94 0.09 2.29 0.13 3.30
50.80 0.21 5.33 0.18 4.57
60.45 0.31 7.87 0.18 4.57
77.47 0.44 11.18 0.10 2.54
(Q') R (A') s (S')
min max max max min
4.83 NA NA NA NA
6.35 0.38 9.65 0.190 1.83
7.87 0.38 9.65 0.128 3.25
7.87 0.38 9.65 0.254 6.45
11.18 0.38 9.65 0.230 5.84
c4@f F1511 -11
r
A
.o.ooomnolUlOO'
O.OO!imm/0.1102'
Maximum Dimensions for Seal Installation
A B c c D E F F F F
Shaft Gland OD Box Bore min Box Bore max Box Nearest Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt
Size Depth min Obstruction Circle Circle Circle Circle
min min min min
Bolt Size Bolt Size Bolt Size Bolt Size
1.125 4.13 1.75 2.01 0.66 2.13 2.88 N/A N/A N/A
1.250 4.25 1.88 2.27 0.78 2.13 3.14 3.25 N/A N/A
1.375 4.38 2.00 2.33 0.69 2.13 3.26 3.34 N/A N/A
1.500 4.88 2.21 2.44 0.96 2.19 3.48 3.60 N/A N/A
1.625 5.00 2.34 2.69 1.02 2.19 N/A 3.77 N/A N/A
1.750 5.49 2.50 2.81 1.04 2.19 N/A 3.88 N/A N/A
1.875 5.49 2.63 2.91 1.04 2.19 N/A 3.91 N/A N/A
2.000 5.50 2.75 3.01 1.27 2.38 N/A 4.16 N/A N/A
2.125 5.86 2.88 3.44 1.27 2.38 N/A 4.41 4.50 N/A
2.250 6.50 3.00 3.48 1.39 2.38 N/A 4.53 4.62 N/A
2.375 6.50 3.13 3.59 1.13 2.53 N/A 4.60 4.72 N/A
2.500 6.75 3.37 3.81 1.39 2.63 N/A 4.88 5.00 N/A
2.625 6.75 3.63 4.04 1.60 2.56 N/A N/A 5.17 N/A
2.750 7.70 3.75 4.06 1.60 2.56 N/A N/A 5.55 N/A
2.875 7.83 3.88 4.18 1.60 2.56 N/A N/A 5.62 N/A
3.000 7.94 4.00 4.46 1.74 2.63 N/A N/A 5.77 N/A
3.125 7.99 4.13 4.60 1.75 2.69 N/A N/A 5.92 N/A
3.250 8.19 4.25 4.60 1.80 2.64 N/A N/A 6.05 N/A
3.375 8.30 4.38 4.85 1.94 2.69 N/A N/A 6.14 6.27
3.500 8.44 4.50 4.97 1.91 2.69 N/A N/A 6.31 6.43
3.625 8.49 4.63 5.10 2.19 2.69 N/A N/A 6.44 N/A
3.750 8.75 4.78 5.19 2.00 2.69 N/A N/A 6.77 N/A
3.875 8.84 4.96 5.37 2.06 2.69 N/A N/A 6.64 6.77
4.000 9.00 5.11 5.50 2.38 2.69 N/A N/A 6.78 6.91
1066
c
A B B c
Shaft Box Box Box
Diameter Bore Bore Face
min max min
1.375 1.94 2.38 2.63
1.500 2.50 2.50 2.94
1.625 2.50 2.62 2.94
1.750 2.50 2.68 3.00
1.875 2.63 2.87 3.12
2.000 2.75 3.00 3.31
2.125 2.87 3.12 3.62
2.250 3.06 3.25 4.00
2.375 3.18 3.37 4.12
2.500 3.18 3.62 4.00
2.625 3.62 3.87 4.75
2.750 3.62 4.25 4.75
2.875 3.93 4.12 5.00
3.000 3.93 4.12 5.00
3.125 4.31 4.75 5.25
3.250 4.31 4.75 5.25
3.375 4.43 5.00 5.50
3.500 4.43 5.00 5.50
3.625 4.75 5.12 5.75
3.750 4.75 5.12 5.75
3.875 4.93 5.50 6.00
4.000 5.00 5.50 6.00
4.125 5.12 5.71 6.25
4.250 5.25 5.75 6.25
4.375 5.42 6.00 6.50
4.500 5.42 6.12 6.50
4.625 5.35 6.12 6.75
4.750 5.62 6.12
F1511 -11
Table S6 Split Mechanical Seals
Maximum Dimensions for Seal Interface
C1 D E
Box Outboard Nearest
Depth Space Obstruction
rnin Required
N/A 1.78 3.00
0.407 1.88 3.00
0.407 1.88 3.00
0.407 1.87 3.00
0.423 2.00 3.06
0.438 2.00 3.06
0.313 2.19 3.50
0.375 2.25 3.50
0.375 2.15 3.50
0.375 2.15 3.50
0.281 2.38 3.62
0.375 2.38 3.62
0.375 2.50 3.75
0.375 2.50 3.75
0.375 2.50 3.75
0.375 2.50 3.75
0.501 2.50 4.02
0.501 2.50 4.02
0.407 2.53 4.02
0.407 2.53 4.02
0.482 2.63 4.02
0.407 2.50 4.02
0.407 2.50 4.02
0.407 2.50 4.02
0.457 2.50 4.02
0.457 2.50 4.02
0.457 2.50 4.02
4.02
1067
121A
121'F'
GLANDDIA
+ 0.00 mml- 0.06 mm
0.000 lnJ 0.002 in.
F G
Gland Bolt
Diameter Circle
min
Bolt
Size
5.01 3.25
5.28 3.68
5.28 3.68
5.28 3.68
5.50 3.78
5.63 3.88
6.13 4.37
6.50 4.56
6.50 4.56
6.50 4.63
7.76 5.38
7.76 5.38
8.01 5.73
8.01 5.74
8.26 5.88
8.50 5.88
8.51 6.18
8.51 6.18
9.00 6.56
9.00 6.56
9.02 6.63
9.02 6.63
9.27 6.86
9.27 6.86
9.55 7.13
9.55 7.13
9.77 7.38
9.77 7.38
G G
Bolt Bolt
Circle Circle
min min
Bolt Bolt
Size Size
3.38 3.50
3.81 3.93
3.81 3.93
3.81 3.93
3.91 4.03
4.00 4.12
4.50 4.62
4.68 4.81
4.68 4.81
4.68 4.87
5.50 5.63
5.50 5.63
5.86 5.98
5.87 5.99
5.86 6.13
5.87 6.13
6.31 6.43
6.31 6.43
6.68 6.81
6.68 6.81
6.75 6.88
6.75 6.88
7.00 7.13
7.00 7.13
7.25 7.38
7.25 7.38
7.50 7.63
7.50 7.63
0 F1511 -11
S5.2 Pusher type seals may be used for hydraulic oils, fuels,
and lubricants.
S5.3 Mechanical seals to Tables Sl-S4 shall be axially
positioned or located on the shaft by positive means such as a
stub, step, or shoulder on the shaft or a sleeve that is positively
located on the shaft.
S5 .4 Mechanical seals to Tables S 1-S4 shall not be axially
positioned by the use of set screws.
S5.5 Any special tools or spacers required to install and
remove a mechanical seal shall be included with the seal.
S5.6 Mechanical seals supplied in accordance with Table S5
shall meet the following requirements:
S5.6.1 Table S5 mechanical seals may use setscrews to
position the seal.
S5.6.2 A throttle bushing or secondary containment seal
shall be used to limit leakage in event of seal failure. The
diametrical clearance of the throttle bushing bore shall not be
more than 0.025 in. for sleeve diameters up to 2.0 in. For larger
diameters, the maximum diametrical clearance shall be 0.025
in. plus 0.005 in. for each additional 1.0 in. of diameter or
fraction thereof. Mechanical seals used for lube oil and fuel
services may use backup packing instead of throttle bushings.
S5.6.3 Non-sparking metallic assembly clips shall be used.
S5.6.4 Throttle bushing drain and seal flushing connections
shall be provided with straight "0" ring fittings to MS 16142,
minimum size 3Js-in.
S5.7 Mechanical seals supplied in accordance with Table S6
shall meet the following requirements:
S5.7.1 No provision for back-up packing is required for split
mechanical seals unless requested by the customer.
S5.7.2 Split mechanical seals shall not be used for fuel or
lube oil service pumps.
S5.7.3 Mechanical seals supplied in accordance with Table
S6 may leak at the seal faces during hydrostatic testing of the
pump. Leakage should not constitute failure of the hydrostatic
test of the pump or failure of the split mechanical seal.
S5.8 Type E mechanical seals shall be the non-contacting
design where the mating faces are designed to intentionally
create aerodynamic or hydrodynamic separating forces to
sustain a specific separation gap.
S5.8.1 Type E seals shall be used only on fuel/oil services
with a shaft speed greater than 300ft per min (fpm) measured
at the shaft diameter.
S5.8.2 Nodular or graphitic ductile nickel cast iron mating
rings allowed per Table S7 are not permitted in Type E seals.
S5.8.3 A self-contained gas seal support system (GSSS) shall
be provided. The GSSS shall include check valve, gas
regulator, pressure gage, and flowmeter. The GSSS compo-
nents shall be enclosed in a box to protect from the elements.
Flow and pressure indicators shall be visible from the outside
of the box. GSSS shall be used to support the Type E seal
during Section S7 testing. The GSSS shall undergo shock
testing in accordance with MIL-S-90 1 and environmental
vibration testing in accordance with MIL-STD-167 -1.
S5.9 Unless otherwise specified, the seal manufacturer shall
prepare drawings in accordance with ANSI Standards Y14.1,
Y14.2, Y14.3, Y14.5, Y14.6, and Y14.26.3.
Table S7 Material Requirements and Service Limits for Standard Seals
A
Fluid Fuels and Lubricants Fresh Water Seawater
Design Detail
Metal components (TRIM)
8
316 stainless steel NiCu
NiCu titanium
Alloy 20 Alloy 20
bronzec bronzec
NiCrMoCo
Springs
0
316 stainless steel NiCu NiCrFe
17-7PH NiMo NiCrMoCo
NiCu NiCrFe NiMo (Alloy B)
NiMo NiCrMoCo NiMo (Alloy C)
NiMo (Alloy B) NiCr NiCrMoCb
NiMo (Alloy C)
NiCr NiCrMoCb
Elastomer components fluorcarbonEF
elastomers
Primary seal ring carbon graphiteG Tungsten carbideH
(6 to 10 % nickel bound)
Silicon carbide
Mating ring Nodular or graphitic ductile Tungsten carbideH (6 to 10 % nickel bound)
nickel cast iron
Silicon carbide
Tungsten carbide (6 to
10%
nickel bond)
Silicon carbide
Pressure 150 psig max (1.03 MPa)
rpm
I
Tables Si and S2
Max
I
Tables S3 and S4
Temperature 225F (10'7"C) max
A See Tables S1-S4 for standard seal envelopes and Section 6 for application material specification.
8
Drive set screws not applicable and shall be of harder material than the shaft.
cOlder design seals in service, replacement parts, and assemblies only.
0
Wave spring materials may be supplied to "chemistry only" limits of the material specification.
E See Table 3 for elastomer compatibility.
F Ethylene propylene may be used where specified for special purposes.
G See Footnote 6 for acceptable grades and approval requirements.
H See Table 2 for performance limits of face material combinations.
1068
3600 rpm
1800 rpm
170F (77C)
F1511 -11
Table S8 Qualification Test Parameters
Mechanical Test
Axial Radial
Seal Type Sequence
OffsetA Offset
0.003 in. (0.08 mm) 0.003 in (0.08 mm)
Tables S 1 and Run-in 0 0
S2 0 0 20 min
Performance +(0.035 in. (0.89 mm) + SNE)
8
0
20 h
tests 20 h
20 h
20 h
400 h
Tables S3 and Run-in 0 0
S4 0 0 20 min
+(0.030 in. (0.76 0 20 h
mm) + SNE)
8
0 20 h
0.010 in. (0.25 mm) 20 h
0.010 in. (0.25 mm) 20 h
0.010 in. (0.25mm) 20 h
0 400 h
A 0 neutral position.
8
SNE = seal nose extension-Ref. Fig. S3.
11
MATING RING erG PRIMARY SEAL RING
1-- SEAL NOSE EX TENS ION
NOTE I. MEASURE (I) AT THE FACE CONTACT SURFACE
PRE RUN
PR
POST RUN
PO
MATING RING WEAR
PR - PO
PRIMARY
SEAL RING WEAR
PR - PO

MATING RING WEAR PRIMARY SEAL WEAR =WEAR RATE INCH/HR
HOURS OF RUNTIME -------
PR
WEAR RATE
HOURS OF SEAL LIFE ____ _
Fig. S2 Dimensional Record
Test
Sequence
Duration
8h
20 h
8h
S5.9.1 Drawings shall be furnished under each contract or
order unless the complete equipment covered by the drawings
are identical in all respects to those previously submitted.
S5.9.2 Information intended for manufacturer's use only
shall be so designated.
1069
0 F1511 -11
S5.10 Drawings for each mechanical seal shall include a
sectional assembly drawing and identify piece parts with
sufficient detail.
S5.10.1 Sectional assembly drawings shall include a sec-.
tional assembly with references to a parts list identifying
materials for all individual parts.
S5.10.1.1 All running clearances shall be shown and shall be
dimensioned and labeled as diametral clearances.
S5.10.1.2 Tightening torques with tolerances and thread
lubrication requirements for threaded fasteners shall be shown
on the drawing.
S5.10.1.3 Assembly drawings shall show, as a minimum, the
dimensions shown on the applicable Tables S l-S4.
S5.10.1.4 Drawings shall specify the type, amount, and
required use of lubricant.
S5.10.1.5 Drawings shall specify where there is an adhesive
or other setting compound factory installed on the elastomer
bellows or 0-ring that seals between the mechanical seal and
the impeller hub, shaft, or shaft sleeve.
S5.10.1.6 Drawings shall provide a description of any
adhesive or setting compound identified in S5.10.1.5 including
any time limits associated with the compound when present on
a mechanical seal in storage and between initial wetting of that
compound and the final positioning of the mechanical seal in
the pump.
S5.10.2 When requesting qualification testing to satisfy
Tables S 1-S6, component drawings shall be submitted to
NAVSEA for review and approval. Drawings to include
dimensional details, manufacturing tolerances, and material
specifications. Seal drawings to be used for NAVSEA verifi-
cation only.
S5.10.3 Shock requirements are specified under Section S7.8
Shock Test.
S5.11 "J-seat" stationary ring designs shall be allowed for
lube oil and fuel oil services.
S6. Materials
S6.1 The mechanical seal metal parts shall be supplied in
accordance with Table S7.
S6.2 The primary seal ring shall be carbon-graphite,
9
silicon
carbide, or 6 to 10 % nickel-bound tungsten carbide. The
mating ring face shall be 6 to 10% nickel-bound tungsten
carbide or silicon carbide and suitable for the liquid being
pumped. Cobalt-bound tungsten carbide shall not be used.
Nodular or graphitic ductile nickel cast iron,
10
may be supplied
for lubricants and fuel oil service.
S6.3 Elastomers such as bellows, 0-rings, friction rings,
and so forth, furnished with seals supplied to the requirements
of this Supplement S 1 shall be made of fluorocarbon elastomer
9
Carbon graphite material shall be a manufacturer's grade that has been tested
and qualified for mechanical seal face service under the qualification tests required
by this specification and has been documented as being in regular shipt-oard service
under equivalent operating conditions.
S6 Split Seals shall use carbon graphite grades CTI-6 or P8412.
Alternative carbon graphite materials will be conditionally approved by NAY-
SEA for specific mechanical seal service. Approval for general service will be
granted after seal qualification testing under this specification and after evidence of
satisfactory shipboard service under equivalent operating conditions, is provided.
10
Ni-Resist (term and logo copyright Dura-Bar, 2100 West Lake Shore Drive
Woodstock, IL 60098) or equivalent has been found satisfactory for this purpose.
in accordance with SAE Standards AMS 7259, AMS 7276,
AMS 3216, and AMS 3218, or Practice D1418 Class FKM,
unless otherwise specified in the contract. Refer to Table 3 for
general service applications and for alternative elastomers
suitable for special requirements.
S6.4 On seawater pumps, the mechanical seal 0-rings and
other elastomers shall not be mounted on or come in contact
with the impeller.
S6.5 All mechanical seals under this specification shall be
certified to be free of functional mercury.
S7. Testing of Mechanical Seals
S7 .1 The purpose of these test procedures is to develop a
confidence level that a Class 0 mechanical seal has
projected statistical life of 16 000 h under normal field service
conditions.
S7.2 To qualify a mechanical seal design, NAVSEA
11
will
first conduct a technical evaluation, reviewing the manufactur-
er's design for compliance with this specification,
configuration, material and performance requirements. Subse-
quent to technical evaluation, the seal will undergo a perfor-
mance evaluation, including:
Run-in-8 h
Hydrostatic-5 min
Operational-500 h
Shock-Mii-S-901 (Grade A)
Test
Parameters Monitored/Measured
Operating pressure
Operating temperature
Surface speed (ft/min)
Fluid media
Leakage rate
Wear rate
S7 .2.1 Testing, including qualification testing, of Classes
through 4 split mechanical seals shall be application
conducted under test conditions, which include the proposed
operating conditions, and under a test schedule and
mance requirements that have been agreed upon by the
purchaser (buyer) and the manufacturer.
S7 .2.2 Type E seals shall be tested with 0.035 in. of axial
endplay towards the driver end of the pump.
S7 .2.2.1 Test to be accomplished using a fluid with
viscosity of 100-500 SSU at start-up. Air shall be used as
barrier fluid.
S7.2.2.2 Run-In Test:
(a) Run-in test specified below per sections S7.2.2.2,
S7.2.2.3, and S7.2.2.4 is based on a 1.750-in. shaft size for lube
and fuel oil pumps. Type E seals greater than 1.750 in.
size shall have an air consumption rate less than or
0.2 % of rated pump capacity.
(b) Run-in test shall be accomplished for 8 h at a
800 fpm with a fluid pressure of 5 and a barrier pressure
of 125 Zero fluid leakage is this test.
consumption rate shall be less than or equal to 1.90 nl/min
4.0 scfh.
11
Department of the Navy, Naval Sea Systems Command, NAVSEA, Arlington
VA 22242-5160.
1070
F1511 -11
(c) Seal shall be operated for 20 min with conditions as
above except the speed shall be 300 fpm. Fluid leakage and air
consumption shall meet requirements of S7.2.2.2.
S7.2.2.3 The 500 h endurance test for Type E seals shall be
accomplished by performing 125 h of testing at each of the
following conditions:
800 fpm, 65 psig fluid pressure, 80 psig barrier pressure
800 fpm, 5 psig fuild pressure, 125 psig barrier pressure
(a) A total minimum of 25 starts and stops must be
performed during the endurance testing. Each start must
include a minimum of 5 min of operating time. A minimum of
three 8-h rest periods must be taken during the endurance test.
(b) During endurance testing, there shall be no visible fluid
leakage. Maximum barrier consumption rate shall be 1.90
nllmin or 4.0 scfh.
S7 .2.2.4 E seals shall undergo a seal recovery test. Test
shall be performed in the following order:
( 1) 15 min at 300 fpm, 65 psig fluid pressure, 125 psig barrier
pressure
(2) 15 min at 300 fpm, 65 psig fluid pressure, disconnect air
source, vent to atmosphere
(3) 15 min at 800 fpm, 100 psig fluid pressure, 125 psig barrier
pressure
(4) 15 min at 800 fpm, 100 psig fluid pressure, disconnect air
source, vent to atmosphere
(5) 15 min at 300 fpm, 65 psig fluid pressure, 125 psig barrier
pressure
At the end of the recovery test. there shall be no visible fluid
leakage. Maximum barrier consumption rate shall be 1.90
nllmin or 4.0 scfh.
S7 .2.3 Any changes to a qualified mechanical seal shall be
presented to the government buying activity for technical
evaluation.
S7.3 General Comments:
S7.3.1 Data will be collected and entered on data sheets
similar to those in S2 and S3.
S7.3.2 problems encountered with the seals,
installation, of the test fixture, or breakdowns of any
kind, shall be recorded. This record shall include a statement of
the cause, running time meter reading at occurrence,
and any other information.
S7.3.3 All tests shall be performed in sea water using the
same seaL
S7.3.4 The test conditions shall be:
1071
Speed: 3600 rpm 5% Tables 81 and 82
1800 rpm 5% Tables 83 and 84
Temperature: 170F (77C), monitored at seal cavity. The flowrate shall be var-
ied as necessary to maintain the seal cavity at the specified temperature.
Pressure: 150 psig (1.03 MPa) 5 psi (0.03 MPa)
Fluid media: ocean water per Specification 01141
S7.3.5 Any seal shown in Tables Sl and S2 successfully
passing all tests will qualify any smaller seal of the same
design up to but not including 1 in. (25.4 mm) smaller.
12
S7.3.6 Test Facility-The test facility must be approved by
NAVSEA before conducting the tests. Approval criteria will be
based on information submitted by the facility demonstrating
the capability to perform all tests indicated herein.
S7 .4 Pretest Inspection:
S7 .4.1 The seal shall be photographed as received from the
manufacturer and examined for compliance. The mating sur-
faces shall be photographed to document the original unworn
condition. All critical dimensions shall be measured and
recorded. The width of the stationary mating ring and the
height of the rotating primary seal nose shall be measured at
60 intervals. A reference point for these measurements shall
be established to ensure that the posttest measurements are
taken at identical locations. If a seal face is not measurable as
an individual component, the manufacturer must provide the
information with photographs and certify the critical dimen-
sions to 0.0001 in. (2.5 mm). Acceptance criteria: seal face
wear rate must allow for an extrapolated service life of 16 000
h.
S7 .4.2 The seal shall be examined for the following defects:
S7 .4.2.1 Components missing or not as specified,
S7.4.2.2 Dimensions not as specified,
S7 .4.2.3 Materials not as specified,
S7 .4.2.4 Assembly incorrect,
S7 .4.2.5 Workmanship not as specified, and
S7.4.2.6 Configuration not in conformance with drawing.
S7 .5 Run-In Test-After completion of the pretest inspec-
tion and seal installation, the test fixture shall be stabilized at
the temperature, pressure, and speed specified for the test
which shall be conducted immediately after the run-in test. The
seal shall be operated for a period of 8 h continuously at test
conditions and stopped. All the area on the test fixture that
would collect fluid escaping past the seal shall be wiped clean
and dry. The seal shall then be operated at the same test
conditions for 20 min after which the leakage will be checked.
Acceptance criteria: there shall be no apparent leakage.
12
Example: Successfully qualifying a 2.000-in. (50.8-mrn) diameter seal would
likewise qualify all seal sizes from 2.000 to 1.125 in. (50.8 to 28.5 mm).
F1511 -11
TEST FACILITY:
SEAL MANUFACTURER
---------- PART NO.
SEAL SIZE
START PRES TEMP LEAK RATE
NO. DATE TIME RUN TIME (PS!G)
(oF)
RPM cc/min
DATE
TECHNICIAN SIGNATURE
-----------------------------------------------
ENGINEERS SIGNATURE
FIG. S3 Mechanical Seal Test Data Sheet
S7.6 Hydrostatic Test-After successful completion of the
prerequisites specified in the previous sections, the seal shall be
subjected to 1.5 times the operational test pressure for a period
of 5 min. During this test, the motor shall not be operated.
Acceptance criteria: there shall be no measurable leakage.
S7.7 Operational Test:
S7 .7 .1 After successful completion of the hydrostatic test,
the seal shall remain in the test fixture for the purpose of
conducting the operational test.
S7.7.2 The seal test fixture shall be stabilized at the
temperature, pressure, and speed specified. The operational test
shall be for a period of 500 h running time with a minimum of
25 starts. Testing will be conducted at the neutral position and
with axial and radial offsets, for the duration of the test
sequences as listed in Table S6.
S7.7.3 During the operational test, the test fixture shall be
monitored to record accurately the conditions of operation
(pressure, temperature, speed, and so forth). Data shall be
1072
F1511 -11
collected and the fixture examined at least twice daily. In
addition to all measured data, the record shall indicate the seal
leakage rate. Acceptance criteria: (I) There shall be no mea-
surable leakage. (2) Seal face wear rate extrapolates to a
minimum service life of 16 000 h.
S7.8 Shock Test:
S7.8.1 The governing document for the shock test shall be
MIL-S-901. The seal test fixture, mounted on the anvil plate of
a shock testing machine for lightweight equipment, shall be
tested with water and shall be stabilized at room temperature,
30 psig (207 kPa) and 1800 or 3600 rpm. General requirements
for the shock test are as follows:
Grade-A
Class-!
Type-C
All mounting and testing shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of MIL-S-901 pertaining to lightweight
shock. Shock tests shall be conducted in the dynamic mode of
operation. Seal leakage rate shall be monitored and recorded.
Acceptance criteria: mechanical seal leakage rate shall not
exceed five drops/min.
S7.8.2 A mechanical seal may also be qualified by testing in
a pump unit as per MIL-S-901.
S7.9 Posttest Inspection-After completion of tests speci-
fied in S7 .1 to S7 .6, the seal shall be removed and all seal
components closely examined. Record any unusual details.
After removal, the seal shall be disassembled and an internal
examination of the seal conducted as specified in S7 .2.1. Wear
shall be measured at 60 intervals relative to the reference point
established during the pretest inspection. Photographs shall be
used to document the worn condition of the seal. Average wear
rate for the operational test shall be extrapolated to 16 000 h to
determine the service life wear requirement. Examine and
analyze the data obtained above and compare it to the data
collected during the pretest inspection.
S8. Packaging and Marking
S8.1 The packaging and marking requirements specified
herein apply only for direct U.S. Government acquisitions.
S8.2 Mechanical seals shall be preserved-packaged level A
or C, packed level A, B, or C as specified, and marked in
accordance with MIL-P-16789. Unless otherwise specified,
package in accordance with Practice D3951.
ANNEX
Al. TERMINOLOGY: DESCRIPTION OF TERMS RELATING TO MECHANICAL SEALS
AND THEIR APPLICATION
ALl balanced seal-a mechanical seal designed to accom-
modate high stuffing box pressure with a decrease in seal face
closing forces.
Al.2 barrier fluid-see buffer fluid.
A1.3 bellows-flexing seal elements:
Al.3.1 An elastomeric seal element with a full or half
convolution that acts as a flexible secondary seal.
Al.3.2 Formed or welded metal seal element that provides
spring load and a flexible secondary seal. See 1 and Fig. 4.
Al.4 buffer fluid-a lubricating liquid which is introduced
between two seal assemblies to provide protection to the seal
and/or the environment.
Al.S bushing-a device used to restrict flow. See Fig. 1.
Al.6 cartridge seal-a completely self-contained assembly
including seal, gland, sleeve, and drive collar or seal assembly
& which can be assembled on to a pump as one unit.
A 1. 7 centrifugal separator-a device using centrifugal
force to remove solids in a sef,ll flushing liquid.
1073
Al.8 diametral clearance-the difference between the di-
ameters of two parts.
Al.9 double seal-two mechanical seals mounted back to
back, or face to face, designed to contain a buffer fluid between
the two seals. See 4-6.
Al.lO elastomer drive seal-a mechanical seal in which
rotation of the seal assembly is accomplished through an
elastomeric secondary seal.
Al.ll end play-movement along the axis or parallel to the
center line of a shaft.
A 1.12 end face seal-a mechanical seal that prevents leak-
age of fluids. Sealing is accomplished by means of a stationary
seal ring bearing against the face of a rotating ring mounted on
a shaft. Primary sealing is accomplished in a plane perpen-
dicularto the shaft axis.
A 1.13 flush-liquid that is introduced into the seal chamber
in close proximity to the sealing faces.
A 1.14 gland gasket-a static seal used between the gland
plate and the pump casing.
F1511 -11
A1.15 gland plate-a pressure-containing housing that is
attached to the pump casing and holds the stationary part of the
seal.
Al.l6 gland plate, solid-a gland plate, according to
A 1.15, whose pressure retaining member is not radially split.
A1.17 gland plate, split-a gland plate that is split on a
plane parallel to the axis of the shaft, with the result that the
gland can be assembled around the shaft without requiring
access over the end of the shaft.
A 1.18 inside mounted seal-a mechanical seal assembly
mounted inside the cavity which holds the fluid to be sealed.
Al.l9 light bands-the horizontal distance between
spcmamg dark on a reflective objective reference when
viewed an optical flat exposed to a monochromatic
light source. For flatness measurement, the distance from one
dark fringe to the next is 11.566 11in. for a helium gas light.
Al.20 mating ring-a precision lapped seal face normaHy
mounted in a gland plate.
A1.21 noncontacting seal-a seal where the mating faces
are designed to intentionally create an aerodynamic or hydro-
dynamic separating force to sustain a separation gap.
Al.22 nonpusher seal-a mechanical seal in which seal
wear and end-play are compensated for by flexing a secondary
seal element.
A1.23 operating length-the axial distance from the seal
face to a reference Also refen-ed to as seal working
Al.24 outside mounted seal-a mechanical seal assembly
mounted outside the which holds the fluid to be sealed.
A1.25 packing-materials fitted into a stuffing box and
compressed to form a seal between the shaft and the stuffing
box bore.
Al.26 positive drive-mechanical means of providing rota-
tional torque in a rotating seal element or preventing rotation in
a stationary seal element by use of pins, tabs, keys, or set
screws.
Al.27 primary seal ring-a prec1s1on lapped seal face
which is held in the seal assembly.
Al.28 pumping ring-a simplified impeller within the seal
cavity which circulates liquid for cooling.
A1.29 pusher seal-a mechanical seal with a dynamic
secondary seal element.
A1.30 quench-a fluid that is introduced on the atmospheric
side of the seal. Quench fluid is introduced through ports in the
gland
Al.31 rotating seal--a seal assembly in which the primary
spring mechanism is rotated with the shaft.
Al.32 seal cavity-the space within a pump housing or
gland between a stuffing box bore and a shaft in which a seal
is installed.
Al.33 seal nose-the axial projection on the primary seal
ring of an end face seal which forms the sealing surface.
Al.34 secondary seal-a device which provides thTin<>rnu'
sealing between the rotating element of a mechanical
assembly and the shaft or sleeve. See 1 and
A1.35 shaft run-out-twice the distance by which the
of the shaft is displaced from the axis of rotation.
A1.36 shaft sleeve-a placed over a
protection of the shafi from wear and corrosion. It
be used to provide for the and as
a step in the shaft to achieve seal balance
positioning.
A1.37 sleeve gasket-a static seal used to prevent
between the shaft and the sleeve.
Al.38 split seal--a mechanical seal that has its element::
split in a plane parallel to the axis of the shaft, with the
that instead of being continuous rings, they are essemmuly
semicircles.
A 1.39 split seal, partial-a split mechanical seal in which
only the rotating and stationary sealing face components
packing elements are split and replaceable by around
the shaft.
A 1.40 split seal, fully-a split mechanical seal in which
of the rotating and stationary seal components are
allowing the entire seal to be assembled around the
without requiring access over the end of the shaft.
Al.41 static seal-a seal between surfaces which have
relative motion.
A 1.42 stationary seal-a seal assembly in which the
mary spring mechanism does not rotate.
A1.43 stuffing box pressure-operating pressure for
mechanical seal.
A1.44 tandem seal-a multiple seal an-angement
of two seals mounted one after the other, with the faces of
seal assemblies oriented in the same direction. See
A1.45 throat hushing-a bushing mounted at the bottom
the stuffing box that restricts flow into or out of the seal
(See bushing .)
A 1.46 throttle bushing-a bushing mounted in the
1074
restrict flow of seal leakage or fluid to atnnos,ph1ere
Al.47 unbalanced seal-a seal in which the total
pressure in the seal cavity acts on the faces of the mech<mH:;a
seal.
F1511 -11
APPENDIXES
Xl. SEAL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Xl.l Before Installation
Xl.l.l Review the seal manufacturer's installation draw-
or instructions, or both.
Xl.L2
per 8.3.
proper eq11ip1meJflt interface reamuerrtents as
Xl.l.3 espe-
leave the
rotary or
faces with
types
Xl.2 Seal Assembly Installation Procedures-For cartncige
or split seal designs, consult specific manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions.
X1.2.1 Remove any loose matter in box and sta-
tionary in gland plate with a cloth. Wipe these areas
clean.
X1.2.2 Remove all burrs and sharp on shaft
X1.2.3 Wipe shaft clean with a dry clean cloth.
X 1.2.4 Lubricate the shaft and secondary seal.
Xl.2.5 Elastomeric driven seals require the shaft to be
lubricated with water or a very grade oil. A nongranulated
waterless soap is recommended. (Warning-Do not use pe-
troleum jelly, TFE (tetrafluoroethylene), or silicone grease on
an elastomer driven seal. EPR (ethylene propylene rubber)
must not be lubricated with any petroleum base substance.)
Xl.3 Installing the Mating Ring:
Xl.3.1 Check to make sure that the cavity for the mating
is dean and free of all foreign matter.
Xl.3.2 Lubricate the ring static seal as in
X1.3.3 Carefully install it into the
counterbore until it is bottomed and square.
Xl.4 Installation of the Seal and Mating Ring
Xl.4.1 Slide the seal assembly on to the pump shaft. Make
certain that it is properly . positioned in to
stuffing box and shaft. If set screws are used, verify installation
reference to face of stuffing box. Tighten set screws.
X1.4.2 Before setting the seal compression, carefully and
lightly wipe seal faces with a lint free cloth or remove face
protective coverings.
X1.4.3 Install gland plate gasket.
X1.4.4 Bring gland plate into position and bolt it to the
stuffing box face. (Warning-Excessive tightening of gland
plate bolts could result in distortion and damage to the gland or
the seal faces, or both.)
Xl.5 Reassemble the Pump.
X2. PART NUMBERING SYSTEM
X2.1 Part numbers for mechanical seals shall include the
number of this specification followed a letter for the seal
type and nine numerals to signify the class, dimensions,
metal component material, spring material, primary seal
and material combinations, and elastomer compo-
nent material. An of this system is:
X2.1.1
0 122 2 2 2
ring and
mating
mounted seals ( 4.1.1)
mounted seals ( 4. 1.2)
X2J.L3 C--Double seals (4.1.3)
.4 D -Tandem seals (6.2.1)
1075
X2.1.1.5 E-Special arrangements/applications vacuum or
gas seal (4.1.6)
X2.1.2 Grade:
X2.1.2.1 1-Basic end face seal (4.1.7)
X2.1.2.2 2-Cartridge seal (4.1.8)
X2.1.2.3 3-Split seal (4.1.9)
X2.1.3 Class:
X2.1.3.1 0-All nonsplit seals (Grades 1 and 2) (4. L1 0)
X2.1.3.2 1-Partial split seal assembly, solid gland (4.1.1 I)
X2.1.3.3 2-Partial split seal assembly, split (4.1.12)
X2.1.3.4 split seal assembly, solid gland (4.1.13)
X2.1.4 Seal Dimensions:
X2.l.4.1 001 through 030--Commercial sizes starting at
0.375 in. and increasing in 0.125-in. size intervals to 4000 in .
F1511 -11
X2.1.4.2 101 through 130-Standard long mechanical seal
(Table Sl)
X2.1.4.3 201 through 230-Standard short mechanical seal
(Table S2)
X2.1.4.4 301 through 304-Special cartridge seals Grade 2
(Table S3)
X2.1.4.5 401 through 405-Special seals Grade 1 (Table
S4)
X2.1.5 Metal Component Material (Table I and Table S5):
X2.1.5 .1 1-316 stainless steel
X2.1.5.2 2-NiCu, Alloy 20 or bronze
X2.1.5.3 3-Titanium
X2.1.5.4 4-Copper alloy
X2.1.5.5 5-Highly alloyed stainless steel, NiMo, NiCr-
MoCb or NiCrFe
X2.1.5.6 6-Special material
X2.1.6 Spring Material (Table 1 and Table S5):
X2.1.6.1 1-316 stainless steel
X2.1.6.2 2-NiCu, NiCr, NiCrMoCb, NiMo, NiMo (Alloy
B), NiMo (Alloy C), NiCrFe, or NiCrMoCo
X2.1.7 Primary Seal Ring Material and Mating Ring Ma-
terial Combinations (Table 2 and Table S5):
X2.1.7.1 1-Carbon graphite and nodular or graphitic duc-
tile nickel cast iron
X2.1.7.2 2-Carbon graphite and tungsten carbide
X2.1.7.3 3-Carbon graphite and silicon carbide
X2.1. 7.4 4-Siliconized carbon and tungsten carbide
X2.1. 7.5 5-Siliconized carbon and silicon carbide
X2.1.7.6 6-Silicon carbide and tungsten carbide
X2.1.7.7 7-Silicon carbide and silicon carbide
X2.1. 7. 8 8-Tungsten carbide and tungsten carbide
X2.1.7.9 9-Special materials
X2.1.8 Elastomer Component Material (Table 3 and Table
S5):
X2.1.8.1 }-Fluorocarbon
X2.1.8.2 2-Ethylene propylene
X2.1.8.3 3-Nitrile
X2.1.8.4 4-PTFE
X2.1.8.5 5-Corrugated graphite ribbon
X2.1.8.6 6-Chloroprene
COPYRIGHT/).
1076
A Designation: F1546/F1546M -96 (Reapproved 2012)
.. u11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Fire Hose Nozzles
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation F1546/F1546M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, and
testing of fire hose nozzles intended for use with sea water or
fresh water either in straight stream or adjustable spray
patterns.
standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A313/ A313M Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire
A580/ A580M Specification for Stainless Steel Wire
A582/A582M Specification for Free-Machining Stainless
Steel Bars
D395 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set
D412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas-
tic Elastomers-Tension
D572 Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration by Heat and
Oxygen
D 1193 Specification for Reagent Water
2.2 NFPA Standards:
3
NFPA 1963 Standards for Screw Threads and Gaskets for
Fire Hose Connections
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 ball shut-off-a spray nozzle configuration that stops
the flow of water through the nozzle by rotating the ball
through which the water flows so that the passage no longer
aligns with the nozzle flow passage.
1
General Requirements.
Current edition approved May I, 2012. Published May 2012. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as F1546/Fl546M- 96
(2006). DOI: 10.1520/F1546_Fl546M-96Rl2.
2
the ASTM website.
3
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), l Batterymarch
3.1.2 break apart-a feature that allows the nozzle tip to be
disconnected from the nozzle body by virtue of a coupling
identical to that on the hose end of the nozzle.
3.1.3 constant flow rate spray nozzle-an adjustable pattern
nozzle in which the flow is delivered at a designed nozzle
pressure. At the rated pressure, the nozzle will deliver a
constant flow rate from straight stream through a wide angle
pattern. This is accomplished by maintaining a constant orifice
size during flow pattern adjustment.
3.1.4 constant pressure (automatic) spray nozzle-an ad-
justable pattern nozzle in which the pressure remains constant
through a range of flows rates. The constant pressure provides
the velocity for an effective stream reach at various flow rates.
This is accomplished by means of a pressure-activated, self-
adjusting orifice baffle.
3 .1.5 constant/select flow rate feature-a nozzle feature that
allows on-site adjustment of the orifice to change the flow rate
to a predetermined value. The flow rate remains constant
throughout the range of pattern selection from straight stream
to wide angle spray.
3.1.6 free swivel coupling-a coupling between the nozzle
and hose or between halves of a break-apart nozzle that is
capable of being turned readily by hand; that is, a spanner
wrench is not required to tighten the coupling to prevent
leakage.
3.1.7 flush-a feature in a nozzle that allows the orifice to be
opened so that small debris that might otherwise be trapped in
the nozzle, causing pattern disruptions and flow variation, can
pass through. When the flush feature is engaged, the nozzle
pressure will drop and the pattern will deteriorate.
3.1.8 lever-type control-a control in which the handle
operates along the axis of the nozzle.
3.1.9 pistol grip-a feature usually available as an attach-
ment that allows a nozzle to be held like a pistol.
3 .1.1 0 rated pressure-that pressure for which the nozzle is
designed to operate at a specified flow rate(s).
3.1.11 rotational-type control-a control that rotates in a
plane perpendicular to the axis of the nozzle.
4. Classification
4.1 Marine fire hose nozzles may be classified into four
general construction types, as follows:
1077
F1546/F1546M - 96 (2012)
4.1.1 Type /-Pistol grip, lever-type control operated.
4.1.2 Type //-Nonpistol grip, lever-type control operated.
4.1.3 Type ///-Break apart, pistol grip, lever-type control
operated.
4.1.4 Type /V-Break apart, nonpistol grip, lever-type con-
trol operated.
4.2 Nozzle types may be subdivided into three general
classes, as follows:
4.2.1 Class /-Constant flow rate.
4.2.2 Class I/-Constant/select flow rate.
4.2.3 Class ]//-Constant pressure.
4.3 Classes may be subdivided into two
follows:
4.3.1 Size 38 mm, with free swivel base.
4.3.2 Size 64 mm, with free swivel base.
sizes, as
5.1 The following shall be specified when ordering:
5.1.1 Quantity,
5.1.2 Type (see
5.1.3 Class (see
5.1.4 Size (see 4.3),
5.1.5 Material (see 6.1.2, 9.8.1 and 12)
4
5.1.6 Thread type
5
6.1 Materials:
6.1.1 All nozzle components and parts must be durable and
demonstrate satisfactory operation during al1 performance tests
in Section 9.
6.1.2 The nozzle body and any metal used in the construc-
tion of any part of the nozzle shall be corrosion resistant.
Copper alloys containing more than 15% zinc are prohibited in
all parts that are in contact with the fluid flow. No aluminum
alloys may be used except for nozzles operated exclu-
with fresh water. No ferrous material may be used
except for the Type 300 series stainless steel for wire and
springs in accordance with Specifications A313/ A313M or
A580/ A580M and for screws and pins in accordance with
Specification A582/ A582M.
6.1.3 All nonmetallic materials or elastomers used
to form a seal or shall have the following properties:
6.1.3.1 uniform dimensions,
6.1. 3. 2 be of such size, shape, and resiliency as to withstand
ordinary usage and matter carried by water, including
petrochemical solvents and high alkaline solutions such as
those used for cleaning nozzles (see and
6.1.3.3 be able to withstand ozone and ultraviolet light
exposure if used on the external of the nozzle.
6.1.4 All materials shall have tensile set of not more than 5
mm as determined in accordance with 6.2. , and compression
set not more than 15 % as determined in accordance with 6.2.2.
6.2 Rubber Sealing Materials:
4
Nozzle material should be galvanically compatible with the intended fire hose
couplings.
5
Threads should conform to a recognized industry standard such as NFPA 1963.
6.2.1 Tensile Strength, Ultimate Elongation, and Tensile Set
Tests:
6.2.1.1 Tensile strength, ultimate elongation, and tensile set
shall be determined in accordance with Test Methods D412,
Method A, except that, for tensile set determinations, the
elongation shall be maintained for only 3 min, and the tensile
set shall be measured 3 min after release of the The
elongation of a specimen for a tensile set determination is to be
such that the bench marks 25 mm apart become to a
distance of 76 mm.
6.2.1.2 If a breaks outside the bench marks, or
either the measured tensile or ultimate of
the is less than the value, an additional
spe:cinaen shall be tested, and those results shall be considered
final. Results of tests for specimens that break in the curved
outside the bench marks may be if the
and values are within the mini-
Set Test:
of the material shall be
and the test conducted in accordance with Test Methods D395,
Method B. The shall be exposed for 22 hat 22C
6.2.3 Accelerated Aging Test:
6.2.3.1 Specimens shall be prepared in the same manner as
for tensile and ultimate elongation and ultimate
elongation tests, except for the bench marks 25 mm apart that
shall be stamped on the specimen after the test exposure. The
exposure shall be conducted in accordance with Test Method
D572.
6.2.3.2 All materials must retain not less than 70% of the
as-received tensile strength and ultimate elongation after the
accelerated aging test.
6.2.4 Silicone rubber (rubber having polyorganosiloxane as
its characteristic constituent) shall have a tensile strength of not
less than 3.5 MPa and at least 100% ultimate elongation
determined in accordance with 9.3.2.
6.2.5 Sealing material other than silicone rubber shall have
a tensile strength of not less than 10 MPa and at least 200 %'
ultimate elongation as determined in accordance with 6.2.1.
7. Configuration
1078
7.1 All nozzles shall consist of the following components
and design:
7 .1.1 Nozzle body,
7.1.2 Free swivel coupling,
7 .1.3 Shutoffs,
7 .1.4 Shutoff seats,
7.1.5 Shutoff handle,
7 .1.6 Bumper guard,
7 .1. 7 Seals,
7 .1. 8 Flushing feature,
7.1.9 Pistol (optional), and
7 .1.1 0 Break apart feature
7.2 Nozzles shall be with a lever-type control
shutoff handle which shall be in the closed when
handle is closest to the
control of the flow rate must also be
handle.
F1546/F1546M - 96 (2012)
7 .2.1 The inside clearances of the shutoff handle shall be a
minimum of 7 5 mm wide by 25 mm high.
7 .2.2 The shutoff handle shall be of such a size that the
operator's hand in a fireman's glove and closed on the handle
does not interfere with the operation of the shutoff handle in
any position.
7.3 Spray pattern adjustment shall be means of rotational
controls. Rotational controls shall traverse from a wide
spray pattern to narrow to stream in clockwise
manner when viewed from the hose end of the nozzle.
The wide and narrow angle spray patterns shall be enhanced
with an action means of a minimum of one and
a maximum of two rows of fixed or teeth concentric to
the orifice.
7.4 Nozzles shall have a or
debris from the nozzle without down hose line.
This may be either the full open nozzle
or a flush feature of the nozzle.
7 .4.1 If used, the flush feature shall have a separate control,
mc:onDmate a detent, or shall increased force to operate,
to indicate to the firefighter when the flush feature is being
7.5 All features and controls shall be one hand
of the operator while the other hand is holding the nozzle.
7.6 A shall be at the end of the
nozzle for physical damage. The nozzle stem
shall not extend past the bumper in any of the flow positions
including flush.
7. 7 The grip, if one is provided, shall have four finger
notches on the side and the minimum span and width shall
be suitable for use with a hand wearing a typical fireman's
7.8 Couplings shall be of a free swivel type.
7.9 Each nozzle shall be provided with a resilient gasket
fitted in the nozzle coupling recess. The shall have
dimensions in accordance with NFPA 1963. Type III and IV
nozzles shall an additional gasket to accommodate
the
7.10 Nozzles for use with 38-mm hoses shall not
more than 4.53 Nozzles for use with 64-mm hoses shall
not more than 5. 9
able without of the nozzle.
which a stop, detent, separate
,.,.,,.,c .,,d force to engage shall be labeled,
and shutoff pattern selection, and
and assemblies cast-
parts, sta:rnpings,
shall be clean and free sand,
material.
9. Design Qualification Tests
9.1 Four first production run specimens shall be randomly
selected and subjected to the tests described in 9.3 through 9.13
in sequential order.
9.2 The specimens shall exhibit no permanent deformation
that interferes with their proper operation during any test.
9.3 Nonmetallic components shall be subjected to the fol
specific testing:
9.3.1 Aging Exposure:
9.3.1.1 Aging tests shall be performed before all other tests
identified in this standard.
9.3.1.2 The specimens shall be subjected to air-oven aging
for 180 days at 70C and then allowed to cool at least 24 h in
air at 25C and 50 % relative humidity.
.3 At the conclusion of the test, the shall be
mspected and all functions shall be operated to ensure
operate Cracking, or any other condition that
interferes with the proper operation of any shall
constitute failure of this test.
9.3.2 Ultraviolet Light-Water Exposure:
9.3 .2.1 Nozzle designs with exposed nonmetallic parts shall
be to ultraviolet and water for 720 h.
9.3.2.2 The ultraviolet shall be obtained from two
ct<>tnn<>u enclosed carbon-arc lamps. The arc of each lamp is
to be fonned between two vertical carbon electrodes, 13 mm in
diameter, located at the center of a revolvable vertical cylinder,
787 mm in diameter and 450 mm in height. Each arc is to be
enclosed with a number PX globe.
9.3.2.3 The water shall conform to Type IV water in
Specification D1193.
9.3.2.4 The specimens are to be mounted vertically on the
inside of the revolvable cylinder, arcing the lamps, and the
cylinder continuously revolved around the stationary lamps at
1 revolution per minute. A system is to be provided so that each
specm1en in tum is sprayed with water as the cylinder revolves.
the operating cycle, each specimen is to be to
the light and water spray for 3 min and the light only for 17 min
(total 20 min). The air temperature within the revolving
cylinder of the apparatus during operations is to be maintained
at 65C.
9.3.2.5 At the conclusion of the test, the specimens shall be
inspected and all functions shall be operated to ensure
operate properly. Cracking, crazing, or any other condition
which interferes with the proper operation of any specimen
shall constitute failure of this test.
1079
9.4 Discharge Calibration Test:
9 .4.1 Constant flow rate specimens shall flow the rated
discharge, plus 10 %, minus 0 %, measured at rated pressure,
the entire range of pattern setting from straight stream
to wide angle spray.
9.4.2 Constant/select flow rate specimens shall flow the
rated plus 10 %, minus 0 %, measured at rated
pressure, for each flow rate selection through the entire range
of pattern from straight stream to wide angle spray.
9.4.3 Constant flow rate specimens and select flow rate
are to be installed on a fitting of the
same size as the nominal inlet thread size, attached to a
F1546/F1546M - 96 (2012)
calibrated laboratory quality flow meter, and supplied with a
source of pressurized water. The water flow rate in liters per
minute is to be recorded through the full range of pattern
selection.
9.4.4 Constant pressure specimens shall be tested beginning
with the minimum rated flow. The pressure at this flow shall be
recorded. The flow rate and nozzle pressure shall be monitored
through the entire range of pattern selection from straight
stream to wide angle spray. Any deviation over 2 % in flow rate
or pressure shall constitute failure of this test. The flow rate
shall be slowly increased to the maximum rated flow while the
pressure is monitored. At the maximum rated flow, the flow
rate and pressure shall be monitored throughout the entire
range of pattern selection. Any deviation over 2 % in flow rate
or pressure shall constitute failure of this test.
9.5 Flow Pattern Test:
9.5.1 Specimens shall develop discharge flow patterns vary-
ing from straight stream to wide angle spray while maintaining
either constant flow rate or constant pressure.
9.5.2 The straight stream pattern setting shall provide a
cohesive jet capable of delivering 90 %of the rated flow within
a circle 400 mm in diameter at a distance of 8 m from the
nozzle.
9.5.3 The spray pattern settings shall provide a full and
uniform spray pattern of small droplets, and the spray pattern
adjustments shall provide spray pattern angles ranging from
25 for narrow angle spray through at least 120 for wide angle
spray at maximum flow rate.
9.6 Flushing Test:
9.6.1 The specimens shall be held vertically, discharge end
down, and the controls placed in the flush position. A 7 -mm
ball must pass through each specimen without changes in the
control position. The inability to pass the test ball will be
considered failure of this test.
9.7 Control Tests:
9.7.1 Lever-type controls:
9.7.1.1 Not more than 80 N nor less than 35 N shall be
required to open or close the shutoff handle against a minimum
of 700-kPa nozzle inlet pressure.
9.7.1.2 The specimens shall be mounted in the closed
position and subjected to a static pressure of 700 kPa. A
dynamometer, which records the maximum force reading, shall
be attached to the shutoff handle, where the handle would
normally be held during operation. The shutoff handle shall be
moved from the fully closed to fully open position for the full
range of pattern adjustment. The maximum force shall be
recorded. Next, the specimens shall be placed in the full
flowing position and the inlet pressure shall be adjusted to 700
kPa. With this new pressure adjustment, the dynomometer shall
be used when moving the shutoff handle through the full range
of positions and maximum force again measured and recorded.
The maximum force recorded in both directions shall not be
greater than permitted in 9. 7 .1. L
9.7.1.3 The specimens shall be mounted without any water
pressure being applied and the shutoff handle shall be placed in
a closed position. The handle shall be moved from the closed
position and the force required to move the handle shall be
1080
measured with the dynomometer. The force to move the handle
shall not be less than permitted in 9. 7 .1. 1 .
9. 7.2 Rotational-type controls:
9.7.2.1 Designs incorporating rotational controls shall have
the torque required to rotate the sleeve determined while the
specimen inlet pressure is 700 kPa.
9.7.2.2 A length of twine or string, not to exceed 2-mm
diameter, shall be wrapped around each specimen at the point
where each specimen would normally be held while rotating
the sleeve. The string shall be of sufficient length to wrap
around each specimen at least six turns. The first two turns will
overlap the starting end of the string, and the balance of the
turns will not overlap any other turn. A force gauge, which
records the maximum force reading, will be attached to a loop
in the free end of the string.
9.7.2.3 The sleeve shall be rotated by pulling the force
gauge perpendicular to the center of the axis of each specimen.
As the pattern sleeve rotates, the string will unwind, so that the
force always remains tangential to the sleeve.
9.7.2.4 The sleeve shall be rotated in either direction
the entire range of rotation and the maximum torque
shall be calculated. The torque shall not be more than 2 N-m
nor less than 0.5 N-m.
9.7.2.5 Free swivel-type couplings shall be tested in accor-
dance with 9.7.2.2 through 9.7.2.4. The force required to rotate
each specimen once the swivel is tightened onto a coupling
shall be at least 50 N not less than 5 N greater than the force
required to rotate the specimen controls.
9.8 Corrosion Exposure:
9.8.1 This test is not required for aluminum nozzles because
of the restriction on their use in fresh water service only.
9.8.2 The specimens shall be supported vertically and ex-
posed to salt spray as specified by Practice B 117 for 120 h.
9.8.3 After completion of the salt spray test, all controls
shall operate without sticking or binding. There shall be no
evidence of galvanic corrosion between dissimilar metals. For
metallic specimens, this test shall be conducted immediately
after the tests specified in 9. 7.
9.9 High Temperature Test:
9.9.1 The specimens are to be conditioned at 60C for 24 h.
Immediately after being removed from the heating chamber,
the specimens shall be tested for proper function of all controls.
There shall be no binding, sticking, or malfunction of any
function.
9.9.2 Within 3 min of removal from the heating chamber,
the specimens shall be subjected to the Rough Usage Test in
9.1 L
9.10 Low Temperature Test:
9.10.1 The specimens are to be conditioned at -37C for 24
h. Immediately after being removed from the cooling chamber,
the specimens shall be tested for proper operation. There shall
be no binding, sticking, or malfunction of any function.
9.10.2 Within 3 min of removal from the cooling chamber,
the specimens shall be subjected to the Rough Usage Test in
9.1 I.
9.11 Rough Usage Test:
F1546/F1546M - 96 (2012)
9 .11.1 Two of the four specimens shall be connected to a dry
hose and dropped twice from a height of 2 m onto a concrete
surface such that the point of impact is on the lever and twice
such that the point of impact is on a side 90 from the lever.
The same two specimens shall then be dropped twice from a
height of 600 mm such that the point of impact is squarely on
the discharge end of the nozzle. The two other specimens shall
be connected to a wet hose and placed in the shutoff position.
The static pressure shall be increased to 700 kPa. The test from
the 2-m height shall be repeated. Specimens equipped with
pistol grips shall also be dropped twice while unconnected so
that the point of contact is on the grip.
9 .11.2 Following the drop test, the specimens shall be
examined for cracking, breaking, and deformation that inter-
feres with their proper operation. Specimens developing cracks
or broken sections or failing to operate properly are considered
failed.
9.11.3 Following the drop tests, the specimens shall be
subjected to the Leakage Test and Hydrostatic Pressure Test in
accordance with J 2 and 9.13, respectively.
9.12 Leakage Test:
9 .12.1 The leakage test shall be conducted during the
Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
9.12.2 At the point during the Hydrostatic Pressure Test in
which the hydrostatic pressure is the greater of 4000 k:Pa or 1
1
/z
times the rated pressure, the shutoff shall be fully opened and
closed. After the shutoff has been closed, the leakage shall be
measured and recorded. The maximum leakage allowed
through the discharge orifice is Vz mL per min. There shall be
no leakage through any part of the specimens other than the
discharge orifice.
9.12.3 The leakage shall be measured and recorded again
when the specimens are subjected to the final hydrostatic
pressure in 3. Increases in leakage shall not exceed 1 mL per
min.
9.13 Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
9.13 .1 The specimens shall be rigidly mounted in a closed
position. The static pressure shall be increased to 350 k:Pa and
held for 30 s. The static pressure shall be increased in 350-kPa
increments and held for 30 s at each pressure to a maximum
static pressure of 7000 kPa. The final pressure shall be held for
1 min without rupture of any specimen.
9.14 Operator Protection Test:
9.14.1 Each specimen shall be coupled to a hose and rigidly
mounted at a height of 1 m to the center of the specimen body.
The specimen may be slightly inclined to simulate the typical
position during normal use. The pressure shall be increased to
an inlet pressure of 700 kPa. The water must be clear and clean,
such as that from a municipal water supply.
9.14.2 A cross or grid on which to mount radiometers shall
be positioned 300 mm directly behind the specimen body. The
structure shall be perpendicular to the vertical plane of the
specimen.
9.14.3 Radiometers shall be mounted on the structure at a
distance of 600 mm above the specimen, 300 mm to the right,
300 mm to the left, and 300 mm below the specimen.
1081
9.14.4 A heat source, such as a grid, tree, or framework of
natural gas nozzles, shall be positioned directly in front of the
specimen. The heat source must be located at a horizontal
distance from the specimen so that it will not be cooled when
operating the specimen wide angle spray pattern.
9.14.5 The heat source shall be operated to obtain a heat flux
value of at least 26 kW/m
2
measured by the radiometers. The
specimen shall be set to the wide angle flow pattern, opened,
and tested for each rated flow. The heat flux shall be recorded
for each radiometer and the average calculated.
9.14.6 The average heat flux obtained during each test must
be 5.7 kW/m
2
or lower, and no individual heat flux value may
be greater than 8.0 kW/m
2

9.15 Horizontal Distance:
9.15.1 The specimens shall be coupled to a hose, rigidly
mounted at a height of 1 m in the open position. The flow
pressure shall be set at 350 kPa.
9.15.2 The specimens shall be placed in the straight stream
position. The specimens may be inclined to achieve the
maximum reach. For 38-mm designs, the horizontal distance
from the nozzle orifice to the center of the water pattern at its
furthest point shall be at least 18 m. For 64-mm designs, this
distance shall be at least 24 m.
9.15.3 The test shall be repeated with the inlet pressure
increased to 700 kPa. For 38-mm designs, the horizontal
distance from the nozzle orifice to the center of the water
pattern at its furthest point shall be at least 27 m. For 64-mm
designs, this distance shall be at least 36 m.
10. Quality Conformance Testing
10.1 Sampling for Quality Conformance Testing:
1 0.1.1 A quantity of completed specimens in accordance
with Table shall be randomly selected from each lot and
subjected to the Discharge Calibration Test, Flow Pattern Test,
and Leakage Test described in 9.4, 9.5 and 9.12, respectively.
The Leakage Test shall be conducted using the rated pressure
and the maximum leakage allowed through the discharge
orifice is
1
/4 mL per min. If one or more defects are found in
any specimen, the entire lot represented by the specimen shall
be considered failed. If a lot is considered failed, the entire lot
may be screened for the defective characteristic(s).
11. Certification
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples from
each lot have been tested and inspected as directed in this
TABLE 1 Sampling for Quality Conformance Testing
Lot Size
2-8
9-300
Over 301
Size
All
10 %-8 minimum
5 %-30 minimum
F1546/F1546M - 96 (2012)
12. Product Marking
12.1 In addition to markings required by any other section,
the name of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's model
number, the size (see 4.3), the thread type, and ASTM
specification designation shall be marked on each nozzle.
Furthermore, all nozzles manufactured with aluminum alloys
shall be marked with the phrase "F.W. Only." All required
markings, whether embossed or attached, shall be permanent
and legible.
13. Keywords
13.1 fire hose; fire protection; marine; nozzle; ship; ship-
board equipment
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr /-/arbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
COPYRIGHT/).
1082
A Designation: F1547-09

I!I_I!RNATIONAL
Standard Guide Listing
Relevant Standards and Publications for Commercial
Shipbuilding
1
standard .is under the fixed designation F1547; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
ongmal adoption or, m the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
standards,
has been developed to aid naval architects,
de:signers, material and equipment suppliers, ship
owners and operators, and government providing
pertinent information in one document that can be used during
various stages of commercial shipbuilding. These stages in-
clude design, planning, purchasing, material fabricating, as-
sembling, testing, quality assurance, and inspection.
2.2 This guide is a non-technical document, meaning that it
does not specify how a particular standard is to be implemented
any person or agency. Local or national regulatory agencies
having jurisdiction and oversight of ship design and operations
may incorporate all or part of any standard in their
regulations.
2.3 There may be more than one standard listed for a
particular product, test, or application. However, this
guide does not compare the different standards or specify
which particular standard should be used.
2.4 A partial list of sources for various standards
is included below. Other sources may be located by contacting
various information centers such as those at ASTM the
National Institute for Standards and Technology (Codes Stan-
dards and and the American National Standards
Institute. Information is also available various sites on
the Internet World Wide Web (for example, http://
www.webplus.netnssn). When should
consider obtaining the latest of standards as complete
sets or portions of sets in whatever media are appropriate
example, hard copy, CD-ROM, or microform) since purchas-
ing, quality assurance, and are fre-
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships and
Current edition approved
approved in 1994. Last previous
10.1520/Fl547-09.
2009. Published June 2009. Originally
approved in 1999 as Fl54 7 - 06. DOl:
looking for information about standards called out in
contract and these standards from one
contract to another. The abbreviations used Table are
defined in here in this Some of the sources
rorrl"'"""''"' standards are:
ABS Americas (ABS)
A Division of the American Bureau of Shipping
16855 Northchase Drive
Houston, TX 77060
Telephone: 281-877-6000
Fax: 281-877-6001
http://www.eagle.org/
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
Telephone: 847-394-0150
Fax: 847-253-0088
http://www.amca.org/
American Boat and Yacht Council, Inc. (ABYC)
3069 Solomons Island Road
Edl:lrew:aJer_ MD 21037-1416
Telephone: 410-956-1050
Fax: 410-956-2737
http://www.abycinc.org/
American Gas Association (AGA)
400 N. Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20001
Telephone: 800-841-8430 or 202-824-7000
Fax: 202-824-7115
http:/ /www.aga.org/
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: 212-642-4900
Fax: 212-398-0023
http://www.ansi.org/
Copyright ASTM lnK>rnational, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1083
F1547-09
American Petroleum Institute (API)
1220 L Street, NW
Telephone: 202-682-8000
Fax: 202-962-4776
http://www.api.org/
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)
Publication Sales Department
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Telephone: 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
http://www.ashrae.org/
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
Telephone: 800-843-2763
http:/ /www.asme.org/
American Society of Naval Engineers (ASNE)
1452 Duke Street
Alexandria, VA 22314-3458
Telephone: 703-836-6727
Fax: 703-836-7491
http:/ /www.navalengineers.org/
1084
American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
1711 Arlingate Lane
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
Telephone: 800-222-2768 or 614-274-6003
Fax: 614-274-6899
http:/ /www.asnt.org/
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM (U.S.)
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Telephone: 610-832-9585
http:/ /www.astm.org
ASTM (Europe)
27-29 Knowl Piece
Wilbury Way
Hitchin, Herts SG4
OSX England
eier,nonte: 0462-437933
Fax: 0462-433678
http://standards.ameritech.co.uklastmhome.html
All European orders are serviced by the ASTM European
Office. Customers in other countries may order from ASTM
(U.S.), ASTM (Europe), or one of the following sources.
ASTM European Office
American Technical Publishers (ATP)
Hitchin, Herts
England
Telephone: 44 1462 437933
http:/ /www.ameritech.co. uk!astm
F1547-09
Albania
Drejtoria e Pergjithshme e Standardizimit (DPS)
Tirana
Telephone: 355 42 262 55
dsc@icc.al.eu.org
Argentina
Institute Argentino De Racionalizacion de Materiales
(IRAM)
Buenos Aires
Telephone: 54 11 43 46 06 02
http:/ /www.iram.com.ar
Tradinco SRL
Buenos Aires
Telephone: 54 64 1 311 2908
tradinco@ lvd.com.ar
Australia
Global Info Centre
Eastwood
Telephone: 61 2 9804 1200
http:/ /www.ihs.com.au
Standards and Technical Publications
Unley
Telephone: 61 08 8373 1540
http://www.stp.com.au
Standards Australia
Strathfield
Telephone: 61 2 9746 4700
software@ standards.com.au
Bolivia
Instituto Boliviano de Normalizacion u Calidad
(IBN ORCA)
La Paz
Telephone: 591 2 241 9038
http:/ /www.ibnorca.org
Bosnia
Institute for Standards, Metrology and Intellectual Property
of Bosnia and Herzegovina
Telephone: 387 33 65 27 65
http:/ /www.baspm.gov.ba
Brazil
Institute for Technological Research of the State
of Sao Paulo (IPT)
Sao Paulo
Telephone: 55 11 3767 4374
http://www.ipt.br
1085
International Library Service
Provo, UT
United States of America
Telephone: 801-374-6214
astm@ normas.com
PTI-Publicacoes Tecnicas Internacionais Ltda.
Sao Paulo
Telephone: 55 11 3159 2535
http://www.pti.com.br
SAE Brazil
Sao Paulo
Telephone: 55 11 287 2627
saebr@ ibm. net
Bulgaria
Bulgarian Institute for Standardization (BDS)
Sofia
Telephone: 359 2 981 00 89
http:/ /www.sasm.government. bg
Chile
Chile Instituto Nacional de Normalizacion (INN)
Santiago
Telephone: 56 2 441 03 30
http:/ /www.inn.cl
China
Beijing CAPE Computer Software System Engineering
Beijing
Telephone: 86 10 6463 2974
songsc @cape.com.cn
China Information Institute of Technical Supervision
Beijing
Telephone: 86 10 6202 2798
China International Book Trading Corp., Shanghai Branch
Shanghai
Telephone: 86 21 5351 0520
cibtcsh@ shtel.net.cn
China National Institute of Standardization (CNIS)
Beijing
Telephone: 86 10 5881 1346
E-mail: libo@nis.gov.cn
China National Publications Import & Export Corporation
Beijing
Telephone: 86 10 6506 6688
http:/ /www.cnpiec.com.cn
f1547-09
China National Sci-Tech Information
Beijing
Telephone: 86 10 8403 9343
cti @public.bta.net.cn
CNPIEC Shanghai Branch
Shanghai
Telephone: 86 21 6215 0555
cnpiecsb@ stn.sh.cn
CNPIEC, Xi'an Branch
Shaanxi
Telephone: 86 29 8727 9748
Global Info Centre
Shanghai Book Traders
Shanghai
86 21 6322 3200
http:l/www.sbt.com.cn
Shanghai Institute of Standardization
Telephone: 86 21 6437 0807
http://www.shsi.net.cn
Colombia
Global Info Centre
Bogata
Telephone: 57 1 600 9474
infoenlace@ andinet.com
Instituto Colombiano de Normas Tecnicas y Certificacion
(ICONTEC)
Bogota
Telephone: 57 607 8888 Ext. 1481
http://www.icontec.org.co
Croatia
State Office of Standardization & Metrology (DZNM)
Zagreb
Telephone: 385 1 610 61 11
http://www.dznm.hr
Czech Republic
Czech Standards Institute
Praha
Telephone: 420 2 21 80 21 11
http://www.csni.cz
1086
Dominica
Bureau of Standards Dominica (DBOS)
Roseau
Telephone: 809 767-448-1685
standards@cwdom.dm
Ecuador
Instituto Ecuatoriano de Normalizacion (INEN)
Quito
Telephone: 593 2 56 56 26
inenl @inen.gov.ec
Egypt
Egyptian Organization for Standardization and Quality
Control (EOS)
Cairo
Telephone: 20 2 256 60 22
moi @idsc.gov.eg
El Salvador
Consejo Nacional de Ciencia y Tecnologia (CONACYT)
San Salvador
Telephone: 503 226 28 00
http://www.conacyt.gob.sv
Finland
Finnish Standards Association
Helsinki
Telephone: 358 9 149 93 31
http://www.sfs.fi
France
Association Franqaise de Normalization (AFNOR)
Cedex
Telephone: 33 1 41 62 80 00
http://www.afnor.fr
Germany
Deutsches Institut fur Normung (DIN)
Berlin
Telephone: 49 30 26 01 0
http://www.beuth.de
India
Allied Publishers Private Ltd.
Chennal
Telephone: 91 2 852 3938
apsaad@ ad 1. vsnl.net.in
Book Supply Bureau
New Delhi
Telephone: 91 11 461 1991
http:l/www.standardsindiv.com
Indonesia
C.V. Djakarta Ray a
Jakarta Timur
Telephone: 62 21 819 3487
http://www.djakartaraya.com
Jamaica
Bureau of Standards Jamaica (BSJ)
Tokyo
lele]Jhorle: 81 03 3439 0124
http://www.kinokuniya.co.jp
Maruzen Company, Ltd.
Tokyo
Telephone: 81 33 275 8595
http:/ /www.maruzen.co.jp
Korea
Korean Standards Association
Seoul
Telephone: 82 2 369 8114
ksa20 1 0@ chollian.dacorn.co.kr
Kyobo Book Centre Co., Ltd.
Chongro-Ku
Telephone: 82 2 735 0030
http://www.kyobobook.co.kr
Malaysia
SIRIM Berhad (SIRIM)
Telephone: 60 3 55446000
http://www.siim.my
Mexico
Global Info Centre
Col. Noche Buena
eiermonte: 52 55 598-0109
global@ihs.com.mx
INFOTEC
Col. Toriello Guerra
52 55 624-2800
rceballo@rtn.net.mx
F1547-09
1087
Mongolia
Mongolian Agency for Standardization and Metrology
(MASM)
Ulaanbaatar
Telephone: 976 11 45 83 49
http://www.mnstandard.com
Morocco
The Service de Normalisation Industrielle Marocaine
(SNIMA)
Rabat
Telephone: 212 37 71 62 14
http://www.mcinet.gov.ma
New Zealand
Standards New Zealand
Wellington
Telephone: 64 4 498 59 90
http://www.standards.co.nz
Panama
Comision Panamena de Normas Industriales y Tecnias
(COPANIT)
Panama City
Telephone: 507-360-0716
http://www.mici.gob.pa
Peru
Instituto Nacional de Defensa de la Competencia y de la
Protecci6n de la Propiedad Intelectual (INDECOPI)
Lima
Telephone: 51 1 224 78 00
http://www.indecopi.gob. pe
Philippines
Philippine Bureau of Product Standards (BPS)
Makati City
Telephone: 632 890 4965
http://www.dti.gov. ph/bps
Poland
Polish Committee for Standardization (PKN)
Warszawa
Telephone: 48 22 556 77 77
Romania
Asociatia de Standardizare din Romania (ASRO)
Bucuresti
Telephone: 40 1 211 32 96
irs@ kappa.ro
Russia
Gosstandart Interstandard
Moscow
http://www.interstandard.ru
F1547-09
Saudi Arabia
Environmental Consulting Group (ECB)
Riyadh
Telephone: 966 1 462 2926
http:/ /www.rhska.com
Singapore
Choice TEXTS
Telephone: 65 7 41 8422
lee@pbs.book.co.th
SPRING Singapore
Telephone: 65 2793920
http://eshop.spring.gov.sg
South Africa
Global Info Centre
Johannesburg
Telephone: 11 835 2221
global @ihs.co.za
Standards South Africa (SABS)
Pretoria
Telephone: 012 428 6002
http://www.sabs.co.za
Spain
Asociaci6n Espanola de Normalizaci6n y Certificaci6n
(AENOR)
Madrid
Telephone: 34 91 4326036
http:/ /www.aenor.es
Sri Lanka
Sri Lanka Standards Institution (SLSI)
LK-Colombo
Telephone: 67 1567 72
http:/ /www.nsf.ac.lk
St. Lucia
Saint Lucia Bureau of Standards (SLBS)
Castries
Telephone: 1 758 453 00 49
http://www.slbs.or.lc
Sweden
Swedish Standards Institute (SIS)
Stockholm
Telephone: 46 8 55 55 20 00
http://www.sis.se
Taiwan
Taos Publishers & Book Co., Ltd.
Taipei
Telephone: 02 2331 5773
wangrex @tpts7 .seed.net.tw
1088
The Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection (BSMI)
Taipei
Telephone: 886 2 2343 1700
http://www.bsmi.gov.tw
Thailand
Book Promotion & Service
Bangkok
Telephone: 662 732 02435
http:/ /www.book.co. th
Trinidad and Tobago
Trinidad & Tobago Bureau of Standards (TTBS)
Trinidad & Tobago
Telephone: 868 662 8826
http://www.ttbs.org.tt
Turkey
Turk Standartiari Endtitusu (TSE)
Ankara
90 312 417 8330
http://www. tse.org. tr/
Uganda
Uganda National Bureau of Standards (UNBS)
Kampala
Telephone: 256 041 222367
http://www.unbs.org
United Kingdom
American Technical Publishers (ATP)
Hitchin, Herts
England
Telephone: 44 1462 437933
http://www.ameritech.co.uk/astm
Uruguay
Instituto Uruguayo de Normas Tecnicas (UNIT)
Montevideo
Telephone: 598 2 901 20 48
http://www. unit.org. uy
Vietnam
MinhAnh Technical Information Co. Ltd.
Vungtau City
Telephone: 84 64 857923
sales @minhanh-techinfo.com
Zimbabwe
Standards Association of Zimbabwe (SAZ)
Harare
Telephone: 263 4 88 20 17/9
sazinfo@ mweb.co.zw
Or Contact:
ASTM International
100 Barr Harbor Drive
P.O. Box C700
W. Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Telephone: 610-832-9585
http://www. astm. org
British Standards Institution (BSI)
BSI Customer Services
389 Chiswick High Road
London W4 4AL
Telephone: + 44 (0) 20 8996 9001
Fax: + 44 (0) 20 8996 7001
http://www.bsi-global.com/wws
Bureau Veritas (BV)
1850 Eller Drive, Suite 201
Everglades, FL 33316
Telephone: 954-525-4114
Fax: 954-763-9718
http://www.bureauveritas.com/
Canadian Standards Associati on (CSA)
5060 Spectrum Way
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 5N6
Canada
Telephone: 416-7 4 7 -4000; 1-800-463-6727
Fax: 416-747-2473
http://www.csa.ca!Default.asp?language=English
Code of Federal Regulations
http://www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.Html
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)
1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004
Arlington, VA 22202-4102
Telephone: 703-412-0900
Fax: 703-412-0128
http://www.cganet.com/
Department of the Navy
(General Specifications forT Ships of
the U.S. Navy (TSGS))
Naval Sea Systems Command
1333 Isaac Hull AVE. SE
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20376
Telephone: 202-781-3732
Fax: 202-781-4554
http:/ /www.navy.mil/
0 F1547-09
1089
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
North and Central America Admin.
70 Grand Avenue, Suite 201
River Edge, NJ 07661
Telephone: 201-343-0800
Fax: 201-343-4061
http://www.dnv.com/
Document Center, Inc.
111 Industrial Road, Unit 9
Belmont, CA 94002
Telephone: 650-591-7600
Fax: 650-591-7617
http:/ /www.document -center. com/
Document Engineering Co, Inc. (DECO)
1520 Stagg Street
Van Nuys, CA 91405
Telephone: 818-782-1010
Fax: 818-782-2374
http:/ /www.doceng.com/cgi -bin/Doceng.storefront
DOD Single Stock Point (DoDSSP)
Standardization Documents Order Desk
700 Robbins Avenue, Bldg. 4D
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
http:/ /dodssp.daps.dla.mil!dodssp.htm
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
(EJMA)
25 North Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591
Telephone: 914-332-0040
Fax: 914-332-1541
http://www.ejma.org/
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)
400 Seventh Street, SW
Telephone: 202-366-0537
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/
Fluid Controls Institute, Inc. (FCI)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115
Telephone: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
http://www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org/default.asp
General Services Administration (GSA)
Specifications Branch
Seventh and D Streets, SW
Telephone: 202-708-9205
Fax: 202-708-9862
http://www.gsa.gov/Portal!gsa!ep/home.do?tabid=O
F1547-09
Germanischer Lloyd (USA), Inc. (GL)
111 Pavonia Avenue, Suite 1410
Jersey City, NJ 07310-1755
Telephone: 201-216-1725
Fax: 201-216-1727
http://www.gl-group.com/start.htm
Global Engineering Documents
15 Inverness Way
East Englewood, CO 80112
Telephone: 303-397 -7956; 800-854-7179
Fax: 303-397-2740
http:/ I global.ihs.com/
IHS Inc.
15 Inverness Way
East Englewood, CO 80112
Telephone: 303-790-0600; 800-525-7052
http:/ /www.ihs.com/
Illumination Engineering Society of North America
(IESNA)
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Telephone: 212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5017
http:/ /www.iesna.org/
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc.
(IEEE)
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331
Telephone: 732-981-0060
Fax: 732-981-1721
http://www.ieee.org/
Instrument Society of America (ISA)
69 Alexander Drive
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
Telephone: 919-549-8411
Fax: 919-549-8288
http://www.isa.org/
International Chamber of Shipping (ICS)
Carthusian Court
12 Carthusian Street
London EC 1M 6EZ
Telephone: 020 7417 2800
Fax: 020 7726 2080
http://www.marisec.org/
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
3, rue de Varembe
P.O. Box 131
CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Telephone: + 41 22 919 02 11
Fax: + 41 22 919 03 00
http://www.iec.ch/
International Maritime Organization (IMO)
Publications Section
4 Albert Embankment
London
SEl 7SR
United Kingdom
Telephone: + 44 (0)20 7735 7611
Fax: + 44 (0)20 7587 3210
http://www.imo.org/home.asp
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
1, rue de Varembe
Case postale 56
CH-1211 Geneve 20
Switzerland
Telephone: + 41 22 749 01 11
Fax: + 41 22 733 34 30
http:/ /www.iso.ch/
Techstreet-Technical Information Superstore
777 East Eisenhower Parkway
Ann Arbor, MI 48108
Telephone: 800-699-9277
Fax: 734-913-3946
http://www.techstreet.com
Orders for ISO International Standards and other ISO
publications should be addressed to the ISO member bodies
(non-USA users, if subscribing to Internet from a USA-based
provider, should consult the member list for ordering ISO
standards in their country) which are normally the primary ISO
sales agents, or for customers in countries where there is no
member body, to the ISO Central Secretariat.
1090
ISO Member Bodies for Ships and Marine Technology:
Brazil ( ABNT)
s s o c i a ~ a o Brasileira de Normas Technicas
Av. Thirteen of May 13, 28 to walk
20031-901-Rio de Janeiro-RJ
Telephone: (21) 3974-2300
Fax: (21) 3974-2347
http:/ /www.abnt.org. br/
Bulgaria (BDS)
Committee for Standardization and
Metrology at the Council of Ministers
1, Aksakov Street
1000 Sofia
Telephone: (359)(2) 869222/98 591
Fax: (359)(2) 980-6897
China (CSBTS)
China State Bureau of Technical Supervision
4, Zhichun Road
Haidian Distlict
PO Box 8010
Beijing 100088
Telephone: + 86 10 203 24 24
Fax: + 86 10 203 10
1918
Cuba (NC)
Oficina Nacional de Normalizaci6n
Calle E No. 261 entre 11 y 13
Vedado, La Habana 10400
Telephone: + 53 7 30 00 22
Fax: + 53 7 33 80 48
Telex: 51 22 45 cen cu
Czech Republic ( COSMT)
Czech Office for Standards, Metrology and Testing
Gorazdova 24
128 01 Praha 2,
Telephone: 420 224 907 111
Fax: 420 224 915 064
Denmark (DS)
Dansk Standard
Baunegaardsvej 73
DK-2900 ILiii.A ,_,.,
Telephone: + 45 39 77 01 01
Fax: + 45 39 77 02 02
http://www.ds.dk/
France (AFNOR)
Association de normalisation
11, avenue Francis de Pres sense
FR-93571 Saint-Denis La Plaine Cedex
Telephone: + 33 1 41 62 80 00
Fax: + 33 1 49 17 90 00
http://www .afnor.fr/
0 F1547-09
1091
Germany (DIN)
DIN Deutsches Institut fiir Normung
Burggrafenstrasse 6
D-10787 Berlin
Postal address:
D-1 0772 Berlin
Telephone: + 49 30 26 01-0
Fax: + 49 30 26 01 12 31
http://www2.din.de/index. php ?lang=en
India (B/S)
Bureau of Indian Standards
Manak Bhavan
9 Bahadur Shah Zafar .Marg
New Delhi 110002
Telephone: + 91 11 323 79 91
Fax: + 91 11 323 40 62
http://www. bis.org.inlother/tender.htm
Italy (UN/)
Ente N azionale Italiano di U nificazione
Via Battistotti Sassi 11/b
I-20133 Milano
Telephone: + 39 2 70 02 41
Fax: + 39 2 70 10 61 06
Japan (J/SC)
Japanese Industrial Standards Committee
c/o Standards Department
Ministry of International Trade and Industry
1-3-1 Kasumigaseki
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-8901
Japan
Telephone: + 81 3 35 01 92 95
Fax: + 81 3 35 80 14 18
http://www.jisc.go.jp/eng/
Korea, Dem. P. Rep. of ( CSK)
Committee for Standardization of the
Democratic People's Republic of Korea
Inhung 1-Dong, Moranbong District
Pyongyang-Korea,
Telephone: + 85 02 181 11 (ext. 381 89 89)
Fax: + 85 02 381 44 80
Korea, Republic of ( K/AA)
Industrial Advancement Administration (KIAA)
2, Chungang-dong, K wachon-city
Kyonggi-do 427-010
Telephone: + 82 2 503 79 38
Fax: + 82 2 503 79 41
Telex: 2 84 56 fincen k
Telegrams: koreaiaa
F1547-09
Netherlands (NEN)
Nederlands Normalisatie-Instituut
Vlinderweg 6
2623 AX Delft
Postbus 5059
2600 GB Delft
Telephone: (015) 2 690 390
Fax: (015) 2 690 190
http://www.nen.nllnl/alg/indexafwijkend.htm
Norway (NSF)
Norges Standardiseringsforbund
P.O. Box 252
N0-1326 Lysaker
Norway
Telephone: + 47 67 83 87 00
Fax: + 47 67 83 87 01
http://www.standard.no
Poland (PKN)
Polish Committee for Standardization
ul.Elektoralna 2
PO Box 411
00-950 Warszawa
Telephone: + 48 22 620 54 34
Fax: + 48 22 620 07 41
http://www.pkn.com. pl/80lat/en!index.html
Romania (IRS)
Institutul Roman de Standardizare
Str. Jean-Louis Calderon Nr. 13
Cod 70201
Bucuresti 2
Telephone: + 40 1 211 32 96
Fax: + 40 1 210 08 33
Russian Federation (GOST R)
Federal Agency on Technical Regulating and Metrology
Leninsky Prospekt 9
RU-Moscow, V-49,
GSP-1, 119991
Telephone: + 7 095 236 40 44
Fax: + 7 095 236 62 31
http://www.gost.ru
USA (ANSI)
11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: 212-642-4900
Fax: 212-398-0023
http://www.ansi.org/
1092
United Kingdom (BSI)
British Standards Institution
BSI Customer Services
389 Chiswick High Road
London W4 4AL
Telephone: + 44 (0) 20 8996 9001
Fax: + 44 (0) 20 8996 7001
http://www.bsi -global.com/index.xalter
Lloyd's Register of Shipping (LR)
17 Battery Place
New York, NY 10004-1195
Telephone: 212-425-8050
Fax: 212-363-9610
http:/ /www.lr.org/code/home.htm
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, VA 22180
Telephone: 703-281-6613
Fax: 703-281-6671
http://www.mss-hq.org/
Maritime Administration
National Maritime Resource and Education Center
Marine Standards Library
400 7th Street, SW
Telephone: 202-366-1864
Fax: 202-366-7197
http://www.marad.dot.gov/nmrec/
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA)
1300 North 17th Street
Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Telephone: 703-841-3200
Fax: 703-841-5900
http://www.nerna.org/
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Morgan Technical Library
1 Batteryrnarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7 4 71
Telephone: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
http://www.nfpa.org/index.asp
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
Standards Services Division
100 Bureau Drive, Stop 2100
Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2100
Telephone: 301-97 5-4000
Fax: 301-963-2871
http://www.nist.gov/
F1547-09
National Shipbuilding Research Program (NSRP)
University of Michigan
Transportation Research Institute
2901 Baxter Road
Ann Arbor, MI 48109-2465
Telephone: 313-763-2465
Fax: 313-936-1081
http://www.nsrp.org
Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA)
Department of the Navy
CODE 05Q
1333 Isaac Hull Ave. SE
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20376
Telephone: 202-781-3732
Fax: 202-781-4554
http:/ /www.navsea.navy.mil
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
One Parker Plaza, 11th Floor
400 Kelby Street
Fort Lee, NJ 07024
Telephone: 201-944-8021
Fax: 201-944-8183
http://www.classnk.or.jp/hp
Oil Companies International Marine Forum (OCIMF)
27 Queen Anne's Gate
London, SWIE 9BU, England
Telephone: + 44 (0) 20 7654 1200
Fax: + 44 (0) 20 7654 1205
http:/ /www.ocimf.com
Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services
(RTCMS)
1800 N. Kent Street, Suite 1060
Arlington, VA 22209
Telephone: 703-527-2000
Fax: 703-351-9932
http:/ /www.rtcm.org
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. (SAE)
400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096
Telephone: 724-77 6-4841
Fax: 724-776-0790
http:/ /www.sae.org
Society of Allied Weight Engineers, Inc. (SAWE)
2131 Tevis Avenue
Long Beach, CA 90815-3352
Telephone: 562-596-2873
Fax: 562-596-2874
http:/ /www.sawe.org
1093
Society of Naval and Marine Engineers (SNAME)
601 Pavonia Avenue
Jersey City, NJ 07306
Telephone: 800-798-2188 or 219-798-4800
Fax: 219-798-4975
http://www.sname.org
Standards Engineering Society (SES)
1706 Darst Avenue
Dayton, OH 45403
Telephone: 513-258-1955
Fax: 513-258-0018
http:/ /www.ses-standards.org
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Telephone: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2250
http:/ /www.gpoaccess.gov
This ordering address applies to the following:
Code of Federal Regulations (CPR)
http://www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Technical Standards Service Inc.
4024 Mount Royal Boulevard
Allison Park, PA 15101
Telephone: 412-487-7007
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
Telephone: 312-272-8800
http://www. ul.com
U.S. Coast Guard (USCG)
Department of Homeland Security
2100 Second Street, SW
Telephone: 202-372-1001
http://www.uscg.mil
For Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circulars (NVICs) go
to: http://www.uscg.mil/hq/grnlcfvs/nvic/
3. Standards and Publications
3.1 Table 1 lists standards and publications, subdivided into
nine groups. If you do not find a standard in one group, check
to see if it is in a related group.
4. lACS Member Societies
4.1 The International Association of Classification Societies
(lACS) Member Societies are listed below. These Classifica-
tion Societies have established lACS to promote the highest
standards in ship safety and the prevention of marine pollution.
lACS provides consultation and cooperation with lMO. The
F1547-09
Member Societies are strictly bound by ISO based Quality
Assurance Standards for Ship Classification and delegated
statutory work.
Societies
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
ABS Plaza
Houston, TX 77060
Tel: 281-877-6000
Tlx. 232099 ABNY UR
Fax: 212-839-5211
Bureau Verities (BV)
17 bis, Place des Reflets
La Defense 2
92400 Courbevoie, France
(Postal address: Cedex 44-92077
Paris-La-Defense, France)
Tel: (33-1) 42 91 52 91
Tlx: (842) 615368F BVSMS
Fax: (33-1) 42 91 52 93
China Classification Society (CCS)
40, Dong Huang Cheng Gen Nan Jie
Beijn 10006
China
Tel: (86-1) 513-6633
Tlx: (718) 210407 ZCBJ CN
Fax: (86-1) 513 0188
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Veritasveien 1
PO Box 300
N-1322 Hovik
Norway
Tel: (47-67) 57 99 00
Tlx: (856) 76 192 VERIT N
Fax: (47-67) 57 99 11
Germanischer Lloyd (GL)
Vorsetzen 32
PO Box 11 16 06
D-2000 Hamburg 11
Germany
Tel: (49-40) 361490
Tlx: (841) 212828 GLHH D
Fax: (49-40) 36149200
Korean Register of Shipping (KR)
1465-1 0 Seocho-Dong
Seocho-Ku, Seoul, Korea
PO Box 3229
Tel: (82-2) 5826001
Tlx: (787) 27358 K
Fax: (82-2) 5848813
Lloyd's Register of Shipping (LR)
71 Fenchurch Street
London EC3M 4BS
England
Tel: (44-71) 709-9166
Tlx: 851 888379 LR LON G
Fax: (44-71) 488-4796
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)
4-7, Kioi-Cho, Chiyoda-Ku
Tokyo 102
Japan
Tei: (81-33) 2301201
Tlx: (781) J22975 CLASSNK
Fax: (81-33) 2303524
Polski Rejestr Statkow (PRS)
ul. Marynarki Polskiej 59
Gdansk-Letniewo
(Postal address: Skr. Poczt. 445
80958 Gdansk 50, Poland)
Tel: (4858) 31 72 23
Tlx: (867) 512373, 512952 PRS PL
Fax: (4858) 31 66 36
Registro Italiano Navale (RINA)
Via Corsica 12, Genova, Italy
(Postal address: Casella Postale
1195 D-16100 Genova, Italy)
Tel: (39-10) 53 851
Tlx: (843) 270022 RINAVI
Fax: (39-10) 591877
Register of Shipping (RS)
191065 St. Petersburg
8, Dvortsovaja Nab.
Russian Federation
Tel: (7-812) 312-88-78
Tlx: 87164 121525 RSSU SU
Fax: (7-812) 314-10-87
Hravatski Registar Brodova (CRS)
Croatian Register of Shipping
Marasoviceva 67
Split 58000
Croatia
Tel: (3858) 48-955
Tlx: (862) 26129 HR CROREG
Fax: 585-746
lACS Permanent Secretariat
Associates
Indian Register of Shipping
72 Maker Towers F, 7th Floor
Cuffe Parade
Bombay 400-005
India
Tel: (91-22) 2186376
Tlx: (953) 83364 IRSIN
Fax: (91-22) 2181241
lACS Ltd.
lACS Permanent Representative at IMO
5 Old Queen Street
London
SW1H 9JA
Tel: (44-171) 976-0660
Tlx: 261720 lACS G
Fax: (44-171) 976-0440
4.2 Delegating Countries-The countries statu-
tory responsibilities to Classification Societies are listed
Table 2. We have received this information from only five of
the lACS Member Societies. The abbreviations used are
discussed at the end of Table 2.
5. lACS Member Societies with Offices in the United
States-Publication Lists
5.1 ABS-American Bureau of Shipping & Affiliated
Companies-Publications
5.1.1 For current prices and information concerning
cations:
1094
ABS Americas:
ABS Plaza
Houston, TX 77060
Tel: 281-673-0700
Fax: 281-874-9551
ABS Europe:
ABS House, 1 Frying Pan Alley
London, E 1 7HR England
Tel: (44-171) 247-3255
Telex: 865621
Fax: (44-171) 377-2453
ABS Pacific:
510 Thomson Road
No. 06-00, SFL Bldg.
Singapore 1129
Republic of Smgap,ore
Tel: 65-353-5713
Telex: RS 34264
Fax: 65-353-3454
cO F1547-09
5.1.2 ABS Publication List:
5.1.2.1 Classification Register:
Title
Record of ABS (Annual) 1998 edition
5.1.2.2 Rules for Building and Classing:
Title
Steel Vessels 1998 = Complete set of rules including all
notices and updates
Aluminum Vessels (1975), RCN-3-5, 1-A
Steel Vessels for Service on Rivers and Intracoastal Water-
ways (1997), RCN5
Steel Vessels Under 90 Meters (295 Feet) in Length (1997)
Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (1997)
Underwater Vehicles, Systems, and Hyperbaric Facilities
(1990), RCN-1
Single Point Mooring (1996)
Bulk Carriers for Service on the Great Lakes (1978), RCN-1 and 2
Steel Barges (1991), RCN 1-4 and corr. #1, also available
on CD-ROM
Steel Floating Drydocks (1977)
Reinforced Plastic Vessels (1978), RCN i-2
Offshore Installations (1997)
Rules
Title
Certification of Cargo Containers (1987)
Nondestructive Inspection of Hull Welds (1986)
5.1.2.4 Preliminary Rules For:
Title
Building and Classing Accommodation Barges and Hotel
Barges (1989), RCN 1
5.1.2.5 Guide For:
Ref. No.
00
Ref. No.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
29
Ref. No.
13
14
Ref. No.
48
Title Ref. No.
Burning Crude Oil and Slops in Main and Auxiliary Boilers (1978), 15
RCN 1
Construction of Shipboard Elevators (1993) 16
Repair and Cladding of Shafts (1980) RCN 1 17
Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey (1996) 19
Lay-up and for Reactivation of Laid-Up Ships (1986) 20
Ships Burning Coal (1980) 21
Building and Classing Fire Fighting Vessels Now Part of Ref. #5 22
Ultrasonic Examination of Carbon Steel Forgings for Tail 30
Shafts (1983)
Thrusters and Dynamic Positioning Systems (1994) 33
Survey Based on Preventative Maintenance Techniques 35
(1995)
The Certification of Offshore Mooring Chain (1986) 39
Lay-Up and for Reactivation of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units 42
(1986)
Classing Vessels for Safety Standby Service Now Part of Ref. #5 43
Certification of Cranes (1991 ), RCN 1 44
Certification of Container Securing Systems (1988) 45
Building and Classing Fishing Vessels (1989), RCN 1 55
The Use of Refrigerated (Low Pressure) Carbon Dioxide as a 56
Fire Extinguishing Medium on Board Ship (1989)
The Certification of Drilling Systems (1990) 57
Application of Dynamic-Response-Based Intact Stability Cri- 58
teria for Column-Stabilized Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
(1990)
Cargo Vapor Emission Control Systems on Board Tank 60
Vessels (1991), Corr-1
Building and Classing High Speed Craft, 1997 61
Building and Classing Motor Pleasure Yachts, (1990), Corr-1, RCN 1 62
and Classing Facilities on Offshore Installations 63
and Classing Undersea Pipeline Systems and Risers 64
Atmosphere Systems (1992) 66
One Man Bridge Operated (OMBO) Ships (1992)
Certification of Oil Spill Recovery Equipment (1993)
Building and Classing Oil Recovery Vessels
Now Part of Ref #5
Hull Condition Monitoring Systems (1995)
Assessing Hull-Girder Residual Strength for Tankers
Improvement tor Structural Connections and Sample
Structural Details-Service Experience and Modifications
for Tankers (1995)
Dynamic Based Design and Evaluation of Double Hull
Tanker Structures Between 150 and 190 Meters in
Length (1995), Corr 1-2
Improvement for Structural Connections and Sample
Structural Details-Service Experience and Modifications
for Bulk Carriers (1995)
Assessing Hull-Girder Residual Strength for Bulk
Carriers (1995)
Preparation for Special Survey (1996)
Certification of Firms Engaged in Thickness
of Hull Strucutres (1996)
Survey of Voyage Repairs to Hull Structure (1996)
Building and Classing Floating Production, Storage and
Offloading Systems (1996)
Dymanic Based Design and Evaluation of
Container Carrier Structures (1996)
Guide for Propulsion Redundancy (1997)
Guide for Building and Classing Vessels Intended
to Carry Refrigerated Cargoes (1997)
Guidance Notes on the Application of
Ergonomics to Marine Systems (1998)
5.1.2.6 Guidance Manual for:
Title
Material Selection and Inspection of Inert Gas Systems (1980)
Bronze and Stainless Steel Propeller Castings (1984)
Preparing Fishing Vessels' Stability Booklet (1990)
5.1.2.7 Requirements For:
Title
68
69
71
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
Ref. No.
24
32
59
Ref. No.
Certification of Self-Unloading Cargo Gear on Great Lakes 25
Vessels (1991)
Certification of the Construction and Survey of Cargo Gear 26
on Merchant Vessels (1975)
Approved Welding Combinations (1998) 27
Notes on Heavy Fuel Oil (1984) 31
List of Type Approved Equipment (1998) 36
International Workshop on Underwater Welding of 46
Marine Structures
Coating Systems: A Guidance Manual for Field 49
Surveyors (1998)
5.2 Bureau Veritas (Marine Division)-Technical Publica-
tions
5.2.1 For information, current prices, and orders concerning
publications:
1095
Bureau Veritas
Direction Division Marine-D.S.M./PUB
17 bis, place des Refiets-92400 La Defense 2
Post Adres.: 92077 Paris-La Defense Cedex
Tel: 33 (0) 1 42 91 52 91
Fax: 33 (0) 1 42 91 52 98
5.2.2 Marine Technical Publications List:
5.2.2.1 Rules:
Title Ref. No.
CD-ROM BV Rules for Ships (9/1997) CDR 09.97 e3.0
E/F
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Ships
(9/'1997) also applying to fishing vessels, launches, fiber-
reinforced plastic ships and aluminum alloy ships
NR 374 SMS
R09 E
Introduction (+ Amendments) (9/1997)
Part I "Classification-Surveys" (1/1997)
Chapter 1: Classification (1/1997)
Chapter 2: Maintenance of Class (1/1997)
Part II "Hull Structure" (9/1997)
Chapter 3: General (3/1996)
Chapter 4: Subdivision and Intact Stability (3/1996)
Chapter 5: Hull Structure Design-Steel Ships of
More Than 65 m in Length (9/1997)
Chapter 6: Hull Structure Design-Steel Ships of
Less Than 65 m in Length (9/1997)
Chaptei 7: Stiengthening for Navigation in !ce
(3/1996)
Chapter 8: Provisions Applicable to Some Service
Notations (9/1997)
Chapter 9: Hopper Dredgers and Split Hopper
Dredgers (3/1996)
Chapter 1 0: Provisioins Applicable to Service
and Offshore Working Ships (3/1996)
Chapter 11: Hull Structure Design-
Fiber Reinforced Plastic Ships (3/1996)
Chapter 12: Hull Structure Design-
Aluminum Alloy Ships (3/1996)
Chapter 14: Hull Outfittings (3/1996)
Part Ill "Machinery Systems" (9/1997)
Chapter 15: Piping Systems-Miscellaneous
Installations (9/1993)
Chapter 16: Boilers and Pressure Vessels (3/1996)
Chapter 17: Propelling and Auxiliary Machinery (3/1996)
Chapter 18: Electrical Installations (9/1997)
Chapter 19: Equipment-Remote Control-Integrated
Propulsion Plant-Automation Notations (3/1996)
Chapter 20: Fire Protection (3/1996)
Chapter 21: Refrigerating Plants (3/1996)
Chapter 22: Ships for the Carriage of Liquefied
Gases (3/1996)
Chapter 23: Ships Carrying Liquid Cargoes in Bulk
(3/1996)
Chapter 24: Harbor and Offshore Working Ships or
Units-Fishing Vessels-Livestock Carriers (3/1996)
Chapter 25: Propelled Ships of Less than 24 m
in Length (9/1997)
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Ships and
Offshore Installations-Materials (1997)
Rules for the Classification-Certification
of Yachts (1993)
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Submersibles
(1989)
Rules and Regulations for the Classification
of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (1987)
Rules and Regulations for the Construction
and Classification of Inland Navigation
Vessels (1984)
Amendments No. i (+ Leaflets 3/85 and 1/95)
Chapters 1 and 2: Classification Surveys
Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification
of Wooden Fishing Vessels (1963)
Amendments No.1 (1970)
Rules for the Construction and Classification of 5,50 Metres
International Class Yachts (French text only) (1966)
F1547-09
NR 421 DNC
R02 E
NR 212 DNS
R07 E
NR 416 DNS
R01 E
NR 417 DNS
R01 E
NR 213 DNC
R06 E
NR 410 DNC
ROO E
NR 411 DNC
ROO E
NR 412 DNC
R01 E
NR 413 DNC
R01 E
NR 414 DNC
ROO E
NR 232 DNC
R02 E
NR 233 DNC
R02 E
NR 234 DNC
R01 E
NR 220 DNC
R02 E
NR 384 DNC
R01 E
NR 415 DNC
ROO E
NR 215 DNC
R06 E
NR 244 DNC
R02 E
NR 245 DNC
R01 E
NR 246 DNC
R03 E
NR 247 DNC
R02 E
NR 248 DNC
R02 E
NR 249 DNC
R02 E
NR 250 DNC
R02 E
NR 251 DNC
R01 E
NR 252 DNC
R01 E
NR 253 DNC
R01 E
NR 444 DNC
ROO E
NR 216 DNC
R02 E
NR 381 DNP
ROO E
NR 316 DTO
ROO E
NR 223 DTO
ROO E
NR 217 DNI
ROO E
NR 376 DNI F/E
G/D
NR 219 DNC
ROO E
NR 222 DNC
ROOF
Rules for Classification and Certification
of Fishfarms-Tentative Issue (1994)
Rules for the Construction and Classification
of High Speed Craft (1997)
Rules for the Classification of Offshore
Units (4/1998)
1096
5.2.2.2 Notes:
( 1) Rule Notes:
Title
Passenger lifts, good lifts, and hoists
suitable for the carriage of the personnel
on board ships (1984)
Freeboard of dredgers and barges fitted
with bottom dump doors (1971)
Steels. Conditions of approval (1986)
Ultrasoning testing of hull butt welds
(1976)
Classification and survey of pontoons
supporting plants (1978)
Towage at sea of vessels of floating units
(1986)
Rules for the classification and certification
of lifting appliances of ships and offshore
units (1984-1986)
Securing of containers on board ships
(1984)
Classification of dynamic positioning
installations (1996)
Loading instruments. Approval procedures
(1984)
Recommendations for the laying up of
ships (1996)
Surveys of installations under continuous
survey or distributed survey systems.
Authorization of chief engineers (1995)
Scantlings of spars and standing rigging
for sailing pleasure boats (1984)
Approval of shipyard quality systems for
the construction of steel ships ( 1987)
Classification and certification of floating
hotels and hospitals (1986)
Marine hovercraft (1987)
Approval of yard quality systems for the
construction of offshore structures
(1987)
Certification of well control equipment
(1986)
Classification of wind propulsion plants
aboard ships (1987)
Building and operation of vibration/free
propulsion plants and ships (1987)
Inspection at works for the classification of
steel ships and offshore units (1994)
Stainless steels intended for chemical
carriers. Conditions of approval (1988)
Approval and inspection at works of
materials and equipment for the
classification of ships and offshore units.
Principles and procedures (1993)
Centralized navigation control (1993)
Bureau Veritas additional class notations
for structural cargo protection of oil
tankers. Tentative rules (1990)
Type testing programmes of internal
combustion engines for the classification
of ships or offshore units (1990)
Raw materials for FRP hull-Approval and
survey programme (1993)
Guidelines for structural analysis of oil
tankers ( 1995)
VERISTAR-Integrating design analysis
and ship management (1996)
NR 387 DTO
ROO E
NR 396 UNITAS
R01 E
NR 445 DTO
ROO E
Ref. No.
NR 143 DNC ROO E
NR 144 DNC ROO E/F
NR 160 DNC ROO E
N1165 DNC ROO E
NR 170 DNC ROO E
NR 183 DNC ROO E
NR 184 DNC ROO E
NR 186 DNC ROO E
NR 187 DNC R01 E
NR 189 DNC ROO E:
NR 191 DNS R01 E
N1192 DNS R02 E
NR 193 DNS ROO E
NR 195 DNC ROO E
NR 197 SMS ROO E
NR 203 DNC ROO E
NR 204 DTO ROO E
NR 205 DNC ROO E
NR 206 DNC ROO E
NR 207 SMS ROO E
NR 266 DNC R01 E
NR 301 DNC ROO F
NR 320 DNC R01 E
NR 325 DNC R01 E
NR 358 DNC ROO E/F
NR 361 DNC ROO E
NR 386 DNC ROO E/F
NR 399 DSM ROO E
NR 418 DSM ROO E
Corrosion protection of offshore units and
installations. Recommended practice
(1996)
Approval of computerized equipment
(1996)
Construction survey of offshore units and
installations Rule Note ( 1992)
Electrical systems on board offshore units
and installations-Tentative issue--Rule
Note (1996)
Piping system on board offshore units and
installations ( 1998)
Process systems on board offshore units
and installations (1998)
Quasi-dynamic analysis of mooring
systems using Ariane software (1998)
Safety features of offshore units and
installations (1998)
( 1) Guidance Notes:
Title
Study on sloshing and partial filling (1984)
Noise on board ships (1981)
Underwaterwelding. General information
and recommendations (1985)
Cyclic fatigue of nodes and welded joints
of offshore units (1987)
Bollard pull measurement and certification
(1985)
Guidelines on documents to be submitted
for stability study (1988)
Non-bonded flexible steel pipes used as
flow-lines (1990)
Practical guide for the certification of
composite yacht hulls under the BV
Mode I survey scheme (1993)
Thickness measurements-
Requirements-Interpretations-
Acceptance criteria (1997)
Fatigue strength of welded ship structures
(1995)
Programme for condition assessment
survey (PCAS) (1995)
Recommendations to avoid overloading of
bulk carrier structures (1995)
Guidelines for corrosion protection of
seawater ballasts tanks and hold spaces
(1995)
Recommendations on the quality of
software on board (1996)
Guidelines for the preparation of cargo
securing manual (1997)
Guidance note for the certification of life-
saving appliances and arrangements
(1997)
Certification of synthetic fiber ropes for
mooring systems (1997)
Type approval of non-destructive testing
equipment dedicated to underwater
inspection of offshore structures (1998)
(1) General Notes:
Title
List of approved steels. (1994)
Type approved materials and equipment.
Electrical control and monitoring
equipment. (1996)
Type approved materials and equipment.
Statutory materials and equipment.
(1996)
Approved filler products for electric arc
welding. (1998)
Type approved processes materials and
equipment. Hull and Machinery. (1996)
5.3 Det Norske Veritas-Publications:
F1547-09
1.111
NR 423 DTO ROO E
NR 424 DNC ROO E/F
NR 426 DTO ROO E
NR 428 DTO ROO E
NR 458 DTO ROO E
NR 459 DTO ROO E
NR 461 DTO ROO E
NR 460 DTO ROO E
Ref. No.
N1171 DNC ROO E
Nl 174 DNC ROO E
Nl 198 DNC ROO E
Nl199 DNC ROO E
Nl 202 DNC ROO E
Nl 299 DNC ROO E
Nl 364 DTO ROO E
Nl 385 DNP ROO ElF
Nl 389 DNS R01 E
Nl 393 DSM ROO E
Nl 395 DNS ROO E
Nl 402 DNC ROO E
Nl 409 DNC ROO E
Nl 425 DNC ROO E/F
N1429 DNC ROO E
Nl 430 DNC ROO E
Nl 432 DTO ROO E
NR 422 DTO ROO E
Ref. No.
NG 259 DSC ROi E/F
NG 260 DSC R04 E
NG 263 DSC R06 E
NG 313 DSC R09 E/F
NG 363 DSC R05 E
1097
5.3.1 For current prices and information concerning publi-
cations:
Det Norske Veritas Classification
80 Grand Avenue
Suite 201
River Edge, NJ 07661
Tel: 201--488-0112
Fax: 201-488-1778
5.3.2 Det Norske Veritas-Publication List:
5.3.2.1 Rules for Classification of Ships:
Complete Volume (includes binder and introduction booklet)
Annual Subscription Fee (includes all new and revised chapters issued)
CD-ROM version for IBM compatible PC, single user
Initial piice
Twice yearly updates-annual subscription free
CD-ROM, network licenses
Reprints of the Rules for Ships (separate booklets)
Volume 1
Part 0
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Part 1
Chapter 1
Part 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Part 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Part 4
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Part 5
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Part 6
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Part 7
Chapter i
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Introduction
User Information, Amendments and Indexes
Introduction to Ship Classification
General Regulations
General Regulations
Materials and Welding
General Requirements for Materials
Metallic Materials
Welding
Structures and Equipment-Main Class
Hull Structural Design, Ships with length 1 00 meters and above
Hull Structural Design, ships with length less than 100 meters
Hull Equipment and Appendages
Stability and Watertight Integrity
Load Line
Lifesaving Appliances and Arrangements
Machinery and Systems-Main Class
Machinery and Systems Design, General
Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
Boilers, Pressure Vessels, Thermal-Oil Installations, and
Incinerators
Electrical Installations
Instrumentation and Automation
Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction
Arrangements for Coal Fired Boilers, Tentative Rules
Safety of Navigation
Radio communications for the Global Maritime Distress and
Safety System
Volume 2
Special Service and Type-Additional Class
Ships for Navigation in Ice
Passenger and Dry Cargo Vessels
Oil Carriers
Chemical Carriers
Liquefied Gas Carriers
Fishing Vessels
Tugs, Supply Vessels, and other Offshore/Harbor Vessels
Slop Reception and Processing Facilities, Tentative Rules
Oil Production and Storage Vessels
Vessels for Carriage of Refrigerated Cargoes
Special Equipment and Systems-Additional Class
Miscellaneous Notations
Electric Propulsion Redundant (EPA)
Periodically Unattended Machinery Space (EO)
Additional Fire Protection (F-AMC)
Integrated Computer Systems (ICS), Tentative Rules
Centralized Cargo Control for Liquid Cargoes (CCO)
Dynamic Positioning Systems
Nautical Safety
Rules for Ships in Operation
General Requirements
Periodical Survey Regulations
Compulsory Operational Requirements, All Ships
Compulsory Operational Requirements, Additional Class
Management of Safe Ship Operation and Pollution Prevention
F1547-09
5.3.2.2 Rules for Classification of Mobile Offshore Units:
Reprints of the Rules for Mobile Offshore Units (separate booklets):
Part 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Part 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Part 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Part 4
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Regulations
General Regulations
Periodical Survey Regulations
General Requirements for Materials
Metallic Materials
Welding
Structures and Equipment-Main Class
Structural Design General
Special Designs, Equipment and Stability
Machinery and Systems-Main Class
Machinery and Systems Design, General
Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
Boilers, Pressure Vessels, Thermal-Oil Installations, and
Incinerators
Chapter 4 Electrical Installations
Chapter 5 Instrumentation and Automation
Chapter 6 Fire Protection, Detection and Extinction
Part 5 Special Service and Type-Additional Class
Chapter 1 Units for Transit and/or Location in Ice
Chapter 2 Accommodation Vessels and other Offshore Support Vessels
Chapter 3 Drilling Vessels and other Vessels for Offshore Operations
Chapter 4 Oil Production and Storage Units
5 Offshore Loading Buoys
6 Special Equipment and Systems-Additional Class
Chapter 1 Miscellaneous Notations
Chapter 2 Position Mooring (POSMOOR)
Chapter 3 Periodically Unattended Machinery Space (EO)
Chapter 4 Additional Fire Protection (F-AM)
Chapter 5 Drilling Plant (DRILL)
Chapter 6 Oil Production Plant (PROD)
Chapter 7 Dynamic Positioning Systems
5.3.2.3 Rules for Classification of Fixed Offshore lnstalla-
tions:
Reprints of the Rules for Fixed Offshore Installations (separate booklets):
Part 1 Regulations
Chapter i General Regulations
Chapter 2 Periodical Survey Regulations
Part 2 Materials
Chapter 1 Steel and Iron
Chapter 2 Aluminum, Copper, and other Non-Ferrous Alloys
Chapter 3 Structural Concrete and Reinforcement Materials
Part 3 Structures
Chapter 1 Structural Design, General
Chapter 2 Fabrication and Construction
Chapter 3 Transport and Installation Operations
Chapter 4 Special Designs: Steel Template (Jacket) Structures .
Chapter 5 Special Designs: Concrete Gravity Based Structures, Tentattve
Rules
Chapter 6 Special Designs: Tension Leg Platforms
Part 4 Safety and Utility Systems Equipment
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Part 5
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
General
General Safety
Utility Piping System
Mechanical Equipment
Electrical Systems and Equipment
Instrumentation and Automation
?recommissioning
Systems Related to Special Designs
Special Function
Drilling Plant
Production Plant
5.3.2.4 Tentative Classification of High Speed and
Reprints (separate booklets):
Part 0 Introduction
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Part 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Part 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Part 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Part4
Chapter i
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Part 5
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Part 6
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
User Information, Amendments and Indexes
Introduction to Classification
Regulations
General Regulations
Periodical Surveys
Steel and Iron
Aluminum, Copper, and Non-Ferrous Alloys
Welding
Fibre Composite and Sandwich Materials
Structures, Equipment
Design Principles, Design Loads
Hull Structural Design, Steel
Hull Structural Design, Aluminum Alloy
Hull Structural Design, Fibre Composite and Sandwich
Constructions
Equipment, Steering and Appendages
Stability and Watertight Integrity, Closing Appliances
Machinery and Systems-Equipment and Operation
Machinery and Hull Piping Systems
Propulsion, Auxiliary Machinery and Pressure Vessels
Electrical Installations
Remote Control, Instrumentation and Automation
Fire Safety
Special Service and Type-Additional Class
Passenger Craft
Car Ferry
Cargo
Special Equipment and Systems-Additional Class
Periodically Unattended Machinery Space (EO)
Nautical Safety
5.3.2.5 Certification Notes: Quality Assurance Systems:
1.1 Conformity Certification Services-General Descrip-
tion, November 1988
1.2 Conformity Description, November 1988-Type Ap-
proval, January 1990
1.3 Conformity Certification Services-Quality System
Certification, May 1990
1.5 Conformity Certification Services-Approval of
Manufacturers, Metallic Materials, September 1990
Approval Schemes:
2.1 Approval and Survey Programs for Materials, October
1988
MAT 100-Approval of Manufacturers, Ferrous and Non-
Ferrous Materials and Material Products
MAT 200-Manufacturing Survey, Ferrous and Non-
Ferrous Materials and Material Products
MAT 300-Approval of Manufacturer and Manufacturing
Survey, Mooring Equipment
MAT 400-Approval of Welding Consumables
MAT 500-Type Approval of Non-Metallic Materials and
Material Products
MAT 600--Approval of Corrosion Protection Systems
2.4 Type Approval of Instrumentation and Automation
Equipment, March 1988
1098
2.5 Type Approval of Loading Instruments for Ships, June
1985
2.6 Certification of Offshore Mooring Chain, July 1985
2.7-1 Offshore Freight Containers, May 1989
2.8 On Board Stability Computers, February 1990
2.9 101 Type Approval, Valves, November 1991
102 Type Approval, Pipe Couplings, November 1991
103 Type Approval, Flexible Hoses of Non-Metallic
Materials, November 1991
F1547-09
201 Approval Program, Approval of Hydraulic Cylin-
ders
2.10 Diesel Engine Driven Power Plants-Certification,
Testing, and Inspection, July 1991
Marine Operations:
3.3 Declarations on Lay-up of Ships, August 1983
3.4 Declarations on Preservation of Laid-up August
1976
5.3.2.6 Book
Det Norske Veritas' Register Book (including 4 supplements)
Notes: Vol-
Fee all new and revised
notes issued)
and Classification of Roll-On/Roll-Off May
1980
Prevention of Harmful Vibration in 1983
Internal Control, Mobile Offshore Units (Owners' Control
Se:r:1terrtber 1983
Stability Documentation for Mobile Offshore Units Class
and Statutory Services, November 1986
Documentation Required for SC Class, June 1988
Condition Assessment Program, September 1991
Safety and Quality Management, May 1992
Guidelines for Corrosion Protection of Ships, July 1992
4.1 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of Bronze
Propellers, October 1992
4.2 Guidance Manual for Inspection and Repair of Steel
Propellers, October 1992
6. Fire Test of Components Intended for Usc in Piping
Systems On Board Ships, May 1980 (Reprint of 1975)
6.1 Fire Test Methods for Plastic Pipes, Joints, and Fittings,
January 1987
7. Ultrasonic Inspection of Weld Connections, May 1980
(Reprint of November 1978)
10.1 Ships and Mobile Offshore Units, Alternative Survey
Arrangements for Machinery and Automation Systems, August
1992
13. Erosion and Corrosion in Piping Systems for Sea Water,
May 1980 (Reprint of January 1979)
14. Instrumentation and Automation, Elec-
tronic Systems, May 1991
20.1 Stability Documentation-Ships (Newbuildings),
1990
20.2 Lightweight Determination-Ships, February 1990
30.1 Strength Analysis, May 1992
30.2 Strength Analysis for Mobile Offshore Units,
1984
30.3 Shells Subjected to Compressive Stresses,
October 1987
30.4 Foundations, February 1992
30.5 Environmental Conditions and Environmental Loads,
March 1991
30.6 .

Reliability Analysis of Marine Structures,
1992
31.1 ,n ........ ,,,n Analysis of Hull Structures in Bulk Carriers
May 1980
Analysis of Hull Structures in Roll-On/Roll-
Off Ships, May 1980
31.3 Strength Analysis of Hull Structures in Tankers, Oc-
tober 1988
31.4 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Column
Stabilized Units (Semi-submersible Platforms), September
1987
31.5 Strength Analysis of Main Structures of Self-
Elevating Units, February 1992
32.1 Strength Analysis of Rudder Arrangements, January
1984
32.2 Strength Analysis of Container Securing Arrange-
ments, July 1983
41.2 Calculation of Gear Rating for Marine Transmission,
1990
41.3 Calculation of Crankshafts for Diesel Engine, July
1988
42.1 Dual Fuel Arrangement for Diesel Engines with
Pressure Gas Injection, February 1989
5.3.2.8 Lists of Type Approved Manufacturers and
Approved Products: Approved Manufacturers:
1099
. 100. Companies with Veritas Certified Quality Systems
1 01. Metallic Materials
Type Approved Products:
1. Nonmetallic Materials
2. Welding Consumables
3. Structural Equipment, Containers, Cargo Handling, and
Securing Equipment
4. Machinery Components
5. Mechanical Equipment and Piping
6. Electrical Equipment and Systems
7. Instrumentation and Automation
8. Fire-Restricting Materials and Fire Technical Equipment
9. Drilling and Well Control Equipment
5.3.2.9 Rules for Other Objects: Translation of Tentative
Rules for the Construction and Classification of Vessels of
Glass Reinforced Plastics (1972) Norwegian and English
Editions
Tentative Rules for the Construction and Classification of
Dynamic Positioning Systems for Ships and Mobile Offshore
Units, 1977
Rules for the Construction and Classification of Floating
Docks, 1977
Rules for Certification of Lifting Appliances, 1989
Rules for Certification of Freight Containers, 1981
Rules for Certification of Diving Systems, 1988
Rules for Certification of Lifts, 1987
Rules for Certification/Classification of Submersibles, 1988
Rules for Lifeboats Based on SOLAS 1974 Amendment 83
Rev. Ch. 3, 1986
5.4 Germanischer Lloyd-English Publications
cations:
Germanischer Lloyd
PO Box 11 16 06, D-20416 Hamburg
Vorsetzen 32, D-20459 Hamburg
Tel: (040) 36 14 90
Telex: 2 12 828 glhh d
Fax: (040) 36 14 92 00
0 F1547-09
Cable: klassenlloyd hamburg
5.4.2 Germanischer Lloyd-Publication List:
NoTE 1-This list includes all English titles, in which the publication is
available.
5.4.2.1 Ship Technology:
Title
Classification and Surveys (1993)
Part 1-Seagoing Ships
Chapter 1-Rules for Hull Structures (1992)
Chapter 2-Rules for Machinery Installations (1992}
Chapter 3-Rules for Electrical Installations (1992)
Chapter 4-Rules for Refrigerating Installations (1992)
Chapter 5-Rules for High Speed Vessels (1991)
Chapter 6-Rules for Liquefied Gas Tankers (1992)
Chapter ?-Rules for Chemical Tankers (1992)
Chapter 8-Rules for Fishing Vessels (1991)
Chapter 9-Rules for Oil Recovery Ships (1993)
Regulations for Chemical Recovery Vessels (1993}
Part 2-lnland Waterway Vessels
Chapter 1-Rules for Hull Structures (1990)
Chapter 2-Rules for Machinery Installations (1990)
Chapter 3-Rules for Electrical Installations (1990)
5.4.2.2 Materials and Welding:
Title
Part 1-Metallic Materials
Chapter 1-Principles, Testing Procedures (1992}
Chapter 2-Ferrous Materials (1992)
Chapter 3-Non-Ferrous Metals (1992)
Chapter 4-Equipment (1992)
Part 2-Non-Metallic Materials
Chapter 1-Piastic Materials
Chapter 2-Wooden Materials
Part 3-Welding
Chapter 1-General Requirements/Proof of Qualification/
Approvals (1992}
Chapter 2-Design, Fabrication, and Inspection of Welds
(1992)
Chapter 3-Welding in the Various Fields of Application
(1992)
Ref. No.
10
11E
12E
13E
12E
14E
15E
15E
16E
17E
18
24E
24E
24E
Ref. No.
30E
30E
30E
30E
31
31
32E
32E
32E
5.4.2.3 Offshore Technology:
Title
Part 1-Underwater Technology
Chapter 1-Diving Systems and Diving Simulators (1991)
Chapter 2-Submersibles (1991)
Chapter 3-Underwater Equipment (1991)
Part 2-0ffshore Installations
Chapter 1-General Regulations (1990)
Chapter 2-Rules for Structure (1990)
Chapter 3-Rules for Specific Types of Units and Equipment
(1990)
Chapter 4-Rules for Machinery Installation (1 990)
Chapter 5-Rules for Electrical Installation (1990)
Part 3-Mooring and Loading Installations (1 0.1993)
5.4.2.4 Non-Marine Technology:
Title
Part 1-Wind Energy
Chapter 1-General Conditions for Approval (1993)
Chapter 2-Safety System, Protective and Monitoring Equip-
ment (1993)
Chapter 3-Requirements for Manufacturer, Quality Assur-
ance, Materials and Production (1993)
Chapter 4-Definitions of Design Loads (1993)
Chapter 5-Rotor Blades (1993)
Chapter 6-Mechanical Engineering Components (1993)
Chapter ?-Electrical Installations (1993)
Chapter 8-Tower and Foundations (1993)
Chapter 9-0perating Instructions and Maintenance Manual
(1993)
Chapter 1Q-Noise Aspects (1993)
5.4.2.5 Additional Rules and Regulations:
Title
Containers
Rules for the Stowage and Lashing of Containers Aboard
Ships (1987}
Regulations for the Construction, Repair, and Testing of
Freight Containers (1988)
Lifesaving Appliances-Lifting Appliances-Towing Gears-
Accesses
Regulations for Lifesaving-Launching Appliances (1986)
Regulations for the Construction and Survey of Lifting
Appliances (1992)
Regulations for the Construction and Examination of Towing
Gears (1988)
Regulations for the Construction and Testing of Accesses to
Ships (1983)
Preliminary Rules for Classification of Lifting Appliances
(1989)
Machinery Installations
Ref. No.
40
40
40
41E
41E
41E
42E
42E
43
Ref. No.
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
50E
Ref. No.
65
66
70E
71E
72E
73E
74E
Regulations for the Design, Equipment, and Testing of Waste 80
Incinerating Systems on Seagoing Ships (09.1993)
Regulations for Testing of Steam Boiler Plants in Accordance 81
with the Dampfkessel-verordnung (German Boiler Regula-
tions) for Seagoing Ships Under the Federal German Flag
(1991)
Regulations on Hygienic Requirements for Cargo Tanks for 82
the Carriage of Liquid Foodstuffs on Board of Seagoing
Ships (1 991)
Regulations for Equipment on Fire Fighting Ships (1984) 83
Regulations for Design, Equipment, and Testing of Gas 84
Welding Installations on Seagoing Ships (1990)
Regulations for Construction, Equipment, and Testing of 85
Closed Fuel Overflow Systems (1990)
Regulations for Ventilation Systems on Board Seagoing Ships 86
(1992)
Preliminary Rules for Bridge Design on Seagoing Ships with 87E
One-Man-Control Console (1991)
Regulations for the Recognition of Manufacturers of Hose 88
Assemblies of Non-Metallic Materials (1992)
Regulations for Systems with Controlled Atmosphere on 89
Ships (Russische Ubersetzung vorhanden) (09.1993)
1100
a F1547-09
ull
Diesel Engines
Regulations for Mass Produced Engines (1987)
Regulations for the Seating of Diesel Engine Installations
(1984)
Regulations for Assessment and Repair of Defects on Propel-
lers (1983)
Pumps, Compressors, Fitting
Regulations for the Design, Construction, and Testing of
Pumps (1984)
Regulations for the Design, Construction, and Testing of
Compressors (1987)
Type Tests
90
93
101E
110
111
Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests, Part o- 114
Procedure (1992)
List of Type Tested Products (1993/94) 115
Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests, Part 1 Test 116
Requirements for Electric/Electronic Equipment, Com-
puters and Peripherals (09.1993)
Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests, Part 2 Test 118
Requirements for Sealing Systems of Bulkhead and Dock
Penetrations (1993)
E-Technology
Regulations for Electromagnetic Compatibility of Electrical 120
Equipment (1989)
Guidelines for the Use of Explosion Protection of Electrical 121
Equipment (1980)
Regulations for the Use of Computers and Computer Systems 122
(1987)
Regulations for the Installation and Ventilation of Storage 123
Batteries and the Construction of Battery Chargers (1989)
Regulations for Variable Frequency Ship's Mains Operation 124
(Variable Frequency Operation) (1991)
Materials-Welding
Regulations for the Inspection of Anchor Chain Cables 130
at Dealers' Promises (09.1993)
Structural Fire Protection for Ships and Offshore Structures- 131
List of Approvals (1992)
Regulations for Offshore Mooring Chains (09.1993) 132
Approved Welding Consumables and Auxiliary Materials 133
(1989)
List of Manufacturers of Materials Approved by Ger- 135
manischer Lloyd (1993)
Rules for Surveying and Testing of Plywood for Aircraft 137E
(1953)
Regulations for the Approval and Application of Composite 138
Materials for Repair and Seating of Components (1992)
German Statutory Regulations
Accident Prevention Regulation of Soe-BG (1981) 145
Regulations, Guidelines, Specifications, Standard Letters of 146
German Authorities for Ships Flying the German Flag
(1989)
Other Operations
Guidelines for Ocean Towage (1986) 150
Recommendations for Laid-Up Ships (1983) 151
Guide for Sea Trials of Motor Vessels (1993) 152E
Heat Transfer Equipment of Seagoing Ships (1987) 153E
Certification of Quality Systems
Instructions for the Certification of Quality Systems (1993) 160
List of Fees for the Certification of Quality Systems (1993) 162
List of Holders of Certificates of Conformity of Their Quality 163
System with ISO 9001, ISO 9002, or ISO 9003 (1993)
5.5 Lloyds Register (LR)-Publications
cations:
International Headquarters of the LR Group
Lloyd's Register
100 Leadenhall Street
London EC3A 3BP, United Kingdom
1101
Tel: +44 171 709 9166
Tlx: 888379 LR LONG
Fax: +44 171 488 4796
North America Regional Office
Lloyd's Register of Shipping
17 Battery Place
New York, NY 10004
Tel: (212) 425-8050
Fax: (212) 363-9610
5.5.2 Lloyds Register (LR)-Publication List:
5.5.2.1 Rules and Regulations (Marine): Rules and Regula-
tions for the Classification of Ships 1993-Based on combi-
nation of long practical experience and advanced theory, the
rules are constantly revised to take account of new develop-
ments in merchant shipbuilding. They are intended primarily
for use by naval architects, shipbuilders, and marine engineers.
A complete set consists of seven separate parts contained in a
Substantial binder.
The complete set, together with four-ring binder and LR's
List of Approved Manufacturers of Materials, Recognized
Proving Establishments, Class 1 Welding Firms and Firms
Approved for Product Certification by Surveillance of Quality
Systems.
All Parts from the Rules are available individually:
Part 1-Regulations-Classification and periodical survey.
Rules for the Manufacture, Testing, and Certification of
Materials
Part 3-Ship Structures-The basic structural philosophy
of hull construction, longitudinal strength, aft end structures,
superstructures, and so forth.
Part 4-Ship Structures-Hull construction requirements
for specific ship-types-for example, tugs, ferries, bulk carri-
ers, oil tankers, and containerships.
Part 5-Main and Auxiliary Machinery-Main and auxil-
iary machinery including shaft vibration and alignment, piping
systems for oil and chemical tankers, and steering gear.
Part 6-:-Control, Electrical, Refrigeration, and Fire-
Automation and control systems, electrical systems, refrigera-
tion systems and fire prevention systems.
Part 7-Special Types-Highly specialized ships to which
the format of the rest of the Rules cannot easily be applied-
that is, nuclear ships; ships with installed process plant; fire
fighting ships; dynamic positioning installed in ships; oil
recovery ships; ship to shore ramps and linkspans; burning of
coal in ships' boilers; positional mooring systems and thruster
assisted positional mooring systems.
Four-Ring Binder-With 55-mm capacity and blocked
"Rules and Regulations."
LR PASS (Plan Appraisal Systems for Ships)
Current Facilities
Rules programs for IBM/PC and compatible computers
Direct calculations programs for IBM/PC and compatible
computers
Feedback and Improvement Procedure
Rules for Inland Waterway Ships-A complete set consists
of the five parts contained in a substantial binder.
All parts are available individually:
F1547- 09
cv
Part !-Regulations
Part 2-Materials for Ship and Machinery
Part 3-Ship Stmcture
Part 4--Ship Structure
Part 5-Main and auxiliary Machinery
Part 6-Control, Electrical and Fire
Binder-(With 55-mm capacity and blocked "Rules and
Regulations.")
Rules for Floating Docks 1987
Code for Lifting Appliances in a Marine Environment
-.Re,qUJtreJments for ship derricks and deck cranes, off-
shore and floating cranes, lifts and ramps. launch and recovery
systems for diving operations and mechanical lift docks.
Rules for Ships for Liquefied Gases 1986--Rules and
regulations for the constmction and classification of ships for
the carriage of liquefied gas in bulk, incorporating the IMO
International Code for the Construction and Equipment of
Ships Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
Rules for for Chemicals 1989-Rules and
for the construction and classification of ships for
of liquid chemicals in bulk, incorporating the IMO
International Code for the Construction and Equipment of
Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code).
Two-volume set.
5.5.2.2 Rules and Regulations (Offshore):
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Mobile Off-
shore Units 1989-The Rules now appear in six Parts con-
tained in a substantial binder (included in the price) and with
Materials from the Rules and Regulations for the Classification
of Ships.
Various Parts from the Rules are available:
Part !-Regulations-Classification and periodical sur-
veys.
Part 2-Materials-Conditions for manufacture, survey and
certification, and requirements for high holding power anchors
and special quality chain cable.
Part 3-Stmcture-Unit structural requirements, unit types,
strength, mooring equipment, and steering arrangements.
Part 4--Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and
Corrosion Control-Requirements for stability, load lines,
watertight and weathertight integrity, guard rails, bulwarks and
corrosion control.
Part 5-Main and Auxiliary Machinery-Main and auxil-
iary machinery including shaft vibration and alignment, piping
systems, pressure vessels and steering gear.
Part 6--Control, Electrical, Hazardous Areas and Fires-
Control systems, electrical systems, hazardous areas, fire
fighting units and dynamic positioning systems.
Four-Ring Binder--With 40-mm capacity and blocked
Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classifica-
tion of Submersibles and Underwater Systems 1989
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Fixed
Offshore Installations 1989-The rules are based on LR's
experience from the certification of over 600 platforms world-
wide. Like all other LR rules, they are based on a mixture of
experience and theoretical innovation. are primarily
intended for operators and designers in areas where national
authorities have no requirements of their own. A complete set
consists of eight parts contained in a binder.
All parts are available individually:
Part !-Regulations-Classification and periodical survey
requirements. Operations Manual.
Part 2-Materials and Manufacturing Procedures-
Material selection for both the jacket structure and machinery
components. This part is accompanied by Materials of the
Rules and Regulations for the Classification of Ships and
includes a chapter covering Quality Assurance Scheme for the
Construction of Fixed Offshore Installations.
Part 3-Environmental and Design Considerations-
Approval of each installation is site specific including complete
assessment of all environmental factors and ocean bed condi-
tions. The jacket and module stmctures are examined for a
variety of external loads imposed by the elements and the
distribution of weight on the platform. Also includes
foundation design.
Part 4--Steel Structures-The stmctural arrangements of
each installation are independently examined and advice
on acceptable analysis techniques, factors of safety and
design.
Part 5-Concrete Structures-All aspects of concrete struc-
tures including materials, fabrication, and assessment are
covered.
Part 6--Corrosion Protection-Active and passive cathodic
protection systems, coating and paint systems.
Part 7-Machinery and Process Systems-Regulations for
drilling and process equipment on platform and subsea, includ-
ing pressure vessels and pressure systems, heating, ventilation,
and air conditioning. Mechanical, electrical, control engineer-
ing, and hazardous areas are included.
Part 8-Fire and Safety Equipment-Passive and active fire
safety measures, both fixed and portable; Safety equipment
including lifesaving appliances and radio communications.
Four-Ring Binder-With 40-mm capacity and blocked
Container Certification Scheme 1988-Rules for the
constmction, and inspection of general cargo containers, ther-
mal containers (both insulated and refrigerated), tank contain-
ers and other portable tanks; container trailer/vehicle chassis;
in--service inspection of containers, tanks, and carrying tanks of
road containers; basic quality system requirements for manu
facturer; ISO test procedures.
1102
5.5.2.3 Approved Products:
Approval System 1990-Advice to producers is
given in a series of documents which outlines the .. ._.,n.vvu
procedure and test requirements to qualify for inclusion in the
list of Approved Products.
LR-Type Approval System Procedure--describes system
operation.
Approval System Test Specification No. /--oT\If'".:
marine environmental tests.
r"''""'va System Test No. ----Hl\!PCC
certain electrical product tests.
Test No . ....--"''''")
internal combustion engine tests.
List of Products 1992--Includes details
F1547-09
all products currently Type Approved in accordance with the
published Type Approval System. Available in four parts:
Part 1-Marine, Offshore and Industrial Equipment
Part 2-Electrical Equipment (Environmentally Tested)
Part 3-Control Equipment (Environmentally Tested)
Part 4-Fire Protection and Fire Fighting
List of Approved Type Tested Fuses (2nd Edition, 1987 plus
Addendum 1991 )-Each entry in this publication carries
information essential in the selection of fuses for marine
installations and includes details of current together
with of fuse holders and bases.
List of Tested Circuit Breakers (2nd Edi-
tion, 1987 Addendum 1991)-This ,has been
to assist in the selection of circuit breakers in
pe:rtormam:.:e under short circuit conditions.
Corrosion
tanks. An additional section
for tank coatings. The
400 indexed under the name of the manufacturer.
Welding Consumables for use in
Construction 1992-This document, which is annu-
ally, lists those welding consumables that have complied with
the requirements for use in construction set out
in LR's rules. The document lists approximately 3500 consum-
ables in seven sections related to welding process and parent
materiaL
5.5.2.4 Manufacturer: List of Approved Manu-
facturers of Materials, Recognized Proving Establishments and
Class 1 Firms 1992-Also includes a list of manu-
facturers of steel, castings, forgings, chain wire ropes,
and so forth.
5.5.2.5 Computer Data:
Rulefinder
5.6 Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
5.6.1 For current prices and information corlceJmHlg
cations:
Kyokai (Class NK)
4-7, Kioi-Cho,
102
Tel: (81-33) 2301201
Tlx: (781) J22975 CLASSNK
Fax: (81-33) 2303524
1103
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
Regional Office for the Americas
One Parker Plaza 11th
400 Kelby Street
Fort Lee, NJ 07024
Tel: 201-944-8021
Fax: 201-944-8183
5.6.2 Nippon KaUi Kyokai (Class NK) Publication List:
5.6.2.1 Registers--Register of Ships (1995-96) with Quar-
terly book contains the principal
lars and survey records of NK-classed
5.6.2.2 Rules and
Conditions of Service for Classification of
tion of Installations ( 1997)
for the Issue of ( 1997)
Rules for Approval of Manufacturers (1997)
Rules for the and Construction of Steel
Part A--General Rules (1997)
Part B-Class ( 1997)
Part C-Hull Construction and (1997)
Part U-Intact Stability (1997)
Part V -Load Lines ( 1997)
Part CS-Hull Construction and of Small
(1997)
Part D-Machinery Installations ( 1997)
Part H-Electrical Installations (1995)
Part K-Materials (1997)
Part (1997)
Part M--Welding ( 1997)
Part N-Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk ( 1997)
PartS--Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (1997)
Part P-Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, Workships, and
cial Purpose Barges (1 997)
Part Q-Steel Barges (1997)
Part T -Submersibles (1997)
Part R-Fire Protection, Detection, and Extinction (1997)
Rules for Installations of Ships
Rules for Marine Pollution Prevention ( 1997)
Rules for the Safety Equipment ( 1997)
Rules for the Radio Installation ( 1997)
Rules for Cargo Refrigerating Installations (1997)
Rules for Cargo Handling Appliances (1997)
Rules for Diving Systems (1997)
Rules for Automatic and Remote Control Systems (1997)
Rules for Navigation Bridge (1997)
Rules for Preventive Machinery Maintenance ( 1997)
Rules for Integrated Fire Control Systems ( 1997)
Rules for Construction and Certification of Freight Containers
(1994)
Rules for the Survey and Construction of of Fit>en2:Iass
Reinforced Plastics ( 1994)
Rules for Docks (1994)
Rules for Speed Craft ( 1996)
Guidance for the Approval and Approval of Materials and
Equipment for Marine Use (1997)
List of Approved Materials and Equipment (1997)
Rules and Guidance for Assessment and Registration of
0 F1547-09
Quality Systems ( 1995)
Rules and Guidance for Assessment and Registration of Safety
Management Systems-According to the International Safety
Management Code (ISM CODE) ( 1996)
5.6.2.3 Other Publications
Directory
Annual Report
Class NK Magazine
6. Keywords
New Shipbuilding in Japan (issued quarterly)
Class NK Technical Bulletin
6.1 commercial shipbuilding; marine technology; ship con-
struction; shipbuilding; shipbuilding standards; ships
Designation
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME B1.1
ASME B1.20.1
ASME B1.20.3
ASTM A20/ A20M
ASTM A27/ A27M
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A47/A47M
ASTM A194/A194M
ASTM A197/A197M
ASTM A203/ A203M
ASTM A216/A216M
ASTM A276
ASTM A307
ASTM A320/ A320M
ASTM A351/A351M
ASTM A352/ A352M
ASTM A370
ASTM A575
ASTM A576
ASTM A690/ A690M
ASTM B16/B16M
ASTM B21/B21 M
ASTM B26/B26M
ASTM B61
ASTM B85
ASTM B96/B96M
TABLE 1 Standards and Publications
Group 1 Materials and Processes
Title
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V, Nondestructive
Examination
Section VII, Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power
Builders
Section VIII, Division I. Pressure Vessels
Section VIII, Pressure Vessels
Section VIII, Division I, Pressure Vessels
Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications
Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications
Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)
Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
Dryseal Pipe Threads (Inch)
Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for
Pressure Vessels
Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General
Application
Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel
Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion
Welding for High-Temperature Service
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength
Specification for Alloy/Steel Bolting Materials for Low-
Temperature Service
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic
(Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts
Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for
Pressure Containing Parts, Suitable for Low-Temperature
Service
Test Method and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products
Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-
Grades
Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
Quality
Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H-Piles and
Sheet Piling for Use in Marine Environments
Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes for
Use in Shapes for Use in Snew Machines
Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes
Specification for Aluminum-Allow Sand Castings
Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings
Specification for Copper-Silicon Al.loy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and
Rolled Bar for General Purposes and Pressure Vessels
1104
Approved For Incorporation In
46 CFR 38.25-3(a)(1); 98.01-3;
151.01-2
46 CFR 59.01
46 CFR 56.15-1; 56.15-5;
56.15-10; 56.25-5; 56.30-iO;
56.30-30; 56.60-1; 56.60-15;
56.95-10
46 CFR 54.01; 54.03; 54.05;
54.1 0; 54.15; 54.20; 54.25;
54.30; 58.30; 59.1 0; 197.204;
197.205; 197.300; 197.310;
197.328
46 CFR 64.2; 64.5; 64.11;
64.13; 64.21; 64.25; 64.31
46 CFR 56. 70-5; 56. 70-20;
56. 75-20; 56.85-1 0
46 CFR 57.01; 57.02; 57.03;
57.04; 57.05; 57.06; 59.10
46 CFR 56.60-1, 56.25-20;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 154.1; 54.25-10;
154.610
46 CFR 160.032-1; TSGS
46 CFR 156.30-10; 160.035-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.50-105; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 54.05-20
46 CFR 160.032-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
46 CFR 56.25-20; TSGS
46 CFR 56.5Q-105
46 CFR 56.50-105
46 CFR 56.50-105
46 CFR 54.25-20
46 CFR 56.6Q-2
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-2
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
46 CFR 162.014-1
46 CFR 56.60-2
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
ASTM Bi17
ASTM B122/B122M
ASTM B124/B124M
ASTM B127
ASTM B152/B152M
ASTM B154
ASTM B209
ASTM B369
ASTM C177
ASTM C518
ASTM D92
ASTM D93
ASTM D323
ASTM D396
ASTM D413
ASTM D471
ASTM D570
ASTM D635
ASTM D751
ASTM D882
ASTM D975
ASTM D1004
ASTM D1434
ASTM D1435
ASTM D1518
ASTM D1621
ASTM D1622
ASTM D2481
ASTM D2842
ASTM D2863
ASTM D3574
ASTM D4066
ASTM D4330
ASTM D4939
ASTM D5479
ASTM D5969
ASTM D6081
ASTM E11
ASTM E23
ASTM E84
ASTM E119
ASTM E208
ASTM E1123
cO F1547-09
Practice for Operating Salt Sp ray (Fog) Apparatus
Specification for Copper-Nickel-Tin Alloy, Copper-Nickel-Zinc
Alloy (Nickel Silver), and Copper-Nickel Alloy Plate, Sheet,
Strip, and Rolled Bar
Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod, Bar,
and Shapes
Specification for Nickel and Copper Alloy (UNS No. 4400)
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
Method for Mercurous Nitrate Test for Copper and Copper
Alloys
Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate
Specification for Copper-Nickel Alloy Castings
Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-
Hot-Plate Apparatus
Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup
Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky -Martens Closed Cup
Tester
Test Method for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
Method)
Specification for Fuel Oils
Test Methods for Rubber Property Adhesion to Flexible
Substrate
Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids
Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils
Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting
Test Method for Determining Gas Permeability Characteristics
of Plastic Film and Sheeting
Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
Test Method for Thermal Transmittance of Textile Materials
Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular
Plastics
Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
Test Method for Accelerated Evaluation of Wood Preservatives
for Marine Services by Means of Small-Size Specimens
Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics
Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index)
Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials-Slab, Bonded,
and Molded Urethane Foam
Specification for Nylon Injection and Extrusion Materials
Practice for Evaluation of Fiberglass Boat Polish and Wax
Test Method for Subjecting Marine Antifouling Coating to
Biofouling and Fluid Shear Forces in Natural Seawater
Practice for Testing Biofouling Resistance of Marine Coatings
Partially Immersed
Test Method for Corrosion-Preventive Properties of Lubricating
Greases in Presence of Dilute Synthetic Sea Water
Environments
Practice for Aquatic Toxicity Testing of Lubricants: Sample
Preparation and Results Interpretation
Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic
Materials
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to Determine
Nil-ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic Steels
Practices for Mounting Test Specimens for Sound Transmission
Loss Testing of Naval and Marine Ship Bulkhead Treatment
Materials
1105
46 CFR 110.15-1(b); 160.171-
3; 161.002-1; 161.004-1;
161.006-1; 160.176-8
46 CFR 58.50; 182.15-25;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-2
46 CFR 58.50-5; 58.50-10;
182.1525; 182.20-25; TSGS
46 CFR 58.50; 182.15-25
46 CFR 56.60-2
46 CFR 58.55; TSGS
46 CFR 160.171-3; 160.174-3
46 CFR 160.171-3; 160.174-3
46 CFR 58.301 0; TSGS
46 CFR 35.25-10; 58.01-10;
58.01-15; 78.17-75; 97.15-55;
182.15-1; 182.20-1
46 CFR 30.10-22; 30.10-59;
58.16-5; 105.10-15; 188.10-21
46 CFR 63.05-75; 65.10-75
46 CFR 160.055-1
33 CFR 183.5; 183.114;
183.516; 183.607; 183.620
46 CFR 160.055-1
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 160.176-13(y)
46 CFR 160.055-1
46 CFR 160.171-3; 160.174-3
46 CFR 160.055-i; 160.171-3;
160.174-3
46 CFR 160.176-13(y)
46 CFR 163.003-3
46 CFR 160.174-3
33 CFR 183.5; 183.516
33 CFR 183.5; 183.516
33 CFR 183.5; 183.114
46 CFR 56.6025
46 CFR 111.60-1(b)(4)
33 CFR 159.125
46 CFR 54.05-5; 56.50-105
46 CFR 164.012-1
46 CFR 164.007-1; 164.008-1
46 CFR 54.05-5
ASTM E1317
ASTM E1597
ASTM F718
ASTM F940
ASTM F941
ASTM F1097
ASTM F1178
0 F1547-09
Test Method for Flammability of Marine Surface Finishes
Test Method for Saltwater Pressure Immersion and Temperature
Testing of Photovoltaic Modules for Marine Environments
Standard for Shipbuilders and Marine Paints and Coatings
ProducVProcedure Data Sheet
Practice for Quality Control Receipt Inspection Procedures for
Protective Coatings (Paint), Used in Marine Construct ion and
Shipbuilding
Practice for Inspection of Marine Surface Preparation and
Coating Application
Specification for Mortar, Refractory (High-Temperature, Air-
Setting)
Specification for Enameling System, Baking, Metal Joiner
Work and Furniture
ASTM F1312 Specification for Brick, Insulating, High-Temperature, Fire
Clay
ASTM F1799 Guide for Shipboard Generated Waste Management Audits
Fed. Spec. CCC-C-426 (DoDSSP) Cloth, Cotton, Drill
Fed. Spec. L-P-390 (DoDSSP)
Fed. Spec. T-R-605 (DoDSSP)
Fed. Spec. V-T-295 (DoDSSP)
Fed. Spec. VV-G-671 (DoDSSP)
FED-STD-i 41 (DoDSSP)
FED-STD-191 (DoDSSP)
IS0614
ISO 657-18
ISO TR 6065
Mil. Spec. MIL-P-21929
(DoDSSP)
NFPA 518
NFPA251
NFPA 255
SAE J343
SAE J373
SAE J429
SAE J1127
SAE J1128
SAE J1475
SAE J1527
SAE J1942
UL19
UL44
UL62
UL83
UL814
Plastic Molding and Extrusion Materials, Polyethylene and
Copolymers (Low, Medium, and High Density)
Rope, Manila and Sisal
Thread, Nylon
Grease, Graphite
Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Materials: Methods of
Inspection, Sampling and Testing
Textile, Test Methods
Instrumental Photometric Measurements of Retroreflective
Materials and Retroreflective Devices
Colors, A, and Notice 5 Used in Government Procurement
Stitches, Seams, and Stitchings
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures Toughened Safety Glass
Panes for Rectangular Windows and Side Scuttles-Punch
Method of Non-Destructive Strength Testing
Hot Rolled Steel Sections-Part 1 8: L Sections for Shipbuilding
(Metric Series)-Dimensions, Sectional Properties and
Tolerances
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Inflatable Life Rafts-
Materials
Plastic Material, Cellular Polyurethane, Foam-in-Place, Rigid,
(2 Pounds Per Cubic Foot)
Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
Tests and Procedures for SAE 1 OOR Series Hydraulic Hose and
Hose Assemblies
Housing Internal Dimensions for Single- and Two-Plate Spring-Loaded Clutches
Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded
Fasteners
Battery Cable
Low Tension Primary Cable
Hydraulic Hose Fittings for Marine Applications
Marine Fuel Hoses
Hose and Hose Assemblies for Marine Applications
Lined Fire Hose and Hose Assemblies
Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire
Standard for Thermo-Plastic Insulated Wires and Cables
1106
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
46 CFR 160.048-i; 160.049-i;
160.055-1; 164.018-5
46 CFR 161.010-1
46 CFR 160.031-1
46 CFR 160.001-1; 160.050-1
46 CFR 164.018-5
46 CFR 160.002-1; 160.005-1;
160.009-1; 160.047-i; 160.052-
1; 160.055-1; 160.060-1;
160.171-3
46 CFR 164.018
46 CFR 160.050-1; 160.055-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 160.002-1; 160.005-1;
160.047-1; 160.048-1; 160.052
1; 160.055-1; 160.060-i;
160.171-3; 160.174-3(b);
160.176-9
33 CFR 183.5; 183.505;
183.516;
46 CFR 160.010-1
33 CFR 127.003
33 CFR 127.003
46 CFR 164.012-1
46 CFR 56.60-25
33 CFR 183.5; 183.430
46 CFR 58.30-15
33 CFR 183.5; 183.430
33 CFR 183.5; 183.430
46 CFR 56.60-25
33 CFR 183.5; 183.540
46 CFR 28.405; 56.60
33 CFR 149.469
46 CFR 34.10-1 0;76. 10-1 0;
95.10-10; 108.425; 167.45-5;
169.115; 169.563; 181.15-10;
193.10-10
46 CFR 111.60-11
46 CFR 111.13; 161.006-1
33 CFR 183.5; 183.435;
183.540
46 CFR 111.30-19; 111.60
46 CFR 63.05-55; 63.10-55
A-3
ANSI A14.3
API RP 2D
API SPEC 2C
ASTM F765
ASTM F782
ASTM F783
ASTM F821/F821 M
ASTM F822
ASTM F823
ASTM F824
ASTM F825
ASTM F826
ASTM F840
ASTM F985
ASTM F987
ASTM F1019M
ASTM
ASTM F1069
ASTM F1070
ASTM F1071
ASTM F1072
ASTM F1073
ASTM F1074
ASTM F1085
ASTM F1092
ASTM F1106
ASTM F1142
ASTM F1143
ASTM F1144
ASTM F1196
ASTM F1197
ASTM F1244
ASTM F1267
ASTM F1273
ASTM F1322
ASTM F1323
ASTM F133i
ASTM F1333
ASTM F2283
ASTM F2363
EJMA
ISO 21
ISO 614
ISO 799
ISO 1704
ISO 1751
ISO 3078
ISO 3434
ISO 3652
ISO 3674
ISO 3'796
ISO 3797
ISO 3876
ISO 3902
F1547-09
Galley Stoves
Fixed Ladders
Operation and Maintenance of Offshore Cranes
Offshore Pedestal Mounted Cranes
Specification for Wildcats, Ship Anchor Chain
Specification for Doors, Furniture, Marine
Specification for Staple, Handgrab, Handle, and Stirrup Rung
Specification for Doors and Frames, Steel, Interior, Marine
Specification for Chest of Drawers (Chiffonier), Steel, Marine
Specification for Desk, Marine, Steel, with Cabinet
Specification for Tables, Marine, Steel
Specification tor Drawers, Furniture, Marine, Steel
Specification for Tops, Furniture, Marine, Steel
Specification for Ladders, Fixed, Vertical, Steel, Ships'
Specification for Panama Canal Pilot Platform
Specification for Portable Intermediate Flush Deck Stanchion
Specification for Steel Emergency Gear Stowage Locker
Specification for Steel Deck Gear Stowage Box (Metric)
Specification for Doors, Gastigh!/Airtight, Individually
Dogged, for Marine
Specification for Doors, Watertight, Gastigh!/Airtight and
Weathertight, for Marine Use
Sp3cifica:tion for Doors, for Marine Use
for Expanded-Metal Bulkhead Panels
Spc3cifica'tion for Expanded-Metal Door
Sp!3Cificaltion for Door for
Weathertight, and Non-light
Doors, Marine Use
Specification for Cleats, Welded Horn Type
Specification for Mattress and Box Springs, Berths
Specification for Fiberglass (GRP) Pultruded Open-Weather,
Storrn-, and Guard-Square Handrails
Specification for Warping Heads, Rope Handling
Specification for Manhole Cover Assembly, Bolted, Semi-
Flush, Oiltight, and Watertight
Specification for Manhole Cover Assembly, Raised, Oiltight,
and Watertight
Specification for Manhole Cover Assembly, Bolted, Hinged,
Semi-Flush, Oiltight, and Watertight, Hinged
Specification for Sliding Watertight Door Assemblies
Specification for Sliding Watertight Door Control Systems
Specification for Berths, Marine
Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel
Specification for Tank Vent Flame Arresters
Guide for Selection of Shipboard Incinerators
Specification for Shipboard Incinerators
Practice for Installation Procedures of Vinyl Deck Coverings on
Portable Plates in Electrical and Electronic Spaces
Specification for Construction of Fire and Foam Station
Cabinets
Specification for Oil Pollution Abatement System
Specification for States Coast Guard Type II or IMO MARPOL 73/78 Annex IV
Marine Sanitation Devices (Flow Through Treatment)
Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
Inc.
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Gable-lifters tor Stud-link
Anchor Chains
Shipbuilding-Toughened Safety Glass Panes for Ships' Side
Scuttles Ships' Rectangular Windows-and Punch Method of
Nondestructive Strength Testing
Shipbuilding-Pilot Ladders
Shipbuilding-Stud-link Anchor Chains
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Ships' Side Scuttles
Shipbuilding-Cargo Winches
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Heated Glass Panes for
Rectangular Windows
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Rope Reels
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Deck Rail
Shipbuilding-Clear Openings through Frames for External
Single-Leaf Doors
Shipbuilding-Vertical Steel Ladders
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Hand-Holes
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Gaskets for Rectangular
Windows and Side
1107
46 CFR 169.115; 169.703
46 CFR 108.160
46 CFR 107.259; 109.437;
109.521; 109.527
46 CFR 107.309; 108.601;
109.437
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
46 CFR 92.01; 170.270;
174,100; 190,01-3
46 CFR 92.01; 170.270;
174.100; 190.01-3
46 CFR 32.20-1 0
ISO 3903
ISO 3904
ISO 3913
ISO 4001
ISO 4050
ISO 4085
ISO 4089
ISO 4127-1
ISO 4127-2
ISO 4143
ISO 5480
ISO 5485
ISO 5488
ISO 5489
ISO 5778
ISO 5779
ISO 5780
ISO 5894
ISO 6042
ISO 6043
ISO 6044
ISO 6045
ISO 6325
ISO 6345
ISO 6454
ISO 6812
ISO 7061
ISO 8146
ISO 8148
ISO 8314
ISO 8431
ISO 9089
ISO 9437
ISO 9519
ISO TR 6065
UL217
UL 710
Designation
ABS
ABS
ABS Rules
ASME PVH0-1
ASTM F986
ASTM F991M
ASTM F994
ASTM F1455
ISO 5621
ISO 6454
ISO 8193
F1547-09
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Ship's Ordinary
Rectangular Windows
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Clear-View Screens
Shipbuilding-Welded Steel Bollards
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Raft-Type Lifesaving
Apparatus
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-"Rhine" and Hall's Stockless
Anchors
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Swing Derricks
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Sealing Rubber for Covers
of Cargo Hatches
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Fairleads-Part 1: Two-lip
Fairleads
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Fairleads-Part 2: Roller
Fairleads
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Open Rowing Lifeboats
Shipbuilding-Guardrails for Cargo Ships
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Fixed Steel Deck Stairs
Shipbuilding-Accommodation Ladders
Shipbuilding-Embarkation Ladders
Shipbuilding-Small Weathertight Steel Hatches
Shipbuilding-Ordinary Rectangular Windows-Positioning
Shipbuilding-Side Scuttles-Positioning
Shipbuilding-Manholes with Bolted Covers
Shipbuilding-Weathertight Single-Leaf Steel Doors
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Eye and Fork Assemblies
Under Tension Load-Main Dimensions
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Derrick Boom Heel
Fittings-Main Dimensions
Bearings for Derrick Goosenecks-Assemblies and
Components
Shipbuilding-Cable Stoppers
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Windows and Side
Scuttles-Vocabulary
Shipbuilding-Strum Boxes
Roll-On/Roll-Off Ship-to-Shore Connection-Interface Between
Terminals and Ships with Straight Stern/Bow Ramps
Shipbuilding-Aluminum Shore Gangways for Seagoing
Vessels
Oval Eye-Plates
Derrick Boom Headfittings-Fixed Type
Trunnion Pieces for Span Bearings and Lead Block Bearings
Fixed Jib Cranes-Ship-Mounted Type for General Cargo
Handling
Marine Structures-Mobile Offshore Units-Anchor Winches
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Matrosov Anchors
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures Rungs for Dog-Step
Ladders
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Inflatable Liferafts-
Materials
Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors
Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment
Group 3 Hull Structure
Title
Rules for Building and Classing Single Point Moorings, 1975
Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels
Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Drilling Units
Pressure Vessels for Human Occupancy
Specification for Suction Strainer Boxes
Specification for Docking/Drain Plug and Boss Assemblies
(Metric)
Specification for Design and Installation of Overboard
Discharge Hull Penetration Connections
Guide for Selection of Structural Details for Ship Construction
Bilge Mud Boxes for Machinery Spaces and Tunnels-General
Design Characteristics
Strum Boxes
Shipbuilding-Shell Plating Information
Group 4 General Support Requirements
1108
46 CFR 28.325
46 CFR 28.33-0
33 CFR 150.405; 149.209
46 CFR 32.15; 32.60; 32.65;
58.1 0; 58.20; 58.25; 62.25-1;
62.25-5; 62.25-30; 62.35;
62.50-30; 70.35-1; 71.15-1;
72.01; 90.35-1; 91.15-1; 92.01-
10; 111.12; 111.30-31; 111.33-
11; 111.35-1; 154.1; 167.15-27;
167.20-1; 188.35-1; 189.15-1;
190.01; TSGS
46 CFR 108.113; 108.705
46 CFR 197.204; 197.205;
197.300; 197.328
TSGS
TSGS
Designation
ABYCA-1
ABYCA-22
ABYC H-25
ANSI A10.14
ANSI A12.1
ANSI A17.1
ANSI Z41
ANSI Z87.1
ANSI Z89.1
APIRP14C
API RP 53
ASTM B209
ASTM B209M
ASTM E2231
ASTM E2257
ASTM E2404
ASTM E2573
ASTM E2579
ASTM E2599
ASTM F670
ASTM F841
ASTM F856
ASTM F906
ASTM F956
ASTM F957
ASTM F991M
ASTM F1005
ASTM F1075
ASTM F1085
ASTM F1099M
ASTM F1138
ASTM F1145
ASTM F1166
ASTM F1179
ASTM F1182
ASTM F1198
ASTM F1270
ASTM F1297
ASTM F1321
ASTM F1332
ASTM F1337
ASTM F1347
ASTM F1348/F1348M
ASTM F1547
F1547-09
Title
Marine Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) Systems
Compressed Natural Gas Systems Standards and Recommended
Practices for Small Craft
Portable Fuel Systems (Standards Recommended)
Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, Lifelines,
and Drop Lines for Construction and Industrial Use
Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings,
and Toeboards
Elevators, Escalators Committee Interpretations Nos. 2-13 June
1979-May
Requirements for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear
Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection
Requirements for Industrial Head Protection
Analysis, Design, Installation, and Testing of Basic Surface
Safety Systems for Offshore Production Platforms
Blowout Prevention Equipment Systems for Drilling Wells
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe
and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
Test Method for Room Fire Test of Wall and Ceiling
Materials and Assemblies
Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of
Textiles, Paper or Vinyl Wall or Ceiling Coverings to Assess Surface Burning Charac-
teristics
Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of
Site-Fabricated Stretch Systems to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Wood
Products to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Reflective
Insulation and Sheet Radiant Barriers for Building Applications
Specification for Tanks, 5- and 1 0-Gal (20- and 40-L) Lube Oil
Dispensing
Specification for Thrusters, Tunnel, Permanently Installed in
Marine Vessels
Practice for Mechanical Symbols, Shipboard Heating,
Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Specification for Letters and Numerals for Ships
Specification for Bell, Cast, Sound Signalling
Specification for Gong, Sound Signaling
Specification for Docking/Drain Plug and Boss Assemblies
Practice for HVAC Duct Shapes; Identification and Description
of Design Configuration
Specification for Dehumidifier Shipboard, Mechanically
Refrigerated, Self-Contained
Specification for Mattress and Box Spring for Use in
Berths in Marine Vessels (Annexes A 1 and A3)
Specification for Rat Guards, Ship's (Metric)
Specification for Spray Shields for Mechanical Joints
Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Cast, Forged
Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems,
Equipment, and Facilities
Practice for Inspection Procedure for Use of Anaerobic Thread
Locking Compounds with Studs
Specification for Anodes, Sacrificial Zinc Alloy
Guide for Shipboard Fire Detection Systems
Practice for Preparing and Locating Emergency Muster Lists
Guide for Location and Instruction Symbols for Evacuation and
Lifesaving Equipment
Guide for Conducting a Stability Test (Lightweight Survey and
Inclining Experiment) to Determine the Light Ship
Displacement and Center of Gravity of a Vessel
Practice for Use of Sl (Metric) Units in Maritime Applications
(Committee F-25 Supplement to ANSIIEEE/ASTM 8110)
Practice for Human Engineering Program Requirements for
Ships and Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities
Specification for Manually Operated Fueling Hose Reels
Specification for Pneumatic Rotary Descaling Machines
Guide Listing Relevant Standards and Publications for
Commercial Shipbuilding
1109
46 CFR 169.115; 159.703;
184.05-1
46 CFR 169.115; 169.703;
184.05
46 CFR 147.7
33 CFR 140; 142
33 CFR 149.441
46 CFR 111.91-1
33 CFR 140; 142; 150.509
33 CFR 140.7; 142; 149.517;
150.509
46 CFR 150.395; 150.457;
154.1; 154.1400
46 CFR 1 08.497; 33 CFR
150.509; 154.1400
46 CFR 58.60-9
46 CFR 58.60-7
46 CFR 182.15-25; 182.20-25;
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
ASTM F1808
DHHS PUB. No. {PHS) 84-
2024
Fed. Spec. BB-N-411C
(DoDSSP)
Fed. Spec. BB-0-925A
(DoDSSP)
FHWAi
IMO
IMO
IMO
IMO
!MO AlES Ill Res. 108,
Annexes I thru IV, dated Nov.
30, 1966, Amendments to
Chapter II
IMO RES. A212(VII)
IMO RES. A328{1X)
IMO Resolut. A.264 (VIII)
IMO Resolut. A.265 (VIII)
ISO 449
ISO 484-1
ISO 484-2
IS0613
ISO 694
ISO 1069
ISO 1964
ISO 2269
ISO 2412
ISO 3715
ISO 3786
ISO 3827-5
ISO 3828
ISO 3969
ISO 4175
ISO 4261
ISO 4867
ISO 4868
ISO 5483
ISO 5572
ISO 5667-9
ISO 6050
ISO 6205
ISO 6216
ISO 6217
ISO 6218
ISO 6345
ISO 6420
F1547-09
Guide for Weight Control Technical Requirements for Surface
Ships
The Ship's Medicine Chest and Medical Aid at Sea, Revised
1984
Nitrogen, Technical
Oxygen, Technical, Gas and Liquid
Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs
Code for Existing Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk
International Convention on Safety of Life at Sea
Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving
Dangerous Goods
Code for Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore
Drilling Units (IMO Assembly Resolution A.414 (XI), Nov. 15,
1979)
International Convention for Safety of life at Sea, 1960
{Adopted as Part of International Convention for the Safety of
Life at Sea, 1974), 1966
Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying
Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk
Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying
Liquefied Gases in Bulk
Carriage of Grain, 1973
Shipbuilding-Magnetic Compasses and Binnacles, Class A
Shipbuilding-Ship Screw Propellers-Manufacturing
Tolerance-Part 1: Propellers of Diameter Greater than 2,50 m
Shipbuilding-Ship Screw Propellers-Manufacturing
Tolerances-Part 2: Propellers of Diameter Between 0,80 and
2,50 m Inclusive
Shipbuilding-Magnetic Compasses, Binnacles, and Azimuth
Reading Devices-Class B
Positioning of Magnetic Compasses in Ships
Magnetic Compasses and Binnacles for Sea Navigation -
Vocabulary
Shipbuilding-Indication of Details on the General
Arrangement Plans of Ships
Shipbuilding-Class A Magnetic Compasses, Azimuth Reading
Devices and Binnacles-Tests and Certification
Shipbuilding-Colours of Indicator Lights
Shipbuilding--Ship Screw Propellers-List of Equivalent
Terms
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation Towing Hooks-Scale of
Tractive Efforts
Shipbuilding-Coordination of Dimensions in Ship's
Accommodation-Part V: Coordination Sizes for Key
Components
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Deck Machinery-
Vocabulary
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Operational Documentation
Shipbuilding-Shipborne Barges, Series 1-Main Dimensions
Petroleum Products-Fuels {Class F)-Specification of Gas
Turbine Fuels for Industrial and Marine Applications
Code for the Measurement and Reporting of Shipboard
Vibration Data
Code for the Measurement and Reporting of Local Vibration
Data of Ship Structures and Equipment
Shipbuilding-Oil and Water Drain Screw
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Numbering of Equipment
and Structural Elements in Ships
Water Quality-Sampling from Marine Water
Shipbuilding-Bulbous Bow and Side Thruster Symbols
Inland Navigation Vessels-Customs Sealing Systems-Basic
Technical Requirements
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Pilot Craft-Classification
and Basic Requirements
Shipbuilding--Inland Navigatio1-Pilot Craft-Identification
Painting and Inscriptions
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Coupling Winches for Push
Tows-Main Dimensions
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures Windows and Side
Scuttles-Vocabulary
Flow Measurement in Channels-Position Fixing
1110
46 CFR 147.7
46 CFR 197.340
46 CFR 197.340
33 CFR 118
46 CFR 154.1
46 CFR
46 CFR 153.930; 154. i;
154.1435; 154.1440
33 CFR 140.7; 143.207;
146.205
46 CFR 80.20
46 CFR 153.2
46 CFR 154.1
46 CFR 93.20-05
46 CFR 170.135; 171.075;
171.082
TSGS
TSGS
ISO 6764
ISO 6765
ISO 6766
ISO 6954
ISO 7221
ISO 7222
ISO 7236
ISO 7255
ISO 7545
ISO 7606
ISO 7607
ISO 7840
ISO 8147
ISO 8216--1
ISO 8216--2
ISO 8217
ISO 8303
ISO 8384
ISO 8469
ISO 8999
ISO 9093--1
ISO 9367-1
ISO 9367-2
ISO 9382
ISO 10087
ISO 10088
ISO 10240
ISO 10253
ISO 10316
ISO 10592
ISO 11547
ISO 13617
ISO 1537"1
ISO 23269-1
ISO/DIS 24409-1
ISO 27991
NBS Special Pub. 440
NFPA 1
NFPA 10
NFPA 11
NFPA 12
NFPA 12A
NFPA 13
NFPA 14
NFPA 15
NFPA 16
F1547-09
Shipbuilding-Shipborne Barges, Series 1-Ufting Post
Casting-Arrangement, Dimensions and Method of Testing
Mechanical Vibration and Shock-Guidelines for the Overall
Evaluation of Vibration in Merchant Ships
Shipbuilding and Marine Shipborne Barges, Series 1, on Barge
Carriers-Principal Technical Requirements
Inland Navigation Vessels-Demountable Signal Masts for
Push Tows-Mounting Attachment
Shipbuilding-Active Control Units of Ships-Vocabulary
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Inland Navigation-
Single-Lock Automatic Couplings for Push Tows
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels---Draught Scales
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Multi-Bucket Dredgers-
Scale of Bucket Capacities
Small Craft-Fire-Resistant Fuel Hoses
Shipbuilding and Marine Derrick Rigs and Component Parts-
Vocabulary
Petroleum Products-Fuels F)--Classification-Part 1:
Categories of Marine
Petroleum Products-Fuels (Class F)-Classification-Part 2:
Categories of Gas Turbine Fuels for Industrial and Marine
Applications
Petroleum Products-Fuels (Class F)-Specifications of
Marine Fuels
Shipbuilding-Shipborne Barges, Series 3-Main Operational
and Technical Requirements
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures--Dredgers-Vocabulary
Small Craft-Non-Fire-Resistant Fuel Hose
Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines-Graphical
Symbols
Small Craft-Seacocks and Through-Hull Fittings
Lashing and Arrangements on Road Vehicles for Sea
Transportation on Ships-General Requirements-Part
1 : Commercial Vehicles and Combinations of Vehicles, Semi-
Trailers Excluded
Lashing and Securing Arrangements on Road Vehicles for Sea
Transportation on Ro/Ro Ships-General Requirements-Part
2: Semi-Trailers
Shipborne Barges, All Series-Classification and Main
Requirements
Small Craft-Hull Identification Coding System
Small Craft-Permanently Installed Fuel Systems and Fixed
Fuel Tanks
Small Craft-Owner's Manual
Water Quality-Marine Algal Growth Inhibition Test with
Skeletonema Costatum and Phaedactylum Tricornutum
Shipbuilding-Class B Magnetic Compasses-Tests and
Certification
Small Craft-Hydraulic Steering Systems
Small Craft-Start-in-Gear Protection
Shipbuilding-Shipboard Incinerators-Requirements
Ships and marine technology-Fire-extinguishing systems for
protection of galley deep-fat cooking equipment-Fire tests
Ships and marine technology-Breathing apparatus for ships-
Part 1: Emergency escape breathing devices (EEBD) for shipboard use
Ships and marine technology-Design, location, and use of
shipboard signs for fire protection, life-saving appliances, and means of escape-Part
i : Design principles
Ships and marine technology-Marine evacuation systems-
Means of communication
Color: Universal Language and Dictionary of Names
Uniform Fire Code
Portable Fire Extinguishers
Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Installation of Sprinkler Systems
Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems
Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water
1111
46 CFR 160.010-1; 160.021-1;
160.022-1; 160.024-1; 160.036-
1; 160.037-1; 160.057-i;
160.171-3; 160.174-3; 160.176-
9; 169.115
NFPA 17
NFPA 17A
NFPA 18
NFPA 18A
NFPA 20
NFPA25
NFPA 30
NFPA 37
NFPA 51B
NFPA55
NFPA 58
NFPA 59
NFPA59A
NFPA61
NFPA 70
NFPA 70E
NFPA 72
NFPABO
NFPA 85
NFPA 86
NFPA 96
NFPA 170
NFPA204
NFPA 252
NFPA262
NFPA265
NFPA268
NFPA 269
NFPA 270
NFPA 271
NFPA274
NFPA 275
NFPA289
NFPA 301
NFPA 302
NFPA 303
NFPA 306
NFPA 307
NFPA 312
NFPA329
NFPA 385
NFPA 400
NFPA 407
NFPA 550
NFPA 551
0 F1547-09
Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
Wetting Agents
Water Additives for Fire Control and Vapor Mitigation
Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based
Fire Protection Systems
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines
Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
Storage, Use, and Handling of Compressed Gases and
Cryogenic Fluids in Portable and Stationary Containers,
Cylinders, and Tanks
Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code
Utility LP-Gas Plant Code
Production, Storage, and Handling of Liquefied
Natural Gas (LNG)
Prevention of Fires and Dust Explosions in Agricultural
and Food Processing Facilities
National Electrical Code
Electrical Safety in the Workplace
National Fire Alarm Code
Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code
Ovens and Furnaces
Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations
Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols
Smoke and Heat Venting
Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and
Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces
Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth
Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls
Test Method for Determining lgnitibility of Exterior Wall
Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
Test Method for Developing Toxic Potency Data for Use in
Fire Hazard Modeling
Test Method for Measurement of Smoke Obscuration Using a
Conical Radiant Source in a Single Closed Chamber
Method of Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release Rates for
Materials and Products Using an Oxygen Consumption Calorimeter
Test Method to Evaluate Fire Performance Characteristics of
Pipe Insulation
Method of Fire Tests for the Evaluation of Thermal Barriers
Used Over Foam Plastic Insulation
Standard Method of Fire Tests for Individual Packages
Code for Safety to Life from Fire on Merchant Vessels
Fire Protection Standard for Motor Craft, Pleasure and
Commercial
Fire Protection Standard for Marinas and Boatyards
Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels
Construction and Fire Protection of Marine Terminals,
Piers, and Wharves
Fire Protection of Vessels Duri11g Construction,
Conversion, Repair, and Lay-Up
Recommended Practice for Handling Releases of
Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Gases
Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Hazardous Materials Code
Standard for Aircraft Fuel Servicing
Guide to the Fire Safety Concepts Tree
Guide for the Evaluation of Fire Risk Assessments
1112
46 CFR 111.05-33; 111.20-15;
111.25-S(a); 111.30-19(d),
(f)(1 ); 111.50-3(c), (d), (f), (h);
111.50-7(a); 111.50-9; 111.53-
i(a); 111.54-1(a); 111.55-1(a);
111.59-1 (a); 111.60-7; 111.60-
11(f); 111.60-13(b)(1), (2),(c);
111.70-1; 111.79-1(c); 111.81-
5; 111.83-3(a); 111.89-1;
111.105-1; 111.105-5; 111.105-
7; 111.105-39(b); 111.107-1(a);
146.29-35
46 CFR 28.335; 28.340;
28.345; 58.10
46 CFR 35.01-1; 71.60-1;
91.50-1; 1 09.573; 150.460;
167.30-1-0; 169.115; 169.236;
189.50-1
46 CFR 1 08.239
NFPA 555
NFPA 704
NFPA 750
NFPA 1405
NFPA 1852
NFPA 1925
NFPA 1961
NFPA 1962
NFPA 1963
NFPA 1964
NFPA 1965
NFPA 1981
OCJMF
SAWE No. 12
SAWE No. 13
UL30
UL 781
UL 1102
UL 1123
UL 1185
UL 1191
UL 1313
UL 1314
USCG
USCG 160.14
USCG Dwg. No. 160.005-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.009
USCG Dwg. No. 160.013-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.027-3
USCG Dwg. No. 160.043-
1(b)
USCG Dwg. No. 160.047-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.048-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.049-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.052-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160.060-1
USCG Dwg. No. 160-055-1A
USCG Dwg. No. 160-055-1B
USCG Dwg. No. 164.013-1
USCG Dwg. No. F49-6-1
USCG Dwg. No. F49-6-5
Designation
ANSI C37.12
ANSI C37.14
API RP14F
API RP14FZ
API RP 500
API RP 505
ASME CSD-1
ASTM B117
ASTM D4066
F1547-09
Guide on Methods for Evaluating Potential for Room Flashover
Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Re-
sponse
Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
Guide for Land-Based Fire Fighters Who Respond to Marine Vessel Fires
Selection, Care, and Maintenance of Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Appara-
tus (SCBA)
Marine Fire-Fighting Vessels
Fire Hose
Inspection, Care, and Use of Fire Hose, Couplings, and Nozzles and the Service
Testing of Fire Hose
Fire Hose Connections
Spray Nozzles
Fire Hose Appliances
Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) for Emergency Services
International Safety Code for Oil Tankers and Terminals
Recommended Practice for Weight Control Technical
Requirements for Surface Ships
Recommended Practice for Standard Coordinate System for
Reporting Mass Properties of Surface Ships and Submarines
Metal Safety Cans
Hazardous Location Equipment Directory, May 1979 Portable
Lighting Units
Non-integral Marine Fuel Tanks
Standard for Marine Buoyant Devices
Portable Marine Fuel Tanks
Components for Personal Flotation Devices
Nonmetallic Safety Cans for Petroleum Products
Special Purpose Metal Containers
Guidelines for Preparation of a Deepwater Ports Operations
Manual, 1975
"Compass and Mounting, dated Dec. 14, 1944" (Specification
for Compasses: Magnetic, Liquid-Filled, Mariners,
Compensating, for Lifeboats (with Mounting) for Merchant
Vessels), 1944
Life Preserver, Fibrous Glass, Adult and Child (Jacket Type)
Cork and Balsa Wood Ring Life Buoy; Arrangement and
Construction Details
Hatch (Lifeboat and Life Raft)
Rectangular Balsa Wood Life Float with Platform, Net and
Rigging
Jackknife (with Can Opener)
Buoyant Vest, Kapok or Fibrous Glass, Adult and Child
Buoyant Cushion, Fibrous Glass
Buoyant Cushion, Plastic Foam
Buoyant Vest, Unicellular Plastic Foam, Adult and Child
Buoyant Vest, Unicellular Polyethylene Foam, Adult and Child
Life Preservers, Unicellular Plastic Foam, Adult
Life Preservers, Unicellular Foam, Child
Pattern, Trigonal Slit, for Polyethylene Foam Slab Material
Life Preserver, Kapok, Adult
Life Preserver, Kapok, Child
Group 5 Electrical, Electronics, and Automation
Title
AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical
Current Basis
Low-Voltage DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of
Electrical Systems for Fixed and Floating Offshore Petroleum
Facilities for Unclassified and Class I, Division 1 and
Division 2 Locations
Recommended Practice for Design and Installation of
Electrical Systems for Fixed and Floating Offshore Petroleum
Facilities for Unclassified and Class I, Zone 0, Zone 1 and
Zone 2 Locations
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at
Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class 1 , Division 1, and
Division 2
Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at
Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class 1, Zone 0, Zone 1, and
Zone 2
Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers
Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
Specification for Nylon Injection and Extrusion Materials (PA)
1113
33 CFR 154.106; 154.735;
154.810
46 CFR 39.1 0-5; 39.20-9
46 CFR 147.7
33 CFR 149.539
33 CFR 140.7; 143.405
46 CFR 147.7
46 CFR 160.171-3; 160.176-8;
160.176-13
46 CFR 147.7
46 CFR 147.7
33 CFR 150.105
46 CFR 33.15-10; 75.20-15;
94.20-15; 192.20-15
46 CFR 160.005-1
46 CFR 160.009-1
46 CFR 160.013-1-3
46 CFR 160.027-1
46 CFR 160.043-1
46 CFR 160.047-1
46 CFR 160.048-1
46 CFR 160.049-1
46 CFR 160.052-1
46 CFR 160.060-1
46 CFR 160.055-1
46 CFR 160.055-1
46 CFR 164.013-1
46 CFR 160.002-1
46 CFR 160.002-1
46 CFR 111.54-1(c)
46 CFR 111.54-1(c)
30 CFR 250.114(c); 250.198
30 CFR 250.114(c); 250.198
30 CFR 250.1i4(c); 250.198
30 CFR 250.114(c); 250.198
46 CFR 63.1 0; 63.15; 63.20
46 CFR 110.15-1(b)
46 CFR 111.6Q-1(c)
ASTM F1003
ASTM F1014
ASTM F1134
ASTM F1166
ASTM F1207M
IEC 60068-2-52
IEC 60079-0
IEC 60079-1
IEC 60079-2
IEC 60079-5
IEC 60079-6
IEC 60079-7
IEC 60079-11
IEC 60079-15
IEC 60079-18
IEC 60092-3
IEC 60092-101
IEC 60092-201
IEC 60092-202
IEC 60092-301
IEC 60092-302
IEC 60092-303
IEC 60092-304
IEC 60092-305
IEC 60092-306
IEC 60092-307
IEC 60092-350
IEC 60092-351
IEC 60092-352
IEC 60092-353
IEC 60092-354
F1547-09
Specification for Searchlights on Motor Lifeboats
Specification for Flashlights on Vessels
Specification for Insulation Resistance Monitor for Shipboard
Electrical Motors and Generators
Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems,
Specification for Electrical Insulation Monitors for Monitoring
Ground Resistance in Active Electrical Systems (Metric)
Basic Environmental Testing Procedures. Part 2: Tests. Test
KB: Salt Mist, Cyclic
Explosive atmospheres-Part 0: Equipment-General requirements
Explosive atmospheres-Part 1: Equipment protection by
flameproof enclosures "d"
pressurized enclosures "p"
powder filling "q"
Explosive atmospheres -Part 6: Equipment protection by
oil immersion "o"
increased safety "e"
Explosive atmospheres--Part 1 i: Equipment protection by
intrinsic safety "I"
Explosive atmospheres-Part 15: Construction, test and
marking of type of protection "n" electrical apparatus
Explosive atmospheres-Part 18: Construction, test and
marking of type of protection encapsulation "m" electrical apparatus
Electrical Installation in Ships; Part 3: Cable (Construction,
Testing and Installation)
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 1 01: Definitions and
General Requirements
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 201: System Design-
General
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 202: System Design-
Protection
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 301: Equipment-
Generators and Motors
Electrical installation in ships, Part 302: Equipment-
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 303: Equipment--
Transformers for Power and Lighting, 1980
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 304: Equipment-
Semiconductor Converters
Electrical installations in ships, Part 305: Equipment-
Accumulator (storage) batteries
Electrical Installation in Ships; Part 306: Equipment-
Luminaires and Accessories
Electrical installations in ships, Part 307: Equipment-
Heating and cooking appliances
Electrical installation in ships, Part 350: General
construction and test methods of power, control and
instrumentation cables for shipboard and offshore applications
Electrical installations in ships, Part 351: Insulating
materials for shipboard and offshore units, power, control,
instrumentation, telecommunication and data cables
Electrical installation in ships, Part 352: Choice and
installation of electric cables
Electrical Installation in Ships; Part 353: Single and Multicore
Non-Radial Field Power Cable with Extruded Solid Insulation
for Rated Voltages 1 kV and 3 kV
Electrical installation in ships, Part 354: Single- and
Three-Core Power Cables with Extruded Solid Insulation
for Rated 6kV to 30kV
1114
46 CFR 33.15-10; 35.30-20;
77.35-5; 94.20-15; 96.35-5;
108.497; 154.1400; 160.051-7;
192.20-15; 195.35-5
46 CFR 110.15-i(b)
46 CFR 111.105-i; 111.105-3;
111.105-5; 111.105-7;
111.105-15(b); 111.105-17(b}
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-8;
111.105-9; 11i.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-5;
111.105-15(b); 111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-5;
111.105-15(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-5;
111.105-15(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 1'11.105-5;
111.105-15(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.1 05-3; 111 .1 05-5;
111.105-i1(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-5;
111.105-15(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.105-3; 111.105-5;
111.105-15(a); 111.105-15(b);
111.105-17(b)
46 CFR 111.05-7; 111.6Q-1(a);
111.6Q-3(a); 111.6Q-3(c);
111.81-i(d)
46 CFR 110.15-1(a); 111.8i-
1(d)
46 CFR 111.70-3(a); 111.81-
1(d)
46 CFR 111.5Q-3(c); 111.5Q-
3(e); 111.5Q-3(g); 111.53-i(a);
111.54-i(a); 111.81-i(d)
46 CFR 111.25-5(a); 111.70.-
i(a); 111.81-1(d)
46 CFR 111.30-1; 111.3Q-5(a);
111.3Q-19(a); 111.81-i(d)
46 CFR 111.205; 111.81-i(d)
46 CFR 111.33-3(a); 111.33-
5(b); 111.8i-1(d)
46 CFR ii1.75-20(a); 11i.81-
1(d)
IEC 60092-359
IEC 60092-373
IEC 60092-374
IEC 60092-375
IEC 60092-376
IEC 60092-401
IEC 60092-501
IEC 60092--502
IEC 60092-503
IEC 60092--504
IEC 60092-506
IEC 60092-507
IEC 60331-11
lEG 60332-1
IEC 60332-3-22
IEC 60364-7-709
IEC 60529
IEC 60533
IEC 60945
IEC 60947-2
IEC 60983
lEG 61097-1
IEC 61892-1
IEC 61892-2
IEC 61892-3
IEC 61892-4
IEC 61892-5
IEC 61892-6
IEC 61892--7
IEC 62271-100
IEEE C37.04
IEEE C37.13
F1547-09
Electrical Installation in Ships, Part 359: Sheathing Materials
for Shipboard Power and Telecommunication Cables
Electrical installations in ships, Part 373: Shipboard
telecommunication cables and radio-frequency cables.
Shipboard flexible coaxial cables
Telephone cables for non-essential communication services
General instrumentation, control and communication cables
Electrical installations in ships-Part 376: Cables for
control and instrumentation circuits 150/250 V (300 V)
Electrical Installations in Ships, Part 401: Installation and Test
of Completed Installation
Electrical Installation in Ships, Part 501: Special Features-
Electric Propulsion Plant
Electrical Installations in Ships, Part 502: Tankers-Special
Features
Electrical installation in ships, Part 503: Electrical Installations
in Ships, Part 503: Special features-AC supply systems with
voltages in the range above 1 kV up to and including 15 kV
Electrical Installations in Ships. Part 504: Special Features-
Control and Instrumentation
Electrical installations in ships-Part 506: Special features-
Ships carrying specific dangerous goods and materials hazardous
only in bulk
Electrical installations in ships-Part 507: Small vessels
Tests for electric cables under fire conditions-
Circuit integrity-Part 11
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions, Part 1:
Tests on a single vertical insulated wire or cable
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions, Part 3-22: Test tor vertical flame spread
of vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables - Category A
Electrical Installations of Buildings-Part 7: Requirements for
Special Installations or Locations-Section 709: Marinas and
Pleasure Crafts
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
Electrical and Electronic Installations in Ships-
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Maritime Navigation and Radio Communications Equipment
and Systems-General Requirements-Methods of Testing and
Required Test Results
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear. Part 2: Circuit
Breakers
Miniature Lamps
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS)-Part
1: Radar Transponder-Marine Search and Rescue (SART)-
Operational and Performance Requirements, Methods of
Testing and Required Test Results
Mobile and fixed offshore units-Electrical installations-
Part 1: General requirements and conditions
Part 2: System design
Part 3: Equipment
Part 4: Cables
Mobile and fixed offshore units-Electrical Installations-
Part 5: Mobile units
Part 6: Installation
Mobile and Fixed Offshore Units-Electrical Installations--
Part 7: Hazardous Area
High-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear-Part 100:
Alternating Current Circuit-breakers
AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical
Current Basis
Lmv-Volt.:tae AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
1115
46 CFR 111.05-9
46 CFR 111.81-i(d)
46 CFR 111.81-1(d); 1i1.105-
31(e)
46 CFR 111.3Q-5(a); 111.81-
i(d);
46 CFR 111.8-H(d)
46 CFR 113.3Q-25(i)
46 CFR 111.30-19(b)
46 CFR 111.60-i(b);
111.60-2; 111.60-6(a);
11i.107-1(c)
46 CFR 111.01-9(a); 111.01-
9(b); 111.01-9(c); 111.01-9(d);
111.01-9(Note); 113.10-7;
113.20-3; 113.25-11; 113.3Q-
25(c); 113.3Q-25(h); 113.4Q-
10(b)
46 CFR 113.05-7
46 CFR 111.54-i(b)
46 CFR 111.54-1
46 CFR 111.54-i(c)
46 CFR 111.54-i(c); TSGS
IEEE 45
IEEE 100
IEEE 1202
IEEE 1580
IESNA HB-9
IESNA RP-12
ISO 8728
ISO 8729
ISO 8846
ISO 8849
ISO 9097
ISO 9875
ISO 9876
ISO 10133
ISO 10134
ISO 11606
ISO 13297
NEMAWD6
NFPA 70
NFPA 77
NFPA99
NFPA496
UL 20
UL44
UL50
UL62
UL67
UL 73
UL83
UL 98
UL 104
UL 197
UL250
UL347
UL363
UL 399
UL471
0 F1547-09
Recommended Practice for Electric Installation on Shipboard
The New IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and
Electronics Terms
IEEE Standard for Flame Testing of Cables for Use in Cable
Tray in Industrial and Commercial Occupancies
IEEE Recommended Practice for Marine Cable for Use on
Shipboard and Fixed or Floating Platforms
Lighting Handbook Reference & Application
Recommended Practice for Marine Lighting
Marine Gyro-compasses
Marine Radar Reflectors
Small Craft-Electrical Devices-Protection Against Ignition
of Surrounding Flammable Gases
Small Craft-Electrically Operated Bilge-Pumps
Small Craft-Electric Fans
Marine Echo-sounding Equipment
Marine Facsimile Receivers for Meteorological Charts
Small Craft-Electrical Systems-Extra-Low-Voltage d.c.
Installations
Small Craft-Electrical Devices-Lightning Protection
Ships and Marine Technology -Marine Electromagnetic
Compasses
Small Craft-Electrical Systems-Alternating Current
Installations
Wiring Devices, Dimensional Requirements
National Electrical Code
Recommended Practice on Static Electricity, 1993
Standard for Health Care Facilities, 1996
Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment
General Use Snap Switches
Standard for Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire
Panelboards
Motor Operated Appliances
Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches
Elevator Door Locking Devices and Contacts
Commercial Electric Cooking Appliances
Household Refrigerators and Freezers
High-Voltage Industrial Control Equipment
Knife Switches
Drinking-Water Coolers
Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers
1116
46 CFR 110.30-19(b); 111.05-
7; 111.15-2(b); 111.30-1;
111.30-5(a); 111.30-19(a);
111.33-3(a); 111.33-5(a);
111.40-1; 111.60-1; 111.60-2;
111.60-3(b); 111.60-5(a);
111.60-(a); 111.60-11(c);
111.60-13(a); 111.60-19(b);
111.60-21; 111.60-23(d);
111.75-5(b); 111.105-3;
111.105--41; 111.107-1(c);
113.30-10; 113.65-5; 183.01-
15; 183.05-45; 183.10-1 0;
TSGS
46 CFR 110.15-1(a)
46 CFR 111.60-2; 111.60-6(a);
111.107-i(c)
46 CFR 111.60-1; 111.60-2;
111.60-3
33 CFR 149.703
33 CFR 154.106; 154.812
46 CFR 39.10-5; 39.20-9
33 CFR 127.003; 154.106;
154.735; 154.808; 154.812;
183.5; 183.435
46 CFR 28.350; 28.370; 39.10-
5; 111.05-33; 111.20-15;
111.25-5(a); 111.50-3(c);
111.50-7; 111.50-9; 111.53-
1(a); 111.54-i(a); 111.55-1(a);
111.59-1; Table 111.60-7;
111.60-11(f); 111.60-13(a);
111.60-13(b); 1111.60-13(c);
111.60-23; 111.81-i(d);
111.83--3(a); 111.105-1;
111.105-1 (Note); 111.105-3;
111.1 05-5; 111.105-7;
111.105-9; 111.105-15(a);
1111.105-17(b); 1111.107-
1(b); 169.115; 183.05; TSGS
46 CFR 111.105-27
46 CFR 111.105-37
46 CFR 108.425; 111.105-7(b)
46 CFR 111.55-7
46 CFR 111.60-11(c)
46 CFR 111.81-1(d)
46 CFR 111.60-13(a)
46 CFR 111.40-1
46 CFR 111.77-5(a)
46 CFR 111.60-1(c); 111.60-
11(c)
46 CFR 183.01-15; 183.10-45
UL 489
UL498
UL 506
UL 508
UL 514A
UL 749
UL 783
UL845
UL857
UL 913
UL921
UL924
UL 1042
UL 1072
UL 1104
UL 1196
UL 1203
UL 1236
UL 1309
UL 1569
UL 1573
UL 1574
ABYC-P-1
ASME
ASME
ASM E
ASME
ASME
Designation
ASTM A178/A178M
ASTM A179/A179M
ASTM A192/A192M
ASTM A210/A210M
ASTM A213/A213M
ASTM A214/A214M
ASTM A234/ A234M
ASTM A249/A249M
ASTM B111/B111M
ASTM B234
ASTM B234M
ASTM F765
ASTM F841
ASTM F998
ASTM F1106
ASTM F1309
ASTM F1338
ASTM F1510
ASTM F1718
ISO 3078
F1547-09
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
Specialty Transformers
Industrial Control E=quipment
Metallic Outlet Boxes
Household Electric Dishwashers
Electric Flashlights and Lanterns for Use in Hazardous
Classified Locations
Motor Control Centers
Busways and Associated Fittings
Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated
Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and Ill Division 1, Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
Commercial Electric Dishwashers
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
Electric Baseboard Heating Equipment
Standard for Medium-Voltage Power Cables
Marine Navigation Lights
Standard for Floating Wateriights, 2nd Edition
Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical
Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries
Standard for Marine Shipboard Cable
Standard for Metal-Clad Cables
Standard for Stage and Studio Lighting Units
Standard for Track Lighting Systems
Group 6 Machinery
Title
Installation of Exhaust Systems for Propulsion and Auxiliary
Engines
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section 1, Power Boilers, July
1989 with 1989 Addenda
Section I, Power Boilers, 1986 Ed., thru 1988 Addenda
Section Ill, Division I, Rules for the Construction of Nuclear
Power Plant Components, July 1989 with 1989 Addenda
Section Ill, Rules for the Construction of Nuclear Power Plant
Components, 1986 Ed. thru 1988 Addenda
Section IV, Heating Boilers, July 1989 with 1989 Addenda
Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and
Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes
Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel
Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes
Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High
Pressure Service
Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and
Superheater Tubes
Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel
Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes
Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
Specification for Piping Fittings for Wrought Carbon Steel and
Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service
Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater,
Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Seamless
Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock
Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn
Seamless Tubes for Condensers and Heat Exchangers
Seamless Tubes for Condensers and Heat Exchangers (Metric)
Specification for Wildcats, Ship Anchor Chain
Specification for Thrusters, Tunnel, Permanently Installed in
Marine Vessels
Specification for Centrifugal Pump, Shipboard Use
Specification for Warping Heads, Rope Handling (Gypsy Head,
Capstan Head)
Practice for Installation Procedures for Fitting Chocks to
Marine Machinery Foundations
Guide for Main Propulsion Medium Speed Marine Diesel
Engines Covering Performance and Minimum Scope of
Assembly
Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement Pumps,
Commercial Ships Use
Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement Fuel Pumps
Shipbuilding-Cargo Winches
1117
46 CFR 111.01-15(c); 111.54
(b); (Note); TSGS
TSGS
46 CFR 111.81-13
46 CFR 154.1
46 CFR 111.105-11(a)
46 CFR 112.39-1(a)(4)
46 CFR 111.75-17(d)
46 CFR 111.87-3(a); 161.010
46 CFR 111.105-9
TSGS
46 CFR 111.60-1; 111.60-3
46 CFR 111.60-23(a)
46 CFR 111.75-20
46 CFR 111.75-20
169.115; 169.609; 182.15
46 CFR 52.01; 52.05; 52.15;
52.20; 52.25; 58.30; 59.10;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.15-1; 56.15-5;
56.60-1; 56.70-15; 56.95-10
46 CFR 55.01; 55.05; 55.10;
55.15; 55.20; 55.25; 58.30
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 53.01; 53.05; 53.10;
53.12
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 55.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.601
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
ISO 3730
ISO 4051
ISO 4568
ISO 6067
IS06115
ISO 6218
ISO 6219
ISO 6482
ISO 6555
ISO 7364
ISO 7365
ISO 7824
ISO 7825
ISO 8528-1
ISO 8528-2
ISO 8528-3
ISO 8528-4
ISO 8528-5
ISO 8528-6
ISO 8528-7
ISO 8528-8
ISO 8528-9
ISO 8665
ISO 9089
SAE J1928
UL296
API STD 2000
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASME
ASM E 816.1
ASME 816.3
ASME B16.4
ASME 816.5
ASME B16.9
ASME 816.10
ASME B16.11
ASME 816.14
ASME B16.15
ASME B16.18
ASME Bi6.20
ASME B16.21
F1547-09
Shipbuilding-Mooring Winches
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Steering Gear-Values of
Torques
Shipbuilding-Seagoing Vessels-Windlasses and Anchor
Capstans
Winches for Lifeboats
Shipbuilding-Travel Winches
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation--Coupling Winches for Push
Tows-Main Dimensions
Shipbuilding-Inland Vessels-Windlasses and Anchor
Capstans
Shipbuilding-Deck Machinery-Warping End Profiles
Shipbuilding-Topping Winches
Deck Machinery-Accommodation Ladder Winches
Deck Machinery-Towing Winches for Deep Sea Use
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Lubrication Nipples-
Cone and Flat Types
Shipbuilding-Deck Machinery-General Requirements
Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine Driven Alternating
Current Generating Sets-Part 1: Application, Ratings and
Performance
Current Generating Sets-Part 2: Engines
Current Generating Sets-Part 3: Alternating Current
Generators for Generating Sets
Current Generating Sets-Part 4: Controlgear and Switchgear
Current Generating Sets-Part 5: Generating Sets
Current Generating Sets-Part 6: Test Methods
Current Generating Sets-Part 7: Technical Declarations for
Specification and Design
Current Generating Sets-Part 8: Requirements and Tests for
Low-Power Generating Sets
Current Generating Sets-Part 9: Measurement and Evaluation
of Mechanical Vibrations
Small Craft-Marine Propulsion Engines and Systems-Power
Measurements and Declarations
Marine Structures-Mobile Offshore Units-Anchor Winches
Devices Providing Backfire Flame Control for Gasoline
Engines in Marine Applications
Oil Burners
Venting Atmospheric and
(Nonrefrigerated and Refrigerated)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section 1
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Par. PG-11Q-Stamping of
Safety Valves 1977-1979
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV-Par. HG-402
Discharge Capacities of Safety and Safety Relief Valves, 1980
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII-Par. UG-131
Certification of Capacity for Pressure Relief Valves, 1980
Cast Iron Pipe/Flanged Flanges and Fittings
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings (Classes 150 and 300)
Gray Iron Threaded Fittings (Classes 125 and 250)
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS % Through 24
Metric/Inch Standard
Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads
Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250
Cast/Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
Metallic Gaskets for Flanges-Ring-Joint, Spiral
Nonmetallic Flat tor
1118
46 CFR 58.10
46 CFR 63.15-5
33 CFR 154.106; 154.814
46 CFR 39.10-5
TSGS
46 CFR 162.012-1; 162.013-1
46 CFR 162.018-1
46 CFR 56.60
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
33 CFR 154.106; 154.500;
154.808; 154.810; Part 155,
Appendix A
46 CFR 39.10-5; 39.20-1;
56.20; 56.30; 56.60; 151.50-35;
153.94; 153.940; 750.480
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.30-5; 56.60-i;
151.50-10; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
ASME 816.22
ASME 816.23
ASME B16.24
ASME B16.25
ASME B16.28
ASME B16.29
ASME 816.34
ASME 816.42
ASME 818.2.1
ASME 818.2.2
ASME 831.1.1
ASME 831.3
ASME B31.5
ASME 836.1 OM
ASME B36.19M
ASTM A53/ A53M
ASTM A106/A106M
ASTM A126
ASTM A134
ASTM A135
ASTM A139/A139M
ASTM A182/A182M
ASTM A268/A268M
ASTM A3i2/A312M
ASTM A320/A320M
ASTM A333/A333M
ASTM A334/A334M
ASTM A335/A335M
ASTM A338
ASTM A350/ A 350M
ASTM A358/A358M
ASTM A369/ A369M
ASTM A376/A376M
ASTM A395/A395M
ASTM A403/ A403M
ASTM A420/ A420M
ASTM A522/A522M
ASTM A536
ASTM 842
ASTM 843
F1547-09
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings-DWV
Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 150,
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
Buttwelding Ends
Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows and Returns
Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Drainage Fittings-DWV
Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 150 and
300
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series
Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
Power Piping
Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
Stainless Steel Pipe
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless
Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded
(Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS
4 and Over)
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges,
Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
Service
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martenistic
Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low-
Temperature Service
Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-
Temperature Service
Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel
Tubes for Low-Temperature Service
Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
Specification for Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe Fittings, and
Valve Parts for Railroad, Marine, and Other Heavy Duty
Service at Temperatures Up to 345 Degrees C
Specification for Carbon and Low Alloy-Steel Forgings
Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for Piping Components
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic
Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service
Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and
Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service
Sp1ecifica!ion for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-
Ternpelrature Central-Station Service
for Ferritic Ductile !ron Pressure-Retaining
for Use at Elevated Temperatures
Sp1ecifical:ion for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping
SpE3cificaltion for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and
Steel for Low-Temperature Service
Spl3cificaltion for Forged or Rolled 8 and 9 % Nickel Alloy Steel
Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature
Standard Sizes
Standard Sizes
1119
46 CFR 56.60-1;
46 CFR 56.60-1
33 CFR 154.106; 154.500;
154.808
46 CFR 56.60-1; 150.480;
153.940
46 CFR 56.30-5; 56.60-1;
56.70-10
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.20-1; 56.60-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.25-20; 56.60-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.25-20; 56.60-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 197.204; TSGS
46 CFR 58.60
33 CFR 154.1 06; 154.51 0;
154.808
46 CFR 58.20
46 CFR 56.07-5; 56.30-20;
56.60-1
46 CFR 56.07"5; 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.10-5; 56.60-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-105; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.50-1 05; 56.60-1;
TSGS
46 CFR 56.50-105
46 CFR 56.50-106; 56.60-i
46 CFR 56.50-106; 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.50-105
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.07-10; 56.60-1;
56.60-2
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-i; TSGS
46 CFR 56.50-105; 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.50-15
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
ASTM B68
ASTM B68M
ASTM B75
ASTM B75M
ASTM B88
ASTM B88M
ASTM B161
ASTM B165
ASTM B167
ASTM B171/B171M
ASTM B210
ASTM B210M
ASTM B241/B241M
ASTM B315
ASTM B361
ASTM D1785
ASTM D2241
ASTM D2464
ASTM D2466
ASTM D2467
ASTM D2665
ASTM F681
ASTM F682
ASTM F683
ASTM F704
ASTM F707 /F707M
ASTM F708
ASTM F721
ASTM F722
ASTM F885
ASTM F992
ASTM F993
ASTM F1006
ASTM F1007
ASTM F1020
ASTM F1030
ASTM F1076
ASTM F1098
ASTM F1120
ASTM F1121
ASTM F1122
ASTM F1123
ASTM F1139
ASTM F1155
ASTM F1172
ASTM F1173
ASTM F1199
ASTM F1200
F1547-09
Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed
Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed
(Metric)
Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric)
Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)
Specification for Nickel Seamless Pipe and Tube
Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Seamless
Pipe and Tube
Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS N06600,
N06601, and N06690) Seamless Pipe and Tube
Specification for Copper-Alloy Plate and Sheet for Pressure
Vessels, Condensers, and Heat Exchangers
Seamless Tubes
Seamless Tubes (Met ric)
Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless
Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube
Specification for Seamless Copper Alloy Pipe and Tube
Specification for Factory-Made Wrought Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Welding Fittings
Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR-Series)
Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40
Specification for Socket-Type Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
Practice for Use of Branch Connections
Specification for Wrought Carbon Steel Sleeve-Type Pipe
Couplings
Practice for Selection and Application of Thermal Insulation for
Piping and Machinery
Practice for Selecting Bolting Lengths for Piping System
Flanged Joints
Specification for Modular Gage Boards
Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers
Specification for Gage Piping Assemblies
Specification for Welded Joints for Shipboard Piping Systems
Specification for Envelope Dimensions for Bronze Globe
Valves NPS 1/4 to 2
Specification for Valve Label Plates
Specification for Valve Locking Devices
Specification for Entrainment Separators for Use in Marine
Piping Applications
Specification for Pipe-line Expansion Joints of the Packed Slip
Type for Marine Application
Practice for Line Blind Valves for Marine Applications
Practice for Selection of Valve Operators
Practice for Expanded Welded and Silver Brazed Socket Joints
for Pipe and Tube
Specification for Envelope Dimensions for Butterfly Valves
NPS 2 to 24
Specification for Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion
Joints for Piping Applications
Specification for International Shore Connections for Marine
Fire Applications
Specification for Quick Disconnect Couplings
Specification for Non-Metallic Expansion Joints
Specification for Steam Traps and Drains
Practice for Selection and Application of Piping System
Materials
Specification for Fuel Oil Metem of the Volumetric Positive
Displacement Type
Specification for Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe and
Fittings to be Used for Marine Applications
Specification for Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and
Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150F maximum)
Specification for Fabricated (Welded) Pipe Line Strainers
(Above 150 psig and 150F)
ll20
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-2; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 56.60-25
46 CFR 56.60-25
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1; TSGS
TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 34.10; 56.60-1; 76.
95.1 0; 1 08.427; 193.10
46 CFR 150.480; 153.940
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60; TSGS
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
ASTM Fi201
ASTM F1245
ASTM F1271
ASTM F1273
ASTM F1298
ASTM F1311
ASTM F1330
ASTM F1333
ASTM F1370
ASTM F1431
ASTM F1476
ASTM F1548
CGA-S-1.2
FCI-69-1
ISO 3926
ISO 3935
ISO 3948
ISO 5620-1
ISO 5620-2
ISO 5625
ISO 7608
ISO 8099
ISO 10420
ISO TR 5987
MSS-SP-6
MSS-SP-9
MSS-SP-25
MSS-SP-42
MSS-SP-44
MSS-SP-45
MSS-SP-51
MSS-SP-55
MSS-SP-58
MSS-SP-61
MSS-SP-67
MSS-SP-69
MSS-SP-72
MSS-SP-73
MSS-SP-83
NFPA 10
NFPA 11A
NFPA 12
NFPA 12A
NFPA 13
NFPA30
NFPA59A
NFPA 407
UL 174
UL343
UL 1102
UL 1453
F1547-09
Specification for Fluid Conditioner Fittings in Piping
Applications Above ooF
Specification for Faucets, Single and Double, Compression and
Self-Closing Type, Shipboard
Specification for Spill Valves for Use in Marine Tank Liquid
Overpressure Protections Applications
Tank Vent Flame Arresters
Specification for Flexible, Expansion-Type Ball Joints for
Marine Applications
Specification for Large-Diameter Fabricated Carbon Steel
Flanges
Guide for Metallic Abrasive Blasting to Descale the Interior of
Pipe
Specification for Construction of Fire and Foam Station
Cabinets
Specification for Pressure-Reducing Valves for Water Systems,
Shipboard
Specification for Water Trap for Diesel Exhaust
Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical
Couplings for Use in Piping Applications
Specification for the Performance of Fitting for Use with
Gasketed Mechanical Couplings Used in Piping Applications
Pressure Relief Device Standards Part 2-Cargo and Portable
Tanks for Compressed Gases
Pressure Rating Standard for Steam Traps
Inland Navigation-Couplings for Oil and Fuel Reception-
Mating Dimensions
Shipbuilding-Inland Navigation-Fire-fighting Water
System-Pressures '
Inland Vessels-Compressed-Air Systems-Pressure Ranges
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Filling Connection for
Drinking Water Tanks-Part 1: General Requirements
Shipbuilding and Marine Structures-Filling Connection for
Drinking Water Tanks-Part 2: Components
Welded Bulkhead Pieces with Flanges for Steel Pipework-PN
6, PN 10 and PN 16
Inland Navigation-Couplings for Disposal of Oily Mixture
and Sewage Water
Small Craft-Toilet Retention and Recirculating Systems for
the Treatment of Toilet Waste
Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries Flexible Pipe Systems for
Subsea and Marine Riser Applications
Inland Navigation-Water Fire-Fighting System-Couplings of
Fire Hoses-General Technical Requirements
Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and
Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings
Spot-Facing for Bronze, Iron, and Steel Flanges
Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and
Unions, 1978
Class 150 Corrosion Resistant Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check
Valves with Flanged and Buttwelded Weld Ends
Steel Pipe Line Flanges
Bypass and Drain Connection
Class 150 LW Corrosion Resistant Cast Flanges and Flanged
Fittings
Visual Inspection
Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and
Manufacture
Pressure Testing of Steel Valves
Butterfly Valves
Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application
Ball Valves with Flanged or Buttwelded Welding Ends for
General Service
Brazing Joints for Copper and Copper Alloy Pressure Fittings
Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket-Welding and Threaded
Portable Fire Extinguishers
High-Expansion Foam Systems
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Installation of Sprinkler Systems
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
Production, Storage, and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas
(LNG)
Aircraft Fueling Services
Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters
Pumps for Oil-Burning Appliances
Nonintegral Marine Fuel Tanks
Electric Booster and Commercial Tank Water Heaters
1121
46 CFR 56.60-1
TSGS
46 CFR 39.1 05; 30.20-9;
153.365
46 CFR 32.20-10
46 CFR 56.30-35
46 CFR 56.30-35
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.25-10; 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 54.01-25
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.20-20; 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
46 CFR 56.60-1
33 CFR 127.003
33 CFR 149.481
33 CFR 149.481
33 CFR 149.481
33 CFR 149.481
33 CFR 127.003
33 CFR 127.003
33 CFR 149.213
46 CFR 63.25-3
46 CFR 63.15-3
46 CFR 58.50-15
46 CFR 63.25-3
Designation
ASTM F1716
ASTM F1756
ISO 5572
ISO 6582
ISO 7460
ISO 7461
ISO 7462
ISO 7838
ISO 8193
ISO 8277
ISO 9203-1
ISO 9203-2
!SO 9203-3
ABYC-H-24
AMCA-210
ASTM F17i6
ISO 7547
ISO 8304
ISO 8861
ISO 8862
ISO 8863
ISO 8864
ISO 9099
ISO 9785
ISO 9943
ISO 11105
0 F1547-09
Group 8 Computer Applications
Title
Guide for Transition and Performance of Marine Software
Systems Maintenance
Guide for Implementation of a Fleet Management System
Network
Numbering of Equipment and Structural Elements in Ships
Numerical Control of Machines-ESSI Format
Ship-lines-Identification of Geometric Data
Numerical Representation of Elements of the Hull Geometry
Principal Ship Dimensions-Terminology and Definitions for
Computer Applications
Ship-lines-Formats and Data Organization
Shell Plating Information
Pipework-lnformation Transfer
Topology of Ship Hull Structure Elements-Part 1: Location of
Elements
Topology of Ship Hull Structure Elements-Part 2: Description
of Elements
of Ship Hull Structure Elements-Part 3: Relations of
Fuel Systems-Gasoline
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Ratings
Guide for Transition and Performance of Marine Software
Systems Maintenance
Air-Conditioning and Ventilation of Accommodation Spaces on
Board Ships-Design Conditions and Basis of Calculations
Shipborne Barges, Series 3-Ventilation System-Principal
Mating Dimensions
Engine Room Ventilation in Diesei-Engined Ships-Design
Requirements and Basis of Calculations
Air-Conditioning and Ventilation of Machinery Control Rooms
on Board Ships-Design Conditions and Basis of Calculations
Ship's Wheelhouse Windows-Heating by Hot Air of Glass
Panes
Air-Conditioning and Ventilation of Wheelhouse on Board
Ships-Design Conditions and Basis of Calculations
Air-Conditioning and Ventilation of Dry Provision Rooms on
Board Ships-Design Conditions and Basis of Calculations
Ventilation of Cargo Spaces Where Internal Combustion Engine
Vehicles May be Driven-Calculation of Theoretical Total
Airflow Required
Ventilation and Air-treatment of Galleys and Pantries with
Cooking Appliances
Small Craft-Ventilation of Petrol Engine and/or Petrol Tank
1122
46 CFR 169.115
33 CFR 183.5; 183.610; TSGS
0 F1547-09
TABLE 2 Countries Delegating Statutory Responsibilities to the Following Classification SocietiesA
Flag Administration Load Line Tonnage SO LAS MAAPOL
Algeria ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL
LA LA LA LR
Nl< NK NK NK
Antigua & Barbuda ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Argentina LR
NK NK
Aruba ABS ABS
LR LR LR
Australia ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LA LR
NK NK NK
Austria ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LA LR
Bahamas ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Bahrain ABS ASS ABS
BV BV BV SV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Bangladesh ABS ASS ASS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Barbados ABS ABS ABS
BV BV SV SV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Belgium ABS ABS
BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR
NK NK
Belize ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL Gl GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Bermuda ASS ABS ASS ABS
SV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
Brazil ASS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
ASS ABS
1123
0 F1547-09
TABLE2 Continued
Flag Administration Load Line Tonnage SO LAS MAR POL
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Cameroon ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
Canada ABS ABS
BV
DNV
GL
LR LR LR
NK
Cayman Islands ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR
Chile ABS ABS
LR
NK NK NK
Columbia ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Congo ABS
GL GL GL
LR LR LR
Cyprus ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Czech Republic ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
Denmark ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Dominican Republic ABS
DNV DNV DNV
LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Ecuador ABS ABS ABS
DNV DNV
GL GL
LR
NK NK NK NK
Egypt ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Estonia BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
LA LR LR LR
Ethiopia ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
Fiji ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR
1124
F1547-09
TABLE2 Continued
Flag Administration Load Line Tonnage SOLAS MAAPOL
NK NK NK NK
Finland ABS
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LA LA LA
Gabon ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
Gambia ABS
DNV DNV DNV DNV
NK NK NK NK
Ghana ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LA
NK NK NK NK
Gibraltar ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
LA LA LA LA
Greece ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LA LA LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Haiti BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
LA LA LA
GL GL
Honduras ABS ABS ABS
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
NK NK NK
Hong Kong ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LA LA LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Hungary DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LA LA LA
Iceland ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LA LA
India ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LA LA LA LA
NK NK NK
Indonesia ABS ABS
BV
DNV
GL GL GL GL
LA LA LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Iran ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
LA LA LA LA
GL GL GL
NK NK NK NK
Ireland ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL
LA LA LA
NK NK NK
Isle of Man ABS ABS ABS ABS
1125
F1547-09
TABLE2 Continued
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
LA LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Israel ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Ivory Coast ABS ABS
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR
Jamaica ABS ABS
BV BV
DNV DNV
LR LR
Japan NK NK NK
Jordan ABS
BV BV BV
DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR
NK NK NK
Korea ABS
DNV
Kuwait ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Latvia BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
Lebanon ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR
NK NK NK
Liberia ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
GL GL GL GL
NK NK NK NK
Libya ABS
BV BV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Luxembourg ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Made ria ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
NK NK NK NK
Malaysia ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Maldives ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
1126
0 F1547-09
TABLE2 Continued
Malta ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
ONV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Marshall Islands ABS ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Mauritius ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNY DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LA
NK NK NK NK
Mexico NK NK NK NK
Morocco ABS
BY BV BV
DNV
GL
LR LA LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Myanmar (Burma) ABS ABS ABS
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LA LA LA
NK NK NK NK
Netherlands and ABS ABS ABS
Territories DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LA LA LA
NK NK NK
New Zealand ABS ASS ASS
BV BV BY
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LA LA LA LA
Nigeria ABS ABS
BV BV BV
GL GL GL
LA LA LA LA
Norway ABS ABS ABS
BV BY
DNV DNV DNY DNV
GL
LA LA LA LA
Oman ABS ABS ABS
BY BV BV
DNY
GL GL
LA LA LA LA
NK NK NK
Pakistan ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BY
DNY DNV DNV
GL GL
LA LA LA
NK NK NK
Panama ABS ABS ABS ABS
BY BY BV BV
DNV DNY DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LA LR LA
NK NK NK NK
Papua, New Guinea ABS ABS ABS
BV BV BV BV
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LA LR LA LR
NK NK NK NK
Philippines ABS ABS ABS
BV BV
1127
<0 F1547- 09
TABLE2 Continued
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Portugal ABS
DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR
NK NK NK
Qatar ABS ABS ABS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
St Vincent & ABS ABS ABS ABS
The Grenadines
BY BY BY BV
DNV DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Saudi Arabia ABS ASS ASS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Seychelles BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Sri Lanka ASS ABS ASS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Singapore ASS ASS ASS ABS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Somalia ABS ASS
BY BY BY
DNV DNV
GL GL
LR LR
NK NK NK
South Africa ABS ABS ABS
BY BY
GL GL GL
LR LR
NK NK NK
Spain ABS ABS
LR LR LR
Sweden ABS ASS ABS
BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL
LR LR LR
Switzerland ASS ABS ABS ABS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV DNV
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Thailand ABS ASS ASS
BY BY BY BY
DNV DNV DNV
LR LR LR LR
NK NK NK NK
Togo BY BY BY
GL GL GL GL
LR LR LR
1128
Tonga
Trinidad & Tobago
Trust Territory of
Pacific islands
Tunisia
United Arab Emirates
United Kingdom
U.S.A.
Uruguay
Vanuatu
Venezuela
Vietnam
Western Somoa
Zaire
Zambia
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
ABS
BV
LR
ASS
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
A.BS
BV
GL
LR
NK
ASS
DNV
LR
ASS
BV
DNV
LR
LR
NK
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
ASS
BV
LR
NK
LR
NK
GL
GL
LR
LR
F1547-09
TABLE 2 Continued
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
ABS
LR
BV
DNV
GL
ABS
BV
GL
LR
ASS
DNV
LR
ASS
LR
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
ASS
LR
NK
GL
ASS
GL
LR
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
ASS
BV
LR
ASS
GL
NK
ABS
BV
GL
LR
NK
ASS
DNV
LR
ASS
NK
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
LR
NK
GL
GL
LR
LR
NK
ASS
BV
BV
DNV
GL
NK
BV
LR
ASS
DNV
ASS
BV
DNV
GL
LR
NK
LR
NK
GL
A The following abbreviations in a flag administration's box indicates that the Classification Society has been recognized and authorized to carry out all or some surveys
and issue sorne international certificates under the above conventions. Please contact the Classification Society of your choice for more detailed information. Special
authorization cases are not included. Classification Societies are not included if the country is not a signatory to the specific convention.
ASS-American Bureau of Shipping
BV-Bureau Veritas
DNV-Det Norske Veritas
GL-Germanischer Lloyd
LR-Lioyd's Register
NK-Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
SOLAS-Safety of Life at Sea
MARPOL-International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships
1129
F1547-09
it not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
COPYRIGHT/).
1130
Performance of Fittings for Use with Gasketed Mechanical
Couplings Used in Piping Applications
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification defines classification, materials, test
requirements, inspection certification, marking and packaging
of fittings for use with gasketed mechanical couplings com-
plying to Specification F1476.
2.1 ASTM Standards :
2
NoTE 1-See Table .I for equivalency listing of applicable, equivalent
specifications.
A47/A47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Cast-
ings
A48/ A48M Specification for Gray Iron Castings
A53/A53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
A153/A153M Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware
A216/ A216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suit-
A234/ A234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought
Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service
A3121 A312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
A395/A395M Spe,cification for Ferritic Ductile Iron
tures
A403/ A403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings
A536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
A743/A743M Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium,
Application
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee P25 on Ships and
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.ll on
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as Fl548- Ol (2006).
DOl: 10.1520/F1548-01Rl2.
2
.For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
the ASTM website.
B26/B26M Specification for Aluminum-AHoy Sand Cast-
B75 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
B21 0 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Drawn Seamless Tubes
B369 Specification for Copper-Nickel Alloy Castings
B580 Specification for Anodic Oxide Coatings on Alumi-
num
B633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel
Fl476 Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechani-
cal Couplings for Use in Piping Applications
2.2 ANSI Standards:
3
B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B 36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
Z 540.1 Calibration Laboratories in Measuring Test Equip-
ment
2.3 ANSI/A WWA Standards:
3
Cl51/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal
Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water and Other Liquids
C606-87 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
2.4 British Standards:
4
BS 729 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on
Iron and Steel Articles
BS 1400 Specification for Copper Alloy Ingots and Copper
Alloy and High Conductivity Copper Castings
BS 1452 Specification for Flake Graphite Cast Iron
BS 1471 Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Alumi-
num Alloys for General Engineering Purposes-Drawn
Tube
BS 1490 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy
Ingots and Castings for General Engineering Purposes
BS 1640 Pt. I Wrought Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel
Fittings
3
4
Available from British Standards Institute (BSI), 389 Chiswick High Rd.,
London W4 4AL, U.K., http://www.bsi-global.com.
1131
F1548 - 01 (2012)
TABLE 1 Specification Equivalency Table
Spec. Ref. U.S. Designation
Number ASTM
A47/A47M
2 A48/A48M
3 A53/A53M
4 A153/A153M
5 A216/A216M
6 A234/A234M
7 A3i2/A312M
8 A395/A395M
9 A403/A403M
10 A536
11 A743/A743M
12 B26/B26M
13 875
14 8210
15 8369
16 8580
17 8584
18 8633
ANSI
19 836.10
20 836.19
21 z 540.1
ANSI/AWWA
22 C151/A21.51
23 C606-87
British ISO
Standard Standard
6681
1452
3601
729
3100
1640 Pt. 1
3605
1640 Pt. 2
4772
3100
1490
2871
1471
3071
1400
1706
3600
3600
5781
5922
1459, 1460, 1461
2531, 4179, 8179
3522, 7722
209
2081
4200
4200
4772 2531,4179,8179
BS 1640 Pt. 2 Wrought and Cast Austenitic Chromium--
Nickel Steel Fittings
BS 1706 Method for Specifying Electroplated Coatings of
Zinc and Cadmium on Iron and Steel
BS 2871 Specification for Copper and Copper Alloys-
Tubes
BS 3071 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Castings
BS 3100 Specification for Steel Castings for General Engi-
neering Purposes
BS 3600 Specification for Dimensions of Steel Pipe for the
Petroleum Industry
BS 3601 Specification for Carbon Steel Pipes and Tubes
with Specified Room Temperature Properties for Pressure
Purposes
BS 3605 Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes and Tubes for
Pressure Purposes
BS 4772 Specification for Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
BS 5781 Measurement and Calibration System
BS 6681 Specification for Malleable Cast Iron
2.5 International Standards Organization:
5
209 Composition of Wrought Products of Aluminum and
Aluminum Alloys ... Chemical Composition (Percent)
1459 Metallic Coatings--Protection Against Corrosion
Hot Dip Galvanizing-Guiding Principles
1460 Metallic Coatings-Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on
Ferrous Materials-Determination of the Mass Per Unit
Area-Gravimetric Method
5
Available from International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1 rue de
Varembe, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland, http://www.iso.ch.
1461 Metallic Dipped Galvanized Coatings
on Fabricated Ferrous Products-Requirements
2081 Metallic of Zinc on
Iron or Steel
2531 Ductile Iron and Accessories for Pres-
sure Pipe Lines
Cast Aluminum Alloys-Chemical and
Mechanical Properties
4179 Ductile Iron Pipes for Pressure and Non-Pressure
Pipelines-Centrifugal Cement Mortar Lining-General
Requirements
4200 Plain End Steel Tubes, Welded and Seamless-General
Tables of Dimensions and Masses Per Unit
5922 Malleable Cast Iron
7722 Aluminum i\lloy Castings Produced by Gravity; Sand,
or Chill Casting, or by Related Processes-General Con--
ditions for Inspection and Delivery
8179 Ductile Iron Pipes-External Zinc Coating
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 fabricated fitting-a fitting constructed by welding
together sections of pipe or tube.
3.1.2 fitting-a device used in a piping system to change
pipe direction, size, split or combine flows, or adapt to other
joining methods.
1132
3.1.3 grooved end-type of fitting or pipe end having a
groove for use with grooved mechanical couplings (Type I) as
defined in Fl476.
3.1.4 pipe-hollow tubular product conforming to Table
Specification Reference Nos. 19, 20, 22 and 13, Nominal
Dimensions, or O.D. tube.
3.1.5 plain end-type of fitting or pipe end for use with a
gasketed mechanical coupling (Type II) that is plain end as
defined in Specification Fl476.
3.1.6 tangent-a section of straight pipe or tube integral to
or welded to the end(s) of a fitting.
3.1. 7 wrought fitting-a fitting made by shaping or shaping
and welding.
4. Classification
4.1 These fittings are classified into the following design
types:
4.1.1 Type /-Grooved end.
4.1.2 Type If-Plain end.
5.1 Orders for fittings under this specification shall include
the following:
5.1.1 Specification designation, title, number and year of
issue.
5.1.2 Quantity.
5.1.3 Size and appropriate suffix (Example 8 in. IPS, 76.1
mm O.D.).
5.1.4 Fitting description (90 Elbow, Tee, Cross, etc.).
F1548 - 01 (2012)
5.1.5 Type (I, H)-Type I must include groove style (that is,
Standard, End Seal,
6
AWWA Rigid, AWWA Flexible, or
Copper).
5.1.6 Minimum pressure rating.
5.1.7 Material (ductile iron or steel, aluminum, copper
nickel, copper, other, etc.) (see Section 6).
5.1.8 Finish (painted, galvanized, bare, plated, special coat-
ings) (see Section 6).
5.1.9 Other requirements agreed to between purchaser and
fitting manufacturer.
6.1 Ferrous Materials-Cast fittings shall be constructed of
ductile iron in accordance wit.IJ Table 1 Specification Reference
8 or 10 Grades 65-45-15 or 65-45-12 respectively or Mal-
leable Iron in accordance with Table 1 Specification Reference
1 or steel in accordance with Table 1 Specification Reference 5
or Cast Iron in accordance with Table 1 Specification Refer-
ence 2. Wrought fittings shall be made in accordance with
Table l Specification Reference 6. Fabricated fittings and
tangents shall be constructed of steel in accordance with Table
1 Specification Reference 3.
6.1.1 Fitting shall be bare, coated with manufacturer's
standard preparation and paint, hot-dip galvanized in accor-
dance with Table 1 Specification Reference 4 or other finish as
agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.2 Aluminum Alloy Materials-Fittings shall be con-
structed of aluminum alloy in accordance with Table 1 Speci-
fication Reference 12. Fabricated fittings shall be made from
pipe in accordance with Table l Specification Reference 14.
6.2.1 Finish for aluminum alloy fittings shall be bare,
anodized in accordance with Table 1 Specification Reference
16 or as otherwise agreed between purchaser and manufacturer.
6.3 Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistance
Materials-Fittings shall be constructed of iron-chromium-
nickel alloy in accordance with Table 1 Specification Refer-
ence 11, or Table 1 Specification Reference 9. Welded tangents
and fabricated fittings shall be in accordance with Table 1
Specification Reference 7.
6.3.1 Finish for iron-chromium-nickel shall be bare or as
6.4 Copper or brass, cast fittings shall be constructed of
brass in accordance with Table l Specification Reference 17.
Wrought fittings shall be constructed of copper in accordance
with Table 1 Specification Reference 13.
6.4.1 Finish for copper or brass fittings shall be bare or as
6.5 Copper-nickel cast fittings shall be constructed of
copper-nickel in accordance with Table 1 Specification Refer-
ence 15 as applicable.
6.5.1 Finish for copper-nickel fittings shall be bare or as
6
End seal is a registered trademark of the Victaulic Company of America.
1133
6.6 Other Materials-Where other materials are required,
the material, mechanical properties and finish of the products
shall be as agreed upon by the fitting manufacturer and the
purchaser.
6.7 Material Quality:
6. 7.1 The material shall be of such quality and purity that
the finished product shall have the properties and characteris-
tics to meet the performance requirements of this standard.
practicable without jeopardizing the intended use. The term
"recovered materials" means: "Materials which have been
collected or recovered from solid waste and reprocessed to
become a source of raw material, as opposed to virgin raw
materials." Used or rebuilt products shall not be used.
7.1 Design Requirements:
7 .1.1 The design of the fittings may be qualified by math-
ematical analysis in accordance with piping codes agreed to by
manufacturer and purchaser or by testing. Fittings that are
tested shall be tested with gasketed mechanical couplings in
accordance with the test requirements of Specification F1476.
7.2 Qualification Requirements :
7.2.1 Mathematical Analysis:
7 .2.1.1 A mathematical analysis, where appropriate, shall be
performed as required by the governing piping code. Records
of the analysis shall be available at the manufacturer's facility
for inspection by the purchaser.
7.2.2 Test:
7 .2.2.1 The fittings shall be tested, where appropriate, with
gasketed mechanical couplings in accordance with the require-
ments of Specification F1476. Unless otherwise noted herein,
all requirements of Specification F 14 7 6 apply. Records of
successful tests shall be available at the manufacturer's facility
for inspection by the purchaser.
7 .2.3 Each type, pressure class, and material of fitting
offered for sale must be qualified. Interpolation between
qualified sizes is allowed as defined in Specification Fl476.
Qualification of the fitting requires successful completion of
the analysis or required testing. Each fitting design is only
qualified for use with the GMC design on which it was tested
or analyzed.
8. Dimensions, Mass and Permissible Variations
8.1 Fitting Dimensions-Fitting dimensions and tolerance
shall be as specified by the manufacturer.
9.1 All fitting surfaces shall be free from scale, blisters, fins,
folds, seams, laps, burrs and cracks, which would affect the
suitability for the intended service.
10. Inspection
10.1 Terms of Inspection:
10.1.1 Inspection of the fittings shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's standard inspection procedure or as agreed
F1548 - 01 (2012)
upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer or supplier
as prut of the purchase contract.
10.2 Raw Material Inspection:
10.2.1 Raw material shall be inspected for compliance with
its material specification.
10.3 Quality Conformance Inspection:
10.3.1 Fitting samples shall be visually and dimensionally
examined to verify compliance with the manufacturer's appro-
priate drawings.
10.4 Process Control Inspection :
1 0.4.1 Fittings shall be inspected throughout the entire
manufacturing and processing cycle. Methods of inspection
shall be in compliance with manufacturer's quality assurance
procedures.
10.5 Inspection Records:
10.5.1 Inspection records shall be maintained by the manu-
facturer. The length of time on file shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's quality assurance procedures.
11. Certification
11.1 Material Certification:
11.1.1 A certification of compliance shall be obtained from
the materials supplier, when applicable. This certificate shall
state that applicable requirements for the raw material have
been satisfied.
12. Product Marking
12.1 Eal!b fitting shall be marked with the manufacturer's
name or trademark, size, and markings traceable to the material
and pressure rating.
13. Packaging
13.1 The fitting shall be boxed, crated, wrapped and other-
wise protected during shipment and storage in accordance with
manufacturer's standard practice. Care shall be taken to prop-
erly protect the fitting from damage during shipment and
storage.
14. Keywords
14.1 fitting; grooved; marine; ship; tangent
COPYRIGHT/).
1134
A Designation: F1565 - 00 (Reapproved 2006)
.. 7
INTERNATIONAL
-------
Standard Specification
Pressure-Reducing Valves for Steam Service
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers self-contained, internally op-
erated, globe pressure-reducing valves for use in steam
service. In these valves, the downstream pressure feedback is
sensed a spring-loaded diaphragm to a pilot
valve-the pilot valve uses the inlet steam pressure to position
the main valve plug via an operating piston.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
Al05/Al05M Specification for Carbon Steel for
Applications
A 182/ A 182M Specification for Forged or Rolled and
Stainless Steel Pipe and Valves
A 193/ A 193M Specification for and Stainless
Steel for High Temperature or Pressure
Service and Other Special Purpose AIJ,Dilcat.wris
A 194/A 194M Specification for Carbon and
for Bolts for Pressure or High Temperature Service,
or Both
A216/A216M SpeciHcation for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suit-
A217 /A2l7M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic
Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suit-
able for High-Temperature Service
A515/A515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Car-
bon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Ser-
vice
A516/ A516M SpeciHcation for Pressure Vessel Plates, Car-
bon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
A547 Specification for Steel Wire, Alloy, Cold-Heading
for Bolts
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25. 11 on
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as F1565 00. DOl:
l0.1520/Fl.565-00R06.
2
the ASTM website.
2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Standards:
3
R 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
6.5 and Flanged
B 16.34 Threaded, and
B 18.2. and Hex bolts and Screws, Askew
bolts. Hex Cap Screws. a.nd Screws
2.3 Federal Specijication:
4
FED-STD-H 28 Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Ser-
vices
2.4 Military Standards and Specijications.
4
MIL- V-3 Valves, Fittings. and for
Indicated Herein);
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.L
Equipment and
MIL-R-2765 Rubber Sheet
Oil Resistant
and Bands for Identification of
MIL-P-15024/5 Plates. Identification
MIL-R -17131 Rods and Powders,
MIL-G-247 J 6 Gaskets, Metallic-Flexible
Wound
MIL-1-45208 Requirements
MIL-STD-167- Mechanical Vibrations of
Equipment (Type ]-Environmental and
Internally Excited)
NAVSEA T9074-AQ-GIB-010/271 Nondestructive
Requirements for Metals
NAVSEA S9074-AR-GIB-Ol 0/278 Fabrication Welding and
Inspe<:tlcms and Casting Inspection and Repair for Ma-
and Pressure Vessels in of the
Welding,
Control, Material Control and Identification and Hi-Shock
Test for Piping for
Shipbomc! Use
Thread Tube
3
International Headquarters, Three Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990.
4
1135
cO F1565 - 00 (2006)
3. Terminology
3.1 accuracy of regulation-the amount by which the down-
stream pressure may vary when the valve is set at any pressure
within the required set pressure limit and is subjected to any
combination of inlet pressure, flow demand, and ambient
temperature variations, within the specified limits.
3.2 design pressure and temperature-the maximum pres-
sure and temperature the valve should be subjected to under
any condition. These are the pressure and temperature upon
which the strength of the pressure-containing envelope is
based.
3.3 hydrostatic test pressure-the maximum test pressure
that the valve is required to withstand without damage. Valve
operation is not required during application of this test pres-
sure, but after the pressure has been removed, the valve must
meet all performance requirements.
3.4 lockup pressure-the outlet pressure delivered by a
pressure-reducing valve under shutoff conditions (that is, when
the flow demand is reduced to a point where it is equal to or
less than the allowable leakage as defined in
3.5 nominal pressure-the approximate maximum pressure
to which the valve will be subjected in service under normal
conditions.
3.6 set pressure-the downstream pressure which the valve
is set to maintain under a given set of operating conditions (that
is, inlet pressure and flow). Ideally, the valve should be set at
downstream pressure approximately equal to the mid-point of
the set pressure limits (defined in 3.7).
3.7 set pressure limits (range of set pressure adjustment)-
The range of set pressure over which the valve can be adjusted
while meeting the specified performance requirements.
4. Classification
4.1 Valves shall be of the following compositions and
pressure ratings, as specified (see Section 5 and 6.1.7). The
pressure-temperature ratings shown below are applicable to the
pressure-containing components of the valve. See 1 and
2.
4.1.1 Composition B-1
1
/4 % chromium, Vz % molybde-
num [maximum temperature 1000F (see 6.1.7)].
4.2 Composition D-carbon steel [maximum temperature
775F (see 6. 1.7)].
4.3 Pressure Ratings-These shall conform to ASME Class
150, Class 300, Class 600, or Class 1500.
5.1 Ordering documentation for valves under this specifica-
5.1.2 Valve specification code (see 6.1.14).
5.1.3 Composition and pressure rating required (see Section
4).
5 .1.4 Trim materials where specific requirement is known
(see Table 1, Footnote B, Note 2).
NoTE 1-Pictorial representations are for illustrative purpose only and
do not imply design.
FIG. 1 Pressure-Reducing Valve (External Pressure Sensing)
5.1.5 Whether internal or external reduced pressure sensing
line is required (see 6.1.2.1).
5.1.6 Accuracy of regulation required if other than listed in
7.2.
5.1.7 Minimum and maximum inlet steam pressures (psig)
(see 7.3 and Sl.5).
5.1.8 Maximum inlet steam temperature CF) (see Sl.5).
5.1.9 Range of set pressure adjustment for valves, if other
than listed in 7.4.
1136
5.1.10 Maximum and minimum capacity required lb!hour.
5.1.11 Special tools, if required (see 6.1.15).
5 .1.12 Supplementary requirements, if any (see S 1 through
S4).
6. Valve Construction and Coding
6.1.1-6.1.14.
6.1.1 Materials of Construction-Materials shall be as
specified in l . All materials shall be selected to prevent
corrosion, galling, seizing, and excessive wear or erosion
where applicable. Clearances shall prevent interference as
result of the thermal expansion. Cadmium plating is prohibited.
F1565 - 00 (2006}
NoTE !-Pictorial representations are for illustrative purpose only and
do not imply design.
FIG. 2 Pressure-Reducing Valve (Internal Pressure Sensing)
6.1.2 General Requirements:
6.1.2.1 Valves will be operated, maintained, and repaired on
board ships and shall emphasize simplicity, maintainability,
ruggedness, and reliability. Design shall permit access for
adjustment and repair when working from either side of the
valve and without requiring removal of the valve body from the
line. Valves shall be of the self-contained, internal-operated
type as described in 1.1.
6.1.2.2 The operating piston shall be separate from the main
valve and fitted with one or more piston rings. The design shall
prevent water buildup on the piston. The piston shall operate
within a separate hardened steel cylinder liner located in the
valve body so that removal of the valve bonnet provides access
to the top of the piston assembly. The cylinder liner shall be
held in place by way of the bonnet bolting or shall be
permanently fabricated into the body. The requirement to
locate the cylinder liner in the body may be waived where it is
shown that an alternative location provides a satisfactory
maintenance configuration. Pilot valve and diaphragm cham-
bers shall be self-draining. The pilot valve shall be single
seated with integral stern. The valve shall be controlled by a
spring-referenced metal diaphragm and shall open against high
1137
Name of Parts
Body, bonnet, and
bottom coverA
TABLE 1 list of Material
Composition B
ASTM A182/Ai82M,
Grade F11
ASTM A217/A217M,
Grade WC6
Internal trim
8
Cylinder liner and piston 400 series CRES
Gaskets
Diaphragm
Springs
BoltingA
500 Brinell min hard
MIL-G-24716, Class B
Ni-Cr alloy
300 series CRES
c
ASTM A193/A193M,
Grade 816
ASTM Al94/Al94M,
Grade 2H
Composition D
ASTM A 1 05/A 105M,
ASTM A216iA216M,
Grade WCB, ASTM
A515/A515M,
A516/A516M,
A547
B
400 series CRES
500 Brinell min hard
MIL-G-24716, Class B
Ni-Cr alloy
300 series CRES
c
ASTM A193/A193M,
Grade 87
ASTM Ai94/A194M,
Grade 2H
Alf desired by the manufacturer, the higher grade bolting materials may be used
in lower temperature categories (for example, Specification A 194/A 194M, Grade 4
may be used for Composition B, and so forth) and also higher grade body
materials lor Composition B and D valves (for example, Specification A 182/
A 182M, Grade F22 for Composition B, and so forth).
8
Trim materials-Unless otherwise specified (see 5.1 ), the valve manufacturer
shall select from the categories listed below the trim materials best suited to meet
the requirements.
( 1) Main valve trim materials. Main valve trim (defined as consisting of the seat
or seat ring and plug and the guide posts and bushings) materials shall be selected
from the following:
( a) Stellite-Trim to be Stellite.
(b) Hardened corrosion-resistant steel-Hardened corrosion-resistant steel
plug (400 series or 17-4 PH) and Stellite seat or seat ring. Guiding surfaces to be
hardened corrosion-resistant steel or Stellite.
Nongalling grades of materials shall be chosen to prevent galling between
rubbing surfaces. A difference in hardness of at least 100 points Brinell shall be
maintained between the rubbing guiding surfaces. This requirement does not
apply if both the guide surfaces are Stellited or if the hardness of either exceeds
450 Brinell.
(c) Where Stellite is used, it shall consist of either wrought Stellite 68, cast
Stellite 6, or an inlay of Stellite (not less than
3
/32-in. thickness for main seat and
disk surfaces). Where inlays are used, welding rods shall be in accordance with
Type MIL-RCoCr-A or MIL-R-17131.
(2) Pilot valve trim materials. Pilot valve trim (defined as consisting of the seat,
valve, and guiding surfaces) shall be made from one or a combination of the
following materials:
(a) 400 series or 17-4PH corrosion-resistant steel-hardened.
(b) Stellite.
c Spring materials-Where the working temperature of the spring will exceed
600F, either lnconel X-750 or A-286 alloy steel shall be used. Where the working
temperature of the spring exceeds 450F, but not 600F, lnconel 600 or tungsten
tool steel may also be used. Where the working temperature of the spring will not
exceed 450F, 300 series corrosion-resistant steel may be used.
pressure. A return spring shall keep the pilot valve in contact
with the diaphragm at all times. The diaphragm shall not travel
through center during any phase of operation. Edges contacting
the diaphragm shall be rounded to prevent wear and damage.
Condensate chamber or other suitable means shall be provided
to preclude internal wetted springs from being exposed to
temperatures exceeding their material limitations. The reduced
pressure sensing line shall be internal or external as specified
(see 1).
6.1.3 Maintainability-Internal parts shall permit easy dis-
assembly and reassembly with standard tools and shall prevent,
as far as practical, the incorrect reassembly of parts. Position-
ing and alignment of all parts in assembly shall use positive
means so that correct reassembly is repeatedly assured. Parts
for a given valve shall not be physically interchangeable or
F1565 - 00 {2006)
reversible, unless such parts are also interchangeable or revers-
ible with regard to function, performance, and strength. Valve
design shall permit accomplishment of the following mainte-
nance actions within the time limits specified:
Action
Disassemble, replace pilot assembly, reassemble
Renew pilot valve assembly trim
Renew main valve trim
Time AllowJd
6.1.4 Interchangeability-Valve design shall inter-
without individual modification of like parts
between all valves. Each part shall have part number
and shall be from stock or the manufacturer on a
nonselective and random basis. With the of matched
the same manufacturer's part number shall
mterc:hang.eal)le with each other with respect to
assemblies, components, and parts are those
that are capable of being installed, removed, or replaced
without alteration, or damage to parts
installed or to adjoining parts. Fabrication operations such as
realmin. hammering, prying,
shall not be required.
6.1.5 shall not be fully coJmpressed
any normal or of the valve. The nirrln,,.. ... ,
stress shall be such that relaxation shall not exceed 5 % over a
1 000-h at the nominal temperature.
ends shall be squared and
6.1.6 Threads-Threads shall conform to ASME B 1.1.
Where necessary, shall be to prevent
accidental loosening of threaded parts. Pipe threads shall not be
used. ASME B 18.2.1 hex-head standards shall be used.
6.1.7 Pressure- Temperature Ratings--Valve pressure-
temperature shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.34
except for maximum allowable temperature. Maximum tem-
perature limitations shall be as follows:
6.1.7.1 Composition B-1000F.
6.1.7.2 D-775F.
6.1.8 End Preparation-Valves shall be furnished with
flanged ends in accordance with ASME B 16.5. shall be
cast or integral with the valve and the inlet and
outlet shall be of the same size and pressure
6.1.9 Bonnet and Bottom Cover Joints-- Bonnet and bottom
cover (where shall be for attachment to the
body. Joints shall be secured by either of the

(a) Through-bolts or studs threaded the entire length and
fitted with a nut on each end. Threads on bolts, studs, and nuts
shall be Class 2 fit in accordance with ASME B 1.1.
(b) Studs with interference fit at the tap end sufficient to
inadverdent out and a Class 2 fit at the nut
end.
Bonnet and bottom cover shall be located by body
(that is, a close tolerance fit between machined diameters on
the bonnet, and bottom cover) rather than on
studs or bolts for location. Spiral wound shall be fully
retained, and the joints shall have metal-to-metal to
controlled of the
assure parallel alignment of the guide bushings. Sufficient
bolting area shall be provided to maintain metal-to-metal
make-up over at least a three-year period. Bearing surface of
nuts and their respective surfaces on the valve shall be finished
machined.
6.1.1 0 Body Construction--Valve bodies shall be machined
from a one-piece or forging and shall be of basic
with in-line inlet and outlet ports. Steam lines,
except for the external downstream pressure line
(where used), shall be internally ported in the and bonnet.
passages produce gradual changes in flow direction
to reduce any effects of concentrated and
90 turns. In of the valve subject to
vuc:UlJ';ve>. SUCh aS HHHH::Uli:llClV
seat, the shall eliminate direct
the walls at close range.
Control Connections-Where external dr.mn.,,b.,,,,,...,
is used, a Vz-in. iron pipe size (i.p.s.)
tion, which is either cast or forged integral with the or
bonnet or welded, shall be provided.
6.1.12 Internal Trim-Internal trim (except welded or
brazed-in seat shall be readily replaceable without
removal of the valve body from the line. The main
or disk shall be single seated. Guiding of the or disk
shall prevent binding or seizing and insure proper under
all conditions. This shall be maintained
parts and under any tolerance sn:Jrl(--nn
condition.
6.1.13 Set Point Adjustment-Means shall be for
ad1ustin2: the set through the specified range, with the
valve under pressure. The adjusting or loading device shall be
safeguarded accidental change in set
6.1.14 Valve Specification Coding-Basic valve fea-
tures shall be and recorded using the following valve
system. The valve specification code contains four
fields of information, which describe the construction features
of the valve. Each of these four fields are further their
respective codes per Tables 2-5.
6.1.15 Maintainability-Maintenance shall require standard
tools to the maximum extent possible. special tools, which
are not commercially available, required for adjustment or
shall be identified and shall be supplied as part of the
valve, if specified in the ordering information (see Section 5).
1138
7. Performance
7.1 All valves shall meet the requirements of 7.1.1-7 .8.
TABLE 2 Valve Pressure Rating Code
Pressure
ASME 150
ASME 300
ASME 600
ASME 1500
Code
A
B
c
D
cd@f F1565 - 00 (2006)
Size
TABLE 3 Valve Composition Code
Valve
Composition B
D
Code
0.25 A
0.50 B
0.75 c
1.00 D
Code
B
D
TABLE 4 Valve Size Code
Size Code Size
1.25 E 3.00
1.50 F 3.50
2.00 G 4.00
2.50 H as
TABLE 5 Set Pressure
Set Pressure
10-65
35 to 125
100 to 450
400 to 600
As
1
2
Code
J
K
L
X
7 .1.1 shall not exhibit a set in excess of
the calculated allowance (See
7.2 of Regulation-The valve shall have an accu-
racy of (see of or 2 whichever is
greater unless otherwise specified in 5.1.
actual steam flow in
per hour (lbs/hour), based on the rmmmum inlet
pressure and highest reduced outlet pressure under
which the valve will be to operate, shall be as
specified (see 5.1). The valve shaH meet the specified capacity
requirement, or any intermediate capacity requirements down
to 10 % of the specified capacity requirement, and shall operate
without hunting, chattering, or excessive noise or vibration, or
exceeding the accuracy of regulation specified in 7.2, under all
specified operating conditions.
7.4 Range of Set Pressure Adjustment (Set Pressure
Limits)-Valve shall be capable of meeting the performance
requirements specified in 7.2 and 7.3 when set at any point
within the required range of set pressure adjustment. Unless
otherwise specified (see 5.1 ), valve set pressure shall be
adjustable over a range specified in Table 5.
7.5 Seat Tightness-With a dead-end downstream volume
not exceeding the volume represented by 100 diameters of
downstream pipe, any steam leakage from the inlet to the outlet
of the valve shall be limited below a value which will cause a
dJs1char2e pressure buildup of 10 psi in a 1-h period.
7.6 External Leakage--There shall be no external leakage
which can be detected by use of a mirrored surface and bubble
fluid.
7.7 Mechanical Shock and Vibration- Valve shall meet the
mechanical shock requirements defined by Grade A, Class I of
MIL-S-901, the HI-shock test guidance of MIL-STD-798, and
the environmental vibration requirements defined by Type I of
MIL-STD-167-1 up to and including 33Hz.
7.8 Endurance-Valves shall be capable of passing the 5-h
endurance test as outlined in S 1.1.6.
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each production valve shall pass the tests outlined in
8.2-8.5.
8.2 Nondestructive Tests-Nondestructive tests shall be as
in NAVSEA S9074-AR-GIB-010/278 and in accor-
dance with NAVSEA T9074-AQ-GIB-010/271. Acceptance
criteria shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-178. This shall
include RT, MT/PT, pressure, and visual testing as delineated
in the above specifications.
8.3 Hydrostatic Test-Valves shall be tested in accordance
with ASME B16.34. There shall be no external leakage,
permanent distortion, or structural failure.
8.4 Seat Tightness Test (Dead-End Test)-Using steam or
air, with an inlet pressure equal to the nominal rating, the outlet
pressure in a dead-end volume representing not more than 1 00
diameters of the downstream pipe shall not rise more than 1 0
in a 1-h period.
8.5 External Leakage Test-Pressure containing parts shaH
be tested with steam or air to the maximum working pressure
to check for external leakage. There shall be no external
leakage which can be detected by use of a mirrored surface (for
steam) or bubble fluid (for air).
9.1 Body Markings-The manufacturer's name or trade-
mark and the body material composition shall be cast or forged
integral with the valve body. The size, rating, and a flow arrow
shall be cast or forged integral with the valve body or die
stamped on raised metal pads (lJs-in. added wall thickness
minimum), or stamped on the outside diameter of the flanges.
9.2 Identification Plates-An identification plate of
corrosion-resistant metal shall be attached to the valve and
shall list the following:
1139
9.2.2 Valve specification code.
9 .2.3 Set pressure range.
9.2.4 ASME pressure class rating.
9 .2.5 Manufacturer's model or part number.
assurance system that will ensure all the requirements of this
specification are satisfied. This system shall also ensure that an
valves will perform in a similar manner to those representative
valves subjected to original testing for determination of the
operating and flow characteristics.
10.2 A written description of the quality assurance system
the manufacturer will use shall be available for review and
acceptance by the inspection authority.
F1565 - 00 (2006)
10.3 The purchaser reserves the right to witness the produc-
tion tests and inspect the valves in the manufacturer's plant to
the extent specified on the purchase order.
11. Keywords
11.1 marine; ship; steam; valves
One or more of the following supplementary requirements Sl, S2, S3, or S4 shall be applied only
when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of those supplementary
requirements shall be agreed upon in writing by the Supplementary
requirements shall in no way negate any requirement of the specificatiOn Itself.
Sl. Initial Qualification Testing
S 1.1 Qualification tests shall be conducted at a facility
satisfactory to the customer and shall consist of the examina-
tions and tests selected from those specified in S 1.1.1 through
S 1.1.1 0 and delineated in the ordering data (see outline of tests
in Table 2). The tests may be conducted on representative valve
sizes and pressure classes to qualify all sizes and pressure
classes of valves provided the valves are of the same type and
design. Evidence of prior approval of these tests is acceptable.
Sl.l.l Qualification Test Sample-A sample valve(s) shall
be submitted for each pressure rating for which qualification
approval is desired (for sample size(s) required for shock
qualification, see Sl.l.7). Qualification approval, based on. the
examination and test of the sample, will then apply to all sizes
of that pressure rating covered by this specification (see
S 1.1.1.1). Cross-sectional assembly drawings of all sizes of
that type and rating shall be submitted with the test valve.
S 1.1.1.1 Upon specific approval by the customer, valves of
other sizes may be tested. Use of only one valve size for
qualification of a type and rating under this specification
applies where the test valve is representative. of the ba.slc
design features of all sizes of the pressure ratmg for whtch
qualification is desired. The customer reserves the right to
determine what are significant variations requiring separate
qualification testing.
Sl.l.2 Examination Before Testing-Upon receipt of the
qualification test sample, the sample valve(s) shall be disas-
sembled and visually and dimensionally examined to deter-
mine conformance with the requirements of this specification
and complete dimensional conformance to the detailed engi-
neering drawings.
S 1.1.2.1 Upon satisfactory completion of the examination
specified in Sl.l.2, the valve(s) shall be tested as specified in
Sl.l.3 through Sl.l.9.
S 1.1.3 Spring Test-The spring from the disassembled
sample valve shall be visually and dimensionally examined as
follows:
Sl.1.3.1 The free spring length shall be measured and an
allowance of 0.010 in. per each inch of free spring length
calculated. Fraction of inches of free spring length shall be
prorated and added to the calculations for allowance.
Sl.l.3.2 The spring shall be compressed to its working
height and released.
S 1.1.3.3 Ten minutes after release, the spring shall be
measured again.
1140
S 1.1.3 .4 The spring shall not exhibit a set in excess of the
allowance calculated in S 1.1.3 .1.
S 1.1.4 The valve shall be subjected to and must pass the
tests outlined in 8.1-8.4 (nondestructive test, hydrostatic test,
seat tightness test, and external leakage test).
S 1.1.5 Performance Test-The performance tests shall be
conducted with the valve set at the upper, mid-point, and lower
of the adjustable set pressure range required by the
application (see 5.1 ). Test medium shall be steam. The maxi-
mum inlet temperature, the range of operating inlet pressures,
and the maximum flow capacity required shall be as specified
(see 5.1) to meet the application requirements. The required
accuracy of regulation shall be maintained. There shall be no
evidence of hunting, chattering, or any other unstable or
unsatisfactory operation of the valve during any portion of the
required operational range of the valve.
Sl.1.5.1 The flow shall be varied from lock-up to the
maximum flow rating of the valve and back (see 5.1 ). This test
shall be conducted under the following sets of conditions:
Condition (a) Max inlet pressure - lowest set pressure.
Condition (b) Min inlet pressure - lowest set pressure.
Condition (c) Min inlet pressure- mid-point set pressure.
Condition (d) Max inlet pressure- mid-point set pressure.
Condition (e) Max inlet pressure- highest set pressure.
Condition (f) Min inlet pressure - highest set pressure.
During each group of test conditions (that is, (a) and (b), (c)
and (d), and (e) and (f), no alteration shall be made to the set
pressure adjustment, or any other portion of the valve. The
duration of the test at each condition shall not exceed 30 s.
S 1.1.6 Endurance Test-The valve shall be subjected to a
5-h operational test to check functioning and performance. Test
medium shall be steam. The 5-h test shall include not less than
25-min aggregate time within each of the following specific
flow ranges: 95 :: 5 % maximum rated flow; 25 :: 3 %
maximum rated flow; and 10 :: 2.5 % maximum rated flow.
The valve shall operate at all times without evidence of
instability, without allowing delivered pressure to vary
specified limits, and without requiring any maintenance, repau,
or adjustment effort. At the successful completion of the 5-h
test, the valve shall be removed and completely disassembled.
All parts shall be examined for signs of excessive wear or any
other condition indicating impending failure or malfunction.
Any such condition shall constitute grounds for failure of the
valve to pass these tests, regardless of how satisfactorily the
valve performed during the 5-h test. Impending failure or
malfunction is defined as one which can be expected to occur
within one year of operation.
F1565 - 00 (2006)
Sl.l.7 Shock Test-Sample size(s) for shock qualification
testing shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-798. The valve
shall be subjected to the high-impact mechanical requirements
for Grade A, Class I of MIL-S-901 to determine its resistance
to high-impact mechanical shock. The shock test shall be
performed with the nominal hydrostatic pressure applied to the
inlet port. During impact, an instantaneous, reversible pressure
excursion is allowable.
S1.1.8 Vibration Test-The valve shall be vibration tested
in accordance with Type I of MIL-STD-167 -1.
Sl.l.9 Maintenance Demonstration-The maintenance ac-
tions specified in 6.1.3 shall be demonstrated.
S 1.1.10 Posttest Examination-After completion of the
tests specified in 8.2-8.5 and Sl.l.5 through Sl.l.7, the test
valve shall be disassembled and visually and dimensionally
examined. Any damage, excessive wear, or signs of galling or
pitting shall be cause for rejection.
S2. Examinations
S2.1 Lot-All valves of the same type and size offered for
delivery at one time shall be considered a lot for the purpose of
sampling.
S2.2 Sampling for visual and dimensional examination. A
random sample of valves shall be selected from each lot as
shown below and shall be examined as specified in S2.3 and
S2.4. Failure of any valve in a sample to pass the examination
specified in S2.3 and S2.4 shall be cause for rejection of the lot.
Lot Size
2 to 25
26 to 65
66 to 180
Over 180
Sample Quantity
1
2
3
4
S2.3 Visual Examination-A visual examination shall be
made of the sample valves selected in accordance with S2.2 to
verify conformance to the requirements of the specification.
S2.4 Dimensional Examination-A dimensional examina-
tion shall be made on the sample valves selected in accordance
with S2.2 to verify conformance with the approved master
drawing.
S3. Technical Data and Certification Requirements
S3.1 Drawings-Assembly drawings, information sheets,
or catalog sheets of the pressure-reducing valve shall be
provided to indicate the design and materials used in the valve.
S3.2 Technical Manuals--A technical manual or instruction
booklet shall be supplied that provides a description of the
valve, its operation and maintenance instructions, and illus-
trated parts breakdown. It shall also include wrench sizes and
assembly torques (or equivalent) for all bolting and threaded
assemblies, and step-by-step disassembly and reassembly pro-
cedures.
S3.3 Certification-Certification shall be provided indicat-
ing that the valve meets all requirements of the purchase order.
S4.1 Scope of Work-The written description of the quality
work to which the system is applicable.
1141
S4.2 Authority and Responsibility-The authority and re-
shall be clearly established.
S4.3 Organization -An organizational chart showing the
relationship between management and the engineering, pur-
chasing, manufacturing, construction, inspection, and quality
control groups is required. The purpose of this chart is to
identify and associate the various organizational groups with
the particular functions for which they are responsible. These
requirements are not intended to encroach on the manufactur-
er's right to establish, and from time to time to alter, whatever
form of organization the manufacturer considers appropriate
for its work. Persons performing quality control functions shall
have a sufficiently well-defined responsibility and the authority
problems and to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
S4.4 Review of quality assurance system. The manufacturer
shall ensure and demonstrate the continuous effectiveness of
the quality assurance system.
S4.5 Drawings, Design Calculations, and
include provisions to ensure that the latest applicable drawings,
design calculations, specifications, and instructions, including
inspection, and testing.
S4.6 Purchase Control-The manufacturer shall ensure that
S4.7 Material Control-The manufacturer shall include a
system for material control that ensures the material received is
properly identified and that any required documentation is
present, identified to the material, and verifies compliance to
the specified requirements. The material control system shall
ensure that only the intended material is used in manufacture.
The manufacturer shall maintain control of material during the
manufacturing process by a system that identifies inspection
status of material throughout all stages of manufacture.
S4.8 Manufacturing Control-The manufacturer shall en-
appropriate monitoring operation.
S4.9 Quality Control Plan-The manufacturer's quality
control plan shall describe the fabrication operations, including
S4.10 Welding -The quality control system shall include
provisions for ensuring that welding conforms to specified
requirements. Welders shall be qualified to the appropriate
standards and the qualification records shall be made available
to the inspection authority if required.
S4.11 Nondestructive Examination-Provisions shall be
made to use nondestructive examination as necessary to ensure
that material and components comply with the specified
requirements. Nondestructive examinations shall be authorized
by their employer and/or qualified by a recognized national
F1565 - 00 (2006)
body, and their authorizations/qualification records shall be
made available to the inspection authority if required.
tablish procedures for controlling items not in conformance
with the specified requirements.
applied. Means should be provided by which heat treatment
S4.14 Inspection Status-The manufacturer shall maintain a
system for identifying the inspection status of material during
between and non-inspected material.
tain and test equipment to be used in
conformance to the specified requirements. Such
S4.16 Records Maintenance-The manufacturer shall have
and manufacturer's data reports that describe the
S4.17 Sample Forms-The forms used in the quality
control system and any detailed procedures for their use shall
be available for review. The written description of the quality
S4.18 Inspection Authority--The manufacturer shall make
with this The manufacturer may
provide for such access by the mspe(;tlcm "''t"''"''
1
'"
with originals or of such documents.
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments wm receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing,vou should
COPYRIGHT/).
1142
_d1iHf!
INTERNATIONAL

Fabricated or Automatic Self ... Cieaning, Fuel Oil and
Strainers
1
l.l This covers automatic or
seJlt automatic strainers, or both, for use
lubrication oil systems. The to operate
under pressure Strainers
manufactured to this spt3Crtlc<ltlcm are suitable for use in any
marine environment.
1.2 It is not the intent of this document to redefine existing
filtration standards. The intent is to provide sound guidelines
for purchasers and designers of lube oil and fuel oil systems.
Nominal micron requirements and filter efficiencies shall be as
upon by the purchaser and manufacturer and stated in
the purchase order document.
2.1 ASTM
D395 1 Practice for Commercial
F795 Practice for
Medium a Constant-Rate,
(Withdrawn 2002)
3
Fll99 for Cast (All
sures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers
150F Maximum)
Fl200 for Fabricated (Welded) Pipe Line
Strainers (Above 150 psig and 150F)
2.2 ASME/ANSI Standards:
4
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII
Division 1 ,Pressure Vessels
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25 .ll on
approved in 1994. Last previous edition appmved in 2001 as F1567- 94 (2001).
DOl: 10.1520/Fl567-94R06.
2
contact ASTM Customer Service at servicc@astm.org. For Annual Book ASTM
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
4
www.asme.org.
Boiler and Pressure Section
:2500)
16.42 Ductile Iron
150 and 300
lJUTiei1SIC>llHlg and
2.3 American Welding Society Standard:
5
A WS D 1.3 Structural Code
2.4 MSS Standards:
6
SP25 Standard H1''u""u"'
Standards for Valve, and
Other Components (Visual Method)
2.5 Federal Specification:
7
Weld-
PPP-F-320 Fiberboard: Sheet Stock
(Container Grade) and Cut
2.6 Military Spec(fications:
8
16 Preservation, Methods of
Barrier Material, Water Proofed.
Flexible
MlL-S-90 I Shock Tests, H. I.
Equir>m1ent and
and Bands for Identification of
Equipment
MIL-P-15024/5 Plates, Identification
8
MIL-STD-167-1 Mechanical Vibrations
Equipment (Type ]--Environmental and
Induced)
MIL-STD-740 Airborne and Structureborne Noise Measure-
ment and Acceptance Criteria of Shipboard bqUIJJment
MIL-STD-2073-1 Material Procedures for Development and
Application of Packaging
5
Available from American Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW LeJeune Rd.,
Miami, FL 33126, http://www.aws.org.
6
Available from Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry (MSS), 127 Park St., NE, Vienna, VA 22180-4602, http://www.mss-
hq.com.
7
Available from Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing
8
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D. 700
1143
F1567 - 94 (2006)
3. Terminology
3.1.1 filter, or straining element-the replaceable compo-
nent in a strainer that petforms the barrier separation of solid
particles from flowing fluid. It shall be removable for cleaning
and servicing.
3.1.2 maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP)- the
highest internal pressure that the strainer can be subjected to in
service. The maximum non-shock working pressure for which
a strainer is rated by the manufacturer on its nameplate.
3.1.3 maximum design temperature-the maximum tem-
perature for which a strainer is rated by the manufacturer.
3.1.4 strainer-a device which, when installed in a pipeline,
provides a mechanicai means of removing suspended soiids
from flowing liquid.
3.1.5 Straining element open area. The net effective open
area of the clean element through which the fluid can pass.
4. Classification
4.1 Strainers shall be furnished as Type I fuel oil or Type II
lubricating oil. The strainers may be either hydraulic, electric,
or pneumatic operated.
5.1 Orders for strainers under this specification shall include
the following:
5 .1.1 This specification number,
5.1.2 Operating and design requirements for flow rate,
pressure, temperature, nominal micron rating, fluid type, and
viscosity. ASME Section VIII Division 1 Code Stamp require-
ments.
5.1.3 Flanged end connections class and type drilling, that
is, ANSI, DIN, and so forth.
5.1.4 Orientation of inlet and outlet connections (see 6.2.9).
5.1.5 Repair spare parts package (see 14.1).
5.1.6 Quality criteria and test plan requirements.
5.1.7 Additional test or supplementary requirements (that is,
ship motions and attitude constraints, see 7.3 and Sl).
5.1.8 Strainer element open area if greater than require-
ments in 6.2.6.
5.1.9 Any special seal requirements.
5.1.10 Any special control requirements, that is, differential
pressure gauges, valves, control panels, motors and so forth.
5.1.11 Certified drawing requirements showing mainte-
nance envelope and mounting details.
6.1 The strainer shall be designed to remove contaminating
or unwanted solid particles, or both, from fuel oil and lube oil.
The self-cleaning action shall be automatic, and shall have the
ability to backwash, when required, the filtered fluid through
the filter element in segments such that the contaminating
particles are flushed free of the filter element. The self-cleaning
action of each unit shall be driven by a motor (electric,
pneumatic, or hydraulic.)
6.2 Components--Each strainer assembly shall consist of a
housing with a removable cover, inlet and outlet connections,
filter/straining element(s), self-cleaning mechanism(s), con-
trols, and a differential pressure gauge. The strainer unit shall
have suitable supports. The cross-sectional flow area through-
out the unit shall be equal to or greater than that of the piping
to which the strainer is connected.
6.2.1 Housing-The strainer housing, cover, flanges, and
other items which form the pressure boundary shall conform to
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, Division 1, Pressure Vessels. Cast grey
iron pressure retaining components shall not be Units
requiring ASME stamp shall have it specified in the purchase
agreement. The dirty oil inlet shall be located at the lower part
of the body and arranged to help prevent contamination of the
clean outlet side of the strainer during disassembly.
6.2.2 Cover-The removable cover shall be secured to the
housing by threaded fasteners. Removal of the cover shaH
provide access to all internal and shall not require
unbolting the inlet and outlet strainer piping connections.
Cover lifting devices with integral supports or lifting eyes shaJ i
be required for covers weighing more than 30 lb.
6.2.2.1 Antispray feature-The strainer cover shall contain
device to deflect fluid spray downward in the event of gasket
failure. The spray deflector shall remain in position at all times
when the cover is connected to the housing.
6.2.3 Gasket-The gasket or o-ring shall be capable of
providing a positive seal under service and test conditions. The
gasket shall be installed between the cover and strainer
housing. This gasket shall be in place during the hydrostatic
pressure test.
6.2.4 Pipe and Flange Dimensions-The inlet and outlet
flanges shall be sized and drilled to conform with ANSI B 16.5,
Class 150 or 300, or as specified in the ordering data (see 5.1
and ANSI B 16.42).
1144
6.2.5 Element Support-The filter element support shall not
permanently deform when the assembly of the filter element
and element support is subjected to the strength of internals test
(see 9.3.3). The element support shall be designed to facilitate
easy removal of the filter element and element support as one
assembly. The element support must satisfy the flow area
requirements of 6.2.6.
6.2.6 Filter Element-The filter element may be furnished
in any corrosion resistant material compatible with the fluid in
service. The filter element shall be attached to the element
support in such a manner that it can be easily removed and
replaced from the element support. The straining element open
area shall be at least two to four times larger than the area of
the strainer discharge connection.
6.2.7 Motor-The self-cleaning action of each unit shall be
operated by a motor included as a part of the strainer. This
motor can be hydraulic, electric or pneumatic.
6.2.7.1 Hydraulic motor-A motor exhaust connection sized
to meet the strainer hydraulic motor shall be provided. This
motor exhaust connection shall also be suitable for venting air
during the initial fill and pressurization.
6.2.7.2 Electric motor-Electric motors shall be fractional
horsepower, TEFC, NEMA design B, with a continuous rated
1.15 service factor or equivalent. Voltage, phase and cycle
rating shall be stated in the purchase document.
0 F1567- 94 (2006)
6.2.7.3 Pneumatic motor-Design type shall be agreed upon
between the purchaser and manufacturer.
6.2.8 Backjlush Structure-The backflush structure shall
periodically or continuously clean all of the filter element by
backflushing system fluid through the element. The structure
shall clean the filter element in segments so as not to disrupt the
system flow through the strainer at any time. All impurities
separated shall be isolated from the filtered liquid and dis-
charged. All shaft penetrations shall require seals suitable for
oil service.
6.2.9 Connections-The inlet and outlet connections shall
be flanged. The inlet and outlet shall be permanently marked
and identified.
6.2.9.1 Drain connections shall be provided. These connec-
tions shall be furnished with caps or plugs.
6.2.9.2 The unit shall have a suitable means of removing
sludge from the strainer when it is isolated from service or
during normal operation.
6.2.1 0 Lifting Attachments-Each housing and the cover
shall be provided with suitable sling attachment areas for
lifting in a normal position. If lifting eyes are used, each eye
shall have the capability to carry the total weight.
6.2.11 Mounting-Free standing strainers shall be mounted
by feet attached to the housing. Each foot must be provided
with a suitable hole to accommodate one hold-down bolt.
6.3 Welding-Welding for nonpressure-boundary compo-
nents shall be in accordance with the A WS Structural Welding
Code. Welding for pressure boundary components shall be in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
6.4 Treatment and Painting-The exterior of the strainer
shall be treated and painted in accordance with standard
commercial practice.
6.5 Material-Ductile iron, bronze, carbon steel, and stain-
less steel materials used in the fabrication of the automatic
self-cleaning strainer shall not affect nor be affected by
petroleum products. Materials shall be in accordance with
ASTM or ASME specifications. Dissimilar metal connections
shall be designed to provide optimum corrosion protection.
6.6 Seals-Strainer seals shall be elastomers suitable for this
service.
7. Operating Requirements
7.1 Pressure-The strainer shall be suitable for operation in
the range of 0.21 to 1.03 MPa (30 to 150 psi).
7.2 Temperature-The strainer shall be suitable for opera-
tion between 15 to l20C (60 to 250F) unless otherwise
specified in the ordering data (see .2).
7.3 Shipboard Performance-Strainers shall be capable of
operating in accordance with all requirements of this specifi-
cation when subjected to the purchase agreement specified ship
motion and attitude constraints (see .7).
7.4 Self-Cleaning Rate-The pressure drop through the
strainer assembly shall not exceed the manufacturer's maxi-
mum rated pressure drop during operation. Specifically, the
self-cleaning mechanism shall be capable of maintaining the
1145
pressure drop below this value when contaminated fluid is
being pumped through the strainer at the design flow specified
in 5 .. 2.
8. Workmanship
8.1 Workmanship-The strainer and its components shall be
free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects
and cracks. All surfaces shall be smooth and clean (reference
MSS SP55). Where dimensions and tolerances affect inter-
changeability, operation, or performance or any combination
thereof, they shall be held.
8.2 Cleaning-The strainer shall be cleaned of all extrane-
ous material and dried.
9. Tests
9.1 Each strainer will have standard hydrostatic tests per-
formed in accordance with Specifications 199 or 200
whichever is applicable. When specified as part of the purchase
agreement, a detailed test plan may be submitted for approval.
The performance, prototype and operational tests listed herein,
shall be performed to prove the design. All strainers produced
under this specification will meet these minimum require-
ments. Proof of test qualification shall be provided when
specified in the purchase agreement.
9.2 Test Extensions--When the following conditions are
satisfied, extension of a product test of one size to qualify
another size is permitted (see Table ):
9.2.1 Similar geometry and design characteristics.
9.2.2 Similar or stronger material than the tested unit.
9.2.3 Same pressure rating.
9.2.4 Similar or stronger end connections.
9.2.5 Similar sealing configurations.
9 .2.6 Same mode of operation and operator attachment.
9.3 Operational Tests:
9.3.1 Flow Capacity Test-The test shall be performed in
general accordance with Practice F795. The pressure drop at
the rated flow shall not exceed 0.07 MPa (10 psi) with a fluid
viscosity of 250 SSU.
9.3.2 Inclined Flow Capacity Test-The flow capacity test
in will be performed at a list and trim angle of 30.
9.3.3 Strength of Internals Test: The filter elements shall be
proven to withstand a minimum pressure differential of ten
times the rated clean pressure differential or
1
/c; of the maxi-
mum allowable working pressure (MA WP) of the housing,
whichever is greater. The increased differential pressure shall
19(%)
50 (2)
150 (6)
200 (8)
250 (10)
TABLE 1 Test ExtensionsA
Size
Other Sizes Approved By This Test, mm (in.)
% and smaller
25 (1 ), 32 (1
1
/4), 40 (1 %), 50 (2)
65 (2%), 80 (3), 100 (4), 150 (6)
200 (8)
250 (10)
A Above 250 mm (1 0 in.), test extensions methods shall be agreed upon between
the purchaser and the manufacturer and should be specified in the purchase
agreement.
F1567 - 94 (2006)
be held or maintained for 30 min. The strainer assembly will
then be disassembled and inspected. Any permanent deforma-
tion or signs of damage shall constitute failure of the test.
When testing methods are not practical, calculations or finite
element methods may be used as objective evidence
that the strength of internals meet the requirements. The
acceptance of these methods is to be a matter of contract and
will be specified in the purchase agreement.
9.4 Self-Cleaning and Filtration Efficiency Test -The test
fluid shall be an SAE 40 weight lubricating oil. The liquids
'"N'""'h' should be either 250 or 500 SSU. This shall be clearly
stated on the test report. The test report contaminants shall be
silica sand with a known granular size and distribution.
Micron Size Contaminants
4-25
25-40
40-75
75-100
10(}-165
228
Weight % of Total Less Than Micron Sizes
25%
50%
80%
90%
95%
100%
The solids loading during the test shall be increased in
intervals until a maximum value of 300 PPM is reached. Test
data shall be recorded for a minimum of 1/2 h at each PPM
PPM Run Time in min
20 PPM (MG/L) 30
40 PPM (MG/L) 30
60 PPM (MG/L) 30
80 PPM (MG/L) 30
100 PPM (MG/L) 30
200 PPM (MG/L) 30
300 PPM (MG/L) 30
Practice F795 shal1 be used as a guide to performance testing
and the reporting of test results.
10. Inspection
10.1 Responsibility for Inspection- The contractor is re-
sponsible for the performance of all inspection requirements.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order,
the contractor may use his own or any other facilities suitable
for the performance of the inspection requirements.
1 0.1.1 Responsibility for Compliance- Items must meet the
requirements of Sections 7, and 8, and, if so ordered, those
of the Supplementary Requirements (see 5.1.7). The inspec-
tions set forth in this specification shall become a part of the
contractor's inspection system or quality program. The absence
of inspection requirements in the specification shall not relieve
the contractor of the responsibility of assuring that products or
supplies submitted for acceptance shall comply with require-
ments of the contract. Quality conformance sampling does not
authorize submission of defective material, nor does it commit
the purchaser to accept defective material.
1 0.1.2 Quality Conformance Inspection-- Quality confor-
mance inspection shall consist of the visual and dimensional
inspections specified in .3. Quality conformance inspec-
tion shall be accomplished on 100 % of the assemblies offered.
Only those assemblies which pass all inspections shall be
delivered to the purchaser.
1 0.1.3 Visual and Dimensional Inspection- The visual and
dimensional inspection shall consist of the inspection listed in
Table 2.
1 0.1.4 Design Data Inspection--The contractor shall pro-
vide the purchaser with documentation to show that the
requirements of Table 2 have been satisfied. This documenta-
tion may include drawings, engineering analyses, or test data,
or any combination thereof. The inspections listed in Table
shall be verified by engineering review of the documentation
provided.
11. Product Marking
11.1 Consult MSS SP25.
11.2 ldentijlcation-Identification plates, if required in the
contract, shall be provided and shall include the
information:
11.2.1 The nominal pipe size of the inlet and outlet connec-
tions.
11.2.2 Design pressure, flow capacity.
11.2.3 The necessary operating instructions.
11.2.4 Weight when wet (operational weight).
12. Packaging
12.1 Protection-Strainer assemblies and their associated
parts shall be individually preserved and packaged to afford
adequate protection against corrosion, deterioration and physi-
cal damage from shipment between the supply source and the
first receiving activity.
13. Supporting Documentation
13.1 Technical and Logistics Documentation-The contrac-
tor shall furnish the following publications applicable to the
assemblies supplied under this specification:
13.1.1 Spare parts listing.
13.1.2 Maintenance, service, and repair manual.
13.1.3 Graph of expected pressure drop across the strainer
assembly as a function of flow at various fluid viscosities. The
maximum pressure drop allowed shall be indicated.
TABLE 2 Visual and Dimensional Inspection
Number of replaceable units
Presence of ASME stamp (if part of purchase
agreement)
Presence and type of cover fasteners
Access to internals without breaking inlet and
outlet connections
Presence of cover lifting device, if required
Presence of antispray feature integral with
cover
1146
Presence, sizes, and locations of connections
Presence of required caps and plugs
Presence of lifting eyes
Presence and type of mounting feet
Presence and color of paint
Presence, completeness, legibility, and
correctness of identification
Quality of workmanship
Presence and contents of technical nllbtlir.i1ttinr1f1
6.1, 5.1.5
6.2.2
6.2.2
6.2.2.1
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.4
ii.i
8.1
0 F1567 - 94 (2006)
Quality of materials
Proper selection of materials
Provisions for dissimilar metal contact, if
temperature
strainer assembly withstand motions
by shipboard use
Sell-cleaning rate
Ease of access to internals
Cover removable without breaking inlet
outlet connections
Weight ol cover, if
of antispray
material
Certification that gasket was used during
hydrostatic pressure test
Flange dimensions
Ease of removal of assembly of filter element
and element support
Ease of removal of filter element
Flow area through assembly of filter element
and element support
Selection of pressure gauge
Material of seals
Connection sizes
Strength of lifting eyes
Welding procedures
Exterior
7.3
rA
6.2.3
6.2.5, 6.2.6
6.2.6
6.2.9
6.6
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.3
6.4
13.2 Test Report-Upon completion of the tests, a test report
shall be prepared. The report shall be certified and signed by
the contractor's quality control representative.
14. Parts
Repairs Parts Kit-When specified (see 5.1.5) a repair/
spare patts kit shall be furnished and delivered with each
The kit shall contain the parts and quantities sped-
the contract.
15.
automatic strainers; fuel oil strainers;
lubrication oil strainers; simplex strainers
SUPPLJ:t-:MENl'ARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary recwiJ:en1ents apply only when specified by the purchaser in an order
(see 5.1.7).
S 1.1 Government Specifications, Standards, and
Han.dbooks---The follow]ng documents, of the issue in effect
on the date of invitation for bids, form a part of this specifi-
cation to the extent herein.
S2.1 Preservation-Preservation shall be Level A or indus-
trial, as
and preservatives shall be
in accordance with MIL-P-116. Strainer unit shall be protected
Method of MIL-P--116.
S2.1.2.1 Strainer '"''<'
0
""'ht,,, __ /.'i
to corrosion shall be a preserva-
COJtnpati1ble the system Unless otherwise
spe1;;rl.1e:d. See S2.1, P2 of MIL-P-1 16 shall
S2. L2.2 External bare metal suifaces-Machined surfaces
and corrodible metal surfaces shall be coated with
MIL-P-116 P-2 and wrapped with greaseproof
barrier material conforming to I, Grade A of MIL-B-121.
1147
S2.1.2.3 Preservative protection-All equipment surfaces
which are preserved shall be protected from direct contact with
any blocking, dunnage, and shrouding by inserting one or more
layers of barrier material conforming to Type I, Grade A of
MIL-B-121 at points of contact.
S2.1.2.4 Openings-The open ends of all flanges and fit-
tings shaH be coated with MIL-P-116 Type P-2 preservative
and sealed with similarly preserved blind flanges or plastic
The ends of the flanges and fittings shall be
with greaseproof barrier material conforming to Type
I, Grade A of MIL-B-121.
S2.1.2.5 Technical Publications-Technical publications,
which accompany shipment prepared for Level A, shall be
"""'"'""'"''"''r1 in accordance with Submethod lC-1 or MIL-P-116
and secured to the hardware package. Technical publications
shall not be placed within the sealed barrier material used to
enclose the strainer assembly. Technical publications, when
shipped in bulk shall be preserved to MIL-P-116
Submethod 1 C-1 and packed in fiberboard containers in
accordance with PPP-F-320.
F1567 - 94 {2006)
S2.2 Packing-Strainers preserved as specified (see S3.1),
shall be packed in exterior shipping containers for the level of
packing specified in accordance with Table VII, exterior
shipping container requirements, of MIL-STD-2073-1, and
herein.
S2.3 Caseliners, Closure, and Gross Weight:
S2.3.1 Caseliners -Unless otherwise specified, shipping
containers containing strainers preserved commercial shall be
provided with waterproof caseliners in accordance with MIL-
STD-2073-1.
S2.3.2 Closure-Container closure, reinforcing, or banding
shall be in accordance with the applicable container specifica-
tion or appendix thereto except that class-weather-resistant/
fire-retardant fiberboard boxes shall be closed in accordance
with Method V and reinforced with nonmetallic or tape
banding and class-domestic/fire-retardant fiberboard boxes
shall be closed in accordance with Method I using pressure-
sensitive tape.
S2.3.3 Weight-Wood, plywood, and cleated type contain-
ers exceeding 200-lb gross weight (91-kg gross mass) shall be
modified by the addition of skids in accordance with MIL-
STD-2073-1 and the applicable container specification or
appendix thereto.
S2.4 Industrial-Items prepared for shipment shall be pack-
aged in accordance with Practice D3951 (see 12.1 ).
S2.4.1 Container Modification -Shipping containers ex-
ceeding 200-lb gross weight shall be provided with a minimum
of two 3- by 4-in. nominal (75- by 100-mm) wood skids laid
fiat, or skid- or all-type base which will support the material
and facilitate handling by mechanical handling equipment
during shipment, stowage, and storage.
S2.5 Marking-In addition to any special marking required,
interior (unit and intermediate) packs and shipping containers
shall be marked including bar coding and structural for
shipment, stowage, and storage in accordance with MIL-STD-
2073-1.
S3. Data Requirements
S3.1 Data Requirements-When this specification is used in
acquisition and data are required to be delivered, the data
requirements identified below shall be developed as specified
by an approved Data Item Description (DD Form 1664) and
delivered in accordance with approved Contract Data Require-
ments List (CDRL), incorporated into the contract. When the
provision of DOD FAR Supplement, Part 27, Sub-Part
27.471-1 (DD Form 1423) are invoked and the DD Form 1423
is not used, the data specified below shall be delivered by the
contractor in accordance with the contract or purchase order
requirements. Deliverable data required by this specification
are cited in the following paragraphs.
Paragraph
No.
Data Requirement Title Applicable DID No.
S3.4
S4.4
10_1_2
13.2
84.2
Product Drawings and Associated Lists
Plan, Inspection and Test
Procedures, Test
Test/Inspection Reports
First Article Qualification Test Plan
DI-DRPR-81 000
UDI-R-21375A
NDI-T-237328
NDTI-80809
DI-T-5313-A
1148
S3.1.1 Data item descriptions related to this specification,
and identified in 5 and the Supplement will be approved and
listed as such in DOD 5010.12-L., AMSDL. Copies of data
item description required by contractors in connection with
specific acquisition functions should be obtained from the
Naval Publications and Forms Center or as directed by the
contracting officer.
S3.2 Data Requirements Waiver Instructions-The data re-
quirements of this specification may be waived by the
contracting/acquisition activity upon certification by the officer
that identical data were submitted by the officer and accepted
by the Government under a previous contract for an identical
item acquired to this specification. This does not apply
specific data which may be required for each contract regard-
less of whether an identical item has been supplied previously
(for example, test reports). When specified in the contract or
order, a certificate of compliance shall be prepared.
S3.3 Technical Manuals-The requirement for technical
manuals and technical repair standards should be considered
when this specification is applied to a contract. If technical
manuals are required, military specifications and standards
which have been cleared and listed in DOD 5010.12-L
(AMSDL) must be listed on a separate CDRL (DD Form
1423), included as an exhibit to the contract. The technical
manuals must be acquired under separate contract line item
the contract.
S3.4 Drawings -Drawings shall be prepared in accordance
with S3.1. One set of reproducible (or microfilm) drawings
shall be furnished to the contracting agency after first article
inspection approval.
S3.5 Identification-Identification plates shall be provided
in accordance with MIL-P-15024 and MIL-P-15024/5, and
shall include the following information:
S3.5.1 The nominal pipe size of the inlet and outlet connec-
tions.
S3.5.2 Design pressure, flow capacity.
S3.5.3 The necessary operating instructions.
S3.5.4 National Stock Number (NSN).
S3.5.5 Weight when wet (operating weight).
S3.6 Technical, Logistics Documentation-The contractor
shall furnish the following publications applicable to the
assemblies supplied under this specification:
S3.6.1 Spare parts listing.
S3.6.2 Maintenance, service, and repair manual.
S3.6.3 Graph of expected pressure drop across the straine1
assembly as a function of flow at various fluid viscosities. The
maximum pressure drop allowed shall be indicated.
S4. Inspection
S4.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection require
ments specified herein are classified as follows:
S4.1.1 First article inspection (see S4.2).
S4.1.2 Quality conformance inspection (see 10. L2).
S4.2 First Article Inspection -First article inspection shal
consist of the visual and dimensional inspections and th(
design data inspections specified in Section 10, and the test:
specified in 9.1, in that order. The strainer assembly must pas:
all inspections and tests specified to be considered acceptable
F1567 - 94 (2006)
S4.3 First Article-The contractor shall furnish a sample
strainer for first article inspection and test (see S4.5).
S4.4 Inspection System-An inspection system program
plan shall be prepared (see S4.1 ).
S4.5 First Article-When a first article inspection is re-
quired, the items shall be a first article sample. The first article
shall consist of the units specified. The contracting officer
should include specific instructions in acquisition documents
regarding arrangements for examinations, approval of first
article test results and disposition of first articles.
S4.5.1 Invitations for bids should provide that the Govern-
ment reserves the right to waive the requirement for samples
for first article inspection to those bidders offering a product
which has been previously acquired and tested by the Govern-
ment, and that bidders offering such products, who wish to rely
on such production or test, must furnish evidence with the bid
that prior government approval is presently appropriate for the
pending contract.
S4.6 Reliability-The contractor shall provide, with the first
article, an engineering calculation of the mean time between
failure for the strainer operating under the conditions specified
herein.
S5. Shock, Vibration, and Acoustic Requirements
S5.1 Mechanical Shock-The strainer assembly, including
the differential pressure gauges, shall meet the high impact
shock requirements of MIL-S-901 for Grade A, Class 1
equipment.
S5.1.1 Mechanical Shock Test-This test shall be conducted
in accordance with MIL-S-90 1. All functions of the strainer
assembly shall be unaffected by this test. Any unit not meeting
MIL-S-901 shall be rejected.
S5 .2 Vibration-The self-cleaning simplex strainers shall
be designed and tested to function satisfactorily under the
requirements of MIL-STD-167 -1 Type 1 environmental vibra-
tion.
S5.2.1 Vibration Test-This test shall be conducted in
accordance with MIL-STD-167 -1. All functions of the strainer
assembly shall be unaffected by this test. Any unit not meeting
MIL-STD-167 -1 shall be rejected.
S5.3 Acoustic Requirement-When operating, the strainer
assembly shall conform to the airborne noise requirements of
MIL-STD-740 for Grade C equipment.
S5.3.1 Acoustic Requirement Test-This test shall be con-
ducted in accordance with MIL-STD-7 40. The sound energy
limits imposed by MIL-STD-740 for Grade C equipment shall
not be exceeded.
S5.4 Tests-Table SS. 1 lists required tests; a test plan shall
be submitted for approval before testing.
S6. Other Requirements
S6.1 Subcontracted Material and Parts-The packaging
requirements of referenced documents listed in Section S 1 do
not apply when material and parts are acquired by the
contractor for incorporation into the equipment and lose their
separate identity when the equipment is shipped.
S6.2 Repair Parts-A repair parts kit shall be furnished and
delivered with each assembly. The kit shall contain the parts
and quantities specified in the contract.
S6.3 Depreservation Instructions-A set of instructions
covering the depreservation of the equipment shall be fur-
nished. Instructions shall show all information necessary for
depreservation, such as, but not limited to: the addition of
lubricants prior to operation, flushing of lines, removal of
greaseproof barrier and the location of detached components.
Instructions shall be packaged in a transparent waterproof
plastic bag, minimum 4 mil ( 100 11m) thick. Closure shall be by
heat sealing. The shipping container in which the instructions
are packed shall be marked to so indicate.
Test
Mechanical shock
Vibration
Acoustic requirement
TABLE S5.1 Tests
Requirement
S5.1
S5.2
S5.3
Method Paragraph(s)
S5.1.1
S5.2.1
S5.3.1
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed eve!}' five years and
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may a/so be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
1149
a Designation: F1669M -12
"UII
7
INTERNATIONAL
Insulation Monitors for Shipboard Electrical Systems
[Metric]
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation Fl669M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers two (2) types of electrical
system insulation monitoring devices.
1.1.1 I is an AC device intended as a permanently
installed unit for use in the detection of ohmic insulation faults
to ground in active AC ungrounded electrical systems up to
1000 VAC, having DC components up to 1500 VDC.
1.1.2 Type II is a DC device intended as a permanently
installed unit for use in the detection of ohmic insulation faults
to ground in DC ungrounded electrical systems up to 1500
VDC.
1.2 Limitations-This specification does not cover devices
that are intended for operation in AC ungrounded systems
without DC components.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 7 of this specification: This
standard does not pwport to address all of the safety concerns,
ifany, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
2.1 UL Standard:
UL
and Distances for Electrical
2.2 IEC Standards:
3
Insulation Tests for Electrical
1
and M<1rine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee in
Electrical.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2012. Published November 2012. Originally
in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as Fl669M- 96(2007).
10.1520/Fl669M-12.
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd.,
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
3
IEC 364-4-41 Electrical Installations of
Protection for Safety/Protection Against Electrical Shock
MIL-STD-1399 (NAVY) Section 300A Interface Standards
for Shipboard Electrical Power,
Current
4
3. Terminology
3.1.1 AC or DC ungrounded electrical system, n-a system
that has no intentional connection to ground and can continue
to perform normally if one conductor becomes connected to
ground.
3.1.2 measuring signal, n-the output signal from the insu-
lation monitor that is superimposed between the AC or DC
ungrounded system to be monitored and ground.
3.1.3 response value, n-the adjustable or preset set-point
value of the system insulation resistance at which an insulation
monitor will provide an alarm indication.
3.1.4 system leakage capacitance, n-the total capacitance
to ground of the system including all connected consumers.
3.1.5 touch voltage, n-the voltage appearing an
insulation fault, between simultaneously accessible parts. This
term is used only in connection with protection against indirect
human contacts, that is, no direct human contact with a live
conductor. The International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) limits the maximum prospective touch voltage which can
be maintained indefinitely to 50 VAC rms or 120 v ............ "_n<>P
DC.
4.1 Orders for monitoring devices under this
shall state the following information:
4.1.1 Type and quantity.
4.1.2 Nominal system voltage and frequency (for AC sys-
tem).
4.1.3 Input supply voltage.
4.1.4 Response value/set-point range in K-Ohms.
4
1150
.. ) F1669M - 12
ciijJW
4.1.6 System leakage capacitance or data from which an
estimate of its magnitude can be determined.
4.1.7 Special requirements such as Test/Reset buttons,
ohmmeters, visual indicators, memory fault retention, and so
forth.
5. Materials and Manufacturing Methods
5.1 The materials and manufacturing methods used shall be
such that the resulting products will conform to the properties
and characteristics prescribed in this specification.
6. Performance
6.1 of Insulation Monitor to a Step
insulation monitor measures the combined
to from all power or circuit conductors.
where
to a step in the actual resistance to
to 50 % of the desired response
the eXjJreSSIIOn:
t (s) :s; 100+40 (R
1
X
internal resistance of monitor, ohm, and
total system capacitance, farad.
For ex<:tmtHe,
t = 124 s if R
1
120000 ohm and C, = 5 X 10-
6
farad
--The
(1)
6.2 Measuring Signal Voltage Limits- The value of
the measuring shall under all operating conditions be
limited to a magnitude deemed acceptable by applicable safety
standards for the intended use. The peak value of the measuring
signal shall be less than the touch voltage 120 VDC
and 50 VAC rms.
6.3 Internal Impedance and Internal Resistance-The AC
internal impedance and DC internal resistance shall be at least
30 ohms per volt nominal system voltage but in either case
shall not be less than 12 K-Ohms.
6.4 Tolerance-The response tolerance of the
monitor shall not exceed 0 to +50 % of the upper value of the
set range when measured at a room temperature of 25 :
5C (72 : 9F), with an input 80-115 %of its
nominal value with a system to
the value at which the monitor is calibrated (1 minimum).
6.5 and Frequency -The
insulation monitor shall as when op<erattlntg
with a system of 0-115 % nominal over the t-... ,.,...,,,.,. ... r."
range 50--400
6.6
6.7 insulation monitor shall
siom; an external (remote) audible or visual alarm
when the insulation resistance value falls below the set-ncnm
value, or a remote indication of the insulation resistance value
of the system, or both. Built-in contacts for
external alarm shall have a continuous
1151
of at least 4 amperes at 250 VAC. The break capacity shall be
at least 2 amps at 250 VAC (0.7 power factor) and 0.3 amps at
120 VDC.
6.8 Built-In Display of Insulation Resistance-If provisions
are made to indicate (display) the current insulation resistance
level, then the manufacturer shall provide information as to the
accuracy of this indication during normal operating conditions.
6.9 Clearance and Creepage Distances-- The insulation
monitor shall have protective spacings through air (clearance)
and over surface (creepage) as stated in UL STD 840 for the
intended maximum circuit voltage.
6.10 Impulse Voltage Withstand Tests- The insulation
monitor shall meet the IEC 255-5 Class III ..... .,,,_,._.,,,._
Withstand Test Requirements.
7.
7.1 The insulation monitor shall reliably function over an
ambient temperature range of 0 to 50C (32 to 122F) and at a
relative humidity of up to 95 %. Storage temperatures of -20 to
+60C ( -4 to 140F) shall not damage the insulation monitor.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Conformance Test-Conformance testing of insulation
monitors shall be performed to confirm that the response
tolerances stipulated are not exceeded and that the
ments of Section 6 are met.
8.1.1 Response Value Tests-The measuring devices used
for testing shall enable a slow stepless or step-by-step
of the simulated insulation resistance and shall allow the
connection of artificial system leakage capacitances. To simu-
late the system leakage capacitance, capacitors with an isola-
tion resistance of 100 times the desired response value and with
a tolerance of + 10 % maximum shall be used. On the
resistance shall be decreased slowly and the insulation moni-
tor's response shall be observed. For testing the response value,
the test arrangement with its insulation resistance level and its
own capacitance must be considered.
8.1.1.1 An insulation monitor with adjustable response shall
be tested at the beginning, mid and end points of its range.
These tests shall be done without connected capacitances. The
test resistor must be decreased to ensure that a static
response value is read. If the measuring principle is
on the system leakage capacitance, the tolerances must be
in accordance with This test is done
the test capacitance step by step to the value at which the
monitor was calibrated.
8.1.2 Testing of Response Time-At a system of
there shall be a step in the insulation level from
to 50 % of the derived response value. The time
for the output to react shall be measured.
8 .1.3 Testing Voltage--Peak measurements
are taken to confirm that the requirements for 6.2 are met. The
voltmeter's internal resistance should have minimum value
not less than 20 times the DC internal resistance of the
circuit.
8.1.4 Testing Impedance or Resistance:
8.1.4.1 Testing the AC Internal Impedance- The AC inter
nal impedance in is verified without any
0 F1669M -12
supply voltage, with an rms milliammeter and with an external
power supply wired between the linked measuring terminals
and the ground terminal. The power supply must have an AC
output rated at nominal voltage, nominal frequency, a harmonic
distortion of less than 5 % and internal impedance of under 10
ohms. The monitor's internal impedance is calculated as
follows:
Nominal System Voltage
__
(2)
8.1.4.2 Testing the DC Internal Resistance- The external
power supply must have a DC output rated at nominal system
voltage. The monitor's internal resistance is calculated as
follows:
Nominal System Voltage
R =
r DC Current
(3)
8.1.5 Testing of Built-in Meters-If indication instruments
are built into the insulation monitor, they must be checked so
that they comply with the response tolerances laid down in 6.8.
8.1.6 Testing the Impulse Voltage Withstand Capabilities
-These tests will follow the procedure outlined in IEC 255-5
Class III..
8.2 Routine Tests-Each monitor must undergo a test during
production to prove that the insulation monitor functions
correctly.
8.2.1 Testing of Response Value-Routine tests should be
performed at room temperature 25 soc (72 9F) with
rated input supply voltage. The insulation monitor must corn-
ply with the requirements of 6.4.
8.2.1.1 The response of the insulation monitor is to be tested
at the beginning and end points of the range if it has a
steplessly adjustable response value.
8.2.2 Testing of Self- Test Function- The internal and exter-
nal test buttons must be checked according to 6.6. The built-in
test device's proper functioning must be verified.
8.2.3 Testing of Built-in Meters-If the insulation monitor
has built-in indication meters, they must be checked so that
they comply with the response tolerances according to 6.8. The
test should be performed at room temperature with rated input
supply voltage.
8.2.4 Voltage Test-A voltage test is performed on the
monitor to verify that the monitor is able to withstand an AC
test voltage equal to twice the nominal systems voltage plus
1000 V for a period of one second without breakdown or
flashover. The test voltages shall be applied directly to the
terminals. Unless obvious, the independent circuits are those
which are so described by the manufacturer.
] 152
8.2.4.1 Link all terminals of each independent circuit. Note
that circuits having the same rated insulation voltage may be
connected together when conducting the test in accordance
with 8.2.4.3( c).
8.2.4.2 Link all terminals of open-contact
2
circuits.
8.2.4.3 Apply test potential: (a) between linked independent.
circuits; (b) between linked-independent circuits and linked
open-contact circuits; ( c) between linked independent circuits
and exposed conductive parts.
8.2.5 Verification of Markings, Labels and Manuals
-Visual examination should verify appropriate markings as
specified in Section 9.
9. Product Marking and Equipment Manual
9.1 The following data shall be included on all enclosures
for insulation monitors:
9.1.1 Name of manufacturer.
9 .1.2 Type of monitor.
9.1.3 Connection diagram.
9 .1.4 Input supply voltage.
9.1.5 Nominal supply voltage and frequency (for AC sys-
tems).
9.1.6 Response value or response range.
9.1.7 Test resistance value.
9.1.8 Serial number or year of production.
9.2 Manufacturer's equipment manual shall provjde the
following information in addition to the above requirement.
9 .2.1 Description of operation.
9.2.2 AC internal impedance or DC internal resistance.
9.2.3 Connection diagram. Clearly identify where the con--
nections are to be made to the equipment being monitored.
9.2.4 Nominal value of measuring signal.
9.2.5 Maximum measurement current.
9.2.6 Nominal contact voltage and current ratings for inte-
gral relays per 6. 7.
9.2.7 A note advising that system leakage capacitance may
influence the measurement.
9.2.8 A note advising that only one monitor may be con-
nected per galvanic circuit and that one monitor must be
disconnected when two ungrounded systems containing inde-
pendent monitors are coupled together.
10. Keywords
10.1 AC electrical systems; DC components; DC electrica
systems; electrical insulation monitoring; electrical systems
ohmic insulation faults
F1669M -12
COPYRIGHT/).
1153
6 Designation: F1685- 00 (Reapproved 2006)
--ual
7
INTERNATIONAL
Pressure-Reducing Manifolds for Air or Nitrogen Systems
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the design, construction, test-
and operating requirements for pressure-reducing mani-
folds for air or nitrogen systems, referred to herein also as
manifolds. The term manifold constitutes the combination of
all components and piping between, and including, the inlet
and outlet ports (see 1 and 2).
as the standard. The values given in parentheses (metric SI
units) are for information only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F992 for Valve Label Plates
Fl508 Pressure Relief Valves
for Steam, Gas, and
F1795 Specification for Valves for Air or
B 1.1 U nifiedScrew Threads
3
MIL-STD-167- Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
!--Environmental and II-- Inter-
MIL-STD-740 Airborne and Structureborne Noise Measure-
ments and Criteria of Shipboard bq:mpme:riC
MS 16142 Boss, Gasket Seal Thread Tube
Standard Dimensions
MIL-S-9()1 Shock Tests, HJ.
and
1
and Marine Technology and is under the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
F25.1.l on Machinery and Piping Systems.
Current edition approved May 2006. Published May 2006.
approved in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as Fl685
l0.1520/Fl685-00R06.
2
the ASTM website.
" Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
4
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze,
4
2.4 Government Drawings:
Nawll Sea Systems Command (NA.VSEA):
NAVSEA 803-1385884 Unions, and f\a<imers
and Socket 6000 PSL WOG and OXY
NAVSEA 803-1385943 Unions, Silver 3000 PSL
WOG, IPS, for UT Inspection
4
.
NAVSEA 803-1385946 Unions, Bronze, Silver
WOG for UT Inspection, 1500 PSI, WOG
4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 accuracy of regulation-the amount by which the
downstream pressure may vary when the manifold is set at any
pressure within the required set pressure range and is subjected
to any combination of inlet pressure, flow demand, and
ambient temperature variations within the specified limits.
3.1.2 bubble-tight-No visible leakage over a 5-min period
using either water submersion or the application of bubble fluid
for detection.
3.1.3 external leakage-Leakage from the manifold which
escapes to atmosphere.
3.1.4 flow rate demand-the amount of flow demanded at
any time by the system downstream of the manifold.
3.1.5 flow rate demand range--the range over which the
flow demand can vary.
3.] .6 hydrostatic shell test pressures-the hydrostatic test
pressures that the inlet and outlet sections of the manifold are
recJmJred to withstand without damage. Manifold is
not application of shell test pressure, but the
manifold must meet all performance requirements after the
shell test pressure has been removed.
3.1.7 inlet operating pressure range over which
the inlet pressure to the manifold can vary under any
conditions which the manifold can be to
in service.
lower pressure
escape to
3.1. 9 inlet and outlet pressure
of the manifold. These rated pressures are selected from
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C?OO, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United Stales
1154
F1685 - 00 (2006)
UPSTREAM
BLEED
VAL. VE
PRESSURE
_ _.../ PRES SURE
MANlFOl.D
INLET
lNLET
STOP
VALVE
BYPASS
THROTTLE
VALVE
.;F IEF
MANJFOL 0
OUTLET

\GAUGE
JSOLATION
VALVE
FIG. 1 Manifold Configuration
UPSTREAM ,
BLEED VALVE'
INLET STOP VALVE
MANIFOLD
INLET
/
INLET STOP VALVE /
PRESSURE
REDUCING
VALVE
DOWNSTREAM
VALVE
."
----- .. PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
GAUGE
ISOLATION
VALVE
OUTLET STOP VALVE
DOWNSTREAM
BLEED VALVE
FIG. 2 Manifold Configuration
apJJilc:abJle pressure ratings (see 4.2) and in the
information (see Section 5). The inlet pressure
is from the manifold inlet up to and mcmamg
seats of the outlet stop valve and bypass throttle valve. The
outlet pressure is from the outlet side of the
seats of the outlet stop valve to the manifold outlet and the
throttle valve to the manifold outlet.
3.1.1 0 manual valves--these are all the op1erated.
valves in the manifold which include
valves and valves. The handwheel-operated
valves are the inlet and outlet stop valves, and the
throttle The valves are the upstream
and downstream bleed valves and the gage isolation valve. The
req!tnrerrients for any valves installed in the
valve are covered under 6.5.1.
3.1.11 maximum rate demand-the maximum amount
of flow demanded of the manifold by the downstream system.
3.1.12 maximum inlet operating pressure-the
sure supplied to the inlet of the manifold in service.
pres-
1155
3.1.13 maximum outlet operating pressure-the
pressure at the manifold outlet in service. This is established
the accumulation pressure of the valve.
3.1.14 maximum set pressure-the
which the manifold can meet the peJ1oJrm:mc:e
3.1.15 minimumjlow rate demand-the minimum flow rate
demanded of the manifold by the downstream system.
3.1.16 minimum inlet operating pressure-the lowest pres-
sure supplied to the inlet of the manifold in service.
3 .1.17 minimum outlet operating lowest pres-
sure at the manifold outlet in service. This is established by the
accuracy of regulation of the valve.
3.1.18 minimum set pressure-the lowest set pressure at
which the manifold can meet the peJrtoJlTil:anc:e
3 .. 1.19 operating pressures-the pressures within the mani-
fold during service.
cO F1685 - 00 (2006)
3.1.20 pressure-reducing valve-the component of the
manifold which accomplishes automatic regulation of the
downstream pressure. In this component, the upstream pressure
is reduced to the desired downstream pressure.
3.1.21 pressure-reliefvalve-the component of the manifold
which protects the manifold and downstream systems against
downstream over pressurization.
3.1.22 set pressure-the outlet pressure delivered by the
manifold at the time the pressure setting is made. For the
purposes of this specification, it will be assumed that the
setting is made when there is no flow demand on the manifold
("lock-up" condition), and the manifold is at surrounding
ambient temperature.
3.1.23 set pressure range-the range of set pressures over
which the manifold can be adjusted while meeting the perfor-
mance requirements specified.
3.1.24 wide open capacity-the flow rate when a valve is in
a position which presents the least resistance to flow.
4. Classification
4.1 Configuration- Manifolds shall be of the following
configurations and specified in the ordering information (see
5.1).
Configuration 1-1 One reducer, one relief (see Fig. l ).
Configuration 2-1 Two reducers, one relief (see 2).
4.2 Pressure Ratings-Manifolds shall have inlet-rated
pressures and outlet-rated pressures selected from the follow-
ing categories: 400-, 1500-, 3000-, and 6000-psig (2.8-, 10.3-,
20.7-, and 41.4-MPa gage pressure). The inlet and outlet
pressure ratings selected shall be specified in Section 5.
4.3 End Connections-Manifolds shall have inlet and outlet
end connections selected from those listed in Table 1 and
5.1 Ordering documentation for manifolds under this speci-
fication shall include the following information, as required, to
describe the equipment adequately:
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
5.1.2 Size and type of inlet end connection (see 4.3 and
6.4.2),
TABLE 1 Manifold Inlet and Outlet End Connections
UnionA , silver-brazed
UnionA , butt/socket
weld
As specified
Pressure Rating,
lb/in
2
(MPa)
400 (2.8)
1500 (10.3)
3000 (20.5)
6000 (41.4)
As specified
Applicable
Documents
MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type)
803-1385946
803-1385943
803-1385884
As specified
A Only the pertinent dimensions listed in the applicable documents applicable to
the straight thread portion of the thread piece shall apply. Thread pieces shall be
secured to the manifold inlet and outlet blocks using straight threads and a 0-ring
seal design. For the manifold inlet and outlet connections, unless otherwise
specified in Section 5 the tail pieces and the union nuts shall not be furnished-
only the thread pieces shall be furnished. If tail pieces and union nuts are required,
their materials of construction shall be in accordance with the applicable docu-
ments listed above and shall be specified in Section 5.
1156
5.1.3 Size and type of outlet end connection (see 4.3 and
6.4.2),
5.1.4 Size and type of end connections for pressure--
reducing valve and pressure-relief valve,
5.1.5 If tail pieces and union nuts are required (when
required, their material of construction shall be per Table 1 ),
5.1.6 Manifold configuration, inlet and outlet pressure
ings (see 4.1 and 4.2),
5.1.7 Manifold inlet operating pressure range,
5.1.8 Type of mounting required: bottom or back mounting
(see 6.4.3),
5.1.9 Set pressure and set pressure range, if other thar
specified (see 7 .3),
5.1.10 Flow rate demand range (see 7.1, Sl.l.6),
5 .1.11 Accuracy of regulation required, if other than
fied, or if set pressure is below 10 psig (see 7.2),
5.1.12 Relief valve set pressure and accumulation pressun
(if different from Specification F 1508),
5.1.13 Ambient atmospheric conditions: temperature range
chemical contaminants, if any,
5.1.14 Quality of inlet air/nitrogen gas: temperature range
moisture content, oil/lubricant contaminants, if any,
5.1.15 Special tools required (see 6.7),
5.1.16 Tamper-proof lead seal if required (see Specificatio1
F 1795, Section 5),
5.1.17 Supplementary requirements, if any (S1 through S4)
and
5 .1.18 Maximum vibration frequency, if other than s p e i f i ~
(see S 1.1.9).
6. Manifold Construction
6.1 Manifolds shall incorporate the design features specifie,
in 6.2-6.11.
6.2 Materials of Construction-Material requirements
the assemblies in the manifold shall be as specified in
applicable component specifications referenced herein. Mate
rials for all other parts, including the inlet and outlet manifol
blocks, shall be 300 series corrosion-resistant steel (SS30'-
304L, 316, or 316L) or other materials selected to provid
weldability and corrosion resistance without requiring pain
ing, coating, or plating. The inlet and outlet manifold block
shall be weld repairable. Materials for contacting parts shall
selected to minimize electrolytic corrosion and galling. Meta
lie materials shall conform to applicable ASTM specification
Nonmetallic materials shall be compatible with the line mt
dium.
6.3 General Requirements-Manifolds shall incorporate
functional elements shown schematically in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2,
applicable, and delineated below:
(1) Inlet and outlet stop valves,
(2) Upstream and downstream bleed valves (for depressu
ization of all components and fluid cavities.),
(3) Pressure-reducing valve(s),
(4) Pressure-relief valve,
(5) Gauge isolation valve, and
(6) Bypass throttle valve.
All components shall be part of a manifold assembly, as shoVI
in Fig. 3 or Fig. 4, as applicable, which requires only one inl
INLET
PORT
0 F1685- 00 (2006)
OUTLET PORT
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
MAINTENANCE ENVELOPE
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
INLET PRESSURE
MANIFOLD \ REDUCING
BLOCK \ VALVE
INLET
PORT
INLET
MANIFOLD
BLOCK
OUTLET MANIFOLD
BLOCK
NoTE 1-Pictorial representations are for illustrative purposes only and do not imply design.
INLET
STOP VALVE
FIG. 3 Components of a Manifold Assembly
OUTLET
1
MANIFOLD
BLOCK
:OUTLET
STOP VALVE
OUTLET
STOP VALVE
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
MAINTENANCE ENVELOPE
D
FIG. 4 Components of Manifold Assembly
1157
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
SUBPLATE
F1685 - 00 (2006)
and one outlet connection to the main flow path of the piping
system in which it is installed. The inlet and outlet connections
shall be in-line. The manifold shall be fabricated from inlet and
outlet blocks, with interconnecting piping for the pressure"7
reducing valve(s) and bypass throttle valve flow paths. The
manual valves shall be cartridge mounted into the inlet and
outlet manifold blocks as shown in Fig. 3 or Fig. 4, as
applicable. The pressure-reducing valve and the pressure-relief
valve shall be mounted by way of takedown connections in
accordance with Table 1. The manifold shall be capable of
meeting all requirements of this specification and provide
extended reliable operation when protected by a 5-!lm nominal/
absolute filter installed upstream of the manifold inlet
and when subjected to conditions specified in Section 5.
6.4 Design Construction Requirements
6.4.1 Pressure hydrostatic shell test pres-
sures shall be 1.5 times the manifold rated inlet and outlet
pressures.
6.4.2 Connections-The main-line inlet and outlet connec-
tions of the manifold, the inlet and outlet connections of the
pressure-reducing valve(s), the connections for the bypass line,
and the inlet and outlet connection to the pressure-relief valve
shall be takedown joints (unions or other as specified) as
specified in Table 1 based on rated pressures specified. Any
exposed threads shall be protected plastic caps for shipping.
The main-line inlet and outlet connection of the manifold and
the inlet and outlet connection for the
valve(s) shall permit axial adjustment to
installation of the manifold into the piping system and to
facilitate replacement of the pressure-reducing valve(s) with
one of another make or model or which is for some other
reason not dimensionally identical to the originally installed
pressure-reducing valve(s). The axial feature for
the pressure-reducing valve(s) shall be included in that portion
of the takedown joints that are connected to the inlet and outlet
manifold blocks. If unions per Table 1 are for the
valve(s) inlet and outlet connections, the
thread pieces shall be the portions of the unions that are
attached to the pressure-reducing valve(s). The range over
which each of the four adjustable connections noted above can
be adjusted shall be as specified in Table 2. A positive and
permanent means shall be incorporated to ensure that none of
the four adjustable connections can be backed out beyond their
minimum engagement position. The size of the main-line inlet
and outlet connections of the manifold shall be as specified (see
Section 5).
6.4.3 Manifold Mounting-The manifold shall be
structural integrity by means of a subplate provided as part of
the manifold. The subplate shall be an form to provide an
TABLE 2 Adjustable Range of End Connections
Connection Size Nominal Pipe Size NPS
(Dimension Nominal DN)
114 and % (8 and 1 0)
112, %, 1, and 1
1
/4 (15, 20, 25, and
32)
1112 and 2
Minimum Adjustment
of Each
in.
%(10)
1/2 (13)
accurate mounting surface for both back and bottom mounting
and shall be bolted to the inlet and outlet manifold blocks in
such a way as to not interfere with mounting the manifold to a
foundation plate. The manifold shall be drilled and tapped or
through-drilled to allow either bottom mounting or back
mounting as specified (see Section 5). All components shall be
fully and easily accessible for operation, service, or removal
from the manifold.
6.4.4 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ASME
B 1.1. Where necessary, provisions shall be incorporated to
prevent the accidental loosening of threaded parts. The
shall be such that standard wrenches can be used on all external
bolting. Lock wire shall not be used.
6.4.5 Interchangeability-The entire manifold,
components and all associated piece parts, shall have part
number identity and shall be from stock the
manufacturer on a nonselective and random basis. Parts
the same manufacturer's part number shall be inter-
changeable with each other with respect to installation
cal) and performance (function). Physically interchangeable
assemblies, components, and pruts are those that are capable of
being readily installed, removed, or without altera-
tion, misalignment, or damage to parts being installed or
adjoining parts. Fabrication operations such as
drilling, reaming, bending,
not be required.
6.4.6 Nonmetallic Element
Nonmetallic elements, including but not limited to, seat
poppet seat inserts, cushions, and 0-rings, shall be treated as
separately identified and readily replaceable parts.
6.4.7 Pressure Gage-The manifold shall be
a 1/4-in. (DN 8) threaded gage connection port to
attachment of a pressure gage for the outlet pressure.
The gage connection under all operating conditions shall be
located to measure accurately pressure at the manifold outlet
connection when using either the pressure-reducing valve or
the bypass throttle valve to control flow. A gage isolation valve
shall be provided in the manifold.
1158
6.4.8 Bleed Valves-Bleed valves as shown in and
2 shall be provided to allow depressurization and
components.
6.5 Component Requirements:
6.5.1 Pressure-Reducing Valve-Pressure-reducing valve(s)
incorporated in the manifold shall be in accordance with
Specification F1795, Type I construction. The pressure
shall be in accordance with 4.2 and shall equal the manifold
inlet pressure rating.
6.5 .1.1 Pressure reversal-The manifold shall withstand,
without damage, a condition in which the
valve is to a maximum reverse pressure differential.
This can occur where the maximum set pressure the
valve outlet, the
element is deactivated if it is a
valve, the set spring adjustment is backed off
and if a loaded valve, the
dome charge is vented off completely), and inlet pressure
vented off.
F1685 - 00 (2006)
6.5.2 Pressure-Relief Valve-The requirements and defini-
tions for the pressure-relief valve incorporated in the manifold
shall. be as in Specification Fl508.
6.5.3 Manual Valves-The requirements for the manual
valves incorporated in the manifold shaH be as specified in
6.5.3.1-6.5.3.6.
6.5.3.1 manual valves shall be
mounted into the manifold blocks.
6.5.3.2 Seats-Each manual valve shall a non-
metallic feature for shutoff.
6.5.3.3 Handwheel operating
be
in either direction.
6.5.3.5 Pressurization rate-All manual shall be
of to limit the rate downstream
pressure volume (with maximum
pressure um;tream gage per
second. Downstream volumes for this
rec;1uirement shall be taken as the amJllc:able
and test purposes, a stop valve not more ten
diameters downstream of the manifold outlet connection shall
be assumed.
6.5.3.6 throttle valve-The bypass throttle valve
shall be to pass full-rated flow of the manifold and
control the outlet pressure at all flow demands and inlet
pressures within the range of the manifold.
6.6 MGtnl!Ota r.nvel<JTJe Dimensions--Manifold di-
spe;cltled in 3 or 4 and 3,
manifold shall direct ac-
cess for and of all internal
parts and subassemblies when mounted for operation
and installed into the system. Maintenance shall
require standard tools to the maximum extent possible.
special tools required for maintenance shall be identified and
shall be supplied when ordered (see Section 5).
6.8 Reversibility-Seating inserts shall not be physically
reversible unless they are also functionally reversible to
incorrect assembly.
6.9 Adjustments--There shall be no adjustments required in
the manifold during or after assembly other than the axial
po:s1t1ommg of the takedown connections for installation of the
pressure-reducing valve into the manifold or installation of the
manifold into the system and the set of the pressure-
valve and the pressure-relief valve.
6.10 Reliability-Periodic maintenance of the manifold or
any of its components shaH not be There shall be no
postassembly lubrication required.
6.1 Ruggedness--To the maximum the
manifold and its components shall be
....... ,, .. malfunction, or as a result of
or other line media contamination or from mishcmd1mg.
7. Performance
7.1 Manifolds shall meet the peJrform:anc:e requirements
7.2-7.7.
7.2 Flow maximum and minimum flow rate
demand required shall be specified (see Section 5) in standard
cubic feet per minute at 60F (15.6C) and 14.7 (101 kPa
absolute). The manifold shall meet the maximum and
minimum flow rate demand requirements, or any intermediate
flow rate demand requirement, and shaH operate without
or chattering under all specified conditions.
xegutalWtl-lVtamtro.ta pressure
shall be maintained within the accuracy of regulation limits
in rfltblc 4 (unless different limits are spe:cltiecl
Section 5) under aU flow rate demand and inlet pressure
conditions specified.
7.4 Range of Set Pressure
Limits )-Unless otherwise
TABLE 3 Dimensions of Manifolds
Manifold Size Distance Between Takedown
(lnletx in.
c 0.12
(ON
%x
1159
D
in.
12 (305)
12114 (311)
12% (318)
13 (330)
13% (337)
i3Y2 (343)
14 (356)
i4%
E 0.06 in.
(2mm)
4 (102)
4% (108)
4Vz (114)
4% (121)
5 (127)
5% (133)
5'12 (140)
5% (146)
6 (152)
6%
F Min
(mm)
G 0.06
(2mm)
5 (127)
5% (137)
61/a (156)
61/4 (159)
6% (169)
7
0 F1685 - 00 (2006)
TABLE 4 Accuracy of Regulation
NoTE 1-For set pressures below 10-psig (69-kPa gage pressure), the
required accuracy of regulation shall be as specified in Section 5.
Set Pressure, psig (kPa Gage
Pressure)
10-25 (69-172)
26-50 (179-345)
51-100 (352-689)
101-250 (696-1724)
251-750 (1731-5171)
751-1000 (5178-6895)
above 1000 (above 6895)
Accuracy of Regulation
(Percent of Set Pressure)
(-301+5 %)
(-20/+5 %)
(-16/+2 %)
(-12/+2 %)
(-10/+2 %)
(-9/+i %)
(-7/+1 %)
pressure range shall be as follows: Where the manifold uses a
mechanical spring, the set pressure shaH be adjustable through
a range of at least 5 % or 2 psi (14 kPa), whichever is greater,
on either side of the specified set pressure. Where the manifold
uses a gas spring (dome loading), the set point shall be
adjustable through a range of at least 25 % or 10 psi (69 kPa),
whichever is greater, on either side of the specified set
pressure.
7.5 Accumulation-The pressure-relief valve shall be sized
to pass at the maximum inlet pressure the wide open capacity
of the pressure-reducing valve, or the wide open capacity of the
by-pass throttle valve, whichever is greater, and limit the
downstream pressure to the accumulation pressure. The accu-
mulation (overpressure) limits shall be per Specification
F1508.
7.6 Seat Tightness-Handwheel-operated valves shall be
bubble-tight in both directions when closed with a force not
exceeding that specified in 6.5.3.3 (or the manufacturers'
recommendations, when less). The pressure-reducing valve
shall meet the seat tightness requirements of 8.5. Where
necessary, leakage measurement shall start after temperature
stabilization.
7.7 External Leakage-Manifold external leakage shall be
bubble-tight at operating pressure conditions over a 5-min
period.
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each manifold shall pass the tests outlined in 8.2-8.6.
8.2 Visual Examination-The manifold shall be examined
visually to determine conformance with the ordering data,
interface dimensions, and workmanship without disassembly.
8.3 Hydrostatic Shell Test-The manifold shall be hydro-
statically tested by applying pressures equal to 1.5 times the
manifold rated inlet and outlet pressures to the inlet and outlet
ports, respectively, to check the structural integrity of the
manifold. Pressure shall be applied for 5 min. Air or nitrogen
may be used in lieu of water providing appropriate safety
precautions are taken to minimize the risk associated with the
use of a compressible fluid. There shall be no external leakage,
permanent distortion, or structural failure.
8.4 Relief-Valve Lift Test-Pressure at the pressure-relief
valve inlet shall be increased until the pressure-relief valve
lifts. Pressure shall then be decreased until the pressure-relief
valve reseats. The pressure-relief valve shall lift and reseat
1160
within the limits specified in Specification F1508. There shall
be no evidence of operational instability or damage to the
pressure-relief valve.
8.5 Seat Tightness Test-Handwheel-operated valves shall
be seated with a torque not exceeding that specified in 6.5.3.3
(or the manufacturers' recommendations, when less). Air, at
the maximum inlet operating pressure each valve is subjected
to in service, shall be used for seat leakage tests, using bubble
fluid or immersing the outlet, or a line from the outlet, under
water. The outlet stop valve shall also be tested in the
outlet-to-inlet direction, applying a pressure at the outlet of the
valve equal to the maximum outlet-section rating of the
manifold. Pressure-reducing valves shall be tested with an inlet
pressure equal to the inlet rated pressure of the manifold.
Pressure-relief valves shall be tested at the reseat pressure
applicable to their setting in accordance with Specification
F1508. None of the valves shall show visible evidence of
leakage over a 5-min period. The following procedure shall be
used to check the pressure-reducing valve seat tightness: The
valve shall be isolated downstream. The dead-ended volume
shall be tight and shall not exceed ten diameters of downstream
pipe. It shall be monitored with bubble fluid to assure tightness.
With full-rated inlet pressure, there shall be no detectable rise
in the outlet pressure over a 15-min period after manifold
temperature stabilizes.
8.6 External Leakage Test-Air shall be applied at the
appropriate rated pressure to each section of the manifold.
External leakage shall be checked using bubble fluid or by
submerging the manifold in water. There shall be no visible
external leakage over a 5-min period.
9. Marking
9.1 Identification Plate--An identification plate of
corrosion-resistant metal in accordance with Specification
F992; Types I, II, III, or IV shall be permanently attached to the
manifold and shall include the following information (some or
all information may instead be stamped or etched on the
manifold blocks):
9 .1.1 Manufacturer's name,
9.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue
9.1.3 Nominal operating conditions (inlet pressure, set pres-
sure, and flow capacity), and
9.1.4 Manufacturer's model/part number.
9.2 Component Marking-The pressure-reducing valve,
pressure-relief valve, and each manual valve shall be marked
or have an identification plate listing the manufacturer's name
and model/part number.
9.3 Handwheel-Operated Valve Marking- Each
handwheel-operated valve shall be clearly marked to show its
function in the manifold (for example, "Inlet Stop Valve,
"Outlet Stop Valve," and "Bypass Throttle Valve") and direc-
tion of operation of the handwheel movement to open or close
the valve.
F1685 - 00 {2006)
specification are satisfied. This system shall also ensure that all
manifolds will perform in a similar manner to those represen-
tative manifolds subjected to original testing for determination
of the operating and flow characteristics.
tion tests and inspect the manifolds in the manufacturer's plant
to the extent specified on the purchase order.
11. Keywords
11.1 air systems; nitrogen systems; pressure-reducing
manifolds
One or more of the following supplementary requirements S1, S2, S3, or S4 shall be applied only
requirements shall be agreed upon in writing by the manufacturer and purchaser. Supplementary
requirements shall in no way negate any requirement of the specification itself. - - -
Sl. Initial Qualification Testing
S 1.1.11 and delineated in the ordering data. The tests may be
conducted on representative manifold sizes and pressure
classes to qualify all sizes and pressure classes of manifolds,
provided the manifolds are of the same type and design.
Evidence of prior approval of these tests is acceptable.
S 1.1.1 Examination Before Testing-The manifold shall be
examined visually to determine conformance with the ordering
data, interface dimensions, and workmanship without disas-
sembly.
S 1.1.2 Relief-Valve Accumulation Test-The pressure-relief
valve shall be tested for two conditions of accumulation
capacity: (1) full-open pressure-reducing valve and (2) full-
open bypass valve. Maximum inlet operating pressure shall be
maintained at the manifold inlet during this test. For the
pressure-reducing valve portion, close the bypass valve, and
block or otherwise modify the pressure-reducing valve to the
wide-open fail condition. For the bypass valve portion, the
pressure-reducing valve shall be isolated and the bypass valve
fully opened. Under either condition, downstream pressure rise
shall not exceed the accumulation pressure specified in Speci-
fication Fl508.
S 1.1.3 Bypass Throttle Valve Functional Test-Minimum
inlet operating pressure shall be maintained at manifold inlet.
The pressure-reducing valve shall be isolated. The bypass
throttle valve shall be opened until highest set pressure is
maintained at maximum flow rate demand. Increase inlet
pressure to maximum, then vary flow demand throughout the
flow range of the manifold and verify ability of the bypass
throttle valve to permit maintaining delivered pressure at the
set point in a smooth, accurate manner.
S 1.1.4 Bypass Throttle Valve Cycle Test-With maximum
inlet pressure operating upstream, the bypass throttle valve
shall be cycled 100 times. There shall be no degradation to
performance or evidence of damage or excessive wear. A cycle
shall consist of a full opening and closing of the valve.
1161
S 1.1.5 Pressure Reversal Test -The manifold shall be
tested to determine the susceptibility to damage when sub-
jected to pressure reversal as specified in 6.5. 1.1. It shall be set
up with maximum inlet operating pressure and maximum set
pressure. A separate means shall be included to insure that
there is no loss of downstream pressure during this test. The
reference load shall then be removed from the pressure-
reducing valve set-point mechanism (if the pressure-reducing
valve is spring loaded, all spring compression shall be backed
off, if it is gas dome loaded, all dome charge shall be released).
The inlet pressure shall then be released from the manifold, and
this condition (no load on the pressure-reducing valve set point
mechanism, zero pressure applied to the inlet side of the
pressure-reducing valve seat, and maximum set pressure ap-
plied to the outlet side of the pressure-reducing valve seat)
shall be maintained for a period of not less than 1 h. There shall
be no leakage from the outlet to the inlet of the manifold. There
shall be no evidence of damage to the pressure-reducing valve
or any other portion of the manifold and no degradation to the
performance capability of the manifold.
S 1.1.6 Accuracy of Regulation Test-The manifold shall be
tested for accuracy of regulation at each inlet pressure/set
pressure combination defined below. At Condition D, flow
shall be varied over the full range of flow rate demand as
specified in Section 5. For Conditions A, B, and C, full-flow
range testing is not required.
Condition Inlet Pressure Set Pressure
A maximum minimum
B minimum minimum
c maximum maximum
D minimum maximum
During each sequence (changing from Condition A to
Condition B and changing from Condition C to Condition D),
no alteration shall be made to the set pressure adjustment, or
any other portion of the manifold, and the accuracy of
regulation shall be maintained as required by Table 4. There
shall be no instability or other evidence of unsatisfactory
operation of the manifold during these tests. Flow in each
condition shall be maintained long enough to demonstrate that
the above requirements are met.
F1685- 00 (2006)
S 1.1. 7 Pressurization Rate Test-With the rated inlet pres-
sure upstream, and a depressurized downstream volume as
specified in 6.5.3.5, each handwheel-operated valve shall be
operated to demonstrate its ability to meet the pressurization
rate as specified in 6.5.3.5.
S 1.1.8 Shock Test-The manifold shall be subjected to and
meet the high-impact shock tests for Grade A, Class I as
specified in MIL-S-901 pressurized with water, air, or nitrogen.
The inlet port shall be pressurized to the maximum inlet
operating pressure and the outlet port pressurized to the
maximum outlet operating pressure. There shall be no struc-
tural damage to the manifold or any components. There shall
be no degradation to the performance capability of the mani-
fold. Momentary loss in pressure is permissible.
S 1.1.9 Vibration Test-The manifold shall be vibration
tested in accordance with Type I of MIL-STD-167-1 pressur-
ized with air or nitrogen. The inlet port shall be to
the maximum inlet operating pressure and the outlet port
pressurized to the maximum outlet operating pressure. At
frequencies up to and including 33 Hz (unless otherwise
specified in the ordering information, Section 5), there shall be
no resonance in the range of frequency tested. There shall be no
structural damage or degradation to the performance capability
of the manifold.
S 1.1.1 0 Noise Test-The manifolds shall be tested for
airborne noise in accordance with MIL-STD-7 40-1. The noise
(sound pressure level) shall not exceed 85 dBA observed at
1-m distance from the manifold.
S 1.1.11 Posttest Examination-The manifold shall be dis-
assembled and examined for any evidence of excessive wear,
degradation, or impending or breakage.
S2. Technical Data and Certification Ke:oui:reJments
S2.1 Drawings-Assembly drawings of the entire manifold
and each component which clearly depict design shall be
The following shall also be included as part of the
drawings content:
S2.1.1 Bill of material listing specification, grade, condi-
tion, and any other data required to identify fully the properties
of the materials proposed. This shall include identifications,
material and size designations, shore hardness, and any other
data necessary to the parts fully.
S2.1.2 In cases in which standard commercial or
parts are or can be used, these shall be appropriately identified.
S2.1.3 Outline dimensions, disassembly space, location, and
size of end connections and mounts.
S2.1.4 Estimated weight and center of (vertical,
longitudinal, and transverse).
S2.1.5 Recommended assembly torques or equivalent pro-
cedures for making up all joints and threaded assemblies.
S2.1.6 The following information shall be included:
S2.1.6.1 Regulation:
(1) Set pressure and adjustable range.
(2) Specified operating conditions-range of inlet pressures
and required range of capacity.
(3) Fail-open capacity (for purposes of
valve sizing) of the pressure-reducing valve.
( 4) Wide-open capacity (for purposes of pressure-relief
valve sizing) of bypass throttle valve.
S2.1.6.2 Overpressure Protection for Pressure-Relief Valve:
(l)Set pressure and adjustable range.
(2) Rated capacity-accumulation.
(3) Reset pressure.
S2.2 Technical Manuals-The following shall be included
as part of the manual contents:
S2.2.1 The assembly drawings for the manifold, supple-
mented by additional illustrations where necessary to illustrate
operation and maintenance adequately. These additional illus-
trations may consist of blowouts or partial or full sections and
may eliminate extraneous lines and details to the
interaction of parts.
S2.2;2 Table wrench sizes and assembly torques (or
other equivalent procedures) for making up all joints and
threaded assemblies.
S2.2.3 Detailed disassembly and reassembly procedures. In
addition to a section providing for the complete
disassembly and reassembly of the manifold, maintenance and
troubleshooting sections shall contain, or refer to, only the
limited disassembly and reassembly required to accomplish
each particular This is intended to reduce the
possibility of unnecessary disassembly and unnecessary distur-
bance of adjustments when performing specific or limited
maintenance or troubleshooting operations.
S2.2.4 Adjustment procedures for the pressure-reducing and
pressure-relief valve. For the pressure-relief valve, provide the
approximate relationship between turns of the adjusting screw
and set pressure change.
1162
S2.3 Certification -Certification shall be provided indicat-
S3. Assurance
S3.3 Organization-An organizational chart
relationship between management and the en:gm:eeJrin:g,
manufacturing, construction, inspection, and
and associate the various organizational groups with
form of organization the manufacturer considers
have a sufficiently well-defined responsibility and the <>nth..-u1h,
and the freedom to identify
and to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
S3.4 Review of Assurance System-The manufac-
of the quality assurance system.
S3.5 Calculations, and Specification
Control--The manufacturer's assurance system shaH
include to ensure that the latest applicable rln1winf1!'<.
F1685 - 00 (2006)
req1Uiierr1ents and that all purchase orders give full details of the
S3.7 Material Control -The manufacturer shall include a
identified and that any documentation is
present, identified to the material, and verifies to
the The material control system shall
ensure the intended used
The manufacturer shall maintain control of material
process system that identifies status of
thrnno-ht>llt all stages manufacture.
M(lnU!ta<;turmF? Control-The manufacturer shall en-
arrange an
Control manufacturer's
shaH describe the fabrication trtcluiCiHlg
S3.10 -The quality control system
that conforms to
to the
to the mspec:tw>n authority if reo1mrecL
made use nondestructive examination, as necessary, to
ensure that material and components comply with the
Nondestructive examinations shall be authorized
by their or qualified by a
both, and their autho:nz<ltlcms.fqu.alttlc<:ttlon
made available to the mspe<;tlcm
S3.12
tablish
with the
S3.13 Heat Treatment-The manufacturer shall
that all
treatment
Status -The manufacturer shall maintain
a system for the status of material
all of manufacture and shall be able
material.
Measurement and Test
--The shaH control, and
mallnt.am mspec:uon, and test eqt1iptne11t to be used
in '""'''
1
u,n..-.. to the Such
1163
S3.17 Sample Forms-The forms used in the quality
control system and any detailed procedures for their use shaH
be available for review. The written description of the
S3.18 Inspection manufacturer shall make
available to the mspe<;tlcm
current copy of the written
assurance system. The manufacturer's
tern shall for the mspe(;tlom '"'th.n.nj"
turer' s plant to have access to all
spc:ciiiCa!tlons, process sheets,
the authority to its duties in accordance
with this supplementary The manufacturer may
for SUCh access the Im;pectlon ""'h'""'h'
ongmtals or copies of such documents.
S4. Material, Design, and Performance
ations
herein, all equipment, material, and articles in the
..., .. covered by this specification shall be new and may be
to the maximum extent without the
intended use. The term "recovered materials" means materials
rey)ro>ce:sse:d to become a source of raw materials, as opposed to
raw materials. None of the above shall be to
this specification unless otherwise specified.
S4.2 threads shall not be used in the manifold.
S4.3 Manifold performance shall not be affected
the line and ambient conditions:
S4.3.1 Ambient Atmospheric Conditions:
S4.3.1.1 Temperature: 40 to l20F (4 to 49C).
S4.3.1.2 Moisture content: to contain-
salt-laden moisture.
S4.3.2 Quality of Inlet Air/Gas-Air or moisture
content between the limits of +20F ( -7C) to -60F
de,;vm)mt at 4500-psig (31.0-MPa gage pressure). Particulate
contamination: Protected by 5-!-HD absolute
filtration.
S4.4 Connections--The
1
/4-in. (DN8) threaded gage
connection (see 6.4.7) shall be in accordance with MS 16142.
0 F1685 - 00 (2006)
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either tor revision of this standard or for additional standards
COPYRIGHT/).
1164
~ ~ u a l

INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Transition and Performance of Marine Software Systems
Maintenance
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide covers a recommended plan for transition
and acceptance of marine software that was developed by an
activity other than the maintaining activity. It further provides
a recommended iterative process model for managing and
executing software maintenance activities.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E622 Guide for Developing Computerized Systems (Discon-
tinued 2000) (Withdrawn 2000?
E919 Specification for Software Documentation for a Com-
puterized System (Discontinued 2000) (Withdrawn 2000)
3
E10l3 Terminology Relating to Computerized Systems
(Withdrawn 2000)
3
2.2 IEEE Standards:
4
100 Standard Dictionary for Electrical and Electronic Tenns
610 Standard Glossary of Software Engineering Terminol-
ogy
I 063 Standard for Software User Documentation
1074 Standard for Developing Software Life Cycle Pro-
cesses
1219 Standard for Software Maintenance
2.3 ANSI Standards:
5
Q9000-3 Quality Management and
Quality Assurance Standards: Guidelines for the Applica-
tion of ANSI/lSO/ASQC Q 9001 to the Development,
Supply and Maintenance of Software
1
Computer Applications.
Current edition approved May 1, 2008. Published July 2008. Originally approved
in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as Fl7l6- 96(2002). DOI:
1 0.1520/F1716-96R08.
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
4
Available from Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE),
445 Hoes Ln., P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331, http://www.ieee.org.
5
ANSI/ISO/ ASQC Q 9001 Quality Systems-Model for
Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production,
Installation and Servicing
6
MlL-STD 498 Software Development and Documentation
3. Terminology
3.1 The terminology used in this guide is defined in Termi-
nology E 1 013 and Guide E622.
3.2 Other computer-related terms in this guide are defined in
IEEE 100 and IEEE 610.12.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This guide provides a recommended transition plan for
a marine software maintainer, when the maintainer is other
than the supplier, to develop the capability to make extensive
changes or extensions to the programs. Further, this guide
provides a recommended interactive process model for man-
aging and executing software maintenance activities. This
guide applies principally to the marine software that requires
design effort and for which the product requirements are stated
principally in performance terms.
5. Software Transition Plan
5.1 The software transition plan is developed when the
software support concept calls for transition of responsibility
from the developer to a separate support agent. The software
transition plan identifies hardware, software, and other re-
sources needed for life cycle support of deliverable software
and describes the developer's plans for transitioning deliver-
able items to the support agent. The developer shall identify all
software development resources needed by the support agent to
fulfill the support concept specified in the contract. The
developer shall develop and record plans identifying these
resources and describing the approach to be followed for
transitioning deliverable items to the support agent. The
planning shall include the following.
6
www.dodssp.daps.mil.
1165
F1716 - 96 (2008)
5.1.1 Software Support Resources-Description of the re-
sources needed to support the deliverable software. These
resources shall include items needed to control, copy, and
distribute the software and its documentation, and to specify,
design, implement, document, test, evaluate, control, and
distribute modifications to the software. This includes needed
compilers, linkers, locators, mappers, and tools such as con-
figuration utilities. In addition, include as applicable, any
special operating systems.
5 J .2 Facilities-Description of the facilities needed to
support the deliverable software. These facilities may include
rooms, power and so
forth.
5.1.3 Hardware-Identification and of the hard-
ware and a">sociated documentation needed to support the
deliverable software. This hardware may include computers,
pex]piler:al hardware simulators, stimulators, emu-
and non-computer eq111pme:nt.
models, versions, and configurations.
5.1.3.2 Rationale for the selected hardware.
5.1.3.3
for each item, as ap]ph!:;at>le.
5.1.3.4 Identification of each hardware item and document
as any item that will be delivered to the
support agent, any item the support agent is known to have, any
item the support agent must acquire, or other description of
status.
5.1.3.5 When items must be acquired, information about a
current source of supply, including whether the item is cur-
available and whether it is expected to be available at the
time of delivery.
5.1.3.6 Information about manufacturer support, licensing,
and data whether the item is currently
the manufacturer, whether it is expected to be
supported at the time of whether licenses will be
assu1;rted to the support agent, and the terms of such licenses.
5.1.3.7
ware and associated documentation needed to support the
deliverable software. This software may include computer-
aided software engineering (CASE) tools, data in these tools,
compilers, test tools, test data, simulations, emulations, utili-
ties, configuration management tools, databases and data files
and other software. The description shall include:
5 .1.4.1 names, identification numbers, version
numbers, release numbers, and configurations, as applicable.
5.1.4.2 Rationale for the selected software.
5.1.4.3 Reference to manuals for instructions
for each item, as apjpll,:;at>le.
5.1.4.4 Identification of each software item and document as
any item that will be delivered to the
support agent, any item the support agent is known to have, any
item the support agent must acquire, or other of
status.
5 .1.4.5 When items must be acquired, information about a
current source of supply, including whether the item is cur-
rently available and whether it is expected to be available at the
time of delivery.
5.1.4.6 Information about vendor support, licensing, and
data rights, including whether the item is currently supported
by the vendor, whether it is expected to be supported at the
time of delivery, whether licenses will be assigned to the
support agent, and the term of such licenses.
5 .1.4. 7 Privacy considerations and limitations.
5.1.4.8 Certification of virus protection measures taken
including identification and version of software used.
5.1.5 Other Documentation--Identification of any
documentation needed to support the deliverable software.
This list will include, for plans, reports, studies,
specifications, design descriptions, test
reports, user/operator manuals, and support manuals for the
deliverable software, the following:
5.1 .5 .1 Names, identification numbers, version numbers,
and release numbers as
5.1.5.2 Rationale for each document.
5.1.5.3 Identification of each document as
furnished, any item that will be delivered to the support agent,
any item the support agent is known to have, any item
support agent must acquire, or other description of status.
5.1.5.4 When a document must be acquired, information
about where to acquire it.
5.1.5.5 Information about and data rights.
5.1.5.6 Privacy and limitations.
5.1.5.7 Beta Testing and Verification and Validation
Records-Records of Beta Testing and Verification and Vali-
dation shall be provided if applicable.
5.1.5.8 Description of significant problems and changes
made during the development process.
5.1.6 Personnel-Description of the personnel needed to
support the deliverable software, including anticipated number
of and types and levels of skills and expertise.
5 .1.7 Other Resources-Identify any other resources needed
to support the deliverable software, including consumables.
5.1.8 Interrelationship of Components-Identify interrela-
tlo.J1Shlps of the components identified above. may be
used to show interrelationships.
5 .1. 9 Recommended Procedures-Describe any prclce;ctmes,
including advice and lessons learned, that the may
wish to recommend to the support agent for supporting the
deliverable software and associated support environment.
5.1.10 Training-Describe the developer's plans for train-
ing support personnel to support the deliverable software.
5.1.11 Anticipated Areas of Change-Describe anttclr>ate:d
areas of change to the deliverable software.
5.1.12 Transition Planning-Planning shall be pertorme:d
for all activities to transition the deliverable software to the
support agent. Plans for the deliverable software
to the support agent shall address the t.-.11.-n1v1no
1166
5.1.12.1 The activities to be to transition the
deliverable software to the support activity. These activities
include planning/coordination
items to be delivered to the support agent; IV"'"'"""'o shlPITlCIJlt,
F1716 - 96 (2008)
installation, and checkout of the software support environment;
packing, shipment, installation and checkout of the operational
software; and training of the support personneL
processes of IEEE 1219 are recommended as a model for
software maintenance.
5 .1.12.2 Designation of the roles and for
7. Support Agent Software Process Maturity
each
5.1.12.3 The resources needed to carry out the transition
7.1 The processes of the software support agent are recom-
mended to be certified to at least Level Two as defined in the
activities and which pm1y will each
Software Engineering Institute (SEI)
5.1.12.4 Schedules and milestones for the tran-
Model for Software Version 1.1,
7
equivalent to ANSI/ISO/
sition activities.
Q 9000-3.
5. Procedures for installation and checkout of the
deliverable items of the support environment. 8.
Software Maintenam:e
8.1 systems; marine tecnn<)logy; soft-
ware; software maintenance; software support
7
Available from Research Access, Inc. (RAJ), 800 Vinial Street, Pittsburgh, PA
ASTl\11 International takes
in this standard. Users of this
mentioned
and the risk
if not revised, Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
res,por1sible technical committee, which you If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTl\11 at the above
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTl\11 website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT!).
1167
a Designation: F1718-01 (Reapproved 2006)
.

INTERNATIONAL
Rotary Positive Displacement Distillate Fuel Pumps
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements applicable to
the design and construction of rotary positive displacement
distillate fuel pumps for shipboard use.
1.2 Lineal dimensions and units of force in this specification
are expressed as inches and pounds respectively. A companion
metric standard is in the process of preparation.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A36/A36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A53/A53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
A 106/ A 106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
Al93/Al93M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
A194/A194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for High Pressure or Service,
or Both
A240/ A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and for Pressure
A276 for Stainless Steel Bars and
A312/ A 312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
A354 Specifi.cation for Quenched and
Bolts, Studs, and Other Threaded Fasteners
A434 Specification for Steel Bars,
Cold-Finished, and T"''-n""''''"rl
or
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee on Ships
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee I on
approved in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as Fl718-01. DOl:
10.1520/F1718-01R06.
2
the ASTM website.
A449 for Hex Screws, Bolts and Studs,
Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
SpecJttlc:atlon for Carbon and Steel Nuts
for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
-rtard.enmg Stainless Steel Bars and
Screws
Stainless
Steel Bars
A 743/ A 743M for Iron-Chromium,
A747/A747M Specification for Steel Stainless,
Sp,ec:ttlc:atJ.on for Aluminum-Bronze Sand
B 150/B 150M Specification for Aluminum Bronze Rod, Bar,
and Shapes
B209 Specification for Aluminum and
Sheet and Plate
for Aluminum and Ex-
truded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
Bnl fur
Sand for
for Rubber and Rubber Latices-
for Rubber Products in Auto
motive ACIPltcat:JOllS
l Practice for Commercial Pw.:k.a.guu!
Classification for Nonmetallic Gasket Materi
als
F467 for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use
F468 for Nonferrous Bolts, Screws,
and Studs for General Use
for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex
Screws, and Studs
for Stainless Steel Nuts
for Stainless Steel Socket Head
upv\.lH'-'<.HHHI for Stainless Steel Socket-Set Screws
So,ecttlc:lt!cm for Steel Socket Set Screws
1168
0 F1718 - 01 (2006)
Fl5ll Specification for Mechanical Seals for Shipboard
Pump Applications
2.2 ANSI Standard:
3
B 16.24 Flanges and
2.3 ANSI/HI Standard:
3
Pump Tests
2.4 AMS Standards:
4
3215 Acrylonitrile Butadiene (NBR) Rubber Aromatic Fuel
Resistant 65-75
4676 Bars and Corrosion Resistant, Hot Finished,
Precipitation Hardenable 66.5 NL 3.0 AL, 0.62 Ti, 28 Cu
4677 Bars and Corrosion Resistant Annealed 66.5
Ni, 2.9 AL, 30 Cu
5894 Bars, Sheet, and Plate, Alloy 60 Co, 28 Cr, 4.5 W, 1.15
C, Solution Heat Treated
2.5 ABMA Standards:
5
9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
II Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for RoUer Bearings
2.6 AGMA Standard:
6
390.03 Gear Classification, Materials and Measuring Meth-
ods for Unassembled Gears
7
MIL-STD-167-1 (Ships) Mechanical Vibrations of Ship-
board Equipment (Type 1-Environmental and Type
2-Internally Excited)
MIL-STD-7 40-l Airborne Sound Measurements and
Acceptance Criteria of Shipboard Equipment
MIL-STD-740-2 (Ships) Structureborne Vibratory Accelera-
tion Measurements and Acceptance Criteria of Shipboard
Equipment
7
MIL-N-25027 Nut, Self-Locking, 250F, 450F and 800E
125 KSI FTU, 60 KSI FTU and 30 KSI FTU
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, HI (High Impact) Shipboard Ma-
chinery, Equipment and Systems, Requirements for Navy
MIL-R-83248 Rubber Fluorocarbon Elastomer, High Per-
formance Fluid, and Compression Set Resistant
2.9 International Standards Organization Standards:
3
ISO 9001 Quality Systems and Quality Assurance--Design/
Development, Production, Installation, and Service
ISO 9066 Information Processing
Communication--Reliable Transfer-Part 2: Protocol
Specification
3. Terminology
3 .1 Definitions:
3
4
Warrendale, PA 15096-0001, http://www.sae.org.
Available from American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA), 2025
M Street, NW Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036, http://www.abma-dc.org/.
6
Available from American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA), 500
Montgomery St., Suite 350, Alexandria, VA 22314-1581, http://www.agma.org.
7
1169
3.1.1 capacity, n-the quantity of fluid actually delivered
per unit of time at the rated speed, including both the liquid and
3.1.1.1 Discussion-In the absence of any gas or vapor
entering or forming within the pump, the capacity is equal to
the volume displaced per unit of time, less slip.
3.1.2 capacity, maximum, n-the quantity of fluid delivered
that does not exceed the limit determined by the formula in
4.1 .2.1.
3.1.3 capacity, rated, n-the minimum quantity of fluid
delivered at the specified conditions of discharge pressure, inlet
pressure and viscosity as shown in Table 1.
3.1.4 displacement, n-the volume displaced per revolution
of the rotor(s).
3.1.4.1 Discussion-In pumps incorporating two or more
rotors operating at different speeds, the displacement is the
volume displaced per revolution of the driving rotor. Displace-
ment depends only on the physical dimensions of the pumping
elements.
3.1.5 dry operation, n-a brief run during priming or
stripping with suction and discharge lines unrestricted and
pump chamber wet with liquid but pumping only air or vapor
available from the suction.
3.1.6 efficiency, mechanical, n-the ratio of the pump
power output (hydraulic horsepower) to the pump power input
(brake horsepower) expressed in percent.
3.1.7 efficiency, volumetric, n-the ratio of the pump's
capacity to the product of the displacement and the speed
expressed in percent.
3.1.8 fuel, clean, n-fuel purified for direct use.
3.1.9 fuel, dirty, n-fuel before purification that may contain
water and some solids.
3.1.10 net positive inlet pressure available (NPIPA), n-the
total inlet pressure available from the system at the pump inlet
connection at the rated flow, minus the vapor pressure of the
liquid at the pumping temperature.
3.1.11 net positive inlet pressure required (NPIPR), n-the
net pressure above the liquid vapor pressure at rated flow and
pumping temperature and at the pump inlet connection re-
quired to avoid performance impairment due to cavitation.
3.1.12 pressure, cracking, n-sometimes called set pressure,
start-to-discharge pressure, or popping pressure; the pressure at
which the relief valve just starts to open.
3 .1.12.1 Discussion-This pressure cannot be determined
readily in a relief valve that bypasses the liquid within the
pump.
TABLE 1 Pump Sizes
Size A B C D E F G H
Rated capacity (gpm) 1 0 25 50 75 100 200 300 400
Maximum capacity (gpm) 13 30 59 86 114 221 328 433
Flange rating (lb) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
F1718 - 01 (2006)
3.1.13 pressure, differential, n-the difference between dis-
charge pressure and inlet pressure.
3.1.14 pressure, discharge, n-the total pressure at the
outlet of the pump; discharge pressure is sometimes called
outlet pressure.
3.1.15 pressure, inlet, n-the total pressure at the inlet of the
pump. Inlet pressure is sometimes called suction pressure.
3.1.16 pressure, maximum allowable working, n-the maxi-
mum continuous pressure for which the manufacturer has
designed the equipment (or any part to which the term is
referred) when handling the specified fluid at the specified
temperature.
3.1.16.1 Discussion-This pressure should not be greater
than two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure
containing parts.
3 .1.17 rated condition, n--defined by discharge pressure,
inlet pressure, capacity, and viscosity.
3.1.18 rotary pump, n--a pump con-
sisting of a casing containing gears, screws, lobes, cams, vanes,
shoes, or similar elements actuated by relative rotation between
the drive shaft and the
3.1.18.1 Discussion-There are no inlet and outlet valves.
These pumps are characterized by their close running clear-
ances.
3.1.19 slip, n-the of fluid that leaks through the
internal clearances of a rotary pump per unit of time.
3.1.19.1 Discussion-Slip depends on the internal clear-
ances, the differential pressure, the characteristics of the fluid
handled and in some cases, the speed.
3.1.20 speed, maximum allowable, n-in revolutions per
minute, the highest speed at which the manufacturers' design
3.1.21 speed, minimum allowable, n-in revolutions per
minute, the lowest speed at which the manufacturers' design
3.1.22 ;.,peed, rated, n-the number of revolutions per
minute of the driving rotor required to meet the rated condi-
tions.
3.1.23 suction lift, n-a term used to define a pump's
capability to induce a partial vacuum at the pump inlet.
3.1.24 temperature, maximum allowable, n-the maximum
continuous temperature for which the manufacturer has de-
signed the equipment (or any part to which the term is referred)
when handling the fluid at the specified pressure.
3.1.25 unit, pump, n-the pump and motor assembly; it also
includes a gear box, base, as req1mred.
4. Classification
4.1 Pumps shall be classified as follows:
4.1.1
4.1.1.1 Type II-Screws with
4.1.1.2 III-Screws without
4.1.1.3 Type with
4.1.1.4 Type V-External gear
4.1.1.5 Type VIII-Internal gear, internal rotary lobe.
4.1.1.6 Type X-Vane (sliding).
4.1.1.7 Type XI-Sliding shoe.
4.1.2 Sizes:
4.1.2.1 Standard pump sizes shall be as shown in Table I.
Rated capacity shall be based on 150-psig discharge pressure,
10-psia inlet pressure and 32-SSU viscosity (1034-kPa gauge,
69 kPa absolute, and 2 centistoke, respectively). Rated
equals the minimum capacity. The maximum capacity shall not
exceed the amount determined the following formula:
Qmax Q [ 1 +
(1)
where:
Q the rated (minimum """"''"rH"
maximum capacity,
shall be rounded to nearest whole number.
5.
5.1 is to the infor-
mation to the potential bidders:
5.1.1 Title, number, and date of specification.
5.1.2 Type and size of each pump (see Section
5.1.3 Quantity of each pump type and size (see Table 1).
5.1.4 Mounting configuration (vertical, horizontal).
5 .1.5 Motor characteristics and specifications (see 7. 6 and
motor specification if applicable).
5.1.6 Discharge pressure.
5.1.7 System relief valve cracking pressure and full flow
bypass pressure (see 7.6 and 7.15).
5.1.8 Preservation, packaging, packing, and boxing
ments (see Section 14).
5.1.9 Quantity of drawings (see 13.2).
5.1.10 Quantity of manuals (see 13.3).
5.1.11 Format and quantity of each type of test report (see
12.1.1.4 and S12.3.8).
5.1.12 Shock, noise, and vibration requirements, if appli-
cable (see S12.3).
5.1.13 Types of certified data required (see 12.1.2).
5 .1.14 Instruction plates and locations, if required.
5.1.15 Define shipbuilding specification, if applicable (see
l ).
6. Materials
6.1 Pump component parts shall be constructed of the
materials shown in Table 2.
General Reoniire1ments
7.1 shall be designed to pump distillate fuel and
aviation turbine fuel with a range of 32 to 100 SSU
(2 to 21 eSt).
7.2 shall be capable of sustained operation
7.3 The pumps shall be capable of withstanding environ-
mental vibration induced by machinery and
ment in the range of 4 to 25 Hz.
7.4 The excited vibration levels of the pump shall
not exceed 0.003-in. (0.076-mm) displacement to
1170
F1718 - 01 (2006)
TABLE 2 Materials
Casings, heads and covers Aluminum bronze
Leaded tin bronze
Materials
Shafts
Stainless steel, precipitation hardening
Ni-Cu-AI alloy (Monel K-500)
8148 (C95800)
8584 (C93700)
A747/A747M
AM8 4676, AMS 4677 (N05500)
A564/A564M (817400)
Bi50/B150M (C63000)
Stainless steel
Rotors Aluminum bronze
Leaded tin bronze
Ni-Cu-AI
Austenitic
8584 (C93700)
AMS 4676, AMS 4677 (N05500)
A276 (821800)
Rotor housings, liners, and disks
Leaded tin bronze
A564/A564M (817400)
8584, B505/B505M, or 8271 (C93700)
A564/A564M, /\747/A747M (817400)
AM8 5894
Stellite
Glands
Bedplates and brackets
Timing gears
Stainless steel
Tin bronze
Structural steel
Nitrided steel
Stainless steel
A743/A743M Gr. CF8M (J92900)
8584, 8271, or 8505/B505M (C90300)
8209 Gr. 5086, 8221 Gr. 5086
A53/A53M, A106/A106M
A240/A240M, A269, A312/A312M
A36/A36M
A434 Gr. 4140, C1.BC
A582/A582M (841600)
Studs, bolts, hex head cap screws Medium carbon and alloy steel
Austenitic stainless steel (304/316)
Ni-Cu alloy
A449, A193/Ai93M Gr. 87, A354 Gr. BO
A193/A193M Gr. 8/8M, F593 Grp. 1 or 2
F468 (N04400)
Socket head cap screws
Socket set screws
Nuts, hex
Ni-Cu-AI alloy
Alloy
Austenitic stainless steel
Alloy steel
Carbon steel
F468 (N05500)
A574
F837, Grp. i
F9i2
F880
A563, Gr. B
Medium carbon steel, quenched and tempered
A194/A194M Gr. 8/8M, A563 Gr. OH (equiv. Gr. 8)
A194/A194M Gr. 8/BM, F594, Grp. 1 or 2
Ni-Cu alloy
Flange nuts, hex Carbon steel
Self-locking hex nuts, nylon inserts Carbon steel
F467 (N04400)
A563
A563, Gr. OH (equiv. SAE Gr. 8) and
MIL-N-25027
0-rings and other elastomers Fluorocarbon (Viton, Fluorel, or equal)
F594, Grp. 1 or 2 and MIL-N-25027
01418 Class: FKM, MIL-R-83248, 02000
Gaskets Plant and animal fiber
Fluorocarbon
Vanes and shoes Nitrile (Buna-N or equal)
Leaded tin bronze
during rated when readings are measured on the
pump case near the coupling to the pump shaft.
7.5 At the conditions in 4. L2, the airborne noise level of the
pump unit shall meet the requirements in Table
7.6 The pump shall be driven by an electric motor. The
driver shall be sized for maximum flow at the relief valve full
flow pressure, at maximum viscosity.
7.7 If a reduction gear is between the driver and the
pump, shall be by the pump manufacturer. Reduc-
tion of the American Gear
Manufacturers Association Gear Hand Book Volume 1, AGMA
390.03. Minimum gears are AGMA Class 7 and
31.5
91
63
88
Acceptable Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels
(in dB re 20 IJPa)
125
85
250
82
500
79
1 000 2000 4000 8000
76 73 70 67
1171
Type and Class: HK
F104, I.D. No. P 33138
01418 Class: FKM, 02000
Type and Class: HK
AM8 3215
8584 (C93700)
None
mm1mum acceptable pm10ns are AGMA Class 8. Bearings
shall be designed for a minimum L 10 life of 15 000 h.
7.8 All pump units shall incorporate guards over couplings,
belts, and other external rotating parts. The guards shall
prevent personnel contact with the rotating elements. Guards
shall be enough to support a 200-lb (88-kg) person
stana1mg on it.
7.9 The seating surfaces of mounting bedplates, bracket
plates, or other mounting arrangements shall be
machined.
7.10 Mounting bedp1ates, brackets, and plates shall be
nrr\\THiPrl with holes of sufficient size and quantity to ensure
attachment to shipboard foundation or mounting
structure. Means shall be provided for attaching lifting gear for
installation or removal.
7.11 Vertical units with face mounted motors shall be
arranged so there are four possible orientations of motor driver
to pump. Other drivers are to be oriented per the ordering data.
c4Sltf F1718 - 01 (2006)
7.12 Vertical units that are motor driven shall be assembled
with the conduit box mounted over the pump inlet flange,
7.13 Couplings between pump and driver shall be keyed to
both shafts.
7.14 Alignment between pump and driver shall not exceed
0.005-in. (0.13-mm) offset and 0.0005-in. per inch (0.01-mm
per mm) angularity.
7.15 A relief valve shall not be provided with the pump
7.16 Direction of rotation shall be indicated by an arrow
cast into the pump or by a label plate attached to the pump.
7.17 Inlet and outlet connections shall be indicated by a
label attached to each flange.
8. Pump Design
8.1 The pump inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged.
Nonferrous material flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI
B 16.24 flat face, unless otherwise stated in the ordering data.
Spool piece adapters (threaded and seal welded, or 0-ring
sealed to the pump case on one end and flanged on the other
end) may be furnished to meet the flanged inlet and outlet
requirement.
8.2 The pump cases shall be equipped with vent, drain, inlet,
and outlet gauge connections. The connection shall be straight
thread with 0-ring seal. Tapered pipe thread connections are
prohibited. Small pumps do not require these connections.
8.3 The pumps shall be equipped with radial and thrust
bearings as necessary to counteract any unbalanced forces in
the pump and to ensure that the pump will operate satisfactorily
under the conditions stated in 7 .2.
8.4 The bearings shall be securely fitted (by snap rings or
shoulders or other means) to prevent axial movement. Bearing
housings shall be integral to the pump case or secured to the
pump case in such a manner as to ensure alignment. Usage of
bolts alone is not considered sufficient to ensure alignment.
8.5 The bearings may be sealed and self or externally
lubricated or may be lubricated by the liquid being pumped.
8.6 The rolling contact bearings shall be selected in accor-
dance with AFBMA standards and shall have a minimum LlO
life of 15 000 h as calculated in accordance with AFBMA
Standard 9 or 11 as appropriate.
8.7 The pumps shall be equipped with mechanical shaft
seals in accordance with Specification Fl5ll. The installation
shall ensure that adequate circulation of liquid at the seal faces
occurs to minimize deposit of foreign matter and to provide
adequate lubrication of the seal faces.
8.8 The mechanical seals shall be positioned or located on
the shaft axially, by a positive means such as a stub, step, or
shoulder positively located on the pump shaft. Set screws shall
not be used to position seals or seal sleeves axially. An
antirotation pin shall be provided for shaft sizes 1 in. and larger
to prevent the mechanical seal-mating ring from rotation, if
required by the ordering document.
8.9 The pump head or end covers, or both, shall be located
to the pump case by a means such as rabbet, dowels, or pilot to
ensure proper alignment.
8.10 The rotors and timing gears shall be machined and
positively secured in position to maintain required clearances
and prevent undue wear.
8.11 The fasteners shall be selected from 2, taking
into consideration temperature of operation, mechanical prop-
erties, and corrosion resistance.
8.12 The pumps shall be provided with removable liners in
pump sizes "C" or larger.
9.1 Pumps of each size shall deliver a capacity within the
respective ranges shown in Table 1 when tested at 10-psia
(69-k.Pa absolute) inlet pressure, 150-psi (1034-kPa) discharge
pressure, and a fluid viscosity of 32 SSU.
10. Painting and Coatings
10.1 Painting-External unmachined and nonmating ma-
chined surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a
fuel resistant, anticorrosive (lead and chromate free) primer
and topcoat.
10.2 Painting external surfaces of nonferrous parts and
components is not required but is permissible to avoid exces-
sive masking. Identification and information plates should not
be painted or over sprayed.
11. Equipment Identification Plates
11.1 The identification plates shall be made of brass or
stainless steel and furnished on each pump unit.
11.2 The plates shall be secured to equipment with
corrosion-resistant metallic fasteners.
1172
11.3 The pump unit identification plates shall contain data
as follows:
11.3.2 Manufacturer's model or type and size.
11.3.3 Service application.
11.3.5 Salient design characteristics if applicable.
11.3.5.1 Capacity.
11.3.5.2 Discharge pressure.
11.3.5.3 Pump rated speed (r/min).
11.4 Accessory units, such as the driver and gearbox, shall
have an identification plate in accordance with the applicable
equipment specification. If not specified, the manufacturer
shall use its commercial nameplate.
12. Testing Requirements
12.1 The pump manufacturer shall perform the following
tests at the manufacturing facility or approved test facility.
Equipment for specified tests shall be provided by the manu-
facturer.
12.1.1 Performance Acceptance Tests-Each pump shall
meet the following performance acceptance tests.
0 F1718 - 01 (2006)
12.1.1.1 Mechanical Running Test-The pump shall be
tested at rated condition of 150-psig discharge pressure,
10-psia inlet pressure, and 32 ( + 13/-0) SSU viscosity to
demonstrate that the pump is capable of delivering the required
capacity as shown in Table 1.
12.1.1.2 Noise Tests-For pumps provided with drivers
(units), each unit shall be tested to demonstrate the ability to
meet the requirements of 7.5, if required by 5.l. The unit shall
be operated at the discharge pressure 1.6) for these tests.
12.1.1.3 Hydrostatic Tests-Pressure-containing parts or the
entire pump shall be tested hydrostatically with liquid to 225
psig for 10 min. The assembled pump shall be hydrostatically
tested to 50 psig for 5 min. The tests shall be considered
satisfactory when no leaks are observed. Seepage past blanking
plates and seepage of other sealing apparatus to perform the
test is allowed. Operation of the hydrostatic test pump to
maintain pressure is acceptable.
12.1.1.4 Test Reports-A test report shall be submitted for
each test conducted. Quantity and format as defined in the
ordering data.
12.1.2 Certified Data-Certified performance data shall be
supplied when required. Testing and reporting as defined by
ANSI/HI 3.6 for Type IV, Level A tests. See 5. L 13.
13. Technical Documents
13.1 General-Drawings and technical manuals shall be
submitted in an electronic format that is ISO 9066 compliant.
When this specification is invoked in a shipbuilding specifica-
tion, the shipbuilding specification shall take precedence for
technical documentation requirements. When this specification
is used for spares, replacements, or requirements without
technical documentation requirements, the following para-
graphs apply.
13.2 Drawings:
13.2.1 Unit Drawings-An outline or top drawing of the
unit (pump and driver) shall be furnished. Length, width,
height, mounting details, and connections shall be dimen-
sioned. Brackets, bedplates, guards, couplings, identification
plates, rotation arrows, and so forth shall be shown on the
drawing. The weight and center of gravity (calculated or
actual) of the unit shall be indicated on the drawing.
13.2.2 Pump Drawings-Pump drawings shall include a
sectional assembly drawing. The sectional assembly drawing
shall contain a complete list of materials or reference to a list
of materials drawing, ~ h i h shall be provided. Any subassem-
bly made up of parts that require special alignment or assembly
methods that cannot be disassembled, repaired, and reas-
sembled onboard ship without the use of special tools and jigs
shall be indicated as a subassembly in the list of material. The
weight and center of gravity (calculated or actual) of the pump
shall be indicated on the drawing.
13.2.3 Associated Equipment Drawings-Drawings for
driver and associated equipment shall be in accordance with
their respective specifications.
1173
13.2.4 Peiformance Curves-Complete performance curves
shall be furnished. The curves may be on graphs that can be
printed on notebook size paper. Format as defined by ANSI/HI
3.6.
13.3 Technical Manuals-Instruction books or technical
manuals shall be prepared for each different type or size of
pump installed. A single manual shall contain not more than
one type or size of pump. However, when several pumps are
installed in a ship that are identical except for type of driver,
they may be included in a single manual. Piece (item or find)
numbers of parts referred to in technical manuals shall match
the piece numbers shown on pump drawings. Technical manu-
als shall contain reproductions of pump drawings.
14. Packaging and Preservation
14.1 Packaging-Pumps, pump units, and accessories shall
be packaged per Practice D3951 for warehouse storage and the
following:
14.1.1 Packaging for Domestic Shipment-Pumps, compo-
nents, and units to be used within six months may be packaged
using standard commercial packaging. For storage of greater
than six months or when multiple handlings are anticipated,
package to ensure prevention of pilferage and resistance to
damage from multiple handlings.
14.1.2 Packaging for Overseas Shipment-Packaging and
marking for overseas shipments shall include sufficient protec-
tion from adverse atmospheric conditions and exposure to
worst case handling and storage problems. All products shall
be protected with water-resistant packaging material for the
exterior shipping container, either treated corrugated cartons or
boxes built from mildew resistant lumber, depending on the
weight of the product or the configuration of the load.
14.2 Preservation-Items susceptible to deterioration or
damage from environmental elements shall be preserved.
Noncoated ferrous surfaces shall be preserved.
14.3 Cushioning and Bracing-Items susceptible to damage
during shipment and handling shall be cushioned or shall be
securely braced or blocked, or both, within the shipping
container, to avoid damage.
14.4 Container Marking-Containers, boxes, or packages
shall be clearly marked with the ship to address, contract or
purchase order number, shipping point address, item nomen-
clature, and bar codes. The lifting points and orientation
markings shall be clearly visible.
15. Quality Requirements
15.1 The manufacturer shall have a certified ISO 9001
quality system.
16. Keywords
16.1 distillate fuel pump; fuel pump; positive displacement
pump; pump; rotary pump
0 F1718 - 01 (2006)
there is a conflict between the specifications and this Supplement, requirements of the Supplement
shall take precedence.
S6.2 Materials other than shown in Table 2 are considered
exceptions and are subject to approval by NAVSEA.
S7 .3 The pumps shall be capable of withstanding environ-
ment in the frequency range of 4 to 25 Hz and be in accordance
with MIL-STD-167 -1 Type I. Maximum single frequency
displacement (double amplitude) in the 4- to 15-Hz range is
0.060 in. (1.524 mm) and in the 16- to 25-Hz range is 0.040 in.
(1.016 mm).
S7 .4 The internally excited vibration levels of the pump
shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-167-1Type II and shall
not exceed 0.003-in. (0.076-mm) displacement peak to peak
during rated operation when readings are measured on the
pump case near the coupling perpendicular to the pump shaft.
S7.5 At the conditions in 4.1.2, the airborne noise level of
the pump unit shall meet the requirements in Table 3 (see
MIL-STD-7 40-1 ).
S7.6 At the conditions in 4.1.2, the structureborne noise
level of the pump unit shall meet the requirements in Table
Sl.l (see MIL-STD-740-2).
S7.19 Pumps shall meet the requirements of MIL-S-901 HI
(High Impact) Shock, Grade A.
S8.7 Mechanical shaft seals shall be in accordance with
Specification F1511, including Supplement S 1.
TABLE S1.1 Acceptable Structureborne Vibratory Acceleration
Acceptance Criteria in AdB re 10 1Jmls
2
(Reference MIL-STD-740-2)
Octave Band Center in Hz
31.5 63 125 250 500 1 000 2000 4000 8000
Resiliently 85 88 90 93 95 98 100 103 105
mounted
pumps
Solidly 65 68 70 73 75 78 80 83 85
mounted
pumps
Sl2.3 Qualification Tests-The first pump of each size,
type, or design shall meet the following qualification tests. All
tests shall be performed with the motor size required at rated
condition as indicated in 4.1.2.
Sl2.3.1 Performance Test-The pump shall be tested at
rated condition of 150-psig discharge pressure, 10-psia inlet
pressure, and 32 ( + 13/-0) SSU viscosity to demonstrate that
the pump is capable of delivering the required as
shown in Table 1. Record all test data, including electrical
power input, for comparison to performance retest results (see
S12.3.7).
Sl2.3.2 Vibration Type II Test-The pump shall be tested to
demonstrate the ability to meet the requirements of S7.4.
comparison to performance retest results (see Sl2.3.7).
Sl2.3.3 Noise Tests-The pump shall be tested to demon-
strate the ability to meet the requirements of S7 .5 and S7 .6.
comparison to performance retest results (see Sl2.3.7).
S 12.3 .4 Vibration Type I Test-The pump shall be tested to
demonstrate the ability to meet the requirements of S7.3.
Sl2.3.5 Shock Test-The pump shall be tested to demon-
strate the ability to meet the requirements of S7 .19.
S12.3.6 Endurance Test-The endurance test shall consist
of a running test of not less than 500 h of actual running time
at rated condition. The 500 h shall be broken by at least three
rest periods of 8 h or more each. A minimum of ten start-stop
cycles shall be performed during the course of the test
S12.3.7 Performance Retest-Upon completion of the tests
in Sl2.3.1 through S12.3.6, repeat the performance test
(Sl2.3.1), the vibration type II test (S12.3.2), and the noise test
(Sl2.3.3). Record all test data.
S12.3.8 Test Reports-A test report shall be submitted for
each test conducted. Quantity and format as defined in the
ordering data.
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at tile address shown below.
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astrn.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
1174
Last ASTM Designation: F1754- 08
Standard Guide for
Marine Vessel Structural Inspection Considerations
This guide covers information to develop and implement a marine vessel inspection process. It is intended to provide considerations
for persons interested in planning, organizing, and implementing a structural survey plan for a marine vessel, especially during the design
phase of the vessel. It is intended to be used in conjunction with any other required inspection or survey requirements but can form the
basis for such planning in the absence of other such applicable requirements.
Formerly under the jurisdiction of Committee F25 on Ships and Marine Technology, this guide was withdrawn in October 2012 due
to its limited use by industry.
1175
A Designation: F1755M - 96 {Reapproved 2012)'
1
11
UII
7
INTERNATIONAL
Solid State Bargraph Meters for Shipboard Use [Metric]
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation FI755M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
in October 2012.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification provides the requirements for design,
construction, performance, and testing of solid state bargraph-
type indicating meters.
1.2 The solid state bargraph meters covered by this speci-
fication are intended for use in shipboard applications of
electrical measurement. This specification covers the require-
ments and quality assurance provisions for solid state, panel-
type (edgewise), and rectangular switchboard-type
instruments, which use light-emitting diodes (LEDs) for bar-
graph indication and optional digital displays.
1.3 This specification's requirements may be invoked for
specialized measurement applications where another quantity,
for example, position, weight, concentration of a trace element
in an atmosphere sample, and so forth, is converted to electrical
energy for display and measurement. Special dial markings
shall be specified for such cases.
1.4 The values stated in metric units are to be regarded as
the standard. The values given in parentheses are for informa-
tion only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D395 I Practice for Commercial Packaging
Fl166 Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine
Systems, Equipment, and Facilities
TT-E-5:29 Enamel, Low VOC Content
3
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.l0 on
Electrical.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2012. Published November 2012. Originally
approved in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as F1755M 96(2007).
DOl: 10.1520/F1755M-96Rl2EOl.
2
the ASTM website.
3
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, ATTN: NPODS.
2.3 Federal Standards:
H28 Screw Thread Standards for Federal Services
3
3. Terminology
3 .1.1 accuracy, n-the accuracy is a number that defines the
limit of errors expressed as a percentage of full-scale value.
3.1.2 center-zero meter, n-meter with display mode char-
acterized by a sequentially illuminated string of LEDs starting
at the center scale zero position and extending in either
direction from zero, proportional to the polarity and magnitude
of the input signal.
3.1.3 dual bargraph display, n-two completely indepen-
dent bargraph displays included in a single enclosure.
3.1.4 end-scale value, n-the value of the actuating electri-
cal quantity that corresponds to end scale indication. When
zero is not at the end or at the electrical center of the scale, the
higher value is used. See Table 1.
3.1.5 end-zero meter, n-meter with display mode charac-
terized by a sequentially illuminated string of LEDs starting
from a zero point, normally at the left for switchboard-style
meters or horizontally installed edgewise meters, or the bottom
of vertically installed edgewise meters, that extends in the
direction of full-scale value.
3.1.6 full-scale value, n-full-scale value is the largest value
of the actuating electrical quantity that can be indicated on the
scale. For instruments with zero between the ends of the scale,
the full-scale value is the arithmetic sum of the values of the
actuating electrical quantity corresponding to the two ends of
the scale.
3.1.7 response time, n-the response time is the time re-
quired for the indicating means to display a new value after a
step change has occurred in the measured quantity to a new
constant value.
3.1.8 scale division, n-a scale division is the increment
between the centers of two consecutive scale marks. The
number of scale marks is one more than the number of scale
divisions. For example, 10 scale divisions require 11 scale
marks.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 194282959. United States
1176
6 F1755M - 96 (2012)E
1
...... 7
TABLE 1 End-Scale Values
Range
End-Scale Values
End-Scale Values
0-150
50-0-150
150-0-150
90-140
0, 150
50, 150
150, 150
90, 140
150
150
150
140
3.1.8.1 linear scale divisions, n-linear scale divisions are
scale divisions that are spaced an equal distance apart and of
the same value, for example, scale divisions spaced 5 A apart
on a 100-A meter.
3.1.8.2 nonlinear scale divisions, n-nonlinear scale divi-
sions are scale divisions of the same value spaced an unequal
distance apart.
3.1.9 scale length, n-the scale length is the length of the
path described by the pattern of the LEDs in moving from one
end of the scale to the other. For multiple scale meters, the
longest scale shall be used to determine the scale length.
3.1.10 scale visibility, n-scale visibility is the maximum
horizontal or vertical viewing angle measured from a line
normal to the scale from which all scale marks and arcs, but not
necessarily all markings, may be seen.
4. Classification
4.1 Classification- Bargraph meters covered in this speci-
fication shall be classified by type and style as specified in
4.2-4.3.
4.2 Type-The type designation defines the physical con-
figuration of the meter and the scale.
4.2.1 Rectangular/switchboard-type meters present angular
displays from 90 to 270 scale for the measured parameter(s).
1 provides typical dimensional and mounting data for
rectangular/switchboard-type meters.
4.2.2 Edgewise/panel-type meters present linear displays
for measured parameters. 2 provides typical dimensional
and mounting data for edgewise type meters.
4.2.2.1 Orientation of Meter-For edgewise/panel-type
meters, the scale marking shall be specified either for a vertical
or horizontal mounting condition.
4.3 Style-The style designation defines the meters display
attributes as follows:
4.3.1 Bargraph Display-The bargraph display shall consist
of light-emitting diode (LED) elements that illuminate to
produce a bar image proportional to the input The
display designation defines whether the meter has smgle or
dual bargraph displays.
4.3.2 Digital Display-The digital display designation de-
fines the number of digits in the digital display as follows:
4.3.2.1 3-digit display.
4.3.2.2 31/z-digit display.
4.3.2.3 4-digit display.
4.3.2.4 4
1
/z-digit display
4.3.2.5 No digital display.
5.1 Purchase orders or inquiries for bargraph meters of this
specification shall specify the following:
1177
5 .1.1 Title, date, and year of this specification.
5.1.2 Quantity.
5.1.3 Type, and for edgewise meter, orientation (see 4.2).
5.1.4 Style of display (single or dual, digital display) (see
4.3).
5.1.5 Window type (plastic or shatterproof glass) (see 7.5).
5.1.6 Dial colors (see 7.9.l.l ).
5.1.7 Range(s) (see 7.9.2).
5.1.8 Power supply voltage (see 8.1.1 ).
5.1.9 Signal input (analog or digital) (see 8.1.:2).
5.1.10 Color(s) of bargraph display (see 8.2.2).
5.1.11 Optional features available:
5.1.11.1 Anti-glare windows (see 7.5.1).
5.1.11.2 Splashproof or spraytight window (see 7.5.2).
5.1.11.3 Internal illumination (see 7.6).
5 .1.11.4 External accessories (see 7. 8).
5.1.11.5 Alarm set points (see 8.1.4).
5.1.11.6 Digital display (see 8.2.4)
5.1.11.7 Nonstandard range values (see 8.2.4).
5.1.11.8 Dot matrix display types (see 8.2.4).
5.1.11.9 Intensity control (see 8.2.5).
5.1.12 Certification requirements (See
5 .1.13 Packaging requirements.
5.1.14 Testing requirements (include only if tests other than
the production tests required by this specification are to be
performed).
6.1 Materials-All materials used in the construction of
these bargraph meters shall be of a quality suitable for the
purpose intended and shall conform to the requirements of this
specification.
6.1.1 Metals-Metals and the treatment of metals shall be
corrosion-resistant.
6.1.2 Plastics-Plastic, when used, shall be suitable thermo-
plastic or thermosetting material so molded as to produce .a
dense solid structure, uniform in texture, finish, and mecham-
cal properties.
6.1.3 Glass-Glass used for the meter window shall be the
shatterproof type.
6.1.4 Gaskets-Material used in gaskets shall not cause
corrosion of metal parts with which they come in contact.
6.2 Manufacture:
6.2.1 Finishes:
6.2.1.1 External Finishes-The portion of the meter case
exposed to view from the front of the panel.or
shall have a black semigloss finish. No mckel or bnght
trimmings shall be used. The external finish may be
coated, electro-coated, or painted in accordance with
TT-E-529. Metal cases shall be rendered resistant to corrosion
prior to the application of the final finish.
6.2.1.2 Internal Finishes-Internal finishes shall be of a
material that shall not melt, crack, chip, blister, or scale as a
result of the tests specified herein.
6.3 Threaded Parts-Threaded parts shall be in accordance
with FED-STD-H28. Where practical, threads shall be in
conformity with the coarse-thread series. The fine-thread series
shall be used only for applications that might show a definite
F1755M - 96 (2012)E
1
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW BACK VIEW
PANEL CUT-OUT
MOUNTING STUDS
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR RECf ANGULAR/SWITCHBOARD-TYPE METERS
123mm 19mm 142mm 50.8mm
-
43mm 43mm
-
114mm 54mm 109mm
-
(4.84 in) (0.75 in) (5.6 in) (2.0 in) (1.69 in) (1.69 in) (4.49 in) (2.13 in) (4.3 in)
118mm 22.3mm 142mm 50.8mm
-
43mm 43mm
-
95mm 57mm 86mm
-
118mm 22.3mm 142mm 50.8mm
-
43mm 43mm
-
114mm 54mm 108mm
-
181mm 22.3mm 217mm 40.6mm
-
63.5mm 83mm
-
172mm 47mm 137mm
-
NOTES: All dimensions are in millimeters (inches are in parenthesis and are nominal unless otherwise specified).
FIG. 1 Rectangular/Switchboardffype Meters
1178
A I
I
I
I
I
'
A
133.35mm
146.55mm
152.4mm
170.2:mm
177.8mm
241.3mm
254.0mm
B
131.95mm
140.0mm
c
F1755M - 96 (2012)
81
1 E
c
I
D E
14.61 mm 36.53 mm
15.5 mm 31.0 mm
in)
FOR
DRILLING
F
110.74mm
(4.36 in)
118.1 m.m
(4.65 in)
144.78mm
(5.7 in)
172.2mm
(6.78 in)
PAIEL CUT-OUT
G
26.9m.m
(1.06
45.0mm
(1.77 in)
46.7mm
(1.84 in)
116.8 mm 15.5 mm 38.86 mm 139.1 mm 31.5mm
(1.24 in) (5.475 in)
184.2 mm 138.9 mm 12.7 mm 63.5 mm 139.7 mm
(5.5 in)
114.3 mm 182.9 mm 20.3 mm 45.72 mm 184.2 mm
(7.25 in)
91.95 mm 215.9 mm
(8.5 in)
FIG. 2 Dimensional Characteristics of Edgewise Meters
1179
38.1mm
(1.5 in)
76.2mm
(3.0 in)
46.7mm
in)
F
H
22.99mm
41.3 m.m
63.5mm
(2.5
0 F1755M - 96 (2012)E
1
advantage through their use. Where a special diameter pitch
combination is required, the thread shall be of American
National Form and of any pitch between 16 and 36 which is
used in the fine-thread series.
6.3.1 Locking of Screw-Thread Assemblies -Screw-thread
assemblies shall not loosen as a result of the tests specified
herein. When practicable, split-type lockwashers or equivalent
means shall be provided under all nuts.
6.4 Sealing-The meter case shall be sealed by means of
gaskets, by fusing or soldering metal-to-metal or metal-to-
glass, or other means which will enable the meter to withstand
the tests specified herein.
7. Design and Construction
7.1 Dimensional Data-Typical physical dimensions for
switchboard and edgewise meters are shown in 1 and
2.
7.2 Mounting-Bargraph meter shall be front panel
mounted to simplify mechanical installation or removal for
service, or both. Electrical connections locations shall be
designed to facilitate meter removal. Typical mounting dimen-
sions are indicated in 1 and 2.
7.2.1 Mounting Hardware-The necessary mounting
hardware, such as mounting clips, nuts, washers, bolts, shall be
supplied with each meter. The machine screws shall have the
same finish as the external finish (see 6.2.1.1).
7.3 Maintainability-The meter shall be constructed so that
no special tools are required for insertion or removal of the
meter.
7.4 Cases-Cases shall be corrosion resistant. Cases shall
be designed and constructed with close-fitting joints to mini-
mize the entrance of dust and moisture (see 6.4).
7.5 Windows-The meter display shall be provided with a
window of methyl methacrylate (MMA), polycarbonate (PC),
or shatterproof glass. If the window is made MMA or PC, the
external surface shall be treated to resist scratching. The
window shall be free from detrimental defects that would
prevent the display from being easily read or from meeting the
luminous distribution and color requirement. Such defects
include electrostatic effects, scratches, chips, cracks, or craze.
7.5.1 Anti-Glare Coatings-When anti-glare is specified,
windows shall be coated with an anti-glare coating. The
coating shall be uniform in quality and condition, clean,
smooth, and free from foreign materials. The coating shall
show no evidence of flaking, peeling, or blistering. The coating
shall not contain blemishes such as discolorations, stains,
smears, and streaks. The coating shall show no evidence of a
cloudy or hazy appearance.
7.5 .1.1 Specular Reflectance-The coating reflectance shall
be not greater than 0.6% for energy incident on the surface at
an angle of 0 to 15 inclusive. The reflectance shall be not
greater than 1.0 % at an angle of 30.
7.5.1.2 Light Loss-The coating light loss shall be not
greater than 2.0 %.
7.5.2 Splashproof/Spraytight Windows --When specified,
splashproof or spraytight windows shall be furnished.
7.6 Internal Illumination-When specified, meters shall be
equipped with internal illumination provided by a minimum of
two lamps, so placed to illuminate the dial evenly.
7.7 Auxiliary Components-All connections from the shunts
and resistors to the input terminals of the meters shall be
insulated to prevent shock hazard.
7.8 External Accessories-External shunt, shunt leads,
transformers, resistors, and other external accessories shall be
furnished when required.
7.9 Meter Scales:
7. 9.1 Dial-The dial shall be made of stiff material and shall
be supported and secured firmly to the meter.
7.9.1.1 Dial Colors-The meter dial shall have white mark-
ings on a black background as standard.
7.9.1.2 Dial Markings-Dial legend markings shall be
sharply defined and visible from the front of the case but not
distract attention from the scale markings. Unless otherwise
specified, the following information shall be marked on the dial
or on an attached nameplate.
(a) Manufacturer's name.
Units of measurement.
(c) The quantity producing end-scale deflection. For end-
zero meters, the dial markings shall be FS, indicating full scale,
followed by the full-scale value and units of measurement (for
example, FS-50 m V). For meters that are not end-zero meters,
the dial markings shall be marked ES indicating end scale
followed by the end-scale value and units of measurement (for
example, ES-50 m V).
7.9.2 Ranges-For end-zero meters, the full-scale ranges
shall be as specified. For meters that are not end-zero meters,
the center and end-scale ranges shall be specified appropriately.
7.9.3 Scale Divisions-Unless otherwise specified, the value
of each scale division shall be one, two, or five of the units
measured or any decimal multiple or submultiple of these
numbers.
7.9.3.1 Linear Scales-The total number of scale divisions
shall be determined by dividing the total range by the smallest
increment. For example; a 150-V scale with the smallest
increment of 5 V is listed as having 30 scale divisions.
7.9.3.2 Nonlinear Scales-The total number of scale divi-
sions shall be determined by dividing the total range by the
smallest increment, although to avoid crowding scale marks, a
portion of the scale shall not be marked. For example, a 100-A
scale with the smallest increment of 2 A, but with no marks
between 0 and 10 A, is listed as having 50 scale divisions.
1180
7. 9.4 Scale Visibility-The scale and characters shall be
uniform visually in character brightness, legibility, and clean-
liness of display with all elements of the meter illuminated. The
entire meter scale shall be clearly visible from a distance of 1
m (3 ft) and from a viewing angle of 45 from normal; both
vertically and horizontally. The scale visibility shall not dete-
riorate during the tests specified herein.
7.9.5 Scale Markings-Numerals, letters, and symbols shall
be in accordance with Practice Fl166. Scale markings shall be
as specified herein.
7.9.5.1 The orientation of numerals shall be tangential or
erect for 90 scales, erect for 180 and 270 scaleplates, and
erect for edgewise scales.
F1755M - 96 (2012)
1
7.9.5.2 The sequence of scale divisions and numerals
through the linear portion of the scale plate shall be uniform.
7.9.5.3 The scales shall begin and end with a numbered
mark, including 0, when applicable.
7.9.5.4 There shall be not greater than five minor scale
divisions between an intermediate or major scale division nor
greater than three intermediate scale divisions between a major
scale division.
7.9.5.5 The numbered markings shall be spaced uniformly
and shall be expressed in the same units of measurement as
those of the end-scale marking. One, two, and five or decimal
multiples thereof, shall be used when possible.
7.9.5.6 Scale division markings shall occupy not greater
than 20 % of the space between a scale division mark and an
adjacent mark.
8. Requirements
8.1 Electrical Requirements:
8.1.1 Power Supply Voltage-The meters shall operate from
a voltage as specified as follows. A means of reverse voltage
protection shall be provided:
5 0.25 V direct current (Vdc)
28 1.0 Vdc
115 8.0 V alternating current (Vac)
8.1.2 Signal Input-The meters shall accept a digital or
analog signal as specified.
8.1.3 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance shall
be not less than 2 MQ between the external terminals and the
meter case.
8.1.4 Alarm Set Points-When specified, the meter shall be
furnished with adjustable visible set points with form-C relay
contact outputs for control of external devices such as remote
alarms. The hysteresis of set points shall be not greater than
1.0 % of full scale.
8.1.4.1 Setting-Set points shall be programmed from the
front of the meter. Set points should be set to a point on the
bargraph as standard and use of the digital display for setting
exact numerical values is an option.
8.2 Displays:
8.2.1 Color Coding-The LED color coding shall conform
to Practice F 1166.
8.2.2 Bargraph Display-The bargraph display shall consist
of segmented LED displays of the colors specified, which
illuminate to produce a bar image equal to the corresponding
scale value of the input. LED display color selection includes
red, green, amber or use of tricolor LED display as an option.
8.2.3 Power-On Indication-The zero LED shall be con-
tinuously illuminated to serve as a "power on" and as a "zero
reference" even in the absence of a signal input.
8.2.4 Digital Display-When specified, the meter shall in-
clude a red LED digital display that shall display continuously
a specified range of values. The standard digital display shall
match the bargraph display. An optional feature of different
range values for the digital and bargraph displays shall be
available when specified. The standard nominal character
height shall be 4.88 mm (0.192 in.) for edgewise types with 2.4
mm (0.095 in.) as an option. The standard nominal character
1181
height shall be 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) for switchboard-type meters.
The display type shall be seven segment as standard with dot
matrix as an option.
8.2.5 Intensity Control-When specified, dimming controls
shall be provided to maintain appropriate brightness, legibility,
and operator dark adaptation level. These controls shall apply
to all LED displays and, when used, dial illumination. The
display luminance shall vary in direct proportion to ambient
lighting, and the dial illumination in inverse proportion.
8.2.6 Adjustments-The meter shall contain provisions to
adjust the zero-offset and full-scale range. The adjustment
devices shall be accessible from the rear of the meter when
connected to the input signal and power supply sources.
8.2.7 Set Point Visual Indication -Visual indication of the
set point locations shaH be shown on the bargraph display by
illuminating that LED segment corresponding to the set value
when the input signal is lower than the set point value. When
the input signal is greater than the set point value, the LED
segment corresponding with the set point value is off. When the
signal level is one LED segment greater or lower than the set
point value, the LED corresponding to the set point value will
flash once a second (1 Hz). When the signal level and the set
point value are the same, the LED corresponding to the
location will flash twice a second (2 Hz).
8.3 Peiformance Requirements:
8.3.1 Zero Adjustment-The meter shall include provision
for zero adjustment by automatic or manual means. Manual
means for zero adjustments shall provide for a minimum
excursion of 1 % of full scale about scale zero. The means
shall be designed such that scale zero does not change as a
result of any of the tests specified herein.
8.3.2 Span Adjustment-The meter shall include provision
for span adjustment that provides for a full-scale adjustment
above and below full scale of not less than 1.0 % of the rated
full scale. The span adjuster shall be designed to prevent it
from shaking loose and changing adjustment when subject to
tests specified herein.
8.3.3 Accuracy:
8.3.3.1 Bargraph Display-The required accuracy of the
meter bargraph display shall be established using the following
equation:
100
Bargraph display accuracy = [number of LED elements]
8.3.3.2 Digital Display Accuracy-The error of the digital
display shall be not greater than 1.0 % for 3- and 3 V2-digit
displays and shall be not greater than 0.1 % for displays with
4- and 4
1
/2-digit displays.
8.3.4 Response Time-The response time of the meter shall
be not greater than 2 s for a zero to full-scale step input or full
scale to zero step input signal.
8.3.5 Display Illuminance:
8.3 .5 .1 Axial Illuminance-The bargraph segment shall
have a minimum illuminance of 60 mcd (0.6 mfc) at a distance
of 200 mm (3.8 in.).
8.3.5.2 Illuminance Variation-The illuminance variation of
the bargraph segments and the digital displays shall be not
greater than 2.4 to 1.
F1755M - 96 (2012)e
1
8.3.6 Chromaticity-The chromaticity for LEDs shall be a
follows:
8.3.6.1 Red shall be standard high efficiency with a domi-
nant wavelength of 626 :: 2 nm.
8.3.6.2 Green shall be standard high efficiency with a
dominant wavelength of 57 4 :: 2 nm.
8.3.6.3 Amber shall be standard high efficiency with a
dominant wavelength of 585 :: 2 nm.
8.3.7 Overload-The meter shall be able to withstand a
momentary overload of 200 % of full scale. The meter shall
withstand a sustained overload of 20 % of full scale. During an
overload, the digital display shall indicate the full-scale value
and all LED display elements shall illuminate except the most
significant LED element shall flash. The meter shall meet the
accuracy requirements of 8.3.3.
8.4 Environmental Requirements :
8.4.1 Temperature-The meter shall operate in an ambient
temperature range from 0 to +65C, and shall withstand,
without damage, a nonoperating (storage) temperature range of
-55 to +85C. The temperature error shall be not greater than
the accuracy requirements of 8.3.3.
8.4.2 Vibration-The meters shall show no evidence of
breakage, permanent deformation, or loosening of parts and
shall retain their serviceability. The meter shall meet the
8.4.3 Salt Fog-The meter shall show no evidence of salt
penetration into the meter encasement nor evidence of corro-
sive effects, peeling, flaking, or color change in material.
8.4.4 Temperature-Humidity Cycling -The meter shall
show no evidence of deterioration of parts or materials,
loosening of finishes, physical distortion, corrosion of metals,
moisture entrapment, or separation of bonded surfaces. The
meter shall meet the accuracy requirements of 8.3.3.
9. Conformance and Production Tests
characteristics specified in this standard have been incorpo-
rated in the meter design and have been maintained in the
production bargraph meters supplied. These tests would not
normally be performed unless specifically required. Production
tests are routine tests performed on production units, or
samples thereof, to ensure that basic requirements are met.
9.2 Reference Conditions-Reference conditions for testing
meter performance shall be as follows:
9.2.1 Temperature: 23 2C.
9.2.2 Relative humidity: 40 to 60 %.
9.2.3 Atmospheric pressure: 575- to 800-rnrn mercury.
9 .2.4 Position: on vertical panel.
9.2.5 External magnetic field: of the earth's field only.
9.2.6 Waveform (AC meter only): sinusoidal.
9.2.7 Warm-up time: 30 min.
9.2.8 Frequency (for AC meters other than frequency me-
ters): rated 3 %.
9.2.9 Voltage (for meters other than volunteers): rated value.
9.3 Zero Adjust-Meters shall be set to zero with use of the
zero adjuster at the completion of each test.
9.4 Number of Scale Readings-Scale reading shall be taken
at approximately six equidistant points on the scale including
the end-scale points.
9.5 Calibration-A calibration inspection shall be con-
ducted when specified in the individual test. It consists of
applying known values of excitation to the meter, with not less
than five equally spaced intervals over the full range of the
meter and recording the correspondingly displayed values.
9.6 Conformance Tests:
9.6.1 Accuracy-The accuracy shall be determined for the
bargaph and digital displays under reference conditions (see
9.1) as follows:
9 .6.1.1 Apply excitation to illuminate the exact end-scale
LED mark and record the value of excitation.
9.6.1.2 Within 15 min, reduce the value of excitation to
illuminate LEDs of not less than five other approximately
equidistant scale marks including the zero mark. Measure and
record the value of excitation at each scale mark.
9.6.1.3 The difference between the reference and measured
conditions shall be calculated, in percentage of full scale, for
each measured point. The accuracy of the meter shall be
verified by using the greatest difference, in percentage, that was
calculated.
9.6.2 Response Time-A photodetector with known re-
sponse characteristics, having adequate sensitivity and resolu-
tion to respond to one element of the display, shall be
positioned at the 80 % element of the meter display. The
photodetector output shall be monitored with a storage oscil-
loscope or other suitable means. An input signal not less than
80 % of the meter range shall be applied to the meter input in
less than 10 ms and held constant. This signal also shall be used
to trigger the oscilloscope. Response time required for the
display element at 80 % to illuminate shall be determined.
9 .6.3 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance of
the meter shall be determined by applying a test voltage (V
1
)
between the external terminals and the meter case, through a
1000-Q resistor. The type of current applied (AC or DC) is
dependent upon the terminal's normally applied excitation.
The ]evel of V
1
for circuits whose normally applied level is less
than 50 V shall be 250 V. The level of V
1
for circuits whose
normal excitation is 50 V and higher shall be 10 times the
normal excitation or 1000 Vdc (707 Vac rrns), whichever is
less. The current flowing through the terminals to ground is
determined using the following:
1182
where:
EM
R=IM
M
Voltage drop across resistor;
Resistance, 1000 Q; and
I M Current through terminals to ground.
The insulation resistance can be determined
following equation:
IM in the
APl\t.; F1755M - 96 (2012)e
1
crmw
where:
IRM = Insulation resistance of meter.
9.6.4 Display Illuminance--Illuminance shall be measured
with instrumentation having a response that is within 2 % of
the International Commission on Illummation (CIE) photo-
topic curve over the specified color region.
9.6.4.1 Axial Luminance-The illuminance shall be mea-
sured with no ambient lighting, with all segments of the
meter's display illuminated. All readings shall be taken to and
at a distance of 200 mm from the plane of the front surface of
the elements, centered on the horizontal and vertical
axes of the display. The luminance measurements
shall be taken with a calibrated photometer and recorded.
9.6.4.2 Luminance Variation-Measure the illuminance of
each segment on the center of its display surface in accordance
with . Record the and the lowest readings
obtained. The luminance variation (DL) shall be determined
using these readings in the following equation:
D =
L lowest reading
9.6.5 Chromaticity-The bargraph meter chromaticity shall
be determined by using one of the following three methods:
9.6.5.1 Method !-Spectrophotometer-Chromaticity shall
be determined a spectrophotometer, fiat slab material of
the same density and thickness of the shaped filter, and
necessary calibration filters.
9.6.5.2 Method 11-Spectroradiometric-Chromaticity shall
be determined a spectroradiometer, a illumi-
nated meter, calibrated lamps of specific color temperature, and
necessary calibration filters.
9.6.5.3 Method III-Visual Comparator-Chromaticity shall
be determined by a color comparator, necessary high and low
limit or filters of known chromaticity, and cali-
brated light sources of specific color temperature.
9.6.6 Overload:
9.6.6.1 Overload-The voltage/current circuits
of AC and DC meters shall be subjected to an application of
200% of the rated full-scale value for 2 min. After 30 min at
reference conditions (see 9.1) following the test, the meter shall
be reset to zero and the change in indication shall be deter-
mined. The accuracy of 8.3.3 shall be verified.
9.6.6.2 Sustained Overload--The meter shall be subjected
for 8 h to an application of voltage/current 20 % greater than
full-scale value. After 30 min at reference conditions (see 9.1)
following the test, the meter shall be reset to zero and the
change in indication shall be determined. The accuracy re-
quirements of 8 . .3.:3 shall be verified.
9.6.7 Temperature-The meter shall be tested, without
""i">'"""''u or the following temperature
9.6.7.1 Hold ambient temperature at 0 2C for not less
than 24 h.
9.6.7.2 Increase ambient temperature in steps of 10 each, at
30 min/step, until 65 2C is reached, and hold at that
temperature for not less than 4 h.
9 .6. 7.3 Reduce ambient temperature in steps of 1 0 each, at
30 min/step, until 25 2C is reached, and hold at that
temperature for not less than 4 h.
9.6.7.4 At each temperature plateau (0, 65, and 25C), a
calibration cycle (see 9.5) shall be made. The temperature error
is calculated as the change in indication caused by a tempera-
ture change of 10C from the three temperature points (0, 65,
and 25C).
9.6.8 Vibration-The meter shall be subjected to a simple
harmonic motion in the X plane having an amplitude of 0.23 to
0.25 mm (0.46- to 0.50-mm total excursion), the frequency
being varied uniformly between 500 and 2500 cycles/min for
20 min. The entire frequency range, from 500 to 2500
cycles/min and return to 500 cycles/min, shall be transversed at
a rate of change of frequency of 200 25 cycles/min. During
the test, an input equal to 80 5 % of the meter span shall be
applied to the meter. After the test, the meter shall be examined
visually and the accuracy verified in accordance with 9.6.1.
Repeat for the Y and Z planes.
9.6.9 Salt Fog-The meter shall be tested in accordance
with Practice B 117. The exposure time shall be 48 h followed
by a 48-h drying period. The meter shall be examined visually
after the test.
9.6.10 Temperature/Humidity Cycling-The meter shall be
tested as specified in the following paragraphs. No adjustments
during the test shall be made, other than the accessible controls
employed for operation of the equipment.
9.6.10.1 Conditioning-To establish a reference condition,
the meter shall be dried at a temperature not less than 40C or
greater than 50C for not less than 2 h.
9.6.10.2 Calibration Cycles-Following the conditioning, a
calibration cycle shall be performed as specified in 9.5 to
indicate the satisfactory performance of the meter. This cali-
bration cycle shall be conducted at 25 soc and 50 5 %
relative humidity. In addition, axial luminance shall be mea-
sured as specified in 9.6.4.1, except that only five segments of
the display shall be measured. Throughout this test, the same
five segments shall be monitored.
9.6.10.3 Temperature Cycling-Meters shall then be sub-
jected to five 24-h cycles of temperature variation consisting of
not less than 16 hat 65 soc and approximately 8 h at 25
soc. The relative humidity shall be maintained above a
minimum of 95 % during the steady-state conditions. The
transitions between temperatures shall be accomplished within
8-h period so that the time at the high temperature is not less
than 16 h. Each transition shall be not greater than l
1
/2 h if the
meter remains in the chamber. If a two-chamber method is
used, both chambers shall be stabilized at their appropriate
settings before transferring the test units. The relative humidity
need not be controlled during the transition periods. The
chamber(s) used shall be proven able to maintain uniform
temperature and humidity throughout the chamber.
1183
9.6.10.4 Measurements-During the second cycle the mea-
surements specified in 9.5 shall be taken at 65 soc with the
meter remaining in the chamber. The meter shall be energized
for as brief a period as required to complete the measurements.
A warm-up period shall be permitted in which previous tests
indicate a definite period is required for the meter to attain
F1755M - 96 (2012)e
1
thermal stability. After the five complete cycles, the measure-
ments specified in 9.5 shall be performed at 25 soc with the
meter remaining in the chamber.
9.6.10.5 Conditioning-Upon completion of the tests, the
meter shall remain inoperative for not less than 12 or greater
than 24 hat a temperature at 25 soc and 50 5% relative
humidity.
9.6.10.6 Humidity Cycling-The meter shall be operated
continuously with an input equivalent to 80 5 % of the meter
span in an ambient temperature of 50 soc for a period of 8
h. The relative humidity shall be increased from 50 5 % to
95 5 % during the final 2 h.
9.6.10.7 Measurements-The meter's calibration shall be
checked and recorded (see 9.5) at 2-h intervals, for a total of
four checks. At each check, the same five input values shall be
used.
9.6.11 Workmanship-Meters shall be manufactured in such
a manner as to be uniform in quality. The interiors of the meters
shall be free from metal filings, grease or oil, foreign material,
dust, or other loose particles that will affect the performance,
serviceability, or appearance of the meter.
9.7 Production Tests:
9.7.1 Visual, Mechanical, and Workmanship Examination-
Meters shall be examined visually and mechanically to verify
that materials, design, construction, physical dimensions,
workmanship, and markings are as specified in this specifica-
tion.
10. Certification Requirements
10.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
producer's or supplier's certification shall be furnished to the
purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
furnished.
11. Marking Requirements
11.1 Meter Markings-Each meter shall be provided with an
identification plate. Plastic identification plates shall be used
when attaching to other than a flat surface. Unless otherwise
specified, the following shall be marked on the identification
plates:
11.1.2 Manufacturer's type or model number.
11.1.4 Year of manufacture.
11.1.5 Country of origin.
12.1 Product shall be packaged, boxed, crated, or wrapped
to provide suitable protection during shipment and storage.
12.2 Preservation of meters shall be in accordance with
Practice D395l.
13. Quality Assurance
13.1 The manufacturer of the solid state bargraph meters
shall maintain the quality of the meters that are designed,
tested, and marked in accordance with this specification. At no
time shall a meter be sold with this specification designation
that does not meet the requirements herein.
14. Keywords
14.1 analog display; bargraph meter; digital display; edge-
wise meter; electrical measurement; light-emitting diode;
switchboard meter; solid state meter
The following supplementary requirements are applicable to DoD procurements and shall apply
S 1.1 Military Specifications:
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High-Impact), Requirements
for Shipboard Machinery, Equipment, and Systems
3
MIL-C-24308 General Specification for Connectors,
Electric, Rectangular, Nonenvironmental, Miniature, Polarized
Shell, Rack and Panel
3
Sl.2 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-167-1 Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment (Type !-Environmental and Type II-Internally
Excited)
3
1184
MIL-STD-461 Electromagnetic Emission and Susceptibil-
ity Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interfer-
ence3
S2. Dial Colors
S2.1 Dial Colors-For U.S. Navy applications, the dial
color combination shall have black on a white background as
standard (see 7.9.5). This color scheme optimizes visibility of
meter in conditions of low ambient lighting, such as red-out
locations.
F1755M - 96 (2012)E
1
S3. Vibration Tests
S3.1 Vibration Tests-The meter shall be tested in accor-
dance with MIL-STD-167-1, Type I. During the test, an input
equal to 80 5 % of the meter span shall be applied to the
meter.
S3.2 Examination After Vibration Tests -The meters shall
show no evidence of breakage, permanent deformation, or
loosening of parts and shall retain their serviceability. The
meter shall meet the accuracy requirements of 8.3.3.
S4. Shock Tests
S.4.1 Shock Tests-The meter shall be tested in accordance
with MIL-S-90 1, Grade A, Class I, Type A. During the test, an
input equal to 80 5 % of the meter span shall be applied to
the meter.
S4.2 Examination After Shock Tests-The meter shall show
no evidence of screws, windows, or other parts being loose,
cracked, or excessively damaged. The meter shall meet the
SS. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Requirements
S5.1 The meter shall meet the following requirements of
MIL-STD-461 for surface ships and submarines: CE 101, CE
102, CS 101, CS 114, CS 116, RE 101, RE 102, RS 101, and
RS 103. The applicable electric field levels for requirements
RS 103 shall be as follows:
Frequency
10kHz 2 MHz
2 MHz 30 MHz
30 MHz 18 GHz
E-field level
10V/m
50 V/m
10V/m
S5.2 Electromagnetic Interference Tests -The meter shall
be tested in accordance with the applicable procedures in
MIL-STD--462.
S6. Terminals
S6.1 The meters shall be furnished with terminal connectors
in accordance with MIL-C-24308. The connector pin assign-
ments shall conform to S6.1.1 and S6.1.2
S6.1.1 Digital Input-The meter shall include two
connectors, which shall be as follows:
S6.1.1.1 M24308i4-l
S6.1.1.2 M24308/4-3.
S6.1.2 Analog Input-The meter shall include a connector
conforming to M24308/24--43 complete with jack screw
hardware, M24308/26-l. The connector pins shall be as
follows:
S6.1.2.1 Input signal ( + ).
S6.1.2.2 Input signal (-).
S6.1.2.3 LED test input signal, if applicable.
S6.1.2.4 LED test input return, if applicable.
S6.1.2.5 Power supply.
S6.1.2.6 Power supply.
COPYRIGHT/).
1185
A Designation: F1756-97a (Reapproved 2008)
~ u t l

INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Implementation of a Fleet Management System Network
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides an overview and guide for the
selection and implementation by shipowners and operators of a
Fleet Management System (FMS) network of computer ser-
vices in a client/server architecture (see 1 ). The FMS is
based upon a wide area enterprise network consisting of an
unspecified number of Shipboard Information Technology
Platforms (SITPs) and one or more shoreside Land-Based
Information Technology Platforms (LITPs), which provides
management services for the shipping enterprise. The FMS can
be understood as a computer system comprised of one or more
LITPs and one or more SITPs. It can be characterized as
mission critical 24 x 365 (24 hlday, 365 days/year).
1.2 The SITP (see 1) provides a set of software
services, including:
1.2.1 Communications Services, to communicate between
vessels and with shore via multiple wireless communication
technologies;
1.2.2 Data Acquisition Services, providing access to ship-
board system data as required for use by other systems and
management purposes; and,
1.2.3 Executive Services, providing software process admin-
istration and control.
1.2.4 In total, the SITP provides the capability for multiple
shipboard computer systems to share data with each other and
to communicate with shore-based management or other vessels
or both.
1.3 The SITP is understood to consist of integrated hard-
ware, software, a data repository, and standardized procedures,
which provide the ability to send, receive, process, transfer,
and store data or messages in digital form in a common mode
from shipboard systems or administrative utilities or both, and
from designated sources outside the network, for example,
systems accessed through wireless communication services,
such as satellite, VHF, HF, and so forth. Shipboard systems
include navigational, machinery control and monitoring, cargo
1
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of F25.05 on Computer
Applications.
in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as Fl756- 97a(2002). DOl:
10.1520/Fl756-97 AR08.
control, communications, and so forth. The SITP also will
provide the capability for the remote administration and
maintenance of associated computer systems aboard the vessel.
1.4 The SITP requires an underlying hardware and network
infrastructure, including a shipboard computer local area net-
work (LAN), file servers, workstations, wireless communica-
tions transceivers, cabling, other electronic and optical devices,
video display units, keyboards, and so forth.
1.5 The SITP also requires underlying system software
providing network operating system (NOS) services, DBMS
services, and other system software.
1.6 There also is a layer of shipboard application systems,
which are designed to capitalize on the FMS infrastructure to
share data with other shipboard systems and management
ashore. Those systems also would be able to capitalize on the
remote management capabilities of the FMS.
1. 7 The LITP is an asset that can exchange operating and
administrative data from individual ships and maintain
DBMS to support fleet management and other maritime
applications. The LITP will support data repositories, file
servers, workstations or personal computers (PCs ), and
communication hub providing connectivity to distributed sat-
ellite services, VHF (very high frequency), HF/MF
frequency/medium frequency), and land lines. The DBMS
makes possible the development of knowledge-based "decision
aids" by providing the ability to retrieve, process, and analyze
operational data.
1.8 This guide does not purport to address all the
ments for a SITP, which forms a path for data for direct control
of the operation or condition of the vessel or the vessel
subsystems.
1.9 In all cases, it shall be possible for all units of navigation
equipment resident on the Navigation Equipment Bus to
operate and display essential operating data independently of
the FMS.
1.10 In all cases, it shall be possible for all units resident on
the Control, Monitoring, and Alarm Bus to operate and display
essential operating data independently of the FMS.
1.11 In all cases, it shall be possible for all units resident on
the Communications Bus to operate and display essential
operating data independently of the FMS.
1186
F1756 - 97a (2008)
Executive
Services
Shipboard
Applications
(Examples)
A Pis
SITP
FIG. 1 Typical Architecture
1.12 Values shown in this guide are in SI units.
bility regulatory limitations prior to use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E919 Specification for Software Documentation for a Com-
(Discontinued 2000) (Withdrawn 2000)
3
E I 013 Terminology Relating to Systems
(Withdrawn 2000)
3
F1166 Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine
Fl757 Guide for Communication Protocols for Com-
puterized Systems
2.2 ANSI Standards:
4
X3.172 Dictionary for Information Systems
X3.172a Dictionary for Information Systems (Computer Se-
curity Glossary)
2.3 IEEE Standards:
5
1028-1988(Rl993) Standard for Software Review and
Audit
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
4
5
1187
IEEE 1012-1986(1992) Standard for Verification and Vali-
dation Plans
IEEE 45 Recommended Practice for Electrical Installations
on Shipboard
IEEE 802 Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area
Networks-Overview and Architecture
IEEE 802 Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area
Networks--Interoperable LAN/MAN Security
IEEE 802.10e and lOf Supplements to IEEE 802.10
IEEE 1003
IEEE 1063 Standard for Software User Documentation
2.4 IEC Documents:
4
IEC 50 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (lEV)
IEC 92-504 Electrical Installations in Ships; Special Fea-
tures-Control and Instrumentation
IEC 533 Electromagnetic Compatability of Electrical and
Electronic Installations in Ships and of Mobile and Fixed
Offshore Units
lEC 945 Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication
Equipment and Systems
IEC 1069 Industrial-Process Measurement and Control-
Evaluation of System Properties for the Purpose of
tem Assessment, Part 1: General Considerations and
Methodology; Part 2: Assessment Methodology
lEC 1 I 62 Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication
Equipment and Systems-Digital Interfaces
lEC 1209 Integrated Bridge Systems (IBS) for Ships
2.5 NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association) Stan-
dard:6
NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Electronic Marine
Navigational Devices
6
Available from the National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) Seven
Riggs Ave., Severna Park, MD 21146.
cO F1756 - 97a (2008)
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Definitions of terms in this guide and described below
are in accordance with Terminology E1013 and ANSI
X3.172X3.172 for Information and
X3.172aX3.1 for Information
puter Security Glossary) .
3.1.2 application program, n-a computer program that
performs a task related to the process being controlled rather
than to the functioning of the computer itself.
3.1.3 application programming interface (API), n-an API
is a set of rules for linking various software components of a
network.
3.1.4 automatic information system (AIS), n- automatic
distribution of a ship's voyage information to all interested
parties, that is, other ships, port state, owner, and so forth.
3.1.5 baseband network, n-only one transmission can be
on the network at any given time.
3.1.6 black box test, n-black box tests are based on the
design specification and do not require a knowledge of the
internal program structure.
3.1.7 certification, n-the process of formal approval, by an
authority empowered to do so, of arrangements or systems for
the reception, storage, or transmission of data and intelligence
relative to the management, operation, or control of vessels.
3.1.8 client server database engine, n- a commercial data
base management system serving as a repository for all critical
ship operating and configuration information.
3.1.9 computer program, n-a set of ordered instructions
that specify operations in a form suitable for execution by a
digital computer.
3.1.10 computer system, n-a functional unit, consisting of
one or more computers and associated software, that uses
common storage for all or part of a program and also for all or
part of the data necessary for the execution of the program.
3 .1.11 configuration manager, n-utilities that determine
the data to be collected, the processing and storage rules, the
standard software functions that facilitate the interfaces be-
tween systems and the FMS process servers and other configu-
ration parameters.
3 .1.12 data replicator/message processor, n- a software
module that is responsible for receiving, decoding, and storing
communications and transmissions received from ships. This
module also prepares data for transmission to a ship through
the land-based communications hub.
3 .1.13 document management system, n-an application
that allows procedures manuals to be stored and accessed
electronically on shipboard and to be updated electronically.
3.1.14 electronic mail system, n-a messaging and file
transfer system for both ship and shore.
3.1.15 fault tolerance, n-the built-in capacity of a system
to provide continued correct execution in the presence of a
limited number of hardware of software faults.
1188
3.1.16 fleet management system (FMS), n- a system of
computer services in a client/server architecture, based on a
wide area enterprise network consisting of an unspecified
number of SITPs and the LITP. The FMS can be understood as
a computer system comprised of one or many shipboard
systems and one of many shoreside systems. It can be
characterized as mission critical 24 x 365 (24 h/day, 365
days/year).
3 .1.17 independent, n-independent as applied to two sys-
tems means that either system will operate with the failure of
any part of the other system excluding the source of power.
3.1.18 interface, n-the interface attribute describes the
methods and rules governing interaction between different
entities.
3.1.19 integration tests, n-tests performed during the
hardware/software integration process before computer system
validation to verify compatibility.
3.1.20 land-based communications hub, n- a land-based
computer system that provides uniform access to multiple
maritime satellite services, as well as access to public tele-
phone networks, e-mail, and the internet.
3.1.21 local area network (LAN), n-a network that con-
nects computer systems resident in a small area. For purposes
of this guide, the SITP is considered a shipboard LAN with
access to similar shoreside and shipboard units through radio
and satellite telecommunication services.
3.1.22 MSAT-satellite communications service covering
North America
3.1.23 multitasking, n-the capability to handle more than
one task at a time
3.1.24 NAVTEX, n-a system for the broadcast and auto-
matic reception of maritime safety information by means of a
narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.
3.1.25 network interface unit (NIU), n-the network inter-
face units (NIUs) provide for connection and message transla-
tion to enable data streams from systems, both hardware and
software, which may use various standard and proprietary
communication protocols to be stored and accessed in the FMS
database in a standard format.
3.1.26 ship information technology plaiform (computing),
n-an integrated system of software, hardware, communication
links, and standardized procedures that provide the ability to
collect, process, and store information in digital form.
3.1.27 ship earth station, n-a mobile earth station for
maritime service located aboard a ship. Typically, a small
lightweight terminal with omnidirectional antenna with inter-
faces for a personal computer or any other data terminal
equipment for message generation and display, for example,
Inmarsat C, or a steerable antenna mounted on a stabilized
platform, for example, Inmarsat A and Band M.
3.1.28 single failure criterion, n-a criterion applied to a
system such that it is capable of performing its safety task in
the presence of any single failure.
3.1.29 software, n-programs, procedures, rules, and asso-
ciated documentation pertaining to the operation of a computer
system.
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
3.1.30 software cycle-the software cycle typically includes
a requirements phase, a design phase, an implementation
phase, a test phase, an installation and checkout phase, and an
operation and maintenance phase.
3.1.31 validation-the test and evaluation of the integrated
computer system, hardware and software, to ensure compliance
with the functional, performance, and interface requirements.
3.1.32 ver{fication, n-the process to determine if the prod-
uct of each phase of the digital computer system development
process satisfies the requirements set by the previous phase.
3.1.33 voyage data recorder (VDR), n-a store of informa-
tion, in a secure and retrievable form, concerning the position,
movement, physical status, command, and control of a vessel
over the period leading up to a marine casualty.
3.1.34 white box test, n-white box tests require a knowl-
edge of the internal program structure and are based on the
internal design specification.
3 .1.35 workstation, n-a computer and associated visual
display unit (monitor) configured as an I/0 unit to perform
certain tasks.
4.1 Competent information management is essential for safe
and productive operation and regulatory compliance. A short
list of the functions affected includes decision aids for naviga-
tion, communications, ship handling, machinery control, cargo
operations, maintenance and repair, personnel records, and
environmental protection.
4.2 The shipbuilding and shipping industries have identified
a need to develop comprehensive standards and guides for
implementing computer-based shipboard data management
systems.
4.3 The FMS may include single or multiple SITPs and
single or multiple LITPs and provides the means to integrate
shipboard and shoreside computer systems with multivendor
connectivity, distributed processing, and electronic data inter-
change between noncompatible networks, computers, worksta-
tions, and peripherals and maintain databases, which promote
safety of life at sea, protection of the environment, and
operational efficiencies throughout the life cycle of the vessel/
fleet. The FMS may incorporate satellite gateways to coastal
communication hubs providing access to land-based networks,
such as telephone lines, facsimile, e-mail, and expanded
satellite services through land earth stations.
4.4 The SITP can be configured to provide the ship's control
center with access to local control centers, such as for cargo
operations, which may be located on the main deck.
4.5 This guide has provisions relevant to all components of
the FMS platform including the ship earth station, interface
devices for subsystems and administrative systems connected
to or forming part of the network, communication services, and
certain land-based facilities under the direct control of the
ship's management.
4.6 It is the intent of this guide to provide guidelines for the
design and implementation of open client/server architecture
1189
for computer and communication networks for shipboard and
shore-based applications.
4. 7 This guide is intended to assist vessel owners, designers,
shipyards, equipment suppliers, and computer service provid-
ers in the development of contract technical specifications,
which detail the services to be supported, performance re-
quired, and criteria for acceptance for specific FMS installa-
tions.
5. FMS Architecture
5.1 Network Design-There is an underlying computer
network to support the FMS. The functions of the FMS enable
a communication network that provides for the exchange of
information between nodes or devices capable of transmitting
or receiving information in the form of electronic or optical
signals. The process is enabled by communication protocols,
which define the rules that must be implemented in the
hardware and software. The text of this guide is predicated on
a network architecture conforming to the Open Systems
Interconnection Reference Model (OSI/RM). See Guide
F1757.
5.2 Network Management:
5.2.1 The FMS is based upon a wide area network (WAN)
consisting of a number of LANs, which are dispersed geo-
graphically over large areas and are linked through wireless
communications by bridges and gateway devices. The group
responsible for managing the FMS will normally be located in
the principal shoreside office. The primary task of the network
management system is to oversee and report on the operation
of the network, which may comprise products from many
different vendors.
5.2.2 Security-A security function should be provided that
is responsible for the following:
5.2.2.1 Data confidentiality;
5.2.2.2 Data integrity;
5.2.2.3 Data authentification; and,
5.2.2.4 Access control.
5.3 Database Model-Database maintenance and availabil-
ity are key features of the FMS. Each SITP and the LITP will
maintain separate databases. Each FMS site will incorporate a
database management system, including replication capability,
as part of each SITP and LITP installation.
6. Shipboard Information Technology Platform (SITP)
Connectivity
6.1 A key objective of the SITP is to facilitate sharing of
data among shipboard systems (see Fig. 2). The shipboard
systems, which are candidates for connection to an SITP
include, but are not limited to, the following:
6.1.1 Shipboard Operating Systems-Shipboard operating
systems are active systems and may acquire information from
sensors or databases and exercise control internally or transmit
data for administrative purposes or for application in
knowledge-based decision aid systems.
6.1.1.1 Integrated Bridge System-This system comprises
the integrated bridge system bus, the navigation equipment
bus, and the control, monitoring, and alarm bus.
::0
0
Shipboard Operations Administrative Network :
Voyage Cargo
Execution Operations
Safety Environmental Maintenance
:ement Protection &
Resources&
T
Integrated Bridge System Bus
Ill llllili Trim & Stab.
Interior Comm.
.1!11 11111111 1111 Reefer Controls Radar/ ARPA
1

1
.. .. [liAcZomrots]
Depth Finder
Ship's
Documents
'-'VIuu .. n. Monitoring & Alarm Bus Navigation Equipment Bus
Integrated Bridge System (IBS)
FIG. 2 SITP Data Flow (Typical)
Emergency
Procedures
Quality
Maruurement
Wireless COmmunications
14 lil-a If Tech. Support
lllf 1ECDIS Updates
.........._..
Talker
..............
Communications Bus
Ship +=t Shore
Data/Control
Talker/Listener Data /voice only

.,
.....
.......
c.n
en
I
CD
.......
D)
-N
0
0
co
-
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
6.1.1.2 Integrated Bridge System Bus -The integrated
bridge system bus provides connectivity for the navigation
equipment bus and the control, monitoring, and alarm bus and
is a controlled gateway to the administrative network.
6.1.1.3 Navigation Equipment Bus-The navigation equip-
ment bus provides systemwide connectivity for any or all of the
following or any additional units associated with the navigation
of the vessel: gyro compass/autopilot; global positioning sys-
tem (GPS); dead reckoning (DR) navigation system; speed and
distance indicator (Doppler tinder; electronic
chart system but not rate of turn
indicator (ROTI); radar/ ARPA (automatic radar aids);
radio direction finder; and voyage data recorder (VDR).
6.1.1.4 Control, Monitoring, and Alarm Bus-The control,
monitoring, and alarm bus systemwide connectivity
for any or all of the following or any additional units associated
directly with control of the vessel: control, moni-
toring, and alarm; liquid cargo control; inert gas control; ballast
control; fire detection and alarm; loading (trim and stability;
hull stress); internal communications; WT door and fire door
controls; controls for refrigerated cargo; and HVAC controls.
6.1.2 Communications Bus-The communications bus pro-
vides for any or all of the following or any
additional units providing communication facitilities on board
the vessel: Inmarsat A, B, M; Inmarsat C; VHF radiotelephone;
MF/HF SSB radiotelephone; cellular; and GMDSS (Global
Maritime Distress Safety X3).
6.1.3 Administration System:
6.1.3.1 Ship-to-Shore Communications:
Electronic mail and file transfer,
Connection to local telephone systems, and
Sailing instructions (weather routing).
6.1.3.2 Cargo Planning:
Stability and trim,
Container ordering,
Cargo manifests,
Custody transfer procedures and records, and
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code.
6.1.3.3 Fuel Management-Speed/Distance/Consumption:
Fuel rate,
Running inventory,
Fuel quality records,
Bunkering checklist,
Bunker planning-grades and quantities, and
Cargo heating.
6.1.3.4 Inspections, Maintenance, and Repair:
schedules,
Maintenance and repair (M and R) schedules and records,
and
parts inventory control (use, ordered, received, and
cost).
6.1.3.5 Management:
ISM Code compliance,
prc,ce<Jur,es and records (ISO 9000), and
6.1.3.6 Personnel and Safety Management:
1-in>ni.rnlln-.<>nt records management-payroll,
Training and certification,
1191
Hazard communication (benzene, asbestos),
Respiratory protection, and
Occupational health monitoring.
6.1.3.7 Ship's Documents:
Predeparture and prearrival checklists/documents,
Bridge manual,
Muster cards and checklists,
Stability book,
Bunkering records,
Engine manual, and
Fire and damage control.
6.1.3.8 Reports:
Automatic information system (AIS) and
Voyage data recorder (VDR).
(SITP)
7.1 The SITP consists of the software and hardware required
to support a distributed computing network based on the
client/server model. In general, the SITP will be optimized to
respond to a single LITP. For cases 1n which the SITP will
to multiple shoreside platforms, a hierarchy should be
defined. The SITP consists of layers of computer services and
underlying layers of system services, including a network
system and a database management system.
7.1.1 Computing Model-Client/server computing is ex-
pected to be the computing model for the SITP. Client/server is
a joint operation in which specific computers petform specific
tasks. Server tasks generally involve file sharing, database
management, communications management, and so forth. Cli-
ent tasks, on the other hand, are generally active and are
defined by the application.
7.1.1.1 Server(s):
(a) Comprises software that is resident on an intelligent
machine (a computer);
(b) Is a provider of services. The services may include
database services (DBMS), communication services, and pro-
cesses;
(c) Is a shared resource. One server can serve several clients;
(d) Is transparent to the user. Clients and servers communi-
cate by a messaging interface; and,
(e) Is normally a dedicated PC.
7 .1.1.2 The client(s) is normally software that is resident on
a PC or work station.
7 .1.1.3 Quality-Design, development, modification, repli-
cation, and installation should be subject to a documented
quality plan. At a minimum, the areas of responsibility,
performance, and acceptance criteria should be addressed in
the quality plan.
7.1 .1.4 The design and testing of the computer services
should ensure that:
(a) The implementation satisfies the applicable require-
ments, which may also include statutory and classification
requirements;
(b) Design documentation will show that specification re-
quirements can be traced through all levels;
(c) Module interfaces and dependencies are clearly defined
and identified;
cO F1756 - 97a (2008)
(d) Estimates of memory capacity, central processor unit,
and bandwidth are reliable and can support hardware selection;
(e) Test procedures are defined and carried out in parallel
with the design process; and,
(j) Documentation is subject to formal review.
7.1.2 Required Underlying System Services:
7.1.2.1 Network Operating System-A network operating
system supports the following services that should be transpar-
ent to the user:
(a) Initialization of the system services;
(b) Enables applications throughout the network;
(c) Provides for multiple user access to programs and
database and file services;
(d) File and print services-remote access, read, write,
download, and upload;
(e) Gateways to independent networks-the ability to access
a remote system; and,
(j) Network management.
7.1.2.2 Security Management-Security management pro-
vides an integrated platform-wide, including network operating
system and compliant applications, security system that in-
cludes:
(a) Discretionary access control (DAC) in which the users
may protect their own objects;
(b) Mandatory access control (MAC) in which users may
read or write objects for which they have clearance. Users may
read objects at the same or lower class and write objects at the
same or higher class;
(c) Isolation of the security kernel from noncritical systems;
(d) User authentification/identification;
(e) Audit and log of security-related transactions-log-ins,
read or write operations on objects, and log-outs;
(j) System testing;
(g) Users' guide;
(h) System manual; and
U) System documentation.
7.1.2.3 Encryption-Radio communications between SITPs
and LITPs are exposed to electronic monitoring, and messages
transmitted in clear text will be exposed to eavesdropping and
intrusion. Data encryption is the most effective protection
against such intrusions and should be available for security-
sensitive communications. The encryption protocol should
provide for multiple algorithms and the assignment of separate
algorithms for different types of data. A critical element of the
encryption program is the control of data encyphering and data
decyphering keys, a key management system. This system is
responsible for key origination, application, recording, assign-
ment, and deletion.
7 .1.2.4 Virus protection-Includes programmed virus scan-
ning software and floppy disk control.
7.1.2.5 Miscellaneous-Includes automatic checking and
reporting of memory errors and automatic reset and reboot
after power interruption.
7 .1.3 Database Management System:
7.1.3.1 The database management system supports a data
repository that provides for storage of data in digital form and
manages:
(a) Data acquisition and storage;
1192
(b) Data replication on demand, scheduled or event driven;
(c) Integration of information at multiple remote sites;
(d) Open database connectivity;
(e) Query language;
(j) Concurrency/multiple users; and,
(g) Referential integrity.
7.1.3.2 Database Security-The DMBS should incorporate
protection against improper access, improper modification of
data (ensure data integrity), and improper denial of access. It
should provide for:
(a) Operational Integrity-This addresses the serialization
and isolation properties of transactions. Serialization means
that the concurrent run of a set of transactions will give
identical results as a sequential run of the same set of
transactions.
(b) Logical Integrity of Data-Allowed range.
(c) Accountability and Auditing-Record of all read or write
access to data.
(d) Privacy-Control of employment, medical records, and
so forth.
Delimitation-Control of information transfer between
programs.
7.2 SITP Services
7 .2.1 The SITP services, as shown in 1 , are required to
provide overall command and control of the SITP. The execu-
tive has overall responsibility to monitor the SITP and control
the distributed processes that operate as platform services. The
SITP executive itself is a series of services each of which are
responsible for specific tasks. The SITP provides a layer of
insulation and control between high- and low-level processes.
It uses a set of structured APis and internal communication
channels for message exchange.
7 .2.2 Executive Services-The following sections describe
the services provided by the SITP executive. These services are
each responsible for the orderly registration, control, audit, and
monitoring of SITP compliant software processes on the server
and supported workstations for their specific function.
7 .2.2.1 Process Management-Process control refers to
starting, staging, pausing, resuming, and stopping. An SITP
process may be an SITP internal process, network operating
system process, or an SITP compliant application. The process
management interfaces with the SITP compliant process
through the SITP APis and with the process management
database. Each physical computer within the SITP will have a
process management function. All SITP processes are regis-
tered in the SITP process management database that describes
the important attributes of the process. All process information
is available to SITP compliant applications.
7 .2.2.2 Health Management-Health management is used
to check, on an ongoing basis, the current health of all SITP
compliant processes and record that finding in the health
management database. This information is available to SITP
compliant applications.
7 .2.2.3 Peiformance Management-Performance manage-
ment is used to observe the efficiency of any particular entity in
the system. It is through the SITP performance management
facilities that a process can make application-specific data
available for monitoring. Furthermore, the data is modeled in
c4@f F1756 - 97a (2008)
such a way as to allow a general purpose monitoring applica-
tion to display performance data for any participating moni-
tored object.
7.2.2.4 Logging Management-The logging management
interfaces with the SITP compliant process through the SITP
APis and with the logging management database. An SITP
compliant process, locally or remotely, may send unsolicited
events to the logging management for processing. The logging
management directs the logging management database to store
the event in the event history.
7.2.2.5 Alarm Management-The alarm management inter-
faces with the SITP compliant process through the SITP APis
and with the alarm management database. An SITP compliant
process, locally or remotely, may send an unsolicited alarm of
a particular alarm type to the alarm management for process-
ing. The alarm management directs the alarm management
database to store the alarm in the alarm history.
7 .2.2.6 Schedule Management-The SITP schedule man-
agement will define a standard API for applications to schedule
future running of programs, either as one-time or recurring
jobs. A history of requests and execution will be maintained.
Compliant applications will have access to this data for display,
reporting, audit, or diagnostic purposes. Programs can be
scheduled to run based on several criteria, such as time and
data, or a range of times. Programs also can be configured to
run on a recurring basis. The SITP schedule management also
will keep a history of execution.
7 .2.2.7 Time Management-The SITP will define a standard
API for applications to synchronize with a master clock. This
will counter the time drift encountered in computer real-time
clocks and allow for the synchronization of time stamps for
remote systems. In a shipboard system in which distributed
systems execute autonomously, synchronization of events is a
critical function. The time management is responsible for
maintaining the master clock and providing an API for various
SITP services to access that information. To present a uniform
reference point, the time management should operate in
Z (Zulu) Time and date stamp in an accepted international
format and arranged to display world local times on demand.
7 .2.2.8 Localization Management-The SITP localization
management interfaces with the SITP compliant process
through the SITP APis and with the localization management
database. An SITP compliant process can request localization
information, such as language type, collating sequence, date
and money formats, system messages, application strings, and
any other locale-related information.
7.2.2.9 Debug Management-The SITP debug management
interfaces with SITP compliant processes through the client
APis and with the debug management database. An SITP
compliant process can send debug data to the debug manage-
ment for processing. The debug management will record this
debug information in the debug management database.
7.2.2.10 Backup Management-The backup management
will service client backup requests. It interfaces with SITP
compliant processes through the client APis and with the
backup management database. The SITP platform will define a
standard API for the backup and restoration of application files
and file sets. A history of backup and restore operations for
1193
volumes and sets will be retained. Compliant applications will
have access to this data for display, reporting, audit, or
diagnostic purposes.
7 .2.2.11 Test Management-The testing management will
intervene between client test requests and targets. It interfaces
with the SITP compliant process through the client APis and
with the testing management database. An SITP compliant
process can request test execution or test history information.
7.2.2.12 Messaging Management-The SITP messaging
management will define a standard API for applications to
transport data among all registered entities on the global SITP
network. This will allow applications to send and receive
arbitrary data to and from any other SITP application. This
includes ship to shore, ship to ship, and shore to ship. A
hierarchical naming scheme is supported by the messaging
management allowing for orderly classification of communi-
cation endpoints. The messaging management will use com-
munications facilities as a transport mechanism for interappli-
cation messages. The communication abstraction provided by
the messaging management allows for additional transport
mechanisms to be used in the future.
7 .2.2.13 Replication Management-The SITP replication
management is a generalized mechanism that may be used by
SITP application providers to build distributed applications
that operate within the SITP environment. The services pro-
vided by this facility include the following:
(a) Rules-Based Distribution-Configurable distribution of
transactions, at the table level, between ship- and shore-based
system sites. SITP can be configured to send all, or selected
subsets of, information between system sites at flexible inter-
vals. Further, a redistribution feature allows transactions to be
forwarded to multiple sites based on system configuration
parameters.
(b) Distribution Control Mechanisms-To maintain data
integrity, strong control mechanisms are required to serialize,
log, and archive all incoming and outgoing transmissions.
Disaster recovery mechanisms are required to resend failed
transmissions or allow a complete refresh synchronization
between system sites. Confirmation of sent and received
transmissions must be passed between system sites to ensure
data integrity.
(c) Batched Distribution-As sustained real-time connec-
tions between system sites can be costly, the platform will
support hatched groups of transactions to be transmitted in
compressed packets during low-cost time windows.
7 .2.2.14 Enterprise Management-Several of the services
offered by the executive system provide a means of managing
various aspects of the SITP system. The enterprise manage-
ment allows SITP interfaces to be available for use by remote
users. The enterprise management would enable a user at a
shore site to invoke SITP APis on a specific ship.
7 .2.2.15 Configuration Management-The configuration
management handles requests from client processes via API
calls. These requests will either request particular configuration
settings or a change to a configuration setting. These client
processes can be any SITP compliant process. This service is
cO F1756 - 97a (2008)
responsible for updating the configuration database as required
and notifying other processes affected by the configuration
change.
7.2.3 Data Acquisition Services:
7.2.3.1 The SITP data acquisition module is responsible for
communicating with the various shipboard control systems or
data collection units to acquire data. The SITP data acquisition
is responsible for the orderly registration, control, audit, and
monitoring of SITP compliant software processes on the server
and supported workstations for data acquisition. The SITP data
acquisition will provide a framework in which custom inter-
faces can be developed to a variety of control systems and data
acquisition units.
7.2.3.2 Data acquisition from the monitoring and control
bus and the navigation equipment bus generally will be read
A gateway will be interposed between the integrated
system bus and the administrative and communications
networks. The gateway will provide the necessary hardware
and software to enable dialog between the integrated bridge
system and the administrative and communication networks
platform and to enforce the one-way communication where
required. Data flow on the administrative and communication
networks generally is unrestricted except as may be limited by
the mode. Access to the integrated bridge system bus
will be regulated as noted.
7 .2.4 Communications Services-The communications
manager must serve both remote and local users. To avoid
connect-time client server blocking, it should provide for
asynchronous dialog with the database server that queues client
requests, establishes a link, confirms receipt, and satisfies the
according to priority without blocking either the client
or server. The communications manager provides a common
systems interface and support for:
7.2.4.1 Multiple wireless communication services, which
may include Inmarsat A, B, M and C; MSAT; ARGOS;
Orbcomm; and Mobile Datacom.
7.2.4.2 Radio communications include VHF, HF/MF, and
cellular.
7 .2.4.3 Route diversification, least cost routing, and carrier
choice.
7 .2.4.4 Message log and cost allocation.
7.2.5 S!TP Compliance--SITP compliance is required for
software applications to have access to the services of the SITP.
APis will allow SITP compliance for third-party software
applications. An SITP compliant software entity will allow for
seamless integration into the platform. There will be four levels
of compliance based upon the extent of SITP services used:
7 .2.5.1 Level 1:
Process management,
Logging management,
Messaging management, and
Replication management.
7.2.5.2 Level 2-Includes Level 1 plus the following:
Alarm management,
Time management, and
Configuration management.
Debug management,
Backup management,
Test management, and
Enterprise management.
Health management,
Performance management,
Schedule management, and
Localization management.
7.3 Application Programming Interfaces -APis will be
required for third-party applications to use SITP services.
7.3.1 Overview of AP!s-The term "application program-
ming interface" (API) is defined as a software tool kit that can
be used as a building block that facilitates connections primar-
ily between applications and other constituent network soft-
ware, but that also can provide linkages for other elements
the network (see 3). The function of the network
system is to control shared resources and establish transactions
among applications. In multivendor networks without com-
monality, APis provide the required link.
8. Land-Based Information Technology Platform (LITP)
8.1 The LITP is the control and communication center of
FMS. It provides the infrastructure, software, and hardware,
necessary to provide computing and communication services
for the management of a wide area network (WAN) of SITPs
and any auxiliary shoreside installations. The design
will that of the SITPs it manages, expanded,
and optimized as required by the size of the fleet. The
underlying service, that is network operating system and
database management system, as well as the LITP services,
provide the same functions as corresponding services of the
SITP described in 7. and except as follows:
8.1.1 Data Acquisition Services-Typically for the LITP,
data acquisition from control systems will not be required.
8.1.2 Data Management-The LITP data management
function will include acquiring, processing, and warehousing
operating data from the various SITPs under its direction. It
also may acquire data from any associated shoreside version or
from other sources. It will oversee the flow of data to SITPs or
LITPs.
8.1.3 Communications Manager-The communications
manager will support a communications hub with access to
Applications
API's
Network Client
Datahmle Openitq Opentinz
s;ymm System InteriKe
Network
FIG. 3 Conceptual Overview of API linkages
1194
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
land lines that may include telephone, telefax, e-mail, cellular,
and land earth stations.
8.1.4 Configuration Manager-The configuration manager
for the LITP responds to requests to reconfigure elements of
the WAN, that is, the SITPs and subsidiary shoreside plat-
forms, as well as to its local network.
9. Hardware
9.1 The selection of system hardware for both
the LITP must consider a number of that are de]Jentdent
on the nature and the of the applications
Guidance to assist the in the selection of
"Fault Tolerance
The level of fault tolerance necessary for each FMS
u'"'"'""""'"'J'"u should be determined as a function of the '"""'"uvcuu 1
the system. A
levels of fault tolerance is provided in F"'I">'PvUU.l"t'
11. Communications Bus
11.1 The communications hub the inter-
face between the communications software and the various
transceivers may include, but are not be limited to, the
1.1.1 Satelite Communications:
11.1 Circuit-Switched Mode-Inmarsat A, Inmarsat B,
Inmarsat M, and MSAT.
11.1.1.2 Store and Forward Mode-Inmarsat C and Orb-
comm.
11.1.2 Radio Communications:
11.1.2.1 Medium and Long Range-MF (300 kHz to 3
Mhz); HF (3 to 30 MHz); emergency communication (500
kHz); weather fax; and radio telex.
11.1.2.2 Short Range-VHF (30 Mhz to 300 mhz) and
cellular.
11.1.3 GMDSS-See .n.viJc:IIUll\
12. Demonstration and Validation
General-Evidence of a satisfactory of reliabil-
in the manufacture, and installation of the equip-
ment and systems comprising the FMS is to be demonstrated.
In this demonstration consists of series of certifica-
tions, verifications, validations, tests, and trials.
12.2 Test Philosophy--Testing shall be of hierarchical na-
ture, from the equipment unit level through testing at
the system level to final user testing in the installed
environment.
12.3 The system hardware will be tested to ensure that no
part of the system can be overstressed as by voltage transients
or that components are e!e:ctr1caJ!
coJmpatllble with other design constraints to allow for part
and parameter variations and transient conditions, and a safe
margin in temperature.
12.4 LAN Software Assessment:
12.4.1 As used in this guide, software assessment refers to
the for verification and validation of the FMS
software. Verification focuses on the functional design,
whereas validation focuses on whether the system satisfies the
requirements. Software is difficult to test. In contrast to
hardware, it does not wear out, it does not operate within
discrete parameters, and testing is largely qualitative and
inferential. In addition, redundancy is not an effective backup.
12.4.2 Verification and validation of software products
should be carried out for individual products and for the
integiatt:d system. There will be a defined software demonstra-
tion and validation test plan created for each installation, and
the SITP and FMS infrastructure wi11 be tested that
In software testing shall be formalized at three
the development.
12.4.2.1 Unit Tests, of individual modules in isolation to
and interface characteristics. This is ac<::ornp!IS!led
with software development.
12.4.2.2 Integration Tests, of the different units to validate
in accordance with criteria.
12.4.2.3 Acceptance Tests, of the complete system, includ-
aU features and elements of the software in a
cor1h hardware state without any element of simulation
and in a normal operating environment.
12.5 Tests and Trials:
12.5.1 Unit Tests (Alpha Testing), are white box tests
for testing individual modules and combinations of
modules in isolation to verify and interface characteris-
tics. may focus on the lower levels of the and
should be started as soon as the software will
12.5.2 Integration tests are white box tests, the purpose of
which is to bring together the various layers or segments of the
software and hardware, including communication links and
gateways, and to test them step by step as the integration
proceeds.
12.5.3 End User (Acceptance) Tests-These are tests of the
coJnpJlete system including software and hardware, as well as
communication links and gateways. should be conducted
as installed or in simulated environment (mock-up). For the
FMS, this will normally include at least one SITP and one
LITP. These are black box tests requiring multiple iterations. At
a minimum, the following should be included:
12.5.3.1 LoadJStress confirm the system can
handle the peak load conditions, internal and external traffic.
12.5.3.2 Security Testing-To reveal weak spots in the
system repeated attempts to defeat the secmity controls.
1195
12.5.3.3 Performance Testing-These tests exercize all of
the software applications, communications links, and database
management systems.
12.5.3.4 Hardware Compatability Testing -To determine
the of hardware resources, memory, disk space, speed,
and so forth, over requirements.
12.5.3.5 Configuration Testing-To determine how the sys-
tems to required alternative configurations in hardware
or software.
12.6 Operation and Maintenance-This phase will focus on
all aspects of system management including:
12.6.1 System configuration and modification,
12.6.2 Anomaly identification and resolution,
12.6.3 Document control (updating),
F1756- 97a (2008)
12.6.4 Communication interfaces,
12.6.5 Latencies, and
12.6.6 Hardware replacement.
13. Human Interface
13.1 In the design of the user interface to the SITPs and the
LITP, reference may be to recognized standards.
13.2 Visual Display Unit (VDU):
13 .2.1 The size, color, contrast, and density of text and
graphics should be read or interpreted easily from the operator
position under all operational lighting conditions. Typeface
should be an internationally recognized simple, clearcut design
similar to Helvetica medium.
13.2.2 VDU pages should have a standardized format.
Information and functional areas should be presented in a
consistent manner.
13.2.3 An overview page or pages should be available to
explain the paging system.
13.2.4 Each page should have a unique identifying label
shown on the screen.
14. Training and Documentation
14.1 General-Regardless of the technical excellence of the
FMS software and hardware, operator training is essential to its
successful application. The disconnected nature of ship opera-
tions serves to emphasize the need for shipboard personnel to
be trained in depth on the operation and maintenance of the
system.
14.1.1 It is a condition of this guide that formal training in
the operation of the FMS is available.
14.1.2 Administrators and users should be trained in and
demonstrate their knowledge of step-by-step procedures for
operation of the FMS including, to the extent necessary,
instructions for associated subsystems, the administrative net-
work functions, ship earth stations, and the land-based com-
munications hub. The program of instruction should include
the following at a minimum:
14.1.2.1 Management of local area networks,
14.1.2.2 Management of wide area networks,
14.1.2.3 Client server systems,
14.1.2.4 Network operating systems,
14.1.2.5 All installed hardware,
14.1.2.6 Maintenance and repair,
14.1.2.7 Knowledge of the regulations concerning telecom-
munications, and
14.1.2.8 Administration of the SITP and FMS systems.
14.2 Documentation:
14.2.1 Documentation can be defined as "the aids provided
for the understanding of the structure and intended uses of an
information system or its components" (ANSI) and system
documentation as "the collection of documents that describe
the requirements, capabilities, limitations, design, and opera-
tion of an information processing system" (ISO). Both defini-
tions are relevant for the purposes of this guide. In addition, the
documentation should comply with the provisions of ANSI/
IEEE 1063 as a minimum.
14.2.2 User documentation for the SITP may be presented
in a tutorial mode and should include detailed instructions for
all permitted operations and for such system adjustments or
repairs as may be practicable for on board personnel.
14.2.3 Administrator documentation for the FMS should
include, in addition to the user documentation, complete
reference material necessary to administer the system.
15. Keywords
15.1 communications service; data acquisition service;
DBMS (database management system) service; executive ser-
vices; fleet management system network; land-based informa-
tion technology platform; network operating system; shipboard
information technology platform
APPENDIXES
MTS
ANSI
AOR
API
ARPA
ASCII
BIOS
CCITI
CES
CISPR
CMIP
CAS
DMA
DSC
EBCDIC
EGG
ECMA
Xl. ACRONYMS
Automated Maritime Telephone Service
American National Standards Institute
Atlantic Ocean Region (E-East, W-West)
Application Programming Interface
Advance Research Projects Agency
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Basic Input/Output System
Consultative Committee for International Telegraphy and
Telephony
Coast Earth Station
Comite International Special des Peturbations RadioPiectrique
(International Special Committee on Radio Interference)
Common Management Information Protocol
Coast Radio Station
Direct Memory Access
Digital Selective Calling
Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
Enhanced Group Call
European Computer Manufacturers Association
1196
EDI
EIA
EMI
EPIRB
FCC
FDDI
FIPS
FMS
FTP
GMDSS
GOSIP
GUI
HF
HVAC
ICMP
IEEE
IP
ISDN
Electronic Document Interchange
Electronic Industries Association
Electromagnetic Interference
Emergency Postion-lndicating Radio Beacons
Federal Communications Commission
Fiber Distributed Data Interface
Federal Information Processing Specification
Fleet Management System
File Transfer Protocol
Global Maritime Distress and Safety Systems
Government OSI Profile
Graphical User Interface
High Frequency (see Appendix X2)
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
Internet Control Message Protocol
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Internet Protocol
Integrated Services Digital Network
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
ISO
ITE
ITU
IVD
Kbps
KBps
LAN
LF
MAC
MAN
MAP
MAP I
Mbps
MBps
MF
MIPS
MTBF
NBDP
NETBIOS
NFS
NFT
NMEA
OS/2
OSIRM
PC
POSIX
PSDN
International Organization for Standardization
Information Technology Equipment
International Telecommunications Union
Integrated Voice and Data
Kilo bits per second
Kilo bytes per second
Local Area Network
Low Frequency (see Appendix X2)
Medium Access Control (OSI physical layer)
Metropolitan Area Network
Manufacturing Automation Protocol
Message Application Programming Interface
Million bits per second
Million bytes per second
Medium Frequency (see Appendix X2)
Million Instructions per Second
Mean Time Between Failure
Narrow Band Direct Printing
Network Basic Input Output System
Network File Server
Network File Transfer
National Marine Electronics Association
Operating System/2
Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model
Personal Computer
Operating system developed by IEEE as Standard 1003
Packet Switching Data Network
PSN
RAID
RAM
RFI
RISC
AMON
ROM
RS-232C
RS-422
RS-449
Ax
SART
SCSI
SES
SITP
SMTP
SNMP
SSB
UHF
VHF
VTS
WAN
Packet Switching Network
Redundant Array of Inexpensive Discs
Random Access Memory
Radio Frequency Interference
Reduced Instruction Set Computer
Remote Monitoring of Networks
Read Only Memory
An EIA standard 25-pin connector for computer/terminal interface
for signal rates up to 20 kbps
An EIA standard 5-pin connector for signal rates up to 20 kbps
An EIA standard for 9- and 37-pin connectors for signal rates
up to 2 Mbps
Receiver
Search and Rescue Transponder
Small Computer Systems Interface
Ship Earth Station
Shipboard Information Technology Platform
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
Single-Side Band
Ultra High Frequency (see X2)
Very High Frequency (see X2)
Vessel Traffic Service
Wide Area Network
X2. RELATED DOCUMENTS
X2.1 ISO Standards:
4
ISO 9000 Quality Management and Quality Assurance
Standards-Guidelines for Selection and Use
ISO 9001 Quality Systems-Model for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing
ISO 9000-3 Quality Management and Quality Assurance
Standards-Guidelines for the Application of 9001 to the
Development, Supp1y and Maintenance of software
ISO/IEC 8802-3 Information Technology-Local and Metro-
politan Area Networks-Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access
with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and
Physical Layer Specifications (Ethernet)
ISO/IEC 8802-4 Information Processing Systems-Local
Area Networks-Part 4: Token Passing Bus Access Method and
Physical Layer Specifications
ISO/IEC 9075 Information Technology-Database Langua-
ges-SQL
ISO 8073 Transport Layer Connection-Oriented Services for
the OSI Reference Model
ISO 8602 Transport Layer Connectionless Services for the
OSI Reference Model
ISO 8326/27 Session Layer Connection-Oriented Services
for the OSI Reference Model
ISO 9548 Session Layer Connectionless Services for the
ISO Reference Model
ISO 8822/23 Presentation Layer Connection-Oriented Ser-
vices for the OSI Reference Model
ISO 9576 Presentation Layer Connectionless Services for
the OSI Reference Model
ISO 10020/21 ISO Standard for Message Handling Services
Based on the CCITT X.400 Standard
ISO 8571 ISO Definition of the File Transfer, Access and
Management (FTAM) Application
X3. OVERVIEW OF RADIOCOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR GMDSS
X3.1 See X3.l for an overview of radiocommunica-
tions equipment required for GMDSS.
1197
F1756 - 97a (2008)
rinter
3. VHF DSC watch receiver
4. SART- minimum of two
5. NAVTEX
EGC if outside NA VfEX
Sea area- A3
Within Coverage of INMARSAT
Sattelite
1. VHF Radiotele hone
2. VHF DSC on channel 70 and
rinter
4. SART- minimum of two
5.NAVTEX
6. EGC and printer if outside
NA VfEX covera e
7. 406 MHz EPIRB
8. VHF two-way radiotelephone
apparatus
a. two
300
MF watch receiver dedicated
to 2187.5 kHz
12. Auto. direction finder 2182
kHz
13. MF DSC encoder/decoder
14. Plus either
a) Two lnmarsat A SatComs or
b) Two lnmarsat C Sat Corns or
c) Imnarsat A & C
d) lnmarsat A+ MFIHF +telex or
lnmarsat C + MFIHF
Sea area- A4
(All other areas outside A 1, A2
andA3
1. VHF Radiotele hone
2. VHF DSC on channel 70and
tinter
4. - minimum of two
X
6. 406 MHz EPIRB
7. VHF two-way radiotelephone
apparatus
a. two req'd. for ships
300 < < 500
10. Two MFIHF radiotelephones
withDSC
FIG. X3.1 Overview of Radiocommunications Equipment Required for GMDSS
X4. SYSTEM HARDWARE
X4.1 Electromagnetic Interference to
be situated in a shipboard open deck environment must be
considered as to levels of radiated and conducted
EMI. Because of a area, the enclosed na,vw:::ltutg
is treated as an open area. The sources of EMI can
be classed as intentional emitters and nonintentional emitters.
Nonintentional emitters are limited standard to a level of
lOV/m radiated EMI under test conditions. Intentional emit-
ters, which include radar, radio, and so forth, are not
limited as to radiated or direction. In addition to fixed
emitters, the area is to
radiation from mobile emitters, such as, walkie talkies, with
levels of EMI to sensitive electronic
ment. See IEC 945 and IEC 533.
X4.2
the
branches.
Layer:
'"""''"
1
'"'"' of a network is defined
of the nodes and the
1198
X4.2.1.1 Star-In practice, the execution for both
bus and ring is often star with arms radliating
from a central hub to each node or station. The wiring within
the hub is connected so that the system behaves as a
bus or This arrangement allows for and
1S011atmg faulted circuits or without
the entire network.
X4.2.1.2 Bus-The bus
Ethernet
with the
The nodes share the
bus, and as a result,
reqiUlflllg SOme form Of aCCeSS C011tf0l, Which is nrrnrlliPrl
In the form,
at all the other nodes. effective
for the standard Ethernet con-
and this a"'
C1UJ)le:i\.mg. Switched
nu"''"rl"'" each device with its own segment so
bandwidth without contention.
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
X4.2.1.3 Ring-The ring network is characteristic of the
Although commonly shown in ring form,
execution is a which be-
haves like a from a central concentrator
the multistation access unit (MSAU), radiate to station:
lrnp1ementaltion should be with 8802.5 at
one or
insulation. The central coJnd11ctin2
canies the and the the
cable is available as thick coax (10Base5 has
the backbone) or thin coax (10Base2).
fibers possess 1m-
over copper conductors:
Im.mtmi1:v to noise from radiated or conducted EMI;
transmission speeds-100 over paths of
up to 2 km for glass fibers. This is the medium of choice for
backbone service; and,
(c) lmcnr"'"'""
Also available with fibers, but with limited to
under 10 Mhps and paths of less than 100 m.
X4.3 Servers-The standard configuration for the shipboard
local area network will comprise a process server, a commu-
nications server, and a database server, which may be allocated
to one or more computers. Estimated minimum re1Juire1ments
for the computer(s)/servers are:
X4.3.1 Processor:
X4.3.1.1 mhz,
.2 Two instructions per clock
X4.3.1 .3 45 MFLOPS
and
X4.3. 1.4 Scalable.
X4.3.2 Memory (RAM), 40-MB ECC (error, checking, cor-
and rerlor1tim!)
X4.3.3 Storage Devices:
X4.3.3.1 1.05-GB hot swap fast SCSI-2 disk,
X4.3.3.2 3.5-in., 1.44-MG disk drive, and
CO-ROM-internal SCSI-2, E.4X.
X4.3.5 Color Monitor (Video
X4.3.5.1 15 in., resolution,
noninterlaced, refresh rate 72 MHz; and,
X4.3.5.2 512-KB standard video memory.
X4.3.6 Graphic Card.
800 X 600,
X4.3.7 Multimedia Sound System Support.
X4.4 Workstations -Two workstations should be provided.
While nominally acting as client, workstations may in addition
be as servers. When in this manner, the
recmi1ren1en1ts of would to a
stanGal<)ne workstation:
Processor:
M ultirnedia Sound
Color Monitor, see
X4.5 Power Sources -The power
mains may be to the variations
also IEC 92.101):
System.
from the
X4.! (see
X4.5.1 Power supply to SITP may be arranged as follows:
1199
X4.5.1.1 From main or emergency power supply with
power conditioner as required to provide the required
and backed up by a closed transition uninterruptible power
with a minimum reserve capacity of 15 min.
X4.5.1.2 An on-line uninterruptible power supply with a
minimum reserve capacity of 15 min supplied from the
main with closed transition backup.
X4.6 Embedded Programs -Embedded programs should
be documented using the following format:
X4.6.1 The procedure's actual calling name from within the
program should be listed along with a one-line description
statement for the calling name. The statement's purpose is to
describe the task associated with the name.
X4.6.2 A list of parameters, a
statement for each parameter that describes the task associated
with the parameter's name, a statement as to whether the
parameter is an input or an output of the and a range
of valid values for each parameter that may be passed into or
out of the procedure.
X4.6.3 A list of calling/called procedures, a description
statement for each procedure that describes the task associated
TABLE X4.1 Power Sources Variations
NoTE 1-Voltage and frequency variations may occur simultaneously.
Total harmonic loading-S%. Harmonic loading at any single fre-
m H ~ n c v %.
Parameter
Permanent,
Transient
% o/o
Voltage +6, -10 20 1.5
5 10 5
<0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
with the procedure's name (this statement should be the same
as the one describing the procedure's calling name), a state-
ment as to whether the procedure is called from within the
routine or is the caller of the routine, and the name of t ~
module in which the calling/called procedure can be found.
X4.6.4 A synopsis describing the program flow for the
procedure. This synopsis should be a detailed, plain language
narrative of what the code is doing.
X4.6.5 A revision history for the procedure that includes the
data and a description of the change. The description should
include the new revision level for the overall program that has
resulted from the module modification.
X4.7 Environmental Conditions-The following are to be
considered minimum levels. If the equipment is to be part of a
system subject to regulatory body approval, then the require-
ments of the regulatory body, if stricter, will apply.
X4.7.1 Temperature Range, operating: 5 to 40C.
X4.7.2 Humidity, operating (5 to 40C): 15 to 80% relative
humidity.
X4.7.3 Vibration, operating random: 0.2 g for 5- to 100-Hz
survival random: 2 g for 5 to 100 Hz.
X4.7.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), to meet
CISPR 22 Class B ITE or equivalent.
X4.7.5 Ship's Motion, operational in any position up to 90.
X5. FAULT TOLERANCE
X5.1 The purpose of fault tolerance is to minimize the
impact of hardware or software failures on the network and
particularly to prevent the loss of data. The following is a
description of several of the methods of backup that may be
considered.
X5.2 "Hot Swap" Backup-This allows continuous use
while replacing a failed drive.
X5.2.1 Disk Mirroring-This system provides for every-
thing to be written to two disks simultaneously; if the primary
disk fails, the standby disk can take over automatically. In this
system, both disks are served by a single controller.
X5.2.2 Disk Duplexing-This system provides for every-
thing to be written to two disks simultaneously as in disk
mirroring, but each disk has a dedicated controller for an added
level of protection.
X5.2.3 RAID 1-This is the same as disk mirroring (see
X5.2.1).
X5.2.4 RAID 5-RAID 5 can read and write blocks of
information to different disks in an array, and it distributes
parity information over all disks in the array. Parity is a
mathematical representation of data held in the array.
X5.3 Tape Backup -On-line tape backup is an option for
multitasking operating systems. Tape backup does not provide
"hot swap" capability, and data must be reentered after a drive
failure. Also on-line tape backup may slow the system opera-
tion to an unacceptable degree.
X5.3.1
1
14-in. Tape, capacities to about 500 Mbytes.
X5.3.2 Digital Audio Tape (DAT), capacities to about 4
Gbytes (8 Gbytes with data compression).
X5.3.3 Video, 8 technology, capacities to about 5 Gbytes.
This is based on 8-track, 8-mm tape cartridges used in video
camcorders.
X6. FIXED ANTENNAS
X6.1 Scope-This appendix is intended to provide informa-
tion of the types of fixed antennas commonly provided for
navigation, communication, and collision avoidance.
X6.2 Classes-For purposes of this appendix, the following
classes of antennas are considered:
X6.2.1 Omnidirectional Transmitting.
X6.2.2 Omnidirectional Receiving.
X6.2.3 Directional Transmitting.
X6.2.4 Directional Receiving.
X6.2.5 Rotating Transmitting/Receiving.
X6.3 Required Antenna Installations for Ocean Area A3
(Typical):
System Type Antenna
1200
Statcom A and B, suitable for
telex, telephony, data and
voice communication
Statcom C, telex only
Satnav
X-band radar system
S-band radar system
MF/HF transceiver for telephony,
digital selective calling, direct
printing telegraphy, general
communications, range
<500 km
MF/HF watch receiver 2182kHz
MF alarm generator
MF 2182-kHz direction finder
Navtex system
lnmarsat EGG receiver
VHF transceivers
VHF watch receiver
X6.4 References:
Automatic directional transmitting/receiving,
1.5 to 1.65 GHz
Omnidirectional, 1.5 to 1.65 GHz
Omnidirectional whip antenna
Rotating transmitting/receiving-1 0 em
Rotating transmitting/receiving-3 em
Large whip antenna as main with wire
antenna as reserve
Same as above
Whip antenna
DF loop aerial and a short wire or whip
Whip
Whip
Whip
Whip
0 F1756 - 97a (2008)
X6.4.1 Radio Regulations of the International Telecommu-
nication Union, Geneva 1976.
X6.4.2 CCIR Recommendation 45, avoidance of interfer-
ence from ship's other radio communication apparatus on
board.
X6.4.3 International Convention for the Safety of Life at
Sea, 1974 as amended, Chapters III and IV.
X6.5 Types of Antennas:
X6.5.1 Omnidirection Antennas.
X6.5.2 Radio Transmitting Antennas:
X6.5.2.1 Wire Antennas:
(a) LF communication, 30 to 300kHz.
(b) MF communication, 300kHz to 3 MHz.
(c) Emergency communication, 500kHz.
X6.5.2.2 Whip and Dipole Antennas:
(a) MF communication, 300kHz to 3 MHz.
(b) HF communication, 3 to 30 MHz.
(c) VHF communication, 30 to 300 MHz.
(d) UHF communication, 300 MHz to 30Hz.
(e) Facsimile receiver, 3 to 30 MHz.
X6.5.3 Radio/Television Receiving Antennas:
X6.5.3.1 Wire Antennas:
(a) LF communication, 30 to 300kHz.
(b) MF communication, 300kHz to 3 MHz.
(c) Emergency communication, 500kHz.
X6.5.3.2 Omnidirectional Radio and Television Central An-
tennas.
X6.5.4 Satellite Communication:
X6.5.4.1 Satcom A and B, telex, telephony, data and voice
communication, automatic 1.5 to 1.65 GHz.
X6.5.5 Directional Transmitting/Receiving Antennas:
X6.5.5.1 Satcom C, data and telex only, omnidirection
antenna, 1.5 to 1.65 GHz.
X6.5.6 Navigational Antennas
X6.5 .6.1 Hyperbolic Navigation Antennas:
(a) Omega System, 10kHz.
(b) Loran System, 100kHz.
(c) Decca System, 84 to 130kHz.
X6.5.7 Global Positioning System (GPS):
Ll band-1575.42 MHz
L2 band-1227 .6 MHz
X6.5.8 Navigational Radar Antennas.
X6.5.9 Rotating Transmitting/Receiver Antenna:
X band navigation radar, 8 to 12 GHz
S band navigation radar, 3 to 4 GHz
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box ClOO, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
COPYRIGHT/).
1201
c6 Designation: F1757- 96 (Reapproved 2008)

'!!I_!RNATIONA.L
Standard Guide for
Digital Communication
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapprovaL A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapprovaL
1.
1.1 The principal content of this
to a communication network appllcaiJle
marine computer systems
1.1.1 the communication
tec:hnto1<)gJca1 infrastructure,
blocks of network topolo-
and transmission associated with the imple-
mentation of transmission media in a network environment;
and,
1.1.3 Identifying operating system and environments.
1.2 Using the System Interconnection (OSI) model,
which provides a layered approach to network functionality
and evaluation, common network communications protocols
are identified and characterized in this guide according to lower
and upper layer protocols corresponding to their degree and
type of functionality.
1.3 Although it is desirable that network users, designers,
and administrators recognize and understand every possible
networking protocol, it is not possible to know the intimate
details of every protocol specification. Accordingly, this guide
is not intended to address fully every hardware and software
protocol ever developed for commercial use, which spans a
period of about 25 years. Instead, the user of this guide will be
introduced to a brief overview of the majority of past and
present protocols which may comprise a ship or marine
internetwork, to include Local Area Networks (LANs), Wide
Area Networks (WANs), and related hardware and software
that such network interoperability and data transfer.
1.4 While this provides an understanding of the wide
range of communication protocols, the user is recommended to
consult the reference material for acquiring a more compre-
hensive understanding of individual communication protocols.
However, by examining the basic functions of protocols and
reviewing the protocol characterization criteria identified in
1
This guide is under the jurisd]tcti<Jn of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships and
Marine Technology and is direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.05 on
in 1996. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as F1757- 96(2002). DOl:
10.1520/F1757-96R08.
the user will be more apt to unaetstalnOmg other
nr,)tflicols not mentioned or addressed herein.
Documents
2.1 AST!vl Standards:
01
Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) -- Token
Media Access Control (MAC)
X3.148 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)-- Token
Protocol (PHY)
X3.166 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDD[) Token
Medium Dependent (PMD)
X3.172 American National Standard Dictionary for Infor-
mation
2.3 IEEE Standards:
4
100 Standard Dictionary for Electrical and Electronic Terms
610 Standard for Software Terminol-
ogy
610.7 Standard
nology
802.1 High Level Interface (lnter:networking)
802.2 Link Control
802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access Control
802.4 Token Bus Medium Access Control
802.5 Token Medium Access Control
802.6 Meltrooolit;:m
Termi-
802.9 Local and
Services (IS) LAN
Control (MAC) and
803.5
Interface at the Medium Access
(PHY) Layers
2.4 ISO .\tnnr1r1rrl.1;
connection-Basic Reference Mode.!
2
www.astm.org.
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), W. 43rd St,
4
Available from Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (JEEE),
445 Hoes Ln., P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854 .. 1331, http://www.ieee.org.
1202
0 F1757 - 96 (2008)
9040/9041 Virtual Terminal (VT)
8831/8832 Job Transfer and Manipulation (JTM)
857118572 File Transfer Access Management (FTAM)
9595/9596 Common Management Infrnnation Service/
Protocol (CMIP)
8823 Connection Oriented Presentation Protocol
8327 Connection Oriented Session Protocol
8073 Connection Oriented Protocol
8473 Connectionless Network Service
8208 Packet Level Protocol
8802-2 Link Control
9314--2
8802-3 CSMA/CD (Bus)
8802-4 Token Bus
7776 Access Protocol/Link Access Protocol-Balanced
(LAP/LAPB)
7809
X.25 Packet Level Protocol
X.226 Connection Oriented Presentation Protocol
Connection Oriented Session Protocol
X.224 Connection Oriented Transport Protocol
2.6 CCIIT Standards:
6
X.2l (BIS) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment
and Data Circuit-Terminating (DCE)
for Operation on Public Data Networks
Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE) for Ter-
minals Operating in the Packet Mode and Connected
Public Data Networks by Dedicated Circuit
2.7 EIA/T!A Standard:
6
232C
568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring
Standard (ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-91)
2.8 Internet Request for Comments (RFCs) Standards:
RFC 768 User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
RFC 791 Internet Protocol (IP)
7
RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol (CMP)
RFC 793 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
7
821 Mail Transfer Protocol
RFC 826
RFC 854 TELNET Protocol
7
RFC 894
RFC 903
RFC 959 File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
7
RFC 1042
RFC 1157 Simple Network Management Protocol
RFC 1201
5
Available from Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), 2500 Wilson Blvd.,
Arlington, VA 22201, http://www.eia.org.
6
Available from the U.S. Department of Commerce, National Technical Infor-
mation Service (NTIS), 5285 Port Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161, http://
www.ntis.gov.
7
Documents may be obtained via anonymous ftp from the hosts:ds.internic.net,
directory rk
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3 .1.1 The terminology used in this guide is defined in
Terminology E1013, IEEE 610, and ANSI X3.172, with the
following additions defined in 3.2.
3.2.1 bridge, n-a device that interconnects local or remote
networks no matter what network protocol that is, TCP/IP or
IPX, are involved. Bridges form a single logical network.
3.2.2 hub, n-a central location for the attachment of cables
from nodes and other network components.
3.2.3 internetwork, n-a collection of LANs using different
network operating systems that are connected to form a larger
net\vork.
3.2.4 IAN (local area network), n-a data communication
system consisting of a collection of interconnected computers,
sharing applications, data and peripherals.
3.2.5 network operating system (NOS), n--the software for
a network that runs in a file server and control access to files
and other resources from multiple users.
3.2.6 node(s), n-any intelligent device connected to the
network. This includes terminal servers, host computers, and
any other devices, such as printers and terminals, that are
directly connected to the network.
1203
3.2.7 protocol, n-a standard method of communicating
over a network.
3.2.8 repeater, n-a network device that repeats signals
from one cable onto one or more other cables, while restoring
signal timing and waveforms.
3.2.9 router, n-a device capable of filtering/forwarding
packets based upon data link layer information.
3.2.1 0 server, n-a device that stores data for network users
and provides network access to that data.
3.2.11 topology, n-the arrangement of the nodes and con-
necting hardware that comprises the network.
3.2.12 WAN (wide area network), n-a network using com-
mon carrier transmission services for transmission of data over
a large geographical area.
4.1 This guide is intended to provide an understanding of
the wide range of communication protocols standards, allow-
ing the user to understand better their applicability to shipboard
networks and marine platform computerized systems. For
computerized networks and systems, communication protocols
are necessary for integrating various system devices, providing
functionality between dissimilar subnetworks, or for enabling
remote connections, either pier side or through geophysical
communication technologies.
4.2 The wide variety and scope of digital communication
protocol standards adds greatly to the complex decision pro-
cess for specifying compatible protocols for system applica-
tions and related devices for the myriad of potential shipboard
systems. However, the user must identify the initial networking
requirements, so once the network protocols under evaluation
F1757 - 96 (2008)
are well understood, the decision process should determine the
appropriate network protocols. Therefore, this guide is in-
tended to reduce the complexity involved with protocol selec-
tion and implementation.
4.3 Network protocols define an agreed, quantifiable ~ n t i t y
or set of rules, by which user computers, system networks, and
internetworking devices communicate and exchange informa-
tion. Communication protocols specify essential networking
guidelines, such as physical interface connections, or data
format and control operations between two communicating
computers. Ship and marine digital communication protocol
requirements are no different than their land-based networked
counterparts. Both require standardized protocol selection, in
various protocol categories, including LAN standards, WAN
protocols, LAN/WAN protocols, network management, wiring
hub configurations/operations, hardware platforms, operating
systems, and network applications.
5. Origin of Protocol Development
5.1 Communication protocol standards have been devel-
oped or refined through three separate processes, identified as
follows:
5.1.1 Defacto Protocol Standards -Acquired widespread
use of a popular technique adopted by vendors and developers;
5.1.2 Dejur Protocol Standards-Standards making bodies;
and,
5.1.3 Proprietary Protocol Standard-Private corporation-
based protocols with limited interoperability.
5.2 The open standards approach is now the norm, which
allows multiple protocol networking solutions to be available,
and as a result, proprietary protocols are now becoming
obsolete.
6. Local Network Interconnection
6.1 The characteristic of a local network is determined
primarily by three factors: transmission medium, topology, and
medium access control protocol.
6.1.1 The principal technological elements that determine
the nature of a local network are the topology and transmission
medium of the network. Together, it determines the type of data
that may be transmitted, the speed and efficiency of
communications, and the type of applications that a network
may support.
6.1.2 Interconnecting a set of local networks is referred to as
an intemetworking. The local networks are interconnected by
devices generically called gateways. Gateways provide a
communication path so that data can be exchanged between
networks.
6.2 Topology-The common topologies used for local net-
works are star, ring, and bus/tree (see 1).
6.2.1 Star Topology-In a star topology, a central switching
element is used to connect all the nodes in the network. The
central element uses circuit switching to establish a dedicated
path between two stations wishing to communicate (see 1).
6.2.2 Ring Topology-The ring topology consists of a closed
loop, with each node attached to a repeating element. Data
circulate around the ring on a series of point-to-point data links
Star
Bus
Tree
FIG. 1 Local Network Topologies
between repeaters. A station wishing to transmit waits for its
next tum and then sends data out onto the ring in the form of
a packet (see 1 ).
6.2.3 Bus/Tree Topology-The bus or tree topology is char-
acterized by the use of a multipoint medium. The bus is simply
a special case of the tree, in which there is only one trunk, with
no branches. Because all devices share a common communi-
cations medium, only one pair of devices on a bus or tree can
communicate at a time. A distributed medium access protocol
is used to determine which station may transmit (see 1).
6.3 Internetwork Topology-The common topologies used
to support emerging networking topologies requiring the inte-
gration of data, video and voice, as well as higher transport
bandwidth are backbone, hierarchical, and mesh (see 2).
6.3.1 Backbone-Backbone configurations are used in net-
working environments in which local networks are connected
over high-speed backbone cables. Bridges and routers are used
to manage the data passing between interconnected networks
and the backbone (see 2).
6.3.2 Hierarchial-In the hierarchial configuration, star-
configured hubs are wired to a central hub that handles interhub
traffic. Routers and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
technology provide support to traffic intensive network appli-
cations requiring the integration of voice, video, and data (see
2).
6.3.3 Mesh-In mesh configurations, there are at least two
pathways to each node. This is a common configuration in
emerging high-speed enterprise networks requiring the integra-
tion of voice, video, and data. It is composed of intemetwork-
ing devices, such as bridges, routers, and ATM technology. The
internetworking devices provide efficient paths for data to
travel from one point to another in this configuration. Mesh
networks often are used because of reliability; when one path
goes down, another can take over (see :2).
6.4 Cabling-Cabling falls into the following categories:
coax, twisted pair, and fiber.
1204
6.4.1 Coax:
6.4.1.1 Thicknet-The standard Thicknet is IEEE 802.3
10BASE5. It is a 0.4-in. diameter RG 4 50-Q coaxial cable. It
F1757 - 96 (2008)
BACKBONE
HIERARCHICAL
FIG. 21nternetwork Topology
may be up to 500 m in length. A maximum of 100 devices can
be attached to this cable.
6.4.1.2 ThinNet-The standard for ThinNet is IEEE 802.3
10BASE2. It is a 0.25-in. diameter RG58A!U 50-Q coaxial
cable. It can be up to 185 m in length and have a maximum of
30 devices attached to it. Each device normally is attached at
0.5-m increments via a BNC T-connector. However, devices
may be attached to an AUI cable and external transceiver.
6.4.2 Twisted Pair:
6.4.2.1 The standard for twisted pair is EIA/TIA-568. It is a
24-AWG telephone wire. The ends of the twisted pair wires are
composed of RJ-45 or RJ-11 telephone-style connectors. Each
device connects to a network wiring hub which controls or
passes the network signal. There are five category ratings for
twisted pair wiring, LVL/CAT-1 through LVL/CAT-5.
6.4.2.2 There are two major types of twisted pair: un-
shielded twisted pair (UTP) and shielded twisted pair (STP).
Environmental surroundings dictate what type of twisted pair is
used. If the environment is prone to a high degree of electrical
interference, STP is used.
6.4.3 Optical Fiber-See Table 1.
Type
Single mode
Multi mode
TABLE 1 Optical Fiber Cabling
Light Source
laser
LED
Bandwidth
100 GHz
1-2 GHz
Primary Application
telephone traffic
data traffic
1205
6.5 2 provides a generalized comparison of the
advantages and disadvantages of the technical characteristics
of local networks, using the transmission medium as a frame of
reference.
Service Classes of Local Networks and Bandwidth
Networks-Computer networks that serve as components of a
communication network provide support to a large multitude of
service classes (see Table 3).
6.5.1 Local Area Network (LAN)-The LAN provides ser-
vices to support a group of interconnected computers to share
applications, data, and peripherals. Bandwidth service is from
1 to 10 Mbps.
6.5.2 High-Speed Local Area Networks (HSLN)-The
HSLN provides a service in the range of 50 Mbps to 1 Gpbs.
There are two key applications for HSLN: backend and
backbone networks. A backend HSLN main function is to
provide high end-to-end throughput between high-speed
devices, such as servers and mass storage devices. A backbone
HSLN provides a LAN or WAN that interconnects intermedi-
ate systems. Fiber optic cables are used as a transmission
medium to internetwork topologies.
6.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)-A network that covers a
large geographic area. The differences between WAN and
LANs are as follows:
6.5.3.1 Economic-WAN services are purchased; LANs are
owned.
0 F1757 - 96 (2008)
TABLE 2 Technical Characteristics of LANS
Transmission Medium
Characteristic twisted pair (UTP, STP) baseband coaxial cable broadband coaxial cable fiber optic cable
To_l)_ology bus, star, or ring bus or ring bus or ring bus, star, or ring
Channels single channel single channel multichannel single, multichannel
normally up to 4 Mbps or 16
normally ~ to 1 0 Mbps; up
Data rate Mbps; up to 100 Mbps up to 400 Mbps up to 1 Gbps
obtainable
to 100 Mbps obtainable
Maximum nodes on net usually <255 usually <1024 several thousands several thousands
supports voice, data, and
low cost; may be able to use supports voice, data, and
Major advantages low cost; simple to install video applications
existing wire video applications simultaneously
simultaneously
limited bandwidth, requires
high cost; difficult to install;
Major disadvantages conduits; low immunity to low immunity to noise cable cost; difficult to splice
requires RF modems
noise
TABLE 3 Classes of Local Networks
Local Area High-Speed Local
WAN
Network Network
Transmission twisted pair, coax, twisted pair, CATV public/private data
medium fiber coax, fiber network providers
backbone,
Topology bus, tree, ring hierarchical, point-to-point
mesh
Transmission
i-20 Mbps 50 Mbps - 1 Gbps
56 Kbps - 45.5
speed Mbps
Switching
packet, circuit packet, circuit packet, circuit
technique
6.5.3.2 Technical-WANs are made up of point-to-point
links; LANs are shared-media.
6.6 Medium Access Control Protocol--To facilitate the shar-
ing of the transmission among network stations, a proper
medium access control scheme must be implemented to
control, coordinate, and supervise the access of user informa-
tion to and from the shared transmission medium:
6.6.1 LAN-IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.4, and IEEE 802.5
(CSMA/CD, token bus, and token ring ) LAN protocols.
6.6.2 HSLN-IEEE 802.2 (FDDI fiber token ring protocol)
or IEEE 802.6 DQDB, ATM.
6.6.3 WAN-X.25 Frame Relay, ATM.
6.7 lnternetworking (Gateways and Routers)-
Internetworking is the interconnection and interoperability of
small-size local networks into existing networks. A local
network should have the capability to support multiple proto-
cols and allow difference environments to operate in parallel.
Intemetworking devices available for these services are Rout-
ers and Gateways.
6.7.1 Routers are devices that implement the network ser-
vice. Routers are required to support multiple protocol stacks,
each with its own routing protocols, and to allow these
different environments to operate in parallel.
6.7.2 Gateways are applications specific that connect differ-
ent architectures. It also provides translation services between
different protocols.
6.8 Types of LANs-LANs are descriptive in their configu-
ration at two levels: administrative relationship between nodes
(stations) and physical and logical relationship among nodes.
6.8.1 Administrative Relationship Between Nodes
(Station)-LANs are divided into server-based and peer-to-
peer LANs. Server-based LAN (client server) controls access
to some resource, such as a hard disk or printer, and serves as
a hosts for the workstations connected to the server. A
workstation request services, such as access to fields or
programs on the hard disk or use of a printer, from a server.
6.8.1.1 Servers run the network operating system (NOS)
software; workstations run client software that manages the
communication between the workstation and the network.
6.8.1.2 Peer-to-peer LANs involve direct communications
between computing devices without a dedicated server.
6.8.2 Physical and Logical Relationship Among Nodes-
This has to do with the manner in how data is transmitted over
a network. The physical is concerned with the topology, that is,
bus, ring, or star, and logical refers to the method of data
transport that is Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI, ATM, and so
forth.
6.9 Network Operating System (NOS)-The NOS runs on a
server and is responsible for processing requests from
workstations, for maintaining the network, and for controlling
the services and devices available to users. An NOS may
replace the native operating system or run as a program on top
of the native operating system. Current NOS available are:
NOVELL Netware, WINDOWS NT, LANtastic, BANYAN,
IBM LAN Server, LAN Manager, AppleS hare/ Apple Talk.
6.10 Operating System (OS)-Operating systems bring to-
gether disparate computing resources and present the user with
more convenient abstractions. These resources include devices
for processing, storing, and transmitting information:
6.10.1 DOS (Disk Operating System)-Single-user operat-
ing system for the personal computer (PC).
6.10.2 Windows 95/NT-Microsoft windows product re-
placing Windows 3.1 and Windows for Workgroup 3.11. It
provides system monitor utilities, remote access, network
e-mail, fax capabilities, and file-and printer-sharing for both
Windows-based and Netware-based clients.
6.10.3 OS/2-A multicasting operating system originally
developed by IBM and Microsoft for use with Intel's micro-
processor and IBM's Personal System/2 (PS/2) computers.
1206
6.10.4 MAC OS--Apple's Mac operating system.
6.10.5 UNIX-A multitasking, multiuser operating system
developed by AT&T. This means that more than one user can
use the same computer (programs, file system, memory, CPU)
by logging in off of different ports (serial, Ethernet, Internet,
and so forth).
iilmA; F1757 - 96 (2008)
<!liiW
6.11 Operating Environments-Operating environments
provide computing flexibility and power to have more than one
application active at the same time. allow users to
activate and switch several applications simultaneously.
6.11.1 Windows 3.1-This program provides an environ-
ment for running 16-bit Windows and DOS It also
supports multimedia, true-type fonts, compound documents
(OLE), as well as drag-and-stop capabilities.
6.11.2 Windows for Workgroups-This program is a LAN-
capable version of MS Windows 3.1 environment providing
integrated file electronic mail (Microsoft Mail), and
._,.._ .. ...,,._.._,,,._, +) Windows for
u/r, .. ln.-.. ""'"''' 3.11 also supports 32--bit disk and file access.
6.11.3 Windows 95/NT-This program utilities,
and services for a LAN environment client
software with support for Windows, Windows NT Workstation,
Windows for MS-DOS, Macintosh, OS/2, and
UNIX.
6.11.4 X Window network-based '""'1r"'"t1'o-
an application interface for
7. OSI of Functionality
7.1 The OSI is a reference model put forth by the Interna-
tional Standards Organization (ISO) for communication be-
tween computer equipment and networks computer
communication functions into seven layers. Each pro-
vides a certain kind of service to the next higher This
service is provided by communicating with the peer entity in
same layer of the remote host using the service the
next lower This model explains what each does.
The model is often used to explain a suite of protocols, not just
OSI, to allow computers to share resources across a network
(see Table 4).
7.2 The content of each of the first four is dictated by
the parameters of the network technology, and the upper three
by the demands of the application user. As shown in the
lowest four layers, which are physical (1), data link (2),
network (3), and transport (4), correspond roughly to protocols
used in all networks. Physical distinguishes individual (0,1)
bits, data link allows reliable transmission of groups of bits
between adjacent computers, network provides safe routing
data packets between distant source and distinction computers,
and transport lets programs running on different computers
exchange sequences of possibly messages.
7.3 The bottom three layers are implemented by communi-
cations carrier hardware or by LAN interfaces. Transport
SOURCE DESTINATION
APPLICATION
t
PHYSICAL
Actual data path
FIG. 3 Protocol Layers in the OS! Model
software runs on user computers. The highest three
session (5), (6), and application (7), are intended
to serve the needs of the application or application-specific
elements.
7.4 For WANs, the intermediate-node routing function,
network is important, but media access is simple,
a maker of making a leased, connection or satellite.
r.n'\!Pr'""'''" for LANs and MANs, no decisions need be
made, and the network is essentially absent, although the
multiaccess protocol can become quite sophisticated.
8. Layers of Interconnection
8.1 The OSI model allows networks to be interconnected at
Layers 1 through 3 and 7. Interconnections between LANs and
WANs usually occur at Layers 2 through 4 except for protocol
conversion between specific applications, such as electronic
mail which occur at Layer 7. A generic LAN/WAN intercon-
nection function must operate at the lower OSI layers.
8.2 Model Structure-The OSI presents an abstract refer-
ence model to describe the computer communications. A
techniques is used to divide the functions in to distinct
yet connected layers. The seven layers can be partitioned into
two main infrastructures, the lowest three layers provide
internetworking services and the upper four layers are the users
of these services. The upper layers, together, provide common
network application services. One of the layers, the Transport
Layer (4), serves as the boundary between the network-specific
elements and the application-specific elements (see 4):
8.2.1 Lower layer infrastructure providing the end-to-end
services responsible for data transfer.
8.2.2 Upper layer infrastructure providing the application
services responsible for information transfer.
8.2.3 Each layer provides a well-defined function.
Conceptually, these layers can be considered as performing one
of two functions:
8.2.3.1 Network-Dependent Functions, lower layer.
8.2.3.2 Application-Oriented Functions, upper layer.
TABLE 4 OSI Layers of Functionality
layer Name Function
Provides end-user services, such as application layer file transfers, electronic messages, virtual terminal emulation,
7 Application
remote database access, and network management. The end user interacts with the aeelication user. __
6 Provides for the of inlormation that is communicated or referred to by processes.
_2 Session Provides the means to organize and S:tnchronize the dialog between aeellcatlon erocesses and manage their data.
4 Provides the transparent transfer of data between systems. . . . .
3 Network
Provides routing and relaying through immediate system. In intermediate systems 1n wh1ch there IS no
application program involved in the communication, the packets are onlY_ processed by the lower three layers.
2 Data link Provides for the transfer of data between connected systems and detects any errors 1n the transfer.
1 Physical Provides the transparent transmission of bit streams between systems including relaying through different media.
1207
F1757 - 96 (2008)
Network 7
Application
6
Services
5
4
3
2
Application
Presentation
Session
Transport
Network
Data Link
Physical
1
.,-- .
nternetwork1ng
Services
J_
FIG. 4 OSI Model Structure
8.2.4 Thus when interconnecting networks, communication
services are characterized by the following:
8.2.4.1 Data Link Protocol-Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI,
and ATM.
8.2.4.2 Network Protocol-IP, IPX, TCP, IPVINES,
NETBIOS, and NETBEUL.
8.2.4.3 Higher Level Protocol (NOS)-Netware, Appletalk,
Banyan VINES, Windows NT, IBM OS/2 LAN Manager, and
so forth.
8.2.5 A canonical form of a layered communication proto-
col is illustrated in 5.
9. Protocol Characterization-Upper Versus Lower Layer
Protocols
9.1 The characterization of common network protocols
based on the layers of the OSI reference model provides a
comparative technique to separate the various communication
protocols into two categories. This perspective characterizes
communication protocols based on their functionality and
operations. By examining the seven layers of the OSI reference
model, a lower and upper layer grouping for protocol charac-
terization is developed to provide a better understanding for
subsequent protocol selection for shipboard systems. This
upper and lower layer characterization perspective is not
perfect. Some communications protocols do not correspond
exactly to the OSI layers in terms of functionality, while
another popular protocol suite similar to the entire OSI network
model does not fully correspond exactly to all the OSI layers.
9.2 The communication protocols described in this guide,
which are based on the two lowest layers, the data link and
physical layers of the OSI model, may differ among themselves
with respect to levels of maturity and degree of commercial
implementation. These lower layer protocols consists of a
mixture of LAN and WAN technology protocols.
9.3 Upper layer protocols, in contrast, are often found to be
families, or suites of protocols, developed as total networking
solutions which mainly were developed as proprietary,
corporate-based networking schemes. In addition, many upper
layer protocols support integration with other upper and lower
Network
Application
ServJW..
lnternetworkin
Services
OSI
LAYER
Applcauon
l"'resem:aoon
:;ess1on
lransport
Network
_LJ8ta LjnK
!'nYSIC81
LAYER
PROTOCOL
INFRASTRUCTURE

SERVICES
Upper layer
Higher Level
Application Oriented
Protocol (NOS)
Lower Layer Network Protocol
Application Oriented
Data Unk Protocol
FIG. 5 Characterization of Protocol Grouping
1208
level protocols, enhancing their popularity and implementation
possibilities with dissimilar protocols. Several of these proto-
cols described in this guide were developed by standard
groups, although sometimes only portions of the "dejure"
protocol suites have been adopted commercially for certain
applications.
10. Lower Level Protocols
10.1 The lower level protocols are the standards,
specifications, and physical characteristics associated with the
implementation of transmission media in a local network
environment.
10.1.1 Ethernet-Ethernet is based on IEEE 802.3 stan-
dards. The standards that define IEEE 802.3 (see Table 5)
networks have been given names that follow the form "s type
1." The S refers to the speed of the network in Mbps, type is
BASE for baseband and BROAD for broadband, and I refers to
the maximum segment length in 100-m multiples. Table 5
shows the operating characteristics of three currently defined
IEEE 802.3 networks to Ethernet.
1 0.1.2 Token Ring-Token ring is based on IEEE 802.5
standards. It can be either a 4- or 16-Mbps LAN. Instead of
connecting to HUB, the lobe runs connect to either a multi-
station access unit (MAU) or cable access unit (CAU). A
maximum of 260 devices can be connected to a MAU or CAU
star-wired ring, depending on the type of cable interface. IBM
supports up to 260 devices attached to a MAU via the IBM
cabling. With UTP, only 72 can be connected to a MAU and
144 to a CAU. See Table 6.
10.1.3 Fiber Distributed Data lnteiface-FDDI is based on
IEEE 802.8 standards. FDDI networks operate at 100 Mbps
over either fiber optic or twisted pair transmission media, using
a counter-rotating redundant, dual-ring topology. The total
length of the dual ring may not exceed 100 km (or 200 KM
when wrapped or connected during a fault condition), with a
maximum of 500 attached stations.
10.1.4 X.25 (see 6)-X.25 is a packet-switched network
not transparent to attached stations, even during the data
transfer phase. At a minimum, the network layer protocol must
provide a service for transferring data between stations. This
service may be either a virtual-circuit service (connection-
oriented) or a datagram service (connectionless). Most public
networks provide a virtual-circuit service. X.25 encompasses
the first three layers of the OSI modeL
1 0.1.4.1 Layer 1-The physical layer is concerned with
electrical or signalling. It includes standards, such as V.35,
X.21(BIS), EIA232C.
10.1.4.2 Layer 2-The data link layer manages the transfer
of data units called frames from one open system to another.
The data link layer specified in X.25 is called LAP-B (Link
Access Procedure Balanced).
10.1.4.3 Layer 3-The X.25 Packet Level Protocol (PLP)
provides network-routing functions and the multiplexing of
simultaneous logical connections over a single physical con-
nection.
10.1.5 Frame Relay-Frame relay is a connection-oriented,
fast-packet data service, conceptually similar to X.25. Whereas
X.25 has three protocol layers and provides a guaranteed,
F1757 - 96 (2008)
TABLE 5 Physical Layer SpecificationA
Operational
Ethernet 10BASE5 10BASE2 10BASET 10BASEF 100BASET
Characteristics
Operating rate, Mbps 10 10 10 10 10 100
Access protocol CSMA/CD CSMA/CD CSMA/CD CSMA/CD CSMA/CD CSMA/CD
Type of signaling baseband baseband baseband baseband baseband baseband
Data encoding Manchester iv1anchester Manchester Manchester Manchester Manchester
Max segment
500 500
length, m
Stations/segment 100 100
50-n 50-n
Medium
coaxial coaxial
Topology bus bus
A Based on IEEE 802.3 (CSMA/CD).
TABLE 6 Transmission Speeds
Cable Type Transmission Speed
IBM Type 1 4 Mbps; lobes can be up to 100ft
16 Mbps lobes can be up to 500 ft
IBM Type 2 4 Mbps; lobes can be up to 500 ft
16 Mbps; lobes can be up to 164 ft
IBM Type 3 26 Mbps; lobes can be up to 328 ft or 100 m
OSI LAYERS
CCITT X.25 LAYERS
FIG. 6 Layers
virtual circuit packet delivery service, frame relay has only two
layers of protocol (physical and data link layer) and relies on
higher-layer protocols for end-to-end message assurance (see
6).
10.1.5.1 Frame relay is data link layer protocol. Frame relay
service is viewed as one of the more versatile packet-switched
technologies available for efficiently linking geographically
separate organizations. Frame relay generally is deployed in
bandwidths from 56 Kbps to about 1.30 Mbps. It can be
implemented over dedicated Tl-lines, but the widespread
application has been toward public networks and ISDN.
10.1.6 Synchronous Data Link Control-The SDLC proto-
col was defined by IBM to facilitate communication over WAN
links to IBM hosts in SNA environments. SDLC is the primary
serial link protocol for SNA and is a superset of the high-level
data link control protocol (HDLC).
186 100 1000 100
30 12/Hub - 12/Hub
50-n twisted pair optical
twisted pair
(UTP, STP)
coaxial (UTP, STP) fiber
optical fiber
bus star bus star
10.1.7 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)-ATM is a
cell-switching physical layer protocol. The ATM protocol is
defined at Layer 1 and part of Layer 2 of the OSI model. It
provides virtual circuit connectivity at Layer 2 to reduce the
amount of overhead. Therefore, it integrates most other
protocols, such as frame relay, SMDS (Switched Multimegabit
Data Service), Ethernet, and so forth.
11. Upper Layer Protocols
11.1 Upper layer protocols provide access to and control of
the network environment, its applications, and data. The lower
layers are used to exchange information.
11.2 ISO Architecture (see Table 7 )-The ISO protocols are
intended to standardize the by-products of network software
and hardware development. The seven-layer ISO architectural
model includes physical and data link layers that allow other
protocol stacks to exist on the same media. OSI protocols
include IEEE 802.2, 802.3, 803.5, ANSI FDDI X.21, V.35,
X.25, and so forth. OSI also offers both a connectionless and
connection-oriented network layer service.
11.3 TCP/IP-TCP/IP is a protocol suite. It is termed a suite
because it is a family of protocols that can be used indepen-
dently of each other. TCP/IP is not dependent on any particular
physical connection. It was designed to connect subnetworks to
larger internetworks. Table 8 shows the TCP/IP layers in
relation to the seven layer OSI model.
11.3.1 TCP is a connection-oriented transport layer protocol
that uses the connectionless services of IP to ensure the reliable
delivery of data. Connection-oriented services establish link
between two devices on a LAN. This link stays active for the
TABLE 7 Upper Layer Protocols
Application
ISO 9040/9041
I
ISO 8831/8832
I
ISO 8571/8572
I
ISO 9595/9596
VT JTM FTAM CMIP
Presentation
ISO 8823/ITU-T X.226
Connection-Oriented Presentation Protocol
Session
Connection-Oriented Session Protocol
Transport
Connection-Oriented Transport Protocol
Network
ISO 8473
I
ISO 8208/ITU-T X.25
Connection Less Network Services Packet Level Protocol
ISO 8802-2
I
ISO 7776
I
ISO 7809
Data link ISO 9314-2
I
ISO 8802-3
I
ISO 8802-4
I
ISO 8802-5
I
ITU-T X.25
FDDI CSMA/CD (BUS) Token Bus Token Ring (LAP/LAPB)
HDLC
Physical Options from EIA, ITU-T, IEEE, and so forth
1209
F1757 - 96 (2008)
<!litW
TABLE 8 TCP/IP Protocol Suite
OSI Layer Protocol Implementation
Electronic Terminal Network
Application File Transfer
Mail Emulation ManaQement
Presentation File Transfer
Simple Mail
TEL NET
Simple Network
Protocol (FTP)
Transfer-Protocol
Protocol
Management
(SMTP) Protocol
Session RFC 959
RFC 821
RFC 854
RFC 1157
Transmission Control Protocol User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Transport
RFC 793 RFC 768
Address Resolution
Internet Protocol (IP)
Internet Control
Message Protocol Network ARP RFC 826
RFC 791
(CMP) RFC 792 RARP RFC 903
Network interface card:
Data link Ethernet, Token FDDI
r--
RFC 894 J3Q 1042, RFC 1201
Physical I
length of a data transmtss10n and can be closed when the
transfer is furnished. With connectionless services, there is no
requirement to establish a link between a source and destina-
tion device before data transmission can begin. Connectionless
services are capable of sending data packets to multiple
destinations, while connection-oriented services cannot.
11.3.2 TCP/IP provides important services, such as file
transfer, e-mail, and remote login across a large number of
distributed client and server systems. TCP/IP was introduced
with UNIX, and then it was later incorporated into the IBM
environment.
11.3.3 To ensure that multivendor, multiplatform systems
could communicate, the original design was based on open
system standards. Because of this design, TCP/IP is platform
independent in that it operates in a similar manner no matter
what the platform. This is synonymous with interoperability, a
key strategy for choosing and using protocols.
11.4 NETWARE IPXISPX-Novell Netware protocols com-
ply to the OSI model. The upper five layers file and
printer sharing and support for various applications, such as
electronic mail transfer, database access, and other dedicated
NOS services (that is SNA, TCP/IP, Appletalk, and OSI). The
Internetwork Packet (IPX) (see Table 9) is a Net-
Ware protocol used to move data across a Novell network. The
IPX packet deals with routers to move data across
Novell NetWare Internetworks. IPX is a result of Novell's
efforts to add new services and features to the original Xerox
XNS protocols.
11.4.1 IPX uses the Packet Exchange (SPX)
rotocol to provide applications with reliable, connection-
oriented data transport service. In the OSI model, IPX con-
forms to the network and SPX the transport layer.
TABLE 9 The Internet Packet Exchange (IPX)
OSI Layer Netware Protocol
Application
Presentation Application
Session
Seguential Packet Exchange_(SPX)_
Network I (IPX) Internet Packet Exchange
Data link
Ethernet
I Token Ring J
FDDI
I
Others
Physical
media: LAN, MAN, or WAN
11.5 Systems Network Architecture (SNA)-SNA is IBM's
proprietary networking protocol. SNA was designed to operate
at the data link layer of the OSI model. The SNA network is a
host-terminal environment because the mainframe acts as a
host system, which is accessed by display devices called
terminals.
11.6 Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN)-APPN is
IBM's proprietary networking protocol. It is an enhancement
to SNA to provide support for distributed applications in IBM
networks, such as mainframes, AS/400s, and PS/2s. APPN
enables direct communication between users anywhere on the
network, a feature SNA could not provide. Much like TCP/IP,
APPN resides at 3 and 4 of the OSI model, providing
network and transport functionality.
11.7 Apple Talk-AppleTalk is an OSI-based, CSMA/CD
LAN technology from Apple. It supports Apple's proprietary
LocalTalk access method, as well as Ethernet (EtherTalk), and
token-ring (TokenTalk). The AppleTalk network manager and
the LocalTalk access method are built into all MACs and Laser
Writer printers, as well as many third-party devices. AppleTalk
can run on PCs, VAXs, and UNIX workstations.
11.7.1 LocalTalk is Apple's LAN access method that uses
twisted pair wiring and transmits at 230.4 Kbps. It runs under
AppleTalk (see Table 10) and uses a daisy chain topology that
connects up to 32 devices at a distance of up to about 1000 ft.
LocalTalk can be configured to work in bus, star, and
active star tOJ)OlogJles.
11.7.2 At 3, the Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP)
provides a connectionless datagram services. At 4, in the
AppleTalk architecture, the Name Binding Protocol (NBP)
provides name-to-address association. Routing table content is
TABLE 10 LocaiTalk LAN Access Method
OS! Layer AnnleTalk Protocol
--_&:plication
r- Presentation
Application
--
Session Zone Information Protocol (ZIP}
Transport
Routing Table Maintenance Protocol (RTMP)
Name Binding Protocol (N!?P)
Network Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP)
Data link
Ethernet I Token Ring -l FDDI I Others
r----rhysical --
1210
F1757 - 96 (2008)
provided by the Routing Table Maintenance Protocol. At Layer
5, the Zone Information Protocol (ZIP) means of
localizing broadcast traffic.
1.8 XEROX Network Systems (XNS) (.see ll)-The
XNS architecture makes two basic
the Internetwork's LAN tec:hnolc)gy
and Ethernets exists. The XNS
tion to the
OS! modeL
model.
.9 DNAs Network Architecture) DECNet/OSI-
DNA the architecture, or master plan, for
DECNet/OST is an of the architecture that is
Interconnection (OSI)
as well as
Corpclration (DEC) Protocol. DECNet is a host-to-host
communication network. DECNet supports both con-
connection--oriented network Both net-
OSI
( LAT)--LAT a proprietary
(DEC) (see Table 3).
or terminal I/0 network on an
a lean and mean stack whose only
purpose life is to move terminal I/0 as
between host and terminals and LAT aPJJroxirnatelv
3, 4, and 5. LAT is nonroutable
stack, which can exist on the Ethernet
and 2. LAT is on VAXen, AXPs,
servers, such as DECservers, and PCs and Macirl-
PATHWORKS.
1211
TABLE 12 DNA Architecture
OSilayer DECNet Protocol Implementation
User
Presentation Network management
f---
Session Network application
Transport Session control
f--
Network Routing
1----
Data link Data link
Physical Physical
TABLE 13 LAT
.11 NetBEUI --NetBIOS Ex-
User Interface (NetBEUI) is the native network proto-
col used Microsoft's Windows NT and Windows
NetBEUI is an enhanced version of NetBIOS
(NOS), such as LAN and
that use NetBEUI, such as Windows NT,
can communicate with other Windows NT systems, as weH
workstations Windows for utr, .. tr"' ..
a network protocol
with its API, support of peer-to-peer
network functions and a interface for writing network
ap:ph1::;atiorts. There is no routing in NetBIOS. This means
NetBIOS cannot
Other such as IP or IPX must be used for internet-
NetBIOS session and transport services
4 and 5 of the OSI model). This NetBIOS often is used
to establish a connection between devices.
12. Fault Tolerance in Communication Networks
Fault tolerance is achieved
several forms of which is
information, resources, or time needed for
normal system operation. The redundancy can take one of
several forms, including hardware
redundancy, information redundancy, and time reclundm1cy
There are many documents and articles that discuss
actual network Network designers have a definite
for standard-based solutions, Jl1(:JudnU!
media, and topologies. Standard-based ne1tW()fkin
solutions have the aura of optimally conceived technology and
the of low (commodity) cost and multivendor avail-
equipment using common silicon-based
Standards not only the
desirable features, but also, at least theoretically, guarantee
interoperability of equipment from different vendors.
F1757 - 96 (2008)
13.2 Topology Selection Decision Tree-See 7.
13.3 Network Environment Selection Decision Tree-See
8, 9, and 10.
13.4 Internetworking (LAN-to-LAN or LAN-to-WAN):
13.4.1 Identify transport protocols present or supported by
LAN-to-LAN or LAN-to-WAN internetwork.
13.4.2 Is the transport protocol(s) identified in 13.3 propri-
etary?
13.4.3 Identify a common denominator transport protocol to
facilitate internetworking: RECOMMENDED: TCP/IP.
13.4.4 Identify basic services to be provided: FILE
TRANSFER, ELECTRONIC MAIL, ROUTING, REMOTE
ACCESS (Terminal Emulation).
Application
Transmission
Speed
Service Class
of Network
Topology
Internetwork
Topology
Network
Technology
Medium
Access Control
Transmission
Medium
Bus
13.4.5 Verify interoperability of NOS: Yes-Use router;
No-Use gateway.
14. Keywords
14.1 bus; internetwork; local area network (LAN); network
operating system (NOS); operating system (OS); protocol;
ring; star; topology; tree; wide area network (WAN)
Voice & DataMdeo
Backbone
Hierarchical
Mesh
Backbone
Hierarchical
Mesh
FIG. 7 Topology Selection Decision Tree
1212
Client
Operating
System
Transport
Protocol
Basic Services
LANs Type
of Service
Number of
Users
Network
Operating
System (NOS)
CUENTOS OS to be Used
DOS
WINDOWS3.X
WINDOWS95
WINDOWS NT
Mac OS
OS/2
Others (specify
TABLE 12.2A
F1757 - 96 (2008)
See Table 12.2C
Identify NOS Supporting OS,
Transport Protocol, Basic Services 1--._,.... See Table 12.2E
LANs Type of Service
BASIC SERVICE
CBS I
TRANSPORT
Protocol to be Used
PROTOCOL
TCPnP File Transfer
UDP Electronic MaH
DECnet Remote Access
Apple Talk Routing
IPX/SPX Printing
NetBIOS Database
NetBUI Other (specify)
BStobe Used
Others (specify)
TABLE 12.2C
TABLE 12.2B
FIG. 8 Network Environment Selection Decision Tree (continued in Fig. 9 and Fig. 1 0)
1213
F1757 - 96 (2008)
lANs Type of Type of Service
Service to be Used
Peer-to-Peer
Server Based
TABLE 12.20
Basic Network Services
Client OS Support
Network Operating
System (NOS) Protocol Supported
Novell Netware
!PX. TCPI!P, App!eTa!k, OSI
TCPIIP, IPX, Apple Talk, NetBUI File, Print, Messages, EmaU
LANtastic TCP/lP, IPX, NetBIOS
File, Print, Messages, EmaU
Banyan TCPIIP, IPX, Apple Talk, NetBUI File, Print, Messages, EmaH
LAN Manager TCPIIP, NetBUI File, Print, Messages, Email
IBM LAN Server TCPIIP, NetBUI File, Print, Messages, Email
DOS, OS2,\Nindows 3.x
DEC Pathworlts TCPIIP, AppleTalk
File, Print, Messages, Email
DOS, OS2, Mac OS
Other (specify)
TABLE 12.2E1 NOS SUPPORT CHART
Network Operating System
Type of LAN Service NOS Client Protocol
(NOS)
Novell Netware
Server-based IPXISPX
Windows NT Server
Server-based NDIS
LANtestic
Peer-to-Peer
NDIS
Windows for Workgroup
Peer-to-Peer
NDIS
Windows95
Peer-to-Peer
NDIS
UNIX Server-based or Peer-to-Peer
TCPJJP
Apple Share/Apple Talk
Server-based orPeer-to-Peer EtherTalk or Apple Talk
The Internet Peer-to-Peer
TCPilP
Other (specify)
TABLE 12.2E2 NOS TYPE OF SERVICE
FIG. 9 Network Environment Selection Decision Tree {continued from Fig. 8)
1214
NOS
Connectivity
PEER-TO-
PEER
SERVICES
Client
Access
Client Operating
System
Natware Bindery
NetwarNDS
lANtastic
F1757 - 96 (2008)
MS Windows 95 IBM OS/2 MS Windows NT
YES YES YES
YES YES
YES YES
YES YES
YES YES
YES YES
YES
YES
YES YES
NO YES
TABLE 12.2E3 OS FEATURES CHART
Apple MAC OS
must load server NLM
must load MacNDS
NO
YES
NO
YES
license
YES
NO
YES
FIG. Hl Network Environment Selection Decision Tree {continued from Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at tile address shown below.
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box ClOO, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy tt1e standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
1215
~ ~
INTERNATIONAL
Filters Used in Air or Nitrogen Systems
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the design, construction, test,
and performance requirements for air or nitrogen system filters,
referred to hereinafter as filters. These filters are intended to be
installed in-line to protect equipment from particular contami-
nation.
1.2 The values stated in this specification in inch-pounds
units are to be regarded as the standard. The SI equivalent
shown in parentheses are provided for information only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F992 Specification for Valve Label Plates
B 1.1 United Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)
3
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
3
B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket- Welding and
Threaded
3
B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
3
B 16.34 Flanged, Threaded, and Welded End
3
2.3 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE):
ARP 901 Aerospace Recommended Practice-Bubble-Point
Test Method
4
MlL-STD-167-l Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment (Type I--Environmental and Type Il--
lnternally Ex.cited)s
MIL-STD-740-1 Airborne Sound Measurements and Accep-
tance Criteria of Shipboard Equipments
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.l1 on
approved in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as Fl791 - 00. DOl:
1 0.1520/F1791-00R06.
2
the ASTM website.
4
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
5
MS16142 Boss, Gasket Seal Straight Thread Tube Fitting,
Standard Dimensions fors
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High-lmpact): Shipboard Ma-
chinery, Equipment and Systems, Requirements fors
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze, Silver-Brazing,
General Specifications for
5
2.5 Naval SEA Systems Command (NAVSEA): Government
Drawings:
NAVSEA 803-1385884 Unions, Fittings and Adapters Butt
and Socket Welding 6000 PSI, WOG, NPS
5
NAVSEA 803-1385943 Unions, Silver Brazing 3000 PSI,
WOG, NPS, for UT Inspections
NAVSEA 803-1385946 Unions, Bronze Silver Brazing,
WOG for UT Inspections
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3 .1.1 absolute contaminant removal rating-the smallest
size of contaminant as defined in ARP 901 that the filter will
retain with 100 % efficiency by weight.
3.1.2 bubble point-the pressure differential across a sub-
merged filter element required to produce a visible and steady
stream of air bubbles. Correlation between bubble point and
contaminant removal capability provides an economical means
to test for contaminant removal capability on a production
basis. The bubble point indicates the maximum pore size of the
filter media under static conditions.
3.1.3 bubble-tight-no visible leakage over a 3-min period
for detection.
3.1.4 clean filter element pressure drop-the pressure drop
across the filter element when it is new or uncontaminated.
3.1.5 cleanable filter element-a filter element that, after
being contaminated to its dirt-holding capacity (contaminated
filter element pressure drop), can be restored by cleaning to
operational condition and with a pressure drop not exceeding
the required clean filter element pressure drop.
3.1.6 contaminant removal rating-this is a measure of the
size of contaminants that the filter can remove from the flow
stream.
3.1.7 contaminated filter element pressure drop- the pres-
sure drop across the filter element when it is contaminated to
the point where cleaning or replacement is required.
1216
F1791 - 00 (2006)
3.1.8 differential pressure indicator actuation pressure-the
pressure drop across the filter element at which the differential
pressure indicator actuates.
3.1.9 disposable filter element-a filter element that, after
being contaminated to its dirt-holding capacity (contaminated
filter element pressure drop), cannot be restored to operational
conditions and thereafter should be replaced.
3.1.10 external leakage-leakage that escapes to atmo-
sphere.
3.1.11 filter element bypass full-flow differential pressure-
the pressure drop across the filter element at which the filter
bypass is passing the full-flow rating of the filter.
3.1.12 filter element bypass reseat differential pressure-the
pressure drop across the filter element at which the filter bypass
reseats after passing the full-flow rating of the filter.
3.1.13 filter element bypass set differential pressure-the
pressure drop across the filter element at which the filter bypass
opens.
3.1.14 filter element collapse strength-the maximum pres-
sure drop or differential across the filter element that the
element must withstand without collapse, damage, or impair-
ment of performance capabilities.
3.1.15 filter element contaminant-holding capacity-also
commonly termed "dirt capacity." The amount of a contami-
nant, expressed in weight, that the element can hold when its
resistance to flow causes a pressure drop equal to the contami-
nated filter element pressure drop.
3.1.16 filter element pressure drop-the pressure drop
across the filter element.
3.1.17 filter housing pressure drop-the pressure drop ac-
counted for by the filter housing.
3.1.18 filter pressure drop-the pressure drop across the
entire filter (element and housing) at any given flow rate of the
service fluid (air or nitrogen).
3.1.19 flow capacity-the maximum flow rate that the filter
is required to pass.
3.1.20 hydrostatic shell test pressure-the hydrostatic test
pressure that the filter is required to withstand without damage.
The filter must be capable of meeting all performance require-
ments after the shell test pressure has been removed.
3.1.21 media migration-any material released into the flow
stream by the filter media and its materials of construction.
This term refers to the tendency of the filter media or "built-in"
contamination, such as, welding scale, metal particles, or
air-borne dust combined with the media during its manufac-
ture, to leave the filter and shed or migrate into the flow stream.
3.1.22 nominal contaminant removal rating-the smallest
size of contaminant as defined in ARP 901 that the filter will
retain with 98 % efficiency by weight.
3.1.23 operating pressure-the pressure within the filter
during service.
3.1.24 pressure ratings-the pressure rating of the filter
shall be defined in the documents listed in Table 1. The
1217
TABLE 1 Filter Inlet and Outlet End Connections
Type of End Connection Pressure Rating
Applicable Documents
for Dimensional
Details of
End Connections
Butt-welded ASME 816.34 Class 150, ASME 816.25
300, 400, 600, 900,
1500, 2500, or 4500
Socket-welded ASME B16.34 Class 150, ASME B16.11
300, 400, 600, 900,
1500, 2500, or 4500
Threaded (tapered ASME B16.34 Class 150, ASME B1.20.1 and
pipe thread) 300,400, 600, 900, ASME 816.11
1500, or 2500
Union-end,A MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type) MIL-F-1183 (0-ring
silver-brazed .400 lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa) type) 400 lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa)
Union-end, A 803-1385946 1500 803-1385946 1500
silver-brazed !b/in.
2
(10.342 MPa) !b/in.
2
(10.342 MPa)
Union-end, A 803-1385943 3000 803-1385943 3000
silver-brazed lb/in.
2
(20.684 MPa) lb/in.
2
(20.684 MPa)
Union-end, A 803-1385884 6000 803-1385884 6000
butt/socket weld lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa) lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa)
Other, as specified as specified as specified
A For union inlet and outlet connections, only the pertinent dimensions listed in
the applicable documents (military specification or NAVESA requirements) shall
apply. The filter shall be supplied with the thread pieces only, without the tail pieces
and union nuts.
pressure rating for a filter is the maximum allowable working
(service) pressure at 100F (38C).
4. Classification
4.1 Filters shall be of the following types, compositiOns,
styles, pressure ratings, sizes, end connections, and contami-
nation removal ratings, as specified in Section 5.
4.1.1 Filter Element Type:
4.1.1.1 Type 1-Disposable.
4.1.1.2 Type 2-Cleanable.
4.1.2 Filter Element Bypass Composition:
4.1.2.1 Composition A: with bypass.
4.1.2.2 Composition B: without bypass.
4.1.3 Filter Element Differential Indicator Style:
4.1.3.1 Style I: with differential pressure indicator.
4.1.3.2 Style II: without differential pressure indicator.
4.2 Pressure Ratings- Filters shall have pressure ratings
selected from those listed in Table 1 and specified in Section 5.
The pressure rating selected shall be the same for both the filter
inlet and outlet.
4.3 Size-Filter sizes shall be 1/4 NPS (13.5 mm),
1
/2 NPS
(21.3 mm), % NPS (26.9 mm), 1 NPS (33.7 mm), 1
1
/4 NPS
(42.4 mm), 1
1
/2 NPS (48.3 mm), and 2 NPS (60.3 mm) or as
specified in Section 5 (see Table 2).
4.4 End Connections- Filters shall have inlet and outlet
end connections selected from those listed in Table 1 and
specified in Section 5. Inlet and outlet connections shall be
identical.
4.5 Contamination Removal Ratings -Filters shall have
contamination removal ratings selected from the following
three categories: 20 11m nominal/50 11m absolute, 5 11m
nominal/18 11m absolute, and 0.4 11m nominal/5 11m absolute.
The contamination rating selected shall be specified in Section
5.
cO F1791 - 00 (2006)
5.
TABLE 2 Filter Performance Characteristics
Filter Size, NPS
1/4 (13.5 mm)
1/2 (21.3mm)
%(26.9)
1 (33.7 mm)
1% (42.4 mm)
1112 (48.3 mm)
2 (60.3
As
Minimum Dirt-Holding Capacity
Grams AC Coarse
as
6.0
6.0
10.0
12.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
5.1 Ordering documentation for filters under the
describe the equipment
5.1.2 Title, number, and date of this specification,
5.1.3 Filter element type (see 4. Ll ),
5.1.4 Filter element bypass composition (see 4.1.2),
5.1.5 Filter element differential pressure indicator style (see
4.1.3),
5.1.6 Filter pressure rating (see 4.2),
5.1.7 Size (see 4.3),
5.1.8 End connections (see 4.4),
5.1.9 Contaminant removal rating, absolute/nominal (see
4.5),
5.1.10 Maximum filter operating pressure,
5.1.11 Flow capacity required (see 7.1, Sl
5.1.12 Supplementary requirements, if any (S 1.0 through
S4.0), and
5.1.13 Maximum vibration frequency and amplitude, if
other than specified (see S1.8).
6. Filter Design and Construction
6.1 Filters shall incorporate the design features specified in
6.1.1-6.1.6.
6.1.1 Materials of Construction-Materials shall be 300
series corrosion-resistant steel (SS304, 304L, 316, or 316L), or
other materials selected to provide compatibility with the line
medium, weldability, and corrosion resistance without
ing painting, coating, or plating. The filter body and the filter
bowl shall be weld repairable. Materials for parts
shall be selected to minimize electrolytic corrosion and galling.
6.1.2 Design Construction Requirements :
6.1.2.1 General Construction-The filter shall have a bolted
flanged body and filter bowl to expedite removal of the filter
element for cleaning or replacement.
6.1.2.2 Collapse Strength-The filter element shall be ca-
pable of withstanding a differential pressure equal to the
maximum inlet pressure rating without structural degradation.
6.1.2.3 Automatic When (see the
filter assembly shall incorporate an automatic bypass feature to
bypass system fluid automatically around the filter element in
the event of excessive flow restriction through the filter
element. The automatic bypass shall be set in accordance with
Table 3 and shall have a capacity equal to or greater than that
of a clean filter assembly.
TABLE 3 Filter Pressure Drop Requirements
NoTE !-Percentages shown above shall read as percent of the
operating pressure of the filter (see 3.1.23 and 5.1.1 0).
Filter Pressure Drop
Maximum
Maximum
Allowable
!::. Plndica- Allowable Filter Element Bypass (see S1.0)
Clean Ele-
tor Contami
ment (see
Actuation -nated Ele-
(see 7.1.5) ment (see Set Full Flow
7.1.5)
7.i.5
2.5% 4.75 to 6.25% 7.25 to 8.25 to
5.25% 8% 9.25%
Example:
Operating pressure: 1000 psi (6895 kPa)
Maximum allowable clean element pressure drop: 25 psi (172 kPa)
!::.P indicator actuation: 47.5 to 52.5 psi (327 to 346 kPa)
Reseat
6.25 to
7%
Maximum a!!owab!e contaminated element drop: 62.5 psi (431 kPa)
Filter element bypass set pressure drop: to 80 psi (500 to 552 kPa)
Filter element bypass full-flow pressure drop: 82.5 to 92.5 psi (569 to 638 kPa)
Filter element bypass reseat pressure drop: 62.5 to 70 psi (43i to 483 kPa)
6.1.2.4 Filter Element Installation -Positive means shall
prevent any play or looseness of the filter element in service
and prevent cocking or misalignment during installation.
6.1.2.5 Filter Element Flow Direction --The ftlter element
flow direction shall be from the outside to the inside surface of
the element.
6.1.2.6 Cleanability- Cleanable filter elements shall be
cleanable and reusable by means of scrubbing and washing the
outside surface with detergent and tap water and blowing
through with compressed air not exceeding 30-psig (207 -kPa
gage pressure). Once cleaned, the element shall be capable of
meeting the requirements for a new element. Cleanable filter
elements shall not be adversely affected by immersion in water
and shall be capable of meeting the above criteria for not less
than five cleaning and reuse cycles.
6.1.2.7 Differential Pressure Indicator -When specified
(see 5.1 the filter body shall incorporate a nonelectrical,
"pop differential pressure indicator which senses the
pressure drop across the element and actuates in accordance
with Table 3. Once actuated, a red indicator button shall remain
up until manually reset.
1218
6.1.2.8 0-Ring Locations- 0-rings in face-seal applica-
tions shall have the grooves located in the lower members to
simplify assembly.
6.1.2.9 Pressure Envelope-The hydrostatic shell test pres-
sures shall be 1.5 times the filter rated pressure at 1 00F
(38C).
6.1.2.1 0 Connections- The inlet and outlet end connections
of the filter shall be as specified in Table l. Any exposed
threads shall be protected by plastic caps for shipping.
6.1.2.11 Port Configuration-The filter body shall have
in-line inlet and outlet end connections for installation into the
piping system.
6.1.2.12 Pressure Lines- All pressure lines in the filter
shall be internally ported.
6.1.2.13 Accessibility- The filter shall be and easily
accessible for or repair without removal of the filter
from the line.
6.1.2.14 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ASME
F1791 - 00 (2006)
prevent the accidental loosening of threaded parts. The design
bolting. Lock-wire shall not be used.
6.1.2.15 entire filter, including all
parts, shall have part number and shall
rer,lac:eaiiJle from stock or the manufacturer on a nonselec-
and random basis. Parts the same manufacturer's
part number shall be with each other
with respect to installation (func-
tion).
filter shall be nrcnJ1<it>rl
attachment of
pressures. The
to measure the pressure
differential across the filter element acc:unUeliY
1.2.18 mcorpiOflllted in the filter shall
ends shall be
bnga;geineJat or of parts
shall not be required.
Mlun.tm;nal?llztv-- The filter shaH direct access
of the filter element
parts and subassemblies when
in the system. Maintenance shall
standard tools to maximum extent vv''""-'"
maintenance shall be identified and shall be
the filter.
The filter element, and all other parts
in the filter, shaH not be reversible unless are
also reversible to incorrect
6.1.5 There shall be no
differential pressure indicator or an automatic valve or
both, where aptmcao!e.
6.1.6 for or of the
filter element, maintenance of the filter or any of its
components shall not be There shall be no pastas-
lubrication req1mrect
Performance
shall meet the of
!.8.
Contaminant Removal -The filter shall be
of the of contaminant removal in the
""''
1
"' .. '"n (see and Section 5).
rJnfU'lt'\1- The flow of the filter shall
be as .11 in standard cubic feet per minute
metre per second) [at 60F and 14.7 (101
The filter shall meet the
or any intermediate
while providing the specified filter contaminant removal rating.
If an automatic bypass is specified (see 5 .1.4 ), it shall also meet
the flow capacity requirements of the filter.
7 .1.3 l!.xternal Leakage-- Filter external leakage shall be
at pressure conditions over a 3-min
Element Set, Full-Flow,
urrrnentzal Pressures---The set, fuH-fl.ow, and
tial pressures of an automatic filter element
Res eat
diifercn-
where
1219
apJJllcable, shall be as in Table 3.
7.1.8 Media Migration- There shall be no media
tion.
8.
8. J Each filter shall pass the tests outlined in 8.1.1-8.1 A.
8.1.1 Visual Examination-The filter shall be examined
to determine conformance with the data and
without disassemb1y.
8.1.2 Hydrostatic Shell Test-The filter shall be hv<iro:stati-
tested by applying pressure to 1.5 times the 100F
fated preSSUre tO the inlet and OUtlet portS, rPCit'\{.>rtiuPI"
to check the structural integrity of the filter. The filter element
may be removed for this test. Pressure shall be for a
minimum of 3 min. Air or nitrogen gas may be used in lieu of
water providing appropriate safety precautions are taken to
minimize the risk associated with the use of a coinpJres:siblte
gas. Thers shall be no external permanent distortion,
or structural failure.
8.1.3 External Leakage Test-Air shall be at rated
pressure to the filter. External leakage shall be checked
bubble fluid or by submerging the filter in water. There shall be
no visible external leakage over a 3-min period.
8.1.4 Bubble Point Test-The filter element shaH be tested
to determine the initial bubble point. The bubble point test shall
be in accordance with the procedure specified in
ARP 901. To ensure the correct nominal contaminant removal
rating and absolute contaminant removal acceptance
criterion shall have been previously established for the particu-
lar filter design being tested by an empirical correlation of the
results of bubble point testing with actual partic1e retention
testing as outlined in ARP 901.
9.
9.1 Identification Plate-An identification plate of
F992; I, II, HI, or IV shall be permanently attached to the
filter and shall include the following information (some or all
information may instead be stamped or etched on the
filter body):
c4@f F1791 - 00 (2006)
9.1.1 Manufacturer's name,
9 .1.3 Operating conditions (inlet pressure and flow capac-
ity),
9 .1.4 Manufacturer's modeVpart number,
9 .1.5 Pressure rating,
9.1.6 Contamination removal rating (nominal/absolute in
micrometre ),
9 .1. 7 Replacement element part number,
9.1.8 Flow direction, if applicable.
filters will perform in a similar manner to those representative
filters subjected to original testing.
tion tests and inspect the filters in the manufacturer's plant to
One or more of the following supplementary requirements Sl.O, S2.0, S3.0, or S4.0 shall be applied
only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of those supplementary
requirements shall be agreed upon in writing the manufacturer and purchaser. Supplementary
requirements shall in no way negate any requirements of the specification itself.
Sl. Supplemental Tests
S 1.1 Supplemental tests shall be conducted at a facility
tions and tests selected from those specified in S 1.2 through
S 1.11 and delineated in the ordering data. The tests may be
conducted on representative filter sizes and pressure classes to
qualify all sizes and pressure classes of filters, provided the
filters are of the same type and design. Evidence of prior
approval of these tests is acceptable.
S 1.2 Element Collapse Test- Apply a pressure differential
across the filter element equal to the pressure rating specified in
Section 5 for 3 min. There shall be no structural damage to the
filter element.
S 1.3 Cleanability Test-The filter shall be subjected to
sufficient contamination so that flow requirements cannot be
met. It shall then be cleaned by the methods specified (see
6.1.2.6) to demonstrate cleanability. After cleaning, the ele-
ment shall be capable of meeting the applicable flow and
pressure drop criteria (see S 1.5).
S 1.4 Flow Capacity/Clean Filter Element Pressure Drop
Test-Apply an inlet pressure equal to the maximum operating
pressure of the filter (see 3.1.23 and 5.1.11). Flow shall be
increased to the flow capacity of the filter. Pressure drop shall
not exceed the allowable clean filter element pressure drop
specified in Table 3. If the clean filter element pressure drop
has been previously determined at a different inlet pressure,
this test may be waived where calculations or previous testing
are provided which verify an acceptable clean filter element
pressure drop at the maximum operating pressure.
S 1.5 Differential Pressure Indicator Actuation Pressure
Test-Differential pressure across the filter element shall be
increased until the differential pressure indicator actuates. The
actuation pressure shall be as specified in Table 3. Once
actuated, the red button shall remain in the up position until
manually reset.
S 1.6 Automatic Bypass Valve Set Differential Pressure
Test-Differential pressure across the filter element shall be
further increased until the automatic bypass valve opens.
Differential pressure shall be further increased until the auto-
matic bypass valve is fully open. Differential pressure shall
then decreased until the automatic bypass valve reseats. The
automatic bypass valve shall lift initially, then lift to pass the
full-flow capacity, and reseat within the limits specified in
Table 3. There shall be evidence of operational instability or
damage.
S 1.7 Seat Tightness Test-The differential pressure across
the automatic bypass valve shall be increased to 95 % of its set
pressure. The automatic bypass valve shall be bubble-tight (no
visible evidence of leakage over a 3-min period using bubble
fluid for detection or submerging a line from the outlet under
water).
S1.8 Shock Test-The filter shall be subjected to and meet
the high-impact shock tests for Grade A, Class I as specified in
MIL-S-90 1 pressurized with water, air, or nitrogen to the
maximum operating pressure. There shall be no structural
damage to the filter. There shall be no degradation to the
performance capability of the filters.
S 1. 9 Vibration Test-The filter shall be vibration tested in
accordance with Type I of MIL-STD-167 -1 pressurized with
air or nitrogen to the maximum operating pressure. At frequen-
cies up to and including 33 Hz (unless otherwise specified in
the ordering information, Section 5), there shall be no reso--
nance in the range of frequency tested. There shall be no
structural damage or degradation to the performance capability
of the filter.
Sl.lO Noise Test- The filter shall be tested for airborne
noise in accordance with MIL-STD-740-1. The noise (sound
pressure level) shall not exceed 85 dBa observed at 1-m
distance from the filter.
1220
0 F1791 - 00 (2006)
S 1.11 Posttest Examination-The filter shall be disas-
sembled and examined for any evidence of excessive wear,
degradation, or impending damage or breakage.
S2. Technical Data Requirements
S2.1 Drawings-Assembly drawings or catalog sheets of
the filter that clearly depict design shall be provided. The
following shall also be included as part of, or in addition to, the
drawing or catalog content:
tion, and any other data required to identify fully the properties
data necessary to identify the parts fully.
S2.1.2 In cases in which standard commercial or military
S2.1.3 Outline dimensions, disassembly space, location,
and size of end connections and mounts.
S2.1.4 Estimated weight and center of gravity (vertical,
S2.1.6 The following information shall be included: (1)
pressure rating, ( 2) contaminant removal rating, (3) clean
pressure drop at filter-rated flow capacity, ( 4) differential
pressure indicator setting (Style I filters), and (5) automatic
bypass valve setting (Composition A filters).
S2.2 Technical Manuals-Technical manuals shall provide
a description, installation procedures, operation and mainte-
nance instructions, and illustrated parts breakdown for the
filter, organized as follows:
S2.2.1 Chapter 1- General information and safety pre-
cautions.
S2.2.2 Chapter 2-0peration.
S2.2.3 Chapter 3-Functional description.
S2.2.4 Chapter 4-'-Scheduled maintenance.
S2.2.5 Chapter 5-Troubleshooting.
S2.2.6 Chapter 6-Corrective maintenance.
S2.2.7 Chapter 7-Parts list.
S2.2.8 Chapter 8-Installation.
S2.3 In addition, the following shall be included as part of
the technical manual contents:
S2.3.1 The assembly drawings for the filter, supplemented
by additional illustrations where necessary to illustrate opera-
tion and maintenance adequately. These additional illustrations
may consist of blowouts or partial or full sections and may
eliminate extraneous lines and details to clarify the interaction
of parts.
S2.3.2 Table listing wrench sizes and assembly torques (or
S2.3.3 Detailed disassembly and reassembly procedures.
In addition to a section providing procedures for the complete
disassembly and reassembly of the filter, maintenance and
each particular operation. This is intended to reduce the
1221
S2.3.4 Adjustment procedures for the differential pressure
indicator and the automatic bypass valve (where applicable).
S3.1 Scope of Work--The written description of the quality
S3.2 Authority and Responsibility-The authority and
responsibility of those in charge of the quality assurance
system shall be clearly established.
S3.3 Organization-An organizational chart showing the
er's right to establish and, from time to time, to alter whatever
and the organized freedom to identify quality control problems
and to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
S3 .4 Review of Quality Assurance System-The manufac-
S3.5 Drawings, Design Calculations, and Specification
S3.6 Purchase Control-The manufacturer shall ensure
that all purchased material and services conform to specified
ensure that only the intended material is used in manufacturer.
manufacturing process by a system that identifies status of
material throughout all stages of manufacture.
S3.8 Manufacturing Control- The manufacturer shall en-
S3.10 Welding- The quality control system shall include
F1791 - 00 {2006)
standards and the qualification records shall be made to the
inspection authority if required.
made to use nondestructive examination, as necessary, to
ensure that material and components comply with the specified
by their employer or qualified by a recognized national body or
both, and their authorizations/qualification records shall be
reqluirerrlents can be verified.
S3.14 Inspection Status- The manufacturer shall main-
tain a system for the inspection status of material
between inspected and non-inspected material.
verifying conformance to the specified requirements. Such
S3.17 Sample Forms- The forms used in the quality
tern shall provide for the inspection authority at the manufac-
provide for such access by furnishing the inspection authority
S4. Special Material, Design, and Performance Considera
ations
S4.1 Recovered Materials-Unless otherwise
herein, all equipment, material, and articles incorporated in the
nrr>rl"'"t"' covered this specification shall be new and may be
to the maximum extent without the
rep1ro<:es:;ed to become a source of raw materials as to
virgin raw materials. None of the above shall be to
S4.2 Pipe threads shall not be used in the filter.
S4.3 Filter perfonnance shall not be adversely affected
the following ambient conditions:
S4.3.1 Temperature: 40F (4C) to l20F (49C).
S4.3.2 Moisture Content: Exposure to atmosphere contain-
salt-laden moisture.
S4.4 Gage Connections-The threaded gauge connection
(see 6.1.2.17) shall be V4-in. (13.5-mm) size in accordance with
MS 16142.
S4.5 General requirements for filters intended for the
protection of air-reducing manifolds. Filters intended for the
protection of air-reducing manifolds shall the
rn.lln,.,,.,,.,. functional elements shown below:
S4.5.1
S4.5.2
S4.5.3
Particulate contaminant removal.
Automatic bypass valve.
Differential pressure indicator.
APPENDIX
Xl. GUIDELINES FOR THE SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF FILTERS
Xl.l Scope-This appendix provides general guidelines for
the selection and installation of filters in air or nitrogen
systems, and therefore, its use does not in any way relieve the
user of his final responsibility in the selection and installation
of filters.
Xl.2 Contamination Removal Rating(also commonly
termed: "filter rating" or "micrometre rating")-The finer the
contamination removal specified, the more frequently it
will be necessary to clean (or replace) the filter element.
Therefore, only the actual desired level of filtration required by
a particular apT'llc:ati<on, and as shown by design or
operating should be
Xl.3 Filter Element Bypass-A filter element bypass
should be specified for any application where a partial or full
blockage of fluid flow is not acceptable. Some or all of the :fluid
flow under such circumstances will be unfiltered. Where a
constant supply of filtered :fluid is necessary, a mtnn1rne-mter
approach should be considered. An adjustable filter element
bypass allows (within the limits of adjustment pro-
vided) the pressure drop at which bypass of :flow initiates.
1222
F1791 - 00 (2006)
Xl.4 Permanent Versus Disposal Elements-Permanent fil-
ter elements are designed to provide specified performance
repeatedly up to a specified number of cleaning from a
contaminated condition. Disposable filter elements require
replacement with a new like element each time reach a
contaminated condition. Permanent elements can reduce inven-
tory Disposable elements can reduce initial costs
and maintenance re<m1.re1me:nts.
X1.5 Contaminant-Holding Capacity--To a certain extent,
capacity is proportional the flow
catJacnv-nr,essure drop of a fi1ter element. Different
filter mediums, however, hold contaminants in different ways,
ASTPv11nternational takes no position
in this standard. Users of this standard are
of infringement of such rights, are entirely
giving different contaminant-holding capacities for any given
initial (clean) flow capacity-pressure drop capability, and
therefore, it is necessary to specify contaminant-holding ca-
pacity as a separate parameter.
X 1.6 Differential Pressure Indicator-A filter element dif-
ferential pressure indicator warns of a high contamination level
before it reaches the point at which the flow of filtered fluid is
no longer adequate to meet system requirements or a
will begin to open. An adjustable filter element differential
pressure indicator allows setting (within the limits of
ment provided) the pressure drop at which the indicator
actuates.
of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item n1entioned
det,9rm,ination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
and should be addressed to ASTM international Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. It you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
address or at 6108329585 (phone), 6108329555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
COPYRIGHT/).
1223
,.u11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Special Requirements for Valves Used in Gaseous Oxygen
Service
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the special requirements for
valves used in gaseous oxygen service. It is intended that this
specification be invoked as an additional requirement in
conjunction with primary valve specifications.
1.2 The values stated in this specification in inch-pound
shown in parenthesis are provided for information only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
G63 Guide for Evaluating Nonmetallic Materials for Oxy-
gen Service
G88 Guide for Designing Systems for Oxygen Service
G93 Practice for Cleaning Methods and Cleanliness Levels
for Material and Equipment Used in Oxygen-Enriched
Environments
094 Guide for Evaluating Metals for Oxygen Service
3
ANSI B 1.1 U nitied Screw Threads
4
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
5
MIL-STD-1330 Standard Practice for Precision Cleaning
and Testing of Shipboard Oxygen, Helium, Helium-
Oxygen, Nitrogen, and Hydrogen Systems
MIL-V-5027 Valves, Check, Oxygen, Pressure
1
DOl: 10.1520/Fl792-97R10.
2
the ASTM website.
3
4
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (AS\1E), ASME
www.asme.org.
5
MlL-STD-178 Fabrication, Welding and Inspection;
Inspection and Repair for Machinery, Piping and Process
Vessels in Ships of the United States Navy
MlL-STD-271 Non-destructive for
Metals
MIL-P-46122 Plastic Molding and Extrusion Material, Poly-
vinylidene Bumide Polymer and Copolymer
3.1.2 Primary valve specification (see 1.1 ).
3.1.3 End preparations, if different than specified in 4.4.
3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, if any (see Sl through
S4).
4. Valve Design and Construction
4.1 Valves shall incorporate the features specified in 4.2-4.6.
4.2 Materials of Construction-Material requirements shall
be as follows:
4.2.1 The pressure containing/retaining envelope (including
any bolting, union nuts, or other fastening devices establishing
the integrity of the pressure containing/retaining envelope),
bellows (where applicable), and end nipples, shall be nickel-
copper (70-30). Internal trim which is in contact with the line
media shall be nickel-copper (70-30), bronze, nickel
aluminum-bronze, Inconel Alloy 600, brass, or other materials
which are compatible with oxygen service.
4.2.2 Non-metallic seat, seat insert, or seals. These materials
shall be selected from TFE, Reinforced TFE, CTFE, plastic in
accordance with MIL-P-46122, Polyamide (Vespel), or PEEK
The materials for 0-rings and gaskets shall be compatible for
oxygen service.
4.2.3 Lubricants-Materials for lubricants shall be halocar-
bon (25-5S), Dupont (Krytox 240 AC, 240 AZ), Braycote 601,
or other lubricants compatible with oxygen service.
4.2.4 Guidance on the selection of materials for oxygen
service can be found in Guides 063 and Guidance on
designing systems for oxygen service can be found in Guide
G88.
1224
cO F1792 - 97 (201 0)
4.3 General Requirements:
4.3.1 Fire Prevention-Valves shall be constructed to mini-
mize the possibility of initiating ignition in gaseous oxygen
service. This shall be accomplished by the following:
4.3.1.1 Materials for parts in contact with oxygen shall have
the highest spontaneous ignition temperatures and the lowest
impact sensitivities compatible with construction and perfor-
mance limitations.
4.3.1.2 Surfaces in contact with oxygen shall be smooth
with well-rounded edges and without sharp or thin sectioned
protrusions (that is, all parts shall have a high ratio of
volume-to-surface area). Sharp exterior comers are prohibited,
and interior corners shall have fillets to prevent the retention or
entrapment of machining chips, burrs, or foreign material.
4.3.1.3 Nonmetailic materials (0-rings, gaskets, etc.) other
than the seating insert, if applicable, shall be well removed
from the main flow path.
4.3.2 Fire Containment-Valves shall be constructed to
minimize oxygen escape in the event of an internal or external
fire. This shall be accomplished by the following:
4.3.2.1 Pressure-Boundary Sealing-Joints for the pressure-
boundary seals shall provide an effective barrier to leakage in
the event of damage or consumption of the non-metallic
sealing elements by providing long, close fitting metal-to-metal
leakage or flame paths.
4.3.2.2 Internal Seating-The seat design shall be such that
in the event that the non-metallic seat is damaged, destroyed, or
carried away, there will be a secondary metal-to-metal seat to
minimize through seat leakage. The construction and location
of the nonmetallic seals and seating inserts shall minimize the
possibility of ignition under a pressure surge.
4.3.2.3 Pressure Surge-Valves shall be designed to prevent
pressure surge, which could cause auto-ignition.
4.4 Design Features:
4.4.1 Manual valves shall be of the packless design, with the
stem sealed by a bellows.
4.4.2 Threads-Threads shall conform to ANSI Bl.l. Use
of threads in contact with oxygen shall be minimized. Any
threads wetted by oxygen shall be of rolled construction or
shall be completely chamfered and deburred to prevent the
possibility of sharp edges or machining burrs in contact with
oxygen.
4.4.3 Cleaning-Prior to assembly and testing, valves shall
be degreased and cleaned in accordance with Practice G93, and
thereafter maintained clean for oxygen service.
4.5 End Preparation-Unless otherwise specified (see Sec-
tion 3), end preparation for the valves shall be as follows:
4.5.1 Valves shall be supplied with inline extension nipples
welded directly to the valve body or fabricated as an integral
part of the valve body. Nipples shall be of the same basic
material as the body. The length and schedule of these nipples
shall be as specified in Table 1.
4.6 Welding and Nondestructive Testing-Welding and non-
destructive testing shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections VIII and IX.
5. Marking
5.1 Identification Plates-A metallic corrosion-res1stmg
identification plate shall be securely attached to the valve and
shall indicate "Valve specially made for oxygen service".
5.2 In addition, each valve shall be marked in accordance
with their applicable primary valve specification requirements.
specification are satisfied.
6.2 A written description of the quality assurance system the
manufacturer will use shall be available for review and
6.3 The purchaser reserves the right to witness any tests and
inspect the valves in the manufacturer's plant to the extent
specified on the purchase order.
TABLE 1 length and Schedule of Extension Nipples
Size of Valve
% NPS to 1 NPS (13.5 mm to 33.7 mm)
1-V2 NPS to 2-112 NPS (48.3 mm to 73.0 mm)
Pipe Schedule
80
160
Minimum Length
of Extension,
inches (Valve
Center to End)
7.00 (178 mm)
12.0 (305 mm)
requirements shall in no way negate any requirement of the specification itself.
1225
0 F1792 - 97 (201 0)
S 1.1 Supplemental tests shall be conducted at a laboratory
S1.4.
Sl.2 Examination Prior to Testing-The valve(s) shall be
examined visually to determine conformance with the ordering
data, dimensions, and workmanship without disassembly.
S 1.3 Nonmetallic Materials Compatibility Test-Materials
shall be subjected to the ozone-resistance and oxygen-bomb
tests as specified in MIL-V-5027, with test pressure applicable
to the valve under test. No charring or deterioration is allowed.
Sl.4 Nondestructive Testing-Nondestructive testing shall
be in accordance \Vith M!L-STD-271.
S2. Cleaning, Drying, Packaging, and Marking Require-
ments
S2.1 Valves shall be cleaned, dried, packaged, and marked
in accordance with MIL-STD-1330. Packaging operations
shall be accomplished in an area that will prevent valve
contamination by hydrocarbons.
S3.4 Review of Quality Assurance System-The manufac-
manufacturing process by a system that identified inspection
controlled conditions utilizing documented work instructions.
The manufacturer shall provide for inspection, where appro-
priate, for each operation that affects quality or shall arrange an
S3.10 Welding-The quality control system shall include
made to utilize non-destructive examination, as necessary, to
requirements. Non-destructive examinations shall be autho-
rized by their employer and/or qualified by a recognized
national body, and their authorizations/qualification records
shall be made available to the inspection authority if required.
S3.12 Non-Conforming Items-The manufacturer shall es-
tain inspection, measuring and test equipment to be used in
1226
S3.17 Sample Forms-The forms used in the quality control
F1792 - 97 (201 0)
specifications, procedures, process sheets, procedures,
S4. Special Fabrication Requirements
S4.1 Welding Requirements-We1ding shall be in accor-
dance with MIL-STD-278.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed evel)f five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn.. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
COPYRIGHT!).
1227
A Designation: F1793 - 97 (Reapproved 201 0)
~ ~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Automatic Shut-Off Valves {Also Known as Excess Flow
Valves, EFV) for Air or Nitrogen Service
1
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers self-contained automatic shut-
off valves (also known as excess flow valves) for air or
nitrogen service. They are intended to be installed as safety
devices to quickly and automatically shut off flow under certain
excess flow conditions caused by a downstream failure or
casualty, such as a hose rupture.
units are to be regarded as the standard. The SI equivalents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
3
ANSI B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread
Form)
ANSI B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ANSI B 16.11 Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ANSI B16.25 Buttwelcling Ends
ANSI B 16.34 Threaded, and Welded End
2.3 Military Standards and Specifi.cations:
4
MlL-STD-167 -1 Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment (Type !-Environmental and Type II-
Intemally Excited)
MIL-STD-7 40-1 Airborne Sound Measurements and Accep-
tance Criteria of Shipboard Equipment
1
and Mmine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.11 on
DOl: 10.1520/Fl793-97R 10.
2
the ASTM website.
3
4
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.L (High-Impact); Shipboard Ma-
chinery Equipment and Systems, Requirements for
MIL-F-1183 Fitting, Pipe, Cast Bronze,
2.4 Government Drawings . .4
NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND (NAVSEA)
NAVSEA 803-1385884 Unions, and Butt
NAVSEA 803--1385943 Unions, Silver 3000 PSI,
WOG, NPS, for UT Inspection
NAVSEA 803-1385946 Unions, Bronze Silver
WOG for UT Inspection
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 automatic shut-off valve-automatic shut-off valves
covered by this specification trip shut in response to the
pressure differential across the valve.
for detection.
3.1.3 external leakage-leakage from the automatic shut-off
valve that escapes to atmosphere.
3.1.4 hydrostatic shell test pressure-the hydrostatic shell
test pressure that the automatic shut-off valve is required to
withstand without damage. Automatic shut-off valve operation
is not required during application of shell test pressure, but it
must meet all performance requirements after the shell test
pressure has been removed.
3.1.5 pressure ratings-the pressure ratings of the automatic
shut-off valves shall be as defined in the documents listed in
Table 1. The pressure ratings (also called pressure-temperature
ratings) establish the maximum allowable working (service)
pressures of a component (valve, end connections, and so
forth) at various temperatures.
3.1.6 seat tightness-the ability of the automatic shut-off
valve to prevent leakage from the valve-inlet to the valve--
outlet.
3.1.7 set point-a combination of inlet pressure and flow,
which the valve trips shut.
1228
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
TABLE 1 Pressure Ratings for Automatic Shut-Off Valves
Type of End
Connection
Butt-welded
Socket-welded
Threaded (tapered
pipe thread)
Union-end,A
Silver-brazed
Union-end,A
Silver-brazed
Union-end,A
Silver-brazed
Union-end,A
Butt/socket weld
Other, as specified
Pressure Rating
Applicable Documents for
Dimensional Details of End
Connections
ANSI 816.34 Class 150, ANSI 816.25
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500,
2500, or 4500
ANSI 816.34 Class 150, ANSI 816.11
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500,
2500, or 4500
ANSI 816.34 Class 150, ANSI 81.20.1 and ANSI
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 816.11
or2500
MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type)
400 lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa)
803-1385946 1500 lblin.
2
(10.342 MPa)
803-1385943 3000 lb/in.
2
(20.684 MPa)
803-1385884 6000 lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa)
As specified
MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type) 400
lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa)
803-1385946 1500 lb/in.
2
(10.342 MPa)
803-1385943 3000 lb/in.
2
(20.684 MPa)
803-1385884 6000 lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa)
As specified
A For Union inlet and outlet end connections, only the pertinent dimensions
listed in the applicable documents (Military Specification or NAVSEA Require-
ments) shall apply. The valve shall be supplied with the thread-pieces only, without
the tail-pieces and union-nuts.
3.1.8 set point accuracy-the band of accuracy of the
automatic shut-off valve expressed as a range of flow rates at a
given inlet pressure, established by the following two points:
3.1.8.1 Discussion-A combination of inlet pressure-flow, at
or below which the automatic shut-off valve will not trip shut
(valve will remain open) regardless of influences such as spring
relaxation, mechanical shock or vibration, and so forth.
3.1.8.2 A combination of inlet pressure-flow, at or above
which the automatic shut-off valve will trip shut (valve will not
remain open) regardless of influences tending to resist closure
such as breakloose friction, corrosion, or sludge, and so forth.
3.1.9 set-point range-the range of set points over which
the automatic shut-off valve can be adjusted. Expressed as a
range of flow rates at a given inlet pressure.
4. Classification
4.1 Automatic shut-off valves shall be of the following
types, styles, sizes, pressure ratings, and end connections:
4.1.1 Types:
4.1.1.1 Type /-Valves that can be adjusted or repaired
without removing the valve from pipe line.
4.1.1.2 Type II-Valves that cannot be adjusted or repaired
without removing the valve from pipe line.
4.1.2 Styles:
4.1.2.1 Style ]-Automatic Reset Construction-These
valves are designed to limit the flow of air or nitrogen upon
closure to a small predetermined level. These valves reset
automatically once the service line downstream is made air or
nitrogen-tight and pressure is equalized across the valve.
4.1.2.2 Style 2-Manual Reset Construction-These valves
are designed to stop the flow of air or nitrogen upon closure.
These valves must be manually reset.
4.1.3 Sizes-Automatic shut-off valves shall be of the fol-
lowing NPS sizes: V4 (13.5 mm),% (17.2 mm),
1
/z (21.3 mm),
% (26.9 mm), 1 (33.7 mm), 1
1
/4 (42.4 mm), 1 Vz (48.3 mm), and
1229
2 (60.3 mm). Unless otherwise specified in 5.0, the valve inlet
size shall be the same as the outlet size.
4.1.4 Pressure Ratings-Automatic shut-off valves shall
have pressure rating(s) selected (see 3.1.5) from Table I. The
pressure rating(s) selected shall be specified in Section 5. The
inlet and outlet pressure ratings of the automatic shut-off valve
shall be the same for any given valve.
4.1.5 End Connections-Automatic shut-off valves shall
have end connections selected from those listed in Table 1 and
5.1 Ordering documentation for automatic shut -off valves
under this specification shall include the following informa-
tion, as required, to describe the equipment adequately:
5.1.2 Valve type (see 4.1.1),
5.1.3 Valve style (see 4. 1.2),
5.1.4 Valve size (see 4.1.3),
5.1.5 Valve pressure rating (see 4.1.4),
5.1.6 End connections (see 4.1.5),
5 .1. 7 Valve inlet operating pressure,
5.1.8 Set point (see 3.1.7 and 7.2),
5.1.9 Tamper-proof set point adjustment, if required (see
6.3.2),
S4), and
5.1.11 Maximum vibration frequency and displacement am-
plitude, if other than specified (see S 1.2).
6. Valve Construction
6.1 Valves shall incorporate the features specified in
6.2-6.16.
6.2 Materials of Construction-Material requirements for
the automatic shut-off valve shall be as follows: The pressure-
containing envelope shall be 300 series corrosion-resistant
steel (304, 304L, 316, or 316L). Internal parts including
springs, poppets, retainers, etc. shall be 300 series corrosion-
resistant steel, nickel-aluminum-bronze, nickel-copper (70-30),
or bronze. Other materials for both the pressure-containing
envelope and internal parts may be selected to assure compat-
ibility with the line medium, weldability, and to provide
corrosion resistance without requiring painting, coating, or
plating. Materials for contacting parts shall be selected to
minimize electrolytic corrosion and galling.
6.3 General Requirements:
6.3.1 Automatic shut-off valves shall be self-contained,
requiring no external power source for operation. The auto-
matic shut-off valve shall be capable of meeting all require-
ments of this specification and provide extended reliable
operation.
6.3.2 Automatic shut-off valves shall incorporate a provi-
sion for manually resetting. This shall constitute an isolatable
bleed-by which is operable with the valve in the pipeline under
pressure and which functions by equalizing pressure across the
poppet. Style 1 valves shall in addition, incorporate a provision
which automatically resets the valve, and which constitutes a
small non-isolatable bleed-by.
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
6.4 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ANSI B 1.1.
Where necessary, provisions shall be incorporated to prevent
the accidental loosening of threaded parts. The design shall be
such that standard wrenches can be used on all external bolting.
Lock-wire shall not be used. Any exposed threads shall be
protected by plastic caps for shipping.
6.5 Interchangeability-The automatic shut-off valve, in-
cluding all associated piece parts, shall have part number
identity, and shall be replaceable from stock or the manufac-
turer on a nonselective and random basis. Parts having the
same manufacturer's part number shall be directly interchange-
able with each other with respect to installation (physical) and
performance (function). Physically interchangeable assem-
blies, components, and parts are those which are capable of
being readily installed, removed or replaced without alteration,
misalignment, or damage to parts being installed or to adjoin-
ing parts. Fabrication operations such as cutting, filing, drilling,
reaming, hammering, bending, prying, or forcing shall not be
required.
6.6 Nonmetallic Element Interchangeability-Nonmetallic
elements, including but not limited to, seat rings, poppet seat
inserts, cushions, and 0-rings shall be treated as separately
identified and readily replaceable parts.
6.7 Maintainability-Maintenance shall require standard
tools to the maximum extent possible. Any special tools
required for maintenance shall be identified, and shall be
supplied as part of the valve.
6.8 Reversibility-Seating inserts, if applicable, shall not be
physically reversible unless they are also functionally revers-
ible to preclude incorrect assembly.
6.9 Adjustments-There shall be no adjustments required in
the automatic shut-off valve during or after assembly other than
the set point.
6.10 Pressure Envelope-The valve shall be designed to
pass a hydrostatic shell test at a pressure of at least 1.5 times
the 100 op (38 C) pressure rating of the valve without damage.
6.11 Body Construction-All pressure lines, including the
reset bleed line, shall be internally ported. The bonnet and
bottom cap (where applicable) shall be attached to the body by
bolting, threading, or threaded-union connections.
6.12 Set-Point Adjustment-Set point shall be adjustable
through the range specified in 7 .4. Type I valves shall be
adjustable with the valve in the line under pressure. Type II
valves may be removed from the line for adjustment. The set
point shall incorporate right-hand threads so that a clockwise
rotation increases the set point. Means shall be used to prevent
an accidental or inadvertent change in set point. The option of
a tamper-proof set-point adjustment (lead seal, and so forth)
shall be available and shall be specified as in Section 5.
6.13 Port Configuration-The automatic shut-t>ff valve
shall have in-line inlet and outlet ports.
6.14 Springs-Spring incorporated in the automatic shut-off
valve shall not be compressed solid during operation. Spring
ends shall be squared and ground. Engagement or disengage-
ment of parts against spring compression shall not be permit-
ted.
6.15 Guiding-The valve poppet shall be guided to prevent
binding or seizing, and to ensure proper seating under all
operating conditions. Proper alignment of all internal operating
parts shall be maintained with interchangeable parts and under
all tolerance stack-up conditions.
6.16 Accessibility-Type I automatic shut-off valve shall be
accessible for adjustment or service, without removing the
automatic shut-off valve from the line.
7.1 Automatic shut-off valves shall meet the requirements
of 7.2-7.8.
7.2 Set Point-The required set point as defined in 3.1.7,
shall be as specified (see Section 5).
7.3 Set-Point Accuracy-The set-point accuracy, as defined
in 3.1.8, shall be plus or minus 10% of the set point.
7.4 Range of Set-Point Adjustment-Automatic shut-off
valves shall be capable of meeting all performance require-
ments when set at any point within plus or minus 25 % of the
nominal specified set point.
7.5 Trip Differential Pressure -The pressure differential at
which the automatic shut-off valve trips shut shall not exceed
the values specified in Table 2.
7.6 Reset Pressure-Once shut, the automatic shut-off valve
shall remain shut until the pressure across the valve is
equalized.
7.7 Seat Tightness-Once shut, and with the manually
operated isolatable bleed-by closed, the automatic shut-off
valve shall meet the following seat tightness requirements.
Where necessary, leakage measurement shall start after tem-
perature stabilization.
7.7.1 Style 1 Valves-Flow leakage shall not be less than
2 % and no greater than 5 % of the set-point flow.
7.7.2 Style 2 Valves-Flow leakage shall not exceed 60
standard cubic inches per hour (SCIH), per inch of valve size.
7.8 External Leakage-The automatic shut-off valve exter-
nal leakage shall be bubble-tight at its operating pressure
conditions over a 3-min period.
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each automatic shut-off valve must pass the tests
outlined in 8.2-8.6.
8.2 Visual Examination-The automatic shut-off valve shall
be examined visually to determine conformance with the
ordering data, interface dimensions, and workmanship without
disassembly.
1230
TABLE 2 Maximum Allowable Trip Differential Pressures
Maximum Inlet Operating Pressure, psi
(MPa)
400 (2.758)
1500 (10.342)
3000 (20.684)
6000 (41.369)
Maximum Allowable Trip Differential
Pressure, psi (kPa)
15 (103)
40 (276)
60 (414)
75 (517)
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
8.3 Hydrostatic Shell Test-The automatic shut-off valve
shall be hydrostatically tested using water by applying a test
pressure equal to the 1.5 times the 100 op (38 C) pressure
rating to the valve inlet and outlet to check its structural
integrity. Pressure shall be applied for three minutes. Air or
nitrogen may be used in lieu of water, providing appropriate
safety precautions are taken to minimize the risk associated
with the use of a compressible fluid. There shall be no external
leakage, permanent distortion, or structural failure.
8.4 Seal Tightness Test 2 Valves auto-
matic shut-off valve shall be tested with air or gas with
an inlet test pressure equal to the 1.1 times the 100 op (38 C)
pressure The leakage requirements of 7. 7 shall be met.
8.5 External Leakage Test-Air or nitrogen at a test pressure
to the 100 op (38 C) pressure rating of the valve shall be
to the inlet and outlet of the automatic shut-off valve.
shall be checked using bubble fiuid, or by
the valve under water. There shall be no visible
external over a 3-min
8.6 Set-Point Test-Apply air or nitrogen at the nominal
pressure rating to the valve inlet. Instrumentation shall include
a pressure gage at the valve inlet, and a flow-measuring device.
With the inlet pressure maintained at the nominal rating,
establish flow at less than 90 % of the specified set point.
Slowly increase flow until the valve trips shut. The valve shall
not close at less than 90% of the set-point flow, and shall close
at no greater than 110% of the set-point flow.
9. Marking
9.1 Body Markings-Valve bodies shall have the manufac-
turer's name or trademark, and flow arrow or ''inlet" and
"outlet" cast, forged or stamped with round bottom dies on
them.
F992; types I, II, III, or IV shall be permanently attached to the
automatic shut-off valve and shall include the following
information (some or all information may instead be stamped
or etched directly on the outside surface of the automatic
shut-off valve):
9 .2.1 Manufacturer's name.
9 .2.2 ASTM designation and year of issue.
9.2.3 Rated pressure.
9.2.4 Set point and range of adjustment.
specification are satisfied. This system shall also ensure that aU
S1.5.
Sl.2 Shock Test-The automatic shut-off valve shall be
subjected to and meet the high-impact shock tests for grade A,
class I as specified in MIL-S-901 pressurized with water, air, or
nitrogen. The inlet port shall be pressurized to the maximum
inlet operating pressure. There shall be no structural damage to
the automatic shut-off valve. There shall be no degradation to
1231
the performance capability of the automatic shut-off valve.
Tripping shut of the automatic shut-off valve is permissible.
S 1.3 Vibration Test-The automatic shut-off valve shall be
vibration tested in accordance with type I of MIL-STD-167- 1
pressurized with water, air, or nitrogen. The inlet port shall be
pressurized to the maximum inlet operating pressure. At
frequencies up to and including 33 Hz (unless otherwise
specified in the ordering information, Section 5), there shall be
no resonance in the range of frequencies tested. There shall be
no structural damage or degradation to the performance capa-
bility of the automatic shut-off valve.
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
S 1.4 Noise Test-The automatic shut-off valve shall be
tested for airborne noise in accordance with MIL-STD-7 40-1.
The noise (sound pressure level) shall not exceed 85 db
observed at one-metre distance from the automatic shut-off
valve.
S 1.5 Posttest Examination -The automatic shut-off valve
shall be disassembled and examined for any evidence of
excessive wear, degradation, or impending damage or break-
age.
the automatic shut-off valve which clearly depict design shall
be provided. The foilowing information shall also be included
as part of the drawings or catalog sheets:
tion, and any other data required to fully identify the properties
data necessary to fully identify the parts.
S2.1.2 In cases where standard commercial or military parts
are or can be employed, these shall be appropriately identified.
size of end connections.
S2.1.6 The following performance information shall be
included:
S2.1.6.1 Set point and adjustable range.
S2.1.6.2 Specified operating conditions.
automatic shut-off valve, organized as follows:
S2.2.1 Chapter ]-General Information and Safety Precau-
tions.
S2.2.3 Chapter 3---Functional Description.
S2.2.4 Chapter 4-Scheduled Maintenance.
S2.2.6 Chapter 6-Corrective Maintenance.
S2.2.7 Chapter 7-Parts List.
S2.2.9 In addition, the following shall be included as part of
the technical manual content:
S.2.2.9.1 The assembly drawings for the automatic shut-off
valve, supplemented by additional illustrations where neces-
sary to adequately illustrate operation and maintenance. These
additional illustrations may consist of blowouts, partial or full
sections, and may eliminate extraneous lines and details to
clarify the interaction of parts.
S2.2.9.2 Table listing wrench sizes and assembly torques (or
S2.2.9.3 Detailed disassembly and reassembly procedures.
In addition to a section providing procedures for the complete
disassembly and reassembly of the automatic shut-off valve,
maintenance and troubleshooting sections shall contain, or
refer to, only the limited disassembly and reassembly required
to accomplish each particular operation. This is intended to
reduce the possibility of unnecessary disassembly and unnec-
essary disturbance of adjustments when performing specific or
limited maintenance or troubleshooting operations.
S2.2.9.4 Adjustment procedures for the automatic shut-off
valve.
S3 .1 SctJpe of Vlork-The written description of the quality
S3.2 Authority and Responsibility-The authority and re--
S3.5 Drawings, Design Calculations, and Spec(fication
S3.7 Material Control-The manufacturer shall include
system for material control that ensures the material received
properly identified and that any required documentation
manufacturing process by a system that identified inspection
controlled conditions utilizing documented work instructions,
1232
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
S3 .17 Sample Farms-The forms used in the quality control
S3 .18 Inspection Authority-The manufacturer shall make
S4. Special Material Design and Performance Consider-
ations
S4.1 Recovered Materials-Unless otherwise specified in
this specification, all equipment, material and articles incorpo-
rated in the products covered by this specification shal1 be new
and may be fabricated using materials produced from recov-
ered materials to the maximum extent practicable without
jeopardizing the intended use. The term "recovered materials"
means materials that have been collected or recovered from
solid waste and reprocessed to become a source of raw
materials, as opposed to virgin raw materials. None of the
above shall be interpreted to mean that the use of used or
rebuilt products is allowed under this specification unless
otherwise specifically specified.
S4.2 Pipe threads shall not be used in the automatic shut-off
valve.
APPENDIX
Xl. GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF AUTOMATIC SHUT-OF'F VALVES
X 1.1 Scope-This appendix provides general guidelines for
the selection of automatic shut-off valves, and therefore, its use
does not in any way relieve the user of the final responsibility
in the selection and installation of automatic shut-off valves.
Xl.2 The automatic shut-off valves described by this speci-
fication are intended to be installed as safety devices in air or
nitrogen service to quickly and automatically shut off flow
under certain excess flow conditions caused by a downstream
failure, such as a hose rupture. They are designed to respond
only to the pressure differential across the automatic shut-off
valve created by the flow. Therefore, these valves are not
1233
intended primarily to preserve the upstream fluid from causes
such as a slow downstream leak.
Xl.2.1 In the open position and under no flow conditions,
the valve is fully balanced with no net pressure force tending
to open or close the valve. The valve is actuated to close when
the pressure drop across the valve caused by a flow exceeds a
set valve. The valve is set by adjusting the distance between the
poppet and the seat in the open position (that is, changing the
restriction to flow presented by the valve) and thereby chang-
ing the flow-pressure conditions under which the set pressure
F1793 - 97 (201 0)
drop occurs. Once shut, the valve remains shut until the static
pressure drop across the valve is reduced.
Xl.3 To function as intended, the characteristics of the
system and the location of the automatic shut-off valve must be
such that the lowest pressure drop created across the automatic
shut-off valve as the result of a casualty will always be greater
than the highest pressure drop created across the valve during
any normal operating condition. The separation between these
two points must be sufficient to be compatible with the
accuracy of the automatic shut-off valve selected. If there is not
a sufficient separation, or if these points overlap, then either the
automatic shut-off valve will inadvertently trip shut during
certain normal operating situations, or it will fail to trip shut
under certain casualty situations, or both, and therefore, its
successful application will not be possible.
Xl.4 Since the automatic shut-off valve is statically pres-
sure balanced, the set point at which it would trip shut is
established by the spring preload tending to hold the poppet in
the open position combined with the flow restriction presented
by the valve when in the open position.
Xl.5 Type I automatic shut-off valves are intended to
provide maximum maintainability (particularly in systems
where removal and reinstallation of the valve body from the
pipe-line may be difficult because of pipe spring) by permitting
valve adjustment and removal of all valve internals with the
valve in the pipe-line. Type II automatic shut-off valves require
removal of the valve from the pipe-line for adjustment or repair
and are intended for applications where compactness and
light-weight are the primary considerations.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed evety five years and
COPYRIGHT/).
1234
c6 Designation: F1794-97 (Reapproved 2010)
~ 11
7
INTERNATIONAL
----
Hand .. Qperated, Globe-Style Valves for Gas (Except Oxygen
Gas) and Hydraulic Systems
1
1. Scope
and operating requirements for hand-operated, quick-
change cartridge trim, in-line body and angle-body, globe-style
valves -for use in gas (except oxygen gas) and hydraulic
systems. These valves may be used for on-off, and/or throttling
applications.
units are to be regarded as the standard. The Sl equivalents
shown in parenthesis are provided for information only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
3
ANSI B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread
Form)
ANSI B 1.20.] Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ANSI B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ANSI B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
ANSI B 16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welded End
4
MIL-STD-167 -I Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment (Type !-Environmental and Type Il-
Internally Excited)
MH..,-STD-740-1 Airborne Noise Measurements and Accep-
1
and Matine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.! I on
DOI: JO.l520/Fl794-97Rl0.
2
the ASTM website.
3
4
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High-Impact); Ma-
Equipment and Systems, Requirements for
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze.
Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA):
and Socket Welding 6000 PSL WOG, NPS
NAVSEA 803-1385943 Unions, Silver 3000 PSI,
NAVSEA 803-1385946 Unions, Bronze Silver
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
for detection.
3.1.2 external leakage-leakage from the valve that escapes
to atmosphere.
3.1.3 flow capacity-the ability of a valve to pass flow under
any given set of pressure conditions. The flow capacity of a
valve is directly related to its Flow Coefficient (Cv). The Flow
coefficient is the quantity of water passing through a valve,
expressed in gallons/minute (litres/minute), when 1 psi (6.895
kPa) pressure drop at 60F (16C) is applied across the valve.
3.1.4 globe-style valves-a basic control valve type that gets
its name from the globular shape of its body with an internal
bridgewall construction. It normally uses a basic rising stem/
plug for the closure member.
3.1.5 hydrostatic shell test pressures-the hydrostatic test
pressures that the valve is required to withstand without
damage. Valve operation is not required during application of
shell test pressure, but the valve must meet all performance
requirements after the shell test pressure has been removed.
3.1.6 internal leakage-leakage from higher pressure to
lower pressure portions of the valve.
3.1.7 operating pressures-the pressures within the valve
during service.
3.1.8 pressure ratings-the pressure ratings of the valve
shall be as defined in the documents listed in Table l. The
1235
F1794 - 97 (201 0)
TABLE 1 End Connections and Pressure Ratings for Valves
Type of End
Connection
Pressure Rating
Connections
Butt-welded ANSI B16.34 Class 150, ANSI B16.25
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500,
2500, or 4500
Socket-welded ANSI B16.34 Class 150, ANSI B16.11
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500,
2500,or4500
Threaded (tapered ANSI B16.34 Class 150, ANSI B 1.20.1 and ANSI
pipe thread) 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, B16.11
or2500
Union-end,A MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type) MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type) 400
Silver-brazed 400 lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa) lb/in.
2
(2.758 MPa)
Union-end,A 803-1385946 1500 lb/in.
2
803-1385946 1500 lb/in.
2
Silver-brazed (10.342 MPa) (10.342 MPa)
Union-end,A 803-1385943 3000 lb/in.2 803-1385943 3000 lb/in.
2
Silver-brazed (20.684 MPa) (20.684 MPa)
Union-end, A 803-1385884 6000 lb/in.
2
803-1385884 6000 lb/in.
2
Butt/socket weld (41.369 MPa) (41.369 MPa)
Other, as specified As specified As specified
A For union inlet and outlet end connections, only the pertinent dimensions listed
in the applicable documents (Military Specification or NAVSEA Requirements)
shall apply. The valve shall be supplied with the thread-pieces only, without the
tail-pieces and union-nuts.
pressure ratings (also called pressure-temperature ratings)
establish the maximum allowable working (service) pressures
of a component (valve, end connections, and so forth) at
various temperatures.
3.1.9 quick-change cartridge trim-a construction that fa-
cilitates rapid and reliable seat-ring/seat removal and replace-
ment by retaining the seat-ring/seat in the valve cartridge, as
opposed to a seat-ring which is threaded, welded, brazed, or
made integral with the valve body.
3.1.10 seat tightness-the ability of a valve to prevent
internal leakage from the valve-inlet to the valve-outlet.
4. Classification
4.1 Valves shall be of the following types, styles, sizes,
pressure ratings, and end connections, as specified in Section 5.
4.1.1 Types-Valves shall have either Type I (angle body
construction) or Type II (inline body construction).
4.1.2 Styles-Valves shall be either Style I (shut-off valves)
or Style 2 (throttling valves).
4.1.3 Sizes-Valve sizes shall be Vs NPS (1 0.2 mm),
1
/4 NPS
(13.5 mm), Ys NPS (17.2 mm),
1
/2 NPS (21.3 mm), % NPS
(26.9 mm), 1 NPS (33.7 mm), 11/4 NPS (42.4 mm), P/2 NPS
(48.3 mm), and 2 NPS (60.3 mm).
4.1.4 Pressure Ratings-Valves shall have a pressure rating
selected from those listed in Table l and specified in Section 5.
The inlet and outlet pressure ratings of the valve shall be
identical for any given valve.
4.1.5 End Connections-Valves shall have end connections
selected from those listed in 1 and specified in Section 5.
The inlet and outlet end connections of the valve shall be
identical for any given valve.
tion shall include the following information, as required to
1236
5.1.2 Valve type (see 4 .. 1),
5.1.3 Valve style (see 4.1 .2),
5.1.4 Valve size (see 4.1.3),
5.1.5 Valve pressure rating (see 4.1.4),
5 .1.6 Valve end connections (see 4. 1.5),
5.1.7 Line medium,
5.1.8 Temperature of line medium,
S4),
plitude, if other than specified (see S1.4), and
5.1.11 Maximum permissible noise level, if other than
specified (see S1.5).
6.1.1-6.1.17.
6.1.1.1 Valves furnished under this specification shall be
soft-seated, globe-style valves using a cartridge in which all
working parts including the seat are removable as an assembly.
6.1.2 Materials of Construction-Material requirements for
these valves shall be as follows: The pressure containing
envelope shall be 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, nickel-
copper (70-30), nickel-aluminum-bronze, or bronze. Internal
parts in contact with the line media shall be 300 series
corrosion-resistant steel, nickel-copper (70-30), copper-nickel
(70-30), bronze, nickel-aluminum-bronze, or naval brass.
Other materials not listed above may be selected to assure
compatibility with the line medium, weldability, and to provide
corrosion resistance without requiring painting, coating, or
plating. Materials for contacting parts shall be selected to
minimize electrolytic corrosion and galling.
6.1.3 Soft-Seating Insert-A soft-seating (non-metallic) in-
sert, if applicable, shall be field replaceable and incorporated in
the valve plug. Soft-seating inserts shall be protected from
direct flow impingement, excessive loading and extrusion, or
any other effect jeopardizing their useful life. Soft-seating
inserts shall be of the simplest practical configuration to
facilitate emergency replacement manufacture where neces-
sary.
6.1.4 Pressure Envelope-The valve shall be designed to
pass a hydrostatic shell test at a pressure of at least 1.5 times
the 100 F (38 C) pressure rating of the valve without any
damage.
6.1.5 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ANSI B 1.1.
6.1.6 Accessibility-All internal parts of the valve shall be
accessible for adjustment or service, without removing the
valve body from the line.
6.1.7 Interchangeability-The valve, including all associ-
ated piece parts, shall have part number identity, and shall be
replaceable from stock or the manufacturer on a nonselective
F1794 - 97 (201 0)
and random basis. Parts having the same manufacturer's part
number shall be directly interchangeable with each other with
respect to installation (physical) and performance (function).
Physically interchangeable assemblies, components, and parts
are those which are capable of being readily installed, re-
moved, or replaced without alteration, misalignment, or dam-
age to parts being installed or to adjoining parts. Fabrication
operations such as cutting, filing, drilling, reaming, hammer-
ing, bending, prying, or forcing shall not be required.
6.1.8 Nonmetallic Element Interchangeability-
Nonmetallic elements, including but not limited to, seat rings,
soft-seating inserts, cushions, and 0-rings shall be treated as
6.1.9 Maintainability-Valve maintenance shall require
standard tools to the maximum extent possible. Any special
tools required for maintenance shall be identified, and shall be
supplied with the valve.
6.1.10 Reversibility-Seat inserts shall not be physically
preclude incorrect assembly.
6.1.11 Adjustments-There shall be no adjustments required
in the valve during or after assembly.
6.1.12 Bidirectional Operation and Bubbletight Shut-Off-
The valve shall be capable of operation and bubbletight
shut-off with a differential pressure equal to the rated pressure
applied across the valve in either direction of flow.
6.1.13 Guiding-The valve poppet shall be guided to pre-
vent binding or seizing, and to ensure proper seating, under all
6.1.14 Valve Operating Force-The maximum permissible
total tangential force required on the handwheel/handle for
operating or seating/unseating the valve shall not exceed 50 lb
(222 N), when the valve is subjected to a differential pressure
equal to the rated pressure applied across the valve in either
direction of flow.
6.1.15 Pressurization Rate-To prevent the possibility of
auto-ignition, the valve shall be capable of being operated to
limit the rate of downstream pressure buildup in a depressur-
ized volume (with the rated pressure upstream) to 200 psi
(1380 kPa) per second. Downstream volumes for this pressur-
ization rate shall be taken as 10 pipe diameters.
6.1.16 Operation-The valve shall close by a clockwise
rotation of handwheel/handle when viewed from directly over
the handwheel/handle.
6.1.17 Envelope Dimensions-For union-end valves only,
the overall envelope dimensions shall be as shown in
(angle body construction) or (inline body construction),
as applicable, and Table 2.
7. Performance
7.1 Valves shall meet the performance requirements of
7.1.1-7.1.3.
7.1.1 Flow Capacity-The flow capacity of the valve, ex-
pressed in terms of Cv shall be equal or greater than the values
shown in Table 3.
1237
~ c _ _
FIG. 1 Angle Body
t------- A --------
FIG. 2 lnline Body
7.1.2 Seat Tightness-Valve shall be bubbletight at 1.1 times
the 100 F (38 C) pressure rating in both directions when
closed with a handwheel!handle force not exceeding that
specified in 6.1.14 (or the manufacturer's published recom-
mendations, when less).
7 .1.3 External Leakage-Valve external leakage shall be
bubbletight at its 100 F (38 C) pressure rating.
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each valve shall pass the tests outlined in 8.1.1-8.1.4.
8.1.1 Visual Examination-The valve shall be examined
visually to determine conformance with the ordering data and
workmanship without disassembly.
0 F1794 - 97 (201 0)
TABLE 2 Envelope Dimensions (for Union-End Valves Only)
Valve Size, NPS
1
/a (10.2 mm)
V4 (13.5 mm)
3fa(i7.2mm)
1/2 (21.3 mm)
% (26.9 mm)
1 (33.7 mm)
11/4 (42.4 mm)
1112 (48.3 mm)
2 (60.3 mm)
Valve Size NPS
1fs(10.2mm)
1/4 (13.5 mm)
3fs (17.2 mm)
1
12 (21.3 mm)
% (26.9mm)
1 (33.7 mm)
1% (42.4 mm)
1112 (48.3 mm)
2 (60.3 mm)
Envelope Dimensions, 0.015 in. (0.38 mm)
Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C
2.750 (69.85) 11fa (28.59) Pia (34.92)
3.375 (85.73) 1112 (38.10) 1
1
1/16 (42.86)
4.000 (101.60) 1% (41.28) 2 (50.40)
4.250 (107.95) 1% (44.45) 21/s (53.98)
4.625 (117.75) 23/a (60.33) 2
5
/16 (59.05)
5.250 (133.35) 2% (69.85) 2% (66.65)
6.500 (228.60) 3 (76.20) 3
1
/4 (82.55)
9.000 (241.30) 4 (101.60) 4 (101.60)
9.500 (241.30) 4.500 (114.30) 4.500 (114.30)
TABLE 3 Flow Coefficient
Flow Capacity, Cv , gpm Flow Capacity, Cv , litres/m
0.5
1.1
2.3
3.1
5.0
8.9
13.8
22.0
36.0
1.89
4.16
8.71
11.73
18.93
33.69
52.24
83.28
136.27
8.1.2 Hydrostatic Shell Test-The valve shall be hydrostati-
cally tested with water by applying test pressures equal to 1.5
times the 100 F (38 C) pressure rating to the inlet and outlet
ports (with the valve in the open position) to check the
structural integrity of the valve. Pressure shall be applied for
three minutes. Air or nitrogen may be used in lieu of water,
providing appropriate safety precautions are taken to minimize
the risk associated with the use of a compressible fluid. There
shall be no external leakage, permanent distortion, or structural
failure.
8.1.3 Seat Tightness Test-The valve shall be seated with an
applied handwheel/handle force not exceeding that specified in
6.1.14 (or the manufacturer's published recommendations,
when less). Air or nitrogen at 1.1 times the 100 oF (38 C)
pressure rating of the valve shall be used for seat tightness test,
using bubble fluid or immersing the outlet, or a line from the
outlet, under water. The valve shall show no visible evidence of
leakage over a 3-min period. The valve shall be tested in both
directions of flow to assure bidirectional seat tightness. For
valves used for helium or helium mixture service, the testing
medium shall be helium or helium/nitrogen mixture.
8.1.4 External Leakage Test-With the valve in the partially
open position, air or nitrogen shall be applied at a test pressure
equal to the 100 op (38 C) pressure rating of the valve to the
inlet port, and the outlet port blanked off. External leakage
shall be checked using bubble fluid, or by submerging the
valve in water. There shall be no visible external leakage over
a 3-min period. For valves used for helium or helium mixture
service, the testing medium shall be helium or helium/nitrogen
mixture.
9. Marking
F99:2; Types I, II, HI, or IV shall be permanently attached to the
valve and shall include the following information (some or aU
information may instead be stamped, etched, or cast on the
valve body):
9.1.3 Manufacturer's model/part number,
9.1.4 Size, and
9.1.5 Pressure rating.
9.2 Body Markings-Valve body shall be marked per ANSI
B16.34.
One or more of the following supplementary requirements S1, S2, S3, or S4 shall be applied only
1238
~ F1794 - 97 (201 0)
S1. Supplemental Tests
tion and tests selected from those specified in S 1.1.1 through
s 1.1.6.
;nr'rann,nm Test-The valve shall be attached to an
air or source at the rated pressure with flow through
the valve over the seat. A needle valve shall be installed
cycling tests. The valve shall
50 times and then seat valve with the maximum
force as specified per manufacturer's recommended
data. One shall consist of one complete
opening and
(b) Allow valve to remain for 1 h in the seated
condition.
(c) (a) and (b) above until valve has undergone 2500
cycles.
(d) After each 50 cycles, stem and seat leakage shall be
checked.
(e) Seating, unseating, and running torques shall be noted
during this test. Maximum valves should be within those listed
in manufacturer's published data.
No lubrication shall be applied to the stem seal either before or
during these tests.
S 1.1.2 Pressurization Rate Test-With a test pressure equal
to the 100 F (38 C) pressure rating applied upstream, and a
depressurized downstream volume as specified in 6.1.15, the
valve shall be operated to demonstrate its ability to meet the
pressurization rate specified in 6.1.15.
S 1.1.3 Shock Test-The valve shall be subjected to and
meet the high-impact shock tests for Grade A, Class I as
specified in MIL-S-901, pressurized with water, air, or nitro-
gen. The valve inlet shall be pressurized to a test pressure of the
100 F (38 C) pressure rating. There shall be no structural
damage to the valve. There shall be no degradation to the
performance capability of the valve.
S 1.1.4 Vibration Test-The valve shall be vibration tested in
accordance with Type I of MIL-STD-167 -1 pressurized with
air or nitrogen. The valve inlet shall be pressurized to the 100
F (38 C) pressure rating. At frequencies up to and including
33 Hz (unless otherwise specified in the ordering information,
Section 5), there shall be no resonance in the range of
frequency tested. There shall be no structural damage or
degradation to the performance capability of the valve.
S 1.1.5 Noise Test-The valve shall be tested for airborne
noise in accordance with MIL-STD-740-1. The noise (sound
pressure level) shall not exceed 85 db, unless otherwise
specified in 5.0, observed at one-metre distance from the valve.
S 1.1.6 Post-Test Examination-After completion of each or
all of the tests specified in S 1.1.1 through S 1.1.5, the valve
age.
S ~ Technical Data Requirements
the valve which clearly depict design shall be provided. The
following information shall also be included as part of the
drawings or catalog sheets:
tion, and any other data required to fully identify the properties
data necessary to fully identify the parts.
valve, organized as follows:
S2.2.1 Chapter J-General Information and Safety Precau-
tions.
S2.2.3 Chapter ]-Functional Description.
S2.3 In addition, the following shall be included as part of
S2.3.1 The assembly drawings for the valve, supplemented
by additional illustrations where necessary to adequately illus-
trate operation and maintenance. These additional illustrations
may consist of blowouts, partial or full sections, and may
eliminate extraneous lines and details to clarify the interaction
of parts.
S2.3.2 Table listing wrench sizes and assembly torques (or
S2.3.3 Detailed disassembly and reassembly procedures. In
addition to a section providing procedures for the complete
disassembly and reassembly of the valve, maintenance, and
each particular operation. This is intended to reduce the
1239
S3 .1 Scope of Work-The written description of the quality
0 F1794 - 97 (201 0)
S3.2 Authority and Responsibility-The authority and re:..
S3.7 Material Control--The manufacturer shall include a
manufacturing process by a system which identified inspection
controlled conditions utilizing documented work instructions.
S3 .11 Nondestructive Examination-Provisions shall be
between inspected and noninspected material.
S3.17 Sample Forms-The forms used in the quality control
S4. Special Material, Design, and Performance Consider-
ations
S4.1 Recovered Materials-Unless otherwise specified in
this specification, all equipment, material, and articles incor-
porated in the products covered by this specification shall be
new and may be fabricated using materials produced from
recovered materials to the maximum extent practicable without
jeopardizing the intended use. The term "recovered materials"
means materials that have been collected or recovered from
solid waste and reprocessed to become a source of raw
materials, as opposed to virgin raw materials. None of the
above shall be interpreted to mean that the use of used or
rebuilt products is allowed under this specification unless
otherwise specifically specified.
1240
S4.2 Pipe threads shall not be used in the construction of the
valve.
cO F1794 - 97 (201 0)
This standard is subject to revision Ht any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
COPYRIGHT/).
1241
~ 11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Pressure-Reducing Valves for Air or Nitrogen Systems
1
1. Scope
ing, and operating requirements for self-contained pressure-
reducing valves for air or nitrogen systems.
1.2 The values stated in this specification in inch-pounds
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F 1685 Specification for Manifolds for
Air or Nitrogen ...:uctPnH!
2.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
B 1.1 United Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)
3
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General
816.11 Forged Steel and
Threaded
3
3
B 16.34 Threaded, and Welded
MIL-STD-167 -1 Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Equipment !-Environmental and II-
lnternally
MIL-STD-740-1 Airborne Sound Measurements and
4
MIL-S-9()1 Shock Tests, H.L (High-Impact); Ma-
chinery, Equipment and Requirements for
4
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Cast Bronze,
General Specifications f01A
1
10.1520/Fl795-00R06.
2
the ASTM website.
3
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
4
Naval Sea Command (NAVSEA):
NAVSEA 803-1385943 Unions, Silver Brazing 3000 PSI,
NAVSEA 803-1385946 Unions, Bronze Silver Brazing,
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 accuracy of regulation-the amount by which the
downstream pressure may vary when the pressure-reducing
valve is set at any pressure within the required set pressure
range and is suqjected to any combination of inlet pressure,
flow demand, and ambient temperature variations within the
specified limits.
3.1.2 bubble-sight-no visible leakage over a 3-min period
for detection.
3.1.3 external leakage-leakage from the pressure-reducing
valve which escapes to atmosphere.
3.1.4 fail-open flow capacity-the ability of the pressure-
reducing valve to pass flow under any given set of pressure
conditions when, as a result of mechanical failure, it has
assumed a position of least resistance to flow.
3 .1.5 flow capacity-the ability of the pressure-reducing
valve to pass flow under any given set of pressure conditions.
3.1.6 flow rate demand-the amount of flow demanded by
the system at any given time downstream of the pressure-
reducing valve.
3.1.7 flow rate demand range-the range over which the
flow demand can vary.
3.1.8 hydrostatic shell test pressure(s)-The hydrostatic test
pressures that the inlet and outlet of the pressure-reducing
valve is required to withstand without damage. Pressure-
reducing valve operation is not required during application of
shell test pressure, but the pressure-reducing valve must meet
all performance requirements after the shell test pressure has
been removed.
3.1.9 inlet operating pressure range-the range over which
the inlet pressure supplied to the pressure-reducing valve can
1242
0 F1795 - 00 (2006)
vary under any operational conditions which the pressure-
reducing valve can be subjected to in service.
3.1.10 operating pressure( s)--the pressures within the
pressure-reducing valve during service.
3.1.11 pressure ratings-the pressure ratings of the
pressure-reducing valve shall be as defined in the documents
listed in Table l. The pressure ratings (also called pressure-
temperature ratings) establish the maximum allowable working
(service) pressures of a component (valve, end connections,
and so forth) at various temperatures. For a pressure-reducing
valve, the pressure ratings may not be identical for the valve
inlet and outlet.
3.1.12 pressure-reducing valve-a component which ac-
complishes automatic regulation of the dovvnstream pressure.
In this component, the upstream pressure is reduced to the
desired downstream pressure.
3 .1.13 pressure reversal-a condition in which pressure
exists at the outlet of a pressure-reducing valve when the
loading element is deactivated (set spring adjustment backed
off fully or dome charge vented off completely) and inlet
pressure is vented off.
3.1.14 seat-tightness-the ability of the pressure-reducing
valve to prevent leakage from the valve inlet to the valve
outlet.
3.1.15 self-contained pressure-reducing valve- a pressure-
reducing valve that does not use an external power source, such
as compressed air, electricity, or hydraulic fluid for operation,
but instead uses the line fluid for operation.
3 .1.16 set pressure-the outlet pressure delivered by the
pressure-reducing valve at the time the pressure setting is
made. For the purposes of this specification, it will be assumed
TABLE 1 Pressure Ratings for Pressure-Reducing Valve
Type of End
Connection
Pressure Rating Dimensional Details of End
Connections
Butt-welded ANSI 816.34 Class ANSI B16.25
150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500,
2500, or4500
Socket-welded ANSI 816.34 Class ANSI B16.11
150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500,
2500, or4500
Threaded (tapered ANSI 816.34 Class ANSI 81.20.1 and ANSI
pipe thread) 150, 300, 400, Bi6.11
600, 900,
1500, or 2500
Union end,A MIL-F-1183 (0-ring MIL-F-1183 (0-ring type)
silver-brazed
type) 400 lb/in.
2
400 lb/in? (2.758 MPa)
(2.758 MPa)
Union end,A 803-1385946 1500 803-1385946 1500
silver-brazed
lb/in.
2
(10.342 MPa) lb/in.
2
(10.342 MPa)
Union end,A 803-1385943 3000 803-1385943 3000
silver-brazed
lb/in.
2
(20.64 MPa) lb/in.
2
(20.64 MPa)
Union end,A 803-1385884 6000 803-1385884 6000
butt/socket weld
lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa) lb/in.
2
(41.369 MPa)
Other, as specified as specified as specified
in the applicable documents (Military Specification or NAVSEA requirements) shall
apply. The valve shall be supplied with the thread pieces only, without the tall
pieces and union nuts.
that the setting is made when there is no flow demand on the
pressure-reducing valve ("lock-up" condition), and the
pressure-reducing valve is at surrounding ambient temperature.
3.1.17 set pressure range-the range of set pressures (set
pressure limits) over which the pressure-reducing valve can be
adjusted while meeting the performance requirements speci-
fied.
3.1.18 soft-seating insert-the insert, incorporated in either
the poppet or the seat of the pressure-reducing valve, which
ensures bubble-tight seat tightness under all operating condi-
tions.
3.1.19 valve poppet-the part of the pressure-reducing valve
trim which established a rate of flow by moving toward or
away from the valve seat.
4. Classification
4.1 Pressure-reducing valves shall be of the following types,
sizes, pressure ratings, and end connections, as specified in
Section 5.
4.1.1 Types-Pressure-reducing valves shall be either Type I
(inlet outlet end connections of the same pressure rating) or
Type II (outlet end connection pressure rating lower than the
inlet end connection rating) and specified in Section 5.
4.1.2 Sizes-Pressure-reducing valve sizes shall be
1
/s NPS
(10.2 mm),
1
/4 NPS (13.5 mm), % NPS (17.2 mm),
1
/2 NPS
(21.3 mm), % NPS (26.9 mm), 1 NPS (33.7 mm), 1
1
/4 NPS
(42.4 mm), Jl/2 NPS (48.3 mm), and 2 NPS (60.3 mm).
4.1.3 Pressure Ratings- Pressure-reducing valves shall
have pressure rating(s) selected (see 1) from Table 1. The
pressure rating(s) selected shall be specified in Section 5.
4.1.4 End Connections- Pressure-reducing valves shall
have end connections selected from those listed in Table J and
5.1 Ordering documentation for pressure-reducing valves
under this specification shall include the following information
as required to describe the equipment adequately.
1243
5.1.2 Valve type (see 4.1.1),
5.1.3 Valve inlet and outlet sizes (see 4.1.2),
5.1.4 Pressure rating(s) (see 4.1.3),
5.1.5 Type of end connections (see 4.1.4),
5.1.6 Inlet operating pressure range.
5 .1. 7 Set pressure and set pressure range, if other than
specified (see 7.1.3).
5.1.8 Flow rate demand range (see 7.1.1, S 1.1.2).
5.1.9 Accuracy of regulation required, if set pressure is
below 10 psig (see 7.1.2).
5.1.10 Tamper-proof set-point adjustment, if required (see
6.1.9),
5.1.11 Supplementary requirements, if any (Sl through S4).
plitude, if other than specified (see S 1.1.4 ).
6.1.1-6.1.19.
F1795 - 00 (2006)
6.1.1 General Requirements-Pressure-reducing valves
shall be self-contained, requiring no external power source for
operation. The pressure-reducing valve shall be capable of
meeting all requirements of this specification and provide
extended reliable operation when protected by a 5-!lm nominal/
18-!lm absolute filter installed upstream and when subjected to
conditions specified in Section 5.
6.1.2 Materials of Construction-Material requirements for
the pressure-reducing valve shall be as follows: The pressure
containing envelope (body, gas dome, or spring housing) shall
be 300 series corrosion-resistant steel (304, 304L, 316, or
316L). Internal parts including springs, poppets, seal rings, and
retainers shall be 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, nickel-
aluminum bronze, nickel-copper (70--30), or bronze. Other
materials for both the pressure-containing envelope and inter-
nal parts may be selected to assure compatibility with the line
medium, weldability, and to provide corrosion resistance
without requiring painting, coating, or plating. Materials for
contacting parts shall be selected to minimize electrolytic
corrosion and galling.
6.1.3 Pressure Envelope-The pressure-reducing valve shall
be designed to pass a hydrostatic shell test at pressure(s) of at
least 1.5 times the 100F (38C) pressure rating(s) of the valve
without damage.
6.1.4 Port Configuration-The pressure-reducing valve
shall have in-line inlet and outlet ports.
6.1.5 Pressure Lines- All pressure lines in the pressure-
reducing valve shall be internally ported.
6.1.6 Soft-Seating Insert-A field replaceable soft-seating
insert shall be incorporated in the pressure-reducing valve.
Soft-seating inserts shall be protected from direct flow im-
pingement, excessive loading and extrusion, or any other effect
jeopardizing their useful life. Soft-seating inserts shall be of the
simplest practical configuration to facilitate emergency re-
placement manufacture where necessary.
6.1.7 Joints-The bonnet or spring housing and bottom cap
shall be attached to the body by bolting, a threaded connection,
or a threaded union connection.
6.1.8 Springs-Any spring incorporated in the pressure-
reducing valve shall not be compressed solid during operation.
Spring ends shall be squared and ground. Engagement or
disengagement of parts against spring compression shall not be
permitted.
6.1.9 Set Point Adjustment-For mechanical spring-loaded
pressure-reducing valves, the set point shall be adjustable
under pressure and shall incorporate right-hand threads so that
a clockwise rotation increases the set pressure. Means shall be
used to prevent an accidental or inadvertent change in set
pressure. The option of a tamper-proof set point adjustment
(lead seal, and so forth) shall be available and provided if
specified in Section 5. For gas-dome loaded pressure-reducing
valves, set point adjustment shall be in accordance with 6.1.1 0.
6.1.1 0 Gas Dome-For gas-dome loaded pressure-reducing
valves, the set point shall be adjustable under pressure and
shall maintain its charge without adjustment or recharge more
frequently than once a year to remain within its specified
performance envelope. Upstream pressure shall be used to
establish dome load. Dome loading shall be accomplished by
two valves installed in series, with a bleed-off valve in-
between. If these valves are metal seated, they shall not seat
directly into the structure of the dome so that damage or wear
to the seating surfaces would not require repair or replacement
of the dome. Only a single dome penetration is allowed. The
valves shall be operable by a standard-size hex wrench or other
suitable means. There shall be no external leakage past the
threads during dome bleeding. Flow from the bleed-off valve
shall be ported in such a way that it does not impinge directly
on the person making the adjustment, cause excessive noise, or
potentially lead to ice formation within the dome loading
circuit.
6.1.11 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ANSI
prevent the accidental loosening of threaded parts. The design
bolting. Lock-wire shall not be used. Any exposed threads shall
be protected by plastic caps for shipping.
6.1.12 Accessability- All internal parts of the pressure-
reducing valve shall be accessible for adjustment or service,
without removing the pressure-reducing valve from the line.
6.1.13 Interchangeability-The pressure-reducing valve in-
cluding all associated piece parts, shall have part number
identity, and shall be replaceable from stock or the manufac-
turer on a nonselective and random basis. Parts having the
same manufacturer's part number shall be directly interchange-
able with each other with respect to installation (physical) and
performance (function). Physically interchangeable assem-
blies, components, and parts are those that are capable of being
readily installed, removed, or replaced without alternation,
misalignment or damage to parts being installed or to adjoining
parts. Fabrication operations such as cutting, filing, drilling,
reaming, hammering, bending, prying, or forcing shall not be
required.
6.1.14 Nonmetallic Element Interchangeability
-Nonmetallic elements, including but not limited to, soft-
seating inserts, cushions, and 0-rings, shall be treated as
6.1.15 Maintainability- Maintenance shall require stan-
dard tools to the maximum extent possible. Any special tools
required for maintenance shall be identified, and shall be
supplied as part of the valve.
6.1.16 Reversibility- Seating inserts shall not be physically
6.1.17 Adjustments- There shall be no adjustments re-
quired in the pressure-reducing valve during or after assembly
other than the set point.
1244
6.1.18 Pressure Reversal-The pressure-reducing valve
shall not be damaged when subjected to a maximum pressure
reversal (maximum set pressure exists at the outlet).
6.1.19 Guiding-The valve poppet shall be guided to pre-
vent binding or seizing and ensure proper seating under all
F1795 - 00 (2006)
7.1 Pressure-reducing valves shall meet the performance
requirements of 7.1 -7.1
7.1.1 Flow Rate Demand Range-The maximum and mini-
mum flow rate demand required shall be specified (see Section
5) in standard cubic feet per minute [at 60F (16C) and 14.7
psia (1 01 kPa)]. The pressure-reducing valve shall meet the
specified maximum and minimum flow rate demand require-
ments, or any intermediate flow rate demand requirement, and
shall operate without hunting or chattering under all specified
conditions.
7 .1.2 Accuracy of Regulation-The pressure-reducing valve
shall maintain set pressure within the accuracy of regulation
limits specified in 2 under all flow rate demand and inlet
operating pressure conditions specified.
7 .1.3 Set Pressure Range-The set pressure range shall be
as follows: Where the pressure-reducing valve is mechanically
spring loaded, the set pressure shall be adjustable through a
range of at least 5 %of the set pressure, or 2 psi (13.8 kPa),
whichever is greater. Where the pressure-reducing valve is gas
dome loaded, the set point shall be adjustable through a range
of at least 25 % of the set pressure or 10 psi (68.9 kPa),
whichever is greater.
7.1.4 Seat Tightness- The pressure-reducing valve shall
meet the seat tightness requirements of 8.1.3. Where necessary,
leakage measurement shall start after temperature stabilization.
7.1.5 External Leakage- Pressure-reducing valve external
leakage shall be bubble tight at operating pressure conditions
over a 3-min period.
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each pressure-reducing valve must pass the tests out-
lined in 8.1.1-8.1.4.
8.1.1 Visual Examination-The pressure-reducing valve
shall be examined visually to determine conformance with the
ordering data, interface dimensions, and workmanship without
disassembly.
8.1.2 Hydrostatic Shell Test-The pressure-reducing valve
shall be hydrostatically tested with water by applying test
pressure(s) not less than 1.5 times the l00F (38C) pressure
TABLE 2 Required Accuracy of Regulation
Set Pressure, psig
0-9 (0-69 kPa)
1 0-25 (70-172 kPa)
26-50 (173-345 kPa)
51-100 (346-689 kPa)
101-250 (690-1725 kPa)
251-750 (1726-5170 kPa)
751-1000 (5171-6895 kPa)
Above 1000 (above 6896 kPa)
Accuracy of Regulation
(Percent of Set Pressure)
As specified in Section 5
(-30 5 %)
(-20 5 %)
(-162%)
(-122%)
(-102%)
(-9 1 %)
(-7 1 %)
1245
rating(s) to the inlet and outlet ports to check structural
integrity. Test pressure(s) shall be applied for 3 min. Air or
leakage, permanent distortion, or structural failure.
8.1.3 Seal Tightness Test--The pressure-reducing valve
shall be tested for seat tightness with air or nitrogen gas at an
inlet test pressure not less than the maximum inlet operating
pressure. The valve shall be isolated downstream using a
dead-ended volume not exceeding ten diameters of down-
stream pipe and monitored with bubble fluid to assure tight-
ness. There shall be no detectable rise in the outlet pressure
over a 3-min period after pressure-reducing valve temperature
stabilizes.
8.1.4 External Leakage Test-Air or nitrogen gas shall be
applied to the inlet of the pressure-reducing valve at the rated
pressure. External leakage shall be checked using bubble fluid
or by submerging the pressure-reducing valve in water. There
shall be no visible external leakage over a 3-min period.
9. Marking
F992, Types I, II, III, or IV shall be permanently attached to the
pressure-reducing valve and shall include the following infor-
mation (some or all information may instead be stamped or
etched directly on the outside surface of the pressure-reducing
valve):
9.1.3 Valve size, type, and pressure rating(s),
9.1.4 Nominal operating conditions (inlet pressure, set pres-
sure, and flow capacity),
pressure-reducing valves subjected to original testing for
determination of the operating and flow characteristics.
tion tests and inspect the pressure-reducing valves in the
manufacturer's plant to the extent specified on the purchase
order.
F1795 - 00 (2006}
c
FIG. 1 Pressure-Reducing Valve Envelope Dimensions
One or more of the following supplementary requirements S 1, S2, or S4 shall be applied only when
specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of those supplementary
S 1.1. 7 and delineated in the ordering data. The tests may be
conducted on representative valve sizes and pressure classes to
qualify all sizes and pressure classes of valves, provided the
valves are of the same type and design. Evidence of prior
approval of these tests is acceptable.
S 1.1.1 Pressure Reversal Test-The pressure-reducing
valve shall be tested to determine the susceptibility to damage
when subjected to pressure reversal as specified in 6.1.18. It
shall be set up with maximum inlet operating pref:sure and
maximum set pressure. A separate means shall be included to
insure that there is no loss of downstream pressure during this
test. The reference load shall then be removed from the
set-point mechanism (if the pressure-reducing valve is spring
loaded, all spring compression shall be backed off, if it is gas
1246
dome loaded, all dome charge shall be released). The inlet
pressure shall then be released and this condition (no load on
the pressure-reducing valve set point mechanism, zero pressure
applied to the inlet side of the pressure-reducing valve seat, and
maximum set pressure applied to the outlet side of the
pressure-reducing valve seat) shall be maintained for a period
of not less than 1 h. There shall be no leakage from the outlet
to the inlet of the pressure-reducing valve. There shall be no
evidence of damage to the pressure-reducing valve and no
degradation to its performance capability.
S 1.1.2 Accuracy of Regulation Test- The pressure-
reducing valve shall be tested for accuracy of regulation at each
inlet pressure/set pressure combination shown in Table S 1.1. At
Condition D, flow shall be varied over the full range of flow
rate demand as specified in Section 5. For Conditions A, B, and
C, full flow range testing is not required. During each sequence
(changing from Condition A to Condition B and changing from
Condition C to Condition D), no alteration shall be made to the
F1795 - 00 (2006)
TABLE S1.1 Pressure Combinations for Accuracy of Regulation
Tests
Condition Inlet Pressure Set Pressure
A maximum minimum
B minimum minimum
c maximum maximum
D minimum maximum
set pressure adjustment, or any other portion of the pressure-
reducing valve, and the accuracy of regulation shall be main-
tained as required by Table 2. There shall be no instability or
other evidence of unsatisfactory operation of pressure-reducing
valve during these tests. Flow in each condition shall be
maintained long enough to demonstrate that the above require-
ments are met.
S 1.1.3 Shock Test-The pressure-reducing valve shall be
subjected to and meet the high-impact shock tests for Grade A,
Class I as specified in MIL-S-90 1 pressurized with air or
nitrogen gas. The inlet port shall be pressurized to the
maximum inlet operating pressure and the outlet port pressur-
ized to the maximum outlet operating pressure. There shall be
no structural damage to the pressure-reducing valve or any
components. There shall be no degradation to the performance
capability of the pressure-reducing valve. Momentary loss in
pressure is permissible.
S 1.1.4 Vibration Test-The pressure-reducing valve shall be
vibration tested in accordance with Type 1 of MIL-STD-167 -1
pressurized with air or nitrogen gas. The inlet port shall be
pressurized to the maximum inlet operating pressure and the
outlet port pressurized to the maximum outlet operating
pressure. At frequencies up to and including 33 Hz (unless
otherwise specified in Section there shall be no resonance in
the range of frequency tested. There shall be no structural
damage or degradation to the performance capability of the
pressure-reducing valve.
S 1 .1.5 Noise e s t ~ The pressure-reducing valve shall be
tested for airborne noise in accordance with MIL-STD-7 40-1.
The noise (sound pressure level) shall not exceed 85 db
observed at 1-m distance from the pressure-reducing valve.
S 1.1.6 Posttest Examination-- The pressure-reducing valve
age.
Sl.l.7 Spring Deflection Test--The springs used in the
pressure-reducing valves shall not exhibit a pern1anent set
when 20 % their design limits. A spring
deflection test shaH be conducted to verify compliance to this
S2.1 Drawings--Assembly drawings or catalog sheets of
the pressure-reducing valve that clearly depict design and shall
be provided. The following information shall also be included
as part of the or sheets:
tion, and any other data to identify fully the properties
material and size designations, shore hardness and any other
data necessary to identify fully the parts.
S2.1.6 The following valve performance information shall
be included:
S2.1.6.1 Set pressure and adjustable range.
S2.1.6.2 Specified operating conditions-range of inlet
pressures and required range of capacity.
S2.1.6.3 Fail-open capacity (for purposes of pressure-relief
valve sizing) of the pressure-reducing valve.
S2.2 Technical Manuals-Technical manuals shall provide a
description, installation procedures, operation and maintenance
instructions, and illustrated parts breakdown for the pressure-
reducing valve, organized as follows:
S2.2.1 Chapter ]-General Information and Safety Precau-
tions.
1247
S2.2.3 Chapter 3-Functional Description.
S2.2.9 In addition, the following shall be included as part of
(1) The assembly drawings for the pressure-reducing valve,
supplemented by additional illustrations where necessary to
illustrate operation and maintenance adequately. These addi-
tional illustrations may consist of blowouts, partial or full
sections, and may eliminate extraneous lines and details to
clarify the interaction of parts.
(2) Table listing wrench sizes and assembly torques or other
equivalent procedures) for making up all joints and threaded
assemblies.
(3) Detailed disassembly and reassembly and procedures. In
addition to a section providing procedures for the complete
disassembly and reassembly of the pressure-reducing valve,
maintenance and troubleshooting sections shall contain, or
refer to, only the limited disassembly and reassembly required
to accomplish each particular operation. This is intended to
reduce the possibility of unnecessary disassembly and unnec-
essary disturbance of adjustments when performing specific or
limited maintenance or troubleshooting operations.
S2.3 Certification-Certification shall be provided indicat-
S3.1 Scope L?f Work-The written description of the quality
F1795 - 00 (2006)
S3.3 Organization-An organizational chart showing the
chasing, manufacturing, construction, inspection and quality
and the organization freedom to identify quality control prob-
lems and to initiate, recommend, and provide solutions.
design calculations, specifications and instructions, including
manufacturing process by a system which identifies status of
material throughout all stages of manufacture.
S3.8 Manufacturing Control- The manufacturer shall en-
examination and inspections.
S3.10 Welding- The quality control system shall include
made to use nondestructive examination, as necessary, to
S3.12 Nonconforming Items-The manufacturer shall estab-
lish procedures for controlling items not in conformance with
the specified requirements.
controls to ensure that all required heat treatment have been
tain inspection, measuring and test equipment to be used in
S3.17 Sample Forms- The forms used in the quality
S3 .18 Inspection Authority-The manufacture shall make
1248
S4. Special Material, Design, and Performance Require-
ments
products covered by this specification shall be new and may be
to the maximum extent practicable without jeopardizing the
reprocessed to become a source of raw materials, as opposed to
S4.2 Pipe threads shall not be used in the pressure-reducing
valve.
S4.3 Envelope Dimensions-Pressure-reducing valve enve-
lope dimensions (see XL .5) shall be as specified in 1 and
Table S4.1.
F1795 - 00 (2006)
TABLE S4.1 Envelope Dimensions
Valve Size A (in.) A(mm)
B (in.) B(mm)
(Max) (Max)
1/4 NPS (13.5 mm) 61/4
3
/16 158 5 31/2 89
% NPS (17.2 mm) 7
3
/16 178 5 41/4 108
1/2 NPS (21.3 mm) 8% 203 6 5 127
% NPS (26.9 mm) 9% 229 6 53!4 146
1 NPS (33.7 mm) 10% 254 6 61/2 165
C (in.)
(Max)
3
4
41/2
5
5%
C(mm)
(Max)
76
102
114
127
146
S4.4 Nonmetallic Valve Internal Parts-Nonmetallic inter-
nal parts shall be compatible with any residual materials ( 100
%humidity, entrained salt spray, and 2190 TEP lubricating oil
used in air compressors) in the line media.
APPENDIX
Xl. GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
X 1.1 Scope-This appendix provides general guidelines for
the selection of pressure-reducing valves, and therefore, its use
does not in any way relieve the user of the final responsibility
in the selection and installation of pressure-reducing valves.
X1.2 Mode of Operation-Pressure-reducing valves for air
or nitrogen service are commonly designed to operate in one of
three basic modes:
Xl.2.1 Direct Spring Loaded-Set point established by a
mechanical spring; generally practical at only small-to-
moderate combinations of flow demand and set pressure.
Xl.2.2 Gas Dome Loaded- Set point established by a fixed
gas charge loaded into the dome from the valve inlet at the time
the valve is set; generally advantageous for high combinations
of flow demand and set pressure.
Xl.2.3 Gas Dome Loaded, Pilot Referenced -Set point
established by a charge of gas in the dome which is maintained
constant at all times by a spring-loaded pilot valve installed on
or adjacent to the dome and which operates by sensing the
pressure in the dome and either venting the dome, or charging
the dome, using gas drawn from the valve inlet, as necessary.
This arrangement, also known as a compensator, compensates
for temperature change, valve stroke, leakage, or any other
condition which would otherwise cause a change in dome
pressure and thus set point.
X1.3 Fail-Open Capacity-It is critical to establish accu-
rately and define clearly the fail-open capacity of a pressure-
reducing valve. This parameter establishes the requirements for
the pressure-relief valve that protects the system downstream
of the pressure-reducing valve from overpressure in the event
of pressure-reducing valve failure.
Xl.4 Valve Types -Pressure-reducing valves covered by
this specification are defined by type as follows:
X1.4.1 Type 1-Valves that have inlet and outlet connec-
tions that are identical.
X1.4.2 Type 2-Valves that have inlet and outlet connec-
tions that are not identical. These valves can facilitate any
configuration, increase in size, or decrease in rating down-
stream of the regulator as a result of the pressure reduction in
the flow path accomplished by the pressure-reducing valve.
Xl.5 Pressure-reducing valves intended for use in mani-
folds per the applicable ASTM specification on manifolds
(Specification F 1685), should be Type I, with union end
connections in accordance with Table 1 and envelope dimen-
sions in accordance with 1 and Table S4.1.
COPYRIGHT/).
1249
A n t ~ Designation: F1799- 97 (Reapproved 2009)
_dliW!
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Shipboard Generated Waste Management Audits
1
1. Scope
1.1 Purpose-This guide covers information for assisting
shipowners in planning for costs or scheduling complications
during maintenance, repair, modifications, purchase negotia-
tions, or scrapping activities. Removal and disposal of certain
materials disturbed during modification, maintenance, or dis-
posal of systems or components may be costly or interrupt the
work schedule.
1.2 Objectives:
1.2.1 This guide will describe materials that may be dis-
turbed on ships during maintenance or scrapping activities,
which may result in costly or time-consuming removal or
disposal actions.
1.2.2 This guide will provide a systematic method to iden-
tify and record the locations of materials of concern for
immediate planning and future reference.
1.2.3 This guide will include a brief discussion of issues
related to the handling and storage of materials described in
this guide.
1.3 Considerations Beyond Scope:
1.3.1 This guide is not intended to address materials carried
as cargo or material stored onboard in prepackaged containers.
1.3.2 This guide is not intended to address waste products
related to the ongoing, day-to-day operation of a ship, such as
sewage, solid waste, incinerator ash (or other residual products
resulting from solid waste treatment), and residual sludge left
in segregated ballast tanks.
1.3.3 This guide does not provide a comprehensive index of
test methods available for characterizing the materials dis-
cussed. Test methods referenced or described should be con-
sidered as examples.
1.3.4 This guide is not intended to address directly regula-
tory issues for any of the materials described.
1.3.5 This guide is not intended to address remediation
concerns.
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM CommitteeF25 on Ships and
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of SubcommitteeF25.06 on
Marine Environmental Protection.
Current edition approved Nov. l, 2009. Published January 2010. Originally
approved in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2004 as Fl799- 97(2004).
DOl: 1 O.l520/Fl799-97R09.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D923 Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids
E849 Practice for Safety and Health Requirements Relating
to Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (Withdrawn 1991)
3
2.2 ASHRAE Standards:
4
ASHRAE Guideline 3. Reducing Emission of Fully Haloge-
nated Chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) Refrigerants in Refrig-
eration and Air-Conditioning Equipment and Applications
2.3 EPA Methods:
5
EPA 600/M4-82-020, Interim Method of the Determination
of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples
EPA SW-846, Method 8080, Organochlorine Pesticides and
PCBs
EPA SW-846, Method 1311. Toxicity Characteristic
Leachate Procedure
EPA SW-846, Method 8270. Semi-Volatiles List
EPA SW-846, Method 8260, Volatiles List
3. Terminology
3.1.1 audit, n-a process to identify waste materials associ-
ated with maintenance, repair, modifications, purchase nego-
tiations, or scrapping activities, some of which may be hazard-
ous, with the goal of providing planning information about
environmental, health, and safety risks and related costs.
3.1.2 friable, n-a physical state in which a dry material can
be easily crumpled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand
pressure.
3.1.3 mobile, adj-capable of being transported from one
surface to another.
3.1.4 PCB, n-a class of chemicals comprised of polychlo-
rinated biphenyls.
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE), 1791 Tullie Circle, NE, Atlanta, GA
30329.
5
1250
F1799 - 97 (2009)
3.1.5 streaming agents, n-a type of chemical used to fight
small, contained fires by directing the firefighting agent spe-
cifically at the fire.
3.1.6 target materials, n-specific materials that the audit
process will identify for evaluation.
3.1.7 waste oil, n-oil that cannot be reused or recycled.
4.1 Applicability-This guide is intended to describe a
planning audit that will improve the shipowner's ability to
forecast costs and schedule impacts and aid the shipowner in
identifying environmental, health, and safety concerns associ-
ated with the removal, handling, and disposal of potentially
hazardous shipboard materials.
4.2 Use-Audits may be performed to aid in planning for a
of events, including maintenance, modification,
purchase, or scrapping. To maximize efficiency, audits should
be tailored to meet the specific needs of the shipowner, with
target materials identified during the planning process.
4.3 Caution-Legal restrictions on the removal and disposal
of materials discussed in this guide may vary significantly from
port to port, both within the United States and abroad. Reasons
for this variation include the decentralized nature of port
control, state, and local environmental regulations, and the
local availability of landfill or treatment facilities. Users of this
guide should consult local authorities to obtain information on
specific legal requirements.
5. Procedure
5.1 Planning-Objectives for the waste management audit
should be established at the planning stage. A well-planned
audit will focus on target materials in critical locations to
minimize audit costs. Waste management audits, therefore,
should be performed by environmental, health, and safety
experts familiar with the specific objectives of the audit. Past
audit reports of the area and other documentation that may
provide insight into material characterization should be re-
viewed to avoid the expense of unnecessary tests. For example,
construction specifications may characterize a particular mate-
rial, eliminating the need for testing. In some instances,
inspection of the ship or interviews with personnel on-site may
be beneficial in planning the audit.
5.2 Testing-Many materials will require sampling and
characterization tests. A sampling plan should be followed by
qualified and authorized personnel. Analysis perfmmed by a
qualified or certified laboratory may be required.
6. Potential Shipboard Generated Wastes
6.1 Asbestos:
6.1.1 Description-Asbestos is the common name of a
number of substances including amosite, anthrophyllite, am-
phibole, and chrysotile (1).
6
When asbestos becomes friable, it
may be inhaled or swallowed, penetrating body tissues and
remaining there for many years. Exposure to asbestos has been
6
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this standard.
1251
linked to asbestosis, mesothelioma, and other cancers. Expo-
sure to cigarette smoke may increase the long-term risk of
developing asbestos-related lung cancer by as much as 90 %.
6.1.2 Uses-Many common construction products contain
asbestos, although use of the material in the United States was
significantly reduced during the 1970s. Likely products include
pipe lagging and other types of insulation, vinyl tile and
linoleum, floor tile adhesives, cement sheet and fiberboard,
brake pads and linings, and gasket materials, particularly for
high-temperature applications.
6.1.3 Test Methods (for Thermal Insulation) (2):
6.1.3.1 Sampling-The area to be sampled should be sub-
divided into homogeneous areas, and sampling of each homo-
geneous area should be conducted in a statistically random
manner. For surface materials, collect at least three samples for
each area under 1000 ft
2
, at least five for areas between 1000
and 5000 ft
2
, and at least seven for each area greater than 5000
ft
2
. For piping insulation, collect at least three samples from
each homogeneous section of piping.
6.1.3.2 Analysis-Samples should not be composited for
analysis. Analysis of each sample should be conducted using
the Polarized Light Microscopy Method described in EPA
600/M4-82-020. Under current U.S. regulations, a homoge-
neous area may be considered free of asbestos if all samples
from that area are shown to contain less than 1 % of asbestos.
6.1.4 Handling Precautions(3)-Asbestos should only be
handled by trained personnel. If asbestos must be disturbed, the
area should be isolated and well-labeled to protect employees
not involved with the removal or repair work. Protective
clothing including disposable coveralls, gloves, goggles, and a
respirator should be worn when handling asbestos, and person-
nel should remove contaminated clothes and wash before
leaving the work site. Material should be kept wet to minimize
potential for airborne fibers. Waste products should be stored in
plastic bags in a sealed rigid container and protected from
physical damage. Asbestos material, including asbestos waste,
should be stored in an isolated, regulated, and well-marked
area. Smoking, eating, drinking, chewing, or applying cosmet-
ics should be avoided in areas in which asbestos exposure is
likely. Practice E849 provides additional details. Asbestos
replacement materials also may pose environmental,
and health risks.
6.2 PCB-Contaminated Media:
6.2.1 Description-PCBs have many useful properties in-
cluding high stability, low vapor pressure, low flammability,
high heat capacity, and low electrical conductivity. They are
suspected carcinogens, however, and have been associated
with adverse health and reproductive effects. They also have a
high potential for bioaccumulation in the food chain. A number
of trade names exist for PCBs, including Aroclor, Asbestol,
Chlorextol, Diaclor, and Dykanol (4).
6.2.2 Uses-Because of the many positive characteristics of
PCBs, oils containing PCBs have been used in a great variety
of applications. The most common use has been as a dielectric
fluid in transformers, capacitors, and other electrical equip-
ment. The oil also has been used in many other situations
including hydraulic equipment, paints, oil-soaked gasket ma-
terial, and as a plasticizer in many other products. PCBs have
c4@f F1799- 97 (2009)
been banned in the United States since the mid-1970s, but
materials manufactured after the ban have been found to
contain them. Applications involving mobile forms of PCBs
pose a much greater risk to personnel and the environment
Typical shipboard materials that may contain mobile forms of
PCBs include electrical equipment containing dielectric fluid,
oil-soaked gasket material, oil-soaked insulation material, and
hydraulic fluids.
6.2.3 Test Methods:
6.2.3.1 Sampling-Because of significant variation in the
PCB content of similar materials, mixing or combining
samples prior to analysis is not recommended. Similarly,
random samples cannot prove untested items either to contain
or to be free of PCBs. Liquid oils may be sampled using
Practices D923.
6.2.3.2 Analysis-Materials may be analyzed using EPA
SW-846, Method 8080.
6.2.4 Handling Precautions-PCBs should only be handled
by trained personnel. Protective equipment should be worn
when handling PCBs, with particular attention to avoiding skin
and respiratory exposure. Work spaces should be well venti-
lated (3).
6.3 Refrigerants:
6.3.1 Description-Refrigerants present similar health and
environmental dangers and may be discussed as a group. Many
refrigerants are ozone-depleting substances. In general, refrig-
erants are relatively safe and stable gases, but may displace
oxygen to dangerously low levels when released into confined
spaces. Some refrigerants also may have acute toxic effects or
result in increased cardiac sensitization at high concentrations.
6.3.2 Uses-A number of chemicals are used as refrigerants
in shipboard air conditioning or refrigeration systems. Almost
all are halocarbons, with CFC 12 and HCFC 22 being the most
common of the traditional refrigerants. Concern for the ozone-
depleting potential of these substances has led to the introduc-
tion of another common refrigerant, HFC 134a.
6.3.3 Test Methods-Identification of materials typically
will not require testing. A quick review of system technical
manuals should reveal the refrigerant used in the system, and
any bottles containing refrigerant gas should be labeled.
6.3.4 Handling Precautions-Work on air conditioning and
refrigeration systems should be performed only by qualified
personnel. Refrigerants should not be intentionally released to
the atmosphere. Refrigerants present in air conditioning or
refrigeration equipment should be recovered and recycled
(refrigerants typically have a high resale or recycling value), as
described in ASHRAE Guideline 3. If accidental release
occurs, personnel should leave the area and avoid inhaling
vapors. Personnel requiring emergency medical attention fol-
lowing inhalation of refrigerants should not be given cat-
echolamine drugs, such as epinephrine, because of the potential
for increased cardiac sensitization. As a result of possible toxic
by-products of combustion, refrigerants should be kept away
from open flame. Smoking should not be allowed in areas in
which refrigerants may leak to the atmosphere.
6.4 Used or Waste Oils:
6.4.1 Description-Waste oils include a variety of oil prod-
ucts that have been contaminated through use or storage to the
point at which they can no longer be used for their intended
purpose. Many used oils can be recycled. This category does
not include water contaminated with small amounts of oil,
which is addressed in 6. 7.
6.4.2 Uses-The primary sources of shipboard used or
waste oils are from hydraulic systems, engine room machinery,
lubricating systems, and fuel systems.
6.4.3 Test Methods-Tests for halogen content and flash
point are the most common, but test procedures will vary
depending on the intended disposal method and suspected
contaminants.
1252
6.4.4 Handling Precautions-Recycling may include pro-
cesses, such as reclamation, burning for energy recovery,
reprocessing, or re-refining. The recycling potential of a used
oil product win be dependent on the quantity of contaminants
present. Contaminants may include arsenic, cadmium, chro-
mium, lead, PCBs, sulfur, hydrogen sulfide, or halogens
(chlorine, fluorine, and bromine). Unusually low flash points
also may limit recycling potential, as will the presence of
dispersants or emulsifying agents. Table summarizes poten-
tial recycling problems associated with a variety of common oil
products.
6.5 Paint Products:
6.5.1 Description-Paint often contains toxic constituents.
Intact paint typically poses little risk, but exposure to toxic
materials may occur during spraying, sanding, grinding, burn-
ing, or abrasive blasting procedures with paints containing
even trace amounts of toxic chemicals. Potential toxic constitu-
ents in paint include fluoride salts and compounds of heavy
metals. Toxic organic compounds such as benzene and toluene
may be present in paint solvents. Toxic constituents are a
concern because of the need to protect those applying or
disturbing paint and because of disposal concerns associated
with paint chips and contaminated blast grit. Paint found on
older ships is of particular concern, as many layers of paint
may be found in a single location.
6.5.2 Uses-Not applicable.
6.5.3 Test Methods-Old paint, applied to surfaces, may
require analysis to determine toxic content before disturbing it.
6.5.3.1 Sampling-Care should be taken to ensure that
samples are representative of the material being sampled. A
representative sample should include all layers of paint.
6.5.3.2 Analysis(5)-While laboratory methods can deter-
mine the total quantity of toxic constituents in the paint, the
capacity for the toxic constituents to leach out into the
surrounding environment may be determined using the Toxic-
ity Characteristic Leachate Procedure, EPA SW-846, Method
1311.
TABLE 1 Potential Recycling Problems Associated with a Variety
of Common Oil Products
Product
Aviation fuels
Refrigeration lubricants
Tank slops (from tank cleaning)
Grease (from trap cleaning), sludges
Oily wastes: waste oil sludge, waste
fuel oil, waste lubricant
Synthetic oil
Potential Problems
low flash point, fire hazard
halogenated hydrocarbon
detergents/emulsifiers
will not dissolve
hazardous contaminants
incompatible with petroleum products
F1799 - 97 (2009)
6.5.4 Handling Precautions-Virtually all paint products
contain some toxic constituents. Even small amounts of toxic
materials present in paint coatings can result in some airborne
exposure during spraying, sanding, grinding, burning, or abra-
sive blasting procedures, so protective equipment, including
respirators and disposable clothing, should be used consistently
to minimize risk to personnel, and work areas should be
cleaned and well ventilated to remove any contaminated dust
or debris (6). Dust, debris, and other waste materials with a
high leachable toxic content may pose a long-term disposal
problem as a result of potential contamination of landfills and
groundwater near the disposal site.
6.6 Cleaning Products:
6.6.1 Description-Many cleaning products contain toxic
chemicals. In some cases, large doses of these chemicals would
be required for any adverse effect to human health, but some
exposure paths require only small quantities of a chemical.
Also, some cleaning products may interfere with the operation
of oily water separators or sewage treatment equipment. For
example, many detergents reduce the effectiveness of ship-
board oily water separators. Also, sewage treatment plants
using microbes to break down waste products can be damaged
by the use of even small quantities of toxic materials.
6.6.2 Uses-Household cleaners, industrial solvents, and
other cleaning products are found throughout most ships.
6.6.3 Test Methods-In most cases, cleaning products will
be labeled clearly, making analysis unnecessary.
6.6.4 Handling Precautions-Specific handling and dis-
posal instructions should be available through the manufac-
turer. Check for technical information, such as an MSDS.
6.7 Oily Water:
6.7.1 Description-Oily water is comprised primarily of oil
and water, typically less than 5 % oil, but may contain other
contaminants.
6.7.2 Uses-Sources for shipboard oily water include tank
cleaning wastes, dirty ballast water, and water collecting in
bilge spaces.
6.7.3 Test Methods-In some locations, tests are performed
to determine the disposal requirements for oily water. If the
oily water is suspected of containing solvents or other con-
taminants, the following tests are typically performed (others
may be required): flash point, lead, zinc, tin, mercury, and
carcinogenic materials.
6.7.4 Handling Precautions-The separation of a pure oil/
water mixture is a relatively simple process, resulting in water
of a high enough quality to be reintroduced into the environ-
ment in some locations and oil of a high enough quality to be
burned for energy recovery. The presence of lead, mercury, or
other toxic contaminants in the mixture may restrict disposal
options, and the presence of emulsifying agents or detergents
in the mixture may impair the separation process.
6.8 Soiled Rags:
6.8.1 Description-Rags used to clean any surface contami-
nated with oils, greases, solvents, or paints. Soiled rags are
most often generated in machinery rooms, but also may be
generated during maintenance on deck gear or in habitability
areas.
1253
6.8.3 Test Methods-Not applicable.
6.8.4 Handling Precautions-Soiled rags should be bundled
and carefully stored for disposal ashore. Rags soaked with oils,
solvents, or paints may be highly flammable and have been
known to combust spontaneously. Soiled rags should be stored
in sealed containers in well-ventilated spaces and kept away
from flame and high temperatures to minimize risk of fire.
6.9 Chemically Treated Water:
6.9.1 Description-Chemicals are often added to alter the
water quality. These may include deoxidizing agents, such as
hydrazine or sodium sulfate, added to minimize corrosion.
Water also is treated with chemicals, such as lime, to reduce
water hardness and prevent fouling. Ethylene glycol often is
added to prevent water from freezing.
6.9.2 Uses-Most chemically treated water is found in
boilers, condensers, and jacket water-cooling systems. Semi-
permanent ballast water may also contain chemical additives.
6.9.3 Test Methods-Inspection of maintenance records
should reveal chemical treatments used on the ship, eliminating
the need for testing under most circumstances.
6.9.4 Handling Precautions-Options for discharge or dis-
posal of chemically treated water may be restricted based on
local discharge regulations or agreements. A high concentra-
tion of dissolved chemicals in the water may limit disposal
options, as municipal water systems, which often eventually
receive chemically treated water, typically prohibit certain
contaminants. Table 2 and Table 3 provide additional informa-
tion on common contaminants and their effect on water
systems.
6.10 Firefighting Agents:
6.1 0.1 Description-Firefighting agents can be one of two
general types. Streaming agents typically are handheld units
used to direct the material at a fire source and usually are found
in small canisters located throughout the ship. Flooding agents
are typically installed systems designed to provide a large
quantity of material throughout an area in which a fire is
occurring and usually are found in large quantities in a central
location with piping systems carrying the agent to distribution
points.
6.10.2 Uses-Water, Halons, foaming agents, powders, and
carbon dioxide are common firefighting agents.
6.1 0.3 Test Methods-In most cases, firefighting agents will
be labeled clearly making analysis unnecessary.
TABLE 2 Contaminants That May limit Disposal Options
Item
Chlorine, surfactant, chloride, sulfate,
antimony, arsenic, beryllium, tin,
formaldehyde, organic solvents, strong
oxidizing agents (including acids, bleaches,
and stripping and cleaning materials),
strong reducing agents (ammonia)
Thallium, cyanide, cadmium, chromium,
copper, lead, mercury, nickel, selenium,
silver, zinc, radioactivity
Temperature, pH
Oil and grease
Effect
may adversely affect sewage
treatment plant operation
may pass through sewage
treatment process
increases corrosion rate in
sewage system
may clog system or interfere with
treatment process
F1799 - 97 (2009)
TABLE 3 Common Prohibited Inputs to Sewage Systems
Gasoline, fuel oil, and other flammable or explosive materials
Toxic, noxious, or poisonous materials
Ashes, cinders, sand, mud, glass, paper, rags, string, metals, plastics, feathers,
or other materials likely to obstruct flow
6.10.4 Handling Precautions-Cylinders of compressed gas
should be handled gently, particularly if age or contents are
unknown. Halons are ozone-depleting substances and should
not be released to the atmosphere except in firefighting
situations. Many firefighting agents are toxic, and direct
contact with skin or through inhalation should be avoided.
Specific handling and disposal instructions should be available
through the manufacturer or distributor of the agent.
6.11 Unknown Material:
6.11.1 Description-Unlabeled containers of potentially
hazardous material may be found. Identification of such
containers through chemical analysis is costly, but necessary to
ensure safe handling and disposal.
6.11. 3 Test Methods-The Toxicity Characteristic Leachate
Procedure, EPA SW-846, Methods 1311 with the Method 8270
(Semi-Volatiles List) and Method 8260 (Volatiles List) may be
used to identify hazardous constituents. Laboratory analysis
should provide tentatively identified compounds (TIC) for any
hazardous constituents identified. In some instances, tests for
various heavy metals also may be appropriate.
6.11.4 Handling Precautions-Unknown material should be
handled with extreme care and only by trained personnel
wearing appropriate personal protective equipment. Contents
of unlabeled containers should never be mixed. Smoking,
eating, or drinking in the vicinity of unknown, but potentially
hazardous, material should be avoided. Disposal alternatives
will vary depending on the result of chemical analysis.
7. Documentation
7.1 Audit Report:
7 .1.1 Summary-A summary section briefly describing the
audit objectives and any notable conclusions that have been
drawn from the audit.
7 .1.2 Auditing Personnel-A complete list of auditing per-
sonnel, their accreditation and their affiliation to the vessel
being audited.
7.1.3 Objectives-A description of the specific objectives
and goals for the audit.
7 .1.4 Target Shipboard-Generated Wastes-A list of target
materials that will be included in the audit.
7 .1.5 Test Methods-A specific description or reference to
test methods used to identify the presence of target materials.
7 .1.6 Results-A summary of the test results arranged in a
clear and concise format.
7.1.7 Conclusions-A summary of target materials identi-
fied, handling and disposal options available, and a description
of unanswered questions or concerns arising from the audit.
7.1.8 Appendices-May contain laboratory reports or other
information supplementing the report described previously.
7.2 Record Retention-Audit reports and other supporting
information should be retained in a central file as technical
documentation for the ship. Supporting documents may be
retained with audit reports to streamline the planning process
for future audits.
8. Keywords
8.1 audit; hazardous material; hazardous waste; shipboard-
generated wastes; ships; waste
REFERENCES
(1) Pohanish, R.P., and Greene, S.A., Hazardous Substances Resource
Guide, Gale Research Inc., Detroit, 1993.
(2) 40 CFR 763.86-87, Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools, Sam-
pling and Analysis, 1994.
(3) The Forum for Scientific Excellence, Inc., Compendium of Hazardous
Chemicals in Schools and Colleges, J.B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia,
1990.
(4) Freeman, H.M., Standard Handbook of Hazardous Waste Treatment
and Disposal, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1988.
Bauer, M., "Is There Such a Thing as Lead-Free Paint?," Pb, SSPC's
Lead Paint Bulletin, Fall 1993.
(6) U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Occupational Safety
and Health Guideline for Inorganic Lead, National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, Division of Standards Development
and Technology Transfer, 1988.
1254
F1799 - 97 {2009)
If not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either tor revision of this standard or for additional standards
COPYRIGHT/).
1255
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Weight Control Technical Requirements for Surface Ships
1
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department qf Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides recommended weight control tech-
nical requirements for surface ships and discusses different
types of weight estimates, reports, and weight control proce-
dures. It contains a weight classification that will assist in
achieving uniformity by standardizing the weight-reporting
system.
1.2 This guide is applicable to ships designed and con-
structed in inch-pound units of measurement and to ships
designed and constructed in SI units of measurement. When-
ever inch-pound units are shown or referred to in the text, or in
example formats included in this guide, it is to be understood
that corresponding SI units may be substituted if applicable to
a ship designed and constructed in SI units, provided that
whichever system is used, it is consistently used in all weight
control reporting documentation for the ship.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F1321 Guide for Conducting a Stability Test (Lightweight
Survey and Inclining Experiment) to Determine the Light
Ship Displacement and Centers of Gravity of a Vessel
Fl332 Practice for Use of SI (Metric) Units in Maritime
Applications (Committee F25 Supplement to IEEE/
ASTM SI 10)
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 agreed weight and center of gravity estimate, n-an
estimate of light ship weight and centers of gravity data,
mutually agreed upon between the owner and the shipbuilder
shortly after award of the shipbuilding contract, based on the
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee on Ships and
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee on
in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as Fl808-03. DOl: 10.1520/
Fl808-03R08.
2
the ASTM website.
ship design information, for example, specifications, drawings,
and so forth, available at the time of award.
3.1.2 as-built weight and center of gravity estimate, n-a
detailed final estimate of light ship weight and centers of
gravity data, adjusted for inclining experiment results, reflect-
ing the as-built ship including the net effect of contract
modifications.
3.1.3 center of gravity, n-the point through which the
resultant of all gravitational forces on a ship or a component
passes. The location, a balance point, at which the entire weight
of a ship may be considered to be concentrated.
3.1.4 deadweight, n-the total carrying capacity of a ship
including weight of cargo, fuel, lubricating oil, fresh water in
tanks, stores, passengers and baggage, and crew and their
effects.
3.1.5 inclining experiment, n-a procedure performed on a
completed, or almost completed, ship to establish experimen-
tally the light ship values of the displacement and the vertical,
longitudinal, and transverse positions of its center of gravity
(see Guide F1321 for detailed procedures).
3.1.6 independent weight and center of gravity estimate,
n-the estimate of light ship weight and centers of gravity
performed by the shipbuilder shortly after award of the
shipbuilding contract based on the ship design information
available at the time of award. When compared with the
owner's estimate and upon resolution of differences, an agreed
upon weight and center of gravity estimate will result.
3.1.7 light ship weight, n-the weight of the ship with all its
equipment and outfit, including permanent (fixed) solid or
liquid ballast, spare parts that are carried on board, water in
boilers at operating levels, machinery including Marine Sani-
tation Device units in working condition, lubricating oil in all
machinery, but not in storage tanks, and liquids in all piping
systems.
3.1.8 longitudinal center of gravity (LCG), n-the point
through which the gravitational forces on a ship pass, measured
longitudinally from amidships, measured from the forward
perpendicular, or in some cases, measured from the aft perpen-
dicular.
1256
4}tf F1808 - 03 (2008)
3.1.9 transverse center of gravity (TCG), n- the point
through which the gravitational forces on a ship pass, measured
transversely, port or starboard, from the ship's centerline.
3.1.10 vertical center of gravity (KG or VCG), n-the point
through which the gravitational forces on a ship pass measured
vertically from the keel (K) or the ship's baseline.
3.1.11 weigh; to weigh, v-as commonly understood in
everyday usage and in the maritime industry, and as used
throughout this guide, means to determine by measuring the
mass of.
3.1.12 weight, n-as commonly understood in everyday
usage and in the maritime industry, and as used throughout this
guide, is synonymous with mass. In this guide, weight in
inch-pound units is measured in pounds and in long tons of
2240 lbs; and in SI units (metric), weight is measured in
kilograms and in metric tons of 100 kg. Refer to Practice
for conversion factors to convert inch-pound quantities
to SI (metric) quantities for units of weight, moment, moments
to trim, and so forth.
3.1.13 weight classification, n-the system used in light ship
weight estimating for grouping materials, equipment, or com-
ponents of the ship in a structured order to facilitate compari-
son and to ensure completeness.
3.1.14 weight group, n-one of the three major elements of
light ship weight as used in the weight classification, that is,
hull structure, outfit, and machinery.
4. Summary of Guide
4.1 Determination of Weight and Moment Data-The
weight and moment data for all components and material and
their overall effect on the ship's weight, center of gravity, list,
and trim should be determined. As ship design or ship
construction drawings are prepared and as material is selected,
acquired, or received, the weight and centers of gravity of all
items that comprise the ship should be determined and reported
in the weight estimates and reports. These data may be
obtained by estimation or calculation during preliminary and
contract design, by a combination of estimation or calculation
of ship construction drawings, and by actual weight determi-
nation of items during detail design and construction.
4.2 Weight Reporting and Control -The procedures for
weight reporting and control, regardless of the level of report-
ing, are described in Section 6 and apply for commercial ships.
The method and frequency of weight reporting can vary
depending on the specific ship design, as well as the technical
requirements set forth in the contract. The extent and level of
w i ~ h t control also can vary depending on the specific ship
design. Although the weight control technical requirements for
commercial ships usually are less demanding than those for
U.S. Navy surface ships, the need for a mechanism to control
the weight of a ship still exists. Sections S 1 S4 describe the
specific weight control technical requirements for U.S. Navy
surface ships.
5.1 It is important to know the amount of weight and its
location before the ship is built to be sure that when it is built
1257
it will have positive stability. Only through detailed weight
estimating in the design stage and during construction can one
be ensured that positive stability will be achieved and retained.
6. Procedure
6.1 A specified number of calendar days, that is, 30, 45, 60,
or 90 after date of award, as specified by the owner, the
shipbuilder should submit for agreement an independent
weight and center of gravity estimate. This estimate should
describe the weight and centers of gravity of the ship in
comprehensive detail and should include summaries and work
sheets showing the detailed work performed, for example,
calculations and estimates based on the design information,
drawings, specification, and so forth. X 1 contains
suggested forms for the independent estimate, and it includes a
suggested weight classification system for the estimate. Terms
used in the weight classification are defined in the Maritime
Administration Publication, Classification of Merchant Ship
Weights.
6.2 A mutual agreement between the shipbuilder and the
owner on the light ship weight and centers of gravity should be
reached as quickly as possible after award of the shipbuilding
contract. Agreement action should consist of a review of
shipbuilder's independent weight and center of gravity esti-
mates and comparison with the owner's estimate. Upon reso-
lution of differences, an agreed upon weight and center of
gravity estimate will result. Thereafter, the shipbuilder should
be responsible for obtaining in the completed vessel the agreed
upon weight and center of gravity characteristics adjusted for
authorized departures from the contracted ship design, re-
flected in the agreed upon estimate.
6.3 Departures from the contracted ship design, reflected in
the agreed upon estimate, which affect the light ship weight
and centers of gravity, should not be undertaken until the
shipbuilder has submitted to the owner his estimate of the
effect on weight and centers of gravity of the ship and obtained
written approval to proceed with the department. Departures,
which have a total impact on any weight group of less than a
specified percentage, that is, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, or 0.04% of the
light ship weight, may be considered negligible and will not
require written approval with respect to weight.
6.4 The shipbuilder should submit periodically, as agreed
upon, to the owner, a tabulation of approved departures and
their cumulative effect on weight and centers of gravity of the
agreed light ship estimate. In addition, when submitting plans
that involve departures from the type of construction in the
contracted ship design, reflected in the estimate, the shipbuilder
should itemize such departures and their effect on light ship
weight and centers of gravity in his periodic reports. A final
report should be submitted at the time of delivery adjusted to
bring the estimated light ship weight and centers of gravity into
reasonable agreement with the inclining experiment results.
3
U.S. Department of Transportation, Maritime Administration Classification of
Merchant Ship Weights, January 1985. Available from the U.S. Maritime Admin-
istration, Office of Ship Construction, MAR 720, 400 Seventh St., SW, Washington,
DC 20590.
F1808 - 03 (2008)
7. Keywords
7.1 light ship; ship acquisition; weight control; weight
estimate; weight report
contract or purchase order. These requirements normally are invoked for U.S. Navy Surface Ships.
Sl. SPECIAL GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS
S 1.1 Government Documents, Drawings, and Publications
-The following government documents, drawings, and pub-
lications form a part of this guide to the extent specified herein.
Unless otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the
solicitation.
Sl.l.l Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA) Docu-
ments:
0900-LP-039-9020 Ship Work Breakdown Structure for
Nuclear Propulsion Plant (U)
4
S9040-AA-IDX-010/SWBS 5D, Expanded Ship Work
Breakdown Structure, Vol I
5
S9040-AA-IDX-020/SWBS 5D, Expanded Ship Work
Breakdown Structure, Vol U
5
S 1.2 Nongovernment Publications-The following docu-
ment(s) form a part of this guide to the extent specified herein.
Unless otherwise specified, the issues of the documents, which
are DOD adopted, are those listed in the issue of the Depart-
ment of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards
(DODISS) cited in the solicitation. Unless otherwise specified,
the issues of documents not listed in the DODISS are the issues
of the documents cited in the solicitation (see S4.1 ).
Sl.2.1 ANSI Document:
6
X3.4 Code for Information Interchange
NoTE Sl-Nongovernment standards and other publications normally
are available from the organizations that prepare or distribute the
documents. These documents also may be available in or through libraries
or other informational services.
S 1.3 Order of Precedence-In the event of a conflict
between the text of this guide and the references cited herein,
the text of this guide takes precedence. Nothing in this guide,
however, supersedes applicable laws and regulations unless a
specific exemption has been obtained.
S2. TERMINOLOGY
S2.1 accepted ship report (ASR), n-the ASR is the
document that demonstrates the contractor's performance with
regard to weight control. The ASR highlights the differences
between the accepted weight estimate (AWE) or the allocated
baseline weight estimate (ABWE) and the delivered ship as
inclined.
4
Available from the Navy Ships Parts Control Center (SPCC), Code 709
Mechanicsburg, PA 17055.
5
Available from Naval Sea Logistics Center, Code 623, PO Box 2060,
Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-{)795.
6
S2.2 accepted weight estimate (AWE), n-the AWE defines
the weight and centers of gravity of a ship that was awarded
under a specification-type contract using the information that
was available at the time of contract award. It establishes
contractual values for weight and KG and is the baseline for
detail design and construction.
S2.3 acquisition margins, n-acquisition margins are
weight and KG allowances included in the weight estimate to
cover the inherent limits of precision and the undefined
variations of component weight and centers of gravity that take
place throughout the design phases and during the construction
of a ship. To provide for adequate weight control and configu-
ration control, acquisition margins are divided into five ac-
counts: preliminary design margin, contract design margin,
detail design and building margin, contract modification mar-
gin, and government-furnished material (GFM) margin.
S2.4 actual weight, n-actual weight is the value obtained
by a measurement of material on an accurate scale or other
weighing device.
S2.5 allocated baseline weight estimate (ABWE), n-the
ABWE is the contractor's definition of the weight and centers
of gravity of a ship that was awarded under a performance-type
contract at the time of hull and propulsion configuration
approval. It is the baseline for detail design and construction.
S2.6 baseline weight estimate (BWE), n-the BWE is any
designated weight estimate that is used as a starting point in a
design phase for comparative analysis with subsequent weight
estimates. Before contract award, the final estimate of each
design phase is usually the baseline estimate for the succeeding
phase. After contract award, the AWE or ABWE usually is the
baseline estimate for the remainder of detail design and
construction.
S2.7 bidder's independent weight estimate (BIWE), n-the
bidder's (or offeror's) independent weight estimate is prepared
by each potential contractor in response to a solicitation. It is
the bidder's evaluation of the ship design based on the ship
specifications, drawings, and data that comprise the contract
package.
1258
S2.8 calculated weight, n-calculated weight is weight
computed from ship construction drawings and vendor draw-
ings.
S2.9 capacity load condition (Condition E), n-the capacity
load condition is the ship complete and ready for service in
every respect. It is light ship (Condition A) plus the following
variable loads: maximum number of officers, crew, and pas-
sengers that can be accommodated and their effects; maximum
stowage of ammunition in magazines and ready service spaces;
0 F1808- 03 (2008)
full allowance of aircraft and vehicles (fully fueled with full
allowance of repair parts and stores); maximum amount of
provisions and stores that can be carried in the assigned spaces;
and maximum capacity of liquids in tanks. Fuel and lube oil
shall be not greater than 95 % of tank capacity, unless such
tanks are compensating. Compensating tanks shall be consid-
ered filled with 95 % fuel and 5 % salt water. Maximum
amounts of cargo and supplies, other than for ship's own use,
shall be included to the full capacity of the assigned spaces.
This load condition shall be not greater than the limiting drafts.
S2.10 category, n--category is a fundamental unit of ma-
chinery weight classification for nuclear-propelled ships in
accordance with NAVSEA 0900-LP-039-9020.
S2.11 category system, n--category system is a system of
machinery weight classification for nuclear-propelled ships in
accordance with NAVSEA 0900-LP-039-9020.
S2.12 contract data requirements list (CDRL) (DD Form
1423), n-a CDRL is a contract form all data items
selected from an authorized data list to be delivered under the
contract. It includes the format, content, frequency, submittal,
and distribution requirements.
S2.13 contract design margin, n-the contract design mar-
gin is a weight and KG allowance included in the weight
estimate to account for increases associated with design
development during the contract design phase. This margin is
included in the feasibility and preliminary design phases. No
portion of this margin is consumed before the start of contract
design.
S2.14 contract design weight estimates (CDWE), n-the
CDWE is the weight estimate of the light ship, full load, and
any other specified loading condition prepared during the
contract design phase.
S2.15 contract modification margin, n-the contract modi-
fication margin is a weight and KG allowance included in the
weight estimates and reports to account for increases associ-
ated with contract modifications issued during the detail design
and construction phase. This margin is included in the feasi-
bility, preliminary, and contract design phases. For
performance-type contracts, this margin is also included in
detail design and building phase. No portion of this margin is
consumed before award of the detail design and construction
contract.
S2.16 contract modification summary, n-the contract
modification summary is a complete listing of the weight and
moment effects of approved contract changes. This information
is included as an appendix to the quarterly weight reports, the
accepted ship report, and the final weight report.
S2.17 contractor-responsible condition, n-the contractor-
responsible condition is the full-load condition without the
effects of contract modifications, changes in GFM, and other
allowable changes after the establishment of the AWE or
ABWE. This condition is used to measure the contractor's
progress in achieving his requirement to deliver the ship within
contractual values (see S3.3.4.6).
S2.18 current weight, n--current weight consists of the
most accurate data available on the date of a given weight
estimate or report. The summary of current weight is fre-
quently a combination of estimated, calculated, and actual
values.
S2.19 design and weight data sheet, n-the design and
weight data sheet is a one-page summary that includes group
level weight data, hull characteristics data, displacement, and
stability characteristics data, load data, and machinery data.
S2.20 detail design and building margin, n-detail design
and building margin is a weight and KG allowance included in
the estimates and reports to account for design changes
as a result of ship construction drawing development; growth
of contractor-furnished material; omissions and errors in the
AWE or ABWE, as well as differing shipbuilding practices,
omissions and errors in the ship construction un-
known mill tolerances; outfitting details; variations between
the actual ship and its curves of form; and similar differences.
This margin is to compensate for all contractor-responsible
differences between the AWE or ABWE and the results of the
inclining experiment, as well as tolerances for experimental
variation in the inclining experiment. This and KG
allowance is budgeted and included in the feasibility, prelimi-
nary, and contract design phases, but no portion of this margin
is to be consumed before award of the detail design and
construction contract. Values for these margins are to be
selected by the offeror and included along with rationale for
their basis in BIWEs or PABWEs. The final margin allowances
are then subject to negotiation between the government and the
contractor that was selected for detail design and construction.
The design and building weight margin shall be located at the
same center of gravity as the summation of weight groups one
through seven.
S2.21 electronic media, n--electronic media is used to
transfer detailed weight and moment data that complies with
the Navy standard weight estimate format and is used by
NAVSEA to prepare Navy weight estimates and reports (see
Annex A1).
S2.22 estimated weight, n--estimated weight is based on
preliminary data and is subject to revision when more accurate
information is available, such as when more detailed drawings
are developed or when components are actually weighed.
S2.23 expanded ship work breakdown structure ( ESWBS ),
n-ESWBS is a five-digit functional classification system in
accordance with NAVSEA S9040-AA-IDX-010/SWBS 5D and
S9040-AA-IDX-020/SWBS 5D (Vol I and II). For weight
reporting purposes, only the first three digits of this system
apply. The fourth and fifth single digit classification levels are
used to incorporate the functions that support maintenance and
repair needs.
1259
S2.24 feasibility study weight estimate, n-the feasibility
study weight estimate is a compilation of the ship's weight and
center of gravity data that result in light ship, full load, and any
cO F1808 - 03 (2008)
other specified loading conditions. This estimate is prepared
during the feasibility study design phase.
S2.25 final weight report (FWR), n-a FWR is a detailed
final report of weight and moment data for all required loading
conditions. This report accurately reflects accumulated values
for estimated, calculated, and actual weight data for the detail
design, including the net effect of changes to GFM and
adjudicated and unadjudicated contract modifications.
S2.26 full load condition (Condition D), n-the full-load
condition is the ship complete and ready for service in every
respect. It is light ship (Condition A), plus the following
variable loads: authorized complement of officers, crew, and
passengers and their effects; full allowances of ammunition in
magazines and ready service spaces; full allowance of aircraft
and vehicles (fully fueled with full allowance of repair parts
and stores); full supply of provisions and stores for the periods
specified in the design characteristics; full potable water tanks;
lube oil tanks to 95 % of capacity; fuel tanks to 95 % capacity,
or in the case of compensating tanks, 95 % fuel and 5 % salt
water; sewage collecting, holding, and transfer tanks to 25 %
capacity; anti-roll tanks to operating levels; and all other
liquids in tanks to required capacity in accordance with
characteristics and liquid-loading instructions. The ammuni-
tion, stores, fuel, and other liquids referred to previously are for
the ship's own use. Cargo (liquid and solid) is included in the
amounts normally carried or to the specified portion of the full
capacity of the assigned spaces.
S2.27 government-furnished material (GFM) margin,
n--the GFM margin is a weight and KG allowance included in
the weight estimates and reports to account for increases
caused by the growth in GFM during the detail design and
construction phase. This margin is included in the feasibility,
preliminary, and contract design phases. For performance-type
contracts, this margin is also included in detail design and
building phase. No portion of this margin is consumed before
award of the detail design and construction contract.
S2.28 government-furnished material summary, n-the
GFM summary is a complete listing of weight and center of
gravity data for material and equipment that will be provided
by the government. The baseline GFM summary, which is
included as part of the A WE or ABWE, reflects the Schedule A
portion of the contract at the time of contract award. The GFM
summary is continuously updated as the detail design weight
estimates mature and the Schedule A is modified. Also, where
the contract permits, the GFM summary can include other
government-responsible equipment, such as equipment desig-
nated as standard for the class, directed procurement, and so
forth.
S2.29 group, n--group is a fundamental unit of ship clas-
sification, identified by one numeric digit or an alphabetic
designator. For weight estimates and reports, a group is the first
character of the three-digit system. The summation of weights
and moments for all of the three-digit elements that begin with
the number one is the total for Group one, and similarly for the
other groups.
S2.30 gyradius, n-the gyradius for roll, pitch, or yaw is the
square root of the quotient of the ship's weight moment of
inertia about the roll, pitch, and yaw axes, respectively, divided
by the ship's displacement.
S2.31 inch-pound units, n-inch-pound units comprise a
system of units using pounds, long tons, ft, ft-lbs, and ft-tons
for reporting mass properties data. These weight and moment
data are carried to the nearest pound and ft-lb at all detail
levels. In addition, summaries are converted and reported to the
nearest one-hundredth of a long ton and to the nearest ft-ton.
All levers are carried to the nearest one-hundredth of a foot.
S2.32 KG, n-KG is defined as the height of the ship's
vertical center of gravity as measured from the bottom of the
keel (includes keel thickness). When using SI units, care must
be taken not to confuse the naval architectural symbol KG, in
uppercase letters, with the SI symbol, kg, in lowercase letters
(which represents the SI unit kilogram).
S2.33 light ship condition (Condition A), n--the light ship
condition is the ship complete, ready for service in every
respect, including permanent solid and liquid ballast, onboard
parts, and liquids in machinery at operating levels,
without any items of variable load.
S2.34 longitudinal lever, n-the longitudinal lever is the
perpendicular distance from a transverse plane through the
ship's longitudinal reference to the center of gravity of an item.
The longitudinal reference is located at the forward perpen-
dicular, unless otherwise specified by the design contract or
Ship Specification Section 096.
S2.35 mass properties data, n-mass properties data are
those physical characteristics that define the magnitude, loca-
tion, and distribution of weight in the ship. They include
weight, centers of gravity location, moments, and weight
moments of inertia.
S2.36 metric units, n-metric units comprise a system of
basic measures that are defined by the International System of
Units based on "Le Systeme International d'Unites (SI)" of the
International Bureau of Weights and Measures.
S2.37 moment, n-a moment is the product of a weight and
its lever. For example, the longitudinal moment of an item is
the product of the weight of the item multiplied by its
longitudinal lever.
S2.38 percent completion, n-percent completion is the
ratio of the current weight, less the current estimated weight, to
the current weight, expressed as a percentage.
S2.39 performance-type contract, n-a performance-type
contract is the vehicle for ship acquisition resulting from a
description of operational and mission requirements. Since the
shipbuilder usually has substantial latitude in determining ship
size and configuration, a PABWE or ABWE is used in this
situation.
1260
S2.40 pitch moment of inertia, n-moment of inertia about
the transverse axis through the ship's center of gravity.
S2.41 preliminary allocated baseline weight estimate
(PABWE), n-the PABWE is the potential bidder's (or offer-
or's) estimate of the weight and center of gravity of the ship in
response to a solicitation for a performance-type contract.
F1808 - 03 (2008)
S2.42 preliminary design margin, n-preliminary design
margin is a weight and KG allowance included in the weight
estimates to account for increases associated with design
development during the preliminary design phase. This margin
is included in the feasibility design phase. No portion of this
margin is consumed before the start of preliminary design.
S2.43 preliminary design weight estimate, n-preliminary
design weight estimate is the weight estimate of the light ship,
full load, and any other specified load condition prepared
during the preliminary design phase.
S2.44 quarterly weight report ( QWR), n-a QWR is a
periodic assessment of displacement, drafts, trim, list, GM, and
KG as the weight estimate matures during detail design and
construction.
S2.45 roll moment of inertia, n-moment of inertia about
the longitudinal axis through the ship's center of gravity.
S2.46 service life allowances, n-service life allowances
are weight and KG budgets included in the design to accom-
modate changes as a result of both authorized (for example,
ship alterations) and unplanned growth (for example, paint,
personal belongings, and so forth) during the ship's operational
lifetime, which tends to increase displacement and impact
stability.
S2.47 SI units (International System of Units), n-SI units
(see Practice F1332) comprise a system of units using kilo-
grams (kg), metric tons, metres (m), kg/m, and metric ton-m
for reporting mass properties data. All levers are carried to the
nearest one-hundredth of am. The weight and moment data are
carried to the nearest kg and kg/m at all detail levels. In
addition, summaries are converted and reported to the nearest
one-hundredth of a metric ton and to the nearest metric ton-m.
S2.48 specification-type contract, n-a specification-type
contract is the vehicle for ship acquisition resulting from a
Navy controlled contract design. The products of the contract
design, which usually become part of the shipbuilding contract
and therefore the basis for the BIWE, include items such as:
midship section drawing, lines drawing, table of offsets,
general arrangement drawings, the shipbuilding specifications,
and special requirements like not-to-exceed weight and KG
values.
S2.49 standard longitudinal station breakdown, n-the
standard longitudinal station breakdown is a system consisting
of 22 stations designated by the letters A through X (excluding
l and 0). Station A is the only station forward of the forward
perpendicular (FP). Station X is the only station aft of the aft
perpendicular (AP). Stations B through W extend from the FP
to the AP, and each comprises 1f2o of the length between
perpendiculars.
S2.50 three-digit system, n-The three-digit system is a
means of classifying mass properties data in a structured order.
Every item that comprises the completed ship is included in the
weight estimates and reports grouped in accordance with the
three-digit system. Unless otherwise specified, the three-digit
system for weight estimates and reports is the same as the first
three digits of the ESWBS. An example of this numerical
ordering is shown in
1261
S2.51 transverse lever, n-transverse lever is the perpen-
dicular distance from the vertical centerline plane of the ship to
the center of gravity of an item.
S2.52 vertical lever, n-vertical lever is the perpendicular
distance from a horizontal plane through the molded baseline
of the ship to the center of gravity of an item.
S2.53 weight control, n-weight control is all of the
necessary actions, such as predicting, estimating, calculating,
weighing, reporting, analyzing, evaluating, and reversing ad-
verse trends to ensure that a ship's weight and moments are
consistent with its naval architectural limits for displacement,
strength, stability, list, trim, and performance, such as speed,
endurance, and seakeeping.
S2.54 weight control plan, n-a weight control plan out-
lines the procedures that will be followed to meet contractual
weight control responsibilities (see S3.3.3.5).
S2.55 weight distribution, n-a weight distribution is a
weight summary by the standard longitudinal station break-
down and is used to develop shear forces and bending
moments.
S2.56 weight moment of inertia, n-weight moment of
inertia about any reference axis through the ship's center of
gravity is the summation of the moment of inertia of each item
about its own axis (parallel to the reference inertia axis), plus
the products obtained by multiplying the weight of each item
by the square of its distance from the reference inertia axis (see
S3.3.2.3).
S2.57 weight reporting, n-weight reporting is the prepara-
tion and submission of the most accurate and current weight
and moment data available at designated intervals throughout
the design and construction phases.
S2.58 yaw moment of inertia, n-moment of inertia about
the vertical axis through the ship's center of gravity.
S3. PROCEDURES
S3.1 General Report Requirements-The contract will
invoke this guide and specify technical data to be prepared,
including modifications and exceptions. The CDRL will
specify requirements for deliverables, such as data to be
submitted, frequency of submission, number of copies, and
recipients. The general requirements for the weight estimates
and reports listed in this standard are specified in S3.1.1
through S3.2. The interface of weight estimates and reports is
depicted in S3.l.
S3.1.1 Loading Conditions -Weight estimates and reports
shall contain loading conditions for light ship, full load, and
contractor responsibility, unless otherwise specified by the
contract. The light ship condition includes a summary of
one-digit groups and the remaining acquisition margin. These
values are combined to result in the light ship weight, centers
of gravity, and associated moments. The light ship condition in
the FWR shall be adjusted to correlate with inclining experi-
ment data. Building margin is used to account for irreconcil-
able differences between the FWR and the inclining experi-
ment. Building margin is the only acquisition margin account
that is permitted in the FWR. Other margin accounts, such as
detail design margin, will either be fully depleted or if
remainders exist they should be deleted from the FWR. The
F1808 - 03 (2008)
UNCLASS I F I ED
SHIP USS SAMPLE
PREPARED BY 551.12
s
WEIGHT AND MOMENT ESTIMATE REPORT NO. 01
3 JANUARY 1989
INCH-POUND UNITS POUNDS, TONS, FEET
LONGITUDINAl REFERENCE IS -250.00 FROM MID PERPENDICULAR
E
SHEET 15
RCG R
NAVY C T OM UNIT NO. CURRENT C VERTICAL LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE EHF P
GROUP ITEM A DESCRIPTION WEIGHT UNITS WEIGHT A VCG MOMENT LCG S MOMENT TCG S MOMENT SGM T
311
ELECTRIC PLANT
SUBTOTAL-POUNDS
SUBTOTAL-TONS
SHIPS SERVICE POWER GENERATION
GROUP TOTAL- POUNDS
GROUP TOTAL- TONS
Note: Inch-pound units are shown
In example, however Sl units are
applicable when specified.
205186. 3472201. 56121920. -111889.
91.60 16.92 1550. 273.52A 25054. o.sss -so.
205186. 3472201. 56121920. -111889.
91.60 16.92 1550. 273.52A 25054. 0.55S 50.
UNCLASSIFIED
FIG. S2.1 Example of a Three-Digit System Format
full-load condition is computed by adding specified items of
variable load to the light ship condition and reflects the actual
ship that is planned for delivery. The contractor-responsible
condition is the full-load condition without the effect of
contract modifications, both adjudicated and unadjudicated; the
net weight change and associated moment changes from
baseline values of current GFM items that were included in the
original Schedule A or were subsequently added to Schedule A
through a change in acquisition responsibility; and other
allowable changes beyond the control of the contractor (see
S3.3.4.6). This condition is used to assess contractual perfor-
mance. In addition to the total weight, centers of gravity, and
associated moments, each loading condition also shall display
KG, metacentric height (uncorrected and corrected for the free
surface effect of liquids in tanks), list, trim, and drafts above
the bottom of the keel at the perpendiculars and midship. Figs.
S3.2-S3.4 provide examples of typical loading conditions.
S3.1.2 Margins-Acquisition margins shall be included in
the estimates and reports. Throughout the design cycle, the
appropriate margin account shall be adjusted concurrently to
compensate for departures from the original estimates. This
computation permits the maintenance of a constant design
baseline until the budgeted margin account is exceeded. Weight
margins shall be located at the same centers of gravity as the
ESWBS current one-digit totals. Fig. S3.5 provides a typical
example.
S3 .1.3 Reasons for Changes-Weight estimates and reports
shall include an addendum that explains each cause of signifi-
cant change in weight or moment within every three-digit
element. Unless otherwise specified, a significant change is a
1 % or greater difference from an element's previous estimate.
A brief narrative of the ship's condition relative to its naval
architectural or contractual limits shall be included in this
section. If any of these limits is in jeopardy, recommendations
for reversing the adverse trend are also required.
S3.1.4 Table of Contents-The estimates and reports shall
contain a table of contents.
S3.1.5 Special Coding-An explanatory note and remarks
section shall be included to define special coding symbols,
such as material codes, GFM indicators, and reasons for
change indicators.
S3.1.6 Lever Symbol-Vertical levers shall be indicated by
a"-" for below the baseline and a"+" or a blank for above the
baseline. Longitudinal levers shall be indicated by an "F" or a
"-"for forward of the reference plane and an "A," a"+," or a
blank for aft of the reference plane. Transverse levers shall be
indicated by a "P," a "+," or a blank for port and an "S" or a
"-" for starboard.
S3.1.7 Reporting System Units-Estimates, reports, and
other specified mass properties documentation and data shall
be reported in either inch-pound or metric units as specified in
the contract.
1262
F1808 - 03 (2008)
PREAWARD
----DESIGN DESIGN --1111+-- DETAIL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PHASE
I
I
I
:---,---
G
PROCESS
'-------'
--r:;;l--e
1"-1
SUPPlEMENTAl. DOCUMENTS (AS REQUIRED)
FIG. S3.1 Interface of Weight Reporting During Design and Construction
S3.1.8 Paper-Estimates and reports shall be machine writ-
ten on 8
1
/2- by ll-in. paper, and protected hard covers, but
not permanently bound. The original or reproducible copy shall
be suitable for microfilming.
S3.1.9 Supporting Documents-Background information,
studies, directives, correspondence, and all detail calculations
pertaining to weight and moment data, including density
factors, shall be made available to the Navy upon request.
S3.2 Classified Reports-Weight reports classi-
fied data shall be marked in accordance with the security
requirements contained in the contract. Whenever possible,
classified or proprietary material shall be downgraded by
deleting classified or proprietary portions that do not impair the
usefulness of the document.
S3.3 Detailed Requirements:
S3.3J Predetail Design Phase-Estimates, reports, and
documents for these phases shall be
in accordance with S3.3.1.1 S3.3.2.10, as
ao1Plll::at)Je, unless otherwise
S3.3. L 1 Estimates and estimates
and reports prepared these consist of baseline
estimates, interim reports, and final
estimates. These estimates and reports contain detailed infor-
mation to the phase, loading conditions for
light ship and full load, and are summarized in tabular form as
follows:
(a) system number and title.
1263
(b) Current weight.
(c) Current vertical lever.
(d) Current vertical moment.
(e) Current longitudinal lever.
(j) Current longitudinal moment.
(g) Current transverse lever.
(h) Current transverse moment
The mass properties data included in these estimates and
reports are based on the engineering products available before
the date of the document.
S3.3.1.2 Baseline Weight Estimates-The initial estimate
for a given design phase is designated the baseline weight
estimate. The baseline weight estimate consists of the
ship, full load, and any other specified loading condition. The
estimate shall be titled Baseline Preliminary or Baseline
Contract Design Weight Estimate. The requirements for the
estimate are as specified in S3.3.1.l.
S3.3.1.3 Interim Reports-Weight estimates produced at
intervals during a given design phase are designated
interim weight reports. The interim report summarizes the
current weight and moment status of the design and highlights
any changes that occurred during the reporting period. The
report shall contain the light ship, full load, and any other
specified loading condition. It also shall reflect the appropriate
title, such as Preliminary Design Interim Report No. 2.
cO F1808- 03 (2008)
UN CLASS l F I ED
SHIP USS SAMPLE
PREPARED BY 55W2
3 JANUARY 1989
INCH-POUND UNITS. POUNDS, TONS, FEET
LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE IS -250.00 FROM MID PERPENDICULAR SHEET 2M
NAVY
GROUP
PERCENT COMPLETE CURRENT VERTICAL LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
DESCRIPTION EST. CALC. ACTUAL WEIGHT VCG MOMENT LCG S MOMENT TCG S MOMENT
SUMMARY
LIGHTSHIP CONDITION WITH MARGINS
GROUPS 1 - 7
M MARGINS
LOADS
NOTE:
WEIGHT
VCG
1. LENGTH BETWEEN PERPENDICULARS
2. BOTTOM OF KEEL BELOW BASE liNE
3. C.G. ABOVE BOTTOM OF KEEL
4. C.G. ABOVE BASE LINE
5. DRAFT AT L.C.F. FOR ABOVE DISP.
6. TONS PER INCH IMMERSION
7. TRANSVERSE METACENTER (KEEL)
8. GM, WITHOUT FREE SURFACE CORR.
9. FREE SURFACE CORRECTION
10. GM, WITH FREE SURFACE CORR.
11 MOMENT TO AlTER HEEL ONE DEGREE
12. LIST
In example, however St unHs are
applicable When specified.
100
100
500.00 FEET
0.06 FEET
27.81 FEET
27.75 FEET
17.98 FEET
48.55 TONS/INCH
28.80 FEET
0.99 FEET
0.00 FEET
0.99 FEET
119.20 FOOT-TONS
0.97 DEGREES STBD
6608.29 26.68 176303. 229.34A 1515522. 0.02S -111.
13. MOMENT TO ALTER TRIM ONE INCH
14. L.C.B. ON EVEN KEEL AT ABV DRAFT
15. LONGITUDINAL CENTER OF GRAVITY
16. TRIMMING LEVER
17. TRIM
18. L.C.F.
19. DIFF IN DRAFT, L.C.F. TO MIDSHIP
20. DRAFTS:
FORWARD PERPEND 1 CULAR
MEAN
AFT PERPENDICULAR
21. DESIGNED DRAG
0.02S
0.02S
0.00
0.02S
-4.
1283.88 FOOT-TONS
246.93 FEET AFT
229.34 FEET AFT
17.59 FEET FWD
7.85 FEET BY HEAD
270.77 FEET AFT
0.33 FEET INCREASE
22.24 FEET
18.31 FEET
14.39 FEET
0.00 FEET
UNCLASS I F I ED
FIG. S3.2 Example of Light Ship Condition Format
S3.6 and S3.7 provide typical examples. In addition to the
requirements specified in S3.3.1.1, the report shall contain the
following:
(a) Previous design phase group level summary.
(b) Previous report group level summary.
(c) Current group level estimate, and when required, the
element level estimate and longitudinal weight distribution
data.
(d) Net change, by group and total, between (a) and (c).
(e) Net change, by group and total, between (b) and (c).
(j) The current status of margins, loads, full-load displace-
ment, KG, list, and trim. The changes corresponding to the
total net change calculated for (d) and (e) shall be shown for
margins, loads, and full-load displacement.
(g) A brief narrative providing rationale for any significant
changes since the previous report and classified by the groups
in which the changes occurred.
S3.3.1.4 Final Design Weight Estimate-The final estimate
produced during a design phase is designated as the final
design weight estimate. This estimate will reflect the final
weight and moment data for light ship, full load, and any other
specified loading condition. The estimate shall be titled Final
Preliminary or Final Contract Design Weight Estimate. The
requirements for the estimate are specified in S3.3.1.1 and
S3.3.1.3.
1264
S3.3.2 Supplemental Documents-The supplemental docu-
ments specified in S3.3.2.1 through S3.3.2.10 shall provide
additional information and background data required during
the preliminary/contract design phases.
S3.3.2.1 Weight and Moment Trade-O.ff Studies -These
studies consist of determining the mass properties impact of
various configuration change proposals and engineering alter-
natives that are being considered for inclusion in the design.
The studies are delivered on an "as requested" basis and
contain detailed mass properties calculations that define the
impact of the study on ship displacement, KG, list, and trim.
There is no fixed format for the completed study, but the
ESWBS classification system shall be used to structure and
summarize the data.
S3.3.2.2 Weight Distribution Report-A longitudinal
weight distribution shall be provided in a tabulated format
accordance with the standard longitudinal station breakdown.
Weight and longitudinal center of gravity shall be determined
for each ship station for both light ship and full-load condition.
0 F1808 - 03 (2008)
UNCLASSIfIED
SHIP USS SAMPLE
PREPARED BY 55W2
WEIGHT AND M!JoiENT ESTIMATE REPORT NO. 01
3 JANUARY 1989
LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE IS -250.00 FROM MID PERPENDICULAR SHEET 1M
NAVY
GROOP
PERCENT COMPLETE CURRENT VERTICAL LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SUMMARY FULL LOAD
CONDITION WITH MARGINS
GROOPS 1 - 7
MARGINS
LOADS,
2. BOTTOM OF KEEL BELOW BASE LINE
11. MOMENT TO ALTER HEEL ONE DEGREE
12. LIST
Note: Inch-pound untts are shown
100
500.00 FEET
0.06 FEET
24.59 FEET
24.53 FEET
20.75 FEET
51.68 TONS/INCH
29.00 FEET
4.41 FEET
0.16 FEET
4.25 FEET
633.76 FOOT- TONS
0. 23 DEGREES PORT
6608.29 26.68 176303. 229.34A 1515522. 0.02S -111.
16. TRIMMING LEVER
17. TRIM
18. L.C.F.
19. DIFF IN DRAFT, LC.F. TO MIDSHIP
20. DRAFTS:
FORWARD PERPENDICULAR
MEAN
AFT PERPENDICULAR
21. DESIGNED DRAG
0.02S
0.02S
0.16P
0.02P
-4.
1453.19 FOOT-TONS
251.96 FEET AFT
235.06 FEET AFT
16.90 FEET FWD
8. 28 FEET BY HEAD
273.31 FEET AFT
0.39 FEET INCREASE
25.28 FEET
21.14 FEET
17.00 FEET
0.00 FEET
UNCLASSI FlED
FIG. S3.3 Example of Full-Load Condition Format
The resultant total weight and longitudinal center of gravity for
the weight distribution report for each condition shall equal the
values reflected in the weight estimate or report for the same
condition in that reporting period.
S3.3.2.3 Weight Moment of Inertia-When specifically re-
quired by the contract, weight moment of inertia data shall be
included for the full-load condition. Current weights, centers of
gravity, and engineering information describing the shape and
orientation of each data element shall be used to develop
weight moment of inertia data. The minimum data required are
as follows:
(a) Ship-oriented roll, pitch, and yaw weight moments of
inertia about each individual data element's centroidal axes.
(b) Ship-oriented roll, pitch, and yaw weight moments of
inertia about the ship's centroid in the full-load condition.
S3.3.2.4 Ship Specification Sections-Ship specification
sections shall define the requirements of the weight control
program and the range of acceptable trim and list limit values
that are to be invoked upon the shipbuilder. Deviations from
this standard, such as special loading conditions, reporting
units, or margins, shall be defined clearly. The format for the
specification sections will be provided by NAVSEA.
S3.3.2.5 Circular of Requirements Sections-These sec-
tions shall provide the weight control requirements when a
performance-type contract is used. The content of these sec-
1265
tions shall be similar to S3.3.2.4, with the addition of service-
life allowance quantities.
S3.3.2.6 Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL)-A
CDRL will be developed that itemizes the data deliverables
that shall be required by the ship acquisition contract. The
portion of the CDRL that contains weight estimates, reports,
and supplemental documents shall be generated during the
contract design phase (see S4.2).
S3.3.2.7 Solicitation Input-A request for proposals or
similar document shall be prepared that describes the ship
design to potential shipbuilders and defines the format for
submitting a bid or making an offer. The following portions of
the solicitation package that pertain to weight control shall be
generated during contract design:
(a) Instructions to Offerors-This section describes the
content of the weight control material that will be submitted for
source selection consideration. The bidder's Independent
Weight Estimate or Preliminary Allocated Baseline Weight
Estimate, Preliminary Weight Control Plan, and resumes of
weight control personnel are typical examples.
(b) Factors for Determining Loads-These are allowances,
densities, and stowage factors that are used in the variable load
portion of the full-load condition are included in the solicita-
tion to permit a consistent calculation of load items by the
bidders or offerors.
F1808- 03 (2008)
UN CLASS I F I ED
SHIP USS SAMPLE
PREPARED BY 55W2
WEIGHT AND MOMENT ESTIMATE
REPORT NO. 01
3 JANUARY 1989
LONGITUDINAL REFER!:NCE IS 250.00 FROM MID PERPENDICULAR SHEET 1M
NAVY
GROOP
PERCENT COMPLETE CURRENT VERT I CAL LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SUMMARY
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE CONDITION
FUll LOAD
NOTE:
2. BOTTOM OF KEEL BELOW BASE LINE
11 MOMENT TO AlTER HEEL ONE DEGREE
12. LIST
Note: Inch-pound unhs are shown
100
500.00 FEET
0.06 FEET
24.59 FEET
24.53 FEET
20.69 FEET
51.62 TONS/INCH
29.00 FEET
4.41 FEET
0.16 FEET
4.25 FEET
630. 34 FOOT- TONS
0. 28 DEGREES PORT
8546.69 24.53 209662. 235.06A 2008952. 0.02P 148.
16. TRIMMING LEVER
17. TRIM
18. L.C.F.
19. DIFF IN DRAFT, L.C.F. TO MIDSHIP
20. DRAFTS:
FORWARD PERPENDICULAR
MEAN
AFT PERPENDICULAR
21. DESIGNED DRAG
2.37S
0.80P
0.18P
0.02P
1450.17 FOOT-TONS
251 .85 FEET AFT
234.93 FEET AFT
16.92 FEET FWD
8.27 FEET BY HEAD
273.30 FEET AFT
0.39 FEET INCREASE
25.22 FEET
21.08 FEET
16.95 FEET
0.00 FEET
UNCLASSIFIED
FIG. S3.4 Example of Contractor-Responsible Condition Format
(c) Weights for Schedule A Items-This listing establishes
the baseline GFM weight that will be required in the A WE/
ABWE.
S3.3.2.8 Weight Control Contract Clause -The contract
clause for weight control shall be provided for inclusion in the
shipbuilding contract. The clause shall contain Not-To-Exceed
(NTE) displacement and KG values, when applicable; a
requirement for adjudicating the weight and moment effect of
contract changes; a requirement that GFM growth is to be
agreed upon before the inclining experiment; an explanation of
the contractor-responsible condition; the method of incorporat-
ing changes that are proposed solely to achieve satisfactory
naval architectural characteristics; and the amount of liquidated
damages that apply.
S3.3.2.9 Design Notebook-The design notebook shall in-
clude a completed set of weight data collection sheets. For each
system, these sheets describe the composition of the system,
the source of the mass properties data, the latitudes in the
system definition that could cause weight variations, the
parameters and assumptions that were used to generate the
mass properties data, and the concurrence of the cognizant
technical code. In addition to the weight data collection sheets,
the design notebook shall include a record of the information
that was used in the development of the estimates and reports.
This information typically consists of engineers' notes, memo-
randa, records of telephone conversations, margin
determination/rationale, interim reports, material equipment
lists, and an index of drawings, sketches, and reports that were
translated into mass properties data. Separate notebooks are
required for preliminary design and contract design.
S3.3.2.10 Design History-The design history is a combi-
nation of narrative and tabular data that summarizes in chrono-
logical order the mass properties evolution of the ship design.
The text highlights the major problem areas and their resolu-
tions during the design phase, significant issues and decisions
that had an impact on mass properties, and a discussion of
margin usage. The narrative is interspersed with summary data
from the weight estimates and reports. Separate histories are
required for preliminary design and contract design.
S3.3.3 Pre-Award Process-This process is the period be-
tween the release of the request for proposals (RFP) or request
for bids and the award of the contract. Estimates and supple-
mental documents required during this process shall be in
accordance with S3.3.3.1 through S3.3.3.2, as applicable.
S3.3.3.1 Weight Estimates-The BIWE or the PABWE is
prepared during this process. The estimate shall contain de-
tailed information appropriate to the design phase and loading
conditions for light ship and full load and shall be summarized
in tabular form as follows:
1266
(a) Three-digit system number and title.
(b) Current weight.
(c) Current vertical lever.
c4@f F1808 - 03 (2008)
UNCLASSI FlED
SHIP USS SAMPLE
PREPARED BY 55W2
3 JANUARY 1989
s
LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE IS -250.00 FROM MID PERPENDICULAR
E
SHEET 26
RCG R
NAVY C T DM UNIT NO. CURRENT C VERTICAL LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE EHF P
GROUP ITEM A DESCRIPTION WEIGHT UNITS WEIGHT A VCG MOMENT LCG S MOMENT TCG S MOMENT SGM T
DESIGN AND BUILDING MARG
DESIGN AND BUILDING MARGIN
Note: Inch-pound untts are shown
UN CLASS! F I ED
FIG. S3.5 Example of Margins Format
(d) Current vertical moment.
(e) Current longitudinal lever.
(f) Current longitudinal moment.
(g) Current transverse lever.
(h) Current transverse moment
When a technical evaluation is conducted during source
selection, the estimate is reviewed for appropriate content and
scored the requirements. After contract award, the
successful bidder's, or offeror's, estimate becomes the basis for
the AWE or ABWE.
S3.3.3.2 Bidder's Independent Estimate (BIWE)-
The BIWE establishes the potential contractor's estimate of the
design before contract award. It is based on the contract,
a11 of the documents referenced therein, the
factors for loads, and the weights for GFM. The
BIWE shall conform to the content and format of
S3.3.3.1, include estimated values for
and contain conditions for
load. The variable loads shall be
thfloug;holllt the in their aPJJropnate
offer, shall include in
(a) Historical estim:1tirag
used in the of the BIWE, such as mill tolerance,
weld material, insulation, and so forth.
(b) The technical analysis that substantiates the values
selected for design and building margin.
(c) A summary of GFM as reported in the details of the
BIWE (see S3.3.3.1).
When NTE displacement and KG values are defined in the
contract, the bidder, or offeror, shall take the appropriate
measures to reflect the design solutions and building practices
that ensure delivery of a satisfactory ship.
S3.3.3.3 Preliminary Allocated Baseline Weight Estimate
(PABWE)-The PABWE establishes the potential contractor's
estimate of the ship design before the award of a performance-
type contract. It is based on the contract, Circular of
ments all the documents referenced therein, and the bidder's,
or off;ror' s, proposed hull and propulsion configurations. The
report shall conform to the requirements of S3.3.3.1, include
estimated values for design and building margin, and contain
contract modification and GFM margins as specified. Variable
loads shall be realistically distributed throughout the ship in
their appropriate spaces. The bidder, or offeror, shaH include in
appendices the following information:
1267
Historical backup data for estimating factors that were
used in the development of the PABWE, such as mill tolerance,
paint, weld material, insulation, and so forth.
(b) The technical analysis that substantiates the values
proposed for design and building margin.
(c) A summary of GFM as reported in the details of the
PABWE (see S3.3.4.3).
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F1808 - 03 (2008)
USS SAMPLE WEIGHT AND C.G. DESIGN MARGIN STATUS
PRELIMINARY /CONTRACT DESIGN - INTERIM REPORT
WEIGHT:
GROUPS 1-7
a. P .D. Margin
b. C.O. Margin
D & B Margins
Loads
Projected Delivery
Limits:
Speed
Strength
Subdivision
"V" Lines
GROUPS 1-7
a. P.O. Margin
b. C.D. Margin
D & B Margins
Projected Delivery
(Light Ship)
Projected Delivery
(Full Load)
26.26
Current
Report
6148.4

1839.2
I 8415.31
I I
9500
841
955
27.54
I 23.96l
Change
From BL
(+) 63.5
0.0
(-) 41.3
0.0
(-) 35.2
(-) 13.0
List
2.95 (P)
0.37 (P)
Change
From
Last
Report
(+) 25.3
0.0
(-) 10.8
0.0
(-) 31.7
(-) 17.2
0.33' (A)
0.77' (A)
LIMITS: fu,,,
LIFE KG
ALLOWABLE KG .b.!.I. I.B!M
6.
7. Available at Projected ue11ver,v.:.,.,
in example, however Sl units are
[ 25.321 I 0.50 P/S lh .5'(A)/0.5'(f) I
1.oo I
1.361
FIG. S3.6 Example of Interim Report Format (page 1)
1268
F1808 - 03 (2008)
USS SAMPLE WEIGHT AND C.G. DESIGN MARGIN STATUS
PRELIMINARY/CONTRACT DESIGN- INTERIM REPORT
Weight Group
1. Structure
2. Propulsion
3. Elec. Plant
4. Command/Surv.
5. Aux. Systems
6. Outfit & Furn.
7. Armament
Total Groups 1 thru 7:
COMMENTS:
Current Change
Report From BL
2941.1 (+)4.9
704.8 (-)12.2
401.8 (+)9.7
381.7 (-)3.2
810.8 (+)10.9
609.4 (+)55.0
298.9
.l:lJ..&.
6148.4 (+)63.5
FIG. S3.7 Example of Interim Report Format (page 2)
1269
Change
From
Last
Report
(+)8.6
(-)0.9
(+)7.9
(-)15.9
(+)25.6
iJ.Q:.!
(+)25.3
F1808- 03 (2008)
After contract award, the PABWE of the successful bidder,
or offeror, becomes the basis for the ABWE, which is used to
measure contractor responsibility.
S3.3.3.4 Supplemental Documents-The supplemental
documents specified in S3.3.3.5 and S3.3.3.6 provide addi-
tional information and background data required during the
pre-award process.
S3.3.3.5 Preliminary Weight Control Plan-A preliminary
weight control plan shall be submitted with detail design and
construction proposals that outlines the procedures that shall be
followed to meet contractural weight control responsibilities.
The plan shall include, but is not limited to, the following
topics:
(a) A discussion of design risk with respect to the ship's
naval architectural characteristics, including special weight
control problems and the areas that will receive weight control
emphasis.
(b) A discussion of the method to be used in adjusting margin
accounts.
(c) The frequency of briefings to top management concern-
ing the ship's naval architectural condition throughout the
detail design and construction phase. The individual who will
give the briefings shall be identified.
(d) A description of the computer systems, both hardware
and software, that will be used in the weight control effort.
(e) A listing of equipment that will be used to perform actual
weight measurements. The listing shall include equipment
capacity, accuracy tolerance, and calibration frequency.
(j) A discussion that conveys an understanding of the actual
weight determination requirements of the contract.
(g) A discussion of the detail to which the ship construction
drawings will be calculated and the recommended selected
areas of the estimates and reports that will be scheduled for
timely calculations during the design phase of the contract.
(h) The reporting schedule and cutoff dates for weight
calculations.
(i) The planned action for verification of mill tolerances,
welding, and paint factors.
(j) The management and technical authority of the weight
control coordinator relative to the overall design effort antici-
pated.
(k) The method of communicating the condition of the ship
to line personnel.
(l) The management actions that will be taken upon detection
of weight and margin trends tending to cause contractual
values to be exceeded.
(m) The method and of weight control that will be
required of subcontractors and vendors.
(n) A discussion of construction monitoring techniques that
will be used to ensure that the as constructed, is
accurately reflected in the weight reports.
(o) A discussion of weight control training to be adminis-
tered to personnel involved in the design and construction of
the ship.
S3.3.3.6 Resumes--Resumes of weight control personnel
that will be directly involved with the ship weight control
program shall be submitted with the proposal.
S3.3.4 Detail Design and Construction Phase-Weight es-
timates, reports, and supplemental documents prepared during
this phase shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in S3.3.4.1 through S3.3.5.8. When the mass proper-
ties data for two or more ships under the same contract are
identical, the estimates, reports, and supplemental documents
can apply to more than one hull number. If deviations in design
or construction create unique mass properties data, then sepa-
rate summaries and condition sheets shall be included with
QWRs and separate FWRs shall be submitted. The contractor
and NAVSEA shall agree on selected areas of estimates and
reports that will be scheduled for timely calculation during
detail design and shall agree on the procedure for reviewing
appropriate drawings. These areas and the review process shall
be agreed on before, or concurrently with, estabiishing the
AWE/ABWE.
S3.3.4.1 Weight Estimates and Reports-Weight estimates
and reports prepared during this phase consist of the ABWE or
AWE, QWR, and FWR. These estimates and reports shall
contain detailed information appropriate to the status of the
design at the time of submittal and loading conditions as
described in S3 .1.1, and shall be summarized in tabular form as
follows:
(a) Three-digit system number and title.
(b) Original weight (not required for AWE or ABWE).
(c) Current weight.
( d) Current vertical lever.
(e) Current vertical moment.
(j) Current longitudinal lever.
(g) Current longitudinal moment.
(h) Current transverse lever.
(i) Current transverse moment.
(j) Current percent completion (not required for AWE or
ABWE).
(k) Special coding symbols.
S3.3.4.2 Every item that comprises the completed ship shall
be included in the weight estimates and reports and grouped in
accordance with the three-digit system. For the data to be
useful in a variety of applications, the details shall contain an
accurate description that links each listed item to a recogniz-
able component. For example, a long listing of plates, tees,
angles, beams, chocks, and so forth, with precise weight and
center of gravity data, does not comprise a satisfactory esti-
mate, unless those pieces of structure can be readily identified
with a specific bulkhead, deck, foundation, or other structure.
Similarly, the descriptions for distributive systems shall indi-
cate the major components that are being connected. Compo-
nent descriptions shall include identifiers, such as type, size,
capacity, and so forth. An example of adequate detail
and proper numerical ordering is shown in S2.1. Calcula-
tions and actual determinations shall be terminated in
advance of report preparation to ensure timely submittals.
1270
S3.3.4.3 Determination of Mass Properties Data-Mass
properties data may be obtained a combination of estimation
or calculation of ship construction drawings and actual weight
determination. The actual weight of all components and
equipment, greater than 500 lbs or 225 kg (unless otherwise
specified), both contractor and government-furnished, shall be
F1808 - 03 (2008)
determined through accurate scale weighing along with the
estimation or calculation of centers of gravity. The actual
weights for materials, components, and equipment, less than
500 lbs or 225 kg, shall be determined on a selective or
sampling basis, as determined by the contractor, to provide unit
weight data. Potential candidates for actual determina-
tion on a selective basis include such items as insulation,
structural plates and shapes, sheathing, piping, and the com-
ponents and equipment less than 500 lbs or 225 kg. Where
factors or percentages are used, such as for estimating and
calculating paint, mill tolerance, and the contractor
shall substantiate these values supplying background infor-
mation (current and historical). Historical infor-
mation on paint, mill tolerance, and welding factors shall be
forwarded with the BI\VE or PABWE. Final values for paint,
mill tolerance, and welding factors, based on current ship
information, shall be forwarded with the FWR. Also, when
design development has occurred for a component, system, or
portion of structure, a reevaluation of the original weight
estimate shall be made to obtain the most accurate current
weight. In addition, to minimize the amount of actual weight
determination at the shipbuilding site, the contractor shall
require, through acquisition documents, subcontractors or ven-
dors to submit information on the current weight and center of
gravity of all major assemblies, equipment, fittings, or compo-
nents to be installed on the ship. It is suggested that informa-
tion be submitted subcontractors or vendors in the following
sequence:
(a ) An estimate of weight and center of gravity in the
proposal.
(b) The calculated weight and center of gravity when the
design is completed.
(c) The actual weight and calculated center of gravity when
the fabrication or assembly is completed.
S3.3.4.4 Accepted Weight Estimate (AWE)-After contract
award, the contractor and NAVSEA shall agree on AWE values
for displacement and KG. To expedite this agreement, the
contractor shall, upon request, visit NAVSEA not less than one
month before the required submittal date of the AWE. The
estimate shall consist of the contractor's BIWE that was
submitted during the solicitation process, adjusted as necessary
to reflect corrections and negotiated changes, such as reclassi-
fication of data. The A \VE shall include loading conditions,
summaries, supporting details for each three-digit element,
appropriate margins, and an appendix that establishes the
baseline for measuring detail design changes in GFM. The
estimate shaH confonn to the content and format requirements
of S3.3.4.1.
S3.3.4.5 Allocated Baseline Weight Estimate (ABWE)--
The ABWE establishes the contractor's estimate of the ship
when the hull and propulsion configurations are defined.
The AB WE shaH reflect a design that meets all of the required
criteria, satisfies the required service-life allow-
the margins. The basis for the
the contractor's PABWE that was submitted
the solicitation process, adjusted as necessary to reflect
and corrections. The ABWE shall include
loading conditions, summaries, margins, and an appendix that
1271
establishes the baseline for measuring detail design changes in
GFM. The estimate shall conform to the content and format
requirements of S3.3.4.L
S3.3.4.6 Quarterly Weight Reports (QWR) -The QWR
shall document the current mass properties status of the ship
design and construction effort. The light ship and full-load
conditions shall reflect the ship that is projected for delivery,
including the current mass properties values for GFM and
contract modifications, both adjudicated and unadjudicated.
The contractor-responsible condition shall be used to adjust the
current full load to account for changes that occur after the
establishment of the contractual baseline and are not within the
control of the shipbuilder. Examples of these types of changes
are as follows:
(a) Changes in weight of GFM and the moment
associated with those weight ... u,:utt>'-"
(b) The net effect of contract modifications.
Changes in weight of equipment as standard
for the class and the moment changes associated with those
weight changes.
(d) Changes that result from the required use of warranted
documentation.
(e) Growth resulting from directed acquisitions.
S3.3.4.7 Separate summaries for each type of change pre-
viously listed shall be provided as appendices to the QWR. A
GFM summary (see S3.3.4.3) and a contract modification
summary (see S3.3.4.17) are required with every submittal of
a QWR. Other summaries may be submitted at the option of
the contractor to substantiate growth beyond his control. If an
optional summary is submitted, it shall document all of the
activity for that particular type of change, weight increases and
decreases, and modified locations. The ship's displacement,
KG, list, and trim from the contractor-responsible condition
shall be compared to the AWE or ABWE values for displace-
ment and KG and the specified allowable ranges for list and
trim. Report details shall be grouped in accordance with the
three-digit system, and each item shall indicate whether the
information shown is estimated, calculated, or based on actual
weight determination. The report shall conform to the content
and format requirements of S3.3.4.1. In addition, the report
shall contain reasons for changes, recommendations to correct
any adverse trends, and a listing of all the equipment for which
an actual weight determination was during the
reporting period.
S3.3.4.8 Final Weight Report (FWR)-The FWR shall re-
flect the final status of the ship design and construction effort
that resulted in a delivered product and is normally based on an
inclining experiment. All of the reporting requirements of a
QWR (see S3.3.4.6) also apply to a FWR. In addition, when
inclining experiment full-load displacement and KG values
differ from the estimate without margin
greater than
1
/2 %, an analysis of the data shall be conducted to
reconcile the differences. Findings that result in correction of
inaccuracies, reevaluation of factors, and so forth, shall be
incorporated in the FWR. The only acquisition margin that may
appear in the FWR is building This accounts
for irreconcilable differences between the weight report and the
inclining experiment. The FWR shall contain a narrative that
F1808 - 03 (2008)
describes the portions of the weight data that are still based on
factors, such as paint, weld material, mill tolerance, and so
forth, and the criteria that comprise the factors.
S3.3.4.9 Weight Estimate and Report Appendices-The fol..,
lowing appendices specified in S3.3.4.10 through S3.3.4.17
provide additional information and background data during the
detail design phase.
S3.3.4.10 GFM Summary-The purpose of the GFM sum-
mary is to extract from the estimates and reports weight and
location data for all GFM and identify the government respon-
sible net weight and moment change that occurs to GFM
during detail design. The GFM summaries shall accurately
reflect the Schedule A portion of the contract, conform to the
content and format requirements of S3.3.4.16, and be included
as an appendix to the BIWE or PABWE, AWE or ABWE, each
QWR, and the FWR. The baseline for measuring detail design
changes is established in the AWE or ABWE. Once accepted,
the baseline is only revised when acquisition responsibility is
transferred or to correct data that was available to the contrac-
tor before the AWE or ABWE, but was inaccurately reported.
Weight changes to GFM and the moment changes associated
with those weight changes, along with contract modifications
an? other types of changes beyond the control of the ship-
budder, are deducted from the current full-load condition to
arrive at the contractor-responsible condition. Changes to GFM
can result from better definition of the baseline items as the
design matures; the addition, deletion, or modification of items
by a revision to Schedule A; or a transfer of acquisition
responsibility.
S3.3.4.11 Adjustment to Baseline GFM-The weight and
moment totals from the GFM summary in the AWE or ABWE
shall be the basis for measuring all subsequent GFM changes
and shall be known as the baseline values. In cases in which
inaccuracies are discovered in the baseline values for which
correct data was available to the contractor before submittal of
the AWE or ABWE, the weight report details shall be modified
to r e ~ e t the correct information. In the GFM summary, the
basehne values shall be adjusted and the weight and moment
effect of the adjustment becomes the responsibility of the
contractor. S3 .8 provides a typical example of the account-
ing procedure for this type of change.
S3.3.4.12 Design Development to Baseline GFM-When
design development occurs to items of baseline GFM, the
weight report details shall be updated to record current weight
and moment data. The contractor is responsible for properly
locating the items of GFM throughout detail design. Moment
changes resulting from the relocation of GFM to suit design
development are not allowable deductions when determining
the contractor-responsible condition. The government is re-
sponsible for the weight and moment impact of weight changes
to baseline items that occur after the establishment of the
baseline. An acceptable method of computing government-
responsible moment changes is to multiply the net weight
change of baseline GFM design development by the centers of
gravity from the original or adjusted baseline GFM. These net
weight and moment changes are then deducted from the current
full-load condition when determining the contractor-
responsible condition. Additionally, once a contract modifica-
tion has been adjudicated, the GFM portion of the change shall
be incorporated into a second section of the GFM summary
(conforming to the content and format requirements of
S3.3.4.16, with the GFM weight and moment values included
as adjudicated in the baseline weight column and in the current
values. This section will be used to monitor weight changes to
GF.M after the contract modification has been adjudicated. Any
wetght and moment changes identified in GFM after adjudica-
tion shall be reflected in the current weight column and
included with the weight and moment changes that are de-
ducted from the current full-load condition when determining
the contractor-responsible condition.
S3.3.4.13 Revision to Schedule A-When Schedule A is
revised to add, delete, or modify GFM, the weight report shall
be updated accordingiy and the changes shall be reflected as
current values in the GFM summary. Since these types of
changes will usually be implemented by a contract modifica-
tion, the contractor shall ensure that the weight and moment
changes are also reflected in the contract modification sum-
mary. However, for the purpose of determining contractor
responsibility, the weight and moment impact of contract
modifications on GFM before adjudication should not be
included with the GFM net changes, since it is already included
with the net effect of contract modifications. Any changes in
GFM included with contract modifications after adjudication
are covered in S3.3.4.12.
S3.3.4.14 Acquisition Responsibility Changes from Govern-
ment to Contractor-When acquisition responsibility passes
from the government to the contractor, the current values and
the baseline values for the item shall be deleted from the GFM
summary. If the current weight differs from the baseline
weight, the contract modification shall reflect the weight
difference. Moment changes associated with the weight differ-
ence may be computed by using the baseline centers of gravity
for the item that was transferred. After the modification has
been adjudicated, changes in weight and location are the
responsibility of the contractor.
S3.3.4.15 Acquisition Responsibility Changes from Con-
tractor to Government-When acquisition responsibility
passes from the contractor to the government, current weight
and moment values for the item that appear in the most recently
submitted weight report shall be added to the baseline weight
and current weight columns of the GFM summary. Contract
modifications that cause this type of transfer shall reflect no
weight or moment change. Any subsequent weight change
shall be treated as routine design development of GFM and
becomes the responsibility of the government.
S3.3.4.16 GFM Summary Format-The GFM summary
shall be in tabular form with subtotals by the three-digit
system, grand totals for current values, and shall include
columns containing the following information for each item:
1272
(a) Three-digit system number.
(b) Schedule A item number.
(c) Description of the item.
(d) Baseline weight.
(e) Current estimated, calculated, or actual weight.
(f) Current vertical lever.
(g) Current vertical moment.
GFM SUMMARY TOTALS
Weight VCG V. Moment lCG l. Moment TCG TM
Original Baseline Values from AWE/ABWE
I
355.00 31.22 11083 157.35A 55859 0.17P 60

515 ff -24 ,
.....
CD
;::;
I New II1'Jfgpi:AAkasuring __

iiii:boo
I
0
CD
-...1
56374 36
I w
:::::::::::::
57160 44
0
(,.)
-
1\)
0
0
Government-Responsible Change to GFM 786
11.28P I
8
I
co
-
in example, however 51 units are
FIG. S3.8 Example of GFM Summary Format
F1808 - 03 (2008)
(h) Current longitudinal lever.
(i) Current longitudinal moment.
(j) Current transverse lever.
(k) Current transverse moment.
S3 .3 .4.17 Contract Modification Summary-Before each
claim for equitable adjustment in price or delivery or both,
asserted pursuant to the changes clause of the contract, an
estimate of the net weight and moment change resulting from
the contract modification shall be prepared and submitted to the
supervisor. The contract modification summary shall reflect
these weight and moment impacts as they appear in the details
of the weight estimate, for both adjudicated and unadjudicated
changes, including field changes. The summary shall consist of
all approved changes listed numerically by NAVSEA number
and shall include the title, net weight, and moment impact of
each change; an identifier that indicates whether the data is
adjudicated or unadjudicated; and a grand total representing the
net effect of all approved contract modifications. The contract
modification summary shall be submitted as an appendix to the
QWRs, the ASR, and the FWR. Supporting details for each
contract modification shall be incorporated into the body of the
weight estimate as soon as the change is approved. Before
adjudication of the contract modification, the weight and
moment effect of the change as reported in the contract
modification summary shall reflect the current values of the
supporting details. After the contract modification has been
adjudicated, the supporting details are treated as any other line
items in the weight estimate, but the weight and moment effect
of the change as reported in the contract modification summary
remains at the adjudicated values. The weight and moment
impact of the addition, deletion, or modification of GFM to the
Schedule A is implemented by a contract modification sum-
mary. If acquisition responsibility passes from the government
to the contractor, the contract modification summary shall
reflect any difference in weight between the current and
baseline weight values. Moment changes associated with the
weight difference may be computed by using the baseline
centers of gravity for the item that was transferred. Changes in
weight are the responsibility of the contractor after the contract
modification has been adjudicated. Contract modifications that
change acquisition responsibility from the contractor to the
government shall reflect no weight or moment impact in the
contract modification summary.
S3 .3 .4.18 Supplemental Weight Report-The following
supplemental weight report, specified in S3.3.4.19, provides
additional information and background data during the detail
design phase.
S3.3.4.19 Machinery Weight Report (Nuclear)-A machin-
ery weight report for a nuclear ship design shall be submitted
in the category system in accordance with NAVSEA 0900-LP-
039-9020. The report shall be divided into two sections.
Section I shall contain nuclear machinery items; Section II
shall contain the remaining items of the category system. The
following summary sheets shall be included:
(a) A listing of a total for each three-digit group within each
of the Categories A through M (excluding I). Subtotals shall be
listed for each category and a grand total for nuclear propulsion
machinery.
(b) Same as (a), except that Sections I and II shall be listed
separately with a subtotal for each section, and a grand total for
nuclear propulsion machinery.
(c) A listing of a total of Categories A through M (excluding
I) for each three-digit group to make a grand total for nuclear
propulsion machinery.
The totals for all summaries shall be the same.
S3.3.4.20 Machinery Weight Report Format--The report
shall include the following information in tabular form:
(a) Original weight values from the AWE or ABWE for each
item.
(b) Current weight of each item.
(c) Current vertical levers.
(d) Current vertical moments.
(e) Current longitudinal levers.
(j) Current longitudinal moments.
(g) Current transverse levers.
(h) Current transverse moments.
When this report is submitted concurrently with the AWE or
ABWE, the QWR, and the FWR, it shall reflect the details of
the report it accompanies.
S3.3.5 Supplemental Documents -The following supple-
mental documents when required by the CDRL, provide
additional information and background data during the detail
design and construction phase.
S3.3.5.1 Weight Control Plan-A weight control plan shall
be submitted that outlines the procedures to be followed in
meeting the contractual weight control responsibilities. The
plan shall address, but is not limited to, the topics listed in
S3.3.3.5. In the event a preliminary weight control plan was
submitted during the solicitation process, the post-award plan
described herein shall not differ from the preliminary plan in
basic content, intent, or significance.
S3.3.5.2 Accepted Ship Report (ASR)-The ASR is the
document that demonstrates the contractor's performance with
regard to weight control. It constructs contractor responsibility
by reporting the light ship values for displacement, KG, trim,
and list from the inclining experiment, and the current loads
from the most recent QWR. The net weight and moment effect
of the following categories of changes are then algebraically
subtracted:
(a) Adjudicated and unadjudicated contract modifications
that were included in the inclining experiment data.
(b) Other directed modifications to loads.
(c) Modifications to GFM since the AWE.
(d) Other allowable categories (see S3.3.4.6).
S3.3.5.3 The results are then compared to the corresponding
values in the AWE. The report shall be submitted in summary
form similar to the example formats shown in as
required by the CDRL. The procedure to compute contractor
responsibility for performance-type contracts shall be submit-
ted in summary form similar to the example format shown in
1274
10, as required by the CDRL. If the final inclining
experiment data differ significantly from the preliminary report
of the inclining, or if they would alter the conclusions drawn
from the ASR, the report shall be corrected by the contractor to
reflect these differences and resubmitted.
;::;
-.l
VI
inclining Experiment
(Condition A)
Current Loads from
latest QWR (add)
Current Full Load
(Total)
Net Effect of Contract
Mods (Deduct} (note 1 i
Directed Modifications
to Loads (Deduct)
II
GFM Net Changes
(Deduct) (note 2)
Other Allowable
Adjustments (note 3)
Contractor Responsible
Values (Total)
Accepted Weight Esti-
mate Values
NOTES:
WEIGHT KG
ACCEPTED SHIP REPORT
VERTICAL
MOMENTS I LCG
LONGITUDINAL
MOMENTS TCG
TRANSVERSE
MOMENTS
TRIM
(F) I (A)
(not,e 4)
LIST
(P) I (S)
(note 4)
1. Represents summation of adjudicated and unadjudicated values for all contract modifications that were included in the inclining experiment
data (including those affecting variable loads).
2. Represents values for net weight and moment changes in GFM since the AWE.
3. These adjustments can include equipment designated as standard for the class changes, changes resulting from the required use of
warranteed documentation, or growth resulting from directed procurements.
4. Insert tolerances agreed to or limits in Section 070 of the Ship Specifications.
FIG. S3.9 Example of Accepted Ship Report Format

i1
"""'
co
0
co
I
0
w
-
1\)
0
0
co
-
_.
N
-..]
0\
inclining Experiment
(Condition A)
Current Loads from
latest QWR (add)
Current Full Load
(Total)
Government Margins
Contract Modifications
Remaining (Add)
Exceeded (Deduct)
GFM
Remaining {Add)
Exceeded (Deduct)
Contractor Responsible
Values (Total)
ABWEIAWE Values
Governing NA Limit
Available Service
Life Allowance
Required Service
Life Ailowance
WEIGHT KG
ACCEPTED SHIP REPORT
(Performance-type contract)
VERTICAL
MOMENTS ILCG
LONGITUDINAL
MOMENTS TCG
TRANSVERSE
MOMENTS
NOTE: 1. Insert tolerances agreed to or limits in Section 070 of the Ship Specifications.
FIG. S3.1 0 Example of Accepted Ship Report Format
TRIM
(F) I (A)
LIST
(Pl I (Sl

.,
_..
Q)
0
Q)
I
0
w
-
1\)
0
0
Q)
-
F1808- 03 (2008)
S3.3.5.4 Design and Weight Data Sheet -The design and
weight data sheet shall contain the information and be of the
format indicated in S3.11, which is an example for a
gas-turbine-powered ship. Major load and machinery items, as
appropriate to the applicable ship, shall be listed. This docu-
ment shall be submitted with a note indicating whether the
units are in the SI or inch-pound system.
S3.3.5.5 Weight Moment of Inertia Report -A weight
moment of inertia report shall be submitted for the full-load
condition. Current weights, centers of gravity, and engineering
information describing the shape and orientation of each data
element shall be used to develop weight moments of inertia.
The minimum required data shall be tabulated as follows:
(a) Ship-oriented roll, pitch, and yaw weight moments of
inertia about the ship's centroid in the full-load condition and
each individual data element's centroidal axes summarized by
the three-digit system.
(b) Ship-oriented roll, pitch, and yaw weight moment of
each individual data element's centroidal axes summarized by
group.
(c) Ship-oriented roll, pitch, and yaw weight moments of
each individual data element's centroidal axes for the total
ship.
(d) The gyradius for roll, pitch, and yaw.
S3.3.5.6 Weight Distribution Report-A longitudinal
weight distribution shall be submitted in a tabulated format in
accordance with the standard longitudinal station breakdown.
Weight and longitudinal center of gravity shall be determined
for each ship station for both light ship and full-load condition.
The resultant total weight and longitudinal center of gravity for
the weight distribution report shall equal the values reflected in
the basic weight estimate or report for the same reporting
period.
S3.3.5.7 Electronic Media-Electronic media shall be sub-
mitted that describes the applicable reports in the format
specified in the Annex and in accordance with the requirements
set forth in ANSI X3.4.
S3.3.5.8 Weight and Moment Trade-Off Studies-Trade-off
studies comprise various engineering and technical studies
directed toward determining detail weight data. These analyti-
cal studies are used to support design change proposals and
1277
support recommendations for reversing trends toward exceed-
ing established margins or limits. These studies are conducted
on an "as requested" basis and contain detailed weight calcu-
lations reflecting the impact of the study on ship displacement,
KG, list, and trim. There is no fixed format for the weight
calculations, but each submittal shall use the ESWBS classifi-
cation system to structure and summarize the data.
S4. NOTES
S4.1 Issue of DODISS-When this guide is used in
acquisition, the applicable issue of the DODISS must be cited
in the solicitation (see S 1.1 and S 1.2).
S4.2 Data Requirements-The following Data Item De-
scriptions (DIDs) must be listed, as applicable, on the Contract
Data Requirements List (DD Form 1423) when this guide is
applied on a contract to obtain the data, except when DOD
FAR Supplement 27.475-1 exempts the requirement for.a DD
Form 1423.
Reference Paragraph DID Number DID Title
83.3.1 through
83.3.2.3,
83.3.2.7, 83.3.2.9
through 83.3.2.1 0,
83.3.3 through
83.3.3.6, 83.3.4
through 83.3.5.8,
Figs. 82.1 -A i .2, and
Annex A 1 , in-
cluding Fig. A 1.1
83.3.2.6
DI-MISC-81357 Mass properties
data report
(surface ships)
DI-A-23434 List, contract
data require-
ments (DD
Form 1423)
Suggested
Tailoring
S4.2.1 The preceding DIDs were those cleared as of the date
ofthis guide. The current issue of DOD 5010.12-L, Acquisition
Management Systems and Data Requirements Control List
(AMSDL), must be researched to ensure that only current,
cleared DIDs are cited on the DD Form 1423.
S4.3 Reports Inteiface-The interface of weight estimates
and reports is depicted in Fig. S3.11.
S4.4 This guide satisfies a requirement to combine all
weight control technical requirements for all phases of U.S.
Navy surface ship acquisition contracts into a single document.
F1808 - 03 (2008)
(Indicate Security Classification)
Machinery
Gas Turbine LM2500
Reduction Gear
Propeller, CRP
SS Gas Turbine Generators
DESIGN AND WEIGHT DATA SHEET
USS SAMPLE
Weight Summary Data"
Group
1 . Hull Structure
2. Propulsion
3. Electric Plant
4. Comm and Control
5. Auxiliary Systems
6. Outfit and Furnishings
7. Armament
Building Margin
Total Light Ship
Crew and Effects
Ship Ammunition
Aircraft (Halo)
Provisions & Stores
General Stores
Aeronautical Stores
Potable Water
Lube Oil (Ship)
Lube Oil {Helol
Fuel Oil
Unusable Liquids
in Tanks
JP-5
Total Loads
Wt !Tons)
3074.9
761.9
284.7
355.7
736.2
478.3
153.9
83.7
5929.3
Full Loads"
Wt !Tons)
29.7
78.4
5.3
34.6
5.9
3.1
40.9
32.1
9.5
1588.4
83.2
64.7
1975.8
Ship - Full Load Cond. 0 7905.1
. 80,000 SHP
14,067 SHP
YfQ.
24.0
22.7
28.1
25.2
28.4
32.2
36.1
49.0
26.0
VCG
29.5
24.7
0.0
27.0
25.8
55.0
11.2
12.9
15.7
4.5
9.9
11.2
10.0
22.0
!&fi:.:
269.6
309.4
298.9
162.6
288.6
280.1
240.2
245.7
271.8
300.3
265.0
324.0
248.9
326.4
265.0
222.1
242.7
397.4
257.0
276.0
407.8
263.7
269.8
Manufacturer
General Electric
Westinghouse
Bird-Johnson
Unit Weight
Dry (Tons!
19.9
71.5
21.8
Stewart & Stevenson 23.9
Aqua-Chem 2.7
York 7.7
York 0.8
Condenser Service & Eng'r 8.0
Ingersoll Rand 2.2
(Navy Stocklessl 4.0
20.8
(Indicate Security Classification)
FIG. S3.11 Example of Design and Weight Data Sheet Format
1278
F1808- 03 (2008)
ANNEX
Al. INPUT DATA FILE FORMAT AND TRANSFER
Al. Scope
annex contains the format for
comp1leting the standard report input data files.
This annex is a part of this guide. The information
contained herein is intended for (see S4.2).
the
is upon the specification
re(lUirerneJllts. and shall contain information regarding the
inertia characteristics of the item. An example of the Navy
standard estimate format is shown in . 1 .
A 1.2.1 First Line of Data-The format for the first line of
data is as follows:
A 1.2.1.1 Columns 1 through 5, Classification Number-
Columns 1 through 3 are based on the Expanded Ship Work
Breakdown Structure (ESWBS) (see NAVSEA S9040-AA-
IDX-Ol0/SWBS 5D). Columns 4 and 5 provide for special
subtotals within the classification number. Columns 4 and 5
shall contain only numeric data. Generally, two zeroes are used
to designate an ESWBS element title. For example, Main Deck
would be designated 13100 for ESWBS. Note that ESWBS
subgroups ending in a zero are not to be used for input data,
such as JJO, 120, 230, 240, and so forth.
A1.2.1.2 Column 6-Column 6 is used for functional cat-
egory designation when required for nuclear-powered ships.
These categories are defined by NAVSEA 0900-LP-039-9020.
A1.2.1.3 Columns 7 through 10, Item Number -The item
number provides the means of identification of each line within
any five-digit element number. The following rules apply:
(a) Each line shall have an item number.
(b) All titles representing any of the basic ESWBS titles shall
include a zero in Column 10.
NoTE A 1.1-Titles for special subtotals within an ESWBS element may
contain any item number desired.
(c) Care shall be taken not to repeat any item numbers within
a five-digit element.
(d) Do not use any leading zeroes in the item number, such
as 0010.
(e) Item numbers for entries should be entered in increments
of ten, such as 10, 20, and 30, instead of 1, 2, and 3.
(j) All item numbers shall be right justified.
A 1.2. 1.4 Column 11, Station-This column is used in con-
junction with the standard longitudinal weight distribution for
subsequent strength calculations. For weight distribution, the
ship is divided into 22 stations which are lettered A through X
I and 0). Station A is designated to contain all items
whose longitudinal center of gravity (LCG) is forward of the
forward perpendicular. Station B contains all items with an
LCG between the forward perpendicular and ship Station 1.
Station C contains items between ship Station 1 and
Station 2, and so on to Station X, which contains all items aft
of the aft perpendicular. For each item titles and items
with no weight), Column 11 shall contain a letter from A
X (excluding I and 0), unless one of the
options is used:
(a) An asterisk inserted in Column 11 for any item indicates
the weight will be automatically distributed in a 22-station
longitudinal distribution in proportion to the basic hull struc-
ture. The basic hull structure for ESWBS consists I
from 110 through 159, except 114 and 123 through 126. Items
in the basic hull structure shall not use the asterisk
(b) A digit of 2 through 9 in Column 11 indicates the
for the given item will be distributed over 2 through 9 stations
centered about the item's LCG. If enough stations are not
available to do a particular distribution, the distribution will be
done over as many stations as are available. For instance, if a
six-station distribution is required within two stations of either
end of the ship, then a four-station distribution will occur.
A1.2.1.5 Column 12, Special Designator -This column
shall contain designators established by the government.
Where no designator is applicable, this column shall be left
blank. In the event of a conflict in determining which desig--
nation is to be used, the order of precedence shall be by
alphabetical order. This designator provides for dual purpose as
follows:
1279
(a) Provides for extractions across the entire ship for
summaries, such as plates, extruded shapes, weldments, pri-
mary, secondary, and others as required.
(b) Provides for listing within the three-digit element, such
as controls, components, distribution, and others as required.
(c) The following designators are applicable:
C-
D-
E-
F-
G-
M-
P-
Controls, such as valves, switches, regulators, gear boxes, and shutters.
Distribution items, such as ducts, pipe, wire, wireways, connectors,
waveguides, propeller shafts, and propeller shaft bearings.
Plating and sheeting.
Forgings, extruded shapes, rolled shapes, built-up shapes, and castings.
Weldments.
Major components, such as air conditioner units, antennas, actuators,
batteries, blowers, boilers, compressors, computers, cranes, davits,
distillers, transmitters, receivers, transceivers, engines, fans, generators,
motors, propellers, pumps, turbines, winches, and replenishment-at-sea
(RAS) equipment.
Secondary, peripheral, and interface components, such as hydraulic
reservoirs, electrical power supplies, nonintegral tanks, filters, heat
exchangers (for system), and subbases.
A1.2.1.6 Column 13, Special Modifier -This column shall
contain a modifier established by the government for the
Column 12 designator for those items in Groups 1 through 7
only, that is, not including items of variable load. In the event
a modifier cannot be determined, a Z shall be inserted. This
modifier provides for dual purpose as follows:
WEIGHT ESTIMATE DATA FORMAT
FJRSr lJ CF DATA F0RWJ

s
ll .. (BUDGT\!!JGK1) """""' OF
"""'

I+ H I I 111 i +1+1 "I "I "11 ..f .. fuffi.<Jl .. II .. .. ..:-I .. .. ,,, .. ,", .. , .. ,m
I
""t
+fll I I I I I : I I ,-, . I II ll I
....___.. 1 : : I TT 1
_:_1 I I ,
:I ; I I I II II TTT1
; I I I I J
. I I
I :
N ljjOIJ
gg I hiJI i'i,JII + : =
HI i i liT 1111111 iTTFTII ' , LL71mrt-t-Y-t-W-1-LW
n ' I ' I I I I I " I : : I I n = I " I I 1 I I ' llT : i T ' T T r , ' n T ' "'" II- 1111,1111111 : 1111 - ' '
-1111111 I I 1 CD
0
: I i j (X)
'.J.c
1
I I
i i 0
I I I (o)
! I lliJ l 1 1 h 11 ! Jlll f-\tt
(X)
- I 111111. I: IIIII 111111
I I I I I I I I : I I I I I I I I I I I
_I_
:' I I I I I I I: II I I I I II I I
1
.,,,.,., .. ,.,,,,,w, .. J ..I.,JI .. .. .. .. ..

""' r:

:H:
:A:
:r:
-:-o.
:R:
:1:

Y-tlOIIl<SI<IN
FIG. A 1.1 Example of Navy Standard Weight Estimate Format
0 F1808 - 03 (2008)
(a) Provides for extractions across the entire ship for various
material types, such as all steel, all aluminum, and others as
required.
(b) Provides for special systems summaries across the entire
ship or within certain elements, such as all payload, all
habitability, and special systems such as hydrofoils and air
cushions.
(c) The following modifiers are applicable:
A - Aluminum.
B - Brass and bronze.
C - Copper, copper-nickel, and nickel-copper.
D - Ordinary strength steel.
E Higher strength steel.
F Fiberglass, plastic, and insulation material.
H - Habitability items, such as berthings, clothing and personal effects
stowage, leisure systems, sanitary systems, messing, personal service,
utility, and work systems. (This modifier shall supersede any material-
type modifiers.)
J - Wood material.
K Liquids.
L- Lead.
M - Miscellaneous metallic material.
N - Miscellaneous nonmetallic material.
P - Payload, which includes items that are peculiar to the specific missions
of a particular ship, such as minesweep gear on a minesweeper,
oceanographic gear on an oceanographic ship, and so forth. (This
modifier shall supersede any material modifiers.)
W - Welding, riveting, and fastening.
A1.2.1.7 Columns 14 through 45, Description -These 32
columns shall be used to describe each item adequately.
Whatever is entered as input data is reproduced exactly on the
weight estimate or report printout. Any combination of alpha-
numeric characters or blanks can be used. Clear and complete
description is essential. However, if budget weights are being
used, the description field shall be limited to 24 columns
(Columns 14 through 37). Columns 38 through 45 will then be
used for budget weights (see Al.2.1.8).
Al.2.1.8 Columns 38 through 45, Budget Weight-Budget
weight, if used, is entered in pounds on ESWBS titles only.
This allows weight values from 0 to 99 999 999 lbs (to be
entered 99999999).
Al.2.1.9 Columns 46 through 53, Unit Weight-Always
enter unit weight of any item in pounds. The broken line on the
Standard Navy Transmittal Form (NAVSEA 5230/32) between
Columns 51 and 52 provides a decimal point, allowing a unit
weight up to 999 999.99 lbs. When the unit weight is a whole
number, enter two zeroes behind the implied decimal point. If
the weight is a deduction, enter a minus sign (-)immediately
before the unit weight number.
Al.2.1.10 Columns 54 through 57, Number of Units-
Values from 0.001 to 999 units can be entered. This number is
multiplied by unit weight to produce total weight for each line
item. Unit weight, number of units, and total weight are all
printed in the detail output.
Al.2.1.11 Columns 58 through 62, Vertical Center of Grav-
ity (VCG )-These columns shall be used for entering the VCG
of each item. The VCGs shall be carried out to the hundredth
decimal place. When the VCG is a whole number, two zeroes
must be entered after the decimal point. If the VCG is negative
(a weight below the baseline), enter a minus sign immediately
before the VCG number. All VCGs are measured in feet. The
VCG will be multiplied by the computed total weight, and the
resultant vertical moment will be printed.
1281
Al.2.1.12 Columns 63 through 67, Longitudinal Center of
Gravity ( LCG )-These columns shall be used for entering the
LCG of each item. The LCG is measured in feet and carried out
to the hundredth decimal place. Always enter a positive LCG;
no sign is necessary. When the LCG is a whole number, enter
two zeroes behind the implied decimal point. The LCG will be
multiplied by the computed total weight, and the resultant
longitudinal moment will be printed.
A1.2.1.13 Column 68, LCG Sign-As previously men-
tioned, the LCG is always entered as a positive value. Enter
"F" or "A" to indicate whether the weight is located forward or
aft of the longitudinal reference datum. A blank in Column 68
is interpreted to mean "A" or aft.
Al.2.1.14 Columns 69 through 73, Transverse Center of
Gravity (TCG)-These columns shall be used for entering the
TCG of each item. The TCGs shall be carried out to the
hundredth decimal place. When the TCG is a whole number,
two zeroes must be entered after the decimal point. All TCGs
are measured in feet port or starboard of the centerline, with the
exception when port and starboard symmetry exists. If a line
item has port and starboard symmetry, the TCG is measured in
feet from the transverse center of one side (port or starboard)
of the symmetrical item. This is essential to calculate the
weight moment of inertia value of the line item. Always enter
a positive TCG; no sign is necessary. If the TCG is not
applicable, leave Columns 69 through 73 blank. The TCG will
be multiplied by the total weight, and the resultant transverse
moment will be printed.
Al.2.1.15 Column 74, TCG Sign-As mentioned previ-
ously, the TCG is always entered as a positive value. Enter "P"
or "S" to indicate whether the weight is port or starboard of the
centerline. However, when a line item has port and starboard
symmetry about the centerline, enter "X" to indicate the
transverse center of one side (port or starboard) of the
symmetrical line item. This distance will only be used to
calculate the weight moment of inertia of the line item. A blank
in Column 74 is interpreted to mean "P" or port.
Al.2.1.16 Column 75, Reservation Indicator (RES)-This
column is used to indicate reservation items or design respon-
sibility. The letter "R" shall be used to designate a reservation
item. The letters "A" through "Z" (except "R") may be used, as
required, to indicate design responsibility, such as:
H - Hull design.
M Machinery design.
E - Electrical design.
Al.2.1.17 Column 76, Reason for Change -This column is
used to indicate the reason for change as follows:
0- Nomenclature change (no weight change).
i - Contract modification change.
2 - Government-furnished material change.
3 - Change to class status, such as estimated to calculated or calculated to
actual.
4-9 and A-Z user-assigned reasons. The column appears under "CHG" in the
output.
A1.2.1.18 Column 77, Material Source Indicator --The
column is used to indicate the source of an item as follows:
G - Government-furnished material.
F - Contractor-fabricated material.
P - Contractor-purchased material.
F1808- 03 (2008)
A1.2.1.19 Column 78, Class Status-Used to indicate the
confidence of the weight value entered for the line item as
follows:
E Estimated weight.
C Calculated weight.
A- Actual (scale) weight.
V Vendor or catalog weight (to be changed to "A" upon actual weight
determination of the item).
A1.2.1.20 Columns 79 and 80, Report Number -Enter the
report number in which the change was first incorporated.
Report Number "AO" shall be used for the first submittal of
input. Line items changed before the first periodic weight
report shall carry Report Number "BO" for the first such
change, "CO" for the second, and so forth. The first periodic
weight report shall have Column 79 blank, and a "1" in
Column 80, and so forth. Deletions may contain the letters
"DD" in Columns 79 and 80, instead of a report number, or the
deletion line may be erased.
Al.2.2 Second Line of Data-The second line of data for
each item contains the gyradius data for the item and imme-
diately must follow the first line of data in the file. The format
for the second line of gyradius data is as follows:
Al.2.2.1 Columns 1 through 5, Classification Number-
These columns must contain the same five-digit classification
number as the line of weight data that precedes it in the file.
Al.2.2.2 Column 6, 1
0
Designator -An asterisk(*) must be
included in this field to designate the line as a second line
containing inertia data for the previous line.
Al.2.2.3 Columns 7 through 10, Item Number -These
columns must contain the same item number as the preceding
line that contains the weight data for the item.
A 1.2.2.4 Column 20, Shape of /
0
Item-This field is used to
indicate what kind of shape is to be used to estimate the I o for
the weight item. The following are shapes that may be used:
0 The 1
0
calculation is to be the ratio or a percentage of a three-digit
element's 1
0
1 - The 1
0
data are actual inertias.
2 - Rectangular prism.
3 - Hollow frustrum of a cone.
4 Hollow right circular cylinder.
5 - Right rectangular pyramid.
6 Hollow hemisphere.
7 Square diamond.
Drawings showing the geometry and orientation of Shapes 2
through 7 can be found in Al.2. If this field is blank or
contains a zero, the 1
0
will be calculated as a percentage of the
three-digit element specified in Columns 41 through 50.
A1.2.2.5 Column 25, Orientation of the /
0
Shape-This
field is used to define the relationship between the local
coordinate system of the I
0
item as shown in A 1.2 and the
ship's coordinate system. The entries to be used are as follows:
0 X axis of the shape as shown in Fig. A 1.2 is oriented in the ship's
longitudinal direction.
i - X axis of the shape as shown in Fig. A1.2 is oriented in the ship's
transverse direction.
2 - X axis of the shape as shown in Fig. A i .2 is oriented in the ship's
vertical direction.
NoTE Al.2-The orientation of the shape relative to the ship's
coordinate system need not have any sign for the calculation of the inertia.
For example, the inertia of the pyramid (Shape 5 in Fig. Al.2) about all
three axes is the same whether the point of the pyramid is pointing in the
positive X (to the right) or negative X direction (to the left). Therefore, for
an item that is to be modeled as a pyramid with the point oriented to the
stem of the ship, the value to be entered for the orientation in Column 25
would still be "0," which is the same as if it were pointing to the bow.
Al.2.2.6 Columns 31-40, X-Dimension -For each of the
shape definitions given in Column 20, the following informa-
tion must be entered. The format for this field is right justified
with an implied decimal point between Columns 38 and 39.
Shape (Column 20) X-dimension (Columns 31-40).
0 or Blank Blank or zero means the ratio of current weight to the
weight of the specified element (entered in the
Y-dimension field) is used to calculate the 1
0
or It (if
999 is entered in the Z-dimension field) or both,
based on the specified element's /
0
or It or both.
Percentage, which is used to calculate the item's /
0
or 1
1
or both, based on the specified element's
(entered in the Y-dimension field) /
0
or It or both. For
1% enter 100, for 0.05% enter 5, and so forth.
1
0
about the local axis oriented in the ship's
longitudinal direction.
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 X-dimension (A of Fig. A 1.2).
6 - Blank.
Al.2.2.7 For the percentage option (0 or blank in Column
20), there are two possible options for calculating the I
0
or /
1
terms or both. For the first option, the X-dimension field is left
blank, and there is a three-digit element number contained in
the Y-dimension field. For this case, the /
0
for the data line will
be calculated as a percentage of the 1
0
for the specified element.
The percentage used will be the weight of the data line to the
element weight. If 999 is entered in the Z-dimension field, the
I
1
will be calculated in a similar manner. If a percentage is
inserted in the X-dimension field and a three-digit element
number is in the Y-dimension field, the I
0
will be calculated as
the defined percentage of the I
0
for the specified element. If 999
is entered in the Z-dimension field, the It will be calculated in
a similar manner.
Al.2.2.8 Columns 41-50, Y-Dimension -For each of the
Shape (Column 20)
0 or Blank
Y-dimension (Columns 41-50).
Three-digit element on which 1
0
or 1
1
or both
percentage calculation is based. If blank, the
calculation will be based on the current three-digit
element.
1
0
about local axis oriented in the ship's transverse
direction.
2, 5, 7 Y-dimension (B of
3, 4, 6 Outer Radius (R of
Al.2.2.9 Columns 51-60, Z-Dimension -For each of the
Shape (Column 20)
0 or Blank
2,5
3,4
6, 7
1282
Z-dimension (Columns 51-60)
If blank, only the 1
0
calculation will be done using a
ratio or an entered percentage. If 999 is entered,
then both the 1
0
and It calculation will be done
using a ratio or an entered percentage.
1
0
about the local axis oriented in the ship's vertical
direction.
Z-dimension (C of
Inner Radius (r of
Blank.
F1808 - 03 (2008)
2- Rectangular Prism
z
6- Hollow Hemisphere
z
3-Hollow Frustum of a Cone
z
......
X
5-Right Rectangular Pyramid
7-Square Diamond
z
I
a ~
FIG. A 1.2 Shapes for 1
0
Calculation
Al.2.2.10 Columns 61-70, T-Dimension --For each of the
shape definitions given in Column 20, the informa-
1283
F1808- 03 (2008)
Shape (Column 20) T-dimension (Columns 61-70).
0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 7
or Blank Blank.
3, 6 Thickness (t of Fig. A 1.2).
Al.2.2.11 Columns 79-80, Report Number-Enter the re:..
port number in which the change was first incorporated as
described for the first line of data.
A 1.3 General Input Data Requirements:
Al.3.1 Load Titles-Line items for titles shall be prepared
for each required load condition, and for each load element
comprising that condition, in accordance with ESWBS in the
following format:
Column 1 - Alpha load condition designator.
Columns 2 and 3 Load element number.
Columns 4 and 5 - Zeroes.
Column 10 - Zero.
Columns 14 through 37 -Load element title.
Al.3.2 Load Details-Loads for ESWBS are classified in
much the same manner as light ship elements in Groups 1
through 7 and follow the same format. Input data must be
prepared for all detail load items comprising the full-load
condition (F in Column 1). The letters "A" through "L" are
used in Column 1 to indicate various other loading conditions.
Al.3.3 Margins-Margins for ESWBS are classified in
accordance with ESWBS. The weight and moment of each
margin will be distributed automatically over the 22 longitu-
dinal stations in proportion to the light ship weight distribution.
The margins either can be input as a total weight or as a
percentage of total light ship displacement. Line items for
margins are prepared in a similar manner to light ship details.
The first line item of the margin group shall be a title of the
form "MOOOO-O-Margins," beginning in Column 1. Margin
depletions are handled as negative detail weight entries, in the
same manner as light ship details, and follow the same format.
Margin options are as follows:
Al.3.3.1 Option 1, Input Weight-Enter the total margin
weight in pounds in Columns 46 through 53 and centers of
gravity as desired. All or any centers of gravity may be left
blank. The margins will then be automatically positioned at the
light ship centers of gravity.
A1.3.3.2 Option 2, Percentage-Margin may be computed
as a percentage of total light ship. In the unit weight, Columns
46 through 53, enter the percentage desired (for example: 4 %
= 4.00). Enter zero in Column 57 of number of units. Centers
of gravity may be entered or left blank. If left blank, margins
be at centers of gravity.
Al.3.4 Titles-Titles for Groups 1 through 7 are included in
the Navy program. All other titles shall be prepared by the user.
A title shall be prepared for each of the ESWBS elements.
A1.4 Data Transfer-Input data files, when required by the
contract or ship specifications, shall be transferred on elec-
tronic media and in ASCII format.
APPENDIX
Xl. SUGGESTED FORMS FOR WEIGHT ESTIMATION
Xl.l The suggested forms for weight estimation are shown
in Xl.l-X1.8.
1284
_.
N
00
Vl
STABILITY AND TRIM CALCULATION
CONDITION ITEM
HUll STRUCTURE
OUTFIT
MACHINERY
SUBTOTAL
FIXED BAllAST
SUBTOTAl
WEIGHT MARGIN %
--
KG MARGIN
TOTAL SHIP IN CONDITION LIGHT SHIP
MEAN S.W. DRAFT
KM
KG
GM
CORR. FOR F.S.
GM AVAILABLE
GM REQUIRED
SHIP
CONDITION
CG ABOVE BASE
DISPL. AND VERT VERTICAl
WEIGHT LEVER MOMENTS
LCG
LCB
TRIM LEVER FWD, AFT
MOMENT TO TRIM
-
TRIM IN FWD, AFT
--
FIG. X1.1 Sample Form #1
DATE BY
CG FROM
lONG. lONG. lONG.
AFT AFTER FWD
LEVER MOMENTS li!:VER
LCF
DRAFT FWD.
DRAFT AFT
I SHEET
LONG FREE SURFACE
FORWARD
MOMENTS
I I
0
.,
...&
0)
0
co
I
0
w
-N
0
0
ClO
-
0 F1808- 03 (2008)
HULL STRUCTURE
(Weight Calculations)
CODE ITEM WEIGHT VERT. VERT. LONG. LONG.
LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
0-0 Stem casting
1 Stern frame casting
2 Boss casting
3 Shaft struts
4 Misc. Hull Castings
5
6
7
8
9
Forgings and Castings
1-0 Flat Plate keel
1 Shell plating
2 Bulwarks
3 Bilge keels
4 Boss plating
5 Rubbing strips and fenders
6 Sea Chests I Skin coolers
7 Skegs
8 Thruster Tunnels I Wells
9
Shell Plating
2-0 Center vertical keel
1 Trans. framing in 1.8.
2 Long. framing in 1.8.
3 Trans. framing outside 1.8.
4 Framing in peaks
5 Transom and cants
6 Web frames
7 Long'! Girder Ring
8 Long'l Stringer Ring
9
Framing
3-0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Deck Plating and Beams
4-0 Main trans. W.T. bhds.
1 Trans. W.T. and O.T. bhds
2 Long. W.T. and O.T. bhds
3 Structural N.W.T. bhds
4 Non-structural bhds
5 Trunks - structural
6 Trunks - non-structural
7 Stair enclosures
8 Hatch Coamings
9 Drill Wells I Leg Wells
Bulkheads end Trunks
DESIGN DATE DIMENSIONS
1286
F1808- 03 (2008)
HULL STRUCTURE
LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
5-0 Pillars and Girders
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pillars and Girders
6-0 Inner Bottom Plating
1 Platform Deck
2 Sponsons
3 Cantilevers
4 Cofferdam Flats & Floors
5 Helicopter Platform
6 Miscellaneous Flats and Floors
7 Stability Column Support Legs
8 Protective Covers I Barriers
9
Hull Miscellaneous
7-0 Main Engine Foundations
1 Boiler Foundations
2 Auxiliary Machine Foundations
3 Shaft Stools Foundations
4 Miscellaneous Foundations
5 Cryogenic I Chemical Foundations
6
7
8
9
Foundations
8-0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 Miscellaneous Houses
9 Stack Enclosure
Superstructures
SUB TOTAl GROUPS 0 THROUGH 8
9-0 Riveting and Welding
1 Welding
2 Mill Tolerance
3
4
5
6
7
Riveting and Welding
TOTAL HULl STRUCTURE
DESIGN DATE DIMENSIONS
1287
c4@f F1808- 03 (2008)
OUTFIT SUMMARY
LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
10-0 Steel Masts, Kingposts, etc.
1 Steel Booms
2 Steel Hatch Covers and Beams
3 Steel Stairways
4 Steel Sheet Metal Work
5 Drill Derricks
6 Self-Unloading Booms
7
8
9
Struc. Steel in Outfit
11-0 Deck Castings, Mooring Ftgs.
1 Mast and Spar Forgings
2 Rails and Stanchions
3 Ladders
4 Miscellaneous Hull Fittings
5 Ratproofing
6 Guide Struc. I Lashings
7 Prim. Cryogenic Contain.
8 Sec. Cryogenic Contain.
9 Tug I Barge Connections
Hull Attachments
12-0 Sliding W. T. Doors
1 Hinged W.T. Doors
2 Manholes and Scuttles
3 Airports, Windows and Lights
4 Hatches and Ports O.T. or W.T.
5 N.W.T. Steel Doors
6 Skylights and Companions
7 Movable Ramps
Lights, Doors Hatches, Ramps
13-0 Wooden Masts and Spars
1 Wood Hatch Covers
2 Hold Ceiling and Sparring
3 Miscellaneous Carpenter Work
4 Wood Decks
5 Wood Houses
6 Composition Dk. Covering
7 Sheet I Block Dk. Tile
8 Ceramic I Misc. Dk. Tile
9 Cement and Misc. Coverings
Carpenter Work and Decking
14-0 Interior Joiner Work
1 Furniture
2
3 Joiner Decks
4 Decorative Joiner Work
5 Accomodation Ladder
6
7 Special Insulation
8 Insulation in Quarters
9 Fire Insulation
Joiner Work
DESIGN DATE
1288
F1808 - 03 (2008)
OUTFIT SUMMARY
LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
15-0 Anchors, Chains, Lines
1 Boats and Boat Handling
2 Rigging and Blocks
3 Canvas Work
4 Miscellaneous Deck Outfit
5 Underwater Support Equipment
6 Exterior Paint
7 Interior Paint
8 Tank Paint
9 Special Coatings
Deck Outfit
16-0 Galley and Pantry Equipment
1 Utility Space Equipment
2 Steward's Outfit
3
4
5
6
7 National Defense
8
9
Steward's Outfit I Defense
17-0 Fire Det. and Ext. System
1 Heating System
2 Ventilation - Natural
3 Ventilation - Mechanical
4 Refrigerating Systems
5 Plumbing Fixtures and Drains
6
7
Hull Engineering
18-0 Bilge and Ballast System
1 Cargo Oil System
2 Deck Steam and Ex. System
3 Fire Mains
4 San. and Fresh Water System
5 Fuel Oil Transfer System
6 Vents, Snd. and Overflows
7 Cryogenic I Chern. Cargo Sys.
8 lnerting I Nitrogen System
9 Hydraulic System
Piping
19-0 Deck Machinery
1 Steer. Gear and Rudder
2 Communicating System
3 Electric Plant
4 Dumb Waiters and Elevators
5 Auxiliary Boiler
6 Dest. Plant (ship use)
7 Stabilizers
8 Thrusters
9 Bulk Unloading
Miscellaneous Machinery
TOTAL OUTFIT
DESIGN DATE
1289
0 F1808- 03 (2008)
MACHINERY SUMMARY
lEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
20-0 Main Propulsion
1 Turbine Drain and Leak-Off System
2 Main Reduction Gears

3 Main Condenser
4 Main Air Ejector
5 Main Circulating System
6
7
TOTAl- Main Propulsion Units
21-0 Feed Heaters
1 Feed and Condensate System
2
3
TOTAL- Feed and Condensate Equip.
22-0 Makeup Feed System
1 Contaminated System
2 Salt Water Evap. System
3
4
TOTAL - Evaporator System
23-0 Shafting
1 Bearings and Stern Tube
2 Propellers
3 Miscellaneous Shafting Parts
4 Shafting and Propeller Spares
5
6
TOTAl - Shafting and Propellers
24-0 Lub. Oil System
1 Miscellaneous Engine Oil Tanks
2
3
TOTAL- lubricating Oil System
25-0 Service Compressed Air Serv. Sys.
1 Starting Air System
2 Scavenger Air System
3
4
TOTAL- AIR SYSTEM
DESIGN DATE
TYPE SHIP RPM
1290
0 F1808- 03 (2008)
-
MACHINERY SUMMARY
LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
26-0 Boilers
~
1 Fuel Oil Burners
2 Soot Blowers
3 Boiler Draft System
4 Automatic Combustion Control
5 Stacks and Uptakes
6 F.O. Service System
7 LNG Boil Off System
8
TOTAl Boilers
27-0 Main Steam Piping
1 Auxiliary Steam Piping
2 Exhaust and Escape Piping
3 Steam Drain System
4 Whistles
' ~
5
6
TOTAL Steam Piping
' ' ~
28-0 Access
1 Work Shop
2 lifting and Handling Gear
3 Machinery Space Ventilation
4 Machinery Space Fixtures
5 Spare Parts
6 Miscellaneous Instruments and Gages
7
8
TOTAl- Miscellaneous
29-0 liquids in Machinery (Gr. 12-19)
1 Water (Gr. 20-28)
2 Oil (Gr. 20-28)
3
4
TOTAL- Liquids in Machinery
TOTAl MACHINERY
DESIGN DATE
TYPE SHIP RPM
1291
WORK SHEET - WEIGHT CALCULATIONS
GROUP NO. .I DESIGN
I DATE I BY I SHEET
ITEM
I QTY I
UNIT I
WEIGHT VERT.
I
VERT.
I
LONG.
T
lONG.
I
REMARKS
WT. LEV. MOM. LEV. MOM.
0
"'"
_,.
co
t::;
II
\0
tv I I I I
I -
I I I II
0
co
I
0
w
-
N
0
0
co
-
F1808 - 03 (2008)
COPYRIGHT!).
1293
c6 Designation: F1835-97 (Reapproved 2012)'
1
14
UII
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Cable Splicing Installations
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides direction and recommends cable
materials and methods that would the
ments of extensive cable splicing in modular ship construction
and offers sufficient information and data to assist the
builder in evaluating this option of cable splicing for future
ship construction.
1.2 This guide deals with cable splicing at a generic level
and details a method that will satisfy the vast majority of cable
splicing applications.
1.3 This guide covers acceptable methods of cable splicing
used in shipboard cable systems and provides information on
current applicable technologies and additional information that
the shipbuilder may use in decision making for the cost
effectiveness of splicing in electrical cable installations.
1.4 This guide is limited to applications of 2000 V or less,
but most of the materials and methods discussed are adaptable
to higher voltages, such as 5-kV systems. The cables of this
guide relate to all marine cables, domestic and foreign,
commercial or U.S. Navy.
1.5 The values stated in SI units shall be regarded as
standard. The values given in parentheses are inch-pound units
and are for information only.
tion of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on and
Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee on
Electrical.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2012. Published October 2012. Originally
DOl: 10.1520/F1835-97R12E01.
2
the ASTM website.
3.
in October 2012.
B8 Specification for
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
D2671 Test Methods for Heat-Shrinkable
trical Use
2.2 IEEE Standards:
for
IEEE 45 Recommended Practice for Electrical Installations
on Shipboard
3
2.3 UL Standards:
4
UL STD 224 Extruded Insulating Tubing
UL STD 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering for Use
with Conductors
2.4 IEC Standards:
rEC 228 Conductors of Insulated
2.5 Federal Regulations:
Title 46 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Shipping
6
MIL-T-16366 Terminals, Electric Lug and Conductor
Crimp-Style
MIL-T-7928 Terminals, Conductors,
Copper
3.1.1 adhesive, n-a wide range of materials used exten-
sively for bonding and sealing; coating added to the inner wall
of heat-shrinkable tubing to seal the enclosed area
moisture. Adhesive is for pressure retention and load-bearing
applications (see also sealant).
3.1.2 barrel, n-the portion of a terminal that is crimped;
designed to receive the conductor, it is called the wire barrel.
3.1.3 butt connector, n-a connector in which two conduc-
tors come together end to end with their axes in line, but do not
overlap.
3
4
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd.,
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
5
Available from the International Electrotechnical Commission, 3 rue de
Varembe, Case Postale 131, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland.
6
1294
F1835 - 97 (2012)e
1
3.1.4 butt splice, n-device for joining conductors by butt-
ing them end to end.
3.1.5 circumferential crimp, n-final configuration of a
barrel made when crimping dies completely surround the barrel
and form symmetrical indentations.
3.1.6 compression connector; n-connector crimped by an
externally applied force; the conductor is also by such
force inside the tube-like connector
3.1.7 cold-shrink tubing, n-tubular rubber sleeves that are
ex]Jarlded and assembled onto a removable core. No
heat used in installation. Also known as tubing
(PST).
3. 1.8 connectors, n-tubular copper connectors made
to match various wire sizes and fastened to the conductor ends
die, n-portion of the tool that
3.1.10 crimping tool, n-a mechanical device, which is used
to fasten electrical connectors to cable conductors forcefully
compressing the connector onto the conductor. This tool may
have interchangeable dies or "jaws" to fit various connec-
tors.
3.1.11 heat-shrink tubing, n-electrical insulation tubing of
a polyolefin material, which shrink in diameter from an
expanded size to a predetermined size by the application of
heat. It is available in various diameter sizes.
3.1.12 primary insulation, n-the layer of material that is
designed to do the electrical insulating, usually the first layer of
material applied over the conductor.
3.1.13 sealant, n-inner-wall coating optional to shrinkable
tubing to prevent ingress of moisture to the enclosed area (see
also adhesive).
3.1.14 splice, n-a joint connecting conductors with good
mechanical strength and good conductivity.
3 .1.15 tensile, n-amount of axial load required to break or
pull wire from the crimped barrel of a terminal or splice.
4.1 Splicing of cables in the shipbuilding industry, both in
Navy and commercial undertakings, has been concentrated in
repair, conversion, or overhaul programs. However, many
commercial industries, including aerospace and nuclear power,
have standards defining cable splicing methods and materials
that establish the quality of the splice to prevent loss of power
or signal, ensure circuit continuity, and avoid potential cata-
strophic failures. This guide presents cable splicing techniques
and hardware for application to commercial and Navy ship-
building to support the concept of modular construction.
4.2 This guide resulted from a study that evaluated the
various methods of cable splicing, current technologies, prior
studies and recommendations, performance testing, and the
expertise of manufacturers and shipbuilders in actual cabling
splicing techniques and procedures.
4.3 The use of this guide by a shipbuilder will establish
cabling splicing systems that are: simple and safe to install;
waterproof; corrosion- and impact-resistant; industry accepted
with multiple suppliers available; low--cost methods; and suit-
able for marine, Navy, and IEC cables.
5. General Requirements for Cable Splicing
5.1 Cable splicing requires that cable joints be insulated and
sealed with an insulation equal in electrical and mechanical
properties to the original cable. Cable splicing shall consist of
a conductor connector, replacement of conductor insulation,
replacement of the overall cable jacket, and where applicable,
reestablishment of shielding in shielded cables and electric
continuity in the armor of armored cables.
5.2 Nonsplice Applications-Unacceptable areas for cable
are established by regulations and concern the restric-
tion of being unable to splice cables in defined hazardous areas.
Hazardous areas are locations in which fire or
hazards may exist as a result of flammable gases or vapors,
flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or
flyings.
6. Cable Splicing
6.1 Cable splicing as presented in this guide uses a system
of compression-crimp, tubular-metal connectors for butt con-
nection of cable conductors and insulating systems of shrink-
able tubing to reinsulate the individual conductors and
the overall cable jacket.
6.2 Crimp Connectors-For splice connection of
conductors, compression-crimped connectors shall be used for
joining an electrical conductor (wire) to another conductor. The
joint requires proper compression to achieve good electrical
performance while not overcompressing and mechanically
damaging the conductor. Compression connections are accom-
plished by applying a controlled force on a barrel sleeve to the
conductor with special tools and precision dies.
1295
6.3 Conductor Reinsulation-Thin-wall shrinkable tubing
shall be used to reinsulate the conductor and the installed
connector. The insulation tubing, when shrunk or recovered,
shall be equal in electrical and mechanical properties to the
original conductor insulation. Tubing used for conductor rein-
sulation does not require an interior adhesive sealant coating.
6.4 Cable Jacket Reinsulation-Shrinkable tubing shall be
used to envelop the overall splice. To satisfy more abusive
conditions that cable jackets are exposed to, a flame-retardant,
thick-wall tubing construction with factory applied sealant
shall be used.
7. Cable Preparation
7.1 Cables to be spliced shall be prepared to the dimensions
specified in 1 and 2. l provides cable preparation
for power cables from single to four conductor sizes. Dimen-
sions for multiple conductor cables (conductor size of No. 14
or less) are shown in 2.
7.2 Care must be exercised when preparing the cable ends
so that conductor insulation is not cut when removing the
overall cable jacket, shield, or cable armor, where applicable.
Similar care is required when removing the individual shield or
F1835 - 97 (2012)
81

TWO
CONDUCTOR
CABI.
fOOR
CONDUCTOR
CABlE
SIZE

(A WG or MCM) 1/C
16to 10 203 127 so 76 102
(8) (5) (2) (3) (4)
9to4 279 178 76 76 152
(11) (7) (3) (3) (6)
3 to 110 330 203 76 102 152
(13) (8) (3) (4) (6)
2JOto250 381 2.S4 127 102 2.54
(15) (10) (5) (4) (10)
300to500 495 330 165 102 330
(19.5) (13) (6.5) (4) (13)
650to2000
- 254 102 508
(10) (4) (20)

All dimensions are in millimeters (inches are shown in parenthesis).
F
2JC 3/C
178 2.54
(7) (10)
2.54 356
(10) (14)
7:19 406
(11) (16)
381 508
(lS) (20)
495 660
(19.5) (26)
- -
4/C 1/C 1/C
330 2.S4 330
(13) (10) (13)
406 305 406
(16) (12) (16)
584 356 483
(23) (14) (19)
635 457 584
(2S) (18) (23}
-
533 699
(21) (27.5)
-
711
(28)
Dimension A equals half the connector length plus 3 mm (1/8-incb). Bare copper on each conductor equals A.
FIG. 1 Splice Dimensions for Power Cables
1296
G
3/C
406.4 559
(16) (22}
508 660
(20) (26)
610 813
(24) (32)
711 914
(28) (36)
864
(34)
-
F1835 - 97 (2012)E
1
I*
.,.lTr
F
l
*l
i---- limfilii.l

-
= esa

&5fiiliil

LaJ LaJ J c L
SPUCES DIMENSIONS FOR CONTROL CABLES
NO. OF 1-9 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 60-69 70-79 80-90
CONDUCTORS
DIMENSION 127 203 254 305 356 406 457 508 610
F (5) (8) (10) (12) (14) (16) (18) (20) (24)
LEGEND:
All dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
9 Conductor cable shown above.
"A" equals lh connector length plus 3 nun (1/8-inch).
"B" equals 4A (distance from any adjacent butt splice.
"C" equals 4A (distance from cable sheath from either end).
"F" equals the length of stripped back cable jacket for wire, W\Shielded, sizes No. 18 to No. 14.
..
For armored cables, it is recommended that the armor be stripped back approximately 75 mm (3-inches)
for overlapping of cable jacket replacement with shrink tubing.
FIG. 2 Splice Dimensions for Control-Multiple Conductor Cables
insulation protecting the conductor to prevent cuts or nicks on
the individual conductor strands.
7 .2.1 Insulation cutting tools that limit depth of cut should
be used to prepare cable ends so that underlying insulation is
not cut. Similar care is required when removing the individual
conductor insulation to protect the conductor copper strands
from nicks and cuts.
7.2.2 Cable preparation shall result in stripping the indi-
vidual conductors so that the bare copper is long enough to
reach the full depth of the butt connector plus 3.2 mm (lfs in.).
1297
7.3 Match the geometrical arrangement between cables to
be spliced using conductor color code identification to elimi-
nate crossovers or mismatch when splicing.
7.4 Cable ends shall be in or near their final position before
being spliced.
8. Materials and Tools
8.1 Cable Splicing Materials-The following sections pro-
vide an overview of the various splice materials. In addition,
cO F1835 - 97 (2012)
1
specific recommendations and suggested guidelines are offered
that would enhance the cable splicing process.
8.1.1 Crimp-Type Connectors-Splice connectors shall be
compression-type, butt connectors conforming to the require-
ments of UL STD 486A and shall be satisfactory to Section
20.11 of IEEE 45.
8.1.1.1 Connector shall be seamless, tin-plated copper.
8.1.1.2 Butt connector shall have positive center wire stops
for proper depth of conductor insertion.
8.1.1.3 Connectors shall be marked with wire size for easy
identification.
8.1.1.4 Connector shall have inspection holes to allow
visual inspection for proper wire insertion.
8.1.1.5 Butt connector for wire sizes No. 10 (AWG) or
larger shall be the "long barrel" type to permit multiple crimps
on each side of the connector for greater tensile strength. The
conductor ends shall be fully inserted to the "stop" at the center
of the connector. For smaller conductor sizes (No. 10 AWG or
less), a single crimp should be spaced half way between the
end of the connector and the center wire stop.
8.1.1.6 Connector shall be color-coded in accordance with
Table or Table 2.
8.1.2 Conductor Reinsulating Material-To reinsulate the
conductor and the installed connector, heat-shrink tubing shall
be used. (see 3).
8.1.2.1 When recovered or shrink, the tubing used shall be
equal to or greater than the thickness of the original conductor
insulation.
8.1.2.2 Shrink tubing used for conductor reinsulation shall
be heat-shrink tubing. The tubing shall be thin-wall cross-
linked polyolefin tubing, flame-retardant (FR-1) construction
in accordance with UL STD 224 requirements. Performance
requirements shall include:
Shrink ratio
Operating temperature range
Minimum shrinkage temperature
Longitudinal shrinkage
Electrical rating
Dielectric strength in accordance with
Test Methods D2671
2:1
-55 to +135C
+121C
5%
600-V continuous operation
19.7 kV/mm (500 V/mil) min
8.1.2.3 Shrink tubing to cover the connection of individual
conductors does not require an interior coating of adhesive
(mastic) sealant.
8.1.3 Cable Jacket Replacement Materials--Several meth-
ods and a variety of materials are available that will provide the
mechanical protection, moisture-sealing properties, and elec-
trical performance characteristics needed in a cable splice. For
a splice reliability and ease of installation replacement of cable
jacket and to envelop the splice area, however, either the
heat-shrink or the cold-shrink (prestretched) type shall be used.
8.1.3.1 The tubing used, when recovered or shrunk, shall be
equal to or greater than the thickness of the original conductor
insulation (see Table 3).
8.1.3.2 The tubing used for cable jacket replacement shall
be thick wall, also referred to as heavy-duty shrink tubing,
cross-linked polyolefin tubing.
8.1.3.3 Shrink tubing shall be flame retardant (FR-1) in
accordance with UL STD 224 requirements.
8.1.3.4 Tubing used for rejacketing of a splice bundle shall
have an interior coating of adhesive (mastic) sealant.
8.1.3.5 Table provides dimensions for thick-wall tubing
used for rejacketing of cables.
TABLE 1 Connector Data Units)
Conductor Size AWG or Connector Overall Depth of Each Side of Overall Diameter of
Color CodeA
MCM Designation Length (min) Barrel (min) Barrel (Approximate) Diameter, in.
22 % 1/4 0.150 0.025
20 5fs % 0.150 0.039
18 5/a 1/4 0.150 0.049
16 5/a 1/4 0.150 0.061
14 5/a 1/4 0.150 0.077
12 %
5
/16 0.212 0.092
10 %
5
/16 0.212 0.108
8 1% 13/16 % red 0.146 2
6 2% 11/a
5
/16 blue 0.184 2
4 2% 11/a
5
/16 gray 0.226 2
3 2% 11/4 3/a white 0.254 2
2 2% 1%
7
/16 brown 0.282 2
2
7
/a 1% 112 green 0.317 4
1/o 2
7
/s 1% 1/2 pink 0.363 4
2/o 31/a 1%
9
/16 black 0.407 4
% 31/a 1% % orange 0.457 4
4/o 3% 1%
1
V1a purple 0.514 4
250 MCM 3%
15/s % yellow 0.577 4
300 MCM 41/a 2
1
3/16 white 0.628 4
350 MCM 41/a 2 7/s red 0.682 4
500 MCM 4% 2% iV15 brown 0.742 4
600 MCM 5%
213!ts 1% green 0.893 4
750 MCM 6 2
15
/16 1% black 0.998 4
3 1% white 1.180 4
A Recommended colors for connectors; however, variances do exist between manufacturers.
8
For conductors No. 1 or larger, the type of crimping tool used determines the number of crimps to be made. Number and location of compression points (crimps) shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1298
F1835- 97 (2012)E
1
TABLE 2 Connector Data (Metric)
Conductor Size AWG or Connector Overall Depth of Each Side of
MCM Designation Length (min) Barrel (Min)
Overall Diameter of
Color CodeA
Barrel (Approximate)
Conductor Nominal
Diameter, mm
Number of Crimps/
End
8
22 16.0 6.5 4.0
20 16.0 6.5 4.0
18 16.0 6.5 4.0
16 16.0 6.5 4.0
14 16.0 6.5 4.0
12 19.0 8.0 5.5
10 19.0 8.0 5.5
8 45.0 21.0 6.5
6 60.0 29.0 8.0
4 60.0 29.0 8.0
3 67.0 32.0 9.5
2 67.0 :32.0 9.5
73.0 35.0 13.0
1
/o 73.0 35.0 13.0
2fo 80.0 39.0 14.5
3
/o 80.0 39.0 14.5
4fo
86.0 41.0 17.5
250 MCM 86.0 41.0 17.5
300 MCM 105.0 51.0 22.0
350 MCM 105.0 51.0 22.0
500 MCM 118.0 57.0 27.0
600 MCM 146.0 72.0 32.0
750 MCM 153.0 75.0 35.0
1000 MCM 156.0 76.0 38.0
A Recommended colors for connectors; however, variances do exist between manufacturers.
red
blue
gray
white
brown
green
pink
black
orange
purple
yellow
white
red
brown
green
black
white
0.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
6.5
7.5
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.5
13.0
15.0
16.0
17.5
19.0
23.0
25.5
30.0
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
For conductors No. 1 or larger, the type of crimping tool used determines the number of crimps to be made. Number and location of compression points (crimps) shall
be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.2 (0.046) 0.6 (0.023)
1.6 (0.063) 0.8 (0.032)
2.4 (0.093) 1.2 (0.046)
3.2 (0.125) 1.6 (0.062)
4.8 (0.187) 2.4 (0.093)
6.4 (0.250) 3.2 (0.125)
9.5 (0.375) 4.8 (0.187)
12.7 (0.500) 6.5 (0.250)
19.0 (0.750) 9.5 (0.375)
25.5 (1.000) 12.7 (0.500)
38.0 (1.500) 19.0 (0.750)
50.8 (2.000) 25.4 (1.000)
76.2 (3.000) 38.0 (1.500)
102.0 (4.000) 51.0 (2.000)
Heat Shrink Thick-Wall Tubing for Cable Jacket Replacement
Recovered Wall Thickness
0.40 (0.016)
0.43 (0.017)
0.51 (0.020)
0.51 (0.020)
0.51 (0.020)
0.64 (0.025)
0.64 (0.025)
0.64 (0.025)
0.76 (0.030)
0.89 (0.035)
1.00 (0.040)
1.20 (0.045)
1.30 (0.050)
1.40 (0.055)
Range of Cable DiameterA
Expanded I.D. (min) Fully Recovered I.D. (max) Fully Recovered Wall Thickness
(Nominal)
... to 7.5-----(,-.. -:. t-o-=o-=.3:-::-0,..-)------- 10.0 (0.40) ---3:::--.:::--8 ___ _
5.5 to 13.0 (0.22 to 0.50) 19.0 (0.75) 6.0 (0.220) 2.7 (0.105)
10.0 to 22.0 (0.40 to 0.87) 28.0 (1.10) 9.5 (0.375) 3.0 (0.120)
14.0 to 28.0 (0.55 to 1.1 0) 38.0 (1.50) 13.0 (0.500) 3.6 (0.140)
22.0 to 44.5 (0.87 to 1.75) 51.0 (2.00) 19.5 (0.750) 3.5 (0.155)
38.0 to 70.0 (1.50 to 2.75) 76.0 (3.00) 32.0 (1.250) 3.5 (0.155)
51.0 to 98.0 (2.00 to 3.85) 102.0 (4.00) 44.5 (1.750) 3.5 (0.155)
Range of Cable DiameterA
2.5 to 9.9 (0.1 o to 0.39)
8
9.9 to 18.0 (0.39 to 0.70)
12.5 to 25.0 (0.51 to 1.00)
17.5 to 33.0 (0.69 to 1.30)
24.0 to 48.0 (0.95 to 1.90)
32.5 to 63.5 (1.28 to 2.50)
Legend-All dimensions are in millirnetres (inches).
Cold Shrink Tubing for Cable Jacket Replacement
Fully Recovered I.D. (max)
6.5 (0.25)
6.5 (0.25)
8.5 (0.34)
11.0 (0.46)
15.0 (0.62)
21.0 (0.84)
A "Range of Cable Diameter" refers to the actual "Splice Bundle Diameter" that may be slightly larger than the cable diameter.
8
Requires slip-on adapters.
1299
Fully Recovered Wall Thickness
(Nominal)
3.8 (0.15)
3.8 (0.15)
4.0 (0.16)
4.3 (0.17)
4.5 (0.18)
4.5 (0.18)
F1835- 97 (2012)E
1
8.1.3.6 Tubing shall have the following performance re-
quirements:
Shrink ratio
Operating temperature range
Minimum shrinkage temperature (for
heat-shrink tubing)
Longitudinal shrinkage
Electrical rating
Dielectric strength in accordance with
Test Methods 02671
3:1
-55 to + 135C
+121C
5%
600-V continuous operation
7.9 kV/mm (200 V/mil) min
8.1.4 Shield Terminations-Cables that require continued
shielding shall have at least a 13-mm (1/2-in.) overlap between
the replacement shielding material and the permanent shielding
and shall be attached with either solder-type connectors or a
mechanical connection using inner and outer compression
(crimp-type) rings.
8.2 Splicing Tools:
8.2.1 Cable Preparation-The basic tools required for cable
splice preparation include a cable cutter, measuring tape or
ruler, and a wire insulation stripper. Following the cable
preparation, the types of tools required to complete a cable
splice include the crimp tool for compression of the butt
connectors and a heat source for reducing heat-shrinkable
tubing.
8.2.2 Crimping Tools-The crimp compression method for
making electrical cable splices as recommended in this guide
consists of compressing a butt connector onto the wire very
tightly so that good metal-to-metal contact is achieved. A
crimping tool is necessary so that the process is controlled, the
crimp is made easily and correctly and can be reproduced
reliably.
8.2.2.1 This guide recommends the use of compression
systems that coordinate connectors, crimping tools and dies,
and include built-in installation and inspection features that
prevent improper field connections.
8.2.2.2 The crimping tool shall be a single-cycle type,
requiring full-cycle compression before release. Full-cycle
control requires the crimping tool to be closed to its fullest
extent, thereby completing the crimping cycle before the tool
can be opened.
8.2.2.3 Mechanical-type (manual) compression tools used
for crimping connectors shall be one-cycle devices and require
full compression before release.
8.2.2.4 Hydraulic crimping devices shall have an emer-
gency release mechanism to abort the crimp cycle if necessary.
8.2.2.5 Crimp tool shall allow easy visual field check for
proper tool adjustment with butting surfaces.
8.2.2.6 Crimping tool and crimp dies shall result in
circumferential-shaped configuration.
8.2.3 Heat Guns-Heat-shrink tubing installation requires
that the source of heat be controllable. Limited electric heat
guns and hot air blowers that are portable and provide even
controlled heat at nozzle temperatures of 260 to 399C (500 to
7 50F) are recommended devices for installing heat -shrink
tubing. Propane torches shall be used with extreme care.
Torches shall not be used to shrink thin-wall tubing.
9.1 General Guidelines for Quality Assurance-For exten-
sive cable splicing activities, such as found with modular ship
1300
construction techniques, that a material control program and a
personnel training program that includes certification of per-
sonnel for both splicing installation and inspection are recom-
mended. Quality control issues are of major significance and
should be controlled and monitored by the shipbuilder before,
during, and following cable splicing. A cable splicing program
as envisioned for modular ship construction should include use
of only approved materials and devices, only qualified person-
nel to make the electrical cable splices, and should establish
inspection procedures using only qualified inspectors to verify
proper installation.
9.2 Material Control-Since crimping is a mechanical pro-
cess and, by controlling the material and dimensional proper-
ties of the conductor, the butt connector, and the crimp tool, the
reliability of the crimped connection may be controlled closely.
An in-process quality assurance program based on controlled
distribution of materials and tools should be established. For
installation tools, the program should include inspections to
assure that:
9.2.1 Splicing equipment shall be inspected before the first
use each month to verify the performance of insulation removal
devices and of crimping tools.
9.2.2 Crimp tool dies shall be checked before the first use
each month for correct tolerances.
9.3 Material Procurement; Recommended Use of Kits-A
material control program should adopt the use of cable splice
kits. Splice kits may be procured directly from a number of
qualified manufacturers or can be assembled by the shipbuilder
from quantity-purchased materials for the various types and
sizes of materials necessary. All kits shall be for one-to-one
cable splices. For selection of cable-splice kit, the following
minimum information should be established:
9.3.1 Number of conductors in the cable.
9.3.2 Size (gage) of each conductor,
9.3.3 Ground wire size, if included.
9.3.4 Shielded or nonshielded; individual, overall.
9.3.5 Only one splice per kit is recommended, with basic
materials of the kit to include butt connectors, conductor
reinsulation material, cable jacket replacement material, and
shield braid sleeve connectors, when required.
10. Installation
10.1 Installation Guidelines-Various factors and condi-
tions are significant in contributing to a successful splice.
These items are summarized in this section as installation
guidelines for the use of shipbuilders and others. These basic
factors should be emphasized in any quality assurance or
training programs established in support of a major cable
splicing program.
10.2 Splice Locations-There are no significant differences
in installing vertical splicing and horizontal splicing, however
after splicing is completed on a cable, the cable should be
supported as close as possible to the splice. For extensive
splicing at section interfaces, it is recommended that individual
cable connections be staggered and where appropriate, the
cables fanned out from one row to a double row for space to
ease installation and avoid derating of cables.
F1835- 97 (2012)E
1
10.3 Important Splicing Factors:
10.3.1 The crimping device shall be matched properly to the
splice connector and wire size.
10.3.2 Splicing material should be kept as clean as possible
during application so that foreign matter or contaminants are
not within the splice. Lightly abrade and solvent clean the
cable jacket a minimum of 153 mm (6-in.) from the jacket
cutback edge.
10.3.3 Proper installation requires that the shrink tubing
should be centered over the installed splice connector and the
cable jacket replacement over the splice area.
10.4 Dimensions:
1 0.4.1 Length of the replacement insulation tubing shall be
57.2 mm (2
1
/4 in.) longer than the buit-crimp connector iength
(see Table 1 and Table 2).
10.4.2 The replacement jacket shall overlap the original
cable jacket by either 76.2 or 101.6 mm (3 or 4 in.) min at each
end as shown in 1 or 2.
10.4.3 Shrink-tubing dimensions shall be as shown in Table
3 for conductor reinsulation or for cable jacket replacement.
10.5 Heating-For heat-shrinkable tubing, apply heat and
begin shrinking at the center of the tubes and move toward the
ends. For jacket replacement, apply heat at the center of the
tube and toward each end until the tube is smooth and
wrinkle-free and recovered enough to assume the final con-
figuration. When a fillet of adhesive is visible at each end,
discontinue heating. Additional heating will not make the tube
shrink tighter.
10.6 Inspection Checkpoints-For quality control and the
assurance of a splicing program, there are a number of check
points at which inspections can be made to verify proper
installation of the cable splice. These include steps in prepa-
ration for, during the overall splice process, and post-
inspection following completion of a splice.
10.6.1 The following suggests various check points in the
splicing process that a quality assurance inspection program
could include:
1 0.6.1.1 Cable ends are properly positioned, that is, stag-
gered configuration and prepared properly to dimensions for
size and number of conductors that will be spliced.
1 0.6.1.2 Splices are assembled properly, positioned in the
crimp tool, and crimped.
1301
1 0.6.1.3 Verify the use of an approved, complete-cycle
crimping tool with dies matched to the splice connector and
conductor.
10.6.1.4 Verify that the splice connectors are spaced prop-
erly.
1 0.6.1.5 Connectors are insulated properly.
10.6.2 Following conductor insulation replacement, the
verification process should include inspection that:
10.6.2.1 All tubings are shrunk in place permanently.
10.6.2.2 All insulation tubings meet the overlap require-
ments for conductor replacement.
1 0.6.2.3 Tubings are not nicked or split or charred if
heat -shrink tubing was used.
10.6.3 Post-Splice Inspection-Following the completion of
a cable splice, post-splice inspections also can be undertaken to
check the splice quality. Some check points that should be
considered in an inspection program are:
10.6.3.1 Verification that jacket tubing meets the minimum
overlap requirements.
10.6.3.2 Verification that the jacket replacement tubing is
shrunk permanently in place without damage, such as cut or
split.
10.6.3.3 Adhesive should be visible at each end for heat-
shrink tubing used in cable sheath replacement.
10.6.3.4 That replacement armor is positioned and secured
properly or a jumper is installed to maintain electrical conti-
nuity for splices made in armored cable.
10.6.4 For heat-shrink with integral (encased) shield for
splicing of shielded cables, the following apply:
10.6.4.1 Sleeve/shield must be recovered along its entire
length.
10.6.4.2 Sleeve must be recovered tightly around cable
jacket.
10.6.4.3 Sealing rings must have flowed along cable jacket.
10.6.4.4 Sleeve must not have discolored to the degree that
joint cannot be inspected.
10.6.4.5 Strands must not be poking through the sleeve.
10.7 Additionally, standard shipboard tests for cable instal-
lations should include final inspection and testing for
continuity, resistance to ground (insulation resistance), and
electrical performance of all completed splices.
11. Keywords
11.1 cable splicing; crimp connectors; circumferential
crimp; electrical cable splicing; insulation sleeving
cO F1835 - 97 (2012)e
1
APPENDIX
Xl. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CABLE SPLICING SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS
X1.1 Background
X 1.1.1 A number of studies have evaluated available splic-
ing materials and techniques that would support extensive
cable splicing mandated in modular ship construction. These
investigations affirmed that suitable materials and several
installation techniques are available for the various shipboard
applications that exist and that these splicing systems would
guarantee the integrity of spliced cables to be the equal of a
continuously installed cable.
X1.2 Marine Cable
X1.2.1 In the U.S. shipbuilding industry, commercial ves-
sels are constructed typically with IEEE 45-type cables or U.S.
Navy military specification cables. Naval combatants and
auxiliary ships typically use the Mil Spec cables. Additionally,
commercial merchant vessels use a PVC/nylon insulated cable
derived from a standard building wire-type construction, as
well as a wide variety of nonstandard cables listed by Under-
writers Laboratories, Inc. under the Marine Shipboard Cable
Program. Foreign vessels typically use cable constructed in
accordance with International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) requirements. These international standards govern the
construction and installation of electrical cables on merchant
ships and on a general comparison with U.S. practices (IEEE
45 or Mil Spec) are found to be comparable and without
significant differences in design.
X1.3 Connectors
X1.3.1 Commercial Versus Military Specification
Connectors-A difference in minimum performance require-
ments of the splice crimp connectors exists between commer-
cial and Mil-Spec-type connectors. The tensile strength re-
quirements for crimped connectors most widely used are those
specified in UL 486A or as required in Military Specifications
in accordance with MIL-T-7928 or MIL-T-16366.
X 1.3 .1.1 Comparison of the minimum pull-out force test
values listed in these documents shows that, in general, the
specified requirements for the Mil-Spec are twice that of the
values specified in UL STD 486A.
Xl.3.1.2 Tensile strength or minimum pull-out force is the
measure of the pulling force required to destroy the crimped
connection (joint) between conductors; however, destruction
may not necessarily occur at the crimp joint and may occur in
one of the following ways:
(a) Slip of the wire from the crimped connector.
(b) Slip of some strands, rupture of the others at the crimp
joint.
(c) Rupture of the wire at the crimp joint.
(d) Rupture of the wire outside of the crimped termination.
Xl.3.1.3 Although IEEE 45 and the Code of Federal Regu-
lations Title 46 recommends the use of connectors listed by UL
STD 486A, this guide adopts that crimp butt connectors used
for the marine shipboard environment should have minimum
requirements exceeding the basic commercial requirements.
The more stringent requirements defined in the military speci-
fication certainly are more appropriate to guarantee the me-
chanical connection between conductors.
Xl.3.2 Crimp Configurations-The crimp die of the tool
determines the completed crimp configuration. There are
variety of configurations in use, such as a simple nest and
indent die, or the more complicated four indent die. Several
different configurations may work equally well for some
applications, while for others, a certain shape is superior. Since
cable splicing for modular construction would require exten-
sive splices at section interfaces for multiple cable runs
(banks), therefore, the area (volume of splices) required should
be minimized to the maximum extent possible. The optimal
technique to fulfill this requirement is the use of the circum-
ferential compression of butt connectors. Circumferential-
shaped compression applies equal force around the connector
sleeve and results in each conductor strand receiving equal
compression and carrying an equal amount of current loading.
This type of joint eliminates loose strands, and therefore, is
virtually free of electrical-caused noise. In general, connectors
compressed into a circumferential joint will have a higher
pull-out strength and a lower electrical resistance than the
common indented (bathtub) crimped. connector. For the best
results and to satisfy minimum splice area, a circumferential-
shaped compression applying equal force around the sleeve
should be used. Note, however, that to assure positive joints,
each connector for this type of operation is designed for only
one or a very limited number of conductor sizes.
X1.4 Splicing Systems
Xl.4.1 The cable splicing method presented in this guide
uses a compression-crimp, tubular-metal connector for butt
connection of cable conductors in conjunction with the use of
shrinkable tubing as both the conductor reinsulating material
and overall cable sheath (jacket) replacement. This guide is
considered the most effective procedure for the greatest num-
ber of applications of cable materials.
Xl.4.2 Although other insulating systems are available and
considered appropriate for particular applications, they have
not been addressed in detail in this guide. The use of various
layers of insulating materials, such as shrinkable-tubing, tape,
or molding compounds require varying levels of skill, differ-
ences in time, and relative cost. The six splicing systems
evaluated were:
1302
Xl.4.2.1 Cold shrink.
X1.4.2.2 Heat shrink.
Xl.4.2.3 Molded-vulcanized.
Xl.4.2.4 Molded-resin, room temperature cure.
Xl.4.2.5 Molded-resin, heat cure.
X1.4.2.6 Tape.
F1835 - 97 (2012)E
1
Xl.4.3 The most significant factor that the shipbuilder must
address is that the choice of a splicing system must be
compatible to both the application/environment and cable
jacket material. Information furnished in 1 ~ 1 b l e s X 1. I-Xl.3
provide comparisons for the various splicing systems to
application factors, compatibility to cable-jacketing materials,
and environment/location of the
Xl.4.3.1 Table XLI shows compatibility of splicing sys-
tems to the various types of cable jacket materials found in
shipboard applications.
X1.4.3.2 Acceptability of the six splicing systems with
regard to environmental or application location is shown in
Table Xl.2.
Xl.4.3.3 Table X 1.3 evaluates application factors for the six
systems and offers a comparison between systems as to the
required skill level of the installer and the time required for
installation.
Xl.4.4 Shrink Tubing Methods-Shrinkable tubing materi-
als are recommended for the vast of cable splice
applications. These materials provide the electrical and me-
chanical properties equivalent to the original cable conductor
insulation and jacketing material.
X1.4.4.1 The addition of a sealant is felt necessary since the
cable's jacket may be nonuniform, damaged, or scratched.
Deviation from eccentricity or small paths for moisture could
lead to splice failure; therefore, the sealant provides an
additional safety factor considered necessary. The addition of
sealant to the area of overlap on the original cable jacket during
splice installation is required for either heat-shrink or cold-
shrink tubing.
Xl.4.5 Molding Compounds Methods-A variety of mate-
rials including rubber-based compounds, epoxies, silicones,
and polyurethane are available for molded-type cable splices.
Vulcanized splices are made with molding presses and require
the use of heat. Ambient-temperature cured materials are
sometimes referred to as "room temperature" cure since no
external heat is applied for the polymerization reactions.
X1.4.5.1 For the marine environment, molded splices
mainly are used for outboard, weather-exposed, or underwater
applications. This type of splice is molded in matched metal
molds, which may be attached to heating platens to expedite
forming. For molded splices, the manufacturers' recommenda-
tions on surface cleaning and preparation of the casting
compounds and primer should be followed explicitly.
X1.4.6 Tape and Coating Compounds-Taping is more
skill/workmanship intensive as compared to the shrinkable
tubing or molding compound methods. The basic types of tapes
and their primary function is as follows:
X1.4.6.1 Insulating and binder-type tapes are pressure-
sensitive tapes used as primary insulation directly over the
connector/conductor and as a binder tape over the conductors
for cables with two or more conductors. These tapes have a
dielectric strength that permits use as a primary insulator over
base connectors or conductors.
X1.4.6.2 Filler tape is used both to fill the indents on large
connectors and to provide a smooth taping surface over which
the cable jacket material can be applied. Filler tape should not
be used if beyond the manufacturer's shelf life recommenda-
tions.
Xl.4.6.3 Outer sheathing tape is a pressure-sensitive vinyl
tape used as sheathing over the filler tape. Sheathing tape is a
relatively heavy tape that is used to cover the splice area and
provides protection against abrasion and wear.
X1.4.6.4 Care should be exercised to keep adhesive tapes
(insulating, binder, and sheathing) clean since they are difficult
to apply when the adhesive becomes coated with dirt. Con-
taminants also will cause degradation to the tape's electrical
properties. All tapes must be applied tightly and smooth and
should be applied such that the buildup to reinsulate the
individual conductor or produce the overall splice is of uniform
cross section.
X1.4.6.5 To complete a tape splice, a coating material,
normally a liquid cement compound, shall be brushed on in
several thin coats to provide overall seal to the splice.
TABlE X1.1 Splicing System-Application/Environment
Application/ Cold Heat Molded
Resin
Resin
Environment Shrink Shrink (Vulcanized)
(Room
(Heat Cure)
Tape
Weather deck Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OutboardA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Enclosed space Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Engine room and machinery space Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Fuel tank (internal) No No No No No No
Hazardous areas
8
No No No No No No
Legend-"Yes" indicates acceptable while "No" indicates not acceptable.
A Below water line.
8
Regulations prohibit splices in hazardous areas.
1303
0 F1835 - 97 {2012)e
1
TABLE X1.2 Splicing System-Cable Jacket Compatibility
Splicing System
Cable Jacket Cold Heat Molded
Resin
Compatibility Shrink Shrink (Vulcanized)
(Room
EPDM Yes Yes No Yes
H.D. polyethylene No Yes No No
Hypalon Yes Yes Yes Yes
Low halogen polyolefinA Yes Yes No Yes
Neoprene Yes Yes Yes Yes
Nitrile Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polyurethane Yes Yes No Yes
PVC Yes Yes No Yes
Silicone Yes Yes Yes Yes
Legend-"Yes" indicates compatibility while "No" means not compatible.
ARecommendation based on splice not necessarily being of low halogen material.
TABLE X1.3 Comparison of Splicing Systems
Application
Factors
Cold
Shrink
Heat
Shrink
Resin
(Room Temperature
Cure
Resin
(Heat Cure)
Tape
Yes Yes
No No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Resin Tape
(Heat Cure)
Cable preparation Cut-backs, abrade,
solvent wipe
Cut-backs, abrade, Cut-backs, abrade, Cut-backs, abrade, Cut-backs, abrade, Cut-backs, abrade,
solvent wipe
2
solvent wipe solvent wipe solvent wipe solvent wipe
Application time
Cure time
Skill level
Special tools
Critical shelf life
1
NA
1
No
No
NA
2
Yes (heat source)
No
5
Yes
5
Yes
Yes
3 5 5
Yes Yes NA
2* 5 5
No Yes No
Yes Yes No
Inspection of installed Centered, adhesive Adhesive bead, bond, Tack-free bond Tack-free bond Tack-free bond Workmanship,
splice bead centered, burn
Legend:
NA stands for "not applicable."
Numericals (1 to 5) represent from least (1) to greatest (5).
*-For premeasured resin kit.
Critical shelf life is defined as less than two years.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed evel}' five years and
COPYRIGHT/).
1304
dimensions
A Designation: F1836M- 09
~ u l l
INTERNATIONAL
Stuffing Tubes, Nylon, and Packing Assemblies (Metric)
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for
nylon stuffing tubes and packing assemblies. Nylon stuffing
tubes are intended for making electric cable penetrations in
marine shipboard enclosures for electrical equipment. The
following types are suitable for both thin-wall enclosures up to
5 mm (16 in.) thick and thick-wall enclosures, bulkheads, and
decks of 5 to 19 mm (:Y16 to 3/4 in.) thick.
1.2 This specification does not cover metal stuffing tubes.
bility of regulatory limitations prior to its use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
motive Applications
D4066 Classification System for Nylon Injection and Extru-
sion Materials (PA)
2.2 NEMA Standards:
Standard 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment ( 1000 V
2.3 ASME Standard:
ASME B 1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR
Thread
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.JO on
Electrical.
Current edition approved March 1, 2009. Published March 2009. Originally
approved in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as F1836M 97(2007).
DOl: 10.1520/Fl836M-09.
2
the ASTM website.
3
4
Varembe, Case postale 131, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland.
2.4 IEC Standard
Standard 68-2-6 Environmental
FC: Vibration (Sinusoidal) Sixth Edition
5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Spec(fic to This Standard:
3.1.1 nylon stuffing tube, n-a marine electrical fitting used
for the sealing of cable penetration into shipboard enclosures
while maintaining or exceeding the degree of protection for
which the enclosure is rated.
3.1.2 packing assembly, n-the compressible insert for the
nylon stuffing tube. It consists of one neoprene bushing and
three nylon washers.
3.1.3 enclosure, n-an electrical panel, cabinet, junction
box, light fixture, electrical equipment, control box, or panel.
4. Classification
4.1 Nylon stuffing tubes shall be of the following types (see
1):
4.1.1 Type ]-straight-Unified Form Thread.
4.1.2 Type 2-90-Unified Form Thread.
4.1.3 Type 3-NPT-American Standard Pipe Thread.
4.1.4 Type 4-Y -Unified Form Thread.
5.1 Orders for stuffing tubes under this specification shall
5.1.1 Type (see 4.1).
5.1.2 Part number (see Table 1 ).
5.1.3 Packing assembly size (see 2 and Table 2).
5.1.4 The 0-ring included in the stuffing tube assembly has
a finite shelf life. If the stuffing tube assembly is used after the
shelf life has expired, the 0-ring should be replaced, using the
appropriate size listed in Table I .
5
www.asme.org.
1305
F1836M- 09
BODY
II\_
~
TYPE 1 STRAIGHT
Example Part Number: F 1836M
Type-1-002 (size 2 straight)
..-----BODY
TYPE3 NPT
Type-3-002 (size 2 Nl'T)
WAU. lliiCKN'Ess
TYPE 2 90 DEGREES
Type-2-002 (size 2 90 degree)
TYPE4 "Y"
Type-4-002 (size 2 Y)
FIG. 1 Stuffing Tube Types
5.1.5 ASTM Part Number. The part number comprises the
ASTM specification number, type designator and assigned
dash number as shown in the following example:
Designator Designator Designator
Example: F1836M Type-3-002: Size 2 NPT stuffing tube
(see 1).
6.1 Materials:
1306
6.1.1 Polyamide (nylon) molding plastic material shall be
Group 1, Class 8, Grade 1 in accordance with Specification
D4066.
6.1.2 Synthetic rubber (neoprene) shall be in accordance
with Classification 02000, M2, BC, 410, A14, B14, Cl2, and
Fl9.
6.2 Manufacture:
6.2.1 Molded nylon parts, such as body, washers, locknut,
and cap, shall meet the requirements specified herein.
6.2.2 Threads shall be unified form UN 2A or 2B or taper
pipe thread (NPT) as specified in ASME Standard B 1.1.
F1836M-09
TABLE 1 Stuffing Tubes Part Numbers and Dimensional Data
Straight
Type 1
goo
Type 2
NPT
Type 3
y
Type 4
Tube
Size
2
3
4
4T
5
6
7
8
9
Tube
Size
2
3
4T
5
6
Tube
Size
2
3
4T
5
6
7
8
9
Tube
Size
2
3
4T
Part
No.
Type-1-001
-002
-003
-004
-005
-006
-007
-008
-009
-010
Part
No.
-002
-003
-005
-006
-007
Part
No.
-002
-003
-004
-005
-006
-007
-008
-009
Part
No.
-002
-003
-004
A See Table 2 size selection.
SEATING
W.UHER
min.
0.077
0.275
0.410
0.450
0.450
0.752
0.806
1.433
1.625
2.030
0.275
0.410
0.450
0.752
0.806
0.275
0.410
0.450
0.752
0.806
1.433
1.625
2.030
0.275
0.410
0.450
in.
max.
0.300
0.472
0.472
0.777
0.777
1.113
1.390
1.610
2.00
2.700
0.472
0.472
1.113
1.390
0.472
0.472
0.777
1.113
1.390
1.610
2.00
2.700
0.472
0.472
0.777
FIG. 2 Typical Packing Assembly
Cable Range
min.
1.96
6.99
10.41
11.43
11.43
19.10
20.47
36.40
41.28
51.56
6.99
10.41
11.43
19.10
20.47
6.99
10.41
11.43
19.10
20.47
36.40
41.28
51.56
6.99
10.41
11.43
6.2.3 Neoprene parts, such as bushing and plug, shall meet
the requirements specified in Classification D2000, and when
assembled in a stuffing tube, shall meet the performance
requirements specified herein.
7 .1.1 Vibration resistance-When stuffing tubes are tested
as specified in 9. 1 , there shall be no evidence of cracking or
loosening of parts.
mm
max.
7.62
11.99
11.99
19.74
19.74
28.27
35.31
40.89
50.80
68.58
11.99
11.99
19.74
28.27
35.3'1
11.99
11.99
19.74
28.27
35.31
40.89
50.80
68.58
11.99
11.99
19.74
Packing
AssemblyA
-16
-17
-18
-19
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
Packing
AssemblyA
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
Packing
AssemblyA
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
Packing
AssemblyA
-17
-18
-19
Clearance Hole Diameter
in.
0.885
1.010
1.135
1.260
1.385
2.010
2.510
2.760
3.260
4.010
0.885
1.135
1.260
2.010
2.510
NPT
0.75
1.0
1.0
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.010
1.135
1.385
for Tube Install
mm
22.48
25.65
28.83
32.00
35.18
51.05
63.75
70.10
82.80
101.85
22.48
28.83
32.00
51.05
63.75
25.65
28.83
35.18
0-Ring
Buna-N
Size
212
214
216
218
220
226
230
232
236
242
212
216
218
220
230
214
216
220
7.1.2 Ruggedness-When stuffing tubes are subjected to a
mechanical abuse test as specified in 9.2, there shall be no
cracking, breaking, distortion, or damage to the sample.
7.1.3 Effectiveness of seal-When stuffing tubes are tested
as specified in 9.3, there shall be no evidence of leakage
through or around the stuffing tubes.
8.1 Stuffing tubes shall be free from warp, cracks, chipped
edges or surfaces, blisters, uneven surfaces, scratches, dents,
and heat marks. They shall be free from fins, burrs, and
unsightly finish caused by chipping, filing, or grinding without
subsequent buffing or polishing. All molded nylon parts shall
be cleaned thoroughly of annealing mediums. Packing assem-
blies shall be free of voids, pin holes, flash, or other imperfec-
tions, that may impair their serviceability.
1307
9. Test Methods
characteristics specified herein have been incorporated in the
stuffing tube design and maintained in production.
0 F1836M- 09
TABLE 2 Packing Assembly Size
NoTE !-Packing assembly selection requires that the packing bushing inner diameter (D) be equal or slightly larger than the cable maximum diameter
(DIA).
NoTE 2-I.D. column indicates the bushing inner diameter.
Cable Range
in. rnm
Tube Part I. D. I. D.
Size No. min. max. min. max.
16-001 0.137 0.187 3.48 4.75
-002 0.077 0.127 1.96 3.23
-003 0.100 0.150 2.54 3.81
-004 0.184 0.234 4.67 5.94
-005 0.228 0.278 5.79 7.06
-006 0.244 0.300 6.20 7.62
17-001 0.275 0.325 6.99 8.26
2
-002 0.317 0.367 8.05 9.32
-003 0.340 0.390 8.64 9.91
-004 0.375 0.425 9.53 10.80
-005 0.422 0.472 10.72 11.99
3 18-018 0.410 0.472 10.41 11.99
19-001 0.450 0.500 11.43 12.70
-002 0.497 0.547 12.62 13.89
-003 0.534 0.584 13.56 14.83
4 -004 0.559 0.609 14.20 15.47
and -005 0.610 0.665 15.49 16.89
4T -006 0.650 0.700 16.51 17.78
-007 0.669 0.719 16.99 18.26
-008 0.727 0.777 18.47 19.74
-009 0.710 0.760 18.03 19.30
20-001 0.737 0.777 18.72 19.74
-002 0.772 0.812 19.61 20.63
-003 0.813 0.853 20.65 21.67
-004 0.849 0.889 21.57 22.58
-005 0.889 0.937 22.58 23.80
5 -006 0.937 0.980 23.80 24.89
-007 0.981 1.021 24.92 25.93
-008 1.000 1.042 25.40 26.47
-009 1.033 1.073 26.24 27.25
-010 1.073 1.113 27.25 28.27
9 .1.1 Vibration-The stuffing tubes shall be subjected to
vibration testing as specified in IEC Standard 68-2-6. The
following details shall apply:
9.1.1.1 The stuffing tubes shall be complete with 0-rings
and 1- to 2-m (3- to 6-ft) lengths of cable of appropriate size.
9 .1.1. 2 The free end of the cables shall be secured to prevent
excessive cable whipping action during test.
9.1.1.3 Tests are to be carried out in three perpendicular
planes.
9 .1.1.4 Duration of the test for no resonance condition shall
be 90 min at 30 Hz. Duration at each resonance frequency at
which Q > 2 is recorded. It is recommended as guidance that Q
does not exceed 5.
9.1.1.5 Test range shall be 2 :: 0.3 Hz to 13.2 Hz -
amplitude ::1 mm: 13.2 to 100Hz- acceleration ::7 g.
9.1.1.6 Nonconformance to the requirements of 7. 1.1 shall
be cause for rejection.
9.2 Mechanical Abuse Test:
9.2.1 Mechanical abuse test shall be conducted on the
sample stuffing tubes assembled with packing assembly on the
end of a 2-m (6-ft) length of electrical cable of appropriate size.
9 .2.2 The stuffing tube shall be allowed to swing on a
radius, while suspended by the electrical cable, from a vertical
1308
Tube Part
Size No. min. max. min. max.
21-001 1.119 1.159 28.42 29.44
-002 1.127 1.167 28.63 29.64
-003 1.160 1.200 29.46 30.48
-004 1.204 1.254 30.58 31.85
6
-005 1.255 1.305 31.89 33.15
-006 1.309 1.350 33.25 34.29
-007 1.350 1.390 34.29 35.11
-008 0.856 0.886 21.74 22.50
-009 0.926 0.956 23.52 24.28
-010 0.776 0.806 19.71 2047
22-001 1.418 1.458 36.02 37.03
7
-002 1.460 1.500 37.08 38.10
-003 1.510 1.566 38.35 39.78
-004 1.570 1.610 39.88 40.89
23-001 1.610 1.641 40.89 41.68
-002 1.645 1.688 41.78 42.87
-003 1.695 1.735 43.05 44.07
8 -004 1.745 1.812 44.32 46.03
-005 1.816 1.859 46.13 47.22
-006 '1.860 1.906 47.24 48.41
-007 1.905 1.935 48.39 49.15
-008 1.940 2.000 49.28 50.80
24-001 2.006 2.046 50.95 51.97
-002 2.050 2.093 52.07 53.16
-003 2.100 2.140 53.34 54.36
-004 2.150 2.285 54.61 58.04
9 -005 2.295 2.385 58.29 60.05
-006 2.375 2.418 60.33 61.42
-007 2.428 2.540 61.67 64.52
-008 2.560 2.700 65.02 68.58
surface and strike against a vertical fiat steel plate on that
surface. The vertical distance through which the stuffing tube is
allowed to fall shall be 1.5 m (5 ft), and the number of impacts
shall be ten.
9.2.3 The stuffing tube shall be disassembled and examined.
Nonconformance to the requirements of7.1.2 shall be cause for
rejection.
9.3 Level of Effectiveness-A complete stuffing tube with
0-ring installed and properly assembled to a cable or with a
plug installed shall conform to the performance requirements
of NEMA 250. The NEMA enclosure-type designation (4, 4X,
6, 6P) shall establish the appropriate environmental capability
(see NEMA 250) required of the installed stuffing tube assem-
bly.
9.3.1 Nonconformance to the requirements of 7.1.3 shall be
cause for rejection.
10. Inspection
10.1 Visual and Dimensional Examination -Samples shall
be examined visually to verify that the materials, design,
construction, physical dimensions, marking, and workmanship
are as specified in the applicable requirements.
F1836M-09
11. Certification
11.1 Plastic Material Certification -Material certification
shall be required from the manufacturer of the plastic material
to ensure the material was manufactured, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with Specification 04066. Material
identity, traceable to this certification, shall be maintained
throughout the manufacturing process.
11.2 Cure date information of all rubber products shall be
recorded on the manufacturer's certificate of conformance. The
year and quarter of manufacture shall be listed.
in this specification and the requirements have been met. \Vhen
12. Product Marking
12.1 Each nylon stuffing tube component body, locknut,
cap, bushing, and washers shall have permanent marking in
3-mm (
1
/s-in.) high raised letters as size permits. For size-
sensitive components, reduced marking is acceptable. Marking
shall indicate the following:
12.1.1 Manufacturer's name or trademark and tube size.
12.1.2 Identification markings of prior or superseded speci-
fications or government drawings. These markings are accept-
able. New molds or molds that require rework shall contain, if
required, the ASTM designation number of this specification
and part number. The location of the ASTM marking shall
apply to the stuffing tube only and be located on the stuffing
tube body. Marking in accordance with 12.1.1 shall apply to all
stuffing tube components.
13. Packaging
13.1 Packaging shall be manufacturer's commercial prac-
tice and shall be sufficient to afford adequate protection against
deterioration and physical damage during shipment from the
manufacturer or supplier, or both, to the using activity.
NoTE 1--Bulk packaging for nylon stuffing tubes; unit packaging for
packing assemblies.
14.1 Responsibility for Inspection -Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is
as specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the
contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his own
or any other facilities suitable for the performance of the
inspection requirements specified.
14.2 Responsibility for Compliance -All items must meet
all the requirements of Section 7. The inspection set forth in
this specification shall become a part of the manufacturer's
overall inspection system or quality program. The absence of
any inspection requirements in the specification shall not
relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility of assuring that
all products or supplies submitted to the customer for accep-
tance comply with all the requirements of the contract. Sam-
pling in quality conformance does not authorize submission of
known defective material either indicated or actual, nor does it
commit the purchaser to acceptance of defective material.
15. Keywords
15.1 cable entry seal; cable penetrator; stuffing tube
S 1.1 Military Specifications:
MIL-S-901 Requirements for Shock Tests, H.I. (High-
Impact), Shipboard Machinery, Equipment, and Systems
6
S2. Shock Tests
S2.1 Stuffing tubes shall be subjected to the high-impact
shock test for Grade A, Type A, Class I equipment as specified
in MIL-S-90 1. The details specified in 9.1 and 9.2 shall apply.
Nonconformance to the requirements of S2.2 shall be cause for
rejection.
S2.2 Examination After Shock Tests-When stuffing tubes
are tested as specified in S.2.1, there shall be no evidence of
cracking, breaking, distortion, or loosening of parts.
6
Available from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Ave.,
Bldg. 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.
1309
S3. Level of Effectiveness (See 9.3)
S3.1 Submersible and Open Submersible -Equipment shall
be submergence tested to a depth of 4.5 m (15ft) at 44.8 KPa
(6.5 psi) for 24 h. Nonconformance to the requirements of 7 .1.3
shall be cause for rejection.
S3.2 Examination After Immersion-Failure for stuffing
tube to operate satisfactorily shall be cause for rejection. For
enclosures including terminal boxes, as revealed by subsequent
disassembly and examination, leakage of water into any part of
the enclosure shall be cause for rejection.
S4. Packaging
S4.1 Preservation, Packing, and Marking-Preservation
and packing may be commercial. Marking information shall
include cure date, shelf life, and expiration dates of rubber
products.
F1836M- 09
COPYRIGHT!).
1310
a Designation: F1837M - 97 (Reapproved 2012)'
1
ull
7
INTERNATIONAJ,
Heat-Shrink Cable Entry Seals (Metric)
1
with editorial in October 2012.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for
heat-shrink cable entry seals. Cable entry seals are intended for
making electrical cable penetrations into connection boxes,
bulkheads, or other enclosures. These devices are suitable for
both thin wall enclosures up to 5 mm in.) thick and
thick-wall enclosures of 5 mm to 19 mm (3/16 in. to% in.) thick.
1.2 Cable entry seals shall have factory-applied adhesive
that provides the seal to wire and cable jackets.
only.
bility of regulatory limitations prior to its use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
at Commercial Power Frequencies
D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
Insulating Materials
D412. Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas-
tic Elastomers-Tension
D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
D747 Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plas-
1
and Marine Technologyand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.l 0 on
Electrical.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2012. Published October 2012. Originally
approved in 1997. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as Fl837M- 97(2007).
DOI: 10.1520/F1837M-97Rl2E01.
2
the ASTM website.
tics by Means of a Cantilever Beam
0792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hard-
ness
D2671 Test Methods for Heat-Shrinkable Tubing for Elec-
trical Use
D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Plastics (Oxygen lndex)
D3149 Specification for Crosslinked Polyolefin Heat-
Shrinkable Tubing for Electrical Insulation
D4572 Test Method for Rubber Chemicals-Wet Sieve
Analysis of Sulfur
D4732 Specification for Cool-Application Filling Com-
pounds for Telecommunications Wire and Cable
2.2 ASME Standard
ASME Bl.l Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR
Thread Form)
3
2.3 NEMA Standards . .4
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (I 000 Volts
Max)
2.4 IEC Standard:
IEC 68-2-6 Environmental Testing-Part 2.: Tests-Test FC:
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Sixth Edition
5
3. Terminology
3.1.1 heat-shrink cable entry seal, n-heat-shrinkable tube
making a watertight, fume-tight seal where cable connections
boxes, bulkheads, or other enclosures.
3.1.2 polyolefin, n-a polymer made by the polymerization
of hydrocarbon olefins or copolymerization olefins.
3
www.asme.org.
4
5
Available from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 3, rue de
Varembe, Case Postale 131, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland.
1311
F1837M - 97 {2012)
81
4. Classification
4.1 Heat-shrink cable entry seals shall be of the following
types:
4.1.1 Type 1, standard cable entry seals for thin-wall enclo-
sures shall consist of the three part assembly; a rigid plastic
nut, 0-ring, and heat-shrinkable molded area.
4.1.1.1 Type I-1, molded area configured with one opening
for a single wire or cable entry.
4.1.1.2 Type I-2, molded area configured with two equal
size openings to seal two wires or cables.
4.1.1.3 Type I-3, molded area configured with three equal
size openings to seal three wires or cables.
4.1.1.4 Type I-4, molded area configured with four equal
size openings to seal four wires or cables.
4.1.1.5 Type I-5, molded area configured with six equal size
openings to seal six wires or cables.
4.1.1.6 Type I-6, molded area configured with eight equal
size openings to seal eight wires or cables.
4.1.2 Type II, cable entry seal for threaded hole applications
shall consist of a one-part assembly that combines a tapered
national pipe thread (NPT) in rigid plastic with heat-shrinkable
molded area.
4.1.2.1 Type II-1, molded area configured with one opening
for a single wire or cable entry.
4.1.2.2 Type II-2, molded area configured with two equal
size openings to seal two wires or cables.
4.1.2.3 Type JI-3, molded area configured with three equal
size openings to seal three wires or cables.
4.1.2.4 Type JI-4, molded area configured with four equal
size openings to seal four wires or cables.
4.1.3 Type III, right angle cable entry seal for thin-wall
enclosure shall consist of a three part assembly; a rigid plastic
nut, 0-ring, and heat-shrinkable molded area.
4.1.4 Type TV, right angle cable entry seal for threaded hole
application shall consist of a one-part assembly that combines
a tapered national pipe thread (NPT) in rigid plastic with a
heat-shrinkable molded area.
5.1 Orders for cable entry seals under this specification shall
5.1.1 Part Number (see -6).
5.1.2 Quantity (per each part).
V/// // / /
= =
1- _;.
...,___- 1-
-
/// / / / /
= ===-
A
FIG. 1 Type 1-Single-Legged Standard Cable Entry Seals
1312
6.1 The rigid plastic parts shall be made from polyamide
(nylon), or polyester material, or both. The material shall be
Group 1, Class 8, Grade 1 as specified in Specification D4066.
6.1.1 Threads shall be unified form UN 2A or 2B or taper
pipe thread (NPT) as specified in ASME B 1. 1.
6.2 The heat-shrinkable tubing shall be of a crosslinked
polyolefin in accordance with Type III of Specification 149.
6.3 The adhesive shall be general purpose high-bond-
strength adhesive sealant that provides stain relief and envi-
ronmental sealing of heat-shrink tubing to cable jackets.
6.4 0-rings shall be made of a material conforming to Type
II of Specification D4732.
6.5 The polyolefin heat-shrinkable tubing shall met require-
ments of Test Methods D2671.
7.1 Dimensional Requirements-Cable-entry seals shall
conform to the dimensional requirements of Tables 1-6. Type I
cable-entry seals are presented in 1 and 2. Type II
cable-entry seals are presented in 3 and 4. Right-angle
cable-entry seals (Types III and IV) are presented in and
6.
7 .2.1 Vibration Resistance-When cable-entry seals are
tested as specified in 9.1, there shall be no evidence of cracking
or loosening of parts.
7.2.2 Ruggedness-When cable-entry seals are subjected to
a mechanical abuse test as specified in 9.2, there shall be no
cracking, breaking, distortion, or damage to the sample.
7.2.3 Effectiveness of Seal-When cable-entry seals are
tested as specified in 9.3, there shall be no evidence of leakage
through or around the cable entry seals.
8.1 Cable-entry seals shall be free from warp, cracks,
chipped edges, or surfaces, blisters, uneven surfaces, scratches,
dents, and flow lines. They shall be free from fins, burrs, and
unsightly finish caused by chipping, filling, or grinding without
subsequent buffing or polishing. All molded parts shall be
cleaned thoroughly of annealing mediums.
9. Test Methods
requested by the purchaser in order to verify that selected
performance characteristics specified herein have been incor-
porated in the cable-entry seal design and maintained in
production.
9.1.1 Vibration-The cable-entry seals shall be subjected to
vibration testing as specified in IEC Standard 68-2-6. The
following details shall apply:
9.1.1.1 The cable-entry seals shall be complete with 0-rings
and 1 to 2-m (3 to 6 ft) lengths of cable of appropriate size.
9 .1.1.2 The free end of the cables shall be secured to prevent
excessive cable whipping action during test.
9.1.1.3 Tests are to be carried out in three perpendicular
planes.
F1837M - 97 (2012)E
1
A
.I
FIG. 2 Type 1-Multi-Legged Standard Cable Entry Seals
FIG. 3 Type 11-Single-Legged Threaded Cable Entry Seals
FIG. 4 Type 11-Multi-Legged Threaded Cable Entry Seals
9 .1.1.4 Duration of the test for no resonance condition shall
be 90 min at 30 Hz. Duration at each resonance frequency at
which Q>2 is recorded. It is recommended as guidance that Q
does not exceed 5.
9.1.1.5 Test range shall be 2 :: 0.3 Hz to 13.2 Hz-amplitude
:: 1 mm: 13.2 Hz to 100Hz-acceleration ::7 g.
9.1.1.6 Nonconformance to the requirements of 7.2.1 shall
9.2 Mechanical Abuse Test:
9.2.1 A mechanical abuse test shall be conducted on the
sample cable-entry seal assembled on the end of a 2-m (6-ft)
length of electrical cable of appropriate size.
9.2.2 The cable-entry seal shall be allowed to swing on a
radius, while suspended by the electrical cable, from a vertical
surface and strike against a vertical flat steel plate on that
surface. The vertical distance through which the cable entry
seal is allowed to fall shall be 1.5 m (5 ft), and the number of
impacts shall be ten.
9.2.3 The cable-entry seal shall be disassembled and exam-
ined. Nonconformance to the requirements of 7 .2.2 shall be
1313
9.3 Level of Effectiveness-A complete cable-entry seal with
0-ring installed and assembled properly and shrunk to a cable
or with a plug installed shall conform to the performance
requirements of NEMA 250. The NEMA enclosure type
designation ( 4, 4X, 6, 6P) shall establish the appropriate
environmental capability required of the installed cable-entry
seal.
9.3.1 Nonconformance to the requirements of 7.2.3 shall be
10. Inspection.
10.1 Visual and Dimensional Examination -Samples shall
be examined visually to verify that the materials, design,
construction, physical dimensions, marking, and workmanship
are as specified in the applicable requirements.
11. Certification
11.1 Material Certification-Material certification shall be
required from the manufacturers of the plastic material and
shirk-tubing to ensure the materials were manufactured,
F1837M - 97 (2012)
81
...,._ ___ A ___ __
D
L
'
II
'I

'I
II
~
I!
II
.....
I
FIG. 5 Type Ill-Right-Angle Cable Entry Seals
c
t
FIG. 6 Type IV-Right-Angle Cable Entry Seals
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with Specifica-
tions D4066 and D3 149. Material identity traceable to this
certification shall be maintained throughout the manufacturing
process.
in this specification and the requirements have been met. When
12. Product Marking
1314
12.1 Each cable-entry seal shall be identified distinctly. The
name of the manufacturer, part number, identification of this
ASTM standard, and other appropriate information shall be
shown thereon.
F1837M - 97 (2012)E
1
TABLE 1 Type 1-Single Legged Standard Cable Entry SealsA
c
Expanded I.D. Recovered I.D.
(min) (max)
13.0 (0.50) 3.0 (0.12)
19.0 (0.75) 6.5 (0.25)
19.0 (0.75) 6.5 (0.25)
28.5 (1.20) 13.0 (0.50)
35.0 (1.38) 13.0 (0.50}
40.0 (1.70} 19.0 (0.75)
70.0 (2.75) 19.0 (0.75)
70.0 (2.75) 36.0 (1.43)
A Dimensions shown are nominal and in millimeters (in).
8
Part numbers were established in the following way:
CES--cable entry seal,
B
I.D. (min)
19.0 (0.75)
19.0 (0.75)
19.0 (0.75)
28.0 (1.10)
28.0 (1.10)
40.0 (1.60)
53.0 (2.10)
74.0 (2.90)
A
Overall Nominal
Recovered Recommended Part No.
8
Hole Diameter
89.0 (3.50) 25.5 (1.00) 1-i
89.0 (3.50) 25.5 (1.00) CESS 1-2
32.0 (1.25) 25.5 (1.00) CESS 1-3
95.0 (3.75) 35.0 (1.38) CESS 1-4
95.0 (3.75) 44.5 (1.75) CESS 1-5
120.0 (4.75) 51.0 (2.00) CESS 1-6
102.0 (4.00) 60.0 (2.36) CESS 1-7
178.0 (7.00) 89.0 (3.50) CESS 1-8
S or T-standard or threaded, and
1-1-number preceding hyphen represents number legs; number following hyphen represents size type.
TABLE 2 Type 1-Multi-Legged Standard Cable Entry SealsA
Multi-Leg Boot
Min. Max.
(Each Leg) (Each Leg)
No. of Legs
2 10.0 (0.40} 3.0 (0.11)
2 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.17)
2 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
3 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
3 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.17)
3 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
3 32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
4 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
4 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.17)
4 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
4 32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
6 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
8 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
A Dimensions shown are nominal and in millimeters (inches).
8
CES--cable entry seal,
S or T -standard or threaded, and
B A
Overall Nominal
I.D. (min) Recovered Recommended
Length Hole Diameter Part No.
8
19.0 (0.75) 89.0 (3.50) 25.5 (1.00) CESS 2-1
28.0 (1.10) 95.0 (3.75) 35.0 (1.38) CESS 2-2
40.0 (1.60) 120.0 (4.75) 51.0 (2.00) CESS 2-3
19.0 (0.75) 89.0 (3.50) 25.5 (1.00) CESS 3-1
28.0 (1.10) 95.0 (3.75) 35.01 (1.38) CESS 3-2
40.0 (1.60) 120.0 (4.75) 51.0 (2.00) CESS 3-3
74.0 (2.90) 178.0 (7.00) 89.0 (3.50) CESS 3-4
19.0 (0.75) 89.0 (3.50) 25.5 (1.00) CESS 4-i
28.0 (1.10) 95.0 (3.75) 35.0 (1.38) CESS 4-2
40.0 (1.60) 120.0 (4.75) 51.0 (2.00) CESS 4-3
74.0 (2.90) 178.0 (7.00) 89.0 (3.50) CESs 4-4
74.0 (2.90) 178.0 (7.00) 89.0 (3.50) CESS 6-1
74.0 (2.90) 178.0 (7.00) 89.0 (3.50) CESS 8-1
1-1-number preceding hyphen represents number of legs; number following hyphen represents size type.
13.1 The seals shall be supplied by type as specified in
1-6.
13.2 The seals shall be packaged in conformance with good
commercial practice unless otherwise specified. Individual
types and sizes shall be neatly bundled or boxed. The exterior
shipping container shall be acceptable by parcel post or
common carrier.
13.3 Each bundle or container of seals shall be identified
distinctly by a tag or label. The name of the manufacturer, the
part number of the seals, the quantity, and other appropriate
information shall be shown thereon.
14.1 Responsibility for Inspection -Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is
as specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the
contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his own
or any other facilities suitable for the performance of the
inspection requirements specified.
1315
14.2 Responsibility for Compliance -All items must meet
all requirements of Section 7. The inspection set forth in this
inspection system or quality program. The absence of any
inspection requirements in this specification shall not relieve
the manufacturer of the responsibility of assuring that all
products or supplied submitted to the customer for acceptance
comply with all the requirements of the contract. Sampling in
quality conformance does not authorize submission of known
defective material either indicated or actual, nor does it commit
the customer to acceptance of defective material.
0 F1837M - 97 (2012)
81
TABLE 3 Type 11-Single-Legged Threaded Cable Entry SealsA
c
(Min.) (Max.)
9.5 (0.37) 3.0 (0.12)
14.5 (0.57) 5.0 (0.19)
19.0 (0.75) 6.5 (0.25)
19.0 (0.75) 6.5 (0.25)
19.0 (0.75) 6.5 (0.25)
32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
51.0 (2.00) 19.0 (0.75)
70.0 (2.75) 25.5 (1.00)
A Dimensions shown are nominal and in the millimeters (inches).
8
CES-cable entry seal,
8 A
Overall Nominal
I.D. (min.) Recovered
6.5 (0.25) 87.0 (3.40)
14.0 (0.55) 87.0 (3.40)
14.0 (0.55) 87.0 (3.40)
19.0 (0.75) 87.0 (3.40)
19.0 (0.75) 89.0 (3.50)
25.5 (1.00) 112.0 (4.40)
28.0 (1.10) 119.0 (4.70)
36.0 (1.40) 127.0 (5.00)
61.0 (2.40) 152.0 (6.00)
1-1-number preceding hyphen represents number of legs; number following hyphen represents size type.
NPT Pipe Size
6.5 (0.25)
13.0 (0.50)
13.0 (0.50)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
25.5 (1.00)
38.0 (1.50)
38.0 (1.50)
63.5 (2.50)
TABLE 4 Type 11-Multi-Legged Threaded Cable Entry SeaJsA
Multi-Leg Boot
Min. Max.
No. of Legs (Each Leg) (Each Leg)
2 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
2 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
2 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
2 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
2 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
3 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
3 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
3 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
3 15 0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
3 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
3 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
3 32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
4 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
4 10.0 (0.40) 3.0 (0.11)
4 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
4 15.0 (0.60) 4.5 (0.18)
4 23.0 (0.90) 7.5 (0.30)
4 32.0 (1.25) 13.0 (0.50)
8
CES-cable entry seal and
S or T -standard or threaded.
15. Keywords
8
I.D. (Min.)
14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75)
28.0 (1.10)
28.0 (1.10)
37.0 (1.47)
14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75)
19.0 (0.75)
28.0 (1.10)
28.0 (1.10)
37.0 (1.47)
61.0 (2.40)
14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75)
28.0 (1.10)
28.0 (1.10)
37.0 (1.47)
61.0 (2.40)
15.1 cable-entry seal; cable penetrator; cable termination;
cross-linked polyolefin heat-shrinkable tubing; electrical insu-
lation; heat-shrinkable tubing
1316
A
Overall Nominal
Recovered Length
87.0 (3.40)
87.0 (3.40)
112.0 (4.40)
119.0 (4.70)
119.0 (4.70)
95.0 (3.75)
94.0 (3.70)
95.0 (3.75)
112.0 (4.40)
119.0 (4.70)
127.0 (5.00)
152.0 (6.00)
87.0 (3.40)
87.0 (3.40)
112.0 (4.40)
119.0 (4.70)
127.0 (5.00)
152.0 (6.00)
NPT Pipe Size
13.0 (0.50)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
38.0 (1.50)
38.0 (1.50)
13.0 (0.50)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
25.5 (1.00)
38.0 (1.50)
38.0 (1.50)
63.5 (2.50)
13.0 (0.50)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
38.0 (1.50)
38.0 (1.50)
63.5 (2.50)
Part No.
8
CSTT 1-1
CES T 1-2
CES T 1-3
CES T 1-4
CES T 1-5
CES T 1-6
CES T 1-7
CES T 1-8
CES T 1-9
Part No.
8
CES T 2-1
CES T 2-2
CES T 2-3
CES T 2-4
CES T 2-5
CES T 3-1
CES T 3-2
CES T 3-3
CES T 3-4
CES T 3-5
CES T 3-6
CES T 3-7
CES T 4-1
CES T 4-2
CES T 4-3
CES T 4-4
CES T 4-5
CES T 4-6
F1837M- 97 (2012)E
1
TABLE 5 Type Ill-Right Angle Cable Entry SealsA
c 8
Tubing
Expanded I.D. Recovered I.D. I.D. (min.)
(min.) (max.)
14.0 (0.55) 7.0 (0.28) 14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75) 8.5 (0.33) 19.0 (0.75)
28.0 (1.10) 16.0 (0.62) 28.0 (1.10)
40.0 (1.60) 16.0 (0.62) 40.0 (1.60)
8
R-1-Right angle; number following hyphen represents size type.
A D
Overall Nominal Recovered Length
36.0 (1.40) 43.0 (1.68)
43.0 (1.70) 45.0 (1.77)
79.0 (3.10) 58.0 (2.30)
79.0 (3.10) 71.0 (2.80)
TABLE 6 Type iV-Right Angie Cabie Entry SeaisA
c 8 A D
Expanded I.D.
(min.)
14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
28.0 (1.10)
Tubing
Recovered I.D.
(max.)
7.0 (0.28)
8.5 (0.33)
10.0 (0.38)
16.0 (0.62)
I.D. (min.)
14.0 (0.55)
19.0 (0.75)
25.5 (1.00)
28.0 (1.10)
8
R-1-Right angle; number following hyphen represents size type.
Overall Nominal Recovered Length
36.0 (1.40) 25.5 (1.00)
43.0 (1.70) 28.0 (1.10)
79.0 (3.10) 34.0 (1.33)
79.0 (3.10) 40.0 (1.56)
SUPPI,EMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
Recommended
Hole Diameter Part No.
8
25.5 (1.00) CES SR-1
25.5 (1.00) CES SR-2
35.0 (1.37) CES SR-3
51.0 (2.00) CES SR-4
NPT Pipe Size
Part No.
8
13.0 (0.50) CES TR-1
19.0 (0.75) CES TR-2
25.5 (1.00) CES TR-3
38.0 (1.50) CES TR-4
S.l.l Military Specification:
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.l. (High-Impact), Shipboard Machinery,
Equipment, and Systems
6
S2. Shock Tests
S2.1 Cable-entry seals shall be subjected to the high-impact
shock test for Grade A, Type A, Class I equipment as specified
in MIL-S-90 1. The details specified in 9 .1. 1 and 9 .1.2 shall
apply. Nonconformance to the requirements of S2.2 shall be
S2.2 Examination After Shock Tests-When cable-entry
seals are tested as specified in S.2.1, there shall be no evidence
of cracking, breaking, distortion, or loosening of parts.
S3. Performance
S3.1 Table S3.1 establishes the physical, thermal, and
chemical properties for heat -shrink tubing used in the cable-
entry seal.
6
Available from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Ave.,
Bldg. 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.
1317
TABLE S3.1 Performance Requirements For Heat Shrink Tubing
Units Test Methods Value
Physical
Ultimate tensile, psi, min D412 1700
Ultimate elongation, %, min D412 350
Hardness-shore "D" D2240 52
Water absorption, %, max D570 0.1
Specific gravity D792, Method 6.1 1.36
Stiffness in flexture, psi D747 18 500
Electrical
Dielectric strength, 75 mils (v/mil) D149 400 min
Volume resistivity, ohm-em, min D257
1015
Thermal Properties
Heat aging MIL-1-81765 5 days 168 hat
175C
Tensile strength, psi, min D412 1200
Elongation, %, min D412 200
Heat shock MIL-1-81765 4 hr at 225C
Low temperature MIL-I-23053D -55C
Flammability
Non-burning D635 yes
Oxygen-index D2863 28
S4. Level of Effectiveness (See 9.3)
F1837M - 97 {2012)e
1
S4.1 Submersible and Open Submersible -Equipment shall
be submergence tested to a depth of 4.5 m (15ft) at 44.8 KPa
(6.5 psi) for 24 h. Nonconformance to the requirements of7.1.3
shall be cause for rejection.
S4.2 Examination After Immersion-Failure for cable-entry
seals to operate satisfactorily shall be cause for rejection. For
enclosures including terminal boxes, as revealed by subsequent
disassembly and examination leakage of water into any part of
the enclosure, shall be cause for rejection.
SS. Packaging
S5.1 Preservation, Packing, and Marking-Preservation and
packing may be commercial. Marking information shall in-
clude cure date, shelf life, and expiration dates of rubber
products.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed evel)l five years and
COPYRIGHT/).
1318
'4u11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Escort Vessel Evaluation and Selection
1
1. Scope
1.] This guide covers the evaluation and selection of escort
vessels that are to be used to escort ships transiting confined
waters. The purpose of the escort vessel is to limit the
uncontrolled movement of a ship disabled by loss of propulsion
or steering to within the navigational constraints of the
waterway. The various factors addressed in this guide also can
be integrated into a plan for escorting a given ship in a given
waterway. The selection of equipment also is addressed in this
guide.
1.2 This guide can be used in performance-based analyses
to evaluate:
1.2.1 the control requirement of a disabled ship,
1.2.2 the performance capabilities of escort vessels,
1.2.3 the navigational limits and fixed obstacles of a water-
way,
1.2.4 the ambient conditions (wind and sea) that will impact
the escort response, and
1.2.5 the maneuvering characteristics of combined disabled
ship/escort vessel(s).
1.3 This guide outlines how these various factors can be
integrated to form an escort plan for a specific ship or a specific
waterway. It also outlines training programs and the selection
of equipment for escort-related activities.
1.4 A flowchart of the overall process for developing and
implementing an escort plan is shown in 1. The process
begins with the collection of appropriate data, which are
analyzed with respect to the performance criteria and in
consultation with individuals having local specialized knowl-
edge (such as pilots, waterway authorities, interest groups, or
public/private organizations, and so forth). This yields escort
vessel performance requirements for various transit speeds and
conditions; these are embodied in the ship's escort plan. When
the time comes to prepare for the actual transit, the plan is
consulted in conjunction with forecast conditions and desired
transit speed to select and dispatch the appropriate escort vessel
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of Committee F25on Ships and Marine
Technology and is the direct responsibility of SubcommitteeF25.06 on Marine
Environmental Protection.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2009. Published January 2010. Originally
DOI: 10.1520/F1878-98R09.
(or combination of vessels). A pre-escort conference is con-
ducted to ensure that all principal persons (ship master, pilot,
and escort vessel masters) have a good understanding of how
to make a safe transit and interact in the event of an emergency.
1.5 This guide addresses various aspects of escorting, in-
cluding several perfmmance criteria and methodologies for
analyzing the criteria, as well as training, outfitting, and other
escort-related considerations. This guide can be expanded as
appropriate to add new criteria, incorporate "lessons learned"
as more escorting experience is gained in the industry, or to
include alternative methodologies for analyzing the criteria.
1.6 This guide addresses physical control of the disabled
ship with the assistance of the escort vessel(s). Other possible
functions, such as firefighting, piloting, or navigational redun-
dancy, are outside the scope of this guide. Also, this guide was
developed for application to oceangoing ships in coastal
waterways; it is not suitable for application to barge strings in
riverine environments.
2.1 Code of Federal Regulations Document:
2
33 CFR Part 168-Escort Vessels for Certain Tankers, Final
Rule
2.2 IMO Resolutions:
3
IMO Resolution A.60J ( 15)-Provision and Display of Ma-
neuvering Information on Board Ships
IMO Resolution A.751 (18)-lnterim Standards for Ship
Maneuverability
2.3 Marine Safety Committee Circulars:
3
MSC Circular 389/Interim Guidelines for Estimating Ma-
neuvering Performance in Ship Design
MSC Circular 644/Explanatory Notes to the Interim Stan-
dards for Ship Maneuverability
3. Terminology
3.1 For purposes of clarity within this guide, the vessel
being escorted is referred to as the "ship" or "disabled ship."
The vessel accompanying the ship as its escort is referred to as
the "escort vessel."
2
Available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing
3
Available from the International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embankment,
London, SEI 7SR U.K.
1319
cO F1878 - 98 (2009)
Ship Data
Performance Criteria
-Tow
-Stop
-Tum
-Operational
I BASEPLAN
l
SPECIFIC
TRANSIT
PLAN
Escort Vessel Data
Analysis
&
Integration
Escort Vessel
Rendevous
wlthShlp
Waterway Data
-Hydrographic
-Meterological
Local Expertise
-Pilots
-USCG
-Ecological
-others
Transit Forecast
Ship Master
Pilot
FIG. 1 Flowchart of the Overall Process for Developing and Implementing an Escort Plan
3.2 The escorting measures addressed in this guide are
based on performance.
3.2.1 The term "performance measure" refers to perfor-
mance capabilities that must be possessed by the escort
vessel(s) in controlling the disabled ship within a particular
waterway. This requires a holistic analysis of the combined
maneuvering dynamics of the escort vessel(s) and ship within
the waterway in ambient weather and sea conditions.
Performance-based requirements involve extensive preplan-
ning and analyses, but offer greater assurance that the escort
vessel(s) actually will be effective. The methodologies and
processes presented in this guide can be used in determining
the performance envelope of an escort vessel at different transit
speeds and under a range of weather and sea conditions.
3.3 The terms "conventional propulsion" and "omni-
directional propulsion" refer to propulsion systems of the
escort vessel.
3.3.1 Conventional Propulsion System-The propulsive
thmst is fixed in a fore/aft direction.
3.3.2 Omni-Directional Propulsion System-The propulsive
thmst is steerable in any direction (360) around the hulL
Examples are the azimuthing Z-drive screw propeller system
and the vertical axis cycloidal system.
3.4 The terms "direct mode" and "indirect mode" refer to
two towing modes for exerting control forces on a disabled
ship via towline from the escort vessel.
3.4.1 Direct Mode-The towline force is derived directly
from the escort vessel's propulsion system. In general, the
towline orientation is over the bow or over the stem of the
escort vessel, and only the propulsive thrust vector parallel to
the towline axis is effective on the disabled ship.
3.4.2 Indirect Mode:_ The towline force is derived from the
escort vessel's hull drag as it is pulled along behind the
disabled ship (similar to a drag chute). High-performance
1320
F1878 - 98 (2009)
escort vessels should have sufficient stability so that they can
tum approximately sideways to the towline without capsizing
(tripping), thereby substantially increasing their hull drag and,
consequently, increasing their towline fon::e. The propulsion
system of these escort vessels is used indirectly to maintain an
over-the-side towline orientation (rather than pull directly on
the towline itself). In the indirect mode, specially designed
escort vessels can kite off to one side or the other of the
disabled ship's stern, thereby imposing substantial steering
forces on the ship as well as retarding forces to slow it down.
3.5 The terms "parameters" and "constraints" refer to addi-
tional conditions that define the escort scenario and response.
3.5.1 Parameters-Additional details that are specified as
part of the performance criteria to define more fully the
performance "problem" that must be solved by the escort
vessel(s). Parameters are used to customize the performance
criteria to reflect a particular waterway or a specific perfor-
mance objective. Examples of parameters include an initial
ship speed at moment of failure, or winds, currents, and sea
state conditions that must be assumed during the escort
response.
3.5.2 Constraints-Limitations associated with "solving"
the performance problem. Examples of constraints include the
stability limits of the escort vessel (which limit how much
towline heeling moment the escort vessel can tolerate),
strength limits of the ship's bollards (which limit how much
towline force can be applied), or the navigable limits of the
waterway (which limit how much maneuvering room is avail-
able).
3.6 Definitions:
3.6.1 allision, n-a collision with a fixed object.
3.6.2 allowable reach, n-the straight line distance forward
from the designated ship, parallel to its course direction, to a
point at which a grounding of an allision would occur.
3.6.3 allowable transfer, n-the straight line distance from
the designated ship, perpendicular to its course direction, to a
point at which a grounding or an allision would occur.
3.6.4 assist maneuver, n-an escort vessel maneuver in
which the assisting escort vessel(s) apply maximum steering
force to a disabled ship to enhance the turn of the rudder. In this
maneuver, the objective is to make the radius of turn of the ship
as small as possible.
3.6.5 emergency scenarios, n-the complete description of
the failure, the navigational situation, and the emergency assist
response.
3.6.6 escort operating area, n-a subregion of the water-
way, harbor, bay, and so forth, that has been identified as the
region in which the escort vessel(s) will stand by or accompany
the designated ship. The subregion may contain locations that
would require timely escort vessel assistance should the ship
experience a propulsion or steering failure, or both.
3.6.7 escort vessel, n-a vessel that is assigned to stand by
or is dedicated to travel in close proximity to a designated ship
to provide timely assistance should the ship experience a
propulsion or steering failure, or both. The escort vessel has
1321
appropriate fendering and towing gear to provide emergency
assist capability relative to the demand of the disabled ship.
3.6.8 grounding, n-impact of a ship's hull with the sea
bottom.
3.6.9 maneuvering coefficients, n-a set of numerical coef-
ficients the are used in polynomial representations of the forces
acting on a ship in terms of the instantaneous state of the ship.
3.6.10 oppose maneuver, n-an escort vessel maneuver in
which the assisting escort vessel(s) apply maximum steering
force to a disabled ship to turn the ship against its rudder. In
this maneuver, the objective is to return the ship to its original
heading by opposing the rudder forces.
3.6.11 propulsion failure, n-the ship is unable to propel or
actively stop itself.
3.6.12 response times, n-the sequence of time delays
following a disabling failure on a transiting ship before the
escort vessel(s) can apply corrective forces.
3.6.13 rescue tow, n-a maneuver in which the escort vessel
makes up lines and pulls the disabled ship; undertaken after all
forward way has come off the disabled ship.
3.6.14 retard maneuver, n-an escort vessel maneuver in
which the assisting escort vessel(s) apply maximum braking
force to a disabled ship. In this maneuver, the objective is to
take speed off the ship as quickly as possible by pulling astern.
The control of a ship's heading is not an objective. Also
referred to as arrest.
3.6.15 rudder failure, n-the ship's rudder is locked at some
angle or it is swinging uncontrollably.
3.6.16 ship track/course, n-the path covered by the ship's
center of gravity during a voyage, a waterway transit, or a
maneuver.
3 .6.17 tactical diameter, n-the distance, perpendicular to
the original course direction, between the ship's center of
gravity at the start and at the end of a 180 heading change.
3.6.18 zigzag maneuver, n-a test used to measure the
effectiveness of the rudder to initiate and check course
changes. The maneuver is described in MSC Circular 644,
Section 2.2.
3.7 Evaluation and Selection Variables:
3.7.1 transit speeds, n-the speed of the escorted ship
measured through the water. The transit speed takes into
account tidal and wind-driven currents. Transit speed is not
over ground (SOG) as measured by Global Positioning System
(GPS), Loran, or radar.
3.7.2 ballard pull, n-the maximum sustainable force that
the escort vessel is able to develop while pulling on a towline
attached to a stationary object. The forward and astern bollard
pulls are individually specified.
3.7 .3 dynamic pull (at a particular speed), n-the maximum
sustainable force that the escort vessel is able to develop while
moving through the water at a particular speed.
3.7.4 transfer, n-the distance perpendicular to the original
track that a ship's center of gravity travels in a 90 change in
heading.
c4@f F1878 - 98 (2009)
3.7.5 advance, n-the distance parallel to the original track
that a ship's center of gravity travels in a 90 change of
heading.
3.7.6 peiformance limits, n-limits of performance mea-
sures such that under all circumstances, the use of vessels,
equipment, or crew shall not place the life and safety of
individuals in jeopardy. No applicable federal or state regula-
tions should be exceeded in determining escort vessel perfor-
mance capabilities and limits.
4.1 This guide presents some methodologies to predict the
forces required to bring a disabled ship under control within the
available limits of the waterway, taking into account local
influences of wind and sea conditions. Presented are method-
ologies to determine the control forces that an escort vessel can
reasonably be expected to impose on a disabled ship, taking
into account the design of the ship, transit speed, winds,
currents, and sea conditions. In some instances, this guide
presents formulae that can be used directly; in other instances,
in which the interaction of various factors is more complicated,
it presents analytic processes that can be used in developing
computer simulations.
4.2 Unlike the more traditional work of berthing assistance
in sheltered harbors or pulling a "dead ship" on the end of a
long towline, the escorting mission assumes that the disabled
ship will be at transit speed at the time of failure, and that it
could be in exposed waters subject to wind, current, and sea
conditions.
4.3 The navigational constraints of the channel or waterway
might restrict the available maneuvering area within which the
disabled ship must be brought under control before it runs
aground or collides with fixed objects in the waterway (see
allision ).
4.4 The escort mission requires escort vessel(s) that are
capable of responding in timely fashion and that can safely
apply substantial control forces to the disabled ship. This
entails evaluation of the escort vessel's horsepower, steering
and retarding forces at various speeds, maneuverability, stabil-
ity, and outfitting (towing gear, fendering, and so forth). This
guide can be used in developing escort plans for selecting
suitable escort vessel(s) for specific ships in specific water-
ways.
4.5 The methodologies and processes outlined in this guide
are for performance-based analyses of escort scenarios. This
means that the acceptability of a vessel (or combination of
vessels) for escorting is based upon the ability to control the
disabled ship in accordance with specified performance crite-
ria. This guide addresses four selected performance measures:
4.5.1 Towing-the ability to tow the disabled ship under
specified parameters,
4.5.2 Stopping-the ability to stop the disabled ship within
specified parameters,
4.5.3 Turning-the ability to tum the disabled ship within
specified parameters, and
4.5.4 Holding steady-the ability to hold the disabled ship
on a steady course under specified parameters.
4.6 The "specified parameters" are additional details that
must be factored into the performance analysis. These param-
eters might be specified by a regulatory agency imposing the
escort requirement, by a study group evaluating the feasibility
of escorting in a particular waterway, or by the ship or escort
vessel operators themselves to define the performance enve-
lope of their vessels. Some examples of these parameters are:
4.6.1 A ship transit speed (at the moment of failure);
4.6.2 The failure scenario (rudder failure alone, or simulta-
neous rudder/propulsion failure, degree of failure, and so
forth);
4.6.3 Navigational constraint within which the disabled ship
must be brought under control (such as allowable advance and
transfer, cross-track error, and so forth);
4.6.4 Wind, current, and sea conditions; and
4.6.5 Time delays, failure recognition, decision making,
escort vessel notification, escort vessel positioning, achieving
full power, and so forth.
4.7 The anticipated users of this guide are:
4. 7.1 Ship owners/operators who are required to select
escort vessel(s) that meet the performance measures addressed
by this guide.
4.7.2 Escort vessel designers/operators who need to evalu-
ate the performance capabilities of their vessels with respect to
the measures addressed by this guide.
4.7.3 Regulatory agencies that have imposed the perfor-
mance measures in this guide in a particular waterway to
develop suitable escort vessel matrices for various sized ships
in the waterway.
4.7.4 Enforcement agencies can use this guide to confirm/
verify compliance with the performance measures (that is, that
suitable escort vessel(s) are being selected).
4.7.5 Study groups can use this guide to explore the
feasibility and effectiveness of escorting as a means of miti-
gating risk on a particular waterway.
4.8 This guide does not address the use of escort vessels
with barge fleets or barge tows. However, some sections of this
guide would be useful if an evaluation of escort vessels with
barge shipments were undertaken. Paragraphs 5.4 and 5.5, and
all of Section 6 would apply in this type of analysis.
4. 9 The methodologies and processes presented in this
guide will yield valid solutions to the performance measures.
This means that the selected escort vessel(s) can reasonably be
expected to control the disabled ship within the specified
parameters. However, users are reminded that other circum-
stances surrounding the disabling incident may still preclude
the escorts from safely responding (such as fire).
4.10 The methodologies in this guide are not necessarily the
only ones that can be used to find solutions for the performance
measures. There may be other analytic approaches that also
will yield valid results. It is hoped that as these alternative
methods are developed, they will be incorporated into this
guide.
1322
5. Data Requirements for Analysis
5.1 This section describes the data required for an escort
vessel evaluation and selection analysis. This analysis is part of
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
the development of an escort plan. The data recommended for
inclusion in an escort plan document are presented in Section
8.
5.2 The data required for this analysis must be either an
accurate evaluation of ship and escort vessel characteristics or
must be based on conservative assumptions regarding those
characteristics.
5.3 Ship Data:
5.3.1 It is recommended that, as a tmmmum, the ship
information contained on the IMO A.601(15) defined pilot card
and wheelhouse poster be collected for use in developing and
verifying an escort vessel analysis. Examples of the pilot card
and wheelhouse poster are shown in Figs. 2-5. The completed
forms can be made part of an escort plan.
5.3.2 In addition, the following ship-specific characteristics
can be used in the development of an escort plan and can be
used in the validation of ship-maneuvering simulation com-
puter models:
5.3.2.1 Unpropelled advance and transfer distances starting
from an engine stop order with rudder amidships at the
proposed transit speed until a speed of 1 knot is achieved in
calm conditions at level trim in deep water.
5.3.2.2 Crash stop (full engine astern) advance and transfer
distances at a speed of 1 knot with port and starboard locked
rudder starting from the proposed transit speed in calm
conditions at level trim in deep water.
Ship's name---------------- Date--------
Call sign ____ _
Deadweight -----
tonnes
Year buill ------
Draught aft __ ml __ f! __ in, Forward __ ml __ lt __ in, Displacement __ tonnes
SHIP'S PARTICULARS
Length overall __ m, Anchor chain: Port __ shackles. Starboard __ shackles.
Breadth
__ m
Stern __ shackles
Bulbous bow Yes/No ( 1 shackle = ___ ml ___ fathomsl
i+--m
m
r:-------
Air
-l
m
draught
t ______ -
TTf
ft
m
+--Parallel W/L
J
Loaded m
Ballast m
Type of engine Maximum power kW { HPl
Manoeuvring engine order Rpm/pitch
Speed lknotsl
Loaded Ballast
Full ahead
Half ahead
Slow ahead
Dead slow ahead
Dead slow astern Time limit astern min
Slow astern Full ahead to full astern s
Half astern Max. no. of consec. starts
Full astern Minimum RPM
---
___ knots
Astern power % ahead
FIG. 2 Pilot Card
1323
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
STEERING PARTICULARS
Type of rudder ------- Maximum angle -------
Hard-over to hard-over ________ s
Rudder angle for neutral effect
Thruster:
Bow---- kW ( ____ HPl Stern ---- kW ( ____ HP)
CHECKED IF ABOARD AND READY
Anchors
Whistle
Radar CJ 3cm
ARPA
Speed log
CJ
Water speed
Ground speed
Dual-axis
Engine telegraphs
Steering gear
Number of power
units operating
OTHER INFORMATION:
D
0
D
10 em
D
Doppler: Yes/No
D
D
C1
0
CJ
D
Indicators:
Rudder
Rpm/pitch
Rate of turn
Compass system
Constant gyro error
VHF

D
II
[_--:]
D
Elec. pos. fix. system
D
D
Type ________ __
FIG. 2 Pilot Card (continued)
5.3.2.3 Dead ship tow behavior and tow force requirements
for a range of wind speeds characteristic of the escort area,
including associated wave heights and the effects of vessel trim
on towing behavior.
5.3.2.4 Data from full-scale ship-escort vessel trials, if
conducted.
5.4 Escort Vessel Data:
5.4.1 It is recommended that, as a m1mmum, the escort
vessel information shown in Fig. 6 be obtained.
5.4.2 In addition, the additional information shown in 7
can be used in the development of an escort plan.
5.4.3 Alternatively, data from scale model testing or instru-
mented full-scale trials can be used in the development of an
escort plan.
5.5 Waterway Data:
5.5.1 Transit Routes and Escort Zones-Transit route(s)
through the escort area must be identified. For routes that pass
through distinctly different regions, it may be beneficial to
divide the escort area into separate zones based on the
environment and the severity of the constraints. This procedure
will separate a zone with severe constraints from one that is
1324
less restrictive. Different escort vessels can be used in the
different zones to satisfy the requirements of this guide.
5.5.2 Navigational Constraints-The geography of the es-
cort area should be evaluated to determine its navigational
limits. It is within these constraints that a disabled ship must be
stopped or controlled if a grounding is to be prevented. Such
limits might be prescribed by a minimum under-keel clearance,
a particular depth contour, or a safety distance from a point
hazard.
5.5.3 Environmental Conditions-The climatology of the
escort area, including wind speeds, wind directions, wave
heights, wave periods, wave directions, current speeds, and
current directions should be assembled. If there are significant
seasonal variations in the climatological conditions and if
seasonally varying escort plans are to be prepared, then the
climatological data for each season should be assembled.
5.5.4 Particular Hazards-A list of points of particular
hazard along the transit route should be compiled.
UJ
N
Ul
Ship's name Call sign , Gross tonnage------ Net tonnage------
at summer full load draught Max. displacement tonncs, and Deadweight tonnes. and Block coefficient -----
Draught at which the manoeuvring
data were obtained
Loaded Ballast
Trial/Estimated Trial/Estimated
__ m forward _m forward
__ malt __ malt
STEERING PARTICULARS
Type of ruddertsl
Ma>.tmum ru!ldr an!JIC
Tune hardover to ll:trd O\er
\Vtth one PO\\cr untt
wolh two power unts
Mmomum speed to maontaon
propeller stopped
Rudder angle tor neutral effect
ANCHOR CHAIN
Max. rate of
No. of
heavtng
shackles
I min/shackle I

Port
Stilfboard
__ knots Stern
( 1 = __ mt __ fathomsl
PROPULSION PARTICULARS THRUSTER EFFECT at trial conditions
Type of engine --- __ leW I __ HPl.
Engine order
Rpm/pitch
selltng
Full sea speed
Full ahead
Half ahead
Slow ahead
Dead slow ahead
Dead slow astern
Slow astern
Half astern
Full astern
Type of propeller ___
Speed
Loaded Ball,lit
CtthCJl _qnn
Montmum rprn __ knots
Tome hmit astern _M,n
Ttme hmit at mon _m.n
Emergcncv full aht);H1
to full astern

Stop to lull astern _s
Astern power -" Jh;;J.:l
Max. no. ol
consecultn?
-
Thruster
!3ow

Combne<.t
Und ..:l k'-t:i

k\'VtHPt
Tome delay Turning rate Time delay to Not effective
lor lull thrust at zero speed lull thrust above speed
s ulmin
s ''lrrun
vlmon
DRAUGHT INCREASE !LOADED!
l ... !,fl't.tt Squat l_tft!tt
SrutJ's spr:"d I Ma> .. bow squat
.n<1l!d csttmated fml
I
I
Heel angle
fdegrEtCI
8
12
16
rmn s knots
nun s knots
rntn s knots
H<!cl Ulcr;t
Draft oncrease
lml
FIG. 3 Wheelhouse Poster

,
.....
(X)
.......
(X)
I
(0
(X)
-N
0
0
(0
-
VJ
N
01
LOADED Water depth/draught ratio 1.2 BALLAST
-;;;10
(l)
::0
<V

(l)
us
C I
!!ll
6j
. i
:1'1 0 -;--- 10
Distance !cables)
Deep water
!Estimated/trial)
EMERGENCY MANOEUVRES
.. . .. , ..
F; '
''I \
I '
I \
1
1
cables '.
I
FULL SEA AHEAD
Comparison of turning lmax.
rudder! and full astern stopping
ability !rudder amidships}
10
i
::0
co

mons
kiS
10
Vi
(l)
:0
ro

(l)
U!;)
\mons.
} kls.

1 cable =
0. 1 nClutical mile
5 10
Distance lcablosl
0 ,._ ..
kts.o 5 10
Distance lcablesl
Shallow water
!Estimated, Clpproxmatel
Deep
TRACK
'REACH
I Estimatcd/tri<lll
LOADED
.:14lO
J
20
'
'"

< l & IZ
'jl 4 1 t 'H

.I ,, ., 4 *I 1
J .,
I 2 J ! '
J u 1 J ] 11
BALLAST
lf'JU l11 ;'IIIJ (,
IIOZ t 10!i I 11J "'t.:J ..
- 'l". ; :: ' " " J .. :.l . . - . . . .
S,. UA Jvtt ,,,..,,.A .. .,, t., 1,_.., ... t411 &,: t,1; ., .. , , ..... t,,.., ftolll h..,. "'""""
............ .,. ...... ...... , .... ,, , .... J '"'"'" .e" .. ,, ..... ,1 .... ,1 1 ......... _.\d ..... ,w .., .......,
'-+ .=,. .,/ ...._'" .. : .-' '-+
STOPPING CHARACTERISTICS
FIG. 4 Turning Circles at Maximum Rudder Angle
EMERGENCY MANOEUVRES
, .. .
, ....
/ \11,'
I '
I \
t Ci!bles '.
I I
FULL SEA AHEAD
Comparison of turning lmax.
rudder! and full astern stopping
ability (rudder amidshipl

,
...a.
co
.....
co
I
CD
co
-
N
0
0
CD
-
-VJ
N
-:J
MAN OVERBOARD
RESCUE
SEQUENCE OF ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN.
TO CAST A LIFEBUOY
TO GIVE THE HELM ORDER
TO SOUND THE ALARM
TO KEEP THE LOOK-OUT

If rh ::::;;?:
A :
....... ............... -.... -................................................. -. :
Loaded m t Ll __J
1
: Ballast m t U
m
Ballast m
I
m-r--- ..
"t--i-----
m
! ....... :-::::-' --
.---
fiim
Insert a
recommended
turn
m---_..,
m
Ballast m
Prepared by
Date
NoTE !-Performance may differ from this record as a result of environmental, hull, and loading conditions.
FIG. 5 Man Overboard Rescue Maneuver

.,
...a.
(X)
.....,
(X)
I
<.0
(X)
-N
0
0
<.0
-
F1878 - 98 (2009)
Escort vessel
Name
Type
Owner
Builder
Year Built
Basic Performance Data
Hull Data
Horsepower (BHP)
LOA
Ahead Bollard Pull Beam (Main Deck)
Astern Bollard Pull
Draft (operating)
Freeboard (operating)
Propeller Data
Engine Data
Propulsion Type
Make/Model:
Number of Shafts and Props
Number of Engines
I
Maximum RPM
I
Prop. Type (No. Blades, etc.)
Prop. Diameter
Prop. Pitch
Nozzle (Type)
Nozzle Diameter
Deck and Escort Equipment
Nozzle Length
Tow winch (make/model)
Winch brake capacity
Rudder Data
Quick release features
Number of Rudders
Towline (type/size)
Rudder Shapes (flat, faired, etc.)
Breaking strength
Maximum Rudder Angles
Bow winches and lines
Flanking Rudders (yes/no)
Firefighting Equipment
FIG. 6 Escort Vessel Data Form
6. Determination of Escort Vessel Capability
6.1 Two different approaches to escort vessel performance
measures are presented. Paragraph 6.2 discusses selected
performance measures. Paragraph 6.3 discusses operational
performance measures. Operational performance measures dif-
fer from selected performance measures in both definition and
methodology for determination of adequacy.
6.2 Selected Performance Measures:
6.2.1 Selected performance measures can be thought of as
the ship demand for escort vessel capability. These measures
can be chosen by regulatory bodies at either the state or
national level, or they can be chosen by vessel operators as a
means of setting minimum performance standards for their
own evaluation and selection of escort vessel(s). These mea-
sures can be specified so as to be waterway and weather
independent. They would not require consideration of such
operational issues as time delays for the application of escort
vessel force and procedures for applying those forces.
6.2.2 Example performance measures are presented in
pendix Xl.
1328
6.3 Operational Performance Measures:
6.3.1 Operational performance measures are ship, water-
way, and season specific. An example of this type of perfor
mance measure is contained in 33 CFR 168.50 Part (a). II
reads, in part: "... at all times during the escort transit each
tanker to which this part applies: ... (2) Must have the escort
vessels positioned relative to the tanker such that timely
response to a propulsion or steering failure can be effected. (3)
Must not exceed a speed beyond which the escort vessels can
reasonably be expected to safely bring the tanker under control
within the navigational limits of the waterway, taking into
consideration ambient sea and weather conditions, surrounding
vessel traffic, hazards, and other factors that may reduce the
available sea room." An operational analysis needs to consider
transit speed, time delays, sea and weather conditions, naviga ..
tional constraints, failure modes, type of assistance used, ship
fitting, and other factors.
6.3.2 The adequacy of the escort under this section can be
demonstrated through computer simulations, model-scale or
full-scale trials, or a combination of both.
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
Name:
HULL:
LWL
Beam
Draft
Freeboard
Displacement
Wetted Surface
GM( corrected)
KG
Vertical Coordinate of Center of Bow Fenders
Vertical Coordinate of Line in Bow Staple
Vertical Coordinate of Line in Towing Staple
Underwater Lateral Area of Hull
Longitudinal Coordinate of Center of Pressure for Hull
Vertical Coordinate of Center of Pressure for Hull
Bow Entrance Angle
SKEG (if fitted)
Aspect Ratio of Skeg
Lateral Area of Skeg
Longitudinal Coordinate of Center of Pressure for Skeg
Vertical Coordinate of Center of Pressure for Skeg
RUDDERS (if fitted)
Number of Rudders
FIG. 7 Escort Vessel Additional Data Form
6.3.3 Failure Modes-Failure modes for an operational
analysis are to be defined. Possible failure modes include
propulsion failure, steering failure, or steering failure without
the use of ship propulsion. The escort requirements differ
significantly, depending on the failure scenario.
6.3.4 Time Delays-Time delays for an operational analysis
are to be defined. Actual time delays can vary significantly as
a result of differences in human performance, weather condi-
tions, nature of casualty, ship speed, escort vessel type, escort
position, escort mode, emergency assist procedures, and equip-
ment. The time delay chain of events should include each of the
following, if applicable.
6.3.4.1 Time delay for failure recognition aboard the tran-
siting ship (consideration can be given to on-board failure
alarm systems),
6.3.4.2 Time delay to consider options and cures and notify
escort vessel(s),
1329
6.3.4.3 Time required to maneuver escort vessel(s) from its
escort position to the ship,
6.3.4.4 Time required to connect any lines, and
6.3.4.5 Time required to stream lines and develop tension.
6.3.5 The possibility that an emergency assist might be
required under adverse conditions, such as storms, darkness,
times of poor visibility, conditions with ice on the decks, or
difficult communications caused by winds and darkness, is to
be considered.
6.3.6 Estimates should be based on experience, full-scale
trials, commentary from experienced masters, and other reli-
able available data.
6.3.7 Type of Assistance:
6.3.7.1 An escort vessel must be capable of providing
assistance in towing, stopping, and steering. The way in which
this assistance is provided will depend on the nature of the
F1878 - 98 (2009)
Rudder Type: (Flat Plate, Trailing Edge Wedge, NACA, High Lift, other)
Maximum Rudder Angle
Chord
Span
-
Aspect Ratio
Rudder Area
ENGINES:
Number
Manufacturer and Type
Maximum RPM
Rated RPM
BHP at Rated RPM
Gear Ratio
Gear Efficiency
Shaft Efficiency
PROPELLERS
Type: open wheel, nozzle, steerable nozzle, azimuthing, cycloidal, other
Four quadrant Kt vs Beta curves
Propeller Interaction Effects
Longitudinal Coordinate of Center of Thrust for Propellers
Transverse Coordinate of Center of Thrust for Propellers
Vertical Coordinate of Center of Thrust for Propellers
FENDERING
Description (Type. materials, etc.)
Dimensions (Vertical Extent at Bow, Length along side, Depth from hull)
Locations (Bow, midship, stem, etc.)
FIG. 7 Escort Vessel Additional Data Form (continued)
ship's casualty, its speed, navigational constraints, escort
vessel type, escort position, and escort mode (whether tethered
or untethered).
6.3.7.2 The towline forces for steering and braking assist
can be substantially higher than the loads that the bitts and
chocks of many existing ships have been designed to accom-
modate. The braking and steering assist forces above the safe
limits of the ship's fittings should not be considered in an
operational analysis.
6.3.7.3 The capability limits of escort vessel fittings should
be evaluated. Assist forces above the safe limits of the escort
vessel fittings should not be considered in an operational
analysis.
6.3.7.4 The use of the disabled ship's astern thrust and the
deployment of its anchors to complement the action of the
escort vessel(s) or other actions should be considered.
6.3.8 Navigational Constraints:
1330
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
6.3.8.1 A quantitative definition of the navigational con-
straints for each escort zone in terms of an allowable reach and
an allowable transfer must be determined. The analysis is to
include distances to point constraints such as bridges, rocks,
and islands, as well as to bottom contours. In evaluating the
navigational constraint, consideration can be made between
grounding on hard bottom, which may potentially open the
hull, and on soft bottom, such as mud, which may not.
6.3.8.2 It is not intended that the escort analysis or escort
plan define the transit route that ships must take in a particular
waterway. It is recognized that tracklines chosen during an
actual transit may differ from those used in the preparation of
the escort plan. However, the escort plan should be based on
the average or most likely route that the ship will take in the
waterway. Thus, allowable reach and transfer distances can be
based on the average or most likely transit route.
6.3.8.3 The offtrack distances from a disabling failure sce-
nario, including the effects of escort vessel assistance, are to be
compared with these allowable distances to determine the
adequacy of escort vessel selection. The offtrack distances can
be obtained from full-scale trials, model-scale testing, or
computer simulations.
6.3.8.4 There are several methods of determining the nu-
merical values of the available reach and transfer distances.
The simplest is to choose the absolute minimums as used from
a trackline chosen for each ship's purposes. Using this defini-
tion, the reach constraint would be the shortest straight-ahead
distance from a tum in the transit route to the constraint
directly ahead. The minimum transfer distance would be the
shortest perpendicular distance to constraints on either side.
However, if this approach is adopted, the escort requirement
would be based on a single-point exposure to the worst case
hazard, which may be too restrictive in relation to the entire
transit route.
6.3.8.5 An alternative approach is to define the reach and
transfer constraints as a statistical measure of the exposure of
the vessel to potential grounding/allision situations. The statis-
tical measure could be the average distance ahead and abeam
measured throughout the entire transit in the escort zone of
interest. Percentile measures of reach and transfer distances
can also be determined. For example, the 95th or 98th percentile
levels can be used to define the navigational constraint. The
procedure for the calculation of statistically defined constraints
begins by measuring the reach and transfer distances from the
normal ship track to a constraint. To do this, the transit is
divided into evenly spaced segments, and the ahead and abeam
distances measured. A histogram of the measurements showing
the frequency distribution of reach and transfer is then con-
structed (Fig. 8). Cumulative frequency distributions are de-
veloped and used to determine the percentile reach and transfer
for any particular transit. An example calculation is shown in
9 and 10.
6.3.8.6 Other reasonable methods of determining available
reach and transfer distances may be developed.
6.3.9 Environmental Conditions-The behavior of a dis-
abled ship and the capability of an escort system are influenced
Histogram of Ott Track Distances to 50' Contour
10 lcx:J%
-.

9
-
,__,..,-
..

---
-
..
Max. 14,160'
--
8
7
7rfi>
-

Average 4,170' -
-
90%> 1 ,9\IJ'
--

95% > 1,650'
---
..
- -
-
6
,..
98% > 1.170'
- -
- -
-.
Min. 860'
-
--
-- -
- -
. - -
-

--
. - 40%
-
.........
-
-.
- -- -
3
..
-
_,.
-
r- r- . -
.
- ---
..

- -
. - .. --- . -

- - - - -
-
. --
- ---

1 . .Lll J.
!IIII-I 1- Ill.-,. l-:JJ.
"
II ..
2
0
10%
! s ! g ! ! ! ! ! g !
Distances (feet)
FIG. 8 Histogram of Transfer Distances from Track to 50-ft Depth Contour
1331
F1878 - 98 (2009)
San Francisco
FIG. 9 Example Calculation of a Statistical Measure of the Navigational Constraint; Transfer Distances from
Track to 50-ft Depth Contour
by the environmental conditions. The environmental factors to
be considered include wind speeds, direction and duration,
wave heights, periods and directions, current velocities, and
direction. Seasonal variations in climatological conditions
should be considered in escort operations analysis and escort
vessel selection.
6.4 Stability of Escort Vessels:
6.4.1 Some modes of escorting may result in an escort
vessel being subjected to forces, both static and dynamic, that
cause heeling moments in excess of those for which the escort
vessel was originally designed.
6.4.2 Conventional stability analysis techniques consider
the effects of heeling moments only in a static condition. The
impact of vessel speed and the resulting hydrodynamic forces
acting on the vessel are not considered.
6.4.3 Escort vessels with omni-directional propulsion sys-
tems deliberately can be placed abeam to the direction of the
tow line to achieve high retarding forces. Such attitudes can
result in high heeling angles at higher speeds and, thus, a
potentially sudden incidence of deck edge submergence.
6.4.4 The stability analysis of escort vessels must consider
all potential attitudes of the escort vessel to the direction of line
pull, the maximum line pull, and the resultant combination of
heel and trim on the escort vessel.
6.4.5 For all escort vessels, a limiting heel angle must be
established. This limit might be the geometrical submergence
of the main deck, including the loss of freeboard as a result of
waves.
6.4.6 The stability analysis must include the effects of
fenders, skegs, nozzles, rudders, and any other appendages on
both the reserve buoyancy and the lateral resistance of the
escort vessel.
6.4.7 The stability analysis must include the contribution to
heel and trim of the propulsion system in conjunction with
maximum line forces.
6.4.8 The stability analysis must include an evaluation of
the reaction of the escort vessel to an instantaneous release of
the line forces and the propulsive forces.
1332
6.5 Procedures for Determination of Escort Vessel Capa-
bilities:
6.5.1 Full-Scale Trials:
6.5.1.1 Full-scale ship-escort vessel trials, wherever they
can be properly designed and safely executed, may be used to
verify the adequacy of escort vessel(s). These trails should be
carefully planned in conjunction with ship owners and escort
vessel operators to ensure proper evaluation of escort vessel(s).
cO F1878 - 98 (2009)
San Francisco
FIG. 1 0 Example Statistical Transfer Distances
The differences between the environmental conditions prevail-
ing at the time of the test and the postulated environmental
conditions during the actual transit should be accounted for in
the analysis.
6.5 .1.2 Full-scale ship-escort vessel makeup trials can pro-
vide examples of the time taken by an escort vessel to approach
a ship and begin to render effective assistance. However, the
trials may take place in conditions different from emergency
conditions and when the crew is fully prepared for the test.
Thus, time delays obtained in these tests will, in most cases,
underestimate the time required in a true emergency.
6.5.1.3 The ship's position during the course of the trials is
to be continuously recorded. Observers should be stationed on
the vessels to monitor the precise sequence of events aboard
the ship and the actions taken by the escort vessel(s). The water
depth, the ship's loaded condition, the load condition of the
escort vessel, and the environmental conditions prevailing at
the time of the trials are to be noted.
6.5 .1.4 At no point in the course of the trials should the
safety of the vessels and their crew be compromised.
6.5.1.5 At the conclusion of the trials, the results are to be
analyzed and the ship tracks plotted. Corrections for any
currents, wind loads, ship and escort vessel operating condi-
tion, and the GPS antenna location on the ship are to be
incorporated, if applicable.
6.5.2 Ship Model for Computer Simulation:
1333
6.5.2.1 As an alternative to full-scale trials, a validated
ship-maneuvering simulation program can be used to verify the
adequacy of escort vessel(s).
6.5.2.2 The coefficients of the underlying mathematical
model of ship maneuvering may be obtained from an appro-
priate database established by properly conducted physical
model tests. The coefficient set shall be suitable for the type of
ship and the waterway bathymetry being modeled. Restricted
water effects, such as bank suction and shallow water effects on
maneuvering, shall be considered. Effects of ship-ship interac-
tion on maneuvering shall be considered where appropriate.
6.5.3 Escort Vessel Model for Computer Simulation:
6.5.3.1 The performance of an escort vessel in an emer-
gency maneuver depends on its ability to apply corrective
forces to the disabled ship either through a line or through
direct contact with the ship's hull. The forces may be applied
while the disabled ship is still moving at speeds close to its
transit speed, except where sea room is available to allow the
disabled ship to slow without escort vessel intervention. Three
distinct assist modes are to be evaluated. They are: stopping
(also called retarding or arresting), steering, and towing. The
assist forces in these modes should be properly evaluated and
applied to the ship model as external forces.
6.5.3.2 Conventionally propelled escort vessels apply brak-
ing force by backing down on a head line while being dragged
through the water by the disabled ship. The braking capability
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
and clutch-in speed of a conventional escort vessel can be
calculated using fourth quadrant open water propeller curves
for the installed propellers, including the hull-propeller inter-
action effects, and the drag of the hull. For conventionally
propelled escort vessels, the braking force may be assumed to
be constant up to the clutch-in speed and equal to that
measured in reverse bollard pull trials.
6.5.3.3 The braking force of a vertical axis cycloidal escort
vessel (in direct and indirect modes) and the braking force of
an azimuthing propelled escort vessel (in reverse, transverse, or
indirect modes) can be calculated from open water propeller
curves for the installed propellers, including the hull-propeller
and propeller-propeller interaction effects, and the lift and drag
of the hull at its equilibrium attitude to the flow.
6.5.3.4 Alternatively, the braking force as a function of
advance speed can be determined from scale-model testing or
instrumented full-scale trials.
6.5.3.5 The emergency assist steering capability of the
escort vessels can be quantified by a pair of speed-dependent
vector force functions, a maximum steering force together with
an associated pushing or braking force. The hydrodynamics of
the underwater hull with any skegs, rudders, and appendages,
the propeller characteristics and stability, including freeboard
and metacentric height, should be considered in the evaluation
of these vector force functions. The assumed position of the
escort vessel at the bow or stern, or when pushing on the side
or transom, or when pulling on a line, is to be properly
modeled. When the escort vessel is pushing on the transom or
the side of the disabled ship or pulling on a headline, the
steering force is accompanied by a longitudinal force which
affects the speed of the disabled ship. Likewise, when steering
by pulling on a line from the stern of the disabled ship, the
steering force is accompanied by a braking force which can
affect the speed of the ship.
6.5.3.6 For all escort vessel types, a heel angle limit should
be established. This limit can be the geometrical submergence
of the main deck edge including the loss of freeboard as a result
of waves. Even though it may be possible to submerge a
portion of the main deck and produce somewhat larger steering
forces, the stability of the escort vessel decreases rapidly.
6.5.3.7 The emergency assist steering capability of the
escort vessel can be calculated by solving the equilibrium free
body problems for a hull in a free stream. The solution
corresponds to a quasi-steady state condition in which the
horizontal-plane forces and moments are in balance. The
dynamic fluctuations in the forcing functions can be assumed
to be negligible with respect to the time rate of change of ship
momentum, and small with respect to the average force
capability of the escort vessel. The analysis should include the
hydrodynamic forces on the escort vessel hull, skeg, and other
appendages and fenders; the lift and drag forces acting on the
rudders (if present); and the thrust of the propellers. The
analysis should include flow modifications, such as the flow
straightening and wake effects of the hull on the flow entering
the propellers, and modifications to the direction and magni-
tude of the velocity field acting on the rudders (if present) as a
result of the propeller slipstream. In addition to the hydrody-
namic forces on the underwater hull, the equilibrium is affected
by all lines and escort vessel-ship contact. The components of
a complete quasi-steady state analysis are summarized in
X2. Effects of escort vessel motions on freeboard
can be ignored. These are time-dependent dynamic processes
and can be assumed not to affect significantly the quasi-steady
state solution.
6.5.3.8 Alternatively, the emergency assist steering force as
a function of advance speed can be determined from scale-
model testing or instrumented full-scale trials.
6.5.3.9 Towing capability can be determined by the thrust
and torque characteristics of the propeller and the resistance of
the escort vessel, towed vessel, and towline at speed. The
calculation should use an accurate model of the escort vessel's
propulsion system. The solution of thrust, torque, RPM, and
required power shouid be checked for propeller cavitation,
RPM limitations, and engine capacity. The towing capability
predicted in calm water should be modified for sea conditions
by reducing the RPM of the engines and adding steady wave
forces and wind loads to the escort vessel hull.
6.5.3.10 Capability Reductions Because of Vessel
Condition-Towing performance is reduced as the engines,
shafting, and propellers deviate from design specifications.
Accountability should be made for significant changes in
capability caused by any change in escort vessel condition. The
performance of a selected escort vessel can change as a result
of the degradation of equipment or stability characteristics over
time. The capability of the selected escort vessel(s) should be
reassessed periodically to ensure the performance is adequate
to meet the needs of the escort plan.
6.6 Escort Vessel Equipment:
6.6.1 The fittings and equipment installed in an escort
must be capable of, and suitable for, the safe transmission
forces and loads between the escort vessel and the designated
ship. Both the equipment and the manner in which it is
connected to the structure of the escort vessel must be designed
in recognition of the maximum loads anticipated during
emergency maneuvers.
6.6.2 Towline Winch-Winches designed for installation on
board escort vessels shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with the following specifications:
6.6.2.1 The winch foundation, drum, and ancillary struc-
tures shall be designed to accept the maximum anticipated
dynamic and static loads with appropriate factors of safety.
6.6.2.2 Winch performance shall be commensurate with the
operator's requirements for safe operations. Performance cri-
teria of light line speed, static line pull, and brake capacity of
the winch should be considered when evaluating the escort
vessel's suitability. Other tow winch features that should be
considered are a fail-safe and properly located abort mecha-
nism, load tension devices, and a method to spool the towline
to prevent burying under severe tension.
1334
6.6.3 Towlines:
6.6.3.1 The towline between the escort vessel and ship is
critical to any successful escort maneuver, but should be
designed as the weak link in the system. The towline should
fail before any mechanical or structural component on the
escort vessel. If the strength of the towing connection on a
designated ship is unknown or suspect, the escort vessel
F1878 - 98 (2009)
operator may consider operational restrictions that would
reduce the potential for high line loads.
6.6.3.2 Towlines for escort service should be sized to the
mission and capabilities of the escort vessel, with consideration
of the appropriate safety factor of the type of line used.
6.6.3.3 Towlines for escort duty must be routinely inspected
for proper condition.
6.6.4 Towline Connectors-Instead of a line winch and
towline stored aboard and controlled by the escort vessel, the
connection between the escort vessel and ship may be made by
using a towline stored aboard the designated ship. In this case,
the escort vessel must be equipped with a device capable of the
following:
6.6.4.1 Rapidly and safely securing the line to the escort
vessei,
6.6.4.2 Rapidly and safely disconnecting the line from the
escort vessel, and
6.6.4.3 Sustaining the highest anticipated loads experienced
during the escort maneuvers.
6.6.5 Ground Tackle-Escort vessels should be equipped
with ground tackle (anchors, cables, and so forth) in compli-
ance with classification society requirements for ocean service.
6.6.6 Fendering:
6.6.6.1 Escort vessels shall be fully fendered to preclude
damage in the event of contact between the escort vessel and
the designated ship.
6.6.6.2 Fender type and geometry shall be arranged to
provide a resilient contact zone between the escort vessel and
ship, such that when the maximum static bollard pull of the
escort vessel is applied, the structural limits of the ship's side
or stern are not exceeded, and the fender system is not stressed
beyond its design limits.
6.6.7 A line-throwing apparatus is required to facilitate
rapid connection between the escort vessel and the ship.
7. Methodology for Escort Vessel Selection
7.1 The methodologies presented in this section provide the
user with three alternatives for analyzing an escort situation
and can be used as guidance in the selection of an escort vessel.
The different approaches are: (1) a ship-specific analysis using
computer simulation of specific escort vessel(s) in a matrix of
operating conditions; (2) a parametric study of the trends in the
results of escort vessel-assisted maneuvers using a number of
ships, escort vessel(s), and operating conditions; and (3) a
demand versus capability study.
7.2 Other methodologies may be developed for escort vessel
selection, but must be validated with literature citations,
scale-model testing, or full-scale testing.
7.3 Simulation Matrices:
7.3.1 The use of a matrix of scenarios to identify escort
requirements is based on an analysis of individual or represen-
tative ships matched with specific escort vessel(s). This method
requires using ship-specific and escort vessel-specific informa-
tion.
7.3.2 A matrix of simulation cases is to be defined so that
acceptable escort solutions can be identified for each escort
area and transit condition. The matrix should include appro-
priate combinations covering all relevant geographic regions,
climatic conditions, navigational conditions, operating speeds,
failure modes, escort deployments, time delays, and types of
assistance.
7.3.3 A computer simulation of the escort vessel acting on
the disabled ship should be carried out for each combination in
the matrix. The resulting ship trackline should be plotted and
then compared with the navigational constraints of the water-
way. Based on this process, acceptable escorts are identified for
all applicable geographic regions, climatic conditions, naviga-
tional conditions, and transit speeds.
7.3.4 Computer simulation of disabled ship maneuvers with
escort vessel assist requires a validated computer model. This
can be accomplished using the ship and escort vessel informa-
tion discussed in 5.1, 5.2, and Section 6. Additional validation
can come from full-scale trials.
7.4 Parametric Studies:
7 .4.1 A parametric study is an extension of the matrix of
simulation cases presented in 7.3. However, unlike the matrix
of cases described in 7.3, which evaluated specific climatic
conditions and transit speeds, this approach uses a matrix of
scenarios based on parametric variations in climatic conditions,
operating speeds, and time delays. Each scenario in the matrix
is analyzed using a particular ship and escort vessel.
7 .4.2 The results of the parametric study can be presented in
a graphical form by plotting a measure representing the
outcome of the emergency assist (transfer distance) as a
function of any of the underlying parameters, while holding the
remaining parameters fixed. For example, a plot of the transfer
distance as a function of the initial speed will clearly demon-
strate the change in the escort vessel's ability to control the
ship as transit speed changes. Similarly, a plot of the transfer
distance as a function of wind speed or current speed will show
the change in the ability of the escort vessel to control a
disabled ship in different climatic conditions. In this example,
comparing the transfer results with the navigational limits of
the waterway will enable the selection of a transit speed or an
environmentally imposed operational limit.
7.4.3 Computer simulation of disabled ship maneuvers with
escort vessel assist requires a validated computer model. This
can be accomplished using the ship and escort vessel informa-
tion discussed in 5.1, 5.2, and Section 6. Additional validation
can come from full-scale trials.
1335
7.5 Demand Versus Capability Formulation:
7.5.1 The approach is advantageous when a diverse range of
escorted ships and escort vessels are to be considered. It can be
used to select a suitable escort system for a given ship at a
prescribed displacement and speed, transiting a particular
escort area. The ship's "demand" for assist forces is separated
from the "capability" of the escort vessel and must not exceed
the demand to have an acceptable escort system.
7.5.2 The demands of the ship requiring escmt shall be
quantified as a function of the displacement, speed, time
delays, and the prevailing environment. The "demand" mea-
sures generally take on scalar values of force or distance. They
should be specific to the failure mode and the escort area. They
are to be independent of escort vessel parameters.
7.5.3 The capabilities of a vessel providing escort should be
established as a function of the speed and the prevailing
cO F1878 - 98 (2009)
environment. They should be independent of ship parameters.
The capability measures must have the same measurement
units as the demand.
7.5.4 Once the demands and capabilities are established,
they should be clearly tabulated. The governing demand can be
taken as the maximum demand across all possible failure
modes. An escort vessel or escort vessel combinations with a
total capability sufficient to meet or exceed the governing
demand qualify as acceptable escorts. Alternative escort
choices for any given ship at a prescribed displacement and
transit speed in any escort area should then be easily identifi-
able from the tables.
7.5.5 Because of the simplifying assumptions inherent in a
demand versus capability formulation, the demand and capa-
bility determination of escort vessel selection should be
double-checked. This should be done by demonstrating that the
selected escort vessel(s) capabilities meet or exceed the de-
mand of a disabled ship, and that they are capable of rendering
timely assistance to the disabled ship and bringing it under
control within the navigational limits of the waterway, taking
into consideration ambient sea and weather conditions, sur-
rounding vessel traffic, hazards, and other factors that may
reduce the available sea room. The validation should be carried
out through full-scale trials or computer simulations and should
cover the full range of ship, escort vessel, and environmental
parameters.
8. Preparation of An Escort Plan
8.1 Components of an Escort Plan-This section provides
recommendations for developing an escort plan. The plan may
be ship- or ship class-specific. It should provide clear and
precise instructions regarding the escorted segment of the
voyage. Forms are to be developed and included in the plan for
presenting the applicable voyage, ship- and escort vessel-
specific information. Flowcharts may be developed for the
various activities to be performed.
8.2 Information and Assumptions :
8.2.1 It is recommended that able ship-maneuvering char-
acteristics be compiled in the form of the maneuvering booklet
recommended in IMO Resolution A.601(15). MSC/Circular
389 may be consulted for guidance on estimating maneuvering
performance. In addition, escort-specific information, includ-
ing the current condition of the ship with regard to its loading,
propulsion and maneuvering equipment, and so forth, should
be available in the form of the pilot card recommended in IMO
Resolution A. 601(15).
8.2.2 The plan should include all additional information that
is useful for understanding the ship's behavior and how it
affects emergency assist requirements. If this information is not
available, the escort plan should indicate that it is not available.
Data from full-scale ship-escort vessel trials, if available, are to
be assembled and included in the escort plan.
8.2.3 Any assumptions used in the selection of the escort
vessel(s) should be documented. These include time delays,
failure modes, environmental conditions, and emergency assist
maneuvers.
8.2.4 Particular Hazards-The escort plan should include a
list of points of particular hazard along the escort transit or
shall contain a reference to the relevant published compilation
of the points of particular hazard, such as the Coast Pilot.
8.2.5 All Coast Guard, VTS, and marine traffic control
contacts, radio frequencies, and phone numbers for the escort
area should be listed in the escort plan.
8.2.6 The climatology of the escort operating area, includ-
ing winds, currents, and sea conditions, should be assembled
and included in the escort plan. If there are significant seasonal
variations in the climatological conditions and if seasonally
varying escort plans are to be prepared, then the climatological
data for each season should be assembled and included in the
escort plan.
8.3 Equipment and Deployment:
8.3.1 A stand-alone diagram or flowchart can be included
that describes the equipment involved and the methods em-
ployed in making an emergency towline connection (if one is
required to be made in accordance with the escort plan).
8.3.2 The plan should include the location and load capaci-
ties of the bitts, chocks, and hard points to be used in an
emergency assist.
8.4 Escort Selection:
8.4.1 The escort plan should indicate available escort vessel
or vessel combinations capable of providing escort.
8.4.2 The plan should specify where to position the escort
vessel(s). In this section, consideration should be given to the
safety of the escort vessel(s) and to the time it takes for the
escort vessel( s) to provide the emergency assistance.
8.4.3 The plan should specify whether the escort vessel(s)
will be tethered or not and, if tethered, whether it will be
tethered during all or a portion of the transit.
1336
8.4.4 If any portion of the escort transit is untethered, then
the plan should define if and how the escort vessel(s) will tether
during an emergency.
8.5 Escort Transit Speed:
8.5.1 The speed for a specific transit should be determined
in compliance with 33 CFR 168. This speed might depend on
the anticipated environmental conditions (winds, currents, and
sea conditions) and the capability of the escort vessel(s).
8.5.2 The intended speed for each portion of the transit
should be clearly indicated on the escort plan.
8.5.3 The plan should contain a notice that the speeds
written are "through the water" speeds and that they differ from
speeds "over ground" by the amount of the current.
8.6 The plan should contain documentation of the results of
all proposed emergency assist maneuvers. The predicted out-
come of the emergency assist maneuvers should be shown on
the escort plan at key points along the route.
8.7 Alternatives to Primary Plan-The escort plan should
clearly spell out alternative procedures for controlling the
disabled ship if the primary plan cannot be executed.
8.8 Pre-Escort Planning and Conference-The plan should
contain a procedure and a form (a sample format is given in
Table 1) to use when conducting a pre-escort conference. The
condition of the environment in which the escort is to take
place, including winds, currents, and sea conditions and the
consequences for escort vessel selection, should be discussed.
F1878 - 98 (2009)
TABLE 1 Pre-Escort Conference Guide
NoTE 1-Inbound ships: The pre-escort conference (PEC) should be
conducted after safely clearing the pilot boarding area and before entering
the escort zone. Outbound ships: The PEC should commence before
getting underway.
USCG Rule
Transit: The destination, route,
planned speed, other vessel
traffic, anticipated weather, tide,
and sea conditions, and other
navigational considerations
Operational status: The type and
operational status of communi-
cation, towing, steering, and
propulsion equipment on the
ship and escort vessels
Positioning: The relative positioning
and reaction time for the escort
vessel(s) to move into assist
positions, including, if appropriate,
pretethering the escort vessel(s) at
crucial points along the route
Preparedness: The preparations re-
quired on the ship and escort
vessel(s), and the methods used
in making an emergency towline
connection, including stationing of
deck crews, preparation of messen-
ger lines, bridles, and other towing
gear, and energizing appropriate
deck equipment
Emergency response: The manner
in which an emergency towline
connection would be made
(which escort vessel will respond,
how messengers and towlines will
be passed, and so forth)
Description
Our destination is via
___ (strait). Transit speed will
be ___ . Anticipated weather/
sea conditions are The
predicted tide is ___ . vessels
monitor VTS for traffic.
Vessels should report any unusual
equipment specifications, extra-
ordinary handling characteristics,
or operational deficiencies at
this time.
Escort vessel(s) will be deployed in the
following manner.
All vessels will prepare their decks and
crews for escort and emergency
response for the transit.
In the event of an emergency, the escort
vessel(s) will be deployed as
necessary, subject to the circum-
stances at the time.
9. Keywords
9.1 disabled ship; escort plan; escort vessel; navigational
limit; ship transit
APPENDIXES
Xl. SELECTED PERFORMANCE MEASURES
X 1.1 Example performance measures in three assist modes
are described herein. The demand and capability method
described in can be used to verify the compliance of an
escort with these measures. In this method, the various
parameters are first applied to the ship to determine the
"demand." The demand in these examples is some measure of
performance, such as towing resistance, stopping ability, rud-
der force, or turning ability. This measure of performance is a
function of the ship, its displacement, dimensions, proportions,
propulsion system, and rudder system. The example assist
modes are:
X 1.1.1 Ability to Tow the Disabled Ship at a Specified Speed
in Calm Conditions and Holding It in a Steady Position
Against a Specified Head Wind:
1337
Xl.l.l.l The ship demand in the first case is equal to the
calm water resistance of the ship at the specified towing speed.
The resistance of a ship may be estimated by the following:
4n
R = lOOOCRpVznvz
(X l. 1)
where:
R resistance,
p density of the water,
V displaced volume, and
V specified towing speed, in any consistent system of
units.
CR may be taken as 0.65 for a tanker or bulk carrier. Use any
consistent set of units.
F1878 - 98 (2009)
X 1.1.1.2 The ship demand in the second case is equal to the
wind load caused by the specified head wind. The load as a
result of a head wind can be calculated as follows (loads are not
included):
where:
V w the specified wind speed and
AT the equivalent transverse projected area obtained by
adding 30 % of the projected transverse main hull area
to the projected superstructure area.
K may be taken to be 0.6. Use any consistent set of units.
Xl.l.l.3 The escort vessel(s) must have sufficient tow rope
pull to match or exceed R, the calm water towing resistance at
the speed, and their bollard pull must match or exceed
the wind load, The wind drag resistance of the escort vessel
is considered negligible and is ignored.
X1.1.2 Ability to Hold the Ship on a Steady Course Against
a Locked Rudder at a Specified Speed:
X 1.1.2.1 The ship demand in this case is equal to the lift
force generated by the rudder in a specified locked position
with the propeller free wheeling at the RPM corresponding to
the ambient flow.
Xl. 1 .2.2 In maneuvering simulation equations, the lift force
generated by the rudder is represented by the following:
where:
1
YRud (Xl.3)
the lateral force,
the length between perpendiculars,
the assumed flow velocity at the rudder location,
the rudder angle in radians, and
the nondimensional maneuvering coefficient used to
represent the lateral rudder force as a function of the
rudder angle and should depend on the effective rudder
area.
X1.1.2.3 The escort vessel(s) must be capable of generating
counteracting steering forces at the specified speed to match or
exceed this demand. The ship can then be held on a steady
course, provided the steering force is applied at the transom.
X1.1.2.4 This solution applies only to a single escort vessel
applying steering forces at the transom. If multiple escort
vessels are used, the moment arms of the rudder steering force
and the counteracting steering forces must be determined and
matched.
Xl.l.3 Ability to Turn the Ship 90, Assuming a Free-
Swinging Rudder in Deep Water and an Initial Spec{fied Speed,
Within a Specified Reach and Tramfer Distance:
Xl.1.3.1 When the escort vessel steering force is applied,
the ship is assumed to be unpropelled, the rudder is assumed to
be ineffective, and the escort vessel assist is to be treated as
immediate and without time delay. water is assumed.
Xl.l.3.2 The advance and transfer of the able ship may be
obtained from the maneuvering card posted in the wheelhouse.
Since the advance and transfer are nearly independent
the wheelhouse information for slow speeds can be used in the
evaluation at other speeds.
Xl.l.3.3 The behavior of the disabled ship with escort
vessel assistance has to be assessed through ship-maneuvering
simulations, model-scale, or full-scale trials. With the require-
ment to meet both the reach and transfer constraints simulta--
neously, the effect of the differences in steering modes between
escort vessel types should be properly accounted for in the
simulations.
X1.1.4 The selected performance measure "demands" must
be matched by the "capabilities" of escort vessel or 'escort
vessel combinations. The ship operator can use these measures
to choose any escort vessel combination that has sufficient
capability to meet the demand.
Xl.l.5 Alternative validated methodologies for the calcula-
tion of the selected performance measures can be used.
X2. COMPONENTS OF A ESCORT VESSEL PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
X2.1 Lift, drag, and center of pressure of hull.
X2.2 Lift, drag, and center of pressure of rudders, based on
published flat plate and lifting surface coefficients, including
effects of aspect ratio and edge effects (for conventional escort
vessels).
X2.3 Lift, drag, and center of pressure of skeg, including
effects of aspect ratio.
X2.4 Modification of flow into rudders resulting from hull
shape (for conventional tugs).
X2.5 Modification of flow into rudders resulting from mo-
mentum changes induced by the propellers (for conventional
tugs).
X2.6 Position of rudders with respect to propellers and local
rudder angles (for conventional tugs).
X2.7 Cross-flow effects as a result of tug orientation with
respect to the free stream.
X2.8 Effects of fendering on hydrodynamic performance of
the hull.
X2.9 Propeller performance, including engine, gearbox, and
shafting characteristics, command RPM, and propeller geom-
etry.
X2.1 0 Effects of twin screw control.
1338
X2.11 Lift, drag, and center of pressure of propeller nozzles,
if present.
X2.12 Heeling moments caused by contact with ship, bow
lines (if rigged), and transverse components of hull, skeg,
rudder, nozzle, and propeller forces.
0 F1878 - 98 (2009)
X2.13 Heeling moments caused by tow line tension (for
tractor tugs working on a line).
X2.14 Freeboard and GM in the design condition, and the
escort condition.
X2.15 Reduction in freeboard as a result of average wave
amplitudes.
X2.16 Deck edge submergence.
X2.17 Friction between its fendering and the
tugs working in contact with the disabled
X2.18 Forces in lines.
X2.19 Position of tug on ship, either alongside, on the
transom, or on a line.
X2.20 Use of additional thrusters.
X2.21 Actual condition of propellers and rudders, that is,
effects of wear or damage.
X2.22 Reductions in available power because of vessel
condition and maintenance.
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rightsf and the risk
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM lntemational, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
COPYRIGHT/).
1339
--utl
7
INTERNATIONAL
Selection of Wire and Cable Size in AWG or Metric Units
1
1. Scope
1.1 This practice is intended as a guide to shipbuilders,
shipowners, and design agents for use in the selection of
conductor size for single conductor or multiple conductor cable
sizes either in American Wire Gauge (AWG) or metric desig-
nations for commercial ship design and construction.
1.2 The comparison chart of electrical conductor sizes
shown in Table 1 presents a combined listing of international
standard sizes of Class 2 stranded copper conductors in
accordance with AWG (Specification B8) English units or IEC
(IEC 60228) metric units.
1.3 As a precautionary caveat, some conductor sizes listed
in Table 1 may exceed minimal size requirements of the U.S.
Coast Guard, the American Bureau of Shipping, and IEEE STD
45 for specific applications.
1.4 The values stated for ampacity and de resistance are
presented as maximum values and are provided for information
only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
B8 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Con-
ductors, Hard. Medium-Hard, or Soft
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials
2.2 IEC Standards:
3
IEC 60092-350 Electrical Installations in Ships-Part 350:
Shipboard Power: Cables-General Construction and Test
Requirements
IEC 60228 Conductors of Insulated Cables
1
and Marine Technologyand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.10 on
Electrical.
in 1998. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as Fl883 -03. DOI: 10.1520/
F1883-03R08.
2
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book ~ f ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard's Document Sumrrary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 3 rue de
Varembe, Case postale 131, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland, http://www.iec.ch.
2.3 IEEE Standard:
4
IEEE STD 45 Recommended Practice for Electric Installa-
tions on Shipboard
3.1 The selection criteria is to be applied for uses of (1) new
cable and (2) replacement cable.
3.2 For the selection of new cable or the selection of
replacement cable, this practice defines the choice criteria for
conductor selection for cables in A WG (ASTM) or metric
(IEC) sizes.
4. Selection Criteria
4.1 When selecting cable for any application, AWG or
metric sizing should be selected according to preferred sizes.
The sizes of conductors that have been marked with an asterisk
in Table 1 designate preferred sizes per Specification B8 and
IEC 60228. Those sizes not marked are given for reference,
and it is recommended that their use be discouraged.
4.2 When selecting cable for any application, AWG or
metric sizing should be selected with full consideration of the
relationship of type of insulation and ampacity. Direct selection
between AWG and metric sizes can be made only after a
determination of the equivalence of insulation is made.
4.3 When selecting cable, the conductor size will be deter-
mined from analysis of required ampacity, voltage drop con-
siderations, type of cable insulation, and planned installation.
Recommended practices for selection and installation of cable
systems are detailed in IEEE STD 45 and IEC 60092-350.
4.4 For the selection of cable sizes for new applications,
conductor size that satisfies ampacity requirements, voltage
drop factors, and the adequacy for application in the available
cable space must also be considered.
4.5 For the selection of cable sizes for replacement appli-
cations, cable size should be selected in excess of or equal to
the replaced cable size. Existing cable space limitations should
then be determined to ensure that space for installation of the
replacement cable is adequate.
4
1340
F1883- 03 (2008)
TABLE 1 Conversion Table-AWG/Metric Preferred Sizes of
Conductors
Size Area in
de Resistances at 20C
8
Metric,
Size
Circ Mils AmpacityA
AWG/MCM
Ohms
mm
2
(Nominal)
km
2 000 000 1155 0.0053 0.0177
1000* 1 970 000 1145 0.0054 0.0176
1750* 1 750 000 1070 0.0063 0.0199
800* 1 580 000 1009 0.0067 0.0224
1500* 1 500 000 980 0.0071 0.0232
1250* 1 250 000 890 0.0085 0.0278
630* 1 240 000 886 0.0096 0.0286
1000* 1 000 000 780 0.0106 0.0347
500* 987 000 772 0.0105 0.0369
400* 789 000 675 0.0133 0.0475
750* 750 000 655 0.0141 0.0463
600* 600 000 575 0.0176 0.0578
300* 592 000 570 0.0211 0.0607
500* 500 000 515 0.0211 0.0694
240* 474 000 499 0.0219 0.0762
400* 400 000 455 0.0264 0.0867
185* 365 000 431 0.0286 0.1000
350* 350 000 420 0.0302 0.0990
300* 300 000 375 0.0353 0.1157
150* 296 000 372 0.0353 0.1260
250* 250 000 340 0.0423 0.1388
120* 237 000 327 0.0436 0.1540
4/0* 211 600 300 0.0500 0.1639
95* 187 000 265 0.0551 0.1950
3/0* 167 000 260 0.0631 0.2065
70* 138 000 230 0.0752 0.2700
2/0* 133100 225 0.0794 0.2605
1/0* 105 600 195 0.1002 0.3288
50* 98 700 185 0.1044 0.3910
83 690 165 0.1261 0.4139
35* 69100 144 0.1495 0.5290
2* 66 360 140 0.1588 0.5211
3 52 620 120 0.2005 0.6577
25* 49300 115 0.2057 0.7340
4* 41740 105 0.2528 0.8295
16* 31 600 89 0.3259 1.160
6* 26240 80 0.4023 1.320
10* 19 700 63 0.5167 1.840
8* 16 510 55 0.6380 2.093
6.0* 11800 43 0.8543 3.110
10* 10 380 40 1.017 3.335
4.0* 7 890 30 1.304 4.700
12* 6530 25 1.620 5.315
2.5* 4930 22 2.067 7.560
14* 4110 20 2.573 8.442
1.5* 2 960 3.417 12.20
16* 2580 4.020 13.19
1.0* 1 970 5.213 18.20
0.90 1773 6.45 21.10
18* 1620 6.82 20.95
0.80 1 576 6.52 21.40
0.75* 1 480 6.82 24.80
0.60* 1182 9.5 31.16
20* 1 020 10.5 34.45
0.50* 987 11.4 36.70
22* 640 16.9 55.44
0.20* 24* 404 26.7 87.60
26* 253 43.6 143.04
A Ampacity of single-conductor cable in air at ambient temperature of 30C and
maximum conductor temperature not exceeding 60C.
8
Temperature correction: the conductor resistance may be corrected for moderate
temperature differences from the noted reference temperature by the following
equation. The parameter, aT, varies with conductivity and temperature. For a list
of common temperature coefficients see Test Methods 8193.
RT = R, [ 1+aT(t-7}] (i)
where:
RT resistance at reference temperature T,
R, = resistance as measured at temperature t,
1341
ar known or given temperature coefficient of resistance of the conductor beinf
measured at reference temperature T. At 20C, the value is 0.003 93,
T reference temperature, and
temperature at which measurement is made.
cAn asterisk (*) indicates preferred sizes for wires of American Wire Gauge or per
IEC 60228 (metric) as appropriate.
5. Keywords
5.1 AWG conductor sizes; cable selection; conductor com-
parison; metric conductor sizes
F1883- 03 (2008)
COPYRIGHT/).
1342
Pneumatic-Operated, Globe-Style, Control Valves
1
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
1.
ing, and operating requirements for pneumatic-operated, giobe-
style, control valves complete with actuators for various fluid
systems (steam, gas, and liquid applications). The control
valves with actuators may be procured under this specification
complete with all associated pneumatic instrumentation neces-
sary for the valve to function in the system application;
however, complete and detailed requirements for air instru-
mentation are beyond the scope of this specification and thus
are not included here. This specification is not intended to
cover quarter-tum or multi-tum stem valves.
only.
2.1 The most recent edition or rev1s1on of the following
standards or specifications shall, to the extent specified in this
specification, form a part of this specification.
2.2 ASME Standards:
2
B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
B 16. I Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25.
125. 250 and 800
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
B 16.24 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged fittings, Class 150
and 300
B 16.34 Valves- Flanged and Buttwelding End Steel, Nickel
Alloy, and Other Special Allows
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM committee F25 on Ships
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2011. Published November 2011. Originally
DOl: 10.1520/Fl985-99Rll.
2
www.asme.org.
2.3 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fitting Industry:
3
MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
Flanges and Unions
2.4 Fluid Controls Institute Standard:
4
FCI 70-2 Control Valve Scat ..
5
MlL-STD-798 Nondestructive Welding
Control Material Control and Identification and Hi-Shock
Test Requirements for Piping System Components for
Naval Ship Usc
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.L (High Impact): Shipboard
Equipment (Type I- Environmental and Type Il - Inter-
nally Excited)
MS-16142 Boss Gasket-Seal Straight Thread Tube Fitting,
MIL-F-1183 Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze, Silver Brazing.
MIL-F-20042 Flanges, Pipe and Bulkhead, Bronze (Silver
Brazing)
2.6 Government Drawings and Publications:
Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA):
5
803-1385946 Unions, Bronze, Silver Brazing Alloy. For
Water, Oil, and Gas
803-1385943 Unions, Silver Brazing, 3000 lb/in.
2
, WOG,
NPS, for UT Inspection
803-1385884 Unions, Butt and Socket Welding, 6000 lb/in.
2
WOG, NPS, For UT Inspections
2.7 /SA Standard:
6
lSA-S75.05 Standard for Control Valve Terminology
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms to This Standard:
3
- hq.com.
4
Available from Fluid Controls Institute, 1300 Sumner Ave., Cleveland, OH
44115.
5
Available from U.S. Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents,
732 N. Capitol St., NW, Mail Stop: SDE, Washington, DC 20401, http://
www.access.gpo.gov.
6
Available from International Society for Measurement and Control, 67 Alex-
ander Dr., PO Box 12277, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.
1343
<0 F1985- 99 (2011)
3 .1.1 actuator-the unit that converts a pneumatic pressure
signal into a force to position the valve plug.
3.1.2 bonnet-the upper portion of the valve body subas-
sembly to which the yoke attaches. The bonnet contains the
valve stem packing.
3.1.3 dead band-the range through which input signal can
be varied, upon reversal of direction, without an observable
change in the value stem position.
3.1.4 equal-percentage opening-an equal-percentage flow
characteristic of a control valve provides a change in flow, with
the change in valve lift, that is a constant percentage of the flow
before the change was made.
3.1.5 flow coefficient (Cv)-A basic capacity rating for
valves that relates flow rate to the inlet and outlet pressure for
a particular fluid in the full-open position of the valve. It is
defined as the number of litres per seconds (gallons/min) of
l6C (60F) water that will flow through the valve with a 6.9
kPa (1 psi) pressure drop ~ p ) across the valve.
3.1.6 globe-style valve-a basic control valve type that gets
its name from the globular shape of its body. It normally uses
a basic rising stem/plug for the closure member.
3.1.7 hydrostatic shell test pressure-the hydrostatic test
pressure that the valve body is required to withstand without
damage or leakage. Valve operation is not required during
application of this test pressure, but the valve shall meet all
performance requirements after the pressure has been removed.
3.1.8 hysteresis-the maximum difference in output value
for any single input value during a calibration cycle, excluding
errors as a result of dead band.
3 .1.9 instrumentation-the term instrumentation, when used
in this specification, refers to any instrumentation, that is, pilot
controllers, transmitters, relays, selectors, positioners, instru-
ment air reducing valves, and strainers/filters required for
operation of the control valve in the system.
3.1.1 0 internal trim-internal parts of the control valve,
including seat rings, plug, stem, guide bushings, cage, pistons,
and so forth.
3.1.11 linear-opening-a linear-opening flow characteristic
of a control valve provides a change in flow that is linearly
proportional with valve lift.
3.1.12 linearity-the measure of how close a plot of the
valve stem travel (in response to an increasing and a decreasing
input signal) conforms to a straight line. Linearity is normally
expressed as the ratio (in percentage) of the maximum devia-
tion from a straight line connecting the end points of the full
operational valve stem stroke.
3.1.13 manual override-the manual override allows valve
operation manually. The manual override feature has the ability
to oppose and overcome an opening or pneumatic
control signal in controlling valve position.
3 .1.14 pneumatic-operated control valve-a valve installed
directly in the fluid system, which translates a pneumatic signal
into a change in flow resistance for the system fluid.
3 .1.15 pressure rating-the pressure rating of the valve shall
be as defined in the documents listed in Table . The pressure
TABLE 1 Pressure Ratings for Control Valves
Type of
Pressure Rating
End Connection
Butt-welded ASME 816.34
Class 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500, 2500, or 4500
Socket-welded ASME 816.34
Class 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500, 2500, or 4500
Flanged ASME 816.34
Class 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, i 500, 2500
Flanged ASME 816.1
(cast iron valves only) Class 125, 250
Flanged ASME 816.24
(bronze) Class 150, and 300
Flanged-navy MIL-F-20042
(bronze) Class 150, 250, 400
Threaded ASME 816.34
(tapered pipe thread) Class 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500, or 2500
Union-endA , MIL-F-1183
silver-brazed
(0-ring type)
400 lb/in.
2
Union-end,A 803-1385946
silver-brazed
1500 lb/in.
2
Union-end, A 803-1385943
silver-brazed
3000 lb/in.
2
Union-end,A 803-1385884
butVsocket weld
6000 lb/in.
2
Other, as specified as specified
Connections
ASME 816.25
ASME 816.11
ASME 816.5
ASME 816.1
ASME 816.24
MIL-F-20042
ASME 81.20.1
and ASME 816.11
MIL-F-1183
(0-ring type)
400 lb/in.
2
803-1385946
1500 lb/in.
2
803-1385943
3000 lb/in.
2
803-1385884
6000 lb/in.
2
as specified
in the applicable documents (Military Specification or NAVSEA requirements) shall
apply. Unless otherwise specified in the ordering data Section 5, the tailpieces and
the union-nuts shall not be furnished-only the thread-pieces shall be furnished. If
tailpieces and union-nuts are required, their materials of construction shall be in
accordance with the applicable documents listed above and shall be specified in
the ordering data Section
1344
(also called pressure-temperature ratings) establish the
maximum allowable working (service) pressures of a compo-
nent end connections, and so forth) at various tempera-
tures.
3.1.16 quick change cage trim-a gasket or an 0-ring sealed
seat held in position by a cage, which may be either
separate from or with the seat The cage is held in
position by either the bonnet or bottom flange. This design
shall permit the replacement of all internal trim by
avoiding the use of any threads located within the valve body,
such as seat ring threads.
3 .1.17 quick-opening-a quick -opening flow characteristic
of a control valve provides large changes in flow for small
in valve lift.
3.1.18 rangeability-a measure of the usable range of a
control valve and defined as the ratio of the maximum to the
minimum controllable These maximum and minimum
t t T ~ F1985 - 99 (2011)
C!lffif1
controllable Cvs establish the throttling range over which a
given control characteristic can be maintained and within
which the valve can perform a useful throttling function.
3.1.19 travel indicator-the moving polnter mechanically
attached to the valve stem and working ir: conjunction with a
fixed indicator scale attached to the yoke.
3.1.20 three-way valve-a three-way valve has three end
connections configured for converging or diverging flow.
3.1.21 valve body subassembly-the combination of valve
body, bonnet, end connections, and internal trim.
3.1.22 yoke-the intermediate piece between the valve bon-
net and the actuator.
3.2 Additional guidance on the control valve terminology
can be found in ISA-S75.05.
4. Classification
4.1 Valves shall be of the following material grades, pres-
sure ratings, types, seat leakage classes, flow characteristics,
and sizes, as specified in Section 5.
4.1.1 Material Grades (Applicable to Pressure Containing
Parts Only):
4.1.1.1 Grade A-Alloy Steel-Material Group 1.9 of
ASME Bl6.34 (1 Cr-
1
/z Mo, or 1-
1
/4 Cr-
1
/z Mo).
4.1.1.2 Grade B-Carbon Steel-Material Group 1.1 of
ASME Bl6.34.
4.1.1.3 Grace C-Corrosion-Resistance Stainless Steel-
Material Group 2.2 of ASME B 16.34 (18 Cr-8 Ni alloy).
4.1.1.4 Grade D-As specified in the ordering information
(see Section 5.)
4.2 Pressure Ratings-Valve shall have pressure ratings
4.3 Types:
4.3.1 Type 1-Two-way valve, in-line (two end connec-
tions).
4.3.2 Type 2-Two-way valve, angle (two end connections).
4.3.3 Type 3-Three-way valve, converging service (three
end connections-two inlet and one outlet end connections).
4.3.4 Type 4-Three-way valve, diverging service (three end
connections-one inlet and two outlet end connections).
4.4 Seat Leakage Classes (Maximum Allowable Seat
Leakage )-Seat leakage class shall be selected from those
listed in FCI 70-2 and specified in Section 5.
4.5 Flow Characteristics-The inherent flow characteristics
of the valve shall be specified as quick-opening, linear-
opening, equal-percentage opening, or as specified in Section
5. (Additional guidance on valve flow characteristics can be
found in ISA Handbook of Control Valves).
4.6 End Connections-Valve shall have end connections
4.7 Sizes-Valve size shall be as specified in Section 5.
describe the equipment adequately:
1345
5.1.2 Material grade (see 4.1 and 'I'able l ),
5.1.3 Pressure rating (see 4.2),
5.1.4 Pressure drop (.6.p), kPa (psi),
5.1.5 Type (see 4.3),
5.1.6 Seat leakage class (see 4.4),
5.1.7 Flow characteristics (see 4.5),
5.1.8 End connections (see 4.6),
5.1.9 Size, inlet, and outlet (see 4.7),
5.1.1 0 Rangeability (see 7 .2),
5.1.11 Line medium (see 6.2),
5 .1.12 Operating pressures of the line media (minimum,
normal, and maximum) (see 6. J 6),
5.1.13 Inlet temperature of the line media (minimum, nor-
mal, and maximum) (see 6.16),
5.1.14 Flow rate required (minimum, normal, and maxi-
mum) (see 7.1 ),
5.1.15 Replaceable seat ring requirement (see 6.13),
5.1.16 Minimum available air supply pressure to the actua-
tor (see 6.16),
5.1.17 Minimum and maximum actuator control signal
pressure, kPa (psi) (benchset of the actuator),
5.1.18 When manual override feature is required, its
location-top or side-mounted (see 6.] 4.3),
5.1.19 Valve fail-position required upon loss of air supply to
the actuator (see 6.14.4)
5.1.20 Instrumentation requirements (see 6.15),
5.1.21 Supplementary requirements, if any (see Supplemen-
tary Requirements, Sl, S2, or S3).
6.1 Valves shall incorporate the design features specified
below:
6.1.1.1 Design shall permit adjustment without requiring
removal of the valve body from the line.
6.2 Materials of Construction-Materials for pressure-
containing parts shall be in accordance with the applicable
documents listed in Table 1 (see 4.1 ). Materials for internal
parts shall be compatible with the line media specified in
Section 5.
6.3 Pressure Envelope-The control valve shall be designed
to pass a hydrostatic shell test at pressure(s) of at least 1.5
times the 38C (100F) pressure rating(s) of the valve without
damage.
6.4 Joints-The bonnet and bottom cover/flange shall be
attached to the body using bolted flanges, a threaded connec-
tion, or a threaded-union connection.
6.5 Valve Springs-Any spring incorporated in the control
valve shall not be compressed solid during operation. Spring
ends shall be squared and ground.
6.6 Threads-Threads shall be as specified in ASME B 1.1.
<0 F1985- 99 (2011)
6.7 Interchangeability-The control valve, including all as-
sociated piece parts, shall have part number identity and shall
be replaceable from stock by the manufacturer on a nonselec-
tive and random basis. Parts having the same manufacturer's
part number shaiJ be directly interchangeable with each other
with respect to installation (physical) and performance (func-
tion). Physically interchangeable assemblies, components, and
parts are those that are capable of being readily installed,
removed, or replaced without alternation, misalignment, or
damage to parts being installed or to adjoining parts. Fabrica-
tion operations such as cutting, filing, drilling, reaming, ham-
mering, bending, prying, or forcing shall not be required.
6.8 Nonmetallic Element Interchangeability-Nonmetallic
elements, including but not limited to, soft-seating inserts,
cushions, and 0-rings, shall be treated as separately identified
and readily replaceable parts.
6.9 Maintainability-Maintenance shall require standard
tools to the maximum extent possible. Any special tools
required for maintenance shall be identified and shall be
supplied with the valve when specified.
6.10 Reversibility-Seating inserts shall not be physically
6.11 Pressure-Temperature Ratings-Valve pressure-
temperature ratings shall be in accordance with the documents
listed in Table 1.
6.12 Stem Seal Assembly-A stem seal assembly shall be
provided to seal against leakage along the stem. The stem seal
design shall allow the removal of the actuator assembly
without disturbing the stem seal assembly.
6.13 Seat Ring-Where required by the service, a seat ring
shall be incorporated in the valve and shall be of a material
different from the valve body to provide increased resistance to
wear, erosion, and leakage. The method of installation of the
seat ring shall ensure against dislodgment of the seat ring or
leakage between the seat ring and the valve body. Where a
replaceable seat ring is required, it shall be specified in Section
5. Unless the method of seat ring retention (for example, quick
change cage trim, threaded, brazed, threaded and seal welded,
and so forth) is specified in Section 5, it shall be per
manufacturer's standard.
6.14 Actuator Assembly:
6.14.1 Yoke-Yoke construction shall allow easy access to
the stuffing box, stem connection, and spring adjuster from
either side of the valve. Mounting pads shall be provided on the
opposite sides of the yoke for mounting valve positioners or
other accessories or both.
6.14.2 Travel Indicator-A travel indicator shall be pro-
vided to indicate the valve closure member position
6.14.3 Manual Override-When specified (see Section 5),
manual override shall be furnished. Location (top- or side-
mounted handwheel) shall be as specified (see Section 5). A
clockwise rotation of the handwheel shall close the valve. The
maximum rim force required on handwheel shall not exceed
manufacturer's standards.
6.14.4 Fail-Position Requirement-In the event of loss of
actuator air supply, the valve shall proceed to and remain in
fail-open, fail-close, or fail-in-position as specified in Section
5.
6.15 Instrumentation-When specified (see Section 5), the
valve manufacturer shall furnish with the valve the instrumen-
tation necessary to accomplish the required control functions.
The process and pneumatic connection(s) to controller's pilots
or transmitters shall be specified in the ordering data. Intermit-
tent bleed instrumentation shall be used wherever it is com-
patible with performance, sensitivity, and response
requirements. Instrumentation interface requirements shall be
6.16 Valve Operation-The valve shall operate properly at
the operating conditions specified in Section 5. Operating
conditions such as operating pressure of line medium. inlet
temperature, and air-supply pressure to actuator shall be
supplied in Section 5.
7. Performance
7.1 All valves shall meet the requirements of 7.1.1--7. 7.
7 .1.1 Capacity-The valve shall be capable of passing the
maximum flow rate specified or any intermediate flow rate
within the rangeability specified (see Section 5).
7.2 Rangeability-The valve shall exhibit the rangeability
specified in the ordering data (see Section
7.3 External Leakage.
7.3.1 Valve-There shall be no visible external leakage from
the pressure boundary.
7.3.2 Actuator-There shall be no leakage in the actuator
assembly.
7.3.3 Stem-There shall be no visible leakage past the stem.
7.4 Internal Seat Leakage-The seat leakage shall not
exceed the leakage specified in FCI 70-2 for its seat leakage
class specified in Section 5 (see 4.4).
7.5 Hysteresis-Hysteresis shall not exceed 2% of valve
stroke for valves supplied with or without instrumentation
installed.
7.6 Dead Band-Under operating conditions, the dead band
shall not exceed 2.4 kPa (0.35 psi) within the full stroke of the
stem.
7. 7 Linearity-The linearity shall not exceed 3 % with the
instrumentation installed, if the instrumentation is specified in
Section 5.
1346
8. Tests Required
8.1 Each control valve shall pass the tests outlined in
8.1.1-8.5.
8.1.1 Visual Examination-The control valve shall be ex-
amined visually to determine conformance with the ordering
data, interface dimensions, and workmanship without disas-
sembly.
8.2 Hydrostatic Shell Test-Each control valve shall be
hydrostatically tested in the partially open position, by apply-
ing a test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the 38C (100F)
0 F1985- 99 (2011)
pressure rating to the inlet and outlet ports to check structural
integrity. Test pressure(s) shall be applied for 3 min. Air or
leakage (excluding stem-packing leakage), permanent distor-
tion, or structural failure.
8.3 Nondestructive Examination (NDE)-When specified in
Section 5, NDE requirements shall be met by performing tests
in accordance with the commercial practices listed in ASME
B16.34. This shall include radiography testing, magnetic par-
ticle testing, dye penetrant, or ultrasonic testing and visual
testing as delineated in the above specification.
8.4 Seat Leakage Test-A seat leakage test shall be con-
ducted to verify conformance with the internal seat leakage
allowed in 7.4.
8.5 Functional Test-With air pressure applied to the valve
actuator, the valve shall be stroked through its entire range of
stem traveL Stem travel shall be smooth without sticking or
binding. Thereafter, with no air pressure applied to the valve
inlet port, the valve shall be tested to verify the minimum air
pressure required to initiate stem travel and the maximum air
pressure required to complete its full stroke. Air pressure
requirements to stroke the valve shall be based upon the
operating conditions specified in the ordering information (see
Section 5).
9. Marking
9.1 Markings-Valves shall be marked in accordance with
MSS SP-25.
10.1 The valve manufacturer shall establish and maintain a
quality control program following the principles of an appro-
priate standard from the ISO 9000 series. The need for
registration or certification by an independent organization for
the valves manufactured under the quality control program
shall be determined by the manufacturer. Documentation
demonstrating quality control program compliance shall be
available to the purchaser at the facility at which the valves are
manufactured. A written summary shall be available to the
purchaser upon request. The valve manufacturer is the corpo-
rate entity whose name or trademark appears on the valve.
11. Technical Data Requirements
11.1 Drawings-Assembly drawings, information sheets, or
catalog sheets shall be provided to indicate the design and
materials used in the valve for approval by the purchaser.
SUPPI,EMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
One or more of the following supplementary requirements, Sl, S2, or S3 shall be applied only when
specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of those supplementary
S 1.1 Supplemental tests shall be conducted at a facility
S 1.5 and delineated in the ordering data. The supplemental
tests may be conducted only on representative valve sizes and
pressure classes to qualify all sizes and pressure classes of
valves, provided the valves are of the same type and design.
Evidence of prior approval of these tests may be acceptable.
S 1.1.1 Flow Tests-A flow test shall be conducted to deter-
mine the valve Cv and the flow characteristic of the control
valve.
Sl.2 Operational Tests:
S 1.2.1 The valve shall be operationally tested as follows:
S 1.2.1.1 The valve shall be assembled. Stuffing box nuts
shall be finger tight with packing installed or with the packing
removed; the valve body shall be at atmospheric pressure.
Tapping the valve to remove friction is not permitted.
1347
Sl.2.1.2 Hysteresis shall be tested at 25 and 75% of stroke.
At any stroke position, a change of air pressure of 1.7 kPa (0.25
psi g) (excluding dead band) in either direction shall cause the
valve stem to move. If an automatic hysteresis loop record is
obtained, the maximum difference in valve position between
increasing and decreasing pressures shall not exceed 2 % of
stroke (see 7.5).
Sl.2.1.3 Linearity of travel shall be tested at 0, 25, 50, 75,
and 100 % of stroke. The relationship between air pressure and
stem travel shall be linear to within 3% (see 7.7).
Sl.3 Shock Test-The control valve shall be subjected to the
high-impact shock tests as specified in MIL-S-901 and MIL-
STD-798 while pressurized with water, air, or nitrogen to
determine its resistance to high-impact mechanical shock. The
detail requirements of MIL-S-90 1 and MIL-STD-798 shall be
delineated in the ordering information. There shall be no
visible structural damage to the control valve or any of its
components. There shall be no degradation to the performance
cO F1985- 99 (2011)
capability of the control valve. During impact, an instanta-
neous, reversible pressure excursion is allowable.
S 1.4 Vibration Test-Control valve shall be vibration tested
in accordance with Type I of MIL-STD-167 -1 while pres u ~
ized with water, air, or nitrogen gas. The detail requirements of
MIL-STD-167-1 shall be delineated in the ordering informa-
tion. There shall be no visible structural damage or degradation
to the performance capability of the control valve.
S 1.5 Posttest Examination-After completion of the shock
and vibration testing, the control valve shall be disassembled
and material conditions noted. If shock and vibration tests are
done successively in sequence, it is not necessary to disas-
semble and inspect the valves in between the tests.
S2. Technical Data Requirements
the control valve that clearly depict design and material of each
part shall be provided.
S2.2 Technical Manuals-A technical manual or instruction
booklet shall be provided which provides a description of the
valve, operation and maintenance instructions, calibration
valves, and illustrated parts breakdown. It shall include wrench
sizes and assembly torque (or equivalent) for all bolting and
threaded assemblies and step-by-step disassembly and reas-
sembly procedures.
S3. Special Material, Design, and Performance Require-
ments
S3.1 Pipe threads shall not be used in control valve con-
struction.
S3.2 Control valve performance shall not be adversely
affected by the following line and ambient conditions:
S3.2.1 Quality of Inlet Air/Gas-Air or nitrogen moisture
content between the limits of -7C (20F) to -51 oc (60F)
saturated at maximum rated pressure.
S3.2.2 Ambient Atmospheric Conditions:
S3.2.2.1 Temperature-4C (40F) to 49C (120F).
S3.2.2.2 Moisture Content-Exposure to atmosphere con-
taining salt-laden moisture.
S3.3 Air Connections-Air connections between the pilot
controller, actuator, and other accessories shall be in accor-
dance with MS 16142, straight-thread and 0-ring seal.
COPYRIGHT/).
1348
c.dRltf Designation: F1994 - 99 (Reapproved 2011)
llu11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Test Method for
Shipboard Fixed Foam Firefighting Systems
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation FI994; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers shipboard, fixed (installed)
foam/sprinkling firefighting systems.
1.2 Satisfactory completion of these tests indicates func-
tional performance of the fixed foam firefighting system and
may be used to demonstrate the system installation's compli-
ance with the design characteristics of the system.
1.3 Tests made in conformity with this test method are
intended to demonstrate the installation and operation of an
installed, fixed foam firefighting system. As it includes regu-
latory requirements, this standard addresses those vessels
subject to regulations and ship classification rules. However,
the methods stated herein are suitable for unregulated commer-
cial vessels, pleasure craft, military vessels, and similar vessels
that are not required to meet regulations for firefighting
systems.
1.4 Limitations:
1.4.1 International requirements, national regu.lations, and
ship classification rules must be consulted. The following
regulatory requirements and classification society rules were
considered in the preparation of this test method:
1.4.1.1 International Convention for the Safety of Life at
Sea (SOLAS); 1974 SOLAS Convention, 1978 SOLAS Pro-
tocol, and the 1981 and 1983 SOLAS Amendments, 11-2/8,
"Fixed low-expansion foam extinguishing systems in machin-
ery spaces,"
1.4.1.2 U.S. Government regulations included in 46 CFR
76, 46 CFR 95, and 46 CFR 108 as those regulations are
written and enforced by the United States Cost Guard, and
1.4.1.3 The American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Rules for
Building and Classing Steel Vessels. However, the owner will
designate the specific classification society which is to be used
to classify a particular vessel.
1.4.2 The requirements, regulations, and rules for a specific
design must be selected by the owner based on the planned
operating profile for the vessel.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships
DOl: 10.1520/F1994-99Rll.
1.4.3 This test method reflects international requirements,
U.S. Government regulations, and ABS rules in effect at the
time it was prepared, and may not include requirements
adopted subsequent to the effective date of this test method.
1.4.4 This test method does not include requirements for the
selection, design, installation, and maintenance of foam fire-
fighting systems. It applies to installed systems whose designs
meet all applicable international requirements, national regu-
lations, and ship classification rules.
2.1 The following documents apply to this test method only
to the extent referenced herein. However, they may be further
invoked by the ship owner as part of the design requirements
for the vessel.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
2
A795/A795M Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for
Fire Protection Use
F998 Specification for Centrifugal Pump, Shipboard Use
Fl030 Practice for Selection of Valve Operators
Fll55 Practice for Selection and Application of Piping
System Materials
Fl198 Guide for Shipboard Fire Detection Systems
F1333 Specification for Construction of Fire and Foam
Station Cabinets
F1370 Specification for Pressure-Reducing Valves for Water
Systems. Shipboard
F1508 Specification for Angle Style, Pressure Relief Valves
for Steam, Gas, and Liquid Services
F 151() Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement
Pumps, Ships Use
F1547 Guide Listing Relevant Standards and Publications
2
Standards volume infmmation, refer to the standard's Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
1349
cO F1994- 99 (2011)
for Commercial Shipbuilding
2.3 Code of Federal Regulations(CFR):
3
Title 46, Part 76, Fire Protection Equipment, Subpart 76.17,
Foam Extinguishing Systems, Details
Title 46, Part 76, Subpart 76.23, Manual Sprinkling S:'stem,
Details
Title 46, Part 95, Fire Protection Equipment, Subpart 95.17,
Foam Extinguishing Systems, Details
Title 46, Part 108, Design and Equipment, Subpat1 D, Fire
Extinguishing Systems, 1 08.459- 108.477
2.4 ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels:
4
Part 4, Section 6 Pumps and Piping Systems
Pat1 4, Section 9 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Part 4, Section 1 J Shipboard Automatic and Remote-control
Systems
5/4B.ll Fire Protection and Fire Extinction
2.5 lACS Documents:
5
Comparable rules also are published by other members of
the International Association of Classification Societies
5
2.6 IMO SOLAS Regulations:
6
SOLAS U-2 Construction Fire Protection, Fire Detection
and Fire Extinction
2. 7 ANSI Standard:
7
B 16.34 Small Butt Welding End Valves
2.8 NFPA Publications:
8
NFPA 11 Standard for Low Expansion Foam
2.9 SNAME Bulletins:
9
Technical & Research Bulletin 3-39 Guide for Shop and
Installation Tests
Technical & Research Bulletin 3-47 Guide for Sea Trials
9
3. Terminology
3.1 Refer to Annex A 1 for terminology used in this test
method related to fixed foam firefighting system installations
and their testing. Actual terminology used for fixed foam
firefighting systems may vary depending upon the desires of
the owner or system designer, or both.
4.1 This test method is applicable to fixed foam firefighting
systems, including foam generation equipment, foam distribu-
tion system piping and valves, sprinkler arrangement and
3
www.access.gpo.gov.
4
Available from American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), ABS Plaza, 16855
5
Other IACS members and locations at which their publications are available are
identified by Guide F.l 547 at Section 4. Publication lists of some lACS members can
be found in Guide Fl547, Section 5.
6
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLASI is available
from International Maritime Organization (lMO), 4 Albert Embankment, London,
England SEl 7SR.
7
8
9
Available from Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers, 601 Pavonia
Ave., Jersey City, NJ 07306.
operation, hose reel unit operation, and system controls, as
those components are included in the system for a particular
application.
4.1.1 Foam systems for machinery spaces are tested using
those portions of this test method which apply to the installed
components. Suitable adaptation of this test method is made for
use with systems which do not include all hardware compo-
nents described herein.
4.1.2 Deck foam systems are tested per the manufacturer's
design criteria.
4.2 This test method demonstrates: satisfactory installation
of an entire fixed foam/sprinkling system and its associated
controls; and effective operation of portions of the foam
distribution system and foam maker sprinkling nozzles for
selected zones.
4.2.1 This test method verifies application rates and areas of
coverage for each type of discharge device of the fixed foam
firefighting system.
4.2.2 The satisfactory operation of the system in the selected
zones is a measure of overall system capacity and anticipated
operation for emergency use. The test, however, may not be
representative of all emergency operating conditions that may
vary with changes in the number of zones that are activated
simultaneously, the material condition of the distribution and
sprinkling components as they are maintained over time, and
restoration of the system following its use for testing or actual
emergencies.
4.3 Test procedures shall be prepared for the conduct of
tests of foam firefighting systems in specific vessels. Those
procedures shall be tailored to the system design for the system
as installed and operated in each vessel.
4.3.1 Tests accomplished in accordance with approved test
procedures may be sufficient to demonstrate that the vessel
meets the regulatory and classification requirements for the
vessel.
4.3.2 Approval of test procedures by a classification society
may be necessary.
4.3.3 Test procedures must state operating parameters and
values (for example, flow rate, pressure, time to activate)
which define pass/fail criteria for each test.
4.4 Certification of the vessel or classification of the vessel
or both by the regulatory bodies may require that tests be
witnessed by a marine inspector or surveyor or both who
represents both regulatory bodies.
4.5 Interpretation of Results:
4.5.1 Leakage at any piping system mechanical joint that is
corrected "on-the-spot" is not cause for test rejection.
4.5.2 Any erratic operation detected in the zone control
valves, seawater sprinkling pump discharge bypass-overboard
valves, or control devices is cause for rejection of the test. The
component causing the erratic operation shall be repaired or
replaced and a retest performed.
1350
4.5.3 Any operation which does not meet the pass/fail
criteria defined by the test procedure(s) is cause for rejection of
the test. The cause of the failure shall be determined, the design
or installation, or both, corrected as appropriate, and a retest
performed.
F1994- 99 (2011)
5. Hazards
5.1 Safety Hazards-The following safety precautions must
be taken when conducting tests in accordance with test
procedures that conform with this test method. However, this is
not an inclusive listing of all hazards which may occur when
this test method is followed, see 1.5. Appropriate safety hazard
statements must be included in test procedures that conform
with this test method.
5.1.1 Live control circuits are exercised tests per-
formed in accordance with this test method. This can result in
the inadvertent discharge of seawater or seawater/foam solu-
tion.
5 .1.1.1 Remote operation of valves which allow discharge
of fluids directly into interior spaces of the vessel is required.
5.1.1.2 Tag out electrical circuits or tag closed valves as
appropriate for each test.
5 .1.2 The fixed foam fire fighting system includes relief
valves and pressure-regulating valves which limit the internal
pressures to which piping and valves of the system are
subjected. Failure of these devices to control or limit system
pressure may result in component failures.
5.1.3 The following safety and control devices are required
to conduct the tests:
5.1.3.1 Pumps' relief valves;
5.1.3.2 Seawater sprinkling pump discharge bypass-
overboard relief valves which must be set in accordance with
the maximum system operating pressure; and
5.1.3.3 Zone sprinkling control, remotely operated valves,
as applicable.
5.1.4 All precautions to ensure safety of life and equipment
protection in compliance with the industrial facility's and
vessel's established safety precautions shall be followed at all
times in the conduct of foam firefighting system tests.
5.1.5 Portions of the fixed foam firefighting system should
not be disabled or isolated for tests until just before the a
specific test event is scheduled to commence. This will leave
the system functional for use in case of an actual fire.
5.2 Precautionary Statements-The following precautions
should be taken when conducting tests in accordance with test
procedures which conform with this test method. Appropriate
precautions and warning statements must be included in test
procedures that conform with this test method.
5.2.1 All appropriate electrical circuits must be de-
energized and tagged when doing any test or demonstration
involving contact with electrical conductors.
5.2.2 It is against environmental regulations to discharge
seawater/foam solutions within 3 miles of shore in the United
States. Care must be taken to prevent discharge of foam into
coastal waters of any country. Therefore, all in-port testing is to
be accomplished using fresh water or clean seawater. Foam
concentration testing, by dispersion of actual seawater/foam
solution, is to be accomplished only when underway, well
outside coastal waters, or the seawater/foam solution is dis-
charged to a containment vessel for disposal in conformance
with local regulations.
5.2.3 Sprinkling or other discharge into interior spaces can
lead to water or seawater/foam solution accumulation. Vessel
stability can be dangerously affected if dewatering systems are
1351
not fully functional and operating. Operators must closely
monitor the amount of water accumulated on deck during any
phase of demonstrations or testing. Demonstrations or testing
should be suspended if such accumulation cannot be controlled
and sufficient stability maintained.
5.2.4 All equipment or surfaces that could be damaged by
water during testing, in way of hose reel discharge areas or in
zones where fresh water or seawater/foam solutions will be
discharged from foam maker sprinkling nozzles, or both,
should be covered with plastic or otherwise protected from the
discharge.
5.2.5 Any piping flanges that formerly were blanked to
conduct hydrostatic testing of the foam distribution system
should be inspected for tightness during the operational tests.
5.2.6 Precaution shall be taken to ensure proper valve
alignment to prevent flooding the vessel during any test
requiring operation of the seawater sprinkling system, seawater
sprinkling pumps, foam proportioning pumps, and foam con-
centrate transfer pumps.
5.2.7 Any tests requiring seawater or seawater/foam solu-
tion to be pumped through foam distribution system piping
shall be conducted only after precautions have been taken to
insure the watertight integrity at the maximum system operat-
ing pressure of all affected piping and valves.
5.2.8 Appropriate zone control valves shall be tagged closed
during in-port testing to preclude accidental discharge of foam
concentrate entering the distributive system or being dis-
charged overboard.
5.2.9 Isolate system areas or zones that are not used in a
specific test.
5.3 Remedial Statements-System restoration following
demonstrations should include the following actions.
5.3.1 Restore all electrical power to the pumps and controls.
Ensure that all electrical and control circuits are set for normal
operation.
5.3.2 Ensure that tags installed on remotely operated valves
have been removed.
5.3.3 Ensure that all distribution piping and valves are
aligned for normal operation.
5.3.4 Clean up all areas and equipment that may have been
wetted by sprinkling or flooding incidental to these demonstra-
tions.
5.3.5 Remove any "socks" or other devices installed to
contain water or foam discharged during demonstrations.
5.3.6 Remove any test instrumentation or gauges installed
for the demonstrations.
5.3.7 Ensure that foam concentrate tanks are filled with
foam concentrate.
6. Overview of Fixed Foam Firefighting System Tests
6.1 There are two phases of testing the fixed foam and
seawater sprinkling system: system installation tests and sys-
tem operational tests.
6.2 Installation testing is intended to demonstrate the integ-
rity of the system as it was installed in the vessel. It comprises
a series of tests to demonstrate that the foam/sprinkling system
<0 F1994- 99 (2011)
is completely installed. It is essential that this testing be
completed before accomplishing any operational tests using
seawater or foam.
6.3 Operational testing is intended to demonstrate that the
system operates in each of its designed modes of ope!ation.
System operational testing is accomplished through a series of
individual tests to exercise all elements of the system. Some
tests will be performed with the vessel in port; other tests will
be done with the vessel underway.
7. Prerequisite Requirements
7.1 The following test materials are required to conduct the
tests:
7 .1.1 Freshwater, sufficient to fill repeatedly all foam con-
centrate tanks for in-port tests.
7 .1.2 Foam maker pressure test fittings composed of the
following: adaptors to install the fitting in-line with a sprinkler
nozzle with branch connection to a globe needle valve and
pressure gage.
7 .1.3 Sufficient foam concentrate to conduct demonstrations
and tests called for within this standard.
7.2 The following equipments and systems are involved in
the testing. Required testing of individual equipments shall
have been completed before testing the foam firefighting
system.
7 .2.1 All seawater and sprinkling/foam distribution system
and transfer system piping in the foam firefighting system.
7 .2.2 All installed foam pro portioners and foam concentrate
tanks.
7 .2.3 Foam concentrate, foam concentrate transfer, and
seawater sprinkling pumps.
7 .2.4 Foam maker sprinkling nozzles, hose reels, and zone
control valves.
7 .2.5 Damage control console (DCC) or other central con-
trol station operating controls, local control station control
panels, and fire control station operating controls.
8. Preparation for Testing
8.1 The following prerequisite testing shall have been com-
pleted satisfactorily before commencing system tests of the
foam firefighting system.
8.1.1 Control System-Testing of the central control sta-
tion's DCC, including any remote alarms or operations con-
ducted through the DCC, shall have been completed using any
separate test procedures developed for that equipment.
8.1.1.1 Such testing may be accomplished in accordance
with Guide F1198 and should meet the test requirements of that
guide.
8.1.1.2 Ensure continuity of all electrical signal or fiber
optic cable connections from the DCC to each remotely
operated valve and its associated local control panel, the fire
control station, and each foam proportioning station and its
associated pumps and valves.
8.1.2 Piping and Valves-Testing of individual piping runs
and valves, including hydrostatic tests, shall have been com-
pleted using any separate test procedures developed for fluid
distributive systems. Documentation should be provided before
starting the foam system tests.
1352
8.1.2.1 Pipe and valves used for foam distribution should
meet the test requirements of the material specifications for
items cited by Table 10, "Dry Fire Main, Foam, Sprinkling,
Deckwash, Tank Cleaning Piping," of Practice F1155.
8.1.2.2 The piping associated with foam proportioners sea-
water valves should meet the testing requirements of Specifi-
cation A795/A 795M.
8.1.2.3 Remotely operated valve operators should be meet
the testing requirements of Practice Fl 030.
8.1.2.4 Pressure regulating valves should meet testing re-
quirements for pressure-reducing valves such as those found in
Specification Fl370.
8.1.2.5 Relief valves, when a component of piping systems,
should meet the test requirements of Specification Fl508.
8.1.2.6 Butterfly-type quick acting valves should meet the
testing requirements of ANSI B16.34.
8.1.3 Operating Stations-Testing of the following operat-
ing stations to ensure electrical power is available, continuity
of electrical signal or fiber optic cable connections between the
DCC and the remotely controlled valve(s) or pumps, and
proper operation of the control consoles or panels at each
station shall have been completed using any separate test
procedures developed for that equipment.
8.1.3.1 Fire control station, including signal connections to
the foam proportioning stations,
8.1.3.2 Foam proportioning stations,
8.1.3.3 Zone control stations, including signal connections
to the foam proportioning stations, and
8.1.3 .4 Hose reel unit controls, including signal connections
to the foam proportioning stations.
8.1.4 Foam Transfer Stations-Testing of individual com-
ponents, including hydrostatic tests, shall have been completed
using the separate test procedures for foam transfer stations.
Pipe and valves used for foam transfer should meet the test
requirements of the material specifications for items cited by
Table 10, "Dry Fire Main, Foam, Sprinkling, Deckwash, Tank
Cleaning Piping," of Practice F1155.
8.1.5 Test relief valves and pressure-regulating valves for
proper settings. Components such as pumps that have integral
relief valves or bypass valves may have such valve settings
verified as part of testing that component.
8.2 The following actions shall have been completed before
commencement of tests of the applicable portions (or all) of the
foam firefighting system. (Warning-Safety procedures shall
be followed to tag out electrical circuits or tag closed valves as
appropriate for that portion of the test.)
8.2.1 Isolate system areas that are not used in a specific
portion of the test. (Warning-Close and tag valves to isolate
portions of the system including zones and hose reel units that
will not be tested. Visually confirm all designated valves are
closed.)
8.2.2 Install the test fittings (see 7. 1.3) in the hydraulically
most remote foam maker nozzles between the reducer from the
branch connection and the nozzle inlet. Install pressure gages.
Adjust the isolation valves as necessary during conduct of the
test to obtain readings without excessive pressure fluctuation or
water hammer.
F1994- 99 (2011)
9. Conduct of System Tests
9.1 Foam Concentrate Tank Hydrostatic Test-Verify there
is a certification of the tank that it will withstand, at a
minimum, the hydrostatic pressure to be seen as it is installed
in the system. Lacking such certification, the foam concentrate
tank shall be tested as Jollows.
9.1 .1 Temporarily blank all openings except the overflow
piping. Fill the tank with fresh water to the top of the overflow
piping to establish maximum the hydrostatic head pressure.
Retain this pressure for a sufficient period of time to complete
the visual inspection. Check tank external boundaries for
leakage and structural damage.
9.1.2 Upon completion of the hydrostatic test, remove all
temporary blanks or plugs, or both. Freshwater may be retained
for use during pump operational tests and hose reel tests.
9.1.3 All tanks and associated piping must be drained of all
water before the introduction of foam concentrate into the
tanks.
9.2 Pump Installation Test-Each seawater sprinkling pump
and foam concentrate pump shall be tested.
9.2.1 Ensure that each pump and motor shaft alignment is
completed and that the pump rotates freely when turned by
hand.
9 .2.2 Verify integrity of all piping and electrical connections
to each pump and its motor.
9.3 Pump motor and controller operational tests: each sea-
water sprinkling pump, foam concentrate pump, and foam
concentrate transfer pump shall be tested.
9.3.1 Perform insulation resistance checks before (cold) and
after (hot) the operational test. (Warning-Ensure all electri-
cal power is secured to pump motors before conducting
insulation resistance checks.)
9.3.2 Conduct an operational test with the pump and motor
unit running and the system aligned to provide continuous
operation. Pump and motor operation shall be without indica-
tions of internal rubbing (for example, noise or vibration) or
other external signs of degrading performance. Pump output
pressure shall be constant over the operating period. Motor
amperage shall not exceed name plate data during steady state
operation.
9.3.3 Additional requirements for seawater sprinkling pump
tests. (Warning-Ensure seawater isolation valves to the foam
proportioners and its seawater bypass are closed and tagged.)
9.3.3.1 Align the pump to take suction from the sea and
discharge overboard.
9.3.3.2 Seawater sprinkling pump relief valves should be set
at the design operating pressure. Pressure control valves should
be adjusted so that the valves control pressure changes to
design criteria.
9.3.3.3 Demonstrate operation of sprinkling pump's associ-
ated remotely operated valves by running the pump with
system isolation valves closed. Ensure overboard isolation
valves are fully open and discharge pressure gauges indicate
the design operating pressure.
9.3.4 Additional requirements for foam concentrate pump
tests.
1353
9.3.4.1 Foam concentrate pumps and seawater sprinkling
pumps typically are tested simultaneously because they do not
have individual controllers. In such instances, they both are
started together at the master controller.
9.3.4.2 Ensure that the foam concentrate isolation valves to
the foam proportioner are closed and tagged. Fill the foam
concentrate tank with freshwater or foam concentrate to an
adequate level to assure continuous suction. Align the pump to
take suction from the tank and discharge back into the tank.
9.4 Zone control valve and hose reel unit operational
demonstrations: Each zone control valve and hose reel unit
shall be tested. (Warning-In addition to other precautions,
the following steps are to be taken prior to demonstrations.)
9.4.1 Secure electrical power to the foam concentrate
pumps. Ensure that appropriate remotely operated valves are
closed and tagged. Set up the system for SEA WATER opera-
tion before initiating each OPEN command.
9 .4.1.1 Ensure that all distribution piping downstream of the
proportioners is aligned for normal operation.
9.4.1.2 Provide protection for all areas and equipment that
may be water damaged by sprinkling or flooding incidental to
these demonstrations.
9.4.1.3 Ensure that the vessel's dewatering system(s) is
fully functional and operating in areas where liquids might be
discharged. (Warning-The amount of liquid on deck should
be closely monitored during these demonstrations.)
9.4.2 Demonstration of hose reel units, if installed in the
vessel.
9.4.2.1 Demonstrate the ability of each hose reel control
START command to activate the sprinkling/foam system.
Ensure the start-up sequence is accomplished by observing the
seawater sprinkling pump master controller.
9.4.2.2 Verify seawater exits satisfactorily from the hose
nozzle.
9.4.3 Demonstration of zone control valves. Demonstrate
the ability of each zone control OPEN command to activate the
sprinkling/foam system. Demonstrate the ability to secure each
zone with CLOSE commands.
9.4.3.1 Ensure the start-up sequence is accomplished by
observing the seawater sprinkling pump master controller.
Observe operation of the remotely operated valve by moving
from the fully closed to the fully open position and from fully
open to the fully closed position.
9.4.3.2 Initiate local activation by initiating the OPEN
command using each zone control local station. Close the
remotely operated valve by initiating the CLOSE command.
9.4.3.3 Initiate remote activation with an OPEN command
from DCC for each zone control valve. Close each remotely
operating valve by initiating the CLOSE command.
9.4.3.4 Demonstrate operation of engine room bilge sprin-
kling and any other engine room foam systems from the fire
control station. Initiate activation with an OPEN command;
close the remotely operated valves by initiating the CLOSE
command.
9.4.3.5 After the remotely operated valve for a particular
zone is closed, secure the seawater sprinkling pump before the
next demonstration of that zone or a different zone. Only one
zone should be demonstrated at a time to verify proper
F1994- 99 (2011)
coordination of the OPEN commands and activation of the
seawater sprinkling pump.
9.5 Sprinkling/foam system operational test: A full opera-
tional test of the entire system shall be conducted before the
vessel getting underway.
9.5.1 Prior to the test, complete the following steps.
9.5.1.1 Determine the two zones with the highest combined
flow rate. If one or both of these zones are interior to the vessel,
and two or more zones that are in weather will develop the
same or higher flow rates, the weather zones may be tested in
lieu of two interior zones.
9.5.1.2 Determine the two foam maker nozzles that are
hydraulically most remote from each foam proportioning
station. Install test fittings (see 7. L2) on those nozzles.
9.5.1.3 Isolate all zone control valves that will not be
included in the test. (Warning-In addition to other precau-
tions, provide protection for all areas and equipment that may
be water damaged by sprinkling or flooding incidental to this
test. "Socks" or other devices may be installed to contain the
discharge from foam maker nozzles and directly route it to an
area in which such discharge will be collected.) (Warning-
The vessel's dewatering system(s) must be fully functional
before conduct of these demonstrations. The amount of liquid
on deck should be closely monitored during these demonstra-
tions.)
9.5.1.4 Verify that the seawater sprinkler pump sequential
start time delays have been set. The primary foam proportion-
ing station's pump start sequence must have a shorter time
delay than the secondary foam proportioning station's pump.
9.5.1.5 Ensure that all foam concentrate tanks are filled with
freshwater and that the tank levels are recorded. This step must
accomplished for the demonstration of each foam proportion-
ing station and must be repeated for the full system demon-
stration.
9.5.1.6 Ensure that educators, pumps, or other equipment
needed to dewater the vessel during and after testing are in
proper working order.
9.5.2 Demonstrate the ability of each foam proportioning
station to be locally started and stopped using the seawater
sprinkling pump master controller.
9.5.3 Demonstrate the ability of each foam proportioning
station to be remotely started and stopped using commands
from DCC.
9.5.3.1 In accordance with the design, demonstrate the
proper mode is activated when the SEAWATER mode or
FOAM mode is selected.
9.5.3.2 When a SEAWATER mode selector is provided,
ensure that the foam proportioning station, when operated in
the SEAWATER mode, defaults to the FOAM mode when it is
secured.
9.5 .4 Demonstrate the ability of each foam proptJrtioning
station to deliver fresh water (in lieu of using foam concen-
trate). Isolate other foam proportioning stations from the
system during these demonstrations.
9.5.4.1 Locally start the pumps for a foam station in the
SEA WATER mode. When good flow has been established to
the selected zone, switch from the SEAWATER mode to the
FOAM mode. Operate in the FOAM mode for 20 min and
secure the Foam Proportioning Station.
9.5.4.2 Select the single zone requiring the highest flow rate
(see 9.5.1.1). Determine the pressure reading at the most
distant nozzle in that zone. Verify full flow from all nozzles in
the selected zone.
9.5.4.3 Determine the pressure reading a the two hydrauli-
cally most distant nozzles from the foam proportioning station
(see 9.5.1.2), regardless of the zone in which located. The
minimum pressure shall not be less than that specified by the
manufacturer of the foam maker nozzle for proper operation of
the nozzle.
9.5 .4.4 Excess water should be dumped overboard during
the test of each foam proportioning station. Verify the design
operating pressure is available at all times at the outlet main
from the station.
9.5.5 Conduct a foam concentrate transfer demonstration. It
should be conducted only after all tests requiring that freshwa-
ter be used in the foam concentrate tanks have been completed
satisfactorily. This demonstration is to be conducted using
foam concentrate only.
9.5.5.1 Remove all water from the foam concentrate tank,
from the foam concentrate piping serving the proportioners,
and from the foam transfer piping.
9.5.5.2 Demonstrate the operation of the hand transfer pump
at each foam proportioning station. Using the hand transfer
pump, transfer foam concentrate from a bulk shipping drum or
banel to the foam concentrate tank. Empty the drum.
9.5.5.3 Demonstrate the operation of each motor driven,
foam concentrate transfer pump, if such pumps are installed in
the vessel.
(a) The operational test (see 9.3.2) should be completed
before commencing this demonstration.
(b) Conduct an operational demonstration of the pump by
aligning it to take suction from the foam tank and discharge
either back into the foam concentrate tank or to the concentrate
tank at another foam proportioning station.
(c) Fill the foam concentrate tank in one of the foam
proportioning stations to at least half full. Demonstration
transfer of concentrate by using the concentrate transfer pump
to transfer all of the concentrate to another station.
9.5.6 Additional requirements for foam concentrate transfer
pump tests, if installed in the vessel. (Warning -Ensure all
appropriate remotely operated valves are closed and tagged to
prevent contamination of the foam concentrate with freshwater
or seawater.
9.5.6.1 Verify setting of the relief valve for the pump.
9.5.6.2 Fill the foam concentrate tank for the foam propor-
tioning station with foam concentrate. Align the transfer pump
to take suction from the tank and discharge either back to the
tank or to another foam station. Commence an operational test
of sufficient duration for the pump to have completely drained
the tank twice, with the pump operating at its rated capacity.
During the final portion of that test, transfer sufficient foam
concentrate to another foam proportioning station to observe a
change in level in that station's tank.
9.5.6.3 Repeat the test for the transfer pump at each foam
proportioning station until all stations have been tested.
1354
F1994- 99 (2011)
9.6 Foam Concentrate Tests-A full operational test of the
entire system shall be conducted with the vessel underway.
9.6.1 Before the full system operational test, complete the
following steps.
9.6.1.1 Determine the two zones with the highest combined
flow rate (see 9.5.1.1). Weather zones may be tested in lieu of
interior zones.
9.6.1.2 Isolate all zone control valves that will not be
included in the test. This should not be done until immediately
prior to the test to allow the zones to be used in case of actual
emergency. (Warning-Provide protection for all areas and
equipment that may be water damaged by sprinkling or
flooding incidental to this test.)
9.6.1.3 Ensure that all foam concentrate tanks are filled with
foam concentrate and that the tank levels are recorded.
9.6.2 Conduct the full operational test. This test will require
the simultaneous operation of all foam proportioning stations,
using foam concentrate. (Warning-The amount of liquid that
accumulates on deck should be closely monitored during this
test.)
9.6.2.1 If provided with a SEAWATER mode selector, start
the seawater sprinkling pumps in the SEAWATER mode. When
good flow has been established to all selected zones, switch
from the SEAWATER mode to the FOAM mode.
(a) Operate in the foam mode for at least 3 min after foam
comes out of the nozzles.
(b) Secure the foam proportioning station after samples
have been taken.
(c) Collect samples of the foam from the most and least
remote locations in each zone. Samples are to be taken after 3
min of foam discharge.
(d) Samples shall be analyzed to determine that the proper
foam concentrate percentage is achieved at all locations
throughout the test, as per design. Foam samples are to be
tested for concentration in accordance with NFPA standard.
9.6.2.2 Excess water should be dumped overboard during
the test of each foam proportioning station. Verify the design
operating pressure is available at all times at the outlet main
from the foam proportioning station.
9.6.2.3 Demonstrate the operation of each hose reel unit, if
any are installed in the vessel. Accomplish the following when
demonstrating of the hose reel(s):
(a) Operate in the foam mode for 10 min.
(b) Collect samples of the foam. Samples are to be taken
after 5 and 10 min of operation. Samples shall be analyzed, in
accordance with NFPA standard, to determine that the proper
foam concentrate percentage is achieved throughout the test.
(c) Drain the system when the test is complete.
10.1 Ordering documentation for testing foam firefighting
systems in accordance with this standard test method shall
include the following information, as required, to describe the
system adequately.
1 0.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
10.1.2 Specifications for testing various components of the
system,
1355
10.1.3 Number of foam proportioning stations in the sys-
tem,
10.1.4 Number and type of pumps in the system,
10.1.5 Number and service location of hose reel units in the
system,
10.1.6 Prerequisite test requirements based on specifications
invoked for components of the system, as described in 8.1,
10.1.7 Regulation accuracy required, if other than given in
3.5,
10.1.8 Pressure and capacity requirements, if specified by
the owner, and
10.1.9 Foam system design USCG certification, if appli-
cable.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 N arne of the industrial facility conducting the tests;
11.1.2 Date of tests and demonstrations;
11.1.3 Set of design drawings describing installation of the
foam firefighting system and associated controls;
11.1.4 Nameplate data for each pump, motor, and controller;
11.1.5 Numerical data in tabular and graphic form (with
identification of limits or pass/fail criteria):
11.1.5.1 Pump installation alignments;
11.1.5.2 Operational test data including: motor voltage,
motor amperage, motor insulation resistance, revolutions per
minute, pump suction and discharge pressures, and, any
unusual conditions noted.
11.1.5.3 Identification of all hose reels demonstrated;
11.1.5 .4 Identification of all sprinkling zones demonstrated
for local and remote operation;
11.1.5.5 Time delays for foam proportioning station pumps;
11.1.5 .6 Identification of foam proportioning stations dem-
onstrated for local and remote operation;
11.1.5. 7 Results of in-port testing using fresh water in lieu
of foam concentrate: capacity of each foam concentrate tank,
level of fresh water in each tank at start and conclusion of the
demonstration for each zone, zones used in the demonstrations,
pressure readings at most remote nozzles, and, any unusual
conditions noted;
11.1.5. 8 Results of underway testing using foam concen-
trate: seawater/foam measured ratios for each sample taken,
zones used in the demonstrations, hose reels demonstrated, and
any unusual conditions noted.
11.2 Report the following information for each failure to
meet the accept/reject criteria of the test procedures:
11.2.1 Specific metrics of the failure,
11.2.2 Description of action(s) taken to correct the failure,
and
11.2.3 Results of the retesting of all failed portions of the
test procedure, including any applicable data of 11.1 .
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision-It is not possible to specify the precision of
the procedure in this test method for fixed foam firefighting
systems because results will vary from vessel to vessel or may
vary for the same system on a single vessel owing to:
12.1.1 The test instrumentation and test setup will vary;
cO F1994- 99 (2011)
12.1.2 The designs of different systems will produce differ-
ent values; and
12.1.3 The test procedures prepared by different industrial
facilities that perform the testing over the life of the vessel.
12.2 Bias-No information can be presented on the bias of
the procedure in this test method for fixed foam firefighting
systems because of variances in the design of each vessel's
installation.
ANNEX
Al. TERMINOLOGY: GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED IN THIS TEST METHOD FOR FOAM FIREFIGHTING SYSTEMS
Al.l Use of This Glossary o.f Terms:
Al.1.1 Test requirements associated with the terms de-
scribed in this annex are for reference only. Specific test
requirements are imposed using the ordering data for indi-
vidual components.
A1.1.2 These terms are for reference only; components of a
particular fixed fire fighting system may be identified by
different nomenclature as part of the system design.
A 1.2 Terms used in this test method for fixed foam fire-
fighting systems.
A 1.2.1 bias-the difference between the average measured
test result and the accepted reference values (or accept/reject
criteria); it measures in an inverse manner the accuracy of a
test.
Al.2.2 bilge sprinkling system-a fixed foam sprinkling
system in the bilges of a machinery space; includes distribution
piping and foam maker sprinkling nozzles.
A1.2.3 control system-the electrical system used to moni-
tor and control all of the equipment associated with the foam
firefighting system. The control system includes the panels and
consoles from which the foam fighting system can be operated
and the interconnecting electrical signal cables or fiber optics.
Al.2.4 damage control console (DCC)-the central console
in the control system at which the firefighting system can be
monitored and controlled. Such console may be part of a fire
detection system installation.
A1.2.5 foam concentrate-liquid solution that is mixed with
seawater to make fire fighting foam.
Al.2.6 foam distribution system-the piping and valves that
distribute seawater/foam solution from foam proportioning
stations to nozzles or hose reels throughout the vessel, or both.
Al.2.7 fixed foam firefighting system-the tanks, pumps,
interconnecting piping, foam distribution system piping and
valves, local controls, foam maker sprinkling nozzles, and hose
reels to provide seawater/foam solution to fight fire,<:.
Al.2.8 foam maker sprinkling nozzle-a nozzle that mixes
air with seawater/foam solution to sprinkle foam.
Al.2.9 foam proportioners-a unit that mixes foam concen-
trate and seawater in the proper proportions to make seawater/
foam solution.
A 1.2.1 0 foam transfer system-the pumps, piping, and
valves that are used to transfer foam concentrate from one
foam proportioning station to another.
Al.2.11 hose reel unit-a fixed unit that includes a reel and
drum assembly from which a hose with foam maker nozzle can
be deployed to allow portable direction of foam at the site of a
fire. Some vessels may use a hose rack in a foam station
cabinet such as one described by Specification F 1333 without
a local proportioners, using seawater/foam solution from the
foam distribution system in lieu of a local foam proportioners.
Al.2.12 local control panel-the panel that controls the
valve operator for a zone control valve or hose reel unit
isolation valve.
A1.2.13 master controller, seawater sprinkling pump-the
motor controller for the seawater sprinkling pump; it also may
be the motor controller for the foam concentrate pump.
A1.2.14 precision-a measurement concept that expresses
the ability to generate test results that agree with each other in
absolute magnitude.
A1.2.15 pressure, design operating -pressure used in de-
sign to determine the required minimum thickness and mini-
mum mechanical properties (of the foam firefighting system).
A 1.2.16 pressure, hydrostatic head-the static pressure at
any point in the system created by a vertical column of liquid
from that point to the highest point in system. Alternately, the
pressure at any point in a tank created by vertical column of the
liquid carried in that tank, from that point to the highest point
in the tank vent.
Al.2.17 pressure, maximum system operating-the maxi-
mum pressure at which the foam firefighting system can be
operated; typically, the highest pressure setting of any pressure
relief device in the system.
A 1.2.18 pump, foam concentrate-the pump that provides
foam concentrate from the foam concentrate tank to the foam
proportioners; they typically are Specification F 1510, Class A
pumps sized with a capacity to provide foam simultaneously to
the two largest zones in the vessel and should meet the test
requirements of that specification.
A1.2.19 pump, foam concentrate transfer-a pump used to
transfer foam concentrate solution from one foam proportion-
station to another; they typically are Specification F 1510,
1356
F1994- 99 (2011)
Class A pumps sized with a relatively low capacity and should
meet the test requirements of that specification.
Al.2.20 pump, hand transfer-a pump used to transfer foam
concentrate from pails or barrels into foam concentrate tanks.
Al.2.21 pump, seawater sprinkling -a pump that takes sea
suction and pumps seawater to the foam proportioners; they
typically are Specification Class 5 pumps and should
meet the test requirements of that specification.
A1.2.22 seawater/foam solution-a mixture of foam con-
centrate and seawater in proper proportions to make foam
when discharged through a foam maker sprinkling nozzle or
hose reel unit foam nozzle.
Al.2.23 station, fire control-the location used to monitor
and control all of the equipment associated with the firefighting
system in the engine room(s) and casing. The panels or console
from which the engine room foam firefighting system can be
operated and the interconnecting electrical signal cables or
fiber optics are located at this station.
Al.2.24 station, foam proportioning -the location at which
seawater/foam solution is generated and from which it is
pumped to sprinkling zones, hose reels, and the engine
room(s). This station typically includes the seawater sprinkling
pump, foam concentrate tank, foam proportioning pump, foam
proportioners, foam transfer pump, interconnecting piping and
valves, and their controls.
A1.2.25 station foam transfer-a location which includes a
pump concentrate transfer pump and control devices necessary
to move foam concentrate.
Al.2.26 station, hose reel-a location used to monitor and
control a foam hose reel unit.
Al.2.27 station, local control-a location at which an op-
erator can monitor and control the foam sprinkling system in a
zone.
Al.2.28 tank, foam concentrate-a tank for bulk stowage of
foam concentrate; it is connected to the suction side of the
foam concentrate pump.
A1.2.29 valve, bypass-overboard-a valve that allows the
discharge of a pump in the fixed foam firefighting system to
bypass the foam distribution system and be discharged over-
board. Such valves also can function as relief valves which
discharge overboard when the system pressure exceeds the
valve's set pressure.
A1.2.30 valve, foam proportioners seawater supply-a
valve on the seawater inlet side of a foam proportioners that
isolates it from its source of seawater, either the fire main or a
seawater sprinkling pump.
Al.2.31 valve, hose reel-the quick opening valve that
isolates a hose reel unit from the distribution main or risers for
the seawater/foam solution.
A1.2.32 valve, remotely operated-a valve that uses an
electric or hydraulic power-actuated operator to change its
position. Remotely operated valves in the foam firefighting
system can be positioned by either local or remote actuation
and can be positioned using a manual operator.
Al.2.33 valve, pressure regulating -a valve that senses
total pressure in the distribution piping downstream of the
valve and adjusts the flow through the valve to maintain that
pressure at a set level.
Al.2.34 valve, relief-a pressure-activated valve designed
to relieve excessive pressure automatically. Such valves in the
foam firefighting system can be integral to the system's pumps
or be a component of piping systems.
Al.2.35 valve, seawater bypass-the valve that bypasses
the foam proportioners, allowing the foam firefighting system
to distribute only seawater.
Al.2.36 valve, sprinkling pump seawater suction-the sea
value on the seawater side of the seawater sprinkling pump.
A1.2.37 valve, zone control-the quick opening valve that
isolates a zone from the distribution main or risers for the
seawater/foam solution.
A1.2.38 zone-a section of the foam distribution system
that includes all piping, valves, and sprinklers for a defined
area of the ship.
COPYRIGHT/).
1357
A ~ l Designation: F2001 - 01 (Reapproved 2006)
~
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Vessel-Related Technical Information for Use in Developing
an Electronic Database and Ship Safety Record
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides a uniform format and definition of
general vessel-related technical information, including ship
safety data, to be used by ship owners and operators, at their
option and to the extent that they consider beneficial to their
operation. It is recognized that all of the data is already
contained in various documents on the vessel, but normally not
electronically and normally not in one location. The Ship
Safety Record is designed to provide an industry-accepted
common method of identifying, maintaining, and subsequently
communicating the safety-related information needed for mari-
time operations. It is recognized that many of the data fields are
not applicable for every vessel. Appendix Xl and Appendix
X2 provide examples of how data elements in this guide may
be used for a specific purpose, that is, the USCG's Automated
Identification System (AIS) and the Advance Notice of Arrival.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F\756 Guide for Implementation of a Fleet Management
System Network
Fl757 Guide for Digital Communication Protocols for Com-
puterized Systems
2.2 IMO Documents:
3
The International Management Code for the Safe Operation
of and for Pollution Prevention-- (The ISM Code)
1994
International Convention on Standards of Training, Certifi-
cation and Watchkeeping for Seafarers- (STCW Con-
vention) 1995
1
Current edition approved Dec. l, 2006. Published January 2007. Originally
approved in 2000. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as F2001- 01. DOl:
1 0.1520/F200 1-01 R06.
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual BoJk of ASTM
the ASTM website.
3
Available from International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embankment,
London, U.K. SEI 7SR, www.imo.org.
Convention on Facilitation of International Maritime Trame.
1965, As Amended
2.3 US Coast Guard Documents:
4
33 CFR 160.107 Notice of Arrival: Vessels Bound for Ports
or Places in the United States
33 CFR 160.211 Notice of Arrival: Vessels Carrying Cettain
Dangerous Cargo
4
2.4 Other Documents:
Paris Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) on Port State
Control
5
Tokyo Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) on Port State
Contro1
6
Acuerdo de Vina del Mar (MOU) Latin American
ment
7
Memorandum of Understanding on Port State Control in the
Caribbean Region (Caribbean MOU)
8
Memorandum of Understanding on Port State Control in the
Mediterranean Region (Mediterranean MOU)
9
Indian Ocean Memorandum of Understanding on Port State
Control (Indian Ocean MOU)
10
Memorandum of Understanding for the West and Central
African Region (Abuja MOU)
11
Black Sea Memorandum of Understanding on Port State
Control (Black Sea MOU)
12
~
3. Terminology
3.1 Abbreviations:
3.1.1 CAP-Condition Assessment Program
4
5
Available from Secretariat, Nieuwe Utileg 1, PO Box 20904, 2500 EX Den
Haag, The Netherlands. .
6
Available from Secretary, Tomoecho Annex Bldg. 6F, 3-8-26, Toranomon
Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-0001 Japan.
7
Available from Secretariat, Prefecture Av. E. Madero 235 Baja, Buennos Aires,
Argentina.
8
Available from Secretariat, Ministry of Tourism and International Transport,
Adriene's Complex, Warrens, St Michael, Barbados.
9
Available from Secretariat, 27 Admiral Hamza Pasha St., Roushdy, Alexandria,
Egypt.
10
Available from Secretariat, Head Land, Sada, Goa 403804 India.
11
Available from Secretariat, c/o National Maritime Authority, 4 Burma Rd.,
Apapa, Lagos, Nigeria 58-72214.
12
Available from Secretariat, Meclisi Mebusa Cad. No. 18, Salipazri, 80040
Istanbul, Turkey.
1358
F2001 - 01 (2006)
3.1.2 CFR-Code of Federal Regulations
3.1.3 ETA-estimated time of arrival
3.1.4 ETD-estimated time of departure
3.1.5 ILO-International Labor Organization
3.1.6 IMO-International Maritime Organization
3.1.7 IOPP-International Oil Pollution Prevention
3.1.8 ISM-International Management Code for the Safe
Operation of Ships and for Pollution Prevention
3.1.9 ISM DOC-ISM Document of Compliance
3.1.10 ISM SMC-ISM Safety Management Certificate
3.1.11 MARPOL-International Convention for the Preven-
tion of Pollution from Ships, 1973 as modified by the Protocol
of 1978 relating thereto
3.1.12 NLS-noxious liquid substance
3.1.13 NUC-not under command
3.1.14 OPA 90-U.S. Oil Pollution Act of 1990
3.1.15 RO RO-roll-on/roll-off vessel
3.1.16 SOLAS-Safety of Life at Sea Convention
3.l.17 STCW-International Convention on Standards of
Training, Certification and Watchkeeping for Seafarers 1995
3.1.18 UTC-universal time coordinated
4.1 The Ship Safety Record is an electronic database of
information pe1taining to a specific vessel including informa-
tion related to the safe operation of the vessel and the safety of
it's crew and the environment. The data is grouped and
organized under the following key categories: vessel particu-
lars, vessel status, crew requirements, crew status, voyage
specific data, record of inspection, record of incidents, and
corrective actions.
4.2 The Ship Safety Record is created and maintained in
each instance for the primary benefit of the owner, technical
manager, or operator who is required through the implemen-
tation of the ISM Code to be cognizant of such information.
The information in the database is at all times the property of
the owner who will maintain and control the dissemination of
any and all of the information. It is expected that operators will
elect to make portions of their Ship Safety Record database
available to other interested parties such as flag states, class
societies, and port states.
13
The Ship Safety Record should
provide for the implementation of several levels of electronic
database security as may be required by the vessel owner or
operator. The data that becomes part of the Ship Safety Record
can be thought of in a number of subsets:
4.2.1 Data that is not subject to change, including particu-
lars of the vessel, and so forth.
4.2.2 Data that is subject to change but not normally by the
ship's crew.
13
Technical information pertaining to Port State Control is included in a
Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) for various regions worldwide as listed in
2.4.
4.2.3 Data that will be updated periodically either manually
or as a result of updates to other computer systems or
applications. This would include, as an example, cargo infor-
mation, ballast conditions, the names/identification of crew
members, and passenger details. This would also include
information relative to internal inspections, maintenance re-
cords, internal audits, safety audits, and so forth.
4.3 Guides F1756 and Fl757 may be used as the basis for
implementation of a shipboard electronic database and ship
safety record.
5. Vessel Particulars
5.1 Vessel Identification:
5.1.1 IMO number.
5.1.2 Vessel name.
5.1.3 Previous names.
5 .1.4 Vessel type.
5.1.5 Vessel call sign.
5.1.6 Flag state.
5.1.7 Ship owner.
5.1.8 Ship operator (who is responsible for ISM compli-
ance).
5.1. 9 Company as defined in ISM Code.
5.1.10 Company contact information.
5.1.11 Current classification society.
5.1.12 Builder's name.
5.1.13 Construction contract date.
5.1.14 Keel laying date.
5.1.15 Delivery date.
5.2 Vessel Certificates:
5 .2.1 The actual list of certificates required for a vessel is a
function of the vessel's intended trade route, flag state, and
international requirements.
1359
5.2.1.1 Certificate of registry.
5.2.1.2 Safety equipment certificate.
5.2.1.3 Safety construction certificate(s).
5.2.1.4 Cargo ship safety certificate.
5.2.1.5 Passenger ship safety certificate.
5.2.1.6 Radio safety certificate.
5 .2.1. 7 Cargo ship radio telegraphy certificate.
5.2.1.8 Cargo ship radio telephony certificate.
5.2.1.9 SOLAS exemption certificate.
5.2.1.1 0 International load line certificate.
5.2.1.11 International load line exemption certificate.
5.2.1.12 Certificate of fitness (liquefied gases in bulk).
5.2.1.13 Certificate of fitness (chemicals in bulk).
5.2.1.14 Oil pollution certificate.
(1) IOPP Certificate/NLS Certificate and Form A Supple-
ment (MARPOL) and Form B.
(2) Annex to Civil Liability for Oil Pollution Damage 1992.
(3) Annex to Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage 1992.
5.2.1.15 Hazardous & Noxious Substances Certificate.
5 .2.1.16 Minimum Safe Manning Document.
5.2.1.17 ISM Safety Management Certificate.
5.2.1.18 ISM Document of Compliance.
5.2.1.19 Classification Certificates:
(1) Hull.
(2) Machinery.
F2001 - 01 (2006)
(3) Automation.
(4) Navigation.
5.2.1.20 International Tonnage Certificate 1969.
5.2.1.21 National Certificates:
(1) Panama Tonnage Certificate.
(2) Suez Tonnage Certificate.
(3) USCG Certificate of Inspection.
(4) U.S. Certificate of Financial Responsibility.
(5) Stability Approval Letter.
5.2.1.22 Ship's radio station license.
5.2.1.23 Supplementary to Safety Steering Gear Certificate.
5.2.1.24 Certificate of Sanitary Construction.
5.2.1.25 Register of Cargo Gear.
5.2.1.26 Certificate of Documentation, unless 5.2.1.
5.2.1.27 Life Raft Certificates.
5.2.1.28 Certificates of Financial Responsibility (COFR).
5.2.1.29 ITOPF Membership Certificate.
5 .2.1.30 Certificate of Deadweight.
5.2.1.31 U.S. Tonnage Certificate.
5.2.1.32 Certificate of Official Number.
5.3 Particulars of the Vessel's Physical Characteristics:
5.3.1 (LOA) length overall (metres/feet).
5.3.2 (LBP) Length between perpendiculars (metres/feet).
5.3.3 Design draft (metres/feet).
5.3.4 Beam (metres/feet).
5.3.5 Keel to top of mast height (metres/feet).
5.3.6 (DWT) summer deadweight (metric tons).
5.3.7 (GRT) gross register tons (metric tons) (for Tankers
may be reduced GRT in accordance with IMO Res. A388(x)).
5.3.8 GRT gross register tons U.S.
5.3.9 Displacement (metric tons).
5.3.10 Lightship weight (metric tons).
5.3.11 Molded depth at sea (metres/feet).
5.3.12 Description of steering gear.
5.3.13 Type of rudder.
5.4 Particulars of the Vessel Subdivision and Stability Data:
5.4.1 (VCG) light ship vertical center of gravity (metres/
feet).
5.4.2 (LCG) light ship longitudinal center of gravity
(metres/feet).
5.4.3 Cargo subdivision (number of holds or tanks).
5.4.4 Intact stability limitations (cargo conditions limiting
vessel operation).
5.4.5 Damage stability criteria.
5.4.6 Minimum metacentric height; G.M.
5.4.7 Identification of shipboard trim and stability electronic
program.
5.5 Particulars of the Vessels Machinery:
5.5.1 Main engine type.
5.5.2 Main engine manufacturer.
5.5.3 Main engine model.
5.5.4 Main engine rating.
5.5.5 Main engine fuel.
5.5.6 List of critical auxiliary machinery.
5.6 Particulars of the Vessel Safety System:
5.6.1 Number and size of fire pumps.
5.6.2 Number and type of fire extinguishers.
5.6.3 C0
2
system/fixed fire fighting systems.
5.6.4 Number and size of life boats.
5.6.5 Number and size of life rafts.
5.6.6 Automatic fire control system.
5.7 Particulars qf the Vessel Navigation Systems:
5.7.1 Description of marine radar system.
5.7.2 Description of magnetic steering compass.
5.7.3 Description of gyro compass/repeater.
5.7.4 Description of rudder angle indicator.
5.8 Particulars qf the Vessel Deck Machinery:
5.8.1 Number and capacity of anchors and anchor windlass.
5.8.2 Number and capacity of mooring winch.
5.8.3 Number and capacity of cargo and other lifting gear.
5.8.4 Cargo gear registry.
5.8.5 Number and capacity of hose handling crane.
5.9 Particulars qf Cargo System :
5.9.1 Type of Cargo.
5.9.2 Vessels Cargo Handling Systems -Number and size
of cargo pumps, description of piping system, cargo control
system, manifolds, vessels dry cargo loading and unloading
systems, cargo cranes, and so forth.
5.10 Vessel Communications Systems :
5.10.1 Radio equipment.
5.10.2 Shipboard Information Technology Platform (SITP);
operating system.
5.10.3 Interior communications.
5.10.4 Satcom.
5.10.5 Cellular.
5.10.6 PC network.
5.11 Vessel Response Plan(s) (Can Include International
and Locally Required Plans)-Notification contact names and
numbers for the following:
5.11.1 Qualified individual.
5 .11.2 Oil spill response organization.
5.11.3 Spill management team.
5.11.4 Salvage/fire fighting/lightering organization.
5.11.5 Electronic hull file location/custodian.
5.12 Incident/Accident Record (Dates of Each):
5.12.1 Pollution incident.
5.12.2 Grounding.
5.12.3 Collision.
6. Vessel Status
6.1 Status of Certificates-List the current status of each
certificate as stated in The actual list of certificates
required for a vessel is a function of the vessel's trade and will
be determined by flag state and international requirements.
6.1.1 Certificate of Registry.
1360
6.1.2 Safety Equipment Certificate.
6.1.3 Safety Construction Certificate(s).
6.1.4 Cargo Ship Safety Certificate.
6.1.5 Passenger Ship Safety Certificate.
6.1.6 Safety Radio Certificate.
6.1.7 Cargo Ship Radio Telegraphy Certificate.
6.1.8 Cargo Ship Radio Telephony Certificate.
6.1.9 SOLAS Exemption Certificate.
F2001 - 01 (2006)
6.1.1 0 International Load Line Certificate.
6.1.11 International Load Line Exemption Certificate.
6.1.12 Certificate of Fitness (liquefied gases in bulk).
6.1.13 Certificate of Fitness (chemicals in bulk).
6.1.14 Oil Pollution Certificate.
6.1.14.1 IOPP Certificate/NLS Certificate and Form A
Supplement (MARPOL) and Form B.
6.1.14.2 Annex to Civil Liability For Oil Pollution Damage
1992.
6.1.14.3 Annex to Compensation For Oil Pollution Damage
1992.
6.1.15 Hazardous & Noxious Substances Certificate.
6.1.16 Minimum Safe Manning Document.
6.1.17 ISM Safety Management Certificate.
6. 1. 18 ISM Document of Compliance.
6.1.19 Classification Certificates:
6.1.19.1 Hull.
6.1.19 .2 Machinery.
6.1.19.3 Automation.
6.1.19.4 Navigation.
6.1.20 International Tonnage Certificate 1969.
6.1.21 National certificates:
6.1.21.1 Panama Tonnage Certificate.
6.1.21.2 Suez Tonnage Certificate.
6.1.21.3 USCG Certificate of Inspection.
6.1.21.4 U.S. Certificate of Financial Responsibility.
6.1.21.5 Stability Approval Letter.
6.1.22 Ship's Radio Station License.
6.1.23 Supplementary to Safety Steering Gear Certificate.
6.1.24 Certificate of Sanitary Construction.
6.1.25 Register of Cargo Gear.
6.1.26 Certificate of Documentation, unless 6.1 . I .
6.1.27 Life Raft Certificates.
6.1.28 Certificate of Financial Responsibility (Alaska Pipe-
line).
6.1.29 ITOPF Membership Certificate.
6.1.30 Certificate of Deadweight.
6.1.31 U.S. Tonnage Certificate.
6.1.32 Certificate of Official Number.
6.2 Status of Hull Structure:
6.2.1 Local structural damage reported by crew as a result of
routine on-board inspection.
6.2.2 Temporary repairs to be completed.
6.2.3 Outstanding items from last class survey report.
6.2.4 Status of coatings.
6.2.5 Status of cathodic protection system.
6.3 Status of Machinery: Inoperable Equipment, Repair
Work Schedules, and So Forth:
6.3.1 Main engine.
6.3.2 Main and auxiliary boilers.
6.3.3 Other auxiliaries.
6.3.4 Outstanding items from last Class Survey Report.
6.4 Status of Vessel Safety Systems :
6.4.1 Inoperable equipment.
6.4.2 Last operation of emergency generator.
6.4.3 Last operation of emergency fire pump.
1361
6.5 Status of Vessel Navigation Systems:
6.5. 1 Steering gear engines.
6.5.2 Steering control system.
6.5.3 Marine radar system.
6.5.4 Magnetic steering compass.
6.5.5 Gyro compass/Repeater.
6.5.6 Rudder angle indicator.
6.5.8 Status of Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver(s)
6.6 Report of Fuel Quality-Report the following for each
fuel on board:
6.6.1 Density.
6.6.2 Viscosity.
6.6.3 Pour point.
6.6.4 Water content.
6.6.5 Fuel stability.
6.6.6 Abrasive particles.
6.6.7 Salt water.
6.6.8 Strong acidity.
6.6.9 Sulfur content.
6.7 Report on Lube Oil Quality :
6. 7.1 Change in viscosity.
6.7.2 Presence of water.
6. 7.3 Strong acidity.
6.7.4 Comparative viscosity.
7. Crew Requirements
7.1 Identification of Crew Positions Consistent with Safe
Manning Requirements and Muster List:
7.1.1 Master.
7 .1.2 Officers in charge of a navigational watch.
7 .1.3 Chief mate.
7 .1.4 Officer in charge of a navigational watch; near-
coastal voyage.
7 .1.5 Master -near--coastal voyage.
7 .1.6 Ratings forming part of a navigational watch.
7 .1. 7 Officer in charge of engineering watch propulsion
power (>750 kw).
7.1.8 Chief engineer propulsion power (>3000 kw).
7.1.9 Chief engineer propulsion power (750 to 3000 kw).
7.1.10 Second engineer propulsion power (>3000 kw).
7.1.11 Second engineer propulsion power (750 to 3000 kw).
7 .1.12 Ratings forming part of an engineering watch.
7 .1.13 Radio operator.
7 .1.14 GMDSS qualified officers.
7 .1.15 Officers qualified to carry out cargo transfer opera-
tions.
7.2 Training Requirements-For each position and who
qualified:
7 .2. 1 Requirements for familiarity with company proce-
dures.
7 .2.2 STCW training (in accordance with Section A-VIII
and A-VZ as applicable):
7.2.2.1 Tanker familiarization course--chemical tanker-
liquified gas tanker.
7 .2.2.2 Personal survival techniques.
7 .2.2.3 Advanced fire fighting.
F2001 - 01 (2006)
7 .2.2.4 Medical first aid.
7.2.2.5 Personnel in charge of medical care.
7 .2.2.6 Personal safety and social responsibility.
7.2.2.7 Ro-Ros (passenger ships).
(J) Crowd management.
(2) Crisis management.
7.2.3 Survival craft and rescue boat training.
7 .2.4 Fast rescue boat training.
7.2.5 Familiarization training.
7 .2.6 Listing of officers qualified to perform on-board train-
ing and on-board assessment of training.
8. Status of Crew and Persons Other Than Passengers on
Board
8.1 Identification of Crew and Persons Other Than Passen-
gers on Board:
8.1.1 Full name of each person.
8.1.2 Rank or rating.
8.1.3 Date and place of birth.
8.1.4 Muster list assignments.
8.1.5 Position as defined in 3.1 filled by each named crew
member.
8.1.6 Date signed on.
8.1.7 Vacant positions from 7.1.
8.2 Certificate of Competency for Each Crew Member as
Issued by Flag State of Vessel; (Issue Date, Validity):
8.2.1 Seafarer's name.
8.2.2 Date of birth.
8.2.3 Nationality.
8.2.4 Sex.
8.2.5 Relevant document number.
8.2.6 Date of issue.
8.2.7 Date of expiry.
8.2.8 Last revalidation date.
8.2.9 Details of dispensation(s).
8.2.1 0 STCW certification of each licensed crew member.
8.2.10.1 STCW competency standard (for example, regula-
tion II/I).
8.2.10.2 Title.
8.2.10.3 Function.
8.2.10.4 Endorsements.
8.3 Training Records-For each person on board other than
passengers:
8.3.1 STCW training (as applicable to type of vessel and
person with designated safety or pollution duties):
8.3.1.1 Tanker familiarization course.
8.3.1.2 Personal survival techniques.
8.3.1.3 Advanced fire fighting.
8.3.1.4 Medical first aid.
8.3.1.5 Personnel in charge of medical care.
8.3. 1 .6 Personal safety and social responsibility.
8.3.1.7 Ro-Ros (passenger ships).
8.3.2 Familiarization training.
8.3.3 Listing of personnel by position required to have
on-board training record book.
8.3.4 Evidence of training in company procedures.
8.4 Medical Records for Each Crew Member:
8.4.1 Documented evidence of medical fitness for each crew
member in accordance with ILO Convention No. 73.
8.4.2 Proof of drug/alcohol testing.
8.5 Log of Hours Worked (Compliance with OPA 90
STCW)-Hours worked each week for each crew member
forming part of a navigational or engineering watch.
8.6 Required Drills Last Performed (Date and Time):
8.6.1 Fire drill/explosion.
8.6.2 Boat drill.
8.6.3 Rescue boat drill.
8.6.4 Man overboard drill.
8.6.5 Entering and leaving port equipment drills.
8.6.6 Abandon ship drill.
8.6.7 Enclosed space rescue drill.
9. Voyage Specific Data
9.1 Port of Departure (Last Port of Call):
9.1.1 Name of port, country.
9.1.2 Date and time of departure.
9.2 Destination Port (Next Port of Call):
9.2.1 Name of port, country.
9.2.2 Estimated time of arrival.
9.2.3 Facility name.
9.2.4 Loading/off loading.
9.2.5 Bunkering-YIN.
9.2.6 Lightering-Y/N.
9.2.7 Agent.
9.3 Loading Pattern:
9.3.1 Tons of cargo in each liquid cargo tank and percent
full.
9.3.2 Tons of fuel in each fuel tank and percent full.
9.3.3 Tons of bulk cargo in each cargo hold.
1362
9.3.4 Tons of bulk cargo/containers stowed above deck.
9.3.5 Planned loading and off-loading sequence.
9.3.6 Type of cargo carried.
9.3.7 Location of each cargo carried.
9.4 Ballast Condition:
9.4.1 Tons of ballast in each ballast tank; percent full and
location where ballast taken on.
9.4.2 Operating draft; (propeller immersion).
9.5 Passenger Details:
9.5.1 Name and nationality.
9.5.2 Assigned cabin.
9.5.3 Assigned lifeboat.
9.6 Critical Voyage Events (Other Than 12):
9.6.1 Off spec bunkers.
9.6.2 Heavy weather (deviation/damage).
9.6.3 Fire on board.
9.6.4 Cargo shifts.
9.6.5 Accident/personal injury.
9.6.6 Sickness.
10. Record of Inspection
10.1 Internal Inspections:
10.1.1 Inspections of hull by crew; date, findings, and action
required.
0 F2001 - 01 (2006)
1 0.1.2 Inspections of machinery by crew; date, findings, and
action required.
10.2 Audit Reports:
10.2.1 Shipboard audit deficiencies and corrective action
taken.
10.2.2 Internal ISM audits (company management and ship-
board).
10.2.3 External ICM audits (company management and
shipboard).
10.2.4 Other external audit reports (company management
and shipboard).
10.3 Classification Survey Records :
10.3.1 Annual hull survey.
10.3.2 Annual machinery survey.
10.3.3 Intermediate survey hull.
10.3.4 Intermediate survey machinery.
10.3.5 Special survey hull.
10.3.6 Special survey machinery.
10.4 Flag State Inspections:
10.4.1 Safety construction inspection.
10.4.2 Safety equipment inspection.
10.4.3 IOPP inspection.
1 0.4.4 Safety radio inspection.
10.4.5 Load line inspection.
10.5 Port State Inspections:
10.5. 1 Control number.
10.5.2 Annual.
10.5.3 Reexamination.
10.5.4 Inspection for Certificate of Compliance.
10.5.5 Ballast tank examination.
10.6 CAPs and Vettings-For each type of survey, list the
surveyor, date, and deficiency.
10.7 Certifying Authority ISM Audits of Operations Proce-
dures (Dates Due/Completed, for Each):
10.7.1 Annual office audit (SMC).
10.7.2 Intermediate ship audit (DOC).
10.7.3 DOC renewal audit.
11. Record of Incidents
11.1 Port State Restrictions:
11.1.1 Prevented from entering port.
11.1.2 Cargo operation delayed pending examination.
11.1.3 Fines imposed.
11.1.4 Vessel arrested.
11.2 Unscheduled Off-Hire:
11.2.1 Equipment failure at sea.
11.2.2 Delays for ship assist/rescue.
11.2.3 Berth availability.
11.2.4 Cargo transfer restrictions.
11.2.5 External interference, for example, weather delays,
acts of war, piracy.
1363
11.3 Other Reportable Incidents :
11.3.1 Loss of propulsion.
11.3.2 Loss of electrical power.
11.3.3 Loss of steering.
11.3.4 Oil spill on-board.
11.3.5 Navigational error.
11.3.6 Near-miss incidents.
12. Corrective Actions
12.1 Scheduled Critical Maintenance :
12.1.1 By ship's crew.
12.1.2 By shore crew.
12.1.3 By dry docking.
12.2 Awaiting Critical Equipment :
12.2.1 Equipment for vital ship's systems.
12.2.2 Equipment for personal safety.
12.2.3 Equipment for shipboard safety systems.
12.2.4 Equipment for navigational systems.
12.3 Critical Documentation Needed:
12.3.1 Navigational information (charts, and so forth).
12.3.2 Vendor maintenance and repair manuals.
12.3.3 Required emergency notification information.
12.3.4 Updates on classification/statutory status reports.
12.4 Deficiency Lag-Deficiencies not reported under other
systems.
13. Keywords
13.1 Advance Notice of Arrival; ISM Code; maritime op-
erations; port state control; ship electronic database; ship safety
record
0 F2001 - 01 (2006)
ANNEX
Al. REFERENCED STANDARDS
Standards referenced in this guide are available for purchase
as follows:
ISO and IEC Standards from
11 W. 42nd St.
New York, NY 10036
Tel. 212-642-3946
Fax 212-302-1286
IEEE Standards form
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
PO Box 1331
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
Tel 800-678-4333 (U.S. and Canada)
Tel 908-981-1393 (outside U.S. and Canada)
Fax 908-981-9667
ASTM Standards from
American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
PO Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
NMEA Standards from
National Marine Electronics Association
PO Box 3435
New Bern, NC 28564-3435
IMO Publications from
International Maritime Organization
4 Albert Embankment
London, U.K. SEl 7SR
United States Coast Guard Documents
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
APPENDIXES
Xl. UNITED STATES COAST GUARD
Xl.l Automatic Identification System (AIS) View
X1.1.1 Mobile marine station identification (MMSI).
Xl.1.2 Call sign, 5.1.5.
Xl.l.3 Name, 5.1.2.
X1.1.4 Dimensions of ship, 5.3.1-5.3.5.
Xl.l.5 Type of ship, 5.1.4.
Xl.1.6 Position of fixing antenna on the ship.
X 1.1. 7 Ship's position with accuracy indication.
Xl.l.8 Time in UTC.
X1.1.9 Course over ground.
Xl.l.IO Speed over ground.
X 1.1.11 Heading.
Xl.l.l2 Navigational Status (for example, NUC, at anchor,
and so forth)
X 1.1.13 Rate of turn (where available).
Xl.l.l4 Angle of heel (where available).
Xl.l.15 Pitch and roll (where available).
Xl.l.16 Ship's draught, 9.4.:2.
X1.1.17 Hazardous cargo (type), 9.3.6.
X 1.1.18 Destination, 9. 2 .1.
1364
Xl.l.19 ETA, 9.2.2.
Xl.l.20 Short safety-related messages.
X1.2 Ship Damage Reporting to Nearest Coastal State
X1.2.1 Risk of pollution report, 5.12.1.
X1.3 Personnel Casualty Reporting to Company
Xl.3.1 Report of death, injury, and serious illness, 9.6.5.
X1.3.2 Nature and cause of injury.
X1.4 Casualty Reporting to Company (Initial and Final
Report for each)
X 1.4.1 Collision, structural damage, grounding, stranding,
fire, and explosion, 5.1:2.2 and 5.1 :2.3.
X 1.4.2 Machinery breakdown, damage to machinery space,
and flooding, 6.3.1-6.3.3.
X1.4.3 Damage/loss to cargo.
X1.5 Oil Spill and Pollution
X1.5.1 Report to local government agencies,
X1.5.2 company,
X1.5.3 designated qualified individual, and
Xl.5.4 Oil Spill Response Agency.
F2001 - 01 (2006)
X2. USCG ADVANCE NOTICE OF ARRIVAL- PORT STATE CONTROL (PSC)
X2.1 The United States Coast Guard's Advance Notice of
Arrival for vessels bound for ports or rlaces in the United
States, in accordance with 33 CFR 160.207, shall include the
following:
X2.1.1 The owner, agent, master, operator, or person in
charge of a vessel (except a barge bound for a port or place in
the United States) shall report the following at least 24 h before
entering the port or place of destination to the captain of the
port of destination.
X2.1.2 The Ship Safety Record (SSR) Reference Group is
provided as follows to demonstrate that for vessels provided
with an electronic Ship Safety Record, all the data in the Notice
of Arrival has already been captured.
Item
Vessel name
Name of registered owner
Name of operator
Flag
Call sign
Main Document
Reference Group
5.1.2
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.6
5.1.5
IMO number
Name of classification society
Type of vessel
Name and telephone number of 24-h point of
contact
SMC information
ETA Date/Time
ETD Date/Time
Last port of call
Next port of call
Type of cargo
Loading/off-load
Facility name
Bunkering
Lightering
Agent
5.1.1
5.1.11
5.11.1
6.1.17 & 6.1.18
9.2.2
9.1.2
9.1.1
9.2.1
9.3.6
9.2A
9.2.3
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
X2.1.3 In accordance with 33 CFR 160.211, for vessels
carrying certain dangerous cargo, in addition to the preceding,
the Advance Notice of Arrival is to report the location of the
vessel and the following:
Name and tons of each dangerous cargo and tank
stowage
Operational condition of navigation equipment
9.3.1
6.5.3-6.5.6
COPYRIGHT/).
1365
c.4RDf Designation: F2014- 00 (Reapproved 2006)
"UII
7
INTERNATIONAL
Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping
Applications
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the pipe materials and dimen-
sions for producing non-reinforced extruded tee connections
manufactured by mechanical forming processes. The term
"extruded tee connection" applies to butt-weld or socket-weld
connections. This specification refers to the forming process
that leads to welding or brazing.
1.2 The non-reinforced extruded pipe tee connection is an
alternative to the tee fittings, nozzle, and other welded connec-
tions.
1.3 The non-reinforced extruded pipe tee connection has
been widely used for systems in the marine, process piping,
food, pharmaceutical, and similar industries.
only.
1.5 The extruded tee connection will be welded in accor-
dance with Specification F722. Brazing of tee connections will
be in accordance with ANSI B31.5.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A53/A53M Specification for Pipe, Steel. Black and Hot-
A 1 06/A 106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe
Pipe
A139/A139M Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-
Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)
A 161 Specitkation for Seamless Low-Carbon and Carbon-
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25 .11 on
10.1520/F2014-00R06.
the ASTM website.
Molybdenum Steel Still Tubes for Refinery (Withdrawn
1999)
3
A178/Al78M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and
Superheater Tubes
A 199/ A 199M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Inter-
mediate Alloy-Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes (Withdrawn 1995)
3
A200 Specification for Seamless Intermediate Alloy-Steel
Still Tubes for Refinery Service (Withdrawn 1999)
3
A209/ A 209M Specification for Seamless Carbon-
Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes
A210/A210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon
Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes
A250/ A250M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Fenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes
A252 Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel
Piles
A312/ A312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
A333/ A333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel
Pipe for Low-Temperature Service
A334/ A334M Specification for Seamless and Welded Car-
bon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service
A500 Specification for Cold-Fonned Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
A512 Specification for Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel
Mechanical Tubing
A519 Specification for Seamless .Carbon and Alloy Steel
Mechanical Tubing
A587 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-
Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry
A589 Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel
Water-Well Pipe
A672 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel
for High-Pressure Service at Moderate Temperatures
888 for Seamless Water Tube
B88M Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Limits for NickeL Nickel and
3
www.astm.org.
1366
F2014 - 00 (2006)
Cobalt Alloys B0881
B280 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Con-
ditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
Titanium Alloy Pipe (Withdrawn 1997)
3
8338 Specification for Seamless and Welded Titanium and
Titanium Alloy Tubes for Condensers and Heat Exchang-
ers
B466/B466M Specification for Seamless
Pipe and Tube
B467 Specification for Welded Copper-Nickel Pipe
F722 Specification for Welded Joints for Piping
Systems
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B3 Ll Power Piping
4
B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Piping
4
B31.5 Refrigeration Piping
4
B36.1 OM Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
4
2.3 ISO Standard:
IS0-4200 Plain End Steel Tubes, Welded and Seamless--
General Table 5 of Dimensions and Masses Per Unit
Length
4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.] extruded tee connection-the tee outlet formed from
the run pipe, subsequently welded or brazed to make a
connection (see 1 ), also known in industry as a branch
FIG. 1 Extruded Tee Connection
connection, mechanically formed tee connection, and also
extruded outlet.
3.2 tee ratio-the ratio of the formed tee connection diam-
eter, divided by the run pipe diameter as follows:
Dt
Dr = tee ratio
(1)
4
1367
4. Dimensions and Tolerances
4.1 For welded connections, the dimensions and tolerances
of the extruded tee connection shall be within the tolerances of
the mating pipe in accordance with Specification F722, as
applicable to ANSI B31.1 and B31.3.
4.2 For braze connections, the dimensions and tolerances of
the extruded tee connection shall be within the tolerances of the
mating pipe in accordance with Specification F722, as appli-
cable to B31.5.
5. Run Pipe Materials and Limitations
5.1 Table 1 contains a list of materials that have been found
to have acceptable forming qualities to produce extruded tee
connections:
TABLE 1 Materials That Have Acceptable Forming Qualities To
Produce Extruded Tee Connections
Material
Copper
Copper nickel
lltaniumA
Steel
8
c
Stainless steel
ASTM Material Specifications
888, 888M
8280
B466/B466M
8467
8337 Grades 1 and 2
8338 Grades 1 and 2
A53/A53M
A135
A 161 low carbon
A199/A199M Grade T11
A209/A209M Grade T1
A333/A333M Grade 1
A500 Grade A
A519 Grade 1010
A589 Grade A
A106/A106M Grade B
A139/Ai39M Grade A
A178/A178M
A200 Grade T36
A210/A210M Grade A-1
A252 Grade 1
A334/A334M Grade 1
A512 Grade MT 1010
A587
A672 Grade A-4
A312/A312M TP 304
A312/A312M TP 304L
A312/A312M TP 3098
A312/A312M TP 310S
A312/A312M TP 316
A312/A312M TP 316L
A312/A312M TP 317
A312/A312M TP 321
A312/A312M TP 347
A Titanium run pipe must be commercially pure (99.1 %) and is limited to a
maximum tee ratio of d.8.
8
The material shall be in a normalized or fully annealed condition before cold
forming the extruded tee.
c Steel shall be hot formed in the temperature range from 850 to 1 ooooc (from
1562 to 1832F). Under these conditions, no subsequent stress relieving is
required.
6. Finish, Appearance, and Repairs
6.1 The extruded tee connection shall be free from burrs and
cracks, which would affect the suitability for the intended
service.
6.2 Pipe/tube repairs are permitted in accordance with the
applicable ASTM specification.
F2014 - 00 (2006)
7. Run by Tee Connection Sizes (See 2-13)
7.1 The pipe/tube figures 2-13) represent a matrix of
the process capabilities, reflecting the extruded tee connections
that can be formed from the main pipe/tube diameters and wall
thicknesses.
7.2 The pipe and tube sizes and dimensions referred to in
2-13 are per ANSI B36.10M and ISO 4200. Interpolation
is allowable for sizes not covered.
7.3 The limitations are based on current technology and are
subject to amendment to equipment or process developments,
or both.
8. Allowable Pressures and Temperatures
8.1 The allowable pressures and temperatures shall be in
accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.3, and B31.5 as applicable.
9. Keywords
9.1 extruded outlet; mechanically formed tee connections;
outlets; tee connections
1368
::::;
0\
\0
I A
Nearest copper designation to maximum wall
NoTE 1-Limitation shown in applicable box: K = K copper, L = L copper, and M = M copper.
NoTE 2-Minimum wall copper is Class DWV.
NoTE 3-Dimensions are nominal copper tube size (CTS) with actual ODin parentheses.
NoTE 4-All dimensions are in inches.
~ J ~ ~ a x wall (in)
FIG. 2 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Copper Tube (Inches)

""1"1
1\)
0
.....
J:',l.
I
0
0
I\)
0
0
en
-
R
u
N
p
I
p
I'
II

F. I II 2.llr--TII3":011 / 0
.,
N
D
0
...6.
VJ
I
I .r::.
-..)
0
A
I
M
0
0
E
T
I\)
0
E 0
R
en
-
. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 l.O 1.0 l.O 1.0 1.0
(Dr)
NoTE 1-All sizes are shown in millimetres (mm).
FIG. 3 Extruded Tree Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Copper Nickel Pipe-Metric (mm)
F2014 - 00 (2006)
FIG. 4 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Copper and Copper Nickel Pipe-NPS
1371
c4@f F2014 - 00 (2006)
NoTE 1-Ail sizes are shown in millimetres (mm).
FIG. 5 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Titanium Tube-Metric (mm)
1372
R
u
N
p
I
p
E
D
I
_.
w
-.l
w
A
M
E
T
E
R
(Dr)
Nearest p1pe schedule to ma.x1mum 'Wall
Q Uoll:

NoTE 1-Limitations shown for applicable schedules: S =standard wall, 40 = Sch 40, 20 = Sch 20, 10 = Sch 10, 30 == Sch 30, and 5 = Sch 5.
FIG. 6 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Titanium Pipe-NPS

,
I\)
0
""""
.;1::1.
I
0
0
-
I\)
0
0
m
-
_.
I
VJ
-.J
.j:>.
R
u
N
T
u
B
E
D
I
A
M
E
T
E
R
(Dr)

. ..-. ---

.,
N
0
.....
.083 .090
-l
.120
.......
.203

-------
-:o4o-- --:o4-o--
____
--:o4o- I
.040
0
----
.120 .126 .126 .237 .237
0
----- ---..--
---:o4o-- --:o4o-
.......... ---];4()"""-
-
EJ
...1
N
.114 .142 .258 .258 0
----
........._ ..,, ..................
-----
.., ...___ ,_ .._______
-:o4o ........
0
.040 .040 (7)
-
FIG. 7 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Titanium Tube (Inches)
0 F2014 - 00 (2006)
FIG. 8 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Steel-Metric (mm)
1375

,
1\)
0
......
w
I ccccur' c.cu'f 'u''j!'"

--J
0\
D .. ' ___ . 040 .. 040, .040! .040, .040, .040, .040 .040, d./1/% . /:,. .
I 1:--------'11 , ...... ,_...,_, ....... .. ..,.,....,;! ............. ,.n ........., .,. ... .......,.. .... )" , )_,)/..,./ , _ j)_._P5._.
0
0
-
1\)
0
0
0')
-
Nearest pipe schedule to maximum waH d Max wall (in}
::1 Min wall {in)
NoTE !-Limitations shown for applicable schedules: 5 = Sch 5 S, 10 = Sch 10, 20 = Sch 20, 30 = Sch 30, S =standard wall, and 40 = Sch 40.
FIG. 9 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Steel Pipe-NPS
c4@f F2014 - 00 (2006)
NoTE l-Inch sizes for steel tube currently available through 12 in.
FIG. 10 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Steel Tube (Inches)
1377

,
N
0
.....
UJ
1- __________j_ __..._____J ...................J ...____ ....... __ ..
+:a.
-..l
00
I
0
0
-N
0
0
en
-
FIG. 11 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Stainless Steel Pipe-Metric (mm)
~
.,
N
0
t:;
I :
-J
\0
......
~
I
0
0
'N
0
0
en
-
Naresl pipe schedule 10 mouomu.m w l ~ ~ Maxwall {101
l Mmw:.Ul (101
NoTE 1-Limitations shown for applicable schedule: 5 = Sch 5, 10 Sch 10, lOS Sch lOS, 20 = Sch 20. = standard walL and 40 = Sch 40.
FIG. 12 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Stainless
......
w
00
0
I D
NoTE l-Inch sizes for stainless steel tube currently available through 12 in.
lw I:
Ma.xwa!l{in)
Mtnwa.ll(ln)
FIG. 13 Extruded Tee Connection Sizes and Wall Thickness for Stainless Steel Tube (Inches)

.,
N
0
...r.

I
0
0
-N
0
0
m
-
F2014 - 00 (2006)
COPYRIGHT/).
1381
cSRDf Designation: F2015- 00 (Reapproved 2006)
11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Lap Joint Flange Pipe End Applications
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the pipe material and wall
thickness applicable to lap joint flange pipe ends, manufactured
a mechanical forming process.
1.2 The lap joint connection has been widely used for
10\V-tJresstire systems in the marine, process and similar
industries.
only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A53/A53M for SteeL Black and Hot-
A106/A106M for Seamless Carbon Steel
Pipe
A 139/ A 139M Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-
Welded Steel (NPS 4 and Over)
A 161 Specification for Seamless Low-Carbon and Carbon-
Molybdenum Steel Still Tubes for (Withdrawn
1999)
3
A I 78/ A 178M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and
Superheater Tubes
A 199/ A 199M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Inter-
mediate Alloy-Steel and Condenser
Tubes (Withdrawn 1995)
3
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee P25 on Ships
Current edition approved May l, 2006. Published May 2006. Originally
I 0.1520/F2015-00R06.
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
for Seamless Carbon
-.:nn<''rhP;lt<'r Tubes
for Seamless Medium-Carbon
:SUJJerheGtter Tubes
Seamless Steel
for Seamless, Welded, and
Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
A333/A333M for Seamless and Welded Steel
1 Service
.:">pccJmcanon for Seamless and Welded Car-
Tubes for Low- Service
:specJ.:I1catJon for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural in Rounds and
12 for Cold-Drawn Butt weld Carbon Steel
for Seamless Carbon and Steel
for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-
for the Chemical
:specJlhcauon for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel
A672 Specification for Electric-Fusion- Welded Steel
for Service at Moderate Temr>er:atu.res
B42 Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe. Standard Sizes
B8R Specification for Seamless Water Tube
B88M Specification for Seamless Water Tube (Met-
ric)
B280 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Con-
ditioning and Field Service
Titanium (Withdrawn 1997)
3
:SpecJi1lcatlon for Seamless and Welded Titanium and
Tubes for Condensers and lleat excn;an,!!-
ers

and Tube
for Seamless
B467 Specification for Welded Copper-Nickel Pipe
1382
F2015 - 00 (2006)
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B31.1 Power Piping
4
B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refining Piping
4
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Bl6.9 Wrought Steel
B 16.42 Ductile lron
Classes 150 and
2.3 ISO Standard:
fS0-7005-1 Metallic
IS0-7005-2 Metallic
IS0-7005-3 Metallic
3.2 convoluted flange--a back-up with a
variable cross section to the material in the stress-
related zones.
3.3 lap joint end-the formed end to accommodate the
back-up flange, commonly referred to as a Van Stone
(see l ).
4.1 The lap joint end outside diameter shall be formed to the
raised face flange diameter as covered under ISO Standard
7005-1,7005-2, 7005-3, and ANSI B16.9 Table 7, Dim. G.
4.2 The back-up flange dimensions are covered under ANSI
Standards B16.5, Bl6.24, and B16.42, and ISO Standards
7005-1, 7005-2, and 7005-3.
4
5. Fabrication
5.1 The formed lap joint end may have a smooth or serrated
face.
5.2 The back-up flange may be a different material from the
lap joint end pipe as long as it conforms to the applicable
piping system codes or standards.
5.3 Convoluted back-up flanges may be used if they comply
with the applicable piping system codes or standards.
6. Pipe Materials and Limitations
6.1 l contains a list of materials that have been found
to have acceptable forming qualities to produce a lap joint end.
7. Finish, Appearance and Repairs
7.1 The lap joint
accordance with accepted
burrs and cracks, which would affect the
intended service.
7.2 Pipe/tube repairs are peJtmme:d in accordance with the
applicable ASTM specification.
8. Dimensional Limitations (see 2-4)
8.1 Interpolation is allowable for sizes not covered.
8.2 The limitations are based on current technolclgy
to amendment to equipment or process de'velopJnents,
9. Allowable Pressure and Temperature
9.1 The allowable pressures and temperatures shall be in
accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.3, and the individual
limitations imposed by the back-up flange, gasket, pipe, and
fasteners in accordance with ANSI B 16.5.
10. Keywords
10.1 lap joint flange; loose flange joint; slip flange
flange joint; Van Stone flange
Lap Joint End _j Back-up
/ _____-- j Flange
Lap Joint Flange
FIG. 1 lap Joint End
1383
0 F2015 - 00 (2006)
TABLE 1 Materials Having Acceptable Forming Qualities to TABLE 2 Lap Joint Flange-Dimensional Limitations for Tube (SI
Produce a Lap Joint End Units)
Material ASTM Material
NoTE 1-Key: 10 ::; maximum wall in mm. 2 :S minimum wall in
Copper B88
mm.
B280
Material
Copper nickel B466/B466M Tube
B467 Diameter, Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Copper Nickel Titanium
mm
TitaniumA Grades 1 and 2
21.3 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.4
8338 Grades 1 and 2
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
26.9 3.7 3.5 4.0 2.4
Steel
8
A53/A53M
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
A135
33.7 4.0 3.7 4.E 3.1
A i 51 low carbon
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
42.4 5.5 4.7 5.5 3.1
A209/A209M Grade T1
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
48.3 6.2 5.0 6.0 3.1
A333/A333M Grade 1
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A500 Grade A
60.3 7.0 5.0 6.0 3.1
A5i9 Grade 1010
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A589 Grade A
76.1 8.0 5.8 6.0 3.4
Ai06/A106M Grade B
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A139/A139M Grade A
88.9 8.8 5.8 6.0 3.4
Ai78/A178M
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A200 Grade T36
114.3 9.5 5.8 6.0 3.4
A210/A210M Grade A-1
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A252 Grade 1
139.7 9.5 5.8 6.0 3.8
A334/A334M Grade 1
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A512 Grade MT 1010
168.3 9.5 5.8 6.0 3.8
A587
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
A672 Grade A4
219.1 9.5 5.8 6.0 4.2
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Stainless steel A312/A312M TP 304
273 9.5 5.8 6.0 4.7
A312/A312M TP 304L
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
A312/A312M TP 309S
323.9 10.3 5.8 6.4 5.1
A312/A312M TP 310S
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
A312/A312M TP 316
355.6 10.3 5.8 5.3
A312/A312M TP 316L
2.0 2.0 2.0
A312/A312M TP 317
406.4 10.3 5.8 5.3
A312/A312M TP 321
2.0 2.0 2.0
A312/A312M TP 347
A Titanium run pipe must be commercially pure (99.1 %).
8
Steel shall be hot formed in the temperature range from 850 to 1 ooooc (from
1562 to 1832F). Under these conditions, no subsequent stress relieving is
required.
1384
F2015 - 00 (2006)
TABLE 3 Lap Joint Flange-Dimensional Limitations for Tube
(Inches-Pound Units)
NOTE 1-Key: 0.375 ::; maximum wall in inches. 0.06 ::; minimum
wall in inches.
Material
Tube
Diameter, Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Copper Nickel Titanium
in.
7/a 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.094
0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
0.145 0.138 0.158 0.094
0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
1% 0.158 0.145 0.177 0.123
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
1% 0.217 0.185 0.216 0.123
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
2 0.245 0.200 0.235 0.123
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
2% 0.275 0.200 0.235 0.123
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
3 0.315 0.200 0.235 0.136
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
4 0.346 0.200 0.235 0.136
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
5 0.375 0.200 0.235 0.136
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
6 0.375 0.200 0.235 0.151
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
7 0.375 0.200 0.235 0.151
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
8 0.375 0.200 0.235 0.167
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10 0.375 0.200 0.235 0.186
0.080 0.080 0.080 0.080
12 0.406 0.200 0.250 0.203
0.080 0.080 0.080 0.080
1385
0 F2015 - 00 (2006)
TABLE 4 Lap Joint Flange-Dimensional limitations for Pipe
NoTE !-Key-Nearest pipe schedule to max wall (where applicable) 2: Schedule 40. 0.375::; maximum wall in inches. 0.08::; minimum wall in
inches.
Copper and
Pipe Diameter (NPS) Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Copper Titanium
NickeiA
1/2 Schedule 40 0.120 Schedule 40 0.120 0.120 Schedule 10
0.040 0.040 0.040
3f4 Schedule 40 0.145 Schedule 40 0.138 0.158 Schedule 10
0.040 0.040 0.040
Schedule 40 0.158 Schedule 40 0.145 0.177 Schedule 10
0.060 0.060 0.060
1% Schedule 40 0.217 Schedule 40 0.185 0.216 Schedule 10
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
2 Schedule 40 0.275 Schedule 40 0.200 0.235 Schedule 10
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.060 0.060 0.060
0.080 0.080 0.080
0.080 0.080 0.080
14 standard wall 0.406 Schedule 1 OS 0.230 0.250 Schedule i OS
0.080 0.080 0.080
16 standard wall 0.406 Schedule 1 OS 0.230 0.250 Schedule 1 OS
0.080 0.080
A For copper-nickel, nearest pipe class to maximum pipe wall is Class 200.
COPYRIGHT/).
1386
0.094
0.040
0.094
0.040
0.123
0.060
0.123
0.060
0.123
0.060
0.123
0.060
0.136
0.060
0.136
0.060
0.136
0.060
0.151
0.060
0.151
0.060
0.167
0.060
0.186
0.080
0.203
0.080
0.212
0.080
0.212
0.080
Designation: F2016 - 00 (Reapproved 2012)
-.qll
7
INTERNATIONAL
Establishing Shipbuilding Quality Requirements for Hull
Structure, Outfitting, and Coatings
1
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapprovaL A
1. Scope
1.1 This practice consists of three annexes: hull structure,
outfitting, and coating. The subject of these annexes was
selected for several reasons. Other commercial shipbuilding
nations already have in place widely recognized standards of
expectations in these areas. These constitute the most signifi-
cant areas where workmanship is a critical factor in customer
satisfaction. The cost associated with the labor involved in
these three areas is a significant factor in construction man-
hours and overall schedules.
1.2 The standard criteria provided in this practice are
intended to apply to conventional, commercial ship construc-
tion. In many cases, specialized, nonconventional vessels using
nonstandard materials or built-to-serve sole requirements may
require unique acceptance criteria that are beyond those
provided in this practice.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D4417 Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface
Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel
E337 Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psy-
chrometer (the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Tem-
peratures)
2.2 ISO Standards:
3
ISO 8502-3 Assessment of Dust on Steel Surfaces Prepared
for Painting (Pressure-Sensitive Tape Method)
ISO 8502-6 Extraction of Soluble Contaminants for
Analysis-The Bresle Method
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships and
Marine Technologyand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.07 on
DOl: 10.1520/F2016-00R12.
2
the ASTM website.
3
2.3 NACE Standards . .4
5 Sutface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and
Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure
Water Jetting Prior to Re-coating (SSPC-SP I 2)
NACE No. 7 Interim Guide and Visual Reference Photo-
graphs for Steel Cleaned Water Jetting (SSPC-VIS
4( 1 ))
2.4 SSPC Standards:
5
SSPC-AB 1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives
SSPC-AB 2 Specification for Cleanliness of Recycled Fer-
rous Metallic Abrasives
SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness With
Magnetic Gages
SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP Hanel Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP 7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP ll Power Toll Cleaning to Bare Metal
SSPC -SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and
Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure
Water Jetting Prior toRe-coating (NACE No. 5)
SSPC-VIS 1-89 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned
Steel
SSPC-VIS 3 Visual Standard for Power- and Hand-Tool
Cleaned Steel
SSPC-VIS 4(1) Interim Guide and Visual Reference Photo-
graphs for Steel Cleaned by Water Jetting (NACE No. 7)
2.5 NSRP Documents:
6
National Shipbuilding Research 6--97-1 "American
Shipbuilding Quality Standards," dated May 28, 1999
3. Summary of Practice
3.1 This practice provides workmanship criteria to be ap-
plied to commercial shipbuilding or ship repair, or both. The
4
Available from NACE International (NACE), 1440 South Creek Dr., Houston,
TX 77084-4906, http://www.nace.org.
Available from Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), 40 24th St., 6th Floor,
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656, http://www.sspc.org.
6
Available from The Librarian, Documentation Center, Marine Systems Divi-
sion, University of Michigan Transportation Research Institute, 2901 Baxter Rd.,
Ann Arbor, Ml 48109-2150.
1387
F2016 - 00 (2012)
criteria covers three primary phases of ship construction, that
is, hull structure, outfitting, and coatings. Specific criteria to be
selected from this standard should be as contractually agreed
between the ship owner and shipbuilder.
4.1 To achieve success in ship construction, it is necessary
for the ship owner and the ship builder to agree on the level of
quality in the final product. Classification rules, regulatory
requirements, and ship specifications all help to define an
acceptable level of construction quality; however, this guid-
ance alone is not sufficient. It is up to the shipbuilder, therefore,
to describe the level of workmanship sufficiently that will be
reflected in the delivered ship, and for the ship owner to
communicate his expectations effectively for the final product.
4.2 It is the intent of this document to contribute to these
objectives in the following ways:
4.2.1 To describe a reasonable acceptable level of workman-
ship for commercial vessels built in the United States.
4.2.2 To provide a baseline from which individual shipyards
can begin to develop their own product and process standards
in accordance with generally accepted practice in the commer-
cial marine industry.
4.2.3 To provide a foundation for negotiations between the
shipbuilder and the ship owner in reaching a common expec-
tation of construction quality.
4.3 The acceptance criteria herein are based on cuuently
practiced levels of quality generally achieved by leading
international commercial shipbuilders. These criteria are not
intended to be a hard standard with which all U.S. shipyards
must comply. Rather, they are intended to provide guidance
and recommendations in the key areas that play a major role in
customer satisfaction and cost-effective ship construction.
5. Keywords
5.1 coatings; hull structure; outfitting; quality; shipbuilding;
workmanship
ANNEXES
Al. HULL STRUCTURE
1388
F2016 - 00 {2012)
I HULL
STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Otvlslon Marking UNIT:mm
Section Sub-section Item
f.)tondard olerance
Remarks
Range L 11111 ta
Stze and shape compared
""' th t 2 t 3
Ill correct ones.
fl
c
Especially for the depth 0
:t 1.5 :t 2.5 of floors and girders of
double bottom.
fl
1..
Corner angle COIIII)ared with
L
0
correct ones
u
:1: 1.5 :t 2
-;
-
)t
""0
Curvature

L Ill
0 1..
:1: I :t 1.5 0. CD
E .!J
0 E
u CD
E
II
c
0
Location of 111e111ber 111ark for
- _,
1.. fttttng co111pared with correct
ones.
:t 2 :t 3 0 c
c

-
(.!)
...
...
- ...
Block marklng(Panel block)
""0
compared with correct ones.
c
:t 2.5 :t 3.5 0

5.
_,
D
Location of 111ember for fitting
c compared with correct ones.
-
...
:t 2.5 :t 3.5
;
(.)
FIG. A 1.1 Hull Structure
I HULL
STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Dtvtslon Gas Cutting UNIT:mm
Section Sub-section Ite111
Standard olerance Standord[olerancj_
Remarks
Rance LimIts Rang_e L 1111 I t s
Strength Shop 100,.. 200,.. The class denoted In parentheses Is In
metnber (2nd cl) 13rd cl) accordance with following definition.
CD
F tel d 150,.. 300,.. lass Than 50,.. 1st class
Q
(3!"'d cl) (Out ell 50,.. ... IOOJJ 2nd class
.,
100,.. -200,.. 3rd class
Cll

More than 200,.. out of class

Other Shop too,..
200'"' - Special precautions ore required In case
1..
Fteld (2nd cl) (3rd ell where grinding or other tr-eatments
1..1..
500j.l 150 ... or-e r-equested. Ill
Ill (Out cl) (Out cl)
- For- angle cutTing the some os the case

In field. c
.t:.
0
Strength Shop IOOj.l 2001.' ::>
0
member- (2nd cl) (3r-d cl)
0:: ..
Field 400j.l soo,..
>
0 (Out cl) (Oul ell
0
1..
Q
.,
Other- Shop 100,.. 1500.u

Field (2nd el) (Out ell
..
800J.I 1500.,. 3:
Wut cl) (Out ell
1389
0 F2016 - 00 {2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Division
Section Sub-section
10
0
.,
u
0
'-
L
:J
IJ)

if,
Q
c
...
18
0
u
c
0
0
c
E
0
...
...
Q
c:
..X:
0
c
0

0 E
....Jo
Ita
L o. ,....
' 0.2 A
0.3 B I
.L 0 . .4-
0. 5 - rrFF/TCFr,rr;r
0.6-
0.7-
0.8 ,, .,, ,,,
-
-
Grode of surface flaking
-i/111- Aroo Rot I o
,x 12345678910 12
mm'- I I I I I I I I I I I I
0.1 -
0.2 -
'
O.J-
o . .a -A
0.5 ...
0.7-
0.8-
0.9-
8
r:
I . 0 ...&.,,..,. ,, ,.,.,.,.,,,,.,,,,.J',_
Appl tcoble to cases where
defects ore over 20% of
thickness, or over deep
and 150mm long.
(o)
(b)
Material
Remarks
I. Grode A pitting ts minor ond no repair ts
necessary. Grode B pttttng Is moderate ond
ts to be repaired as necessary. Grade C
pitting Is severe and requires repair.
2. Pttttng that occurs on the boundary l lne
between Grode A and Grode B con be considered
111lnor and Treated as Grode A pitting .
3. Repairs shall be made as follows:
Depth of pitting :d
Plate Thtckness :T
Where 0.07t>d Grind SmooTh
INote1Regordless of plate thickness. ot
no tlae should piTting that Is 3mm deep
or greater be repaired by grinding only)
Where Grind and Weld
No1e1 The area ratio Is the estimated
percentage of the plate surface that Is
pitted to the point where the surface
appearance Is unsatisfactory.
I. Grade A pltTin9 Is minor and no repair Is
necessary. Grode 6 pitting Is Moderate and
Is to be repaired as necessary. Grade C
pitting Is severe ond requires repair.
2. Pitting that occurs on the boundary ltne
between Grade A and Grode 8 con be considered
minor and treated as Grode A pitting.
3. Repotrs snoll be made OS follows:
Depth of piTting :d
Plate Thickness :1
Where 0.07t>d Grind Smooth
!Note:Regardless of plote thickness, at
no TIMe should pitting tnot Is 3mm deep
or greater be repaired by grlndtng only)
Where Grind and Weld
Note: The area raTio Is the estimated
percentage of the plate surface that Is
piTted to the point where the surface
appearance Is unsatisfactory.
When the removal of a surface defect exposes
other significanT defects such as covltles,
crocks or Inclusions, the casting Is to be
checked using dye penetrant Inspection,
magnetic particle Inspection or ultrasonic
Inspection and repaired accordingly, using on
appropriate method of repair .
Where delaMination Is minor It con be chipped
or ground out and built-up with weld metal as
shown In Figure lo).
Where minor delamination occurs close to the
plate surface grinding or chipping and weld
metal build-up should be as shown In Figure
(b).
Repair of moderate delamination should be
considered on a case by case bosls.
Where delamination Is fairly extensive,
plating should be cropped out locally and
replaced.
The minimum width of plottng to be cropped
out Is to be as follows:
Highly Stressed Primary Longitudinal
Strength Members: 1600mm
Moderately Stressed Primary Longitudinal
Strength Members: 800mm
All Other Structural Members: 300mM
Where severe delamination thot affects the
whole plate occurs, the whole plate must be
replaced.
1390
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL
STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
OUALITY STANDARDS
Dtvlslon Gas Cutting LNIT:IIIIn
Secllon Sub-sect ton Item
Standard oleranc:e
Remarks
Range L11111 ts
I )Upper edge of sheer stroke. Notches ore to be welded up
2)Strength dock between 0.6l. prior to grinding In areas
ond free edge of opening of shell where 0 SIIIOOlh finish Is
plate. required. Sufftclent weld
3)Moln longl strength I!Utll'lbers.
Notch
metol should be lold such
0
thot ofter grinding there
"
ore no residual voids or
CI"OC:ks between the weld
fl},t:
metal and the parenT Metal.
can
Free
0-.
edge -..c CD...,
-oo
0 E
Ill L
Longitudinal &. Transverse Indentions greater than the
Ill. 0
Strength members

stated tolerance l IIIII 1 arl!l
0 E C
-
to be treated OS nolches.
......
-
0
......
Others

Indentions greater thon the
oi)-C>
<.. L In stoted tolerance I I mIt ore
tn e..c ......
to be treated OS notches.
4'"'0 ...... -
.t: E
ll fl) Ill-
., SnelL plate &. Upper-deck Indentions greater than the
..... -- _.,

0
...J
btween 0.6le stated tolerance II 111 It ore
z.t: .. (!l
() 0 0
;.11:
.. .c c
...
o.-o
Others Indentions greater than the
c !..
Weld
...

.... ;:I
stated tolerance l I miT ore
<(C-'
groove Ill
to be tr-eated OS notches.
"'0
-, ...
Ill c
Ftllet Weld Indent Ions greater than the
... -
Indent at
0 stated tolerance lt mIT ore
z
Strolghtneea
of plate
Both elde aubaerged ore welding
:1:0.4 :t0.5
edge
Mon1.1ol 1/U>IIII oytomattc
welding :!:1.0 :!:2.5
Depth of
edge
i >t
I .5 :t2.0
preparation
Angle of'

edge . :t2 :t4
preporot I on
Length of

:t0.5d :ti.Od
toper
(l
compared wl th correct st:zes)
c
0
-
Structyrol members other than .,
c
double bottom floors and girders. :!:3.5 5.0

E
0
Depth of double bottom floors
and girders.
Stze of
t2.5 !4.0
member
Breadth of face bar.
-3.0
t2.0
-
+4.0
Edge Automatic welding
t2' t4
preparation
Semi-automatic &. manual weld-
lng.
2' :t4
1391
I HULL
Dtvlslon
Section Sub-section
'-
0

.LO
... c
"'00
o-
. ._
t.
co
.t)
ID

'-
0
.L
...
0
ID
0
ti
5
,...o
"'0
:J
...
)I
;
)0"'0
... c
c

0
_J
G e
"'0
_.a

ac
a
c 0
c
c(-
0
'-
-'
LL

a
c c

.,.Ill
t. .....
:J; 0
,.. L Cl
0
0 c
>- 0

:J I. 0
u ..
UliD

c.t)
-.
t.

0 .. '-
Cl .. 0
t.
., c.
,... c

3 0 0
u'-
';.L
-
F2016 - 00 (2012)
STRUCTURE
Fabrication

Standard
Rona a
----j
r-
'/
:t:3.0
Compared with
correct size
'/
3.0
_L
t
:t2.0
Compa,..ed wIth
correct stze
ti00-=1-
_l
_t
'// --
2.5
Compared wIth template pel"'
100 mm
Per 10m
Per 10m
In breadth of flange
/
In
/
1 n
-
-
-
:tiO
-
-
-
/
....-:
--
..&
length
\- -
-
-
/
....-:
.&;
length
:1:10
-
-
---=
--
FIG. A1.5 Hull Structure
1392
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
UNIT:mm
olerance
Remarks
Limits
:t5.0
Low and moderately stressed
111embers.
5.0
Htghly stressed members .
:t3.0
:t:4.5
:t25
:t25
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Division Fabrication
Sec t1 on Sub-section he111
Standar-d olerance
Re111ar-ks
L t111tta
Anglj j

'b
:t1.5 :t2.0

c
0
I. Coapared with teaplate

0
Maxtau111 per111ltted curvature
c
-

per IOOm111 Length of aember.
I.
(J)
:ti.O :tl.5
1000
Compared with te111plote
Curvature co111pared with template
or check llne.Per 10m In lengtn.
:t2.0 :t4.0

0
Deviation fro11.
0.
ll
::>

..
.....
:t3.0 :t5.0
-
::>
co
Inscribed curve
..,

Correct from Inscribed.
0.
0
c
c
<
0
..J
ii
..,
In
:tt.5 :t3.0
e
flange angle
0 -.
I.
I.&.
Co111pored wttn template
Deviation of face plate

:t1.5 :1:3.0
per per
IOOmm IOOnu1
1393
~ F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Otvlslon Fobl"leotlon UNIT:111,.
Sect I on Sub-section I tea
Stondal"d olel"ance
Re111ol"ks
Range L lm Its
_,
r-
._
r
0

..t:.O
... c
:3.0 ~ 5 0
"00
o ......
....
~
(.
co
;
..1(
u
CoMpONtd wIth 0
l
C01"1"8CT stze
co
"
_j_
"
0
'
-
0
_1 -
c.O
-
-
lJ..

Ill ll<
.,
... c:
~ 0
:t3.0 :t5.0
Q
-'c
00
~ ......
._
Compared wiTh te111plote per
100 IIIII In breadth of flange
... Actual line of plate edge.
t2.0 :t4.0
. )( ...
co111pored
"' t n
template.
... 0 Ill
0.0 0.
Q. t. 0
eo..c
Actual curved sul"foce,compared For diMensions greater
"''-Ill
:2.0 :4.0
t- with template. than IM. :t5.0.
"
0.
0
..t:.
1ft
)(
Location of check line for lev-
0
.D ellng by slght,conapored w 1 th
:tl.5 :t3.0
1..
Ill teMplate.
0 Ill
(for transvel"se)
Ql 0
c
......
0 0.
Q.
e
<II
-
...
Ill c Local I on of check line for lev-
CJ) 0
ell ng by sight ,compared wIth
- t I .5 t3.0
0
~
template.
~
(for I ong 1 t ud 1 no l )
Q Ill
e
(/)
CJ)
~
())
c
Shope,compored -
"
w 1 th template. :t I .5 :t3.0
c
CJ)
co
Ill
CD
~ ...
eo
..t:....J
Shope,compored with
... 0.
template . :tl.5 :t3.0
OE

...
1394
I. HULL STRUCTURE
Division
F2016 - 00 (2012)
Fobrlc:allon
SHIPeUILDING
QUALITY STAI'OARDS
I.J'IJIT:mlill
S l
a- Slandord oleronc:e

Depth of corrugation
,
0
Ill
Breadth or corrugation.
0
G
::;
1,.
c..
0
u
0
ll
,
e
...
0
Ctl
j
c..
L.
0
u
I
I.
j
...
IJ IJ
::; ..
I.
..
....
Ill

0 c:l
IJ.
-...
I. 10
-vo
c e
,..
u
Breadth (6)
Dtollle'l'ttrs
8
Ptlc:h
(p)
Depth
(h)
In regard to the check line
(for longitudinal)
(for transverse)
Gop between shell plate end
section template
:t3.0 t6.0
A :t3.0 t6.0
B 3.0 t6.0
t6.0 :t9.0
:t:2.0 :t3.0
:1:2.5 :t5.0
But.Mox. But,Mox.
5.0 :t7.5
:t2.5 t5.0
:t2.5 t5.0
:1:2.5 :t5.0
1395
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Division Sub-ossembl, UNIT: mm
Section Sub-section l1e11
!Standard oleronce
Remarks
Range Ltml ts
o
Distance between oft edge of
t5 t 10
eli
boss and aft peak bulkhead (b)
upper
- p gudgeon
~ ....
Iii c
Gl c..
'jliD
"Clll
.....
t5 :t:IO
?(f) Twist of Sub-assembly (c)
lower b .oo
::l c
It Ul Ill_
gudgeon 1-
c
!
.X.,
(c) 0
-
~ u ::l
plush
1.1 .0
o-'
Deviation of rudder
c E
~ t4 t8

(iJ co_
from shaft t (d)
E ..
0
..
0
I
.... .0
1..
0 ::l

Correct or re-assemble
(f)
"0 Twist of Rudder plote over t6 tiO
"
.,
1 ts length
partially
I)
~
:>
0
0::
1..
-
:> u
0 IP
0 0.
., Flatness of top plate
t5 :tiO <( (/)

of main engine bed
.0

c
- Breadth and length of
:t6 0 :t4
c top plate of matn engine bed
IP
c
-
0
Others The eome as for flat plate block Sub-assembly
:t
1396
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
OUALITY STAIIDARDS
Dtvlslon Sub-asseMbly LNIT:IIIIII
Section Sub-section I tell
Standard olerance
Re111orks
Range L 111111s
Breadth of Sub-asseably :1:4.0 :t6.0 Cut, when too long
Length of Sub-osselllbly u.o t6.0 Cut,when too long
...
Measured c!tfforence cf d!-
E
agonal length of ftnol
Gl
Ill
Squareness of u :t8
11orktng l tnes.
Ill
Wnsn the difference Is
0
over
I the lt111 ts.correcT the ftno
.D
11orktng line.
:I
(J)
Gl
Dtetortton of
tiO
Measured on the face of
0 Sub-ossellbly
t20
web or girder.

..
Excluding the case when
0
Interior 111e111bers are con-
nee ted by lapped )oint,
Deviation of :t5.0 tiO.O
= =
=7
Interior 11e11bers \Fro etc.
froM shell plating
'
-*
ahall plota
'
Ill
llccurocr of 1hla dlaanaton
c
0
-
Ill
Breadth of Sub-asseMbly t4.0 t8.0
Measured along the girth.
c

Cut, when too long .
E
0
...
Length of Sub-ossellbly :1:4.0 :t8.0 Cut,when too long. 0
....
\)
...
0

Measured on face of web
L
:>
E
Distortion of
or girder.
\)

:tiO :t20 Correct the ftnol 111arktng \) .,

<( .,
ltne,when the distortion
0
exceeds the ltlll lS.
I
.D
:I
(/)
Difference of bose ltne to
e 11orktno or
d{=EB
..
difference of
0

diagonal
lengths along
"'0
Sqvareness of
:tiO :t15
!IIOrklng
Gl
>
d= I e I=- e2=1 L

:J
u
od)vst marking
where procttc:oble. 2
Deviation of Inter tor
The BOllia as for the flat plate Sub-assembly
111e111bers rrolll snell plating
above.
Breadth of each panel
x"'
Length of eac:h panel
u-'
o.D
Savoreness of each ponel
E
.......
10.,
The for the flat plate
tit Distortion of each panel
SOllie OS
,_ 0
above.
o'
.D
Dtstortton of

Interior
ll.(/)
members fr-a111 skin
plating
1397
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Dtvlston Sub-assembly UNIT:mm
1St ondord oleronce
Reorks
Ronge L talts
Measured OS follows:
..(\
"'
..(\
\<
~
"'
...
\<',._
v 0'1
coY
-
.1:1
c E
\
:
/.
Ill Twtst
~
0
of :tiO :t20
l
Sub-assembly .1:1
::J
(/)
...X:
TI-le points A,B and c ore
0 established ln the 501118
0
plane. Measure the
iO deviation of poinT D

fro111 that plane.
'0
Moy re-asseMble partially
when the devlotlon el<ceeds
0:: B.L.
=
baseline the (I Ill ItS.
Dev l ott on of
~ - - v
upper/lower panel :t5 :t:IO
fro t or B.L.
~ - \ ue.
Deviation of
"'- .,.
Ul
upper/lower panel t5 t:IO .(
c from t or FR.L
Accuracy of this dimension
0
-
Ill Breadth of each panel
c

:..
Length of e
:0
each panel
0
E
The some OS for the fl ot

Distortion of eoch panel plate Sub-asseMbly
.... !Ill
(previous poge)
0
Ill
0
Deviation of Inter tor me111bers
... I
from skin plating
0 .1:1
0 ::>
(., (/)
The Sallie OS for the flat
:I
Twist or
0 .X
Sub-assembly
:1:15 :t25 plate Sub-assembly
0
f.)
(pr-evious poge)
<
0
iO
Deviation of

upper/lower panel t7 :t 15
0
from
'
or B.L. Re-assemble partially when
0::
the deviaTion el<ceeds the
Deviation of ltmt ts
upper/lower panel 7 :tl5
fr-om It Of' FR.L
,...
-
Dtstance between
..J:l
e upper-/lower
Q)
gudgeon (o)
Ill
Ill
0 Gl
I e
t5.0
..J:l 010
10.0
:I c: (.
(f)-<.-
.,
..l: :I c:
u_. t.
0 u
.... c ...
ro-m
1398
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Division occurac::r UNIT: 111111
Seclton Sub-section
Item
Standard oleronce
Remarks
Range LIMits
Applied to ships of 100 me-
Length between
ters length and below.
Perpendiculars
:t50.0
For the convenience of the
Ill
Per
Not
!lutosurement the point where
c
lOOM
defined
the keel Is connected to th
0
or the stelll ~ ~ n a y be
-
curve
Ill Lengih substituted for the fore
c
perpend I cul or In the ~ ~ n e a s
ll
G uremenl of the length.
0
Length between oft
-
edge of boss and :t25.0
Not
0 defined
a main engine
-
0
Molded breadth Applied to ships or 15 me- c
No't
- Breadth A111ldshlps t 15.0 ters breodth ond above.
(..
defined
Measured on the upper deck.
0..
Oeplh
Molded depth
:1:10.0
Nol Applied to ships of 10 me-
Aatdshlps deft ned ters depth and above.
Deformation for the
Not
Ups(-) and Downs(+)
whole length t25.0
defined
against the check ll ne of
Flatness
keel slghllng.
of
Deformation for the Stghtlng by the transIt or
Keel
distance between two
:!:15.0
Not using sltts.
adlacent bulkheads defined
IH tgnment of fore-body to Ups(-) and Downs(+)
baseline. against the baseline of
E
~
the keel at the foremost
(,.
frame on the flat port of 0
Not
...
30.0
defined
1 he keel .
_,
-;
bose J:. line
... Forebody
e
0
Alignment
c
Al \gn111ent of oft-body to Ups(-) ond Downs(+)
0 baseLine. against the baseline of
- the keel at the oft-
~
;Elboso
Not
perpendtcular.
e
t20.0
(..
defined
0
...
Ill
0
l tne
Rise of floor CUIIdShlps The height of the lower
turn of the bilge. compared
wIth the planned height.
Rise
Not
Measured from the plane
of
~
t 15.0
defined
posstng through the outer
Floor surface of the keel plate.
l
1399
c4@f F2016- 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
OUALlTY STANDARDS
Dtvlslon Welding l.A'JIT: 111111
Section Sub-section lte111
Tolerance
Re111orks
L 11111 ts
"'0

.. 0
c e e
c-.o-
0 I tl
ec.. c

u
.-uoo
J:.l..
tl OJ:...lC
-c-. ... c In case where

Is over 90
e c-oo
h:not defined IT Is to be repaired by
:r- o-
eiJ,. Bznot defined grinding or welding to 1110ke
I.. I..
e:S;9o eS:90"
Ul
...
Shell plate and face plate be- over 90 Repair using fine electrode.
;,
u-..-. tween 0.6l

continuous
b
(Avoid short beads for
... ,
dSO.!S
higher lens lle steel)

e...o e
"0
,_ ..
0 c
Other dS:0.8 .,
::::>
...0
... :;, ..
6
0

Cl
. -.
0 "0<- lJ
J:. c-
(/)
::::>
Co111pored wIth When over tolerance l 1 ml ts.
Correct ones
cfe
weld up.
.r.
( l ,d) (Avoid short beads for
... higher tensile steels)
Cl
c

-
Cl
l1leg length
....J
d:Throot depth

..

When over tolerance lt ml ts .
c
repair by l I ne' heatIng or
- -
c 0 c 0
Shell plate between 0.6Lox
re-weld after cutting ond
o.-. 1..0 ....
re-fitting.
-
o-
11101 -Uta or bea
'- c ;, 1.. c
WS:6 o- ..... o-
--o a.--o
....... c .....
Fore and Aft shell plating ond
WS:7 -Ill <(-to
Transverse strength member Qll "0
...
._
Other-s WS:8 0 0
Cl
.50HT In case where short bead OIC
c- .Cost steel

Is unavoidable, preheat to

TMCP type 50HT :t25c.
.... au (ceq.>0.36X) If short bead Is
lnodvertentlr,remove the
..xcr._ Grode E of mild steel bead by grlndlng,ond weld
-o
0"'0 0 over length of vIsIble
0
00 TMCP type 50HT crock.
Ill

.0
1-8
(ceq.S:0.36%)
...0
...
.50HT
L
<-"'0
0
0 0
.Cost steel
J:.

(/)
CD
TMCP type 50HT
CI...O
c (ceq.>0.36X)
-a
1.. c
Grode E
--
of 1111 ld steel
o-o
o.-
TMCP
CD CD
type 50HT
Q:JI
(ceq.S:0.36X)
1400
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HUI_L STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Dtvlston
Sec 1 I on Sub-sect I on
Q
c
-
...
0

L
I

L
0
Q
5
"'0
Cl)

=
Gl
::>
-' (T
I
Gl
c..
L
n.

L
:;)
...
0
c..
Cl)
0.
E

......
.50HT
. Cost steel
.Grode E of 111lld steel
.TMCP type 50HT
TMCP type 50HT
!Ceq.S:0.36X)
.50HT
Cast steel
TMCP type 50HT
(Ceq.>0.36X)
Mild steel
Welding
Tolerance
lImIts
not allowed
HO"C
T:S:5"C
1401
UNIT: MIA
Re111orks
In case where arc-strike Is
mode Inadvertently. remove
the hardened zone by
grinding or weld over
length of short bead on the
ore-strike .
In case where Ceq. of each
plate ore different In
)otnt,tolerance of higher
Ceq.to be app11ed.
c4@f F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL
STRUCTURE
Dtvlslon Alignment and Finishing
Tolerance
Ltlls
-o
<...-
0.
!II

u ...
c c
0
... u
!.00
_....,
-o-o
0
e
:;I c
e..-
-
C"O
l:
l<
Ill
I.

..0
e

e
c
Ill

!

..0
0.
0
(.!)
0
... "'0
-o-'
..... e

....
..
... :I
';..o
co

-o
- ....
Ill
-
....
-
';-
co'-
L

..0
E

iii
lCD
c
-
c

....
....
-
';;;
-o
c
0

0
Cl
c

Ill

';
..0
0.
0
(.!)
01
....
0 0
- - 0.
0.
.J:..S::.
QQ
:::1-
o ...
L
.S::."''
c
0
Rr
dl
r .

Main
structure
Other
structure
(
I
Main
'
I
structure

Other
structure
Stiffening member Located
perpendicular to plate.
r
when C>3,any following
treatment con token.
I)
2)
3) r = c=
1
1
.
,
Sttffentng member located
obliquely to plate .
(without edge preparation)
C I > C2
I

CS:3
BS:3
CIS:3
1402
SHIPBUILDII\JG
QUALITY STANDARDS
UNIT:m111
Remarks
Where beads ore parallel.
Gop between members Is to
be less than 3mm.
I . HULL STRUCTURE
Otvlslon
Section
,..
0
0
(..
:I
0
0
<
til
c
..
...
Sub-section
Alignment of ftllet
] oInt
o:Otff'erence
t:Thlckness

Otfferences
beTween the beam
and the frame
Gop before
welding
F2016 - 00 (2012)
SHIPBUILDING
OUALITY STANDARDS
Alignment and Finishing
Item
Others
oamknee

rome
a:Dtfference
F llle t weld
it

Standard olerance
Range Ltatts

1403
UNlT:IIIII
o) l/2ta
re-fitting
a>ll2te re-fiTting
The figure Indicates the
tolerance that the members
can be welded by pulling
without taking aport.
(D 3<oS:5
Increased leg length
Rule leg +(o-2}
(21 5<aS:I6
Welding with bevel
preparation or Liner
treatment
Weldtnp with bevel pre-
poroT I on
To make bevel edge of
web to 30-45 .attach
the backing material,
and after weldlng,re-
mave IT.
Then weld the opposite
side. Ltner treatment
Liner treatment

liner treaTmenT or
portlol l"enew
fhMin
c::::!!:J;oo
Partial

cO F2016- 00 (2012)
I . HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Dtvlslon
Sect ton Sub-sect ton
...
u
0
l.
:I
u
0
<
Q
c
...
-

l.o

. .,

o.
olr
Cl
Fabrication
Ite111
Butt weld
welding)
a: Gap
Butt weld
(autoMatic welding)
!.Two side sub111erged ore
welding
2.Monuol or CCb submerged ore
welding
3.0ne side subMerged ore welding
with flux copper backing or
flux bocl'lt ng
4.0ne stde submerged ore welding
with fiber backing
Standard olerance
Range L1111tts

OS:aS:3.5 oS:5

1404
UNIT:m111
Re111orks
(j)5<aS:I6
After weldtng,remove back-
Ing 111oterlal, chip and
finish weld.
/Backing material
16<o<25
Welding up with edge
preparation or parttol
renew.
a>25
Partial renew.
Min 300
d---b
Where predicted to burn
through, weld seoltng bead.
Where a Is over 5mm,
see manual welding.
through, weld sealing bead.
through, od)usT by
scattering of metal powder
or weld sealing bead.
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
OUALllY STAN)ARDS
Dtvtston At tgn111ent and Finishing l.llllT:IIIIII
Sect ton Sub-section
Scope of staging sockets and Standard olerance
Re11orks
l If t I ng (Ug8 t 0 be r&IIIOV!td Range L I Ill ItS
In tonk Not to be removed.
.
Lifting lugs sublected to
fatigue to be removed.
(D Ports ruining appearance
Ill
and passage to be r e ~ n o v e
...
Ports or and
flush to bose plate.

1 n engine ruining appearance
.X
room Interfering with clear passage.
Others to be re111oved by
()
0
gos cutting at tl-.e bond
Ill
zone.
a
In hold Under stcht of hold and hatch
;;:
0
coomlng.
jt' along
0
(n
his line
exposed
To be re11oved.
ports of
shell upp
DK etc ..
In tonk Not to be removed except
disturbance of passage.
Ill
In engine Port of ruining appearance and
~
room passages.
a
~
In hold To be removed except bock of
:::.
deck.
-
_J
exposed
To be reftloved.
ports of
shell upp
DK etc ..
1405
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPeUILDIIG
OUAI..ITY ST NOAROS
Olv\ston Fobr1c::otlor\ li'41Tallllll
Section Sub-section I tell
Stondord oleronce
Reeorka
Ltatta
one veldtna
lvlth bocktng aot'l
c=l c=J

--+--
6.Electro aos weldtno
c=l c=J

,.,
--+-- ...
0
Gop before
I.
7.SIIIpllfled elec::tr1c
;:) Welding
goa wetdlng
...
...
<II(
c=l c=J
2SoS8 oSlO
0
c
--+--
-...
...
.;,:
Lop weld
(J) 3<oS5

oS2 GS3

Re-ft tt tna
1\.llgnaent or bun Strength ll.lellber
15t
o>O.I5t or a>3
)oint
(IIICUC 3)
Reft n tng
EE:TI c=J
....,-;-- Others

a>0.2t or o>3
!<JMllllollpnftlent (IIIOIC J)
Reft tt tng
t:Thtcknellls(thtnner pl
Port good Out1111de surface of
oppearonce shell plates,
!
deck,
c super- See Annex A3 fer
lit.
stl"ucture
Grind flush surfaces that n o IS
u..c
tobepalrad
ou
I. 0
QO
:II
...
Ports not requiring Inside of tonk
CIL
c 0
good appearance Inside of celltng
-L
c 0
Deck to be shield
Grtnd only oo.
with deck co- Sea AnneiK A3 for
e E
.....
postnon etc.
conspicuous
surface& that are
u- parllil
to be painted
...
ftnlshtng
0
Scar (J) d<0.07t IMaM 3)
IO<e
GrlncHng or welding

....
Depth welding
o..,
0. (d)
......
Length
L..

(a)
eS:IO
1406
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . HULL
STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Division Deforaotton UNIT:IIIIIII
Sect ton Sub-section 114111111
!5tondo1"d olel"once
Reaorks
Ronlite llml ta
Pol"allel parT
6
side
4
Parallel port
4 6 Shell plate
botto111
Fore and oft
5 7
port
Double bottom
4 6
tonk top plate
longl Bulkhead
Bulkhead Trans Bulkhead 6 8
Swash Bulkhead
Parallel port
(Between 0.6lel
4 6
Strength deck Fol"e and af't POI"t 6 9
0
Ill

E
Covered pol"t 7 9 0
1..
<..
c
Exposed port II>
cD
6 8
)I
Second deck
';
..0
Covered port 7 9
(!I
';;

Exposed port 4 6
'-
Fore-castle deck
0
Poop deck
Ill
Covered port 7 9
fill
Ill
c
';;
Exposed por1 4 6

I.L.
Super Structure
deck
Covered port 7 9
Cross deck 5 7
Outside butkhead 4 b
House bulkhead lnstde bulkhead 4 b
Covered por1 7 9
Interior me111ber Web of gtrder,trons 5 7
Floor ond girder
6 8
of double boltom
1407
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
OUALITY STANDARDS
Division
Al lgnment and Ftntsl-tlng UNIT:mnt
Sect ton Sub-section l1e111
Standard oleronc:e
Rearks
Ronge Ltntlts
Strength member In

Open the hole to over
skin plote 75thun
01"@
Open the hole 10 over
2000111m
0<200
Ott-tel's In cose . open the hole to
over 2000Mm
.$
or
IJ)
;
l)
Strength 111ember In Metl-tod of treatment
skin plote

@:Spigot potel-t
:J
.J:.
)..
"9, :
o=Jo-..40"
I.
Others
0 G=4"-6%
I.
C)
t,= l/2t"-1
0
(l e50%
e
Ill
..
Se,...rotlon.Scollop
..... by butt welding .
0
Slot.
or<O
Close with lopping piece
c
!Closing plote to be some

thickness of bose plote)
e @Where I t Is difficult from
...
structuol point of view to
0
.,
open The hole over 200mm,
I.
pre-heot ond use o low
1-
hydrogen electl"ode.
InspecT by l"odtog,...ophtc
Ol" ultrasonic Inspection.
1408
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Division DeforMation l.N'llT:111111
SecTion Sub-section lte
Standard oleronce
Remarks
Range L 1111 ts
Parallel port

t2e/IOOO :t3e/IOOO
Shell plate
Fore and aft
port t3e/IOOO t4e/IOOO

e
0
Deck and top plate (-)
1..
of double bottom t3e/IOOO t4e/IOOO
.....
.....
0
Bulkhead
c :t4e/IOOO :t5e/IOOO
0
-.
'0 Accommodation
Deck
-
:t3e/IOOO :t4e/IOOO
>

0
Outside bulkhead
:t2e/1000 :t3e/IOOO
Others
:t5e/IOOO :t6e/IOOO
Distortion of deep Length of span
girder and transverse
f
-

-}j
lot the port or 5 8
upper edge and
<
"
fl on get)
Dtstortton of
longitudinal and
5 8
fS

transverse fro111e,
bean and stiffener
'
lot the port of
IOOO<e
e
fl onge).
3 + 2e/ 6 + 2e/

1000 1000
(aox 10) (IIOX 13)
Ill
Dtstortton of
i]
:>
H pillar between
0
decks.
Ill
4 6
c
0
_,
"$
u
VI
Olstortton of fore
- Dlstortlan of
::: and aft direction.
cross TIe.
eo (cross Tie only)
6 10

DistorTion of fore
and aft direction.
12 16
eo (cross t le +
trans web) eo
Distortion of trip- Otstortlon at the

ping bkt and s11oll port of free edge.
stiffener with web
lo
plate.
Distortion of foc:e

plots
a=2 + a=5 +
b/100 b/100
1409
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Division
Miscellaneous UNIT: !IIIII
Sect ton Sub-section Ite111
Standard lolel"'once
Relllol"'ks
Range L I 11111s
14
0
G
c c
Sub osse111bly and Po tnt after
... 0
L_ assembly welded hull block Not defined Shop pi"'II!Uir con
a ...
)oint Inspection be opplted.
;:u

~ i
c
-
c: c
~ ~
Point after" Butts of .....
....
"0
tightness Skin PLTS
.. :J test.Butts 01"'8 coated
-o!:. of Skin PLTS after ftnol
~ f l l
are coated construction
.. c
ll 0 wash primer Inspection
I. I) before final and before
0 (.. construction Leak test.
'-o
Erection welded
Inspection.
~ )Oint
Po tnt before
.:Ill tightness
....
test.when
c ..
tanks given
0
special pro-
0..
teettve coot
lng ore hyd-
routtcollr
tested
..X
(..
0
:::E Co111pored to the
::.
template
1:1.0 :t2.0
0
I.
0
.X
1..
0
:::E
"0
Compared to the
!..
template :t0.5 0.5
0
0
.t:l
Cll
0
L
u..
1410
<0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I
HULL STRUCTURE
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Division Miscellaneous UNIT:111111
Section Sub-section I1em
Standard olerance
Remarks
Range Limits
Length t5 t 10
Principal dimensions Breadth t5 t 10
of hatch COOIIIIng
01
c
Difference of t 10 15
e
diagonal length
0
0
u
..c
0
..
End coamlng
0
J:
3 5
Deforrnotlon of Stde coa1111ng 5 :t8
horizontal stiffener
Defol"motton per
:1:2 t3
one Meter (l"ondoM)
Breadth and
:1:4 7
Hetght
Opening of St ll hetght 0-15 -lo-+30
steel walL
Deformation 2 3
e (pel" lm)
0
c
0
L
...
c Breadth :t2 3
"'
'-
0
Opening of deck
CJil
I through type}
c
-
c
3 3 ID Length
Q
0
Breadth -3-+2 -5-+3
Opening of deck
(not through type)
length -3-+2 -5-+3
1411
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
A2. OUTFITTING
1412
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I PIPING
Division A. PIPE FABRICATION
SHIPBUILDING
Section I. STRAIGHT PIPE
OUALITY STANDARDS
NoMinal Standard Tolerance
Sub- secT I on lte111 F I gurtl Dta111eter Range
(mill) (111111) lmm)
Indicated length l
of ptpe on drawing
r---ld----1 Not
Length tolerenee d :tb
Defined
Sect ton 2. BENT PIPE
o. Indicated lengths l 6.

Single of ptpe on drawing l,
direction
bend\ng Length 1ol!!!rence d
' ,-
:t6 Not
Defined
I
Length tolerance d,

:1:5 Not
Defined
Design bending o
angle
Bend tolerance or
:1: ,.
Not
Defined
b. Indicated lengths l l,
;;.?
Two of pipe on drawing .La
direction
bending Length tolerence d :tb Not
Defined
Length tolerence d, :t5 Not
Defined
Length tolerance da
:t6 Not
Defined
Design bending a
angles o,
l+d
Bend tolerance
a,
_L :t:2" Not
-Jl,+d,
Defined
-
c. Indicated lengths l , lo
;L)'
Three of pipe on drawing
L,
dt,..ect ton

bending Length tolerence d :1:5 Not
Defined
Length tolerence do
11lo+d, r-
:t5 Not
Defined
Length tolerence d, :t5 Not
_j_) Defined
Design bending
o.
.. L
angles
ao
Bend tolerance
a, :tl" Not
-r
Defined
Section 3. Branch pipe
Indicated lengths l , l I
of pipe on drawing , la
Length tolerence d

:t5 Not
.
Defined
LengTh tolerance d,
a +or
la+da
:1:5 Not
f
Defined
Length tolerance d,
I
:t5 Not
Defined
Design angle a"

Angle tolerance
a, :tl" Not
I
t.+ d, Defined
FIG. A2.1 Piping
1413
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. PIPING
SHIPBUILDING
Section 4. PENETRATION PIECE
OUAL ITY STANDARD
Nominal Standard Tolerance
Sub-section lte111 Figure Dto111eter Range L 11111 ts Remarks
( Rlln) (mil) (mm)
Indicated lengths
l. l'
, .. of pipe on drawing
o +a, center
Length tolerenc:e d
y r
:t4 Not
Defined
Length tolerenc:e d, Not
....
Deft ned
Design penetration o
angle
Angle tolwrance
a,
Not
Defined
Section 5. FLANGES
a. DisplaceMent of d

Angle of flange face
flange
TO pipe Angle deviation o < 150 I"
from normal 150 d S: I 5"
b. Distortion d
-=L
<200 <I .0
Dtstorl\on of dimension 200-450 .0 <2.0
flange face >500 S:l.5 <2.5
c. Distance d
it
Distance between
between filleT and
f tll et and butt welding
butt welding bead
beod
d. Pipe setback from d

1+ 1.5 Not
Attachment of face of rtange Defined
flange to
pipe Toe of weld d,
setback fro111 face
of flange
e. Length of thread d

0-3
Thread protrusion

threads
extension
post nut
f. Distance between l _..,lr- )T
DisTance flange and bend

beTween pipe
and bending Thickness of t
area flange
Bend radius r :<!2d
Pipe diameter d
g. of flange 0
DlJ!1_i
oS:3
Al1gn111ent of offset c-bS:3
flanges
Maxlmun distance c
between flange
tc:gpi
faces
Mtnlmun dtstonce b
between fl onge
I
faces
!
FIG. A2.2 Piping
1414
F2016 - 00 (2012}
I. PIPING
SHIPBUILDING
Section 6. CIJI.PL INGS
QUALITY STANDARDS
No111tnol Stondor-d Toler-once
Sub-section Ite111 Ftgur-e Diameter Range L lilt t t s Remarks
(mil) (mm) (111111)
0. Length of coupl tng L
.........
t
Coupl lng

t::-
I sleeve) Leng1h of pipe l. not l, 0
Inside coupling

defined vory
L,
occordlng
Dtstonce beween la to ptpe
ptpes Inside
.!4dJL
diameter
couplng
Pipe thickness 1
:
Distance between d 1-3 not
Inside of coupling deft ned
I
ond outside of
pipe
b. Distance between d

S:2.0
Couplt ng Inside of coupling
misalignment ond ouTside of
T -
pipe
Angle 1111aollgnment o
d
<5" 0
c. Dtstonce between d S:0.2
CouplIng Inside of coupling
l_:jtt- l bell socket ond outside of
pipe

Dtstonce pipe l d!:5t
Inserted tn sockeT
Pipe thickness T
d. Dtstonc:e between d --; r--d :t!O not
Dresser pipe ends
(f(g
deft ned
coupling
dtstonce
between
ptpe ends

e. Amount of d

3 :t5
Dresser mtsaltgn111ent
couplIng

otpe
mlsotgnment
d
Division B. PIPE BENDING
Section I. ELLIPTICITY lout of r-oundness)
Tolerance Limits (unl t: %)
Sub-section Item Ftgure
Bending Cold Hot
Radius Bending Bending
Remarks
a. Elltpttctty'" RS:2A - 10 Tolerance
Steel and
(%)

llmllsof
non-fer-rous 0 2A<RS:3A 10 8 cold
pipe bending
Outside dta. of D 3A<RS:4A 10 8 Includes
pipe before that of
manufacturing 4A<R 10 5 htgh
frequency
Mo)or- dto. of bent D, Induction
PIPe
L'
heating
bending
Minor dto. of bent 02
pipe Standard

range not
Nominal dlo. A deft ned
Bendtng radius R
FIG. A2.3 Piping
1415
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . PIPING
Dtvlslon B. PIPE BEII()ING
SHIPBUILDING
Section I. ELLIPTICITY (out of roundness)
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance LIMits ( unl t: %)
Sub-section Item Figure
Bending Cold Hot
Radius Bending Bending
Remarks
--- - ----------- ----------
b. Ellipticity:

Rs;2A 15 Tolerance
At-brass
(%) l 11111 t s of
CuNI pipe
2A<Rs;3A 10 cold
Outside dto. of D
bending
3A<Rs;4A 10 lncludes
pipe before
that of
111anufacturlng
4A<R 6 high
Mal or dla. of bent D,
L'
frequency
pipe Induction
Minor dla. of bent 0. o.Q

pipe

No111tnal dta. A jSondo'd
ronge not
Bending radius R defined
Section 2. REDUCTION IN WALL THICKNESS
a. Reduction In wall Rs;2A - 20 Tolerance
Steel pipe thickness

ltmltsof
(t-t,)XIOO (X)
2A<Rs;3A 25 10 cold
t bending
3A<Rs;4A 20 5 Includes
Original wall 1
that of
Thickness 4A<R 15 5 high
frequency
Wall thickness l I
f$
Induction
after bending
heat! ng
bending
Nominal dta. A
Standard
Bending radius R
range not
l I
defined
b.
Rs;2A - 20 Tolerance
Copper pipe
ll m 1 ts of
2A<Rs;3A 30 15 cold
bending
3A<Rs;4A 25 10 Includes
that of
4A<R 20 10 high
frequency
Induction
heat 1 ng
bending
Standard
range not
defined
c.
Rs;2A 25 Tolerance
At-brass
ltmltsof
CuNI pipe
2A<RS:3A 25 cold
bending
3A<Rs;4A 20 Includes
that of
4A<R 15 high
frequency
Induct l on
heatIng
bending
Standard
range not
defined
Section
3. SWELL WRINKLE DISTORTION
a.
Amount of swell h

I
h or ho
l
IT ol erance
AI t pipe
distortion
s: m-oA
l1m1 ts
moterlals
jnot
Amount of wrinkle h,
'def 1 ned
distortion
I I I
No1111nat
'
dta. A
"' I
FIG. A2.4 Piping
1416
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . PIPING
Dtvtston c. PIPE HANGERS
SHIPBUILDING
Sec 1 ton I. U-BOLT
OUALITY STANDARDS
Standard Tolerance
Remarks
Sub-section Item Ftgure
Range llalts
uniT: 111111
a. Diameter of u-bolt d
_L
Height

difference Difference between a not defined
between ends bolt ends
of U-bolt
b. Dtfferance between 0 not defined
Pttch of required and

U-bol T actual location
j__ '
rc::===--
c. Clearance between 0 not defined Appl tad to
Clearance top of pipe
!de
necessary
between pipe hanger port only
U-bolt or
flat steel Clearance between b
r- +
bond bottom of pipe
hanger
Clearance between c
side of pipe Co
b
hanger
d. length of thread 0
L!l:
0-!5 not defined
Thread protuslon beyond threads
extension nut
fro111 nut for
U-bolt or Diameter of bolt
flat steel
! -li-d bond
Sec lion 2. FLAT STEEL BAND
o. Required heighT h
ffi
Hanger of hanger
height
Dimensional d -2 -o not defined
variaTion
I
b. Required pitch l
J1t
PItch of bolt between bolt holes
holes
Dimensional d i:2 not defined
variation
I I
r--l +d--,
Section 3. DISTANCE BETWEEN PIPE HANGERS
Pipe Moxlmun Pipe Moxlmun
nominal hanger nominal hangar
spacing diameter spacing
10 I .4 m 125 4.5 Ill
15 I .6 m 150 5.0 Ill
20 I .8 m 200 5.0 m
25 2. I m 250 5.5 m
32 2.4 Ill 300 6.0 m
40 2.6 m 350 6.0 m
50 2.8 m 400 6.0 m
65 3.2 m 500 7.0 m
80 3.5 m 600 7.0 m
100 4.0 Ill 700 7.0"'
FIG. A2.5 Piping
1417
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. PIPING
Division E. REACH RODS
SHIPBUILDING
Section I. MANUFACTURING OF REACH ROD
DUALITY STANDARDS
Standard Tolerance
Re111arks
Sub-secTion Item Figure
Range L lmlts
unit: 111111
a. Diameter of reach 0

not defined
Clearance rod 0.5:S:os;l .5
between reach
rod and Clearance between a not deft ned
bearing reach rod t bearing 0.5:!0aS::2.0
b. Deflection of rod 0
r- 5 Ill ---j
S::IO not defined
Straightness (per 5 111 length)
of spindle
' -
(per 5 ml
'
0
c. Clearance between c
0
0.2s;os;J.O not def I
Clearance reach rod and
+J-a-=+
beTween reach )oint piece
rod and )oint
piece
Section 2. FITTING OF REACH ROD
a. Spindle end a

S::IO not defined
Spindle end spacing
spacing
free end Free end spactng b 5:!0bS::8 not defined
spacing of of Toper pin
b ..........
toper pin
b. Deflection of rod 0
il
S::IO not defined
Straightness (per 5 m length)
of reach rod
(per 5 m)
c. Mtsol lgnment a
-1J-a
:!010 not defined
Mt sol I gnment distance
between valve
spindle and
T
reach l"od
d. Angle deviation a"
j_
:s;l" not defined
Ft T 11 ng angle from vertical
of deck stand
e. Angle deviation a
c=f"
!,;I" not defined
Devlatlon of from normal
reach rod
fl"om perpen-
dtculor To
bearing
FIG. A2.6 Piping
1418
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . PIPING
Division F. BELL MOUTHS
SHIPBUILDING
Sect ton I. A-TYPE BELLMOUTH
OUALITY STANDARDS
NoMinal Standard Tolerance
Sub-section Item Figure Dta111eter Ronge Lt111lts Remarks
(lftlll) (IIHII) (mm)
Hetght of l

80 l = 15
bell111outh above 100 t:20
bottom of tonk 125 l=20
150 Lx25
I
Height tolerances d 200 l=35
&1
I
'
SecTion 2. B-TYPE BELLMOUTH
Height of l

250 l=50
bellmouth above 300 t=50
bottom of tonk 350 l=80
400 t=80
Height toleronces d 450 l"'IOO
&1
500 t=IOO
550 l=120
'
Section 3. C-TYPE BELLMOUTH
Height of l
\ ~
bell111outh above
bottom of tonk 40 l"'l5
50 l=15
65 l .. 20
80 l=25
100 l=35
125 l=40
150 1"'45
200 l65
FIG. A2.7 Piping
1419
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Division
Section
Sub-section
I.
Dimension of
hatch cover
2.
Deflection of
side end and
top plate
3.
Dimension of
wheel ofter
Installing
I-A WATER TIGHT STEEL HATCH COVER
I. HATCH COVER !SINGLE PU..L TYPE)
Item
Length (I hatch)
Length {I panel)
6'CD
6.2
Figure
Height of hatch

cover
Dt fference between IL,-L,I
diagonals (I hatch (j) \
1
Breath
Dt fference between IGL.I l +6, -, '?
dIagonals (I panel) _,
Deflection of side 6
6
plate In the
vertical direction
Deflect I on of end 67
plot e In the
vertical dlrectlon

6
8
direction
Bend of end plate 6
In the transverse 9
dtrec'tlon
Deformation of top 6tD
plate
Flatness of
undersurface of
hatch cover
(I panel)
Dimension of
balancing wheel
after- Installing
Height of
balancing wheel
Dimension of wheel 613
after InstalLing
Height of wheel
Pttch of Installed
wheel
l+6,.
FIG. A2.8 Hull Outfitting
1420
Standard
Range
{mml
t5
:t3
t3
:t3
:t3
:t3
:t3
:t3
:t2
:t2
:t2
:t2
I
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
L lml ts
{mill)
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
:t3
:t3
:t3
:t3
t4
Remarks
!<D and Q) I nd I COle
acceptable tolerances
for various support
conditions shown
below:
<D: condition where
each covel" Is
ranged without
closely tightening
0
condlt ton where
each cover Is ranged
and t lghtened
l= designed dimension
L,= actual dimension
tndtcotes clearance
between under-
surface of cover
and surface table
hen putTing on
the surface table
I. HULL
Division
Section
Sub-section
4.
Intermediate
hinge and
water , l gh 1-
ness
5.
Installing
position of
snag for qutcl<
octlng cleat
6.
Clearance
between hatch
cover ond
hatch coomlng
Section
I.
Otmenslon or
hatch coomlng
<0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
OUTFITTING
I. HATCH COVER (SINGLE PULL TYPE)
Item Ftgure
Height from base

l I ne 1 o pockIng
17
gutter
Breath of pocking

line ...
gutter l +6,. '?
Oevtotton belween

compression bor one
pocking
Compressed depth

t=fr-
of pocking
Deviation between .. 01
top plates
'()
+
Deviation between

stde plates r-:- I
A A
Clearance between

-I-t +6a
hatch covers

II
'()
Longitudinal

L$
deviation
Vertical deviation
625
Touchptece type

Directly of touched

.0
type

Rest pod type

Note
Every touchplece of A or C type to be tn
touch with end ond side girder of hatch
cover or rest arm of hatch cover.
For type B. end and side girder or hatch
cover to be In touch with the coamlng
top plate at least one position In any 3
meters.
2. HATCH COVER (SINGLE PULL TYPE)
Breadth
Difference
dtogonols
l +6,
1421
Standard
Range
(ma)
:tl
I
t I
:t5
t3
S2
S2
:t3
:t4
4
S:l
S:3
Sl
5

I
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
Ltmtts
(am)
:t2
:t2
:t2
:t!
2
..
S:4
S:4
-5-+10
6
:t6
S:2
S:5
S2
:tiO
10
Sl5
I
l
Remarks
t=thlckness of
compression bar
Compressed depth
of pocking
surrounding hatch
cover to be In
accordance wiTh
this 1 t em.
not deft ned
Refer to note
to be In
accordance with
hull spectflcollon.
l=deslgned dimension
L,=acluol dimension
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL OUTFITTING
Division I-A WATER TIGHT STEEL HATCH COVER
Section 2. HATCH COAMINGS ( SIJIG..E PULL TYPE)
Standard
Sub-s&ct I on
2.
Deflect ton of
horizontal
stiffener
Item
End coamlng
Side coomlng
Deflection In
one meter (at end
Figura
...
( Ins t a l l I ng
position of
coMpression bor) and side coamtng
A? A
3.
Installing
dimension
of compression
bor
4.
Installing
dimension of
guide roll and
romp
SecT I on
I,
D1 mens I on of
hatch cover
2.
Deflect 1 on of
side, end and
top plate
Installing position o
6
Longitudinal
deviation
Transverse deviation o
8
Deviation from 6
9
center line of
cover pocking
Installing position 6IO
of gutde f'oll
Installing posltton
of r-omp 61 I
Devlollon of romp
from vertical line 612
T?: ..
/ ..
Cf:.6.
3. HATCH COAMINGS I SIDE ROLLING TYPE)
length
6
'<D
Breadth (I hatch)
62 <D
Breadth (I panel)
63
Height of cover
o . e
Difference be 'tween
IL,-?!J
dtogonols (I panel)
Difference between IG-L.I
diagonals (I panel)
0
plate In the
vertical direction
Deflection of end 67
plate In the
vertical dlrectlon
Bend of side plah 0s
In the transverse
direction
Bend of end plate 69
In the transverse
direction
Deformat ton of top 610
plate
Flatness of lower
surface of hatch
cover (I panel)
..3
i
-'
r
!- 6.
'f
6ot

\.6

..
1422
Range
(aM)
:t3
:t5
:t2
:t3
:t3
S:3
S:5
t3
:t3
:t3
:t5
:t5
:t4
:t3
S:5

t3
t3
t3
3
4

j
SHIPSUILOING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
Limits
(mill)
:t5
t8
:t3
t5
:t8
t5
:t!
2
:t3
:t3
:t3
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
No1
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Deflned
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Not
Defined
Remarks
to be In
accordance with
hull specification.
t= thickness of
compression bar
j<D and (3 lndl cote
for various support
conditions shown
below:
<D
condition where
each cover Is
r-anged without
closelr tightening
0
condition where
eoch cover Is ranged
and tightened
l= designed
L,= actual dimension
.
tndtcotes clearance
between under surface
of notch cover and
sufoce table. when
putt lng on the
surface table.
:
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvtston
SECTION
Sub-section
3.
Installing
dtmens\on of
wheel
4.
Intermediate
hinge and
wa1ertlgh1

3. HATCH COVER !SIDE ROLLING TYPE)
l1em
Span (between 0
11
C<IH\ter lines)
lnslalllng height
6!2
Installing p 1 tch 6t3
H lght from
lne to lng
gutter
Breath of pocking
6,@
gutter
Dev 1 at I on bet ween 16,,01
compression bar and
pocking
Compressed depth
of parking
Deviation between
1op plates
Devtotlon be1ween 6"
end plo1es
d b
t =6.. 1 =6 ..

JI-L + 6
1
SECT A-A
5. longitudinal
Installing devlollon
posltton of
snag for Quick Vertical deviation 623
octtng cleat
6.
Cl eoronce
between hotch
cover ond
hotch coomlng
SECTION
I.
Dimension of
hatch coamlng
Touch piece type

Dtrectlr
type
touched
625
Rest pod lype
6:26
Note
Evevr touchptece of A or C trpe to be tn
touch wtth end and side girder of hatch
cover or rest arm of hotch cover.
For type B. end and side girder of
cover to be In louch with the coamlng ..
top plate at leasT one postsltlon In ony
3 meters.
4. HATCH COAMING (SIDE ROLLING TYPE)
Otfferance be1ween IL.-Ltl
diagonals
1423
Standard
Range
(111111)

:t2
2
I
:tl
:tl
S5

2
:t3
:1:3
:1:4
:t4
:0::1

S:l
t5
t5
S:IO
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
limits
1111111)
:t3
:t3
:t3
2
2
:t2
1
:t2
..
S4

-5-+10
-
:t6

S:2
S:5
S:2
t I 0
t 10
Sl5
Remarks
t=thlckness of
compression bar
Compressed depth
of pocking,
surrounding hatch
cover io be In
accordance "'t ih
thIs It em.
..
noi defined
Refer to no1e
to be In
accordance wtth
hull specification.
l;deslgned dimension
L,=octuol dtmenston
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvtston I-A WATER TIGHT STEEL HATCH COVER
Section 4. HATCH COAMINGS I SIDE ROLLING TYPE)
Sub-section
2.
Deflec11on of
horlzontol
Item
End coomlng
stiffener Stde coomlng
lot lnstolllng
posiTion of
co11presston bor) Deflection In onr
one meter (at end
3.
Installing
dtmenslon
of compression
bar
4.
Installing
dlaenslon of
roll
5.
Position of
opening hole
of 'ock
ond stde coomlng
Installing
Longitudinal and 67
transverse deviation
Devlolton from 6,s
centel" line of
cover pocking
Installing position 6:J
of I"OI l
Level of roll top 610
Deviation between
wheel center and
loch center
Deviation between
roll and flop
Ftgure
1 (from t) 6.
Stondord
Range
( lllld
13
15
t2
:!3
t3
5
t3
:1:3
13
I
Section 5. HATCH COVER !PONTOON TYPE FOR CONTAINER SHIP)
I.
Dtmenston of
hatch cover
2.
Deflection of
stde, end and
top plate
Length
Breadth
Height of covel"
Dlffel"ence between
diagonals
Deflection of side
plate In the
direction of up and
down
Deflection of end
plate In the
direction of
up and down
o,

IL,-L21
Bend of side plate
In the direction
transverse
Bend of end plate C7
In the direction of
transverse
Defol"moT ton of top Os
plate
Flatness of under
surface of cover
1424
"15
:1:5
3
S:5
3
3
3
13
4
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Toleronce
Limits
(111m)
5
:t8
:t3
:t5
:1:5
t
:1:2
:t5
5
:t5
2
Remarks
1 o be 1 n
accordance with
hull spectftcotton.
l = Design dimension
l=thtckness of
compression bar
<DondQ) Indicate
for various support
conditions shown
follows:
(1) : condt t I on
putting together,
nonttght:
0 : closed cond I t I on
l= Design dimension
L,= actual dlmenslor
to be measured br
condition 2 ot
container mount on
cover or pedestal.
" not defined
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvlston I-A WATER TIGHT STEEL HATCH COVER
SecTion 5. HATCH COVER !PONTOON TYPE FOR CONTAINER SHIP)
Sub-section
3.
Water
tightness
. 4.
Cleoronce
between notch
cover ond
hatch coomlng
SecTion
I.
01111enslon of
hatch cover
2.
Deflection of
horizontal
stlffner
(ot lnstolllns;
position of
compression
bor)
3.
Installing
dimension of
compression
bar
Item Ftgure
Height fro111 bose

line to pocking
6,c
gutter
Breath of pocking
6,,
gutter
Touch piece type
612
Directly touched
0
13
type
Rest pod type
614
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE C
Note
Evevy touchplece of A type to be In
touch wtth end and side gtrder of hatch
cover or rest orm of hatch cover.
For type B. end and side girder of hatch
cover to be In touch with the coo111tng
top plate at least one poslsltlon In any
3 meters.
Standard
Range
(mill)
tl
tl
tl

6. HATCH COAMING !PONTOON TYPE FOR CONTAINER SHIPl
Difference
diagonals
End coomlng
Stde coomlng
Deflection In onr
one meter (ot end
ond s\de coomtng)
Installing position 6e,
Longitudinal and 67
transverse deviation
Deviation from
center I lne of
cover pocking
l +6,
1425
:t5
:t5

:t3
:t5
:t2
3
:t3
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
L 11111 ts
{mm)
t2
:t2
:t:2

10
:t:IO
Sl5
:t5
t8
:t3
I
I
Remarks
Refer to note
.
10 be tn
accordance w l th
hull speclftcotton.
t=thlckness of
compression bar
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvlslon
Section
Sub-section
I.
Dimension of
hatch cover
2.
Def l ec t \on of
side end and
top plate
3.
Installing
dimension of
wheel
4.
Intermediate
hinge ond
waTer ThtghT-
ness
I. HATCH COVER !FOLDING TYPE)
I tell!
Length (I hatch)
Length (I panel)
Breath
Height of hatch
cover
01 fference between L
1
-lt
diagonals (I hatch) m
01 fference between IL,-L,
diagonals ii panel)
plate t n the
vertical direction
Deflection of end 66
plata tn the
vertical direction
Bend of stde plate 67
In the transverse
direction
Bend of end plate 6
8
In the direction
of transverse
Deformation of top 6
9
plate
Flatness or tranverse
under surface of
hatch cover
(I panel)
Span (between
center lines)
Installing height
Installing pitch
Height from bose
l I ne to pockIng
gutter
Breath of pocking
gutter
Deviation between
compression bor
and pocking
Compressed depth
of pocking
Deviation between
top plates
Deviation between
side plates
.
Ito .
Figure

I I I
Clearance between
hatch covers
-J.
-'-t +6
20
SECT A-A
1426
Standard
Range
lmtn)
:t3
3
:t3
:t3
t4
2
t2
t2
tl
:tl
tl
:t5
:t2
S2
:t3
SHIPBUILDING
OUALlTY STANDARDS
Tolerance
ltmlts Remarks
(mm)
Not I<D and 0 Indicate
Deftned acceptable tolerances
for various support
conditions shown
below:
:t3
:t4
:t2
:t2
:t2
'
:t-
2
<l): condItIon where
each cover Is
ranged lthout
closely tightening
0 condItIon where
eacn cover 1s
and tightened
L,= ac 1 uo l d I mens 1 on
Indicates clearance
between under-
surface of cover
and surface table
when putting on
the surface table
t=th1ckness of
compression bor
Compressed depth
of pocking
surrounding hatch
cover to be In
accordance wiTh
this Item.
not defined
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvtston
SecTion
Sub-section
l t ng
position of
snag for quick
acting cleat
6.
Ct ear once
between hatch
cover and
hotch coomlng
7.
Installing
dimension of
Intermediate
and main
hinge
8.
InstalLing
dimension of
ln,ermedlote
and main
hinge
Section
I.
Dimension of
hotch coomlng
I . HATCH COVER I FOLDING TYPE)
Item Figure
Langttudlnot 0
21
'('
deviation
Verllcal devl otl on 6
22
022
Touchplece type
623
13

DtrecilY of louched 0
24
JF*
type
li.
025
I()
Rest pad type

II

touchplece of o A or C type to be In
touch wiTh end end and side girder of notch
cover or rest arm of hatch cover.
For type B. end and side girder of hatch
cover to be In touch with the coomlng
top plate ot least one poslsltlon tn any
3 Meters.
Devtotlon between 626
rnoln hinge and
baseLine of hatch
cover (longlludlnal
ond vertical
direction)
Deviation be1ween 627
motn hinge and
basel lne of hatch
cover (longitudinal
and vertical
direction)
Devlat I on between 628
eye plate for moln
cylinder and bose
line of ho1ch cover
2. HATCH COVER (FOLDING TYPE)
Length
"'Breadth
Difference
dlogonols
1427
Standard
Range
(mm)
:1:4
4

S:l
2
2
5
5
!>10
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
limits

6
:t6
S:2
s;5
5:2
3
:t3
3
10
:tiD
S:l5
I
Remarks
Refer To note
to be In
accordance wllh
hull speclflco11on.
l=destgned dimension
L,=octuol dimension
c4IDtf F2016 - 00 (2012)
I . HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvtslon I-A WATER TIGHT STEEL HATCH COVER
SHIPBUILDII'G
Section 2. HATCH COAMINGS tFOLDII'G TYPE)
OUAL IT Y STANDARDS
Standard Tolerance
Sub-section Itelll Figure Range L IIIII ts Remarks
(111111) I 11un l
2. End coarnlng
63
:t3 t5
.
to be In
Deflection of
accordance with
hor I zont ol Stde coomlng
64

:t5 :t8 hull spectf'lcotlon.
stiffener
(Installing
Deflection In ony
65
:t2 :t3
post t I on of
one meter (at end
.. /0
compre.s s I on bar)
ond side coomlng
fM.
3. Installing poaltlon
66
t3 t5 , ..
thickness of'
Instollt ng
Longitudinal
67
3 :t8
compression bor
dimension
devtoi\on
of compression
bar
Transverse deviation
6a
3 :t5
Deviation from
69
t5

center line of
2
cover pocking
r:t
4. Installing position
o,o
:t3 t5
Installing of roll
dimension of
Devtotton of ro111p o,, :t3 :t5
guide roll
fro111 vertical l t ne
Division I-B ENTRANCE DOOR AND HATCH
Section I. WATER TIGHT STEEL DOOR
I.
Breadth
6,
2 %4
l= designed dl111enslon
Door
Height
62

:t2 :t4

distance between
points
Distortion
63
:t2 :t3
of dlogonols
Straightness 64
+
:tl 3
Warp
c55
:tl :t3
2. Breadth
66
:t2 :t4

distance between
Door coomlng
elddle points
Height
c57

2 :t4 of dlogonols
Hetght of s tll
6a
0-15 0-30
Dl st ort I on
69
t2 :t4
Straightness 6
to

:tl :t3
Warp
6 I I
ti :t3
3. Breadth
612
:t4 :t7
Port of cut
steel wall
Height
0
13
[J
4 :t7
Height of' stll
614
0-15 -I 0-30
Def'romotton
615

::t2 t3

j
1428
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvtston I-B ENTRANCE [)()(lR AND HATCH
Section 2. WATER TIGHT STEEL SMALL HATCH (SQUARE TYPE)
Sub-section
I.
Hotch cover
2.
Hotch coomtng
3.
Port of cut
deck plate
(penetration
type}
4.
Port of cut
deck plate
(non-
penetration
type)
5.
Water
tightness
Item
Breadtn
Length
Distortion
Strolgntness
De format I on (In on>
one meter)
Breadth
Length
Hetght
Distortion
Straightness
Breadth
Length
Breadth
Length
Touch between
gosket and
Figure
6,

63
T
6.
64
65

6.
66
67
- /
' ' 6,
6e
6,.
69
610
6.4&J
T
61 I
612
5B
6,,
612
1\ Coo11ll ng
Standard
Range
(IIIII)
:t3
:t3
:t2
:tl
:tl
:t2
:t2
0 -6
2
:tl
:t2
:t2
-3-2
-3 -2
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
L 11111 ts
( IIIII)
:t5
:t5
t3
3
t3
:t5
:t5
0-20
t3
:t3
:t3
:t3
-5-3
-5-3
Remarks
6) : dtstonce between
middle points
of dtogonols
6. : distance belween
111lddle potn1S
of d t agonal s
To be opplted for
steel water tight
door and woter tight
steel small hatch.
(Water tight door)
B:Breadth of
chalk clung on the
gasket after tighten-
Ing test. Tha test
Is to be carrtad out
with thrusting chips
to the middle of the
wedges.
(Water t tght small
hotcnl
B:Breadth of
chalk clung on the
gasket after tighten-
Ing test. The test
Is to be carried ou1
with thrusting chtps
to the middle of the
wedges.
Sect ton 3. WATER TIGHT STEEL SMALL HATCH
(RQUNO TYPE)
TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WATER TIGHT SDUARE
SMALL HATCH NOTE: REGUARDING A DIAMETER AS LENGTH
OR BREATH
1429
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Division
Section
Sub-section
I.
Water tightness
Section
I-C VENTILATOR AND SKYLIGHT
I ANOTt-ER WATER TIGHT STEEL HA TO-I
Contact between
gasket and coomtng
I . SKYLIGHT
Figure
I. Contact between
Water 11ghtness gasket and eoalllng
Division I-0 CARGO LOADING APPARATUS
Sect l on I. WELDING FABRICATED BOOM
I.
Derrick boom
Length
Banding
Diameter
PerMissible out of
roundness of
crltndrlcol shell ________ ____
ol Installing
posttton of
Standard
Range
(.,a)
7
5

SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
Ltatts
(wull)
10
10
0-]Q,
100
Re111arks
Ventilation hole
with wall
Wall louver
Goose neck
ventilaTor
Musnroo111
venTttotor
d: designed dlaenslon
or derrick boom at
measuring position
D,= max diameter
0,= min. diameter
i------- ----t....;b....;o_s....;e;..._a:_s:_s.:....:.e_m..:.b...:l_t...:e...:s;...__-+-;;.-::-+--l-....:6:...'------+-----+-----l-------------l
2. Ot st ort I on between "'9 L..00 :c.; I S2
Derrick boom assemblies on bose
and assemblies and ossambltes on 'J
top Guy
.treplate
{{ 11-l_
Heel
place
Motn
eyeplote
1430
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvlslon I-E CONTAINER LASHING DEVICES
Section I . CONT AINE:R LASHING FITTING
Stondol"d
Sub-section I tell'! Figure Range
(IIIII)
I. Length
o,
13
20' Container
.0
fIt 1 I ng
Breod1n
6,<3
..
t2 _,
t[8]
Difference of
~
2
height ot CI"CISS\
sect I on of
diagonals
I I
Dtfference between
~
l-t6,
5
dlogonols
o"l.tl
2.
Lenglh
63
:t3
40' Cohtotner
fitting
Breodlh
6.
2
.0
Difference of

+
2
.....
height at CI"OSII!
tt8J
secllon of
dtogonols
Dtfference between
lw-B
5
dtogonols
I
l-tO:s
I
3. Length 6.6,
6.
Cl111oronce
l
between
Breoc:lth
o:o,.
cell guide and
container
6a l 1' J 0.
I
J.,
I
T
().,
1431
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Tolel"once
Ll111lts Remarks
1111111)
:t4 (]) ond 0 lndtcote
acceptable 1 ol eronces
t3
for various support
condl11ons shown
4
follows:
CD: condition
putTing together,
nont 1 ght:
8 0: closed condttlor
l =
Spectf1ecl
dlrutnslon
15 L.= octuol d 1 mens 1 or
:t3
to be measured by
condnton 0 ot
container mount on
4 cover or pedestal.
8
7
t.7
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I HULL OUTFITTING
Division
Section I
Sub-section
I.
Dimension of
deck
2.
Dtslortton or
deck
3.
Clear-once
between decks
4.
Height
between decks
5.
Gulderoll
6.
Clearance
between pillar
and movable
deck
7.
Cl earonce
between
gulderoll and
guide piece
I-F MOVABLE DECK. RAMP WAY. ETC.
HOISTABLE DECK (LIFTABLE DECK)
Item
Length
Breadth
Height
Difference between
diagonals
Deflection of deck
Distortion of deck
Deviation of deck
end from deck level
Difference In level
between movable
decks
Difference In level
between movable
deck and fixed
deck
Clearance between
movable decks
Clearance between
11avoble deck and
fixed deck
Height between
fixed deck and
movable deck
Height between
movable decks
Deviation of
gutderall from
verttcol ltne
Deviation of
gulderall fro111
vertical line
do
Clearance between
gvtder-otl and gutde
piece
do
Ftgvr-e
....

613

XED
s
614
VABLE 16
VABLE 1+6,.
615
1fi(
c;
g

"' I
..J
-* 6,. g
616

s plooo
ipollo,..
617 1+6 ..
t+6 ..
618
1+6
..
"
619
movable dack
1432
Standar-d
Range
( m11d
:t5
:t5
:t3
:t8
+5
-0
+5
-2
:t5
+20
-0
+20
-0
5
;
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Toler-onc:e
Limits
(mad
tiO
+ 10
-5
+ 10
-5
5
10
10
t8
:t 10
.. 10
:t 10
+8
-o
+8
-0
Re11or-ks
l=-deslgned
d 111141H'IS I on
64<%=
oc:tval dimension

distortion of dec:k
to be kept designed
svppor t I no
condition.
ldeslgned
dimension
610' 6,,.
difference of
!
i
level and cleorence
between decks to
kept designed
supporting and
guided position.
Ldeslgned
dimension
:Planned dimension
means the clear
height to be kept
In the loading
condlton.
615:
deviation from
vertical l In e
between one deck,
spans.
l=deslgned
dimension
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Division
Sect ton 2
Sub-section
I.
Dimension of
ro111p
2.
PosiTion
of hinges
I-F MOVABLE DECK, RAMP WAY, ETC.
STERN RAMP ( INCLLOING RAMP DOOR)
Item
Breadth (lower port)
6,
Breadth (upper port)

Length (SEC l)
OJ
Length (SEC Ill 64
Length !TOTAL)
betweun
anoln hinges
Dtstonce between
the center of
hinges
67
Figure
LOWER PART
PC.IRT
+ STAR 80ARO
SIDE SIDE
l.PPER LEVEL
Distance between 6a
r
0
10
3.
Dimension of
romp door
4.
Otstortlon of
romp
5.
Clearance eTc.
In way of
tightening
port
Longitudinal
distance between
compression bars
-r=
I= SEI I ....
lo&
C\1
Transverse distance Oil 0
between compression
bars

01 fferenee between 5,; 6, u 'Tn \1
diagonal distances
of compression bar
t+&
Longitudinal
distortion
Transverse
distortion
Deviation of the 616
position of
compression bar
the centerl lne
of pocking
Clearance between 617
the pocking glove
ond the top plate
of romp door
cleat F==
sn=-al
-M-
I
!romp .J;.
ofter___j'
construction
for comp. bar
1433
Standard
Range
!111m}
:t5
:t5
:t5
t5
:tiO
SHIPBUILDING
OUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
Ltatts
(am)
t8
:t8
t8
t8
:t 16
::t5
t8
t4
::1:4
::1:5
::1:5
:t:8
t5
5
5
Remarks
l=deslgned
dl111enston
CLI : center of
main hinges
CL2 : center of
Interchange
CL3 : center of
flop hinges
CL4 : means the
perpenndlculor
T 0 Cll.
L+OJ= <D +0
L +63= G e
64.0s=
to be 111easured
after erection
012.613:
actual distance
6t4.61S
Distortion of top
plate on girders
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Division I-F MOVABLE DECK. RAMP WAY. ETC.
Section 3 MIDSHIP RAMP I INCLUDING RAMP DOOR)
Sub-secTion
I.
Dtmenston of
romp
2.
Dimension ond
position of
hinges
3.
Dimension of
romp door
I tell
Breodtn (lower port)
Breadth (upper port)
Lengtk (romp)
Lenotk (flop)
Distance between
main hinges
BreadTh or
lifting rae
Longitudinal
distance between
compression bars
o,
62
63
64
65
66
Transverse distance o
8
between compression
bars
Dlff'erence between
diagonal distances
of compression bar
4. Longitudinal
Distortion of distortion
romp
5.
Clearance etc.
In way of
tightening
porT
Transverse
distort ion
Deviation of 1he
position of
compression bar
f'rom the centerline
of pocking
Clearance between
the pocking glove
and the top plate
of romp door
Figure
L +6&
,, l+6, ,,

l +6a
-
CL2
j
'

CLI
..
::>
..
.....
'9
.....
I
I
1434
Standard
Range
I 111m)
:t5
t5
t5
:t5
I
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STAI\OARDS
Tolerance
L I 1111 ts
(IIIII)
t8
tB
:t8

:t5
:t:2
:1:5
:t5
:t8
:t5
:t5
:1:5
5
Re111orks
l=deslgned
dimension
.CLI : center of
I
main ntnges
CL2 : center of
I
l
flop hinges
6,o:
actual distance
6tt.612:
Distortion of Top
plate on girders
F2016 - 00 (2012)
I. HULL OUTFITTING
Dtvlslon
Section 4
Sub-section
I.
Dt111enslon of
door'
I-F MOVABLE DECK. RAMP WAY. ETC.
BULKHEAD DOOR/COAM!NG
Breadth
Hetgth
It era
6.
6.
Figure
Standard
Range
lm11d
Dtfrorence bo<weon 6., '
diagonal distances
I / rr
2. Height of The 6. 1 / t.d '
PosiTion center ltne of """-i
Depth
of r I "'nos wheel 'I "'' 52----IJ.
Position of clea1 f M::-k
Pos 1 T ton of
slopping device
3.
Distortion of
door
4.
Ollllension of
COallllnQ
Distortion
(transverse dtrec-
1ton)
6..
Distortion 6w
(vertical direction)
Height
6w

Depth
Difference between
diagonal distances
.....----
--; _,...
6w 'g 5.
Position
of ro tl
Distance from the
bulkhead 10 the
center of gulderoll
Ll - _.,.,....-,....-
1< .-,.....

6. Deflection 0..
Distortion of (transverse direction)
coomlng
Deflect I on 0..
(vertical direction)
Distortion 0..
(lronsverse direction)
Distortion 6.
(verllcol dtrac11on)
Clearance between
deck and bock plate
of door pocking
Gop be1ween the &
corner of 1lght bor
ond pocking end

ton1r or ftgh1 bar-
1435
I
'
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
L tmtts
l11un)
5
t5
:t3
:t3
:t8
:t3
:t3
:1:5
:t3
3
5
5
:t3
:t3
8
3
t3
3
t3
t3
t3
:t3
I
Remarks
l=deslgned
dimension
.o
11
.o
1
2'
actual dimension
l=deslgned
dimension
o, 7 018
0
20 -
0
23:
actual dimension
l=des!gned
dimension
I
I
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
II. WOODWORK
Division II-A ACCOMMODATION SPACE
Section I
Sub-section
I.
Clearance
between
door- and
door- frame
Section 2
DOOR AND DOOR FRAME
Ite111
Between wooden a,
door ond door frame
Between steel o
1
door and door frame
DIVISIONAL WALL
I. Deviation
F 1 ttl ng of
division wall
Section 3
I.
Ceiling cleo!"
height
CEILING
Shor-t of calling
clear heIght
(clear height)
Figure
___ ... __ 11--0
Door I
fr-ame l
Deck
f' I.-Beam
d
line
(drawing

Section 4 DETAIL OF DIVISIONAL PARTS
I.
.Joint piece
of woodwork
Relation beTween
wooden parls and
screw hole
Deviation from
marking line
a,
a,
Wooden
)oinT piece
6,
Working
line -r,A
Wooden
)oint piece
FIG. A2.24 Woodwork
1436
Standard
Range
(IIIII)
S5
s;1o
::l:2.5 D
SHIPBUILDING
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
L 1m 1 ts
(mill)
S3
SB
.5 D
Remor-ks
To be defined by
planned dimension
D= dlo. of belt
or dla. of screw
F2016 - 00 (2012)
II WOODWORK
Dtvlslon II-A ACCOMMODATION
SHIPBUILDING
Sect! on 4 DETAIL OF DIVISIONAL PARTS
DUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance
Sub-secTion Ite111 Figure I--onge Lt111lts Remarks
(mill) (1111!11)
2. A lolner (plywood
62
s;o.5

Alignment of wIth the lost
m
plywood )oint coot of point)
A )olner CTo be
veneered)
63
cn3
s;o.3
No )olner ITo be
64
om
S:0.3
veneered)
A )otner wtth
65
S:l
)oint pieces

(To be veneered)
3. Plywood with the
66

S:0.3 S:l
Clearance lost coot of paint
or plywood
)oInt
Without lotnt
67
S:0.3 S:0.5
pieces

(To be veneered)
WIth )otnt pieces
68
at=ts
S:l S:2
(To be veneered)
4.
Fireproof bulk-
69

S:2 S:2.5
Penetrations
head (Clearance and
of wooden wall lap length)
Ot

t
(Qscrew
St l pl t
(thickness more
than I .0 mm)
5.
Deviation between
0
to
S:5 S:B
Sleel panel
upper and lower
pieces
_,

t;
II
h

610

'I
...
ll)
AI lgn111ent of )oint o,,
Steel
S:0.5
deck
Gop of lolnt
612
C1b
S:0.5 S:l

DO
I
i
FIG. A2.25 Woodwork
1437
~ F2016- 00 (2012)
II WOODWORK
Division II-A ACCOMMODATION
SHIPBUILDING
Section 5 DECK COVERING LEVEL
DUALITY STANDARDS
Stondor"d Tolerance
Sub-section Item Figure Range lilt! ts Remorks
( aun) 1111111)
I.
Flotness of deck 61
1
,.. 2m ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
S:5
Dep11'1 of 6
1
In
Deck
composition
lwo Mllllers.
composition
~
2.
Flatness of deck Di t 10 S:5 Dl tto
Deck
covering
covering
Division II-B DECK C()IPARTMENT
Section I ON DECK
I. Gop belween deck 61
~
'!.7
S:9 Dtstor"tlon of steel
Deck planking plonktng and
deck Is based on
sleet deck
quality stondord
for hull. Deck
planking Is based on
quality standard for
bar"e steel por"ts.
I
Stl plated deck
Section 2 IN HOLD
I.
Horizontal Ot
~ ~ ~
Clearance a
:SIO
between 5
S6
sparring and
~
11
cleat
-'
Longitudinal
Ct
0.
~
_, S6
S:IO
.....

.J:.
P-
Ul
2. Deviation of a a
10 '!. 03
5 s; 0:)
Ftlttng accuracy
Locotton of
SPOI'r"lng fr"Oill
OJ S 15 a3 s: 20
of cleat Is defined
cleat
face Shell plat In
OS Installed. In
case wher"e It Is
ome
Impossible To COtllply
wllh the standard
due to fora of
3
fro111es. Sparring Is
to be divided OS
appropr"tote.
Shell plolln
a me
;
SGctlon 3 THE COLD STORAGE SPACES
I. Air tightness of
Not
To be checked b1 chalk
Door
door
defined
test. No 111eosurobl e
frost outside the cold
storage spaces under'
refrlgerot tng test. In
-- case where It fr'ost s,
blow olr fro1111 the
outside ond check with
leakage of olr lth o
candle or a )oss st lch
I In the cold storage
i :.;nne"
FIG. A2.26 Woodwork
1438
F2016 - 00 (2012)
IV. MACHINERY
Dtvtston
Section
Sub-sect I on
!.Reamer
IV-A RUDDER
I Rl.ODER PLATE AND RUDDER STOCK
Otmensl.on of
reamer bolt hole
Roundness
C,! lndrtcol
Dimension of
reamer bolt hole
Roundness
Cylindrical
Inlerfer-ence of
reamer- bolt
Figure
d-D
Stondord
Range
(nun)
SHIPBUILDING
QUALITY STANDARDS
Tolerance

!mal

>O
Remarks
Dt :dlo of bolt
dl:dlo of hole

2. JoIn
3. Sleeve of
rudder stock
Facing !lhJrfoce
area between
rudder plate and
rudder stock
Deviation fro111
The centor llnEo
of rudder and
rudder stock
after connection
Length of rudder
plate and rudder
slock afler
connection
Length of rudder 62
stock
Length of rudder 63
63
Total length
Gop belween 64
rudder plate ond
rudder stock
after connection
Interference for
sleeve of rudder
stock
IS U 5)
!B Cl
Section 2. Pintle and gudgeon bushing
I. Plnlle Facing surface
area between
pintle and toper
of rudder plaTe
Interference for Gudgoi f Rudder
pintle of rudder pl"'"
stock
(5 u 5) d,-d,
!B Cl d,-da
2. Gudgeon
Interference of
bushing
gudgeon bushing
Gudgeon-
d,-d,
l:>uel>
Ptrol\"
!BC. SUSl
sleeve
(Synthetic resin) d.-d3
FIG. A2.27 Machinery
1439
>60%
s;o.3 S:0.5
:t3
4
5
<0.03
IO)d, ,.
10,000
( !0-20) dl ..
10.000
>60% ..

10,000
..
U.Q::2.Ql.g'
..
10.000
0-0.05 .
..
noT defined
Both longlludlnol
and transverse
deviations ore to
comply with lhls
standard
After tightening
of reamer boll
not defined
d, : ou 1 s 1 de d 1 a.
of rudder stock
d,: ouTs I de d I o.
of sleeve
not defined
d,:outslde dto.
of pintle
da:lnslde dlo.
of sleeve
not defined
d,: ouTS l d& d I o.
of pintle
d.: I n s I de d I o .
of sleeve
F2016 - 00 (2012)
IV. MACHINERY
Division IV-A Rudder
SHIPBUILDING
Section 3. Stern frame
QUALITY STANDARDS
Standard Tolerance
Sub-section !Hull Figure Range L I !I'll ts Remarks
(!1'111'1) lll'lml
I.
Al lgn!l'lent of cen-
61
Rucktor co,.,.. 1.,.. S0.3 Both longitudinal
Gudgeon
terl.lne for rudder

and transverse
center
carriers, upper
p., deviations ore
lIne
lower gudgeons
to COIIIp[y to this
after boring, or
standard
after cr01111111ng

eccentric bushing
oudoo"'

i..or o"doeon
Section 4. Rudder tIller
I. Interference

>O
Rudder of rudder
II II or-
stock and stock and tIller

t tll er
Interference of 0.005 >O
taper key
... .....
-0.0!5
u or
oloc:k
2. Facing surface >60%
.
not defined
Rudder area between
stock !"udder stock
and and tIller
tIller
wIth Fastening 0.005 >O
toper cleol"once of toper -0.015
key
Sect ton 5. Rudder carrier ond stuffing box
I Facing surface

>50%
.
not deft ned
e>loco
Installation area of t 1 ner This standard Is
Gop between rudder'
Ruddor
<0.05
.
also oplled to
carrier and liner eorr ,.,. that of stuffing
...... I ........
box
To be measured
In the condition
before tightening
of up bolts
Tock Toppr
Division I V-B Steering engine
SecTion I. Rom cyl lnder type
I
Reamer Interference
d-D 0.01 >O d: dla. of bolt
bolt
D: dla of hole
2
Installation Clearance <0.06

not defined
of lIner
(Top lIner In the condition
Chock liner) before tightening
of bolts
3
10
Level ond Level and torsion

Wt thin
torsion of 75% of
rom crltnder clearance
of rom
I
cylinder
i
1440
F2016 - 00 (2012)
IV. MACHINERY
Division IV-6 Steer\ ng engine
SHIPBUILDING
Section I. Rom cylinder type
DUALITY STANDARDS
Standard Tolerance
Sub-section Ite1111 Figure Range Ltllltts Remarks
lmm) lmm)
4 Inclination of I T,-lal s;o.o7
.
In case of
Alignment the surface solid coupling
coupling
-+
center of Concent.rlctty
.... ....
S0.05
.
To 111easure like
h.rdroullc this figure by
pump after lleans of dial
Installation

guage, In case
of sol ld coupling.
Section 2. Rotary vane type
I Facing surface

not defined
Toper oreo area
between rudder
slack ond
boss on
&leering
engine
2 Push up travel 0.6
. Length of
Interference -1.0 Indentation Is
mark on nut ccordtng to the
ot the top of Maker standard
the rudder
stock
not defined
3 Inclination of IT,-Ta I S0.07
.
In cose of solid
Alignment of the surface
T,
coupling to be
coupl lng
-+
11eosured by means
centel' of Concentl'lc\ty S0.05

of dial guoge
hrd,..oullc See left sketch
pump after
la
Instal lot I on

Division IV-C Deck machine
Section I. Inslollotlon of machine seat
I A class <0.06 <0.10 A closs1
Cleal'ance deck crone and
between seat cargo gear
and machine
6 class <O. 10 <0.20 6 closs1
pump
C class
. .
C class:
miscellaneous
winch and davit
A 6 C class
to be measured
before tIght &n I ng
not defined
1441
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
IV. MACHINERY
Division IV-C Deck machine
SHIPBUILDING
Section I. Installation of machine
QUALITY STANDARDS
seat
Standard Tolerance
Sub-section Item Ftgure Range L 1 at ts Remarks
lmml
,.,.,)
2 Inclination of JT,-T,I
..
In case of solid
Alignment the surface coupling
of coupling T, To be measured by
center Concentricity
+
s;0.05
.
111eons of dial
gouge
See sketch
Ta
I Ololguoy
3
JC.::.Q.l

..
A class
Alignment of 2
A
shaft center

not defined
Division IV-D Deck crane
Section I. Traveling type 1-tnclude traveling type hopper)
I Dtstonce between
16,1
1451
/A'

..
not defined
Laying roll center of the
/\ r-1
rolls lone side
"-.._1 ...... Jl'-' ...... L.l
type)
.,
Distance between
16:11
.
not defined
center of the
/\
,.;.:.:
rot ls (both stde
'\....!
.;a.._. L.JLJ
type)
Horizontal line
16"1
cOl C.Mor of
1
roll

0
Standard per
of rot l !for
a ......
meter
optlonol 10111)
line
I
I
tOT
J 10
Vert! col ltne
16.1

.
Standard per
of roll (for
.or .. of ralt
meter
optional 10m)
?a" l lne

Slope of roll 16!11
tTop
_I_
.
Standard per
(for optional
8
<1000 meter
10m) Ina I
Preaualng ot both
end of for-e ond aft.
Plane of rot L
I 6,1

_I_
.
(for optional
f>
<1000
10m)
Incltnot ton
1671
s!
I
..
of roll <200
Difference of
16.1
.o;

To be 111eosured
hetghl between
K
at each 5m
.port and stbd
ll'
1442
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
IV. MACHINERY
Otvlslon IV-D Deck crone
SHIPBUILDING
Sect ton 2. Fixed
QUALITY STANDARDS
type
Standard Tolerance
Sub-section lte111 Figure Range Limits
(rara) (111111)
I Plane of flange 16,1
.
Installation
6,
of posT Dtfference of bolt
16.1
!00.&
.
Difference for
hole on rlonge
cCJ
dt amet"er
not defined
-
, .......
o-62

Otvlslon IV-E Stde thruster
Section I. Stde thruster
I Clearance between
61
50/1000
.
Universal
Center tube and blade
6\
coupll ng type
of not defined
coupling
2 Clearance between o,
.
not deft ned
tube ond blade &00
of tube
0' b'
D
b'

lub
Blacle
1443
c4@f F2016 - 00 (2012)
A3. COATINGS
A3.1 ContentsA3.1
Introduction
General
1 . Type of vessel
2. Tank coating area
3. Type of cargo
4. Tank anodes
5. Outfitting
6. Paint to be used
7. Dry film thickness
8. Shop primer
9. Holding coats
10. Painting process
Presurface Preparation Standards
11. Free edge
12. Spatter
13. Undercut
14. Surface damage
15. Manual welding bead
16. Automatic welding bead
17. Overlap welding bead
18. Welding arc strike
19. Gas cut surface
20. Lifting lugs
21. Moisture
22. Oil and grease contaminants
23. Dust and nonvisual contaminants
24. Chalk or slate pencil marks
25. Marking paint
Surface Preparation Standards
26. Solvent cleaning
27. Mechanical cleaning
28. Abrasive blast cleaning and surface profile
29. Water jetting
30. Abrasives
31. Repairs to shop primed surfaces
Coating Standards
32. Stripe coating tanks
33. Overall coat
Coating Repair Standards
34. Sagging
35. Spray dust
36. Foreign matter
37. Crater, pinholes and bubbles
38. Blushing
39. Mechanical damage
40. Insufficient film thickness
Film Thickness Measurement Standards
41. Film thickness measurement of tank plate
42. Film thickness measurement of tank longitudinal members
43. Film thickness measurement of tank transverse members
Environmental Painting Standards
44. Temperature
45. Humidity
46. Ventilation (Blasting)
47. Ventilation (Painting)
48. Erection of scaffolding
49. Removal of scaffolding
50. Illumination
Inspection Standards
51. Presurface preparation
52. Surface preparation
53. Stripe coating
54. Film thickness
55. Final inspection
56. Temperature, humidity, and dew point
57. Gas concentration of solvent
58. Ventilation
Explanations
1444
A3.2
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.1
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.2
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.3
Fig. A3.4
Fig. A3.4
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.5
Fig. A3.6
Fig. A3.6
Fig. A3.6
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.7
Fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
Fig. A3.8
Figs. A3.9-A3.15
F2016 - 00 (2012)
A3.2 Introduction
A3.2.1 This practice for coatings addresses those aspects of
coating application inherent in achieving finished product
quality that can be measured and warranted as meeting
acceptable criteria. Because of the nature of coating systems, in
which preparation and methodology directly affect finished
quality, this practice contains information about processes and
application practices, as well as, pass/fail criteria of the end
product. It should be acknowledged that measuring finished
coating attributes cannot determine that good application
practices were followed and, therefore, cannot be used as a sole
means of warranting the finished quality of the coating.
No. Item Prerequisites Remarks
1 Type of Veael Commercial and Military
2 Tok. Coaiing Area No Limitation
3 Type of cargo Products identified in the specification section. Refer to ship's specification
In accordance with ship's specifications in Water
Refer to ship's speclftcation.
4 Taokanodes Ballut Tanks and Slop Retention Tank.
Refer to Fig. A3.9 (Explanations).
In the case of steel, painting is similar to the
5 Oatfittm1 surroundiDg area. Paint shall not be applied to
woodwork, polished fittings, gas.kets, packing,
anodes, non-ferrous material, or other noo-
corrosive metals and any other S1.l1'face or fittings
and equipment where paiDt coWd obstruct their
1)['0Der function.
As specified by owoer. Coatings sbaU be lead free, Refer to ship's specification
'
Paillt to be used chromate free, asbestos free, cadmium free and
comply with applicable Federal, Ssatu and local
llegulations
Refer to ship's specification and maoufacturer's
Refer to Fig. A3.9 (Explllnatious).
7 Dry film tbieknea recommendations.
After primary surface preparation, one ( 1) coat of
I Shop primer inorganic zinc silicate type shop primer will be
applied in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendation, for structural
steel not coated with inorganic zinc silicate type
shop primer builder shall blast to SSPC-SP 10 and
apply first coat of specified system, subject to
owner approval .Surface profile to comply with
shlo's specification.
As determined by builder with consideration to
9 Holding c:oa.t paint manufacturer's recommendation.
10 PaintiDI Proeess Block unit through completion.
Refer to Fig. A3.9 ~ ) .
FIG. A3.1 General
1445
F2016 - 00 (2012)
No. Item Process Studard Judgment Remarks
( 1) Break 90 degree edges 1 mm minimum
Free edge
H
lD
(2) In general, rolled angle edges, bulb Visual
Immersiog flats, etc. (including fiat bars) are to be left
~ r e k
untreated.
AregToBe
CG&ted
( 1) For spatter observed before blasting:
(a) Remove with a chipping hammer, scraper, etc.
Spatter (b) For spatter not easily removable with a
!!!
scraper, etc. Use gri.nder or disc.
12 Imme[]ion Visual
Service Note: It is the intent of this standard that all spatter is to be removed
Areas: To Be before surface prep. Any remaining or additional spatter observed
Coated after surface prep sball be removed in accordam:e with l(a) and l(b).
Undercut to a depth exceeding 1.6mm and a width smaller than the
Refer to
13 Undercut depth is to be repaired by grinding. If a s]wp edge exists with a crest Visual
Fig.A3.10
exceeding 3mm grind until irregularity is less tban 3mm.
(Eleplan.)
14 Surface Surface damage, pitting, break-off marks to depths exceeding 1 mm
Refer to
damage are to be repaired by welding or grinding Visual
Fig. A3.10
(Explan.)
15 Manual Weld beads with surface irregularities exceeding 3 mm or with a
welding sharp crest are to be ground until the irregularity is less than 3 mm. Visual
bead
u Automatic In general, no specific treatment is required.
welding Visual
bead
17 Overlap Overlapping weld beads that create sharp notches are to be repaired Visual
welding as per item No. 13, "Undercuf'.
bead
18 Welding arc: Same as Item No. 12, .. Spatter", and Item No. 14, "Surface Visual
strike Damage."
19 Gas cut Gas cut surfaces are to be ground as follows.
surface (a) Except where hull strength considerations require a smooth
fmish, notches shall be ground to less than 2mm.
(b) Gas slag produced during cutting is to be treated according to
Item 11, "Free Edge." Treatment to be accomplished before blasting. Visual
/
1-
I
ur
?
I At"'
.........
lO Lifting lugs Where a lifting lug is partially removed by cutting the pad-eye
portion off per page 1 7 of the Hull volume, the remaining stub and Visual
surrounding area is to be treated according to item No. 11 "Free
Edge", item No. 15 "Manual welding bead", and item No. 19 "Gas
cut surface".
FIG. A3.2 Presurface Preparation Standards
1446
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
No.
.Item :rroe.a Studanl Judlmeat Remarks
21 Moisture To be removed until no visible moisture remains Visual
12 Oil and To be removed, by wiping with thinner, fresh water (preferably high Visual
grease pressure wash), wire brush or compressed air or as pennitted by
contaminants paint manufacturer.
Refer to
Fig. A3.10
Visual
13
Dust and
Dust and contaminants are to be removed by compressed air, Clear Tape
visual contami-
nants
vacuum or high pressure water cleaning, u necessary. Test Method
24 Chalk or slate To be removed with rag or brush in accordance with manufacturer's Visual
pencil marks recommendation.
25 Marking To be removed by blasting, power tool or other. Marking paint for Visual
paint epoxy does not need to be removed if it is in accordance with
paint manufadurer' s recommendation
FIG. A3.2 Presurlace Preparation Standards (continued)
No.
Item
Judpoeat Remarks
16
Solvmt Refer to ship's specification Visual
Clening Standards
17
Meebameal
Refer to ship's specification Visual
Cleuinc
Standards
Abnsive Refer to ship's specification Visual
R*to
Blast
Standards
Fig. A3.11
11
(E>iptlrlliilDOna)
AmiSvfue
Profile
Refer to ship's specification Visual
29 Water Jetting
Standards
Refer to ship's specification Written
30 Abruives
Standards
,...to Shop
Refer to ship's specification
Visual
31
Standards
FIG. A3.3 Surface Preparation Standards
No. Item Process Standard Jud2ment Remarks
To achieve the specified DFT, stripe coats shall be applied to: edges Refer to
32 Stripe of small holes, comers of other flame burned edges, free edges of Visual
Fig. A3.12
Coating structural members, and rough welding seams.
(Explanations)
Tanks
When more than one coat is specified, subsequent coats shall not be Wet gauge
33 Overall coat applied until preceding coat has sufficiently cured/dried in and Visual
accordatlce with paint manufacturer's recommendation.
FIG. A3.4 Coating Standards
1447
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
No. Item Process standard Jud1ment Remarks
Sagging with.a height of2 mm or more is to be repaired in Refer to
34 Sagging accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Visual
Fig. A3.13
(Explanations)
Dry spray, over spray, and spray dust is to be removed before
35 Spray dust painting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Visual
36 Foreign matter in the paint film shall be removed. Damaged film is
Foreign to be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's Visual
matter recommendations.
37 Crater, Defects are to be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's Visual
Refer to
pinholes and recommendations.
Frg. A3.13
bubbles (Explanations)
38 Blushing
Excepting the final coat film. visible blushing on the film surface is
to be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's Visual
recommendations.
39 Medlanlc:al Touch up is to be equivalent to the original specification, unless Visual
damage otherwise noted in the Painting Plan.
40 Insufficient Areas with insufficient film thickness are to be repaired in Visual/Dry Refer to
fdm thickness accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Film Gage
Fig. A3.14
(Explanations)
FIG. A3.5 Coating Repair Standards
No. Item Process standard Judement Remarks
41 Film Film thickness to be measured for every five square meters for flat Micro tester
thickness panels or corrugated bulkheads. Film thickness is to be measured or electro-
measurement at two (2) points in each panel of plating bounded by transverse and magnetic
of tank plate longitudinal members. (Note: this excludes panel breaker, or panel film
stiffeners) thickness
gauge
42 Film Film thickness to be measured at two points between transverse Micro tester
thickness members on each side of web and face plates (Note: this excludes or electro- Refer to
measurement panel breakers and panel stiffeners) magnetic
Fig. A3.14
of tank film
(Explanations)
longitudinal thickness
members
gauge
43 Film Film thickness to be measured at three points between longitudinal Micro tester
thickness girders or bulkhead on each side of web and face plates. or electro-
measurement magnetic
of tank film
transverse thickness
members
gauge
FIG. A3.6 Film Thickness Measurement Standards
1448
cO F2016 - 00 (2012)
No. Item Process standard Judgment Remarks
44 Temperature Steel and air temperatures are to be in accordance with the paint
(During manufacturer's recommendations. Measure
paintbag, and with a
drying) thermometer
45 Humidity Paint shall not be applied during periods of rain, snow, fog or mist Measure
(During in the open air or when ambient relative humidity exceeds with a
painting, and manufacturer recommendation. hygrometer.
initial drying) Measure
with a
surface
thermometer
46 Ventilation Air change rate to be two times per hour, or more as directed by the Check
(Immediately manufacturer's product data sheet ventilating
Refer to
before requirement
Fig. A3.15
blasting to (Explanations)
paint)
47 Ventilation Air change rate to be five times per hour or more. Dehumidifying Check
(During paint capacity to be according to ventilation requirements. If the external ventilating
drying) air humidity is above 85%, air change rate may be decreased to the requirement
capacity of the dehumidifier.
Make sure that scaffolding does not interfere with painting,
48 Erection of ventilation, illumination, blasting and inspection ( builder shall Visual
scaffolding attempt to maintain a 150 mm clearance wherever possible). If not
possible (to maintain the 150 mm clearance), the Owner shall be
informed of the particular area and review during the scaffolding
inspection.
49 Removal of Care must be taken not to damage the film. Visual
scaffolding
so mumination Effective illumination to be provided to ensure proper inspection of Visual
the blast and coated surface is achieved.
FIG. A3.7 Environmental Painting Standards
1449
F2016 - 00 (2012)
Coatrol
Standard
Owaer
Shipy
Paint
No. Item
ard
Mmufaeturer
Pre-Surface
Refer to Fig. A3.2
ll A A
51
PreparatioD
Suriaee
Refer to Fig. A3.3
A A A
52
Preparation
Stripe
Refer to Fig. A3.12 ~ )
A A
53
Coating
Film
Refer to Figs. A3.9 and A3.14 E ~ )
A A
54
Thickness
Final
Final confirmation of completion of painting
ll ll ll
55
Iaspeetion
Temperatve
Refer to Fig. A3.15 (Explanations)
A A
56 Humidity and
Dew Point
Gu
Refer to Fig. A3.15 (Explanations)
fl. A
57 CoDeentration
Of solvent
Refer to Fig. A3.15 (E>cplanaHons)
A A
58 Ventilation
FIG. A3.8 Inspection Standards
1450
NO.
4
7
10
Item
Tank anodes
Dry film thickness for
Banast Tanks,
Fore/ Aft Peak Tanks,
Wet Spaces and
Water Tanks shown.
See note for all other
spaces.
Tank painting process
(Typical; guideline
only, deviations are
acceptable)
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
Explanation
(1) Anodes may be installed in ballast tanks which are often loaded with
sea water.
(2) Anodes are not to be installed when dissolution of zinc into the tank
contents presents problems (as in the case of jet fuel, etcJ.
Measurements at 80% of total measuring points must verify a film
thickness exceeding or equal to a specified value (e.g., 300 microns). For
the remaining 20%, the measured film thickness must be equal to or over
80% (e.g., 240 micron) ofthe specified thickness. (Note: All other tank
spaces the 90-10 rule shall apply, All other surfaces to SSPC-PA 2)
( 1) For tank coating, block painting, painting in a dry dock, afloat
painting, or any combination is considered. However this standard is
based on afloat painting only.
(2) For abrasive blasting and painting in tank, the following two systems
may be considered:
Sandblasting of
upper pens

C.m""'""'"'"'-
ingof upper paru
Sandbluting of
bottom pern
Removal of
scaffoldings
::::::-c:::: J
Completion of paint
ing of bottom parts
FIG. A3.9 General (Explanations)
1451
Sandblasting of
the entiraiiUrfac:a
Painting of entire
"surlBCtt
Completion of paint
ing of upper parts
Completion of paint
ing of bottom pans

1

Ramovelof I
sceffoldings

<0 F2016 - 00 {2012)
No. Item Explanation
Division Welding
section Sub- Item Tolerance Limits Remarks
section
hgt. of

reinf.
- ...p
brth. of
7
bead, h: not defmed In cases where e is over
flank B: not defined 90, repair by grinding or
ofang.
9=90 welding to make e = 90
under- Skin plate and Over90
b
To be repaired by welding
13 Undercut cut face plate mm electrode or other,
(butt between 0.6 continuous (carefully avoid short
weld) d = 1.6mm bead for higher tensile
steels).
under- Others d = 1.6mm
cut fill
leg
!
lgth.

Compared with

L: Leg length
If over tolerance, fill weld
correct ones
r : Throat depth
to correct.
L
t
14 Surface Division Material
damage
section Sub- Item Remarks
section
surface Pit Grade of pitting
1. Grade A is considered slight and no repair is necessary.
flaw
Grade B is medium and is to be repaired if necessary.
-AraRatio
Grade C requires some repair.
SMiiaSa
2. Pitting or flaking on boundaries of grade "A" and "B",
grade "B" and "C", and grade "A" and "C" shall be
, ..
LH
classified as grade "A", grade "B" and grade "A"
.,
"
respectively.
""
3. Repair method of surface flaw: depth of defect= d , plate

thickness= t (d=.07 t remove by grinding (but in no case
a.,
..
d= 3 mm) .07 t= d= .2 t grinding followed by welding .
..
I.
Ll
surface Flaking
GrideoflUifafllting
4. Grade A is considered slight and no repair is necessary.
flaw
Grade B is medium and is to be repaired if necessary.
::t, -Aiallatio Grade C needs some repair.
mm llll.ill:ttm!ll 5. Pitting or flaking on boundaries of grade "A" and "B",
Hj
grade "B" and "C", and grade "A" and "C" shall be
classified as grade "A", grade "B" and grade "A"
respectively.
!:
B 6. Repair method of surface flaw depth of defects = d, plate
.:
thickness= t, d= .07 removed by grinding (but in no cased

= 3 mm), .07 t = d = .2 t grinding followed by welding.
.. ' c
FIG. A3.10 Preparation Standards for Steel (Explanations)
1452
F2016 - 00 (2012)
21 Moisture Rainwater inflow and moisture in the air may produce sweat on steel surface. After
secondary surface preparation, moisture may cause turning or binder adhesion.
Appropriate measures must be taken to prevent rainwater from flowing in.
22 Oil and grease In general, remove with a rag and thinner/cleaner. For heavy adhesion of grease and
contaminants oil, first dissolve with a brush soaked in thinner/cleaner, then wipe off with a clean
rag. Detect oil visually with a black light or water spray bottle (water break test).
23 Dust and Check for dust with clear tape, clean cloth or pictorial standard in accordance with
non-visual ISO 8502-3. Remove dust by compressed air or vacuum. Non-visual contaminants
contaminants may be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP 12/NACE No. 5 as applicable to meet
the ship's specification and manufacturer's recommendation. Check for soluble salts
according to ISO 8502-6 when required by manufacturer or ship's specification.
24 Chalk or slate Remove with a rag or brush. When marks enter an anchor-pattern concavity and are
pencil marks difficult to remove, use a hard brush.
FIG. A3.10 (continued)
26 Solvent Cleaning Surface cleanliness is to be in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. Note: SSPC-SP 1 is
required prior to all other surface preparation methods.
SSPC-SP 3 is the minimum accepted method of repair for non-immersion service
27
Mecbanieal
substrates. (SSPC-SP 2 may be substituted where SSPC-SP 3 is impractical).
Cleaning
SSPC-SP 11 is the minimum accepted method for repair of immersion service
52 substrates.
To determine surface cleanliness, refer to the SSPC-VIS 3 photographic standard.
To determine surface profile use ASTM D 4417 Method A or B.
Abrasive Blast
SSPC-SP 10 is the minimum accepted surface preparation for pre-construction primer
28 and for immersion serviee substrates.
Cleaning and
SSPC-SP 7 may be used in place of SSPC-SP 3 when practical.
52
Surface Profile
For cleanliness refer to SSPC-VIS 1-89 photographic standard.
To determine surface profile use ASTM D 4417 Method A or B.
Where acceptable according to the s i p ~ s specification and manufactmer's
29
Water Jettin1
recommendations, clean in conformance with SSPC-SP 12/NACE No.5.
Refer to SSPC-VIS 4(1)/NACE No.7 photographic standard.
52 To confirm pre-existing swface profile use ASTM D 4417.
30 Abrasives Blast surface color tends to vary depending on the abrasive material used. As long as
the same grade of cleanliness is used, a difference in color does not affect the film
perfonnance.
Abrasives to be determined according to SSPC-AB 1.
Recycled Abrasive Cleanliness to be determined according to SSPC-AB 2.
31 Repairs to shop (1) In general shop primer in the cargo oil and slop retention tanks shall be removed
primed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation to a visual acceptance.
(2) All other spaces intact shop primer may remain and over coated in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendation.
(3) In no way does the above supercede the ship's specification
FIG. A3.11 Surface Preparation Standards (Explanations)
1453
No. Item
32 Stripe
coating in
tanks.
F2016 - 00 (2012)
E lanation
Where airless spraying is difficult and the film thickness can not be maintained, apply stripe
coating with a brush before or after spraying.
Stripe coating locations are as follows:
(a) Inside and edges ofholes ........ <D
(b) Free edges . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . (2)
(c) Welding beads .................... (3)
(d) Where painting is difficult . . . . . . <4>
FIG. A3.12 Coating Standards (Explanations)
1454
No. Item
34 "Sagging"
F2016 - 00 (2012)
Ex lanation
The "sagging" of the film needs repair due to the following causes:
( 1) Spray dust, dust, etc. tend to collect.
(2) Sag having a large film thickness. Solvent tends to collect on high film thicknesses.
If coating is applied over the "sagging" area, solvent evaporation becomes more difficult
leading to possible cracks in the film.
"Sagging" to be r t p ~ i m is follows:
(a) Sagging with the height of2mm and more.
2mmandmore
(b) Wide "sagging"
(c) "Sagging" in the bottom corners
FIG. A3.13 Coating Repair Standards (Explanations)
1455
No. Item
36 Foreign
matter
c4BJtf F2016 - 00 (2012)
Ex luation
When abrasives are used in surface preparations (blasting), abrasives remaining
may adhere to the substrate and be trapped in the film during painting.
Foreign matter
/\
Foreign material shall be removed by screen. sanding, etc. as directed by the paint
manufactlll'ef.
37 Craters, ( 1) Pinholes tend to occur at the pit of manual welding bead.
31
pinholes, and (2) Craters tend to occur when surface tension becomes uneven during the film
bubbles drying process. A crater is a concave, and reduces film thickness.
"Blushing"
Mechanical
damage
(3) Bubbles occur when paint mixed with air is applied in the airless painting.
Repairs to coating to be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
Generally, surface will be feathered by sanding or screening and coating applied to
achieve desired DFT.
The film will "blush", due to humidity absorbed by the hardening agent. When
humidity rises or dew is produced before curing, this may occur. Blushing is
confined to the film surface, and does not affect film performance. However,
excessive blushing must be repaired because it hinders adhesion of overcoating.
The surface of the film shall be lightly abraded with sandpaper, screen, or as
recommended by coating manufacturer and coating applied to the desired DFT.
Feather
1456
No. Item
40 Film
thickness
41 measurement
in tanks.
42 For other
areas see
43 Note.
44
0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
Ex lanation
( 1) Measuring equipment to be adjusted once a day by using a reference plate with a
thickness nearest to the film thickness to be measured.
(2) The measured value of film thickness to be marked at a measuring point using a
specified marking material.
Film thickness measuring point (x mark)
(a) Bottom part
Bottom transverse
(b) Deck part
Deck plate
NOTE:
For all other areas, measure eve
Deck longitudinal
Deck transverse
FIG. A3.14 Film Thickness Measurement Standards (Explanations)
1457
F2016- 00 (2012)
44
Temperature ( 1) Lowest temperature
(During (a) Temperature must be 3 Cor more above the dew point
painting and Theoretically the steel plate surface temperature is used However the air
drying) temperature in tank is practically used herein.
(b) Curing of epoxy resin slows down when the temperature drops below 10 C
and 5 C is the lowest limit. It is preferable to keep the temperature above l 0 o C
and in conformance with the paint manufacturer's recommendation.
(2) Highest temperature
The maximum temperature is affected by the type of paint used and the painting
process. Consult the paint manufacturer for maximum allowable temperature for
application and cure.
45 Humidity Relative humidity is to be below 85% .
(During This value applies when the painted surface temperature is equal to or above the
painting, and atmospheric temperature.
initial
drying)
46
Ventilation ( 1) The amount of ventilation required during painting and drying is greater than that
47
required for blasting due to the following reasons:
(a} The film begins hardening with evaporation of solvents in the film.
(b) Solvent evaporation is greatly influenced by ventilation and temperature.
(c) Retained solvents affect film performance.
(2) Air change rate
This standard is determined for correct film performance and this varies depending
on tank capacity. These standards are different from OSHA 29 CFR 1915.35 and
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.57. Consult "Industrial Ventilatio11, 20th Edition"
1
and OSHA
Technical Manual Section lli: Chapter 3 for guidance.
(3) Air change rate for high humidity (85% RH or above). With high humidity, dew must
be prevented after painting, from blasting stages up to the film hardening stages. Otherwise,
the following may occur:
(a) Turning ofblasted surfaces
(b) Film defects (Blushing, poor adhesion)
As described above in (1) insufficient ventilation also deteriorates film performance.
Consequently it is preferable to ventilate at least three times per hour even with high
humidity for two days (this varies according to the type of paint) immediately after
painting.
FIG. A3.15 Environmental Painting Standards (Explanations)
1458
No.
46
47
45
46
47
AI
49
50
<0 F2016 - 00 (2012)
Item Explanation
The safety and ( 1) The safety and Health Standards for Painting
Health (a) When gas concentration reaches 10% of the lower explosion limit (LEL), stop
Standards for operations and evacuate workers.
Painting (b) When gas concentration exceeds 10% of the lower explosion limit (LEL), take
appropriate measures such as adding fans and reducing the number of paint
~ " " " " ' @ Refer to OSHA 29 CFR 1915.35 and 29 CFR 1926.57
"Industrial Ventilation, 20* Edition"
1
OSHA Technical Manual Section
m: Chapter 3 for guidance.
Instruments ( l) For humidity and dew point:
for measuiog
environmental Sling psychrometer and psychrometric tables or battery operated psychrometer
conditions according to ASTM E 337 Standard.
(2) Surface temperature
Magnetic contact surface thermometer.
(3) Anemometer
Used to measure the ventilation volume and rate.
Erection of ( 1) Scaffolding pieces
seaffoldiop Scaffolding pieces not to be removed are recommended to be of stainless steel.
(2) The distance between painted surfaces and scaffolding is to be between 150 and 300 nnn
(to prevent unpainted portions).
(3} Scaffold planks of expanded metal or similar open design to assist in abrasive removal
and ventilation.
(4) Height of scaffolding; 1,700 to 1,900 mm (to ensure easy and satisfactory work).
Illumioation Explosion-proof lighting is to be used during painting and drying.
COPYRIGHT!).
1459
~ ~ u a l

INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Database Structure of Electronic Data Interchange Between
Ship Owner and Shipyard for Contract Administration
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides the database structure of electronic
data interchange (EDI) information between ship owner and a
shipyard for contract administration. Ship owners (hereinafter
referred to as owners) and shipyards may each have unique
software programs to manage their respective portions of a ship
repair period. There is information that must be exchanged
between the parties during the contract period. This standard
has been developed to establish common field lengths, names,
and types such that the exchanged information can be used
directly by the respective software programs without scanning,
typing, or redundant keying of information.
2. Terminology
2.1.1 BLOB-short for binary large object, a collection of
binary data stored as a single entity in a database management
systems (DBMS). BLOBs are used primarily to hold multime-
dia objects such as images, videos, and sound, tho,ugh they can
also be used to store programs or even fragments of code. Not
all DBMSs support BLOBs.
2.1.2 CHAR(XX)-character data, alphanumeric where XX
represents the maximum number of characters permitted and
SQL fills the remaining spaces with blanks if fewer than the
maximum are entered.
2.1.3 Condition Found Report (CFR)-a report generated
by the shipyard to inform the owner of conditions found,
deficiencies with the specification, or any other pertinent
information regarding a particular work item.
2.1.4 Condition Found Report Response-the owner's re-
sponse back to the shipyard's Condition Found Report. It may
be a simple acknowledgement of receipt or a lengthy response
and reference to a Request for Proposal.
2.1.5 DATE-stores the year, month, and day values of a
date. The length of a DATE is ten positions, as in 01/31/2000
(for 31 Jan 2000).
1
approved in 2000. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as F2017 - 00. DOl:
10.1520/F2017-00R06.
2.1.6 INTEGER-a number that has no fractional part and
its precision (maximum number of digits) depends on the
specific SQL implementation.
2.1.7 owner--in this case, the recognized authority for
contracting ship repair work.
2.1.8 Request for Proposal-an owner-generated document
asking the shipyard to add, modify, or delete work to the
existing package. It may or may not be n;lated to a shipyard
initiated CFR.
2.1.9 shipyard-in this case, the principal party to a contract
with a ship owner.
2.1.1 0 SQL compliant-an industry standard data sublan-
guage, specifically designed to create, manipulate, and control
relational databases. SQL-92 is the latest version of the
standard.
2.1.11 tests and trial agenda-the agenda provided by the
shipyard, which details the planning schedule for all testing
events to be conducted during a dock or sea trial.
3.1 Intended Use- Compliance with this guide will allow
the sharing of electronic data between contracting parties that
is normally done by hard copy. This can only be used when
both parties use a database-derived software package to man-
age their contracts. Specifically, it will:
3.1.1 Eliminate the duplication of manual entry of data into
each party's contract administration software package and
3.1.2 Allow for wide access of the data to all authorized
parties.
4. Database Structure
4.1 A shipyard contract management database, or an owner
contract management database, may contain hundreds of tables
and fields and thousands of records. Much of the data is
business-sensitive and must remain under the control of the
party. However, there is data that is shared and common to both
parties in a ship repair contract.
4.2 Condition Found Report-A Condition Found Report,
generated by the shipyard and forwarded to the owner, will be
structured as follows:
1460
0 F2017 - 00 (2006)
Name Required Type Size Data Statement of work
y
memo BLOB owner
Field Element
Owner
4.5 Proposal-A Proposal, in to RFP and response an
Condition Found Report ID
y
CHAR 10 shipyard generated by the shipyard and forwarded to the owner, will be
Contract number
y
CHAR 16 owner
Work item number
y
CHAR 7 owner
Equipment ID number N Integer 12 owner
Name Required Type Size Data
Ship name N CHAR 30 owner
Field Element
Date Condition Found Report
y
DATE 10 shipyard
Owner
Generated MM/DDIVYVV
Shipyard POC
y
CHAR 30 shipyard
ProposaiiD
y
CHAR 10 shipyard
Condition
y
memo BLOB shipyard
Owner contract number
y
CHAR 16 owner
Recommendation N Memo BLOB shipyard
Shipyard contract number
y
CHAR 16 shipyard
4.3 Condition Found Report Response -A Condition
RFPID N INTEGER 4 owner
Found Report Response, generated by the owner and for- Proposal date
y
DATE 8 shipyard
warded to the shipyard, will be structured as follows:
(MM/DD/YYYY)
Shipyard POC
y
CHAR 30 shipyard
Name Required Type Size Data SO\l'J comments N memo BLOB shipyard
Field Element
Owner Shipyard proposal N Currency $M shipyard
($#,###,###.##)
y
CHAR 10 shipyard
4.6 Test and Trial Agenda-A TTA, generated by the ship-
Contract number
y
CHAR 16 shipyard
Ship name N CHAR 30 owner yard and forwarded to the owner, will be structured as follows:
Response date
y
DATE 10 owner
MM/DDIVYVV
Field Element
Owner POC
y
CHAR 30 owner
Owner
Response N memo BLOB owner
4.4 Request for Proposal-A Request for Proposal, gener- TIAID Number (Long) 4
ated by the owner and forwarded to the shipyard, will be
y
CHAR 16 owner
y
CHAR 16 shipyard
Agenda date
y
DATE 8 shipyard
Field Element
(MM/DD/YVYV)
Owner
Shipyard POC
y
CHAR 30 shipyard
Event tableA
y
memo BLOB shipyard
RFPID
y
INTEGER 4 owner
y
CHAR 10 shipyard A The event table will include the test name, equipment name, start time, and
y
CHAR 16 owner required attendees (witnesses).
y
CHAR 16 shipyard
Ship name
RFP date
Owner POC
N CHAR 30 owner
5. Keywords
y
DATE 10 owner
(MM/DDIYYYY) 5.1 contract administration; database; electronic;
y
CHAR 30 owner
shipyard
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or tor additional standards
COPYRIGHT/).
1461
owner;
14
UII
7
INTIERNATIONAI.
Standard Guide for
Basic Elements of Shipboard Occupational Health and
Safety Program
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide covers the basic elements of a Shipboard
Occupational Health and Safety Program (SOHSP). These
elements are applicable to all vessel types including but not
limited to tank vessels, dry bulk carriers, passenger vessels,
roll-on roll-off vessels, ore bulk oilers, offshore supply vessels,
tugboats, towboats, and barges. The elements described are
fundamental pieces of a systematic occupational safety and
health program and may be used by company line managers,
health and safety personnel or consultants who are implement-
ing, improving, or auditing the effectiveness of a shipboard
health and safety program.
2.1 ANSI Standards:
2
ANSI Z4.1-1986 Minimum Requirements for Sanitation in
Places of Employment
ANSI Z4l-1991 Personal Protection - Protective Footwear
AN Sl Z87 .1-1989 Practice for Occupational and Educa-
tional Eye and Face Protection
ANSI Z88.2-1992 Respiratory Protection
ANSI Z89 .1-1986 Protective Head wear for Industrial Work-
ers
ANSI Z244.1-1982 (R 1 993) Safety Requirements for the
Lock Out/Tag Out of Energy Sources
ANSlJASA S3.18-1979 (R1993): Guide for the Evaluation
of Human Exposure to Whole Body Vibration
ANSI/ASA S3.44-1996 Determination of Occupational
1
approved in 2000. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as F2039 - 00 (2006).
DOl: 1 0.1520/F2039-00R12.
2
Noise Exposure and Estimation of Noise-Induced Hearing
Impair1ncnt
ANSI/AWS Z49.1-1994 Safety in Welding, Cutting and
Allied Processes
NFPA 306-1997 Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels
3
NFPA 1991-2000: Vapor Protective Suits for Hazardous
Chemical Emergencies
3
NFPA 1992-2000: Liquid Splash Protective Suits for Haz-
ardous Chemical Emergencies
3
IMO A.468(XH) Code on Noise Levels Onboard Ships
4
IMO A.849 (20) Code for Investigation of Marine Casualties
and Incidents
4
IMO A.864 (20) Recommendations for Entering Enclosed
Spaces Aboard Ships
4
46 CFR 16.210 Pre-employment Testing Requirements
5
U.S. Coast Guard Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circular
2-98 Physical Evaluation Guidelines for Merchant Mari-
ner's Documents and Licenses
5
3.1 This guide does not set specific performance or techni-
cal criteria, but recommends that companies set policies and
objectives and develop procedures for managing their health
and safety program. Companies should consider their unique
organization, culture, and hazards on their vessels and the
possible effects of their operations. The elements are intention-
ally flexible and may be tailored to address any size of
operation or any vessel type. Note that although the standard is
aimed at the shipboard occupational health and safety program,
some of the elements address activities and commitments that
must be completed or made by shore side personnel (for
example, executive management commitment and provision of
adequate resources). Key to the effectiveness of the program is
the implementation of each element within an interconnected
system.
3
4
Available from International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embankment,
London SEl 75R, United Kingdom.
5
www.access.gpo.gov.
1462
F2039 - 00 (2012)
4. Basic Elements
4.1 Executive Management Commitment and Leadership-
Executive management commitment and leadership is a pre-
condition for an effective SOHSP. Executive management
commitment and leadership includes, but is not limited to
integrating health and safety into the management structure and
fabric of the company, developing a health and safety policy,
developing health and safety objectives, providing resources to
achieve the objectives, defining stewardship responsibilities
and providing authority to carry out those responsibilities, and
establishing accountability for safety and health as a part of job
performance reviews. Further guidance is provided in Annex
Al.
4.2 Employee Participation-Employees from all levels
including crewmembers, officers, masters, persons in charge,
and shoreside personnel should be directly involved with the
SOHSP. Shipboard and shoreside employees should be in-
volved in developing, implementing, evaluating, and modify-
ing the SOHSP. Employees should also participate in setting
health and safety objectives and performance criteria. This
involvement might be through employee membership on safety
committees that provide input to management for the develop-
ment of safety and health policy, debate and set health and
safety goals, measure and evaluate performance, and recom-
mend modifications to the program based on their evaluation.
Shoreside and shipboard employees should work together to
achieve safety and health goals. For example, shoreside per-
sonnel should participate on vessel safety committees since
their decisions affect vessel operations and ultimately the
health and safety of vessel personnel. In large companies,
individual vessel safety committees might submit recommen-
dations to an overarching safety committee that evaluates the
recommendations and sets policy to apply appropriate recom-
mendations to the entire fleet. Further guidance is provided in
Annex A2.
4.3 Hazard Anticipation, Identification, Evaluation and
Control-The core function of any health and safety program is
prevention. Health and safety hazards including fire, reactivity,
and chemical and physical hazards, need to be anticipated and
prevented from occurring. Hazards and unsafe operating pro-
cedures need to be identified and addressed so they will not
endanger employees or the public and will not damage the
vessel, cargo, or third party property. Potential hazards should
be systematically anticipated, identified, evaluated, and con-
trolled. Tools such as job hazard analysis, industrial hygiene
exposure assessments, and risk assessment/management meth-
odologies enable the evaluation and control of hazards. Further
guidance is provided in Annex A3.
4.4 Training-Employees should receive training appropri-
ate for their duties and responsibilities so that they may work
safely and not endanger their shipmates or the public. In
addition, employees who have specific health and safety
responsibilities (generally supervisors with responsibility for
the safety of others, but also nonsupervisors who are assigned
to safety committees or as crew member representatives)
should receive training to enable them to carry out their health
and safety program responsibilities. Further guidance is pro-
vided in Annex A4.
4.5 Record Keeping-Company records sufficient to dem-
onstrate the effectiveness of the health and safety program
should be maintained. Data that enables trend or pattern
analysis for root causes is particularly desirable. For example,
results of audits that evaluate effectiveness of the safety and
health management system should be maintained. Records that
indicate industrial hygiene exposure assessments have been
conducted and appropriate controls have been implemented
should be maintained. Current job safety analyses and corre-
sponding standard operating procedures with safe work prac-
tices should be documented. Injury :;tnd illness data should be
maintained to enable the identification of trends and patterns
that associate the injury or illness with a common cause, which
can be addressed. Training topics, lesson outlines, and attend-
ees should be documented. Where appropriate, such records
should permit evaluation of the program on individual vessels
as well as across an entire fleet. Further guidance is provided in
Annex AS.
4.6 Contract or Third Party Personnel-When contract or
third party personnel are on board to perform work, vessel
personnel should provide information regarding potential haz-
ards on the vessel that may affect the contract or third party
personnel. Potential hazards related to the work conducted by
contract or third party personnel should be provided to the
vessel owner/operator and/or the master/person in charge. Each
employer should provide appropriate information regarding
vessel and work hazards to their own employees. For example,
exchange of information on chemical hazards might be accom-
plished by exchanging appropriate material safety data sheets
(MSDS), then each employer can inform their own employees
of the hazards identified in the MSDS. Further guidance is
provided in Annex A6.
4.7 Fatality, Injury, Illness, and Incident Investigation-
Personnel injuries, occupational illnesses, and "near miss"
incidents should be promptly investigated. The current incident
and other similar occurrences should be analyzed to identify
the primary (root) cause and any contributing factors. The
investigation report, setting forth primary cause, contributing
factors, and corrective measures should be presented to man-
agement. Followup action that specifically addresses the re-
port's recommendations for corrective action should be under-
taken and documented. Further guidance is provided in Annex
A7.
4.8 Systematic Program Evaluation and Continuous
Improvement-Maintaining an effective health and safety pro-
gram is an ongoing process. The SOHSP should have systems
for detecting, reporting, and correcting nonconformities to the
program. Some type of "formalized" evaluation should also be
conducted on a periodic basis consistent with other aspects of
the vessel's management plan. The evaluation should deter-
mine whether the SOHSP is appropriate for the vessel and its
operations, that actual practices are consistent with the pro-
grams and procedures in the SOHSP, and that the SOHSP is
effective. Comparison of data and records (refer to Annex AS,
1463
F2039 - 00 (2012)
Record Keeping) to performance objectives and criteria (refer
to Annex A 1, Section A 1.3, health and safety objectives) can
provide important indicators of the effectiveness of the SOHSP.
Further guidance is provided in Annex A8.
5. Keywords
5.1 health; safety
ANNEXES
Al. MANAGEMENT COMMITMENT AND LEADERSHIP
Al.l Health and safety programs are most effective when
they are integrated into the management structure of a com-
pany, rather than treated as an "add on" program. Examples of
integrated health and safety efforts include:
Al.l.l Developing Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs),
written to the education level of the person who must follow
the SOP, that integrate safe work practices and basic opera-
tional functions,
A1.1.2 Making design review by qualified health and safety
personnel an element of the acquisition procedures, and
Al.l.3 Making consultation with qualified health and safety
personnel a part of the process when making changes to
operations.
Al.2 Executive management sets the tone for the entire
SOHSP through their policy regarding health and safety.
Examples of values that can be stated and commitments that
can be made in company policy include:
Al.2.1 A statement that the company will make every effort
to provide a safe and healthy workplace and that working
safely is a condition of employment,
Al.2.2 Statements that convey how important each crew
member is to the vessel as a fellow worker and as a company
resource:
Al.2.2.1 "The basic safety policy of this company is that no
task is so important that an employee must violate a safety rule
or put himself or herself at risk of injury or illness in order to
get it done.",
Al.2.3 A written commitment to provide resources neces-
sary to implement the health and safety program could also be
included in the policy statement, and
A 1.2.4 Management can demonstrate commitment to the
safety and health policies through word and action. For
example, managers visiting vessels should follow safety rules
and standard operating procedures, including use of hearing
protection, safety glasses, safety shoes, protective clothing, and
so forth.
A 1.3 Setting and attaining health and safety objectives
demonstrates a company's commitment to improvement of
health and safety performance. Objectives provide a target
against which those who are responsible for health and safety
may measure their progress. Quantifiable objectives are desir-
able since often, "What gets measured gets done." (Refer to
Annex A8, Systematic Program Evaluation, for examples of
performance measures and an overall program audit.) Health
and safety objectives may include:
Al.3.1 Eliminate lost time incidents,
A1.3.2 Report "near miss" incidents or problems, evaluate,
and if appropriate, implement changes to prevent a more
serious incident or accident in the future,
Al.3.3 Develop and implement a program of evaluations
through drills and other means (for example, simulators) to
ensure that personnel are competent to carry out their duties,
Al.3.4 Improve the health and safety program by review-
ing, considering, and implementing appropriate published
industry practices and consensus standards rather than relying
on the imposition of new regulatory standards. Examples of
consensus standards to consider include, but are not limited to:
ANSI Z41-1991, ANSI Z87.1-1989, ANSI Z88.2-1992, ANSI
Z89.1-1986, ANSI Z244.1-1982 (R1993), ANSIIASA S3.18-
1979 (R1993), ANSIIASA S3.44-1996, ANSIIAWS Z49.1-
1994, ANSI Z4.1-1986, NFPA 1991-2000, NFPA 1992-2000,
NFPA 306-1997, IMO A.864 (20), and IMO A.468(XII).
Al.3.5 Complete periodic comprehensive (or area-specific)
hazard review,
1464
Al.3.6 Reduce exposure levels to airborne vapors to accept-
able levels through appropriate controls,
A1.3.7 Complete annual respiratory fit testing on schedule,
Al.3.8 Develop and implement acute toxic exposure proce-
dures addressing first aid procedures, obtaining additional
emergency medical assistance, and appropriate medical sur-
veillance tests (for example, S-phenylmercapturic acid in urine
following a potential benzene overexposure), and
A1.3.9 Develop and implement an occupational health
medical surveillance plan.
NOTE ALl-The intent of this medical surveillance plan is to ensure
employees are not overexposed to hazards on the job including chemicals,
radiation, noise, and so forth. This section is not intended to address
requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act or issues covered by
physical standards related to watch keeping published elsewhere.
A1.4 Company management holds the authority to dedicate
necessary resources to achieve health and safety objectives.
Necessary resources may include:
c@ F2039 - 00 (2012)
A 1.4.1 Access to health and safety information,
Al.4.2 Training, including classroom and on-the-job train-
ing, that cover topics identified by the company's risk assess-
ment process as well as those required by international or
national standards. These topics would include but not be
limited to existing chemical and mechanical hazards,
Al.4.3 Qualified health and safety professionals, either on
the company staff or hired as consultants,
A1.4.4 Capital investments in engineering controls, and
A 1.4.5 Personal protective equipment.
Al.5 Defining stewardship responsibilities and providing
authority to carry out those responsibilities is an essential
component of management commitment. For example:
A1.5.1 Company Management Should:
A1.5.1.1 Designate a shoreside person who has access to the
executive management of the company and is responsible to
ensure essential health and safety issues are clearly communi-
cated to executive management of the company and decisions
regarding those issues are clearly communicated back to the
vessel.
A1.5.1.2 Ensure adequate resources of time, funds for
health and safety equipment, training and expertise are avail-
able to effectively implement the program throughout the
company.
Al.5.1.3 Ensure that a safety committee or other mecha-
nism to involve crewmembers in health and safety issues is
created on each vessel adequately.
A1.5.1.4 Ensure that the elements of the shipboard health
and safety program are integrated and systematically imple-
mented throughout the company and on each vessel.
Al.5.1.5 Ensure that objectives are developed and perfor-
mance measures are reported from each vessel.
Al.5.1.6 Ensure that all appropriate programs are developed
and implemented including, but not limited to respiratory
protection, hearing protection, confined space entry, and lock
out-tag out.
Al.5.1.7 Set a good example for employees by following
established safety rules on vessels and by staying current on
training commensurate with duties.
Al.5.1.8 Report unsafe practices or conditions observed
while on a vessel to the supervisor of the area.
1465
Al.5.2 Master/Person-In-Charge/Operator Should:
Al.5.2.1 Ensure each crewmember receives an initial vessel
orientation, covering company safety policy, emergency pro-
cedures, access and egress, fire fighting, job hazards, and
information on hazardous materials before beginning work.
Document the completion of this orientation.
A1.5.2.2 Ensure each crewmember is competent to perform
a task or job by requiring a prejob explanation and/or walk
through of all procedures including safe work practices before
starting work on that project or equipment. Require prejob
refresher training if the employee cannot demonstrate this
competence.
Al.5.2.3 Ensure each crewmember has been issued and
received training on the use of required personal protective
equipment (PPE) before starting work on a project requiring
PPE.
Al.5.2.4 Complete periodic walk-around health and safety
checks of the vessel (accompanied by appropriate personnel
including those who have responsibilities or work in certain
areas, for example, chief engineer and an oiler in engine spaces
and first mate and able-bodied seaman on deck).
Al.5.2.5 Periodically observe work performance of em-
ployees for compliance with safety rules contained or docu-
mented in the SOHSP.
Al.5.2.6 Set a good example for subordinates by following
established safety rules and attending training as appropriate.
A1.5.2.7 Complete a preliminary investigation of all acci-
dents and report findings to company management.
A1.5.2.8 Provide information to company management sug-
gesting changes to company-wide standard operating proce-
dures or equipment that will improve employee safety.
A1.5.3 Officers/Other Management Personnel Should:
Al.5.3.1 Act as the master's or person-in-charge's represen-
tative and implement examples listed for the master in areas
over which they exercise supervision (for example, first mate
responsible for "deck" personnel and Chief Engineer respon-
sible for "engineers").
A 1.6 Management should establish accountability for health
and safety as part of job performance reviews. Performance
reporting regarding health is as important and should be as
routine within the company as reports regarding timeliness of
delivery, cargo loss or contamination, or citations regarding
violations of regulations.
F2039 - 00 (2012)
A2. EMPLOYEE PARTICIPATION
A2.1 Full participation in developing, implementing, evalu-
ating, and continually improving the SOHSP helps those on
board the vessel see the SOHSP as something that is the result
of a value they share with vessel owners/operators. Personnel
directly involved with the work are often the best source of
information on health or safety hazards and often can suggest
effective methods for abating those hazards. Shoreside person-
nel need to be directly and heavily involved with the SOHSP
because they are integral in setting the rules and schedules for
vessel operation. Shoreside personnel also represent the vessel
to management and are the link to the resources and authority
necessary for the success of the SOHSP. Specific ways that
crewmembers, officers, and shoreside personnel can contribute
to the SOHSP include:
A2.1.1 Participating in periodic vessel inspections,
A2.1.2 Evaluating safety and health program materials,
A2.1.3 Developing standard operating procedures that in-
corporate safe working practices,
A2.1.4 Conducting job safety/hazard analyses (JSAs/JHAs),
A2.1.5 Reviewing and analyzing injury and illness data,
A2.1.6 Participating in risk assessment and risk manage-
ment activities,
A2.1. 7 Participating in accident/incident/problem investiga-
tions,
A2.1.8 Developing solutions to health and safety com-
plaints and disputes,
A2.1.9 Evaluating safety and health training activities, and
A2.1.1 0 Evaluating the safety and health management sys-
tem.
A2.1.11 Line or operations personnel including crewmem-
bers, officers, and shoreside personnel outside the health and
safety staff may need training in health and safety techniques
such as job safety/hazard analysis, reviewing injury and illness
data for trends, risk assessment, and investigations. This initial
training investment enables those who do the work to mean-
ingfully participate in identifying and solving health and safety
problems. Those crewmembers, officers, and shoreside person-
nel who receive additional training in health and safety and
actively participate in the development of the vessel or
company SOHSP, or both, also become health and safety
"champions" among their peers. Additional information on
training is provided in Annex A4.
A2.2 Since health and safety objectives and performance
may directly affect crewmembers' and officers' current and/or
future health and safety, they should be involved in
those objectives and performance criteria. This participation
may be accomplished through health and safety committee
involvement, labor negotiations, or other mechanism suitable
to the specific company. Refer to Annex Al, Section A 1.3 for
examples of health and safety objectives and performance
criteria.
A2.3 Employees should:
A2.3.1 Fully understand (including underlying principles)
and follow established standard operating procedures and
safety rules.
A2.3.2 Report unsafe conditions or actions to supervisor as
soon as they become aware of them.
A2.3.3 Report all injuries to supervisor promptly.
A2.3.4 Report all accidents, near misses, or problems to
supervisor promptly.
A2.3.5 Use personal protective equipment (PPE) in good
working condition where it is required.
A2.3.6 Do not remove or defeat any safety device or
safeguard.
A2.3.7 Encourage shipmates by words and behavior to
follow standard operating procedures and use safe work
practices on the job.
A2.3.8 Make suggestions to supervisor or safety committee
representative about changes to operating procedures, work
practices, or equipment that will improve safety.
A3. HAZARD ANTICIPATION, IDENTIFICATION, EVALUATION AND CONTROL
A3.1 Potential hazards on the vessel and created by the
vessel should be systematically anticipated, identified, evalu-
ated, and controlled. Hazards that should be discovered,
evaluated, and contro1led by the SOHSP include hazards
addressed by international conventions and national regula-
tions and other hazards that are causing or likely to cause
illness, death, or serious physical harm to workers or the
public. Types of hazards to consider may include:
1466
A3.1.1 Hazardous atmospheres caused by oxygen defi-
ciency, flammable or toxic gases or vapors, and biological
agents,
A3.1.2 Chemical hazards and the proper handling of vessel
generated hazardous wastes,
0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
A3.1.3 Physical hazards including noise, vibration, radia-
tion, electricity, uncontrolled mechanical energy, and shifting
cargoes that may engulf a crewmember,
A3.1.4 Ergonomic factors including fatigue, workstation
design, and poor team practices,
A3.1.5 Collisions, groundings, or rammings and their resul-
tant impacts, and
A3.1.6 Drowning.
A3.2 Methods of anticipation include:
A3.2.1 Systematic requirements for vessel and equipment
design and modification review by qualified health and safety
personnel,
A3.2.2 Periodic management review of the vessel and its
operation, its equipment, and its fitness for purpose,
A3.2.3 A procurement system that automatically requires
consideration of health and safety aspects of items ordered,
A3.2.4 Consideration of fitness for current conditions, and
A3.2.5 Systematic review of vessel and shoreside team
practices.
A3.3 Methods of identifying hazards include:
A3.3.1 Vessel inspections,
A3.3.2 Industrial hygiene exposure assessments of chemical
and biological hazards including inhalation and dermal expo-
sure routes and physical hazards such as vibration and ergo-
nomic hazards,
A3.3.3 Job safety analyses including risk assessment, both
statistical and expert opinion based,
A3.3.4 Employee hazardous condition notification system
including easy-to-understand labeling system for all possible
mechanical and chemical hazards,
A3.3.5 Review of available safety and health data to iden-
tify trends,
A3.3.6 Readers interested in physical standards may refer to
U.S. Coast Guard Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circular
2-98, Physical Evaluation Guidelines for Merchant Mariner's
Documents and Licenses, and
A3.3.7 Readers interested in preemployment drug tests may
refer to 46 CFR 16.210.
A3.4 Methods of hazard evaluation include:
A3.4.1 Comparison of industrial hygiene exposure levels to
standards identified in the SOHSP (for example, standards
required by regulation or prudent levels adopted by the
company in the absence of regulatory requirements).
A3.4.2 Risk analysis tools, including:
A3.4.2.1 Hazard effects and control analysis,
A3.4.2.2 Hazard control analysis,
A3.4.2.3 Fault tree analysis of possibilities based on expert
opinion,
A3.4.2.4 Management oversight and risk analysis, and
A3.4.2.5 Task hazard analysis.
A3.5 Methods of hazard control are hierarchical. In order of
preference, they include:
A3.5.1 Inherent safe design and verification of design out-
put to design requirements.
A3.5.2 Material substitution such as:
A3.5.2.1 Nonhazardous insulation for asbestos lagging,
A3.5.2.2 Citrus-based cleaning agents for solvent-based
cleaning agents, and
A3.5.2.3 Nontoxic paint for toxic paint.
A3.5.3 Engineering controls such as:
A3.5.3.1 Closed gauging,
A3.5.3.2 Vapor recovery systems, and
A3.5.3.3 Climate-controlled spaces such as control booths
in engine rooms.
A3.5.4 Administrative controls such as:
A3.5.4.1 Systematic review for fitness of vessel for opera-
tions,
A3.5.4.2 Standard operating procedures that incorporate
safe work practices. Some activities that might require standard
operating procedures with integrated safe work practices in-
clude:
A3.5.4.3 Machinery startup and shutdown operations,
A3.5.4.4 Emergency response to machinery failures,
A3.5.4.5 Getting underway and entering port operations,
A3.5.4.6 Cargo loading and unloading operations,
A3.5.4.7 Response to unplanned or emergency situations
during cargo operations,
A3.5.4.8 Man overboard procedures,
A3.5.4.9 Lifeboat-launching procedures,
A3.5.4.10 Watchkeeping procedures,
A3.5.4.11 Teamworking procedures such as bridge resource
management taught in simulators with practice by actual team
members,
A3.5.4.12 Prejob planning and briefings,
A3.5.4.13 Job hazard/safety analyses (JHAs/JSAs),
A3.5.4.14 Emergency procedures,
A3.5.4.15 Systematic inspection of incoming equipment
and equipment in use to ensure conformation to specifications
identified in the SOHSP (for example, personal protective
equipment),
A3.5.4.16 An easy-to-understand labeling system for all
possible mechanical and chemical hazards, and
1467
A3.5.4.17 Occupational medical surveillance programs tai-
lored to vessel and cargo hazards.
A3.5.5 Specific programs that need special attention within
the overall SOHSP:
A3.5.5.1 Respiratory protection program,
A3.5.5.2 Hearing loss prevention program,
A3.5.5.3 Safe lifting procedures,
A3.5.5.4 Permit-to-work programs for operations such as
lock out and tag out, tank or hold cleaning operations, confined
space entry, hot work operations, including a gas-freeing
program, working aloft, and
A3.5.5.5 Health and safety equipment control, calibration,
and maintenance procedures.
F2039 - 00 (2012)
A3.5.6 Security procedures to control entry and exit of
personnel to and from the vessel
A3.5.7 Basic safety rules such as:
Do not do things which are unsafe to get the job done. If a
necessary activity is unsafe, report it to the supervisor so it can
be evaluated and alternate methods developed.
Mechanical guards must be kept in place at all times when
machinery is being operated. Do not remove or disable any
safety device!
No person may operate a piece of equipment unless they
have been trained and are authorized. Notify supervisor that
training is needed if asked to perform a function not learned in
meeting the requirements for your license.
Use personal protective equipment whenever it is required.
Obey all safety warning signs.
Smoking is only permitted in designated locations and may
be entirely prohibited at certain times, such as during cargo
transfer operations.
Good housekeeping is an important part of accident preven-
tion. Replace all tools and supplies after use. Do not allow
rubbish or debris to accumulate where they will become a
hazard.
A3.5.8 Employee assistance and wellness programs,
A3.5.9 Preemployment chemical tests for dangerous drugs,
A3.5.10 Incentive programs such as safety awards, bonuses,
and vessel competitions, and
A3.5.11 Disciplinary policy that provides for progressive
consequences depending on the severity or repetition of the
violation of a safety rule, or both.
A3.5.12 Personal protective equipment such as:
A3 .5 .12.1 Safety glasses, goggles, hearing protection,
safety shoes, protective clothing, chemical protective booties,
respiratory protection, and
A3,5,12,2 Impervious gloves for food handlers as appropri
ate.
A3.5.13 Preventive maintenance of the vessel and equip--
ment and basic housekeeping programs.
A4. TRAINING
A4.1 Training to enable all employees to recognize hazards
and to take appropriate precautions should include:
A4.1.1 General orientation to the company,
A4.1.2 Overview of the company's health and safety pro-
gram,
A4.1.3 Vessel orientation including access and egress,
A4.1.4 Emergency procedures in case of fire, confined
space entry incident, release of hazardous chemicals or cargo,
and overexposure,
A4.1.5 The nature of potential hazards to which employees
may be exposed during routine tasks and how to recognize
symptoms of exposure,
A4.1.6 Use of protective measures, such as standard oper-
ating procedures that incorporate safe work practices, and
protective equipment and clothing (refer to Annex A3, Section
A3.5, Hazard Control),
A4.1.7 Specific programs including respiratory protection,
confined space entry, hearing loss prevention, lockout-tagout,
fall protection, safe lifting, health and safety equipment con-
trol, calibration and maintenance, and
1468
A4.1.8 Recognition and control of fatigue.
A4.2 Additional training for those with specific health or
safety responsibilities may include:
A4.2.1 Risk assessment and risk management including:
A4.2.1.1 Health and safety data trend analysis,
A4.2.1.2 Job safety analysis, and
A4.2.1.3 Shipboard watch implications.
A4.2.2 Fatality, injury, illness, "near miss" incident, and
problem investigation and root cause analysis.
A4.3 Effective worker protection programs do not stop at
initial training. Effective programs evaluate the success of the
training provided and offer refresher training on both a routine
and as-needed basis.
A4.4 Elaborate training programs solely related to safety
and health are not always needed. Integrating consideration of
safety and health protection into all organizational activities is
the key to effectiveness. Safety and health information should
be integrated into other training about performance require-
ments and job practices.
F2039 - 00 (2012)
AS. RECORD KEEPING
A5.1 Records are needed to document hazard control efforts
such as job hazard analyses, industrial hygiene sampling, and
training. Data collection systems that enable trend analysis
help in identifying injuries and illnesses with common causes.
A review of shipboard personnel injury and illness experience
over a period of time may reveal patterns of injury and illness
with common causes, which can be addressed. Similarly, a
review of accidents, "near miss" incidents, or problems over
time can reveal patterns of dangerous practice, which need
correction to assure safety. The correlation of changes in injury,
illness, and "near miss" incident or problem experience with
changes in the safety and health program, operations, work
processes, and personnel may help to identify potential causes
and likelihood of personnel accidents, injuries, and illnesses,
and danger or risk to the public. Audits that evaluate the
effectiveness of the health and safety program can be used to
identify weak points in the system.
A5.2 Examples of records that should be maintained in-
clude:
A5.2.1 Death, injury, illness, accident, "near miss" incident,
and problem data including:
A5.2.1.1 Investigation reports and root cause analysis (see
also Annex A 7, Fatality, Injury, Illness, and Incident Investi-
gation), and
A5.2.1.2 Injury, illness, near miss, and problem rates,
A5.2.2 Hazardous condition notifications and abatement
actions,
A5.2.3 Crew member safety suggestions,
A5.2.4 Industrial hygiene monitoring results for both per-
sonal and area samples,
A5.2.5 Job safety analyses,
A5.2.6 Safety committee reports,
A5.2.7 Safety inspection reports or log entries,
A5.2.8 Medical surveillance data (aimed at identifying ex-
posures so that proper interventions, including improvement of
hazard controls, may be initiated),
A5.2.9 Training (refer to Annex A4 for a discussion of
recommended training):
A5.2.9.1 Record training outline, date, and attendance,
A5.2.9.2 Record completion of courses such as fire fighting
and confined space entry schools, and
A5.2.10 Safety and health management system audits (refer
to Annex A8 for an example).
A5.3 The extent of recordkeeping necessary to document
the effectiveness of the program will vary depending on the
size of the company, level and nature of exposure to hazards on
the vessel, and other factors. The records should be maintained
as long as necessary in light of their intended use.
A5.4 Records of individual ships should also be shared with
other ships and analyzed as a larger base of data to gain
information on frequency of problems to identify trends better.
A6. CONTRACT OR THIRD PARTY PERSONNEL
A6.1 The vessel owner/operator or the master/person-in-
charge, or both, should provide information on applicable
elements of the company's health and safety program, vessel
hazards, safety rules, standard operating procedures, and emer-
gency procedures with contract or third party personnel who
may be exposed to vessel or cargo hazards.
A6.2 The contractor or third party should inform his/her
employees of the applicable elements of the vessel's health and
safety program and of any known vessel or cargo hazards to
which his/her employees may be exposed. The contract or third
party person-in-charge should also direct his/her employees to
follow the health and safety rules of the vessel to the extent that
they meet or exceed the contractor's or third party's own
requirements.
A6.3 The contract or third party person-in-charge should
inform the vessel's master or person-in-charge of any health
and safety hazards presented by their work and how they will
1469
address those hazards. The contract or third party person-in-
charge should also inform the vessel personnel of any other
health and safety hazards in the course of their work on the
vessel.
A6.4 During the initial exchange of information regarding
vessel hazards and hazards presented by the work intended, the
actions of the contractor or third party toward the health and
safety of the vessel crew and their own employees should be
clearly identified. Likewise, the actions of the vessel personnel
toward the health and safety of the contractor or third party
should be clearly identified. Emergency procedures should be
clearly agreed upon in advance.
F2039 - 00 (2012)
A7. FATALITY, INJURY, ILLNESS AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
A7.1 The objective of an investigation is to prevent related
incidents from recurring. An investigation should identify the
circumstances of the injury, illness, or incident and reveal the
proximate causes, contributing factors, and root causes by
gathering and analyzing information and drawing conclusions.
Identification and correction of causes may prevent similar
incidents from recurring. Furthermore, identifying and correct-
ing a true root cause may prevent other, apparently unrelated
incidents, giving even more return on the effort expended to
root causes. For example, if a problem with the
company's training system was identified as the root cause for
a confined space incident, then correcting the entire
system may prevent an injury that would have been caused by
an untrained person improperly operating a piece of machinery.
A 7.2 Start the investigation as soon as possible after the
incident occurs. Interview workers involved in the incident and
all witnesses. Discover situations leading up to the incident
including several days before. These situations may include
contributing factors. (Human factors including fatigue often
are found as root or contributing factors and may accumulate
over a period of time.) Examine the location of the incident and
identify factors associated with the incident. Interview other
company personnel as needed to determine root causes. Docu-
ment the investigation and recommendations.
A 7.3 The final report should include:
A 7.3 .1 A summary outlining the basic facts of the incident,
A 7 .3.2 A narrative detailing the circumstances of the casu-
alty or near incident,
A 7 .3.3 Analysis and comment that lead to logical conclu-
sions or findings, establishing all the factors, including root
cause(s) that contributed to the incident, and
A 7.3 .4 Immediate and long -term recommendations aimed
at preventing similar accidents and correcting root causes.
A 7.4 It may be helpful to categorize investigation data. An
example of a one-page form divided into information catego-
ries is provided (Fig. A7.1). Additional pages might be used to
capture the summary, narrative, analysis, and recommenda-
tions (Fig. A 7.2).
A 7.5 The information in this annex was drawn from the
references below. Further guidance regarding accident investi-
gation may be obtained from IMO A.849 (20) and Refs (6 and
7).
1470
0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
O Fatality, D Injury, 0 Illness, or D Incident Investigation 1 Date: j Time:
Vessel Name: I TypeofVessd:
I 011511. Soelety: I Vessel Location: I Temp: I Wind Spd: I Sea State:
Vessel operation at time of ineldent:
0 discharging cargo 0 loading cargo
0 gas freeing tanks 0 stripping tanks
0 cleaning tanks 0 receiving fuel
0 mooring at dock 0 replenishment at sea
0 transit harbor 0 transit restricted channei
0 resource exploration 0 resource production
Lead Investigator:
Related Vessel Cuualty:
0AIIision
0 Collision
0 Strand/grounding
0 Failure: hull, water
tight doors, ports, etc.
Captain/PIC:
0 Fire or explosion
0 Machinery damage
0 Capsize
0 Listing
LJOther:
0 trawling 0 underway at sea Nature of Aceldent or lneldent:
____ r- slip/faJI-stairs D slip/fall-gangway
E slip/fall-deck 0 slip/fall-other __ _
fall, same level D fall, into water
0 Deck Crew ;: Deck Officer struck, falling object D struck, flying object
D Engineering Crew = Engineering Officer struck, moving obj. O bumped fixed obj.
0 Master Steward otrnt"'lr VPQe.P.1 n ot.hP.r
D Tankennan : Person-In-Charge 0 ----
0 OIM :, Platform worker sprain/strain 0 overexertion
0 Passenger Gov. employee caught in lines 0 burned, non-electric
0 Longshore/harbor worker = V 1sitor ':::::: burned, electric D scalded
1-N-al-ure_o_ff_ata-llty-, in_j_u_ry_o_r_lll_n_ess_:,_ 0rA::-s-p
7
h-yx-.-1 ,..- hypothermia D hyperthermia
0 Thermal bum bum diving accident 0 asphyxiation
0 Electrical bum (shock) '"' old injury acute toxic exposure 0 chronic toxic expos
0 Abrasion 0 0 Concussion disappeared 0 other
D Blister 0 Drowning O Strain Activity penon undertaking when accident occurred:
0 Cut 0 Hemorrhoid 0 Sprain 0 Deck duty D Engine duty
0 Fracture D Puncture 0 Hernia 0 Drilling 0 Fishing
0 Infectious Dx. D Heat Stroke 0 Blood Clot 0 Handling cargo 0 Handling lines
0 Unknown 0 Other 0 Operating machinery 0 Repairing machinery
Part of body injured: [::! Ankle
0 Back 0 Chest 0 Eye
0 Groin D Hand 0 Foot
0 Steward duty
0 Off duty - exercising
0 Passenger
0 Off duty
0Knee 0Leg 0
[:!Arm
0 Finger
0Head
0Neck
0Lung
Proximate and eontributory cause(s) of accident or incident:
0 Shoulder 0 Stomach 0 Intoxication, alcohol 0 Intoxication, narcotics
--::-:-:--::-... D=:o<-C_ar_do;-io_v_as_c.,....q:O=_::::-.O-:-th-er-=='-! 0 Adverse weather
Location wben injured/at time of near miss: g Unknown D Command problem
0 Aft area 0 Bridge 0 Cargo hold 0 Excessive task/wk load
0 Pump room 0 Cargo tank 0 Deck stores 0 Inappropriate policy
0 Deck, open 0 Engine rm 0 Engine stores 0 Carelessness
0 Fire room 0 Forepeak 0 Galley 0 Cognitive function error
0 Fwd area 0 Fuel tank 0 Laundry rm 0 Fatigue
0 Machinery D Mast, boom, 0 Mid-ship 0 Inaccurate info flow
spaces
0 Quarters
0 Ballast tank
OVoid
0Mudpit
rigging
0 Paint locker
0 Shaft alley
0 Cofferdam
0 Drill. platfom
area
0 Offices
0 Passageway
0 Steering spc
0 Windlass rm
00ther
D Design-emergency sys's
0 Design-work station
0 Physical factors
0 Deck slippery
0 Failure-use PFD
Root cause(s): 0 Chemical rxn or release
0 Managemnt Commitment D Record keeping D No/lnad. PPE available
0 Employee Involvement 0 Contract/third party 0 Improper maintenance
0 Hazard id, eva!, control 0 Investigatjon 0 Improper supervision
0 Training 0 Systematic Evaluation 0 Improper light"
0 Improper
lnvestigator __________ Date:___ 0 Inadequate/miss rail
Signature
Captain/PIC Date:
FIG. A7.1 Data Form
1471
0 Faulty planning
0Haste
0 Task time problem
0 Boredom, inattention
0 Judgment error
0 Inadequate training
0 Untimely info flow
0 Design-control interface
0 Design-general layout
0 Psychological factors
0 Deck cluttered
0 Equipment failure
0 No PFD available
0 Failure-use PPE
0 Inadequate/miss guard
0 Insufficient ventilation
0 Misuse of tools/equip
D Improper tools/equip
0 Material failure
0 Mooring line surge
F2039 - 00 (2012)
Statement of D Injured/Ill Person, D Witness,TI Supervisor ,D Investigator
(Attach extra sheets, drawings, Information if needed.)
Name: (Print)
I Signature:
I Date:
FIG. A7.2 Statement Form
1472
F2039 - 00 (2012)
A8. SYSTEMATIC SHIPBOARD OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM EVALUATION
A8.1 Tools that may help with program evaluation include:
A8.1.1 Trend analysis of fatality, injury, illness, and" near
miss" incident statistics,
A8.1.2 Trend analysis of records of "unsafe acts or behav-
iors",
A8.1.3 Review of vessel safety committee reports and
recommendations, and
A8.1.4 Review of hazardous condition notifications and
abatement actions.
A8.2 Performance measures that may assist in program
evaluation include:
A8.2.1 Lost time incident rate,
A8.2.2 Fatality rate,
A8.2.3 Acute toxic exposure incidents per 1000 employee
work hours,
A8.2.4 Number of nonconformities with standard operating
procedures per 100 employee work hours,
A8.2.5 Percentage of training required by SOHSP com-
pleted on schedule,
A8.2.6 Percentage of annual respiratory fit testing com-
pleted on schedule, and
A8.2.7 Percentage of annual medical monitoring exams
completed on schedule.
1473
A8.3 The audit tool may be used to evaluate a SOHSP. The
elements scored in the audit tool are the first seven elements of
a SOHSP. Some elements are further divided into factors that
are individually scored. The auditor should objectively score
the vessel's SOHSP on each of the individual factors and
elements after obtaining the necessary information to do so.
A8.4 Calculate the overall SCORE, as follows:
A8.4.1 Score each element:
A8.4.1.1 The score for the Management Commitment and
Leadership Element is the lower of the two scores of the
General and Implementation Factors.
A8.4.1.2 The score for the Employee Participation Element
is the lower of the two scores for the General and Hazard
Reporting Factors.
A8.4.1.3 The score for the Hazard Anticipation, Identifica-
tion, Evaluation and Control Element is the average of all six
factors.
A8.4.1.4 The scores for single-factcfr elements are the
scores for the factor.
The overall SCORE is the average score of the seven
element scores and may be assigned a "verbal" description
based upon the score.
SCORE Level of Shipboard Occupational Health and Safety Program
5 Outstanding program
4 Superior program
3 Basic program
2 Developmental program
1 No program or ineffective program
~ F2039 - 00 (2012)
Management Commitment
And Leadership
Overall Program Score
Absent or
Average of 7 Elements Rounded
NoTE 1-Tables A8. l-A8.14 provide the verbal descriptions anchoring the numeric indicators in Fig. AS. I.
FIG. A8.1 Evaluation Form
TABLE A8.1 Management Commitment and Leadership
General
Management commitment and leadership is a precondition for an effective
S O H S ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Management demonstrates no policy, goals, objectives, or interest in
safety and health issues on this vessel.
2 Management sets and communicates safety and health policy and goals,
but remains detached from all other safety and health efforts.
3 Management follows all safety and health rules and gives visible support
to the safety and health efforts of others.
4 Management participates in significant aspects of the site's safety and
health program, such as site inspections, incident reviews, and program
reviews. Incentive programs that discourage reporting of accidents,
symptoms, injuries, or hazards are absent. Other incentive programs may
be present.
5 Site sarety and health issues afe regularly included on agendas of
management operations meetings. Management clearly demonstrates-by
involvement, support, and example--the primary importance of safety and
health for everyone on the work site. Performance is consistent and
sustained or has improved over time.
1474
0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
TABLE A8.2 Management Commitment and leadership
Implementation
Implementation means tools, provided by management, that include:
Resources:
budget
information
expertise/training
personnel
Defined and assigned responsibilities
Commensurate authority to carry out responsibilities
Accountability
1 Tools to implement a safety and health program are inadequate or
missing.
2 Some tools to implement a safety and health program are adequate and
effectively used; others are ineffective or inadequate. Management
assigns responsibility for implementing a site safety and health program to
identified person(s). Management's designated representative has
authority to direct abatement of hazards that can be corrected without
major capital expenditure.
3 Tools to implement a safety and health program are adequate, but are not
all effectively used. Management representative has some expertise in
hazard recognition and applicable standards. Management keeps or has
access to applicable standards on the unit and seeks appropriate
guidance for interpretation of the standards. Management representative
has authority to order/purchase safety and health equipment.
4 All tools to implement a safety and health program are more than
adequate and effectively used. Written safety procedures, policies, and
interpretations are updated based on reviews of the safety and health
program. Safety and health expenditures, including training costs and
personnel, are identified in the vessel budget. Hazard abatement is an
element in management (officers/persons in charge/supervisors)
performance evaluation.
5 All tools necessary to implement a good safety and health program are
more than adequate and effectively used. Management safety and health
representative has expertise appropriate to vessel size and operation and
has access to professional advice when needed. Safety and health
budgets and funding procedures are reviewed periodically for adequacy.
TABLE A8.3 Employee Participation
General
Employee participation provides the means through which those who actually
do the work identify hazards, recommend and monitor abatement, and
otherwise participate in their own protection.
1475
1 Worker participation in workplace safety and health concerns is not
encouraged. Incentive programs are present that have the effect of
discouraging reporting of incidents, injuries, potential hazards, or
symptoms. Employees/employee representatives are not involved in the
shipboard health and safety program.
2 Workers and their representatives can participate freely in safety and
health activities on the unit without fear of reprisal. Procedures are in
place for communication between employer and workers on safety and
health matters. Workers are able to refuse or stop work that they
reasonably believe involves imminent danger. Workers are paid while
performing safety activities.
3 VVorkers and their representatives are involved in the safety and health
program, involved in inspection of work areas, and are permitted to
observe monitoring and receive results. Workers and representatives have
access to information regarding the shipboard health and safety program
including health and safety data trend analysis, job task analysis, and
industrial hygiene sampling data. A documented procedure is in place for
raising complaints of hazards or discrimination and receiving timely
employer response.
4 Workers and their representatives participate in workplace analysis,
inspections and investigations, and development of control strategies
throughout the vessel, and have necessary training and education to
participate in such activities. Workers and their representatives have
access to all pertinent health and safety information, including safety
reports and audits. Workers are informed of their right to refuse job
assignments that pose serious hazards to them pending management
response.
5 Workers and their representatives participate fully in development of the
safety and health program and conduct of training and education. Workers
participate in audits, program reviews conducted by management or third
parties, and collection of samples for monitoring purposes, and have
necessary training and education to participate in such activities. Employer
encourages and authorizes employees to stop activities that present
potentially serious safety and health hazards.
TABLE A8.4 Employee Participation
Hazard Reporting
A reliable hazard reporting system enables employees, without fear of
reprisal, to notify management of conditions that appear hazardous and to
receive timely and appropriate responses.
1 No formal hazard reporting system exists, or employees are reluctant to
report hazards.
2 Employees are instructed to report hazards to management. Supervisors
are instructed and are aware of a procedure for evaluating and responding
to such reports. Employees use the system with no risk of reprisals.
3 A formal system for hazard reporting exists. Employee reports of hazards
are documented, corrective action is scheduled, and records maintained.
4 Employees are periodically instructed in hazard identification and reporting
procedures. Management conducts surveys of employee observations of
hazards to ensure that the system is working. Results are documented.
5 Management responds to reports of hazards in writing within specified
time frames. The workforce readily identifies and self-corrects hazards;
they are supported by management to do so.
0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
TABLE A8.5 Hazard Anticipation, Identification, Evaluation, and
Control
Anticipation, Identification, and Evaluation
Anticipation, identification, and evaluation of hazards involves systematic
review of vessel and equipment design, review of the vessel and equipment
fitness for current conditions and operations, a procurement system that
requires consideration of health and safety aspects of items ordered, vessel
inspections, exposure assessments, job safety analyses, mechanisms for
employees to report hazardous conditions, and review of health and safety data
and records to identify trends.
1 No system or requirement exists for hazard review of planned/changed/
new equipment or operations. There are no requirements to consider
health and safety aspect of items purchased for the vessel. There is no
evidence of comprehensive inspections for safety or health hazards,
exposure assessments, routine job safety analysis, or health and safety
data trend analysis.
2 The person-in-charge of operation and/or equipment changes considers
health and safety implications of the changes but has not had appropriate
training to be able to identify all health and safety consequences of the
changes. The person responsible for procurement considers health and
safety issues but has not been trained on hazards that may be
encountered. Inspections for health and safety hazards are conducted by
vessel and corporate personnel but only in response to accidents or
complaints. The employer has identified principle health and safety
standards appropriate for the vessel. Supervisors dedicate time to
observing work practices and other safety and health conditions in work
areas where they have responsibility.
3 Competent person(s) determine health and safety consequences of
proposed changes in high-hazard operations or equipment before the
changes occur and appropriate precautions are implemented. Competent
person(s) determine health and safety hazards of all items procured and
appropriate precautions are taken when the item is used. Vessel and
corporate personnel with specific training in health and safety hazards
conduct vessel inspections. Items in need of correction are documented.
Inspections include compliance with relevant regulations, industry
standards, and practices. Time periods for corrections are set. Current
hazard analyses are written (where appropriate) for all high-hazard jobs
and processes; analyses are communicated to and understood by affected
employees. Hazard analyses are conducted for jobs/tasks/workstations
where injury or illnesses have been recorded.
4 Competent person(s) in consultation with a qualified professional
determines health and safety consequences of all proposed changes in
operations or equipment before the changes occur, and appropriate
precautions are implemented. Competent person(s) determine health and
safety hazards of all items requested for procurement, identify appropriate
substitutions for hazardous items, or ensure appropriate precautions are
taken if a substitute cannot be identified. A qualified professional
conducted a vessel inspection within the last five years, and competent
person(s), trained in items identified by the qualified professional, conduct
periodic inspections and appropriate corrective actions are taken promptly.
The inspections are planned, with key observations or check points
defined and results documented. Corrections are documented through
followup inspections. Results are available to workers. Current hazard
analyses are documented for all work areas and are communicated and
available to all employees.
5 Qualified professionals in consultation with certified safety and health
professional(s) analyze health and safety consequences of all proposed
changes in operations or equipment, identify substitutions if possible, or
ensures appropriate precautions are implemented as the change occurs.
Competent person(s) in consultation with qualified professional(s) or
certified safety and health professional(s), as needed, identify health and
safety hazards of all items requested for procurement and obtain
substitutes for hazardous items. Regular inspections are planned and
overseen by certified safety or health professionals. Statistically valid
random audits of compliance with all elements of the shipboard health and
safety program are conducted. Observations are analyzed to evaluate
progress. Documented workplace hazard evaluations are conducted by
certified safety and health professional(s). Corrective action is documented
and hazard inventories are updated.
TABlE A8.6 Hazard Anticipation, Identification, Evaluation, and
Control
Control - General
Workforce exposure to all current and potential hazards should be prevented or
controlled by using engineering controls whenever feasible and appropriate,
work practices and administrative controls, and personal protective
equipment.
1 Hazard control is seriously lacking or absent from the vessel.
2 Hazard controls are generally in place, but effectiveness and
completeness vary. Serious hazards may still exist. Employer has
achieved general compliance with applicable standards regarding hazards
with a significant probability of causing serious physical harm. Hatards
that have caused past injuries on the vessel have been corrected.
3 Appropriate controls (engineering, work practice, administrative controls,
and PPE) are in place for significant hazards. Some serious hazards may
exist. Employer is generally in compliance with voluntary standards,
industry practices, and manufacturers' and suppliers' safety
recommendations. Documented reviews determining the need for machine
guarding, energy lockout, ergonomics program, materials handling
procedures, bloodbome pathogen program, confined space entry program,
hazard communication, and other generally applicable programs have
been conducted. The overall program tolerates occasional deviations.
4 Hazard controls are fully in place and are known and supported by the
workforce. Few serious hazards exist. The employer requires strict and
complete compliance with all applicable regulations, consensus standards,
and industry practices and recommendations. All deviations are identified
and causes determined.
5 Hazard controls are fully in place and continually improved upon based on
workplace experience and general knowledge. Documented reviews of
needs are conducted by certified health and safety professionals.
Control
Control - Maintenance
An effective shipboard health and safety program will provide for vessel and
equipment maintenance, so that hazardous breakdowns are prevented.
1476
1 No preventive maintenance program is in place; breakdown maintenance
is the rule.
2 There is a preventive maintenance schedule, but it does not cover
everything and may be allowed to slide or performance is not
documented. Safety devices on machinery and equipment are generally
checked before each shift.
3 A preventive maintenance schedule is implemented for areas where it is
most needed; it is followed under normal circumstances. Manufacturers'
and industry recommendations and consensus standards for maintenance
frequency are followed. Breakdown repairs for safety-related items are
expedited. Safety device checks are documented. Ventilation system
function is observed periodically.
4 The employer has effectively implemented a preventive maintenance
schedule that applies to all equipment. Vessel experience is used to
improve safety-related preventative maintenance scheduling.
5 There is a comprehensive safety and preventive maintenance program
that maximizes equipment reliability.
<0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
Control
Control- Medical Program
An effective shipboard health and safety program will include a suitable
medical program where it is appropriate for the nature of the hazards.
1 Management is unaware of, or unresponsive to occupational medical
surveillance needs. Required medical surveillance, monitoring, and
reporting are absent or inadequate.
2 Required medical surveillance, monitoring, removal, and reporting
responsibilities for applicable standards are assigned and carried out, but
results may be incomplete or inadequate.
3 Medical surveillance, removal, monitoring, and reporting comply with
applicable standards. Employees report early signs/symptoms of job-
related injury or illness and receive appropriate treatment.
4 Health care providers provide followup on employee treatment protocols
and are involved in hazard identification and control on the vessel.
Medical surveillance addresses conditions not covered by specific
standards. Employee concerns about medical treatment are documented
and responded to.
5 Health care providers periodically observe the work areas and activities
and are fully involved in hazard identification and training.
Control
Control-Emergency Preparedness-Planning and Drills
There should be appropriate planning, training/drills, and equipment for
response to emergencies.
1 Little or no effort to prepare for emergencies.
2 Emergency response plans for fire, chemical, and weather emergencies
as required by regulation are present. Training is conducted as required
by the applicable regulation. Some deficiencies may exist.
3 Persons with specific training have prepared emergency response plans.
Appropriate alarm systems are present. Employees are trained in
emergency procedures. The emergency response extends to spills and
incidents in routine operation. Adequate supply of spill control and PPE
appropriate to hazards on site is available.
4 Abandoned ship drills are conducted in accordance no less than annually.
The plan is reviews by a qualified safety and health professional.
5 Vessel personnel with emergency response assignments have adequate
training. All potential emergencies have been identified. Emergency
response plans and performance are reevaluated at least annually and
after each significant incident. Procedures for terminating an emergency
response condition are clearly defined.
1477
TABLE A8.1 0 Hazard Anticipation, Identification, Evaluation, and
Control
Control-Emergency Preparedness-First Aid
First aid/emergency care should be readily available to minimize harm if an
injury or illness occurs.
1 First aid/emergency care cannot be ensured.
2 First aid/emergency care is available on every shift.
3 Personnel with appropriate first aid skills commensurate with likely
hazards on the vessel and as required by applicable regulations are
available. Management documents and evaluates response time on a
continuing basis.
4 Personnel with certified first aid skills are always available on-site; their
level of training is appropriate to the hazards of the work being done.
Adequacy of first aid is formally reviewed after significant incidents.
5 Personnel trained in advanced first aid and/or emergency medical care
are always available on-site.
TABLE A8.11 Safety and Health Training
General
Safety and health training should cover the safety and health responsibilities
of all personnel who work on the vessel or affect its operations. It is most
effective when incorporated into other training about performance requirements
and job practices. It should include all subjects and areas necessary to address
the hazards on the vessel.
1 Vessel personnel depend on experience and peer training to meet needs.
Master/person-in-charge/others in supervisory positions demonstrate little
or no involvement in safety and health training responsibilities.
2 Some orientation training is given to new hires. Some safety training
materials (for example, pamphlets, posters, videotapes) are available or
are used periodically at safety meetings, but there is little or no
documentation of training or assessment of worker knowledge for a given
topic. Masters/persons-in-charge/and others in supervisory positions
generally demonstrate awareness of safety and health responsibilities, but
have limited training themselves or involvement in the site's training
program.
3 Training includes regulatory rights and access to information. Training
required by regulations is provided to all vessel employees. Supervisors
attend training in all subjects provided to employees under their direction.
Vessel personnel can generally demonstrate the skills/knowledge
necessary to perform their jobs safely. Records of training are kept and
training is evaluated to ensure it is effective.
4 Knowledgeable persons conduct safety and health training that is
scheduled, assessed, and documented, and addresses all necessary
technical topics. Employees are trained to recognize hazards, violations of
regulations, and vessel practices. Employees are trained to report
violations to management. Training is followed up with performance
observation and feedback. All site employees-including supervisors and
masters/persons-in-charge-can demonstrate preparedness for
participation in the overall safety and health program. There are easily
retrievable scheduling and record keeping systems.
5 Knowledgeable persons conduct safety and health training that is
scheduled, assessed, and documented. Training covers all necessary
topics and situations, whether addressed in regulations or not, and
includes all persons on the vessel (unlicensed personnel to the master or
person-in-charge, contractors, and temporary employees). Employees
participate in creating site-specific training methods and materials.
Employees are trained to recognize inadequate responses to reported
program violations. Retrievable recordkeeping system provides for
appropriate retraining, makeup training, and modifications to training as
the result of evaluations.
0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
TABLE A8.12 Record Keeping
Data Collection and Analysis
An effective shipboard occupational health and safety program will collect and
analyze injury, illness, and "near miss" incident data for indications of sources
and locations of hazards, and jobs that experience higher numbers of incidents.
By analyzing injury, illness, and "near miss" incident trends over time, patterns
with common causes can be :dentified and prevented.
1 Little or no collection and/or analysis of injury, illness, or "near miss"
incident data. Exposure monitoring is not conducted or documented.
2 Injury, illness, and "near miss" incident data is collected and analyzed, but
not widely used for prevention. CG-2692 is completed for all reportable
marine casualties. Exposure records and analysis are organized and are
available to safety personnel.
3 Injury, illness, and "near miss" incident logs and exposure records are
kept, are audited by shoreside management personnel, and are
essentially accurate and complete. Rates are calculated so as to identity
, high-risk areas and jobs. Liability claims are analyzed and the results are
used in the program. Significant analytical findings are used for
prevention.
4 Shoreside management and vessel master/person-in-charge and
supervisors can identify the frequent and most severe problem areas, the
high-risk areas and job classifications, and any exposures that exceed
OSHA PELs, ACGIH TLVs, or company standards. Data are fully analyzed
and effectively communicated to employees. Injury, illness, and "near
miss" incident data are audited and certified by a responsible person.
5 All levels of management and the workforce are aware of results of data
analyses and resulting preventive activity. External audits of accuracy of
injury, illness, and "near miss" incident data, including review of all
available data sources are conducted. Scientific analysis of health
information, including nonoccupational databases is included where
appropriate in the program.
TABLE A8.13 Contract and Third Party Personnel
General
An effective safety and health program protects all personnel on the vessel,
including the employees of contractors, subcontractors, and third party
personnel. It is the responsibility of shoreside management and the vessel
master or person-in-charge to address contractor safety and third party safety.
1 Shoreside management and the vessel master or person-in-charge make
no provision to include contractors and third party personnel within the
scope of the vessel's health and safety program.
2 Vessel safety policy requires contractor and third party personnel to
conform to applicable regulations and other legal requirements.
3 The master/person-in-charge designates a representative to monitor
contractor and third party safety and health practices, and that individual
has authority to stop contractor practices that expose host or contractor
employees to hazards. Management informs contractor and employees of
hazards present at the facility.
4 Shoreside management investigates a contractor's safety and health
record as one of the bidding criteria. Shoreside management contacts
third party personnel management if necessary to correct unsafe third
party behavior.
5 The vessel's health and safety program ensures protection of everyone
employed at the work site including full-time employees, temporary
employees, contractors, and third party personnel.
1478
F2039 - 00 (2012)
TABLE A8.14 fatality, Injury, Illness, and Incident Investigation
General
An effective shipboard occupational health and safety program wilt provide tor
investigation of accidents and "near miss" incidents, so that their causes,
and the means lor their prevention, are identified.
1 No investigation of accidents, injuries, near misses, or other incidents is
conducted.
2 Some investigation of incidents takes place, but root cause may not be
identified, and correction may be inconsistent. Supervisors prepare injury
reports for lost time incidents greater than 72 h.
3 All "OSHA recordable incidents" are documented in a log. Reports are
generally prepared with cause identification and corrective measures
prescribed.
4 "OSHA recordable incidents" are always investigated, and effective
prevention is' implemented. Reports and recommendations are available to
employees. Trained safety personnel systernaticaiiy review quality and
completeness of investigations.
5 All loss-producing accidents and "near-misses" are investigated for root
causes by teams or individuals that include trained safety personnel and
APPENDIX
Xl. RATIONALE
Xl.l This guide was developed by a group of management,
labor, and government people involved in the shipping indus-
try. Members of the group agreed that guidance in the area of
occupational health and safety would be helpful to the shipping
industry. However, they did not want a detailed prescriptive
standard, nor did they want to produce something that already
existed. The group researched existing guidance at the national
and international levels and came to the agreement that
research existed that outlined key elements to effective health
and safety program implementation. These elements are
contained in this guide with amplifying information
cally geared toward the shipping industry. The literature used
in development of the guide is listed in the Reference Section
6
The boldface numbers given in parentheses refer to a list of references at
end of the text.
REFERENCES
(l) 14 Elements of a Successful Safety and Health Program, National
Safety Council, 1994, and Basic Elements of a Shipyard Health and
Safety Program, National Shipbuilding Research Program, SP-5
Committee.
(2) How to Write an Accident Prevention Program, State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries, 1996 (Draft).
(3) Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries-Health, Safety and Environ-
mental Management Systems, International Organization for Stan-
dardization Technical Committee 67, ISC 6Nl59 {Draft).
1479
(4) AIHA Guidance Document: Occupational Health and Safety Manage-
ment System, American Industrial Hygiene Association, 1996.
(5) Employee Health and Safety Code of Management Practices, Respon-
sible Care, Chemical Manufacturer's Association.
(6) Essentials of Safety and Health Management, R. W. Lack, ed., CRC
Press, Inc., 1996 .
(7) "Human Factors Digest No. 7, Investigation of Human Factors in
Accidents and Incidents," International Civil Aviation Organization
Circular 240-AN/144.
<0 F2039 - 00 (2012)
COPYRIGHT/).
1480
A Designation: F2044- 09
.. qll
1
INTERNATIONAL
Liquid Level Indicating Equipment, Electrical
1
1. Scope
1. 1 This specification covers the requirements for electrical
liquid level indicating equipment for shipboard low pressure
and high pressure tanks containing freshwater, feed water,
potable water, seawater, wastewater, diesel fuel, lubricating oil,
contaminated oil, refrigerants, JP fuels, and various other
fluids. Application includes compensating tanks in which the
equipment must locate the interface.
1.2 Each liquid level indicating equipment typically consists
of the following components:
(a) One or more sensing devices;
(b) Flexible interconnections, if needed;
(c) Primary indicator panel assembly;
(d) Auxiliary indicator panel assembly, when required; and
(e) Portable indicator panel assembly, when required.
only. Where information is to be specified, it shall be stated in
SI units.
1.5 Special requirements for naval shipboard applications
are included in the Supplement to this standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D395 I Practice for Commercial Packaging
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.1 0 on
Electrical.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2009. Published August 2009. Originally
approved in 2000. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as F2044 00, which was
withdrawn in March 2009 and reinstated in August 2009. DOl: 10.1520/F2044-09.
2
the ASTM website.
2.2 ISO Standards:
9001 Qual.ity System Model for Quality Assurance in
DesigniDcvelopment, Production, Installation, and Ser-
vicing3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 hysteresis-maximum difference in output, at any
measurand value within the specified range, when the value is
approached first with increasing and then with decreasing
measurand.
3.1.2 insulation resistance-the resistance measured be-
tween insulated portions of a liquid level indicating equipment
and between insulated portions of a liquid level indicating
equipment and ground when a specified de voltage is applied
under specified conditions.
3.1.3 output-electrical or numerical quantity, produced by
a liquid level indicating sensor or measurement system, that is
a function of the applied measurand.
3.1.4 pressure cycling-the specified minimum number of
specified periodic pressure changes over which a liquid level
indicating sensor will operate and meet the specified perfor-
mance.
3.1.5 process medium-the measured fluid (measurand) that
comes in contact with the sensing element.
3.1.6 repeatability-ability of a liquid level indicating
equipment to reproduce output readings when the same mea-
surand value is applied to it consecutively, under the same
conditions, and in the same direction.
3.1.7 response-the measured output of a liquid level indi-
cating sensor to a specified change in measurand.
3.1.8 signal conditioner-an electronic device that makes
the output signal from a sensor element compatible with a
readout system.
3.1.9 wetted parts-liquid level indicating equipment com-
ponents with at least one surface in direct contact with the
process medium.
3
1481
APThl, F2044 - 09

4. Designation
4.1 Designation-Most liquid level indicating equipment
manufacturers use designations or systematic numbering or
identifying codes.
4.2 Design-Liquid level indicating equipment typically
consist of a sensing device that may or may not be in contact
with the process medium, a transduction element that modifies
the signal from the sensing device to produce an electrical
output, and an indicator panel assembly to show the level of the
medium being measured. Some parts of the sensing device may
be hermetically sealed if those parts are sensitive to and may be
exposed to moisture. The output cable must be securely
fastened to the body of the sensing device. A variety of sensing
devices is used in liquid level indicating equipment. In the
most common types of devices, sensing techniques such as
admittance/impedance, magnetic float, static pressure, differ-
ential pressure, time domain reflectometry, radar, capacitive,
resistance tape-type and ultrasonic are used. The function of
the sensing device is to produce a measurable response to the
admittance, impedance, differential pressure, reflected energy,
capacitance, or resistance of the fluid being measured. The
following is a brief introduction to the major level sensing
technology design categories.
4.2.1 Sensing Techniques-The sensing device typically
does not use any part of the tank structure as part of the sensing
device.
4.2.1.1 Admittance and Impedance-The admittance and
impedance sensing technique uses the apparent resistance to
the current flow of an alternating current in the sensing device
circuit or its reciprocal with respect to the level of the measured
fluid in the tank.
4.2.1.2 Magnetic Float-The magnetic float sensing tech-
nique uses a float with embedded magnets to change the circuit
status of the sensing device and produce an electrical signal
proportional to the float's position with respect to the level of
the measured fluid in the tank.
4.2.1.3 Differential Pressure-The differential pressure-
sensing technique uses the pressure difference regardless of the
ambient pressure to change the circuit status of the sensing
device and produce an electrical signal proportional to the level
of the measured fluid in the tank.
4.2.1.4 Time Domain Refiectometry-The time domain re-
flectometry sensing technique uses a high frequency electro-
magnetic wave transmitted along a transmission line, wire,
cable, or rod to determine the level of the measured liquid( s) by
detecting changes in and timing the reflected energy.
4.2.1.5 Capacitive-The capacitive-sensing technique uses
the change in capacitance of the sensing device to produce an
electrical signal proportional to the level of the measured fluid
in the tank.
4.2.1.6 Resistance Tape-The resistance-tape-type sensing
technique uses the change in circuit resistance in the sensing
device to produce an electrical signal proportional to the level
of the measured fluid in the tank.
4. 2.1. 7 Static Pressure-The static head technique measures
the static (head) pressure caused by the measured liquid
relative to the ambient pressure to change the circuit status of
the sensing device and produce an electrical signal proportional
to the level of the measured fluid in the tank.
4.2.1.8 Radar-The radar technique uses a high frequency
electromagnetic wave transmitted through the air, including
guided inside a hollow tube, to determine the level of the
measured liquid(s) by detecting changes in and/or timing the
reflected energy.
4.2.1. 9 Ultrasonic-The ultrasonic technique uses high fre-
quency sonic waves transmitted either through the air or in the
liquid to be measured, to determine the measured liquid( s)
level by detecting changes in and/or timing the reflected
energy.
4.3 Process Medium-The following are the most common
types of process media. The first column identifies fluids that
are measured in the tank. The second column identifies the
liquid or gas that interfaces with the measured fluid.
Fluid
Contaminated fuel
Contaminated oil
Fuel (diesel fuel, cargo fuel, gasoline)
Freshwater, potable water, feed water
Hydraulic oil
JP-5, JP fuels
Lubricating oil
Refrigerants
Synthetic oil
Seawater
Turbine oil
Waste oil
Wastewater, sanitary waste
Liquid or Gas
air
compressed air
compressed gas
Water
steam
seawater
wastewater
4.4 Pressure Rarige-The liquid level indicating equipment
must be able to withstand the expected fluid pressures in the
tank. Pressure range specification must take into account
expected pressures to be encountered in differing tank sizes and
fluid types for a particular sensor type.
4.5 Display-The display for liquid level indication is
typically specified as analog, digital, or both.
5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with all of
the pertinent application data shown in accordance with 5.2. If
special application operating conditions exist that are not
described.
5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
must specify the following:
(a) Title, number, and date of this specification;
(b) Manufacturer's part number;
(c) Sensing technique;
(d) Application;
(e) Pressure range;
1482
(f) Display requirements (see 4.5) and indication range;
(g) Indicator panel assembly mounting method;
(h) Indicator panel assembly requirements;
(i) System operating characteristics;
G) Materials;
(k) Environmental requirements;
(l) Quantity of liquid level indicating equipment required;
(m) Size and weight restrictions (see 7 .5);
(n) Critical service life requirements (see 8.1);
0 F2044-09
(o) Performance requirements (see 8.2);
(p) Special surface finish requirements (see 9.1);
(q) When certification is required (see Section 13);
(r) Special marking requirements (see Section 14);
(s) Special packaging or package marking requirements
(see Section 15);
(t) When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not re-
quired (see 16.1); and
(u) Special warranty requirements (see 16.2).
6.1 Sensing Devices-The materials for the sensing devices
and wetted pans shall be selected for long-term compatibility
(see 8.1) with the process medium (see 4.3).
sible for ensuring that materials used are manufactured, exam-
ined, and tested in accordance with the specifications and
7. Physical Properties
7.1 Enclosure-Unique or special enclosure requirements
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2).
7.2 Liquid Level Indicating Equipment Mounting-Liquid
level indicating equipment is commonly mounted using brack-
ets or similar hardware.
7.3 External Configuration-The outline drawing shall
show the configuration with dimensions in SI units (inch-
pound units). The outline drawing shall include limiting
dimensions for electrical connections if required. The outline
drawing shall indicate the mounting method with hole size,
center location, and other pertinent dimensions. Where
threaded holes are used, thread specifications shall be provided.
7.4 Electrical Connection-Electrical flexible interconnec-
tions shall be provided with each liquid level indicating sensor
as specified in the contract (see 5.1).
7.5 Size and Weight-The user may have intended applica-
tions in which size and weight are limited. Size and weight
restrictions shall be specified in the acquisition requirements
(see 5.2).
8.1 Service Life-The user may have a minimum specified
service life requirement that may be critical. Critical service
life requirements shall be specified in the acquisition require-
ments (see 5.2).
8.2 Liquid Level Indicating Equipment Performance
-Performance tolerances are usually specified in percent of
indicator full scale. Critical performance requirements shall be
specified in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2). The follow-
ing performance characteristics and environmental exposures
may or may not be important to each user's intended applica-
tion.
Accuracy
Response time
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Insulation resistance
Specific gravity
Fluid conductivity
Tank wall proximity
Inclination
Spike voltage
Salt spray
Pressure
Vibration
Shock
Enclosure
de magnetic field
Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Immersion
Supply line voltage and frequency variation
9.1 Finish and Appearance-Any special surface finish and
appearance requirements shall be specified in the acquisition
requirements (see 5.2).
10. Inspection
(a) First article tests (see 10.2) and
(b) Conformance tests (see 10.3).
10.2 First Article Tests-First article test requirements shall
be specified, where applicable. First article test methods should
be identified for each design and performance characteristic
specified. Test report documentation requirements should also
be specified.
10.3 Conformance Tests-Conformance testing is accom-
plished when first article tests were satisfied by a previous
acquisition or the product has demonstrated reliability in
similar applications. Conformance tests are usually less inten-
sive than first article tests, often verifying that samples of a
production lot meet a few critical performance requirements.
1483
11.1 Test Specimen-The number of test specimens to be
subjected to first article tests shall be specified and should
depend on the liquid level indicating equipment design. Gen-
erally, one liquid level indicating equipment of each type (that
is, sensing technique, application, pressure range, display, and
indication range) shall be subjected to first article testing.
12. Test Data
12.1 Test Data-Test data shall remain on file at the manu-
facturer's facility for review by the buyer upon request. It is
recommended that test data be retained in the manufacturer's
files for at least three years or a period of time acceptable to the
buyer and manufacturer.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the acquisition requirements (see
5.2), the buyer shall be furnished certification that samples
F2044-09
representing each lot have been either tested or inspected as
directed in this specification and the requirements have been
met.
14. Product Marking
14.1 User specified product marking shall be listed in the
acquisition requirements (see 5.2). The minimum data to be
clearly marked on each liquid level indicating equipment shall
(a) Manufacturer's name,
(b) Manufacturer's part number,
(c) Serial number or lot number,
(d) Date of manufacture (not required if serial number is
traceable to date of manufacture), and
(e) Excitation voltage.
15.1 Packaging of Product for Delivery- Product should be
packaged for shipment in accordance with Practice D3951.
15.2 Any special packaging or package marking require-
ments for shipment or storage shall be identified in the
acquisition requirements (see 5.2).
16.1 Quality System-A quality assurance system in accor-
dance with ISO 9001 shall be maintained to control the quality
of the product being supplied effectively, unless otherwise
specified in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2).
16.2 Responsibility for Warranty-Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the manufacturer is responsible for the following:
(a) All materials used to produce a unit and
(b) Workmanship to produce the unit.
Special warranty requirements shall be specified in the
17. Keywords
17.1 level indicator; liquid level; sensing device; tank level
The following supplementary requirements established for U.S. Naval shipboard application shall
apply when specified in the contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between the standard
F25(LLIE)M-99 and this supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence for
equipment acquired by this supplement. This document supersedes MIL-L-23886, Liquid Level
Indicating Equipment (Electrical), for new ship construction.
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATING EQUIPMENT (ELECTRICAL)
S1. Scope
S 1.1 This specification supplement covers the requirements
for electrical liquid level indicating equipment for use in low
pressure and high pressure tanks aboard naval ships containing
freshwater, feed water, potable water, seawater, wastewater,
diesel fuel, lubricating oil, contaminated oil, refrigerants, JP
fuels, and various other fluids.
S 1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. Inch-pound units are provided for information only.
Where information is to be specified, it shall be stated in SI
units.
S2. Reference Documents
S2.1 ABS Rules:
Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels
4
S2.2 ISO Standards:
9001 Quality System-Model for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing
5
4
Available from American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), ABS Plaza, 16855
5
S2.3 Military Standards:
MIL-C-17 Cables, Radio Frequency, Flexible, Coaxial
6
MIL-C-915 Cable and Cord, Electrical, for Shipboard Use,
General Specifications for
6
MIL-C-24231 Connectors, Plugs, Receptacles, Adapters,
Hull Inserts, and Hull Insert Plugs, Pressure-Proof, General
Specification for
MIL-L-17331 Lubricating Oil, Steam Turbine and Gear,
Moderate Service
6
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High-Impact); Shipboard Ma-
chinery, Equipment and Systems, Requirements for
6
MIL-S-16032 Switches and Detectors, Shipboard Alarm
Systems
6
Excited)
6
MIL-STD-461 Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics
of Subsystems and Equipment, Requirements for the Control
1484
6
F2044-09
MIL-STD-1399 Section 070, Interface Standard for Ship-
board Systems, D.C. Magnetic Field Environment
6
MIL-STD-1399 Section 300, Interface Standard for Ship-
board Systems, Electric Power, Alternating Current
6
S2.4 NEMA Standards:
250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maxi-
mum)7
S3. Terminology
S3.1 Terminology is consistent with that of Section 3 and
the referenced documents.
S4. Designation
S4.1 Designation-For this specification, liquid level indi-
cating equipment designations shall be assigned as specified in
S5.1 and listed in the format below:
Example: F25(LLIE)M-MF-SW/AR-LP-A-005/245/250
Specification MF SW/AR LP A
005/245/
250
F25(LLIE)M Sensing Application Pressure Display Indication
technique range range
S4.2 S4.3 S4.4 S4.5 S4.6
S4.2 Sensing Technique-The sensing technique shall be
designated as follows:
AZ - Admittance/impedance
CA - Capacitive
DP - Differential pressure
MF Magnetic float
RD Radar
RT Resistance tape type
TD - Time domain reflectometry
SP Static pressure (head)
US - Ultrasonic
S4.3 Application-The fluid to be measured shall be desig-
nated as follows. The first two-letter designation identifies the
fluid to be measured in the tank. The second two-letter
designation identifies the liquid or gas that interfaces with the
measured fluid.
Fluid
CF - Contaminated fuel
CO Contaminated oil
FO- Fuel (diesel fuel, cargo fuel,
gasoline)
FW Freshwater, potable water,
feed water
HO - Hydraulic oil
JP - JP-5, JP fuels
LO - Lubricating oil
RF - Refrigerants
SO Synthetic oil
SW - Seawater
TO - Turbine oil
WO - Waste oil
WW - Wastewater, sanitary waste
Liquid or Gas
AR-Air
CA - Compressed air
CG - Compressed gas
ST-Steam
SW - Seawater
WW -Wastewater
S4.4 Pressure Range-The pressure range under which the
sensing device shall operate shall be designated as follows:
7
AP Vacuum pressure of 749-mm mercury (29.5-in. mercury) to
138 kPa
(20 psig) inclusive.
VP- Vacuum pressure of 749-mm mercury (29.5-in. mercury) to
689 kPa
(100 psig) inclusive.
LP- From 0 kPa to 689 kPa (0 to 100 psig) inclusive.
HP- From 696 kPa (101 psig) to maximum pressure as specified
(see S5.2).
S4.5 Display-The display shall be designated as follows:
A-Analog
D-Digital
C - Analog and digital
S4.6 Indication Range-The indication range shall be des-
ignated by three numbers, separated by a slash. Each number
shall represent a height in millimetres above the bottom of the
tank. The first number shall indicate where liquid level
indication shall begin. The second number shall indicate where
liquid level indication shall end. The third number shall
indicate the total height of the tank.
the pertinent application data in accordance with S5.2. If
special application operating conditions exist that are not in the
acquisition requirements, they shall also be described.
S5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
shall specify the following:
(b) Part designation required (see S4.1);
1485
(c) National Stock Number (NSN) if available;
(c) National Stock Number (NSN) if available;
(d) Quantity of liquid level indicating equipment required;
(e) If pressure range is HP, the maximum pressure required (see
S4.4);
(f) If deviation requests are not required when departing from
material guidance (see S6);
(g) If the maximum height of any individual component is
other than 3048 mm (120 in.) or maximum weight of any
individual component is other than 16 kg (35 lbs) (see S7.6);
(h) If primary indicator panel assembly is panel or bulkhead
mounted (see S7.9);
(i) If more than one liquid level display is required for the
primary indicator panel assembly (see S7 .9);
(j) If volumetric accuracy is required (see S7.9.1);
(k) If a control circuit is required and whether settings are to be
two high, two low, one high and one low, or two high and two
low (see S7.9.2);
(1) If alarm lights are required on primary indicator panel
assembly (see S7.9.3);
(m) If audible alarm and alarm acknowledge switch are
required on primary indicator panel assembly (see S7.9.3);
(n) If a protective shield is required for primary indicator panel
assembly (see S7.9.4);
(o) If auxiliary indicator panel assembly is required. Specify
either panel or bulkhead mounted, and what is required in
addition to a liquid level display (see S7.10);
(p) If portable indicator assembly is required (see S7.11);
(q) If epoxy coating is required (see S7.13);
(r) If special purpose equipment is not to be provided (see
0 F2044-09
S7.14);
(s) If indicator dial is not to be furnished blank or if additional
information is to be identified on the dial or if dials are to have
other than black letters, numerals, and graduations on a white
background (see S7.15.1);
(t) If red illumination is required for liquid level display (see
S7.15.2);
(u) If audible signals are required for any remote station (see
S7.16);
( v) If de magnetic field strength requirement is other than 400
Nm (see S8.16 and S12.2.15);
(w) When first article tests are required (see Sl0.3);
(x) Sampling and acceptance numbers for Group A and Group
B testing (see S 11.1 and S 11.3);
(y) If the inclination angle is other than 45 (see Sl2.2.8);
(z) Special product marking requirements (see S14);
(aa) Special packaging or package marking requirements (see
Sl5);
(bb) When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not required
(see Sl6.1); and
(cc) Special warranty requirements (see Sl6.2).
S5.3 First Article Tests-When first article testing is re-
quired, the buyer should provide specific guidance to offerors
whether the item(s) should be a preproduction sample, a first
article sample, a first production item, a sample selected from
the first production items, or a standard production item from
the manufacturer's current inventory. The number of items to
be tested in accordance with S 10.4 should be specified. The
buyer should include specific instructions in acquisition docu-
ments regarding arrangements for tests, approval of first article
test results and time period for approval, and disposition of first
articles. Invitations for bids should provide that the buyer
reserves the right to waive the requirement for samples for first
article testing to those bidders offering a product which has
been previously acquired or tested by the buyer; and that
bidders offering such products, who wish to rely on such
production or test, must furnish evidence with the bid that prior
buyer approval is presently appropriate for the pending con-
tract. The manufacture of items before buyer approval should
be specified as the responsibility of the manufacturer.
S6. Materials
S6.1 General-Toxic materials shall not be used in potable
water applications.
S6.2 Metals -Unless otherwise specified herein, all metals
used in the construction of liquid level indicating equipment
shall be corrosion resistant or treated to provide corrosion
resistance. Dissimilar metals shall not be used in contact with
each other unless suitably finished to prevent electrolytic
corrosion. The materials for wetted parts shall be selected for
long-term compatibility (see S8.1) with the contacted fluid,
liquid, or gas (see S4.3).
S6.3 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the con-
struction of liquid level indicating equipment shall in the end
configuration be noncombustible or fire retardant in the most
hazardous of atmosphere, pressure, and temperature to be
expected in the application. Fire retardance shall not be
achieved by use of nonpermanent additives to the material.
S6.4 Fungus-Resistant Materials-Materials used in the
construction of liquid level indicating equipment shall not
support the growth of fungus.
S6.5 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning Agents-When
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal compo-
nents, no degradation shall result during in-service use.
S7 .1 Configuration-Each liquid level indicating equip-
ment shall consist of the following components:
(a) One or more sensing devices,
(b) Flexible interconnections, if needed,
(c) Primary indicator panel assembly,
(d) Auxiliary indicator panel assembly, when required (see
S5.2), and
(e) Portable indicator assembly, when required (see S5.2).
S7 .2 Magnetic Float Liquid Level Switches-Magnetic float
liquid level switches shall be in accordance with MIL-S-16032.
S7 .3 Microprocessors-When microprocessors are used to
perform processing and control functions, built-in test (BIT)
shall be provided in the form of firmware residing in program-
mable read only memory. To assist troubleshooting, BIT shall
indicate basic failure modes of the equipment such as power
supply parameters out of tolerance.
S7.4 Testability-No mechanical or electrical disassembly
shall be required for the purpose of obtaining access to test
points or adjustments, except for removal of a cover plate.
S7 .5 Safety-For JP, CF, CO, WO, and FO applications, the
portions of the liquid level indicating equipment inside the tank
shall be in accordance with the hazardous area requirements of
ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels, except
flexible interconnections shall be in accordance with S7.8.
S7.6 Size and Weight-Unless otherwise specified (see
S5.2), the maximum height of any individual component shall
be 3048 mm (120 in.). Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2),
the maximum weight of any individual component shall be 16
kg (35 lbs).
S7.7 Interchangeability-In no case shall parts be physi-
cally interchangeable or reversible unless such parts are also
interchangeable or reversible with regard to function, perfor-
mance, and strength.
S7.8 Flexible Interconnections-Electrical flexible inter-
connections, including tank penetration cables, shall have high
pressure pin connections in accordance with MIL-C-24231 on
high pressure tank penetrations. Flexible interconnections shall
permit easy repair, replacement, substitution, or bypassing of
sensing devices. No interconnection boxes or junction boxes
shall be installed inside of any tank. Flexible interconnections
shall be Type I or Type II as specified herein.
S7 .8.1 Type I Flexible Interconnections-Type I flexible
interconnections shall be used in FO, CF, CO, WO, and JP
applications. For sensing techniques other than TD, the cable
shall be shielded, water-blocked cable consisting of watertight
primary conductors, insulated with crosslinked (XL) modified
polyalkene and with an outer layer of XL-modified polyvi-
nylidene fluoride. The primary conductors shall be water
blocked and wrapped with polyester tape. The shield shall be
tin-plated copper and water blocked and wrapped with another
1486
F2044-09
polyester tape layer. The cable jacket shall be XL-modified
ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene copolymer. The final cable formu-
lation shall meet the physical characteristics as specified in
MIL-C-915. For TD sensing techniques, the cable shall be
FEP-jacketed coax cable in accordance with MIL-C17/127.
S7.8.2 Type II Flexible Interconnections-Type II flexible
interconnections shall be used in applications other than FO,
CF, CO, WO, and JP applications. Type II flexible intercon-
nections shall be of watertight flexing construction in accor-
dance with MIL-C-915 and MIL-C-915/8, Type DSS, TSS,
FSS, and 755. The cable outer jacket shall be butadiene
copolymer with an acrylonitrile content of 40 : 10 % by
volume. The final cable formulation shall meet the physical
characteristics (tensile strength, elongation, bending endur-
ance, and so forth) as specified in MIL-C-915. For TD sensing
techniques, the cable shall be PEP-jacketed coax cable in
accordance with MIL-C-17 /127.
S7 .9 Primary Indicator Panel Assembly-The primary in-
dicator panel assembly shall be as small and lightweight as
practicable and arranged for bulkhead or panel mounting as
spe;clfted (see Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2), the
primary indicator panel assembly shall provide only a single
liquid level display. The primary indicator panel assembly shall
consist of devices such as regulated power supply, signal
conditioners, controls, and indicators required for proper op-
eration. When specified (see S5.2), a control circuit to be used
for actuating an external device, such as an alarm or pump,
when liquid level reaches predetermined points shall be pro-
vided. Other functional components and parts not included in
the sensing device assembly shall be contained within the panel
enclosure. Where multiple displays are combined on a single
primary indicator panel assembly, there shall be no interaction
between the individual tank liquid level indicating equipment
circuits except that a common power supply and operational
test device may be used.
S7 .9 .1 Signal Conditioner-The signal conditioner shall
provide a continuous output signal from 0 to 200 !lAde, 4 to 20
mAde, 0 to 10 V de, or 1 to 5 V de. The signal conditioner
output shall be uninterrupted from empty to full or over that
portion of the tank to be measured. Unless volumetric accuracy
is specified (see S5.2), the output signal shall be proportional to
the actual liquid level height in the tank. When volumetric
accuracy is specified, the output of the signal conditioner shall
be proportional to the actual liquid level volume in the tank,
and the contracting activity will furnish the tank capacity
curve. Volumetric accuracy shall not be accomplished by
modifications to the indicator dial scale or display.
S7.9.2 Control Circuit-When specified (see S5.2), a con-
trol circuit shall be provided that has two (two high, two low,
or one high and one low), or four (two high and two low)
independently adjustable settings, each of which controls a
two-pole double throw switching device with a contact rating
of 1 A (inductive) at 115 V, 60Hz.
S7.9.2.1 Control Circuit Setpoints-The high level control
circuit setpoints shall be adjustable from 50 to 98 % of the
indicated range. The low level control circuit setpoints shall be
adjustable from 2 to 50 % of the indicated range. No mechani-
cal or electrical disassembly shall be required to access the
control circuit setpoint adjustments except for removal of a
cover plate. A control circuit test means shall be provided to
verify the alarm setpoints and control circuit operation.
S7. 9.3 Controls and Indicators-The following controls
and indicators shall be mounted on the front panel of the
primary indicator panel assembly:
(a) Power-on light (white lens),
(b) Power-on switch,
(c) One or more liquid level displays,
(d) Operational test device,
(e) When required, alarm lights (see S5.2), and
(f) When required, audible alarm and alarm acknowledge
switch (see S5.2). Multiposition switches and controls may be
used to combine functions.
S7.9.4 Protective Shield-The protective shield, when re-
quired (see S5.2), shall be rigid, transparent, shatterproof, and
positioned as close to the indicator as possible to protect the
indicator from accidental damage. The shield shall
not trap moisture and shall be easily removable.
S7 .10 Auxiliary Indicator Panel
(see S5.2), the auxiliary panel enclosure shall be as small and
lightweight as practicable and arranged for bulkhead or
mounting as specified (see S5.2). Unless otherwise specified
(see S5.2), only a liquid level display shall be mounted on the
front panel. The liquid level display shall be of the same type
as on the primary indicator panel assembly. In the event of
failure of the auxiliary indicator panel assembly, a device shall
be provided on the primary indicator panel assembly to allow
isolation of the auxiliary indicator panel assembly. With the
auxiliary indicator panel assembly isolated, the primary indi-
cator panel assembly shall continue to operate as specified
herein.
S7.11 Portable Indicator Panel Assembly-When required
(see S5.2), the portable indicator panel assembly shall meet the
requirements of the primary indicator panel assembly (see
S7 .9), except bulkhead or panel mounting provisions are not
required.
S7.12 Mounting-Component mounting devices or brackets
shall be supplied with the liquid level indicating equipment.
S7.13 Coating-For all seawater applications and when
required (see S5.2), the stationary metallic parts of the liquid
level indicating equipment which may come in contact with the
fluid to be measured, excluding flexible interconnections, shall
be powder epoxy coated.
S7 .14 Maintainability-The liquid level indicating equip-
ment shall facilitate assembly, disassembly, fault isolation,
operational test (for example, setting or checking alarm set-
points and setting or checking full-scale meter deflection), and
preventative maintenance without the aid of special tools or
special purpose equipment. Unless otherwise specified (see
S5.2), special purpose equipment required for initial setup,
equipment change, or troubleshooting shall be provided with
the liquid level indicating equipment. Functional pans shall be
readily identifiable, accessible, and removable for
If possible, all equipment components, excluding float when
used, shall be maintainable outside the tank.
1487
F2044-09
S7.15 Liquid Level Display-Liquid level displays shall be
0 to 200 JlAdc, 4 to 20 mAde, 0 to 10 Vdc, or 1 to 5 Vdc; high
impact shock resistant; and watertight or sealed electrical
indicating meter types in accordance with one of the following:
(a) 4V2 in., 250 with nominal scale length meter;
(b) Panel mounted, edgewise meter;
(c) Digital bargraph-type panel meter with minimum 4-digit
display and minimum 51-segment ( 10 !-segment preferred)
analog display. Light-emitting diode type preferred; and
(d) Digital panel display with 3 V2 digits graduated 0 to 100 %
only. Light-emitting diode type preferred.
S7.15.1 Dials-Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2), liq-
uid level display dials shall be furnished blank, except for
minimum and maximum travel points. The dial shall be readily
removable and replaceable from the front of the liquid level
display without disturbing the pointer or other parts of the
liquid level display. The dial surface shall be suitable for
marking by an installing activity after the liquid level indicat-
ing equipment has been calibrated to a particular tank. When
graduations are specified, they shall extend uniformly over the
full range of the liquid level display and shall be multiples of
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, and so forth. Multiples of any other numbers
or fractions are not permitted. The minimum number of
graduations per dial shall be 24 and the maximum number of
graduations shall be 200. Dials shall begin and end with a
numbered graduation. Markings such as "0" and "F' shall not
be used. When required (see S5.2), additional information shall
be identified on the dial as specified by the contracting activity.
Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2), dials shall have black
letters, numerals, and graduations on a white background. The
indicator pointer shall be black.
S7.15.2 Red Illumination -When red illumination is speci-
fied (see S5.2), the primary indicator shall have white letters,
numerals, and graduations on a black background and shall
contain internal red illumination. The letters, numerals, and
graduations shall appear white under ambient white light and
red under ambient and internal red light. The indicator pointer
shall be either red illuminated or silhouetted against the dial.
Red illuminated dials shall be readable in all levels of incident
illumination up to 0.3 lux. The lighting circuit shall be
ungrounded and shall be energized from a 6-V supply with
separate external terminals.
S7.15.3 Display Visibility-The display shall be clearly
visible from a distance of 3 ft and from a viewing angle of 45
from normal, both vertically and horizontally.
S7 .16 Audible Signals-When audible signals are required
for any remote station (see S5.2), the audible signal shall be
actuated by the signal conditioner output or a control circuit
adjusted to a predetermined level (see S7.9.1 and S7.9.2).
S8. Performance Requirements
S8.1 Service Life-Electrical liquid level indicating equip-
ment shall be constructed for a life of 25 years of operation.
S8.2 Sensing Device Operation-The sensing device shall
not use any part of the tank structure as part of the sensing
device.
S8.3. Accuracy
S8.31 Liquid Level Indicating Equipment Accuracy-
Liquid level indicating equipment accuracy shall be as follows:
(a) Actual liquid level as "height in the tank" or "volume in the
tank" (volumetric accuracy), whichever is specified in S5.2,
shall be within 3 % of full scale and
(b) Repeatability of the indicators shall be within 1 % of full
scale at any point on the scale.
S8.3.2 Control Circuit-Accuracy of adjustable control cir-
cuit setpoints shall be as follows:
(a) Hysteresis of dead band make and break of the control
function when operated through down and up cycles shall not
exceed 3 % including instrument hysteresis and dead band
and
(b) Repeatability of the control point contact shall be within
I % of full scale.
S8.4 Response Time
S8.4.1 Indication Response Time-Liquid level indicating
equipment shall have an indication response time of 0.5 s or
less for liquid level change rates up to 1 in./s. Indication
response time is defined as the time difference between when
a liquid achieves a specified level and when the liquid level
display indicates that specified level within the accuracy
requirements of S8.3.
S8.4.2 Control Circuit Response Time-Control circuit
response time shall be adjustable and shall have a minimum
control circuit response time of 0.5 s and a maximum control
circuit response time of 20 s. The indication response time shall
be in accordance with S8.4.1 regardless of control circuit
response time setting. Control circuit response time is defined
as the time difference between when a liquid reaches a setpoint
level and when the control circuit activates or deactivates the
switching device associated with that setpoint level. Accuracy
shall be in accordance with S8.3.
1488
S8.5 Insulation Resistance-The liquid level indicating
equipment insulation resistance shall be not less than 10 MO.
Accuracy shall be in accordance with S8.3 after measurement
of insulation resistance.
S8.6 Specific Gravity-For applications in which the fluid is
FO, CO, WO, CF, or JP, accuracy shall be in accordance with
S8.3 when subjected to changes in specific gravity. Manual
adjustments shall not be permitted or required to obtain
accuracy.
S8.7 Fluid Conductivity -For applications in which water
of any type is present, accuracy shall be in accordance with
S8.3 when the water conductivity is in the range of 3 to 10 000
11S!cm. Manual adjustments shall not be permitted or required
to obtain accuracy.
S8.8 Tank Wall Proximity-Accuracy shall be in accordance
with S8.3 when the distance from the sensing device to the tank
walls is reduced.
S8.9 Inclination -Accuracy shall be in accordance with
S8.3 when the liquid level indicating equipment is inclined.
Differential pressure sensing devices with ranges less than 20
in. of water may compensate for hydrostatic pressure changes
created by the inclined geometry.
S8.10 Spike Voltage-Accuracy shall be in accordance with
S8.3 after spike voltage is applied.
c4@f F2044 - 09
S8.11 Accelerated Life (Endurance)-The liquid level indi-
cating equipment shall withstand the effects of the accelerated
life test. The temperature range shall be 0 to 60C except for
ST (steam) applications in which the temperature range shall
be 0 to 100C. Performance shall be in accordance with S8.3
throughout the test. After completion of the test and cleaning,
the base metal shall not be visible through the finish nor shall
there be any evidence of blistering, softening, separation from
the base metal, corrosion, or other coating failures. Flexible
interconnections shall not exhibit any signs of deterioration nor
corrosion of connector pins and housings. Upon completion of
the accelerated life tests, accuracy and response time shall be in
accordance with S8.3 and S8.4.
S8.11.1 Power Supply-The power supply shall be compat-
ible with Type I power input as specified in M!L-STD-1399,
Section 300. Nominal power input voltage and frequency shall
be 115 V, 60Hz, single phase. Changes in input voltage and
frequency within 5% of nominal shall have no deleterious
effect on the power supply. Accuracy shall be in accordance
with S8.3.
S8.12 Enclosure-Liquid level indicating equipment to be
installed partially or totally outside the tank shall meet all test
criteria in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures.
Portable liquid level indicating equipment shall meet all test
criteria in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 6 enclosures. Opera-
tion shall be in accordance with S8.3.
S8.13 Pressure-Sensing devices that may be exposed to
seawater or the fluid being measured, complete with entrance
fittings and interconnection fittings, shall withstand the pres-
sure test without physical or electrical damage and without any
leakage or signs of leakage around any of the fittings. Flexible
interconnections shall show no evidence of liquid intrusion or
evidence of mechanical or electrical damage. Accuracy of all
readings shall be in accordance with S8.3 throughout the test
and for the postinspection reference measurement.
S8.14 Vibration-Liquid level indicating equipment shall
show no evidence of mechanical or electrical damage or
loosening of pans when subjected to the vibration test. Oper-
ating controls shall not change status, and there shall be no
transfer of switch contacts during, or as a result of, the
vibration test. Accuracy shall be in accordance with S8.3.
S8.15 Shock-Liquid level indicating equipment shall show
no evidence of mechanical or electrical damage or loosening of
pans as a result of shock tests. Operating controls shall not
change status, and there shall be no transfer of switch contacts
as a result of shock tests. Accuracy shall be in accordance with
S8.3.
S8.16 DC Magnetic Field-Unless otherwise specified (see
S5.2), liquid level indicating equipment shall meet the 400-
A/m de magnetic field environment requirement of MIL-STD-
1399, Section 070, Part 1. Accuracy shall be in accordance
with S8.3.
S8.17 Electromagnetic Inteiference-The liquid level indi-
cating equipment shall meet the requirements of Table II of
MIL-STD-461, except as modified below:
CE101-The test signal shall be applied only to the ac power
leads of the test sample.
CE 102-The test signal shall be applied only to the ac power
1489
CS114-0nly limit Curve #2 shall apply with the frequency
range limited to 10 kHz to 30 MHz.
RElOl-Only the limit curve for 50 em shall apply.
RS 103-The frequency range shall be limited to 10 kHz to 18
GHz with an electric field strength test level of 10 V /m.
Accuracy shall be in accordance with S8.3.
S8.18 Flexible Interconnection-Type I cables shall resist
swelling and show no evidence of liquid intrusion or evidence
of mechanical or electrical damage after immersion testing in
JP-5. Removable flexible interconnections shall meet the
insulation resistance test requirements of S8.5 after completion
of immersion testing.
S9.1 After fabrication, parts and assembled equipment shall
be cleaned of smudges; loose, spattered, or excess solder; weld
metal; metal chips and mold release agents; or any other
foreign material that might detract from the intended operation,
function, or appearance of the equipment. Wires and cables
shall be positioned or protected to avoid contact with rough or
irregular surfaces and sharp edges and to avoid damage to
conductors or adjacent parts. There shall be no evidence of
burns, abrading, or pinch marks in wire or cable insulation that
could cause short circuits or leakage. The clearance between
wires or cables and heat generating parts shall be sufficient to
minimize deterioration of the wires or cables.
SlO. Inspection
S 10.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection re-
quirements specified herein are classified as follows:
(a) First article tests (see Sl0.2) and
(b) Conformance tests (see Sl0.3).
S 10.2 First Article Test-First article tests shall be per-
formed before production. First article tests shall be performed
on samples that have been produced with equipment and
procedures normally used in production. First article tests shall
consist of the tests specified in Table S 10.1. Failure of any
liquid level indicating equipment to meet the requirements of
S10.2.1 Order of First Article Tests-With the exception of
the immersion test which may be performed at any time, the
test specimens (liquid level indicating equipment) shall be
subjected to the tests specified in Table S 10.1 in the order
listed. Any deviation in the test order shall first be approved by
the buyer.
S10.3 Conformance Tests-Liquid level indicating equip-
ment samples in each lot offered for delivery shall be subjected
to the tests listed in Table S 10.2 and shall be conducted in the
order listed. Failure of any liquid level indicating equipment to
meet the requirements of this specification shall be cause for
rejection.
TABLE S1 0.1 First Article Tests
Test
Accuracy
Response time
Specific gravity
Fluid conductivity
Method
812.2.2
812.2.3
812.2.4
812.2.5
812.2.6
Requirement
88.3
88.4
88.5
88.6
88.7

F2044 - 09
dliHfl
TABLE S10.1 Continued
Tank wall proximity
Inclination
Spike voltage
Accelerated life
Enclosure
Pressure
Vibration
Shock
de magnetic field
Electromagnetic
interference
Immersion
S12.2.7
S12.2.8
S12.2.9
S12.2.10
S12.2.11
S12.2.12
S12.2.13
S12.2.14
S12.2.15
S12.2.16
812.2.17
TABLE S1 0.2 Conformance Tests
and
Test
Group A
General examination
Group B
Accuracy
Supply line voltage
variation
Method
S10.4
812.2.4
812.2.2
S12.2.18
S8.8
S8.9
S8.10
S8.11
S8.12
S8.13
S8.14
S8.15
S8.16
S8.17
88.18
S1.6 and 81.7
88.5
S8.3
S8.11.1
S 10.4 General Examination--Each sample equipment shall
be subjected to a general examination to ascertain that the
material, parts, testability, input connectors and color code, size
and weight, accessibility, workmanship, design, proper cable
harness dress, creepage and clearance distances, safety require-
ments, and treatment for prevention of corrosion are in
conformance with this specification. The fit of parts shall be
observed with particular reference to the interchangeability of
such parts as are likely to require replacement during the
normal service life of the equipment. Examination shall also
check all controls, adjustments, displays, indicators, liquid
level indicating equipment description, mounting devices,
signal conditioner, operation, control circuit (including failsafe
design), primary indicator panel assembly, auxiliary indicator
panel assembly, portable indicator panel assembly, protective
shield, sensing device design, and maintainability as applicable
(see S7 and S9).
Sll. Number of Test and Retests
S 11.1 One liquid level indicating equipment of each type
(that is, sensing technique, application, pressure range, display,
and indication range) (see S4.1) shall be subjected to first
article testing when specified (see S5.2).
S 11.2 An inspection lot for conformance inspection shall
consist of all liquid level indicating equipment of each type
(that is, sensing technique, application, pressure range, display,
and indication range) (see S4.1) produced under the same
conditions and offered for inspection at the same time. Sam-
pling and acceptance for Group A and Group B testing shall be
as specified (see S5.2). When the number of rejected equip-
ment, in any sample, exceeds the acceptance number for that
sample, the lot represented by the sample shall be rejected.
S12. Test Methods
S 12.1 Test Conditions-Except where the following factors
are the variables, or unless otherwise specified in the individual
test procedure, the tests specified in S12.2 shall be conducted
with the liquid level indicating equipment operating under the
following conditions:
(a) Ambient temperature shall be 23 1.0C.
(b) Relative humidity shall be 50 5 %.
(c) Supply voltage shall be 115 V 5 %.
(d) Supply frequency shall be 60Hz 5 %.
(e) Controls shall be in the neutral or normal position.
(f) Liquid level indicating equipment shall be mounted to
simulate shipboard installation and measure the liquid level
along the vertical centerline of the test tank (see Sl2.1.1).
(g) Liquid level indicating equipment shall be configured to
indicate liquid level height over a vertical distance equal to the
normal operating range (height) of the sensing device.
(h) The fluid/gas or fluid/water used shall be the same as the
intended application (see S4.3), except that ordinary tap water
having a minimum conductivity of 400 11S may be substituted
for seawater interface applications. For CF applications, the
fluid used for testing shall be JP-5. For CO and WO applica-
tions, the fluid used for testing shall be lube oil 2190 in
accordance with MIL-L-17331, or equal. For CF/AR and
CO/ AR applications, the fluid used for testing shall be water
having a minimum conductivity of 400 flS with a 3- 0.25-in.
layer of JP-5 for CF/AR and lube oil 2190 in accordance with
MIL-L-17331, or equal, for CO/AR applications.
(i) The fluid temperature shall be 25 1 0C.
S 12.1.1 Test Tank-The test tank shall be a carbon steel test
tank coated for surface ship seawater tanks. The test tank shall
be large enough to exercise the liquid level indicating equip-
ment through the normal operating range (height) of the
sensing device for tests specified herein. The tank shall have a
sight glass or similar device with sufficient resolution and
accuracy to determine the accuracy, repeatability, hysteresis,
and dead band requirements of S8.3.
S 12.2 Tests-The liquid level indicating equipment and all
associated test equipment shall be energized for a period of
time sufficient to ensure complete warm-up.
S 12.2.1 Reference Measurement-When specified in the
individual test, a reference measurement shall consist of
measurements of the indicated level versus actual tank level.
(When volumetric accuracy is required (see S5.2), the actual
tank levels and the indicated levels shall be converted to
volumetric levels using the capacity curve supplied by the
contracting activity.) The measurements shall be measured at a
minimum of ten equal increments,
1
/2 % of full scale, for
both increasing (upscale) and decreasing (downscale) level.
The liquid level shall be maintained at each checkpoint for a
time sufficient to obtain a stable measurement, but not longer
than 30 s. Reference measurement accuracy shall meet the
requirements of S8.3. For fluid/water interface liquid level
indicating equipment, the following conditions shall apply:
(a) The tank shall be filled over the entire normal
range (height) of the sensing device. The tank shall be full of
water, full of the measured fluid, or full of some combination
of water and the measured fluid.
1490
(b) The liquid level indicating equipment shall indicate 0 % of
the device normal operating range (height) '"hen the
tank is full of water.
(c) The liquid level indicating equipment shall indicate 1 OU
<0 F2044-09
of the sensing device normal operating range (height) when the
tank is full of the measured fluid.
(d) The two fluids shall not be agitated in any way to create an
emulsion. The two fluids shall be allowed to separate and form
a distinct interface before any measurements are taken.
S 12.2.2 Accuracy
Sl2.2.2.1 Liquid Level Indicating Equipment Operation and
Accuracy-The sensing device shall be conditioned first by
raising and lowering the level between 0 and 100 % of the
sensing device normal operating range (height) for three
consecutive cycles. Three reference measurements (see
Sl2.2.1) shall then be made in succession. Accuracy shall be in
accordance with S8.3.
S 12.2.2.2 Control Circuit Accuracy-The detection points
for the high control circuit setpoints shall be tested at 50, 75,
and 98 % of the sensing device normal operating range
(height). The detection points for the low control circuit
setpoints shall be tested at 2, 25, and 50 % of the sensing
device normal operating range (height). The liquid level shall
be raised above then lowered below each detection point three
successive times. The control circuit accuracy shall be in
accordance with S8.3 at each control circuit setpoint tested.
Sl2.2.3 Response Time Tests-The test tank (see S12.l.l)
shall be used to subject the sensing device to changes in liquid
level at a constant rate. Where it is impractical to achieve the
fill/empty rate specified, this test may be performed by simu-
lating the change in fluid level (for example, raising or
lowering the sensing device by means of a pneumatic cylinder)
at the same rate specified.
S12.2.3.1 Indication Response Time Test-This test is ap-
plicable to all liquid level indicating equipment. When an
adjustable response time is provided, the liquid level indicating
equipment shall be adjusted to its minimum response time
setting. The actual fluid level and the level indicated by the
liquid level displays shall be monitored. The test point levels
shall be 20, 50, and 80 % of the liquid level indicating
equipment normal operating range (height). The fluid level
shall be increased at a constant rate of 1 0.01 in./s through
the test points and then decreased at the same rate through the
test points. The elapsed time from when the actual fluid level
reaches a test point level to when the liquid level indication
equipment indicates the test point level, within the specified
accuracy requirements (see S8.3), shall be measured both
upscale and downscale. The maximum elapsed time shall be
the indication response time. Perfonnance shall conform to the
requirements of S8.4.l.
Sl2.2.3.2 Control Circuit Response Time Test-This test is
applicable only to liquid level indicating equipment with
control circuit(s). When two high control circuits are provided,
one setpoint shall be set at 50 % and one at 80 % of the liquid
level indicating equipment normal operating range (height).
When two low control circuits are provided, one setpoint shall
be set at 20 % and one at 50 % of the liquid level indicating
equipment normal operating range (height). When one high
and one low control circuit is provided, their setpoints shall be
set at 80 and 20 % of the liquid level indicating equipment
normal operating range (height), respectively.
S12.2.3.2.1 Minimum Control Circuit Response Time Test-
The control circuit shall be adjusted to its minimum response
time setting. The fluid level shall be increased at a constant rate
of 1 0.01 in./s through the test points and then decreased at
the same rate through the test points. The elapsed time from
when the actual fluid level reaches a test point level to when the
control circuit activates or deactivates the switching device
associated with that setpoint level shall be measured both
upscale and downscale. The maximum elapsed time shall be
the minimum control circuit response time. Performance shall
conform to the requirements of S8.4.2. This test may be done
concurrently with S 12.2.3.1.
S12.2.3.2.2 Maximum Control Circuit Response Time
Test-The control circuit shaH be adjusted to its maximum
response time setting. The fluid level shall be increased at a
constant rate of 0.25 + 0.005 in./s through the test points and
then decreased at the same rate through the test points. The
elapsed time from when the actual fluid level reaches a test
point level to when the control circuit activates or deactivates
the switching device associated with that setpoint level, and the
elapsed time from when the actual fluid level reaches a test
point level to when the liquid level indication equipment
indicates the test point level within the specified accuracy
requirements (see S8.4.2) shall be measured both upstate and
downscale. The maximum elapsed time between when the
actual fluid level reaches a test point level to when the control
circuit activates or deactivates the switching device associated
with that setpoint level shall be the maximum control circuit
response time. The maximum elapsed time between when the
actual fluid level reaches a test point level to when the liquid
level indication equipment indicates the test point level within
the specified accuracy requirements (see S8.4.2) shall be the
indication response time. Performance shall conform to the
requirements of S8.4.2.
S 12.2.4 Insulation Resistance Test-The insulation resis-
tance of the liquid level indicating equipment shall be deter-
mined by applying 50 V de between electrical input and output
circuits and between these circuits and ground. The insulation
resistance measurement shall be made immediately after a
2-min period of uninterrupted test voltage application. How-
ever, if the indication of insulation resistance meets the
specified limit (S8.5) and is steady or increasing, the test may
be terminated before the end of the 2-min period. The accuracy
test (see S12.2.2) shall be performed after completion of the
insulation resistance measurements. Performance shall con-
form to the requirements of S8.5.
1491
S 12.2.5 Specific Gravity Test
S12.2.5.1 Fluid/Gas Interface Test-This test applies only
to fluid/gas interface applications in which the fluid is FO, CO,
WO, CF, or JP. Two accuracy tests (see Sl2.2.2) shall be
performed, one using water as the test fluid and the other using
an organic fluid with a specific gravity of 0.86 0.02, such as
lube oil. The liquid level indicating equipment shall not be
altered, modified, or manually adjusted during each accuracy
test or between the two accuracy tests. Performance shall
conform to the requirements of S8.6.
0 F2044-09
S12.2.5.2 Fluid/Water Interface Test-This test applies only
to fluid/water interface applications in which the fluid is FO,
CO, WO, CF, or JP. Two accuracy tests (see Sl2.2.2) shall be
performed, the first using water and an organic fluid with a
specific gravity of 0.86 0.02, such as lube oil as the test
fluids, and the second using water and another fluid with a
specific gravity of 0.78 0.02, such as kerosene, as the test
fluids. The liquid level indicating equipment shall not be
altered, modified, or manually adjusted during each accuracy
test or between the two accuracy tests. Performance shall
S12.2.6 Fluid Conductivity Test-This test applies only to
SW, FW, WW, CO, CF, and WO applications. Three accuracy
tests (see S 12.2.2) shall be performed using water with a
different electrical conductivity for each test. The three test
conductivities of water shall be 3 2, 500 50, and 10 000
50 11S/cm. The conductivity of the water shall be controlled
by varying the concentration of sodium chloride in solution
with the water. The liquid level indicating equipment shall not
be altered, modified, or manually adjusted during each accu-
racy test or between the accuracy tests. Performance shall
Sl2.2.7 Tank Wall Proximity Test-The sensing device shall
be located at a comer of the test tank that is formed by two
continuous steel walls and shall be equidistant from each of the
two adjoining walls. The distance to each wall shall either
provide 1 in. of clearance between the sensing device and the
wall or shall be the minimum distance specified by the
manufacturer up to a maximum of 4 in. An accuracy test (see
S12.2.2) shall be performed. Performance shall conform to the
Sl2.2.8 Inclination-The accuracy test (see S12.2.2) shall
be performed except that the liquid level indicating equipment
and the test tank shall be inclined 45, unless otherwise
specified (see S5.2), to each side of vertical along both the
fore-and-aft and athwartship axes of the tank, for a total of four
positions. Reference measurements (see S12.2.1) shall be taken
in each of the four inclined positions. The actual liquid level
shall be measured at the inclined vertical tank centerline.
Performance shall conform to the requirements of S8.9.
Sl2.2.9 Spike Voltage Test-The liquid level indicating
equipment shall be subjected to an input supply line voltage
spike of 2500-V positive peak amplitude; the voltage wave-
shape shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-1399, Section
300, Fig. 2, Voltage Spike Impulse Wave Shape. This spike
shall be impressed at normal supply line voltage and frequency
while the liquid level indicating equipment is operating. The
accuracy test (see S12.2.2) shall be performed at the conclusion
of the test. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S8.10.
Sl2.2.10 Accelerated Life Test-Liquid level indicating
equipment shall be subjected to the accelerated life test as
specified herein. Throughout the test, the temperature of the
fluid in the test tank shall be within plus or minus soc of the
required test chamber temperature. The liquid level in the tank
shall be continuously cycled from empty to full throughout the
test. If the test tank is sealed from the ambient environment, the
humidity inside the test tank need not meet the test chamber
humidity requirements. Performance shall conform to the
Sl2.2.10.1 Initial Test Conditions-The test shall begin
with the following initial conditions:
(a) Equipment set up in a temperature-controlled chamber at 25
soc and relative humidity of 90 to 100 %.
(b) Equipment energized.
1-Nominal line voltage of 115 V 5% and nominal
frequency of 60Hz+ 5 %.
2-Fully operational for 2 h.
(c) When equipment internal temperature has stabilized, per-
formance parameters shall be measured as reference test data
for comparison with subsequent tests.
S 12.2.1 0.2 Temperature Conditions -After initial test con-
ditions have been satisfied, temperature testing shall be per-
formed as follows:
(a) Reduce chamber temperature, at a uniform rate in not less
than 4 h, to the lowest operating temperature of the range
specified and maintain relative humidity of 90 to 100 %.
(b) Maintain chamber temperature at the lowest operating
temperature of the range for 4 h.
(c) Near the end of the fourth hour, measure performance
parameters specified in S8.12.
(d) Increase chamber temperature, at a uniform rate in not less
than 6 h, to the highest operating temperature of the range
specified and maintain humidity at 90 to 100 %.
(e) Maintain chamber temperature at the highest operating
temperature of the range specified for 4 h.
Near the end of the fourth hour, measure performance
(g) Reduce chamber temperature, at a uniform rate in not less
than 6 h, to the lowest operating temperature of the range
specified and maintain humidity at 90 to 100 %.
(h) Maintain chamber temperature at the lowest operating
temperature of the range specified for 2 h.
512.2.10.3 Voltage and Frequency Cycling Conditions-
After completion of the 2-h low-temperature conditioning
period specified in S 12.2.10.2(h), perform the following:
(a) Decrease the input voltage to the lowest limit of the
equipment voltage tolerance band.
(b) Maintain chamber temperature at the lowest operating
temperature and input voltage at the lowest limit for 1 h while
equipment continues to operate, then measure performance
1492
(c) Return input voltage to nominal value. Decrease input
frequency to the lower limit of the equipment frequency
tolerance band.
(d) Maintain chamber temperature at the lowest operating
temperature and input frequency at the lowest limit for 1 h
while equipment continues to operate, then measure perfor-
mance parameters specified in S8.11.
(e) Return input frequency to nominal value.
Increase temperature to 25 soc and maintain relative
humidity at 90 to 100 %. Maintain this condition for 2 h.
With equipment operating at 25 soc and relative
J..."'""''r
1
;i-., at 90 to 100 %, decrease input voltage and frequency
to the lower limits of the equipment voltage and frequency
tolerance bands. Maintain this condition for 1 h and then
F2044-09
measure performance parameters specified in S8.11.
(h) Repeat Sl2.2.10.3(g) with input voltage at the upper limit
of the equipment voltage tolerance band and input frequency at
the lower limit of the equipment frequency tolerance band.
(i) Repeat Sl2.2.10.3(g) with input voltage and frequency at
the upper limits of the equipment voltage and frequency
tolerance bands.
(j) RepeatS 12.2.10.3(g) with input voltage at the lower limit of
the equipment voltage tolerance band and frequency at
the upper limit of the equipment frequency tolerance band.
(k) Repeat uniform temperature rise test of S 12.2.10.2(d).
(l) Measure performance parameters specified in S8.12 at the
end of the uniform temperature rise test of S 12.2.10.3(k).
(m) With equipment operating at the highest operating tem-
perature of the range specified and relative at 90 to
100 %, increase input voltage to the upper limit of the
equipment voltage tolerance band, maintaining input frequency
at the upper limit of the equipment frequency tolerance band.
(n) Operate for 4 hat this condition and measure performance
parameters specified in SS .11.
( o) Maintain input frequency at the upper limit of the equip-
ment frequency tolerance band but decrease input voltage to
the lower limit of the equipment voltage tolerance band.
(p) Operate for 1 h at this condition and measure performance
(q) Maintain high temperature and humidity conditions but
return input voltage and frequency to nominal values.
(r) Operate for 1 h at this condition and measure performance
(s) Reduce temperature to 25 soc and maintain relative
humidity at 90 to 100 %. Maintain this condition for 2 h.
(t) Repeat temperature, voltage, and frequency cycling tests of
S12.2.10.3(g) through (s) with relative humidity at 90 to 100%
for not less than eight cycles.
(u) Repeat uniform temperature rise test of S12.2.10.2(d).
(v) Repeat temperature, voltage, and frequency cycling tests of
S12.2.10.3(m) through (r) with relative humidity at 10 to 20%
for not less than ten cycles.
( w) Reduce chamber temperature, at a uniform rate in not less
than 6 h, reduce relative humidity to 45 to 55 % and return
temperature, voltage, and frequency to nominal values speci-
fied in Sl2.2.10.1.
(x) Operate for 2 hat this condition and perform accuracy (see
Sl2.2.2) and response time (see Sl2.2.3) tests.
Sl2.2.11 Enclosure Test-Each liquid level indicating
equipment enclosure to be installed partially or totally outside
the tank shall be subjected to the tests in NEMA Standard 250
for Type 4X enclosures. The portable indicator assembly shall
be subjected to the tests in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 6
enclosures. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S8.12.
S 12.2.12 Pressure Test-The components of the liquid
level indicating equipment, including flexible interconnections,
subject to immersion in the measured fluid, shall be installed in
a p r ~ s s u r vessel to simulate actual tank installation so that all
parts of the components, especially connections and fittings,
are submerged and remain submerged except when test condi-
tions state otherwise. Before testing, the pressure vessel with
the liquid level indicating equipment installed shall be filled
and allowed to soak for 1 h at atmospheric pressure. Except for
the AP pressure range (see S4.4), the rate of pressure change
shall not be less than 10 lb/in.
2
s. For the AP pressure range, the
rate of pressure change shall not be less than 5 lb/in.
2
s.
S12.2.12.1 Pressure Test Procedure-The pressure test
shall consist of three successive fill and empty cycles. The
pressure vessel shall be filled in ten equal increments through
the sensing device normal operating range (height) at atmo-
spheric pressure and level readings taken at each increment.
The specified pressure (see below) shall then be applied and
held for 1 h. While maintaining the specified pressure with
compressed gas, the pressure vessel shall be emptied in ten
equal increments and level readings shall be taken at each
increment. The pressure shall then be reduced to atmospheric
for 10 min and the cycle repeated twice. During the third
pressure cycle, an insulation resistance measurement (see
S 12. 2.4) shall be made on the sensing device at both the
specified pressure and at atmospheric pressure. The specified
pressure for the test shall be as follows:
(a) AP pressure range sensing devices shall be subjected to 30
psig.
(b) VP and LP pressure range sensing devices shall be
subjected to 150 psig.
(c) HP pressure range sensing devices shall be subjected to 150
% of the maximum pressure specified (see S5.2).
S 12.2.12.2 Posttest Inspection-Upon completion, the
sensing device shall then be removed from the pressure vessel
and disassembled to the maximum extent possible without
affecting sensing device performance or integrity. The sensing
device shall be examined for any physical or electrical damage
and leakage or signs of leakage. The sensing device shall then
be reassembled and a reference measurement (see S 12.2.1)
taken. Performance shall conform to the requirements of S8.13.
1493
S 12.2.13 Vibration Test-Liquid level indicating equipment
shall be tested in accordance with Type I (environmental)
vibration of MIL-STD-167-1. Components of the liquid level
indicating equipment, including sensing devices, shall be
mounted to simulate shipboard installations in an empty tank
and shall not be restricted from normal operation and move-
ment. The equipment under test shall be energized in the
normal manner. At the conclusion of the test and before any
adjustments, accuracy shall be measured (see S12.2.2). Liquid
level indicating equipment shall be physically examined for
evidence of mechanical or electrical damage or loosening of
parts. Performance shall conform to the requirements of S8.14.
Sl2.2.14 Shock Test-Liquid level indicating equipment
shall be tested in accordance with Grade A, Class 1, Type A
equipment as specified in MIL-S-901. The liquid level indicat-
ing equipment shall be energized in the normal manner.
Components of the liquid level indicating equipment, including
sensing devices, shall be mounted to simulate shipboard
installation in an empty tank and shall not be restricted from
normal operation and movement. If individual components of
the liquid level indicating equipment must be shock tested
separately because of size or weight, the complete liquid level
indicating equipment shall be connected together (electrically
and mechanically) as designed, energized, and the output and
0 F2044-09
control circuit signals monitored during the test. At the
conclusion of the test and before any adjustments, the accuracy
shall be measured as specified in S12.2.2. The liquid level
indicating equipment shall be physically examined for evi-
dence of mechanical or electrical damage or loosening of parts.
Sl2.2.15 DC Magnetic Field-The liquid level indicating
equipment shall be tested in accordance with MIL-STD-1399,
Section 070, Part 1. Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2), the
magnetic field strength shall be 400 Nm. Performance shall
S 12.2.16 Electromagnetic Interference Tests-EMI tests
shall be in accordance with the test methods specified in
MIL-STD-461, with the modifications as specified in S8.17.
Upon completion of the EMI tests, an accuracy test (see
Sl2.2.2) shall be performed. Performance shall conform with
the requirements of S8.17.
S12.2.17 Flexible Interconnection Immersion Test-When
intended for use in tanks containing CF, CO, WO, FO, or JP
type fuels, flexible interconnections shall be submerged in JP5
for a continuous period of 45 days. The test fluid temperature
shall be maintained at 25 10C. Removable flexible inter-
connections may be tested with a simulated shipboard instal-
lation using test fixtures to replace sensing devices. After
completion of immersion testing, the flexible interconnection
shall undergo a physical examination and insulation resistance
test (see S 12.2.4). Performance shall conform to the require-
ments of S8.18.
S 12.2.18 Supply Line Voltage and Frequency Variation-
Liquid level indicating equipment shall be operated at normal,
maximum, and minimum steady state voltages and frequencies
(see S8.11.1). The liquid level indicating equipment shall
remain at each configuration for 15 min. A reference measure-
ment (see S12.2.1) shall be performed before and after each
transition. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S8.11. 1.
S13. Certification
S 13.1 The purchase order or contract should specify
whether the buyer shall be furnished certification that samples
met. The purchase order or contract should specify when a
report of the test results shall be furnished. Otherwise, the
purchase order or contract should specify that all test data
review by buyer upon request.
S14.1 Marking-Unless otherwise specified (see S5.2), all
major liquid level indicating equipment components shall be
marked or provided with label plates. Markings on plastic or
metallic materials shall be made by stamping, engraving,
stenciling, or rubber-stamping with smudgeproof ink covered
with a coat of dear lacquer or silk screening. Label plates shall
be made with engraved or stamped markings. At a minimum,
labels and markings shall contain:
(a) "LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR,"
(b) Component name,
(c) Manufacturer's name,
(d) National Stock Number (NSN), if available,
(e) Date of manufacture, and
(f) Designation (see S4.1).
A label plate marked with manufacturer's part number and
serial number shall be permanently affixed on the front of each
indicator panel assembly.
Sl5.1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
dance with Section 15.
S 16.1 Quality System-A quality assurance system in ac-
cordance with ISO 9001 shall be maintained to control the
of the product being supplied effectively, unless other-
in the acquisition requirements (see S5.2).
S 16.2 Warranty-Any special warranty requirements shall
be specified in the acquisition requirements (see S5.2).
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-8329555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
COPYRIGHT!).
1494
a Designation: F2045 - 00 (Reapproved 2011)
~ ~ u l l
INTERNATIONAL
Indicators, Sight, liquid level, Direct and Indirect Reading,
Tubular Glass/Plastic
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for direct and
indirect reading sight liquid level indicators for general appli-
cations. General applications for indirect reading sight glasses
are water and fuel service at working pressures 2.07 MPa (300
lb/in.
2
) and below, temperatures of 149C (300F) and below.
General applications for direct reading sight glasses are appli-
cations in which the temperature does not exceed 66C
(150F).
1.2 Direct reading sight glass indicators may consist of glass
or plastic tubes with fittings including shutoff valves. Glass
tubes may be used for low shock direct reading sight glass
indicators in which the fluid is not compatible with plastic.
1.3 Indirect reading indicators may consist of a sealed
chamber with a magnetic float or flag indicator.
are included in the supplement to this standard.
only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (DoD adopted)
3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
1
Electrical.
DOl: 10.1520/F2045-00Rll.
2
the ASTM website.
3
3.1.1 S/ (Le Systeme International d'Unites) Units-units of
measurement recognized by the CIPM (Comite' International
des Poids et Mesures).
4. Design Classification
4.1 Types-Indicator designs are classified as either direct
reading or indirect reading. Both types are depicted in Fig. 1,
complete with dimensions that facilitate ordering.
4.2 Special Considerations-Special considerations that
may affect selection and installation are listed below. This is
not to be construed as a complete listing.
(I) Type of indicator,
(2) Manual or automatic shutoff valves,
( 3) Indication length of liquid level range,
( 4) Method of connection,
( 5) Location of indicator relative to vibrating equipment,
(6) Protection of the instrumentation,
(7) Application of each indicator,
( 8) Cleaning procedure or reference to the cleaning proce-
dure being used, and
(9) Selection of indicator for compatibility with materials,
temperature, pressure, ambient environment, and with the
parameter being measured.
5.1 The buyer shall provide the manufacturer with aJJ of the
pertinent application data outlined in the acquisition require-
ments.
5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents shall
specify the following:
(I) Title, number, and date of this specification;
(2) Type and quantity of indicators required;
( 3) Manufacturer's part number;
( 4) When qualification testing is required;
( 5) Final disposition of qualification test samples;
(6) Environmental requirements;
(7) Operating media;
( 8) Viscosity and specific gravity of fluid for indirect
indicators;
(9) Materials;
(I 0) Indication length;
1495
F2045 - 00 (2011)
TOTAL I
LENGTH
L
A
TOTAL I
LENGTH
L
FIG. 1 Indicator Design Types
( 11) Size and type of connections;
(12) Shutoff valve requirements;
( 13) Cleaning requirements;
( 14) When certification is required;
( 15) Marking requirements;
(16) Unique packaging requirements; and
( 17) Unique preservation requirements.
6.1 Materials-The materials for all wetted parts shall be
selected for long-term compatibility with the process medium
and ambient conditions.
6.3 Gaskets and 0-Rings-Gaskets and 0-rings shall be
fabricated of materials suitable to the operating pressure,
temperature, and process medium for each application.
1496
7.1 Connections-Sight indicators are usually installed us-
ing standard pipe fittings or flanges. fittings and material
should match that of the existing pipe for each installation.
and size of fittings shall be specified in the acquisition
requirements. Welding or brazing shall be perfom1ed in accor-
dance with industry standards.
7.2 Flanged Connections-Where sight indicators are in-
stalled using flanges, flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI
B16.5. Standard flange sizes include 1.27 em (Vz in.), 1.9 em
(%in.), 2.54 em (1 in.), 3.8 em (1-
1
/z in.), and 5.08 em (2
Standard flange pressure ratings include 1.034 MPa (150
2.07 MPa (300 psi), and 4.14 MPa (600 psi). Other flange
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
7.3 Vent and Drain Connections-Where required, vent and
drain connections are usually plugged, Vz- or %-in. NPT or
with NPT valves. Other vent and drain connections shaH be
0 F2045 - 00 (2011)
8.1 Peiformance Considerations-In many applications,
certain performance characteristics are deemed critical to the
intended or desired function of a sight liquid level indicator.
The following are prime examples:
( 1) Accuracy,
(2) Shock and vibration classifications, and
( 3) Operating pressure and temperature ranges.
requirements.
9.2 Sight Glass Cleaning-Any special cleaning require-
ments shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
10. Inspection
( 1) Qualification testing and
(2) Quality conformance testing.
10.2 Qualification Testing-Qualification test requirements
shall be specified where applicable. Qualification test methods
should be identified for each design and performance charac-
teristic specified. Test report documentation requirements
should also be specified.
10.3 Quality Conformance Testing-Quality conformance
testing is accomplished when qualification testing was satisfied
by a previous acquisition or product has demonstrated reliabil-
ity in similar applications. Quality conformance testing is
usually less intensive than qualification, often verifying that
samples of a production lot meet a few critical performance
requirements.
subjected to qualification testing shall depend on the design. If
each range is covered by a separate and distinct design, a test
specimen for each range will require testing. In instances in
which a singular design series may cover multiple ranges and
types, only three test specimens need be tested provided the
physical similarities are approved by the buyer. In no case,
however, shall less than three units, one unit each representing
low, medium, and high ranges, be tested, regardless of design
similarity.
12. Test Methods
12.1 Tests-All tests shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM, ASME, or industry standards as specified.
12.2 Test Data-All test data shall remain on file at the
manufacturer's facility for review by the buyer upon request. It
is recommended that test data be retained in the manufacturer's
13.1 Warranty-Unless otherwise specified, the manufac-
turer is responsible for the following:
( 1) All materials used to produce a unit and
(2) Manufacturer will warrant his product to be free from
defect of workmanship to produce the unit.
14. Certification
15. Product Marking
15.1 User-specified product marking shall be listed in the
acquisition requirements.
16.1 Packaging of Product for Delivery-Product shall be
packaged for shipment in accordance with Practice D395l.
16.2 Any special preservation, packaging, or package mark-
ing requirements for shipment or storage shall be identified in
the acquisition requirements.
17. Keywords
17.1 direct level indicator; indirect level indicator; liquid
level indicator; sight glass
(Specification F2045) and this supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence
for equipment acquired by this supplement. This document supersedes MIL-1-20037, Indicators, Sight,
Liquid Level, Direct/Indirect Reading, Tubular Glass/Plastic, for new ship construction.
INDICATORS, SIGHT, LIQUID LEVEL, DIRECT AND INDIRECT READING, TUBULAR GLASS/PLASTIC
(NAVAL SHIPBOARD USE)
1497
0 F2045 - 00 (2011)
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 This supplement covers sight liquid level indicators of
the direct and indirect reading type having tubular glass, clear
polycarbonate, or rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
S 1.2 Direct reading sight glass indicators may consist of
glass or plastic tubes with fittings including shutoff valves.
Indirect reading indicators may consist of a sealed chamber
with a magnetic float or flag indicator.
Sl.3 Indirect indicators are intended for use in water and
fuel service at working pressures of 2.07 MPa (300 lb/in.
2
) and
below, temperatures of 149C (300F) and below, and for
hi-shock applications. Direct indicators are intended for use in
hi-shock applications and shall use plastic sight tubes where
the fluid is compatible and teinperatuies do not exceed 66C
(150F). Glass tubes shall only be used for low shock appli-
cations and where the fluid is not compatible with plastic tubes.
S 1.4 Only direct-type indicators with glass tube material
less than 92 em (36 in.) in length or indirect type indicators
shall be used for hydrocarbons and flammable fluid applica-
tions.
S2.1 Commercial Documents:
ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (DoD ad-
opted)3
ANSI/ ASQC Q900 1-1994 Quality Systems-Model for
Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production, Instal-
lation, Inspection, Testing and Servicing
3
ASTM A312/A312MSpecification for Seamless and Welded
Austenitic Stainless Steel- Pipes (DoD adopted)
2
ASTM B61 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Cast-
ings (DoD adopted)
2
ASTM B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings (DoD adopted)
2
ASTM B 117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Appa-
ratus2
ASTM B283 Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die
Forging Hot-Pressed
2
ASTM Dl784 Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride
PVC Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride CPVC
Compounds (DoD adopted)
2
ASTM D3935 Specification for Polycarbonate (PC) Unfilled
and Reinforced Material
2
ASTM D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
2
MSS-SP-72 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service
4
MSS-SP-110 Ball Valves, Threaded Socket-Welding, Solder
Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
4
S2.2 Government Documents:
S2.2.1 Military Standards:
4
hq.com.
Equipment (Type I - Environmental and Type II - Internally
Excited)
5
S2.2.2 Military Specifications:
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact); Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment and Systems, Requirements fors
S2.2.3 Other Government Documents: Drawings and pub-
lications, Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA)
803-5184222 Gage Glass Ball Valves
S8700-1385802 Level Indicator Shields
S9074-AR-GIB-010/278 Requirements for Fabrication
Welding and Inspection and Casting Inspection and Repair for
Machinery, Piping and Pressure Vessels
5
S3. Terminology
S3.1 Definitions:
S3 .1.1 direct indication-the tank fluid level is visible in the
glass or tube.
S3.1.2 indirect indication-the tank fluid level is contained
in a sealed chamber and indicated by some other means such as
a float or flag actuated by a magnet contained in a float in the
fluid chamber.
S4. Design Classification
S4.1 Designation-Sight glass indicator designation shall
consist of a series of designations which shall be assigned and
listed in the format below:
Example: F 2045-SGI-D-A-PLY-PA
F2045
Specification
SGI D
Equipment Indication
designa-
tor
A
Shutoff
valve
PLY
Slight
glass
material
PA
Application
(see S4.2) (see S4.3) (see S4.4) (see S4.5) (see S4.6)
S4.2 Equipment Designator-The level indicator shall be
designated as SGI-Sight Glass Indicator.
S4.3 Indication-The type of indication desired shall be
specified as follows:
D-Direct indication
!-Indirect indication
S4.4 Shutoff Valves-The sight glass indicators shall be
equipped with a manual or automatic shutoff valve of the
ball-check type depending on the type of indication specified.
Valve type shall be designated as:
A-Automatic for direct indication
M-Manual for indirect indication
S4.5 Sight Glass Material-The tube material of direct
1498
reading sight glass indicators shall be designated as follows:
GWT -Glass with teflon heat shrink tube
PLY -Polycarbonate
PVC-Rigid polyvinyl chloride
S4.6 Application-The sight glass indicators may be used,
but are not limited to, the following applications:
5
0 F2045 - 00 (2011)
LA-Lubricating oil and air interface
PA-Potable water and air interface
DA-Diesel oil and air interface
JA-JP fuel and air interface
FT -Deaerating feed tanks
FA-Feed water and air interface
AG-Aviation gasoline
3F-Aqueous film-forming fluid
the pertinent application data shown in accordance with S5.2.
described.
(1) Title, number, and date of this specification;
( 2) Quantity and designation of indicator;
(3) Size of connection if specified;
( 4) Hand wheel with chain when required;
(5) Dimensions, as applicable (see Fig. 1);
( 6) Operating temperature, minimum and m a x i m u m ~
(7) Operating pressure, normal and maximum;
( 8 ) Operating media;
(9) Viscosity and specific gravity of fluid for indirect indicators
only;
( 1 0) When qualification testing is required;
(11) Final disposition of qualification test samples;
(12) National Stock Number (NSN) if available;
( 13) Unique product marking requirements; and
(14) Unique packaging requirements.
Piping material used in the construction of sight glass
indicators shall be compatible with the intended service piping
and media. Material for indirect indicators using a magnetic
operating principle shall be corrosion-resistant steel in accor-
dance with Type 304 of Specification A312. Only direct-type
indicators with glass tube material less than 91.44 em (36 in.)
in length or indirect-type indicators shall be used for hydro-
carbon and flammable fluid applications.
S6.1 Castings-The composition of castings shall be in
accordance with Specifications B61 or B62.
S6.2 Forgings-The composition of forgings shall be in
accordance with Alloy 632M of Specification B283.
S6.3 Welding-Welding and nondestructive testing shall be
in accordance with NAVSEA Publication S9074-AR-GIB-010/
278. In no case shall such processes as peening or plugging be
used on castings or forgings for reclaiming any parts.
S6.4 Glass-Glass tubing shall be of annealed borosilicate
transparent glass with a 1.59-cm (5/s-in.) outside diameter (o.d.)
and a minimum wall thickness of 0.24 em in.) with a
transparent fluorinated ethylene propylene plastic insulating
sleeving heat shrunk over the glass tube. Glass tubes shall be
used for temperatures above 66C (150F) but not to exceed
132C (270F) or where the fluid is not compatible with
polycarbonate or rigid PVC. Maximum length of glass tubes
shall be as specified in Drawing 803-5184222.
S6.5 Plastics-Plastics used in the sight glass indicator
shall be polycarbonate in accordance with Specification D3935
or rigid PVC in accordance with Specification D1784.
products covered by this specification shall be new and shall be
to the maximum extent practicable without jeopardizing in-
tended use. The term "recovered materials" means materials
reprocessed to become a source of raw materials as opposed to
this specification unless specified.
S7 .1 Design and Construction-The indicators shall be
constructed so as to allow replacement of the glass tube or
indicating element and also allow cleaning from either end
without loosening any packing or sealing material while the
pressure vessel is under pressure.
S7.1.1 Sizes-Unless otherwise specified in the acquisition
requirements, the connections of direct indicators shall be of
the size specified for the diameter of the tube in accordance
with Table S7 .1.
TABLE S7.1 Connection Sizes
Tube Diameter Connection Size (Flanged)
~ ~
1.59 em (5/s-in. o.d.) 1.91 em (3!4 in.)
1.91 em (%-in. o.d.) 1.91 em (% in.)
S7 .1.2 Valves:
S7 .1.2.1 Nonautomatic Shutoff-The nonautomatic shutoff
valve shall be in accordance with MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110.
S7 .1.2.2 Automatic Shutoff-Direct indicators shall have an
automatic shutoff valve of the solid ball-check type in accor-
dance with Drawing 803-5184222. The check valve shall be
constructed so as to allow leakage of 5 to 25 cm
3
per minute at
345 kPa (50 lb/in?) when the check valve is in the closed
position.
S7 .1.2.3 Handwheel-When required for remote operation,
the shutoff valves shall be furnished with a handwheel having
an o.d. not less than 8.89 em (3
1
/2 in.) and with holes drilled in
the rim located for adapting to chain operation. When specified
in the acquisition requirements, chain shall be provided.
S7 .1.2.4 Glands-Glands for direct reading gage glasses
shall be designed to minimize torsional stress on the glass
when the gland is tightened.
S7 .2 Protection :
S7.2.1 Class A-The glass tube of direct indicators shall be
protected from damage by not less than four solid rods of
corrosion-resistant material a minimum of 0.64 em (1/4 in.) in
diameter of sufficient length to allow for a maximum 91.44-cm
(36-in.) tube length. A shield shall be provided in accordance
with Drawing S8700-1385802 for combustible fluids.
1499
S7.2.2 Class B-Where all plastic sight tubes are used,
protective rods or shields are not required. Protective rods or
shields shall not be required for indirect indicators.
S7.3 Connections-Sight glass indicators shall have flat-
face ranged connections. Flanges shall be 1.91 em (% in.) in
accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B 16.5 classes. The
F2045 - 00 (2011)
flange rating shall be compatible with the maximum pressure
and temperature conditions expected in the intended applica-
tion and shall be based upon the ratio of the allowable stress at
temperature of the material used to that for the material
specified in ANSI Bl6.5.
S7.3.1 Drain Connections -The indicators shall have a
drain connection to which a drain line may be connected. For
pressures below 345 kPa (50 lb/in.
2
), the drain line connection
shall be %-in. NPT or larger. For pressures of 345 kPa (50
lblin.
2
) or above, the drain line connection shall be a welded
socket pipe nipple, V2-in. NPS or larger.
S7 .4 Temperature -Direct reading indicators using plastic
tubes shall not be used in applications above 66C (150F).
Glass tubes shall be used for temperatures above 66C (150F)
but not to exceed 132C (270F). Indirect reading indicators
using flags in the indicator may be used up to 149C (300F)
with plastic flags and 232 (450F) with aluminum flags.
S7 .5 Working Pressure:
S7.5.1 Direct Indicators-Maximum working pressure for
direct indicators shall be as specified on Drawing 803-
5184222.
S7.5.2 Indirect Indicators-Maximum working pressure for
indirect indicators shall be 2.07 MPa (300 lb/in.
2
) at 149C
(300F).
S7 .6 Interchangeability-Parts, components, and attach-
ments shall be interchangeable with parts and components of
the same types and classes produced by the same contractor.
SS. Performance
S8.1 Accuracy:
S8.1.1 Direct Indicator Accuracy-Accuracy of direct indi-
cator shall be within 1.27 em (1/2 in.).
S8.1.2 Indirect Indicator Accuracy-Accuracy of the indi-
rect indicator shall be within 2.54 em (1 in.). In addition,
when indirect indicators are capable of providing a remote
indication, the remote indication shall be accurate to within
3 % of full scale.
S8.2 Hydrostatic Effects-Each indirect sight glass indica-
tor shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of
3.1 MPa (450 lb/in?) when tested in accordance with
S 12.2.2.1. Each direct sight glass indicator shall be capable of
withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of 3.1 MPa (450 lb/in?)
when tested in accordance with Sl2.2.2.3.
S8.3 Inclination -The indirect sight glass indicator shall
provide accurate operation when inclined up to a 45 in any
direction and tested as specified in Sl2.2.3.
S8.4 Salt Spray-The sight glass indicator shall provide
accurate operation in a salt spray marine environment when
tested as specified in Sl2.2.4.
S8.5 Reliability-The sight glass indicator shall operate
reliably in a naval shipboard environment for a service life of
at least 40 000 h. The sight glass indicator shall be mechani-
cally reliable for operating at least 2000-h mean time between
failures at a 90 % confidence level. A failure is any malfunction
that requires unscheduled corrective maintenance of more than
1 h or which requires replacement of the equipment. The
reliability of the sight glass indicator shall be demonstrated in
accordance with S12.2.5.
S8.6 Shock-The indicator shall show no signs of damage
when exposed to Grade A, Class I shock for indirect indicators
and Grade B for direct indicators in accordance with MIL-S-
901 as specified in Sl2.2.6.
S8.7 Vibration-The indicator shall show no signs of dam-
age when exposed to Type I vibration in accordance with
MIL-STD-167-1 as specified in Sl2.2.7.
S9.1 Cleaning and Surface Finishes-Surfaces of castings,
forgings, molded parts, stampings, and machined and welded
parts shall be free of defects such as cracks, porosity, under-
cuts, voids, and gaps as well as sand, dirt, fins, sharp edges,
scale, flux, and other harmful or extraneous materials. External
surfaces shall be smooth and edges shall be either rounded or
beveled. There shall be no burn-through. There shall be no
warpage or dimensional change as a result of heat from
welding operation. There shall be no damage to adjacent parts
resulting from welding.
SlO. Inspection
S 10.1 Inspection System-The testing set forth in this
inspection system or quality program. The manufacturer's
quality system shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/
ASQC 9001-1994, Quality Systems-Model for Quality As-
surance in Design, Development, Production, Installation, and
Servicing. Certification and registration is highly desired but
not required.
(1) Qualification testing and
S 10.3 Qualification Testing-Qualification testing shall
consist of two samples of each type indicator subjected to the
examinations and tests in accordance with Table S 10.1 in the
order shown. Failure of any sight glass indicator to meet the
requirements of this specification shall be cause for rejection.
1500
TABLE S1 0.1 Qualification and Quality Conformance Testing
Examination Qualification
Quality
or Test
Requirement
Test Method
Conformance
Test Method
General examination S12.1 S12.1
Accuracy S8.1 S12.2.1
Hydrostatic test S8.2 S12.2.2 S12.2.2
Inclination S8.3 S12.2.3
Salt spray S8.4 S12.2.4
Reliability S8.5 S12.2.5
Shock S8.6 S12.2.6
Vibration S8.7 S12.2.7
S 10.4 Quality Conformance Testing-Sight glass indicators
that are produced on the same facilities, using identical
materials, manufacturing, and assembly procedures shall be
subjected to the quality conformance tests specified in Table
S 1 0.1. Sight glass indicators of the same type, class, and size
offered for delivery at one time shall be considered a lot for
purposes of inspections and tests.
Sll. Number of Tests and Retests
S 11.1 The number of tests and retests, if any, shall be
Afln,, F2045 - 00 (2011}
c!liHf'
S12. Test Methods
S 12.1 General Examination-Sight glass indicators shall be
given a thorough examination to determine that it conforms to
this specification and the approved drawings with respect to
material, finish, construction, assembly, dimensions, workman-
ship, marking, identification, and information plates.
Sl2.2 Test Methods:
S 12.2.1 Accuracy-Indicator accuracy shall be determined
by mounting the indicator assembly to a test tank with a
capacity at least 10 % greater than the total indication at the
indicator. The tank shall be filled to the zero point of the
indicator and in 10 % increments until the maximum level of
the indicator is reached. Measurements of the actual fluid level
of the tank shall be compared to level shown on the indicator.
Indicator accuracy shall be in accordance with S8.1.
Sl2.2.2 Hydrostatic Tests-Sight glass indicators shall be
tested at ambient conditions as a complete assembly for
strength and porosity. With the shutoff valves in the
position, a pressure of 3.1 MPa (450 lb/in?) shall be applied
for 20 min. Any weeping, porosity, or deformation shall be
cause for rejection. Indicators having plastic sight tubes shall
have no permanent deformation of the tube upon release of the
test pressure. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shall be
reduced to 2.07 MPa (300 lb/in?) and the valve shall be
checked for closing readily against the maximum working
pressure of the indicator. The valve shall operate with a
maximum force of 13.6 kg (30 lbs).
S 12.2.2.1 Nonautomatic Shutoff Valve-After operating the
valve for ten cycles (open-close), conduct a hydrostatic test for
seat tightness. With the valve in the closed position, apply 2.07
MPa (300 lb/in?) to the inlet. Pressure shall be maintained for
15 min. No leakage shall be allowed.
Sl2.2.2.2 Automatic Shutoff' Valves-Direct reading sight
glass indicator shutoff valves shall be tested in accordance with
Drawing 803-5184222.
S12.2.3 Inclination Test-Indirect indicators shall be tested
inclined at 45 forward, backward, left, and right. The fluid
level shall be varied between 20 to 80 % indication to verify
satisfactory operation.
S12.2.4 Salt Spray-The complete indicator assembly and
shutoff valves shall be subjected to a salt spray in accordance
with Test Method B 117. No appreciable corrosion or other
damage shall be evident after exposure to the salt spray.
Sl2.2.5 Reliability -Reliability of the assembled indicator
shall be demonstrated by the following tests:
Sl2.2.5.1 Cycling -The assembled indicator and shutoff
valves shall be cycled at a minimum of 25 000 cycles at the
rate of 3 to 6 cycles per minute. The fluid level shall be varied
between 20 to 80 % of the total indication level. Test tempera-
ture and pressure shall be in accordance with Drawing 803-
5184222, Notes 17B, C, and D. During the cycling period, the
following tests shall be conducted:
( I a) After every 1000 cycles, the indicator shall be
down by shutting the lower indicator shutoff valve and rap1dly
opening the indicator drain valve. Shut the drain valve and
reopen the indicator lower shutoff valve.
(2) Thermal Shock. After every 3000 cycles, the indicator shall
be allowed to cool to ambient temperature 24 1 oc (75
1501
2F) and drained. The indicator shall be rapidly filled with hot
water, 93 to l00C (200 to 212F) for glass tubes, 66oc
(150F) for rigid PVC tubes, to the maximum indication level.
After 2 min, the indicator shall be drained and rapidly refilled
with cold water, 1 ooc (50F). Any evidence or spalling,
cracking, breaking of the sight glass, or any abnormal wear or
material deformation (during or at the end of the tests) shall
constitute a failure.
S12.2.5.2 Hydrostatic-Upon completion of the 25 000
cycles, the indicator and valves shall be subjected to the
hydrostatic test as specified in S8.2.
Sl2.2.6 Shock-Indicators shall be subjected to shock in
accordance with MIL-S-90 1, Class I, Grade A for indirect
indicators and Grade B for direct indicators. The indicators
shall be tested as a complete assembly mounted on a Type 4-A
mounting fixture. The shock test shall be performed in the
following sequence:
(1) Valves open, indicator at 50% fluid level and pressurized to
normal working pressure. A total of nine blows shall be
applied, three blows shall be applied parallel to each of the
three principal axes.
(2) Valves shut, normal working pressure applied to valve inlet.
Indicator dry and drain plug removed. A total of nine blows
shall be applied, three blows shall be applied parallel to each of
the three principal axes.
After exposure to shock, the indicator shall be refilled and
the fluid level varied between 20 to 80 % to ensure satisfactory
operation. The shutoff valves shall be hydrostatically tested to
3.1 MPa ( 450 lb/in?) in the open position to check for body
and valve stem leakage and the closed position to check for
seat leakage. The indicators and valves shall be disassembled
and visually examined for any damage.
S 12.2. 7 Vibration-The complete indicator assembly shall
be subjected to vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-167 -1,
Type I. The indicator shall be filled to the 50 % indication level
and pressurized to normal working pressure during to
vibration. After exposure to vibration, the operation of the
indicator shall be accurate when the fluid level is varied
between 20 to 80 % of the indicator range.
Sl3.1 Warranty-Special warranty requirements shall be
S14. Certification
S14.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
buyer shall be furnished certification that
each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed m this
S 15.1 Unique product marking or identification plate re-
quirements shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
cO F2045 - 00 (2011)
S 16.1 Packaging shall be in accordance with the require-
ments of Practice D3951. Unique preservation, packaging, or
package marking requirements shall be specified in the c q u i ~
sition requirements.
COPYRIGHT/).
1502
a Designation: F2046- 00 (Reapproved 2011)

INTERNATIONAL
Tachometers, Various
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers various tachometers capable of
measuring rotational shaft speed.
1.2 Special requirements for tachometer types used in naval
shipboard applications are included in Supplement S 1.
only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 S/ (Le Systeme International d'Unites) Units-units of
measurement recognized by the Comite' International des
Poids et Mesures (CIPM).
3.1.2 tachometer-an instrument capable of generating,
transmitting, and indicating information or signal that can be
convened into a function of rotational speed.
4. Classification
4.1 Design Types-The following are among the types of
tachometers available:
( 1) Centrifugal;
(2) Centrifugal, flexible drive;
( 3) Chonometric;
(4) Electrical, alternating current (ac) voltage responsive,
direct drive;
( 5) Electrical reactance;
( 6) Electrical, magnetovoltmeter, direct drive;
1
Electrical.
approved in 2000. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as F2046 - 00(2006).
DOl: 10.1520/F2046-00Rll.
2
the ASTM website.
(7) Electrical, magnetovoltmeter;
(8) Frequency responsive, electrical control box and
meter, direct drive;
(9) Frequency sensitive, electrical, nonrotating magnetic
pickup, direct drive, consists of a magnetic pickup, transducer,
and indicator;
( 10) Photoelectric;
( 11) Digital contact;
( 12) Centrifugal, flexible drive; and
( 13) Vibrating resonant reed.
5.1 The buyer shall provide the manufacturer with all of the
pertinent application data in accordance with the acquisition
requirements, 5 .2.
5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents shall
specify the following:
( 1) Title, number, and date of this specification;
(2) Quantity of tachometers required;
(3) Range;
( 4) Manufacturer's part number;
(5) When qualification inspection is required;
( 6) Final disposition of qualification test samples;
(7) Type of electrical connection;
( 8) Mounting method;
(9) Environmental requirements;
( 10) Materials;
( 11) Size and weight restrictions;
(12) Critical service life requirements;
( 13) Performance requirements;
( 14) Surface finish requirements;
( 15) Cleaning requirements;
( 16) When certification is required;
( 17) Marking requirements;
( 18) Packaging requirements; and
( 19) Preservation requirements.
6.1 Material Selection-The materials for all parts shall be
selected for long-term compatibility with the environment in
which the tachometer will be installed or used.
Copyright ASTM International. 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1503
F2046 - 00 (2011)
7.1 Size and Weight-The buyer may have intended appli-
cations where size and weight are limited. Size and weight
limitations shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
8.1 Service Life-The buyer may have a minimum specified
service life requirement. Critical service life requirements shall
be specified in the acquisition requirements.
8.2 Tachometer Peiformance-Performance tolerances are
usually specified in percentage of range span. The following
performance characteristics and environmental exposures may
or may not be important to each buyer's intended application.
( 1) Accuracy,
(2) Repeatability,
( 3) Damping,
( 4) Temperature,
( 5) Humidity,
(6) Salt spray,
(7) Vibration,
( 8) Shock, and
(9) Electromagnetic interference (EMI).
9.1 Cleaning, Finish, and Appearance- Any special clean-
ing, surface finish, and appearance requirements shall be
10. Inspection
(I) Qualification testing and
shall be specified, where applicable. Test methods should be
identified for each design and performance characteristic
be specified.
inspection is accomplished when acceptance and qualification
testing is satisfied by a previous acquisition or when the
product has demonstrated reliability in similar applications.
Quality conformance inspection is usually less intensive than
acceptance and qualification, often verifying that samples of a
11.1 Test Specimens-The number of test specimens to be
subjected to qualification testing shall depend on the tachom-
1504
eter design. If each range is covered by a separate and distinct
design, a test specimen for each range will require testing. In
instances in which a singular design series may cover multiple
ranges and types, it is recommended that three test specimens
be tested provided the electrical and mechanical similarities are
approved by the buyer. In no case, however, should less than
three units, one unit each representing low, medium, and high
ranges, be tested, regardless of design similarity.
12. Test Methods
12.1 Tests-All tests shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM, ASME, or industry standards as specified.
manufacturer's facility for review by the buyer upon request. It
13.1 Warranty:
13. Responsibility for Warranty-Unless otherwise
(2) Manufacturer will warrant his product to be free from
defect of workmanship to produce the unit.
14. Certification
specification, and the requirements have been met. When
15. Product Marking
15.1 User-specified product marking shall be listed in the
acquisition requirements. The minimum data to be clearly
marked on each tachometer shall include the following:
( 1) Manufacturer's name,
( 3) Serial number or lot number,
( 4) Date of manufacture, and
(5) Range.
16.1 Packaging of Product for Delivery-Product shall be
packaged for shipment in accordance with Practice
requirements for shipment or storage shall be identified in
17. Keywords
17.1 tachometer
F2046 - 00 (2011)
(Specification F2046) and this supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence
for equipment acquired by this supplement. This document supersedes MIL-T-16049C, Tachometers:
Electrical; Self-Generating; Mechanical, Fixed Mounting, and Hand Held; and Vibrating Reed, for
new ship construction. This document also supersedes MIL-T-24797, Tachometers, Fiber Optic,
(Naval Shipboard Use), (Metric) General Specification for, for new ship construction.
TACHOMETERS: ELECTRIC AND FIBER OPTIC, FIXED MOUNTING
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 This supplement covers single-range noncontact elec-
tric and fiber-optic tachometers capable of generating, trans-
mitting, and indicating information or signal that can be
converted into a function of rotational speed. The subject
tachometers may be used in shipboard systems, such as gas
generators, power turbines, propulsion shafts, and gas steam
turbine generators.
Sl.2 Vibrating reed resonant-type tachometers are not cov-
ered in this specification.
S 1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
only.
S2.1.1 ASTM Standards:
2
2
S2.1.2 ANSI/ISA Standards:
ANSI/ISA S37.1 (R-1982) Electrical Transducer Nomencla-
ture and Terminology
3
ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994 Quality Systems-Model for
Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production, Instal-
lation, Inspection, Testing, and Servicing
3
S2.1.3 Electronic Industries Association (EIA):
RS-422 Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digi-
tal Interface Circuit
4
455-22 FOTP-22 Ambient Light Susceptibility of Fiber
Optic Components
4
455-34 FOTP-34 Interconnection Device Insertion Loss
Test
4
3
4
Arlington, VA 22201, http://www.ecaus.org/eia.
1505
of
5
Excited)s
MS3452 Connector, Receptacle, Electric, Box Mounting,
Rear Release, Crimp Contact, AN Type
5
MS3456 Connector, Plug, Electrical, Rear Release, Crimp
Contact, AN Types
MIL-C-5015 Connectors, Electrical, Circular Threaded, AN
Type General Specification fors
MIL-M-24794 Material, Index Matching, Fiber Opticss
MIL-F-49291 Fiber, Optical, (Metric), General Specifica-
tions fors
MIL-C-83522 Connectors, Fiber Optic, Single Terminus,
5
MIL-C-83522/16 Connector, Fiber Optic, Single Terminus,
Plug, Adapter Style, 2.5 mm Bayonet Coupling, Epox/
Adapter, 2.5 mm Bayonet Coupling, Bulkhead Panel Mount
5
MIL-C-83522/18 Connector Fiber Optic, Single Terminus,
Adapter, 2.5 mm Bayonet Coupling, PC Mounts
MIL-C-85045 Cables, Fiber Optic, (Metric), General Speci-
fication for
5
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact), Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment, and Systems, Requirements for
5
S3. Terminology
S3.1 Definitions-Terms marked with (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
are taken directly from ANSI/ISA S37.1 (R-1982) and are
included for the convenience of the reader.
S3 .1.1 ambient conditions--conditions, such as pressure
and temperature, of the medium surrounding the case of a
sensor (ANSI/ISA S37.1).
5
cd@f F2046- 00 (2011)
S3.1.2 calibration-test during which known values of
measurands are applied to the sensor and corresponding output
readings are recorded under specific conditions (ANSVISA
S37.1).
S3.1.3 environmental conditions-specified external condi-
tions, such as shock, vibration, and temperature, to which a
sensor may be exposed during shipping, storage, handling, and
operation (ANSVISA S37.1).
S3.1.4 error-the error for a given value of the input
variable (measurand) is the difference between the measured
value of the output signal and the expected value of the output
signal. The expected value of the output signal for any value of
the measurand shall be represented by a straight line whose end
points are given by:
S3 .1.4.1 Tne specified value of the output signal at the
minimum input value of the measurand (for example, 4 rnA at
the minimum specified rotational speed).
S3.1.4.2 The specified value of the output signal at the
maximum input value of the measurand (for example, 20 rnA
at the maximum specified rotational speed).
S3.1.5 noncontact tachometer-any type of tachometer that
senses or responds to rotational speed without physical contact
or mechanical connection to the shaft being measured.
S3.1.6 operating environmental conditions--environmental
conditions during exposure to which a sensor must perform in
some specified manner (ANSVISA S37.1).
S3.1.7 optical-involving the use of light-sensitive devices
to acquire information.
S3.1.8 optical fiber-a very thin filament or fiber, made of
dielectric materials, that is enclosed by material of lower index
of refraction and transmits light throughout its length by
internal reflections.
S3.1.9 optoelectronics module-a component of the fiber
optic tachometer that contains the optical source and detector,
and signal conditioner devices necessary to convert the sensed
rotational speed to a specified output signal.
S3 .1.1 0 output-electrical or numerical quantity, produced
by a sensor or measurement system, that is a function of the
applied measurand.
S3.1.11 range-measurand values, over which a sensor is
intended to measure, specified by their upper and lower limits
(ANSVISA S37.1).
S3 .1.12 repeatability -ability of a sensor to reproduce
output readings when the same measurand value is applied to
it consecutively, under the same conditions, and in the same
direction (ANSVISA S37 .1).
S3.1.13 sensor element-that part of the sensor that re-
sponds directly to the measurand (ANSI/ISA S37.1).
S3.1.14 sensor head-the transduction element of a fiber
optic tachometer that detects rotational speed by means of
changes in optical properties.
S3 .1.15 sheath-the protective covering of a sensor ele-
ment.
S3.1.16 signal conditioner-an electronic device that
makes the output signal from a transduction element compat-
ible with a readout system.
S3 .1.17 span-the algebraic difference between the limits
of the measurement range.
S3.1.18 static error band-the maximum deviation from a
straight line drawn through the coordinates of the lower range
limit at specified sensor output, and the upper range limit at
specified output expressed in percentage of sensor span.
S3.1.19 supporting surface-surface on which the equip-
ment is placed.
S3.1.20 target--description including items such as mate-
rial, size, multiple reflectors, and surface features shall be as
S3.1.21 tachometer-an instrument capable of generating,
transmitting, and indicating information or signal that can be
converted into a function of rotational
S3.1.22 warm-up time-the time required for a sensor to
operate within specified accuracy, repeatability, and other
critical parameters after being energized from a cold (ambient)
state.
S4. Design Classification
S4.1 Electric Types:
S4.1.1 Designation-Tachometers shall be classified by a
series of designations which shall be assigned and listed in the
format following.
Example: F2046-20M-BK-A
F2046 20M BK A
Specification Range Mounting Indicator
(see 84.1.2) (see 84.1.3) (see 84.1.4)
S4.1.2 Range-Electric tachometer ranges shall be selected
from the standard ranges listed in Table S4.1.
S4.1.3 Mounting-Tachometer indicators shall be either
bulkhead mounted (designator-BK) or panel (designator-
PL) mounted.
S4.1.4 Indicator-Tachometer indicators shall be either
analog (designator-A) or digital (designator-D).
1506
TABLE S4.1 Standard Ranges for Electric Tachometers
Q-100
Q-200
Q-500
5Q-500
Q-1000
10Q-1000
Q-2000
200-2000
Q-3000
30Q-3000
Q-4000
0-5000
50Q-5000
0-10 000
1000-10 000
0-20 000
1000-20 000
Q-30 000
Q-50 000
500Q-50 000
0-100 000
50Q-100 000
100Q-100 000
500Q-1 00 000
S4.2 Fiber-Optic Type:
10A
20A
50 A
50M
10B
10M
20B
20M
30B
30M
408
508
50N
10C
10N
20C
20N
30C
50C
50P
100
10P
10R
10T
S4.2.1 Designation-The sensor classification shall consist
of a series of designations which shall be assigned and listed in
the form following.
Example: F 2046-DC-A-1
0 F2046 - 00 (2011)
F2046 de A
Specification Input power Optoelectronics Sensor mount-
84.2.2 module type ing
84.2.3 configuration
84.2.4
S4.2.2 Input Power-The input power required to operate
the optoelectronics module shall be designated as follows:
dc-28-V direct current (Vdc)
ac-115-V alternating current (Vac)
S4.2.3 Optoelectronics Module-The mounting of the ta-
chometer's optoelectronics module type shall be designated as
follows:
Type A-Bulkhead mounted (see 87.3.1)
Type B-Console mounted (see 87.3.2)
S4.2.4 Sensor Mounting Configuration-The tachometer's
sensor shall be mounted according to the following mount
requirement type. The mass per unit length of the sensor mount
configuration shall be no greater than 0.02 kg/mm. The
dimensions of the tachometer's sensor head shall be in accor-
dance with Fig. S4.1.
S4.2.4.1 Mass-Unless otherwise specified, the mass of the
optoelectronics module shall be not greater than 5 kg.
S4.2.4.2 Target-The target description including items
such as material, size, multiple reflectors, and surface features
shall be as specified in the acquisition requirements.
S4.2.5 Range-The fiber-optic tachometer range is an inter-
nal selection within the optoelectronics module with the
following ranges:
Q-1000 RPM
Q-5000 RPM
Q-10000 RPM
Q-20 000 RPM
S5 .1 The buyer shall provide the manufacturer with all of
the pertinent application data shown in S5.2. If special appli-
cation operating conditions exist that are not shown in the
acquisition requirements, they shall also be described.
(J) Title, number, and date of this specification;
( 2) Type and quantity required;
5/8-18UNF-2A THO
(3) Whether panel or bulkhead mounting is required;
( 4) Range required;
(5) National Stock Numbers (NSNs) if available;
(6) When self-contained red illumination is required;
(7) Whether tachometer, control box, and indicator should be
other than drip-proof construction;
( 8) Number of additional indicators, if required;
(9) When qualification testing is required;
(1 0) Disposition of qualification test samples;
(11) Analog or digital indicator requirement;
(12) Special levels of preservation-packaging and packing
required; and
(13) Product marking and labeling required.
S5.2.1 Fiber-Optic Requirements -In addition to the re-
quirements outlined in S5.2, acquisition documents for fiber-
optic tachometers should specify the following:
( J) Classification (see S4.2.1):
(a) Input power,
( b) Optoelectronics module,
(c) Signal output, and
(d) Range.
(2) Whether bulkhead or console mounting is required.
(3) Type and quantity of indicator(s) required.
(4) Whether junction box should be other than drip-proof
construction.
S6.1 Metals-Unless otherwise specified herein, all metals
used in the construction of the tachometer shall be corrosion
resistant. Dissimilar metals shall not be used in close physical
contact with each other unless suitably finished to prevent
electrolytic corrosion.
S6.2 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the construc-
tion of the tachometer shall, in the end configuration, be
noncombustible or retardant in the most hazardous conditions
of atmosphere, pressure, and temperature to be expected in the
application.
S6.3 Fungus-Resistant Materials-Materials used in the
construction of the tachometer shall be fungus-inert materials.
OFCC
/r- JACKETED FIBER
//. _ FIBER OPTIC
/ // CABLE
''-,
""-._ S1UFFING
TUBE
SENSOR HEAD DIMENSIONS (rnm)
A
I
200.0. MAX
B
I
50.0 MAX
FIG. S4.1 Sensor Head Construction
1507
F2046- 00 (2011)
S6.4 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning Agents-If any
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal tachom-
eter components, no degradation of these components shall
result during in-service use.
S6.5 Refractive Index Matching Gels, Fluids, or
Compounds-Refractive index matching gels, fluids, or com-
pounds for fiber-optic tachometers shall be in accordance with
MIL-M-24794.
S7.1 Electric Tachometers-Electric tachometers shall be a
noncontact design and shall provide an output proportional to
the continuous instantaneous shaft speed. Tachometers shall be
for fixed mounted type of installations in which ranges from
100 to 100 000 RPM are encountered. Unless otherwise
specified, the sensor, control box, and indicator shall be of
drip-proof construction.
S7.1.1 Sensor-The sensor shall produce a signal by mag-
netic pulse, light pulse, or other noncontact method for input to
the control box. The method of mounting or adapting the
sensor may be varied to suit the machinery details.
S7 .1.2 Control Box-The control box shall include the
necessary electronics to process the sensor signal for driving
the indicator. The sensor and control box may be combined in
a single unit.
S7 .1.3 Indicator -The indicator shall be capable of panel
or bulkhead mounting. The indicator shall be analog or digital,
as specified in the acquisition requirements. The analog indi-
cator shall be a nominal 4V2- or 6-in. round scale with a 250
minimum arc. The digital indicator may be a round or
rectangular liquid crystal or light-emitting diode display with
readout numerals a minimum of 1 em in height. A stop shall be
provided in analog indicators to prevent the indicating pointer
from going past full-scale reading. Analog indicators shall have
self-contained red illumination.
S7.1.3.1 Dial and Pointer for Analog Indicators-The dial
shall be of a corrosion-resistant material that will not warp at
90C. The dial shall have a dull white finish with scale
markings, numerals, and pointer a dull black. Dial and pointer
assembly shall be of commercial design.
S7.1.3.2 Display or Indicator Windows--The display shall
be protected by a window of high-quality plastic, free from
flaws and defects, that does not cause parallax error.
S7.1.4 Dimensions and Weights (Maximum)-Dimensions
and weights of the indicator shall be as shown in Table S7 .1.
TABLE S7.1 Dimensions and Weight (Indicators)
Nominal
Scale
6
Height Max, Width Max, Depth Max, Weight Max,
in. in. in. lbs
7% 7% 6 6
S7.1.5 Mounting-The indicator shall be designed for panel
or bulkhead mounting.
S7 .1.6 Operating Characteristics-The tachometers shall
instantaneously and continuously indicate information or a
signal that can be converted into a function of the speed of
rotation in RPM of the rotating part being measured. The
1508
tachometers shall indicate, without change or adjustment,
regardless of the direction of rotation of the driving part on the
same scale.
S7 .2 Fiber-Optic Tachometers-The fiber-optic tachometer
shall be a noncontact device capable of converting a rotational
speed to a continuous output signal throughout a specified
measurement range. A fiber-optic tachometer shall consist of a
sensor head, optoelectronics module, and fiber-optic cable
connector at both ends. The optoelectronics module translates
the optical input from the sensor head to a continuous linear
proportional analog electrical signal or other output signal such
as optical and digital.
S7.2.1 Sensor Head-The sensor head(s) shall be passive
and detect shaft rotation through change in optical properties.
The beam interruption sensing mechanism shall consist of two
sensor heads. One sensor head shall be used to transmit, and
one sensor head shall be used to receive an optical signal
(generated from the optoelectronics module) across an air gap.
Neither electrical nor electronic components shall be used in
the construction of the sensor head. The configuration and
physical dimensions of the sensor head(s) shall be as specified.
S7 .2.2 Optoelectronics Module Mounting-The optoelec-
tronics module mounting shall be either bulkhead or console
mounted as specified.
S7.2.2.1 Bulkhead Mounted (Type A)-The optoelectronics
module shall be housed in a junction box.
S7 .2.2.2 Console Mounted (Type B)-The optoelectronics
module shall be packaged in a circuit card that is a modular
subassembly of a control console. Design and test requirements
for the optoelectronics module shall be as specified.
S7 .2.3 Fiber-Optic Cable-For integrity, the cable shall
have an outer diameter of a four-fiber cable in accordance with
MIL-C-85045. In the cable, there shall be no less than two
times the number of fibers needed for operation of the sensor.
The cable shall be supplied with a stuffing tube, packing
assembly, and an 0-ring, installed on each end of the cable to
accomplish watertight penetration into the sensor head and
optoelectronics module. Exposed single-fiber OFCC shall not
be used over distances greater than 1 m. The length of cable
shall be as specified.
S7.2.3.1 Optical Fiber-Optical fiber used to transmit light
between the optoelectronics unit and the sensor head shall be in
accordance with MIL-F-49291.
S7.2.3.2 Fiber-Optic Connectors, Receptacles, and Bulk-
head Adapters-Fiber-optic connectors, receptacles, or bulk-
head adapters used shall be in accordance with MIL-C-83522
and MIL-C-83522/16,17,18, respectively. Connectors shall be
assembled at both ends of the fiber-optic cable between the
sensor head and the optoelectronics module. The connectors
and receptacles shall be mounted inside the sensor head or
optoelectronics module.
S7.2.4 Electrical Input Power Requirements-Nominal
steady-state power supply requirements for ac shall be 115
8 V, 60 2 Hz, single phase. Nominal steady-state power
supply requirements for de shall be 28 4.5 V. The tachometer
shall meet all performance requirements specified herein while
operating with specified power supply voltages and their
tolerances.
F2046 - 00 (2011)
S7 .2.5 Output Signal-The output signal of the tachometer
shall be directly proportional to the speed being measured. A
means shall be provided for internal selection (within the
optoelectronics module) between the following output signals:
true current source of 4 to 20 rnA, 0 to 1 rnA, 0 to 2 rnA, 0 to
5 rnA; true voltage source of 0- to 5-V or 0- to 10-V de, and
frequency (including TTL compatibility). A means shall also be
provided for internal indication of the output signal selected.
The complexity of this adjustment shall be such that one
individual working alone is capable of performing this adjust-
ment. The adjustment shall not require electrical disconnection.
S7.2.5.1 Current Output-The 0- or 4-mA output shall
correspond to the lower speed range value and the 1-, 2-, 5-,
or 20-rnA output shall correspond to the upper speed range
value. The current output shall remain accurate regardless of
external load resistance variations over a range of 0 to 250 Q.
S7.2.5.2 Voltage Output-The 0-Vdc output shall corre-
spond to the lower speed range value, and the 5- or 1 0-V de
output shall correspond to the upper speed range value. The
voltage output shall remain accurate regardless of external load
resistances greater than 100 000 Q.
S7.2.5.3 Optical Output-When an optical output is re-
quired, all requirements shall be as specified.
S7.2.5.4 Digital Output-When an electrical digital output
is required, all requirements shall be as specified. The electrical
characteristics shall be in accordance with EIA Standard
RS-422 for balanced voltage digital interface circuitry or as
specified. The data format shall be as specified.
S7.2.6 Electrical Connectors-A single electrical connector
and mating plug in accordance with MIL-C-5015 shall be used
to interface the input power and linear output signal to the
optoelectronics module. The appropriate connector assembly
and pin designations for each of the possible tachometer
configurations shall be as follows:
S7 .2.6.1 de Input and Current or Voltage Output-The
receptacle mounted to the optoelectronics module shall be
Classification MS3452W14S-5PX in accordance with
MS3452. Receptacle Pin "A" shall be +28-Vdc power input,
Pin "B" shall be -28-Vdc power input, Pin "C" shall because
ground, Pin "D" shall be a +rnA or V de signal output, and Pin
"E" shall be a -rnA or V de signal output. The mating plug shall
be Classification MS3456W14S-SSX in accordance with
MS3456.
S7.2.6.2 de Input and Frequency Output-The receptacle
mounted to the optoelectronics module shall be Classification
MS3452W14S-5PX in accordance with MS3452. Receptacle
Pin "A" shall be +28-Vdc power input, Pin "B" shall be
-28-Vdc power input, Pin "C" shall be case ground, and Pins
"D" and "E" shall be frequency signal outputs. The mating
plug shall be Classification MS3456WI4S-5SX in accordance
with MS3456.
S7.2.6.3 ac Input and Current or Voltage Output-The
receptacle mounted to the optoelectronics module shall be
Classification MS3452W14S-5PX in accordance with
MS3452. Receptacle Pins "A" and "B" shall be 115-Vac power
input, Pin "C" shall be case ground, Pin "D" shall be a +rnA or
V de signal output, and Pin "E" shall be a -rnA or V de signal
1509
output. The mating plug shall be Classification MS3456W14S-
5SX in accordance with MS3456.
S7 .2.6.4 ac Input and Frequency Output-The receptacle
mounted to the optoelectronics module shall be Classification
MS3452W14S-5PX in accordance with MS3452. Receptacle
Pins "A" and "B" shall be 115-Vac power input, Pin "C" shall
be case ground, Pins "D" and "E" shall be frequency signal
outputs. The mating plug shall be Classification
MS3456W14S-5SX in accordance with MS3456.
S7 .2.6.5 Digital Output-The connector assembly for a
digital output signal shall be as specified.
S7.2.7 RPM Range Selection-A means shall be provided
for internal selection (within the optoelectronics module)
between the following rpm ranges: 0 to 1000, 0 to 5000, 0 to
10 000, and 0 to 20 000. A means shall also be provided for
internal indication of the rpm range selected. The complexity
of this adjustment shall be such that one individual working
alone is capable of performing this adjustment. The adjustment
shall not require electrical disconnection.
S7. 2. 8 Low-Intensity Alarm Indication-The optoelectron-
ics module shall have a red LED which shall light when the
intensity of the tachometer's optical signal falls below a preset
level. The LED shall be located on either the top or front of the
module as it would be mounted during typical usage. The LED
shall be visible in typical fluorescent room lighting. The
optoelectronics alarm will allow for an indication that mainte-
nance is required before a false output signal from the
tachometer.
S7.2.8.1 Low-Intensity Alarm Set Point Adjustment-A
means shall be provided for adjusting the low-intensity alarm
set point over no less than one half of the dynamic range of the
tachometer. A means of securing this adjustment shall be
provided. The low-intensity alarm set point shall be capable of
adjustment by one individual without the necessity for any
electrical disconnection. Alarm set point adjustments shall be
labeled and shall be accessible when the optoelectronics
enclosure cover is removed.
S7 .2.9 Sensitivity Adjustment-The tachometer shall have a
sensitivity adjustment for increasing or decreasing the electri-
cal pulse height of the optical signal over the dynamic range of
the tachometer. The tachometer's sensitivity shall be adjustable
by one individual without the necessity for any electrical
disconnection. Sensitivity adjustments shall be labeled and
shall be accessible when the optoelectronics enclosure cover is
removed.
S7.2.10 Fuses-The optoelectronics module shall not be
fused.
S8.1 Accuracy, Repeatability, and Damping-The accuracy
of the tachometer shall be no less than 1 % of full-scale reading
at any part of the scale at any ambient temperature between 5
and 65C. The accuracy requirement shall be met during three
calibration cycles to demonstrate repeatability. The accuracy
requirements shall be met within 2 s of the sensor receiving an
input signal and at any temperature between 5 and 65C to
demonstrate damping requirements.
F2046 - 00 (2011)
S8.2 Reference Measurement -The referenced accuracy of
each of the output signals of the fiber optic tachometer shall be
within 1.0 % of the output span. Measurements shall be
made at 10, 50, and 90 % intervals of span without any
alignments or adjustments.
S8.3 Magnetizing-The materials used in the construction
of the tachometers shall have such characteristics that no error,
either temporary or permanent, in excess of the errors permit-
ted under the accuracy requirements specified for the appli-
cable type will be introduced when the tachometer is tested as
specified in S12.2.3. Posttest reference measurements shall
meet the requirements of S8.2.
S8.4 Accelerated Life-The tachometers shall be capable of
demonstrating reliable operation within the accuracy require-
ments when subjected to the conditions within the performance
parameters yet configured to induce accelerated life conditions
(see Sl2.2.4).
S8.5 Sensitivity (Fiber Optic Only)-The ratio of the ta-
chometer output in percent change of span to speed input in
percentage change of span shall not be less than 0.75 or more
than 1.25.
S8.6 Response Time (Fiber Optic Only)-The time for the
tachometer output signal to indicate a steady-state speed (that
is, 5000, 10 000, or 20 000 rpm) shall not be greater than 2 s
after the test standard attains a steady-state speed.
S8.7 Warm-Up Time (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer
shall attain an output value within 1 % of the output span.
Output shall reach this band in no more than 1 min after the
tachometer is energized and shall remain in this band.
S8.8 Dynamic Range (Fiber Optic Only)-The dynamic
range of the tachometer shall be no less than 35 dB for
tachometers using the beam interruption sensing mechanism.
The dynamic range of the tachometer shall be no less than 16
dB for tachometers using the reflection and magneto-optic
sensing mechanism.
S8.9 Ambient Light Susceptibility (Fiber Optic Only)-This
test is applicable for tachometers using the reflection and beam
interruption sensing mechanism only. Monitored tachometer
output during the ambient light susceptibility test shall show no
deviation greater than 1 % of the output span.
S8.10 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac) or
Supply Voltage (de) (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer shall
exhibit no damage and shall be in accordance with the
requirements of S8.2 during each of the specified test condi-
tions.
S8.11 Transient Voltage and Frequency (ac) or Voltage (de)
(Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer shall exhibit no damage
and reference measurements shall be in accordance with the
requirements of S8.2 following each of the transient condi-
tions.
S8.12 Insulation Resistance (Fiber Optic Only)-fhe insu-
lation resistance of the optoelectronics module shall not be less
than 10 MQ.
S8.13 Power Interruption (Fiber Optic Only)-The ta-
chometer shall exhibit no damage and shall be in accordance
with the requirements of S8.2 when power is reapplied
following each of the power interruption intervals.
S8.14 Short Circuit (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer
shall exhibit no damage and shall be in accordance with the
requirements of S8.2 following the short-circuit test.
S8.15 Line Voltage Reversal (de Input) (Fiber Optic
Only)-The tachometer shall exhibit no damage and shall be in
accordance with the requirements of S8.2 following the line
voltage reversal test.
S8.16 Temperature (Fiber Optic Only)-During the tem-
perature test, monitored tachometer output shall show no
deviation greater than 1 % of the output span. Following this
test, the tachometer shall be in accordance with the require-
ments of S8.2.
S8.17 Humidity (Fiber Optic tachometer shall
be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2 without any
alignments or adjustments. After testing is completed, there
shall be no evidence of physical degradation, such as corrosion
of metal parts or distortion of plastic parts.
S8.18 Enclosure (Fiber Optic Only)-There shall be no
evidence of water penetration into the tachometer components
either during or at the conclusion of the enclosure test. During
the enclosure test, monitored tachometer output shall show no
deviation greater than 1 % of the output span. The tachom-
eter shall be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2
following the enclosure test.
S8.19 Salt Spray (Fiber Optic Only)-Following this test,
the tachometer shall show no appreciable corrosion or other
damage, either optical, mechanical, or electrical that will affect
its operation, and it shall be in accordance with the require-
ments of S8.2.
S8.20 Vibration-Tachometers shall conform to the vibra-
tion requirements of MIL-STD-167-1 (see Sl2.2.20). Moni-
tored tachometer output during all phases of the vibration test
shall show no deviation greater than 1 % of the output span.
Pretest and posttest reference measurements shall be in accor-
dance with the requirements of S8.2. The tachometer shall
show no evidence of physical damage that impairs its operation
as a result of the vibration test.
S8.21 Shock-Tachometers shall conform to the shock re-
quirements of Type A, Class I, Grade A for lightweight
equipment of MIL-S-90 1. Monitored tachometer output during
all phases of the shock test shall show n'O evidence of physica1
damage greater than 1 % of the output span. Pretest and
posttest reference measurements shall be in accordance with
the requirements of S8.2. The tachometer shall show no
evidence of physical damage that impairs its operation as a
result of the shock test.
S8.22 Electromagnetic Interference (EM!) Emission and
Susceptibility-Tachometers shall conform to the electromag-
netic interference requirements of MIL-STD-461 (see
S12.2.22). The tachometers shall be in accordance with MIL-
STD-461 requirements CE101, CE102, CS101, CS114, CS116,
RE101, RSIOl, RS103, and RS105. Monitored tachometer
output during all phases of the EMI test shall show no
deviation greater than 1 % of the output span. Pretest and
posttest reference measurements shall be in accordance with
1510
F2046 - 00 (2011)
forgings, molded parts, stampings, and machined and welded
parts shall be free of defects such as cracks, porosity, under-
cuts, voids, and gaps as well as sand, dirt, fins, sharp edges,
scale, flux, and other harmful or extraneous materials. External
beveled. There shall be no bum-through. There shall be no
warpage or dimensional change as a result of heat from
welding operation.
SlO. Inspection
S 10.1 Inspection System-The manufacturer shall provide
and maintain an inspection system acceptable to the buyer for
supplies and services covered by this specification. The testing
set forth in this specification shall become a part of the
manufacturer's overall inspection system or quality program.
The manufacturer's quality system shall comply with the
requirements of ANSI/ASQC 9001-1994. Certification and
registration is highly desired but not required.
( J) Qualification testing and
S10.3 Qualification Testing-One sample tachometer shall
be subjected to the examination and tests specified in Table
S 10.1. Failure of any tachometer to meet the requirements of
S10.4 Quality Conformance Testing-Each tachometer
shall be subjected to the tests specified in Table S 1 0.2. The
results of each examination and test shall be compared to the
requirements of this specification. If any tachometer fails in the
examination or in any test, it shall be rejected.
S 10.5 Order of Inspection-The sample tachometers shall
be subjected to the inspections specified in Tables S 10.1 and
S 10.2 in the order listed except that the steady-state supply
voltage and frequency inspection may be performed concur-
rently with the temperature inspection.
TABLE S1 0.1 Qualification Testing
Examination
Electrical Fiber-Optic Require-
and Test
Tachometers ments Test
Tachometers
General examination X X S10.6
Accuracy and X X S8.1 S12.2.1
repeatability
Damping X S8.1 S12.2.1
Reference X X S8.2 S12.2.2
measurement
Magnetizing X X S8.3 S12.2.3
Accelerated life X S8.4 S12.2.4
Sensitivity X S8.5 S12.2.5
Response time X S8.6 S12.2.6
Warm-up time X S8.7 S12.2.7
Dynamic range X S8.8 S12.2.8
Ambient light X S8.9 S12.2.9
susceptibility
Steady-state voltage X S8.10 S12.2.10
frequency
Transient voltage X S8.11 S12.2.11
frequency
Insulation resistance X S8.12 S12.2.12
Power interruption X S8.13 S12.2.13
Short circuit X S8.14 S12.2.14
Line voltage reversal X S8.15 S12.2.15
1511
TABLE S10.1 Continued
Examination
and Test
Tachometers
Temperature X S8.16 S12.2.16
Humidity X S8.17 S12.2.17
Enclosure X S8.18 S12.2.18
Salt spray X S8.19 S12.2.19
Vibration X X S8.20 S12.2.20
Shock X X S8.21 S12.2.21
Electromagnetic X X S8.22 S12.2.22
interference
TABLE S10.2 Qualification Conformance Testing
Examination
and Test
Tachometers
Genera! X X 810.6
examination
Accuracy and X X S8.1 S12.2.1
repeatability
Damping X S8.i S12.2.i
Dynamic range X S8.8 S12.2.8
Insulation X S8.12 812.2.12
resistance
Temperature X S8.16 S12.2.16
Enclosure X S8.18 S12.2.18
S10.6 General Examination-Each tachometer shall be
given a thorough examination to determine conformance to the
requirements of this specification with respect to material,
finish, workmanship, construction, assembly, dimensions,
weight, and marking of identification. Examination shall be
limited to the examinations that may be performed without
disassembling the units. Examination shall also include a check
of all adjustments. The manufacturer shall be responsible for
ensuring that materials used are manufactured, examined, and
tested in accordance with the specifications and standards as
applicable.
SU. Number of Tests and Retests
S 11.1 The number of tests and retests, if any, shall be
812. Test Methods
S 12.1 Test Conditions-Unless otherwise specified herein,
the fiber-optic tachometer(s) shall be fully assembled and
energized throughout the duration of each test procedure.
Except where the following factors are the variables, the tests
specified in S10.2 shall be conducted with the equipment under
the following operating environmental conditions:
(1) Ambient temperature shall be 25 :::!:: 5C,
(2) Relative humidity shall be ambient,
(3) Supply voltage shall be 115 V (nominal) for input power
designation ac or 28 V (nominal) for input power designation
de,
(4) Supply frequency shall be 60Hz (nominal) for input power
designation ac or de for input power designation de,
( 5) Distance from sensor head to target shall be 10 mm for
fiber-optic tachometers using refleetion and beam interruption
sensing mechanisms, and
( 6) Distance from sensor head to target shall be 2 mm for
fiber-optic tachometers using magno-optic sensing mechanism.
Sl2.2 Test Methods:
F2046 - 00 (2011)
S 12.2.1 Accuracy-The tachometer shall first be operated
over its full speed range by slowly increasing and decreasing
the applied speed in four continuous cycles. The calibration
measurements shall be made at a minimum often equally
spaced intervals over the full range. This calibration procedure
shall be applied three successive times to determine repeatabil-
ity. The fiber optic tachometer shall be energized and opera-
tional at a speed range setting of 0 to 20 000 rpm. A
measurement of each of the outputs of the optoelectronics
module shall be performed at the following speeds: 5000,
10 000, 15 000, and 20 000 rpm. This measurement shall be
performed three successive times for each of the optoelectron-
ics module outputs (see S8.2). The maximum difference
between any two output values at the same speed for each of
the optoelectronics module output signal selections shall de-
termine repeatability. Accuracy, repeatability, and damping
shall meet the requirements of S8.1.
S 12.2.1.1 Temperature-Accuracy tests shall be conducted
at 5, 25, and 65C. The accuracy shall be checked at
minimum of five equally spaced operating speeds over the
range of the tachometer. The tachometer shall conform to the
accuracy requirements of S8.1.
Sl2.2.2 Reference Measurement-The tachometer shall be
energized and operational. A measurement shall be made at 10,
50, and 90 % intervals of span both upscale and downscale.
The accuracy at all points of measurement shall meet the
requirements of Sl2.2.1.
Sl2.2.3 Magnetizing -While operating at a constant speed
of approximately 50 % of full-scale range, the tachometer shall
be placed in varying positions in a unidirectional, magnetic
field having a flux density in free air of approximately 5
gausses. The error of tachometers shall be within the require-
ments specified in S8.2.
Sl2.2.4 Accelerated Life-Tachometers shall be operated at
a constant speed approximately equal to the midpoint of their
range for four periods. The periods shall be as follows:
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Period 4
25 hat 25C
25 hat soc
25 hat 65C
25 hat 25C
Relative humidity shall be varied during Periods 2 and 3
between approximately 50 and 90 % in alternate hour periods.
All tachometers shall operate satisfactorily during these tests
within their required accuracy as specified in S8.1.
S 12.2.5 Sensitivity (Fiber Optic Only)-The sensitivity fac-
tor shall be determined using the following procedure:
The tachometer shall be energized and operational at an
output signal, of the 0- to 10-V setting corresponding to a speed
of 3000 rpm. The tachometer's speed range setting shall be
to 10 000 rpm.
( 2) Measure both the shaft speed and the optoelectronics
module output signal.
(3) Increase the shaft speed by an amount not greater than 1 %
of the output span.
( 4) Measure both the new shaft speed and the optoelectronics
module output signal.
( 5) Calculate the change in both shaft speed and the optoelec-
tronics module output signal as a percentage of the output span.
( 6) Determine the ration of the output percentage change to
applied shaft speed percentage change in terms of the output
span.
(7) Repeat this procedure for shaft speed decrease not greater
than 1 % of the output span.
S 12.2.6 Response Time (Fiber Optic Only)-The response
time shall be determined by the following procedure:
Energize the fiber optic tachometer and set the position of
the sensor head.
(2) Adjust the tachometer's output signal to the 0- to 10-V
setting and the rpm setting to the 0- to 10 000-rpm range.
(3) Energize the test standard and increase the speed of its
rotating target to 5000 rpm. The test standard shall reach 5000
rpm within 2 s.
( 4) Monitor the output signal of the tachometer and the test
standard during the test.
S12.2.7 Warm-Up Time-The warm-up time shall be deter-
mined by the following procedure:
Allow the tachometer output signal to stabilize at a value,
of the 0- to 5-V setting, corresponding to a measurand
speed of 800 rpm. The tachometer's speed range
setting shall be 0 to 1000 rpm.
(2) Deenergize the tachometer for no less than 2 h.
Reenergize the tachometer and monitor the optoelectronics
module output as necessary to ensure tachometer meets the
Sl2.2.8 Dynamic Range (Fiber Optic Only)-The dynamic
range of the optoelectronics module shall be tested in accor-
dance with the following procedures:
Sl2.2.8.1 Beam Interruption-A calibrated optical attenua-
tor with two jumpers shall be tested for insertion loss in
accordance with EIA-455-34. The attenuator shall then be
connected between the optoelectronics module and the sensor
head of the transmitting optical signal by means of the two
jumper cables. The tachometer's sensitivity shall be adjusted to
the maximum setting. The attenuation shall be increased from
0 dB (encompassing insertion loss of attenuator and jumpers)
to 35 dB. The tachometer shall be operating at an output signal
value, of the 0- to 5-V setting, corresponding to an operating
1512
of 800 rpm. The tachometer's speed range setting shall
be 0 to 1000 rpm. The dynamic range will be exceeded when
the output signal drops to a value equivalent to 0 rpm.
Performance shall be in accordance with the of
S8.8.
Sl2.2.8.2 Reflection and Magneto-Optic Effect-A cali-
brated optical attenuator with two jumpers shall be tested for
insertion loss in accordance with EIA-455-34. The attenuator
shall be connected between the optoelectronics module and the
sensor head via two jumper cables. The tachometer's
shall be adjusted to the maximum setting. The
att1emmt1:on shall increase from 0 dB (encompassing insertion
loss of attenuator and jumpers) to 16 dB. The tachometer shall
be at an output signal value, of the 0- to 5-V setting,
corresponding to an operating speed of 800 rpm. The tachom-
speed range setting shall be 0 to 1000 rpm. The dynamic
range will be exceeded when the output signal drops to a value
equivalent to 0 rpm. Performance shall be in accordance with
F2046 - 00 {2011)
S12.2.9 Ambient Light Susceptibility (Fiber Optic Only)-
The ambient light source and general test conditions shall be in
accordance with EIA-455-22. The tachometer shall be ener-
gized and placed in the beam of the light source for a 10-min
duration. During the test, the tachometer shall be energized and
operational at an output signal, of the 0- to 5-V setting,
corresponding to a speed of 3000 rpm. The tachometer's speed
range setting shall be 0 to 10 000 rpm. This output shall be
monitored during the test. Performance shall be in accordance
with the requirements of S8.9.
S12.2.10 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac)
or Supply Voltage (de) (Fiber Optic Only)-This test may be
performed in conjunction with the temperature test (see
Sl2.2.16). For ac-powered tachometers, a reference measure-
ment shall be performed at 0, 25, and 65C for each of the
conditions specified in S12.2.11.1 and Sl2.2.11.2. For de-
powered tachometers, a reference measurement shall be per-
formed at 0, 25, and 65C for each of the conditions specified
in S12.2.11.3. The tachometer shall be allowed to stabilize at
each testing temperature before the reference measurements
are performed. Performance shall be in accordance with the
S12.2.11 Transient Voltage and Frequency (ac) or Voltage
(de) (Fiber Optic Only)-Ac-powered tachometers shall be
tested in accordance with S 12.2.11.1 and S 12.2.11.2. De-
powered tachometers shall be tested in accordance with
S12.2.11.3.
S12.2.11.1 Transient Voltage (ac):
S12.2.11.1.1 Upper Limit-With the tachometer operating
at the steady-state voltage of 123 Vac, the voltage shall be
increased to 138 Vac and then decreased back to the steady-
state voltage of 123 Vac in a 2-s period. A reference measure-
ment shall then be performed at 115 Vac. The tachometer shall
be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2.
S12.2.11.1.2 Lower Limit-With the switch operating at a
steady-state voltage of 107 Vac, the voltage shall be decreased
to 92 Vac and then increased back to the steady-state voltage of
107 Vac in a 2-s period. A reference measurement shall then be
performed at 115 Vac. The tachometer shall be in accordance
Sl2.2.11.2 Transient Frequency (ac):
S 12.2.11.2.1 Upper Limit-With the tachometer operating
at a steady-state frequency of 62 Hz, the frequency shall be
increased to 63.5 Hz and then decreased back to the steady-
state frequency of 62 Hz in a 2-s period. A reference
measurement shall then be performed at 60 Hz. The tachometer
shall be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2.
S12.2.11.2.2 Lower Limit-With the tachometer operating
at a steady-state frequency of 58 Hz, the frequency shall be
decreased to 56.5 Hz and then increased back to the steady-
state frequency of 58 Hz in a 2-s period. A reference
measurement shall then be performed at 60 Hz. The tachometer
shall meet the requirements of S8.2.
Sl2.2.11.3 Transient Voltage (de):
S12.2.11.3.1 Upper Limit-With the tachometer operating
at a steady-state voltage of 32.5 V de, the voltage shall be
increased to 34.5 Vdc and then decreased back to the steady-
state voltage of 32.5 V de in a 2-s period. A reference
1513
measurement shall then be performed at 28 V de. The tachom-
eter shall be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2.
S12.2.11.3.2 Lower Limit-With the tachometer operating
at a steady-state voltage of 23.5 Vdc, the voltage shall be
decreased to 21.5 Vdc and then increased back to the steady-
state voltage of 23.5 Vdc in a 2-s period. A reference
measurement shall then be performed at 28 V de. The tachom-
eter shall be in accordance with the requirements of S8.2.
S 12.2.12 Insulation Resistance (Fiber Optic Only)-The
insulation resistance of the optoelectronics module shall be
determined by applying 50 Vdc between electrical input and
output circuits and between these circuits and ground. The
temperature shall be 25 soc and the relative humidity shall
be 50 10 %. The insulation resistance measurement shall be
made immediately after a 2-min period of uninterrupted test
voltage application. If the indication of insulation resistance
meets the specified limit and is steady or increasing, the test
may be terminated before the end of the 2-min period. The
tachometer shall be in accordance with the requirements of
S8.12.
Sl2.2.13 Power Interruption (Fiber Optic Only)-With the
tachometer operating within the steady-state tolerances of
voltage and frequency, the external power supply shall be
suddenly interrupted. After an interval of between 3 and 4 s, the
power supply, within the steady-state tolerances, shall be
reapplied. After the tachometer has been operated long enough
to detect any major performance degradation, the power shall
be interrupted for an interval of no less than 30 s. This cycle,
(3- to 4-s interruption, monitor, then an interruption of no less
than 30 s) shall be repeated three times (four total cycles).
Following each of the power interruption intervals, a reference
measurement shall be made. The tachometer shall be in
accordance with the requirements of S8.13.
Sl2.2.14 Short Circuit (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer
shall be deenergized and the positive and negative electrical
output leads or terminals of the optoelectronics module shall be
connected directly together with no load resistance. The
tachometer shall be energized for 5 min, then deenergized, and
the short circuit removed. The tachometer shall be energized
and a reference measurement shall be made at ambient
temperature. The tachometer shall meet the requirements of
S8.14.
Sl2.2.15 Line Voltage Reversal (for de Powered Tachom-
eters) (Fiber Optic Only )-A positive 28-V de signal shall be
applied to connector Pin "B." The de reference signal shall be
applied to connector Pin "A." The power supply shall be
energized for a period of 10 min and then shall be discon-
nected. The power supply shall then be correctly applied (Pin
A positive, Pin B negative) and a reference measurement shall
be made. The tachometer shall be in accordance with the
S 12.2.16 Temperature (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer
shall be positioned in an environmental chamber in an ener-
gized state and shall be subjected to the following test
procedure. Performance shall meet the requirements of S8.16.
(1) Hold test temperature at ooc for no less than 24 h.
(2) Increase test temperature in steps of 10 each, at 30 min for
each step, until plus 65 : zoe is reached. Hold at that
c4@f F2046 - 00 (2011)
temperature for no less than 24 h.
(3) Reduce test temperature in steps of 1 oo each, at 30 min for
each step, until plus 25 2C is reached. Hold at that
temperature for no less than 24 h.
During the last hour of operation at each temperature plateau
(0, 65, and 25C) the tachometer electrical output signal, of the
0- to 5-V setting, shall be measured corresponding to a speed
of 3000 rpm. The tachometer's speed range setting shall be 0
to 10 000 rpm. After the temperature test, a reference measure-
ment shall be made. Performance shall be in accordance with
S 12.2.17 Humidity (Fiber Optic Only)--The tachometer
shall be subjected to the conditioning and tests specified in
S12.2.17.1 through S12.2.17.5. The tachometer shall be ener-
gized throughout the test. Performance shall be in accordance
S 12.2.17 .1 Conditioning-To establish a reference condi-
tion for the measurement of operating parameters and a valid
basis for comparison of the effects of the conditioning to
follow, the complete equipment shall be dried at a temperature
no less than 40C or more than 500C for no less than 2 h.
S 12.2.17 .2 Reference Measurements--Following the condi-
tioning, a reference measurement shall be made at 25 soc
and 50 5 % relative humidity. Performance shall be in
accordance with the requirements of S8.17.
S 12.2.17 .3 Temperature Cycling-The tachometer shall
then be subjected to four 24-h cycles of temperature variation
consisting of 18 h at 65 SOC and 6 h at 25 5C. The
relative humidity shall be maintained at 90 to 95 % (noncon-
densing) during the steady-state conditions. The transitions
between temperatures shall be accomplished within the 6-h
period so that the time at the high temperature is 18 h. Each
transition shall be not greater than 1 h if the tachometer
remains in the chamber or 15 min if a two chamber method is
used. The relative humidity need not be controlled during the
transition periods.
Sl2.2.17.4 Measurement During Cycling-During the sec-
ond cycle, a reference measurement shall be made at the end of
the high temperature period with the tachometer remaining in
the chamber at 65 5C. The tachometer shall be energized
for as brief a period as required to complete the measurements.
S 12.2.17 .5 Measurements After Temperature Cycling-
After the four complete cycles, a reference measurement shall
be made at 25 soc with the tachometer remaining in the
chamber. Performance shall meet the requirements of S8.17.
S12.2.18 Enclosure (Fiber Optic Only)-The tachometer
shall be placed or mounted in a position typical of that for
which it was designed. The surface upon which the equipment
is placed or mounted (supporting surface) shall extend no less
than 1 m beyond the equipment on all sides so that splashing
may be produced by directing the water stream on the
supporting surface. The water stream shall be a coarse spray
with a flow rate of no less than 55 L/min and a head pressure
of no less than 3 m. A head pressure of 3 m is defined as
sufficient water pressure so that if directed straight up, the
stream of water shall rise to a height of 3 m. The distance from
the nozzle to the enclosure under test shall be approximately 2
m. The time of the test shall be no less than 5 min with
approximately equal portions of time for spray on each surface,
including joints of the enclosure and at the supporting surface.
During the test, the tachometer shall be energized and opera-
tional at an output signal, of the 0- to 5-V setting, correspond-
ing to a speed of 3000 rpm. The tachometer's speed range
setting shall be 0 to 10 000 rpm. This output signal shall be
monitored during the test. The equipment shall be in accor-
dance with the requirements of S8.18.
S 12.2.19 Salt Spray (Fiber Optic Only )-Before exposure
to salt spray, a reference measurement shall be made. The
fiber-optic tachometer shall be deenergized and tested in
accordance with Practice B 117. Duration of the test shall be 96
h. The tachometer's major components shall be disassembled
at the immediate conclusion of the test and examined for
corrosion and moisture penetration. After exposure to salt
spray, the tachometer shall be and a reference
measurement shall be made. Performance shall be in accor-
dance with the requirements of S8.19.
Sl2.2.20 Vibration-Before exposure to vibration, a refer-
ence measurement shall be made. The tachometer shall be
exposed to Type I vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-
167 -1. During vibration, the electric tachometer shall be
energized and operational at a speed corresponding to the
midpoint of full scale. During vibration, the fiber-optic tachom-
eter shall be energized and operational at an output signal, of
the 0- to 5-V setting, corresponding to a speed of 3000 rpm.
The tachometer's speed range setting shall be 0 to 10 000 rpm.
This output signal shall be monitored during the test. After
exposure to vibration, a reference measurement shall be made.
Performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of
S8.20.
S 12.2.21 Shock-Before shock, a reference measurement
shall be made. Electric tachometers shall be subjected to the
Type A, Grade A, Class I, lightweight equipment test of
MIL-S-901. During shock, electric tachometers shall be ener-
gized and operational at a speed corresponding to the midpoint
of full scale. The fiber-optic tachometer equipment shall be
exposed to shock in accordance with MIL-S-90 1, Grade A,
C, Class I. The equipment shall be mounted on Fixture
4A simulating shipboard installation. During shock, the ta-
chometer shall be energized and operational at an output
signal, of the 0- to 5-V setting, corresponding to a speed of
3000 rpm. The tachometer's speed range setting shall be 0 to
10 000 rpm. This output signal shall be monitored during
shock. After exposure to shock, a reference measurement shall
be made. Performance shall be in accordance with the require-
ments of S8.21.
S12.2.22 Electromagnetic Interference (EM/) Emission and
Susceptibility -The tachometers shall be exposed to EMI in
accordance with MIL-STD-461. During exposure to EMI, the
electric tachometer shall be energized and operational at a
speed corresponding to the midpoint of full scale. During
exposure to EMI, the fiber-optic tachometer shall be energized
and operational at an output signal, of the 0- to 5-V setting,
corresponding to a speed of 3000 rpm. The tachometer s speed
range setting shall be 0 to 10 000 rpm. This output signal shall
be monitored during exposure to EMI. After exposure to EMI,
1514
0 F2046 - 00 (2011)
a reference measurement shall be made. Performance shall be
in accordance with the requirements of S8.22 ..
Sl3.1 Warranty-Special warranty requirements shall be
S 14. Certification
S 14.1 When specified in the purchase order
buyer shall be furnished certification that
specification, and the requirements have been met. When
in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
Sl5.1 Unique product marking requirements shall be speci-
fied in the acquisition requirements.
Sl5.2 Fiber-Optic Tachometers:
Sl5.2.1 Optoelectronics Module-Each optoelectronics
module shall be permanently and legibly marked. The follow-
ing minimum information shall be provided:
( J) Nomenclature,
(2) Design classification,
(3) National Stock Number (NSN) if available,
( 4) Manufacturer's name and model number,
(5) Technical manual number,
( 6) Contract number, and
(7) A unique serial number from the manufacturer.
Sl5.2.2 Sensor Head-Each sensor head shall be perma-
nently and legibly marked in accordance with Practice D3951.
The following minimum information shall be provided:
(1) Nomenclature,
( 4) Manufacturer's name and model number, and
Sl5.2.3 Labeling-If laser radiation is used, a visible label
shall be affixed to the outside of the optoelectronics module
cover and shall contain the following:
NOTICE
UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTIONS MAY
EMIT LASER RADIATION. DO NOT VIEW BEAM
WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS AND AVOID
DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
A visible label with yellow lettering on a black background
shall be affixed to the sensor head and the inside of the
optoelectronics module and shall contain the following:
WARNING
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
Sl5.2.3.1 Alternating Current-Optoelectronics modules
with input power designation ac shall be permanently and
legibly marked with the following label:
"WARNING 115VAC"
Sl6.1 Packing Requirements-Tachometer equipment shall
be preserved, packaged, and marked in accordance with
Practice D3951. Bar codes and other applicable packing
acquisition options shall be specified.
it not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
COPYRIGHT/).
1515
A Designation: F2070- 00 (Reapproved 2011)

INTERNATIONAL
Transducers, Pressure and Differential, Pressure, Electrical
and Fiber-Optic
1
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapprovJl. A
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for pressure
and differential pressure transducers for general applications.
SI units.
safety concerns, any, associated with its use. It is the
priate safety and health practices, and determine the applica-
are included in Supplementary Requirements Sl, S2, and S3.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
2.2 ANSI!ISA Standards:
ANSI/ISA S37.1 Electrical Transducer Nomenclature and
Terminology
3
2.3 ISO Standard:
ISO 9001 Quality System-Model for Quality Assurance in
vicing4
3. Terminology
3.1 Tenns marked with (ANSI/ISA S37.1) are taken directly
from ANSI/ISA S37.1 (R-1982) and are included for the
convenience of the user.
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25. l 0 on
Electrical.
DOI: l0.1520/F2070-00R1 L
2
the ASTM website.
3
4
3.2 Definitions:
3.2.1 Terminology consistent with S37.1 shall
apply, except as modified by the definitions listed as follows:
3.2.2 absolute pressure-pressure measured relative to zero
pressure (vacuum). (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.3 ambient conditions-conditions such as pressure and
temperature of the medium surrounding the case of the
transducer. (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.4 burst pressure-the maximum pressure applied to the
transducer sensing element without rupture of the sensing
element or transducer case as specified.
3.2.5 calibration-the test during which known values of
measurands are applied to the transducer and corresponding
output readings are recorded under specified conditions.
(ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.6 common mode pressure-the common mode pressure
is static line pressure applied simultaneously to both pressure
sides of the transducer for the differential pressure transducer
only.
3.2.7 differential pressure-the difference in pressure be-
tween two points of measurement. (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.8 environmental conditions-specified external condi-
tions, such as shock, vibration, and temperature, to which a
transducer may be exposed during shipping, storage, handling,
and operation. (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.9 error-the algebraic difference between the indicated
value and the true value of the measurand.
(ANSI/ISA S37 .1)
3.2.10 fiber-optic pressure transducer-a device that con-
verts fluid pressure, by means of changes in fiber-optic
properties, to an output that is a function of the applied
measurand. The fiber-optic pressure transducer normally con-
sists of a sensor head, optoelectronics module, and connector-
ized fiber-optic cable.
3.2.11 hysteresis-the maximum difference in output, at any
measurand value within the specified range, when the value is
approached first with increasing and then with decreasing
measurand. (ANSIIISA S3 7.1)
3.2.12 insulation resistance-the resistance measured be-
tween insulated portions of a transducer and between the
1516
F2070 - 00 (2011)
insulated portions of a transducer and ground when a specified
de voltage is applied under specified conditions.
3.2.13 line pressure-the pressure relative to which a dif-
ferential pressure transducer measures pressure.
(ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.14 operating environmental conditions-environmental
conditions during exposure to which a transducer must perform
in some specified manner. (ANSI/ISA S37.1)
3.2.15 optical-involving the use of light-sensitive devices
to acquire information.
3.2.16 optical fiber-a very thin filament or fiber, made of
3.2.17 optoelectronics module-a component of the fiber-
optic pressure transducer that contains the optical source and
detector, and signal conditioner devices necessary to convert
the sensed pressure to the specified output signal.
3 .2.18 output-electrical or numerical quantity, produced by
a transducer or measurement system, that is a function of the
applied measurand.
3.2.19 overpressure-the maximum magnitude of mea-
surand that can be applied to a transducer without causing a
change in performance beyond the specified tolerance.
3.2.20 pressure cycling-the specified minimum number of
specified periodic pressure changes over which a transducer
will operate and meet the specified performance.
3.2.21 pressure rating-the maximum allowable applied
pressure of a differential pressure transducer.
3.2.22 process medium-the measured fluid (measurand)
that comes in contact with the sensing element.
3.2.23 range-measurand values, over which a transducer is
intended to measure, specified by their upper and lower limits.
(ANSI!ISA S37.1)
3.2.24 repeatability-ability of a transducer to reproduce
direction. (ANSI/IS A S37 .1)
3.2.25 response-the measured output of a transducer to a
specified change in measurand.
3.2.26 ripple-the peak-to-peak ac component of the de
output.
3.2.27 sensing element-that part of the transducer that
responds directly to the measurand. (ANSI!ISA S37.1)
3.2.28 sensitivity factor-the ratio of the change in trans-
ducer output to a change in the value of the measurand.
3.2.29 sensor head-the transduction element of the fiber-
optic pressure transducer that detects fluid pressure by means
of changes in optical properties.
3.2.30 signal conditioner-an electronic device that makes
the output signal from a transduction element compatible with
a readout system.
1517
3.2.31 static error band-static error band is the maximum
deviation from a straight line drawn through the coordinates of
the lower range limit at specified transducer output, and the
upper range limit at specified transducer output expressed in
percent of transducer span.
3.2.32 transducer-device that provides a usable output in
response to a specified measurand. (ANSIIISA S37.1)
3.2.33 wetted parts-transducer components with at least
one surface in direct contact with the process medium.
4. Classification
4.1 Designation-Most transducer manufacturers use desig-
nations or systematic numbering or identifying codes. Once
understood, these designations could aid the purchaser in
quickly identifying the transducer type, range, application, and
other parameters.
4.2 Design-Pressure transducers typically consist of a
sensing element that is in contact with the process medium and
a transduction element that modifies the signal from the
sensing element to produce an electrical or optical output.
Some parts of the transducer may be hermetically sealed if
those parts are sensitive to and may be exposed to moisture.
Pressure connections must be threaded with appropriate fittings
to connect the transducer to standard pipe fittings or to other
appropriate leak-proof fittings. The output cable must be
securely fastened to the body of the transducer. A variety of
sensing elements are used in pressure transducers. The most
common elements are diaphragms, bellows, capsules, Bourdon
tubes, and piezoelectric crystals. The function of the sensing
element is to produce a measurable response to applied
pressure or vacuum. The response may be sensed directly on
the element or a separate sensor may be used to detect element
response. The following is a brief introduction to the major
pressure sensing technology design categories.
4.2.1 Electrical Pressure Transducers:
4.2.1.1 Differential Transformer Transducer-Linear vari-
able differential transformers (LVDT) are variable reluctance
devices. Pressure-induced sensor movement, usually transmit-
ted through a mechanical linkage, moves a core within a
differential transformer. Sensors are most commonly bellows,
capsules, or Bourdon tubes. The movement of the core within
the differential transformer results in a change in reluctance
that translates to a voltage output. An amplifying mechanical
linkage may be used to obtain adequate core movement.
4.2.1.2 Potentiometric Transducer--Pressure-induced
movement of the sensing element causes movement of a
potentiometer wiper resulting in a change in resistance which
translates to a voltage output. A bellows or Bourdon tube is
commonly used as the sensing element. An amplifying me-
chanical linkage may be used to obtain adequate wiper
movement.
4.2.1.3 Strain Gage Transducer-Typical strain gage pres-
sure transducers convert a pressure into a change in resistance
due to strain which translates to a relative voltage output.
Pressure-induced movement in the sensing element deforms
strain elements. The strain elements of a typical strain gage
pressure transducer are active arms of a Wheatstone Bridge
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
arrangement. As pressure increases, the bridge becomes elec-
trically unbalanced as a result of the deformation of the strain
elements providing a change in voltage output.
4.2.1.4 Variable Capacitance Transducer-Variable capaci-
tance pressure transducers sense changes in capacitance with
changes in pressure. Typically, a diaphragm is positioned
between two stator plates. Pressure-induced diaphragm deflec-
tion changes the circuit capacitance, which is detected and
translated into a change in voltage output.
4.2.1.5 Variable Reluctance Transducer-Variable reluc-
tance pressure transducers sense changes in reluctance with
changes in pressure. Typically, a diaphragm is positioned
between two ferric core coil sensors that when excited produce
a magnetic field. Pressure-induced diaphragm deflection
changes the reluctance, which is detected and translated to a
in voltage output.
4.2.1.6 Piezoelectric Transducer--Piezoelectric transducers
consist of crystals made of quartz, tourmaline, or ceramic
material. Pressure-induced changes in crystal electrical prop-
erties cause the crystal to produce an electrical output which is
detected and translated to a change in voltage output.
4.2.2 Fiber-Optic Pressure Transducers:
4.2.2.1 Fabry-Perot Interferometer -Fabry-Perot interfer-
ometers (FPI) consist of two mirrors facing each other, the
space between the mirrors being called the cavity length. Light
reflected in the FPI is wavelength modulated in exact accor-
dance with the cavity length. Pressure-induced movement of
one of the mirrors causes a measurable change in cavity length
and a phase change in the reflected light signal. This change is
optically detected and processed.
4.2.2.2 Bragg Grating Interferometer -A Bragg grating is
contained in a section about 1 em long and acts as a narrow
band filter that detects variation in the optical properties of the
fiber. When the fiber is illuminated with an ordinary light
source such as an LED, only a narrow band of light will be
reflected back from the grating section of the fiber. If a pressure
is applied to the grating section of the fiber, the grating period
changes, and hence, the wavelength of the reflected light,
which can be measured.
4.2.2.3 Quartz Resonators-Typically, a pair of quartz reso-
nators are inside the pressure transducer. These are excited by
the incoming optical signal. One resonator is load-sensitive and
vibrates at a frequency determined by the applied pressure. The
second resonator vibrates at a frequency that varies with the
internal temperature of the transducer. Optical frequency sig-
nals from the resonators are transmitted back to the optoelec-
tronics interface unit. The interface unit provides an output of
temperature-compensated pressure.
4.2.2.4 Micromachined Membrane/Diaphragm
Deflection-The sensing element is made on a silicon substrate
using photolithographic micromachining. The deflection of this
micromachined membrane is detected and measured using
light. The light is delivered to the sensor head through an
optical fiber. The light returning from the membrane is propor-
tional to the pressure deflection of the membrane and is
delivered back to a detector through an optical fiber. The fiber
and the sensor head are packaged within a thin tubing.
4.3 Types-The following are common types of pressure
and differential pressure transducers: pressure, differential;
pressure (gage, absolute and sealed); pressure, vacuum; and
pressure, compound.
4.4 Process Medium-The following are the most common
types of process media: freshwater, oil, condensate, steam,
nitrogen and other inert gases, seawater, flue gas and ammonia,
and oxygen.
4.5 Application-The following is provided as a general
comparison of different types of transducers and considerations
for application.
4.5.1 LVDT Transducer-The sensor element may become
complicated depending on the amount of motion required for
core displacement. Careful consideration should be exercised
when the application includes very low- or
measurement, overpressure exposure, or high levels of vibra-
tion. Careful consideration should also be exercised when
measuring differential pressure of process media having high
dielectric constants, especially liquid media. If the process
media is allowed to enter the gap between the sensor element
and core, accuracy may suffer. Frequency response may suffer
depending on the type of mechanical linkage(s) used in the
transducer.
4.5.2 Potentiometric Pressure Transducer-Potentiometric
pressure transducers are generally less complicated than other
designs. Careful consideration should be exercised when the
application includes very low pressure measurement, overpres-
sure exposure, high levels of vibration, stability and repeatabil-
ity over extended periods of time, or extremely high resolution
requirements. Frequency response may suffer depending on the
type of mechanical linkage(s) used. Technological advances
have yielded more reliable designs that are commonly used.
4.5.3 Strain Gage Transducers-Low-level output strain
gage transducers are among the most common pressure trans-
ducers. They are available in very compact packages which
lend well in applications in which size is critical. Strain gage
transducers that demonstrate high degrees of accuracy and
excellent frequency response characteristics are readily avail-
able. Careful consideration should be exercised when the
application includes very low-pressure measurement, very low
lag or delay, vibration levels, extreme overpressure
requirements, or critical stability over extended periods.
4.5.4 Variable Capacitance Transducers-Variable capaci-
tance transducers are well suited to measure dry, clean gases at
very low pressures with a high degree of accuracy. Careful
consideration should be exercised when measuring differential
pressure of process media having high dielectric constants,
especially liquid media. If the process media is allowed to enter
the gap between the diaphragm and stators, accuracy may
suffer. Process media that alters the dielectric constant between
the diaphragm and stators also alters the output of the trans-
ducer unless isolation devices such as membranes or oil fills
are used.
1518
4.5.5 Variable Reluctance Transducers-Variable reluc-
tance transducers are well suited to measure most process
media, especially if the core coil sensors are isolated from the
process media. Variable reluctance transducers are well suited
for applications that include high shock or vibration levels,
F2070 - 00 (2011)
extreme overpressure requirements, high degrees of accuracy,
or critical stability over extended periods. Careful consider-
ation should be exercised when evaluating size, weight, and
cost. All reluctance devices are affected by strong magnetic
fields.
4.5.6 Piezoelectric Transducers-Piezoelectric transducers
are very effective in measuring changes in pressure. The
piezoelectric crystals only produce an output when they
experience a change in load. With adequate signal conditioners
they can also be used to perform static measurements.
4.5.7 Fiber-Optic Pressure Transducers-Fiber-optic pres-
sure transducers can be used in virtually all applications. They
are extremely sensitive and are beneficial for resolution
measurements. They are unaffected by electromagnetic inter-
ference and are recommended in applications where EMI is a
f-1"--'UA\du. These transducers are by nature safe and
are especially applicable for hazardous environments.
4.6 Range-Each manufacturer of transducers advertises a
standard operating range for their offered selections but there is
no industry-wide standard of specific ranges for transducers.
Ranges are available that cover applications from vacuums to
210 MPaG (30 000 psig). Refer to individual manufacturer
recommendations on range best suited to each application or
specify an exact range if the range is a critical characteristic.
4.7 Pressure Rating-Pressure rating applies only to differ-
ential pressure transducers. Differential pressure transducers
must be selected with a pressure rating for the maximum media
pressure to be encountered. The purchaser should refer to
specific manufacturer guidance to ensure a transducer has the
proper pressure rating for each intended application.
4.8 Power Supply-Power supplies furnish excitation to the
transducer. Power supplies may include batteries; line-
powered, electronically regulated, de power supplies; or ac
power directly from the power system.
4.9 Output-Output signals can be electrical or optical
dependent on design. Output must be measurable and must
correspond with pressure applied within the range of the
transducer. Multiple output signals shall be provided when
specified. One signal shall be designated as the prime and the
other as supplemental.
4.10 Pressure Connection-The pressure connection is the
opening of the transducer used to allow the process medium to
reach the sensing element. Differential pressure transducers
have two pressure connections, a high-pressure port and a
low-pressure port.
5.1 The purchaser should provide the manufacturer with all
of the pertinent application data shown in accordance with 5.2.
shown in the acquisition requirements, they should also be
described.
5.2.1 Title, number, and date of this specification,
5.2.2 Manufacturer's part number,
5.2.3 Range, pressure rating (differential only), power sup-
ply, output,
5.2.4 Mounting method (see 7.2),
5.2.5 Type of pressure connection (see 7 .5),
5.2.6 Type of electrical connection (see 7.4),
5.2.7 When an electrical connection mating plug is not to be
provided (see 7.4),
5.2.8 System process medium,
5.2.9 Prime output signal,
5.2.10 Supplemental output signal, if required,
5.2.11 System operating characteristics, such as pressure
and flow rate,
5.2.12 Materials,
5.2.13 Environmental requirements, such as vibration and
ambient temperature,
5.2.14 Quantity of transducers required,
5.2.15 Size and weight restrictions (see 7.7),
5.2.16 Critical service life requirements (see 8.1 ),
5.2.17 Performance requirements (see 8.2),
5.2.18 Special surface finish requirements (see 9.1 ),
5.2.19 Special cleaning requirements (see 9.2),
5.2.20 When certification is required (see Section 13),
5.2.21 Special marking requirements (see Section 14),
5.2.22 Special packaging or package marking requirements
(see Section 15),
5.2.23 When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not
required (see 16.1 ), and
5.2.24 Special warranty requirements (see 16.2).
6.1 Sensing Elements-The materials for the sensing ele-
ment and wetted parts shall be selected for long-term compat-
ibility (see 8.1) with the process medium (see 4.4).
7 .l Enclosure-If case sealing is required, the mechanism,
materials, and process shall be described. The same should
apply to the electrical connector. The long-term resistance to
common process media should be stated. Resistance to clean-
ing solvents should likewise be stated. Unique or special
enclosure requirements shall be specified in the acquisition
7.2 Transducer Mounting-Transducers are commonly
mounted directly by their pressure connections or through the
use of brackets or similar hardware. Mounting force or torque
shall be specified if it tends to affect transducer performance.
Mounting error shall be specified in terms of percent of
full-scale output or within the static error band under specified
conditions of mounting force or torque.
1519
pound units). The outline drawing shall include limiting
dimensions for pressure and electrical connections if they are
not specified. The outline drawing shall indicate the mounting
method with hole size, center location, and other pertinent
dimensions. Where threaded holes are used, thread specifica-
tions shall be provided.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
7.4 Standard Electrical Connection-An electrical interface
connector receptacle and mating plug shall be provided with
each transducer unless otherwise specified in the contract (see
5.1). Optional possible electrical interface connections include
pigtails and terminal boards.
7.5 Pressure Connections-Pressure connections commonly
consist of pipe thread, hose tube fittings, 0-ring union, Oring
union face seal, and others.
7.6 Damping-The use of a media for damping in transduc-
ers shall be specified including the type, composition, and
compatibility with transducer components and materials.
7.7 Size and Weight-The purchaser may have intended
applications in which size and weight are limited. Size and
weight restrictions shall be specified in the ordering informa-
tion (see 5.2).
8.1 Service Life-The purchaser may have a m1mmum
specified service life requirement that may be critical. Critical
service life requirements shall be specified in the ordering
information (see 5.2).
8.2 Transducer Peiformance-Performance tolerances are
usually specified in percent of transducer output span. Critical
performance requirements shall be specified in the ordering
information (see 5.2). The following performance characteris-
tics and environmental exposures may or may not be important
to each purchaser's intended application: static error band,
repeatability, hysteresis, sensitivity factor, ripple, warm-up
time, steady-state supply voltage and frequency (ac), steady-
state supply voltage (de), response, transient supply voltage
and frequency (ac), transient supply voltage (de), temperature,
humidity, overpressure, line pressure (differential only), salt
spray, pressure cycling, insulation resistance, vibration, shock,
burst pressure, output, enclosure, electromagnetic interference
(EMI), common mode pressure (differential only), pressure
rating (differential only), and power system harmonic distor-
tion.
appearance requirements shall be specified in the ordering
9.2 Transducer Cleaning-Any special cleaning require-
ments shall be specified in the ordering information (see 5.2).
subjected to first-article tests shall be specified and should
depend on the transducer design. As guidance, if each range is
covered by a separate and distinct design, a test specimen for
each range should require testing. In instances in which a
singular design series may cover multiple ranges and types, a
minimum of three test specimens should be tested provided the
electrical, optical, and mechanical similarities are approved by
the purchaser. It is suggested that three units, one unit each
representing the low, medium, and high ranges, be tested,
regardless of design similarity.
1 0.1.1 Low Range-Less than 700 kPa (less than 100
lb/in?).
10.1.2 Medium Range-700 kPa to less than 7 MPa (100 to
less than 1000 lb/in.
2
).
10.1.3 High Range-? MPa and greater ( 1000 lb/in? and
greater).
11. Test Methods
manufacturer's facility for review by the purchaser upon
request. It is recommended that test data be retained in the
manufacturer's files for at least three years, or a period of time
acceptable to the purchaser and the manufacturer.
12. Inspection
12.1 Classification of Inspections -The inspection require-
12.1.1 First-article tests (see 12.2).
12.1.2 Conformance tests (see l
12.2 First-Article Tests-First-article test requirements shall
be specified, where applicable. First-article test methods should
be specified.
12.3 Conformance Tests-Conformance testing shall be
specified when applicable. Conformance testing shall be con-
ducted on all units manufactured for delivery unless otherwise
specified in the contract.
13. Certification
1520
13.1 When specified in the acquisition requirements (see
5.2), the purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples
met.
14. Product Marking
14.1 The purchaser specified product marking shall be listed
in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2). The minimum data to
be clearly marked on each transducer shall include the follow-
ing:
t'4.1.1 Manufacturer's name,
14.1.2 Manufacturer's part number,
14.1.3 Serial number or lot number,
14.1.4 Date of manufacture,
14.1.5 Range,
14.1.6 Excitation voltage, and
14 .1. 7 Pressure rating (differential pressure transducers
only).
14.2 For differential pressure transducers, the high- and
low-pressure connections shall be clearly marked on the
transducer body adjacent to the connections.
15.1 Packaging of Product for Delivery-The product
should be packaged for shipment in accordance with Practice
F2070 - 00 (2011)
15.2 Any special packaging or package marking require-
ments for shipment or storage shall be identified in the ordering
16.2.1 All materials used to produce a unit and
16.2.2 Workmanship to produce the unit.
16.3 Special warranty requirements shall be specified in the
17. Keywords
17 .I differential pressure transmitter; fiber-optic pressure
transducer; miniature; optoelectronics module; pressure and
differential pressure transducers; pressure transmitter; sensing
element; sensor head; transduction element
The following supplementary requirement, established for U.S. naval shipboard application, shall
apply when specified in the contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between this
specification and this supplementary requirement, this supplementary requirement shall take prece-
dence. This document supersedes MIL-T-24742, Transducer, Pressure and Differential Pressure,
Miniature (Electrical), for new ship construction.
Sl. TRANSDUCERS, PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE, MINIATURE (ELECTRICAL)
Sl.l Scope
S 1.1.1 This supplement covers the requirements for minia-
ture pressure and differential pressure transducers designed to
meet the requirements for use onboard naval ships.
S 1.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
units.
S1.2 Referenced Documents
S1.2.1 ISO Standard:
6149-1 Connections for Fluid Power and General Use-
Ports and Stud Ends with ISO 261 Threads and 0-Ring
Sealing-Part 1: Ports with 0-Ring Seal in Truncated Hous-
ing4
S 1.2.2 NEMA Standard:
250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maxi-
mum)5
S 1.2.3 Military Standards:
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.I. (High-Impact); Shipboard
6
Excited)
6
~
MIL-STD-1399, Section 300 Interface Standard for Ship-
board Systems, Electric Power, Alternating Cun-ent
6
N. 17th St., Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209.
6
Available from U.S. Government Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111.
1521
6
Contact, AN type
6
S1.3 Terminology
S 1.3.1 Terminology is consistent with that of Section 3 and
S1.4 Designation
S 1.4.1 Designation-For this specification pressure trans-
ducers, designations shall be assigned in accordance with
S1.5.1 and listed in the following below:
Example: F25XMS 1-D-F-5-DC-2-N-M-1 OOD
Specification D F 5 DC 2 N M 1 OOD
F25XMS1 Type Application Press Power Output Press Mounting Range
Rating Supply Conn
S1.4.2 S1.4.3 S1.4.4 S1.4.5 S1.4.6 S1.4.7 S1.4.8 S1.4.9
Sl.4.2 Types-The following designators have been estab-
lished for the various types of transducers:
D-Pressure, differential
P-Pressure (gage, absolute and sealed)
V -Pressure, vacuum
C-Pressure, compound
S 1.4.3 Application-The following application designa-
tions have been established for the con-esponding process
media:
F-Freshwater, oil, condensate, steam, nitrogen, and other
inert gases
S-Seawater
G-Flue gas and ammonia
X-Oxygen
S 1.4.4 Pressure Rating-The pressure rating shall be indi-
cated by the designator for its numerical value for Type D
transducers ("X" for Type P, V, and C transducers) and shall be
limited to the following:
F2070 - 00 (2011)
Designator Rating, kPaG Inch-Pound, psig
100 15
2 1000 150
3 2 000 300
4 4 000 600
5 10 000 1500
6 20 000 3000
7 40 000 6000
S 1.4.5 Power Supply-Transducers shall operate with either
ac or de input power, but not both. Designators shall be as
follows:
Sl.4.5.1 de-Direct-current supply.
S1.4.5.2 ac-Alternating-current supply.
S 1.4.6 Output-The de electrical signal output of the trans-
ducer shall be designated by the following designators:
2-4-20 rnA
3-0-5 v
4-0-12 v
5--0-3 mV
6-0-200 flV
S 1.4.7 Pressure Connection-Transducer pressure sensing
connection shall be as follows:
N-M12 x 1.5 (7/16-20 UNF-2B) (see S1.7.5)
X-l/4 nps, 155-mm (6-in.) long pipe nipple (see Sl.7.5)
Z-Other
Differential Pressure
Ranges, kPaD
Range Designator
0-100 100
0-200 200
0-400 400
0-700 700
0-1400 1400
0-2800 2800
0-4000 4K
D
Differential Pressure Water
Column Ranges, kPaWD
Range Designator
0-2.5 2
0-15 15
0-40 40
0-75 75
Pressure Ranges, kPaG,
kPaA or kPaSA
Range Designator
0-100 100
0-200 200
0-350 350
0-400 400
0-700 700
0-850 850
0-1400 1400
0-2 000 2K
0-4 000 4K
0-6 000 6K
0-7 000 7K
0-10 000 10K
0-20 000 20K
0-40 000 40K
0-70 000 ?OK
S 1.4.8 Transducer Mounting-The transducer mounting
method shall be designated as follows:
P-Pressure port connection
M-Mounting plate
Sl.4.9 Range-The pressure range of the transducer shal1
be designated by two parts. The first part shall be the designator
for the upper range value. The second part shall be the
designator for the upper range unit of measure (see Sl.4.9.1).
The transducer pressure ranges shall be in accordance with
TableS 1.1.
Sl.4.9.1 Units-The units shall be designated by the corre-
sponding letter designator and are limited to the following:
Letter Sl Units Inch-Pound Units
v kPaV-kiloPascals, vacuum Hg-inches of mercury vacuum
A kPaA-kiloPascals, absolute psia-pounds per square inch,
absolute
D kPaD-kiloPascals, differential psid-pounds per square inch,
differential
G kPaG-kiloPascals, gage psig-pounds per square inch,
gage
s kPaS-kiloPascals, sealed at psis-pounds per square inch,
101.4 kPaA sealed at 14.7 psia
w kPaW-kiloPascals, water column WC-inches of water column
N KPaWD-kiloPascals, water WCD-inches of water column,
column, differential differential
S1.5 Ordering Information
c v
Water Column Ranges,
kPaW
Compound Ranges,
kPaV/kPaG
Vacuum Range,
kPaV
Range Designator
0-2.5 2
0-15 15
0-40 40
0-75 75
Range
100/150
100/300
100/900
100/1500
100/2400
100/4000
Designator
150
300
900
1500
2400
4000
Range Designator
0-100 100
Inch-Pound Units
Ranges, psid
Range Designator
0-15 100
0-30 200
0-60 400
0-100 700
0-200 1400
0-400 2800
0-600 4K
Differential Pressure Water
Column Ranges, WCD
Range Designator
0-10 2
0-60 15
0-150 40
0-300 75
Pressure Ranges, psig,
psia, or psisA
Range Designator
0-15 100
0-30 200
0-50 350
0-60 400
0-100 700
0-125 850
0-200 1400
0-300 2K
0-600 4K
0-900 6K
0-1 000 7K
0-1 500 10K
0-3 000 20K
0-6 000 40K
0-10 000 ?OK
we
Range Designator
0-10 2
0-60 15
0-150 40
0-300 75
A For upper range values of 7000 kPa (1000 lb/in.
2
) and above.
1522
Compound Ranges,
Hg-0-psig
Range Designator
30-0-15 150
30-0-30 300
30-0-1 00 900
30-0- i 50 1500
30-0-300 2400
30-0-600 4000
Vacuum Range,
Hg
Range Designator
0-30 100
F2070 - 00 (2011)
Sl.5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with
all of the pertinent application data in accordance with Sl.5.2.
If special application operating conditions exist that are not in
the acquisition requirements, they shall also be described.
Sl.5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
S1.5.2.1 Title, number, and date of this specification.
S1.5.2.2 Part designation.
Sl.5.2.3 National Stock Number (NSN), if available.
Sl.5.2.4 Mounting method, if other than specified herein.
S 1.5 .2.5 Type of pressure connection, if other than specified
herein.
Sl.5.2.6 Type of electrical connection, if other than speci-
fied herein.
S 1.5.2.7 When the electrical connection mating plug is not
to be provided.
S 1.5.2.8 Quantity of transducers required.
S 1.5.2.9 If deviation requests are required when departing
from material gu1daLnce.
Sl.5.2.10 When first-article tests are required.
S 1.5 .2.11 Special product marking requirements.
S 1.5.2.12 Special packaging or require-
ments.
S 1.5 .2.13 When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not
required.
S 1. 5. 2.14 Special warranty requirements.
Sl.5.3 First-Article 1ests-When first-article testing is re-
quired, the purchaser should provide specific guidance to
offerors whether the item(s) should be a preproduction sample,
a first-article sample, a first production item, a sample selected
from the first production items, or a standard production item
from the manufacturer's current inventory. The number of
items to be tested in accordance with S 1.12.4 should be
specified. The purchaser should include specific instructions in
acquisition documents regarding arrangements for tests, ap-
proval of first-article test results and time period for approval,
and disposition of first articles. Invitations for bids should
provide that the purchaser reserves the right to waive the
requirement for samples for first-article testing to those manu-
facturers offering a product that has been previously acquired
or tested by the purchaser; and that manufacturers offering such
products, who wish to rely on such production or test, must
furnish evidence with the bid that prior purchaser approval is
presently appropriate for the pending contract. The manufac-
ture of items before purchaser approval should be specified as
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
S1.6 Materials
S 1. 6.1 Sensing Elements-The materials for the sensing
element and wetted parts shall be selected for long-term
compatibility (see Sl.8.1) with the process medium (see
Sl.4.3). Table SL2 is provided for guidance as acceptable
material and process medium compatibility. Dissimilar metals
shall not be used in contact with each other unless suitably
finished to prevent electrolytic corrosion. When departing from
this guidance, the manufacturer shall provide evidence of
material compatibility to the procuring activity, unless speci-
fied otherwise (see S1.5.1).
S 1. 7 Physical Properties
1523
TABLE S1.2 Material Versus Application
Sensing Element and
Wetted Parts
CRES 304L, 316L, 321 &
347
CRES 15-5 PH, 17-4 PH,
and 17-7 PH
Monel and K-Monel
lnconel 600 and 750
lnconel 625 and 718
Hastelloy C276
Titanium CP and 6A1-4V
CuNi 70/30
NiSpan
Tantalum
Process Medium
Application Application Application Application
Designation Designation Designation Designation
F S G X
X X
X
X X X
X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X X
X
X X
X X
S 1. 7.1 Enclosure-The transducer body and pressure
shall be environmentally sealed unless otherwise specified. The
transducer enclosure shall be Type 4 in accordance with
NEMA Standard 250.
S 1.7 .2 Transducer Mounting-The transducer shall have a
mounting plate as shown on S 1 .1. If required in a specific
application and with prior approval of the purchaser, the
transducer may be mounted by its pressure piping connection.
For Type D transducers, the high-pressure port shall be used. If
the transducer is mounted by its pressure connection, the
mounting plate shall not be required (see Sl.5.2). If the
transducer is mounted by its pressure port connection and the
mounting plate is provided, mounting holes shall not be
required.
SL7.3 External Configuration-The transducer shall have
an external configuration within the boundaries established
Sl.l.
S 1. 7.4 Electrical Connector-An electrical interface con-
nector receptacle and mating plug shall be provided with each
transducer unless otherwise specified. The electrical connector
shall bee a standard threaded coupling receptacle, AN type,
MS3452W/14S-5P, or equivalent, for de-power input, or AN
type, MS3452W/14S-5PX, or equivalent, for ac-power input.
The mating plug shall be a MS3456W/14S-5S, or equivalent,
for de-power input, or MS3456Wil4S-5SX, or equivalent, for
ac-power input.
S1.7.4.1 de-Power Input-Output 2-The receptacle shall
be wired to provide the performance described herein. Recep-
tacle Pin A shall be +28-Vdc power input, Pin B shall be
-28-V de power input, and Pin C shall be case ground.
Receptacle Pins A and B shall also serve as the 4- to 20-mA de
output.
S 1.7 .4.2 de Power Input-Output 3, 4, 5, 6-The receptacle
shall be wired to provide the performance described herein.
Receptacle Pin A shall be + 28-V de power input, Pin B shall be
-28-V de power input, Pin C shall be case ground, Pin D shall
be positive de voltage signal output, and Pin E shall be
negative de voltage signal output.
Sl.7.4.3 ac Power Input-Output 2-The receptacle shall
be wired to provide the performance described herein. Recep-
tacle Pins A and B shall be 115-Vac power input, Pin C shall be
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
MOUNTING PlATE
Dimension
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
H
mm
72
F
THRU HOLE FOR BOLT
(B DIA - 2 PlACES)
in.
2.83
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(TYPE D ONLY)
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
(HIGH PRESSURE
FOR TYPE D)
A
8
c
D
E
F
G
H
7.20.15
90 max
6.5 max
50.0 max
0.281 0.005
3.5 max
0.25 max
2.0 max
76.0 o:o F o:o 101.0
63.5
3.0 o:o F o:o 4.0
2.5
19.0 o:o H o:o 25.0 0.75 o:o H o:o 1.0
NoTE !-Transducer housing (body) cross section is shown as circular. Any alternate cross section not exceeding 50 mm (2 in.) in width and 50 mm
(2 in.) in height is acceptable.
NoTE 2-Dimension tolerance is plus or minus 1.25 mm (0.05 in.), unless otherwise specified.
NoTE 3-The pressure connection(s) shall be generally located as shown.
FIG. S1.1 External Configuration
case ground, Pin D shall be +4- to 20-mA de-signal output, and
Pin E shall be -4- to 20-mA de signal output.
Sl.7.4.4 ac Power Input-Output 3, 4, 5, 6-The receptacle
Receptacle Pins A and B shall be 115-Vac power input, Pin C
shall be case ground, Pin D shall be positive de-voltage signal
output, and Pin E shall be negative de voltage signal output.
51.7.5 Pressure Connections-Unless otherwise specified,
transducer pressure-sensing connections for all services shall
be M12 x 1.5 (7/16-20 UNF-2B) tube connection in accordance
with ISO 6149-1. When pressure connection Type X is
specified, as commonly used on submarine oxygen replenish-
ment systems, the transducer sensing connections shall be a
nickel-copper pipe nipple
1
/4 nominal pipe size (nps) with
3.1-mm (0.12-in.) minimum wall thickness, 155 mm (6 in.)
long, welded to the socket (see S1.5.2). For TypeD transduc-
ers, the high-pressure connection shall be on the end and the
low-pressure connection shall be on the side (see S 1 l ).
S1.7.6 Welding-For Application X, all pressure boundary
joints shall be welded.
51.7. 7 Lubrication-The transducer shall operate without
lubrication of moving parts after assembly.
Sl.7.8 Damping-The use of a media for damping in
transducers shall be cited on the equipment drawing.
Sl.7.9 Weight-The weight of a transducer shall not exceed
510 g (18 oz).
S1.8 Performance Requirements
S 1.8.1 Service Life-The transducer shall be constructed for
a life of 40 000 h of operation and shall meet the requirements
specified herein when operated in the naval shipboard environ-
ment.
1524
S 1.8.2 Input Power-The transducer shall be designed to
operate using 115-V, 60-Hz, single-phase, ungrounded, ac
power as defined in MIL-STD-1399, Section 300 or 28
4.5-V de power. The transducer shall operate with power supply
variations as specified in S 1.11.2.8 and S 1.11.2.11.
S 1.8.3 Output-The electrical signal output of the trans-
ducer shall be de, directly proportional to the pressure or
differential pressure input. The output shall be a true current
source or true voltage source.
Sl.8.3.1 Current Output-When a 4- to 20-mA current
output is specified (see Sl.5.2), the requirements specified
herein shall be met regardless of external load resistance
variations over a range from 0 to 250 Q. The 4-mA output shall
correspond to the lower pressure or differential pressure range
value, and the 20-mA output shall correspond to the upper
pressure or differential pressure range value for the ranges
specified in ll1ble S 1.1.
51.8.3.2 Voltage Output--When a voltage output is speci-
fied (see S1.5.2), the requirements specified herein shall be met
for external load resistance exceeding 100 000 .0.. The 0-V
output shall correspond to the lower pressure or differential
pressure range value, and the 5-V, 12-V, 3-rn V, and 200-11 V
output shall correspond to the upper pressure or differential
pressure range value for the ranges specified in l. .
Sl.8.4 Transducer Performance-Unless otherwise speci-
fied, performance tolerances are specified in percent of trans-
ducer output span.
S 1.8.4.1 Static Error Band-The transducer static error
band shall not exceed 0.5 %.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
S1.8.4.2 Output-The output shall conform to Sl.8.3, and
the transducer performance shall be within the static error band
specified in S1.8.4.1.
Sl.8.4.3 Warm-Up Time-The transducer output shall attain
a value within ::0.5% of the steady-state output with no
overshoot in excess of 0.5 %. Output shall reach this band
within 15 s after the transducer is energized and shall remain in
this band.
S 1.8.4.4 Enclosure-The transducer shall meet all test cri-
teria in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures.
S 1.8.4.5 Repeatability-Repeatability of the transducer out-
put shall be within 0.5 %.
Sl.8.4.6 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall not
be less than 0.75 nor more than 1.25.
S1.8.4.7 Ripple-The transducer root mean square (rms)
output ripple shall not exceed 0.15 % of full-scale de output.
S 1.8.4.8 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-The maximum difference between out-
puts at any voltage and frequency or voltage (for de) condition
and the normal (115-V, 60-Hz, or 28-Vdc) at the same input
and test temperature (differential pressure shall be included for
Type D) shall not exceed 0.5 %.
S 1.8.4.9 Common Mode Pressure (Type D Only )-During
the common mode pressure test, transducer performance shall
be within the range formed by extending the upper and lower
static error band limits specified in S 1.8.4.1 by a percentage
equal to the following:
(system pressure rating)
(1/10) 1/3
differential pressure range
S 1.8.4.1 0 Response-Transducer output shall conform to
the following criteria, where all percentages are of transducer
span:
(1) The transducer output shall be within ::2% of the
maximum ramp pressure within 0.01 s of the time that pressure
is attained.
(2) The transducer output shall exhibit no overshoot of
maximum ramp pressure in excess of 2 %.
(3) The transducer output shall indicate the actual pressure to
within :: 1 % in 0.17 5 s or less after attainment of the
maximum ramp pressure, and shall remain within this error
band for the duration of the applied steady-state pressure.
Sl.8.4.11 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac) or
Supply Voltage (de):
(J) Voltage-During the voltage transient test, the transducer
output shall remain within ::0.5 % of the pretransient output.
(2) Frequency-During the frequency transient test, the
transducer output shall remain within ::0.5 % of the steady-
state output.
Sl.8.4.12 Temperature-During the temperature test, the
transducer performance shall be within the static error band
specified in S 1.8.4.1.
S 1.8.4.13 Overpressure-The calibration conducted after
the overpressure test shall have no values in excess of 1 %
deviation from the pre-overpressure test reference measure-
ment.
S1.8.4.14 Line Pressure (Type D Only)-After the line
pressure test, the transducer performance shall be within the
static error band specified in S 1.8.4.1.
1525
S 1.8.4.15 Pressure Cycling-The calibration conducted af-
ter completion of pressure cycling test shall have no values in
excess of 1 % deviation from pretest reference measurement.
S 1.8.4.16 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance
of the transducer shall be not less than 10 MQ.
S 1.8.4.17 Vibration-Monitored transducer output during
all phases of vibration test shall show no variation from
steady-state output in excess of 2 %. There shall be no visible
evidence of damage to the transducer as a result of the
vibration test.
S 1.8.4.18 Shock-The transducer shall operate during and
after the shock test. After the shock test, the transducer output
shall have no value in excess of 1 % deviation from the
preshock test reference measurement. There shall be no visual
evidence of damage to the transducer as a result of the shock
test.
S 1.8.4.19 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall withstand
the burst pressure specified in S1.11.2.19 without showing any
evidence of leakage.
S 1.8.4.20 Electromagnetic Inteiference (EM/)-The trans-
ducers shall meet the requirements of Table II of MIL-STD-
461, except as modified as follows:
(1) CE101-The test signal shall be applied only to the ac
power leads of the test sample.
(3) CS114-0nly Limit Curve #2 shall apply with the
frequency range limited from 10 kHz to 30 MHz.
(4) RE101-0nly the limit curve for 50 em shall apply.
(5) RS103-The frequency range shall be limited from 10
kHz to 18 GHz with an electric field strength test level of 10
V/m.
S1.9 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
S1.9.1 Transducer Cleaning-The manufacturer shall en-
sure that pressure transducers shall be free of all loose scale,
rust, grit, filings, and other foreign substances and free of
mercury, oil, grease, or other organic materials. In addition, the
following shall apply:
S1.9.1.1 Transducers for oxygen service, Application X (see
Sl.4.3), shall be clean gas calibrated, cleaned, and pressure
connections capped.
S 1.9.1.2 Transducers for all other applications shall be
freshwater or clean gas calibrated, cleaned, and pressure
connections capped.
Sl.lO Number of Tests and Retests
Sl.lO.l The number of test specimens to be subjected to
first-article and conformance tests shall depend on the trans-
ducer design. If each range is covered by a separate and distinct
design, a test specimen for each range shall require testing. In
instances in which a singular design series may cover multiple
ranges and types, only three test specimens need be tested
provided the electrical and mechanical similarities are ap-
proved by the purchaser. In no case, however, shall less than
three units, one unit each representing the low, medium, and
high ranges, be tested, regardless of design similarity.
S1.10.1.1 Low Range-Less than 700 kPa (less than 100
lb/in.
2
).
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
Sl.l0.1.2 Medium Range-700 kPa to less than 7 MPa (100
to less than 1000 lb/in.
2
).
S1.10.1.3 High Range-7 MPa and greater (1000 lb/in? and
greater).
S1.11 Test Methods
S 1.11.1 Test Conditions-Except where the following fac-
tors are the variables, the tests specified in S 1.11.2 shall be
conducted with the equipment under the following operating
environmental conditions:
Sl.ll.1.1 Ambient temperature shall be 23 :::!:: 2C.
S 1.11.1.2 Relative humidity shall be ambient.
S1.11.2 Tests -Except for the warm-up time test (see
S.l.11.2.3), the transducer and all associated test equipment
shall be for a period of time sufficient to ensure
complete warm-up.
S 1. l 1.2.1 Reference Measurement-A reference measure-
ment consisting of one-trial calibration with at least five
equally spaced intervals over the entire transducer range both
upscale and downscale shall be conducted when specified in
the individual test.
S 1.11.2.2 Output-A reference measurement shall be made
in accordance with S 1. 11.2.1. Performance shall conform to
the requirements of S 1.8.4.2.
S 1.11.2.3 Warm-Up Time-The test shall be conducted to
determine the elapsed time between the application of line
power to the transducer and the point at which the transducer
output reaches the conditions specified in Sl.8.4.3.
S 1.11.2.3 .1 Test Conditions -The transducer shall be sub-
jected to the ambient temperature of the testing location, while
deenergized, for not less than 2 h. Recording equipment and
other auxiliary equipment shall be energized to ensure com-
plete warm-up. An input pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) of 80 5 % of the transducer span shall be applied to
the transducer and maintained constant during this test. Perfor-
mance shall conform to S 1.8.4.
S 1.11.2.4 Enclosure-The enclosure shall be subjected to
the tests in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures.
Perfonnance shall conform to S 1.8.4.4.
S 1.11.2.5 Static Error Band and Repeatability-The trans-
ducer shall first be flexed over its full-pressure range by slowly
increasing and decreasing the applied pressure for six continu-
ous cycles. The calibration measurement shall be made at a
minimum of five equally spaced intervals over the entire range
(both upscale and downscale). Precaution shall be taken to
avoid overshoot. This calibration procedure shall be applied
three successive times to determine repeatability. Static error
band of all calibrations shall meet the requirements of S 1.8.4.1.
Repeatability shall meet the requirements of S1.8.4.5.
S 1.11.2.6 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall be
determined as follows: Provide a pressure (differential pressure
for Type D) to the transducer to a level of 80 5 % of span.
Record the input pressure (differential pressure) and corre-
sponding electrical output. Increase the pressure (differential
pressure) by an amount not exceeding 1 % of span. Record
both the new pressure (differential pressure) and corresponding
new electrical output. Calculate the change in both applied
pressure (differential pressure) and electrical output as a
percentage of transducer span. Determine the ratio of electrical
output percentage change to applied pressure (differential
pressure) percent change. Repeat this procedure for a pressure
(differential pressure) decrease not exceeding 1 % of span.
Performance shall conform to the requirements of S 1.8.4.6.
S 1.11.2. 7 Ripple-Transducer output root mean square
ripple shall be determined at an input pressure (differential
pressure for Type D) of 80 :::!:: 5% of transducer span.
Performance shall conform to the requirements of Sl.8.4.7.
S 1.11.2.8 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac)
or Supply Voltage (dc)--The transducer shall be operated at
normal, maximum, and minimum steady-state voltages (de)
and at all possible combinations of normal, maximum, and
minimum voltages and frequencies (ac). The ambient tempera-
ture shall also vary, with the transducer operated for at least 15
min at each test temperature before the first reference measure-
ment. The transducer shall be allowed at least 15 min to
stabilize at each configuration at which point a reference
measurement shall be taken (see S 1.11.2.1 ). Reference mea-
surements shall be perfonned at ambient temperatures of 0
2, 25 :::!:: 2, and 65 :::!:: 2C. Test temperatures shall be
accomplished by varying temperature in steps of 1 ooc each (30
min for each step) until the desired ambient temperature is
reached. Performance shall conform to S 1.8.4.8.
S 1.11.2.9 Common Mode Pressure (Transducer Type D
Only)-The rated pressure of the transducer shall be applied
simultaneously to both pressure ports. The pressure at the
low-pressure port shall then be decreased in pressure incre-
ments specified in S 1.11.2.1 to the specified transducer range
and then increased in similar increments to the transducer-rated
pressure. Performance shall conform to S1.8.4.9.
S 1.11.2.10 Response-A pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) ramp consisting of a pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) rise of at least 40 % of transducer span occurring at a
rate of not less than 400 %/s shall be applied to the transducer.
The maximum ramp pressure shall be maintained for at least
0.50 sand shall not vary by more than 2% of the transducer
span. Performance shall conform to S 1.8.4.10.
S 1.11.2.11 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-Tests shall be conducted with a pressure
(differential pressure for Type D) input signal equal to 80
5 % of the transducer span. Performance shall conform to the
requirements of S 1.8.4.11.
1526
(1) Transient Voltage:
(a) Upper and Lower Limits of Steady-State Voltage-With
the transducer operating at the upper and lower limits of
steady-state ac voltage, the ac-powered transducer shall have a
transient voltage of no more than :::!:: 16 %, recovering to the
steady-state band in 2 s, superimposed. With the transducer
operating at the upper and lower limits of steady-state de
the transducer shall have a transient
of no more than :::!::2 V, respectively, recovering to the
steady-state band in 2 s, superimposed. Performance shall
conform to the requirements of Sl.8.4.11.
(2) Transient Frequency (for ac-Powered Transducers):
(a) Upper Limit of Steady-State Frequency-With the trans-
ducer operating at the upper limit of steady-state frequency, a
transient frequency of + 1.5 Hz recovering to the steady-state
F2070 - 00 {2011)
band in 2 s shall be superimposed. Performance shall conform
to the requirements of Sl.8.4.11.
(b) Lower Limit of Steady-State Frequency-With the trans-
ducer operating at the lower limit of steady-state frequency, a
transient frequency of -1.5 Hz recovering to the steady-state
Sl.11.2.12 Temperature-The transducer shall operate nor-
mally (without alignment or adjustment) throughout the fol-
lowing temperature cycle. Tolerances in operating characteris-
tics shall be as specified herein.
(1) Hold the test temperature at 0 :::'::: 2C for at least 24 h.
(2) Increase the test temperature in steps of 1 oo each, at 30
min for each step, until +65 :::'::: 2C is reached and hold at that
temperature for at least 4 h.
(3) Reduce the test temperature in steps of 1 oo each, at 30
min for each step, until +25 :::'::: 2C is reached and hold at that
temperature for at least 4 h. At each temperature plateau (0, 65,
and 25C), a reference measurement (see Sl.ll.2.1) shall be
made. Performance shall conform to S 1.8.4.12.
S 1.11.2.13 Overpressure-Before the overpressure test, a
reference measurement in accordance with S 1.11.2.1 shall be
made. The transducer shall successfully withstand pressure
(differential pressure for Type D) equal to 200% of its range
with a maximum pressure of 85 MPa (12 000 lb/in.
2
) for a
period of V2 h. At the end of this period, transducers shall be
immediately subjected to a pressure equal to 7 kPa (1 lb/in.
2
)
or 10 % of range, whichever is less, below atmospheric for an
additional period of
1
/2 h. Within 10 min after release of this
pressure, a reference measurement (see S.1.11.2 .1) shall be
made for comparison. Performance shall conform to Sl.8.4.13.
For Type D only, if the line pressure rating exceeds 200 % of
the differential pressure range, the overpressure test shall be
omitted and 0.5 % deviation shall be applied to the line
pressure test (see S.l.ll.2.14).
Sl.l1.2.14 Line Pressure (for Type D Only)-The trans-
ducer shall successfully withstand the pressure rating, when
applied to the high-pressure port with the low-pressure port
vented to atmosphere for a period of 10 min. The preceding
shall be repeated with the pressure applied to the low-pressure
port of the transducer. After each test, a reference measurement
in accordance with S 1.11.2.1 shall be made. Performance shall
conform to Sl.8.4.14.
S 1.11.2.15 Pressure Cycling-Before performing the pres-
sure cycling test, a reference measurement shall be made (see
S.1.11.2.1). The test shall be conducted on a suitable system by
applying a periodic pressure change of not more than 20 % to
not less than 80 % of span for a total of 260 000 cycles. The
rate of cycling shall be within the range from 0.25 to 2 Hz. The
transducer shall be energized throughout the test. After
completion of the pressure cycling test, a reference measure-
ment shall be made for comparison (see S.l.11.2.1). Perfor-
mance shall conform to S1.8.4.15.
S 1.11.2.16 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance
of the transducer shall be determined by applying 50 V de
between electrical input and output circuits and between these
circuits and ground. The relative humidity shall be 50 10 %.
The insulation resistance measurement shall be made immedi-
ately after a 2-min period of uninterrupted test voltage appli-
cation. However, if the indication of insulation resistance
meets the specified limit (see Sl.8.4.16) and is steady or
increasing, the test may be terminated before the end of the
2-min period.
S 1.11.2.17 Vibration -The transducer shall be tested in
accordance with Type I vibration of MIL-STD-167 -1 except
that the upper frequency shall be 175 Hz. The amplitude of
vibration shall be in accordance with Table S 1.3 and for the
variable frequency portion, the vibration level shall be main-
tained for 2 min at each integral value of frequency. If no
resonance frequencies are observed, the 2-h endurance test
shall be conducted at 175 Hz. During the vibration test, a fluid
pressure of 80 :::'::: 5 % of the transducer span shall be applied to
the transducer. Transducer output during the test shall be
monitored. Performance shall conform to Sl.8.4.17.
S 1.11.2.18 Shock-The shock tests shall be conducted in
accordance with Grade A, Class 1, Type C using bulkhead
mounting Fixture 4-A of MIL-S-901. During the test, a fluid
pressure (differential pressure for Type D) of 80 :::'::: 5 % of the
transducer span shall be applied to the transducer. The trans-
ducer output during the test shall be monitored. Before and
after the shock test, reference measurements shall be made for
comparison. Performance shall conform to Sl.8.4.18.
S 1.11.2.19 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall be sub-
jected to a liquid pressure equal to 300 % of the range with a
maximum pressure of 105 MPa (15 000 lb/in.
2
) applied to the
transducer (simultaneously to both sides for Type D) for a
period of 10 min. The transducer shall conform to the require-
ments of S1.8.4.19. No performance test shall be required after
the burst pressure test. A reference measurement (see
S 1.11. 2.1) shall be recorded for information purposes.
S 1.11.2.20 EM! Tests-The EMI tests shall be in accor-
dance with the test methods specified in MIL-STD-461, with
the modifications as specified in S 1.8.4.20. Performance shall
be as specified in S 1.8.4.20.
81.12 Inspection
S 1.12.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection re-
1527
S1.12.1.1 First-article tests (see S.l.12.2).
S.l.l2.1.2 Conformance tests (see S.l.12.3).
S1.12.2 First-Article Tests-First-article tests shall be per-
formed before production. First-article tests shall be performed
procedures normally used in production. First-article tests shall
consist of the tests specified in Table S 1.4. Failure of any
5 to 20
21 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 175
5 to 20
21 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 175
TABLE S1.3 Amplitude of Vibration
0.255 0.050
0.105 0.025
0.0380 0.0075
0.0130 0.0025
Inch-Pound Units, in.
0.010 0.002
0.004 0.001
0.0015 0.0003
0.0005 0.0001
0.765 0.150
0.510 0.100
0.255 0.050
0.0380 0.0075
0.030 0.006
0.020 0.004
0.010 0.002
0.0015 0.0003
F2070 - 00 (2011)
TABLE S1.4 First-Article Tests
Test Test Method Requirement
Output S1.11.2.2 S1.8.4.2
Warm-up time S1.11.2.3 S1.8.4.3
Enclosure S1.11.2.4 S1.8.4.4
Static error band and repeatability S1.11.2.5 S1.8.4.1 and 81.8.4.5
Sensitivity factor S1.11.2.6 S1.8.4.6
Ripple S1.11.2.7 S1.8.4.7
Supply voltage and frequency (steady-state) S1.11.2.8 S1.8.4.8
Common mode pressure (transducer Type S1.11.2.9 S1.8.4.9
D only)
Response S1.11.2.10 S1.8.4.10
Supply voltage and frequency (transient) S1.11.2.11 S1.8.4.11
Temperature S1.11.2.12 S1.8.4.12
Overpressure S1.11.2.13 S1.8.4.13
Line pressure (transducer Type D only) S1.11.2.14 S1.8.4.14
Pressure cycling S1.11.2.15 S1.8.4.15
Insulation resistance S1.11.2.16 S1.8.4.16
Vibration 81.11.2.17
l:'-t n A -4""7

Shock S1.11.2.18 S1.8.4.18
Burst pressure S1.11.2.19 S1.8.4.19
EMI S1.11.2.20 S1.8.4.20
pressure transducer to meet the requirements of this specifica-
tion shall be cause for rejection.
S 1.12.2.1 Order of First-Article Tests-With the exception
of the electromagnetic interference emission and susceptibility
test which may be conducted on separate transducers, the test
specimens (transducers) shall be subjected to the tests specified
in Table S 1.4 in the order listed. Deviation of the test order
shall be approved by the purchaser.
S 1.12.3 Conformance Tests-Each pressure transducer in
each lot offered for delivery shall be subjected to the tests listed
in Table S 1.5 and shall be conducted in the order listed. Failure
of any pressure transducer to meet the requirements of this
specification shall be cause for rejection.
Sl.12.4 General Examination-Each transducer shall be
disassembling the units. The manufacturer shall be responsible
for ensuring that materials used are manufactured, examined,
and tested in accordance with applicable approved industry
standards.
S1.13 Certification
S 1.13 .1 The purchase order or contract should specify
whether the purchaser shall be furnished certification that
samples representing each lot have been either tested or
have been met. The purchase order or contract should specify
when a report of the test results shall be furnished. Otherwise,
TABLE S1.5 Conformance Tests
Test
General examination
Output
Static error band and repeatability
Sensitivity factor
Overpressure
Line pressure (transducer Type D only)
Test Method
S1.12.5
S1.11.2.2
S1.11.2.5
S1.11.2.6
S1.11.2.13
S1.11.2.14
S1.11.2.16
S1.6 and S1.7
S1.8.4.2
S1.8.4.1 and S1.8.4.5
81.8.4.6
S1.8.4.13
Si.8.4.14
S1.8.4.16
1528
the purchase order or contract should specify that all test data
review by the purchaser upon request.
S1.14 Product Marking
S1.14.1 Label Plates-A label plate with engraved
stamped markings shall be permanently affixed to the trans-
ducer. At a minimum, it shall contain the following:
Sl.14.1.1 "PRESSURE TRANSDUCER" or "DIFFEREN-
TIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER,"
S 1.14.1.2 Manufacturer's name,
Sl.14.1.3 National Stock Number (NSN), if available,
S 1.14.1.4 Date of manufacture,
S 1.14.1.5 Designation, and
S1.14.1.6 Pressure rating for Type D transducers.
S1.14.2 Transducers for use with Applications F and X (see
S 1.4.3) shall have "USE NO OIL FOR CALIBRATION"
prominently marked on the body.
S 1.14.3 For TypeD transducers, the high- and low-pressure
connections shall be clearly marked on the transducer body
adjacent to the connections.
Sl.l4.4 The legend "DO NOT LUBRICATE" shall be
S1.15 Packaging and Package Marking
S 1.15 .1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
S1.16 Quality Assurance
Sl.16.1 Quality System-A quality assurance system in
accordance with ISO 9001 shall be maintained to control the
quality of the product being supplied effectively, unless other-
wise specified in the acquisition requirements (see S1.5.2).
S 1.16.2 Warranty-Any special warranty requirements
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see Sl.5.2).
The following supplementary requirement, established for
U.S. naval shipboard application, shall apply when specified in
the contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between
this specification and this supplementary requirement, this
supplementary requirement shall take precedence. This docu-
ment supersedes MIL-S-24796, Sensors, Absolute Pressure,
Fiber Optic (Naval Shipboard Use), for new ship construction.
S2. TRANSDUCERS, PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAl;
PRESSURE, FIBER-OPTIC
S2.1. Scope
S2.1.1 This supplement covers the requirements for fiber-
optic pressure transducers designed to meet the requirements
for use onboard naval ships.
S2.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
Where information is to be specified, it shall be stated in Sl
units.
D542 Test Methods for Index of Refraction of Transparent
Organic Plastics
2
2
S2.2.2 EIA Standard:
F2070 - 00 (2011)
TIA-422 Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage
Digital Interface Circuits
7
Sealing-Part 1: Port with 0-Ring Seal in Truncated Housing
4
S2.2.4 NEMA Standard:
mum)5
MIL-PRF-49291 Fiber, Optical (Metric), General Specifica-
tion for
6
6
MIL-STD-167 -1 :Mechanical Vibrations of Shipboard
Excited)
6
ot
6
6
Contact, AN Type
6
S2.3 Terminology
S2.3.1 Terminology is consistent with that of Section and
S2.4 Classification
S2.4.1 Designation-For this specification, fiber-optic pres-
sure transducer designations shall be assigned in accordance
with S2.5.1 and listed in the following format:
Example: F25FXMS2-P-F-X-AC-A-N-1-P-1 OOA
F25FXMS2 P F X AC A N 1 P 100A
8pecifica- Type Applica- Press Power Output Press Opto- Mount- Range
tion tion Rating, Supply Conn Elec- ing
g ~ n ~
Module
82.4.2 82.4.3 82.4.4 82.4.5 82.4.6 82.4.7 82.4.8 82.4.982.4.10
S2.4.2 Type-The following designators have been estab-
lished for the various types of fiber-optic transducers:
P-Pressure (gage, sealed, absolute)
V -Pressure, vacuum
S2.4.3 Application-The following application designa-
tions have been established for the media to be measured:
F-Freshwater, oil, condensate, steam, nitrogen, and other
inert gases
S-Seawater
X-Oxygen
S2.4.4 Pressure Rating-The pressure rating shall be indi-
cated by the designator for its numerical value for Type D
transducers ("X" for Type P, V, and C transducers) and shall be
limited to the following:
7
Arlington, VA 22201.
1529
Designator Rating, kPaG Inch-Pound Units, psig
1 100 15
2 1000 150
3 ~ 300
4 4000 600
5 10 000 1500
6 20 000 3000
7 40 000 6000
S2.4.5 Power Supply-Transducers shall operate with either
ac or de input power, but not both. Designators shall be as
follows:
S2.4.5.1 de-Direct current supply.
S2.4.5.2 ac-Alternating current supply.
S2.4.6 Output-The prime output shall be an electrical de
signal. A supplemental output shall also be provided when
specified. The signal output of the transducer shall be desig-
nated by the following designators:
A---4 to 20 rnA
V-0 to 5 V
0-0ptical (and current)
D-Digital (and current)
S2.4. 7 Pressure Connection-Transducer pressure sensing
connection shall be as follows:
N-M12 x 1.5 (7/t6-20 UNF-2B) (see S7.5)
X-
1
/4 nps, 155-mm (6-in.) long pipe nipple (see S7.5)
Z-Other
S2.4.8 Optoelectronics Module-The optoelectronics mod-
ule shall be designated as follows:
1-Bulkhead mounted
2-Console mounted
S2.4.9 Transducer Mounting-The transducer mounting
method shall be designated as follows:
P-Pressure port connection
M-Mounting plate
S2.4.10 Range-The pressure range of the transducer shall
designator for the upper range unit of measure (see S2.4.8.1).
Table S2.1.
S2.4.1 0.1 Units-The units shall be designated by the
corresponding letter designator and are limited to the follow-
ing:
Letter 81 Units Inch-Pound Units
v kPaV-kiloPascals, vacuum Hg-inches of mercury vacuum
A kPaA-kiloPascals, absolute psia-pounds per square inch,
absolute
D kPaD-kiloPascals, differential psid-pounds per square inch,
differential
G kPaG-kiloPascals, gage psig-pounds per square inch,
gage
s kPa8-kiloPascals, sealed at psis-pounds per square inch,
101.4 kPaA sealed at 14.7 psia
w kPaW-kiloPascals, water column we-inches of water column
N KpaWD-kiloPascals, water WCD-inches of water column,
column, differential differential
S2.5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with
all of the pertinent application data in accordance with S2.5.2.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
TABLE S2.1 Range
D
p
c v
Sl Units
Ranges, kPaD
Differential Pressure Water Pressure Ranges, kPaG,
Column Ranges, kPaWD kPaA, or kPaSA
Range Designator Range Designator Range Designator
0-100 100 0-2.5 2 0-100 100
0-200 200 0-15 15 0-200 200
0-400 400 0-40 40 0-350 350
0-700 700 0-75 75 0-400 400
0-1400 1400 0-700 700
0-2800 2800 0-850 850
0-4000 4K 0-1 400 1400
0-2 000 2K
0-4 000 4K
0-6 000 6K
0-7 000 7K
0-10 000 10K
0-20 000 20K
0-40 000 40K
0-30 200 0-60 15 0-30 200
0-60 400 0-150 40 0-50 350
0-100 700 0-300 75 0-60 400
0-200 1400 0-100 700
0-400 2800 0-125 850
0-600 4K 0-200 1400
0-300 2K
0-600 4K
0-900 6K
0-1 000 7K
0-1 500 10K
0-3 000 20K
0-6 000 40K
0-10 000 ?OK
A For upper range values of 7000 kPa (iOOO lb/in.
2
) and above.
S2.5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
S2.5.2.2 Part designation required (see S2.4.1).
S2.5.2.3 National Stock Number (NSN), if available.
S2.5.2.4 Transducer mounting method, if other than speci-
fied herein (see S2.7.2).
S2.5.2.5 Optoelectronics module mounting method, if other
than specified herein (see S2.7.2).
S2.5.2.6 Type of pressure connection, if other than specified
herein (see S2.7.7).
S2.5.2.7 Type of electrical connection, if other than speci-
S2.5.2.8 When the electrical connection mating plug is not
to be provided (see S2.7.6).
S2.5.2.9 Requirements when Type 2 optoelectronics module
is specified (see S2.7.2.2).
S2.5.2.10 Fiber-optic cable length required (see S2.7.3).
S2.5.2.11 Output requirements when Type 0 rmtput is
specified (see S2.8.3.3) or output requirements and data format
when Type D output is specified (see S2.8.3.4).
S2.5.2.12 Electrical connectors when Type D output is
specified (see S2. 7 .6).
S2.5.2.13 When overload protection is required for the
optoelectronics module (see S2.7.9).
kPaW
Range Designator
0-2.5 2
0-15 15
0-40 40
0-75 75
0-60 15
0-150 40
0-300 75
Compound Ranges,
kPaV/kPaG
Range Designator
100/150 150
100/300 300
100/900 900
100/1500 1500
100/2400 2400
100/4000 4000
30-0-30 300
30-0-100 900
30-0-150 1500
30-0-300 2400
30-0-600 4000
Vacuum Range,
kPaV
Range Designator
0-100 100
S2.5.2.14 Quantity of transducers required.
S2.5.2.15 When first-article tests are required (see S2.12.3).
S2.5.2.16 Group B inspection sample size (see S2.12.3.2).
S2.5.2.17 Special product marking requirements (see
S2.14).
S2.5.2.18 Special packaging or package marking require-
ments (see S2.15).
S2.5.2.19 When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not
required (see S2.16.1).
S2.5.2.20 Special warranty requirements (see S2.16.2).
S2.5.3 First-Article Tests-When first-article tests are re-
items to be tested in accordance with S2.12.4 should be
specified. The purchaser should also include specific instruc-
tions in acquisition documents regarding arrangements for
tests, approval of first-article test results and time period for
approval, and disposition of first articles. Invitations for bids
should provide that the purchaser reserves the right to waive
the requirement for samples for first-article testing to those
manufacturers offering a product that has been previously
acquired or tested by the purchaser, and that manufacturers
1530
F2070- 00 (2011)
offering such products, who wish to rely on such production or
test, must furnish evidence with the bid that prior purchaser
approval is presently appropriate for the pending contract. The
manufacture of items before purchaser approval should be
specified as the responsibility of the manufacturer.
S2.6 Materials
S2.6.1 Meta/s-Unless otherwise specified herein, all met-
als used in the construction of the transducer shall be corrosion
resistant. Dissimilar metals shall not be used in contact with
each other unless suitably finished to prevent electrolytic
corrosion. The materials for the wetted parts shall be selected
for long-term compatibility with the process medium.
S2.6.2 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the con-
struction of the transducer shall in the end configuration be
noncombustible or fire retardant in the most hazardous condi-
tions of atmosphere, pressure, and temperature to be extJected
in the application. Fire retardance shall not be achieved by use
of nonpermanent additives to the basic materiaL
S2.6.3 Fungus-Resistant Materials-Materials used in the
construction of the transducer shall not support the growth of
fungus.
S2.6.4 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning Agents-When
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal trans-
ducer components, no degradation shall result during in-
service use.
S2.6.5 Refractive Index Matching Gels, Fluids, or
pounds shall not produce toxic, corrosive, or explosive by-
products. The material is subject to a toxicological data and
max
B 50.0 max
-c 6.5 max
D 76.0 :os: F
E 63.5
F 19.0 :os: F
G 72
H 7.2 0.15
formulations review and inspection, for safety of material, by
the purchaser. The index matching material shall be either
silicone or aliphatic hydrocarbon material and shall be clear
and transparent. The index matching material shall have an
index of refraction of 1.46 0.01 as tested in accordance with
Test Methods 0542, when exposed to operating temperature
extremes between -28 and +85C. The index matching mate-
rial shall not flow at elevated temperatures. The index match-
ing material shall remain clear and transparent when tested for
water absorption in accordance with Test Method 0570. The
index matching material shall have a shelf life not less than 36
months at 25 5C. The 36-month period commences on the
date of adhesive manufacture.
S2. 7 Physical Properties
S2. 7.1 Sensor Head Configuration-The sensor head shall
be constructed in accordance with configuration limits in
S2.1. When required for repair or maintenance, replacement of
sensor head components shall be accomplished with the sensor
head body remaining fixed in place at mounting plate and
pressure connection points.
S2.7.1.1 Sensor Head Mounting-The sensor head shall be
mounted using mounting holes in locations shown in S2.1.
If required in a specific application and with prior approval of
the purchaser, the sensor head may be mounted by its pressure
piping connection (see S2.5.2). For Type D transducers, the
high-pressure port shall be used. If the sensor head is mounted
by its pressure connection, mounting holes shall not be
required. It is recommended that the sensor head be installed
max
2.0 max
0.25 max
101.0 3.0 :os: F :os: 4.0
2.5
25.0 0.75:os:F:os:1.0
2.83
0.281 0.005
NoTE 1-Sensor head housing (body) crO!is section is shown as circular. Any alternate cross ~ ~ o not exceeding 50 rnm (2 in.) in width and 50 mm
(2 in.) in height is acceptable.
NoTE 2-Dimension tolerance is plus or minus 1.25 mm (0.05 in.), unless otherwise specified.
NoTE 3-The pressure connection(s) shall be generally located as shown.
FIG. S2.1 Sensor Head External Configuration
1531
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
such that sufficient clearance is provided for repair and
maintenance of the unit.
S2.7.2 Optoelectronics Module-The optoelectronics mod-
ule shall contain the optical and signal conditioner devices
necessary to convert the sensor head output to the specified
transducer output signal. Access to the interior of the optoelec-
tronics module shall be possible to replace the connectorized
cable. The module shall be bulkhead mounted or console
mounted as specified in acquisition requirements (see S2.5.2).
S2.7.2.1 Bulkhead Mounted (Type I)-The optoelectronics
module shall be housed in a NEMA Standard 250 Type 4
enclosure.
S2.7.2.2 Console Mounted (Type 2)-The optoelectronics
module shall be packaged in a console-mounted circuit card as
specified in acquisition requirements (see S2.5.2).
S2.7 .2.3 Fiber-Optic Cable-A fiber-optic cable shall be
used to connect the sensor head to the optoelectronics module.
There shall be no less than two times the number of fibers
needed for operation of the transducer in the cable. Penetration
of the fiber-optic cable into both the sensor head and the
optoelectronics module shall be watertight. The required length
of cable shall be as specified in acquisition requirements (see
S2.5.2).
S2.7.4 Optical Fiber-All optical fiber used in the construc-
tion of the transducer shall be in accordance with MIL-PRF-
49291.
S2.7.5 Fiber-Optic Connectors, Receptacles, and Bulkhead
Adapters-All fiber-optic connectors, receptacles, and bulk-
head adapters shall be in accordance with MIL-C-83522 and
MIL-C-83522/16, 17, and 18, respectively, or equivalent.
Connectors shall be assembled at both ends of the fiber-optic
cable between the sensor head and the optoelectronics module.
The connectors and receptacles shall be mounted inside the
sensor head and optoelectronics module.
S2.7.6 Electrical Connector-An electrical interface con-
nector receptacle and mating plug shall be provided with each
optoelectronics module of the transducer unless otherwise
specified. The electrical connector shall be a standard threaded
coupling receptacle, AN type, MS3452W/14S-5P, or equiva-
lent, for de-power input, or AN type, MS3452W/14S-5PX, or
equivalent, for ac-power input. The mating plug shall be a
MS3456W/14S-5S, or equivalent, for de-power input, or
MS3456W/14S-5SX, or equivalent, for ac-power input. Elec-
trical connectors for digital output shall be as specified (see
S2.5.2).
S2.7.6.1 de-Power Input-Current Output-The receptacle
-28-V de power input, and Pin C shall be case ground.
Receptacle Pins A and B shall also serve as the 4-20-mA de
signal output.
S2.7.6.2 de-Power Input-Voltage Output-The receptacle
-28-V de power input, Pin C shall be case ground, Pin D shall
be +0-5-Vdc signal output, and PinE shall be -0-5-Vdc signal
output.
S2.7.6.3 ac-Power Input-Current Output-The receptacle
shall be case ground, Pin D shall be +4-20-rnA de signal
output, and PinE shall be -4-20-mA de signal output.
S2.7.6.4 ac-Power Input-Voltage Output-The receptacle
shall be case ground, Pin D shall be +0-5-V de signal output,
and PinE shall be -0-5-Vdc signal output.
S2.7.7 Pressure Connections-Unless otherwise specified,
transducer pressure-sensing connections for all services shall
be M12 x 1.5 (7116-20 UNF-2B) tube connection in accordance
with ISO 6149-1. When pressure connection Type X is
specified, as commonly used on submarine oxygen replenish-
ment systems, the transducer sensing connections shall be a
nickel-copper pipe nipple I&#
10
/ nominal pipe size (nps) with
3.1-mm (0.12-in.) minimum wall thickness, 155 mm (6 in.)
long, welded to the socket (see S2.5.2). For TypeD transduc-
ers, the high-pressure connection shall be on the end and the
low-pressure connection shall be on the side (see S2.l ).
S2.7.8 Adjustments-Tamper-proof adjustments for zero
and span may be provided on the optoelectronics module for
calibration purposes. The number of adjustments shall be kept
to a minimum consistent with the operation and maintenance
requirements. Electrical disconnection shall not be required to
accomplish these adjustments.
S2. 7. 9 Electrical Overload Protection and Isolation-The
optoelectronics module shall be provided with overload pro-
tection when not adequately protected by the ship's power
circuits (see S2.5.2). A means of isolating the optoelectronics
module from ship power shall be provided on the unit.
S2.7.10 Calibration Media-Oil shall not be used as the
calibration media.
S2.7.11 Welding-For Application X, all pressure boundary
shall be welded.
S2. 7.12 Lubrication-The transducer shall not require lu-
brication.
1532
S2.7.13 Damping-The use of oil for damping is prohib-
ited.
S2.7.14 Weight-The weight of the sensor head shall not
exceed 510 g (18 oz). The weight of the optoelectronics
module shall not exceed 4.5 kg ( 10 lb ).
S2.8.1 Service Life-The transducer shall be constructed for
service life of no less than 40 000 h and shall meet the
requirements specified herein when operated in the naval
shipboard environment.
S2.8.2 Input Power-The transducer shall be designed to
operate using 115-V, 60-Hz, single-phase, ungrounded, ac
power as defined in MIL-STD-1399, Section 300 or 28
4.5-V de power. The transducer shall operate with power
variations as specified in S2.11.2.7 and S2.11.2.8.
S2.8.3 Output-The prime transducer output shall be an
electrical de signal that is directly proportional to the input
pressure and shall be a true current or voltage source. If an
or digital output is required, it shall be a supplemental
output.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
S2.8.3.1 Current Output-When a 4- to 20-mA current
output is specified (see S2.5.2), the requirements specified
herein shall be met regardless of external load resistance
variations over a range from 0 to 250 Q. The output shall be
directly proportional to the input pressure. The 4-mA output
shall correspond to the lower pressure range value and the
20-mA output shall correspond to the upper pressure range
value for the ranges specified in Table S2.1.
S2.8.3.2 Voltage Output-When a 0- to 5-V output is
specified (see S2.5.2), the requirements specified herein shall
be met for external load resistance exceeding 100 000 Q. The
output shall be directly proportional to the input pressure. The
0-V output shall correspond to the lower pressure range value,
and the 5-V output shall correspond to the upper pressure range
value for the ranges specified in Table S2.1.
S2.8.3.3 Optical Output-When an optical output is speci-
fied (see S2.5.2), the optical output requirements shall be as
specified in the ordering data (see S2.5.2).
S2.8.3.4 Digital Output-When an electrical digital output
is specified (see S2.5.2), the digital output requirements shall
be as specified in the ordering data (see S2.5.2). The electrical
characteristics shall be in accordance with EIA Standard
TIA-422 for balanced voltage digital interface circuitry, or as
specified (see S2.5.2). The data format shall be as specified (see
S2.5.2).
S2.8.4 Transducer Peiformance-Unless otherwise speci-
fied, performance tolerances are specified in percent of trans-
ducer output span.
S2.8.4.1 Static Error Band-The transducer static error
band shall not exceed :: 1 %.
S2.8.4.2 Repeatability -Repeatability of the transducer
output shall be within 0.5 %.
S2.8.4.3 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall not
S2.8.4.4 Response-The transducer output shall conform to
span:
(1) The transducer output shall be within ::2% of the
is attained.
maximum ramp pressure in excess of 2 %.
within :: 1 % in 0.2 s or less after attainment of maximum ramp
pressure, and shall remain within this error band for the
duration of applied steady-state pressure.
S2.8.4.5 Warm-Up Time-The transducer output shall attain
a value within :: 1 % of the steady-state output with no
overshoot in excess of 1 %. Output shall reach this band within
1 min after the transducer is energized and shall remain in this
band.
S2.8.4.6 Ripple-The transducer rms output ripple shall not
be greater than 0.5 %.
S2.8.4.7 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-The maximum difference between out-
puts at any voltage and frequency or voltage (for de) condition
and the normal (115-V, 60-Hz, or 28-V de) at the same input
and test temperature (differential shall be included for Type D)
shall not exceed 1 %.
S2.8.4.8 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac) or
Supply Voltage (de):
S2.8.4.8.1 Voltage-During the voltage transient test, the
transducer output shall remain within ::0.5 % of the pre-
transient output.
S2.8.4.8.2 Frequency -During the frequency transient test,
the transducer output shall remain within ::0.5 % of the
pre-transient output.
S2.8.4.9 Power interruption-During the power interrup-
tion test, the transducer performance shall conform to S2.8.4.1.
S2.8.4.10 Common Mode Pressure (Type D Only )-During
the common mode pressure test, transducer performance shaH
be within the range formed by extending the upper and lower
static error band limits specified in S2.8.4.1 by a percentage
equal to:
(system pressure rating)
( 1110) 1/3
differential pressure range
S2.8.4.11 Temperature-During the temperature test, the
transducer performance shall be within the static error band
S2.8.4.12 Enclosure-The sensor head and optoelectronics
module shall meet all test criteria in NEMA Standard 250 for
Type 4X enclosures.
S2.8.4.13 Overpressure-Calibration conducted after over-
pressure test shall have no values in excess of 1 % deviation
from the pre-overpressure test reference measurement.
S2.8.4.14 Line Pressure (Type D Only )-After the line
pressure test, transducer performance shall be within the static
error band specified in S2.8.4.1.
S2.8.4.15 Pressure Cycling-Calibration conducted after
completion of pressure cycling test shall have no values in
excess of 1 % deviation form pretest reference measurement.
S2.8.4.16 Vibration-Monitored transducer output during
all phases of the vibration test shall show no variation from
vibration test.
S2.8.4.17 Shock -The transducer shall operate during and
pre-shock test reference measurement. There shall be no visual
test.
1533
S2.8.4.18 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall withstand
S2.8.4.19 Short-Circuit (Output Type A Only)-After the
short-circuit test, the transducer shall exhibit no damage and
shall conform to S2.8.4.1.
S2.8.4.20 Line Voltage Reversal (de Power Supply Only)-
The transducer shall conform to S2.8.4.1 after the line voltage
reversal test.
S2.8.4.21 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance
0 F2070 - 00 (2011)
S2.8.4.22 Electromagnetic Inteiference (EM/) Emission and
Susceptibility -The transducers shall meet the requirements of
Table II of MIL-STD-461, except as modified as follows:
(1) CElOl-The test signal shall be applied only to the
ac-power leads of the test sample.
(2) CE102-The test signal shall be applied only to the
ac-power leads of the test sample.
(4) RElOl-Only the limit curve for 50 em shall apply.
V/m.
rust, grit, filings, and other foreign substances and free of
mercury, oil, grease, or other organic materials. In addition, the
following shall apply:
S2.9.1.1 Transducers for oxygen service, Application X (see
S2.4.3), shall be clean gas calibrated, cleaned, and pressure
connections capped.
S2.9.1.2 Transducers for all other applications shall be
freshwater or clean gas calibrated, cleaned, and pressure
connections capped.
S2.9.2 Surface Finish--Surfaces of castings, forgings,
molded parts, stampings, and machined and welded parts shall
be free of defects such as cracks, pores, undercuts, voids, and
gaps. External surfaces shall be smooth and edges shall be
either rounded or beveled. There shall be no bum through,
warpage, or dimensional change as a result of heat from
welding. There shall be no damage to adjacent parts resulting
from welding.
S2.10 Number of Tests and Retests
S2.10.1 Test Specimen-see 10.1.
S2.11 Test Methods
S2.11.1 Test Conditions-Except where the following fac-
tors are the variables, the tests specified in S2.11.2 shall be
S2.11.1.1 Ambient temperature shall be 23 2C.
S2.11.1.2 Relative humidity shall be ambient.
S2.11.2 Tests-Except for the warm-up time test (see
S2.11.2.5), the transducer and all associated test equipment
shall be energized for a period of time sufficient to ensure
complete warm-up.
S2.11.2.1 Reference Measurement-A reference measure-
ment consisting of a one-trial calibration with at least five
the individual test. No adjustments to the transducer are
permitted during the reference measurement.
S2.11.2.2 Static Error Band and Repeatability -The trans-
ducer shall first be flexed over its full-pressure range by slowly
(both upscale and downscale). Precaution shall be taken
band of all calibration shall meet the requirements of S2.8.4.1.
S2.11.2.3 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall be
determined as follows: Provide an input pressure (differential
pressure for Type D) to the transducer of 80 5% of span.
Record the input pressure (differential pressure) and corre-
sponding electrical output. Increase the pressure (differential
pressure) by an amount not exceeding 1 % of span. Record
both the new pressure (differential pressure) and corresponding
new electrical output. Calculate the change in both applied
pressure (differential pressure) and electrical output as a
percentage of transducer span. Determine the ratio of electrical
output percentage change to applied pressure (differential
pressure) percentage change. Repeat this procedure for a
pressure (differential pressure) decrease not exceeding 1 % of
span. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S2.8.4.3.
S2.11.2.4 Response-A pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) rise of at least 40% of span occurring in not greater
than 0.1 s shall be applied to the transducer. The maximum
ramp pressure shall be maintained for at least 0.5 s and shall
not vary by more than 2% of the transducer span. Perfor-
mance shall conform to the requirements of S2.8.4.4.
S2.11.2.5 Warm-Up Time-The test shall be conducted to
determine the elapsed time between the application of the line
output reaches the conditions specified in S2.8.4.5.
(1) Test Conditions-The transducer shall be subjected to the
ambient temperature of the testing location, while de-
energized, for not less than 2 h. Recording equipment and other
auxiliary equipment shall be energized to ensure complete
warm-up. An input pressure of 80 5 % of span shall be
applied to the transducer and maintained constant during this
test. Performance shall conform to the requirements of S2.8.4.
1534
S2.11.2.6 Ripple-Transducer output rms ripple shall be
determined at an output pressure (differential pressure for Type
D) of 80 5% of transducer span. Performance shall conform
to the requirements of S2.8.4.6.
S2.11.2. 7 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac)
or Supply Voltage (de)-The transducer shall be operated at
normal, maximum, and minimum steady-state voltages (de)
and at all possible combinations of normal, maximum, and
minimum voltages and frequencies (ac). The ambient tempera-
ture shall also vary, with the transducer operated for at least 1
h at each test temperature before the first reference measure-
ment (see S2.11.2.1 ). Reference measurements shall be per-
formed at ambient temperatures of 0 2C, 25 2C, and 65
2C. Test temperatures shall be accomplished by varying
temperature in steps of 1 ooc each (30 min for each step) until
the desired ambient temperature is reached. Performance shall
conform to the requirements of S2.8.4.7.
S2.11.2.8 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-Tests shall be conducted with a pressure
(differential pressure for Type D) input signal equal to 80
5 % of the transducer span. The transducer output shall be
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
monitored throughout the test. Performance shall conform to
the requirements of S2.8.4.8.
S2.11.2.8.1 Transient Voltage:
(1) Upper and Lower Limits of Steady-State Voltage-With
the transducer operating at the upper and lower limits of
steady-state ac voltage, the ac-powered transducer shall have a
transient voltage of 16 %, recovering to the steady-state band
in 2 s, superimposed. With the transducer operating at the
upper and lower limits of steady-state de voltage, the de-
powered transducer shall have a transient voltage of 2 V,
respectively, recovering to the steady-state band in 2 s, super-
imposed. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S2.8.4.8.
S2.11.2.8.2 Transient Frequency (for ac-Powered Trans-
ducers):
(1) Upper Limit of Steady-State Frequency-With the trans-
ducer operating at the upper limit of steady-state frequency, a
transient frequency of + 1.5 Hz recovering to the steady-state
(2) Lower Limit of Steady-State Frequency-With the trans-
ducer operating at the lower limit of steady-state frequency, a
transient frequency of -1.5 Hz recovering to the steady-state
S2.11.2.9 Power Interruption-An input pressure ( differen-
tial pressure for Type D) of 80 5 % of span shall be applied
to the transducer and maintained constant during the test. With
the transducer operating within the steady-state tolerances of
voltage and frequency, the external power supply shall be
interrupted for an interval of 3 to 4 s. The power supply shall
then be reestablished to within steady-state tolerances. The
transducer shall be operated at steady-state power for 1 min.
The power supply shall then be interrupted for an interval of 30
s. This cycle shall be repeated three times. Performance shall
S2.11.2.10 Common Mode Pressure (Transducer Type D
low-pressure port shall then be decreased in pressure incre-
ments specified in S2.11.2.1 to the specified transducer range
and then increased in similar increments to the transducer-rated
pressure. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S2.8.4.10.
S2.11.2.11 Temperature-The transducer shall operate nor-
mally (without alignment or adjustment) throughout the fol-
lowing temperature cycle. Tolerances in operating characteris-
tics shall be as specified herein. Performance shall conform to
Hold the test temperature at 0 2C for at least 24 h.
the last hour of a reference measurement
shall be made (see S2.11.2.1 ).
( 2) Increase the test temperature in steps of 1 oo each, at 30
min for each step, until +65 2C is reached and hold at that
temperature for at least 24 the last hour of operation,
a reference measurement shall be made (see S2.11.2.1).
1535
(3) Reduce the test temperature in steps of 1 oo each, at 30
min for each step, until +25 2C is reached and hold at that
temperature for at least 24 h. During the last hour of operation,
a reference measurement shall be made (see S2.11.2.1).
S2.11.2.12 Enclosure -The sensor head and optoelectron-
ics module (Type 1 only) shall be subjected to the tests in
NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures. Performance
shall conform to the requirements of S2.8.4.12.
S2.11.2.13 Overpressure-Before the overpressure test, a
reference measurement in accordance with S2.11.2.1 shall be
made. The transducer shall be subjected to a pressure equal to
200 % of the upper limit of its range for a period of 30 min.
Within 10 min after release of this pressure, a reference
measurement (see S2.11.2.1) shall be made for comparison.
Performance shaH conform to the requirements of 52.8.4.13.
S2.11.2.14 Line Pressure (for Type D Only)-The trans-
ducer shall successfully withstand the pressure rating, when
applied to the high-pressure port with the low-pressure port
vented to atmosphere, for a period of 10 min. The preceding
shall be repeated with the pressure applied to the low-pressure
port of the transducer. After each test, a reference measurement
in accordance with S2.11.2.1 shall be made. Performance shall
conform to S2.8.4.14.
S2.11.2.15 Pressure Cycling-Before performing the pres-
S2.11.2.1). The test shall be conducted by applying a periodic
pressure change of not more than 20 % of span to not less than
80 % of span for a total of 260 000 cycles. The rate of cycling
shall be within the range from 0.25 to 2 Hz. The transducer
shall be energized throughout the test. After completion of the
pressure cycling test, a reference measurement shall be made
for comparison (see S2.11.2.1). Performance shall conform to
S2.11.2.16 Vibration-A reference measurement (see
S2.11.2.1) shall be made before the vibration test. The trans-
ducer shall be tested in accordance with Type I (environmental)
vibration of MIL-STD-167-1 except that the upper frequency
shall be 175 Hz; the amplitude of vibration shall be in
accordance with Table S2.2; and for the variable frequency
portion, the vibration level shall be maintained for two minutes
at each integral value of frequency. If no resonances are
observed, the 2-h endurance test shall be conducted at 17 5 Hz.
During the vibration test, a fluid pressure of 80 5 % of the
transducer span shall be applied to the transducer. Transducer
output during the test shall be monitored. Performance shall
TABLE S2.2 Amplitudes of Vibration

21 to 50 0.105 0.025 0.510 O.iOO
5i to 100 0.0380 0.0075 0.255 0.050

21 to 50 0.004 0.001 0.020 0.004
51 to 100 0.0015 0.0003 0.010 0.002
101 to 175 0.0005 0.0001 0.0015 0.0003
F2070 - 00 (2011)
S2J 1.2.17 Shock-The shock tests shall be conducted in
mounting fixture 4-A of MIL-S-901. During the test, a fluid
pressure of 80 5 % of the transducer span shall be applied to
the transducer. The transducer output during the test shall be
monitored. Before and after the shock test, reference measure-
ments shall be made for comparison. Performance shall con-
form to the requirements of S2.8.4.18.
S2.11.2.18 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall be sub-
jected to a liquid pressure equal to 300 % of the upper limit of
its range applied to the transducer for a period of 10 min. The
transducer shall conform to the requirements of S2.8.4.18. No
performance test shall be required after the burst pressure test.
A reference measurement (see S2.11.2.1) shall be recorded for
information purposes.
S2.11.2.19 Short-Circuit (Output Type A Only)-An input
pressure (differential pressure for Type D) of 80 5 %of span
shall be applied to the transducer and maintained constant
during the test. The transducer shall be de-energized. The
electrical output pins of the optoelectronics module shall be
connected together with no load resistance. The transducer
shall be energized for 5 min. Immediately following the 5-min
period, the output pins shall be unshorted. The transducer shall
S2.11.2.20 Line Voltage Reversal (de Power Supply
Only )--An input pressure (differential pressure for Type D) of
80 5 % of span shall be applied to the transducer and
maintained constant during the test. The positive 28-Vdc signal
shall be applied to Connector Pin B. The de reference signal
shall be applied to Connector Pin A. The transducer shall be
energized for a period of 10 min and then disconnected. The
power shall then be correctly applied (Pin A positive, Pin B
negative). A reference measurement shall be made (see
S2.11.2.1 ). The transducer shall conform to the requirements of
S2.8.4.20.
circuits and ground. The relative humidity shall be 50 10 %.
after a 2-min period of uninterrupted test voltage appli-
meets the specified limit (see S2.8.4.21) and is steady or
increasing, the test may be terminated before the end of the
2-min period.
S2.11.2.22 EM! Emission and Susceptibility-The EMI
tests shall be in accordance with the test methods specified in
MIL-STD-461, with the modifications as specified in
S2.8.4.22. Performance shall conform to the recJUIJren1eJJtts
S2.8.4.22.
S2.12 Inspection
S2.12.1 Classification of Inspections--The re-
S2.12.1.1 First-article tests (see
S2.12.1.2 Conformance tests (see
S2.12.2 First-Article Tests--First-article tests shall be per-
formed before production. First-article tests shall be peJ:tmme:d
on samples that have been produced with eq11ipment
consist of the examination and tests specified in Table S2.3.
Failure of any pressure transducer to meet the requirements of
S2.12.2.1 First-Article Tests Sample Size-Two transducers
of each lot shall be subjected to first-article testing, Table S2.3.
One sample shall be subjected to the tests of Group I and one
sample shall be subjected to the tests of Group II of Table S2.3.
The fiber-optic connecting cable shall not be less than 100 ft.
S2.12.2.2 Order of First-Article Tests-The sample trans-
ducers shall be subjected to the tests specified in Table S2.3 in
the order listed except that the steady-state supply voltage and
frequency inspection may be performed concurrently with the
temperature inspection. Any deviation in the test order shall
first be approved by the purchaser.
1536
S2.12.3 Conformance Tests-Each lot of transducers of-
fered for delivery shall be subjected to the tests of Table S2.4.
S2.12.3.1 Group A Tests-All transducers offered for deliv-
ery shall be subjected to Group A tests as listed in Table S2.4.
Failure of any transducer to meet the requirements of this
S2.12.3.2 Group B Tests-Group B tests shall be as listed in
Table S2.4. The number of samples subjected to Group B tests
shall be in accordance with Table S2.5. Failure of any
transducer to meet the requirements of this specification shall
S2.12.4 General Examination-Each transducer shall be
and marking of identification. Examination shall be
disassembling the units. Examination shall include a check of
all adjustments, if applicable. The manufacturer shall be
TABlE S2.3 First-Article Tests
error
Sensitivity factor
Response
Warm-up time
Ripple
Test
voltage and frequency (steady-state)
voltage and frequency (transient)
Power
Common pressure (transducer Type
D only)
Overpressure
Line pressure (transdiuce1 Type D only)
Pressure
Vibration
Shock
error
Short-circuit (output
Line voltage reversal
EMI emission and
Test
Method
82.11.2.3
82.11.2.4
82.11.2.5
82.11.2.6
82.11.2.7
82.11.2.8
82.11.2.9
82.11.2.10
82.11.2.11
82.11.2.12
82.11.2:13
82.11.2.14
82.11.2.15
82.11.2.16
82.11.2.17
Requirement
82.8.4.3
82.8.4.4
82.8.4.5
82.8.4.6
82.8.4.7
82.8.4.8
82.8.4.9
82.8.4.10
82.8.4.11
82.8.4.12
82.8.4.13
82.8.4.14
82.8.4.15
82.8.4.16
82.8.4.17
F2070 - 00 (2011)
TABLE 52.4 Conformance Tests
Test
General examination
Sensitivity factor
Temperature
Enclosure
Line pressure (Type D only)
Overpressure
Test Method
Group A
Grou B
S2.12.5
S2.11.2.2
S2.11.2.3
S2.11.2.21
82.11.2.11
S2.11.2.12
82.11.2.14
S2.11.2.13
82.6 and S2.7
S2.8.4.1 and 82.8.4.2
S2.8.4.3
S2.8.4.21
S2.8.4.11
82.8.4.12
S2.8.4.14
S2.8.4.13
TABLE 52.5 Group B Tests Sample Size
Lot or Batch Size Size
2 to 8 2
9 to 15 3
16 to 25 5
26 to 50 8
51 to 90 13
91 to 150 20
151 to 280 32
281 to 500 50
501 to 1200 80
1201 to 4200 125
4201+ 3 per 100
responsible for ensuring that materials used are manufactured,
examined, and tested in accordance with applicable approved
industry standards.
S2.13 Certification
S2.13.1 The purchase order or contract should specify
S2.14.1 Label Plates-A label plate with engraved or
stamped markings shall be permanently affixed to the sensor
head and to the optoelectronics module.
S2.14.1.1 Sensor Head-At a minimum, the following in-
formation shall be provided on the label plate:
(1) "SENSOR HEAD,"
(2) Manufacturer's name,
( 4) Manufacturer's part number and drawihg number,
(5) Designation,
(6) National Stock Number (NSN), if available, and
(7) Date of manufacture.
S2.14.1.2 Optoelectronics Module-At a minimum, the fol-
lowing information shall be provided on the label plate:
(1)" OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE,"
( 4) Manufacturer's part number,
(5) Electrical and optical (if any) output (see S2.8.3),
(6) National Stock Number (NSN), if available, and
1537
(7) Date of manufacture.
S2.14.2 Labeling-Labels shall be permanently and promi-
nently marked.
S2.14.2.1 The legend "USE NO OIL FOR CALIBRA-
TION" shall be marked on the sensor head housing.
S2.14.2.2 The legend "DO NOT LUBRICATE" shall be
marked on the sensor head housing.
S2.14.2.3 A visible label, consisting of yellow lettering on a
black background, shall be affixed to the outside of the
optoelectronics module cover and shall contain the following:
NOTICE
EMIT LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW BEAM WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
AND AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
S2.14.2.4 A visible label, consisting of yellow lettering on a
black background, shall be affixed to the sensor head and the
inside of the optoelectronics module and shall contain the
following:
WARNING
S2.15.1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
S2.16.1 Quality System-A quality assurance system in
accordance with ISO 9001 shall be maintained to effectively
control the quality of the product being supplied, unless
otherwise specified in the acquisition requirements (see
S2.5.2).
S2.16.2 Warranty-Any special warranty requirements
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see S2.5.2).
The following supplementary requirement, established for
naval shipboard application, shall apply when specified in the
contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between this
specification and this supplementary requirement, this supple-
mentary requirement shall take precedence.
S3. TRANSDUCERS, SMART PRESSURE AND DIF-
FERENTIAL PRESSURE (ELECTRICAL)
S3.1 Scope
S3.1.1 This supplementary requirement covers the require-
ments for smart pressure and differential pressure transducers
designed to meet the requirements for use onboard naval ships.
S3.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
units.
Sealing-Part 1: Ports with 0-Ring Seal in Truncated Hous-
ing4
S3.2.2 NEMA Standard:
rnum)5
F2070 - 00 (2011)
6
Equipment (Type !-Environmental and Type II-Intemally
Excited)
6
~
S3.3 Terminology
S3.3.1 Terminology is consistent with that of Section 3 and
S3.4 Classification
S3.4.1 Designation-For this specification, pressure trans-
ducer designations shall be assigned in accordance with S3.5.1
and listed in the following format:
Example: F25XMS3-D-F-DC-2-1 OKD
F25XMS3 D F DC 2 iOKD
Specification Type Application Power Supply Output Range
S3.4.2 S3.4.3 S3.4.4 S3.4.5 S3.4.6
S3.4.2 Types-The following designators have been estab-
lished for the various types of transducers:
P-Pressure (gage, absolute and sealed)
V-Pressure, vacuum
S3.4.3 Application-The following application designa-
tions have been established for the corresponding process
media:
F-Freshwater, oil, condensate, steam, nitrogen and other
inert gases
S-Seawater
S3.4.4 Power Supply-Transducers shall operate with de
input power. The designator shall be as follows:
DC-Direct current supply
S3.4.5 Output-The default de electrical signal output of
the transducer shall be designated by the following designators:
2-4 to 20 rnA
3-1 to 5 V
4-0.8 to 3.2 V
S3.4.6 Range-The pressure range of the transducer shall
0-10 000 ?OK
A For upper range values of 7000 kPa (1000 lb/in.
2
) and above.
designator for the upper range unit of measure (see S3.4.6.1).
Table S3.1.
S3.4.6.1 Units-The units shall be designated by the corre-
sponding letter designator and are limited to the following:
Letter Sl Units Inch-Pound Units
v KPaV-kiloPascals, vacuum Hg-inches of mercury vacuum
A KPaA-kiloPascals, absolute psia-pounds per square inch,
absolute
D KPaD-kiloPascals, differential psid-pounds per square inch,
differential
G kPaG-kiloPascals, gauge psig-pounds per square inch,
gage
s kPaS-kiloPascals, sealed at psis-pounds per square inch,
101.4 kPaA sealed at 14."7 psia
w kPaW-kiloPascals, water column WC-inches of water column
N kPaWD-kiloPascais, wate; WCD-inches of water column,
column, differential Differential
S3.5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with
all of the pertinent application data in accordance with S3.5.2.
S3.5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
S3.5.2.2 Part designation required (see S3.4.1).
S3.5.2.3 National Stock Number (NSN), if available.
S3.5.2.4 Mounting method, if other than specified herein
(see S3.7.2).
S3.5.2.5 Type of pressure connection, if other than specified
herein (see S3.7.5).
S3.5.2.6 Type of electrical connection, if other than speci-
S3.5.2.7 Quantity of transducers required.
S3.5.2.8 Quantity of handheld communicators required (see
S3.7.8).
S3.5.2.9 If deviation requests are not required when depart-
ing from material guidance (see S3.6).
S3.5.2.10 When the first article inspection is required (see
S3.12.3).
1538
S3.5.2.11 Special product marking requirements (see
S3.13).
S3.5.2.12 Special packaging or package marking require-
ments (see S3.14).
0 F2070 - 00 (2011)
S3.5.2.13 When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not
required (see S3.16.1).
S3.5.2.14 Special warranty requirements (see S3.16.2).
S3.5.3 First-Article Tests-When first-article testing is re-
items to be tested in accordance with S3.12.3 should be
specified. The purchaser should also include specific instruc-
tions in acquisition documents regarding arrangements for
tests, approval of first-article test results and time period for
approval, and disposition of first articles. Invitations for bids
should provide that the purchaser reserves the right to waive
the requirement for samples for first-article testing to those
manufacturers offering a product which has been previously
acquired or tested by the purchaser; and that manufacturers
offering such products, who wish to rely on such production or
test, must furnish evidence with the bid that prior purchaser
approval is presently appropriate for the pending contract. The
manufacture of items before purchaser approval should be
specified as the responsibility of the manufacturer.
S3.6 Materials
S3.6.1 Metals-Unless otherwise specified herein, all met-
als used in the construction of the transducer shall be
corrosion-resistant or treated to provide corrosion resistance.
Dissimilar metals shall not be used in contact with each other
unless suitably finished to prevent electrolytic corrosion. The
materials for the sensing element and wetted parts shall be
selected for long-term compatibility (see S3.8.1) with the
process medium (see S3.4.3).
S3.6.2 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the con-
struction of the transducer shall in the end configuration be
tions of atmosphere, pressure, and temperature to be expected
in the application. Fire retardance shall not be achieved by use
of nonpermanent additives to the material.
S3.6.3 Fungus-Resistant Materials-Materials used in the
construction of the sensor shall not support the growth of
fungus.
S3.6.4 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning Agents-When
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal trans-
ducer components, no degradation shall result during in-
service use.
S3. 7 Physical Properties
S3.7.1 Enclosure-The transducer body and pressure cavity
shall be environmentally sealed unless otherwise specified. The
transducer enclosure shall be Type 4 X in accordance with
NEMA Standard 250.
S3.7.2 Transducer Mounting-The transducer shall be
mounted on an integral coplanar flange/bracket, as shown in
S3.l, for interface with the process medium. For Types P,
V, and C transducers, the equalizing valve control handles shall
be removed and equalizing valve ports shall be blanked.
S3.7.3 External Configuration--The transducer shall have
an external configuration within the boundaries established by
S3.1 and S3.2.
S3.7.4 Electrical Connection-A terminal block shall be
provided in the transducer for connection of electrical conduc-
tors for power supply input, de electrical signal output, and
transducer case ground.
S3.7.5 Pressure Connections-The pressure connections
that interface with shipboard systems shall be Ml2 x 1.5
(1/16-20 UNF-2B) tube connection in accordance with ISO
6149-1. The traditional flange (see Fig. S3.2) provides these
connections for differential pressure units and the fiat adapter
(see Fig. S3.3) provides these connections for pressure units.
Differential units shall mount on the traditional flange and
pressure units shall interface with the fiat adapter.
S3.7.6 Digital Meter-The transducer shall have a direct
reading digital meter to display pressure in pressure engineer-
ing units and in percent of analog range values. The meter shall
display diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting. The
meter shall be capable of being rotated 90 clockwise or
counterclockwise within the transducer housing for meter
reading flexibility.
S3. 7. 7 Communications Protocol-The transducer shall be
microprocessor-based. The transducer shall be capable of
digital communications with field devices using the frequency
shift keying Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
(HART) protocol supported by the HART Communication
Foundation. Using the HART protocol, the transducer shall be
capable of providing analog signal output (see 3.8.3) and
digital communications over the same pair of wires.
S3.7.8 Handheld Communicator-A handheld communica-
tor shall be provided when specified (see S3.5.2). The handheld
communicator shall enable communication by an operator with
the transducer using the HART protocol. The handheld com-
municator shall be capable of communicating with the trans-
ducer for configuration, test, and detailed setup of the trans-
ducer (see 3.8.5.2).
S3.7.9 Lubrication-The transducer shall operate without
lubrication of moving parts after assembly.
S3.7.10 Damping-The use of a media for damping in
transducers shall be cited on the equipment drawing.
S3.7.12 Weight-The weight of a transducer shall not ex-
ceed 2.7 kg (6 lb). The weight of a traditional flange/bracket
shall not exceed 2. 7 kg.
1539
S3.8.1 Service Lzfe-The transducer shall be constructed for
a life of 25 years of operation and shall meet the requirements
specified herein when operated in the naval shipboard environ-
ment.
S3.8.2 Input Power-The transducer shall be designed to
operate using 28 4.5 V de power. The transducer shall
operate with power supply variations as specified in S3.11.2.10
and S3.11.2.13.
S3.8.3 Output -The electrical signal output of the trans-
ducer shall be de, directly proportional to the pressure or
differential pressure input. The output shall be a true current
source or true voltage source. The output type shall be
selectable via a handheld communicator (see S3.7.8) or other
device using the HART protocol. Selectable output types shall
be 4 to 20 rnA, 1 to 5 V, and 0.8 to 3.2 V.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
ElECTRICAL CONNECTION LOCATION
PRESSURE PORT -----Y
LOCATIONS
Dimension
A
B
c
mm
85.0 max
165.0 max
205.0 max
in.
3.2 max
6.4 max
8.0 max
c
I
NoTE !-Dimension tolerance is 1.25 mm (0.05 in.), unless otherwise specified.
NoTE 2-The pressure port(s) shall be generally located as shown. Differential pressure transducer ports shall be located to match traditional
flange/bracket configuration.
FIG. S3.1 Transducer External Configuration Boundary Limits
S3.8.3.1 Current Output-When a 4- to 20-mA current
output is selected, the requirements specified herein shall be
met regardless of external load resistance variations over a
range from 0 to 250 n. The 4-mA output shall correspond to
the lower pressure or differential pressure range value and the
20-mA output shall correspond to the upper pressure or
differential pressure range value for the transducer span pro-
grammed into the transducer (see S3.8.3.3).
S3.8.3.2 Voltage Output-When a voltage output is se-
lected, the requirements specified herein shall be met for
external load resistance exceeding 100 000 n. The 1- or 0.8-V
output (output Type 3 or 4, respectively) shall correspond to the
lower pressure or differential pressure range value for the
transducer span programmed into the transducer (see 3.8.3.3).
The 5- or 3.2-V output (output Type 3 or 4, respectively) shall
1540
correspond to the upper pressure or differential pressure range
value for the transducer span programmed into the transducer
(see 3.8.3.3).
S3.8.3.3 Floating (Live) Zero-The transducer shall be
capable of assigning the low output value (4 rnA, 1 V, or 0.8 V)
to any pressure value within the programmed transducer span.
The transducer shall be capable of assigning the high output
value (20 rnA, 5 V, or 3.2 V) to any pressure value within the
programmed transducer span that is higher than the low output
pressure value.
S3.8.4 Pressure Ports (Transducer Type D Only)-The
transducer shall be capable of operation with either pressure
port as the high-pressure port and the other as the low-pressure
port. Selection of high- and low-pressure ports shall be
programmable from a remote device using the HART protocol.
F2070 - 00 (2011)
BOLT'IliRUHOI.EFOfl
TIWIIIOUCER MOUNTING
(EOIA-4PlACES)
BOLTTHRIJHOI.EFOfl
IIIW:I<ETMOUNl'ING
(HOIA4PI.ACES)
EQUAUZING PRE-
VN..VE(TYP)
Dimension
A
B
c
D
mm in.
41.3 1.625
54.0 2.125
15.9 0.625
9.6 0.375
E 12.7 dia 0.5 dia
F 11.2 0.4375 dia
G 60.5 2.375
H 12.7dia 0.4375 dia
I 60.5 2.375
J 20.7 0.8125
K 13.5 0.531
L 93.7 3.6875
M 12.7 0.4375
N 3'1.75 1.25
p
188.9 7.4375
Q
6.35 0.25
R 85.7 3.375
s 60.5 2.375
T 128.6 5.0625
v 101.6 4.0
w 6.35 0.25
X M12x 1.5 7/1s-20UNF-2B
NoTE 1- Dimension tolerance is 1.25 mm (0.05 in.), unless otherwise specified.
FIG. S3.2 Traditional Flange/Bracket Configuration
S3.8.5 Transducer Performance-Unless otherwise speci-
fied, petformance tolerances are specified in percent of trans-
ducer output span for each settable span.
S3.8.5.1 Rangeability-Rangeability of the transducer shall
be 1 00 to 1. Span values shall be settable anywhere within the
range limits. Minimum span shall be no more than 1 % of the
upper range value.
S3.8.5.2 Communications -The transducer shall be ca-
pable of communication with field devices using the HART
protocol (see S3.7.8). The transducer shall be programmed
1541
such that field device operators can perform configuration, test,
and detailed setup of the transducer.
S3.8.5.2.1 Configuration-In the configuration mode, field
device operators shall be capable of the adjustment of trans-
ducer operational parameters including, but not limited to,
linear or square root output, damping, engineering unit selec-
tion, and assigning high and low pressure ports (differential
transducers). The field device operator shall be capable of
entering informational data for identification and physical
description of the transducer. Informational data shall include
F2070 - 00 (2011)
A
I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I T
I I I I I I c
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I
~ ~ ~ ~
I
I I
_L
Dimension mm in.
A
B
c
M12 X 1.5
50.8
25.4
7/1e-20UNF-2B
2.0
1.0
NoTE 1-Dimension tolerance is 1.25 mm (0.05 in.), unless otherwise specified.
FIG. S3.3 Flat Adapter
tag, descriptor, and message fields for the transducer, date,
flange type, flange material, drain/vent material, 0-ring mate-
rial, and remote seal information.
S3.8.5.2.2 Test-In the test mode, field device operators
shall be capable of interrogation of the transducer when a
problem has been detected. The field device operator shall be
capable of being directed to give specific outputs for loop
testing.
S3.8.5.2.3 Detailed Setup-The detailed setup mode is used
during initial setup of the transducer and for maintenance of the
digital electronics. Detailed setup shall include the setting of
transducer zero and span values anywhere within available
range limits, analog output selection, and transducer calibra-
tion. The field device operator shall be capable of selecting
security features to prevent accidental or deliberate adjustment
of analog output setpoints.
S3.8.5.3 Static Error Band-The transducer static error
band shall not exceed 0.25 %.
S3.8.5.4 Output-The output shall conform to S3.8.3 and
the transducer performance shall be within the static error band
S3.8.5.5 Warm-Up Time-The transducer output shall attain
a value within 0.5% of the steady-state output with no
overshoot in excess of 0.5 %. Output shall reach this band
within 2 s after the transducer is energized and shall remain in
this band.
S3.8.5.6 Enclosure-The transducer shall meet all test cri-
teria in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures.
S3.8.5.7 Repeatability-Repeatability of transducer output
shall be within 0.5 %.
S3.8.5.8 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall not
S3.8.5.9 Stability and Temperature-The transducer shall
remain within the static error band specified in S3.8.5.3
throughout the stability and temperature test.
S3. 8.5 .10 Ripple-Transducer rms output ripple shall not
exceed 0.15 % of full-scale de output.
S3.8.5.11 Steady-State Supply Voltage-Maximum differ-
ence between outputs at any voltage condition and the normal
(28-V de) at the same input and test temperature (differential
pressure shall be included for Type D) shall not exceed 0.5 %.
1542
S3.8.5.12 Pressure Rating and Common Mode Pressure
(Transducer Type D Only)-Type D transducers shall have a
pressure rating of 21 MPa (3000 lb/in.
2
). During the common
mode pressure test, transducer performance shall be within the
range formed by extending the upper and lower static error
band limits specified in S3.8.5.3 by a percentage equal to:
(System pressure rating)
(1110) 113
Differential pressure range
F2070 - 00 (2011)
S3.8.5.13 Response-Transducer output shall conform to
span:
(1) The transducer output shall be within 2% of the
is attained.
maximum ramp pressure in excess of 2%.
within 1 % in 0.175 s or less after attainment of maximum
ramp pressure, and shall remain within this error band for the
duration of applied steady-state pressure.
S3.8.5.14 Transient Supply Voltage-During the voltage
transient test, the transducer output shall remain within 0.5 %
of the pretransient output.
S3.8.5.15 Power Interruption-During the power interrup-
tion test, transducer performance shall conform to S3.8.5.3.
S3.8.5.16 Overpressure-Calibration conducted after over-
pressure test shall have no values in excess of 1 % deviation
from the pre-overpressure test reference measurement.
S3.8.5.17 Line Pressure (Transducer Type D Only )-After
the line pressure test, transducer performance shall be within
the static error band specified in S3.8.5.3.
S3.8.5.18 Pressure Cycling-Calibration conducted after
completion of pressure cycling test shall have no values in
excess of 1 % deviation from pretest reference measurement.
S3.8.5.20 Vibration-Monitored transducer output during
all phases of vibration test shall show no variation from
vibration test:
S3.8.5.21 Shock-The transducer shall operate during and
pre-shock test reference measurement. There shall be no visual
test.
S3.8.5.22 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall withstand
S3.8.5.23 Short-Circuit Test-After the short-circuit test,
the transducer shall exhibit no damage and shall conform to
S3.8.5.3.
S3.8.5.24 Line Voltage Reversal Test-The transducer shall
conform to S3.8.5.3 after the line voltage reversal test.
S3.8.5.25 Electromagnetic lnteiference (EMI)-The trans-
ducers shall meet the requirements of Table II of MIL-STD-
461, except as modified as follows:
(4) RElOl-Only the limit curve for 50 em shall apply.
V/m.
rust, grit, filings and other foreign substances and free of
mercury, oil, grease, or other organic materials. Transducers for
all applications shall be freshwater or clean gas calibrated,
cleaned, and pressure connections capped.
S3.10 Number of Tests and Retests
S3.10.1 Test Specimen-(see 10.1).
S3.11 Test Methods
S3.11.1 Test Conditions-Except where the following fac-
tors are the variables, the tests specified in S3.11.2 shall be
S3.11.1.1 Ambient temperature shall be 23 2C.
S3.11.1.2 Relative humidity shall be ambient.
S3.11.1.3 Range Setting-The transducer has a rangeability
from 100 to 1 (S3.8.5.1):All tests, excluding static error band
and repeatability (S3.11.2.6), shall be conducted with the
transducer set at approximately the mid range. Static error band
and repeatability shall be accomplished at 3 ranges (low,
medium, and high) within the capability of the transducer
under test.
S3.11.2 Tests-Except for the warm-up time test (see
S3.11.2.4), the transducer and all associated test equipment
shall be energized for a period of time sufficient to ensure
complete warm-up.
S3.11.2.1 Reference Measurement-A reference measure-
ment consisting of a one-trial calibration with at least five
the individual test.
S3 .11.2.2 Communications-The test shall be conducted
with a handheld communicator using the HART protocol.
Configuration, test, and detailed setup of the transducer shall be
performed. In the test mode, transducer problems shall be
simulated to verify test mode functions. Performance shall
conform to S3.8.3, S3.8.4, S3.8.5.1, and S3.8.5.2. All handheld
communicator functions shall be verified.
S3.11.2.3 Output-Three reference measurements shall be
made in accordance with S3.11.2.1. Each reference measure-
ment shall use a different set of low- and high-output values
(see S3.8.3.3). Performance shall conform to the requirements
of S3.8.5.4.
S3.11.2.4 Warm-Up Time-The test shall be conducted to
determine the elapsed time between the application of line
output reaches the conditions specified in S3.8.5.5.
S3 .11.2.4.1 Test Conditions-The transducer shall be sub-
jected to the ambient temperature of the testing location, while
deenergized, for not less than 2 h. Recording equipment and
other auxiliary equipment shall be energized to ensure com-
plete warm-up. An input pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) of 80 5 % of the transducer upper range limit shall
1543
cO F2070 - 00 (2011)
be applied to the transducer and maintained constant during
this test. Performance shall conform to S3.8.5.
S3.11.2.5 Enclosure -The enclosure shall be subjected to
the tests in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X enclosures.
Performance shall conform to S3.8.5.6.
S3.11.2.6 Static Error Band and Repeatability-The trans-
ducer shall first be flexed over its full pressure range by slowly
(both upscale and downscale). Precaution shall be taken to
band of all calibrations shall meet the requirements of S3.8.5.3.
S3.11.2.7 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall be
determined as follows: Provide a pressure (differential pressure
for transducer Type D) to the transducer of 80 5 % of
transducer upper range limit. Record the input pressure (dif-
ferential pressure) and corresponding electrical output. In-
crease the pressure (differential pressure) by an amount not
exceeding 1 % of upper range limit. Record both the new
pressure (differential pressure) and corresponding new electri-
cal output. Calculate the change in both applied pressure
(differential pressure) and electrical output as a percentage of
transducer range. Determine the ratio of electrical output
percentage change to applied pressure (differential pressure)
percent change. Repeat this procedure for a pressure ( differen-
tial pressure) decrease not exceeding 1 % of upper range limit.
Performance shall conform to the requirements of S3.8.5.8.
S3.11.2.8 Stability and Temperature-The transducer shall
be operated at an input pressure (differential pressure for
transducer Type D) of 80 5% of transducer upper range
limit for a period of ten days. Starting ambient temperature
shall be 25 2C. At the end of three days, the ambient
temperature shall be changed to 0 2C. At the end of five
days, the ambient temperature shall be changed to 65 2C.
At the end of seven days, the ambient temperature shall be
returned to 25 2C. Performance shall conform to the
requirements of S3.8.5.9.
S3.11.2.9 Ripple-Transducer output rms ripple shall be
determined at an input pressure (differential pressure for
transducer Type D) of 80 5% of transducer upper range
limit. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S3.8.5.10.
S3 .11.2.1 0 Steady-State Supply Voltage-The transducer
shall be operated at normal, maximum, and minimum steady-
state voltages (de). Performance shall conform to S3.8.5.11.
S3.11.2.11 Common Mode Pressure (Transducer Type D
assigned low-pressure port shall then be decreased in pressure
increments specified in S3.11.2.1 to the specified transducer
range and then increased in similar increments to the
transducer-rated pressure. Performance shall conform to S3.8.4
and S3.8.5.12. The test shall be conducted once with each
pressure port as the assigned low-pressure port.
S3.11.2.12 Response-A pressure (differential pressure for
Type D) rise of at least 40% of transducer upper range limit
occurring at a rate of not less than 400 % per second shall be
applied to the transducer. The maximum ramp pressure shall be
maintained for at least 0.50 s and shall not vary by more than
2 % of the transducer upper range limit. Performance shall
conform to S3.8.5.13.
S3 .11.2.13 Transient Supply Voltage-Tests shall be con-
ducted with a pressure (differential pressure for transducer
Type D) input signal equal to 80 5 % of the transducer upper
range limit. With the transducer operating at the upper and
lower limits of steady-state de voltage, the de-powered trans--
ducer shall have a transient voltage of no more than 2 V,
respectively, recovering to the steady-state band in 2 s, super--
imposed. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S3.8.5.14.
S3.11.2.14 Power Interruption-An input pressure (differ-
ential pressure for transducer Type D) of 80 5% of
transducer upper range limit shall be applied to the transducer
and maintained constant during the test. With the transducer
operating within the steady-state voltage tolerances, the exter-
nal power supply shall be interrupted for an interval of 3 to 4
s. The power supply shall then be reestablished to within
steady-state tolerances. The transducer shall be operated at
steady-state power for 1 min. The power supply shall then be
interrupted for an interval of 30 s. This cycle shall be repeated
three times. Performance shall conform to the requirements of
S3.8.5.15.
S3 .11.2.15 Overpressure-Before the overpressure test, a
reference measurement in accordance with S3.11.2.1 shall be
made. The transducer shall successfully withstand pressure
(differential pressure for transducer Type D) equal to 200% of
its upper range limit with a maximum pressure of 85 MPa
( 12 000 lb/in.Z) for a period of V2 h. At the end of this period,
transducers shall be immediately subjected to a pressure equal
to 7 kPa (llb/in.
2
) or 10% of upper range limit, whichever is
less, below atmospheric for an additional period of
1
/2 h. Within
10 min after release of this pressure, a reference measurement
(see S3.11.2.1) shall be made for comparison. Performance
shall conform to S3.8.5.16. For Type D only, if the line
pressure rating exceeds 200% of the maximum differential
pressure range, the overpressure test shall be omitted and 0.5 %
deviation shall be applied to the line pressure test (see
S3.11.2.16).
S3.11.2.16 Line Pressure (for Transducer TypeD Only)-
The transducer shall successfully withstand the pressure rating,
when applied to one pressure port with the other pressure port
vented to the atmosphere for a period of 10 min. The preceding
shall be repeated with the pressure applied to the opposite
pressure port of the transducer. After each test, a reference
measurement in accordance with S3.11.2.1 shall be made.
S3 .11.2.17 Pressure Cycling-Before performing the pres-
S3.11.2.1). The test shall be conducted on a suitable system by
applying a periodic pressure change of not more than 20 % to
not less than 80 % of upper range limit for a total of 260 000
1544
<4@f F2070 - 00 (2011)
cycles. The rate of cycling shall be within the range from 0.25
to 2 Hz. The transducer shall be energized throughout the test.
After completion of the pressure cycling test, a reference
measurement shall be made for comparison (see S3.11.2.1).
S3 .11.2.18 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance
circuits and ground. The relative humidity shall be 50 : 10 %.
ately after a 2-min period of uninterrupted test voltage appli-
meets the specified limit (see S3.8.5.19) and is steady or
increasing, the test may be terminated before the end of the two
minute period.
S3.11.2.19 Vibration-The transducer shall be tested in
accordance with Type I (environmental) vibration of MIL-
STD-167 -1. The following exceptions apply: the upper fre-
quency shall be 175 Hz, the amplitude of vibration shall be in
accordance with Table S3.2 for the variable frequency portion,
and the vibration level shall be maintained for 2 min at each
integral value of frequency. If no resonance frequencies are
observed, the 2-h endurance test shall be conducted at 175 Hz.
During the vibration test, a fluid pressure of 80 : 5 % of the
transducer upper range limit shall be applied to the transducer.
Transducer output during the test shall be monitored. Perfor-
mance shall conform to S3.8.5.20.
S3.11.2.20 Shock-The shock tests shall be conducted in
mounting fixture 4-A of MIL-S-901. During the test, a fluid
pressure (differential pressure for transducer Type D) of 80 :
5 % of the transducer upper range limit shall be applied to the
transducer. The transducer output during the test shall be
monitored. Before and after the shock test, reference measure-
ments shall be made for comparison. Performance shall con-
form to S3.8.5.21.
S3.11.2.21 Burst Pressure-The transducer shall be sub-
jected to a liquid pressure equal to 300 % of the upper range
limit with a maximum pressure of 105 MPa (15 000 lb/in.Z)
applied to the transducer (simultaneously to both sides for
transducer Type D) for a period of 10 min. The transducer shall
conform to the requirements of S3.8.5.22. No performance test
shall be required after the burst pressure test. A reference
measurement (see S3.11.2.1) shall be recorded for information
purposes.
5 to 20
21 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 175
5 to 20
21 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 175
TABLE S3.2 Amplitudes of Vibration
Hz
0.255 0.050
0.105 0.025
0.0380 0.0075
0.0130 + 0.0025
Inch-Pound Units, in.
0.010 0.002
0.004 0.001
0.0015 0.0003
0.0005 0.0001
0.765 0.150
0.510 0.100
0.255 0.050
0.0380 0.0075
0.030 0.006
0.020 0.004
0.010 0.002
0.0015 0.0003
1545
S3.11.2.22 Short Circuit-An input pressure (differential
pressure for transducer Type D) of 80 : 5 % of transducer
upper range limit shall be applied to the transducer and
maintained constant during the test. The transducer shall be
de-energized. The electrical output terminals of the transducer
shall be connected together with no load resistance. The
transducer shall be energized for 5 min. Immediately following
the 5-min period, the output terminals shall be unshorted. The
transducer shall conform to the requirements of S3.8.5.23.
S3.11.2.23 Line Voltage Reversal-An input pressure (dif-
ferential pressure for transducer Type D) of 80 :: 5 % of
transducer upper range limit shall be applied to the transducer
and maintained constant during the test. The + 28-V de conduc-
tor from the power supply shall be connected to the negative
terminal on the transducer terminal board. The -28-V de
conductor from the power supply shall be connected to the
positive terminal on the transducer terminal board. The trans-
ducer shall be energized for a period of 10 min and then
disconnected. The power shall then be correctly connected
(positive conductor to positive terminal and negative conductor
to negative terminal). A reference measurement shall be made
(see S3.12.2.1). The transducer shall conform to the require-
ments of S3.8.5.24.
S3.11.2.24 EM! Tests-The EMI tests shall be in accor-
dance with the test methods specified in MIL-STD-461, with
the modifications as specified in S3.8.5.25. Performance shall
be as specified in S3.8.5.25.
83.12 Inspection
S3 .12.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection re-
S3.12.1.1 First-article tests (see S3.12.3).
S3.12.1.2 Conformance tests (see S3.12.4).
S3.12.2 First-Article Tests-First-article tests shall be per-
formed before production. First-article tests shall be performed
consist of the tests specified in Table S3.3. Failure of any
pressure transducer to meet the requirements of this specifica-
tion shall be cause for rejection.
S3.12.2.1 Order of First-Article Tests-With the exception
of the electromagnetic interference emission and susceptibility
test which may be conducted on separate transducers, the test
specimens (transducers) shall be subjected to the tests specified
in Table S3.3 in the order listed. Any deviation in the test order
shall first be approved by the purchaser.
S3.12.3 Conformance Tests-Each pressure transducer in
each lot offered for delivery shall be subjected to the tests listed
in Table S3.4 and shall be conducted in the order listed. Failure
of any pressure transducer to meet the requirements of this
S3.12.4 General Examination-Each transducer shall be
disassembling the units. The manufacturer shall be responsible
F2070 - 00 (2011)
Test
Communications
Output
Warm-up time
Enclosure
Sensitivity factor
Stability and temperature
Ripple
Supply voltage (steady-state)
Common mode pressure (transducer
TypeD only)
Response
Supply voltage (transient
Power interruption
Overpressure
Line pressure (transducer Type D only)
Pressure cycling
Vibration
Shock
Burst pressure
Short-circuit
Line voltage reversal
EMI
Test Method
S3.11.2.2
S3.11.2.3
S3.11.2.4
S3.11.2.5
S3.11.2.6
S3.11.2.7
S3.11.2.8
S3.11.2.9
S3.11.2.10
S3.11.2.11
S3.11.2.12
S3.11.2.13
S3.11.2.14
S3.11.2.15
S3.11.2.16
S3.11.2.17
S3.11.2.18
S3.11.2.19
83.11.2.20
S3.11.2.21
S3.11.2.22
S3.11.2.23
S3.11.2.24
S3.8.5.1 and S3.8.5.2
S3.8.5.4
S3.8.5.5
S3.8.5.6
S3.8.5.3 and S3.8.5.7
S3.8.5.8
S3.8.5.9
S3.8.5.10
S3.8.5.11
S3.8.5.12
S3.8.5.13
S3.8.5.14
S3.8.5.15
S3.8.5.16
S3.8.5.17
S3.8.5.18
S3.8.5.19
S3.8.5.20
S3.8.5.21
S3.8.5.22
S3.8.5.23
S3.8.5.24
S3.8.5.25
Test
General examination
Output
Sensitivity factor
Test Method
S3.12.5
S3.11.2.3
S3.11.2.6
S3.11.2.7
S3.11.2.18
S3.6 and S3.7
S3.8.5.4
S3.8.5.3 and S3.8.5.7
S3.8.5.8
S3.8.5.19
for ensuring that materials used are manufactured, examined,
and tested in accordance with applicable approved industry
standards.
S3.13 Certification
S3.13.1 The purchase order or contract should specify
S3.14.1 Label Plates-A label plate with engraved or
stamped markings shall be permanently affixed to the trans-
ducer. At a minimum, it shall contain the following:
S3.14.1.1 "PRESSURE TRANSDUCER" or "DIFFEREN-
TIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER,"
S3.14.1.2 Manufacturer's name,
S3.14.1.3 National Stock Number (NSN), if available,
S3.14.1.4 Date of manufacture,
S3 .14.1.5 Designation, and
S3.14.1.6 Pressure rating for Type D transducers.
S3.14.2 Transducers for use with Application F shall have
"USE NO OIL FOR CALIBRATION" prominently marked on
the body.
S3.14.3 The legend "DO NOT LUBRICATE" shall be
S3.14.1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
S3.16.1 Quality System-A quality assurance system in
accordance with ISO 9001 shall be maintained to control the
quality of the product being supplied effectively, unless other-
wise specified in the acquisition requirements (see S3.5.2).
S3.16.2 Warranty-Any special warranty requirements
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see S3.5.2).
COPYRIGHT/).
1546
Designation: F2071 - 00 (Reapproved 2011)
.. ull
INTERNATIONAL
Switch, Position Proximity (Noncontact} or Limit
(Mechanical Contact), Fiber-Optic
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation P2071; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for fiber-
optic position switches (proximity and limit). This specifica-
tion does not include switches that transfer an optical signal
from one path to another by an external force or energy applied
to the switch.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to regarded as the
SI units.
are included in the Supplement.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
D395l Practice for Commercial Packaging
2.2 ISO Standards:
ISO 9001 Quality System-Model for Quality Assurance in
vicing3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 closed switch-the light path is complete; signal from
transmitter to receiver is complete.
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F:25.10 on
Electrical.
DOl: 10.1520/P2071-00Rll.
2
the ASTM website.
3
3.1.2 closed switch with positive alarm-the light path is
complete. Signal level indicates that the end faces of the
sensing element are dirty and require maintenance for contin-
ued proper operation.
3.1.3 fiber-optic position switch-a device that converts
measured position, via changes in fiber-optic properties, to an
output that is a function of the applied measurand. The
fiber-optic position switch normally consists of a sensor head,
optoelectronics module, and connectorized fiber-optic cable.
3.1.4 limit switch-a switch that senses a change in position
via mechanical contact.
3.1.5 open switch-the light path is blocked; signal from
transmitter to receiver is not complete.
3.1.6 optical transmittance change-the change in optical
power level introduced by an environmental, mechanical, or
other induced stress.
3.1.7 optoelectronics module-unit of the fiber-optic posi-
tion switch that contains the optical transmitter and receiver,
and signal conditioning electronics, necessary to convert the
sensed position to the specified output signal. The optoelec-
tronics module may be an expansion card for a microprocessor-
based system, or a stand-alone unit.
3.1.8 proximity switch-a switch that senses a change in
position via noncontact means.
3.1.9 sensor head-unit of the fiber-optic position switch
that detects position via changes in optical properties. The
optoelectronics module interrogates the sensor head to deter-
mine the position of the measurand. An optical signal is
transmitted from the optoelectronics module to the sensor
head. The optical path is either complete or blocked, depending
on the status of the item being measured, giving an indication
of the position or status of the item back to the optoelectronics
module.
3 .1.1 0 steady-state supply voltage-an input voltage that
does not deviate from a specified nominal tolerance (for
example, 5 %).
3.1.11 tether valve limit switch--a limit switch used to
detect valve position via a tether line connected to the valve
handle.
1547
cO F2071 - 00 (2011)
3.1.12 transient supply voltage-a voltage superimposed on
the steady-state supply voltage that is greater than the specified
steady-state tolerance and has a very rapid rise and fall.
4. Classification
4.1 Designation-Most switch manufacturers use designa-
tions, systematic numbering or identifying codes. Once under-
stood, these designations could aid the purchaser in quickly
identifying the switch type, electrical power ratings, and other
characteristics.
4.2 Design-Fiber-optic position switches typically consist
of an assembly with three major components: optical sensor
head, fiber-optic cables, and optoelectronics module. The
optoelectronics module shall be interchangeable between any
of the sensor types.
4.3 Types-The following are common types of fiber-optic
position switches:
Proximity
Limit, pin actuated
Limit, lever actuated
Limit, lever and roller
Limit, tether valve
4.3.1 Fiber-Optic Proximity Switches-The fiber-optic
proximity switch sensor head receives the light beam from the
light source in the optoelectronics module via a fiber-optic
cable, The sensor head emits the light beam to detect an object
in a specific location. The sensor head also receives the light
beam reflection from the object, typically via a wide angle
receiving lens, and is detected by the light beam receiving
device in the optoelectronics module. When the object moves
into the sensing site, the light beam is reflected into the
receiving lens completing the fiber-optic light path. It is
important to consider contrasting light levels between reflec-
tions from background objects when no object to be detected is
present and reflections from the object to be detected, when
selecting a fiber-optic proximity switch.
4.3.2 Fiber-Optic Limit Switches -The fiber-optic limit
switch sensor head houses the mechanical contact device that
senses the position of the object to be detected. The mechanical
contact device is typically a pin or plunger, lever, roller, lever
and roller, or tether valve. The fiber-optic limit switch sensor
head receives the light beam from the light source in the
optoelectronics module via a fiber-optic cable. The same
fiber-optic cable allows completion of the light path to a
fiber-optic receiver in the optoelectronics module. Dependent
upon the configuration of the switch, the mechanical contact
device either completes or breaks the light path upon detection
of the object.
of the pertinent application data. Recommended data is shown
in 5.2. If special application operating conditions exist that are
not shown in the acquisition requirements, they should also be
described.
( 1) Title, number, and date of this specification,
1548
(3) Switch type required (see 4.3),
(4) Unique or special enclosure requirements (see 7.1),
(5) Type of optoelectronics module (see 7.2). If control
enclosure or console mounted, specify requirements,
(6) Length of fiber-optic cable required,
(7) Type of electrical connection (see
(8) When the electrical connection mating plug is not to be
provided (see 7.4),
(9) System operating characteristics,
( 10) Materials,
( 11) Environmental requirements,
( 12) Quantity of switches required,
(13) Size and weight restrictions (see 7.5),
(14) Critical service life requirements (see 8. I),
( 15) Performance requirements (see
(16) Special surface finish requirements (see 9 .I),
(17) Special workmanship requirements (see
(18) When certification is required (see 13 ),
(19) Special marking requirements (see 14 ),
(20) Special packaging or package marking requirements
(see 15),
(21) When ISO 9001 quality assurance system is not
required (see 16.1 ), and
(22) Special warranty requirements (see 16.1).
6.1 Position Switches-Materials for the fiber-optic position
switches shall be corrosion resistant and noncombustible or fire
retardant.
7.1 Enclosure-If case sealing is required, the mechanism,
materials, and process shall be described. The same should
apply to the electrical connector. Resistance to cleaning sol-
vents should likewise be stated. Unique or special enclosure
requirements shall be specified in the acquisition requirements
(see 5.2).
7.2 Optoelectronics Module-The optoelectronics module
shall contain the optical and signal conditioner devices neces-
sary to convert the sensor head output to the specified electrical
output. Optoelectronics modules shall be designed in consid-
eration of their mounting method (type): bulkhead mounted,
control enclosure mounted, or console mounted (microproces-
sor expansion card).
pound units) if they are not specified. The outline drawing shall
include limiting dimensions for electrical and fiber-optic con-
nections if they are not specified. The outline drawing shall
indicate the mounting method with hole size, center location,
and other pertinent dimensions. Where threaded holes are used,
thread specifications shall be provided.
7.4 Electrical Connection-An electrical interface connec-
tor receptacle and mating plug shall be provided with each
optoelectronics module of the position switch unless otherwise
~ F2071 - 00 (2011)
specified in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2). Other
possible electrical interface connections include pigtails and
terminal boards.
7.5 Size and Weight-The purchaser rnay have intended
applications in which size and weight are limited. Size and
weight restrictions shall be specified in the acquisition require-
ments (see 5.2).
8.1 Service L ~ f e The purchaser may have a mm1mum
specified service life requirement that may be critical. Critical
service life requirements shall be specified in the acquisition
8.2 Switch Peiformance-Critical performance require-
ments shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see
The following performance characteristics and environ-
mental exposures may or may not be important to each
purchaser's intended application.
( 1) Warm-up time,
(2) Steady-state supply voltage and frequency (ac),
(3) Steady-state supply voltage (de),
( 4) Response time,
(5) Transient supply voltage and frequency (ac),
(6) Transient supply voltage (de),
(7) Change in optical transmittance,
( 8) Dynamic range,
(9) Ambient light susceptibility,
( 10) Temperature,
( 11) Humidity,
( 12) Salt spray,
( 13) Insulation resistance,
( 14) Power interruption,
(15) Short circuit,
(16) Line voltage reversal (de powered),
( 17) Output,
( 18) Mechanical life,
( 19) Enclosure,
(20) Vibration,
(21) Shock,
(22) Electromagnetic interference (EMI), and
(23) Power system harmonic distortion.
9.2 Workmanship-Any special workmanship requirements
shall be specified in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2).
10.1 The number of test specimens to be subjected to
first-article and conformance tests shall be specified and should
depend on the fiber-optic position switch design. As guidance,
for each switch covered by a separate and distinct design, a test
specimen for each design should require testing. In instances in
which a singular design series may cover multiple switch
configurations, a minimum of three test specimens should be
1549
tested, provided the electrical, optical, and mechanical simi-
larities are approved by the purchaser. It is recommended that
one unit be tested for each switch configuration regardless of
design similarity.
11. Inspection
11.1 Classification of Inspections -The inspection require-
( 1) First-article tests (see 11.2)
(2) Conformance tests (see 11.3)
11.2 First-Article Tests-First-article test requirements shall
be specified, where applicable. First-article test methods should
specified.
11.3 Conformance Tests-Conformance testing is accom-
plished when first-article tests were satisfied by a previous
acquisition or the product has demonstrated reliability in
similar applications. Conformance tests are usually less inten-
sive than first-article tests, often verifying that samples of a
12. Test Data
12.1 Test Data-Test data shall remain on file at the manu-
facturer's facility for review by the purchaser upon request. It
purchaser and manufacturer.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the acqms1t10n requirements (see
5.2), the purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples
met.
14. Product Marking
14.1 Special purchaser specified product marking shall be
listed in the acquisition requirements (see 5.2). The minimum
data to be clearly marked on each switch shall include the
following:
14.1.1 Sensor Head:
( 1) "FIBER-OPTIC POSITIONS SWITCH-SENSOR
HEAD,"
( 3) Manufacturer's serial number or lot number, and
( 4) Manufacturer's part number.
14.1.2 Optoelectronics Module:
( 1) "FIBER-OPTIC POSITION SWITCH-
OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE"
( 3) Manufacturer's serial number or lot number,
( 4) Manufacturer's part number, and
( 5) Excitation voltage.
packaged and marked for shipment in accordance with Practice
03951.
cO F2071 - 00 (2011)
15.2 Special packaging or package marking requirements
for shipment or storage shall be identified in the acquisition
(2) Workmanship to produce the unit.
Special warranty requirements shall be specified in the
17. Keywords
17.1 fiber-optic position switch; limit switch; optoelectron-
ics module; position switch; proximity switch; sensor head
F25(FOSW)M-99 and this supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence for
equipment acquired by this supplement. This document supersedes MIL-S-24798, Switch, Position,
Proximity (Non-Contact) or Limit (Mechanical Contact), Fiber Optic, for new ship construction.
Sl. SWITCH, POSITION, PROXIMITY (NONCON-
TACT) OR LIMIT (MECHANICAL CONTACT), FIBER-
OPTIC.
S1.1 Scope
S 1.1.1 This specification supplement covers the require-
ments for fiber-optic position switches (proximity and limit)
designed to meet the requirements for use onboard naval ships.
This specification does not include switches that transfer an
optical signal from one path to another by an external force or
energy applied to the switch.
S 1.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
D542 Test Methods for Index of Refraction of Transparent
Organic Plastics
2
2
Sl.2.2 EIA Standards:
455-20 FOTP-20 Measurement of Change in Optical Trans-
mittance4
455-22 FOTP-22 Ambient Light Susceptibility of Fiber
Optic Components
4
455-34 FOTP-34 Interconnection Device Insertion Loss
Test
4
S 1.2.3 NEMA Standards:
mum)5
S 1.2.4 Military Standards
6
MIL-C-83522116 Connector, Fiber Optic, Single Terminus,
Plug, Adapter Style, 2.5 Millimeter Bayonet Coupling, Epoxy
6
4
5
N. 17th St., Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209.
6
Available from U.S. Government Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111.
Adapter, 2.5 Millimeter Bayonet Coupling, Bulkhead Panel
Mount
6
MIL-C-83522118 Connector, Fiber Optic, Single. Terminus,
Adapter, 2.5 Millimeter Bayonet Coupling, PC Mount
6
MIL-PRF-49291 Fiber, Optical (Metric), General Specifica-
tion for
6
6
Equipment (Type !-Environmental and Type II-Internally Ex-
cited)6
of
6
S1.3 Terminology
S1.3.1 Terminology is consistent with that of Section 3 and
S1.4 Designation
S 1.4.1 Designation-For this specification, fiber-optic posi-
tion switch designations shall be assigned as specified in S 1.5 .2
and listed in the format below:
1550
Example: F25(FOSW)M-1-B-DC
B DC
Specification Type Optoelectronics Power Supply
Module
S1.4.2 81.4.3 81.4.4
S 1.4.2 Type-The following designators have been estab-
lished for the various types of fiber-optic position switches:
l --Proximity position switch sensor head,
2-Pin-actuated limit position switch sensor head,
3-Lever-actuated limit position switch sensor head,
4-Lever and roller limit position switch sensor head,
5-Tether valve limit position switch sensor head, and
6-Special (see SL5.2).
0 F2071 - 00 (2011)
S 1.4.3 Optoelectronics Module-The optoelectronics mod-
ule shall be designated as follows:
A-Bulkhead mounted,
B-Control enclosure mounted, and
C--Console mounted (microprocessor or programmable
logic controller expansion card).
S1.4.4 Electrical Power Supply-The electrical interface
wiring shall be determined by the power supply as follows:
AC-Four-wire system used with a 115-V (nominal) alter-
nating current (ac) supply.
DC-Four-wire system used with a 28-V (nominal) direct
current (de) supply.
Sl.S Ordering Information
Sl.5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with
all of the pertinent application data shown in accordance with
S 1.5.2. If special application operating conditions exist that are
not shown in the acquisition requirements, they shall also be
described.
S 1 .5.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition documents
(1) Title, number, and date of this specification;
(2) Part designation (see S 1.4.1 );
(3) Special type position switch (see Sl.4.2) description and
unique requirements;
(4) National Stock Number (NSN) if available;
(5) Sensor head mounting requirements (see S1.7.2);
( 6) Requirements when Type B or Type C optoelectronics
module is specified (see Sl.7.3.2 and Sl.7.3.3);
(7) Optoelectronics module mounting method if other than
specified herein (see S 1.7 .3);
(8) Type of fiber-optic connectors, receptacles, and bulk-
head adapters, if other than specified herein (see Sl.7.4);
(9) Fiber-optic cable length required (see Sl.7.6);
(10) Critical dimensions of the switch (see Sl.7.13);
(11) Quantity of switches required;
(12) When first-article tests are required (see Sl.12.2);
(13) Special marking (see S 1.14);
(14) Special packaging or package marking requirements
(see Sl.15); and
( 15) Special warranty requirements (see Sl.l6.1).
Sl.5.3 First-Article Tests-The purchaser should include
specific instructions in acquisition documents regarding ar-
rangements for tests, approval of first-article test results and
time period for approval, and disposition of first articles.
Invitations for bids should provide that the purchaser reserves
the right to waive the requirement for samples for first-article
inspection to those manufacturers offering a product which has
been previously acquired or tested by the purchaser, and that
manufacturers offering such products, who wish to rely on such
production or test, must furnish evidence with the bid that prior
purchaser approval is presently appropriate for the pending
contract. The manufacture of items before purchaser approval
should be specified as the responsibility of the manufacturer.
S1.6 Materials
S 1.6.1 Metals--Unless otherwise specified herein, all met-
als used in the construction of the proximity or limit position
switch shall be corrosion resistant. Dissimilar metals shall not
1551
be used in contact with each other unless suitably finished to
prevent electrolytic corrosion.
S 1.6.2 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the con-
struction of the proximity or limit position switch shall be
tions of atmosphere, pressure, and temperature to be expected
in the application. Fire-retardant additives may be used pro-
vided they do not adversely affect the specified performance
requirements of the basic materials. Fire retardance shall not be
achieved by use of nonpermanent additives to the basic
material.
Sl.6.3 Fungus-Resistant Materials-Materials used in con-
struction of the switch sensor head and optoelectronics module
shall not support the growth of fungus.
S 1.6.4 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning Agents-\Vhen
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal proximity
or limit position switch components, no degradation shall
result during in-service use.
S 1.6.5 Refractive Index Matching Gels, Fluids, or
pounds shall not produce toxic, corrosive, or explosive byprod-
ucts. The material is subject to a toxicological data and
formulations review and inspection, for safety of material, by
the purchaser. The index matching material shall be either
silicone or aliphatic hydrocarbon material and shall be clear
and transparent. The index matching material shall have an
index of refraction of 1.46 0.01 as tested in accordance with
Test Methods D542, when exposed to operating temperature
extremes between -28C and +85C. The index matching
material shall not flow at elevated temperatures. The index
matching material shall remain clear and transparent when
tested for water absorption in accordance with Test Method
D570. The index matching material shall have a shelf life not
less than 36 months at 25C 5C. The 36-month period
commences on the date of adhesive manufacture.
S1.7 Physical Properties
Sl.7.1 Design and Construction-The switch shall consist
of an assembly with three major components: optical sensor
head, fiber-optic cable, and optoelectronics module. The opto-
electronics module shall be interchangeable between any of the
sensor head types (see S 1.4.2).
S 1.7 .2 Sensor Head- The sensor head shall meet the
requirements specified herein. Sensor head mounting require-
ments shall be as required for the switch application and
specified in the acquisition requirements (see S1.5.2). It is
recommended that the sensor head be installed such that
sufficient clearance is provided for repair and maintenance of
the unit.
S 1.7 .3 Optoelectronics Module-The optoelectronics mod-
ule shall contain the optical and signal conditioner devices
necessary to convert the sensor head output to the specified
electrical output. The module shall be bulkhead mounted,
control enclosure mounted, or console mounted as specified in
the acquisition requirements (see S1.5.2).
Sl.7.3.1 Bulkhead Mounted (Type A)-Bulkhead-mounted
optoelectronics modules shall be housed in a junction box. The
junction box maximum dimensions shall be 280-mm L by
205-mm W by 130-mm D (11-in. L by 8-in. W by 5-in. D). The
0 F2071 - 00 (2011)
junction box material shall be brass.The junction box shall
meet all test criteria in NEMA Standard 250 for Type 4X
enclosures. The optoelectronics module shall be subjected to
all first-article tests as specified (see S 1.12.1) before mounting
in the junction box.
S1.7.3.2 Control Enclosure Mounted (Type B)-Control
enclosure-mounted optoelectronics modules are intended for
use within an environmental protective enclosure as part of a
motor controller or other system. The optoelectronics module
shall be mounted in an enclosure as specified in the acquisition
requirements (seeS 1.5.2). The optoelectronics module shall be
subjected to all first-article tests as specified (see Sl.l2.1)
before mounting in the enclosure.
Sl.7.3.3 Console Mounted (Type C)-Console-mounted
(microprocessor or programmable iogic controlier (PLC) ex-
pansion card) optoelectronics modules are intended for use as
a plug-in card for a console control system. The optoelectron-
ics module shall be packaged in a console-mounted circuit card
as specified in the acquisition requirements (see Sl.5.2). The
size, weight, pinout configuration, and number of channels
shall be as specified in the acquisition requirements (see
Sl.5.2).
Sl.7.4 Fiber-Optic Cable-A fiber-optic cable shall be used
to connect sensor head to the optoelectronics module. There
shall be no less than two times the number of fibers needed for
operation of the switch in the cable. Penetration of the
fiber-optic cable into the sensor head and the optoelectronics
module shall be watertight. The required length of cable shall
be as specified in acquisition requirements (see S 1.5.2).
S1.7.5 Optical Fiber-All optical fiber used in the construc-
tion of the fiber-optic switch shall be in accordance with
MIL-PRF-49291.
Sl.7.6 Fiber-Optic Connectors, Receptacles, and Bulkhead
Adapters-All fiber-optic connectors, receptacles, and bulk-
head adapters shall be in accordance with MIL-C-83522 and
MIL-C-83522/16, 17, and 18, respectively, or equal. Connec-
tors shall be assembled at both ends of the fiber-optic cable
between the sensor head and the optoelectronics module.
S 1. 7. 7 Local Status Indication-The switch optoelectronics
module shall have three indicator light-emitting diodes
(LEDs): (1) a green LED that indicates the switch is closed
when illuminated, (2) a red LED that indicates the switch is
open when illuminated, and (3) a yellow LED that indicates a
switch is closed with alarm level condition when illuminated.
The LEDs shall be located on either the top or front of the
module as it would be mounted during usage. The LEDs shall
be visible in fluorescent room lighting. One LED and only one
LED shall be lit at all times when the optoelectronics unit is
energized.
Sl.7.8 Low-Intensity Alarm Set Point Adjustment-The
switch shall provide an indication of a degradation in the
intensity of the transmitted optical signal via an alarm output.
The optoelectronics module shall provide a means for adjusting
the low-intensity alarm set point by one individual and without
the necessity for an electrical disconnection. The low-intensity
alarm set point adjustments shall be labeled and shall be
accessible when the optoelectronics enclosure cover (for
mounting Type A and Type B) is removed. The low-intensity
alarm level set point shall allow tamperproof sensitivity
adjustment over the entire dynamic range of the optoelectron-
ics module. The optoelectronics module low-intensity alarm
shall allow for an indication that maintenance is required
before a false open switch indication.
S 1. 7. 9 Electrical Overload Protection and Isolation-The
optoelectronics module shall be provided with overload and
short circuit protection. As a minimum, ac switches shall be
protected from continuous overloads up to 6-A rms. Interrup-
tion of the operating voltage shall be required to restore normal
operation of the switch after an overload has been detected. A
means of isolating the optoelectronics module from ship power
shall be provided on the unit.
1552
Sl.7.10 Wire Colors:
S 1. 7.1 0.1 ac Switches-wire colors shall be as follows:
Normally open (N.O.):
Black = input
White output
Normally Closed (N.C.):
Black = input
White = output
Sl.7.10.2 de Switches-Wire colors shall be as follows:
Black = de power high (positive lead)
White =normally open (N.O.) output
Red =normally closed (N.C.) output
Green de power low (negative lead)
S 1. 7.11 Lubrication-The fiber-optic position switch shaH
not require lubrication.
Sl.7.12 Weight-The weight of the fiber-optic position
switch shall not exceed 4.5 kg (1 0 lb ).
S 1. 7.13 Dimensions-The critical dimensions of the fiber-
optic position switch shall be as specified in the acquisition
requirements (see S 1.5.2).
S 1 .8.1 Reliability- The fiber-optic position switch shall be
constructed for a service life of no less than 40 000 h.
S 1.8.1.1 Switch Electrical Characteristics-Fiber-optic po-
sition switches shall operate on either ac or de power as
specified in the part designation (see Sl.5.2)
S 1.8.2 ac Switch Electrical Characteristic s-ac switches
shall be two-wire devices and shall operate in series with the
load. ac switches shall be selectable between normally open or
normally closed configuration.
Sl.8.2.1 Operating Voltage-The switch shall be designed
to operate using 115-V, 60-Hz, single-phase, ungrounded, ac
power as defined in MIL-STD-1399, Section 300. The switch
shall operate with power supply variations as specified in
Sl.11.9 and Sl.11.10. Full-time surge protection shall be
provided for power supply limits.
S 1.8.2.2 Voltage Drop-The voltage drop across each
switch during the activated (ON) state shall not be greater than
4-Vac root mean square (rms) at rated load current.
S 1.8.2.3 Leakage Current-The leakage current through
each switch during the deactivated (OFF) state shall not be
greater than 2-mA rms.
S 1.8.2.4 Load Ratings- The switch load ratings shall be as
specified in Sl.8.2.5 through Sl.8.2.7.
S 1.8.2.5 Resistive-The switch shall have a resistive rating
of 1.25.
S 1.8.2.6 Inductive-The switch shall operate inductive
loads with a power factor between I and 0.35. As a minimum,
the switch shall have a make-current rating of 10-A rms for
F2071 - 00 (2011)
three cycles of the specified operating voltage and a break
current rating of 1.25-A rms.
Sl.8.2.7 Minimum Load-The switch shall operate with a
minimum load of 15-mA rms.
S 1.8.3 Multiple ac Switch Operation:
Sl.8.3.1 Series Connection-When two ac switches of the
same designation (see Sl.4.1) are operated in series, the total
switch voltage drop at the load shall not be greater than 8-Vac
rms at the rated load current.
Sl.8.3.2 Parallel Connection-When two ac switches of the
same designation (see Sl.4.1) are operated in parallel, the total
switch leakage current at the load shall not be greater than
4-mArms.
S 1.8.4 de Switch Electrical Characteristics-de switches
shall be four-wire devices and shall operate as voltage sources.
Switches shall be line powered and shall have solid-state
outputs. Each switch shall have one normally open (N.O.) and
one normally closed (N.C.) output in a complementary con-
figuration. The total power drawn from the line shall not be
greater than the sum of 50 rnA plus the output load current.
S 1.8.4.1 Operating Voltage-The switch shall be designed
to operate using 28 : 4.5 V. The switch shall operate with
power supply variations as specified in S 1.11.9 and S 1.11.10.
Full-time surge protection shall be provided for power supply
limits.
S 1.8.4.2 Voltage Drop-The voltage drop across each
switch during the activated (ON) state shall not be greater than
1.5 V de at rated load current.
Sl.8.4.3 Leakage Current-Leakage current from each out-
put in the open (OFF) state shall not be greater than 300 !lA
with 35 V de applied to the switch.
S 1.8.5.4 Load Ratings- The switch load ratings shall be as
specified in Sl.8.5.5 through Sl.8.5.6.
S 1.8.5.5 Maximum Current- The switches shall operate
continuously and supply 250 rnA to resistive and inductive
loads and 100 rnA into lamp loads. The inductive load shall
have a decay time of not greater than 100 ms when the load is
interrupted. This decay shall be measured from the 90 % level
to the 10 % level.
S1.8.5.6 Minimum Load-The switches shall supply any
load current from maximum (see Sl.8.5.5) down to zero.
S1.8.5 Multiple de Switch Operation:
Sl.8.5.1 Series Connection-When two de switches of the
same designation (see S 1.4.1) are operated in series, the total
switch voltage drop at the load shall not be greater than 3 V de
at the rated load current.
Sl.8.5.2 Parallel Connection-When two de switches of the
same designation (see S1.4.1) are operated in parallel, the total
switch leakage current at the load shall not be greater than 600
jlA.
S 1.8.6 Switch Peiformance:
S 1.8.6.1 Operation-The switch shall operate as specified
in Sl.7.7, S1.7.8 and Sl.8.1.1.
S 1.8.6.2 Response Time-Response time is the time it takes
to go from 10 to 90 % of full rise. The response time of the
opto-electronics module shall be no greater than 100 ms closed
to open and 100 ms open to closed.
1553
Sl.8.6.3 Warm-Up Time-The switch shall operate properly
as specified in Sl.7.7 and Sl.8.1.1 within 1 min.
S 1.8.6.4 Change in Optical Transmittance-Changes in op-
tical transmittance shall not be greater than 3 dB.
S 1.8.6.5 Dynamic Range-The dynamic range of the opto-
electronics module shall not be less than 30 dB.
S 1.8.6.6 Ambient Light Susceptibility-The switch shall not
indicate a false closed condition when the switch is open nor a
false open condition when the switch is closed in the presence
of ambient light.
Sl.8.6.7 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency (ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-The switch shall perform in accordance
with S 1.8.6.1 and shall not indicate a false open condition
when the switch is closed, nor shall it indicate a false closed
condition when the switch is open, when operated within the
limits of steady-state voltage.
S 1.8.6.8 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-The switch shall perform in accordance
with S 1.8.6.1 and shall not indicate an open switch condition at
any time when exposed to the specified limits of transient
voltage and frequency.
Sl.8.6.9 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance of
the optoelectronics module shall not be less than 10 mO.
S 1.8.6.10 Power Interruption-The switch shall perform in
accordance with S 1.8.6.1 and shall not indicate an open switch
condition during steady-state operation when exposed to re-
peated power interruptions.
S 1.8.6.11 Short Circuit-The switch shall perform in accor-
dance with S 1.8.6.1 and the local status indication shall
indicate the correct switch position when experiencing a
shorted output circuit.
Sl.8.6.12 Line Voltage Reversal (de Switch Only)-The
switch shall operate in accordance with S 1.8.6.1 after the input
power leads have been reversed.
Sl.8.6.13 Mechanical Life-The switch shall operate in
accordance with S1.8.6.1 and S1.8.6.4 for a minimum of
260 000 cycles. The switch shall show no evidence of physical
damage.
Sl.8.6.14 Temperature-The sensor head and optoelectron-
ics module shall operate within the optical limits specified in
S 1.8.6.4 when exposed to the specified temperature limits. The
switch shall show no evidence of physical damage.
Sl.8.6.15 Enclosure-The sensor head and optoelectronics
module shall meet all test criteria in NEMA Standard 250 for
Type 4X enclosures.
Sl.8.6.16 Vibration-The sensor head and optoelectronics
module shall meet the requirements of S1.8.6.1 and Sl.8.6.4
when exposed to vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-
167 -1. The switch shall show no evidence of physical damage.
S 1.8.6.17 Shock-The switch shall operate within the re-
quirements of Sl.8.6.1 and Sl.8.6.4 when exposed to shock in
accordance with MIL-S-901. Minor deformation of the switch
is acceptable provided the sensor operates in accordance with
S 1.8.6.1 after shock. The switch shall not indicate a change in
state for greater than 50 ms during shock.
F2071 - 00 (2011)
S 1.8.6.18 Electromagnetic Interference (EM/)-The switch
shall perform within the limits of S 1.8.6.1 and S 1.8.6.4 and
shall not indicate a change in state at any time when exposed
to EMI in accordance with MIL-STD-461 Table II, except as
modified below:
CEl 01-The test signal shall be applied only to the ac power
CE102-The test signal shall be applied only to the ac power
CS114-0nly Limit Curve No. 2 shall apply with the
frequency range limited to 10 kHz to 30 MHz.
REIOI-Only the limit curve for 50 em shall apply.
RS 103-The frequency range shall be limited to 1 0 kHz to
18 GHz with an electric field strength test level of 1 0 V /m.
S 1.9.1 Surface Finish-Surfaces of castings, forgings,
molded parts, stampings, and machined and welded parts shall
be free of defects such as cracks, pores, undercuts, voids, and
gaps, as well as harmful or extraneous materials such as sand,
dirt, fins, sharp edges, scale, and flux. External surfaces shall
be smooth and edges shall be either rounded or beveled. There
shall be no burn through, warpage, or dimensional change as a
result of heat from welding. There shall be no damage to
adjacent parts resulting from welding.
Sl.lO Number of Tests and Retests
S 1.1 0.1 First-Article Test Sample Size-A sample shall
consist of a sensor head (Type 1 through 5), an optoelectronics
module, associated fiber-optic cable, connectors, bulkhead
adapters, and connector receptacles. Four samples of the same
test lot (see Sl.lO.l.l) shall be subjected to first-article tests.
Each sample shall be supplied with the length of cable required
for the application (see Sl.5.2) or 30 m of fiber-optic cable,
whichever is greater. Note that two items will be tested at the
same time: the optoelectronics module and the sensor head,
whether proximity or limit. Prior testing of an optoelectronics
module in conjunction with the testing of a different sensor
head does not exclude the optoelectronics module from any of
the testing requirements specified herein. Three samples shall
be subjected to the tests of Group I and one sample shall be
subjected to the tests of Group II.
S 1.1 0.1.1 First-Article Test Lot-A test lot shall consist of
all fiber-optic switches of the same classification (see S1.4.1),
produced under essentially the same conditions, in the same
facility from the same materials and offered for delivery at the
same time.
S 1.1 0.2 Conformance Test Sample Size-Fiber-optic
switches offered for delivery shall be subjected to Group A
tests listed in Table S 1.1. The number of samples subjected to
Group B tests shall be in accordance with Table S 1.2.
S1.11 Test Methods
S 1.11.1 Test Conditions-Except where the following fac-
tors are the variables, the tests specified in S 1.11.2 shall be
(1) Ambient temperature shall be 23 2C.
(2) Relative humidity shall be ambient.
Test
General examination
Operation
Response time
Dynamic range
Grou A
Group B
Supply voltage and frequency (steady-
state)
Temperature
Enclosure
Method
81.12.4
81.11.3
81.11.4
81.11.7
81.11.9
81.11.13
81.11.18
81.11.19
Requirement
81.6.1 through 81.7.13
81.8.6.1
81.8.6.2
81.8.6.5
81.8.6.7
81.8.6.9
81.8.6.14
81.8.6.15
TABLE S1.2 Group B Tests Sample Size
9 to 15 3
16 to 25 5
26 to 50 8
51 to 90 13
91 to 150 20
151 to 280 32
281 to 500 50
501 to 1200 80
1201 to 4200 125
4201 + 3 per 100
S 1.11.2 Tests-Except for the warm-up time test (see
S 1.11.5), the switch and all associated test equipment shall be
energized for a period of time sufficient to ensure complete
warm-up.
S 1.11.3 Operation- The operation of the sensor head and
optoelectronics module shall be tested by manually opening
and closing the switch for ten cycles. Performance shall be in
accordance with S 1.8.6.1.
S 1.11.4 Response Time-The response time shall be mea-
sured by opening and closing the switch via a beam gate,
controlled by a function generator. The output of the switch
shall be connected to a calibrated optical oscilloscope or a
calibrated electrical oscilloscope as appropriate. The output
from the function generator shall be connected to the monitor-
ing oscilloscope and the traces shall be compared to determine
the response time of the system. Performance shall be in
accordance with S 1.8.6.2.
Sl.ll.5 Warm-Up Time-The switch shall be deenergized
for a period of not less than 12 h. The switch shall then be
energized. The warm-up time is the elapsed time between the
application of line power and the point at which the switch
output reaches the conditions specified in Sl.8.6.3. Perfor-
mance shall be in accordance with S1.8.6.3.
S 1.11.6 Change in Optical Transmittance- The change in
optical transmittance of the sensor head shall be performed in
accordance with EIA 455-20. Performance shall be in accor-
dance with S 1.8.6.4.
S 1.11. 7 Dynamic Range--A calibrated optical attenuator
with two jumpers shall be tested for insertion loss in accor-
dance with EIA 455-34. The attenuator shall then be connected
to the transmitter and receiver via the two jumper cables. The
attenuation shall be increased from 0 dB (plus insertion loss of
attenuator and jumpers) to 50 dB (plus insertion loss of
attenuator and jumpers). The switch shall be left in the open
1554
F2071 - 00 (2011)
position. The dynamic range will be exceeded when the switch
indicates a closed switch position. The dynamic range shall be
in accordance with Sl.8.6.5.
S 1.11.8 Ambient Light Susceptibility-The ambient light
source and general test conditions shall be in accordance with
EIA 455-22. The entire switch shall be placed in the beam of
the light source and placed in a closed condition. After a period
of 10 min, the switch shall be placed in an open condition by
disconnecting the optical cable from the source. The switch
shall then be subjected to the ambient light source for an
additional 10 min. Performance shall be in accordance with
Sl.8.6.6.
S 1.11.9 Steady-State Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac)
and Supply Voltage (de )-The switch shaH be operated for not
less than 15 min and shall be manually opened and closed not
less than ten times at conditions of nominal, maximum, and
minimum steady-state voltages (de) and all possible combina-
tions of nominal, maximum, and minimum steady-state volt-
ages and frequencies (ac). Each of the conditions shall be
tested at 0 2C, 25 2C, and 60 2C. This test may be
Sl.ll.l8). The switch shall be allowed to stabilize at each
testing temperature before the steady-state voltage and fre-
quency test shall be performed. Performance shall be in
accordance with Sl.8.6.7.
S 1.11.1 0 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac) or
Supply Voltage (de)-The switch shall be tested to S 1.11.11
(ac) or Sl.11.12 (de). The switch shall be placed in a closed
switch position and the output of the switch shall be monitored
throughout the test. Performance shall be in accordance with
S1.8.6.8.
S 1.11.11 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency ( ac )-
The test shall be performed as follows:
(1) With the switch operating at steady-state voltage of 123
Vac, the voltage shall be increased to 138 Vac, and then
decreased back to the steady-state voltage of 123 Vac in a 2-s
period.
(2) With the switch operating at a steady-state voltage of 107
Vac, the voltage shall be decreased to 92 Vac, and then
increased back to the steady-state voltage of 107 Vac in a 2-s
period.
With the switch operating at a steady-state frequency of
62Hz, the frequency shall be increased to 63.5 Hz, and then
decreased back to the steady-state frequency of 62 Hz in a 2-s
period.
(4) With the switch operating at a steady-state frequency of
58 Hz, the frequency shall be decreased to 56.5 Hz, and then
increased back to the steady-state frequency of 58 Hz in a 2-s
S 1.11.12 Transient Supply Voltage (de)-The test shall be
as follows:
Vv'ith the switch operating at a steady-state voltage of
32.5 Vdc, the voltage shall be increased to 34.5 V de, and then
decreased back to the steady-state voltage of 32.5 V de in a 2-s
period.
(2) With the switch operating at a steady-state voltage of
23.5 Vdc, the voltage shall be decreased to 21.5 Vdc, and then
increased back to the steady-state voltage of 23.5 Vdc in a 2-s
period.
S 1.11.13 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance
of the optoelectronics module shall be determined by applying
50 V de between electrical input and output circuits and
between these circuits and ground. The temperature shall be 25
soc and the relative humidity shall be 50 10 %. The
insulation resistance measurement shall be made immediately
after a 2-min period of uninterrupted test voltage application. If
the indication of insulation resistance meets the specified
requirements (see Sl.8.6.9) and is steady or increasing, the test
may be terminated before the end of the 2-min period.
Performance shall be in accordance with Sl.8.6.9.
S 1.11.14 Power Interruption-The switch shall be placed in
a closed switch position and the output of the switch shall be
monitored throughout the test. With the switch operating
within the steady-state tolerances of voltage and frequency, the
external power supply shall be suddenly interrupted, and after
an interval between 3 and 4 s, the power supply shall be
reestablished to within the steady-state tolerances. After the
switch has been operated long enough to detect any major
performance degradation, the power shall be interrupted for an
interval of 30 s. This cycle (3- to 4-s interruption, monitor, then
30-s interruption) shall be repeated three times (total of four).
S 1.11.15 Short Circuit-The switch shall be deenergized.
The electrical output leads or terminals of the optoelectronics
module shall be connected directly together with no load
resistance. The switch shall be energized for 5 min. The switch
shall be manually opened and closed ten times during this
period. Immediately following the 5-min period, the output
pins shall be unshorted. Performance shall be in accordance
with S 1.8.6.11.
1555
S 1.11.16 Line Voltage Reversal (de)-The switch power
supply shall be connected as follows: the positive 28-V de
signal shall be applied to connector Pin "B." The de reference
signal shall be applied to connector Pin "A." The power supply
shall be energized for a period of 10 min and shall then be
disconnected. The power supply shall then be correctly applied
(Pin "A" positive, Pin "B" negative). Performance shall be in
accordance with Sl.8.6.12.
S 1.11.17 Mechanical Life-The switch shall be placed in
the closed switch condition. The switch shall then be operated
for 260 000 cycles (open-close is one cycle). The cycle rate
shall be between one cycle per s and one cycle every 2 s ( 1 to
0.5 Hz). A change in optical transmittance test (see S 1.11.6)
shall be performed at the end of the mechanical life test.
S 1.11.18 Temperature-The mated cable to switch assem-
blies shall be tested at high and low temperature as specified
herein. The switch shall be placed in a closed switch position
and Steps 1 through 6 shall be performed. The switch shall then
be placed in an open switch position and Steps 1 through 6
shall be performed. Change in optical transmittance shall be
F2071 - 00 (2011)
measured in accordance with S 1.11.6. Visual inspection shall
be performed after the test. Performance shall be in accordance
with Sl.8.6.14.
Step 1-Hold temperature at room ambient (25 2C) for
one h.
Step 2-Decrease temperature in steps of 1 ooc at 30 min per
step until -28 2C is achieved.
Step 3-Hold temperature at -28 2C for 24 h.
Step 4--Increase temperature in steps of 10C at 30 min per
step until 65 2C is achieved.
Step 5-Hold temperature at 65 2C for 24 h.
Step 6-Decrease temperature in steps of 1 ooc at 30 min per
step until 25 2C is achieved.
S 1.11.19 Enclosure- The sensor head and optoelectronics
module shall be subjected to the tests in NEMA 250 for Type
4X enclosures. Change in optical transmittance shall be mea-
sured in accordance with S1.11.6. Performance shall conform
S1.11.20 Vibration-The switch shall be placed in a closed
switch position and the output of the switch shall be monitored
throughout the test. The switch shall be tested in accordance
with MIL-STD-167 -1 Type I vibration test. Change in optical
transmittance shall be measured in accordance with S 1.11.6.
Visual inspection shall be performed after the test. Perfor-
mance shall be in accordance with S1.8.6.16.
S1.11.21 Shock-The switch shall be subjected to the high-
impact shock test for Grade A, Type A, Class I, lightweight
equipment as specified in MIL-S-901. The switch shall be
placed in a closed switch position and the switch shall be
monitored throughout the test. The change in optical transmit-
tance shall be measured after each of the nine hammer blows
(see S 1.11. 6). Performance shall be in accordance with
Sl.8.6.17.
S 1.11.22 Electromagnetic Effects-The switch shall be
tested in accordance with MIL-STD-461. The switch shall be
placed in a closed switch position and the output of the switch
shall be monitored throughout the test. Performance shall be in
accordance with S1.8.6.18.
S1.12 Inspection
S 1.12.1 Classification of Inspections- The inspection re-
(1) First-article tests (see Sl.l2.2).
(2) Conformance tests (see Sl.12.3).
Sl.12.2 First-Article Tests-When first-article tests are re-
quired in the acquisition requirements (see S 1.5.2), first-article
tests shall be performed before production. First-article tests
shall be performed on samples that have been produced with
equipment and procedures normally used in production. First-
article tests shall consist of the tests specified in Table S 1.3.
Failure of any switch to meet the requirements of this specifi-
cation shall be cause for rejection.
S 1.12.2.1 Order of First-Article Tests-Test specimens shall
be subjected to the tests specified in Table S 1.3 in the order
listed except that the steady-state supply voltage and frequency
test may be performed concurrently with the temperature test.
Any deviation in the test order shall first be approved by the
purchaser.
Test Method Reg_uirement
Grou I
Operation S1.11.3 S1.8.6.1
Response time S1.11.4 S1.8.6.2
Warm-up time 81.11.5 S1.8.6.3
Change in optical transmittance S1.11.6 S1.8.6.4
Dynamic range S1.11.7 S1.8.6.5
Ambient light susceptibility S1.11.8 S1.8.6.6
Supply voltage and frequency (steady-state) S1.11.9 S1.8.6.7
Supply voltage and frequency (transient) S1.11.10 S1.8.6.8
Insulation resistance S1.11.13 S1.8.6.9
Power interruption S1.11.14 S1.8.6.10
Short circuit S1.11.15 81.8.6.11
Line voltage reversal S1.11.16 S1.8.6.12
Mechanical life S1.11.17 S1.8.6.13
Temperature S1.11.18 S1.8.6.14
Enclosure S1.11.19 S1.8.6.15
Vibration 81.11.20 81.8.6.16
Shock S1.11.21 S1.8.6.17
Grou II
Operation S1.11.3 S1.8.6.1
EMI S1.8.6.18
S 1.12.3 Conformance Tests-All switches shall be sub-
jected to conformance tests. Conformance tests shall be in
accordance with Table S 1.1 and S 1.1 0.2. Failure of any switch
to meet the requirements of this specification shall be cause for
rejection.
S 1.12.4 General Examination-Each fiber-optic position
switch shall be examined to determine conformance to the
color, finish, workmanship, safety, construction, assembly,
dimensions, weight, identification marking, and label plates.
Examination shall be limited to the examinations that may be
performed without disassembling the unit in such a manner that
its performance, durability, or appearance would be affected.
Examination shall include a check of all controls and adjust-
ments, as applicable.
S1.13 Certification
S 1.13 .1 The purchase order or contract should specify
inspected as directed in this standard and the requirements have
been met. The purchase order or contract should specify when
a report of the test results shall be furnished. Otherwise, the
purchase order or contract should specify that all test data
review by purchaser upon request.
Sl.l4.1 Identification Marking-Special purchaser speci-
fied product marking shall be listed in the acquisition require-
ments (see 5.2). Switches shall be permanently and legibly
marked. Marking shall be located on the top or front of the
sensor head (as mounted in service), and on the top or front of
the optoelectronics module (as mounted in service).
1556
Sl.14.1.1 Sensor Head-At a minimum, the information
specified in 14.1.1 in addition to the following shall be marked
on the sensor head:
( ') National stock number (NSN).
Sl.l4.1.2 Optoelectronics Module-At a minimum, the in-
formation specified in 14.1.2 in addition to the following shall
be marked on the module.
cO f2071 - 00 (2011)
(a) National stock number (NSN),
(2) Technical manual number, and
(3) Contract number.
Sl.14.2 Labeling-Labels with yellow lettering on a black
background shall be provided as follows:
S1.14.2.1 Optoelectronics Module- A visible label shall .be
affixed to the outside of the optoelectronics module cover and
shall contain the following:
WARNING
EMIT LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW BEAM WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
AND AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
S1.14.2.2 Sensor Head and Inside of Optoelectronics
Module-A visible label shall be affixed to the sensor head and
the inside of the optoelectronics module and shall contain the
following:
WARNING
S 1.15 .1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
S 1.16.1 Warranty- Special warranty requirements shall be
specified in the acquisition requirements (see Sl.5.2).
ASTM international takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
COPYRIGHT!).
1557
cdYnf Designation: F2087- 01 (Reapproved 2007)
~ ~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Packing, Fiberglass, Braided, Rope, and Wick
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specificaiion covers the general requirements and
tests for braided, rope, and wick fiberglass packing used for
boiler, furnace, and other high-temperature equipment seals for
service temperatures up to 1000F (538C).
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
0578 Specification for Glass Fiber Strands
04268 Test Methods for Testing Fiber Ropes (Withdrawn
2002)
3
3. Terminology
3.1 braided fiberglass-A braid constructed of continuous
fiberglass strands.
3.2 plied-A yarn product produced by twisting together
two or more ends of single fiberglass yarns.
3.3 strand-An ordered assemblage of textile fibers having
a high ratio of length to diameter and normally used as a unit,
including slivers, rovings, single yarns, plied yarns, cords,
braids, ropes, and so forth.
3.4 yarn-Portion of fiberglass reduced to thread to obtain a
fine and thin strand.
3.5 lot-Unless otherwise specified herein, a lot should
consist of all finished packing of one type and size produced in
a continuous nm or at the same time under essentially the same
conditions. The sampling unit should be one spool, reel, or coil
of packing as necessary to enable performance of the required
examinations or tests.
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee F25.()2 on
Insulation/Processes.
Current edition approved May I, 2007. Published June 2007. Originally
10.1520/F2087-01R07.
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
4. Classification
4.1 Classification- The material shall be of the following
types as specified (see 5.1):
Type I-Wick
Type II-Rope
Type III-Braided
(b) Type, size, and weight of spool, reel, or coil required
(see Section 7);
(c) Marking requirements (see Section 15);
(d) Packaging requirements (see Section I 6);
(e) Performance requirements; and
(f) Inspection, testing, and certification of the material
should be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier
as part of the purchase contract (see Sections 12 and 14).
6.1 Material-The material shall be a continuous, high-
density-type ETG fiberglass material (see Specification D578).
Asbestos and components containing asbestos are prohibited.
6.2 Construction- The packing shall be composed of
twisted plied strands made into a braided packing or laid up
into the general form of a wick or a loosely twisted rope
according to the manufacturer's design. If a core is used, it
shall be of the same material and construction.
7.1 Type I Wick Packing-Unless otherwise specified (see
5.1), the packing shall come in 13-lb (5.9-kg) or 25-lb
(11.3-kg) spools, reels, or coils in the sizes listed in Table 1.
7.2 Type II Rope Packing-Unless otherwise specified (see
1), the packing shall come in 25-lb or 50-lb
(22.7-kg) spools, reels, or coils in the sizes listed in Table 2.
7.3 Ill Braided Packing--Unless otherwise specified
(see 5.1 ), the packing shall come in 25-lb (11.3-kg) or 50-lb
spools, reels, or coils in the sizes listed in Table 3.
1558
0 F2087 - 01 (2007)
TABLE 1 Dimensions for Type I Wick Packing
Size
001W
002W
Diameter in. (mm)
0.250 0.025 (6.3 0.6)
0.375 0.038 (9.5 0.9)
ft/lb (m/kg)
54.00 5.40 (80.36 8.04)
29.00 .t 2.90 (43.16 4.32)
TABLE 2 Dimensions for Type II Rope Packing
001R
002R
003R
004R
005R
006R
007R
008R
009R
OiOR
Diameter in.
0.250 0.025 (6.3 0.6)
0.375 0.038 (9.5 0.9)
0.500 0.050 ( 12.7 1.3)
0.625 0.063 (15.8 1.6)
0.750 0.075 (19.1 1.9)
0.875 0.088 (22.2 2.2)
i .000 0.100 (25.4 2.5)
1.250 0.125 (31.7 3.2)
1.500 0.150 (38.1 3.8)
2.000 0.200 (50.8 5.1)
ftllb
55.00 5.50 (81.85 8.19)
23.50 2.35 (34.97 3.50)
14.00 1.40 (20.83 2.08)
9.00 0.90 (13.39 1.34)
6.50 0.65 (9.67 0.97)
4.50 0.45 (6.70 0.67)
3.50 0.35 (5.21 0.52)
2.50 0.25 (3.72 0.37)
2.00 0.20 (2.98 0.30)
1.20 0.12 (1.79 0.18)
TABLE 3 Dimensions for Type Ill Braided Packing
Size
001B
002B
0038
004B
005B
006B
007B
008B
009B
010B
0.250 0.025 (6.3 0.6)
0.375 0.038 (9.5 0.9)
0.500 0.050 (12.7 1.3)
0.625 0.063 (1 5.8 1.6)
0.750 O.Q75 (19.1 1.9)
0.875 0.088 (22.2 2.2)
1.000 0.100 (25.4 2.5)
1.250 0.125 (31.7 3.2)
1.500 0.150 (38.1 3.8)
2.000 0.200 (50.8 5.1)
8. Workmanship
ftllb
To be specified by purchaser
8.1 Workmanship- The packing should be free from extra-
neous material and visible defects that may affect its service-
ability.
9.1 Quality Systems-- Suppliers shall be prepared to docu-
ment use of a quality system such as compliance with an ISO
9000 series program or similar program.
10.1 Specimen Preparation-Purchaser and
agree on specimen preparation.
11. Test Methods
should
11.1 Material-Material shall be tested in accordance with
Specification D578.
11.2 Size-Material shall be measured using a flexible
measuring tape such as the one described in Test Methods
D4268 and shall be in accordance with the size specified in
Table 1, Table 2, or Table 3.
11.3 Splices-Unless otherwise agreed upon, there shall be
allowed a maximum of two splices per unit with no piece
shorter than 10 ft in length.
11.4 Weight-Material shall be weighed in accordance with
Table 1, Table 2, or Table 3 using a weighing scale, accurate to
0.25 related to the real division of the graduated line. This
value is expressed in mass unit of:
(a) the difference between the corresponding values of
marks of the graduated line and
(b) the difference between two consecutive indications for
digital indication.
12. Inspection and Testing
12.1 Inspection and testing of the material should be agreed
upon between the purchaser and the supplier as part of the
purchase contract (see 5.1).
13. Rejection
13.1 Materials that fail to conform to the requirements of
this specification shall be rejected. Rejection should be re-
ported to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In
case of dissatisfaction with the results of testing, the producer
may make claim for a rehearing or provide for third party
testing.
14. Certification
results shall be fumi shed (see 5. 1 ) .
15. Product Marking
15.1 Marking-For commercial shipment, marking should
be in accordance with accepted industry practices or as
required in the purchase contract (see 5.1).
15.1.1 When specified, a part-numbering system shall be
used in accordance with X l.
16. Packaging
1559
16.1 Commercial Packaging-Commercial packaging
should be in accordance with Practice D3951 or as required in
the purchase contract (see 5 .1).
0 F2087 - 01 (2007)
APPENDIX
Xl. PART-NUMBERING SYSTEM
Xl.l Part numbers for fiberglass packing shall include the
number of this standard followed by the size shown in Table 1,
Table 2 or Table 3. An example of this system is in Fig. X 1.1.
Size
Document Identifier
FIG. X1.1 Part-Numbering System
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rigl;ts, and the iisk
COPYRIGHT/).
1560
c6 Designation: F2133- 01 (Reapproved 2007)
.. u11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Test Methods for
Determining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on
Insulated Marine Bulkheads and Decks, Constructed of
Steel
1
1. Scope
1.1 These test methods described in this fire-test response
standard are used for determining the fire-test response of
insulated marine steel bulkheads and decks. The insulation is
either homogeneous or composite construction.
1.2 It is the intent that tests conducted in accordance with
these test methods will indicate whether bulkheads and decks
will continue to perform their intended function during the
period of fire exposure. These test methods shall not be
construed as implying suitability for use after fire exposure.
1.3 These test methods prescribe a standard fire exposure
for comparing the relative performance of different bulkhead
and deck assemblies under controlled laboratory conditions.
The application of these test results to predict the performance
of actual assemblies when exposed to large pool fires requires
a careful engineering evaluation.
1.4 Limitations-These test methods do not provide the
following:
1.4.1 Full information on the performance of assemblies
constructed with components or of dimensions other than those
tested.
1.4.2 An evaluation of the degree to which the assembly
contributes to the fire hazard through the generation of smoke,
toxic gases, or other products of combustion.
1.4.3 Measurement of flame spread over the surface of the
test assembly.
1.4.4 The erosive effect that the velocities or turbulence, or
both, generated in large pool fires has on some fire protection
materials.
1.4.5 Full information on the performance of assemblies at
times less than 5 min because the rise time called out in Section
6 is longer than that of a real fire.
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee f25 on
Ships and Marine Technology and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
F25.02 on Insulation/Processes.
Current edition approved May I, 2007. Published June 2007. Originally
10.1520/F2133-01R07.
standard. The values given in parentheses are for approximate
information only.
1.6 This standard measures and describes the response of
materials, products, or assemblies to heat and flame under
controlled conditions, but does not by itself incorporate all
factors required for fire hazard or fire-risk assessment of the
materials, products, or assemblies under actual fire conditions.
1. 7 This test method is based on the fire exposure as defined
in Test Methods E1529 (issued by the Committee on Fire
Standards, E05).
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E 1 1 9 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials
E176 Terminology of Fire Standards
E5ll Test Method for Measuring Heat Flux Using a Copper-
Constantan Circular Foil, Heat-Flux Transducer
E1529 Test Methods for Determining Effects of Large Hy-
drocarbon Pool Fires on Structural Members and Assem-
blies
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to These Test Methods
-Refer to Terminology E 176 for definitions of terms associ-
ated with fire issues used in these test methods.
4. Summary of Test Methods
4.1 The fire environment within the furnace shall develop a
total heat flux of 204 : 16 kW/m
2
(65 000 : 5000 Btu/ft
2
-h)
2
the ASTM website.
1561
0 F2133 - 01 (2007)
and an average temperature of 1093 111 oc (2000 200F)
within 5 min from the start of the test. The fire environment
shall be controlled by reproducing the furnace temperatures
recorded during the furnace calibration method specified in
Section 7. This temperature shall be maintained throughout the
remainder of the fire test as shown in Fig. 1.
4.2 Performance is defined as the time period during which
bulkheads and decks will continue to perform their intended
function when subjected to fire exposure. The results are
reported in terms of time increments such as 15, 30, 60, 90, and
120 min.
5.1 These test methods are intended to provide a basis for
evaluating the time period during which bulkheads and decks
will continue to perform its intended function when subjected
to a controlled, standardized fire exposure.
5.1.1 In particular, the selected standard exposure condition
simulates the condition of total continuous engulfment of a
member or assembly in the luminous flame (fire plume) area of
a large free-burning fluid hydrocarbon pool fire. The standard
fire exposure is basically defined in terms of the total flux
incident on the test specimen together with appropriate tem-
perature conditions.
5.1.2 It is recognized that the thermodynamic properties of
free-burning, hydrocarbon fluid pool fires have not been
completely characterized and are variable depending on the
conditions, the physical relationship of the structural member
to the exposing fire, and other factors. As a result, the exposure
specified in these test methods is not necessarily representative
of all the conditions that exist in large hydrocarbon pool fires.
The specified standard exposure is based upon the best
available information and testing technology. It provides a
basis for comparing the relative performance of different
assemblies under controlled conditions.
5 .1.3 It is feasible that substantial changes in the fire
performance characteristics of the assembly will result from
any variation from the construction or conditions (that is, size,
method of assembly, and materials) that are tested.
5.2 The structural assemblies that will be evaluated in
accordance with these test methods will be located on a ship.
6. Furnace Control
6.1 The fire environment within the furnace shall develop a
total heat flux of 204 16 kW/m
2
(65 000 5 000 Btu/ft
2
-h)
and an average temperature of 1093 111 oc (2000 200F)
within 5 min from the start of the test. The fire environment
shall be controlled by reproducing the furnace temperatures
recorded during the furnace calibration method specified in
Section 7. This temperature shall be maintained throughout the
remainder of the fire test as shown in Fig. 1.
6.2 The furnace shall be controlled to maintain the area
under the time-temperature curve to \Vithin 10% of the
corresponding area under the standard time-temperature curve
shown in Fig. 1 for fire tests of 60-min or less duration; to
within 7.5 % for test longer than 60 min but not longer than
120 min: and to within 5 % for tests exceeding 120 min in
duration. The area under the time-temperature curve shall be
obtained by averaging the results of thermocouple readings.
6.3 A correction will be applied for variation of the furnace
exposure from the prescribed, where such variation will affect
the test results, by multiplying the indicated time period by two
thirds of the value obtained by dividing the difference in area
between the curve of average furnace temperature and the
standard curve for the first three fourths of the period by the
area between the standard curve above a baseline of 20C
(68F) for the same part of the indicated period during the first
part of the test. For fire exposure times longer than standard, it
is feasible that the indicated rating period will be increased by
the amount of the correction, and for fire exposure times less
than standard, the indicated rating period may be similarly
decreased. The correction will be expressed by the following
formula:
where:
21 (A A.)
C=- 3 (As-)
(1)
TEMPERATURE, F
~ ~ ~ ~ 2500
1232
1093
954
816
677
538
399
261
122
2250
--------------------------------::j 2000
FIG. 1 Time-Temperature Curve
1562
1750
1500
1250
1000
750
500
250
F2133 - 01 (2007)
C correction in the same units as I,
I indicated fire-resistance period,
A area under the curve of indicated average furnace
temperature for the first three fourths of the indicated
period, and
As = area under the standard furnace curve for the same part
of the indicated period.
6.4 The temperature fixed by the furnace calibration (see
Section 7) shall be the average temperature obtained from the
readings of five thermocouples symmetrically disposed and
distributed within the test furnace to show the temperature near
all parts of the assembly.
6.5 The thermocouples shall be fabricated by fusion-
welding the twisted ends of (0.064-in.) diameter (No. 14 B &
S gage) chromel-alumel wires having a time constant of 2 min
or less, and mounting the wires in porcelain insulators. The
thermocouple assembly shall be inserted through a standard
weight, nominal13-mm (Vz-in.) iron, steel, or inconel pipe, and
the end of the pipe from which the welded junction protrudes
is to be open. The thermocouple junction shall protmde 13 mm
(1/z in.) from the open end of the pipe.
6.6 The junction of the thermocouples shall be placed 102
mm (4 in.) away from the exposed face of the test specimen
and located at the V3 and
2
/3 heights of the test specimen.
6.7 Each thermocouple within the furnace shall be recorded
at intervals not exceeding 1 min.
7. Calibration of Furnace
7.1 A furnace calibration record shall be maintained and the
furnace shall be recalibrated after completion of any repair that
could alter the heat generation, retention, or flow characteris-
tics of the furnace.
7.2 The temperature of the furnace shall be measured by
five thermocouples. They shall be located as shown in 2.
7.3 The measured values of all thermocouples and calorim-
eters shall be recorded at intervals not exceeding 1 min.
7.4 The thermocouples used to measure the temperatures on
the face of the calibration wall shall be No. 28 gage, Type K
inconel sheathed thermocouples having a time constant of 0.5
s or less. The thermocouple junction shall be located 6.3 mm
(V4 in.) from the face of the calibration walL
7.5 The thermocouples used to measure the temperatures
within the furnace shall be constructed as described in 6.5.
7.6 The calorimeters shall have a minimum range from 315
kW/m
2
(100 000 Btu/ft
2
-h) and a 180 view angle. They shall
be located as shown in 2.
7.7 The fire environment during the calibration test shall
comply with the requirements of 6.1. The length of the
calibration test shall be 60 min.
7.8 Individual total heat flux measurements shall lie within
the limits shown in Fig. 3.
7. 9 The average furnace temperature shall be determined by
averaging the temperatures recorded by the five thermocouples
placed 102 mm (4 in.) from the specimen. The average shall be
1563
I
I 11 I
T--r--r
I 4 I I 5
-e- -+--0
SIDE VIE'v/
Lb
1--+--500
500
200;-
0
-
0
---1
FRONT VIEW'
NoTE 1- e denotes site of heat flux measurement, X a gas temperature
sensor.
NoTE 2-Arrow denotes viewing direction of heat flux sensor.
NoTE 3-All dimensions are in mm.
NoTE 4-Calibration assembly is to be fabricated from noncombustible
materials.
FIG. 2 Calibration Assembly for Fire-Containment Walls
1093 :: 111 oc (2000 :: 200F) and individual temperatures are
to be 1093 :: 2l9C (2000 :: 400F) 5 min after the start of the
test and until the end of the test.
7.10 The average furnace temperature curve shall be repro-
duced to maintain the furnace control described in Furnace
Control, Section 6.
7.11 A record of the temperatures measured near the face of
the wall and the oxygen content shall be retained by the testing
laboratory on file for a period of ten years.
8. Furnace Pressure
8.1 A linear pressure gradient exists over the height of
furnace, and although the gradient will vary slightly as a
function of the furnace temperature, a mean value of 8 Palm
height shall be assumed in assessing the furnace pressure
conditions. The value of the furnace pressure shall be the
nominal mean value, disregarding rapid fluctuation of pressure
outside the furnace at the same height. It shall be monitored
and controlled continuously and by 5 min from the commence-
ment of the test shall be achieved within ::3 Pa, see Fig. 4 for
design of the T-shaped sensor.
8.2 For vertically orientated specimens, the furnace should
be operated such that a pressure of zero is established at a
height of 500 mm above the notional floor level to the test
specimen. However, for specimens with a height greater than 3
m, the pressure at the top of the test specimen shall not be
greater than 20 Pa, and the height of the neutral pressure axis
shall be adjusted accordingly.
8.3 For horizontally orientated specimens, the furnace shall
be operated such that a pressure of 20 Pa is established at a
position 100 mm below the underside of the specimen.
F2133 - 01 (2007)
TOTAL HEAT FLUX
226 K'W/M"
2
TOTAL HEAT FLUX
BTU/FT" 2.HR
75000
220
205
189
173
157
142
PPER LIMIT

65000

DINER LIMIT
55000
50000
45000
40000
35000
30000
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
126
110
94
79
63
47
31
16
FIG. 3 Time-Total Heat Flux Curve
Sto.inless steel tube
FIG. 4 T-Shaped Sensor
9. Test Specimen
9.1 Bulkheads:
9.1.1 Dimensions:
9 .1.1.1 The minimum overall dimensions for the test speci-
men including the perimeter details at the top, bottom, and
vertical edges, are 2440-mm width and 2500-mm height.
9.1.1.2 The overall dimensions of the structural core shall
be 20 mm less in both the width and the height than the overall
dimensions of the specimen, and the other dimensions of the
structural core shall be as follows:
Thickness of plating: steel
Stiffeners spaced: steel at 600 mm
4.5 0.5 mm
65 5 x 65 5 x 6 1 mm
9 .1.1.3 The width of the structural core shall be greater than
the specified dimensions providing that the additional width is
in increments of 600 mm to maintain the stiffener centers and
the relationship between the stiffeners and the perimeter detail.
9.1.1.4 Any joints in the plating shall be full-welded, at least
from one side.
9 .1.1.5 The construction of a structural steel core having the
recommended dimensions is shown in Fig. 5; the thickness of
the plating and dimensions of the stiffeners shown are nominal
dimensions. Irrespective of the dimensions of the structural
core and the material of manufacture, the details around the
perimeter shall be as illustrated in Fig. 6.
1564
9.2 Decks:
9.2.1 Dimensions:
9.2.1.1 The minimum overall dimensions for the test speci-
men including the perimeter details at all edges are 2440 mm
in width and 3040 mm in length.
9.2.1.2 The overall dimensions of the structural core shall
be 20 mm less in both the width and length than the overall
dimensions of the specimen, and the other dimensions of the
structural core shall be as follows:
Thickness of plating: steel
Stiffeners spaced: steel at 600 mm
4.5 0.5 mm
100 5 x 70 5 x 8 1 mm
9.2.1.3 The width of the structural core shall be greater than
the specified dimensions providing that the additional width is
in increments of 600 mm to maintain the stiffener center and
the relationship between the stiffeners and the perimeter detail.
9 .2.1.4 Any joints in the plating shall be full welded, at least
from one side.
9 .2.1.5 The construction of a structural steel core having the
recommended dimensions is shown in 2; the thickness of
the plating and dimensions of the stiffeners shown are nominal
dimensions. Irrespective of the dimensions of the structural
core and the material of manufacture, the details around the
perimeter shall be as illustrated in Fig. 7.
0 F2133 - 01 {2007)
ELEVATION
l.teldlng to
leg of
stiffeners
rB
IJidth 244
j
t..:
"'
LB
r ~
A A
2 o- ~ o o ---60"
HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION
~
Five off
vertlco.l
stiffeners
o.lterno.tive
six off)
/
uO uOD-
/lo.te, 4.5 thick
r7 .+.
1'--65 X 6 Flo.t
x 2406 long
65 x 65 x 6 L's
2474 long
'l'
65 X 6 Flo.t
v ~ 2406 long
r6
20
7
'
c c
\ c :J
5 No, 65 X 65 x 6 L
vertlco.l stiffeners
SECTION 'A - A'
~ o o : 1
~ 5 X 65jx 6 L'
SECTION 'B - B'
65 x 6 Flo. t weld fixed
1
Tito plt - s stlffenoc
FIG. 5 Bulkhead
10. Mounting of the Test Specimens
10.1 Restraint and Support Frames :
10.1.1 All test specimens shall be mounted within substan-
tial concrete, or concrete or masonry-lined frames, which are
capable of providing a high degree of restraint to the expansion
forces generated during the test. The concrete or the masonry
shall have a density between 1600 and 2400 kg/m
3
The
concrete or masonry lining to a steel frame shall have a
thickness of at least 50 mm.
1 0.1.2 The rigidity of the restraint frames shall be evaluated
by applying an expansion force of 100 kN within the frame at
mid-width between two opposite members of the frame, and
measuring the increase in the internal dimensions at these
position. This evaluation shall be conducted in the direction of
the bulkhead or deck stiffeners, and the increase of the internal
dimension shall not exceed 2 mm.
10.2 Bulkheads and Decks:
10.2.1 The structural core to bulkheads and decks shall be
fixed into the restraint frame and sealed around its perimeter as
shown in 6. It is feasible that steel spacers, with an
1565
approximate thickness of 5 mm, will be inserted between the
fixing cleats and the restraint frame if the laboratory finds this
necessary.
10.2.2 When the structural core of a bulkhead or a deck is to
be exposed to the heating conditions of the test, that is, when
the fixing cleats are on the exposed side of the structural core,
then a 100-mm-wide perimeter margin adjacent to the restraint
frame shall be insulated such that the fixing cleats and the
edges of the structural core are protected from direct exposure
to the heating condition. In no other situations, irrespective of
the type of test specimen, shall the perimeter edges be
protected from direct exposure to the heating conditions.
11. Insulating the Test Specimen
11.1 Decks shall be insulated from below on the stiffener
side. Insulation shall be on the exposed side.
11.2 For unrestricted use, bulkhead insulation shall be
installed on the unexposed side.
11.3 If the insulation is installed on the unstiffened or
stiffened exposed side, the use shall be restricted.
F2133 - 01 {2007)
llldth 2440
1------ 2420 ------
IJeld or bolt
fixing to fro.Me
Mlnero.l wool
po.cklng to
fill cleo.ro.nce
Fixing cleo. t - 50 x 50 x 5 L x 100 long
continuous weld fixed to structural
steel core
4.5 thick plo. te
SECTION 'B - B' <see figures 5 o.nd 7)
IJeld or loolt
fixing to f'ro.Me
NoTE 1-Section 'A-A' (see Fig. 5 and Fig. 7).
NoTE 2-Section 'B-B' (see Fig. 5 and Fig. 7).
65 X 65 X 6 L
<Bulkheo.d)
FIG. 6 Section Details
11.4 If the insulation is installed on both sides in identical
details then the use shall be unrestricted. The unexposed face
shall be the stiffened side of the test specimen.
11.5 If different insulation details are installed on both sides
of the bulkhead, then the bulkhead shall be tested from both
sides for unrestricted use.
12. Conditioning
12.1 General:
12.1.1 The test specimen shall not be tested until it has
reached an air-dry condition. This condition is defined as an
equilibrium (constant weight) with an ambient atmosphere of
50% relative humidity at 23C (73F).
12.1.2 Accelerated conditioning is permissible provided the
test method does not alter the properties of component mate-
rials. In general, high-temperature conditioning shall be below
temperatures critical for the materials.
12.2 Verification-The condition of the test specimen shall
be monitored and verified by use of special samples for the
determination that shall be so constructed as to materials, as
appropriate. These samples shall be so constructed as to
represent the loss of water vapor from the specimen by having
similar thicknesses and exposed faces. They shall have mini-
mum linear dimensions of 300 by 300 mm (12 by 12 in.) and
a minimum mass of 100 g. Constant weight shall be considered
to be reached when two successive weighing operations,
carried out at an interval of 24 h, do not differ by more than
0.3 % of the mass of the reference specimen or 0.3 g,
whichever is the greater.
12.3 Encapsulated Materials-When the test specimen in-
corporates encapsulated materials, it is important to ensure that
these materials have reached an equilibrium moisture content
prior to assembly, and special arrangements shall be made with
the applicant for the test to ensure that this is so.
13. Unexposed Face Temperature Thermocouples
1566
13.1 Design-The temperature of the unexposed surface
shall be measured by means of disk thermocouples of the type
shown in 8. Thermocouple wires, 0.5-rnm-thick noncom-
bustible insulating pad. The pad material shall have a density of
900 : 100 kg/m
3
.
0 F2133 - 01 (2007)
ELEVATION
'w'elding to
leg of
stiffeners
rB
'w'idth 2 4 4 ~
r6 rfl
LB
~
~ o o x 8 no.
x 2408 long
Five off
vertico.l
stiffeners
100 x 70 x 8 L's
3<ll2
1
long
304
I
l
~
100 X 8 Flo.
A
v ~ 2408 long
r
A
/ r8
2 o- ---60 0 0 oo-- 20
6
"
HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION
/lo. te, 4.5 thick
L L
\ L OJ
5 No. 100 x 70 x 8 L
vertico.l stiffeners
SECTION 'A - A'
J
lE
OO ~
SECTION 'B - B'
100 x 8 Flo. t weld fixed
'Tito plte - s stlfF.,>er
FIG. 7 Deck
13.2 Connection-Connection to the recording instrument
shall be by wires of similar or appropriate compensating type.
13.3 Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Thermocouples:
13.3.1 Steel-Surface finishes shall be removed and the
surface cleaned with a solvent. Loose rust and scale shall be
removed by a wire brush.
13.3.2 Irregular Surfaces-A smooth surface not greater
than 2500 mm
2
, to provide adequate adhesive bond, shall be
made for each thermocouple by smoothing the existing surface
with a suitable abrasive paper. The material removed shall be
the minimum to provide adequate bonding surface. Where the
surface cannot be smoother, fillings shall be used of minimum
quantity to provide a suitable surface. The filling shall com-
prise a ceramic cement, and when the filled surface is dry, it
shall be smoothed, if necessary, with abrasive paper.
13.4 Fixing of Thermocouples:
13 .4.1 Steel-The insulating pad with the thermocouple
fitted shall be bonded to the cleaned surface of the steel using
a water-based ceramic cement produced by integrating the
1567
components to form a high-temperature resistant adhesive. The
adhesive shall be of such a consistency that no mechanical aid
is necessary for retention purposes during the drying process,
but where difficulty in bonding is experienced, it is feasible that
retention by adhesive tape will be used provided that the tape
is removed sufficiently long in advance of removal of the tape
to ensure that the insulating pad is not damaged. If the
thermocouple pad is damaged when the tape is removed, then
the thermocouple should be replaced.
13.4.2 Mineral Wool-The thermocouples with insulating
pads fitted should be arranged in such a way that if a surface
wire mesh is present it may aid retention, and, in all cases, the
bond to the fibrous surface should be made using a contact
adhesive. The nature of the adhesive necessitates a drying time
before mating surfaces are put together, thus, obviating the
need for external pressure.
13.4.3 Mineral Fiber Spray-Thermocouples should not be
fitted until the insulation has reached a stable moisture condi-
tion. In all cases, the bonding technique for steel should be
c4@f F2133 - 01 (2007)
0.2
0.5
W'hen Mo.king the junction of the
therMocouple wires to the copper
disc, o. MiniMUM o.Mount of solder
sho.ll be used for the purpose.
Any surplus solder sho.ll be reMoved.
Copper disc o.nd Insula. tlng po.d
Cuts to aUow pad to be
positioned over copper disc
Insulo. tlng po.d bonded to surf'o.ce of speciMen,
no adhesion between copper disc o.nd speciMen
surf'o.ce or between copper disc and Insulating pad.
FIG. 8 Unexposed Surface Thermocouple Junction and Insulation Pad
used, and, where a surface wire mesh is present, the thermo-
couples should be affixed to the insulation in such a way that
the wire mesh aids retention.
13.4.4 Vermiculite/Cement-Type Spray- The technique
specified for mineral fiber spray shall be employed.
13.4.5 Boards of Fibrous or Mineral Aggregate Composi-
tion -The bonding technique for steel shall be used.
13.4.5.1 In all cases of adhesive bonding, the adhesive shall
be applied in a thin film sufficient to give an adequate bond,
and there should be a sufficient lapse of time between the
bonding of the thermocouples and the test for stable moisture
conditions to be attained in the case of the ceramic adhesive
and evaporation of the solvent in the case of the contact
adhesive.
13.5 Positioning of Thermocouples on the Specimen:
13.5 .1 Bulkheads and Decks-The surface temperatures on
the unexposed face of the test specimen shall be measured by
thermocouples located as shown in 9 and 10:
13.5.1.1 Five thermocouples, one at the center of the test
specimen and one at the center of each of the four quarters, all
positioned no closer than 100 mm away from the nearest part
of any joints welds or pins to any stiffeners;
13.5.1.2 Two thermocouples, one placed over each of the
central stiffeners and positioned for a bulkhead at 0.75 height
of the specimen, and positioned for a deck at mid-length of the
deck;
13.5.1.3 Two thermocouples, each placed over a vertical
(longitudinal) joint, if any, in the insulation system and
positioned for a bulkhead at 0.75 height of the specimen and
positioned for a deck at mid-length of the deck;
13.5.1.4 When a construction has two differently orientated
joint details, for example normal to each other, then two
thermocouples additional to those already described in 13.5 .1.3
shall be used, one on each of two intersections;
13.5.1.5 When a construction has two different types of
joint detail, then two thermocouples shall be used for each type
of joint;
1568
13.5 .1.6 Additional thermocouples, at the discretion of the
testing laboratory, shall be fixed over special features or
specific construction details if it is considered that temperatures
higher than those measured by the thermocouples previously
listed are possible; and
13.5.1.7 The thermocouples specified in 13.5.1.4-13.5 .. 6
for measurements on bulkheads, for example, over different
F2133 - 01 (2007)
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tllOO
I
;B
B I --+--
I
I
I
I
I I
-T- I
I
~
I
Do
I
I ID
I
:rtlOO
I
I
~ ~
I I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
~
I
7
r--
_T--c
JlOO
I
jB
13
1 1 0 ~ l
ID
DD
HlOO

I
p
ossible joints o.long the
nexposed fo.ce of the
nsulo. tlon systeM ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

TherMocouples used for MO.XiMuM
teMpero. ture rise o.nd in co.lculo. ting
o. vero.ge teMpera. ture rise
TherMocouples used for Mo.xiMuM
0 teMpero. ture rise
TherMocouples used for Mo.xiMuM
8 teMpero.ture rise. <Not o.pplico.ble if
insula. tlon systeM is without joints)
B TherMocouples used for bulkheo.d tests only
D TherMocouples used for deck tests only
FIG. 9 Position of Unexposed Face Thermocouples for Bulkhead or Deck: Insulated Face to the Laboratory
joint types or over joint intersections, shall, where possible, be
positioned in the upper half of the specimen.
14. Measurements and Observations on the Test
Specimen During Test
14.1 Temperature:
14.1.1 The ambient air temperature at the beginning of the
test shall be within the range from 10 to 32C (50 to 90F).
14.1.2 All temperature measurements shall be recorded at
intervals not exceeding 1 min.
14.1.3 When calculating temperature rise on the unexposed
surface of the test specimen, this shall be done on an individual
thermocouple-by-thermocouple basis. The average tempera-
ture rise of the unexposed surface shall be calculated as the
average of the rises recorded by the individual thermocouple
used to determine the average temperature.
14.1.4 For bulkheads and decks, the average temperature
rise on the unexposed face of the specimen shall be calculated
from the thermocouples specified in 13.5 .1.1 only.
1569
14.2 Deformation-The maximum deflection of specimen
shall be recorded during the test. These deflections and
displacements shall be measured with an accuracy of 2 mm.
14.3 General Behavior-Observations shall be made of the
general behavior of the specimen during the course of the test
and notes concerning the phenomena such as cracking, melting
or softening of the materials, spalling or charring, and so forth,
of materials of construction of the test specimen shall be made.
If quantities of smoke are emitted from the unexposed face,
this shall be noted in the report. However, the test is not
designed to indicate the possible extent of hazard due to these
factors.
15. Performance Criteria
15.1 The average unexposed face temperature rise as deter-
mined by averaging the five thermocouples as described in
13.5.1.1 shall not be more than 140C (250F), and the
temperature recorded by any of the individual unexposed face
cd@f F2133 - 01 (2007)
!il:
: :: : :: I::
: li
II I I II I II I II
I II
II I I II I II I II
I II
II I
I II I II I II I II
II I I II I II I II
I II
II I I II I II I II I II
II I I II I II I II
I II
II I
I II .I II I II
I II
II I I II I II I II
I II
II I I II I II I II I II
II I I II I II I II
I II
!: : : :
I II I II I II
I II
"h
I II
I I I h!OO
I II
: : 100
I II
I II
I II
::: : ::
I II I II I II
I II I II I II
11 :Bulkheo.ci--H>
I II
Bulkheo.cl
I II
I II
I II
l: 1 only :
11
I II
only :
11
I II
I II
I II
lt I I II I II I II I II
1
1 I I II I II I II I II
1
1 I I II I II I II
I II
1
1 I I II I II l II
I II
I II I II I II
1
1 I I II
1
1 I I II I
h!OO
I II
I II
1
1 I I II I I II I II
1
1 I I II I I II I II
:: l Deck l ll
I II I II I II
I II I II
I II
l : --1-<:t>
I II
:
I II
I II
I II
I only , 11
I II
I II I II
1
1 I I II I II I II
! :
1
1
1
~ :h
I II I II I II
I II I
h!OO
I II
:: : : : 100
I II I I II
I II I I II
:1 I I II I II I II I II
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 I I II I II I II Ill
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 I I If I II I II I II
1
!l: : :: : :: : ::
I II
Therl""locouples usecl for I""'O.Xii""'UI""l
tel""lpero. ture rise o.ncl in co.lculo. ting
a. vero.ge tel""lpero. ture rise
0
Therl""locouples usecl for l""lo.xii""'UI""l
tel""lpero. ture rise
FIG. 10 Position of Unexposed Face Thermocouples for Bulkhead or Deck: Flat Face of Structural Steel Core to the Laboratory
thermocouples shall not be more that 180C (325F), during
the following periods for each classification:
Class H-120
Class H-60
Class H-30
Class H-15
16. Report
120 min
60 min
30 min
15 min
16.1 Report all important information relevant to the test
specimen and the fire test including the following specific
items:
16.1.1 The name of the testing laboratory and the test date.
16.1.2 The name of the applicant for the test.
16.1.3 The name of the manufacturer of the test specimen
and of the products and components used in the construction,
together with identification marks and trade names.
16.1.4 The constructional details of the test specimen,
including description and drawing and principal details of
components. All the details of the specimen shall be give. The
description and the drawings, which are included in the test
report, shall, as far as practicable, be based on information
derived from a survey of the test specimen.
16.1.5 All the properties of materials used that have a
bearing on the fire performance of the test specimen together
with measurements of thickness, density and, where appli-
cable, the moisture or binder content, or both, of the insulation
material(s) as determined by the test laboratory.
16.1.6 A statement that the test has been conducted in
accordance with the requirements of these test methods (and if
any deviations have been made to the prescribed procedures
and a witness and their affiliation) and a clear statement of the
deviations.
16.1. 7 The name of the witness and their affiliation present
at the test; when a test is not witnessed by a certifying
authority, a note to this effect shall be made in the report.
16.1.8 Information concerning the location of all thermo-
couples fixed to the specimen, together with tabulated data
obtained from each thermocouple during the test. Additionally
a graphical depiction of the data obtained shall be included. A
drawing shall be included which dearly illustrates the positions
of the various thermocouples and identifies them relative to the
temperature/time data.
1570
0 F2133 - 01 (2007)
16.1.9 The average and the maximum temperature rises,
recorded at the end of the period of time appropriate to the
insulation performance criteria for the relevant classification of
insulation. If the test is terminated due to the insulation criteria
having been exceeded, the times at which limiting tempera-
tures were exceeded.
16.1.10 The individual unexposed thermocouple readings at
each time interval. The average, as described in 14.1.2, and
maximum thermocouple at each time interval.
16.1.11 The individual furnace thermocouple reading at
each time interval. The average furnace thermocouple reading
at each time interval.
16.1.12 Observations of significant behavior of the test
specimen during the test and photographs or video recordings
or both.
17.1 The precision and bias of these test methods have not
yet been determined.
18. Keywords
18.1 bulkhead, deck; fire test response; hydrocarbon pool
fire; restricted, unrestricted, insulation; temperature, heat flux
ANNEX
Al. TOTAL HEAT FLUX SENSOR ("CALORIMETER")
Al.1 General Description-For measurement of total heat
flux, a water-cooled circular foil "Gardon Gage" heat flux
sensor shall be used. A general description of this type of gage
is given in Test Method E511, which was developed by ASTM
Subcommittee E21.08. While it is used to make total heat flux
measurements, this device is designed for making radiative
heat flux measurements. Caution must be exercised when using
this gage to make measurements with a large convective
fraction as a result of calibration constant changes. Additional
information is contained in the literature (l-4).
3
This rapid-
response sensor derives its output from a differential thermo-
couple circuit that measures the temperature difference be-
tween the center and periphery of the active sensing area
(which is the water-cooled circular foil). This millivolt area
output is self-generating and is directly proportional to the total
heat flux.
Al.2 Specifications:
A1.2.1 View Angle- 180.
A1.2.2 Accuracy-3% of reading (radiative fluxes only).
Al.2.3 Linearity-2% of full range.
Al.2.4 Repeatability-
1
/z %.
Al.2.5 Response Time- 0.5 s or less.
A1.2.6 Surface Coating Absorptivity -To be specified by
the manufacturer for a 2500R (139K) blackbody radiation
spectrum.
Al.3 Calibration:
Al.3.1 Each instrument shall have a certified calibration for
the range of intended use, directly traceable to the National
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
the standard.
1571
Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). The instrument
shall have a certified recalibration, for the range of intended
use, directly traceable to the NIST range if intended use,
directly traceable to the NIST whenever there is reason to
suspect that recalibration is required (for example, if there is a
change in the appearance of the sensor coating); or at least once
per year, or after 25 testing hours, whichever comes first.
Al.3.2 Before each use, each instrument should have a
recalibration performed by the testing laboratory that is either
directly or indirectly traceable to NIST.
A1.4 Operation-Because condensation on the surface of
the sensor can cause faulty readings, the temperature of the
sensor shall be kept above l20F (50C) or above the dew
point of the local environment, whichever is greater.
A1.5 Mounting and Use-Sensors shall be mounted in the
calibration fixtures. The sensors shall be mounted where there
is no direct flame or high-velocity jet impingement. The
water-cooling must be capable of maintaining foil edge tern-
perature less than 300F (150C).
Al.6 Acceptable Sensors-Several sensors have been veri-
fied by their manufacturers to meet the requirements of A 1 .1
through A 1.2.
Al.7 Radiometers and Calibrations-Radiant heat flux
measurements are not required in the test method. If radiant
heat flux measurements are desired, radiometers based on the
designs of the total heat flux sensors are available. If the
radiometer uses a window, calibration of the sensors shall be
performed with the window in place and use a thermal source
with a radiation spectrum similar to that present in a furnace at
2500R (139K).
F2133 - 01 (2007)
APPENDIXES
Xl. COMMENTARY
Xl.l Introduction-This commentary has been prepared to
provide the user of these test methods with background
information and rationale on the development of these test
methods and the selected standard test condition. These test
methods are primarily intended for evaluation of materials used
for fire protection of structures in the hydrocarbon processing
industry (HPI) (such as oil refineries, petrochemical plants,
offshore oil-production platforms, and so forth), and other
structures that can be exposed to large, free-burning, fluid
hydrocarbon-fueled, pool fires. No attempt has been made to
incorporate all the available information on pool fires in this
commentary.
Xl.2 Basic Differences in Large Pool Fire Test Versus Test
Methods 119-Before the development of these test methods,
Test Methods E 119 were the only standardized tests available
for evaluation of the thermal response of structural members
and assemblies to fires. These test methods differ from Test
Methods E 119 in two major ways:
Xl.2.1 When a furnace is used to produce the thermal
exposure, the primary control for these test methods is based
on a calibration procedure that develops a time-temperature
curve to produce a specified heat flux incident upon the test
specimen.
Xl.2.2 These test methods get hotter faster than in Test
Methods El19, which consequently subjects the test specimens
to a strong thermal shock. Specifically, these test methods
specify a cold wall heat flux of 204 kW/m
2
(65 000 Btulft-h
2
)
upon the test specimen within 5 min of test initiation. This
compares to values measured in a major Test Methods Ell9
furnace of 35 kW/m
2
(11 100 Btu/ft
2
-h) at 5 min and 18
kW/m
2
(37 400 Btu/ft
2
-h) at 60 min (5).
Xl.2.3 Need to Control Heat Flux -The heat flux incident
upon an object is defined as energy per unit area per unit time
(for example, Btu/ft
2
-h (kW/m
2
). During the initial stages of
the fire, the thermal response of an object to the fire is a direct
function of the heat flux to which the object is exposed (5*9).
While temperature is an important driving force for heat flux,
temperature alone does not sufficiently define a fire environ-
ment. For example, both a match and a large pool fire (for
example, 50 ft in diameter) burn in a roughly similar tempera-
ture regime (from 871 to 1093C (1600 to 2000F)), but clearly
a person can safely get within a few inches of a match. The
reason is, that the size of the pool fire results in a much higher
incident heat flux. Therefore, it is temperature as well as other
factors, such as fire size, flame thickness, and so forth, that
cause heat flux. One study of Test Methods E119 concluded:
Exposure severity is given indirectly and incompletely by
specification of the furnace temperature. The true measure of
severity is given by the heat flux. Our overriding conclusion is
to recommend that future improvements of Test Methods E 119
1572
focus more on the control, measurement, and specification of
the heat flux condition rather than the ambient gas temperature
history (10).
Therefore, specifying a combination of the heat flux and the
temperature for the control of these test methods represents an
advance in fire technology, not a unique requirement for large
pool fires as such.
X1.3 Need for a Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fire Test:
X1.3.1 A large pool fire is loosely defined as that resulting
from hundreds (or thousands) of gallons of liquid hydrocarbon
fuel burning over a large area (several hundred to several
thousand square feet) with relatively unrestricted air flow to it
and combustion products from it (for example, outdoors). A
number of large pool fire experimentalists (11-18) have shown
that high heat flux and temperature conditions are rapidly
achieved in this fire (typically in less than 1 min.) This is in
sharp contrast to the slow rate of buildup of thermal conditions
in the Test Methods E 119 fire, which simulates a fire in which
the fuel is solid and restrictions exist on air flow to (and
combustion products from) the fire.
Xl.3.2 The HPI facilities, which largely are located out-
doors, handle large quantities of hydrocarbon fluids. Personnel
responsible for safety and loss prevention in these facilities are
concerned that when they have a fire of consequence, it is a
large pool fire, not a Test Methods E 119 type fire, and that
structures, assemblies, and fire protection materials should be
designed based on ratings in a large pool fire, not the Test
Methods EH 9 fire (19-22). Indeed, Norway now specifies
firewalls on offshore platforms rated per a hydrocarbon fire
(23).
X1.3.3 The concern for materials and structural perfor-
mance in large pool fires has led to the development of several
different types of large pool fire simulation tests (5, 6, 20,
2 4 ~ 2 7 that have shown that materials can perform quite
differently in Test Methods E119 versus pool fire test. For
example, one experimenter showed that 2 in. of a standard
fireproofing material gave only 1 h in a pool fire simulation test
versus a nominal 3-h Test Methods E 119 rating (20).
Xl.3.4 However, the existence of various simulation tests
has sometimes led to confusing and conflicting results, and the
lack of a standardized test has inhibited acceptance of ratings
in accordance with this test method (21). Therefore, the need
was established for this standardized test method that simulates
the effects of large pool fires on the types of structures and
assemblies that are used in HPI facilities.
Xl.4 Rationale for the Specific Test Conditions:
Xl.4.1 Needfor a Single Set of Test Conditions-To estab-
lish a standardized large pool fire simulation test, the issue
becomes one of selection of the conditions to simulate. As
0 F2133 - 01 (2007)
demonstrated by the various large pool fire experimenters, a
range of temperatures, velocities, heat fluxes, and chemical
conditions exist, and they vary dramatically with time and
spatial location (12, 14). From a pragmatic viewpoint, selection
of multiple test conditions would probably result in prohibi-
tively high testing costs. Therefore, it becomes a case of
whether engineering judgment can be exercised in selecting a
single set of test conditions that represent a reasonable worst
case for HPI facility design purposes.
NoTE Xl.l-Reasonable worst case means, in essence, designing to
withstand the most severe set of conditions that could be expected, within
reason, to occur. Note that the design solution for a structure exposed to
the reasonable worst case set of fire conditions selected does not
necessarily have to be limited exclusively to pa<>sive fire protection, but
can, and generally does, include a combination of passive plus active
systems fixed and mobile.
Xl.4.2 Radiant Heat Flux and the Continuous Total Flame
Engulfment Criterion-There is a consensus that radiation is
the dominant heat transfer mechanism to an object immersed in
a large pool fire (6, 9, 11, 12, 14, 17) . Radiant heat transfer to
an object is defined by the Stefan-Boltzmann equation as
follows:
q = crr.F'r (Xl.l)
where:
q radiant heat flux incident on the exposed time, kW/m
2
(Btu/ft
2
-h);
(j Stefan-Boltzmann constant, 5.67 X w-ll kW/m
2
K
4
;
emissivity of the fire as viewed from the exposed item
(by definition 0 :::; e :::; 1 ), the case in which = 1 is
given the name blackbody radiation;
F view factor of the exposed item to the fire (by definition
O:::;F:::;l);and
T absolute temperature of the fire, *R or K.
Therefore, to determine a reasonable worst case radiation
condition, consideration must be given to the view factor to the
fire, fire emissivity, and time continuity, as well as fire
temperature.
X1.4.2.1 View Factor- Only those surfaces of an object
that are in a direct visual line to a fire can receive heat flux.
Because an object located outside of, or on the periphery of, a
fire has a view factor (to the fire) of 0.5 or less, it is clear that
maximum radiation occurs when the object is fully engulfed in
the fire and hence has a view factor of 1.0 (which is the
theoretical maximum) and that this is a reasonable maximum.
Xl.4.2.2 Emissivity of a Fire-By definition, emissivity
ranges from zero (for example, no flames at all) to 1.0 (for
example, flames so thick that they cannot be optically seen
through). Experimenters are tending to believe that in a fire that
has a large quantity of luminous soot particles (such as a liquid
hydrocarbon fueled pool fire), flames only have to be 3 to 6 ft
thick to be optically opaque (15). Clearly, then, it is a
reasonable maximum to have an emissivity of 1.0.
Xl.4.2.3 Time Continuity- This is perhaps the most impor-
tant factor. Consider an example of fire exposure of an
individual structural member, such as a beam or column,
centered in a pool fire on the order of 30 to 40 ft in diameter.
It is clear that, at least at some times during the fire, an
optically opaque fire can totally engulf the beam or column.
1573
Hence it is reasonable for the view factor and fire emissivity to
be 1.0 at some times, with respect to the beam or column. The
question then must be answered: For what percentage of the
time duration of the fire (for example, if it is a 1-h fire) do these
conditions prevail? Since these pool fire predominantly occur
outdoors, and since even small winds can cause the fires to
fluctuate greatly in a given space (Note XJ .2) (12, 15-18), this
is a very difficult question to answer. Therefore, an assumption
has to be made, and the reasonable worst case assumption
made is that the total engulfment conditions prevail 100 % of
the duration of the fire exposure. In other words, total continu-
ous engulfment means that at no time during the fire does any
part of the structural member ever see out (nor would an
imaginary observer anywhere outside of the fire ever see in to
the member). Because the performance of any individuai
member (for example, a column) can be critical, this total
continuous engulfment criterion designs the member as if it
were in the central portion of a large stationary fuel spill on a
relatively windless day for the duration of the protection time
desired (for example, 1.0 h).
NoTE Xl.2-lndeed, virtually all large pool fire experimenters specifi-
cally wait for windless (or special prevailing wind) conditions to conduct
their fires so they have a measure of control on their experiment.
Xl.4.3 Total Heat Flux:
X1.4.3.1 The specified total heat flux is 204 kW/m
2
-h (65
000 Btu/ft-h
2
) within 5 min of fire initiation, and is a
summation of the radiative plus convective components, with
the radiative component being very dominant:
(Xl.2)
where:
qr total heat flux, kW/m
2
or Btu/ft
2
-h;
qR radiant heat flux, see Eq X l. l ; and
qc convective heat flux, h(T
1
T
5
) (see Eq X1.3).
Therefore, total heat flux is a strong function of fire
temperature(s), and the convective component is a function of
the temperature and velocity of the gases in the fire. In Xl.4.4
and X 1.4.5, fire temperature and gas velocity are discussed.
X1.4.3.2 Measurement of heat flux in a fire is a difficult
experimental task. However, it is surprising how much agree-
ment there is between experimenters, given this experimental
difficulty plus the fluctuation of conditions within a given fire,
as well as the differences in types and sizes of fires and where
and how the heat flux measurements are made and other
variables (for example, wind).
(1) Bader of Sandia (11) measured heat fluxes in large pool
fires by several methods and developed a simplified computer
model to predict the response of an object immersed in the fire.
Using slug (that is, solid metal) calorimeters, the maximum
time-integrated measured heat flux in 5.5- by 5.5-m (18- by
18-ft) fires was 150 kW/m
2
(47 500 Btu/ft
2
-h). For modeling of
an object's response, he states:
It was realized that both radiant and convective heat transfer
played significant parts as energy transfer modes within a fire,
but it was reasoned that at high temperature the radiant mode
would be dominant, blackbody source temperature which
would combine the effects of radiation and convection. A study
of experimental temperature measurements was undertaken.
0 F2133 - 01 (2007)
After analyses, "It was decided that a good numerical repre-
sentation of a large free-burning fire was possible using an
1850F (1010C) blackbody temperature as the input."
NoTE Xl.3-This input began at -1 min after fire initiation. Blackbody
radiation at 1850F (1010C) gives a heat flux of 48 800 Btu/ft
2
h (154
kW/m
2
).
(2) Canfield and Russell of the U.S. Navy (12) mapped the
temperature and radiant heat flux (using Gardon gages) at up to
32 points in the flame plume of a 16- by 8-ft (4.9- by 2.4-m)
pool fire. The maximum means value of radiant heat flux was
51 000 Btu/ft
2
-h (161 kWm
2
), this being in the (spatially)
small hot core of the flames (measured from 1945 to 1974F
(1063 to 1079C).
(3) NASA and Avco (13) measured total heat flux in a 48- by
54-ft (14.6- by 16.5-m) pool fire using a Gardon gage. The
maximum total heat flux measured was 50 600 Btu/fe-h (160
kW/m
2
).
(4) Brown of the FAA (16) also used Gardon gages to
measure total heat flux at one point in a series of 20- by 20-ft
(6.1- by 6.1-m) pool fires under various wind conditions. The
result: "The heat flux to the . . . calorimeters averaged about
50 400 Btu/ft
2
-h (159 kW/m
2
) for calm wind or steady perpen-
dicular wind (blowing fire toward calorimeter) tests." (The heat
flux was about 18 000 Btu/ft
2
-h (56.7 kW/m
2
) for wind
blowing away.) The heat flux reached quasisteady state values
in less than 20 s.
(5) Mansfield of NASA (14) also used Gardon gages. The
fires were 25 by 25ft (7.6 by 7.6 m) and 30 by 80ft (9.1 by 9.1
m). The average total heat flux of three points was 50 800
Btu/ft
2
-h.
(6) In a series of tests at Sandia National Laboratories (17,
18, 28), a variety of flat plate and cylindrical calorimeters have
been used in 30- by 60-ft (9- by 18-m) pool fires to obtain hot
wall heat fluxes to objects of different sizes and shapes. The
maximum average value of the cold wall heat flux in these test
methods was slightly less than 50 000 Btulft
2
-h (158 kW/m
2
).
Xl.4.3.3 Therefore, the selected value of 50 000 Btu/ft
2
-h
(158 kW/m
2
) is a reasonable average of the experimental
values. This is assumed to be a reasonable worst-case expo-
sure.
Xl.4.4 Convective Heat Flux and Gas Velocity:
X1.4.4.l While the convective heat flux is not called out
separately in these test methods, on a vertical column it is
expected to be approximately 10 % of the total heat flux or
about 5000 Btu/ft
2
-h (16 kW/m
2
) (see X1.4.4.4).
Xl.4.4.2 Convective heat flux to an object occurs as the
result of the flow over the object of gases of higher temperature
than the object. For an object of a given shape (for example, a
9-ft tall column), and gases of a given temperature and
composition, the convective heat flux is then a function of the
velocity of the gases and their orientation to the object. In the
continuous engulfment portion (see Xl .4.2) of a large pool fire,
the prevalent (time-wise at any one spatial point) velocity of
the combustion gases is vertical as a result of the buoyant
forces of the flame plume (for example, in comparison to any
wind conditions that could exist which would add horizontal
component to the gas velocity, and to very sporadic cyclone-
type whirling vortices). For the example of a 9-ft (2.7-mm) tall
column, the flow is parallel to the 9-ft height and is turbulent
and the convective heat flux can be quantified as follows:
qc = havg(T
8
- TJ (Xl.3)
h = 0.0037 = (k!L) = (VL!v)
0
8
Pfl
33
(Xl.4)
where:
qc cold wall convective heat flux, Btu/ft
2
-h; wall at 70F;
havg average heat transfer coefficient, Btu/ft
2
-h F;
T average gas temperature, F;
L height of the column, ft;
k thermal conductivity of the gases, Btu/ft
2
-h F;
v kinematic viscosity of the gases, ft
2
/h;
Pr Prandtl number; and
V average velocity of the gases, ftlh (mlh).
Xl.4.4.3 Unfortunately, state-of-the-art heat transfer theory
for buoyant plume velocities in large pool fires is corrobora-
tion. Theory (9, 29-33) states that maximum (vertical) velocity
occurs at the centerline of a fire (under windless conditions),
and increases with height (until a height is reached where
lateral air entrainment/dilution effects cause the flame plume to
become dissipated) (Note X 1.3). Vertical velocity in general
decreases with lateral distance from the fire centerline. Pub-
lished data on velocity measurements is scarce. One published
value of measured vertical plume velocity in a large pool fire is
38 ft/s (11.6 m/s) at a 20-ft (6.1-m) elevation at the exact
centerline of a 50-ft (15.2-m) diameter fire (17). Reference (19)
provides average velocities at the centerline of a 9 by 18 m, and
9.5 m/s at 6.1 m; velocities measured during periods of low
winds are up to 30% higher. References (18, 29-33) provide
theoretical analysis.
X1.4.4.4 Using Xl.3 and X1.4, and using T = 2000F
(1093C) and estimated properties (that is k, v, PR) for the
combustion gases, q computes to slightly of 5000 Btulft
2
is
total specified heat flux of 50 000 Btu/ft
2
-h (159 kW/m
2
). This
agrees well with Mansfield's observation (14). "This division
of radiant and convective energy transfer is similar to a
frequently accepted average or standard radiant/convective
ratio of 9:1 for large pool fires."
X1.4.4.5 Although theory predicts higher velocities at
higher elevations, common HPI design practice limits the
major areas of fire protection concern to a maximum of 30 to
40 ft (9.1 to 12.2 m) above the fire source (23). The 20-ft
(6.1-m) height at which the 38-ft/s (11.6-m/s) value was
reported (17) or the 41-ft/s (12.6-m/s) value reported in (18)
during low winds are therefore at the approximate average
height of HPJ concern. Note that the data reported show
that the temperatures at this elevation are lower than at some
elevations closer to the pool surface.
Xl.4.4.6 As a counterpoint to the discussion of X1.4.4.4,
the possibility exists that some fireproofing materials might be
susceptible to erosive damage because of exposure to
temperature gases with velocities representative of those mea-
sured in large pool fires. However, preliminary analysis of
measurements made in large pool fires at Sandia National
Laboratories, gives a shear stress estimate of less than 1 psf (50
Pa). As technology advances, this entire subject of gas velocity
and its effects is one that could use further attention.
1574
F2133 - 01 (2007)
X1.4.4.7 As a pragmatic point, it is extremely difficult and
expensive experimentally to generate high velocities of large
quantities of hot gases and direct them in a highly controlled
manner on a large test specimen. In fact, it is not clear if any
existing test facility, other than an actual fire, has the capability
of generating the representative velocities.
Xl.4.5 Fire Temperature:
X1.4.5.1 The specified fire temperature (that is, the tem-
perature of the environment that generates the heat fluxes of
Xl.4.3 and XI.4.4) is from 1850 to 2150F (1010 to 1180C).
While this range is narrower than that seen in large pool fires
(15, 17, 18), it was selected for two reasons:
(J) As the discussion in Xl.4.5 presents, fires do not bum at
any one temperature, but rather consist of gases with a wide
range of temperatures, depending on spatial and time position
in the fire. The range from 1700 to 2300F (927 to 1260C) is
typical of the luminous plume engulfment region of large pool
fires (12, 15, 17, 18) . The selected range is in the middle of the
broader range.
(2) The selected temperature range provides the
experimenter/test facility with some flexibility and latitude in
the means used to achieve the specified heat fluxes.
X1.4.5.2 As a reference point, using Eq X 1.1 (the Stefan-
Boltzmann equation for radiant energy transfer), if one is
disposed to think of the fire at a single idealized temperature,
then for the blackbody radiation case of emissivity -1 and view
factor ofF= 1, 1j= 2000F (1093C) gives an incident radiant
heat flux of 63 770 Btu/ft
2
-h (198 kW/m
2
). Indeed, this
concept of a single fire temperature is quite useful if an
enclosed furnace is used as the test simulation facility. The heat
flux of 65 000 Btu/ft
2
-h called out in this test method would
require a surface absorptivity of 0.8.
X1.4.5.3 Temperature can be thought of as the driving
potential for the heat flux. In actuality, the temperature in a
luminous mass of combusting gases from a pool fire is not a
constant but varies over a wide range, from about 1000 to
1200F (538 to 649C) at the air-entraining edge of the plume
to a broad internal zone from 1200 to 1900F (649 to 1038C)
to a small central hot core from about 1900 to 2200F (1038 to
1204C) (12, 15). One set of data for a spatially fixed grid of
up to 50 thermocouples in the vertical cylindrical space over a
50-ft (15.2-m) diameter pool fire on a windless day gave the
following time-averaged volumetric distribution (31):
Less than 1200F (649C)-66%
1200 to 1900F (649 to 1038C)-23%
1900 to 2200F (1038 to i204C)-11%
Given the fluctuating nature of a pool fire, and therefore the
probability that at some times the member wil1 see out through
the fire, thus counterbalancing exposures to higher tempera-:
tures, the specified range appears to meet the criterion of a
reasonable worst case.
Xl.4.6 Gas Chemistry and Oxygen Content:
X 1.4.6.1 While the chemistry of the gases adjacent to the
test specimen are not specified in these test methods, some
discussion of these topics was considered appropriate for
commentary.
Xl.4.6.2 The chemistry in the fire plume of a pool fire is,
like temperature, not a constant, but dynamic with time and
spatial position. On the one hand, the chemistry is complex
such as CO, C0
2
, HO, 0, N, H, and CnHm (for example,
various hydrocarbons), soot particles, and so forth. On the
other hand, the chemistry is relatively straightforward-that of
a fluid hydrocarbon reacting with air. Therefore, the range of
chemical species present are relatively well known.
Xl.4.6.3 The most extensive measurement of chemistry in a
pool fire is given by Ref (15), where up to 23 spatial points
were sampled periodically in the cylindrical area over a 50-ft
(15.2-m) diameter pool fire. One analysis of this data led to the
statement: "The overall conclusion form the data presented is
that in the JP-4 fuel fire there is very little oxygen at the center
of the fire up to a height of 1.5 fire radius. That is, combustion
is still taking place" (30). For the 50-ft diameter fire cited, a
height of 1.5 fire radius is about 38 ft (11.6 m), approximately
the normal maximum height of primary interest for fire
protection (in accordance with the HPI; see X 1.4.4.4).
X2. USE OF FURNACE TYPE FACILITIES
X2.1 While these test methods do not restrict the technique
used to achieve the test conditions specified in Section 6 for the
purposes stated in Section l, there is strong interest in the use
of traditional fire test facilities. The use of enclosed furnaces to
simulate the thermal effects of a hydrocarbon fire is discussed.
X2.2 Traditionally, enclosed furnace-type facilities have
been used for testing of structural response of materials (for
for Test Methods E119 testing). These furnaces
normally are fueled by a clean burning gas such as natural gas
or propane. Experimental to date indicates that
enclosed furnaces are in concept also usable to
simulate the pool fire conditions specified in Section 6 for the
purposes specified in Section 1. The reason that an enclosed
furnace type facility appears applicable to simulating the pool
1575
fire can be understood by referring to the discussion in X 1.4.2,
which explained that the 50 000-Btu/ft
2
-h heat flux condition
simulates total engulfment in the luminous portion of the flame
plume. That is, the view factor F and emissivity are at the
maximum value of 1.0. In addition, the fire is conceptualized as
being at a uniform temperature of 1865F (10l8C), as
explained in X 1.4.5.2. Consider a 2.7-m (9-ft) column in an
enclosed furnace with optically opaque walls at 1865F
(1 018C) and with optically transparent gases in the furnace
also at 1865F (10l8C). The view factor of the column to the
walls of the furnace is 1.0. If the walls of the furnace and the
surface of the column are at a uniform temperature, the
effective emissivity of the walls is 1.0 (Note Note X2.1 ). The
radiant heat flux to the specimen in accordance with Eq X 1 . I
is the specified 65 000 Btu/ft
2
-h. As long as the temperatures
F2133 - 01 (2007)
are uniform throughout the furnace, the same discussion for
radiant heat fluxes holds true even if the gases in the furnace
are not transparent.
NoTE X2.1-For the case of a fully enclosed furnace with optically
opaque walls and at a uniform temperature, the radiosity (that is, the sum
of the emitted and reflected radiation) of the walls is constant and equal to
that of a blackbody at the same temperature, regardless of the materials of
construction of the furnace (34). The walls have an effective emissivity of
1.0, regardless of the actual emissivity of the wall material. If the test
specimen is at a temperature lower than that of the furnace walls, the heat
flux to the specimen will drop below the blackbody flux based on the wall
temperature. The size of the effect depends on the size of the test specimen
relative to the furnace volume, the temperature difference, and the
radiative properties of the test specimen and the furnace materials (35).
REFERENCES
OJ Gardon, R., "An Instrument for the Direct Measurement of Intense
Thermal Radiation," Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol 24, No. 5,
May 1953, pp. 366-370.
(2) Borell, G. J., and Diller, T. E., "A Convection Calibration Method for
Local Heat Flux Gages," Journal of Heat Transfer, Vol 109, February
1987, pp. 83-89.
(3) Keltner, N. R., and Wildin, M. W., "Transient Response of Circular
Foil Heat-Flux Gauges to Radiative Fluxes," The Review of Scientific
Instruments, Vol 46, No. 9, 1975.
(4) Keltner, N. R. and Moys, J. L., "Defining the Thermal Environment in
Fire Tests," Fire and Materials, Vol 14, pp. 133-138, 1989.
(5) Crowley, D. P., et al, "Test Facilities for Measuring the Thermal
Response of Materials to the Fire Environment," Journal of Testing
and Evaluation, Vol 1, No. 5, September 1973, pp. 363-368.
(6J Belason, B., et al, "A Fire Simulation Facility for Materials Response
Testing," Fire Technology, Vol 6, No. 2, May 1970.
(7J Castle, G. K., et al, "Analytical Prediction of the Thermal Response of
Decomposing Materials in Fire Environments," Journal of Testing
and Evaluation, Vol 1, No. 5, September 1973, pp. 416-421.
(8) Castle, G. K., "The Nature of Various Fire Environments and the
Application of Modern Material Approaches for Fire Protection of
Exterior Structural Steel," Journal of Fire and Flammability, 1974.
Also, Loss Prevention, Vol 8, by American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, 1974. Presented at AICheE Symposium, November 1973,
Philadelphia, PA.
Newman, J. S., and Vincent, B. G., "Thermal Endurance of Construc-
tion Materials at LNG Facilities," Final Report (October 1980=Sep-
tember 1981 ), for Gas Research Institute Contract No. 5080-352-
0347, Chicago, IL.
(H)} Kanury, A. M., and Holve, D. J., "A Theoretical Analysis of the
ASTM El99 Standard Fire Test of Building Construction and
Materials," NBS-GCR 76-50 , Standard Research Institute Project
PYU 3523, August 1975. Prepared for U.S. Department of Com-
merce, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC.
0 f) Bader, B. E., "SC-R-64-1366A Heat Transfer in Liquid Hydrocarbon
Fuel Fires," Chemical Engineering Progress Symposium Series,
Sandia Corp., Albuquerque, NM. Vol 61, No. 56, 1965.
(12) Russell, L. H., and Canfield, J.A., "Experimental Measurement of
Heat Transfer to a Cylinder Immersed in a Large Aviation-Fuel Fire,"
Journal of Heat Transfer, August 1973.
Henshaw, J., et al, Fire Protective Materials ApplicatioF Program,
Vol 1, Final Report, Avco Systems Div. for NASA-Ames, March
1972.
04) Mansfield, J. A., "Tank Car Fire Program," Report No. DOT-NASA-
3 -1, May 197 4 Interim Report, Prepared for Department of Trans-
portation, Federal Railroad Administration, Washington, DC.
Johnson, H. T., Linley, L., and Mansfield, J., "Measurement of the
Spatial Dependence of Temperature and Gas and Soot Concentra-
tions Within Large Open Hydrocarbon Fuel Fires," NASA Technical
Memorandum 58230, JSC White Sands Test Facility, Las Cruces,
NM.
(16) Brown, L. J., Jr., "Cabin Hazards from a Large External Fuel Fire
Adjacent to an Aircraft Fuselage," Report No. FAA-Rd-79-65, August
1979 Final Report, Prepared for U.S. Department of Transportation,
Federal Aviation Administration, Systems Research & Development
Service, Washington, DC.
Gregory, J. J., Keltner, N. R., and Mata, R., Jr., "Thermal Measure-
ments in Large Pool Fires," Heat and Mass Transfer in Fire,
ASME-HTD Vol 73, 1987 and Journal of Heat Transfer, Vol 111,
May 1989, pp. 446-454.
Schneider, M. E., and Kent, L. A., "Measurements of Gas Velocities
and Temperatures in a Large Open Pool Fire," Heat and Technology,
Vol 25, No. 1, February 1989.
{19) Waldman, S., "Loss Prevention in the CPI Fireproofing in Chemical
Plants," The Dow Chemical Co., Midland MI, pp. 90-98.
Warren, J. H., and Corona, A. A., "This Method Tests Fire Protective
Coatings," Hydrocarbon Processing, January 1975.
(21) Davenport, J. A., and Geihsler, V. G., "Fireproofing Structural Steel
in Hydrocarbon Processing Plants," The Sentinel, Second Quarter
I 983, Industrial Risk Insurers, Hartford, CT, pp. 9-11.
(22) Guideline on Fireproofing Practices in Petroleum and Petrochemi-
cal Processing Plants (Draft), American Petroleum Institute Com-
mittee on Safety and Fire Protection, August 1 981.
Norwegian Petroleum Directorate, Requirements for Offshore Plat-
forms, Section 6, Passive Fire Protection.
1576
(24) Kayser, J. N., Loss Prevention: Testing Fireproofing for Structural
Steel, Exxon Co., Baton Rouge, LA, pp. 45-47.
"Epoxy Coating Fireproofs Chemical Tanks," Chemical Processing,
Exxon Testing, November 1976.
(26) Schwag, R. F., and Lawler, J. B., Laboratory Evaluation Tests of
Fireproofing Materials, Allied Chemical Corp., Morristown, NJ, pp.
42-44.
Rains, W. A., "Fire Resistance-How to Test For It," Chemical
Engineering , Dec. 19, 1977, pp. 97-100.
Bainbridge, B. L., and Keltner, N. R., "Heat Transfer to Large
Objects in Large Pool Fires," Journal of Hazardous Materials, Vol
20, 1988, pp. 21-40.
Harsha, P. T., et al, "Preliminary Report: Improvement of a Math-
ematical Model of a Large Open Fire," SAI-79-014-CP/R, Prepared
for NASA-Ames, Moffett Field, CA, Contract NO. NAS2-10327,
September 1979.
Phani, R., "Analysis of NASA JP-4 Fire Tests Data and Development
of a Simple Fire Model," NASA Contractor Report 159209, NASA
Contract NASl-15380, NASA, Hampton, VA, April 1980.
(.H) Mansfield, J., Analysis of Data Contained in Ref. 12, presented at
Pool Fire Task Group, June 1982.
c4@f F2133 - 01 (2007)
(32) Harsha, P. T., et al, "A Mathematical Model of a Large Open Fire,"
SAI-81-026-CP, prepared for NASA-Ames, Moffett Field, CA,
Contact No. NAS-2-10675, April 1981.
\33) McCaffrey, F.J., "Purely Buoyant Diffusion Flames: Some Experi-
mental Results," NBSIR 79-1910, Nationai Bureau of Standards,
1979.
(34) Eckert, E. R. G., and Drake, R. M., Heat and Mass Transfer,
McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, p. 365.
Babrauskas, V., and Williamson, R. B., "Temperature Measurement
in Fire Test Furnaces," Fire Technology, Vol14, 1978, pp. 226-238.
COPYRIGHT/).
1577
A n T ~

~
INTERNATIONAL
Sound-Absorbing Board, Fibrous Glass, Perforated Fibrous
Glass Cloth Faced
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers fibrous glass sound-absorbing
board with a perforated fibrous glass cloth facing for sound
reduction in ship spaces with high noise levels. This specifi-
cation is primarily for materials used on ships. Additional
requirements, testing, and certification are required for use of
this material aboard U.S. Coast Guard inspected vessels in the
United States.
1.2 This standard measures and describes the response of
materials, products, or assemblies to heat and flame under
controlled conditions, but does not by itself incorporate all
factors required for fire hazard or fire risk assessment of
materials, products, or assemblies under actual fire conditions.
bility of regulatory requirements prior to use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorp-
tion Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
C634 Terminology Relating to Building and Environmental
Acoustics
D3951 Practice for Commercial J:'a(;Kagn:lg
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
1
1 0.1520/F2154-0 1 R07.
2
the ASTM website.
2.2 ANSI Standard:
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4 Sampling Procedures and Tables for In-
spection by Attributes
3
46 CFR 164.01 2 Code of Federal Regulations--Interior
Finishes for Merchant Vessels
4
~
Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circular (NVIC) 9-97
5
3. Terminology
3.1 For definitions of terms used in this specification, see
Terminology C634.
4.1 Title, number, and date of this specification.
4.2 First article sample, when required (see 7.1).
4.3 Width and length required, if other than 24- by 36-in.
(609.6- by 914.4-mm) board (see 8.1).
4.4 Thickness required (see 8.2).
4.5 Density of waffle board (see lO.l ).
4.6 Conformance inspection reports required (see 11.1).
5.1 See typical construction details located in Supplemen-
tary Requirements Section S3.
6.1 Surface Flame Spread and Smoke Generation Proper-
ties -The sound-absorbing board shall meet the requirements
for surface flame spread and smoke generation properties for
an U.S. Coast Guard Approved Interior Finish in accordance
with 46 CFR 164.012 or NVIC Circular 9-97.
6.2 Facing Separation-When the sound-absorbing board is
cut or sawed, the threads of the fibrous glass cloth facing across
4
www.access.gpo.gov.
Available from Supeiintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA
15250-7954.
1578
0 F2154 - 01 (2007)
which the cut is made shall not be separated from the face over
a distance of more than 3.0 mm (1/s in.). In case the fibrous
glass cloth facing does not cover the entire surface of the
board, the uncovered portion of the board shall not extend
further than 3.175 mm (Vs in.) from any edge. The fibrous glass
cloth facing shall not extend over the edge of the board.
6.3 Sound-Absorption-When tested as specified in 1 0.3,
the sound-absorbing board shall have coefficients of absorption
that are equal to or greater than those shown in Table 1.
7.1 First Article-When specified (see Section 4 ), the con-
tractor shall furnish sample unit(s) for first article inspection
and approval (see 11.1).
8.1 Width and Length-Unless otherwise specified (see
Section 4), the sound-absorbing board shall be furnished in a
width of 609.6 mm (24 in.) and a length of 914.4 mm (36 in.)
(see 11.2).
8.2 Thickness-The sound-absorbing board shall be fur-
nished in thicknesses of 25.4 mm (1 in.) or 50.8 mm (2 in.), as
specified (see Section 4 and 11.2).
8.3 Tolerances-Tolerances on length and width shall not
exceed 6.35 mm (V4 in.). Tolerance on thickness shall not
exceed 2.38 mm (32 in.) -0 mm (0 in.).
9. Sampling
9.1 Inspection Lot-For the purpose of sampling, a lot shall
consist of all boards of the same thickness produced under
essentially the same conditions, and offered for delivery at one
time.
9.2 Sampling for Visual and Dimensionall!.J::amination -A
random sample of board shall be selected from each lot offered
for inspection in accordance with ANSI Zl.4 at Inspection
Level II. No defects shall be allowed.
Board
mm 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
------------------------------------------
25.4 0.07 0.25 0.70 0.90 0.75 0.70
50.8 2 0.25 0.70 0.90 0.85 0.75 0.75
9.3 Conformance Test Sampling-When density and surface
flame spread and smoke generation property tests are required
in accordance with 11.1.2, the samples shall be selected in
accordance with 9.3.1 and 9.3.2.
9.3.1 Sampling for Density Test-Sample boards shall be
selected in accordance with ANSI Z1.4 at Inspection Level S-4
for the density test of 1 0.1. No defects shall be allowed.
9.3.2 Sampling for Suiface Flame Spread and Smoke Gen-
eration Properties-A sufficient number of boards shall be
randomly selected and joined end-to-end to form a specimen
50.8 em (20 in.) wide by 50.8 mm (2 in.) thick by 731.5 em (24
ft) long. The specimen shall be subject to the surface flame
spread and smoke generation property test of 10.2.
10. Test Methods
10.1 Density-The density of the waffle board fibrous glass
layer (see S3.1.2) shall be tested at the location of manufacture
prior to fabrication into final form panels. Density is deter-
mined by dividing sample mass by sample volume. Sample
mass is measured to the nearest 1.0 g and sample volume is
measured to the nearest 1 cm
3
of water displaced by one
standard board as specified (see 9.3.1).
10.2 Suiface Flame Spread and Smoke Generation Proper-
ties -The test specimens (see 9.3.2) shall be tested in
accordance with Test Method E84 (see S5).
10.3 Sound Absorption Coefficients- The sound-absorbing
board shall be laid directly on the floor of a reverberation room
and tested in accordance with Test Method C423.
11. Inspection
11.1 Type approvals for 46 CFR 164.012 include inspection
requirements as part of the specific type approval.
12. Packaging
12.1 Commercial Packaging-Commercial packaging shall
be in accordance with Practice D3951.
13. Keywords
13.1 fibrous glass cloth; perforated fibrous glass cloth;
reverberation room method; sound absorbing; sound absorp-
tion coefficient; sound reduction; surface flame spread and
smoke generation properties; waffle board
(Mandatory Information for U.S. Navy)
This specification is adapted from MIL-A-23054.
1579
d T ~ F2154 - 01 (2007)
C!liiW
Sl. Supplemental Requirements and Exceptions to the
Requirements of This Specification for Ships of the
U.S. Navy
Sl.1 DoD Intended Use-The sound-absorbing board cov-
ered by this specification is intended for reduction of sound in
spaces where there is a high level of noise.
S2.1 Military Specifications:
MIL-I-742 Insulation Board, Thermal, Fibrous Glass
6
MIL-A-3316 Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
6
MIL-C-20079 Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile, Glass; and
Thread, Glass
6
S3.1 Material-The sound-absorbing board shall be a lami-
nate consisting of a perforated fibrous glass cloth facing, a
high-density fibrous glass layer waffle board, and a fibrous
glass backing board. Asbestos fibers and components contain-
ing asbestos fibers are prohibited.
S3.1.1 Backing Board-The backing board shall conform to
type II of MIL-I-7 4 2 unfaced board except that the board shall
be furnished in nominal thickness of 19.05 mm (% in.) or
44.45 mm (1% in.) (see 5.1.2 and 8.2).
S3.1.2 High-Density Fibrous Glass Layer-The fibrous
glass layer shall have a density of not less than 160 kg/m
3
(10
lb/fe) (see 10.1). The layer shall consist of glass fibers
impregnated with a suitable binder and compressed or other-
wise formed into a waffle. The nominal thickness of the
high-density fibrous glass layer shall be 6.35 mm (V4 in.).
S3.1.2.1 Waffle-The waffle shall be constructed having
4.76-mm (3JI6-in.) deep indentations tapering from a nominal
6.0-mm (V4-in.) diameter to a nominal 3.175-mm (1/s-in.)
diameter indentations on a 12.7-mm (1/z-in.) center.
S3.1.3 Fibrous Glass Cloth Facing-The cloth used for
facing the high-density fibrous glass layer shall conform to
Type I, Class 2 of MIL-C-20079. The cloth facing shall be
impregnated with a hardening agent. The cloth facing shall be
perforated with nominal4.76-mm (3/16-in.) diameter holes on a
12.7-mm (1/z-in.) center.
S3.1.3.1 Facing Adhesive-The impregnated fibrous glass
cloth facing shall be compatible with adhesive conforming to
Type II of MIL-A-3316. The adhesive strength requirements
for securing fibrous glass cloth facing to the high-density
fibrous glass layer shall conform to MIL-A-3316.
S3.2 Recycled, Recovered, or Environmentally Preferable
Materials- Recycled, recovered, or environmentally prefer-
able materials should be used to the maximum extent possible
provided that the material meets or exceeds the operational and
maintenance requirements, and promotes economically advan-
tageous life cycle costs.
S3.3 Construction- One side of the high-density fibrous
glass layer shall be adhered to the backing board and the other
side adhered to the fibrous glass cloth facing, using adhesive.
The fibrous glass cloth facing shall be free of wrinkles or other
6
irregularities. The sound-absorbing board shall be so designed
that the perforations in the fibrous glass cloth facing shall be
centered over the indentations in the waffle-type high-density
fibrous glass layer.
S4. Department of Defense Packaging
S4.1 DoD Packaging-For acquisition purposes, the pack-
aging requirements should be as specified in the contract or
order. When actual packaging of material is to be performed by
DoD personnel, these personnel need to contact the responsible
packaging activity to ascertain requisite packaging require-
ments. Packaging requirements are maintained by the Inven-
tory Control Point's packaging activity within the Military
Department or Defense Agency, or within the Military Depart-
ment's System Command. Packaging data retrieval is available
from the managing Military Department's or Defense Agen-
cy's automated packaging files, CD-ROM products, or by
contacting the responsible contracting activity.
S5.1 Surface Flame Spread and Smoke Generation
Properties-The sound-absorbing board shall have a flame
spread index less than 30 and smoke development less than 100
when tested as specified in 1 0.2.
S6. Inspection
S6.1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection require-
ments specified herein are classified as follows: (J) first article
inspection (see 11.1.1), and (2) conformance inspection (see
11.1.2).
S6.1.1 First Article Inspection- The first article inspection
shall consist of the examination and tests shown in Table S6.1.
S6.1.2 Conformance Inspection-Conformance inspection
shall consist of the visual and dimensional examination of
S6.2. The density test of 10.1 shall be tested on each lot of
material. New tests for density (I 0.1) and fire resistance (.I 0.2)
are required whenever the manufacturing methods or compo-
nent materials are changed and reports supplied when re-
quested.
S6.1.3 Examination-Each of the boards selected in accor-
dance with 9.2 shall be examined to verify compliance with the
dimensional requirements of this specification. When measur-
ing length, width, or thickness, any convenient measuring rule
graduated to 1.59 rnm (1/16-in.) shall be used. Any board in the
sample containing one or more defects shall be rejected. If the
sample contains 3% or more of defective boards, the entire lot
represented by the sample shall be rejected. The facing
separation and workmanship examinations shall be included.
1580
TABLE S6.1 First Article Inspection
Inspection
Visual and dimensional examination
Density
Surface flame spread and smoke
generation properties
Sound absorption
Requirement
Paragraph
8.1-8.3
S3.1.2
6.3
Examination and
Test Paragraph
11.2
10.1
6.1
10.3
F2154 - 01 (2007)
S6.1.4 Workmanship-The insulation shall be free of visual
defects that will adversely affect the service quality. For
example, holes or delamination of the facing when occurring to
an excessive degree shall be judged to adversely affect the
service quality of the material.
COPYRIGHT/).
1581
A Designation: F2168- 02 (Reapproved 2008)
14
UII
7
INTERNATIONAL
Packing Material, Graphitic, Corrugated Ribbon or Textured
Tape, and Die-Formed Ring
1
1. Scope
1.1 Scope-This specification covers various types, classes,
and grades of flexible graphite material in which valve media
temperatures are limited to a maximum of 1050F (966C).
Where this specification is invoked as ASTM F2168, Sections
1-18 apply. Where this specification is invoked as ASTM/DoD
F2168, Sections 1-18 and the Supplementary Requirements are
applicable.
standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
C559 Test Method for Bulk Density by Physical Measure-
ments of Manufactured Carbon and Graphite Articles
C561 Test Method for Ash in a Graphite Sample
C816 Test Method for Sulfur in Graphite by Combustion-
lodometric Titration Method
C889 Test Methods for Chemical and Mass Spectrometric
Analysis of Nuclear-Grade Gadolinium Oxide (Gd
2
0
3
)
Powder
D129 Test Method for Sulfur in Petroleum Products (Gen-
eral High Pressure Decomposition Device Method)
0512 Test Methods for Chloride Ion In Water
D 1179 Test Methods for Fluoride Ion in Water
Dl246 Test Method for Bromide Ion in Water
D3178 Test Methods for Carbon and Hydrogen in the
Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke (Withdrawn 2007)
3
03684 Test Method for Total Mercury in Coal by the
Oxygen BombCombustion/ Atomic Absorption Method
1
in 2002. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as F2168- 02. DOl: 10.1520/
F2168-02R08.
2
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Bo,,k of ASTM
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
D376l Test Method for Total Fluorine in Coal by the
Oxygen Bomb Combustion/Ion Selective Electrode
Method
D4239 Test Method for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of
Coal and Coke Using High-Temperature Tube Furnace
Combustion
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 accordion crease, n-because of the method of con-
struction of die-formed rings, an accordion-like linear indica-
tion (crease) may appear singularly or in multiple locations
around the inside and outside diameter surface.
3.1.2 corrosion inhibitors, n-additives to the products to
function in a passive or sacrificial manner to reduce galvanic
corrosion. These additives are typically embedded zinc
powder, phosphorus, or barium molybdate.
3.1.3 corrugated ribbon, n-graphite ribbon or tape that is
subjected to mechanical pressure in a consistent manner to
apply surface indentations to the tape or ribbon.
3.1.4 density, n-the mass per unit volume at a specified
temperature.
3.1.5 detrimental materials, n-abrasive or chemically ac-
tive constituents such as ash particles (in high ash content foils)
or elemental materials that can cause galvanic action or
corrosion in long-term storage or service environments.
3.1.6 die-formed ring, n-a packing ring made by mechani-
cally compacting winds of graphite ribbon or braided packing
in a die or fixture.
3.1.7 lot, n-ail finished packing of one size, type, class, and
grade produced in a continuous run or at the same time under
essentially the same conditions.
3.1.8 set, n-the packing components required to pack one
valve.
3.1.9 size, n-refers to the physical dimensions of the
packing material.
4. Classification
4.1 Classification-The material shall be of the following
types, classes, and grades as specified (see Section 5).
1582
F2168 - 02 (2008)
4.1.1 Type !-Corrugated ribbon or textured tape.
4.1.2 Type If-Die-formed ring.
4.1.3 Class 1-For use where detrimental material content
of the packing need not be controlled beyond normal manu-
facturing limit (commercial grade).
4.1.4 Class 2-For use where detrimental material content
must be controlled to the limits specified herein.
4.1.5 Grade A-Treated with corrosion inhibitor.
4.1.6 Grade B-No corrosion inhibitor.
5.1 Contracts or orders for the units under this specification
shall include the following information:
5.1.1 Title, number, and date of this specification.
5.1.2 Type, class, and grade.
5.1.3 Type of corrosion inhibitor (see 6.1.3 and Supplemen-
tary Requirements).
5.1.4 Specify density of die-formed rings.
5.1.5 Inspection, testing, and certification of the material
should be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier
as part of the purchase contract (see Sections 14 and 16).
5.1.6 When die-formed (Type II) packing rings are desired,
the ring height, inside diameter, outside diameter, number of
cuts, and number of packing rings required per set (see 9.2 and
9.3).
5.1.7 Marking requirements (see Section 17 and Supple-
mentary Requirements).
5.1.8 Packaging requirements (see Section 18 and Supple-
5.1.9 Application data (to include operating pressure, oper-
ating temperature, and media).
5.1.10 Specify thickness of Type I.
6.1 Material-Requirements specified herein apply to Class
1 and Class 2 and Grade A and Grade B packing, except where
noted.
6.1.1 Type I-The packing shall be made entirely of flexible
graphitic material having no binders and meeting the require-
ments of Tables 1 and 2.
6.1.2 Type II-Die-formed packing rings shall be manufac-
tured from flexible graphitic material conforming to the re-
quirements of Tables 1 and 2.
6.1.3 Coating and Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatments:
6.1.3.1 Grade A-Grade A packing shall be provided with a
powdered zinc active corrosion-inhibiting treatment or a pas-
sive inhibiting treatment such as phosphorous or barium
molybdate, as specified (see Section 5). If the use of inhibitors
is required, both passive and active inhibitors shall be permit-
ted to be used.
6.1.3.2 Grade B-Grade B packing shall not contain
corrosion-inhibiting additives.
Density, bulk
Ash
Value
as specified
1 % by mass, max
99 min
Test
13.5
13.3
13.4
1583
TABLE 2 Detrimental Materials (Class 2 Only (See 13.6))
Mercury (Hg)
Sulfur (S)
Element
Total halogens (chlorine, bromine, and
fluorine)
Chlorine (CI)
Bromine (Br)
Fluorine (F)
Maximum Total
Allowable Impurity
Levels in Parts
Million
10
750
500
250
250
250
6.1.4 Mercury Exclusion-During manufacturing,
fabrication, handling, packaging, and packing, the packing
material shall not come in contact with mercury or mercury
containing compounds.
7. Properties
7.1 Chemical and Physical Properties-Unless otherwise
specified, the properties of the finished packing shall conform
to the requirements of Table l. Class 2 also requires compli-
ance with Table 2.
7.2 Prohibited Additions-There shall be no intentional
additions of any of the detrimental materials of Table 2 or
antimony (Sb), arsenic (As), bismuth (Bi), cadmium (Cd),
gallium (Ga), indium (In), lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), silver (Ag),
or tin (Sn) during the manufacturing, fabrication, handling,
packaging, and packing of the product.
8.1 No other requirements noted.
9.1 Type I Ribbon Packing-Unless otherwise specified (see
Section 5), the packing shall be uniformly coiled, spooled, or
reeled in accordance with Table 3.
9.2 Type II Die-Formed Packing-Unless otherwise speci-
fied (see Section 5), the tolerances for Type II packing shall be
in accordance with Table 4. The tolerance applies to finished
rings before any cutting operations.
9.3 Split Rings-The number of cuts (zero, one, or two)
shall be as specified (see Section 5). Cuts shall be made at
approximately a 45 angle such that an overlapping joint is
formed in the compressed state. When two cuts are required
(separating the ring into two parts), the resulting parts shall be
approximately the same dimension. If the number of cuts is not
specified, single-cut rings shall be provided.
TABLE 3 Dimensions for Type I
Width
0.25 0.030 (6 0.075 mm)
0.50 0.030 (12 0.075 mm)
0.75 0.030 (18 0.075 mm)
1.00 0.030 (25 0.075 mm)
25ft (7.62 m)
25ft (7.62 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
min
cO F2168- 02 (2008)
TABLE 4 Tolerances for Type II Packing
to 1 in. (25 mm) o.d.
1 in. (25 mm) and above
o.d.
Inside Diameter
+0.01 0 in. (0.25 mm)
-0.000 in. (0.000 mm)
+0.015 in. (0.38 mm)
-0.000 in. (0.000 mm)
10.1 Workmanship-The packing shall be free from extra-
neous material and visual defects that may affect its
serviceability, as defined in Table 5.
11.1 Quality Systems-Manufacturers shall be prepared to
document use of a quality system such as compliance with an
ISO 9000 series program or similar program.
12.1 Specimen Preparation-Buyer and seller shall agree on
specimen preparation.
13. Test Methods
13.1 Tests-In the event tests are required as part of the
purchasing requirements (see 5.1.5), tests shall be made in
accordance with the following tests or by way of alternate
methods of analysis with equal to or improved accuracy and
precision. The use of an alternate analytical method requires
the prior written consent of the purchasing party before
acceptance will be allowed. Except for the corrosion-inhibiting
treatment exceptions of 13.3 and 13.4, all testing shall be
performed on final product after completion of all processing,
including application of any binders and, if required, corrosion
inhibitors.
13.2 Size-The size shall be determined by measuring each
sample selected for visual examination (see Table 4).
13.3 Ash Content-The ash content shall be determined in
accordance with Test Method C561 (see Table 1 ). For Grade A
packing only, the test shall be conducted before the corrosion-
Outside Diameter
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm)
-0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
+0.000 in. (0.000 mm)
-0.015 in. (0.38 mm)
Thickness
0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
0.030 in. (0.75 mm)
inhibiting treatment or the added mass of the corrosion
inhibitor shall be determined and subtracted from the base
mass of the sample.
13.4 Graphite Purity-The sample shall be dried to a
constant mass at 300 5F (149 3C) before testing. For
Grade A packing only, the test shall be conducted before the
corrosion-inhibiting treatment or the added mass of the corro-
sion inhibitor shall be determined and subtracted from the base
mass of the sample. The percent carbon shall be based upon
mass of the dried sample. This determination shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods 03178 or an alternate method of
analysis with equal or improved accuracy and precision (see
Table I).
13.5 Bulk Density-The bulk density of the Type I and Type
II materials shall be determined in accordance with Test
Method C559.
13.6 Detrimental Material Tests-For determination of the
detrimental materials listed in Table 2 for Class 2 only, the test
methods of Table 6 or alternate methods of equal or improved
accuracy and precision shall be used.
14.1 Inspection and testing of the material should be agreed
purchase contract (see 5. I .5).
15. Rejection
this specification shall be rejected. Rejection shall be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
TABLE 5 Classification of Visual Defects
Item
Type I corrugated ribbon or textured tape
Type II die-formed rings
Void.
Rip or tear in ribbon.
Particulate or extraneous matter on surface that is not easily removed without damaging the packing.
Noncontinuous length (no joints).
Lack of corrugation or textured surface area.
Creasing or crimping.
Holes or voids.
Particulate or extraneous matter on surface that is not easily removed without damaging the packing.
Delaminations (laminated rings).
Gouges (minor ir1dentations less than 0.005 in. in depth resulting from normal production and handling are
acceptable).
Split rings not cut cleanly.
Lack of corrosion inhibitor (Grade A only).
Wrong corrosion inhibitor (Grade A only).
Presence of corrosion inhibitor (Grade 8 only).
Cracking (crevices of no appreciable width associated with folds (accordion creases), ply terminations, or plies of
die molded ribbon packing rings are acceptable.)
1584
cO F2168 - 02 (2008)
Element
Chlorine (CI),
bromine
(Br)
Fluorine (F)
Sulfur (S)
Mercury (Hg)
TABLE 6 Detrimental Materials Tests
Preparation/Analysis Test Methods
(I) pyrohydrolysis (C889)/ion chromatographic analysis
(2) 0129/0512
(3) 01246 (for bromine)
(I) pyrohydrolysis (C889)/selective ion electrode or
ion chromatographic analysis
(2) 0129/01179
(3) 03761 (sample preparation and analysis)
(1) high temperature combustion in 100% oxygen/
nondispersive infrared analysis or ion chromato-
graphic
analysis
(2) C816 (sample preparation and analysis)
(3) 04239 Method 3 (sample preparation and
analysis)
(1) direct analysis of volatile elements (Hg) by
emission spectrographic method
(2) direct analysis of volatile elements by atomic
absorption per 03684
dissatisfaction with the results of testing, the producer shall
make claim for a rehearing or provide for third party testing.
16. Certification
senting each lot have been tested and the requirements have
been met. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
16.2 Detrimental Materials Control-For Class 2 material
only, the vendor shall provide certification that the limits of
Table 2 have been met and that low melting metals (Sb, As, Bi,
Cd, Pb, Sn, Ga, In, Ag, Hg and Zn [Zn for Grade B only]) have
not been added as intentional constituents. In lieu of specific
test results for the lot to be delivered, certifications shall be
based on tests of both raw materials and production lots of
similar finished packing material over an extended time period
(not exceeding three years between tests). Any change to
manufacturing processing that affects product composition,
including changes to raw material, binders, or inhibitors (Grade
A) shall require additional testing to form the basis for future
certifications.
17. Product Marking
17.1 Marking-For commercial shipment, marking shall be
in accordance with accepted industry practices or as required in
the purchase contract (see 5.1.1). Marking shall include type of
corrosion inhibitor, if any.
18. Packaging
be in accordance with Practice D3951 or as required in the
purchase contract (see 5.1.1).
19. Keywords
19.1 flexible graphite material; packing material
contract or order. All of these supplementary requirements, and Sections 1-18, are applicable where
this specification is invoked as ASTM/DoD F2168. This specification is adapted from MIL-P-24503.
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 DoD Intended Use-Packing is intended for general
shipboard service in valves with the exception of potable water.
Grade A packing is intended for use in valves with
noncorrosion-resistant (for example, carbon steel, 400 series
stainless steel) stem and packing gland parts.
S 1.1.1 Type I-Type I packing is in corrugated ribbon or
textured tape form for use where packing gland dimensions are
not uniform or known. Type I packing may be used to
manufacture Type II packing locally.
S 1.1.2 Type II-Because Type II packing is die formed, it is
designed for applications in new equipment or equipment in
which packing gland dimensions are uniform or known and in
excellent mechanical condition. The die-molded ribbon pack-
ing requires only a drop-in, but not loose, clearance with final
gland compression setting the rings for proper operation.
Sl.1.3 Class J-Class 1 is intended for use where detrimen-
tal materials content of the packing need not be controlled
beyond normal manufacturing limits.
1585
S 1.1.4 Class 2-Class 2 is intended for use where detrimen-
tal materials content must be kept to a minimum.
S2. Classification
S2.1 The type and class classifications of this specification
correspond to the type and class classifications of MIL-P-
245034.
S2.2 The Grade B classification of this specification corre-
sponds to the GradeN classification of MIL-P-24503.
S2.3 The Grade A classification of this specification, uszing
zinc powder corrosion inhibitor only, corresponds to the Grade
I classification of MIL-P-24503.
S3.1 Density Requirements:
4
www.access.gpo.gov.
0 F2168 - 02 (2008)
S3.1.1 Type /-Unless otherwise specified (see Section 5),
density of corrugated ribbon/textured tape shall be 65 10
lb/ft
3
(1040 160 kg/m
3
).
S3.1.2 Type //-Unless otherwise specified (see Section 5),
density of finished die-formed rings shall be 90 + 5/-10 lb/ft
3
(1440 + 80/-160 kg/m
3
).
S3.2 Coating and Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatments:
S3.2.1 Grade A-Grade A packing shall be provided with a
powdered zinc active corrosion-inhibiting treatment (2% Zn
by weight, minimum) only.
S3.2.2 Grade B-Grade B packing shall not contain
corrosion-inhibiting additives.
S4. Dimensions and Tolerances
S4.1 Type /-Unless otherwise specified, (see Section 5),
thickness of Type I packing shall be nominal 0.015 in. (0.38
mm).
S5.1 As a minimum, manufacturers shall provide and main-
tain an inspection system that meets the requirements of
ANSI/ASQC Q9003
5

S6. Test Methods
S6.1 Examination for Visual and Dimensional Defects-
Each unit selected for visual and dimensional examination
shall be surface examined and measured to determine confor-
mance with the requirements that do not require tests (see
Section 10, including Table 5, and 13.2, including Table 6).
S6.2 Examination for Preparation for Delivery-Each unit
selected shall be visually examined to determine compliance
with packaging requirements (see Section 5 and 9.1) and
marking requirements (see Section 5 and S.9).
S6.3 Simulated Performance-The test shall be conducted
in an apparatus designed to simulate conditions in valves in
actual service. A schematic of the test rig is shown in S6.1.
The valves used in the simulator shall have glands and stems
that are in as new condition. The entire piping system and
valves shall be insulated so as to minimize heat loss. Thermo-
couples shall be installed so as to indicate the actual steam
5
STEAM FLOW
1200 LB/IWG
VALVE
STOP
VALVE
STOP
temperature. The simulator shall be capable of holding a
temperature of 975 25F (524 14C) and a pressure of
1200 50 lb/in.
2
(84 3.5 kg/cm
2
) for the duration of the test.
The packing shall be installed and the gland initially adjusted
so that no leakage occurs with the system at its operating
temperature and pressure. While pressurized, the valve shall be
fully cycled manually not less than once every half hour (full
close to full open). The following schedule shall be followed
for running the test (test need not be conducted over a weekend
period, if desired):
12 days 1 day at temperature 975 25F (524 14C) and
1200 50 lb/in.
2
(84 3.5 kg/cm
2
) pressure
35 days 5 days at ambient temperature and pressure
(system shut down; valves need not be cycled)
5 days 1 day at temperature 975 25F (524 14C) and
1200 50 lb/in.
2
(84 3.5 kg/cm
2
) pressure
There shall be no steam leakage from the packing gland
during the simulated performance test at a temperature 97 5
25F (524 l4C) and 1200 50 lb/in? (84 3.5 kg/cm
2
)
pressure. There shall also be no corrosion or degradation of the
packing gland at the completion of the test. Any leakage or
gland adjustment shall be recorded. This test is equivalent to
the simulated performance test of MIL-P-24503.
S7. Inspection and Testing
S7 .1 Unless otherwise specified (see Section 5), first-article
testing and quality conformance testing are required. The
inspections and tests making up the first-article and quality
conformance testing are as follows:
S7 .2 Sampling for First-Article Testing-A sample shall be
subjected to the first-article testing of Table S7. L
S7.3 Sampling for Quality Conformance Testing:
S7.3.1 Sampling for Visual and Dimensional
Examination-As a minimum, the contractor shall randomly
select a quantity of sampling units from each lot in accordance
with Table S7 .2 and subject them to the examination for visual
and dimensional defects of S6.1. The sample size depends on
the lot size. If one or more defects are found in any sample, the
entire lot shall be rejected. The contractor has the option of
screening 100 % of the rejected lot for the defected character-
istics or providing a new lot, which shall be inspected in
accordance with the sampling plan herein. The contractor shall
maintain for a period of three years after contract completion,
records of inspections, tests, and any resulting rejections.
2"TEST
VALVE
2"TEST
VALVE
RETURN
LINE
FIG. S6.1 Test Rig
1586
F2168 - 02 (2008)
TABLE S7.1 First-Article and Quality Conformance Tests
First Article
Examination for visual and
dimensional defects (S6.1)
Ash content (13.3)
Graphite purity (1 3.4)
Bulk density (13.5)
Detrimental materials (13.6)
(Class 2 only)
Simulated performance (S6.3)
N/A
Lot Size
2 to 50
51 to 90
91 to 150
151 to 280
281 to 500
501 to 1200
1201 to 3200
3201 to 10 000
10 001 to 35 000
35 001 to 500 000
Conformance
Examination for visual and
dimensional defects (S6.1)
Ash content (13.3)
Graphite purity (13.4)
Bulk density (i 3.5)
Detrimental materials (13.6)
(Class 2 only)
N/A
Examination for preparation for
Size
Lesser of 5 or size of lot
7
11
13
16
19
23
29
35
40
S7.3.2 Sampling for Chemical and Physical Property and
Detrimental Materials Tests-A single random sample shall be
selected from each lot for the testing of 13.3-13.6.
S7.3.3 Sampling for Examination for Preparation for
Delivery-The lot size is the number of shipping containers.
Sampling shall be in accordance with Table S7 .2.
SS. Certification
S8.1 Simulated Peiformance Test-After the simulated per-
formance test is once performed acceptably, providing product
composition or processing has not changed, a certificate of
compliance, citing the test report or document accepting
compliance with the test requirement, may be provided there-
after.
S9. Product Marking
S9.1 Item description marking shall include, as a minimum,
the size, class, grade, and type of inhibitor (if any) of the
graphitic packing material. In addition, the item description
marking shall include the phrase "ASTM!DoD F2168" to
identify the applicability of this specification and any special
marking which shall be required, such as bar coding (see
Section 5).
SlO. Rejection
S 10.1 Known Defects--Materials that fail to conform to the
requirements of this specification shall not be offered for
delivery.
S10.2 Buyer Testing-The buyer reserves the right to per-
form any of the inspections and tests set forth in this document.
Materials that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification shall be rejected. Rejection will be reported to the
producer or suppiier promptiy and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of testing, the producer may
S 10.3 Replacement of Test Specimens-A test specimen
shall be discarded and a replacement specimen selected from
the same lot of material under the following conditions:
S10.3.1 Where the specimen is incorrectly prepared,
S10.3.2 Where the test procedure is incorrect,
S 10.3.3 Where there is a malfunction of the testing
equipment, and
S10.3.4 Where a flaw that is not indicative of an inferior or
defective lot of material develops during the test.
Sl0.4 Retests- Retests are only permitted for ash content,
graphite purity, bulk density, and detrimental material tests.
Retests shall be performed on twice the number of specimens
that were originally nonconforming. Retest specimens shall be
taken in the vicinity of the initial location of a failed specimen.
If any of the retest specimens fail, the lot shall be rejected with
no further retesting permitted.
Sl0.5 Resubmittal of Rejected Lots-A rejected lot shall be
resubmitted for acceptance provided that the rejected lot is
reworked, as necessary, to correct the nonconforming condi-
tion. Reworking shall consist of any procedure required to
correct physical, mechanical, or dimensional deficiencies in
nonconforming material to meet specification requirements
without adversely affecting its other required characteristics.
APPENDIX
Xl. RATIONALE
Xl.l This appendix provides general background informa-
tion for the specification which is an adaptation of the former
MIL-P-24503, "Packing Material, Graphitic, Corrugated Rib-
bon or Textured Tape and Die-Formed Ring." The intent of this
specification is to provide general guidance describing com-
1587
mercial packing requirements in the main body and military
ship requirements in the supplementary requirements section.
Note that Grade A military (ASTM/DoD) packing is restrictive
in terms of the corrosion inhibitor allowed.
cO F2168 - 02 (2008)
COPYRIGHT/).
1588
a Designation: F2191 -02 (Reapproved 2008)
~ II
INTERNATIONAL
Packing Material, Graphitic or Carbon Braided Yarn
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers staple or continuous filament
carbon/graphite yarn valve stem compression packing, suitable
for use as end-rings on packing systems for valves. Intended
services include steam, hydrocarbons, water and non-oxidizing
chemicals. Where this specification is invoked as ASTM
F2191, Sections 1-18 apply. Where this specification is in-
voked as ASTM/DoD F2191, Sections 1-18 and the Supple-
mentary Requirements are applicable.
standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
C 135 Test Method for True Specific Gravity of Refractory
Materials by Water Immersion
C561 Test Method for Ash in a Graphite Sample
C562 Test Method for Moisture in a Graphite Sample
C816 Test Method for Sulfur in Graphite by Combustion-
Iodometric Titration Method
C889 Test Methods for Chemical and Mass Spectrometric
Analysis of Nuclear-Grade Gadolinium Oxide (Gd::P
3
)
Powder
D129 Test Method for Sulfur in Petroleum Products (Gen-
eral High Pressure Decomposition Device Method)
D512 Test Methods for Chloride Ion In Water
D 1179 Test Methods for Fluoride Ion in Water
01246 Test Method for Bromide Ion in Water
1
F2191-02R08.
2
the ASTM website.
03178 Test Methods for Carbon and Hydrogen in the
Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke (Withdrawn 2007)
3
03684 Test Method for Total Mercury in Coal by the
Oxygen BombCombustioPJAtomic Absorption Method
03761 Test Method for Total Fluorine in Coal by the
Oxygen Bomb Combustion/Ion Selective Electrode
Method
D4239 Test Method for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of
Coal and Coke Using High-Temperature Tube Furnace
Combustion
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
4
MIL-P-24583 Packing Material, Graphitic or Carbon
Braided Yarn
4
MIL-P-24503 Packing Material, Graphitic, Cmrugated Rib-
bon or Textured Tape and Preformed Ring
4
2.3 Fluid Sealing Association Handbook:
Guidelines for the Use of Compression Packings, Copyright
1997
5
3. Terminology
3.1 base fiber density-bulk density of the base fiber before
being coated or impregnated and braided into packing; ex-
pressed as lb/ft
3
.
3.2 braided flexible graphite-a braid constructed of con-
tinuous strands or strips of expanded flexible graphite tape or
ribbons which may have been overwrapped or have imbedded
reinforcing fibers.
3.3 carbon fibers-fibers used in braided packing are pro-
duced from viscose rayon, pitch, or polyacrylonitrile (PAN)
and are defined as a yarn with a carbon assay of less than 99 %.
3.4 carbon yarns-manufactured from continuous or staple
carbon fibers that are twisted or plied into continuous indi-
vidual strands of between 6 and 18 11m in diameter.
3
www.astm.org.
4
5
Available from the Fluid Sealing Association, 994 Old Eagle School Road,
Suite 1019, Wayne, PA 19087-1866.
1589
F2191 - 02 (2008)
3.5 carbon/graphite .fibers-carbon/graphite fibers used in
braided packing are produced from viscose rayon, pitch, or
polyacrylonitrile (PAN).
3.6 center or corner filler strands-strands of fiber/yam that
run parallel to the longitudinal axis of the braid in the comers
or center to control the internal density and dimensional
stability of the braid.
3.7 continuous-individual fibers are almost infinite in
length.
3.8 continuous or staple carbon/graphite-continuous or
staple defines the length of the individual fibers in the
carbonaceous yarn. Continuous means the fibers are infinite in
length and staple means the individual fibers are at least 75 mm
(3 in.) long and preferably 150 to 200 mm (6 to 8 in.) long. All
of the fibers are between 6 to 18 !liD in diameter and are
twisted/plied into continuous strands called yarns.
3.9 corrosion inhibitors-additives to the yarn or braid to
function in a passive or sacrificial manner to reduce galvanic
corrosion such as embedded zinc powder, phosphorus, or
barium molybdate.
3.10 detrimental materials-abrasive or chemically active
constituents such as abrasive ash particles (in high ash content
foils) or elemental materials as in Table 2.
3.11 diagonal interlocking braid-these strands criss-cross
from the surface of the braid diagonally through the body of the
braid and each strand is strongly locked by other strands to
form an integral structure (see Fig. 1).
3.12 dispersion-various coatings or impregnants added to
the base fibers or braid to facilitate handling, lubricate the
fibers, accelerate break-in, or act as blocking agents during use.
3.13 graphite fibers-fibers used in braided packing are
produced from viscose rayon, pitch, or polyacrylonitrile (PAN)
and are defined as a yam with a carbon assay of 99 % or higher.
3.14 graphite yarns-manufactured from continuous or
staple graphite fibers that are twisted or plied into continuous
individual strands between 6 to 18 !liD in diameter.
3.15 lot-all finished packing of one size, type, class, and
grade produced in a continuous run or at the same time and
under essentially the same conditions.
3.16 PAN-polyacrylonitrile fibers used as precursors to
manufacture carbon/graphite for braided packing.
3.17 PTFE-polytetraftuoroethylene. (Warning-Graphitic
valve packing containing PTFE has been associated with
accelerated valve stem corrosion.)
TABLE 1 Chemical and Physical Properties
Carbon Assay
Graphitic
Carbon
Ash
Finished Packing (in as-
supplied state):
Specific gravity
Moisture content
Value
99 % by mass, min.
95 % by mass, min.
1 % by mass, max.
1 .38 glee, min.
3%, max.
25 min.
Test
!3.4
!3.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.10
TABLE 2 Detrimental Materials (Class 2 only (see 13.8))
Element
(chlorine, bromine, and fluorine)
Maximum Allowable
Total
Impurity Levels in
parts million
10
750
500
250
250
250
3.18 specific gravity-the ratio of the mass of a unit volume
of a material at a stated temperature to the mass of the same
volume of distilled water at the Sfuue temperature.
3.19 square plait braid-the strands in this type of braid
interlock in a single plane and do not interlock through the
body of the braid (see 1).
3.20 staple carbon/graphite-individual fibers are at least
75 mm (3 in.) long and preferably 150 to 200 mm (6 to 8 in.)
long.
3.21 unraveling-a loss of the original braiding shape or
dimensions of the cut end extending from the cut for a distance
greater than that specified along the axis of the packing.
4. Classification
4.1 Classification-The material shall be of the following
types, classes, and grades, as specified (see 5.1):
4.1.1 Type !-Continuous carbon or graphite yarn.
4.1.2 Type l/-Staple carbon or graphite yarn.
4.1.3 Type III-Braided flexible graphite.
4.1.3.1 Class 1-For use where detrimental material and
lubricant content of the packing need not be controlled beyond
normal manufacturing limits.
4.1.3.2 Class 2-For use where detrimental materials con-
tent must be controlled to limits specified herein.
4.1.3.3 Class 3-For use where detrimental materials con-
tent need not be controlled beyond normal manufacturing
limits, and media temperatures do not exceed 500F (260C).
( 1) Grade A-Treated with corrosion inhibitor.
(2) Grade B-No corrosion inhibitor.
5.1.2 Type, Class and Grade required (see Section 4).
5.1.3 Carbon or graphite.
5.1.4 Type of corrosion inhibitor.
5.1.5 Chemical properties (see 7.1).
1590
5.1.6 Inspection, testing, and certification of the materia]
shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier as
part of the purchase contract.
5.1.7 Size required (see When pre-cut rings are de-
sired, specify the braid cross-section, inside diameter, outside
diameter, and number of rings required.
5.1.8 Put-up, if other than required by Table S4.1 (see
Supplementary Requirements).
0 F2191 - 02 (2008)
C<m:rsnnd Cenkr Stnmd
Comer Strand (4 Positions)
(4 Paitims) (1 Pceition)
Center Strand ( l Position)
36 Cw:rier Pattern Shown (32 Pattem is Similar)
Stuffer Wrap Strand (up to 8
Positions)
20 Cattier Patrem Shown (12, 18, and 24 Carrier Patrems are Similar)
Diagonal Interlocking Through-Body-to-Surface Construction (Sizes
1
A in. (6 rmn) and Over)
Key
Braider Tracks
Comer Strand ( 4 Positions)
8 Carrier Sq.Jare (Plait)
Pattern (Patrems of8 to 20
Carriers Exist)
Braid Over Braid {Round Braid)
16 Carrier (Maypole) Pattem (Patrems
with 4 to 96 Cruriers Exist)
8 Carrier or Sq.Jare (Plait)
BraidPatrem
Interlocking and Square Plait Versus Patterns
FIG. 1 Packing Construction
5.1.9 Application data.
5 .1.1 0 Packaging requirements (see Section 18 and Supple-
5.1.11 Marking requirements (see 17.1 and Supplementary
Requirements).
6.1 Materials and Manufacture-The material shall be as
specified in 6.1.1-6.1.5.
6.1.1 Yarn:
6.1.1.1 Type I packing shall be made of continuous filament
carbon or graphite yarn.
6.1.1.2 Type II shall be made of staple carbon or graphite
yam.
6.1.1.3 Type III shall be made of flexible graphite.
6.1.2 Packing:
6.1.2.1 Class 1 packing shall be made of I or Type II
yarn and shall have a pure graphitic dispersion or carbon
dispersion.
1591
6.1.2.2 Class 2 packing shall be made of Type I yarn and
shall have a pure graphite or carbon dispersion.
6.1.2.3 Class 3 packing shall be made of Type I or Type II
yarn and shall have a pure graphite, or carbon dispersion and
may be coated with polytetrafiuoroethylene (PTFE) (see 7.2
and 13.9).
6.1.3 Coating and Corrosion Inhibiting Treatments:
6.1.3.1 Grade A-Grade A packing shall be provided with a
powdered zinc (Zn) active corrosion inhibiting treatment or a
passive inhibiting treatment such as phosphorus or barium
molybdate. If required, both active and passive inhibitors shall
be used.
6.1.3.2 Grade B-Grade B packing shall not contain corro-
sion inhibiting additives.
6.1.4 Packing Construction (Type I and Type //)-Packing
shall be square (plait) braided for cross-sectional sizes smaller
than 6 mm (1/4 in.). Cross-sectional sizes of 6 mm (Y4 in.) or
greater shall use a diagonal interlocking type construction. The
diagonal interlocking constructions shall consist of either
cO F2191 - 02 (2008)
single or plied yarns braided on 12, 18, 20, 24, 32, or 36 carrier
braiding machines. Additional axial center, corner, and (stuffer)
warp yarn(s) can be added within the braid as necessary to
produce a dense square cross-section packing profile with good
dimensional stability.
6.1.5 Mercury Exclusion-During manufacturing, fabrica-
tion, handling, packaging, and packing, the packing material
shall not come in contact with mercury or mercury containing
compounds.
7. Properties
7.1 Chemical and Physical Properties-Unless otherwise
specified, the properties of the finished packing shall conform
to the requirements of Table 1. Class 2 also requires compli-
ance with Table 2.
7.2 PTFE Coating (Class 3 only )-If PTFE is used, it shall
not exceed 10% by mass of the packing (see J 3.9) unless
otherwise agreed to by the purchaser. (Warning-Graphitic
valve packing containing PTFE has been associated with
accelerated valve stem corrosion.)
7. 3 Prohibited Additions-There shall be no intentional
additions of any of the detrimental materials listed in Table 2 or
any antimony (Sb), arsenic (As), bismuth (Bi), cadmium (Cd),
gallium (Ga), indium (In), lead (Ph), mercury (Hg), silver (Ag),
or tin (Sn), or, in the case of Grade B packing, zinc (Zn).
8.1 Braid Geometry Retention-Untaped, cut ends shall not
unravel more than 3 mm (1/s in.) with the packing dry or wet
(see 13.11 ). For example, packing 12 mm (1/z-in.) in cross
section shall not unravel more than 3 mm (1/s in.) at either end
of the packing.
9.1 Sizes and Mass-Packing shall be furnished in the sizes
shown in Table 3, or other size(s) as is ordered by the customer,
(see Section 5 and 6.1.4 ). Packing shall be formed approxi-
mately square or rectangular in cross-section (either when
straight or when placed about a shaft) within the dimensional
tolerances of Table 3. When specified in the purchase docu-
ment (see 5.1 and 13.2), the mass per linear foot (or other
measure) shall be in accordance with the sizes listed in Table 4.
Sizes not listed in Table 4 shall be as agreed between purchaser
and manufacturer and specified in Section 5, Ordering Infor-
mation. Minimum mass per linear foot should be included as a
part of the bid and purchase documents.
9.1.1 Tolerance and Measurement Standards-The gener-
ally accepted method of measurements in the packing manu-
facturing environment is a hand held, direct reading, vernier
caliper. To ensure concentricity, the inside diameter is mea-
TABLE 3 Manufacturing Tolerances by Cross-Sectional Size
Cross Section Sl Cross Section IP
Tolerance Tolerance
Sl IP
Up to 6 mm Up to% in. 0.4 mm
1
/64 in.
6 to 25 mm, incl 1f4 to 1 in., incl 0.8 mm %2 in.
greater than 25 mm greater than 1 in. 1.6 mm
1
/16 in.
sured using a ground dimensional plug gauge and the outside
diameter is measured by the above (caliper) while the plug is
inserted. Information regarding tolerance and measurement is
available in the Guidelines for the Use of Compression
Packings published by the FSA.
10.1 Workmanship-The packing shall be free of defects
that have the potential to affect its serviceability as defined in
Table 5.
10.2 Construction-The sample shall be visually examined
and confirmed to be of the correct braid construction (square
plait braid or diagonal interlocking braid) for the ordered size
(see 5.1 and 6.1.4).
11.1 Quality Systems-Manufacturers shall be prepared to
document use of a quality system such as compliance with an
ISO 9000 series program or similar program.
12.1 Specimen Preparation-Buyer and seller shall agree on
specimen preparation.
13. Test Methods
13.1 Tests-In the event that tests are required as part of the
purchasing requirements 5.1, tests shall be made in accordance
with the following tests or by way of alternate methods of
analysis with equal to or improved accuracy and precision. The
use of an alternate analytical method requires the prior written
consent of the purchasing party before acceptance will be
allowed.
13.2 Size-Before unbraiding, the size shall be determined
by measuring each sample selected for visual examination (see
Table 3). A steel rule with 1 mm (1/32 in.) divisions accurate to
1 mm ( 1/32 in.) or a steel slide caliper with 1 mm (1/32 in.) and
0.5 mm (1/64 in.) divisions shall be used (see 9.1).
13.3 Mass-The mass shall be determined using a specimen
at least 609.6 mm (2 ft) in length for measurement in
conjunction with the values of Table 4.
1592
13.4 Carbon Assay-The sample shall be dried to a constant
mass at 149 3C (300 5F) before testing. For Grade A
packing only, the test shall be conducted prior to the corrosion
mass of the sample. The percent carbon shall be based upon
mass of the dried sample. This determination shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods D3178 or an alternate method of
analysis with equal or improved accuracy and precision (see
'ntble 1).
13.5 Ash Content-The ash content shall be determined in
accordance with Test Method C561 (see Table 1). For Grade A
packing only, the test shall be conducted prior to the corrosion
mass of the sample.
F2191 - 02 {2008)
TABLE 4 Sizes and Mass of Packing
Nominal Size Nominal Size
(mm) (in.)
3 1fs
3.8 5/32
4.5
3
/16
5.3
7
/32
6 1/4
6.8
9
/32
7.6
5
/16
8.4 1%2
9 3/s
9.6 13f32
10.2
7
/16
10.8 15/32
12 1/2
12.8 17/32
13.6
9
/16
14.2 19/32
15 5/e
16.5
1
V15
18 3/4
19.5 13/16
21 7/s
22.5 15/16
24
30 1%
TABLE 5 Classification of Visual Defects
Areas of loose weave in braid
Frayed braid surface
Clumps of yarn fibers protruding from surface
Types I and II
Minimum Mass
(gllinear meter)
6.7
10.4
13.4
19.4
25.3
31.3
38.7
47.7
56.6
65.5
77.5
87.9
99.8
113.2
126.6
141.5
156.4
189.2
226.4
265.2
306.8
353.0
402.2
627.1
Yarn knots excessively sized or extending beyond the braid surface
Uneven or irregular stitch pattern
Particulate or extraneous matter on surface
Lack of corrosion inhibitor (Grade A only)
13.6 Specific Gravity-This determination shall be made in
accordance with Test Method C135, modified as follows:
(Alternative methods of analysis with equal or improved
accuracy and precision (see Table 1) can be used upon receipt
of prior written consent and approval by the purchaser.)
13.6.1 Preparation for Test Method Cl35-A 50 g (1.7637
oz) sample shall be prepared for grinding by unbraiding,
cutting, or otherwise reducing the braided packing to pieces not
larger than 3 mm (1/s in.).
NoTE 1-Test Method C] 35 uses a water pycnometer test method. Test
procedures using a gas pycnometer-based analytical method shall forego
the need to reduce of the sample to its fiber state.
Types I and II
Minimum Mass
(!bilinear ft)
.0045
.007
.009
.013
.017
.021
.026
.032
.038
.044
.052
.059
.067
.076
.085
.095
.105
.127
.152
.178
.206
.237
.270
.421
Type Ill
Minimum Mass
(g/linear m)
10.4
16.4
25.3
34.3
44.7
55.1
64.0
76.0
90.9
107.2
119.2
148.9
165.3
184.7
195.1
250.2
238.3
311.3
312.8
537.7
558.6
616.6
506.4
996.5
Type Ill
Minimum Mass
(!bilinear ft)
.007
.011
.017
.023
.030
.037
.043
.051
.061
.072
.080
.100
.111
.124
.131
.i68
.160
.209
.210
.361
.375
.414
.340
.669
13.7 Moisture Content-The moisture content shall be de-
termined in accordance with Test Method C562 (see Table 1).
13.8 Detrimental Materials Tests-For determination of the
detrimental materials listed in Table 2 for Class 2 only, the test
methods of Table 6 or alternate methods of equal or improved
accuracy and precision shall be used.
13.9 Analysis for PTFE Coating (Class 3 only)-A5 g
specimen of packing shall be placed in a crucible and heated at
104 1 oc (220 2F) to constant mass (original dry mass)
at room temperature. Then the specimen shall be heated at 316
5.5C (600 10F) for 24 h, cooled, and the mass
determined. The same specimen shall then be heated at 482 +
14 - 0C (900 + 25 - 0F) for 3 h, cooled, and the mass
determined. After the 482C (900F) heating, the crucible mass
shall be redetermined without the specimen unless a platinum
crucible was used. The new mass of the crucible shall be used
to determine the mass of the residue after heating. Heating
shall be done in a ventilated hood to avoid exposure to toxic
vapors. The percentage of PTFE shall be calculated as follows,
based on an average of three determinations (see 7.2).
TABLE 6 Detrimental Material Tests
Chlorine (CI),
Bromine (Br)
Fluorine (F)
Sulfur (S)
Mercury (Hg)
Element Preparation/Analysis Test Methods
( 1) Pyrohydrolysis (ASTM C889)/lon Chromatographic Analysis
(2) ASTM D 129/ ASTM D512
(3) ASTM Di246 (for Bromine)
( 1) Pyrohydrolysis (ASTM C889)/ Selective I on Electrode or lon Chromatographic Analysis
(2) ASTM D129/ASTM D1179
(3) ASTM D3761 (sample preparation and analysis)
(1) High temperature combustion in 100% Oxygen/Non-Dispersive Infrared Analysis or lon Chromato-
graphic Analysis
(2) ASTM C8i6 (sample preparation and analysis)
(3) ASTM D4239 Method #3 (sample preparation and analysis)
( 1) Direct analysis of volatile elements (Hg) by Emission Spectrographic Method
(2) Direct analysis of volatile elements by Atomic Absorption per ASTM D3684
1593
0 F2191 - 02 (2008)
where:
w
F
N
lOO(F- N)
Percent PTFE = W
average original dry mass of specimens after extraction,
average mass of residue in crucibles after heating at
316C (600F), and
average mass of residue in crucibles after heating at
482C (900F).
13.10 Compression Recovery-Three specimens, each 44
3 mm (1.750 0.125 in.) long, shall be prepared from the
sample and the results of the following test of each specimen
averaged for comparison with the compression recovery limit
of Table I.
13.10.1 Center the specimen on a flat plate which is larger
than the specimen and has its upper surface perpendicular
(2) to the load to be applied. Place a flat plate of similar size
on top of the specimen so that its lower surface is parallel
( 2) to the upper surface of the bottom plate. The upper plate
shall weigh 2.27 0.45 kg (5 1 lb). Both plates shall be
rigid and maintained parallel during the testing. After the
weight of the upper plate has been applied to the specimen for
at least 15 s, measure and record the thickness (P) of the
preloaded specimen. Several measurements about the circum-
ference of the test plate shall be taken and averaged for this,
and subsequent, measurements.
13.10.2 Apply the major load, by either the top or bottom
plate, along an axis passing through the center of the specimen
in a slow, uniform manner so that the major load is attained
within 20 5 s. The major load is that load which will produce
a stress of 316.4 kg/cm
2
:::!.:. 10 % ( 4500 lbs/in.
2
10 %) on the
area of the specimen initially in contact with the lower test
plate.
13.10.3 Maintain the major load for at least 60 s and
measure and record the thickness (M) of the fully loaded
specimen.
13.10.4 Immediately remove the major load and after about
60 s measure and record the recovered thickness ( R) under the
original preload.
13.10.5 Calculate the percent compression recovery (PCR)
as follows:
PCR
(R -M)
(P _ M) X 100
13.11 Braid Geometry Retention-Cut a 50 1.5 mm (2
V16 in.) length packing (the ends shall not be taped prior to or
after cutting). Soak the test piece in room temperature water for
15 min, minimum. The packing shall not unravel at the ends
more than 3 mm (Vs in.) at either end (see 8.1 ).
14.1 Inspection and testing of the material shall be agreed
purchase contract (see 5.1).
15. Rejection
this specification shall be rejected. Rejection shall be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
16. Certification
senting each lot have been tested and the requirements have
been met. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
16.2 Detrimental Materials Control-For Class 2 material
only, the vendor shall provide certification that the limits of
Table 2 have been met and that low melting metals (anitmoney
(Sb), aresenic (As), bismuth (Bi), cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), tin
(Sn), gallium (Ga), indium (In), silver (Ag), mercury (Hg) and
zinc (Zn) [zinc for Grade B only]) have not been added as
intentional constituents. Instead of specific test results for the
lot to be delivered, certifications shall be based on tests of both
raw materials and production lots of similar finished packing
material over an extended time period (not exceeding three
years between tests). Any change to manufacturing processing
which affects product composition, including changes to raw
material, binders, or inhibitors (Grade A) shall require addi-
tional testing to form the basis for future certifications.
17. Product Marking
17.1 Marking-For commercial shipment, marking shall be
in accordance with accepted industry practices or as required in
the purchase contract (see 5.1). Marking shall include type of
corrosion inhibitor, if any.
18. Packaging
be in accordance with Practice D3951 or as required in the
purchase contract (see 5.1 ).
1594
F2191 - 02 (2008)
contract or order. All of these Supplementary Requirements and Sections 1-18 are applicable where
this specification is invoked as ASTM/DoD F2191. This specification is adapted from MIL-P-24583.
Sl. DoD Intended Use
S 1.1 Type I packings are intended for general shipboard
service as anti .. extrusion end-rings to be used in conjunction
with corrugated ribbon or preformed ring packing
material in valves. Grade A packing is intended for use in
valves with non-corrosion resistant (for example, carbon steel,
400 series stainless steel) stem and packing gland parts.
S2. Classification
S2.1 The Type (I and II) and Class classifications of this
specification correspond to the Type and Class classifications
of MIL-P-24583.
S2.2 The Grade B classification of this specification corre-
sponds to the GradeN classification of MIL-P-24583.
S2.3 The Grade A classification of this specification, utiliz-
ing zinc powder corrosion inhibitor only, corresponds to the
Grade I classification of MIL-P-24583.
S3.1 Coating and Corrosion Inhibiting Treatments:
S3.1.1 Grade A-Grade A packing shall be provided with a
powdered zinc (Zn) active corrosion inhibiting treatment only
(2 % zinc, by weight, minimum).
S3.1.2 Grade B-Grade B packing shall not contain corro-
sion inhibiting additives.
S4. Dimensions and Tolerances
S4.1 Put-Up-Unless otherwise specified (see Section 5),
packing shall be uniformly coiled on spools or reels of the size
specified (see Section 5) in accordance with Table S4. l. No
more than three segments of packing shall be provided on the
smallest spool or reel.
S5.1 As a minimum, manufacturers shall provide and main-
tain an inspection system that meets the requirements of
ANSI/ASQC Q9003.
Packing
mm
Packing Size,
in.
TABLE S4.1
S6. Test Methods
S6.1 Examination for Visual and Dimensional Defects-
Units shall be examined for visual and dimensional defects as
follows:
S6.1.1 Size-The size of each unit selected shall be mea-
sured for conformance with the requirements of Section 9,
including Table 3, and 13.2.
S6.1.2 Visual Examination- Each unit selected shall be
visually examined to determine conformance with the require-
ments of 10.1, including Table 5.
S6.1.3 Construction- Each unit selected shall be visually
examined to determine conformance with the requirements of
10.2.
S6.2 Examination for Preparation for Delivery-Each unit
selected shall be visually examined to determine compliance
with packaging requirements (see Sections 5 and 18) and
marking requirements (see Sections 5 and 9).
S6.3 Simulated Peiformance-The test shall be conducted
in an apparatus designed to simulate conditions in valves in
actual service. A schematic of the test rig is shown in S6.l.
The valves used in the simulator shall have glands and stems
that are in new condition. The entire piping system and valves
shall be insulated so as to minimize heat loss. Thermocouples
shall be installed so as to indicate the actual steam temperature.
The simulator shall be capable of holding a temperature of 524
:: l4C (975 :: 25F) and a pressure of 84 :: 3.5 kg/cm
2
(1200
:: 50 lb/in?) for the duration of the test. The packing shall be
installed and the gland initially adjusted so that no leakage
occurs with the system at its operating temperature and
pressure. The valve shall be fully cycled manually not less than
once every half-hour (full close to full open). The following
schedule shall be followed for running the test (test need not be
conducted over a weekend period, if desired):
12 1 days at temperature 524 14C (975 25F) and
84 3.5 kg/cm
2
(1200 50 lbs/in.
2
) pressure
35 5 days at ambient temperature and pressure
(system shut down; valves need not be cycled)
5 1 days at 524 14C ( 975 25F) and 84 3.5 kg/cm
2
(1200 50 lb/in.
2
) pressure
Package, Package,
2.4 through 8.7
9.5 through 15.1
15.9
17.5
19.0
%2 through
1
Vs2
3fs through 1%2
%
11
116
%
0.45, 0.9 or 1.35 kg spools
0.9, 1.35, or 2.28 kg spools
1.35, 2.28, 4.54 or 11.4 kg reels
1.35, 2.28, 4.54 or 11.4 kg reels
2.28, 4.54 or 11.4 kg reels
1 , 2, or 3 lb spools
2, 3, or 5 lb spools
3, 5, 1 0, or 25 lb reels
3, 5, 10, or 25 lb reels
5, 10, or 25 lb reels
20.6
22.2
23.8
25.4
31.8
13
/16
?fa
15
/16
1
1%
2.28, 4.54 or 11.4 kg reels
2.28, 4.54, 11.4 or 22.7 kg reels
2.28, 4.54, 11.4 or 22.7 kg reels
4.54, 11 .4 or 22.7 kg reels
4.54, 11.4 or 22.7 kg reels
1595
5, i 0, 25, or 50 lb reels
5, 1 0, 25, or 50 lb reels
1 0, 25, or 50 lb reels
F2191 - 02 {2008)
STEAM FLOW
1200 LB/IN
2
G
VALVE
STOP
VALVE
STOP
2"TEST
VALVE
2"TEST
VALVE
RETURN
LINE
FIG. S6.1 Test Rig
There shall be no steam leakage from the packing gland
during the simulated performance test at a temperature of 524
:::!:: l4C (975 :::!:: 25F) and a pressure of 84:::!:: 3.5 kg/cm
2
(1200
:::!:: 50 lb/in.
2
). There shall also be no corrosion or degradation
of the packing gland at the completion of the test. Any leakage
or gland adjustment shall be recorded. This test is equivalent to
the simulated performance test of MIL-P-24503MIL-P-24503.
S7. Inspection and Testing
S7.1 Unless otherwise specified (see Section 5), first article
testing and quality conformance testing are required. The
inspections and tests making up the first article and quality
conformance testing are as follows:
S7 .2 First Article Tests-First article testing shall consist of
the examinations and tests of Table S7 .1.
S7 .3 Quality Conformance Tests-Quality conformance
testing shall be in accordance with Table S7 .1.
S7.4 Sampling:
S7 .4.1 Sampling for Visual and Dimensional Examination
(S6.1)-As a minimum, the contractor shall randomly select a
quantity of sampling units from each lot of graphitic or carbon
braided yarn packing material in accordance with Table S7.2
and subject them to the examinations for visual and dimen-
sional defects of S6.1. The sample size depends on the lot size.
TABLE S7.1 First Article and Quality Conformance Tests
First Quality
Requirements Article Conformance
Tests Tests
Examination for visual and 9, 10, 13.2 S6.1 S6.1
dimensional defects
Mass 9.1 13.3 13.3
Carbon assay Table i 13.4 13.4
Ash Table 1 13.5 13.5
Specific gravity Table 1 13.6 13.6
Moisture content Table 1 13.7 13.7
Detrimental materials (Class 2 only) Table 1 13.8 13.8
PTFE coating 7.2 13.9 13.9
Compression recovery Table 1 13.10 13.10
Braid geometry retention 8.1 13.11 13.11
Simulated performance S6.3 N/A
Examination for preparation for N/A S6.2
delivery
TABLE S7.2 Sampling
lot Size
2 to 50
51 to 90
91 to 150
151 to 280
281 to 500
501 to 1200
1201 to 3200
3201 to 10 000
10 001 to 35 ooo
35 001 to 500 000 (and above)
Size
Lesser of 5 or size of lot
7
11
13
16
19
23
29
35
40
If one or more defects are found in any sample, the entire lot
shall be rejected. The contractor has the option of screening
100 % of the rejected lot for the defected characteristics or
providing a new lot, which shall be selected in accordance with
the sampling plan herein. The contractor shall maintain for a
period of three years after contract completion, records of
inspections, tests, and any resulting rejections.
S7 .4.2 Sampling for Chemical and Physical Property and
Detrimental Material Tests-A single random sample shall be
selected from each lot for the testing of 13.3-13.11.
S7 .4.3 Sampling for Examination for Preparation for De-
livery (S6.2)-The lot size shall be the number of shipping
containers . Sampling shall be in accordance with Table S7.2.
S7.4.4 Sampling for Simulated Performance Test (S6.3)-A
sample of sufficient size shall be selected for the simulated
performance test.
S8. Certification
1596
S8.1 Simulated Performance Test-After the simulated per-
formance test is once performed acceptably, providing product
composition and processing has not been changed, a certificate
of compliance, citing the test report or document accepting
compliance with the test requirement, shall be provided there-
after.
S9. Product Marking
S9.1 Minimum Product Marking-Item description marking
shall include, as a minimum, the size, type, class, grade and
type of inhibitor (if any) of the packing material. In addition,
0 F2191 - 02 (2008)
the item description marking shall include the phrase "ASTM/
DoD F2191" to identify the applicability of this specification
and any special marking which may be required, such as bar
coding (see Section 5). Marking for DoD procurements shall
be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
S9.2 Spool/Reel Marking-If packing is to be provided on
spools or reels, the required information of S9.1, and the
National Stock Number and contract number, shall be marked
on the spool or reel.
SlO. Rejection
S10.1 Known Defects-Materials that fail to conform to the
requirements of this specification shall not be offered for
delivery.
S 10.2 Buyer Testing-The buyer reserves the right to per-
form any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specifi-
cation. Materials that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification shall be rejected. Rejection will be reported to the
producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
S10.3 Replacement of Test Specimens-A test specimen
shall be discarded and a replacement specimen selected from
the same lot of material under the following conditions:
S 1 0.3.1 Where the specimen is incorrectly prepared.
S10.3.2 Where the test procedure is incorrect.
S10.3.3 Where there is a malfunction of the testing equip-
ment.
S10.3.4 Where a flaw that is not indicative of an inferior or
defective lot of material develops during the test.
S 10.4 Retests- Retests are only permitted for ash content,
graphite purity, bulk density and detrimental material tests.
Retests shall be performed on twice the number of specimens
that were originally nonconforming. Retest specimens shall be
taken in the vicinity of the initial location of a failed specimen.
If any of the retest specimens fail, the lot shall be rejected with
no further retesting permitted.
S 10.5 Resubmittal of Rejected Lots-A rejected lot can be
resubmitted for acceptance provided that the rejected lot is
reworked, as necessary, to correct the nonconforming condi-
tion. Reworking shall consist of any procedure required to
correct physical, mechanical or dimensional deficiencies in
nonconforming material to meet specification requirements
without adversely affecting its other required characteristics.
APPENDIX
Xl. RATIONALE (COMMENTARY)
This appendix provides general background information for
this specification, which is an adaptation of the former MIL-
P-24583, "Packing Material, Graphitic or Carbon Yam." The
intent of this specification is to provide general guidance
describing commercial packing requirements in the main body
and military ship requirements in the supplementary require-
ments section. It is noted that some Grade A military ASTM/
DoD packings are restrictive in terms of the corrosion
inhibitors.
COPYRIGHT/).
1597
a Designation: F2192- 05 {Reapproved 2011)
.......
Determining and Reporting the Berthing Energy and
Reaction of Marine Fenders
1
INTRODUCTION
A marine fender is an energy-absorbing device that is typically secured against the face of a marine
facility or a ship's hull for the purpose of attenuating the forces inherent in arresting the motion of
berthing vessels safely. Most modern fenders fall into three general classifications based on the
material used to absorb energy: (1) solid rubber fenders in which the material absorbs the energy, (2)
pneumatic (air-filled) fenders in which air absorbs the energy, and (3) foam-filled fenders in which the
foam core absorbs the energy.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the recommended procedures
for quantitative testing, reporting, and verifying the energy
absorption and reaction force of marine fenders. Marine
fenders are available in a variety of basic types with several
variations of each type and multiple sizes and stiffnesses for
each variation. Depending on the particular design, marine
fenders may also include integral components of steel, com-
posites, plastics, or other materials. All variations shall be
performance tested and reported according to this test method.
1.2 There are three performance variables: berthing energy,
reaction, and deflection. There are two methods used to
develop rated performance data (RPD) and published perfor-
mance curves for the three performance variables.
1.3 The primary focus is on fenders used in berthside and
ship-to-ship applications for marine vessels. This testing pro-
tocol does not address small tendering "bumpers" used in
pleasure boat marinas, mounted to hulls of work boats, or used
in similar applications; it does not include durability testing. Its
primary purpose is to ensure that engineering data reported in
manufacturers' catalogues are based upon common testing
methods.
standard.
1
10.1520/F2192-05Rll.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3.1 General:
3.1.1 All testing shall define fender performance under
velocities that decrease linearly or that are proportional to the
square root of percent of remaining rated energy.
3.1.2 Rated performance data (RPD) and manufacturers'
published performance curves or tables, or both, shall be based
on: (1) initial deflection (berthing) velocity of 0.15 rn/s and
decreasing to no more than 0.005 m/s at test end, (2) testing of
fully broken-in fenders (break-in testing is not required for
pneumatic fenders), (3) testing of fenders stabilized at 23 :
5C (excluding pneumatic fenders; see 6.3), (4) testing of
fenders at oo angle of approach, and (5) deflection (berthing)
frequency of not less than 1 h (use a minimum 5-min deflection
frequency for pneumatic fenders.).
3.1.3 Catalogues shall also include nominal performance
tolerances as well as data and methodology to adjust perfor-
mance curves or tables or both for application parameters
2
the ASTM website.
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken. PA 19428-2959. United States
1598
F2192- 05 {2011)
different from RPD conditions. Adjustment factors shall be
provided for the following variables: (1) other initial velocities:
0.05, 0.1 0, 0.20, 0.25, and 0.30 m/s; (2) other temperatures:
+50, +40, +30, +10, 0, -10,-20, -30; and (3) other contact
angles: 3, 5, 8, 10, 15. In addition, RPD shall contain a
cautionary statement that published data do not necessarily
apply to constant-load and cyclic-loading conditions. In such
cases, designers are to contact fender manufacturers for design
assistance.
3.1.4 Adjustment factors for velocity and temperature shall
be provided for every catalogue compound or other energy
absorbing material offered by each manufacturer.
3.2 Fender Testing-Performance testing to establish RPD
must use either one of two methods:
3.2.1 Method A-Deflection of full-size fenders at velocities
inversely proportional to the percent of rated deflection or
directly proportional to the square root of percent of remaining
rated energy. Test parameters shall be as defined for published
RPD. RPD tests shall start at 0.15 rn!s. Tests to establish
adjustment factors for initial berthing velocities other than 0.15
rn!s shall start at those other initial velocities.
3.2.2 Method B-Deflection of full size fenders at constant
velocity with performance adjusted by velocity factors devel-
oped from model tests. Velocity factors shall be the ratio of
performance test results of models under the following condi-
tions: (1) a constant strain rate similar to the strain rate of the
full-size fender at its test speed, and (2) decreasing speed
deflection with initial strain rate similar to that of the full-size
fender under RPD deflection conditions.
3.2.3 The RPD for pneumatic fenders shall be determined
using either Method A or Method B with miniature-size
fenders; in which case, the compression perfom1ance of air
shall be directly extrapolated from the test data of reduced
scale models.
4. Apparatus
4.1 The test apparatus shall be equipped with load cell(s)
and linear transducer(s) capable of providing continuous moni-
toring of fender performance. The test apparatus shall be
capable of recording and storing load-cell and transducer data
at intervals of <0.01 H, where His a fender's nominal height,
and storing manually entered inputs. Output information shall
include, as a minimum:
4.1.1 Serial number and description of test item,
4.1.2 Date, time at start, and time at end of test,
4.1.3 Location of test facility and test apparatus ID,
4.1.4 Stabilization temperature of test specimen,
4.1.5 Test ambient temperature, and
4.1.6 Graphic plot(s) of: (1) deflection velocity versus
deflection (optional) (If not plotted, deflection velocity and its
characteristics shall be separately noted.), (2) reaction versus
deflection, and (3) energy versus deflection.
4.2 For fender tests, all equipment used to measure and
record force and deflection shall be calibrated and certified
accurate to within 1 %, in accordance with ISO or equivalent
JIS or ASTM requirements. Calibration shall be performed
within one year of the use of the equipment, or less, if the
normal calibration interval is shorter than one year. Calibration
of test apparatus shall be performed by a qualified third-party
organization, using instrumentation that is traceable to a
certified, national standard.
4.3 The test apparatus shall deflect specimens according to
Section 5.
5. Procedure
5.1 The performance test shall deflect specimens according
to either of the two methods listed below. Clear and unambigu-
ous calculations must be provided for any adjustments made to
the test results.
5.2 Method A:
Nom 1-Steps 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 do not apply to pneumatic fenders. Step
may be omitted for pneumatic fenders, provided internal pressure is
adjusted to the manufacturer's specified value for the ambient test
temperature.
5.2.1 Break in the specimen by deflecting it three or more
times to its rated deflection, or more, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5.2.2 Remove load from specimen and allow it to "recover"
for 1 h or more, as recommended by manufacturer.
5.2.3 Before conducting performance test, stabilize fender
temperature in accordance with 6.1 . Temperature-stabilizing
time can include time for 5.2.1 and 5.2.2.
5.2.4 Deflect specimen once at a continuously decreasing
deflection velocity as defined in one of the equations below:
V V
0
(D- d)ID or 0.005 m/s whichever is greater (1)
or
V = V
0
V{E- e) IE or 0.005 m/ s whichever is greater ( 2)
where:
V instantaneous deflection velocity of fender,
V
0
initial deflection velocity, where V
0
== 0.05, 0.10, 0.15,
0.20, 0.25, or 0.30 m/s,
D rated deflection,
d instantaneous deflection,
E rated energy absorption of fender, kN/m, and
e instantaneous running total of energy absorbed, kN/m.
Initial velocity shall be appropriate for particular
purpose.
5.2.5 Stop test when deflection reaches rated deflection, or
more, as recommended by the manufacturer.
5.2.6 Adjust performance to rating temperature (23 5C),
if required, or to desired application temperature by multiply-
ing both energy and reaction results by temperature factor (TF)
(see 6.3).
5.3 Method B:
NoTE 2-Steps 5.3.1 and do not apply to pneumatic fenders. Step
may be omitted for pneumatic fenders, provided internal pressure is
adjusted to the manufacturer's specified value for the ambient test
temperature.
1599
5.3.1 Break in specimen by deflecting three or more times to
its rated deflection, or more, as recommended by the manufac-
turer.
5.3.2 Remove load from specimen and allow it to "recover"
for 1 h or more, as recommended by manufacturer.
0 F2192- 05 (2011)
S.3.3 Before conducting performance test, stabilize fender
temperature in accordance with 6.1. Temperature-stabilizing
time can include time for 5.3.1 and 5.3.2.
S.3.4 Deflect specimen once at a constant deflection veloc-
ity.
S.3.S Stop test when deflection reaches rated deflection, or
more, as recommended by the manufacturer.
S.3.6 Adjust performance to rated temperature (23 SC),
if required, or to desired application temperature by multiply-
ing both energy and reaction results by temperature factor (TF)
(see 6.3).
S.3.7 Adjust performance to RPD initial deflection velocity
(O.lS m/s) or to desired initial berthing velocity, if required, by
multiplying both energy and reaction results by velocity factor
(VF) (see 6.2).
6. Supporting Procedures
6.1 Temperature Stabilization:
6.1.1 Test temperature for full-size specimens is defined as
the same as stabilization temperature, as long as ambient
temperature at test apparatus is within 1SC of stabilization
temperature and testing is completed within 2 h of the
specimen's removal from the temperature-controlled environ-
ment.
6.1.2 To stabilize temperature, store specimen at a constant
temperature S
0
C. Record air temperature of space where
specimen is stored within 3 m of specimen surface, either
continuously or twice a day, no less than 10 h apart.
6.1.3 Stabilization time shall be not less than 20xl.5 days or
more as recommended by the manufacturer, rounded to the
next whole day (x = dimension of greatest rubber thickness, in
meters), after curing plus 20x1.
5
days, rounded to the next
whole day, after being in an ambient temperature differing from
stabilization temperature by more than 1 ooc for more than 8 h.
6.2 Velocity Factor (VF)-One of the following protocols
shall be followed to determine VF for every combination of
fender configuration, initial velocity other than RPD velocity,
fender element standoff and energy-absorbing material. Speci-
mens for determining VF may be either full-size fenders or
models, as noted below. Pneumatic fenders do not require a
VF.
6.2.1 Method A-Testing of full-size fenders at actual,
decreasing rate deflection velocity.
6.2.1.1 Test full-size fenders per 5.2 at 0.1S-m/s initial
velocity and 23 soc.
6.2.1.2 Repeat at other initial velocities.
6.2.1.3 Derive the VFs from the data in 6.2.1.1 and 6.2.1.2
per the following method:
(1) Energy velocity factor and reaction velocity factor by
Method A, VFea and VFra shall be defined by the following
equations:
where:
VFea = E)ERPD
VFra = R)RRPD
Ev energy at other initial velocity per 6.2.1.2,
ERPD energy at the RPD initial velocity per 6.2.1.1,
Rv reaction at other initial velocity per 6.2.1.2, and
(3)
(4)
1600
RRPD reaction at the RPD initial velocity per 6.2.1.1.
(2) Corrected energy and reaction performance is then
calculated by the following equations:
where:
Ea = ERPD X VFea
Ra = RRPD X VFra
Ea energy at alternative initial velocity,
Ra reaction at alternative initial velocity,
ERPD energy at RPD initial velocity, and
RRPD reaction at RPD initial velocity.
(5)
(6)
6.2.2 Method B-Testing of model at both constant and
decreasing strain rates.
6.2.2.1 Calculate the strain rate of the full-size fender when
it is deflected at the constant velocity of 0.0003 to 0.0013 m/s
(2 to 8 em/min).
6.2.2.2 Test the model, per 5.3, at 23 5C, at the strain
rate calculated in 6.2.2.1 ( 10 % ).
6.2.2.3 Calculate the initial strain rate of the full-size fender
when it is deflected at the desired initial berthing velocity.
6.2.2.4 Test the same model used in 6.2.2.2 per 5.3, at 23
SC, beginning at the initial strain rate calculated in 6.2.2.3
(10 %).
6.2.2.S Derive velocity factors for energy and reaction, VFe
and VFr, from the data in 6.2.2.2 and 6.2.2.4 per the following
equations:
where:
VFr RJRtest
VFe = EJE,est
Ev energy per 6.2.2.4,
Etest energy per 6.2.2.2,
Rv = reaction per 6.2.2.4, and
Rtest reaction per 6.2.2.2.
(7)
(8)
6.3 Temperature Factor (TF)-Temperature factors (TF) for
pneumatic fenders may be calculated using ideal gas laws. For
every urethane, foam or rubber compound, the TFs shall be
determined by the following procedure.
6.3.1 Conduct standard performance tests on temperature-
stabilized specimens using either Method A or Method B, per
one of the two methods described below:
6.3.1.1 (A)-Stabilize specimens at test temperature per
6.1.2 and 6.1.3. Specimens shall be either full-size fenders or
models not smaller than 0.1 min height. Test specimens in test
apparatus maintained at test temperature for duration of test.
6.3.1.2 (B)-Stabilize specimens at test temperature per
6.1.2 and 6. 1.3. Specimens shall be either full-size fenders or
models not smaller than 0.3 m in height. Test specimens at
room temperature. Test must be completed within 1S min of
sample's removal from temperature-controlled environment.
6.3.2 Specimens shall be stabilized at the following tem-
peratures: -30, -20, -10, 0, + 10, +23, +30, +40, and +S0C.
The TFs for each of these temperatures, TF
1
, where t is the
number designating the reference temperature, shall then be
calculated by the following equations:
(9)
F2192- 05 (2011)
(10)
where:
Rr reaction at temperature other than 23C (highest
reaction below 0.35 H deflection),
R
23
reaction at 23C (highest reaction below 0.35 H
deflection),
Et energy at temperature other than 23 C, and
E
23
energy at 23C.
7. Verification/Quality Assurance Testing
7.1 Energy/Reaction Compliance Testing-Verification/
quality assurance testing to determine compliance with either
RPD or other customer-specified energy and reaction require-
ments (required performance) shall be performed in a test
apparatus, as described in Section 4. Samples for verification
testing shall be actual fender elements fabricated for the project
location. For cylindrical foam, pneumatic, and hydropneumatic
fenders larger than 1800-mm diameter by 3600-mm long, the
tests of a 1200-mm diameter by 2000-mm long or larger fender
may be scaled to demonstrate the energy and reaction ratings of
the fender. The projected fender and the test fender shall both
be constructed with the same materials, have the same general
configurations of the ends, and have the same skin thickness-
to-diameter ratio. Scaling shall be conducted per the following
equations:
E scale E test X ( d scad d test)
2
X (/seal) [test) ( 11 )
R scale = R test X ( d seal) d te;,) X (l scad/ test) (12)
where:
E energy,
d diameter,
l length, and
R reaction
7.1.1 Test sample according to Method A (5.2) or Method B
(5.3), adjusting performance to required performance as speci-
fied in 5.2.6 or 5.3.6, and 5.3.7.
7 .1.2 A fender provides the required performance (required
energy and reaction) within production tolerances if it meets
both the following requirements simultaneously at any point
during the test described in 7 .1.1:
7 .1.2.1 Velocity-and-temperature-adjusted energy absorbed
is equal to or greater than the required energy multiplied by the
nominal energy tolerance (low end) specified in its catalogue
data.
7 .1.2.2 Velocity-and-temperature-adjusted reaction is no
more than the required reaction multiplied by the nominal
reaction tolerance (high end) specified in its catalogue data.
1601
7.2 Other Testing-Other testing requirements, including
selection of sampling scheme, shall be as agreed between
customer and fender manufacturers.
8. Effect of Contact Angle Testing
8.1 Manufacturers shall include graphs or tables defining
the effect of deflecting fenders at the contact angles listed in
3.1.3 (3). This data may be generated mathematically or by
testing performed on either actual fender elements or on scale
models or arrays. It must reflect the effect of angle contact on
an entire fender assembly, not just an individual element.
8.2 The following is the procedure for defining the effect of
each contact angle/configuration combination. The test shall be
made on the horizontal and vertical axes of the fender unit:
8.2.1 Using a test apparatus as described in Section 4,
execute the steps of the test procedure defined in 5.2 or 5.3.
8.2.2 Determine the base-case energy rating for oo contact
angle of the specimen at the deflection or reaction limit
recommended by the manufacturer.
8.2.3 Allow the specimen to recover outside the test appa-
ratus for at least 1 h or more as recommended by the
manufacturer.
NoTE 3-A 5-min recovery period is sufficient for pneumatic fenders.
8.2.4 Attach a "wedge" to the test apparatus' moveable
surface to simulate the desired contact angle and repeat the test
cycle only of 8.2.1.
8.2.5 Determine the energy rating of the specimen in the
contact angle test at the manufacturer's recommended deflec-
tion or reaction limit.
8.2.6 The contact-angle factor is the energy determined in
8.2.5 divided by that determined in 8.2.2.
8.3 This factor is applied to energy only. No factor need be
applied to reaction, since the maximum reaction is as defined
by the oo contact-angle performance. For combined horizontal
and vertical contact angles, multiply the contact-angle factor
for the horizontal direction by the contact-angle factor for the
vertical direction.
9.1 No information is presented about either the precision or
bias of Test Method F2192 measuring the performance of
fenders. The precision and bias information is being deter-
mined and will be available on or before May 2006 following
Practice E691.
10. Keywords
10.1 berthing; berthing energy; deflection; energy absorp--
tion; fender; fender testing; rated performance data; reaction;
temperature factor; velocity factor
F2192- 05 (2011)
COPYRIGHT/).
1602
c6 Designation: F2218 - 02 (Reapproved 2008)
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Standard Guide for
Hardware Implementation for Computerized Systems
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides assistance in the choice of comput-
ing hardware resources for ship and marine environments and
describes:
1.1.1 The core characteristics of interoperable systems that
can be incorporated into accepted concepts such as the Open
System Interconnection (OSI) model;
1.1.2 Process-based models, such as the Technical Refer-
ence Model (TRM), that rely on interoperable computing
hardware resources to provide the connection between the
operator, network, application, and information; and,
1.1.3 The integrated architecture that can be used to meet
minimum information processing requirements for ship and
marine environments.
1.2 The use of models such as OSI and TRM provide a
structured method for design and implementation of practical
shipboard information processing systems and provides plan-
ners and architects with a roadmap that can be easily under-
stood and conveyed to implementers. The use of such models
permit functional capabilities to be embodied within concrete
systems and equipment.
1.3 The information provided in this guide is understood to
represent a set of concepts and technologies that have, over
time, evolved into accepted standards that are proven in
various functional applications. However, the one universal
notion that still remains from the earliest days of information
processing is that technological change is inevitable. Accord-
ingly, the user of this guide must understand that such progress
may rapidly invalidate or supersede the information contained
herein. Nonetheless, the concept of implementing ship and
marine computing systems based on these functional principles
allows for logical and rational development and provides a
sound process for eventual upgrade and improvement.
1
F2218-02R08.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E1013 Terminology Relating to Computerized Systems
(Withdrawn 2000)
3
Fl757 Guide for Digital Communication Protocols for Com-
puterized Systems
2.2 ANSI Standards:
4
X3.131 Information Systems-Small Computer Systems
Interface-:2 (SCSl-2)
X3.172 American National Standard Dictionary for Infor-
mation Systems
X3.230 Information Systems-Fibre Channel-Physical
and Signaling Interface (FC-PH)
X3.232 Information Technology-SCSI-2 Common Access
Method Transport and SCSI Interface Module
X3.253 Information Systems-SCSI-3 Parallel Interface
(SPI)
X3.269 Information Technology-Fibre Channel Protocol
for SCSI
X3.270 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Architecture
Model (SAM)
X3.276 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Controller Com-
mands (SCC)
X3.277 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Fast-20
X3.292 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Interlocked Pro-
tocol (SIP)
X3.:294 Information Technology-Serial Storage
Architecture-SCSl-2 Protocol (SSA-S2P)
X3.297 Infonnation Systems---Fibre Channel--Physical
and Signaling lnterface-2
X3.30llnformation Technology-SCSl-3 Ptimary Com-
mands (SPC)
2
the ASTM website.
3
www.astm.org.
7
Withdrawn.
4
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.A
1603
F2218 - 02 (2008)
X3.304 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Multimedia
Commands (MMC)
MS58 Information Technology-Standard Recommended
Practice for Implementation of Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI-2), (X3.131.1994) for Scanners
NCITS 306 Information Technology-Serial Storage
Architecture-SCSI-3 Protocol (SSA-S3P)
NCITS 309 Information Technology-SCSI-3 Block Com-
mands (SBC)
2.3 IEEE Standards:
5
100 Standard Dictionary for Electrical and Electronic Terms
488 Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation
610.7 Standard Glossary for Computer Networking Termi-
nology
796 Microcomputer System Bus
802.11 Wireless LAN Medium Access Control and Physical
Layer Specifications
l003.2d POSIX-Part 2 Shell and Utilities-Amendment:
Batch Environment
1003.5 Binding for System Application Program Interface
(API)
1003.b Binding for System Application Programming Inter-
face (API)-Amendment 1: Real-time Extensions
1014 Versatile Backplane Bus: VMEbus
t 101.10 Additional Mechanical Specifications for Micro-
computers using the IEEE Std 1101.1 Equipment Practice
1155 VMEbus Extensions for Instnunentation: VXIbus
1212.1 Communicating Among Processors and Peripherals
Using Shared Memory (Direct Memory Access DMA)
1394 High Pe1formance Serial Bus
!496 Chip and Module Interconnect Bus: Sbus
1394 32-bit Microprocessor Architecture
2.4 ISO Standards:
4
1155 Portable Operating System Interface for Computer
Environments (POSIX)
9945-1 System Application Program Interface (API) [C
language]
9945-2 Shell and Utilities
2.5 TINE/A Standard:
6
568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
3.1 This guide is aimed at providing a general understand-
ing of the various types of hardware devices that form the core
of information processing systems for ship and marine use.
Ship and marine information processing systems require spe-
cific devices in order to perform automated tasks in a special-
ized environment. In addition to providing information ser-
vices for each individual installation, these devices are often
networked and are capable of supplementary functions that
benefits ship and marine operations.
5
445 Hoes Ln., P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854-!331, http://www.ieee.org.
6
Available from TIA, 2500 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 300, Arlington, VA
22201-3834.
3.2 A variety of choices exists for deployment of informa-
tion processing devices and greatly increases the complexity of
the selection task for ship and marine systems. The choice of
particular device or system cannot be made solely on the
singular requirements of one application or function. Modem
information processing systems are usually installed in
complex environment where systems must be made to interact
with each other. Ship and marine installations add an even
further layer of complexity to the process of choosing adequate
computerized systems. This guide aims to alleviate this task by
giving users specific choices that are proven technologies that
perform in a complex environment.
3.3 Hardware resources used in ship and marine installa-
tions are a result of careful consideration of utility and
function. These resources may require some physical special
ization in order to inhabit a particular environment, but they are
in no way different from equipment used in shore-based
situations. Ship and marine computer system configurations,
interconnections, and support services are essentially the same
as those found in a land-based network environment and as
result, the skill sets of ship and marine information processing
system users, administrators, and support personnel are inter-
changeable with those of shore-based activities.
4. Standards Profiles
4.1 Standards profiles are sets of specifications bundled
together to describe the technical standard for a function or a
service (such as operating systems, network, and data inter-
change services), and will include minimum criteria for the
information and technology that support specific functional
requirements. Profiles equate to the lowest level process, and
document agreed-to implementation requirements used in
building and operating systems. Systems using the same
standards, but different options, will probably not interface
correctly. The Technical Reference Model (TRM) is useful for
assembling standards profiles across technology categories of
Computing Resources, Information Management, and Appli-
cations.
4.1.1 The TRM identifies and specifies the support services
(multimedia, communications, and so forth) and interfaces that
provide a common operating environment and support the flow
of information among enterprise and common support appli-
cations. This model represents the computer resources, infor-
mation management, and applications categories and interfaces
with the communication and networking technology categories
that are appropriately represented by the ISO Open System
Interconnect model. The TRM addresses standard profiles that
provide seamless application support over widely distributed
computing resources and attendant interfaces between the
computing resources and other technologies.
1604
4.2 Computing hardware resources represent generally con-
sists of Central Processing Unit(s) (CPU), Input and Output
(110) interfaces, main memory, buses, and peripherals. The
external environment considerations that affect computing
hardware resource selection are security, communications,
real-time, and high availability. The computing hardware
resource provides the environment necessary to support appli-
cation software. From the perspective of the application
F2218- 02 {2008)
software, services are provided by the computing resource,
whether the particular services are provided locally or remotely
as part of a distributed system.
4.3 The architecture needed to support a typical application
consists of computers that perform as clients and servers. The
servers host the primary application software and contain the
processing power necessary to support multiple users. Servers
also host the data needed to support the application. The
standard 3-tiered application architecture consists of (1) an
application server, (2) a data server, and (3) presentation clients
(see 1 ).
4.4 In the future, most application processing software will
be hosted on the server computers. Clients will use presenta-
tion software t.l}at connects to the servers using a common
interface. At that time, client computers will likely be less
expensive and tailored to the user's individual preference
because application interoperability will not be a significant
factor.
4.5 Today, however, most application software is hosted on
the client and interoperability among clients is a critical factor.
Even within the client-server application architecture, applica-
tion specific software resident on the client is still prevalent.
This demands consistency of client workstations across an
entire installation to achieve seamless interoperability. Table 1
outlines a rationale for the client-server deployment strategy.
4.6 Driven by the current state of client-server technology,
the general philosophy for implementing computing resources
is the concept of homogeneous clients and heterogeneous
servers. Homogeneous clients facilitate providing a consistent
interface between the user and the system and make system
support and maintenance less complex. Heterogeneous servers
support the various computing requirements of applications
needed to support ship and marine operations. The same
advantages that homogeneous clients enjoy can be achieved if
APPLICATION
SERVER
DATA
SERVER
servers are homogeneous as well. Independent of whether or
not the server suite employed is heterogeneous or homoge-
neous, it is important that they perform their function trans-
parently to the user (that is, the user neither knows nor cares
about the location, number, or vendor of the server being used.)
Requiring servers to be homogeneous would restrict the
introduction of new server technology, choking innovation and
preventing the installation from taking advantage of advances
in computing such as massively parallel processors.
5. Computing Hardware
5.1 Computing Resources-Computing resources consist of
many computing hardware components and configurations of
these components. This section covers the various hardware
components that make up a computing resource system and
examines how these components are commonly configured.
5.2 Component Technologies-The major hardware compo-
nents of Computing Resources are the Central Processing Unit
(CPU), one or more backplane buses, main memory (both
RAM and cache), Input/Output (I/0) interfaces, and peripher-
als. This section will examine each of these areas and provide
guidance on the selection of these component technologies as
part a computing resource system.
5.2.1 CPU-The CPU is the "engine" of the computer
system and, combined with the OS (operating system), forms
the core of the computing resource. Since the OS drives many
decisions concerning the computer resource, a CPU that is
compatible with the OS becomes an overriding factor in
determining the type of CPU. Other than the OS, the main
factors to consider in determining the type of CPU for the
computer are processing speed (performance) and cost. For
computing resources, such as servers and multiprocessors,
scalability of the number of processors can be a significant
factor in determining CPU.
PRESENTATION CLIENTS
(Appliances)
FIG. 1 Three-Tiered Application Architecture
1605
<0 F2218- 02 (2008)
TABLE 1 Client-Server Deployment Rationale
Rationale for Heterogeneous The server must be tailored to the specific application that may not be supportable by computers most prevalent in the
Servers marketplace.
Many applications work well in their current computing environment and it is not cost effective to change.
It is not practical to have all applications on a. common server for multiple reasons including the need to maintain competition
between computer developers and vendors.
Encourages innovation by not restricting the type of computer used for the development of applications.
Rationale for Homogeneous Allows for a common, consistent user interface.
Clients
Maximizes interoperability.
Minimizes re-training required as users transfer to different organizations within the enterprise.
Maximizes the ability to use common support and maintenance skills, parts and labor; thereby minimizing cost.
Maximizes portability of support for applications across the enterprise as well as portability of user skills.
Allows for economies of scale in both procurement (volume discounts) and support (more focused skill set for help desk
TABLE 2 CPU Sample Implementations
Clients, Servers, and Special Purpose
Intel Pentium/Celeron
AMD K6/Athlon/Duron
VIA C3/Cyrix
Motorola PowerPC
Transmeta Crusoe
Compaq Alpha
Hewlett Packard PA-RISC
Sun Microsystems SPARC/UitraSPARC
Motorola PowerPC
5.2.2 Bus-The computer bus connects the different com-
ponents of the computer resource together and allows them to
pass data between them at high speeds. Computer resource
configurations, such as personal workstations, often limit or
determine the type of bus that will be used. Often there are
multiple buses connected together to allow for multiple types
of component cards or to extend a non-expandable system bus.
Considerations in determining the type of bus to use are:
number and type of commercial products compatible with the
bus architecture, number of parallel data bit lines, clock speed,
and cost. Once the appropriate bus architecture is determined,
an important computer resource factor becomes how many
interface slots are available on the bus for component cards.
5.2.2.1 Use buses that provide the necessary performance
economically and are compatible with the board level compo-
nents that are needed to meet requirements. For buses that
provide slots for component cards, use standard buses that are
supported by multiple vendors providing compatible compo-
nent cards.
5.2.3 Main Memory-Main memory is the storage ware-
house of the computer where data and programs are stored for
efficient processing. In the context of this section, main
memory refers to cache and RAM. The main factor to consider
in acquisition of a computer system is the quantity (in
megabytes) of RAM. Other considerations are access speed,
mounting design, and parity. Computer systems with too little
memory run slowly, won't load, and crash often. Mounting
designs today generally provide for easily upgradeable
Memory Modules. SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random
Access Memory) has long been a standard for memory, but
more advanced designs such as DDR (Double Data Rate) and
Rambus memory offer better speed and throughput and are
TABLE 3 Sample Bus Implementations
PCI
VMEIVXI
SBUS
VXI
CardBus
GPIB/HP-18
EISA
NoTE !-Peripheral Connect Interface (PCI) bus is quickly gaining
favor as a low-cost preferred system bus architecture. PCI provides the
necessary throughput to support the high-end data rates required by many
of today' s applications. Most commercially available computers come
with a PCI bus.
NoTE 2-EISA bus should be used only to accommodate legacy
systems.
NoTE 3-Although VME bus is more popular, VXI bus offers a greater
degree of standardization and therefore a greater degree of interoperability
between vendor's products. These are the buses of choice for embedded
systems. IEEE Std 1014 applies to VME and Std 1155 applies to VXL
NoTE 4--GBIB is the Standardized version (IEEE Std 488) of the
HP-IB implementation developed by Hewlett-Packard.
NoTE 5-CardBus is the new 32-bit high performance bus defined by
the new PC Card Standard released by the PCMCIA standards body and
trade association. The PC Card Standard replaces the outdated PCMCIA
version 2.0 and version 2.1 standards.
rapidly gaining wide acceptance. Older architecture memory
designs are generally slower and less efficient and should be
avoided to the extent possible.
5.2.3.1 Cache is usually hard wired to the motherboard and
has a faster access time than RAM. Computer system caches of
512 KB or larger are generally satisfactory.
5.2.3.2 RAM can often be on a separate memory board and
is used to store the OS, applications that are running, and data
files. The amount of RAM needed for a computer system can
vary with the environment and the OS. Servers generally need
about an order of magnitude more RAM than personal work-
stations. For personal workstations with a 16/32 bit operating
system, 64 MB or more of RAM is recommended; for
workstations with 32/64 bit operating systems, 128 MB or
more is recommended. For servers, use the Network Ur>eratlng
System (NOS) guidelines based on the environment The three
major factors used to determine the amount of RAM for a
server are number of user connections, number of processes
running, and amount of hard drive space.
5.2.4 Input/Output ( 110) lnteifaces-I/0 interfaces allow
the computing resource to move data between the "outside
world" and the CPU and main memory. Operations like
1606
F2218- 02 {2008)
TABLE 4 Recommended Memory (RAM) Standards
Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM)
Extended Data Output Dynamic Random Access Memory
(EDO DRAM)
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM)
Double Data Rate Memory (DDR)
RAM BUS
NoTE 1-Extended Data Out (EDO) DRAM was long a standard for
mass-market memory, but Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) is now the
standard for currently installed machines. SDRAM is a memory architec-
ture that incorporates many improvements over traditional DRAM tech-
nologies. SDRAM is a new technology that runs at the same clock speed
as the microprocessor. The clock on the memory chip is coordinated with
the clock of the CPU, so the timing of both the memory and the CPU are
"in synch." This reduces or eliminates wait states, and makes SDRAM
significantly more efficient than Fast Page Mode (FPM) or even Extended
Data Out (EDO) memory.
NoTE 2-Even more speed and throughput improvements are being
realized with Double Data Rate (DDR) and Rambus Memory; selection of
a memory architecture will need to be made according to a careful
consideration of cost (particularly over the anticipated service life of a
system) and performance considerations.
loading a program or file from a floppy or CD, sending and
receiving information over the LAN or WAN, or sending a
document to the printer to get a hardcopy use IJO interfaces.
Quite often the information is sent to or received from a
peripheral, which is discussed in the next section.
5 .2.4.1 Use I/0 interfaces that use open access standards,
support open device connections, and are platform indepen-
dent.
5.2.5 Peripherals-Peripherals provide data access, input,
storage, and connectivity for a computing resource. The
number of peripherals available on the commercial market
continues to explode, generally driven by processor speeds,
memory/storage capacities, and I/0 speeds. Although there are
many different types of peripherals, such as printers, facsimi-
les, moderns, scanners, video cameras, microphones, speakers,
and so forth, the main issue in specifying/procuring these items
is t.he compatibility of their I/0 interfaces with the computer
(see 5.2.4) and application software. Apart from these compat-
ibility issues, the major considerations for acquiring peripher-
als are cost and performance (which can include both speed
and quality). A major category of peripherals is static storage
devices. As distinguished from main memory (covered in
5.2.3), static storage devices retain data when the power is off.
The remainder of this section will discuss storage devices. Use
peripherals that support standard I/0 interfaces and are plat-
form independent.
TABLE 5 Recommended 1/0 Interface Standards
SCSI-2
USB
SCSI-3
IEEE 1394
FC-PH/FC-AL
XIO
ESCON
Serial
IPI
Parallel
PC Card
NoTE 1-Fibre Channel (FC-PH) is emerging as a host-level interface standard for delivery of high I/0 data transfers. FC-PH provides connections
for workstation clustering, storage clustering and network-based storage concepts, parallel processing, load leveling, host-to-host or server-to-server
communications, host- or server-to-mass storage communications, bulk data transfer, and multimedia. FC-PH is also being used as a system bus at the
CPU and memory level as well as a way to cluster multiple systems similar to Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA). NUMA describes an architectural
approach to clustering multiple systems such that distributed memory appears to the operating system as shared memory. This architectural approach
allows a benefit to the user of a shared memory programming model with the scalability of a massively parallel processor's (MPPs) distributed memory
model. FC-PH currently provides up to 1.062 GigaBits Per Second (Gbps) bandwidth using optical fiber.
NoTE 2-FC-PH-based storage subsystems will be supported on mainframes; therefore, the Enterprise Systems Connection or ESCON-based systems
will be phased out.
NoTE 3-The Upper Layer Protocol (ULP) over FC-PH from the mainframe will initially deploy as SCSI-2 or SCSI-3 and migrate quickly to Intelligent
Peripheral Interface (IPI). IPI will be deployed on large servers before it will be deployed on mainframes. Note that IPI is a protocol only; SCSI is both
a protocol and an interface. FC-PH is an interface that can support various ULPs.
NoTE 4-For servers and higher end personal workstations, SCSI is the predominant host-level interface for current disk and peripheral devices. As
the demand for higher data transfer rates and expanded connectivity requirements increase, SCSI-2 and SCSI-3 over FC-PH in a PCI form factor will
be the appropriate long-term direction.
NoTE 5-Enhanced IDE is the predominant peripheral interface for lower end personal workstations. SCSI is the current interface of choice for
high-speed devices, such as high-capacity disk and tape drives and is the appropriate long-term direction for both the commodity level and high capacity
devices.
NoTE 6-Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) announced that PCMCIA cards are now referred to as PC Cards. The
PC Card Standard defines a 68-pin interface between the peripheral card and the PC Card "socket" into which it gets inserted. It also defines three standard
PC Card sizes, Type I, Type II and Type III. All PC Cards measure the same length and width, roughly the size of a credit card. Where they differ is in
their thickness. Type I, the smallest form factor, often used for memory cards, measures 3.3 mm in thickness. Type II, available for those peripherals
requiring taller components such as LAN cards and modems, measures 5 mm thick. Type III is the tallest form factor and measures 10.5 mm thick. Type
III PC cards can support small rotating disks and other tall components.
NoTE 7-As mentioned under "Bus" (see l.l.2), CardBus is a new standard introduced as an addendum to the PCMCIA PC Card standard. CardBus
is a 32-bit bus-mastering card operating at 33 Mhz transferring data at up to 132 MBytes per second. (The 16-bit PC Card bus data rate is 20 MBytes
per second.) Like PC Cards, CardBus uses the 68-pin interface but operates at 3.3 volts versus the 5 volts used by PC Cards. CardBus slots are backward
compatible with PC Cards. Card sockets can support PC Cards only or CardBus cards only, but not a mixture of the two.
NoTE 8-Serial I/0 refers to standard serial interfaces such as RS 232, 422, 423, and 449.
Nom 9-Parallel I/0 refers to standard parallel intetfaces such as micro-Centronix.
NoTE 10---XIO is an emerging I/0 solution based on Specialix' SI controller, and incorporating the high performance I/0 processor and communication
technology introduced in the RIO range. XIO is ideal for the 16-32 user system where sustaining high performance is essential.
NoTE 11-IEEE 1394, also known as "Firewire," is a high speed serial l/0 that supports data rates up to 400Mbps.
1607
<0 F2218- 02 (2008)
5.2.5.1 Storage Device Standards-Storage refers to the
capability to store information outside the central processor.
For most computers, the predominant technology for storage
has been magnetic disk and will remain so for the next few
years.
( 1) Storage media is the physical material on which data is
stored. The choice of media is usually determined by the
application needs in terms of data accessibility, storage density,
transfer rates, and reliability. Broad industry standards exist for
3.5-in. magnetic disk, 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT), 8-mm
helical tape, digital linear tape (DLT), Y2-in. tape, and compact
disk-read only memory (CD-ROM). However, industry is in
the process of agreeing on a standard for Digital Versatile Disk
(DVD) which will able to read CD-ROMs as well as the new
DVDs. Standards do exist for write once read many (WORM)
optical and magneto-optical (MO) disks. Although the physical
medium for optical technologies conforms to an open standard,
the device's recording format may not.
(2) Archived data on outdated storage media (for example,
5.25-in. floppy disks) should be transferred to media that is
more current to avoid data being "trapped" on obsolete media
that cannot be read by devices currently on the market.
(3) As networks proliferate and storage requirements ex-
pand, storage technology that uses standard interfaces and
promotes hardware and software supplier independence is
necessary. This technology will enable us to take advantage of
the open systems environment.
( 4) Implement storage technology and storage device me-
dia that use open access standards, support open device
interface standards, and are platform independent.
5.2.5.2 RAID Technology-Redundant Array of Indepen-
dent Disks (RAID) technology protects from data loss by
providing a level of redundancy immediately within an array.
The array contains removable disk drive modules that are
automatically rebuilt in the event of a device failure without
causing the system to shut down. When RAID levels other than
0 are used, no downtime is required to replace a failed disk
drive. Data is continuously available while reconstruction of
the failed disk occurs in the background. Much of the benefit of
RAID technology lies in its capability to off-load storage
management overhead from the host system. To realize this
benefit, RAID developers endow their array controllers with
significant levels of intelligence. For instance, Adaptive RAID
supports multiple RAID levels based on workload character-
istics. Choose the RAID level based on your specific need.
5.3 System Configurations-The hardware component tech-
nologies mentioned in 5.2 can be configured in many different
ways to accomplish different tasks and meet different require-
ments. This section examines some of the common configura-
tions (Personal Workstations, Servers and Embedded Comput-
ers) with guidance on what component technologies to use for
each configuration.
5.3.1 Personal Workstation-Personal Workstations (PW)
are devices that contain at least one CPU (sometimes several)
and provide a user interface, typically a GUI, as well as
personal productivity tools, local data storage, and a flexible
method for accessing and manipulating data. These PW s are
commonly known as Personal Computers or PC' s, desktop
1608
TABLE 6 Storage Device Media
3.5 in. magnetic disk
3.5 in. floppy disk
5.25 in. WORM
5.25 in. MO
ISO 13346
CD-ROM
Flash Memory Removable Devices
Smart cards
DVD
V2-in. helical tape
4 mm DAT
DLT Tape
3490E cartridge tape
NoTE 1-8-mm helical tape is appropriate for backup and archive use;
however, it is slow and unreliable for near-line storage solutions where
frequent access is required. 4mm DAT offers a faster, more reliable
solution to high-capacity and high-access applications.
NoTE 2-Vz-in. helical tape offers higher storage capacity than 4 mm or
8 mm; however, it is expensive, proprietary, and only Storage Technology
supports it.
NoTE 3-3490E square cartridge Y2-in. tape is predominantly a main-
frame technology for off-line data storage.
NOTE 4-High capacity tape applies capacity multipliers of 2x to 4x to
current technology. Gains are achieved through increased density factors
as well as media length (number of media ft per unit).
NoTE 5-Flash Memory Storage devices are finding wide acceptance in
Asia. They can hold as much as 128MB of data in a keychain form factor
that plugs into an available USB port.
NoTE 6-Smart cards are being used in Europe and Asia. Smart cards
will be used predominantly as an intelligent storage media for providing
services to individuals.
NoTE 7-The Digital Video Disk (DVD, also known as Digital Versatile
Disk) allows for dual-sided as well as dual-layered implementations that
will increase CD-ROM capacities significantly. In addition, transfer rates
may improve to as high as 16 Mega Bits Per Second (Mbps).
computers, portables (laptops or notebooks), or workstations
and use one of several bus architectures. Low-end PWs are
used primarily to support the general office work place. More
powerful PWs are predominantly used in high-end computer
applications such as Computer-Aided Design/Computer-Aided
Manufacturing/Computer-Aided Engineering (CAD/CAM/
CAE), application development, multimedia, and decision
support data analysis presentation.
5.3.1.1 Also included in PWs are handheld computers-
Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs), also referred to as Personal
Information Managers (PIMs). Handhelds are computer sys-
tems that fit in a person's hand and are extremely portable.
Handheld systems also tend to have two types of input
methods: pen or keyboard. The pen input can be used as digital
ink, a mouse, or for handwriting recognition.
5.3.1.2 Combine components that provide flexible, scale-
able, and easy-to-use personal workstations that support the
Client/Server model of computing, data access, and multime-
dia. Allow for an external communication device such as a
modem or network interface card.
5.3.1.3 Table 9 provides a quick summary of the nominal
specifications for Personal Workstation implementation.
5.3.2 Servers-Servers are computing resources that can be
configured to support groups from small teams (work group
servers) to entire ships (campus servers). Work group servers
provide support, such as directory, file, print, and authentica-
tion services, in a LAN environment. Campus servers may
F2218- 02 (2008)
TABLE 7 Recommended Personal Workstation (Portable)
Hardware Configuration Guidance
CPU Bus 110
PentiumiCeleron PCI RAM EliDE HD >10GB
128MB
K61 AthloniDuron Cache USB 3.5-in. floppy
512KB
C3/Cyrix PC Card DVDICD-ROM
PowerPC
Crusoe
TABLE 8 Recommended Personal Workstation (Desktop)
Hardware Configuration Guidance
CPU
PentiumiCeleron
K61Athlon/Duron
C3/Cyrix
PowerPC
Bus Memory 1/0
PCI RAM EliDE
EISA
128MB
Cache
512KB
SCSI-2,3
USB
IEEE-1394
PC Card or
Card bus
Peripherals
HD >10GB
3.5-in. floppy
CD-ROM
DVD
NOTE I-EISA bus should be used only to accommodate legacy
systems.
TABLE 9 Personal Workstation Configuration Summary
Processor
System Bus
Memory
Input/Output
Storage
Operating
System
Personal
Workstation
also used as
a Server
PentiumiCeleron
K61Athlonl
Duron C31
CyrixPowerPC
PCI
256MB SDRAM
EliDE
SCSI-3
PC Card X2
Serial
Parallel
USB
IEEE 1394
Dual Network
Interface
Card (NIC)
3.5-in. floppy
CD-ROM
4-mm DAT
40GB HOD
64 bit
Desktop Laptop
PentiumiCeleron PentiumiCeleron
K61 AthloniDuron K61 AthloniDuron
C3/Cyrix C31Cyrix
PowerPC PowerPC
Crusoe
PCI, EISA PCI
256MB SDRAM 256MB SDRAM
EliDE EliDE
PC Card X2 PC Card X2
Serial Serial
Parallel Parallel
USB USB
IEEE 1394 Modem
Modem NIC
NIC (Modem and NIC
(Modem and NIC can
can be on a PC Card)
be on a PC Card)
3.5-in. Floppy 3.5-in. Floppy
CD-ROM CD-ROM
10GB HOD 10GB HOD
32 bit 16/32 bit
augment and, for many new applications, replace traditional
mainframes. Selecting systems that address and support fea-
tures and services of both systems management and reliability,
availability, and serviceability is important. Campus servers
often implement RAID storage technology to provide services
with high reliability and availability (see 5.2.5.2).
5.3 .2.1 There are different types of servers, performing
more specific functions. Some of these server types include:
database servers, multimedia servers, data push server, appli-
cations server, optical disk servers, and mail servers. A brief
description of these servers follows:
1609
( 1) Database Servers-Large databases make extensive
use of disk space and processor power and typically require
their own dedicated database server hardware. Increasingly
these database servers have more than one CPU and more than
one network interface channel to keep up with the demands
placed upon them by large numbers of simultaneous users.
(2) Multimedia Servers-If an installation has a large
archive of audio or video data, or if it intends to distribute
audio or video data in real-time, it will require a multimedia
data server. Archives of audio and video data require huge
amounts of disk space. Moving this data over the network
(typically through streaming audio or video services and
protocols) is also resource intensive. Both requirements typi-
cally require the dedicated use of a multimedia server.
( 3) Data Push Servers-If an instaliation implements a
data push mechanism for distributing information to internal
and/or external desktops, it will have to host that push function
on a data push server. Depending on the number and volume of
channels being pushed, the data push server software may
reside on hardware that is also performing other server
functionality (typically the web server).
( 4) Application Servers-One option for centralizing sys-
tem management and reducing total cost of ownership in a
network environment is to run the actual application programs
on a few high-powered application servers rather than on the
desktop clients. This is a common approach in UNIX-based
computing environments through the use of the X Windows
graphical interface to open display and control windows on one
system for an application running on another system. A new
variation of this approach brings current Microsoft Windows
applications to systems that are under-powered (old 286 or 386
CPU PCs) or that are not running the 16/32 bit based Windows
operating system (UNIX workstations, Java Network Comput-
ers). This is made possible by running the applications on
shared Windows NT/2000 application servers and just sending
the user interface over the network to the user's local system.
(5) Optical Disk Servers-With the huge amounts of refer-
ence data available on CD ROM and the increasing availability
of CD ROM writers for organizations to use to create their own
archival data storage on CD ROM, there is a growing need to
have multiple CD ROM disks online at once. A new class of
hardware, the CD ROM Server, is a stand-alone network
device that includes a large number of CD ROM drives which
can be made available as shared disks to all users on a network.
(6) Mail Servers-In an organization that has a number of
networked PW clients, mail servers provide store and forward
functions for electronic messages. These servers receive, store,
and distribute electronic messages and require a large amount
of storage, proportional to the number of e-mail accounts they
carry. They also require numerous network connections and
modem connections to receive and distribute messages from/to
users and other organizations.
5.3.2.2 Evaluate servers for their interoperability, portabil-
ity, reliability, availability, serviceability, and scalability. The
capability to easily upgrade processor performance or to add
additional processors, disk storage, and communications sup-
port extends the life of the platform and enhances the return on
investment. Use hardware components that are standards
0 F2218- 02 (2008)
based, primarily those that are compatible with interface bus
standards. Select scaleable servers that can increase perfor-
mance by adding components and by supporting standards-
based network protocols. Through the use of a multiprocessing
architecture, hardware should be scaleable and should enable
parallel processing.
5.3.3 Embedded Computers-When readily available com-
puters do not meet the requirements, components must be
integrated to form a system. This often involves a design of
board level components to perform the necessary functions.
The major design consideration is the selection of a back plane
bus that will allow all of the components to communicate with
each other. This decision can impact dramatically the cost, both
in the development and the logistics support of the system.
Considerations in determining the bus include avaiiabiiity of
components and existing systems bus architectures (to reduce
the logistics support costs). Commercially available compo-
nents should be considered first before custom designing and
building the components. When designing embedded computer
systems, use industry standard buses and standard components
to the maximum extent possible.
6. Cable Plant
6.1 The cable plant includes copper cable and fiber optic
cable. Fiber optic cable is the solid media preferred for its
current high-capacity (lOO's of Mbps), future bandwidth po-
tential (Gbps to Tbps), reliability, reduced susceptibility to
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), and security. (Although
fiber cannot be made completely secure without encryption or
proper physical protection, it cannot be "tapped" without
physical manipulation.)
6.2 Fiber optic cable is required to support voice and
high-speed data. Fiber optic cable is recommended in other
areas where feasible. If cost limits its use, then fiber optic cable
should be run at least in the backbone of the network and to
major junction points (telephone closets, for example). A mix
of 62.5 mm core/125 mm cladding multimode and 8 mm
core/125 mm cladding single-mode fiber should be pulled in
jacketed bundles, terminated, and tested. The cost avoidance of
installing additional single-mode cable is relatively low com-
pared to the future benefits it presents.
6.3 Copper cabling should be avoided in the backbone
because it has inherently low bandwidth over significant
distance. If copper is unavoidable, it should be limited to areas
that can be easily, and inexpensively, rewired with fiber when
TABLE 10 Server Hardware Configuration Guidance
CPU Bus Memory 1/0 Peripherals
Pentium PC! RAM 2:: SCSI-2, 3 HD > 40GBA
Athlon VMENXI 512MBA FC-PH CD-ROM/
MIPS CardBus Cache 2:: PC Card or DVD
Alpha SBUS
2
MBA CardBus
1
R
3
A
4
ID
' ' ,5,6
PowerPC GPIB/HP-IB IPI 4-mm OAT
PA-RISC EISA DL T
A Refer to server OS documentation to determine memory requirements.
NoTE 1-PCI is a system bus architecture and interface standard that
will be used to support I/0 needs. Unlike SCSI, PCI is not an I/0
interface. PCI will likely become the de facto open standard.
TABLE 11 Embedded Computer Systems Hardware Configuration
Guidance
CPU Bus 1/0
Pentium/Celeron VXI SCSI-2, 3 Hard Drive
Power PC VME FC-PH 3.5-in. floppy
K6/ Athlon/Duron PCI IPI CD-ROM
MIPS GPIB/HP-18 ESCON DVD
SPARC EISA EliDE
Alpha SBUS Serial
Crusoe CardBus Parallel
PC Card or
CardBus
A Varies widely based upon system requirements.
Nom 1-Although VME bus is more popular and offers a wider variety
of vendor products, VXI bus offers a greater degree of standardization and
therefore a greater degree of interoperability among vendors' products.
These are the buses of choice for embedded systems.
NoTE 2-As the popularity of PCI bus rises and the number of available
products increases, PCI becomes a more desirable architecture for
embedded systems.
appropriate. If copper is used, select only properly terminated
and tested Category 5 ("Cat 5") cable for cable from the
telecommunications closet to the desktop. (Unshielded Twisted
Pair (UTP) Cat 5 is the copper standard for data rates up to 155
Mbps.) Thin-wire coax, thick-wire coax, RS-232/422, Cat-
egory 3 and "telephone" wire should be avoided-the minor
cost savings is not usually justifiable because of limited data
rates and degraded interoperability. (Allowable exceptions are
recognized when linking distant, or otherwise limited-access
areas, which are already wired.)
6.4 Definitions:
6.4.1 Trunk Cable-A trunk cable is a cable that connects
two main interconnection boxes or patch panels. It is used to
provide connectivity between the service areas of the cable
plant.
6.4.2 Local Cable-A local cable is a cable that connects a
main interconnection box or patch panel to user system
equipment or a local breakout box.
6.4.3 System Specific Cable-A system specific cable di-
rectly connects two pieces of user system equipment, indepen-
dent of the cable plant. A system specific cable is typically used
to connect equipment within the same service area of the cable
plant.
6.4.4 Drop Cable-A drop cable is a system specific cable
between a ready movable piece of user system equipment, such
as a PC or printer, and the local breakout box in the area. A
drop cable is not considered to be part of the cable plant.
6.5 Fiber Optic Cable-Fiber optic cable is the preferred
media for all network applications due to its growth potential.
(In shipboard and other high Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) environments, fiber optic cable is critical in eliminating
the effects of noise.) The backbone network must use fiber
optic cabling, as part of the Fiber Optic Cable Plant (FOCP)-
twisted pair (shielded or unshielded) or coaxial cable should
not be used. Where possible, multimode graded index fiber
with a 62.5-micrometre (jlm) core/125 11ffi cladding should be
used. Due to the low relative marginal cost, single-mode fiber
(8 11m core/125 11m cladding) should be provided in at least the
backbone FOCP and preferably to major junction points.
1610
F2218 - 02 (2008)
6.5.1 Multimode fiber (62.5 J.tm) is easier to terminate and
test, especially in the field. However, there are distance and
bandwidth limitations that cannot be overcome and single-
mode fiber must be used. (Multimode fiber can support rates of
up to 155 Megabits per second (Mbps) at distances up to 2
kilometres (km). It can only support 622 Mbps for hundreds of
feet. Single-mode fiber (8 J.tm), however, can easily support
units of Gigabits per second (Gbps) at up to 30 kms. Further,
it can support multiple wavelengths, each operating at units of
Gbps. Thus today's single-mode fiber can support tens of Gbps
for tens of kilometres. Laboratory tests have shown this limit to
be at least 2 orders of magnitude higher, namely Terabits per
second (Tbps).
6.5.2 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)-Category 5 UTP
cable may be used only for the cabling between the appliance
and the network edge device or between the workstation and
other network equipment under certain conditions. Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP) cable should not be used. The following
factors should be taken into consideration when using Category
5 UTP cable:
6.5.2.1 Mission criticality of the application (The UTP
copper cable may exhibit a lower availability than fiber due to
EMI problems.)
6.5.2.2 Bandwidth or signaling rate (UTP may be used for
short runs of lOOBaseT, but should not be used at higher data
rates or for long runs.)
6.5.2.3 Security level (UTP is easy to tap if not run in
conduit.)
6.5.2.4 Length of cable run (UTP should be limited to
intra-compartment runs.)
6.5.2.5 Installation factors (UTP requires exceptional care
during installation, and should be thoroughly tested.)
6.5.2.6 Environmental Factors-EMI (UTP is subject to
interference from radar and nearby high-powered equipment.)
6.5.3 In ship and marine environments, UTP cable should
meet general flammability, smoke, acid gas generation, halo-
gen content, and toxicity index requirements. Further, UTP
should be limited in critical systems to due to EMI, shock, and
vibrations (RJ-45 plastic connectors for UTP are not designed
to withstand significant shock loads and may crack or discon-
nect under long-term vibration conditions).
6.5.4 Legacy Copper-Media Networks-For installations
with copper-based legacy systems, it is recommended that
those systems be selectively upgraded to fully integrate users
of the backbone network based on capability requirements and
funding availability. In ship and marine environments where
funding availability or system requirements cannot
support the decision to upgrade the system, connectivity to the
ship's backbone network can be accomplished at either the
backbone or workgroup switch, providing that those devices
can support the legacy network In such a configu-
ration, the backbone network switch acts as a gateway between
the legacy system and the rest of the backbone. If some limited
for system upgrade is available, and such upgrades suit
the needs of the ship, a lower cost interim upgrade would be to
replace the legacy copper links with fiber optic links, and
integrate those links into the ship's FOCP. This interim
1611
physical integration will simplify the further upgrade from a
separate legacy system to an integrated network application.
6.6 Patch Panels, Interconnection Boxes, and Connectors:
6.6.1 FOCP Interconnection Boxes-FOCP interconnection
boxes and patch panels should hold a minimum of 48 connec-
tor pairs. Interconnection boxes should be sized to accommo-
date all of the fibers (allocated, spare, and growth) that enter
the box.
6.6.2 Local Breakout Boxes-Local breakout boxes may be
used to provide additional flexibility in locating workstations
or easily moved equipment. The interconnection box should
completely enclose the fiber terminations. Local breakout
boxes should not be used as a substitute for rack-mounted
patch panels for the interconnection of rack-mounted equip-
ment.
6.6.3 Location of Tx-Rx Pairs and Optical Crossover -In
FOCP Interconnection Boxes, local breakout boxes, and in
rack-mounted patch panels, the pair of ST connectors associ-
ated with one full-duplex optical circuit should be located in a
vertical line, one above the other, with the transmit (Tx)
connector above the receive (Rx) connector. In a complete
optical link, there must be one (or an odd number of)
crossover(s) in order to connect the optical transmitter at one
end to the optical receiver at the other end, and vice versa.
6.7 Connectors
6.7.1 Fiber Optic Cable:
6.7.1.1 ST-type-ST-type connectors were, until recently,
the standard for all multimode connections. In commercial
applications, SC is rapidly becoming the standard. It is
becoming hard to find host network interface cards with ST
connectors.
6.7.1.2 SC-type-SC-type connectors are becoming the in-
dustry standard for both host network interface cards and
backbone connections. While this is acceptable for multi-mode
fiber, it has debatable merit for single-mode fiber. (Pros: more
common connector, easier to insert/remove; Cons: can more
easily confuse multi-mode with single-mode fiber, if single-
mode transmitter accidentally plugged into multi-mode re-
ceiver, the receiver could be permanently damaged.)
6. 7 .1. 3 FCPC-type-FCPC-type connectors are the standard
for single-mode fiber. Many equipment vendors, however, are
beginning to use SC-type connectors. Because the risk of
accidentally switching multi-mode and single-mode connec-
tions exists when the same connector is used for both, it is
recommended that FCPC-type be used for single-mode fiber
(see discussion in the previous paragraph).
6.7.1.4 MIC-type-MIC-type connectors are not recom-
mended for use within the backbone network. However, if
MIC-type connectors are the only available option, it is
recommended that a MIC-ST jumper cable be fabricated to
allow the MIC connector at the equipment interface, but with
an ST connector for connection to the FOCP or rack-mounted
patch panel. MIC connectors should not be used within FOCP
interconnection boxes.
6.7.1.5 Heavy-Duty Multiple Terminus-Heavy-duty mul-
tiple terminus connectors are recommended for equipment
interfaces that require a rugged interface that is easily discon-
nected and reconnected.
~ F2218- 02 (2008)
6.7.1.6 Mechanical Splice-Mechanical splices are recom-
mended only for those applications requiring higher optical
performance than is available with ST-type connectors. Me-
chanical splices may be used in interconnection boxes, and
may also be used inside rack-mounted patch panels where
needed for higher optical performance.
6.7.2 Copper Cable:
6.7.2.1 RJ-45 Connectors-Category 5 cable specifications
limit the connector type to RJ-45. However there are a number
of pin-out standards from which to choose. Because ISDN also
specifies the use of RJ-45, the ISDN pin-out specification will
be used: ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-1991 Standard, Commercial
Building Telecommunications Wiring. This variant is desig-
nated EIA/TIA T568A (also called ISDN, previously called
EIA).
6.7.3 Ship and Marine Environment-In ship and marine
environments, ST-type connectors are recommended for all
light-duty multi-mode fiber applications. ST-type connectors
may be used as the interface to equipment if sufficient cable
strain-relief and protection are provided. Failure to provide
sufficient strain relief and protection will result in connector
breakage or failure.
6.7.3.1 Until such time as SC-type connectors are evaluated
against shock, vibration, and wear, they are not recommended
for use within the backbone network. However, if SC-type
connectors are the only available option associated with the
network equipment, it is recommended that an SC-ST jumper
cable be fabricated to allow the SC connector at the equipment
interface with an ST connector for connection to the FOCP or
the rack-mounted patch panel. SC connectors should not be
used within FOCP interconnection boxes.
6.8 Topology, Security, and Integrated Cabling:
6.8.1 Basic Topology-The recommended physical topol-
ogy is a mesh, as opposed to a ring or star configuration. If a
logical ring or star topology is required for near-term cost
reasons, the physical mesh cable plant infrastructure can be
configured to provide the required logical topology. The mesh
physical architecture will support the future expansion or
upgrade to a full mesh logical topology.
6.8.2 Network Node Locations-Node locations should be
selected based on the concentrations of current and planned
network users. Nodes should be located in secure areas, to
preclude unauthorized access to the equipment. Nodes should
also be located in temperature controlled compartments, to
optimize equipment reliability. Note that there is a trade-off
between the number of nodes and the total quantity of local
cable required to connect users. These two parameters should
be considered in conjunction with the system requirements for
survivability when determining the appropriate number of
nodes.
6.8.2.1 Users should be connected to nodes within the same
fire zone for survivability. Also, the number of nodes installed
should be selected to provide maximum coverage of the ship's
fire zones, while minimizing the total network cost.
6.8.3 Patch Panel and Interconnection Box Locations
-Main interconnection boxes or patch panels should be
collocated with the network nodes. For maximum installation
and connection flexibility, it is recommended that the patch
panels be installed in the same rack as the network node
equipment. These rack -mounted patch panels can also be used
to provide a convenient means of interconnecting equipment
within the same rack, and to provide a simplified disconnect
point in the event that racks must be moved.
6.8.3.1 For racks containing connection-intensive network
devices, the use of a rack-mounted patch panel should be
considered to serve as the interconnection box for that zone.
6.8.4 Trunk Cable Routing-In general, trunk cables s h ~ u l
be routed along diverse physical paths to ensure a survivable
FOCP. The degree of redundant/fail-over equipment is cost-
driven but with a proper FOCP mesh, outages can be quickly
restored using alternate cable paths.
6.8.4.1 Trunk cables should be routed to provide survivable
signai paths between interconnection boxes. In general, each
trunk cable should have an identical redundant cable following
a separate route between the two interconnection boxes. In
addition, the cables should be routed on opposite sides of the
ship, with at least two decks separating them vertically.
6.8.5 Local Cable Distribution-If a single user has mul-
local cables for redundancy or survivability, those local
cables should be routed to two different interconnection boxes,
and should be separated within 60 ft of the equipment.
6.8.6 Network Fiber Allocations:
6.8.6.1 Inter-node-Fibers should be allocated for all inter-
node connections. The level of inter-node connectivity should
be determined based on current technical requirements, future
projections of requirements, and overall program cost con-
straints. In general, it is desirable to include sufficient fiber in
the FOCP to allow for full inter-node connectivity in a mesh
topology. Any interim logical configurations, such as rings or
stars, should also be considered when determining fiber re-
quirements.
1612
6.8.6.2 Redundancy-Redundant fibers in survivable sepa-
rated trunk cables should be provided for each active and spare
user system fiber. This is particularly critical in ship and marine
environments.
6.8.6.3 Spares-Spare fibers should be provided on a 100 %
basis; that is, each actively used fiber should have an assigned
spare. This is particularly critical in ship and marine environ-
ments.
7. Wireless Networking
7.1 The establishment of standards such as IEEE 802.11 has
created the ability of computers to communicate via network
protocols without physical wiring. Commonly known as wire-
less Local Area Networks, this innovation provides practical
interconnectivity without the investment or labor required to
establish physical media.
7.2 Wireless networks operate on a range of frequencies and
bandwidths, with newer systems functioning at 2.4 GHz
frequencies and with a bandwidth of approximately 11 Mbs.
These networks operate at a range of up to 90 m indoors, and
out of doors can operate up to 300 m. Actual communication
methods may vary, however, and care must be exercised to
ensure that equipment from various vendors is compatible.
7.3 Workstations equipped with compatible wireless net-
working cards can operate in a peer-to-peer fashion, but in a
F2218 - 02 (2008)
larger installation a more reasonable design would be to
establish distinct Wireless Access Point (W AP) devices that
connect directly to the cable plant and act as gateways to the
physically wired network and attached servers. In this scenario,
wireless workstations may be moved from location to location
within a ship and connect to the network wherever a WAP is
established. Laptops and PDAs are particularly well suited to
support WAP installations, due to their inherent mobility.
7.4 The ability of a wireless-configured device to easily
connect to another wireless device or WAP also highlights one
of the disadvantages of wireless networks. Security of operat-
ing data, services and systems can be seriously compromised in
a wireless installation. The 802.11 standard offers an encryp-
tion method known as Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) but
several flaws may be found in the WEP encryption algorithms.
A safer method would also involve the use of Virtual Private
Networking (VPN) to establish secure communications with
wired servers and systems. VPN methods vary, however, and
any implementation should be thoroughly researched to ensure
that the solution is applicable for all circumstances (wired/
wireless, different Operating Systems) and equipment (Servers,
Workstations, Laptops, PDAs).
8. Ship and Marine Facility Requirements
8.1 Racks-Ship and marine networking equipment should
never be installed by setting them upon desks, tables, filing
cabinets, etc. Small equipment can be bulkhead-mounted or
hung from the overhead; however, the preferable technique for
ship and marine installation of standard information processing
equipment is in racks.
8.1.1 Suitable racks can be obtained from a number of
vendors. However, heavy duty, industrial grade or ruggedized
racks should be used, not lightweight racks intended for
shore-based office environments. Standard rack widths are 19
in. and 24 in. Nearly all typical networking equipment is
designed to fit into 19-in. wide racks. (Note that these are
mounting widths; the overall external width of a 19-in. rack is
about 24 in., and the outside width of a 24-in. rack is about 30
in .. )
8.1.2 Standard 19-in. racks come in several depths, typically
17 in., 24 in., 29 in., and 36 in .. When deciding on the depth of
a rack, remember to allow enough depth for recessing equip-
ment that have front-access cabling, and to allow air exhaust
space for equipment with rear-facing fans. Many pieces of
networking equipment have modular assemblies that are re-
moved from the front, and the cables attach to these assemblies
from the front. This requires that the unit be recessed at least 4
in. to allow a reasonable cable bending radius. (For units that
have rear-accessible modules, it is often desirable to mount
them in backwards for easier access to removable modules.)
8.1.3 If there is sufficient space in the compartment to
mount the racks away from the bulkhead for both front and rear
access, a sufficiently deep rack will permit electronics units and
fiber patch panels to be placed back-to-back at the same
vertical level within the rack.
8.1.4 Consider cable entry when ordering racks. If the rack
is to be located on a raised false deck, then the cabling can
enter from the bottom. Otherwise the cable should enter the
rack from the lower half of the rear panel. For all cable
entrances, a minimum of three in. of slack should be provided
to allow for movement of the rack under shock and vibration.
There should also be a minimum length of 18 in. between the
last cable support and the cable's entrance to the equipment.
8.1.5 Racks should be ordered with removable, but lock-
able, side, front and rear panels for maximum equipment
accessibility. Note that the location of louvers in rack panels
depends upon the cooling method that is used (see below).
8.1.6 The location of equipment within racks is a trade-off
among the often-conflicting parameters of accessibility,
weight, and cooling. Heavy equipment should be located low
in the rack for stability and ease of removing. Equipment that
requires reading of displays, LEDs, or patching should be
located at eye level. Heat-dissipation equipment should be
located near the air exhaust, not near the cold air inlet, to avoid
pre-heating the air flowing over the rest of the equipment.
8.1.7 Heavy equipment should be mounted using front-to-
rear angle brackets or slide trays to simplify installation and
removal, and to avoid the need to carry the weight of the
equipment on the front panel screws.
1613
8.1.8 Rack Cooling-Racks that contain equipment whose
total power dissipation is more than 100 W should be provided
with rack-mounted blowers or fans to augment any cooling that
might be provided by fans inside the equipment.
8.1.8.1 The ft
3
/min (CFM) rating of the rack blower/fans
can be estimated from the following equation:
CFM = 4PIT (1)
where:
CFM airflow, ft
3
/min,
P total rack power dissipation, W, and
T temperature rise (inlet to outlet),
0
F.
For example, a rack with 1000 W of electronics will need a
400-CFM blower to limit the temperature rise to 1 ooF.
8.1.8.2 Since heated air tends to rise, the airflow from fans
or blowers should be bottom-to-top. This means placing a
blower at the bottom of the rack, or an exhaust fan at the top
of the rack. In either case, a washable air filter should be placed
at the air entry point. Note that the blower, as opposed to the
exhaust fan, has the added advantage of putting a positive
pressure within the rack to keep out dust and dirt from
unfiltered air entry.
8.1.8.3 If a blower is placed at the bottom of the rack, then
the rear or side panels, or both, should have louvers near the
top for exhaust air to exit. Do not use fully louvered panels that
would short circuit the air flow. If exhaust fans are used, then
the doors and panels should have no louvers; the cold air enters
from the air filter near the bottom and the warm air exits via the
top-mounted exhaust fan.
8.1.9 Shock Isolation-Ship and marine equipment racks
should not be hard-mounted to deck foundations, but should be
shock isolated via coil springs or other acceptable isolation
mechanisms. Tall racks (over 1.5 m tall) should also have
shock-isolated anti-sway mounting from the top of the rack to
the bulkhead or to the overhead (see 8.5.5).
8.2 Line Conditioning and UPS-Ship and marine ac p o w ~
is often unreliable, noisy, and subject to over-voltage and under
0 F2218 - 02 (2008)
voltage conditions that can seriously damage networking
equipment. Network equipment should never be connected
directly to shipboard power without the protection of a line
conditioner and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). (Print-
ers need not be connected to UPS.)
8.2.1 Line conditioners protect against over/under voltage
conditions, and provide some degree of noise suppression, but
do not protect against total loss of power. UPSs provide
over/under voltage protection, noise suppression, and supply ac
power (generated from de batteries within the UPS) for a
limited time. (The loss-of-power protection interval varies with
the size of the UPS batteries, but should be designed to operate
for a minimum of 30 min when the UPS is operated at the
recommended 50% rated load.)
8.2.2 Unlike shore-based ac distribution systems, ship and
marine power uses an ungrounded (floating) neutraL If ordi-
nary line conditioners or UPSs are connected to shipboard
power, the grounded neutral will cause a ground-fault indica-
tion. Line conditioners and UPSs with floating neutral can be
obtained, but they must be special-ordered for ship and marine
service.
8.3 Electrical System Inteifaces :
8.3.1 Electric Load Analysis-Prior to installation, an elec-
tric load analysis should be performed to calculate the electri-
cal system impact associated with the new equipment, taking
into consideration any removed equipment as well.
8.3.2 Local Distribution-If adequate electrical distribution
is not available to supply the new loads, install additional
equipment and cable as required. If the existing electrical
distribution system is modified, circuit breakers and cables
should be examined for adequacy and modified or replaced as
necessary to support the new loads.
8.3.3 Bonding and Grounding-Secure electrical informa-
tion processing equipment and cables should be bonded and
grounded.
8.3.4 Power Source for Backbone Switches-Backbone
switches should be supplied ac power from two independent
power sources via an automatic power bus transfer system.
8.4 Air Conditioning-Prior to installation, the ability of the
existing ship's air conditioning system (High Volume Air
Conditioning (HVAC) system) to support the equipment instal-
lations in each compartment on the ship must be verified.
8.5 Special Considerations for Ship and Marine Critical
Systems:
8.5.1 Shock Equipment shall meet grade "A" shock require-
ments. Equipment shall operate before, during and after shock
conditions resulting from high impact shock testing of hard-
ware, mounting rack, and shock mounting devices. For critical
signals that cannot accept momentary disruption of a circuit,
multi-mode fiber is preferred over single-mode fiber because
multi-mode fiber connectors withstand shock more readily than
single-mode connectors.
8.5.2 Humidity-Using commercially available hardware in
environments with condensing 100 % relative humidity can
lead to shorting of printed circuit cards which are normally not
conformally coated in commercial equipment. One solution to
this problem is the use of specially treated equipment rooms
(node rooms) or controlled spaces where highly reliable air
conditioning is always available.
8.5.3 Temperature-Most electronic equipment is designed
to temperature ranges of 0 to 30, 40, or 50C. Ship and marine
operation outside of this range can cause failure or improper
operation of LED displays, hard drives, and CD-ROM drives at
the low temperature extremes, and power supplies and other
electronics at the higher temperature extremes. The concept
noted in the previous paragraph of air-conditioned node rooms
can be used to solve this problem. Temperature testing shall be
conducted with the equipment operational in a controlled
environment of 0 to 55C.
8.5.4 Magnetic Field-The high magnetic fields caused by
ship degaussing can disturb the displays on CRT screens. If
critical information needs to be read during degaussing, con-
sider the use of fiat-panel displays instead of CRT displays.
8.5.5 Vibration Equipment shall be subjected to endurance
testing at fixed frequencies based upon the critical frequencies
determined from the vibration response testing. When vibra-
tion response investigation does not identify any critical
frequencies, testing shall be conducted at the maximum vibra-
tion frequency of 100 Hz and 0.076 mm vibration amplitude.
8.5.6 Electromagnetic Susceptibility-The equipment shall
not be susceptible to electromagnetic emission in the room or
area in which it is installed.
8.5.7 Fungus/mold-The equipment shall not support fun-
gal or mold growth.
8.5.8 Salt Fog-Equipment shall be tested to withstand salt
fog when used in ship and marine locations that are susceptible
to salt fog conditions.
9. Keywords
9.1 bus; client; CPU; fiber optic; I/0; peripherals; RAM;
server; UTP; workstation
1614
F2218 - 02 (2008)
COPYRIGHT/).
1615
A Designation: F2283 -12
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Shipboard Oil Pollution Abatement System
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture,
installation, performance, and operation of a shipboard oil
pollution abatement system (OPAS) that collects, transfers, and
processes all the oily waste generated from incidental operation
of machinery spaces. This specification applies to commercial
and public vessels and is intended for use by designers,
manufacturers, purchasers, installers and operators of ship-
board OPAS to determine the requirements for system design,
equipment manufacture, equipment purchase, system integra-
tion and installation, and system in-service operation. This
specification and its supplementary sections may be tailored to
meet the specific user's needs to cover from OPAS new
construction to retrofitting of individual OPAS equipment.
1.2 OPAS is comprised of drain tanks, bilge suctions,
transfer pumps, Oily Bilge Water Holding Tanks, Oil Residue
(sludge) Tanks, 15 ppm Bilge Separator systems, 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm, automatic stopping device, and deck connections. The
15 ppm Bilge Separator is considered to be applicable for use
to separate oily bilge water and ballast water from fuel oil
tanks. Treatment of ballast water is addressed in other
regulations/ standards and is not addressed herein.
1.3 This specification covers the system from the point of
entering the OPAS until the oil-water mixture is treated, the
clean water meeting the applicable discharge limits is dis-
charged overboard, and the separated oil is contained for on
shore disposal or further treatment. It also includes concepts
for minimizing oily waste generation. The ASTM specification
is intended to augment the existing regulations, provide the
user options to meet their specific needs, and should not be
considered a replacement for overriding regulation.
1.4 It is recognized that the development and testing of high
capacity separating equipment designed for dealing with efflu-
ent from cargo tanks on tankers pose special problems and such
equipment is not required to be tested under International
Maritime Organization (IMO) Marine Environment Protection
1
Current edition approved June 1, 2012. Published September 2012. Originally
approved in 2004. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as F2283 - 04(2009).
DOl: 10.1520/F2283-12.
Committee (MEPC) resolution MEPC.l07(49) nor is it cov-
ered in this specification
1.5 There are means to reduce the volume of bilge and/or
process oily waste that are not considered 15 ppm Bilge
Separators systems. Examples include incinerators,
evaporators, combinations thereof, and other technologies.
Such processes may require addressing all potential issues with
the system such as toxicology and emissions to atmosphere.
Such means and/or processes are out of scope of this standard.
safety concerns, (f any, associated with its use. It is the
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
and Stainless Steel
B 165 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400)
Seamless Pipe and Tube
F993 Specification for Valve Locking Devices
Fl155 Practice for Selection and Application of
System Materials
F1323 Specification for Incinerators
F151 0 Specification for Positive
Use
Mechanical Seals for Shipboard
Electrical
F2045 for Indicators, Sight. LeveL
Direct and Indirect Tubular Glass/Plastic
2
the ASTM website.
1616
F2283-12
F2446 Classification for Hierarchy of Equipment Identifiers
and Boundaries for Reliability, Availability, and Maintain-
ability (RAM) Performance Data Exchange
2.2 ANSI/ASME Standards:
3
B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings
B 16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Valves and Fittings 150,
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 lb
B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings. Socket Welding and Threaded
B 16.24 Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings 150, 300 lb
2.3 Code of Federal Regulations:
4
33 CFR Part 155 Department of Homeland Security, U.S.
Coast Guard (USCG), Oil or Hazardous Material Pollu-
tion Prevention Regulations for Vessels
46 CFR Part J 47 Department of Homeland Security, U.S.
Coast Guard (USCG), Hazardous Ships' Stores
40 CFR Part 171 Depm1ment of Transpm1ation (DoT),
Research and Special Programs Administration (RSPA),
General Information, Regulations and Definitions
2.4 International Maritime Organization (IM0):
5
MARPOL 73178 International Convention for the Preven-
tion of Pollution from Ships, 1973 as modified by the
Protocol of 1978, Annex !-Prevention of Pollution by Oil
MEPC.107 (49) Resolution Revised Guidelines and Speci-
f-Ications for Pollution Prevention Equipment for Machin-
ery Space of Ships
IMO MEPC.187 (59) Amendments to the Annex of the
Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention
for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973
IMO MEPC.l/Circ.759 Guidelines for a Shipboard Oil
Waste Pollution Prevention Plan
IMO MEPC.l Circ 642 2008 Revised Guidelines for Sys-
tems for Handling Oily Waste in Machinery Spaces of
Ships Incorporating Guidance Notes for an Integrated
Bilge water Treatment System (IBTS)
IMO MEPC.1/Circ.760 Amendments to the 2008 Revised
Guidelines for Systems for Handling Oily Wastes in
Machinery Spaces of Ships Incorporating Guidance Notes
for an Integrated Bilge Water Treatment System (lBTS)
(MEPC.l/CIRC.642, as amended by MEPC.1/CIRC.676)
IMO MEPC.l Circ 677 Guide to Diagnosing Contaminants
in Oily Bilge Water to Maintain, Operate and Trouble-
shoot Bilge Water Treatment Systems
ANSl/ISA 60079-13 or IEC 60079-1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres-Part 1: Flameproof Enclo-
sures "d"
3
ANSI/ NEMA MG 1 Motors and generators
3
IEC 60085 ElectricaJ insulation-Thermal evaluation and
designation
6
3
4
732 N. Capitol St., NW, Mail Stop: SDE, Washington, DC 20401.
5
Available from International Maritime Organization (IMO) Publishing, 4 Albert
Embankment, London SEl 7SR, United Kingdom.
6
Available from International Electrotechnical Commission (lEC), 3 rue de
1617
IEC 60092-350 Electrical installations in ships--Part 350:
General construction and test methods of power. control
and instrumentation cables for shipboard and offshore
applications
6
IEC 60092-353 Electrical Installations in Ships-Part 353:
Single and Multicore Non-radial Field Power Cables with
Extruded Solids Insulation for Rated Voltages 1 KV and 3
KV
6
IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures,
International Protection Rating (lP Codes)
6
64 Federal Register Number 173, 8 September 1999 Con-
tiguous Zone Proclamation ANSI/NFPA No. 70 National
Electrical Code
7
IEEE 1580 Recommended Practice for Marine Cable for use
on Shipboard and Fixed or Floating Marine Platforms
8
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
9
Public Law 92-500 Federal Water Pollution Control Act,
October 18, 1972, as amended by Public Law 95-217,
Clean Water Act, December 27, 1977. as amended Under-
writers Laboratories Standard 913 (as revised April 8,
1976)
7
UL 913 Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Asso-
ciated Apparatus for Use in Class 1, II, III, Division 1,
Hazardous (Classified) l..,ocations
10
UL 1309 Standard for Safety Marine Shipboard Cable
10
UL 1203 Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition Electrical
Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
ISO 9377-2:2000 Water Quality-Determination of Hydro-
carbon Oillndex-Part 2: Method Using Solvent Extrac-
tion and Gas Chromatography
11
3. Terminology
3.1.1 15 ppm bilge alarm-an instrument that is designed to
measure the oil content of oily mixtures from machinery space
bilges and fuel oil tanks that carry ballast and activate an alarm
at a set concentration limit. Also, referred to in this standard as
Oil Content Monitor (OCM).
3.1.2 15 ppm bilge separator-device that may include any
combinations of a separator, filter, coalescer or other means,
and also a single unit designed to produce an effluent with oil
content not exceeding 15 ppm. Also, referred to in this
document as Oil-Water Separator (OWS).
3.1.3 automatic stopping device-a device that automati
cally stops any discharge overboard of oily mixture when the
oil content of the effluent exceeds 15 ppm. Also, referred to in
this document as diverter valve.
3.1.4 bilge primary tank-a tank used as a means of
pre-treatment for separation of oily bilge water.
7
732 N. Capitol St., NW, Mail Stop: SDE, Washington, DC 20401.
8
445 Hoes Ln., P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331
9
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), I Batterymarch
10
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Corporate Progress, 333
Pfingsten Rd., Northbrook, IL 60062.
11
F2283-12
3.1.5 bulk oil-liquid phase composed mostly of oil or oil
residue.
3.1.6 certifying administration-any entity appropriately
authorized by a government to carry out the functions pre-
scribed in regulations pertaining to oily waste.
3.1.7 commercial vessel-any vessel (that is, boat or ship)
engaged in commercial trade or that carries passengers for hire.
This would exclude pleasure craft that do not carry passengers
for hire or warships.
3.1.8 contiguous zone-the entire zone established by the
United States under Contiguous Zone Proclamation. Source
Presidential Proclamation 7219 of August 2, 1999.
3.1.9 discharge-includes, but is not limited to, any spilling,
leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying, or dumping,
however caused.
3.1.10 diverter valve-referred to in this document as auto-
matic stopping device.
3.1.11 flag state-the authority under which a country
exercises regulatory control over the commercial vessel which
is registered under its flag. This involves the inspection,
certification, and issuance of safety and pollution prevention
documents.
3.1.12 free oil-oil in water that is not chemically emulsi-
fied or highly dispersed by mechanical means.
3.1.13 GT-gross tonnage.
3.1.14 hazardous materials-any material or combination
of material that poses a substantial danger to human beings,
plants, animals and the marine environment. A material is
hazardous if it possesses one or more of the following
characteristics: ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, toxicity, and
radioactivity.
3.1.15 Integrated Bilge Water Treatment System (IBTS)-a
system to minimize the amount of oily bilge water generated in
machinery spaces by treating the leaked water and oil sepa-
rately. It also provides an integrated means to process the oily
bilge water and oil residue (sludge).
3 .1.16 IM 0-International Maritime Organization
3 .1.17 independent laboratory-a laboratory that is not
owned or controlled by a manufacturer, supplier, or vendor of
15 ppm bilge separators, or 15 ppm bilge alarms.
3.1.18 manufacturer-a vendor, shipbuilder, shipyard, or
any other supplier of OPAS equipment and/or components.
3.1.19 MARPOL-Marine Pollution convention
3.1.20 MARPOL 73/78-International Convention for the
Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 as modified by the
Protocol of 1978.
3 .1.21 MARPO L 7 3178 Annex /--Prevention of Pollution by
Oil
3.1.22 MEPC-Marine Environment Protection Committee
3.1.23 oil-petroleum, synthetic oil, fuel oil, bio-fuel,
sludge, oil refuse, and oil mixed with wastes other than
dredged soil.
1618
3.1.24 Oil Content Monitor (OCM)-referred in this stan-
dard as 15 ppm Bilge Alarm.
3 .1.25 oil residue (sludge )-the residual waste oil products
generated during the normal operation of a ship such as those
resulting from the purification of fuel or lubricating oil for
main or auxiliary machinery, separated waste oil from oil
filtering equipment, waste oil collected in drip trays, and waste
hydraulic and lubricating oils. Sometimes, refened to as waste
oil.
3.1.26 Oil Residue (sludge) Tank-a tank which holds oil
residue (sludge) from which sludge may be disposed directly
through the standard discharge connection or any other ap-
proved means of disposal. Sometimes, refened to as Waste Oil
Tank.
3.1.27 oily bilge water--water which may be contaminated
by oil resulting from things such as leakage or maintenance
work in machinery spaces. Any liquid entering the bilge system
including bilge wells, bilge piping, tank top or bilge holding
tanks is considered oily bilge water.
3 .1.28 oily waste-oil residues (sludge) and oily bilge water.
3.1.29 Oil Pollution Abatement System (OPAS)-system
that collects, transfers, and processes all the oily waste gener-
ated during a ship's normal service and allows overboard
discharge of waters meeting legal requirements.
3.1.30 OPAS Integrator-shipyard, installer, owner operator
or any other organization responsible for providing the entire
OPAS.
3.1.31 Oil-Water Separator (OWS)-referred in this docu-
ment as 15 ppm Bilge Separator.
3.1.32 overboard discharge-treated bilge water which is
analyzed by the Bilge Alarm and pumped to the sea.
3.1.33 ppm-parts of oil per million parts of water by
volume.
3.1.34 public vessel-a vessel owned or bareboat chartered
and operated by the United States, or by a State or political
subdivision thereof, or by a foreign nation, except when the
vessel is engaged in commerce.
3.1.35 remove or removal-refers to containment and re-
moval of the oil from the water and shorelines or the taking of
such other actions as may be necessary to prevent, minimize, or
mitigate damage to the public health or welfare, including, but
not limited to, fish, shellfish, wildlife, and public and private
property, shorelines, and beaches.
3.1.36 settleable solids--small particles that can sink in a
given liquid.
3.1.37 synthetic oil-oils that are not petroleum based.
3.] .38 treated bilge water-bilge water that has been pro-
cessed by the ] 5 ppm Bilge Separator.
3.1.39 United States-the States, the District of Columbia,
the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the
Northern Mariana Islands, Guam, American Samoa, the Virgin
Islands, and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands.
3.1.40 vessel-every description of watercraft or other arti-
ficial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of
transportation on water other than a sea plane.
F2283-12
3.1.41 waste oil-referred in this document as oil residue
(sludge).
4.1 Orders shall include the following information:
4.1.1 Sizing requirements.
4.1.2 Processing rate requirements.
4.1.3 Additional control requirements.
4.1.4 All applicable requirements contained in the supple-
mentary requirements section.
4.1.5 Any additional requirements required by the purchaser
to meet special needs.
5.1 Integrated Oil Pollution Abatement System Description:
5.1.1 The purpose of the Oil Pollution Abatement System
(OPAS) is to reduce the volume of oil-contaminated water that
must be held onboard the This is accomplished by
processing oily bilge water by the OPAS to produce treated
bilge water meeting regulatory limits that can be discharged
overboard through the 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm
Bilge Alarm. The system allows treatment of the oily bilge
water through the 15 ppm Bilge Separator; or transfer of the
oily bilge water directly to the Bilge Primary Tank or discharge
through the standard deck connection. The OPAS as an
integrated system is intended to operate on oily bilge water
collected after segregation of oil residue and oil free water to
minimize the amount of bilge water to be treated. The OPAS is
composed of integrated sub-systems to accomplish the follow-
ing major functions; collection, holding and transfer of oily
bilge water and oil residue (sludge), and processing and
monitoring of oily bilge water to reduce its oil content to not
exceed 15 ppm to allow its discharge to overboard. The
integrated OPAS is shown in 1.
5.1.2 Collection Sub-system:
5.1.2.1 The Collection sub-system consists of bilge wells,
oily bilge water drain tanks, oil residue (sludge) drain tanks,
oily drains and oily bilge water drains to collect oily waste
generated during systems operation and maintenance, leaks,
and accidental oil spills. This collected oily bilge water is
transferred to the Bilge Primary Tank using the oily waste
transfer pump. Collected oil residue (sludge) is transferred to
the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank using oil residue (sludge)
collecting pump
5.1.3 Holding Sub-system:
5.1.3.1 The Holding sub-system consists of the Bilge Pri-
mary Tank, Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, and the Oil
Residue (sludge) Tank to provide temporary holding of oily
bilge water and oil residue (sludge) for ashore disposal or oily
bilge water processing.
( 1) Bilge Primary Tank-The Bilge Primary Tank is pro-
vided as a pre-treatment unit for initial separation of bulk and
free oils and settleable solids from the oily bilge water prior to
being sent to the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank. Baffles divide
the tank in two sections, an oily section and a water section. All
oily bilge water discharges and drains are directed to the oily
section. In there, bulk and free oils float and accumulate at the
top, settleable solids start to sink and accumulate on the
bottom. The separated oil phase is transferred by skimming or
other means to the oily residue (sludge) tank for disposal
ashore or disposal by other approved means. The bilge water
flows under the first baffle and over the second baffle into the
water section. The water phase drains or is pumped into the
Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank.
(2) Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank-The Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tank is provided to collect and provide temporary
holding for the oily bilge water prior to its discharge, transfer,
disposal or processing by the 15 ppm Bilge Separator. The
separated oil phase is transferred by skimming or other means
to the oily residue (sludge) tank for disposal ashore or disposal
by other approved means. The Bilge Primary and Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tanks may be combined to increase settling
time and to reduce space.
(3) Oil Residue (sludge) Tank--An Oil Residue (sludge)
Tank is provided to hold oil residue (sludge) from which oil
residue (sludge) may be directly transferred ashore through the
standard discharge connection or any other approved means of
disposal. Any accumulated water is drained or pumped to the
Bilge Primary Tank.
5.1.4 Transfer Sub-system:
5 .1.4.1 The transfer system consists of transfer pumps,
piping, valves, hose connections, and other items intended to
transfer oily waste. Oily waste transfer pump(s) moves oily
bilge water from the bilges via bilge wells and hose
connections, oily bilge water drain tanks or other oily bilge
water sources to the Bilge Primary Tank or the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank for subsequent processing by the 15 ppm
Bilge Separator system. The oily waste transfer pump(s) can
also move oily bilge water from the bilges, oily bilge water
drain tanks, Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, and Bilge Primary
Tank to deck connections for off-loading to shore. In addition,
the oily waste transfer pump(s) can move oil from the bilges to
the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank or to the deck connections in
case of an oil spill in the bilge area. The oil residue (sludge)
collecting pumps transfer collected oil residue (sludge) to the
Oil Residue (sludge) Tank. Also, this pump may be connected
to the oil removal line to move skimmed oil to the Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank if gravity drain cannot be achieved.
5.1.4.2 The oil residue (sludge) pump moves Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank content to the deck connections for offloading to
shore or to an incinerator or boiler if available.
5.1.4.3 Hose connections allow the use of hoses at the oily
waste transfer pump(s) suction piping to reach any point in the
bilges.
5.1.5 Processing and Monitoring Sub-systems:
5.1.5.1 The 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm are installed to remove oil from the oily bilge water
pumped from the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, send the
removed oil to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank, and send the
water effluent overboard or back to the Primary Bilge Tank
depending on the decision of the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm.
5.1.5.2 Optional Pre-Treatment-Pre-treatment units may
be provided to enhance the 15 ppm Bilge Separator system
performance and/or reliability.
1619
F2283 -12
To Deck
To Optional Incinerator/ Boiler
(Oil/Sludge Phase Only)
Oily Drains
Oil Residue
Overboard
NOTES:
0
Pump
1. Bilge Primary and Oily Bilge Water Holding Tanks may be combined.
y Drain funnel
2. Also, refer as Oil/Water Separator (OWS)
3. Also, refer as Oil Content Monitor (OCM)
Oil phase
4. Typically a 3-way diverter valve.
....
5. lf gravity drain cannot be achieved, an alternative arrangement may be fitted, provided that it does not
connect directly to the bilge piping system and that allows removal of the water phase only.
V1
1><1
Check valve
Cut-offvalvc
6. Maybe connected to the suction piping of the Oil Residue (Sludge) Collecting Pump if gravity drain
cannot be achieved, provided that tank level indicators or other means are available to allow pumping of
the oil phase only. Alternatively, mechanical skimmers may be used.
Cut-off valve with
locking device
7. Oil Residue (Sludge) Pump and Oil Residue (Sludge) Collecting Pump maybe combined.
FIG. 1 Notional Oil Pollution Abatement System
5.1.5.3 Processing: 15 ppm Bilge Separator-The 15 ppm
Bilge Separator system may be a multi-staged treatment train
consisting of several unit operations or separation technolo-
gies. The 15 ppm Bilge Separator system treats the oily bilge
water to produce an effluent not to exceed 15 ppm unless a
lower concentration is specified in the purchase contract. The
separated oil is sent to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank and the
treated water phase effluent is monitored by a 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm. The overboard discharge piping is provided with a Port
State Inspection valve and return piping to the Bilge Primary
Tank to allow system inspection and testing.
5.1.5.4 Monitoring: 15 ppm Bilge Alarm and Automatic
Stopping Device-A 15 ppm Bilge Alarm and automatic
stopping device are installed downstream of the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator to ensure compliance with environmental regulations
by preventing oil from being discharged overboard. The 15
ppm Bilge Alarm constantly monitors the effluent from the 15
ppm Bilge Separator and controls the automatic stopping
device to allow overboard discharge only if the oil content does
not exceed 15 ppm or recycled back to the Bilge Primary Tank
for reprocessing if it is greater than 15 ppm. Typically, a 3-way
diverter valve is used as the automatic stopping device.
1620
5.2 Bilge Management: Design and Maintenance (Preven-
tion) (Ref" IMO MEPC.1 Circ 642,677 and 760):
5.2.1 Successful bilge water management, design and main-
tenance requires a three pronged strategy-Minimizing oily
waste entering the bilge; minimizing clean waste water from
0 F2283-12
entering the bilge; and minimizing contaminants entering the
bilge. To prevent many of the problems with the operation of
bilge treatment systems, it is important to identify potential
sources of bilge water contamination and incorporate in the
design of OPAS features to minimize the introduction of
excessive clean operating water and contaminants. Also nec-
essary is the management of bilge water in the daily routines of
machinery space operations. These management philosophies
should be incorporated into the operating and maintenance
procedures of an OPAS (see Section 7). Bilge water contami-
nants include, but are not limited to: oil (sludge) residues,
solvents, detergents, iron oxide particles (rust or "rouge"),
engine room soot, and "biological" contaminants. Biological
contaminants are products of bacterial and microbial decom-
position. These include sewage and growth of life forms in the
bilge and piping. Chemicals, particulate matter, and biological
detritus in bilge water can cause the OPAS to malfunction. In
a typical vessel, the main sources of oily waste, excessive
water, and contamination in bilge water and Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tanks include: diesel engine after coolers (clean
water); sludge from decanting I bottom draining storage and
sludge tanks; lube oil and fuel oil purification (oily water); fuel
oil storage and settling tanks (oily water); lube oil and fuel oil
filtration (oil); machinery leakages; condensate from air com-
pressors and compressed air systems; diesel engine piston
stuffing box leakages and piston underside blow-down (slow-
speed diesels only); boiler water I condensate drains (different
than piston cooling water because these include other types of
chemicals (for example, solvents), causing different concerns);
equipment and engine room washing; economizer water wash-
ing; seawater I freshwater cooling (a potential source of
biological contaminants); firefighting foam; water treatment
chemicals; engine coolant; grey water drains; sanitary system
leaks and overflows; and air conditioning and refrigeration
condensate. Figure 2 is provided for illustrative purposes. It is
an example of a flow diagram of several (of many potential)
sources of bilge water contamination.
Excessive clean water entering the bilge can overwork the
OPAS and lead to system failure. Both the volume of waste oil
to be separated and the volume of water entering the bilge are
a major concern for proper management of on board bilge
water. Prevention of excessive oily waste generation directly
associated with the maintenance, cleaning and operation of
equipment and systems within a machinery space can decrease
the "wear and tear" on oily bilge water treatment systems and
the likelihood of system failure.
5.2.2 An assessment of potential sources of bilge water
contamination and excessive clean water should be conducted
in the OPAS design phase and prior to retrofitting to assess the
design features, preventive measures and procedures required
in the OPAS' documentation.
5.2.3 Design Features to Minimize Contaminants-The
items in Table 1 present means to minimize bilge contaminants
and optimize bilge design. Applicability to retrofitted systems
or newly installed systems is marked as appropriate.
5.3 Design of Oil Pollution Abatement System:
NoTE 1-The design and installation of OPAS and its components shall
comply with the applicable classification and regulatory design standards
and requirements. The information contained in this document is intended
to complement those standards and requirements.
5.3.1 Collection Sub-system:
5.3.1.1 Vessels shall be designed to minimize oily bilge
water generation and to facilitate segregation of oil residues,
non-oily bilge water, solvents, surfactants and detergents from
oily bilge water as recommended in 5.2.3.
5.3.1.2 The machinery spaces shall be provided with bilge
wells, drain tanks, drain funnels, and drain pans to collect oily
waste generated during systems operation and maintenance,
leaks, and accidental oil spills.
FIG. 2 Example of Shipboard Flow Diagram: Sources of Contamination in Bilge Water
1621
Section Number
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.3
5.2.3.4
5.2.3.5
5.2.3.6
5.2.3.7
5.2.3.8
5.2.3.9
5.2.3.10
5.2.3.11
5.2.3.12
5.2.3.13
5.2.3.14
5.2.3.15
5.2.2.16
5.2.2.17
5.2.2.18
0 F2283-12
TABLE 1 Design Features to Minimize Contaminants
Design Feature
Design machinery spaces to be as dry as practical and provide means for
condensation containment and diversion via clean drains to minimize the volume
of water entering the bilge.
Incorporate oil drip pans and other oil containment devices to collect oily waste
in engine room and auxiliary spaces and pipe these oily wastes directly to oil
residue (sludge) tank or oil residue (sludge) drain tank.
Incorporate soot contaminated waste water collection systems, including but not
limited, to particle filters and water holding tanks into systems' design.
Direct overflow piping from sewage systems to a containment tank or overboard
with an alarm to indicate the same. Ensure that sewage drains do not comingle
with engine and auxiliary space bilges.
Pipe directly overboard evaporator dump in place of dumping to bilge.
Install premium seals in order to prevent leakage into the bilge.
Incorporate mechanical seals in machinery and auxiliary space pumps. Refer to
ASTM F1511.
Install skimming arrangements for Oi!y Bi!ge \"later Holding Tanks and Bilge
Primary Tanks in order to skim oil from the top for discharge into Oil Residue
(sludge) Tanks.
Optimize slow speed diesel cylinder oil to minimize leakage.
Incorporate oil cooled cooling designs versus water cooled designs in slow
speed diesel piston cooling systems.
Incorporate modern-type lip-seal systems with protections in place to minimize
sea water intrusion and oil leakage in propeller shaft seal design.
Reduce or prevent the introduction of soot into bilge water by reducing the need
for economizer water washing to reduce soot.
Segregate air compressor blow down lines by piping these to drainage systems
to prevent oil contamination of existing bilge water.
Prevent the introduction of synthetic oils and emulsifying agents into bilge water
or the ship's OPAS.
Coat bilges with corrosion resistant coatings, particularly in low point collections
areas.
Install tanks and piping with corrosion resistant coatings.
Install Bilge Primary Tank with the following characteristics:
High aspect ratio
Heating coils
Non-skin tank to minimize heat loss
Internal baffling to minimize mixing due to vessel movement
Access to allow cleaning/removal of heavy sludge.
D1rect clean drains to prevent clean water from entering the OPAS.
Retrofitting
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
New Construction
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.3.1.3 When feasible, oily bilge water and oil residues shall
drain directly to the Bilge Primary Tank oil section and the Oil
Residue (sludge) Tank, respectively.
5.3.1.4 Oily bilge water drain tanks shall be provided to
collect oily bilge water drains that cannot be directed to the oil
section of the Bilge Primary Tank.
( 1) Oily bilge water may drain directly to the oil section
of this tank or can be collected in the bilges or smaller drain
tanks and transferred to the oil section of this tank using the
oily waste transfer pumps.
5.3 .1.5 Oil Residue (sludge) drain tanks shall be provided to
collect oily drains that cannot be directed to the Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank.
5.3.1.6 All collected oily bilge water shall be transferred to
the oil section of the Bilge Primary Tank using the oily waste
transfer pump (s) or by gravity drain.
5.3 .1. 7 All collected oil residue (sludge) shall be transferred
to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank using the oil residue (sludge)
collecting pump (s) or by gravity drain.
5.3 .2 Holding Sub-system:
5.3.2.1 Bilge Primary Tank:
( 1) A Bilge Primary Tank shall be provided as a pre-
treatment unit for separation of bulk oil and settleable solids
from the oily bilge water prior to discharge into the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank for subsequent processing by the 15 ppm
Bilge Separator. Refer to IMO MEPC.1/Circ 642.
(2) The Bilge Primary Tank shall be designed as a baffled
settling tank as shown in Fig. l. The baffles shall divide the
tank in two sections, an oil section and a water section.
( 3) All oily bilge water discharges and drains entering this
tank shall be directed to the oil section and as far as possible
from the baffle.
( 4) Piping shall be provided to allow oily bilge water from
the bottom of the water section to flow to the top of the Oily
Bilge Water Holding Tank. This piping shall be as far as
possible from the baffle and shall be provided with a clearance
between the piping suction and the bottom of the tank to avoid
suction of solids or sludge accumulated at the bottom of the
tank.
( 5) Each section of the tank shall be designed to allow
separation of the bulk oil, large free oil droplets and settleable
solids by gravity as the oily bilge water moves from the oil.
section to the water section of the tank. In general, tall and
slender tanks are preferred over short and stout tanks to
enhance oil and water gravity separation. The following
considerations are provided as guidelines:
1622
( 1) Provide enough tank height to allow separated oil to
accumulate at the top of the water phase even during
movement.
F2283 -12
(2) The oil is considered separated when it reaches a level
that is higher than the bottom opening of the baffie in the oil
section and the bottom clearance of the overflow piping to the
Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank in the water section.
( 3) The rise velocity of the oil droplets can be determined
using Stoke's Law, which is defined as follows:
V= [g*d
2
6.pY(l8,u)
v
V droplet rise velocity
g gravity constant
d diameter of oil droplet
~ specific gravity of water - specific gravity of oil
J1 viscosity of water
( 4) 'Vhen feasible, design to remove the smallest free oil
droplet possible (for example within the 100 to 500 micrometer
range).
( 5) Consider expected average and peak influent flow
rates.
(6) Consider hydraulic residence time.
(6) Means shall be provided to manually or automatically
transfer any accumulated bulk oil from each of the two sections
of the tank to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank. The oil may
gravity drain to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank or drain tank via
an oil removal line with shut off valve and funnel to ensure that
only the oil phase is drained. Alternatively:
( 1) The drain piping may be connected to the suction
piping of the Sludge Collecting Pump if gravity drain cannot be
achieved, provided that tank level indicators or other means are
available to allow pumping of the oil phase only.
(2) Or, a mechanical skimmer may be considered to
accomplish this function.
(7) Means shall be provided for manually or automatically
preventing the accumulated oil phase in the oil section and the
water section, from moving to the water section and the Oily
Bilge Water Holding Tank, respectively.
(8) Means shall be provided to easily access and remove
any accumulated solids and sludge from the bottom of the oil
and water sections of the Bilge Primary Tank.
(9) The bilge primary and Oily Bilge Water Holding Tanks
may be combined to reduce space or for any other design
constraints. If combined, the 15 ppm Bilge Separator suction
shall be from the water section and all other Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tank requirements shall apply to the water section.
5.3.2.2 Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank:
( 1) An Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank shall be provided to
collect oily bilge water and provide temporary holding prior to
its processing, discharge, transfer or disposal.
(2) Calculations of the expected oily bilge water generation
rate shall be perfonned to determine tank size and shall account
for the propulsion plant, drainage systems, ship arrangement,
auxiliary equipment, condensation, equipment and machinery
cleaning, fuel stripping systems, and all other relevant infor-
mation.
( 3) For vessels greater than 400 gross tonnages (GT),
OPAS design shall collect oily water in a dedicated Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank sized to hold the oily water production
during normal routine operations of a typical voyage. Refer to
MARPOL 73178 Annex 1 and MEPC.l87
( 4) For vessels less than 400 GT, oily waste shall be
permitted to be stored in the bilge or dedicated holding tank. If
not equipped with a 15 ppm Bilge Separator, it shall have the
capacity to hold oily waste for the entire duration of anj
voyage. Refer to MARPOL 73178 Annex 1.
( 5) Piping shall be provided from the bottom of this tank
for the 15 ppm Bilge Separator suction.
(6) A clearance shall be provided between the 15 ppm
Bilge Separator suction piping and the bottom of the tank to
avoid suction of solids or sludge accumulated at the bottom of
the tank.
(7) All the discharges entering this tank shall be directed as
far as possible from the suction piping of the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator.
transfer any accumulated bulk oil on top of the water phase in
the tank to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank. The oil may gravity
drain to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank or drain tank via an oil
removal line with shut off valve and funnel to ensure that only
the oil phase is drained.
( 1) Alternatively, the drain piping maybe connected to the
suction piping of the Sludge Collecting Pump if gravity drain
cannot be achieved, provided that tank level indicators or other
means are available to allow pumping of the oil phase only.
(9) Means shall be provided for manually or automatically
preventing the accumulated oil phase to reach the bell mouth of
the suction piping of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator.
( 10) Means shall be provided to easily access and remove
any accumulated solids and sludge from the bottom of the tank.
5.3.2.3 Oil Residue (sludge) Tank:
(1) An Oil Residue (sludge) Tank shall be provided to hold
oil residue (sludge) from which oil residue (sludge) may be
directly transferred ashore through the standard discharge
connection or any other approved means of disposal.
(2) The oily residue (sludge) tank(s) shall satisfy the
requirement for sludge tanks prescribed in MARPOL 73/78
Annex 1, Regulation 12.1.
(3) Oily drains may be sent directly to Oil Residue (sludge)
Tank or may be collected into oil residue (sludge) drain tanks
and then transferred to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank using the
oil residue (sludge) collecting pumps.
remove any water phase from the bottom of the tank to the oil
section of the Primary Bilge Tank. The water may gravity drain
to the oil section of the Primary Bilge Tank or oily bilge water
drain tank via a water removal line with shut off valve and
funnel to ensure that only the water phase is drained.
1623
( 1) Alternatively, this tank may be fitted with an alterna-
tive arrangement, provided that this arrangement does not
connect directly to the bilge piping system and allows removal
of the water phase only.
(2) If the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank will be decanted to
the OPAS, a device such as a sight glass or level indictor shall
be provided to monitor the oil-water interface level in the Oil
Residue (sludge) Tank to prevent introduction of oily sludge
into the OPAS.
( 5) Means shall be provided to easily access and remove
any accumulated solids and sludge from the bottom of the tank.
F2283-12
5.3.3 Transfer Sub-system:
5.3.3.1 Oily Waste Transfer pump(s) and associated piping
shall be provided for handling of oily bilge water and trans-
ferring it to shore connections.
5.3.3.2 The Oily Waste Transfer pump(s) shall take suction
from: bilge wells, oily bilge water drain tanks, hose
connections, Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, oil and water
sections of the Bilge Primary Tank, and any other sources of
bilge water.
5.3.3.3 Hose connections or other means may be provided at
each space that generates oily water to allow complete access
to the space by using a hose.
5.3.3.4 The Oily Waste Transfer pump(s) shall discharge to:
deck connections, Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, and the oil
section of the Bilge Primary Tank. Also, this pump shaH be
capable of discharging to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank in the
event of an oil spill in the bilge areas.
5.3.3.5 A dedicated oil residue (sludge) pump shall be
provided to transfer oil residue from the Oil Residue (sludge)
Tank to shore connections or the ship's incinerator (if pro-
vided).
5.3.3.6 A dedicated oil residue (sludge) collecting pump
shall be provided to transfer of oil residue from oil residue
(sludge) drain tanks to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank.
5.3.3.7 The oil residue (sludge) pump and oil residue
(sludge) collecting pump may be combined.
5.3.3.8 OPAS pumps shall impatt low shear force into the
bilge water in all suction lines before the oil-water 15 ppm
Bilge Separator, including the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank,
therefore centrifugal pumps shall not be used for this purpose.
5.3.3.9 OPAS pumps shall meet ASTM F151 0 or equivalent
standard.
5.3.3.10 The OPAS may be automated to take suction from
oily water generating spaces by means of level switches.
5.3.3.11 A relief valve shall be installed at the discharge of
each positive displacement process pump to protect them from
over pressurization. The relief valve tail piping should dis-
charge to a collecting tank via a funnel to minimize water
entering into the bilges.
5.3.3.12 Pressure gauges shall be provided at the suction
and discharge of each process pump to verify proper operation
of the pumps.
5.3.3.13 Strainers with baskets shall be provided at the
pump's suction to remove large particles that may damage the
pump.
5.3.3.14 Means shall be provided such as differential pres-
sure switch with alarm to alert the operator when the strainer
basket needs to be cleaned.
5.3.3.15 Deck Connections:
( 1) Transfer pump piping risers with standard deck dis-
charge connections shall be provided to enable ships to
discharge oily bilge waste water and oil residue (sludge) to
shore facilities.
(2) An International Maritime Organization (IMO) stan-
dard discharge connections shall be provided to allow compat-
ibility between the deck discharge connections and shore
facilities at worldwide ports. (MARPOL 73178 Annex 1,
regulation 13)
1624
( 3) Deck connections shall be outfitted with a containment
device as per class or Flag state requirements.
5.3.3.16 Automated Transfer System (Optional):
( 1) This is an optional requirement and shall apply only
when specified by the purchase or contract. For specific
requirements, refer to Section S4 Supplementary Requirements
for Automated Oily Waste Transfer (AOWT) System.
(2) NOTE-This supplementary requirement may be in-
cluded in the purchaser's order or contract. When so included,
the supplementary requirement shall have the same force as if
it were in the body of the specification. Supplementary
requirements details not fully described shall be agreed upon
between the purchaser and the supplier, but shall not negate
any of the requirements in the body of the specification.
5.3.4 Processing and Monitoring Sub-systems:
5.3.4.1 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge Alarm
shall be installed to remove oil from the oily bilge water
pumped from the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, send the
removed oil to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank, and send the
water effluent overboard or back to the Bilge Primary Tank
depending on the decision of the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm.
5.3.4.2 Optional Pre-treatment:
( 1) The OPAS should aid in the separation of oil, solids and
other contaminants from the oily bilge water by pretreatment
prior to the oily bilge water being processed by the 15 ppm
Bilge Separator. This pretreatment of oily bilge water should
aid in increasing the efficiency of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator
and decrease operating labor and 15 ppm Bilge Separator
maintenance.
(2) Optional Pre-treatment technologies include particle
removal and heat treatment among others. A table of options is
contained in supplementary section Table S 1.4.
( 3) NOTE: One or more of the supplementary requirements
listed in Table S1.4 may be included in the purchaser's order or
contract. When so included, the supplementary requirement
shall have the same force as if it were in the body of the
specification. Supplementary requirements details not fully
described shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and the
supplier, but shall not negate any of the requirements in the
body of the specification.
5.3.4.3 15 ppm Bilge Separator:
(1) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall comply with all the
MEPC.l 07 ( 49) requirements as determined by an independent
laboratory and approved by an authorized government entity.
(2) Feed Pump
( 1) The feed pump (or pumps) is part of the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator unit and can be located upstream or downstream of
this unit, or as required in a multi-staged treatment system.
(2) Low shear pumps shall be used to minimize the
mixing of the oil in water entering the 15 ppm Bilge Separator
system.
(3) Feed pumps shall meet ASTM Fl510 or equivalent
standard.
( 3) A 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall be provided and shall
be sized to process the oily water at a rate based on the daily
generation of oily bilge water.
( 4) When determining the process rate of the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator, consider the clean water used to backflush any of the
F2283-12
15 ppm Bilge Separator stages, any of the pretreatment units,
and/or the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm. These processes require the
addition of clean water to the OPAS, which may reduce the
overall net processing rate of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator.
(5) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator system may be a single or
multi-staged treatment train consisting of several unit opera-
tions or separation technologies. Regardless of the technology
used, the 15 ppm Bilge Separator system shall effectively treat
free oils and emulsified oils, and produce an effluent not to
exceed 15 ppm unless a lower concentration is specified in the
purchase contract.
(6) Each 15 PPM Bilge Separator shall be designed so that
adjustments to valves or other equipment are not necessary to
start it.
(7) Each 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall be designed to be
operated both automatically and manually and shall require a
minimum of crew attention.
(1) Each 15 ppm Bilge Separator to be installed in an
unattended machinery space shall be capable of operating
automatically for at least twenty-four (24) hours.
(2) In automatic, the 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall start
when the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank total liquid level
reaches a predetermined level (for example, 50%).
(3) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator system shall automati-
cally stop before the oil-water interface inside the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank level reaches the suction bell mouth to
allow processing only the water phase. In addition, a manual
override shall be provided to stop the system at any time.
( 8) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall be designed so that it
does not rely in whole or in part on dilution of influent or
effluent mixtures as a means of performing its function in
meeting the regulatory requirements.
(9) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall have a 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm complying with MEPC.1 07 ( 49) installed and other
requirements listed herein.
(10) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall be designed and
constructed to resist internal and external corrosion due to the
marine environment.
(11) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall have a dedicated
suction from the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank or from the
water section of the Bilge Primary Tank if these tanks are
combined.
( 12) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall send separated oil to
the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank and shall send processed water
overboard or recirculate to the water section of the Bilge
Primary Water Holding Tank depending on the 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm decision.
( 13) The 15 ppm Bilge Separator system shall have ad-
equate pressure indications to assess system operation. Pres-
sure indications must be provided locally for troubleshooting
purposes as well as to the interface/control station(s). At a
minimum, pressures shall be determined at the pump inlet and
outlet and across strainers or other equipment that may become
clogged. If required by the 15 ppm Bilge Separator technology,
temperature indications shall also be provided.
( 14) Treated bilge water exceeding the oil content limit
shall be recirculated to the Bilge Primary Tank for reprocess-
ing.
1625
(15) From Resolution MEPC. 107(49) the OPAS must be
capable of handling any oily mixtures from the machinery
space bilges and be expected to be effective over the complete
range of oils which might be carried on board ship, and deal
satisfactorily with oil of very high relative density, or with a
mixture presented to it as an emulsion. With the possibility of
emulsified bilge water always present, the 15 ppm bilge
separator must be capable of separating the oil from the
emulsion to produce treated bilge water with an oil content not
exceeding 15 ppm.
(16) Sample Ports:
(1) AnIMO sample port, as required by MEPC.107 (49)
section 6.1.1, shall be installed at the 15 ppm Bilge Separator
water effluent piping prior to the diverter valve as shown in
1. Aitematively, a sample port may tee off from the 15 ppm
Bilge Alarm sampling line.
(2) Additional sample ports should be installed on the
influent pipe to the process system (on the pressure side of the
pump, if the pump is upstream of the process system), across
treatment stages and on the oil discharge line in accordance
with 1.
( 3) The IMO sample ports should be installed in an
upward, fully developed flow in a vertical pipe and be in an
accessible location to allow sample collection.
( 4) All sample ports shall be provided with a protective
device to prevent bending and breakage from incidental
contact.
(17) Additional 15 ppm Bilge Separator Device require-
ments (Optional): The following additional requirements for
the 15 ppm Bilge Separator are optional and are contained in
Supplementary Section S1:
(1) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Separator for purchaser
specified fluid "D", Section S 1.1. Fluid "D" may consist of
single oil, oil mixture, and/or contaminants specified by the
purchaser.
(2) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Separator at discharge limits
lower than 15 ppm, Section S 1. 2. Some special areas may
require a discharge limit lower than 15 ppm (for example, 5
ppm).
( 3) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Separator for Reliability,
Maintainability, and Availability, Section Sl.3. This require-
ment is to ensure reliability, maintainability and availability to
satisfy purchaser's needs.
(4) NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
ments may be included in the purchaser's order or contract.
When so included, the supplementary requirement shall have
the same force as if it were in the body of the specification.
Supplementary requirements details not fully described shall
be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier, but
shall not negate any of the requirements in the body of the
specification.
5.3.4.4 Monitoring: 15 ppm Bilge Alarm and Automatic
Stopping Device
(1) A 15 ppm Bilge Alarm and automatic stopping device
shall be installed downstream of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator to
ensure compliance with environmental regulations by prevent-
ing oil from being discharged overboard.
(2) 15 ppm Bilge Alarm:
F2283-12
(1) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall comply with all the
MEPC.1 07 ( 49) requirements as determined by an independent
laboratory and approved by an authorized government entity.
(2) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall continuously draw a
sample from the 15 ppm Bilge Separator effiuent, measure its
oil content, and, depending on the alarm status, signal the
diverter valve to send the 15 ppm Bilge Separator effiuent
overboard or return to the Bilge Primary Tank.
( 3) Alarm conditions shall occur when the oil content
exceeds the set limit or under any condition that would affect
the oil content determination.
(4) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall interface with the 15
ppm Bilge Separator to activate automatically whenever the 15
ppm Bilge Separator is in operation.
(5) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm design shall provide for
flushing and self-cleaning capabilities and for automatically
positioning the automatic stopping device to return all effluent
during these processes to the Bilge Primary Tank. It is
recommended that the flushing feature be automated to provide
flushing at system shut-down.
(6) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall provide outputs for
remote indication of; operating status, ppm readings, alarm
status, any malfunction indication, and any other 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm indication.
(7) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall be designed to operate
only when it receives a sample flow and not when the sample
is stagnant.
(8) Means shall be provided to simulate alarm conditions
to allow testing of the diverter valve and the alarm indicators.
( 3) Additional 15 ppm Bilge Alarm System requirements
(Optional): The following additional requirements for the 15
ppm Bilge Alarm are optional and are contained in Supple-
mentary Section S2:
( 1) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm for purchaser speci-
fied fluid "D", Section S2.1 Fluid "D" may consist of single oil,
oil mixture, and/or contaminants specified by the purchaser.
(2) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm for discharge limits
lower than 15 ppm, Section S2.2. Some special areas may
require a discharge limit lower than 15 ppm (for example, 5
ppm).
( 3) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm for detection of "free
oil," Section S2.3. This requirement is to ensure that the 15
ppm Bilge Alarm detects large oil droplets of "free oil" that
may be present in the effiuent during 15 ppm Bilge Separator
failure (for example, saturated filter media, membrane cracks
or broken seals, and others)
(4) Testing the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm for reliability,
maintainability, availability, Section S2.4. This requirement is
to ensure reliability, maintainability and availability to satisfy
purchaser's needs.
(5) Additional Recording Device to record additional
parameters not covered by MEPC.107 (49), Section S2.5.
(6) Tamper proof design, Sections S3.1 and S3.3.
(7) NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
specification
( 4) 15 ppm Bilge Alarm sampling port and sampling
device:
( 1) A sampling device shall be installed through a sam-
pling port installed in the 15 ppm Bilge Separator effluent
piping, downstream of alll5 ppm Bilge Separator components,
and upstream of the diverter valve to provide a sample to the
15 ppm Bilge Alarm, see Fig. 1.
(2) The recommended sampling port and sampling device
installation is as follows:
( 1) In a vertical section of pipe with at least ten pipe
diameters of unobstructed flow upstream and downstream of
the sampler (no elbows or valves).
(2) In a pipe with flow from low to high.
( 3) The sampling line shall be as short as possible to
minimize the travel time of the sample from the sampling
connection to the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm. This sample travel time
shall not exceed 15 seconds to ensure that the overall response
time does not exceed 20 seconds as required by MEPC.l 07
(49).
(4) Multi-port Nozzle Sampling Device (Optional)-A
multi-port nozzle sampling device is recommended for piping
larger than 1.5 inch nominal pipe diameter to ensure a
representative sample is taken. The sampler construction and
installation are contained in Supplementary Section S2.6.
( 1) NOTE-This supplementary requirement may be in-
any of the requirements in the body of the specification
5.3.4.5 Automatic Stopping Device: Diverter Valve:
( 1) An automatic stopping device shall be fitted down-
stream of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator to preclude overboard
discharge of unacceptable effiuent.
(2) The automatic stopping device may be a 3-way diverter
valve or two 2-way valves.
( 3) The position of the automatic stopping device shall be
controlled by the 15 ppm Bilge alarm.
( 4) The automatic stopping device shall meet the following
requirements:
( 1) Divert the flow to overboard when energized and
return to the Bilge Primary Tank when de-energized.
1626
(2) Return to the default de-energized position in the
event of any automatic stopping device, power supply or
control signal failure.
( 3) Have a quick cycle time to change valve position (for
example, less than 2 seconds).
( 4) Rated for the system operating pressure.
( 5) Provide outputs from the valve (for example, limit
switches) for local and remote indication of the valve's
position.
F2283-12
(6) The automatic stopping device may be provided with
tamper-proof means as specified in Supplementary Section
S3.2.
( 1) NOTE-This supplementary requirement may be in-
any of the requirements in the body of the specification
5.3.4.6 Fail-Safe Design:
( 1) The OPAS shall be designed for fail-safe operation to
preclude unacceptable overboard discharge of oily waste in the
event of failures of any of the OPAS components or electrical
power supply failure.
(2) The default start-up position of the automatic stopping
device shall be to recirculate to the Bilge Primary Tank. The
automatic stopping device shall immediately return to the
default position in the event of system shutdown, no control
signal from 15 ppm Bilge Alarm, actuator failure, or electrical
supply failure.
(3) The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm installation shall provide at
least a 20 seconds time delay to ensure that the 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm receives and analyzes a representative sample prior to
sending the control signal to the automatic stopping device to
allow overboard discharge. The time delay can be built into the
15 ppm Bilge Alarm unit or a separate PLC or time delay box
between the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm unit and the automatic
stopping device. The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm signal to the
automatic stopping device shall be immediately interrupted to
return the effluent to the Bilge Primary Tank if any reading
exceeds the discharge limit.
5.3.4.7 Overboard Discharge Piping:
( 1) Overboard discharge piping shall be provided with a
Port State Inspection valve downstream of the automatic
stopping device as shown in Fig. l. Refer to MECP.l07(49)
section 6.1.1.
(2) A check valve shall be provided on the discharge side of
the Port State Inspection valve to prevent flow from the bilge
through the valve.
( 3) A valve with locking devise shall be provided at the
overboard discharge piping, just upstream of the hull
penetration, to allow locking this valve shut to secure the
system. Refer to ASTM F993 for locking device requirement<;.
5.3.4.8 Tamper-proof Installation Design (Optional):
( 1) The following tamper-proof installation designs are
contained in Supplementary Section S3.
(1) The 3-way diverter valve (automatic stopping device)
sealed installation to preclude tampering, Section S3.2.
The 15 ppm Alarm sampling line tamper-proof
to preclude dilution of the sample by introducing clean water,
Section S3.3.
( 3) proof overboard discharge piping
Section S3.4.
( 4) NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
specification.
5.3.4.9 Optional Incinerator I Boiler:
( 1) Waste oil incinerators, if provided, shall meet Specifi-
cation Fl323.
5.3.4.10 Sludge Removal:
( 1) The system shall be designed for efficient removal of
nearly all of the liquid and solids remaining as a result of
system operation.
5.3.5 Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM)
Requirements (Optional):
5.3.5.1 Reliability, availability and maintainability (RAM)
requirements for the 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm are contained in supplementary sections S 1.3 and S2.4,
respectively.
5.3.5.2 NOTE-One or both of these supplementary
rnents may be included in the purchaser's order or contract.
specification.
5.3.6 Independent Supporting:
5.3.6.1 All equipment supports shall be independent from
connecting pipes.
5.3.7 Access to Parts:
5.3.7.1 Each part of the OPAS that is required by the
manufacturer's instructions to be serviced routinely shall be
readily accessible in the installed position of the device
recommended by the manufacturer.
5.3.7.2 Each part of the OPAS that is susceptible to wear
and tear shall be readily accessible for maintenance in its
installed position.
5.3.7.3 Access for maintenance shall be provided for all
applicable components.
5.3.8 General OPAS Requirements:
5.3.8.1 All OPAS components shall mmumze the effort
required for their draining, accessing, cleaning, maintenance,
and preservation.
5.3.8.2 The OPAS system shall operate as specified herein
within relative humidity limits of 5 to 95 %.
5.3.8.3 The OPAS equipment shall not be damaged nor shall
subsequent operational performance be degraded as a result of
exposure to salt fog.
5.3.8.4 When in a non-operating state, the OPAS shall not
be damaged nor shall subsequent operational performance be
degraded as a result of all external components being subjected
to seawater spray.
5.3.8.5 The OPAS shall minimize turbulent fluid flow, oil
and water mixing and emulsification, and oil droplet size
reduction prior to the 15 ppm Bilge Separator.
1627
5.3.8.6 Materials used to fabricate the structure, systems,
and equipment shall have material properties and behavior
suitable for the manufacturing and installation processes
selected, in-service environment, and function performed.
F2283-12
5.3.8.7 Selected materials shall support the ship's required
service life without degrading the performance of ship
structure, systems, and equipment during the specified ship
operational profiles.
5.3.8.8 OPAS shall be designed and constructed with cor-
rosion resistant materials having the same expected life of the
vessel for valves, fittings, and piping materials given the
expected operating environment.
5.3.8.9 Direct contact of electrolytically dissimilar metals is
prohibited unless electrolytic corrosion precautions are used.
OPAS design must be of compatible materials and components.
5.3.8.10 All equipment and systems shall minimize the
production and use of hazardous materials during their manu-
facture and life cycle.
5.3.8.11 Alternatives to hazardous materials shall be used
where practicable.
5.3.8.12 Coatings or paints shall not contain any heavy
metals, such as, chromium, lead, tin or other materials banned
by regulatory authorities.
5.3.8.13 Asbestos, mercury, cadmium, and polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCBs), shall not be used in the construction of the
OPAS or any subsystem.
5.3.8.14 The OPAS shall remain safe while secured or
during operation.
5.3.8.15 To ensure crew safety, overflow alarms and moni-
tors shall be installed in all operating spaces.
5.3.8.16 A stowage locker for an oil spill response kit shall
be provided and be located convenient to locations of potential
oil spill areas.
5.3.8.17 The OPAS shall be capable of intermittent opera-
tion of relatively short time intervals and shall be capable of
being secured for long periods without disrupting the treatment
system's efficiency and ability to activate.
5.3.8.18 All OPAS valves shall be provided with label plates
in accordance with F992.
5.3.8.19 The OPAS shall be designed for human interface
and safety:
( 1) The criteria in ASTM Practice F 1166 shall be used for
the design, construction, and layout of the OPAS controls,
displays, equipment and labels.
(2) All rotating or moving parts with the potential to cause
injury shall be guarded to avoid accidental contact.
( 3) Warning and operating labels shall be affixed to the
device where necessary in accordance with Practice Fl166.
( 4) Equipment requiring routine maintenance shall be eas-
ily accessible.
(5) Tanks, voids and vents, if any, that require internal
inspection shall be fitted with a connection point suitable for
atmospheric "gas free" sampling.
5.3.8.20 Special Government Requirements (for Govern-
ment Procurement Only )-Due to the criticality of their
mission, OPAS for government vessels have special require-
ments. These requirements are contained in Supplementary
Section S5.
( 1) NOTE-These supplementary requirements may be
included in the purchaser's order or contract. When so
included, the supplementary requirement shall have the same
force as if it were in the body of the specification. Supplemen-
1628
tary requirements details not fully described shall be agreed
upon between the purchaser and the supplier, but shall not
negate any of the requirements in the body of the specification.
5.4 Tanks/ranks Construction:
5.4.1 Overflows:
5.4.1.1 Any tank with oily waste delivered under pressure
shall have dedicated overflow piping.
5.4.1.2 Overflow piping from any tank containing oily
waste shall not be combined with overflows or air vents from
fuel tanks.
5.4.1.3 The Residue (sludge) Tank shall overflow to the
Bilge Primary Tank.
5.4.1.4 The Residue (sludge) Tank and oily waste tanks
shall not overflow overboard.
5.4.1.5 All overflow lines shall originate from a point low in
the tank so that water at the bottom of the tank will overflow
before the oil.
5.4.1.6 All overflow lines shall contain a check valve
oriented in the fore and aft position.
5 .4.1. 7 Check valves shall be located at the high point in the
overflow piping.
5.4.1.8 If multiple Oily Bilge Water Holding Tanks are
present, overflows may be combined to eliminate large runs of
pipe.
5.4.1.9 Overflow piping from all overflow tanks and over-
flow mains shall be sized to accommodate the maximum
combined filling rate of all the tanks served.
5.4.1.10 The discharge point of all overflow piping shall
comply with all applicable flag state requirements.
5.4.1.11 Due to the criticality of their mission, government
vessels may have different requirements. These requirements
are contained in Supplementary Section S5 for Special Gov-
ernment Requirements.
( 1) NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
specification.
5.4.2 Air Vents:
5.4.2.1 The Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank and any other tank containing oily waste shall
have air vents that are separate from the overflow piping.
5.4.2.2 Air escape piping from any tank containing oily
waste shall not be combined with overflows or air vents from
fuel tanks.
5.4.2.3 All air vents lines shall originate from the top of the
tank to avoid any air flow obstruction due to the tank's liquid
content.
5.4.2.4 The air vents shall be sized in relation to the
maximum filling rate to which the tank may be subjected. In
general, they shall be sized to limit the air velocity to 25 feet
per second when the tank is being filled at its maximum design
rate, but shall be a minimum of 1.5 inch nominal pipe diameter.
F2283-12
5.4.2.5 The air vent opening shall be 1.5 times larger than
the vent pipe and have a double screen that can be removed for
cleaning.
5.4.2.6 Air vents for tanks containing oily waste (including
the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank, Bilge Primary Tank and
Oil Residue (sludge) Tank) may be combined provided the
junction is above the highest tank overflow level.
5.4.2.7 Vents shall be designed and constructed to minimize
clogging by either the contents of the tank or climatic condi-
tions such as snow or ice.
5.4.2.8 The discharge of all air vents shall comply with all
applicable flag state requirements.
5.4.3 Sounding Tubes:
5.4.3.1 AU tanks shall be provided with sounding tubes as a
means of verifying the tank level indicator (TLI) receivers and
eliminating a single point of failure.
5.4.4 Tank Construction:
5.4.4.1 Tanks shall be provided with access (for example,
manholes) for easy inspection, cleaning or repairs.
5.4.4.2 Tanks with a capacity of 1,000 gallons or more shall
be provided with two manholes.
5.4.4.3 All internal tank surfaces, including ladders and
other ferrous structures, fittings, pipe supports, etc., shall be
coated to prevent corrosion from oily waste, waste oil, and
seawater. Care shall be taken to ensure complete coverage of
all such surfaces. Alternative materials such as composites with
acceptable mechanical and electrical (electrostatic - compos-
ites shall be electrically conductive and grounded to prevent
electrostatic discharges) properties for tank ladders and related
tank fixtures may also be used.
5.4.4.4 Tanks shall be provided with cathodic protection.
ZHC-42 zinc anodes are recommended to be installed in the
tanks at a concentration of one anode for every 80 square feet
of tank surface. Anodes shall be distributed in concentrations
proportional to the amount of time that the area of the tank will
spend submerged. Anodes shall also be located in the vicinity
of dissimilar metal combinations in the tank such as piping
penetrations. The tank surface shall be coated prior to installing
the anodes. After installing the anodes, the paint on the studs
shall be touched-up.
5.5 Electrical System:
5.5 .1 Electrical Components and Installation:
5.5.1.1 Interior electrical equipment and enclosures used in
a machinery space, a location normally exposed to splashing or
another space with a similar moisture level shall be at least IEC
60529 IP44 or an appropriate ANSI/NEMA250 Type for the
intended service.
5.5.1.2 Exterior electrical equipment and enclosures for
treatment system exposed to the weather, water wash down, or
similar moisture conditions shall be at least ANSI/NEMA Type
4 or Type 4X, or IEC 60529 IP65.
5.5.1.3 Electrical equipment and components shall be pro-
tected from direct water impingement.
5.5.1.4 Electrical equipment and installations shall be suit-
able for the roll, pitch, and vibration of the vessel while
underway.
5.5.1.5 Electrical equipment for treatment system, including
switches, fuses, lamp holders, etc., shall be suitable for the
voltage and current utilized.
5.5.1.6 Electrical equipment and circuits for treatment sys-
tems shall be clearly marked and identified on all wiring
diagrams.
5.5.1. 7 Any cabinet, panel, box, or other enclosure contain-
ing more than one source of power shall be fitted with a sign
warning persons of this condition and identifying the circuits to
be disconnected.
5. 5 .1. 8 Electrical equipment exposed to corrosive environ-
ments shall be corrosion resistant and of suitable construction.
5.5.1.9 Electrical equipment shall be protected from acci-
dental contact by personnel operating or routinely servicing the
equipment.
5.5.1.10 Su:fficie.nt slack shall be provided in electrical lines
to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance.
5.5.1.11 Electrical wiring diagrams shall be provided inside
the corresponding electrical enclosure.
equipment.
5.5.2 Control systems and conductors
5.5.2.1 Treatment system wiring shall be rated for the
maximum operating temperature to which it has the potential to
be exposed.
5.5.2.2 All control wiring between components shall have
copper conductors 2: size No. 18 AWG or shall have stranded
copper conductors with a current -carrying capacity of 2:125 %
of the expected current. Communications and Radio Frequency
(RF) cables, such as Universal Serial Bus (USB), ribbon,
coaxial, telephone twisted-pairs, Ethernet or similar cables, do
not have to meet this requirement.
5.5.2.3 Internal wiring of cabinets or enclosures shall be
NEC or equivalent type insulated wires suitable for at least dry
and damp locations.
5.5.2.4 Internal wiring within enclosure or cabinet shall
terminate on terminal blocks when connection to external
wiring is necessary.
5.5.2.5 When individual insulated wires are used, rather
than cable, outside cabinets or enclosures on systems of >50 V,
wires shall be in conduit.
5.5.2.6 Cables shall be secured with metallic band strapping
such that they remain tight without damage to armor or
insulation.
5.5.2.7 Metallic band strapping used for cable support shall
be fabricated from steel and corrosion treated if not of
corrosion-resistant material.
5.5.2.8 Cable supports for all horizontal runs shall prevent
undue sag.
5.5.2.9 Cable retention devices shall be installed on vertical
and horizontal runs, as applicable.
5.5 .2.1 0 Power cables and external control cables shall meet
the construction and testing standards of IEEE 1580, UL 1309,
IEC 60092-350 or IEC 60092-353 with amendment I.
5.5.2.11 When a Type metal-clad (MC) cable is used it shall
be a continuous corrugated metal-clad cable.
1629
c4@f F2283 -12
5.5.2.12 Portable cables or flexible cords may be used for
external connections of moving parts or where frequent inter-
change or disconnection is necessary due to calibration or
maintenance of field connected devices.
5.5.2.13 Overcurrent protection shall be provided in accor-
dance with Article 240 of NFPA 70 or equivalent standard as
determined by the certifying body.
5.5.2.14 Electrical equipment in spaces containing machin-
ery powered by, or fuel tanks containing, gasoline or other
fuels having a flashpoint of :S43 .3 oc (ll0F) shall be
explosion-proof or ignition-protected or be part of an intrinsi-
cally safe system.
5.5.3 Motors:
5.5.3.1 Motors must be rated to operate at 50C (122F)
ambient air temperature, unless it can be shown that a 40.0C
(104F) or 45.0C (l13F) ambient temperature will not be
exceeded.
5.5.3.2 Motors shall be constructed with a minimum of
Class F insulation in accordance with IEC 60085 or ANSI/
NEMAMG 1.
5.5.3.3 Motors exposed to splashing or spraying oil or water
shall be at least IEC 60529 IP 44 or an equivalent ANSI/
NEMA 250 Type for the service intended.
5.5.3.4 Motors shall be provided with a corrosion resistant
nameplate specifying; (1) the manufacturer's name, (2) rated
horsepower, (3) rated voltage and full-load current, (4) rated
frequency and number of phases, ( 5) rated RPM, ( 6) rated
temperature, (7) Code letter, (8) and thermal protection if used.
For IEC motors, the manufacturer shall certify the rated
temperature by signed letter or other equivalent means.
5.5.3.5 Motor branch circuits, motor feeder conductors and
their protection, motor overload protection, motor control
circuits, motor controllers, and motor control centers shall be in
accordance with Article 430 of NFPA 70 or equivalent standard
as determined by the certifying body.
5.5.3.6 Motor controllers shall have a power rating in
accordance with Part IV of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or
equivalent standard as determined by the certifying body.
5.5.3.7 Motors shall be provided with motor running pro-
tection in accordance with Part IV of Article 430 of NFPA 70
or equivalent standard as determined by the certifying body.
5.5.3.8 Thermal protection of the motor shall be in accor-
dance with Part III of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or equivalent
standard as determined by the certifying body.
5.5.3.9 Conductors of a motor remote control, interlock, and
indicator circuits shall be protected against overcurrent in
accordance with Part VI of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or
5.5.3.10 Motors shall be provided with terminal leads or
terminal screws in terminal boxes integral with, or secured to,
the motor frames.
5.5.3.11 Motor terminal housing shall be in accordance with
Article 430 of NFPA 70 or equivalent standard as determined
by the certifying body.
5.5.4 Hazardous Locations:
5.5.4.1 Components to be installed in hazardous location
shall be certified as being: intrinsically safe in accordance with
UL 913, ANSI/ISA 60079-11, or IEC 60079-11; explosion
proof in accordance with UL 1203, ANSI/ISA 60079-1, or IEC
60079-1 for Class I, Group D hazardous locations; or other
accepted standards as determined by the certifying body.
5.6 Tank Level Indicator:
5.6.1 Each OPAS shall have means of indicating tank(s)
levels that is compliant with Specification F2044 or F2045-00.
5.6.2 The Bilge Primary Tank, Oily Bilge Water Holding
Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank, drain tanks, and any tank
containing oily waste shall have tank level indicating systems.
5.6.3 Tank Level Indicators (TLis) shall also be installed in
feed water and potable water tanks to preclude their overflow-
ing to the bilge.
5.6.4 The Bilge Primary Tank (both sections), Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank shall have
TLis that display oil-water interface (that is, water level) and
oil-air interface (that is, total liquid level).
5.6.5 The TLis in the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank may
also be used to control the automatic start and stop of the 15
ppm Bilge Separator, as well as automatic bulk oil stripping
from Bilge Primary Tank (both sections), Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank.
5.6.6 Qualified level sensing technology shall be used
provided the technology meets the following requirements for
TLI systems:
5.6.6.1 Ability to adequately perform in the presence of
pure water, bulk oil, emulsions, sludge, water/oil interface and
water/emulsion interface.
5.6.6.2 Not susceptible to failure due to sludge accumula-
tion.
5.6.6.3 Accessibility for cleaning and maintenance.
5.6.6.4 Ability to adequately perform under the effects of
ship motion.
5.6.7 Flange mounted TLI assemblies shall be used to
facilitate removal for cleaning and maintenance. Maximum
indication to the top of the tank and minimum indication to the
bottom of the tank are required.
5.6.8 TLI read-outs and alarms shall be available on the 15
ppm Bilge Separator and/or the automated transfer program-
mable logic controller (PLC) when installed.
5.6.9 Cables used for TLI systems shall be oil-proof and
low-smoke.
5.6.10 High-level alarms shall be installed on all tanks that
receive oily waste under pressure to give warning before
overflow occurs. The high-level alarm set point shall be set not
to exceed 90 to 95% of tank capacity and shall provide at least
2 minutes warning before tank overflow occurs. Additional
high-level alarms may be considered for use in the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank to provide
two alarms, one at the 90 to 95% capacity and one to this
level to prompt operator action before reaching the 2-minute
warning.
5.6.11 Low-level alarms shaH be provided in the Oily
Water Holding Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank to warn the
operator to stop the pump before it is run with a dry suction.
1630
5.6.12 TLI receivers and high-level and low-level alarms
shall be located in continuously manned spaces and at equip-
ment that can cause overflow conditions, such as the control-
lers for the 15 ppm Bilge Separator, and all pumps which
F2283-12
discharge to or draw suction from the Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tank and Oil Residue (sludge) Tank.
5.6.13 Means shall be provided to test high level alarms
without opening or filling tanks.
5.7 Piping:
5.7.1 Piping shall be compatible with the treatment system
materials.
5.7.2 Piping selection and application shall be in accordance
with Practice Fll55.
5.7 .3 If copper-nickel alloy piping is used, it shall meet the
requirements in Specification B 165.
5.7.4 If carbon steel or alloy steel piping is used, it shall
meet Specification A530/ A530M or Specification A999/
A999M.
5.7.5 If alternate materials are used other than those listed in
Practice 155, the manufacturer shall obtain approval
for their use.
5.7.6 Inlet and outlet connections shall be in accordance
with ASME B16.1, B16.5, or B16.11, or ASME B16.24.
6. Emuent Standards
6.1 OPAS effluent shall not exceed 15 ppm unless more
stringent requirements are specified by the purchaser.
6.1.1 Requirements for testing the 15 ppm Bilge Separator
and 15 ppm Bilge Alarm at a discharge limits lower than 15
ppm are contained in supplementary sections S 1.2 and S2.2,
respectively.
6.1.2 NOTE-One or both of these supplementary require-
Supplementary requirements details not fully de5cribed shall
specification.
6.2 Operating Specifications:
6.2.1 The operating specifications in 33 CFR Part 155 apply
to each U.S. flagged vessel, wherever located, and to non-U.S.
flagged vessels while in the navigable waters of the United
States. These regulations implement MARPOL Annex I in the
United States.
6.2.2 Elsewhere, the operating specifications of the ship's
State apply.
7.1 Documentation-A complete installation, operation,
maintenance, and troubleshooting instructions manual with
electrical diagrams, and spare parts list shall be
furnished with each major component of the OPAS.
7 .1.1 The instructions manual supplied by the manufacturer
shall contain directions for each of the following:
7 .1.1.1 Installation of the device in a manner that will
access to all parts of the device routine
service.
7 .1.1.2 Routine cleaning and removal.
7 .1.1.3 The type and quantity of chemicals that are required
to operate the device, including instructions on the proper
handling, storage and use of these chemicals.
7 .1.1.4 Recommended methods of making required piping
and electrical connections and supply circuit overcurrent pro-
tection.
7 .1.1.5 Operating procedures.
7 .1.1.6 Troubleshooting and remedy procedures.
7 .1.1. 7 Procedures for routine and periodic maintenance of
equipment and systems.
7.1.1.8 Procedures to verify that the Bilge Alarm is zeroed
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for
testing (consistent with MEPC.107(49)) prior to running the 15
PPM Bilge Separator. Such procedures should include that
these tests be recorded in an appropriate logbook.
7 .1.2 The instructions manual supplied by the manufacturer
shaH include the following information:
7 .1.2.1 The name of the manufacturer
7 .1.2.2 The name and model number of the device.
7 .1.2.3 A complete parts list.
7 .1.2.4 A schematic diagram showing the relative location
of each part.
7.1.2.5 A wiring and/or piping diagram. The dutgr::tm(s
shall identify each labeled part, switch and valve. A description
of the service for the user to perform without coming into
contact with oily water mixtures or chemicals.
7 .1.2.6 Average and peak capacity of the device for the flow
rate and volume.
7 .1.2.7 The power requirements, including voltage and
current.
7 .1.2. 8 Whether the device is designed to operate in salt,
fresh, or brackish water.
1631
7.1.2.9 Installation verification test procedures
7.2 The following documentation shall be provided by the
manufacturer for the overall integrated OPAS and system
interfaces:
7 .2.1 Installation drawings including piping, electrical and
structural. The installation drawings shall identify each labeled
part, switch and valve.
7 .2.1.1 The installation drawings shall be updated as re-
quired to reflect any changes in the system installation,
including changes in each labeled part, switch and valve.
7 .2.2 Installation verification and operating procedures for
the integrated OPAS.
7.3 The following documentation shall be provided the
OPAS integrator or manufacturer on troubleshooting proce-
dures and proper bilge management procedures to enhance
system effectiveness. Refer to IMO MEPC.l I Circular 677.
7 .3.1 Detailed trouble shooting and repair procedures for
general 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge Alarm
mechanical failure.
7.3.2 Trouble shooting procedures for determining the cause
and remedy for constant 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm
Alarm recirculation and failure to discharge
below 15 ppm.
7.3.3 Troubleshooting procedures shall include, but not be
limited to the following: detailed instructions and procedures
for troubleshooting 15 ppm Bilge Alarm malfunctions. Identi-
fication of contaminants related to 15 ppm Alarm or 15
ppm Bilge Separator malfunctions; detailed procedures for
identifying the bilge contaminants causing the malfunctions.
F2283 -12
Procedures should address the presence of detergents and
solvents, oily emulsions, non-oily emulsions, particulates (bio-
logical detritus, soot and rouge (iron oxide compounds)).
7.3.4 Bilge management procedures shall minimize bilge
contaminants and should address and include but not be limited
to the following: control of the amount of solvents, detergents
and degreasers entering bilge; limiting of engine room chemi-
cals that will cause problems and promote use of 15 ppm Bilge
Separator friendly chemicals; run 15 ppm Bilge Separator more
frequently to prevent sludge build up in pipes, pumps and
holding tanks; control leaks and maintenance discharges of
coolants, fuel oil, lubricants, hydraulic fluids and oil sludge
into the bilge; control leaks from boiler water and condensate
drains, piston cooling water and any other sources of excess
water (for example, diesel engine after coolers, air conditioning
and refrigeration condensate) and chemicals; prevent the dis-
charge of sewage and food wastes into the bilge; control
leakage from machinery and piping; control the discharge and
build up of rust and other particles in the bilge (for example,
from scraping and maintenance of machinery space equip-
ment); keep bilge areas clean to ensure leakages can be
identified quickly and repaired; do not decant the Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank to the OPAS; avoid the use of cleansing agents,
emulsifiers, solvents, or surfactants used for cleaning purposes
that may cause the bilge water to emulsify.
7.3.5 Provide the tools to conduct testing for regular moni-
toring of contaminants in bilge water.
7.4 Training-The OPAS integrator or manufacturer shall
provide the following training modules for incorporation into
the ship's training program:
7.4.1 Training module on bilge water management and the
regular monitoring of contaminants in bilge water.
7 .4.2 Training module on the operation and maintenance for
the integrated OPAS.
8. Safety Concerns
8.1 The design of the OPAS shall minimize potential for
human error during operation and maintenance, under routine,
non-routine and emergency conditions.
8.2 The manual handling of hazardous materials by users
shall be limited as far as possible.
8.3 Shafts, couplings, gears, and similar items shall have
adequate guards installed for protection of personnel.
8.4 OPAS components shall:
8.4.1 Be free of design defects such as rough or sharp edges
with the potential to cause bodily injuries or that would allow
toxic substances to escape to the interior of the vessel;
8.4.2 Be vented or provided with a means to prevent an
explosion or over pressurization as a result of an accumulation
of gases; and
8.4.3 Meet all other safety requirements of the regulations
applicable to the type of vessel for which it is certified.
8.4.4 Where chemicals are specified or provided by the
manufacturer for use in the operation of a device and are
defined as a hazardous material as in accordance with 49 CFR
171.8, they shall be labeled, stowed and used as required by 46
CFR 147.
8.4.5 Current carrying components shall be protected from
accidental contact by personnel operating or routinely servic-
ing the device. All current carrying components shall as a
minimum be of drip-proof construction or be enclosed within
a drip-proof compartment.
8.4.6 Owner/operator is responsible to ensure compliance
with all the applicable flag state safety requirements.
9. Test Methods
9.1 The 15 ppm Bilge Separator shall be approved in
accordance with Resolution MEPC.107(49).
9.2 Optional Test Methods for 15 ppm Bilge Separator - In
addition, one or more supplementary requirements listed below
and contained in the Supplementary Section S 1 shall apply
only when specified in the purchaser's order or contract.
9.2.1 Test 15 ppm Bilge Separator with purchaser's speci-
fied fluid "D" - Fluid "D" may consist of single oil, oil mixture,
and/or contaminants specified by the purchaser.
9.2.2 Test 15 ppm Bilge Separator at discharge limits lower
15 ppm- Some special areas may require a discharge limit
lower than 15 ppm (for example, 5 ppm).
9.2.3 15 ppm Bilge Separator Reliability, Maintainability,
Availability Tests - This requirement is to ensure system
reliability, maintainability and availability to satisfy purchas-
er's needs.
9.2.4 NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
specification.
9.3 The Bilge Alarm shall be approved in accordance with
Resolution MEPC.107(49).
9.4 Optional Test Methods for 15 ppm Bilge Alarm-In
addition, one or more supplementary requirements listed below
and contained in the Supplementary Section S2 shall apply
only when specified in the purchaser's order or contract.
9.4.1 Test 15 ppm Bilge Alarm with purchaser specified fluid
"D"-Fluid "D" may consist of single oil, oil mixture, and/or
contaminants specified by the purchaser.
9.4.2 Test 15 ppm Bilge Alarm at discharge limits lower
than 15 ppm-Some special areas may require a discharge limit
lower than 15 ppm (for example, 5 ppm).
9.4.3 15 ppm Bilge Alarm Free Oil Test-This requirement
is to ensure that the 15 ppm Bilge Alarm detects large oil
droplets of "free oil" that may be present during 15 ppm Bilge
Separator failure (for example, saturated filter media, mem-
brane cracks or broken seals, and others)
9 .4.4 15 ppm Bilge Alarm Reliability, Maintainability,
Availability Tests-This requirement is to ensure system
reliability, maintainability and availability to satisfy purchas-
er's needs.
1632
9.4.5 NOTE-One or more of these supplementary require-
F2283-12
specification.
9.5 A test report shall be generated in accordance with
Resolution MEPC.107 (49).
9.6 Testing of OPAS eftluent oil-in-water shall be in accor-
dance with ISO 9377-2:2000.
10. Inspection
10.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser's inspector
all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy the purchaser that
the material is being furnished ~ accordance \Vith this speci-
fication. Inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnec-
essarily with the manufacturer's operations. All examinations
and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture,
unless otherwise agreed upon.
10.2 Owner/operator is responsible to ensure compliance
with all the applicable flag state inspection requirements.
11. Certification
11.1 Manufacturer's certification that an OPAS has been
constructed, installed, and is operational in accordance with
this specification shall be provided (by letter or certificate).
11.2 Responsibility rests with the purchaser to ensure that
an OPAS procured to this standard meets all regulatory
requirements for areas in which it is to be operated.
11.3 Owner/operator is responsible to ensure compliance
with all the applicable flag state certification requirements.
12. Product Marking
12.1 Each 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge Alarm
manufactured under a certifying administration shall be plainly
marked by the manufacturer with the information listed in 12.3.
12.2 The marking shall be made of a durable and corrosion
proof material and shall be securely fastened to the item.
12.3 Each marking shall include the following information:
12.3.1 Name of the manufacturer.
12.3.2 Name or model number of the item.
12.3.3 The maximum throughput and the maximum influent
pressure at which it is designed to operate.
1633
12.3.4 The month and year of completion of manufacture.
12.3.5 The manufacturer's serial number for the item.
12.3.6 The certifying administration number assigned to the
item in the certificate of approval.
12.3.7 A warning placard or label to refer to the equipment
manual for a list of bilge cleaners, solvents, and other chemical
compounds that do impair operation of the item.
12.3.8 If the item is a 15 ppm Bilge Separator that uses
replaceable filter or coalescer elements, the part numbers of the
elements.
12.3.9 Any additional approved test listed in Supplementary
Sections S1 and S2 for the 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm
Bilge Alarm, respectively.
13.1 OPAS shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in a
manner that ensures the requirements of this specification are
met.
13.2 The OPAS shall conform to human engineering prin-
ciples in accordance withASTM F1166 to the degree that it can
be operated and maintained by a 52 em (5 ft) tall male or
female as well as 185 em (6 ft 1 in.) tall male or female.
13.3 OPAS design shall reflect system and personnel safety
factors, including the elimination or minimization of the
potential for human error during operation and maintenance,
under both routine and non-routine or emergency conditions.
Machinery, systems, equipment, and fixtures shall be intrinsi-
cally safe as far as practicable, and in the event of failure, shall
fail to a safe mode.
13.4 The OPAS manufacturer shall maintain the production
quality of the OPAS that are designed, tested and marked in
accordance with this specification. At no time shall an OPAS be
sold with this standard designation that does not meet the
requirements herein (see Certification).
14. Keywords
14.1 15 ppm bilge separator; 15 ppm bilge alarm; automatic
stopping device; bilge primary tank; bilge water; diverter
valve; marine environmental protection; MEPC.l07(49);
MEPC.1 Circ 642; MEPC.1 Circ 677; oil content monitor; oil
pollution abatement; oil-water mixture; oil water separator; oil
residue (sludge) tank; oily bilge water holding tank; oily
wastemarine environmental protection
F2283-12
One or more of the supplementary requirements described below may be included in the purchaser's
order or contract. When so included, a supplementary requirement shall have the same force as if it
were in the body of the specification. Supplementary requirements details not fully described shall be
agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier, but shall not negate any of the requirements in
the body of the specification.
Sl. Supplementary requirements for 15 ppm Bilge Sepa-
rator.
S 1.1 Test 15 ppm Bilge Separator with purchaser speci-
fied fluid "D".
S 1.1.1 This test is in addition to the MEPC.l07 ( 49)
approvai requirements.
Sl.l.2 Add an additional run to the MEPC.l07 (49) test to
include a purchaser specified fluid "D". This fluid "D" may
consist of a single oil, oil mixtures, and/or contaminants
specified by the purchaser. The purchaser will determine the
test conditions and concentrations.
S 1.1.3 The results of this run are not part of the MEPC.107
( 49) approval and shall be reported to the purchaser in a
separate document.
Sl.2 Test 15 ppm Bilge Separator at discharge limits
lower than 15 ppm.
S 1.2.1 Some special areas may required an overboard
discharge with an oil content lower than the 15 ppm limit.
Therefore, the purchaser should ensure that the Bilge Separator
to be installed meets the required lower discharge limit.
S1.2.2 This test is in addition to the MEPC.l07 (49)
approval requirements.
S 1.2.3 In addition to the 15 ppm discharge limit, use the
purchaser's specified lower discharge limit (for example, 5
ppm) to analyze the results from the MEPC.107(49) test.
S1.2.4 The results analysis at the lower discharge limit are
not part of the MEPC.107 (49) approval and shall be reported
to the purchaser in a separate document.
Sl.3 15 ppm Bilge Separator Reliability, Availability and
Maintainability(RAM) Tests
S1.3.1 This test is in addition to the MEPC.107 (49)
S1.3.2 The purchaser shall pre-determine the minimum
reliability, availability and maintainability requirements.
NOTE: SECTION S5.8 AND TABLE S5.1 CONTAIN RAM REQUIRE-
MENTS RECOMMENDED FOR GOVERNMENT USE. ASTM F2446 may be
used as reference for the exchange of equipment RAM
performance data.
Sl.3.3 Modify the MEPC.l07 (49) test set-up to recycle
back to the feed tank to allow for continuous long term
operation of the unit.
Sl.3.4 Operate the unit in a closed loop for a minimum of 6
hours alternating between test fluid runs (for example, A, B, C
and/or D (if applicable)). The initial fluid concentration shall
be at least 1 % by volume. Means shall be provided to mix the
feed tank content to preclude phase separation in the tank. The
test shall be performed with no interruptions for system
maintenance or adjustments (for example, changing of filters,
changing controller set points, etc.) unless otherwise previ-
ously agreed with the purchaser.
Sl.3.5 Record operating status and parameters, and any
other relevant information.
S1.3.6 Continue test until the system: reaches the pre-
determined total operating time, is not capable of producing an
effluent with less than 15 ppm oil content, or a mechanical
failure occurs.
S 1.3. 7 Determine reliability, availability and maintainability
based on the test results.
Sl.3.8 The results of this test are not part of the MEPC.107
separate document.
S 1.4 Examples of optional pre-treatments for the 15 ppm
Bilge Separator are contained in Table S 1.4.
S2. Supplementary requirements for Bilge Alarms
S2.1 Test 15 ppm Bilge Alarm with purchaser specified
fluid "D"
TABLE S1.4 Optional Pre-Treatment
Section Pre-treatment
81.4.1 Particle Removal
S1.4.2 Heat Treatment
81.4.3 Gas/Air Flotation
_
Self-cleaning strainers are recommended upstream of the 15 ppm Bilge Separator to remove
small particles that may clog the filter media. Backwash from self-cleaning strainers contains
high concentration of solid particles and shall be directed to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank. The
timing of the backwash cycle should be optimizing to minimize excessive water being sent to
the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank.
Heat treatment is recommended to enhance the oil-in-water separation and break chemical
emulsions. Heating elements can be installed inside the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank and/or
the Bilge Primary Tank
Gas/air flotation systems are recommended to enhance the oil-in-water separation. These
systems work by introducing small gas bubbles into the oily wastewater being treated. As the
gas bubbles rise they attach to the oil droplets and carry them to the surface where the oil is
separated from the water into an oil The small gas bubbles can be introduced at the
bottom of the Water Tank and/ or the Tank.
1634
F2283-12
S2.1.1 Add an additional run to the MEPC.107 (49) test to
include a purchaser specified fluid "D". This fluid "D" may
consist of a single oil, oil mixtures, and/or contaminants
specified by the purchaser. The purchaser will determine the
test conditions and concentrations.
S2.1.2 The results of this run shall not affect the MEPC.l 07
separate document.
S2.2 Test 15 ppm Bilge Alarm at discharge limits lower
than 15 ppm
S2.2.1 Some special areas may required an overboard
discharge with an oil content lower than the 15 ppm limit.
Therefore, the purchaser should ensure that the Bilge Alarm to
be installed meets the required lo\ver discharge limit.
S2.2.3 Set the Alarm to the desired alarm set point as
per its equipment manufacture's (OEM's) instructions.
NOTE: MosT coMMERCIAL BILGE ALARMS ALLOW CHANGING THE
ALARM LIMIT SET POINT AS LONG AS IT IS LOWER THAN 15 PPM.
S2.2.4 Perform additional MEPC.l 07 ( 49) test runs using the
specified ppm alarm limit instead of 15 ppm.
S2.2.5 The results analysis at the lower discharge limit are
not part of the MEPC.107 (49) approval and shall be reported
to the purchaser in a separate document.
S2.3 15 ppm Bilge Alarm Free Oil Test
S2.3.2 Perform additional MEPC.107(49) test runs with the
high shear pump off to ensure that the Bilge Alarm is capable
to accurately measure the content of "free" or non-dispersed
oils.
S2.3.3 The results analysis of the free oil test are not part of
the MEPC.l 07 ( 49) approval and shall be reported to the
purchaser in a separate document.
S2.4 15 ppm Bilge Alarm Reliability, Availability and
Maintainability (RAM) Tests
S2.4.1 This test is in addition to the MEPC.107 ( 49)
S2.4.2 The purchaser shall pre-determine the minimum
reliability, maintainability, and availability requirements.
NOTE: SECTION S5.8 AND TABLE S5.2 CONTAIN RAM REQUIRE-
MENTS RECOMMENDED FOR GOVERNMENT USE. ASTM F2446 may be
used as reference for the exchange of equipment RAM
performance data.
S2.4.3 Modify the MEPC.l07 (49) test set-up to recycle
back to the feed tank to allow for continuous long term
operation of the unit.
S2.4.4 Operate the unit for a minimum of 6 hours per run
between test fluid runs (for example, fluid A, B, C,
and/or D (if applicable)) at concentrations greater than 15 ppm,
clean water runs, and short (for example, 10 minutes) 15 ppm
injection checks. Means shall be provided to mix the feed tank
content to preclude phase separation in the tank.
S2.4.5 Record operating status and parameters and any other
relevant information.
S2.4.6 The test shall be performed with no interruptions for
system maintenance or adjustments (for example, recalibration,
unit cleaning, changing controller set points, etc.) unless
otherwise previously determined by the purchaser.
S2.4.7 Continue test until the system: reaches the pre-
determined total operating time, is not capable to read 0 and 15
ppm oil content, or any failure occurs.
S2.4.8 Determine reliability, availability and maintainability
based on the test results.
S2.4.9 The results of this test are not part of the MEPC.l07
separate document.
S2.5 Additional Recording Device
S2.5.1 An additional recording device shall be provided if it
is required to record additional parameters not covered
MEPC.l07 (49).
S2.5.2 Alternatively, the additional parameters can be re-
corded by the 15 ppm Bilge Separator PLC controller.
S2.6 Supplementary requirement for nozzJe
sampling device:
S2.6.1 A multi-port nozzle sampling device is recommended
for piping larger than 1.5 inch nominal pipe diameter to ensure
a representative sample is taken. The sampler construction and
installation are shown in S 1.1 and described below:
S2.6.1.1 The sampling device shall be constructed from pipe
or tubing of corrosion resistant material (for example, s "
70/30 copper-nickel class 3300, 0.049" wall thick.r1ess) with a
plug welded on one end.
S2.6.1.2 Symmetrically oriented holes shall be drilJed into
one side of the sampling device near the plugged end (not
drilled through both walls of the sampler).
S2.6.1.3 The holes locations are calculated to be in positions
to cover equal areas across the pipe flow profile, which ensures
that representative isokinetic samples are taken.
S2.6.1.4 The sampling device shall be oriented so that the
holes face into the flow (for example, holes face down if pipe
flow is from low to high). These requirements ensure that the
flow has a uniform profile so that the calculated port spacing
remains appropriate.
S2.6.1.5 The sampling device installation shall allow for the
sampling device to be removed for cleaning purposes.
S3. Supplementary requirements for Tamper-proof instal-
lation:
1635
S3.1 The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm shall comply with MEPC.l07
( 49), which requires a seal to protect from calibration tamper-
ing and a system design to alarm whenever clean water is used
to avoid sample dilution.
S3.2 The automatic stopping device (3-way diverter valve)
shall be provided with a sealed wiring installation to preclude
tampering.
S3.2.1 All the electrical interconnecting wires of the auto-
matic stopping device shall be installed to allow visible
of the complete wire runs. These wires may be run
separate from other wires to avoid confusion.
S3.2.2 Seals shall be provided to the access of any compo-
nent that can control the position of the diverter valves
including: valve actuator, signal output connector from 15 ppm

m ~ F2283 - 12
C!liHf1
Discharge Pipe
Sample +-- ....._ __
1
,...---__ ...,.......,f--+-
A
NOTES:
Multi-port
Sampling
device
c
D
I. A= 0.067 d, B = 0.250 d, C 0.750 d, D = 0.933 d, where dis the corrected pipe diameter to account for arc
formed between plugged sampling device end and pipe wall. d [(!D discharge pipe/- (OD !Itbe sampler/
10.5
2. Total area of ports shall be less than the cross-sectional area of the sampling device tubing to ensure that the
flow is determined by sampling ports.
3. The sampling device shall not occuov more than 25% of the discharge oioe cross-sectional area.
FIG. S1.1 Multi-port Sampling Device
Bilge Alarm, and corresponding interconnecting cables and
electrical junction boxes. If any component is required to be
opened for repair or replaced such action will be required to be
logged in an appropriate logbook.
S3.2.2.1 Alternatively, a sealed automatic stopping device
may be installed if available. In regards to sealing the auto-
matic stopping device the complete cable + valve actuator +
automatic stopping device must be one piece sealed molded by
the manufacturer. If a problem were to arise with any of the 3
(cable + solenoid valve + automatic stopping device) the total
needs to be replaced without user serviceable parts and logged
in an appropriate logbook. The other end of the cable going to
the Control box must be sealed at the point of penetration in to
the Control Box. The Control Box itself can easily have a seal
where, if required to be opened for repair can again be logged
in an appropriate logbook.
S3.3 The 15 ppm Bilge Alarm sampling line shall be tamper
proof to preclude dilution of the sample by introducing clean
water.
S3.3.1 This sampling line shall be connected from the
sampling port, at the 15 ppm Bilge Separator overboard
discharge pipe, to the sample inlet connection of the 15 ppm
Bilge Alarm. No other piping or tubing shall be connected to
this sampling line. Quick connections shall not be used on this
line.
S3.3.2 Any component on the sampling line (for example,
cut off valve, pressure gauge connection, etc.) shall be brazed
or flanged to avoid tampering. All the flanges shall be provided
with at least one flange bolt drilled through both the bolt and
nut and tagged with a tamper-proof seal.
S3.3.3 Any threaded connector or removable component (for
example, valve stem, check valve cap, etc.) shall be provided
with a tamper proof seal such as tamper proof shrink sleeve
seals.
S3.3.4 Tamper proof seals should be uniquely numbered
non-reusable seals. For flanges it may be either plastic or metal
pull-up type. Flanges shall be stamped with an identifying
number. Seal numbers should be recorded in an appropriate
record book to with the dated fitted, identifying flange number
and seal number. In the event a seal should be removed, the
reason for removal should be noted in an appropriate logbook.
S3.4 All piping connected to the overboard discharge shall
be brazed or flanged to avoid tampering.
S3.4.1 Any threaded connector or removable component (for
example, valve stem, check valve cap, etc.) shall be provided
with a tamper proof seal such as tamper proof shrink sleeve
seals.
S3.4.2 All these flanges shall be provided with at least one
flange bolt drilled through both the bolt and nut and tagged
with a tamper-proof seal. Tamper proof seals should be
uniquely numbered non-reusable seals, either plastic or metal
pull-up type. Flanges to be stamped using with an identifying
number. Seal numbers should be recorded in an appropriate
record book to with the dated fitted, identifying flange number
and seal number. In the event a seal should be removed, the
reason for removal should be noted in an appropriate logbook.
S4. Supplementary requirements for Automated Oily
1636
Waste Transfer (AOWT) System
S4.1 The transfer system shall be designed as an automated
oily waste transfer (AOWT) system to provide practical
automatic monitoring, control, operation, and oily waste man-
agement. The AOWT system is intended to improve reliability,
reduce operator interaction, reduce maintenance, reduce
chance for operator error, avoid equipment damage, enhance
survivability, more effectively manage oily waste, and help
minimize the chance of oily waste being discharged overboard
in an emergency situation. The system shall facilitate the
processing of oily waste to ultimately evacuate clean water
overboard as quickly as possible.
S4.2 The AOWT system shall provide main operator inter-
faces and controls at a continuously manned space that has
personnel with authority to monitor and operate any portion of
the entire AOWT system. The main interface/control station
shall be capable of monitoring and operating the entire AOWT
system and shall have data logging capabilities. Local operator
<0 F2283 -12
interfaces and control stations shall also be provided in each
space equipped with a transfer pump. The local interface/
control station shall be capable of monitoring the entire AOWT
system but shall allow control for only the operations directly
associated with its local equipment. Audible and visual alarms
shall be provided at the main and local interface/control
stations.
S4.3 The AOWT system main and local interface/controls
shall utilize screen graphics to display at-a-glance status of the
entire transfer system including active flow paths, system
operating data, tank levels (total and interface levels), major
automated valve positions, pump flow rates, operating
pressures, and 15 ppm Bilge Separator and 15 ppm Bilge
Alarm status. The AOWT control system shall be capable of
being operated by simple keystrokes and/or touch screens.
S4.4 The AOWT system shall be designed such that central-
ized information is available for all pumping stations, and will
also be localized so each pumping station can operate inde-
pendently if needed. Components required for each pumping
station (pump, automated valves, transducers, etc.) shall be
logically grouped so that loss of communications of one
pumping station does not prevent operation of the remaining
AOWT system. Each pumping station and its associated
components and controllers shall be powered by independent
sources, so that downtime of any station does not affect
information sharing or operational capabilities of the other
stations.
S4.5 The AOWT system shall provide distinct modes of
operation as listed below:
S4.5.1 One mode shall be provided whereby the AOWT
control system automatically monitors the entire transfer sys-
tem and recommends OWT operations that will initiate only
with operator approval from either the main interface/control
station or from the local interface/control station where the
operation will occur. Once approved by the operator, the
AOWT control system shall automatically align all necessary
valves and start pump(s) to perform the operation.
Additionally, the operator shall be provided the option of
initiating any allowed transfer system operation at any time by
inputting the desired source (for example, bilges and tanks) and
target tanks and pump(s). Upon completion of the operation,
the AOWT control system shall automatically stop pumps and
return valves to their default position. A means for the operator
to secure operations at any time shall be provided. The control
system shall immediately secure operations if an alarm shut-
down condition is detected.
S4.5.2 One mode shall be provided whereby the AOWT
control system automatically monitors the entire transfer sys-
tem and automatically conducts internal shipboard transfer
operations without operator approval. Transfer operations that
involve o:ffioading oily waste to shore, sweep hoses, or pump
hose connections shall not be permitted without operator
approval. The AOWT control system shall automatically align
all necessary valves and start pumps to perform the operation.
Upon completion of the operation, the AOWT control system
shall automatically stop pumps and return valves to their
default position. A means for the operator to secure operations
1637
at any time shall be provided. The control system shall
immediately secure operations if an alarm shutdown condition
is detected.
S4.5.3 One mode shall be provided with password protection
or other means to limit access whereby an authorized operator
can remotely operate any individual automated device. In this
mode, remote control of transfer operations is allowed but the
operator must individually specify the pumps and automated
valves via the interface/control station. Although all readings,
indicators and visual/audible alarm and caution conditions
shall be displayed, the control system shall not take any
safeguards to secure the AOWT system operation. However,
mechanical safeguards (relief valves, vacuum breaks, overload
protectors, etc.) shall still be in effect. In this mode, the
operator shall manually secure each pump and valve at the
interface/control station.
S4.6 The AOWT control system shall be capable of integrat-
ing with a 15 ppm Bilge Separator control system. Tank level
data and other shared signals shall be provided to both the
AOWT control system and the 15 ppm Bilge Separator control
system. Sensing equipment shall not be duplicated to indepen-
dently serve the transfer and 15 ppm Bilge Separator systems.
S4.7 The AOWT system shall not use intermediate monitor-
ing devices for components that can directly communicate with
the AOWT control system. Such intermediate devices present
an unnecessary point of system failure.
S4.8 The AOWT control system shall use a minimum
amount of controllers to reduce cost and ease troubleshooting.
Controllers should be consolidated to achieve this purpose.
Program software and control system hardware shall be stan-
dardized to the maximum extent possible.
S4.9 The AOWT system shall have the features and capa-
bilities listed below.
S4.9.1 At a minimum, the AOWT system shall automatically
start a transfer operation when any of the following conditions
occur:
S4.9.1.1 A source tank or bilge reaches a high set point and
a target tank is below the high set point.
S4.9.1.2 An operator initiates a transfer operation.
S4.9.2 At a minimum, the AOWT system shall automatically
stop a transfer operation when any of the following conditions
occur:
S4.9.2.1 The source tank or bilge reaches a low set point.
Low set points shall be located to prevent air from being
routinely drawn into the suction bell mouth.
S4.9.2.2 The target tank reaches a high set point.
S4.9.2.3 An operator stops a transfer operation.
S4.9.2.4 An alarm shut down condition occurs.
S4.9.3 The AOWT control system shall display viable
options for source and target tanks when the operator initiates
a transfer in a mode that supports automated alignment.
S4.9.4 To accommodate peak demand periods, the AOWT
control system logic shall be capable of automatically coordi-
nating and conducting simultaneous transfer operations that do
not negatively impact or conflict with each other.
F2283-12
S4.9.5 The AOWT system shall be survivable. Capability
shall be provided to allow the AOWT system to operate as
automatically as possible in the event of one or more device
failures.
S4.9.6 Notification shall be provided to alert the operator of
an automatic system shut down as well as that an abnormal
condition exists that is not sufficiently serious to warrant a
system shutdown. The notification shall contain enough detail
to provide the operator adequate information to correct the
problem.
S4.9.7 Audible and visual alarms shall be provided to alert
the operator that a serious abnormal condition exists and
requires immediate action by the operator. Alarms shall be
designed to avoid nuisance alarms that occur too frequently or
at unaffected operating stations. The notification shaH contain
enough detail to provide the operator adequate information to
correct the problem.
S4.9.8 Certain critical alarms shall cause the AOWT system
to automatically secure when the system is in the appropriate
operating mode. At a minimum, the following conditions shall
cause an alarm shut down:
S4.9.8.1 Low pump suction pressure (high vacuum)
S4.9.8.2 High pump discharge pressure
S4.9.8.3 Receiving tank at a high level
S4.9.8.4 High differential pressure at pump strainer
S4.9.8.5 Valves failures
S4.9.8.6 Tank level indication inconsistency
S4.9.9 The AOWT control system shall receive total liquid
level and oil-water interface levels in the Oily Bilge Water
Holding Tank, Primary Bilge Tank, Oil Residue (sludge) Tank,
and other oily waste collection tanks via the continuous level
methods.
S4.9.10 A means shall be provided to automatically transfer
the contents of bilges and oily waste drain tanks to the oil
section of the Bilge Primary Tank or other oily waste collection
tanks at pre-determined set points.
S4.9.11 Bi-directional communication shall be used between
the AOWT and 15 ppm Bilge Separator system so that each
system can facilitate the other system's operation and perfor-
mance. For instance, the AOWT can trigger the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator to start processing early if the AOWT detects large
quantities of bilge water being generated. If the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator cannot reach 15 ppm, the 15 ppm Bilge Separator
can request the AOWT transfer bilge water (for example, that
maybe available in bilges or tanks) to dilute the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank contents.
S4.9.12 The AOWT system shall provide bulk oil stripping
capabilities to allow bulk oil in both sections of the Bilge
Primary Tank and the Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank to be
automatically stripped to the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank. High
and low bell mouths shall be included in these tanks to
facilitate this feature. The following criteria should be used
during oil strip of these tanks:
S4.9.12.1 There should be sufficient room in the Oil Residue
(sludge) Tank before commencing stripping operations.
S4.9.12.2 Oil hide-out shall be considered in
compartmentalized/baffled Bilge Primary Tank and Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank designs.
S4.9.12.3 Water carryover during the bulk oil stripping
process shall be minimized to ensure low total water content in
the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank (for example, not to exceed 5%
of tank contents).
S4.9.13 The AOWT system shall provide water phase
stripping capabilities to allow water in the Oil Residue (sludge)
Tank to be automatically stripped to the oil section of the
Primary Bilge Tank. The following criteria should be used
during water strip of the Oil Residue (sludge) Tank:
S4.9.13.1 There should be sufficient room in the Oily Bilge
Water Holding Tank to receive overflow from the Bilge
Primary Tank before commencing stripping operations.
S4.9.13.2 Oil carryover during the water stripping process
shall be minimized.
S4.9.14 Feature(s) shall be provided to monitor pump
and provide a clear indication to the operator that
pump capacity has fallen outside the pump's normal operation
window. Means to accomplish this requirement include track-
ing change in tank level over time, monitoring pump pressure,
and installing and monitoring flow meters.
S4.9.15 Means shall be provided via devices or processes
(for example, pressure, flow rate, etc.) to prevent pumps from
operating under conditions that can cause pump damage. For
example, pumps shall be protected from being run while dry.
Protection may include automatic pump priming or other
suitable features.
S4.9.16 The AOWT system shall be capable of logging and
holding data for Logged at least 18 months and retrieving the
logged data for review at the interface/control station(s) for
troubleshooting purposes. At a minimum, the logged data shall
include the following parameters with date and time stamp by
the main interface/control station:
S4.9.16.1 Notification of abnormal conditions (for example,
notifications and alarms that do not cause a shutdown)
S4.9.16.2 Alarm shutdown conditions
S4.9.16.3 Pump run time
S4.9.16.4 System pressures
S4.9.17 All transfer pump operations shall automatically be
secured prior to overflow of a target tank.
S4.9.18 All bulkhead isolation valves shall be automated.
S4.9.19 All automated valves in the AOWT system should
be motor-operated ball valves (full-port ball is recommended to
prevent shearing of oil droplets). Solenoid valves are not
recommended due to reliability issues.
S4.9.20 All automated valves shall be provided with manual
operators (that is, hand wheels) or a bypass.
S4.9.21 Key automated valves shall have a failsafe return
feature to provide system isolation in the event of a power or
control system loss.
S4.9.22 AOWT system shall be capable of monitoring total
and interface level in the Bilge Primary (both sections), Oily
Bilge Water Holding, and Oil Residue (sludge) tanks, and total
level in the other collecting tanks and bilges.
1638
S4.9.23 The AOWT control system shall be capable of
prioritizing transfer operation in a continuous basis and adjust-
ing transfer operation accordingly (for example, stop pumping
into a tank when it is reaching a high level).
F2283-12
S4.9.24 To account for AOWT control system failure, the
AOWT system shall be provided with means to manually
operate the system via manual/external pump control and valve
bypass I handle.
S5. Special Government Requirements
S5.1 For Government Procurement Only
S5.1.1 Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the
contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection
and test requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise
specified in the contract, the contractor shall be permitted to
use his own or any other suitable facilities for the performance
of the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless
rh.flnrln)'lrf'rl by the purchaser at time of purchase. The pur-
chaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections
and tests at the same frequency as set forth in this specification
where such inspections are deemed necessary to assure that
material conforms to prescribed requirements.
S5.2 Reference Documents Fl166 Practice for Human
Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment and Fa-
cilities F1337 Practice for Human Engineering Program Re-
quirements for Ships and Marine Systems, Equipment, and
Facilities MIL-STD-167 -1 Mechanical Vibrations of Ship-
board Equipment (Type I & II) MIL-STD-882 System Safety
Program Requirements MIL-S-901D Grade B Shock Require-
ments for Shock Tests, Shipboard Machinery, Equipment and
Systems MIL-STD-461 Electromagnetic Emission and Sus-
ceptibility Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic
Interference MIL--STD-462 Electromagnetic Interference
Characteristics, Measurements of
S5.3. Design Considerations
S5.3.1 The services that are available for the OPAS system
are:
S5.3.1.1 440V, 60-Hz, 3-phase electrical power, 3 wires,
ungrounded.
S5.3.1.2. 120V, 60-Hz, 3-phase electrical power, 3 wire
ungrounded.
S5.3.1.3 Seawater-at 791 to 1,308 kPa (100 to 175 psig).
(Actual value will vary over time and depending on shipboard
location.)
S5.3.1.4 Fresh Water-515 kPa (60 psig) up to 10 GPM;
70F (21 C).
S5.3.1.5 Ship Service Compressed Air-At 963 kPa (125
psig) (air supply to the space at a maximum temperature of
32C (90F) with a wet bulb temperature of 32C (81 F)
S5.3.1.6 Compartment Ventilation-As Required.
S5.3.1.7 Material degradation restoration and material re-
shall be limited to ship scheduled availability
S5.3. 1 .8 The service power generation system shall
the worst-case functional operating load, with service
with one ship service generator set not in
use.
S5.3.2 If a waste oil incinerator or other means of destroying
oil residue is provided, the Oil Residue Tank
shall hold a minimum of seven days of waste.
S5.3.3 A swing check valve shall be installed near the shell
penetration in all overflows which discharge overboard.
S5.3.4 The Oily Bilge Water Holding Tank overboard
overflow piping shall discharge at least one deck height above
the full load waterline via a swing check valve.
S5.3.5 All valves at the suction side of pumps shall be ball
valves to minimize suction.
S5.3.6 All rotating machinery shall be installed with the axis
of rotation as nearly horizontal and parallel to the centerline of
the ship as practical.
S5.3.7 Due to the criticality of the mission of military
vessels, an overboard discharge connection shall be provided
for the oily waste transfer pump to allow dewatering of the
bilges in case of emergency. This emergency overboard dis-
charge connection shall be provided with a swing check valve,
double valve protection, and a valve locking device to keep the
valve shut.
S5.3.8 The hull penetration for the overboard discharge
piping shall be above the ship's water line.
S5.3.9 Oily Waste Transfer pump, Oil Residue (sludge)
pump, and Oil Residue (sludge) Collecting pump may be
combined.
S5.4. Hazardous Substance Minimization
S5.4.1 Equipment and systems provided shall minimize the
production and use of hazardous materials.
S5.4.2 Lead paint shall not be used.
S5.4.3 The OPAS shall not utilize chlorinated plastics in its
construction or any subsystem.
S5 .5 Human Engineering
S5.5.1 Human engineering principles and standards
shall be applied in the ship design, system and equipment
selection, systems integration, hardware, software, architec-
tural aspects, and human-machine interfaces.
S5.5.2 Practice F1166 specific criteria shall be applied in the
design of compartments, spaces, systems, work and control
stations, and facilities. Factors affecting both normal and
emergency conditions, such as illumination and environmental
conditions shall be as outlined in Practice Fl337.
S5.5.3 Operation, maintenance, and repair activities and
procedures shall minimize the requirement for manual han-
dling operations and shall accommodate a wide range of
individual physical capability.
S5.5.4 Accommodation of the needs of the 5th percentile
female as well as 95th percentile male shall be incorporated.
S5.5.5 The level of training required for operating personnel
shall be no more than two (2) hours of on-the-job training;
training required for maintenance personnel shall be no more
than five (5) hours.
1639
S5.6 System Safety
S5.6.1 Man-machine interfaces shall minimize both the
!JVlli;_,HH<l.l for and the consequence of human error.
S5.6.2 Ship's systems, equipment, and arrangement shall
ensure the safety of personnel, systems, equipment, and the
environment during operation, maintenance, and support evo-
lutions necessary to fulfill the ship's mission and required
capabilities.
S5.6.3 System safety shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-
882.
F2283-12
S5.6.4 The ship design shall reflect system and personnel
safety factors, including the elimination or minimization of the
potential for human error during operation and maintenance,
under routine, non-routine, and emergency conditions.
S5.6.5 System safety shall be integrated into the design to
avoid hazardous manual handling operations as far as reason-
ably practicable, and shall limit activities to the required range
of physical capabilities.
S5.7 Process Monitoring
S5.7.1 The system shall provide for sufficient process
monitoring and the automated controls necessary to maintain
the set point operating conditions.
S5.7.2 Set Points for parameters required by the manufac-
turer to control the treatment process are to be determined by
the manufacturer.
S5.7.3 The OPAS control/operator interface shall clearly
communicate all information to the operator that is required to
ensure efficient and safe operation of the OPAS process.
S5.8 System Supportability
S5.8.1 Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM)
Requirements-The reliability, availability, and maintainability
characteristics of the OPAS shall be such to ensure that the
crew of a ship can, with a high degree of confidence,
consistently dispose of the waste stream as defined by pur-
chaser.
S5.8.1.1 All OPAS equipment, including 15 ppm Bilge
Separator, 15 ppm Bilge Alarm, automatic stopping device, and
transfer pumps shall meet the reliability, availability and
maintainability requirements this section. All tests shall be
performed by an independent test facility and/or witnessed by
an authorized government representative unless otherwise
specified. Any change to or substitutions for major equipment
components shall warrant re-verification that the requirements
contained herein are met.
S5.8.1.2 The manufacturer shall provide proof or certifica-
tion that systems conform to the requirements specified herein.
Applicable records shall include drawings, specifications, de-
sign data, receiving inspection records, processing and quality
control standards, vendor catalogs and certifications, industry
standards, test reports, and rating data.
S5.8.1.3 A summary of reliability, maintainability, and avail-
ability requirements is provided in Table S5.l
S5.8.1.4 The service life of the OPAS shall be 15 years
minimum with an operating life expectancy of 10,000 hours
minimum. A Reliability Development Growth Test (RDGT)
shall be performed to verify the service life during first article
testing.
S5.8.1.5 For reliability, the Mean-Time-Between-Failure
(MTBF) of the system shall be 400 hours at a 90% level of
confidence. MTBF shall be determined when the system is
operated at rated capacity during first article testing. With no
failures, the actual run time statistically required to meet the
MTBF goal is 922 hours. For testing purposes, a failure is
defined by adjustment, repair, or replacement action using
controls, on-equipment tools or parts, and which causes or may
cause:
S5.8.1.5.1 Failure to commence operation, cessation of
operation, or degradation of performance below specified
levels.
S5.8.1.5.2 Damage to the system by continued operation.
S5.8.1.5.3 Safety hazard to personnel.
S5.8.1.5.4 Any mechanical or electrical malfunction that
causes the system to be inoperative for more than five hours
during the operational test, or which cause the system not to
meet performance objectives.
S5.8.1.6 Failures for OPASs shall be classified as follows:
S5.8.1.6.1 Critical-Any failure that prevents attainment of
a key performance parameter (for example, 15 ppm Bilge
Separator system effluent concentration, pump suction lift, 15
ppm Bilge Alarm decision making).
S5.8.1.6.2 Major-Any failure that causes the system to lose
capability to process oily waste, or a malfunction that requires
more than 5 hours of corrective maintenance action to remedy.
S5.8.1.6.3 Minor-Any failure that affects operation, but
does not prevent the processing of oily wastewater.
S5.8.1.7 All critical, major, and minor failures shall also be
classified as either relevant or non-relevant. Examples of
relevant failure include equipment design defects or equipment
manufacturing defects. Examples of non-relevant failure can
be attributed to operator or procedural error, or accident,
mishandling, and improper storage or installation.
S5.8.1.8 The MTBF shall be based upon relevant critical and
relevant major failures only.
TABLE S5.1 Summary of Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM) Requirements
Service Life
Operating Life
MTBF
Maintenance Ratio
Avg. Annual Preventive
Maintenance (Max)
Max Time for Preventive
Maintenance
Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)
(geometric)
Maximum Time To Repair
(Max TTR)
Operational Availability (A
0
)
for entire OPAS
Transfer Pump
15 years minimum
10,000 hours
400 hrs, 90% confidence
0.03
3.5 hr/wk
2 man-hour
3 hour
6 hours
15 ppm Bilge Separator
15 years minimum
10,000 hours
0.03
3.5 hrs/wk
16 man-hours
3 hours
8 hours
1640
95%
15 ppm Bilge Alarm
15 years minimum
10,000 hours
0.03
1 hr/wk
1 man-hour
1 hour
4 hours
Automatic stopping device
15 years minimum
10,000 hours
0.03
1 hr/wk
1 man-hour
1 hour
4 hours
F2283-12
TABLE S5.2 Environmental Requirements for OPA Equipment
Factor
Shock
Environmental Vibration
Internally Excited Vibration (for
rotating machinery)
Airborne Noise
Structure-borne Noise
Electromagnetic Interference
Operational Temperatures
Storage (non-operational)
Temperatures
Humidity
Inclination
Salt Fog
Hydrostatic Pressure
Requirement
Grade B, Class I, Type A
Type I
Type II
Grade E
Type II
Emissions and susceptibility
requirements for auxiliary equipment
operating in a machinery space
Operate as designed in ambient
temperatures ranging from 50-122F
Not be damaged or degraded as a
result of being subjected to ambient
air temperatures ranging from -40 to
158F
No damaged or degraded
performance when subjected to
humidity profiles in the standard
Operate as designed with no loss of
fluid when inclined at a rate of 5 to 7
cycles per minute in one phase to
angles of 15 degrees on both sides of
the vertical for a period of not less
than 30 minutes. Repeat with the
system rotated 90 degrees through
the vertical to the plane in which it
was originally rotated.
Operate as designed after a 48 hour
exposure followed by a 48 hour drying
time
Subject to 135% system design
pressure and hold with no leaks for 30
minutes.
S5.8.1.9 If failures (relevant critical or relevant major) occur
during the 922 hour test that prevents the attainment of 400
.hours MTBF, a waiver may be requested from the correspond-
ing government authority. A waiver shall only be granted if the
failure(s) occurred after 461 hours of operation (to demonstrate
a MTBF of 200 hours at 90% confidence) and if an engineer-
ing analysis is performed by the manufacturer to show that the
failure will not result in an undue burden to the government for
shipboard installed systems. The completion of the full 922
hour reliability test shall be at the discretion of the applicable
government authority. The failure(s) shall be counted in the
other maintainability metrics discussed in this section.
S5.8.1.10 The OPAS shall have a maintenance ratio of not
greater than 0.03. The maintenance ratio is the ratio of total
active maintenance man-hours (scheduled and unscheduled) to
the total operating time. The scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance shall be timed, accumulated and converted to a
maintenance ratio during first article testing. Only scheduled
maintenance in the manufacturer's recommended maintenance
schedule shall be permitted.
S5.8.1.11 The average time for preventative maintenance
(calculated on an annual calendar-year basis) shall not exceed
3.5 hours per week for 15 ppm Bilge Separator equipment and
transfer pumps and 1 hour per week for 15 ppm Bilge Alarm
and diverter valves. The time required to perform any preven-
tive maintenance action shall not be greater than 16 man-hours
for 15 ppm Bilge Separator equipment, 2 man-hours for
transfer pumps, or 1 man-hour for 15 ppm Bilge Alarm and
diverter valves by an Engineman third class or Electrician's
Mate third class.
Standard
MIL-S-9010
MIL-STD-167-1
MIL-STD-167-1
MIL-STD-740-1
MIL-STD-740-2
MIL-STD-461
MIL-STD 810 method 501.4,
procedure I and II for high
temperature and method 502.4,
procedure I and II for low temperature.
Operating period for each test is 1
hour.
MIL-STD-810 method 507.4
None
MIL-STD-810 method 509.2
None
Demonstration Method
Independent Test Facility Test
Independent test
Engineering Analysis by Manufacturer
Independent Test Facility Test or
Manufacturer Test
Test by Manufacturer
S5.8.1.12 All major OPAS assemblies and installed attach-
ments shall be accessible for maintenance, repair, and replace-
ment without the removal of other major assemblies and
attachments. The components shall be arranged so all mainte-
nance can be performed with access from only the front of the
system and one adjacent side. In addition, the 15 ppm Bilge
Separator shall be designed for a maximum time to repair (Max
TTR) of 8 hours. The mean time to repair (MTTR) shall not
exceed 3 hours. The transfer pump shall be designed for a Max
TTR of 6 hours. The MTTR shall not exceed 3 hours. The 15
ppm Bilge Alarm and diverter valve shall be designed for a
Max TTR of 4 hours with a MTTR of 1 hour.
S5.8.1.13 The availability characteristics for the OPAS are
based upon operational testing and evaluation. The operational
availability (A
0
) shall be 95% for the entire OPAS. The value
(A
0
) is determined by the following formula:
S5.8.1.13.1 A
0
Uptime/ (Uptime+ Downtime).
S5.8.1.14 Uptime is the total calendar time that the system is
in a condition to perform its required functions (that is, it will
operate if needed). Downtime is calendar time that the system
is not in a condition to perform its required functions due to
preventive or corrective maintenance. Downtime includes
delays due to logistics.
S5 .8.1.15 Environmental Requirements
S5.8.1.15.1 All OPAS equipment, including 15 ppm Bilge
Separator, 15 ppm Bilge Alarm, automatic stopping device, and
transfer pumps shall comply with the requirements in Table
S5.2. Compliance shall be demonstrated by testing at an
independent test facility, engineering analysis by the equip-
ment manufacturer, or testing by the equipment manufacturer.
1641
F2283-12
Results from all tests or engineering analysis shall be submitted
to the corresponding government authority. Deviations from
the requirements listed in Table S5.2 shall be documented in a
letter from the corresponding government authority that iden-
tifies the nature of the deviation and the risks to that program.
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org or through the ASTPv1
COPYRIGHT/).
1642
c& Designation: F2361 - 03 (Reapproved 2009)
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAl..
Standard Guide for
Ordering low Voltage {1 000 VAC or less) Alternating
Current Electric Motors for Shipboard Service-Up to and
Including Motors of 500 Horsepower
1
1. Scope
1.1 This guide covers the required basic ordering informa-
tion for low voltage (1000 VAC or less) general-purpose,
commercial, universal, small and medium sized alternating
current electric motors for shipboard use, up to and including
motors of 500 hp.
1.2 The electric motors covered by this guide are general-
purpose (GP) motors intended to drive common shipboard
mechanical machinery such as fans, blowers, centrifugal and
screw pumps.
1.3 This guide is not intended to be used to order special-
purpose (SP) motors or definite-purpose motors (for example,
cryogenic service) or motors for use in hazardous (classified)
locations as defined by the National Electrical Code (NFPA
70).
2.1 Canadian Standards Association ( CSA):
2
CSA Standard C390-93C Energy Efficiency Test Methods
for Three-Phase Induction Motors General Instruction
No.1
2.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE):
3
[EEE Standard 45 Recommended Practice for Electrical
Installations on Shipboard
1
Electrical.
10.1520/F2361-03R09.
2
Available from Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 5060 Spectrum Way,
Mississauga, ON L4W 5N6, Canada, http://www.csa.ca.
3
IEEE Standard 112 Standard Test-Procedure for Polyphase
Induction Motors and Generators
2.3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Standard:
4
NEMA Standard MG-1 Motors and Generators
2.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
5
3. Terminology
3.1.1 closed-coupled-a special design where the motor
features a face mounting flange that the pump casing mounts
to, and a motor shaft extension on which the pump impeller is
mounted.
3.1.2 dripproof-a machine enclosure that allows the motor
to be cooled by ambient air having ventilation openings that
allow operation when drops of liquid or solid particles strike
the enclosure at any angle from zero to 15.
3.1.3 drive method-the method of driving the equipment,
such as direct, belt, gearbox, or chain.
3.1.4 efficiency classes-standard efficiency classes estab-
lished by NEMA based on motor performance.
3.1.5 end shield-a machined flange or base which have
rabbets and bolt holes for mounting equipment to the motor or
for overhanging the motor on a driven machine.
3.1.6 frame size-standard sizes established by NEMA
based on motor power and speed.
3 .1. 7 mounting arrangement-the installed operating posi-
tion of the motor, such as horizontal, vertical shaft up, or
vertical shaft down.
3.1.8 multi-speed-a motor that can operate at more than
one speed, typically at two or three speeds.
3.1.9 NEMA design classes-design classifications desig-
nated by NEMA (See NEMA Standard MG-1) for motors that
4
5
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), I Battcrymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471, http:/fwww.nfpa.org.
1643
F2361 - 03 (2009)
provides information to the end user on characteristics such as
motor starting, torque, voltage, and so forth.
3.1.10 NEMA insulation classes-NEMA system that clas-
sifies motor insulation systems by their ability to withstand a
specified temperature for a specified length of time with
minimum deterioration.
3.1.11 polyphase medium motors-motors which have
windings so arranged to accept to polyphase voltage sources.
3.1.12 service factor-service factor for an ac motor is a
multiplier, which when applied to the rated horsepower,
indicates a permissible horsepower loading which may be
carried under the conditions specified for the service factor.
3.1.13 single-phase fractional horsepower motors-motors
with ratings up to 1 hp which use single-phase power.
3.1.14 single-phase integral horsepower motors-motors
with ratings of 1 hp up to and including 10 hp, which normally
use single-phase power but at the upper end of their specified
range may also utilize polyphase power.
3.1.15 slip-the difference between synchronous speed and
full load speed. Normal slip is less than 5 %.
3.1.16 speed-the number of revolutions per minute (r/min)
at which an induction motor operates, which is dependent upon
the input power, frequency, and the number of magnetic poles
in the machine.
3 .1.17 temperature, ambient-the temperature of the air
surrounding the machine.
3.1.18 temperature rise-the difference between the hot
spot temperature and the ambient temperature times a constant
(see NEMA MG-1).
3.1.19 totally-enclosed air over (TEAO )-an enclosure
similar to a TEFC except the cooling air is provided by a fan
that is not part of the motor.
3.1.20 totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC)-a totally-
enclosed machine equipped for exterior cooling by means of a
fan or fans integral with the machine but external to the
enclosed parts.
3 .1.21 totally-enclosed non-ventilated (TENV)-a machine
enclosed to prevent the free exchange of air between the inside
and outside of the case, but not sufficiently enclosed to be
airtight.
3.1.22 totally-enclosed water-air cooled (TEWAC)-a
totally-enclosed machine with integral water-to-air heat ex-
changer and internal fans to provide closed-loop cooling of the
windings.
3.1.23 universal motors-typically small motors, which can
operate on ac or de current, or both.
3.1.24 variable speed drive (VSD )-a method used to per-
mit an operator to vary the speed of a motor.
3.1.25 weather protected-a machine with ventilating pas-
sages so constructed as to minimize the entrance of rain, snow
and airborne particles to the electrical components.
4. General Requirements for Electric Motor Ordering
4.1 Electric Motor Ordering Requirements :
1644
TABLE 1 Sample Electric Motor Ordering Checklist
Electrical Input
Speed
Power
Enclosure
Duty Cycles
Parameter
Ambient Temperature
Insulation Class
Design Class
Service Factor
Drive Method
Mounting Arrangement
Mounting Flange (end shield)
Rotation
Motor conduit box Location
Closed-Coupled
Efficiency
Special Requirements
Other Standards
Voltage, Phase,
Frequency
Other
r/min (single speed, two
speed, VSD)
Type per NEMA MG-1
Continuous or Other
oc
per NEMA MG-1
per NEMA MG-1
1.0 or Other
Specify
Specify
Yes or No
CW, CCW, Reversible
F1, F2
Yes or No
Standard, High, Premium
Specify
Specify
4.1.1 With each electric motor ordered for marine service,
provide the following, to the greatest extent practicable:
4.1.1.1 Electrical Input-Voltage, phases and frequency.
4.1.1.2 Speed (Synchronous or Full Load)-rlmin.
4.1.1.3 Power-The horsepower of the motor must be stated
as a standard NEMA rating. At a minimum, consideration
should be given to the needed starting torque, capability to
accelerate the load to full running speed and maximum
overload.
4.1.1.4 Enclosure-Select in accordance with IEEE Stan-
dard 45. DP or TEFC are normally specified for below deck
applications and WP for above deck applications.
4.1.1.5 Duty Cycle-Continuous duty is normally specified
since it demands operation at an essentially constant load for an
indefinitely long time. If intermittent or varying duty cycles are
required, special motor selection criteria will apply.
4.1.1.6 Ambient Temperature-Standard motors are de-
signed for 400C ambient. If a higher ambient is required, this
will reduce the service factor or reduce the motor rating thus
requiring a larger size motor.
4.1.1.7 Insulation Class.
4.1.1.8 Design Class-NEMA designated design class.
4.1.1.9 Service Factor (SF).
4.1.1.10 Drive Method.
4.1.1.11 Mounting Arrangement-If vertical, specify with
or without feet.
4.1.1.12 Mounting Flange (End Shield):
( 1) C-face
(2) D-flange
(3) P-base
4.1.1.13 Rotation-The rotation of the motor must be speci-
fied as clockwise, counter-clockwise or reversible.
4.1.1.14 Conduit Box Location-View from the non-shaft
end of the motor:
( 1) Right (standard)-Fl
(2) Left-F2
4.1.1.15 Closed-coupled-Specify when the motor will
mount the pump on a flange and the motor shaft mounts the
pump impeller.
F2361 - 03 (2009)
4.1.1.16 Efficiency-If compliance with the Energy Policy
Act of 1992 is necessary, it should be stated that motors shall
be furnished with a nominal efficiency as defined in Table
12-10, NEMA MG-1.
4.1.1.17 Special Requirements-This shall include, but not
be limited to, space heaters, temperature protection, additional
regulatory or classification society requirements. Specific
specification sections and paragraphs must be cited.
4.2 Other Requirements:
4.2.1 Marine Service--Each motor specified for installation
on board ship shall as a minimum comply with the require-
ments of IEEE Standard 45.
4.2.2 General Testing-Unless otherwise stated, all motors
shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEEE
Standard 112.
4.3 Electric Motor Ordering Checklist :
4.3.1 It is recommended that the minimum information
shown in Table 1 be provided to the supplier when ordering an
electric motor for marine service.
5. Keywords
5.1 general purpose motors; multi-speed motors; polyphase
motors
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the vaiidity of any such patent rights, and the risk
This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, "I 00 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
COPYRIGHT/).
1645
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Temperature Monitoring Equipment
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for equip-
ment intended to provide control input and monitoring of
temperatures in general applications. Equipment described in
this specification includes temperature indicators, signal con-
ditioners and power supplies, and temperature sensors such as
thermocouples and resistance temperature element assemblies.
1.2 Special requirements for Naval shipboard applications
are included in the Supplementary Requirements section.
only.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
E344 Terminology Relating to Thennometry and Hydrom-
etry
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions-Definitions of terminology shall be in ac-
cordance with Terminology B344.
4. Classification
4.1 General-Temperature measuring devices are generally
classified as either temperature sensors or thermometers. Ther-
mometers are not covered by this specification. Temperature
sensors are classified by design and construction. Sensors may
also be classified by the manner of response, basically me-
chanical or electrical, to a change in temperature. Mechanical
response is characterized by some mechanical action as tem-
perature changes. Electrical response is characterized by the
production or change of an electrical signal or property as
1
Electrical.
l0.1520/F2362-03R09.
2
the ASTM website.
temperature changes. The following describes the most com-
mon types of sensors:
4.2 Thermocouples-Thermocouples are constructed in a
variety of designs to provide measurement of direct or differ-
ential temperature. Thermocouples are commonly installed
using a thermowell which protects the thermocouple but also
delays the rapid response time characteristic of thermocouples.
4.2.1 Principle of Operation-Most thermocouples utilize
two wires fabricated from dissimilar metals joined at one end
to form a measuring junction that is exposed to the process
medium being measured. The other ends of the wires are
usually terminated at a measuring instrument which forms a
reference junction. When the two junctions are exposed to
different temperatures, electrical current will flow through the
circuit (Seebeck Effect). The measurement of millivoltage
resulting from the current is proportional to the temperature
being sensed.
4.2.2 Types of Thermocouples-Thermocouples can be di-
vided into functional classes by materials and therefore,
temperature ranges. The three classes are base metal, noble
metal, and refractory metal. Although many types are com-
monly used in industrial applications, the Instrument Society of
America (ISA) has assigned letter designations to seven types.
By convention, the practice of using a slash mark to separate
the materials of each thermocouple wire is widely accepted.
Likewise, the order in which the materials appear also denotes
polarity of the wires; positive/negative when the measuring
junction is at a higher temperature than the reference junction.
The following are examples of typical thermocouples:
Class Type Materials
Temperature
(max)
Base metal J I ron/constantan 1ooooc (1832F)
Base metal T Copper/constantan 1000C (1832F)
Base metal K Chromel/ Alumel 1000oc (1832F)
Base metal E Chromel/constantan 10oooc (1832F)
Base metal Alloys of copper, nickel, iron, 1ooooc (1832F)
chromium,
manganese, aluminum, and
other metals
Noble metal Various noble metals 2ooooc (3632F)
Refractory Tungsten-rhenium, tantalum, 2600C (4712F)
metal molybdenum,
and their alloys
4.3 Resistance Temperature Measuring Devices-
Resistance thermometers measure changes in temperature
based on changes in resistance of the sensor element exposed
1646
F2362 - 03 (2009)
to the temperature. Two common types are resistance tempera-
ture detectors which have metal sensor elements and thermis-
tors which have semiconductor sensor elements.
4.3.1 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)-An RTD
consists of sensor which uses a metal wire or fiber which
responds to changes in temperature by changing its resistance.
The sensor is connected to a readout via a bridge circuit or
other means of translating the resistance to a temperature
value.
4.3.1.1 Types of RTDs-RTD designs include averaging
RTDs, annular RTDs, and combination RTD-thermocouples.
Averaging RTDs are characterized by a long resistance ele-
ment. Annular RTDs have sensors that are designed to provide
a tight fit within the inner walls of thermowells. Combination
RTD-thermocouples have both an RTD and a thermocouple
housed in the same sheath.
4.3.2 Thermistors-Thermistors are made of solid semicon--
ductor materials, usually complex metal oxides, that have a
high coefficient of resistance. Thermistors are available with
positive and negative temperature coefficients of resistance and
are usually designated PTC and NTC thermistors, respectively.
The temperature range for typical thermistors is 1 00 to 300C
(212 to 572F).
4.3.2.1 Types of Thermistors-Thermistors are classed by
the configuration of the semiconductor material. Common
types are the bead, disc, washer, and rod thermistors. Leads are
attached to semiconductor materials, except where metal plated
faces are used for contact to complete the circuit.
of the pertinent application data outlined in the acquisition
requirements.
5.2.1 Title, number and date of this specification,
5.2.2 Classification required,
5.2.3 Quantity of units required,
5.2.4 Type of enclosure mounting,
5.2.5 Power requirements,
5.2.6 Equipment temperature ranges,
5.2.7 Size or weight limitations,
5.2.8 Disposition of qualification test samples,
5.2.9 Product marking requirements, and
5.2.10 Special preservation, packaging, packing and mark-
ing requirements.
6.1 Temperature Sensors-The materials for all wetted parts
shall be selected for long term compatibility with the process
medium.
7.1 Description-The equipment specified herein in con-
junction with the thermocouples or resistance temperature
measuring elements comprise a temperature instrument. The
temperature monitoring equipment may consist of the follow-
ing units and may be built integrally together and housed in the
same enclosure:
7 .1.1 Signal Conditioner-The signal conditioner shall con-
vert the sensing element output to a continuous linear analog
signal directly proportional to temperature.
7.1.2 Power Supply-The power supply shall provide exci-
tation energy to the signal conditioner and sensor.
7 .1.3 Test Device-A test device shall be furnished to
provide a calibrated test signal used for calibrating the equip-
ment.
7.2 Size and Weight Considerations-A dimensional outline
of the temperature monitoring equipment showing overall and
principle dimensions in sufficient detail to establish space
requirements in all directions necessary for installation and
servicing will greatly assist proper selection. In many applica-
tions weight is a critical limitation.
7.3 General Features-Requirements for general features
shall be specified. General features consist of the following:
7.3.1 Output,
7.3 .2 Equipment range,
7.3.3 Adjustments,
7.3.4 Failsafe output,
7.3.5 Isolation,
7.3.6 Enclosure,
7.3.7 Power supply requirements, and
7.3.8 Cable entrance and connection.
8.1 Service Life-The purchaser may have a m1mrnum
specified service life requirement. Critical service life require-
ments shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
1647
8.2 Performance Considerations-Certain performance
characteristics may be deemed critical to the intended or
desired function of temperature monitoring equipment. Perfor-
mance tolerances are usually expressed in percent of equip-
ment span. The following performance characteristics and
environmental exposures should be tailored to each purchaser's
intended application:
8.2.1 Accuracy,
8.2.2 Repeatability,
8.2.3 Threshold and deadband,
8.2.4 Ripple,
8.2.5 Warm-up time,
8.2.6 Input resistance,
8.2.7 Supply voltage or frequency, or both,
8.2.8 Temperature error,
8.2.9 Response time,
8.2.1 0 Temperature,
8.2.11 Insulation resistance,
8.2.12 Vibration, and
8.2.13 Shock.
requirements.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
subjected to qualification testing shall depend on the sensor
design. If each range is covered by a separate and distinct
design, a test specimen for each range may require testing. In
instances where a singular design series may cover multiple
ranges and types, only three test specimens may need to be
tested provided the electrical and mechanical similarities are
approved by the purchaser. In no case, however, should less
than three units, one unit each representing low , medium, and
high ranges, be tested, regardless of design similarity.
11. Test Data
manufacturer's facility for review by the purchaser upon
request. It is recommended that test data be retained in the
manufacturer's files for at least three years, or a period of time
acceptable to the purchaser and manufacturer.
12. Inspection
12.1.1 Qualification testing, and
12.1.2 Quality conformance testing.
shall be specified where applicable. Qualification test methods
should be identified for each design and performance charac-
teristic specified. Test report documentation requirements
should also be specified.
testing is accomplished when qualification testing was satisfied
by a previous acquisition or product has demonstrated reliabil-
ity in similar applications. Quality conformance testing is
usually less intensive than qualification, often verifying that
samples of a production lot meet a few critical performance
requirements.
13. Certification
14. Product Marking
14.1 Purchaser specified product marking shall be listed in
packaged for shipment in accordance with Practice D3951.
requirements for shipment or storage shall be identified in
16.1 Warranty:
16.1.1 Responsibility for Warranty-Unless otherwise
16.1.1.1 All materials used to produce a unit, and
16.1.1.2 Manufacturer will warrant his product to be free
from defect of workmanship to produce the unit.
17. Keywords
17.1 resistance temperature detector (RTD); thermistor;
thermocouple
TEMPERATURE MONITORING EQUIPMENT (NAVAL SHIPBOARD USE)
(ASTM F2362) and this supplement, the requirements of this supplement shall take precedence for
equipment acquired by this supplement. This document supercedes MIL-T-15377, Temperature
Monitor Equipment, Naval Shipboard, for new ship construction.
Sl. Scope
S 1.1 This supplement covers temperature monitoring equip-
ment which continuously monitors and selectively indicates, at
a central location, a number of temperatures at remote equip-
ment locations on board naval ships.
S1.2 Monitoring Equipment-Monitoring equipment, in
conjunction with the temperature sensor assemblies and inter-
connecting cabling, comprise a temperature measuring and
1648
alarm system. In order to warn operating personnel of abnor-
mal temperature conditions, the system shall energize an
audible and visual alarm when the temperature at a particular
location is below or above a preset limit. Monitoring of
temperatures shall be accomplished by measuring the electro-
motive force (emf) output of thermocouples or by measuring
the signal output due to changes in resistance of temperature
F2362 - 03 (2009)
sensing elements. Temperature monitoring equipment shall
actuate external audible alarms specified herein.
S 1.3 Selective Temperature Readout Equipment-Selective
temperature readout equipment, in conjunction with tempera-
ture sensor assemblies and interconnecting cabling, comprise a
temperature measuring system. In order to enable operating
personnel to measure a number of temperatures at remote
points, the system shall enable the operator to manually select
the desired point to be measured, convert the selected tempera-
ture sensor output to a signal proportional to temperature, and
display this signal on a meter calibrated in temperature oc (F).
Readout of temperatures shall be accomplished by measuring
the output of thermocouples or by measuring the signal output
due to changes in resistance of temperature sensing elements.
S1.4 The U.S. Government preferred system of measure-
ment is the metric SI system. However, since this item was
ANSI C96.1 Temperature Measurement Thermocouples
3
4
Excited)
MIL-STD-1399 Interface Standard for Shipboard Systems
Electric Section 300 Power, Alternating Current (Metric)
MIL-PRF-19207 11 Fuseholders, Extractor Post Type,
Blown Fuse Indicating, Type FHLlOU
MIL-PRF-19207 12 Fuseholders, Extractor Post Type,
Blown Fuse Indicating, Type FHL 11 U
S3. Terminology
S3.1 Definitions:
S3.1.1 temperature monitoring equipment-the necessary
equipment required to continuously or selectively sense and
indicate various temperatures including audible and visual
alarms when specified.
S4. Classification
S4.1 Classification-Monitoring and selective temperature
readout equipment classification shall be of following format:
Example: ASTM F2362S1-IC/A-1-RTE-40
Specification Type
F2362S1 IC/A
(see S4.2)
Alarm
1
(see S4.3)
Sensing
Technique
RTE
(see S4.4)
Number of
Channels
40
(see S4.5)
3
4
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.
S4.2 Type-The equipment shall be designated by the 3
letter symbols as follows:
IC/ A-Continuous, simultaneous monitoring of remote tem-
perature sensors for alarm and also manual selective tempera-
ture readout.
IC/1-Manual selective temperature readout for measuring
temperatures at several remote locations.
!CIS-Continuous, sequential scanning of remote tempera-
ture sensors for indication and alarm.
S4.3 Alarm-The alarm technique shall be designated by a
single number as follows:
1-Alarm on temperature above the set level or (exclusive
or) below the set level as operator selected.
2-No alarm provision-temperature readout only.
S4.4 Temperature Sensing Technique-The temperature
sensing technique shall be designated by 3 letter symbols as
follows:
RTE-Resistance temperature element, platinum.
TCE-Thermocouple temperature element, type K.
S4.4.1 Readout Ranges-Readout ranges shall be provided
as specified as follows:
( 1) For RTE type sensors, the following ranges and meter
scales shall be provided:
(a) 5 to 127C (-40 to 260F)
(b) 18 to 205C (0 to 400F)
(c) 18 to 427C (0 to 800F)
(d) 18 to 538C (0 to 1000F)
(2) For type TCE sensors, the following ranges and meter
scales shall be provided:
(a) 5 to 127C (-40 to 260F)
(b) 18 to 205C (0 to 400F)
(c) 18 to 427C (0 to 800F)
(d) 205 to 816C (400 to 1500F)
(e) 260 to 1093C (500 to 2000F)
S4.5 Number of Channels-The number of channels, cor-
responding to the number of remote sensors that monitored
shall be designated by its numerical value.
S5.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with an
of the pertinent application data shown in accordance with
S5.2. If special application operating conditions exist that are
described.
( 1) Title, number and date of this specification,
(2) Classification required,
1649
( 3) Quantity of items required,
( 4) Number of temperature sensors to be monitored,
(5) Setting of alarm channels, if other than 93.3C (200F),
( 6) Height and weight of equipment assembly,
(7) Number of remote resistance temperature sensors or
remote thermocouple temperature sensors monitored by
equipment,
( 8) Equipment alarm and readout temperature range,
(9) Accuracy or other performance requirements,
( 10) Disposition of qualification test samples, and
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
( 11) Unique preservation, packaging and marking require-
ments.
S6.1 Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall be fabri-
cated from corrosion resistant materials compatible with sys-
tem piping materials and process medium.
S7.1 Enclosure Assembly:
S7.1.1 Temperature Monitor Equipment-Equipment enclo-
sure assembly shall be of sheet metal, splash-proof
construction, and shall be suitable for either panel or bulkhead
mounting. Splash-proof construction shall be such that water or
solid particles directed at the enclosed equipment or its
mounting surface shall have no harmful effect on equipment
operation.
S7.1.2 Continuous Parallel Monitoring (JCIA)-Enclosure
assembly for IC/ A monitor equipment shall contain one tern-
perature readout module and the number of alarm modules
required to provide the number of alarm channels specified, up
to a maximum of 60. Modules shall be readily removable from
the enclosure assembly by means of integral plug-in features
operable from the front of the enclosure. Access to the interior
or back of the enclosure assembly shall not be required to
accomplish removal of any module.
S7.1.3 Temperature Readout Module-The temperature
module shall be a temperature readout device and associated
circuits. Necessary controls shall be located on the front panel
of the module.
S7.1.4 Alarm Module (!CIA and ICII)-Indicator lights and
controls shall be located on the front panel of each alarm
module to perform the following functions. Multi-position
switches may be utilized to combine control functions speci-
fied.
(1) Power on light (white lens).
(2) Alarm light for each temperature monitoring channel
(red lens).
(3) External alarm cut-out (silence) switch for each tern-
perature monitoring channel.
( 4) Alarm set potentiometer.
(5) External alarm cut-out (silence) switch for temperature
monitoring channels (one per equipment).
(6) Alarm circuit reset switch: one per module (if required).
(7) Test switch to verify continuity of alarm circuit, alarm
light, and temperature sensor (one per module).
(8) Read (indicate) light on each temperature monitoring
channel to light when it has been selected at the readout
module.
S7.1.5 Access (JCIA)-Electrical connection between alarm
and readout modules and between modules and the other
circuits within the enclosure assembly shall be by means of
quick-disconnect connectors. Required auxiliary circuits, such
as the power supply, shall be located within the enclosure
assembly in such a location as to be readily accessible from the
front of the enclosure assembly. Required controls and
indicators, associated with the power supply, shall be on the
front panel. Fold down or slide drawer chassis construction
may be used. Terminals and terminal boards shall be provided
for interconnection to ships power, temperature sensors, and
external audible alarm. These terminals shall also be located to
be accessible from the front of the enclosure assembly. Three
2.44 rn (8 ft) long cable assemblies shall be provided and
stowed securely inside each equipment enclosure. With these
cable assemblies, it shall be possible to remove any one alarm
module and the power supply, readout, alarm, and calibration
modules to operate the equipment in a normal manner on a
work bench away from the installed console. These cable
assemblies shall only be required to obtain access for special
testing, trouble shooting, and repair.
S7 .1.6 Manual Selective Temperature Readout Equipment
(JCIJ)-Enclosure assembly shall contain the temperature in-
dicating meter, selector switch for selecting the desired tem-
perature sensor to be read, ali required, associated functional
circuits and parts, and terminals for interconnection to external
power and temperature sensors.
S7 .1. 7 Continuous Scanning Monitoring (!CIS )-Enclosure
assembly for IC/S shall contain a readout, a micro processor,
input multiplexers, AID converters, and alarm circuits required
to provide the number of channels specified, up to a maximum
of 60. Operating controls and the readout shall be accessible
from the front panel. A provision shall be included whereby the
function of the front panel controls can be disabled to prevent
tampering by unauthorized personnel.
S7.1.8 Temperature Monitor Equipment (ICIA)-One iden-
tification plate shall be provided for each enclosure assembly.
Individual identification plates shall be provided on each
module (alarm and indicator unit) showing the location of the
associated temperature sensing element, next to each alarm
light, and identifying the function of controls and indicators
located on the front of each module. As an alternate, identifi-
cation plates showing location of temperature sensor elements
may be provided on the overall equipment frame adjacent to
each module location. Plates shall also provide for indicating
the proper scale to use on the readout for each channel if a dial
type meter is used. Adjustment, calibration, setting, and stan-
dardization controls located within the enclosure assembly,
shall also be identified by means of identification plates.
Temperature sensor connection terminals shall be marked to
correspond with the position identification for monitor point.
S7 .1.9 Selective Temperature Readout Equipment ( ICII)-
The position of all selector switches shall be marked to identify
the temperature sensor selected to be measured. Adjustment,
calibration, and sensor connection terminals located within the
enclosure assembly shall be identified and marked.
S7.1.10 Continuous Scanning Monitoring (ICIS)-The
equipment display shall identify the location of the temperature
element when an alarm condition occurs.
S7.2 System Requirements:
S7.2.1 Temperature Monitor Equipment (ICIA)-IC!A tern-
perature monitor equipment shall provide for continuous par-
alleled monitoring of up to 60 temperature sensors. Equipment
shall be modular, with individual modules having plug-in
features as specified in S7 .1.2. There shall be at least 3 types of
modules:
1650
( 1) Monitor and alarm,
(2) Readout, and
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
( 3) Power supply module.
Each monitor and alarm module shall monitor 4 temperature
sensors. Equipment shall be capable of operating, as specified
herein, with each of the 60 temperature alarm set points
adjusted for a different temperature setting. Any alarm may be
activated regardless of the state of any other alarm. For
purposes of standardization, the factory setting shall be ap-
proximately 93.3C (200F) for points, unless otherwise speci-
fied in the acquisition requirements.
S7 .2.2 Visual Alarm-Each monitor point shall be uniquely
associated with a specific remote temperature sensor and shall
have its own individual indicating light. When the temperature
at the point being monitored reaches a predetermined tempera-
ture setting (alarm point), the indicator light shall be energized
and remain energized until manually reset.
S7.2.3 Audible Alarm-One or electronic switch hav-
ing 5 A minimum rating DPDT operation shall be provided for
supplying 115 V alternating current (ac) power for actuating an
external audible alarm simultaneously with activating the
visual alarm. The alarm relay switch shall be wired to the panel
tenninal boards in the cable entrance stuffing box. The audible
alarm shall be activated when any one or more of the
temperatures being monitored reaches the predetermined
(alarm) setting. Each channel shall provide a manual switch for
cutting out the audible alarm for its own monitoring point. This
cut-out shall not prevent any of the other channels from
sounding the audible alarm should the temperature at any other
monitored point reach the predetermined (alarm) setting. A
single, master cut-out switch with associated indicator light
shall be provided, which will disable the sounding of the
external audible alarm for the entire system.
S7 .2.4 Independent Action-The monitoring and alarm ac-
tion of individual points shall be independent of each other.
Action of indicating an alarm condition at one or more monitor
points shall not prevent the system (equipment) from indicating
an alarm condition at other monitor points.
S7 .2.5 Temperature Readout-The temperature readout de-
vice and channel selector switch shall be provided in a readout
module. The selector switch shall be depressed to tum so that
momentary contact is not made with intermediate channels.
The continuous, automatic monitor and alarm capability of the
system shall not be affected by the selection of a temperature
sensor for reading. When a channel temperature reading is
being taken, the alarm feature of all points including the one
being measured shall be maintained. The operation of the
readout module shall not depend on balancing motors,
slidewires, potentiometers, or similar devices. The use of
potentiometers shall be limited to test, adjustment, and cali-
bration purposes only.
S7.2.6 Test Feature-A test switch shall be provided for
each monitor and alarm module for testing alarm lights and
cot1tnmi1ty of each temperature sensor and alarm circuits of that
module. When the switch is operated to the "test" position, the
channel alarm shall indicate an alarm condition. Failure of
the channel alarm light on the module to light shall indicate an
open circuit in the lamp, temperature sensor, or in the associ-
ated alarm circuit. This test operation shall not change the
normal state of the alarm relays or external relays.
1651
S7.2.7 Fail Safe Design-The IC/A temperature monitor
equipment shall have an inherent "fail safe" feature. An open
circuit in the external temperature sensor or its connecting
cabling shall result in an alarm condition.
S7.2.8 Calibration and Setting of Alarm Point-Design of
the IC/ A temperature monitor equipment shall be such as to
facilitate calibration and adjustment of the individual alarm set
points. Self calibration capability shall be an inherent design
feature. Test jacks shall be provided to facilitate direct connec-
tion to external instrumentation for test, calibration, and trouble
shooting. Calibration, alarm set point adjustment and access to
the test jacks shall not require disassembly or changes to the
electrical wiring connections.
S7.2.9 Cold Junction Compensation-Cold junction com-
pensation for equipment for thermocouple sensing shall be
self-contained, automatic, and shall be referenced to 0C
(32F).
S7 .2.1 0 Lead Length Compensation-Equipment for resis-
tance temperature sensing shall provide an input terminal for .3
wire sensor configuration. A means shall be provided to
compensate for the resistance of interconnecting wiring be-
tween sensor and monitor equipment. This compensating
provision and associated sensor input terminal configuration
shall be arranged that it can be easily by-passed (removable
alternate terminals, or similar means) for use with 2
wire resistance temperature elements. Equipment for thermo-
couple sensing shall provide for thermocouple lead length
compensation. Accuracy, calibration, and response time shall
be independent of thermocouple extension lead length.
S7.2.11 Size and Weight- Individual modules (alarm or
readout) shall not exceed 15.24 em (6 in.) in height, 7.62 em (3
in.) in width, and 30.48 em (12 in.) in depth. Total weight per
module shall not exceed 5.44 kg (12 lb). The equipment
assembly, containing the required number of alarm modules,
the readout module, and power supply module shall not exceed
50.8 em (20 in.) in width, and 35.6 em (14 in.) in depth. The
height and weight, determined by the number of temperatures
the equipment is designed to monitor, shall be as specified in
the acquisition requirements. The equipment assembly, con-
taining the required number of alarm modules to monitor 60
temperatures, shall not exceed 129.6 em (51 in.) in height.
Total weight shall not exceed 90.7 kg (200 lb). For a 40 point
monitor system, the equipment assembly shall not exceed
91.44 em (36 in.) in height, and weight shall not exceed 68 kg
(150 lb).
S7.2.12 Selective Temperature Readout Equipment (/C/l)-
Equipment shall provide for the manual selection of any one of
several remotely located temperature sensors and converting
the signal output of the selected sensor to the signal required
for display on a read-out device, calibrated in oc COF). The
operation of the readout equipment shall not depend on
balancing motors, slide-wires, potentiometers, or similar de-
vices. Use of potentiometers shall be limited to test,
adjustment, and calibration purposes only. The equipment shall
facilitate calibration without disassembly or changes to the
electrical wiring connections. Test jacks shall be provided to
permit direct connection to test and calibration instruments. An
inherent "fail safe" feature shall be incorporated which will
F2362 - 03 (2009)
result in an off-scale (high or low) reading to signal a failure in
the manual selector, associated readout circuits, or an open or
short in the external temperature sensor.
S7 .2.12.1 Size and Weight- Selective temperature readout
equipment assembly shall not exceed 30.48 em (12 in.) in
width, 30.48 em (12 in.) in height, and 35.6 em (14 in.) in
depth. The total weight shall not exceed 18.14 kg (40 lb).
S7 .2.13 Continuous Scanning Monitoring, Indicating, and
Alarm Equipment (IC/S)-IC/S temperature monitor equip-
ment shall provide for continuous scanning via micro processor
of up to 60 temperature sensors. Equipment shal1 be modular,
with individual modules having plug-in features. The equip-
ment shall scan at a rate which will allow all channels to be
scanned in 5 s or less. Alarm set points and temperature input
characteristics shall be able to be re-programmed from the
front panel. The equipment shall be capable of annunciating
alarms regardless of number (up to 60) and regardless of
previous alarm history.
S7.2.14 Number of Readout Points (!CIA, IC/1 and ICIS)-
The number of remote resistance temperature sensors or
remote thermocouple temperature sensors monitored by the
equipment shall be specified in the acquisition requirements.
S7.3 Parts Requirements-Electrical parts, mechanical
parts, processes, and material shall be selected and applied to
meet the requirements herein.
S7.3.1 Batteries- Batteries shall not be used.
S7.3.2 Electrical Indicating Meters-Electrical indicating
meters shall be high-impact shock resistant, watertight, or
hermetically sealed types, in accordance with one of the
following:
(1) 11.43 em (4-
1
/2 in.) 250 nominal scale length.
(2) Panel mounted, edgewise type.
S7 .3.3 Digital Readout-Digital meters utilized in lieu of an
electrical indicating meter (analog type readout) shall have a
minimum of 4 digits. The meters shall be high-impact shock
resistant, and watertight, or hermetically sealed.
S7 .3.4 Fuses-Fuses shall be selected so that the overload
blowing characteristics and short circuit interrupting capacity
matches the overload protection requirements of the equipment
and wiring being protected and the short circuit capacity of the
supply circuit.
S7.3.5 Fuse Mounting-Fuses shall be mounted in panel
mounted, indicating type fuse-holders. Fuse-holders FHLlO in
accordance with MIL-PRF-1920711 or FHLll in accordance
with MIL-PRF-19207/2 are preferred types.
S7.3.6 Terminal Boards and Mounting-Terminal boards
shall be stud type and shall be secured only by bolts (machine
screws) and shall be capable of ready removal and replace-
ment. They shall be accessible from the front of the enclosure
with the front cover plate removed or access door open.
S7.3.7 Switches-Switches shall be selected so that rated
currents and voltages (make, break, carry) are not exceeded in
the intended application, as well as for their ability to withstand
the shipboard environments. Rotary switches are preferred for
power circuit interruption. Readout channel selector switch
shall be a "push to turn" type so that momentary contact is not
made with intermediate channels while turning the switch.
S8.1 Calibration and Accuracy-Temperature monitoring
equipment, selective temperature readout equipment, and con-
tinuous scanning temperature monitoring equipment shall
comply with the calibration and accuracy requirements speci-
fied below. Equipment performance requirements specified
herein are specified on the basis of simulating the signal output
of the appropriate temperature sensors and applying this signal
to the input terminals (temperature sensor terminal points) of
the equipment.
S8.1.1 Accuracy of Alarm Set Point-Temperature monitor-
ing equipment (IC/A, IC/I, and IC/S) shall permit the setting of
the alarm point at any value over the designated temperature
span. The error band of the alarm level setting shall be one-half
the error band of the temperature readout on any full scale
range.
S8.1.2 Accuracy of Readout-The readout error of the
equipment shall not exceed 2 % of the readout range for any
readout range setting. The temperature indicated on the readout
device shall be within 2% of the temperature equivalent to
the simulated temperature sensor output in ohms or millivolts,
as applicable.
S8.2 Ambient Temperature Error-The change in tempera-
ture reading (temperature error) of the equipment due to any
changing ambient temperature from 4.5 to 65C (40 to 149F)
shall not exceed 0.18 (0.1) % of full scale per oc (F) change
in ambient temperature.
S8.3 Response Time:
S8.3.1 Alarm Circuits (!CIA and IC/1)-The alarm shall be
actuated within 0.1 s when a step signal change of 1.5 % of full
scale is applied when the monitoring systems are reading 1.4 %
of full scale below the alarm setting for any alarm setting from
5 to 100 % of full scale.
S8.3.2 Alarm Circuits (IC/S)-The alarm shall be actuated
on the first scan cycle after the alarm condition appears at the
input of the equipment. Alarms shall be programmable to
actuate either above a set condition or below a set condition.
S8.3.3 Temperature Readout-Equipment shall display the
steady state temperature reading 2.0% in less than 3 s when
a step signal equivalent to 80 % (from 10 to 90 %) of full
temperature span is applied to the temperature sensor input
terminals of the temperature monitoring equipment console.
S8.3.4 Compensation for RTE-Equipment shall provide
for 3 wire temperature sensor inputs. Means shall be provided
to compensate for the resistance of interconnecting wiring
between temperature sensor and the indicator equipment.
Compensating provision and associated sensor input terminal
configuration shall be so arranged that it can be easily bypassed
(removable jumper, alternate terminals, or similar means) for
use with 2 wire uncompensated resistance temperature sensors.
S8.3.5 Compensation for TCE-Cold junction compensa-
tion shall be self-contained, automatic, and shall be reference
to ooc (32F).
1652
S8.4 Operation:
S8.4.1 Temperature Monitor Equipment-When the equip-
ment is operated under nominal conditions simulating ship-
board service (see S11.3), equipment operation shall comply
with the following:
F2362 - 03 (2009)
( 1) Individual visual alarm indicators light when associated
test switch is operated (applicable to IC/A and IC/S equip-
ment).
(2) Test, reset, and audible alarm cut out switches operate as
required.
( 3) Indicator reads required temperature when test and
select (or indicate as applicable) switches are operated. Read-
out accuracy shall be in accordance with S8.1.2.
( 4) Alarm indication activated with temperature sensor
terminals open or short circuited, except instruments for
thermocouple sensors need not detect a short.
S8.4.2 Selective Temperature Readout Equipment-When
the equipment is operated under nominal conditions simulating
shipboard service (see S 11.3), equipment operation shall com-
ply with the following:
(1) Accuracy of readout (see S8.1.2).
(2) Selector switch operates in accordance with S8.4.1(3).
( 3) Indicator scale is driven to either extreme low or high
with temperature sensor terminals open or short circuited.
S8.4.3 Power Supply Requirements-Equipment shall oper-
ate normally from type I power as defined in MIL-STD-1399,
Section 300. Nominal power input voltage and frequency shall
be 115 V, 60 Hertz (Hz), single phase. Power line transients and
spikes with magnitudes, duration, repetition rates, and decay
characteristics as specified in MIL-STD-1399, Section 300
shall not cause equipment damage or affect equipment opera-
tion. The maximum difference in indicator reading and alarm
setting level at any voltage and frequency condition and
nominal (115 V, 60Hz) with the same input, shall not exceed
1
/2 of 1 % of full scale on all ranges.
S8.5 Warm-up Time-Transducer output shall attain a value
within 1 % of the steady-state output with no overshoot in
excess of 1 %. Output shall reach this band in 30 min or less
and shall remain in this band (see S11.4).
S8.6 Inclination-Maximum deviation of indication result-
ing from inclination shall not exceed 1.0% (see S11.5).
S8.7 Enclosure- There shall be no evidence of water
leakage into the equipment enclosure (see S11.6).
S8.8 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance shall
be not less than 10 megohms between power input lines and
ground (hull).
S8.9 Shock-The temperature monitoring equipment shall
show no evidence of mechanical or electrical damage or
loosening of parts, when exposed to shock in accordance with
MIL-S-901.
S8.9.1 Temperature Monitor and Readout Equipment (/CIA,
IC!I, and IC/S)-Operating controls shall not change status
during shock. There shall be no transfer of switch or relay
contacts or change in selector switch position during shock.
After shock, without any adjustments, the equipment shall
meet the following requirements:
(1) Alarm set point accuracy as specified in S8.1.1 (as
applicable).
(2) Indicator accuracy in accordance with S8.1.2.
( 3) Operation shall be in accordance with S8.4.
S8.10 Vibration- Temperature indicating and monitoring
equipment shall operate in accordance with the requirements
herein when exposed to type I environmental vibration of
1653
MIL-STD-167-1. Equipment range and accuracy requirements
shall be demonstrated during and after completion of vibration.
Equipment shall show no evidence of mechanical or electrical
damage or loosening of parts. Operating controls and relays
shall not change status during vibration. There shall be no
momentary or permanent transfer of switch or relay contacts or
change in selector switch position during vibration.
S8.11 Temperature-Equipment shall operate in accordance
with S8.4 when exposed to ambient temperature conditions
from 0 to 65C (32 to 149F). The equipment shall not be
damaged in a non-operating condition when exposed to ambi-
ent temperatures of -40 to 70C ( -40 to 158F).
S9.1 Cleaning and Suiface Finishes-Surfaces of castings,
forgings, molded parts, stampings, machined and welded parts
shall be free of defects such as cracks, porosity, undercuts,
voids and gaps as well as sand, dirt, fins, sharp edges, scale,
flux, and other harmful or extraneous materials. External
beveled. There shall be no bum-through. There shall be no
warpage or dimensional change due to heat from welding
operation. There shall be no damage to adjacent parts resulting
from welding.
SlO. Number of Tests and Retests
S10.1 The number of tests and retests, if any, shall be
Sll. Test Methods
S 11.1 Calibration and Accuracy-Monitor and readout
equipment calibration and accuracy measurements shall be
accomplished by simulating temperature sensor signal output
over the designated temperature span. Simulated signal for
equipment using the resistance sensing technique shall be
resistance values as specified in Appendix B and shall be
simulated by a resistance decade (or similar device) having an
accuracy of 0.055 n. The simulated signal for equipment
using the thermocouple sensing technique shall be millivolts
(m V) as specified in ANSI C96.1 and shall be simulated by a
stable direct current (de) voltage source having an accuracy of
0.025 mV.
S 11.1.1 Accuracy of Alarm Set Point-Alarm set points
shall be calibrated and adjusted in accordance with the instruc-
tions contained in the technical manual furnished with the
equipment. The accuracy of the alarm set point shall be
checked at 5 different temperatures approximately equally
spaced over the temperature span for each alarm channel. A
signal simulating the temperature sensor output shall then be
applied to the equipment input terminals. The accuracy of the
alarm set point shall be checked with both increasing and
decreasing signals. The signal required to actuate the alarm
shall be within the limits specified in S8.1.1.
S 11.1.2 Accuracy of Readout-The accuracy of the readout
portion of equipment types shall be determined at approxi--
mately equally spaced intervals over each readout temperature
span. The reading, at each simulated temperature input, shaH
be as specified in S8.1.2.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
S 11.1.3 Lead Resistance Compensation-For equipment
which operates with RTE sensors, one of the measurements
specified in S 11.1.1 and S 11.1.2 shall be repeated by inserting
a resistance in series with each lead of the resistor simulating
the RTE to simulate lead resistance. The resistance in each lead
shall be any value between 20 and 30 cr, but the resistance for
each lead shall be equal to each other within 0.1 Q.
Sll.2 Response Time:
S 11.2.1 Alarm Circuits-Compliance with S8.3.1 shall be
demonstrated by testing at 10, 20, 50, 90, and 100 % of the full
alarm setting range.
S 11.2.2 Temperature Readout- A step input signal, equal to
80 % of the temperature span (from 10 to 90 % of the span) for
each temperature range setting shall be applied to the tempera-
ture sensor input terminals. Indicator reading shall be as
specified in S8.3.3.
S11.3 Operation (Monitor and Readout Equipment)-
Equipment shall be energized with nominal voltage and fre-
quency (ll5 V, 60Hz) and allowed to stabilize for at least 30
min. Input signals, simulating temperature sensor outputs
equivalent to approximately mid-range of the temperature
span, shall be connected to all equipment input terminals.
Equipment controls shall then be actuated in turn to verify
compliance with S8.4.1 and S8.4.2. Indicator readings shall be
noted and recorded. The supply voltage and frequency shall
then be adjusted to the lower limit of permissible variation (see
S8.4). Equipment shall be stabilized at this input power for at
least 15 min and indicator reading shall be noted and recorded.
Supply voltage and frequency shall then be adjusted to the
higher limit, stabilized for at least 15 min, and the indicator
reading noted and recorded. Temperature sensor inputs during
these tests shall remain constant. The change in indicator
reading, due to variations in input power shall be within the
limits specified in S8.4.
S 11.4 Warm-up Time-Test shall be conducted to determine
the elapsed time between the application or line power to the
equipment and the point at which the indication reaches the
conditions specified in S8.5.
S 11.4.1 The transducer shall be placed in an ambient
temperature of 25 : 2C (77 : 3.6F) for not less than 2 h
de-energized. Recording equipment and other auxiliary equip-
ment shall be energized to assure complete warm-up. A
simulated signal equal to 80 : 5 % of indication shall be
applied and maintained constant during this test. Performance
shall conform to S8.5.
S 11.5 Inclination- The equipment shall be inclined for a
period of at least 1 min in each of the following positions:
( 1) 45 o forward
(2) 45 backward
( 3) 45 to the left
(4) 45 to the right
In each position a reference measurement (see S11.1) shall
be made. Performance shall conform to S8.6.
S 11.6 Enclosure-The enclosure shall be subjected to a
solid stream of water from a 2.54 em (1 in.) nozzle at 246 L (65
gal) per minute at a distance from the equipment of approxi-
mately 3.05 m (10ft). The water stream shall be directed at all
surfaces of the enclosed equipment and its mounting surface
for a minimum of 5 min. Performance shall conform to S8.7.
S 11.7 Insulation Resistance--Insulation resistance shall be
determined with a test potential of 50 V de applied for a
minimum of 60 s.
S 11.8 Shack-Equipment and sensor assemblies shall be
tested in accordance with the high-impact shock test specified
in MIL-S-901 for grade A, class I, type C equipment.
S11.8.1 Monitor and Readout Equipment- The equipment
shall be energized during the test with nominal voltage and
frequency (115 V, 60 Hz) and sensor input signals shall be
80 % of span. During the test, all operating controls shall be
observed for change in status. After the shock test, equipment
shall be subjected to the following examinations and tests:
( 1) Alarm set point accuracy (see S 11.1.1),
(2) Readout accuracy (see Sll.l.2),
( 3) Operation at nominal voltage and frequency (see S 11.3 ),
and
( 4) Examination for evidence of mechanical damage or
loosening of parts.
S 11.9 Vibration-Equipment and sensor assemblies shall be
tested in accordance with type I vibration of MIL-STD-167 -1.
Energization, input signals, observations during test and ex-
aminations after vibration shall be as specified in S11.8 for the
shock test. IC/ A system shall have the alarm point set within
4 % of full scale of the incoming temperature level. The
temperature level shall be at 90 % of full scale. If an alarm
occurs during vibration, any vibration test is a failure and
corrective action is required. Frequency variation tests of
MIL-STD-167-1 are required with the same settings. It shall be
demonstrated that vibration from 1 to 50 Hz in accordance with
MIL-STD-167 -1 shall not cause alarm.
Sll.lO Temperature:
S11.10.1 Operating-The equipment shall be subjected to
the following temperature cycles:
Period (h)
6
6
6
Temperature (3C)
ooc (32F)
65C (149F)
25C (77F)
Environment
Chamber
Chamber
Stable room or chamber
Cycle periods shall be measured from the time the tempera-
ture is stabilized. All tests within a 6-h period shall be
continuous. Performance during and after the tests shall con--
form to S8.11.
Sll.10.2 Non-operating-The equipment shall be held at
each of the two temperature extremes for a period of 24 h.
Performance after the test shall conform to S8.11.
S12. Inspection
S 12.1 Classification of Inspections--The inspection require-
(a) Qualification testing, and
1654
(b) Quality conformance testing.
S 12.2 Qualification-Qualification tests shall be conducted
at a laboratory satisfactory to the purchaser. Qualification tests
shall consist of the general examination and the tests specified
in Table S 1 and shall be conducted on equipment produced
with techniques and procedures normally used in production.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
TABLE S1 Qualification Testing
Readout
Examination and Test
General examination
Calibration and accuracy
Response time
Operation (Monitor and
Readout Equipment)
Warm-up time
Inclination
Enclosure
Shock
Vibration
and Selective Temperature
Test
812.5
88.1 811.1
88.3 811.2
88.4 811.3
88.5 811.4
88.6 81'1.5
88.7 811.6
88.8 811.7
88.9 811.8
88.10 811.9
88.11 811.10
Sample-Monitor and Readout
1'-q,u!p'ment-- One sample of each type and temperature sensing
tec:hnlQtle with the maximum number of channels for which
shall be submitted for examination and
test.
S 12. 2.1.1 Extent Qualification--Qualification of an
eqlnPJneJ1t type will also be extended to of the same
design, type, and sensing technique, with lesser number of
channels.
S12.2.2 Test Routine--Equipment submitted for qualifica-
tion shall be subjected to the tests shown in Table S 1 in
the order listed. Failure of an equipment to comply with any of
the requirements listed shall cause refusal to grant qualifica-
tion.
S 12.2.3 Disposition of Qual(fication Samples-Samples
subjected to qualification testing shall be considered consumed
and non-deliverable as part of the contract. Final disposition of
qualification samples shall be specified in the acquisition
requirements.
S 12.3 Quality Conformance Testing-The sample equip-
ment or sensor assemblies selected shall be subjected to the
examinations and tests listed in Table S3. Examinations and
tests shall be performed in the order listed.
7 and under
8 to 15
16 to 40
41 to 110
11 to 300
301 to 500
501 and over
TABLE S3
General examination
Calibration and accuracy
All
7
10
15
25
35
50
88.1
88.8
88.4
88.3
1
2
2
3
Test
Si2.5
811.1
S11.7
811.3
811.2
of the same type for
quality conformance inspection at one time shall be considered
a "lot." The lot may include the entire contract quantity, or it
1655
may be the production of any convenient time period. Each
equipment shall be subjected to general examination and
accuracy test.
S 12.3.2 Sampling-A sample of equipment shall be selected
from each lot in accordance with Table S2 and subjected to the
examinations and tests specified in Table S3. If the number of
nonconforming equipment in any sample exceeds the accep-
tance number for that sample, the lot represented by the sample
shall be rejected.
S 12.4 Test Conditions-Except for those tests where the
following factors are the variables, tests shall be conducted
with the equipment operating under the following conditions:
( 1) The ambient temperature shall be 25 :2:: 3 oc (77 :2::
5.4F), and the relative humidity shall be between 25 and
50%.
(2) The supply voltage shaH be 115 V nominaL
( 3) The supply frequency shall be 60 Hz nominal.
S12.5 General Examination-The temperature mcmJ1:on,ng
equipment shall be given a thorough examination to determine
that it conforms to this specification and the approved r1r,,.,;,r,.,"'
with respect to material, finish, construction,
dimensions, workmanship, marking, identification, and infor-
mation plates. This examination shall be limited to those
examinations that may be performed without disassembling the
unit in such a manner that its performance, durability and
appearance would be affected. This examination shall include
a mechanical check of all operating controls and adjustments,
as applicable.
S13. Certification
S 13.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
S14.1 Product marking requirements shall be specified in
S15.1 Packaging and package marking shall be in accor-
S 16.1 Warranty-Special warranty requirements shall be
cO F2362 - 03 (2009)
SIGNAL CONDITIONER AND POWER SUPPLY (ELECTRICAL) (NAVAL SHIPBOARD USE)
The following supplementary requirements established for U.S. Naval shipboard application shall apply when specified in the contract or
purchase order. When there is conflict between the standard (ASTM F2362) and this supplement's appendix, the requirements of this supple-
ment's appendix shall take precedence for equipment acquired by this supplement's appendix. This document supercedes MIL-T-24387,
Temperature Measurement Equipment Signal Conditioner and Power Supply (Electrical) for new ship construction.
S17. Scope
S 17.1 This specification covers the requirements for signal
conditioners and electrical power supplies used in conjunction
with thermocouples and resistance temperature element assem-
blies for naval ships. It does not include the design of the
sensing elements and wells or the requirements for the readout
or display.
S 17.2 This specification defines equipment intended to pro-
vide control input and monitoring of temperatures for ship-
board engineering plants.
Sl7.3 The U.S. Government preferred system of measure-
Sl8.1 Commercial Documents:
ANSI/ ASQC Q900 1-1994 Quality Systems-Model for
Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production,
Installation, Inspection, Testing and Servicing
5
Sl8.2 Government Documents:
6
S18.2.1 Military Standard:
Excited)
S 18.2.2 Military Specifications:
MIL-J-24142 Junction Boxes for Electrical Fittings and
Fixtures, General Specification for
MIL-J-24142/3 Junction Box, Submersible, Size 6 by 9
S19. Terminology
S 19.1 Definitions:
S19.1.1 thermocouple, shall be as defined by S34.
S 19 .1.2 resistance, shall be as defined by Section S34.
S19.1.3 deadband, the range through which the measurand
can be verified without a change in output.
5
6
S19.1.4 static error band, the maximum deviation from a
straight line drawn through the coordinates of the lower span
limit at specified output, and the upper span limit at specified
output expressed in percent of span.
S20. Classification
Temperature monitoring equipment shall consist of a series
of designations which shall be assigned and listed in the format
below.
1656
Example: ASTM F2362S17-TRE-4H-YES
Specification Type Input Range Alarm and Repeater Circuits
F2362Si 7 TRE 4H YES
820.1 S20.2
S20.1 Type-Temperature measurement equipment shall be
designated by the three letter symbols as follows:
TRE-Temperature Resistance Equipment, platinum
TTE-Temperature Thermocouple Equipment, type K
S20.2 Input Range-The temperature range in degrees Fahr-
enheit (F) shall be designated by its numerical value (see
S20.2.1.1 and S20.2.2.1 ).
S20.2.1 Temperature Resistance (Type TRE) Input:
S20.2.1.1 Ranges-Equipment temperature range shall be
as specified in the acquisition requirements. Ranges shall be in
accordance with the following:
Range Designation
-40 to 127C (-40to 260F) 26
-18 to 205C (0 to 400F) 4H
-18 to 538C (0 to 1000F) 1K
S20.2.1.2 Excitation Current-The maximum current
through the resistance temperature element shall be 6 rna, de.
S20.2.1.3 Lead Wire Resistance Compensation-The equip-
ment input for resistance sensing technique shall be of three-
wire configuration. A means shall be provided to compensate
for the factors which introduce error such as self heating and
the resistance of interconnecting wiring between the sensor and
signal conditioner.
S20.2.2 Temperature Thermocouple (Type TCE) Input:
S20.2.2.1 Ranges-Equipment temperature range shall be
as specified in the acquisition requirements. Ranges shall be in
accordance with the following:
Range
-40 to 93C (-40to 200F)
-18 to 205C (0to 400F)
-18 to 538C (0 to 1000F)
205 to 649C (400to 1200F)
260 to 816C (500to 1500F)
Designation
2H
4H
1K
12H
15H
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S20.2.2.2 Cold Junction Compensation- Cold junction
compensation for thermocouple sensing technique shall be
automatic and shall be referenced to ooc (32F).
S21.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with all
described.
( 1) Title, number and date of this specification,
( 3) Quantity of units required,
( 4) Type of enclosure mounting,
( 5) Power requirements,
(6) Equipment temperature ranges,
(7) Disposition of qualification test samples,
( 8) Product marking requirements, and
(9) Unique preservation, packaging, and marking require-
ments.
S22.1 Except where specifications are referenced, materials
shall be in accordance with commercial specifications having
material compositions suitable for service in the shipboard
marine environment.
S23.1 Description-The equipment specified herein in con-
junction with the thermocouples or resistance temperature
elements specified in Appendix B comprise a temperature
instrument. The temperature measurement equipment gener-
ally consists of the following units:
( 1) Signal Conditioner- The signal conditioner shall con-
vert the sensing element output to a continuous linear analog
signal directly proportional to temperature.
(2) Power Supply-The power supply shall provide excita-
tion energy to the signal conditioner and sensor.
( 3) Test Device-A test device shall be furnished to provide
a calibrated test signal used for calibrating the equipment.
The various assemblies of temperature measurement equip-
ment shall be built integrally together and housed in the same
enclosure.
S23 .2 Output-The electrical signal output of the equipment
shall be de, directly proportional to temperature input. The
output shall be 4 to 20 rna, de into an external resistance of 550
10% a.
S23.3 Calibration Means-A means shall be provided to
monitor equipment output corresponding to temperature input
to permit in place calibration by one man. Each temperature
instrument shall contain a test switch and a temperature
detector simulator capable of supplying a test signal into the
instrument circuitry. This test device shall have a calibrated
dial and shall replace the detector when the instrument is in the
test mode. The signal from this simulator shall be of sufficient
accuracy to determine static error band (see S24.2) and
repeatability (see S24.3). Test jacks shall be provided to
monitor the equipment output and detector output. Placing the
instrument in the test mode shall allow remote monitoring of
the detector. Calibration shall be effected without the necessity
of electrical disconnection.
S23.4 Equipment Range-Equipment range shall be deter-
mined by means of an interchangeable assembly or internal
adjustments.
S23.5 Adjustments- Tamper-proof adjustments for zero
and span shall be provided for calibration purposes. The
number of adjustments shall be kept to a minimum, consistent
with the operation and maintenance of the equipment and the
elimination for the selective matching of parts.
S23.6 Fail Safe Output-If the input of the signal condi-
tioner is open circuited, the output shall drive upscale or
downscale, the choice of which shall be made by means of a
link.
S23.7 Isolation- Input and output circuits shall be isolated
from each other and from ground.
S23.8 Enclosure- Temperature measurement equipment
shall be mounted in a junction box. The junction box may be
in accordance with MIL-J-24142 and MIL-J-24142/3. At a
minimum, the size, mounting, and cable interface shall be per
MIL-J-24142 and MIL-J-24142/3. All adjustments and test
points shall be accessible when the cover is removed. Tem-
perature measurement equipment shall be designed for bulk-
head or bracket mounting.
S23.9 Weight-The weight of the complete equipment shall
be kept to a minimum commensurate with good engineering
design.
S23.10 Power Supply Requirements-The equipment shall
be designed to operate with line variations as specified in S27 .9
and S27.12. Nominal steady state power supply requirements
shall be 115 10% Vat 60 5 %hertz (Hz), single phase,
unless otherwise specified in the acquisition requirements.
S23.11 Cable Entrance and Connection-Cable entrance
shall be by means of stuffing tubes located on the bottom
surface of the enclosure.
1657
S23.12 Operation- The operation of the equipment shall
not depend on balancing motor, slide wires, or similar devices.
The system shall be completely static. The use of potentiom-
eters are for test and adjustment purposes only.
S23.13 Resistors-Composition type fixed or variable resis-
tors shall not be used.
S23.14 Batteries-Batteries shall not be used.
S23.15 Modular Assemblies-Modular units or assemblies
shall be fastened in such a manner to allow for quick and easy
removal for maintenance accessibility or replacement.
S23.16 Terminal Boards-The interface with shipboard wir-
ing shall be by means of terminal boards. These terminals shall
be accessible with the coverplate removed.
Performance tolerances are expressed in percent of equip-
ment span unless stated otherwise.
S24.1 Service Life-Equipment shall be designed for a
minimum service life of 40 000 h in a shipboard marine
environment.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
S24.2 Static Error Band-The static error band shall not
exceed plus or minus 1 % (see S27.2).
S24.3 Repeatability-Repeatability of the output shall not
exceed 0.3 % (see S27.2).
S24.4 Threshold and Deadband-The maximum least de-
tectable increment plus deadband shall not exceed 0.2 % (see
S27.4).
S24.5 Ripple-Equipment output ripple shall not exceed
0.15 % of full scale output (see S27.5).
S24.6 Warm-up Time-The equipment output shall attain a
value within plus or minus 1 % of the steady state output with
no overshoot in excess of 1 %. Output shall reach this band in
30 min or less and shall remain in this band (see S27.6).
S24.7 Inclination-Maximum deviation of equipment out-
put resulting from inclination shail not exceed 1.0 % (see
S27.7).
S24.8 Input Resistance-The equipment output shall remain
within the static error band (see S24.2 and S27 .8).
S24.9 Supply Voltage and Frequency (Steady State)-
Maximum difference between outputs at any voltage and
frequency condition and the normal (115 V, 60Hz) at the same
input shall not exceed 1.0 % (see S27.9).
S24.10 Response Time-The 95 % response time shall be
0.5 s or less (see S27.10).
S24.11 Supply Voltage and Frequency (Transients):
S24.11.1 Voltage-When the equipment is exposed to the
limits of specified voltage transient, the equipment output shall
remain within 1 % of the steady state output (see S27 .11).
S24.11.2 Frequency-When the equipment is exposed to the
limits of specified frequency transient, the equipment output
shall remain within 1 % of the steady state output (see
S27.11).
S24.12 Temperature-- When the equipment is exposed to
the ambient temperature extremes, performance shall be within
the static error band specified in S24.2 (see S27.12).
S24.13 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance of
the equipment between circuits and between circuits and
ground shall be not less than 10 megohms (see S27.13).
S24.14 Vibration- When the equipment is exposed to
vibration in accordance with MIL-STD-167-1, monitored out-
put test shall show no variation from steady state output in
excess of 2.0 %. There shall be no visible evidence of damage
to the equipment as a result of the vibration (see S27.14).
S24.15 Shock-After exposure to shock in accordance with
MIL-S-901 but prior to any adjustment, the equipment output
shall show no deviation greater than 3 %. A post shock
calibration, using adjustments provided, shall conform to
performance requirements of S24.2. There shall be no visual
evidence of damage to the equipment as a result of the shock
(see S27.15).
from welding.
S26. Number of Tests and Retests
S27. Test Methods
S27 .1 General Examination and Operation-The unpow-
ered temperature monitoring equipment shall be given a
thorough examination to determine conformance to the re-
quirements of this specification with respect to material, color,
finish, workmanship, safety, construction, assembly,
dimensions, weight, and marking of identification plates.
Examination shall be limited to the examinations that may be
performed without disassembling the unit in such a manner that
its performance, durability, or appearance would be affected.
S27.2 Static Error Band and Repeatability-Prior to the
start of this test, the test sample and associated test equipment
shall be energized for a period of 2 h. The test sample shall first
be cycled over its full temperature range by slowly increasing
and decreasing the input for six continuous cycles. The
calibration measurements shall be made at a minimum of 5
equally spaced intervals over the entire range (both upscale and
downscale). Precaution shall be taken to avoid overshoot. This
calibration procedure shall be applied three successive times to
determine repeatability. Static error band of all calibrations
shall meet the requirements of S24.2. Repeatability shall meet
S27.3 Reference Measurement-A one trial calibration with
at least five equally spaced intervals over the entire input range
both upscale and downscale shall be conducted when specified
in the individual test.
S27 .4 Determination of Threshold and Deadband-
Threshold and deadband shall be determined with 80 5 % of
the temperature span applied to the test sample. The tempera-
ture interval beyond this point required to produce a detectable
change in output and the temperature interval in the opposite
direction to return the output to the original value shall be
determined in each direction. Threshold is the first temperature
interval. The second temperature interval is the sum of the
threshold and deadband. Performance shall conform to the
S27.5 Ripple-equipment Output-Ripple shall be deter-
mined at an input of 80 5 % of the temperature span.
1658
S27.6 Warm-up Time-This test shall be conducted to de-
termine the elapsed time between the application of line power
to the test sample and the point at which the equipment output
reaches the conditions specified in S24.6. The test sample shall
be placed in an ambient temperature of 25 2C (77 3.6F)
for not less than 2 h de-energized. Recording equipment and
other auxiliary equipment shall be energized to assure com-
plete warm-up. An input of 80 5 % of the span is to be
applied to the test sample and maintained constant during this
test. Performance shall conform to S24.6.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S27. 7 Inclination-The equipment shall be inclined for a
period of at least 1 min in each of the following positions:
( 1) 45 degrees forward
(2) 45 degrees backward
(3) 45 degrees to the left
( 4) 45 degrees to the right
In each position a reference measurement (see S27.3) shall
be made. Performance shall conform to S24.7.
S27 .8 Input Resistance-For thermocouple sensing
technique, a noninductive resistance of 150 ::!::: 1 % n shall be
placed in each lead to the input terminals to total a circuit
resistance of approximately 300 n. A reference measurement
(see S27.3) shall be made. Performance shall conform to S24.8.
S27.9 Supply Voltage and Frequency State)-The
equipment shall be at the various combinations of
normal, maximum and minimum state and
freau13nc:ies outlined in S24.9. The equipment shall be operated
at least 15 min in each combination during which time a
reference measurement (see S27.3) shall be taken. Performance
S27.10 Response Time-A step input equal to 10 to 90% of
full scale equipment temperature span shall be applied to the
test sample. Performance shall conform to S24.1 0.
S27 .11 Supply Voltage and Frequency (Transient)-The
tests specified in S27 .11.1 through S27 .11.2 shall be conducted
with a temperature input signal equal to 80 ::!::: 5 % of the input
span. Performance shall conform to S24.11.
S27 .11.1 Transient Voltage-With the equipment operating
on the upper limit of steady voltage, a transient voltage of plus
20 % of nominal voltage recovering to the steady state band in
2 s shall be superimposed. With the equipment operating on the
lower limit of steady state voltage, transient voltage of minus
20 % of nominal voltage recovering to the steady state band in
2 s shall be superimposed.
S27.11.2 Transient Frequency--With the equipment operat-
ing at the nominal frequency, a transient frequency of 2 Hz
shall be applied of which not more than Yz cycle per second is
outside the steady state tolerance band recovering to the steady
state tolerance band within 2 s. This shall be repeated with a
minus 2 Hz transient frequency.
S27.12 Temperature-The equipment shall be capable of
normal operation (without alignment or adjustment) -other than
the accessible controls employed for operation of the equip-
ment) throughout the following temperature cycle; tolerances
in operating characteristics shall be as specified in the indi-
vidual equipment specification.
( 1) Hold room temperature at 0 ::!::: 2C (32 ::!::: 3.6F) for at
least 24 h.
(2) Increase room temperature in steps of l0C (18F) each,
at 30 min per step, until 65 ::!::: 2C (149 ::!::: 3.6F) is reached,
and hold at that temperature for at least 4 h.
( 3) Reduce room temperature in steps of 1 ooc ( l8F) each,
at 30 min per step, until25 ::!::: 2C (77 ::!::: 3.6F) is reached, and
hold at that temperature for at least 4 h. At each temperature
plateau ooc (32F), 65C(l49F) and 25C (77F), a reference
measurement (see S27 .3) shall be made. Performance shall
conform to S24.12.
S27 .13 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance of
the equipment shall be determined by applying 50 V de
circuits and ground (see S24.13).
S27.14 Vibration-The equipment shall be tested in accor-
dance with type I (environmental vibration) of MIL-STD-
167 -1 except that the upper limit of the frequency range shall
be 100 Hz. The amplitudes of vibration shall be in accordance
with Table S4. If no resonances are observed, the 2 h endurance
test shall be conducted at 100 Hz. During the vibration test, an
input equal to 80 5 % of the temperature span shall be
applied to the test sample. The output during the test shall be
monitored. Performance shall conform to S24.14.
5 to 20
21 to 50
5i to 100
TABLE S4
Range,
762 150 (0.030 0.006)
500 100 (0.020 0.004)
250 50
S27 .15 Shock-The shock test shall be conducted in accor-
dance with MIL-S-90 1, grade A, class I, type C. During the test
an input equal to 80 : 5 % of the temperature span shall be
applied to the equipment. The test sample output during the test
shall be monitored. Before and after this test, reference
measurements shall be made for comparison (see S27.3).
Performance shall conform to S 24.15.
S28. Inspection
The testing set forth in this specification shall become a part
of the manufacturer's overall inspection system or quality
program. The manufacturer's quality system shall comply with
the requirements of ANSI/ ASQC 9001-1994, Quality
Systems-Model for Quality Assurance in Design,
Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. Certifi
cation and registration is highly desired but not required.
( 1) Qualification testing, and
S28.2 Test Conditions-Except where the following factors
are the variables, the tests shall be conducted with the
equipment operating under the following conditions:
1659
( 1) Ambient temperature shall be 24 ::!::: soc (75 9F),
(2) Relative humidity shall be 60 ::!::: 15 %,
( 3) Supply voltage shall be nominal, and
(4) Supply frequency shall be nominal.
S28.3 Qualification Testing-The qualification testing shall
consist of the tests specified in Table S5. The tests shall be
performed in the sequence shown.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
TABLE S5 Qualification Testing
General examination
Output
Static error band and
repeatability
Reference measurement
Threshold and deadband
Ripple
Warm-up time
Inclination
Input resistance
Supply line voltage and
frequency, steady-state
Response time
Supply line voltage and
frequency, transients
S24.4
S24.2
S24.3
S24.4
S24.5
S24.6
S24.7
S24.8
S24.9
S24.10
S24.11
Test
S27.1
S27.2
S27.2
S27.3
S27.4
S27.5
S27.6
S27.7
S27.8
S27.9
S27.10
S27.11
Temperature S24.12 S27.12
insulation resistance S24.13 S27.13
Vibration S24.14 S27.14
Shock S24.15 S27.15
S28.3.1 Sample Size-The number of samples subjected to
qualification tests as specified in Table S5 shall depend on the
equipment design. If each range is covered by a separate and
distinct design, a sample for each range will require testing.
Only one sample of a basically similar design series which may
cover many ranges need be tested if mechanical and electrical
similarity is deemed sufficient by the purchaser.
S28.4 Quality Conformance Testing-All temperature mea-
surement equipment offered for delivery shall be subjected to
the examination and tests listed in Table S6 and shall be
conducted in the order listed. Failure of any temperature
equipment to meet the requirements of this specification shall
TABLE S6 Quality Conformance Testing
Examination and Test Requirement Test
General examination 827.1
Output 824.4 S27.2
Static error band and S24.2 827.2
repeatability
Ripple 824.5 827.5
Input resistance 824.8 S27.8
(thermocouple sensing
technique only)
Insulation resistance 824.13 S27.13
S29. Certification
the acquisition requirements but at a minimum, shall include:
( 1) Manufacturer's name,
(2) Classification, and
( 3) Signal conditioner.
THERMOCOUPLE AND RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR ASSEMBLIES (NAVAL SHIPBOARD USE)
The following appendix to supplementary requirements established for U.S. Naval shipboard application shall apply when specified in the
contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between the standard (ASTM F2362) and this supplement's appendix, the requirements of
this supplement's appendix shall take precedence for equipment acquired by this supplement's appendix. This document supercedes MIL-T-
24388, Thermocouple and Resistance Temperature Detector Assemblies, General Specification for (Naval Shipboard), for new ship construc-
S32. Scope
S32.1 This specification covers environmentally hardened
resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors that trans-
form the surrounding thermal energy in a manner that can be
electrically measured and converted to a temperature using a
tion.
1660
signal conditioner/temperature monitor. Types of configura-
tions covered in this specification are those which place the
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor directly into
the medium (bare bulb), into a thermowell, or embedded into
a bearing.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S32.2 Resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors
are intended to convert temperature measured to an electrical
output for input to a temperature signal conditioner.
S33.1.1 ASTM Standards?
A249 Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler,
Superheater, Heat Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes
A269 Specification for Seamless and Weided Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service (DOD adopted)
A276 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Bars and Shapes (DOD adopted)
Stainless Steel Pipe (DOD adopted)
B23 Specification for White Metal Bearing Alloys Known
Commercially as "Babbitt Metal"
B 117 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing (DOD adopted)
B 152 Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Rolled Bar (DOD adopted)
B164 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and
Wire (DOD adopted)
B167 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS
N06600 and N06690) Seamless Pipe and Tube (DOD adopted)
B355 Specification for Nickel-Coated Soft or Annealed
Copper Wire (DOD adopted)
B637 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening Nickel Al-
loy Bars, Forgings, and Forging Stock for High Temperature
Service
D1457 Specification for Polytetrafiuoroethylene PTFE
Molding and Extrusion Materials (DOD adopted)
E344 Terminology Relating to Thermometry and Hydrom-
etry
8
Excited)
MS 3102 Connector, Receptacle, Electric, Box Mounting,
Solder Contacts, AN
MS 3106 Connector, Plug, Electric, Straight, Solder
Contacts, AN Type
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, HI (High-Impact); Shipboard
MIL-W-5846 Wire, Electric, Chromel, and Alumel, Ther-
mocouple
7
the ASTM website.
8
1661
MIL-A-8625 Anodic Coating, for Aluminum and Alumi-
num Alloys
MIL-W-16878 Wire, Electrical, Insulated, General Specifi-
cation for
MIL-W -1687 8/4 Wire, Electrical, Pol ytetrafiuoroethy lene
(PTFE) Insulated, 200 'C, 600 V, Extruded Insulation
MIL-W-16878/25 Wire, Electrical, Polytetrafiuoroethylene
(PTFE) Insulated, 260 'C, 600 V, Extruded Insulation
MIL-W-81381 Wire, Electric, Polyimide-Insulated, Copper
or Copper Alloy
MIL-W-81381/12 Wire, Electric, Fluorocarbon/Polyimide
Insulated, Medium Weight, Nickel Coated Copper Conductor,
600 V, 200 'C, Nominal 8.4 or 15.4 MIL WALL
S34. Terminology
S34.1 Definitions-Definitions and terminology shall be in
accordance with Terminology E344.
S35. Classification
S35.1 Design Type-Resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall be classified according to the following
variables:
Example: ASTM F2362S32-KTC-TW-S7
Specification Type Configuration Designation
Number
F2362S32 KTC TW S7
(see S35.2) (see S35.3) (see S35.4)
S35.2 Type-The type of resistance thermometer or thermo-
couple sensor shall be designated by one of the following
three-letter symbols:
Type Symbols
Type K thermocouple sensor KTC
Resistance thermometer with nickel element NRT
Resistance thermometer with platinum element PRT
S35.3 Configuration-Type of configuration for which the
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor is intended
shall be designated by one of the following two-letter symbols:
Type of Configuration Symbols
Thermowell TW
Bare bulb BB
Embedded EM
S35.4 Designation Number-The designation number used
to specify the sheath length and other applicable parameters
within each type of configuration shall be denoted by one or
two numerals or by one or two numerals preceded by a lettex
found in one of the following:
Type of Configuration
TW
BB
EM
Table Number
S7
sa
S9
S36.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with al
of the pertinent application data shown in accordance witt
S36.2. If special application operating conditions exist that an
not shown in the acquisition requirements, they shall also bt
described.
S36.2 Acquisition Requirements-Acquisition document:
F2362 - 03 (2009)
( 3) Design type,
(4) Range,
( 5) Quantity required,
( 6) When qualification testing is required,
(7) Disposition of qualification test samples,
( 8) Product m r ~ n g requirements, and
(9) Packaging requirements.
S37 .1 Materials-Recommended materials of resistance
thermometer and thermocouple sensor components are pro-
vided in Table S7.
S37.1.1 Nonmetallic Materials-Nonmetals, when used for
seals, protective finishes, and so forth, shall be moisture and
flame resistant, shall not support fungus growth, and shall not
be adversely affected by the ambient environments specified in
the performance requirements of this specification.
S37.1.2 Connecting Wire and End Closure-The connecting
wire and end closure shall be airtight, nonhygroscopic, fungus
resistant, flame resistant, and able to form a chemical bond
with connecting wires (thermowell configuration), electrical
connector receptacle pins, (bare bulb configuration), or the
connecting wire insulation (embedded configuration) and with
the sheath sufficient to meet the sealing requirements. The
connecting wire end closure shall not chemically react,
degrade, or outgas when subjected to the following: air,
distilled water, sea water, salt, petroleum and silicone based
oils, oil solvents, prolonged (greater than 1 month) periods of
exposure to ambient temperatures, prolonged periods of expo-
sure to elevated temperatures up to 205C ( 400F), and
exposure to prolonged cycling periods from ambient to el-
evated temperatures. A connecting wire and enclosure consist-
ing of a ceramic-to-metal or a glass-to-metal seal shall also
incorporate other characteristics to make it impenetrable to
fluids and shall be considered a hermetic seal. The connecting
wire end closure shall meet all the performance requirements
specified in S39, including the connecting wire end closure
requirement (see S42.8).
S37 .1.3 Fungus-inert Materials-Materials which provide a
nutrient medium for fungus and insects shall not be used in the
construction of any resistance thermometer or thermocouple
sensor.
S37.1.4 Restricted Materials-Cadmium or cadmium-
plated parts shall not be used.
TABLE S7 Materials
Part
topping
Connecting wire resistance
thermometer
Connecting wire
thermocouple sensor
Connection head cap
Connection head extension
Connection head
identification plate
Gasket
Pins, connector
Receptacle plug
Seal, ceramic to metal wire
end enclosure
Sheath
Sheath, internal insulation
Spring, compression
Spring stop
Threaded fasteners
Washers
EM
TW
BB
EM
TW
8B
EM
TW
TW
TW
BB
BB:PRT
BB:NRT
B8:KTC
BB
EM
TW
B8
EM
8B,TW:
NRT,PRT,KTC
TW
TW
TW
TW
Material
Babbitt
22 AWG, stranded nickel-plated
copper
PTFE insulated
22 AWG, stranded nickel-plated
copper
24 AWG, stranded nickel-plated or
silver-plated copper
22 AWG, type K
PTFE insulated
22 AWG, type K
24 AWG, type K fluorocarbon/
polymide insulated
Aluminum 356751
304 SST
Aluminum
302 set
Copper
Nickel-plated copper
Nickel-plated copper
(+)chromel (-)alumel
Glass to metal epoxy
316 SST
or lnconel
UNS N04405
99 % pure copper
Aluminum Oxide or
Magnesium Oxide
lnconel
300 Series SST
Corrosion-resistant steel
316 SST
1662
Material
ASTM B23, grade 2
MIL-W-16878 and
MIL-W-16878/25
ASTM 01457
ASTM B355
MIL-W-81381 and
MIL-W-81381/12 or
MIL-W-16878 and
MIL -W-16878/4
MIL-W-5846
ASTM 01457
MIL-W-5846
MIL-W-81381/12
MIL-A-8625, type 1;
356T6
ASTM A312
MIL-A-8625, type 1;
356 T6
MIL-P-15024
ASTM 8152
MS 3102R-14S-7S
MS 3106F-14S-7P
MS 31 02-R-12S-3P
MS 3106F-12S-3S
ASTM A249
ASTM A269
ASTM B167
ASTM 8164
Chemical certification
on file required
ASTM B637
ASTM A249
ASTM A269
ASTM A276
ASTM B167
ASTM A276
ASTM A276
Remarks
Conductors lAW MIL-W-5846
and no plating
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Temper 0
Receptacle
Plug
Receptacle
Plug
Required for type KTC
1 % not restricted
99.8 % pure, MgO 94 %
for KTC
lnconel, including grade 600
(1)
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S38. Physical Properties sions and application temperatures for thermowell, bare bulb,
S38.1 Construction-Resistance thermometers and thermo- and embedded configurations shall be in accordance with Table
couple sensors are shown on Figs. SLO-S6.0. Resistance S8, Table S9, and Table SlO respectively.
thermometer and thermocouple sensor construction dimen-
SEAL HEADER WITH
ANTI-ROTATION DEVICE
3 WIRES RESISTANCE
THERMOMETER
2 WIRES
THERMOCOUPLE
f-odlllll-----+- 0. 25
MIN.
L-1.0
MIN.
WASHER(SEE DETAIL A) SPRING STOP
.5 DIA. MAX.
SHEATH
.01 TYP
.... .... y
__ z
MIN.
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
DETAIL A. WASHER
.25 .005 DIA.
NOTE: SPRING SHALL PRODUCE A 5 LB
FORCE WHEN COMPRESSED 3/16"
48 +.00
.

DETAIL B. UNCOMPRESSED SPRING LENGTH
NoTE 1-Dimensions and tolerances are reference only to meet installation requirements.
FIG. S1.0 Resistance Thermometerffhermocouple Sensor Construction
1663
F2362 - 03 (2009)
1/2" - 14 NPSM
A
NoTE 1-(1) Dimension to suit particular head design.
(2) Inside diameter shall be sized to allow clearance for sensor sheath, spring stop, and spring.
(3) Minimum wall thickness shall be 0.109 in ..
FIG. S2.0 Connection Head Extension
3/4.;,;28 UUNS;;,2B
CONNECTING _
METAL LINK
TERMINAL BOARD
BINDING SCREW
TERMINAL BOARD
SCREW-ON TYPE
CONNECTION CAP
WASHER
CAP
CHAIN
3/4
NoTE !-Dimensions and tolerances are reference only to meet installation requirements.
FIG. S3.0 Connection Head Construction
1664
CONNECTION HEAD
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
2 3/4
MAX
THREADS FOR
TERMINAL BOARD
MACHINE SCREWS
L
CONNECTION
HEAD EXTENSION
LENGTH A
INSERTION LENGTH
INTO THERMOWELL
cO F2362 - 03 (2009)
NOTES:
1. TOP OF CONNECTION HEAD EXTENSION
AND BOTIOM OF WASHER SHALL BE ON
THE SAME DATUM LINE.
2. RESISTANCE THERMOMETER OR
THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR TIP IS
COMPRESSED AGAINST BOTIOM OF
THERMOWELL.
THERMOWELL NOT SUPPLIED
WITH THERMOWELL CONFIGURATION
NOTE 2
FIG. S4.0 Thermowell Type Resistance Thermometerffhermocouple
1665
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
------1 r.0323 .0040
I (STOCK)
t
-+-+---HI--1.000 DIA.
_l
1.000 t.ooo DIA.

-
002
1.125 HEX
NOTE 1_ NOTE 2

3/ 4-16UNF -3A THO.
. .375 DIA.
.18
SENSING
ELEMENT
.125
f-o!iilill------- E ......
F ----------l!llillo-!
FIG. S5.0 Bare Bulb Type Resistance Thermometer/Thermocouple
1666
LEAK PROOF
EMBOSSED KEY
Type
PAT
PAT
PAT
PAT
PAT
PAT
NAT
NAT
NAT
KTC
KTC
KTC
KTC
KTC
KTC
KTC
KTC
0.274.002
DIA.
r
BABBITI TOPPING
0.276 MAX. DIA.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
o 1 o+.oo6
r- . -.000
L-=J
0 250
+.000
. -.005
CHAMFER
/LOWER FACE
.___,_-,/ __ LOWER FACE TO BE
MACHINED FLAT FOR
FOR .045/.050 FROM
OUTER EDGE

? Z=-=L-
0.0025 G125.016 DIA.
MAX. 1.0 MIN.
36.0
FIG. S6.0 Embedded Type Resistance Thermometer/Thermocouple
TABLE S8 Construction Dimensions and Application Temperatures, Thermowell Configuration
Dimensions, em (in.)
M . Thermowell
Insertion Length,
(see Fig. Si.O, Fig. 82.0, and Fig. 84.0)
Temperature
ax1mum Design
Designation
em (in.)
Range,
Connect1on Number
L1mm A 0.75 mm
ya za
oc(oF)A
Head Temp, (B
40 9
)
(0.04) (0.03)
oC (oF) .
4 6.8 11.28 4.45 9.53 13.34 -40 to 316 260 2(E)
(2.69) (4.44) (1.75) (3.75) (5.25) (-40 to 600) (500)
6 6.8 16.99 10.16 15.24 19.05 -40 to 316 260 2(E)
(2.69) (6.69) (4.00) (6.00) (7.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
10 11.66 25.88 14.22 24.13 27.94 -40 to 538 260 4(E)
(4.59) (10.19) (5.60) (9.50) (11.00) (-40 to 1000) (500)
6 11.91 22.07 10.16 20.32 24.13 -40 to 316 260 4(E)
(4.69) (8.69) (4.00) (8.00) (9.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
8 11.91 22.07 10.16 20.32 24.13 -40 to 316 260 4(E)
(4.69) (8.69) (4.00) (8.00) (9.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
16.99 22.07 5.08 20.32 24.13 -40 to 316 260
(6.69) (8.69) (2.00) (8.00) (9.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
9 6.8 24.61 17.78 22.86 26.67 -40 to 205 149 2(E)
(2.69) (9.69) (7.00) (9.00) (10.50) (-40 to 400) (300)
10 11.66 25.88 14.22 24.13 27.94 -40 to 205 149 4(E)
(4.59) (10.19) (5.60) (9.50) (11.00) (-40 to 400} (300)
11 11.91 29.69 17.78 27.94 31.75 -40 to 205 149 4(E)
(4.69) (11.69} (7.00) (11.00) (12.50) (-40 to 400) (300)
4 6.8 11.28 4.45 9.53 13.34 -40 to 316 260 2(E)
(2.69) (4.44) (1.75) (3.75) (5.25) (-40 to 600) (500)
6 6.8 16.99 10.16 15.24 19.05 -40 to 316 260 2(E)
(2.69) (6.69) (4.00) (6.00) (7.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
21.26 39.04 17.78 37.29 41.10 -40 to 816 260
(8.37) (15.37) (7.00) (14.68) (16.18) (-40 to 1500) (500)
6 11.91 16.36 4.45 14.61 18.42 -40 to 316 260 4(E)
(4.69) (6.44) (1.75) (5.75) (7.25) (-40 to 600) (500)
8 11.91 22.07 10.16 20.32 24.13 -40 to 316 260 4(E)
(4.69) (8.69) (4.00) (8.00) (9.50) (-40 to 600) (500)
29.54 47.32 17.78 29.54 49.38 -40to816 260
(11.63) (18.63) (7.00) (11.63) (19.44) (-40 to 1500) (500)
42.24 46.69 4.45 44.93 48.74 -40 to 316 260
(16.63) (18.38) (1.75) (17.69) (19.19) (-40 to 600) (500)
31.45 47.32 15.88 45.57 49.38 -40to816 260
For "A" dimensions less than 12.7 em (5.0 in.) the temperature range is limited to 56C (i00F) above the maximum connection head temperature.
8
Reference dimension only. Y and Z as required to meet installation requirements.
1667
c4@f F2362- 03 (2009)
TABLE S9 Construction Dimensions and Application Temperatures, Bare
Bulb Configuration
Size, em (in.) (see Fig.
Type Designation
S5.0)
Temperature
E 750 mi F 750 mi
(0.03) (0.03)
NRT B1 5.71 (2.25) 8.89 (3.50) -40 to 205
B2 16.5 (6.50) 19.69 (7.75) (-40 to 400)
PRT B3 5.71 (2.25) 8.89 (3.50) -40 to 538
B4 16.5 (6.50) 19.69 (7.75) (-40 to
1000)
KTC B5 5.71 (2.25) 8.89 (3.50) -40 to 816
B6 16.5 (6.50) 19.69 (7.75) (-40to
1500)
TABLE S1 0 Construction Dimensions and Application Temperatures,
Embedded Configuration
Type
NRT
PRT
KTC
Designation
E1
E2
E3
Temperature Range, oc (F)
-40 to 205 (-40 to 400)
-40 to 205 (-40 to 400)
-40 to 205 (-40 to 400)
S38.1.1 Resistance Thermometer-Resistance thermom-
eters have the following characteristics:
(I) The two resistance thermometer elements have different
temperature ranges (excluding the EM configuration):
Nickel: -40 to 205C ( -40 to 400F),
Platinum: -40 to 538C (-40 to 1000F),
(2) High accuracy,
( 3) Excellent stability and reproducibility but slow in
response,
(4) Easily interchangeable but damages easily if not
handled properly. Can be matched to close tolerances for
temperature difference measurements, and
( 5) Resistance thermometers with platinum elements should
be specified for new construction and new instrument installa-
tions. Resistance thermometers with nickel elements should be
restricted to retrofit and replacements only.
S38.1.2 Thermocouple Sensors-Thermocouple sensors
have the following characteristics:
( 1) Simple construction,
(2) Small signal output is produced which requires sensitive
measuring instruments,
( 3) Lower cost and faster response than the resistance
thermometer,
( 4) Type K thermocouple covers a temperature range of -40
to 816C (-40 to 1500F) (excluding EM configuration),
( 5) Compensation for reference junction temperature is
required,
(6) Attains high accuracy but subject to changes within the
accuracy limit with use. These changes become more pro-
nounced as the temperature increases,
(7) Preferable for use with thermowells having a 5.08 em (2
in.) immersion depth since the thermocouple sensor's mini-
mum immersion depth is significantly smaller than that of a
resistance thermometer, and
(8) Preferable for use in the EM configuration since ex-
tremely fine resistance thermometer element wire is very
susceptible to electrical opens, shorts, or intermittent behavior
in service.
S38.2 New Construction-Resistance thermometers with
platinum elements should be specified for new construction
and new instrument installations with the following exceptions:
1668
(1) Thermowells have a 5.08 em (2 in.) immersion depth,
see S38.1.2(7), and
(2) EM configuration installations, see S38.1.2(8).
S38.2.1 Resistance Thermometer Element:
S38.2.1.1 Location-The resistance thermometer element
shall be located within the bottom 2 in. of sheath for the
thermowell and bare bulb configurations. The resistance ther-
mometer element for all configurations shall be located in a
manner such that the installation resistance test requirements
are met.
S38.2.1.2 Resistance Thermometer Current-Resistance
thermometers shall withstand a continuous operating current of
6 milliamperes (rnA) direct current (de).
S38.2.1.3 Temperature versus Resistance-Relationships
for resistance thermometers shall be in accordance with Table
Sll and Table S12 with limits of error specified in S39.2.
NoTE !-Resistance thermometers with nickel elements shall not be
used for temperature applications above 400F.
S38.2.2 Thermocouple:
S38.2.2.1 Location-The thermocouple measuring junction
shall be ungrounded and located within the bottom 6.35 mm
(lJ4 in.) of the sheath for the thermowell and bare bulb
configurations. The thermocouple measuring junction shall be
ungrounded and located in the middle of the sheath for the
embedded configuration.
S38.2.2.2 Connecting Wires-The diameter of the connect-
ing wire shall be the AWG as specified in Table S7. The
connecting wire material shall also be in accordance with Table
S7.
S38.2.3 Resistance Thermometers:
S38.2.3.1 External Insulation (TW and EM
Configurations)-The material for the external insulation shall
be specified in Table S7.
S38.2.3.2 Color Code- The external insulation for the
single connecting wire attached to one end of the resistance
thermometer element shall be color coded red. The external
insulation for the two connecting wires attached to the other
end of the resistance thermometer element shall be color coded
white or amber.
S38.2.3.3 Internal Insulation (TW and BB
Configurations)-The resistance thermometer connecting
wires shall be insulated from the sheath and from each other by
alumina (A1
2
0
3
). The alumina shall be alpha alumina with a
minimum content of 99.5 % alumina. Sulfur shall not exceed
50 parts per million (ppm) while carbon shall not exceed 200
ppm.
S38.2.3.4 Number of Connecting Wires-The resistance
thermometers shall be of three-wire construction except for the
bare bulb configuration with a nickel element which shall be of
two-wire construction.
S38.2.4 Thermocouple Sensors:
S38.2.4.1 External Insulating (TW and EM
Configurations)-The material for external insulation shall be
as specified in Table S7.
S38.2.4.2 Color Code-The external insulation for the posi-
tive (chomel) connecting wire shall be yellow. The external
insulation for the negative (alumel) connecting wire shall be
red.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S38.2.4.3 Internal Insulation (TW and EM
Configurations)-The thermocouple sensor connecting wires
shall be insulated from each other , except at the measuring
junction, and from the sheath by magnesia (MgO). The
magnesia shall be electrically fused with a 96.5 % minimum
content of magnesia. The sulfur content shall be less than 50
ppm and the carbon content less than 200 ppm.
S38.2.5 Thermowell Configuration:
S38.2.5.1 Temperature Exposures-Maximum connecting
head temperature shall be 300F for resistance thermometers
with nickel elements, 260C (500F) for resistance thermom-
eters with platinum elements, and 260C (500F) for type K
thermocouple sensors.
S38.2.5.2 Watertight Enclosure- Resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors shall be watertight such that water
directed at the sensor from any angle is prevented from entry.
S38.2.5.3 Construction- Thermowell configuration shall
consist of resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor,
construction head, and a connection head extension as shown
of S l.O-S4.0.
S38.2.5.4 Connection Head Cap-The connection head of
the thermowell configuration shall be provided with a screw-on
type cap with metal link chain.
S38.2.5.5 Terminal Board-Terminal board shall be secured
to the connection head.
S38.2.5.6 Thermowells-When resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors are intended for use with
thermowells, the thermowells shall be in accordance with
ASME B40.9, Supplement 1.
S38.2.6 Bare Bulb Configuration:
S38.2.6.1 Temperature Exposures-The maximum connec-
tor receptacle and plug temperature shall be 149C (300F).
S38.2.6.2 Watertight Enclosure-Resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors shall be watertight such that water
directed at the sensor from any angle is prevented from entry.
S38.2.6.3 Construction-The bare bulb configuration shall
be of one-piece construction as shown on Fig. S5.0.
S38.2.6.4 End Cap-The connector receptacle shall be pro-
vided with a screw-on end cap.
S38.2.6.5 Pressure Requirements-The resistance thermom-
eter and thermocouple sensor shall withstand 37.9 MPa (5500
psi) when inserted into air stream at a temperature of 182C
(360F) with velocity of 12.2 m (40ft) per second.
S38.2.7 Embedded Configuration:
S38.2.7.1 Temperature Exposures-Resistance thermom-
eters and thermocouple sensors shall withstand a maximum
temperature of 205C (400F) for continuous use, 274C
(525F) for short term exposure of 15 min, and 288C (550F)
for short term exposure of 2 min.
S38.2.7.2 Construction- The embedded configuration shall
consist of the resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor
as shown in Fig. S6.0.
S38.2.7.3 Scoring-The material and construction of the
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor shall be such
that in the event the bearing should fail and be wiped to a depth
of 2.54 254 11m (0.10 0.01 in.) over the area of the
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor, scoring of a
carbon steel shaft having a Brinell hardness of 170 to 180 will
be limited to a depth of 7.62 11m (300 11in.) or less.
S38.2.7.4 Babbitt Topping-The tip of the sheath shall
contain a 2.54 1.5 mm (0.10 0.06 in.) thick topping of
babbitt. The diameter, including maximum to tolerance, of the
babbitt topping shall conform to the diameter of the sheath.
S38.2.8 Cleaning and Surface Finishes-Surface of
castings, forgings, molded parts, stampings, machined and
welded parts shall be free of defects such as cracks, porosity,
undercuts, voids, and gaps as well as sand, dirt, fins, sharp
edges, scale, flux, and other harmful or extraneous materials.
External surface shall be smooth and edges shall be either
rounded or beveled. There shall be no bum-through. There
shall be no warpage or dimensional change due to heat from
resulting from the welding.
TABLE S11 Temperature versus Resistance Characteristics for Resistance Thermometers with Nickel Elements
Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance
oc (oF)
(Ohms) oc (oF)
(Ohms)
oc (oF)
(Ohms)
oc (oF)
(Ohms)
-40.0 (-40) 92.75 21.1 (70) 135.46 87.8 (190) 189.81 154.4 (310) 253.69
-34.4 (-30) 96.39 26.7 (80) 139.66 93.3 (200) 194.75 160.0 (320) 259.48
-28.9 (-20) 100.07 32.2 (90) 143.92 98.9 (210) 199.75 165.6 (330) 265.36
-23.3 (-10) 103.80 37.8 (100) 148.24 104.4 (220) 204.83 171.1 (340) 271.32
-17.8 (0) 107.57 43.3 (110) 152.61 110.0 (230) 209.97 176.7 (350) 277.35
-12.2 (10) 111.40 48.9 (120) 157.04 115.6 (240) 215.18 182.2 (360) 283.46
-6.7(20) 115.28 54.4 (130) 161.54 121.1 (250) 220.46 187.8 (370) 289.66
-1.1 (30) 119.21 60.0 (140) 166.09 126.7 (260) 225.82 193.3 (380) 295.93
0.0 (32) 120.00 65.6 (150) 170.71 132.2 (270) 231.24 198.9 (390) 302.29
4.4 (40) 123.19 71.1 (160) 175.39 137.8 (280) 236.74 204.4 (400) 308.73
10.0 (50) 127.23 76.7 (170) 180.13 143.3 (290) 242.32
15.6 (60) 131.32 82.2 (180) 184.94 148.8 (300) 247.96
1669
F2362 - 03 (2009)
TABLE S12 versus Resistance Characteristics for Resistance Thermometers with Platinum Elements
Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance
oc (oF)
(Ohms)
oc (oF)
(Ohms)
-40.0 (-40) 83.97 100.0 (212) 139.24
-28.9 (-20) 88.44 104.4 (220) 140.96
-17.8 (O) 92.90 126.7 (260) 149.51
-6.7 (20) 97.34 137.8 (280) 153.76
0.0 (32) 100.00 148.8 (300) 158.00
4.4 (40) 101.77 160.0 (320) 162.22
15.6 (60) 106.18 171.1 (340) 166.43
27.6 (80) 110.58 182.2 (360) 170.63
37.8 (100) 114.96 193.3 (380) 174.81
48.9 (120) 119.33 204.4 (400) 178.97
60.0 (140) 123.69 215.6 (420) 183.12
71.1 (160) 128.03 226.7 (440) 187.26
82.2 (180) 132.35 237.8 (460) 191.38
93.3 (200) 136.67 248.9 (480) 195.49
S39 .1 Insulation Resistance-The insulation resistance shall
be determined at 50 VDC and shall be no less than 10
megohms.
S39.2 Accuracy- The span and limits of error shall be as
specified in Table Sl3 (see S42.2).
TABLE S13 Accuracy (Span of limits of Error)
Temperature Range, oc (
0
F) Limits of Error
Resistance Thermometers with Nickel Elements
-40 to 93 ( -40 to 200) 1.1 oc (2F)
93 to 205 (200 to 400) 1% of temperature
measured
Resistance Thermometers with Platinum Elements
-40 to 277 ( -40 to 530) 1.1 oc (2F)
277 to 538 (530 to 1 000) % % of temperature
measured
Thermocouple Sensors
-40 to 277 (-40 to 530) 1.1C (2F)
277 to 816 (530 to 1500) % %of temperature
measured
S39.2.1 Accuracy Repeatability-The span and limits of
error shall be as specified in Table S 14.
TABlE S14 Accuracy Repeatability (Span of limits of Error)
Temperature Range, oc (F) Limits of Error
Resistance Thermometers with Nickel Elements
-40 to 93 (-40 to 200) 0.6C WF)
93 to 205 (200 to 400) 0.5 % of temperature
measured
Resistance Thermometers with Platinum Elements
-40 to 277 (-40 to 530) 0.6C (1 F)
277 to 538 (530 to 1000)
3
/16 %of temperature
measured
Thermocouple Sensors
-40 to 277 (-40 to 530) 0.6C WF)
277 to 816 (530 to 1500)
3
/16 %of temperature
measured
S39.2.2 Reference Measurement-The performance shall
conform to S39.2 (see S42.2.2).
S39 .3 Response Time-Response time of the resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be as follows:
(I) 8 s or less for thermo well configuration,
(2) 15 s or less for bare bulb configuration, and
( 3) 5 s or less for embedded configuration.
S39.4 Self-heating (Resistance Thermometers only)-The
temperature change due to self heating of the resistance
thermometers shall not exceed 0.6C (1 F) at an input power
level of 5 milliwatts (see S42.4).
Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance
oc (oF)
(Ohms) oc (oF)
(Ohms)
260.0 (500) 199.58 415.6 (780) 255.35
271.1 (520) 203.66 426.7 (800) 259.23
282.2 (540) 207.72 437.8 (820) 263.09
293.3 (560) 211.77 448.9 (840) 266.93
304.4 (580) 215.81 460.0 (860) 270.77
315.6 (600) 219.83 471.1 (880) 274.58
326.7 (620) 223.83 482.2 (900) 278.39
337.8 (640) 227.82 493.3 (920) 282.17
348.9 (660) 231.80 504.4 (940) 285.95
360.0 (680) 235.76 515.6 (960) 289.71
371.1 (700) 239.71 526.7 (980) 293.45
382.2 (720) 243.64 537.8 (1000) 297.18
393.3 (740) 247.56
404.4 (760) 251.46
S39.5 Thermal Cycling-When subjected to 1500 thermal
cycles, there shall be no shorts, opens, or evidence of intermit-
tent behavior. The resistance thermometers and the thermo-
couple sensors shall show no evidence of physical damage as
result of thermal cycling. The reference measurement per-
formed at the conclusion of the thermal cycling shall conform
to S39.2.
S39.6 Over-temperature (EM Co'nfiguration)-Resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall conform to the
temperature span and accuracy requirements specified in S39 .2
after being subjected to over-temperature. During over-
temperature, there shall be no shorts, opens, or evidence of
intermittent behavior. The reference measurement performed at
the conclusion of over-temperature shall conform to S39.2 (see
S42.5).
S39.7 Terminal Strength (TW and EM Configurations)-
Attachment of connecting wires to the connecting wire end
closure and their encapsulation into the sheath shall withstand
the specified static load. The resistance thermometers and
thermocouple sensors shall be axially loaded for 15 min
without causing circuit failure or loss of watertight integrity
(see S42.7). The reference measurement performed at the
conclusion of static loading shall conform to S39 .2.
S39.8 Connecting Wire end Closure-When subjected to a
vacuum or pressure, there shall be no physical damage to the
resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors and there
shall be no observed evidence of air bubbles while under
vacuum. After application of vacuum and pressure, the perfor-
mance of the resistance thermometers and thermocouple sen-
sors shall conform to S39.1 and S39.2 (see S42.8).
S39.9 Enclosure (TW and BB configurations)-There shall
be no leakage of water into the watertight enclosure (see
S42.9).
1670
S39 .1 0 Salt Spray-Resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall show no appreciable corrosion or other
damage when subjected to salt spray (S42.10). The perfor-
mance of the resistance thermometers and thermocouple sen-
sors shall conform to S39.1 and S39.2.
S39.11 Spring Loading (TW Configuration)-When com-
pressed 7.62 em (3/16 in.), the spring shall exert a minimum
force of 2.27 kg (5 lb) (S42.11).
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S39.12 Vibration-When exposed to vibration per MIL-
STD-167 -1, the resistance thermometers and thermocouple
sensors shall show no evidence of improper operation, failure,
or damage (see S42.12). The electrical signal from the resis-
tance thermometer and thermocouple sensor shall be monitored
during vibration and there shall be no shift in the temperature
indication. A reference measurement performed at the conclu-
sion of vibration shall meet the specified accuracy require-
ments of S39 .2.
S39.13 Shock-Resistance thermometers and thermocouple
sensors shall withstand the effects of shock in accordance with
MIL-S-901 (S42.13). A reference measurement performed
after exposure to shock shall meet the specified accuracy
requirements of S39 .2.
S39.14 Pressure (EM Configuration)-The embedded resis-
tance thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall not deform
to such a degree that the babbitt surface is visually determined
to be dimpled, cracked, or ruptured after exposure to a pressure
of 12.4 MPa (1800 lb/in.
2
) gauge. The insulation resistance
between each connecting wire and the babbitt surface shall be
no less than 10 megohms when measured both before and at
the conclusion of exposure to pressure. The resistance ther-
mometers and thermocouple sensors shall meet the reference
measurement requirements of S39 .2 both before and at the
conclusion of exposure to pressure (S42.14).
S39.15 Scoring (EM Con.figuration)-The stylus traces re-
sulting from the application of a scoring force of 3.63 kg (8 lb)
shall not indicate a scoring depth exceeding 7.62 micrometers
(300 microinches) (S42.15).
forgings, molded parts, starnpings, machined and welded parts
from welding.
S42. Test Methods
S42.1 Insulation Resistance-Insulation resistance shall be
determined by applying 50 V (de) between the connecting
wires and the sheath. Performance shall conform to S39.1.
S42.2 Accuracy-Resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall be calibrated in accordance with the
requirements of S39.2. The temperature of the bath fluid shall
be as shown in Table Sl5, ::2.8C (5F), with a temperature
gradient of ::0.06C (1/10 F), 0.28C (V2 F) for salt bath,
under steady state temperature conditions. The resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be calibrated at
temperatures listed in the increasing order. Performance shall
conform to S39.2.
TABLE S15 Calibration
Configuration Type
Temperature
Calibration Values, (F)
1671
BB NAT -40 to 205 -29, 0, 27, 82, 138, 193
(-40 to 400) (20, 32A , 80, 180A , 280, 380A )
PAT -40 to 538 -29, 0, 93, 205, 316, 427, 527
(-40 to 1000) (20, 32A, 200A , 400, 600A , 800,
980A)
KTC -40to816 -29, 0, 93, 205, 316, 482, 649
(-40 to 1500) (-20, 32A, 200, 400, 600A, 900,
120oA)
EM NAT, -40 to 205 -29, 0, 27, 82, 138, 193
PAT, (-40 to 400) (20, 32A, 80, 180A, 280, 38QA)
KTC
A These values shall be used for reference measurement (see S42.2.2).
S42.2.1 Accuracy Repeatability-The accuracy test speci-
fied in S42.2 shall be performed two additional times. Perfor-
mance shall conform to S39.2.1.
S42.2.2 Reference Measurement-The accuracy test as
specified in S42.2 shall be referred to as a "reference measure-
ment" when performed at the conclusion of another test listed
in Table S 15. The reference measurement shall only be
conducted at the temperatures that are specified for a reference
measurement in Table Sl5. Performance shall conform to
S39.2.2.
S42.3 Response Time-Resistance thermometers and ther-
mocouple sensors shall be tested in accordance with the
conditions of Table S 16. The low or high temperature test shall
be used depending upon the configuration and the type of
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor criteria in
Table S 17. The time it takes the standard cylinder output to rise
from an equivalent temperature from to T
2
in Table S 16
shall be the standard cylinder response time. The standard
cylinder response time shall be within the values listed in Table
Sl6 for at least six consecutive trials not counting those
performed in establishing the proper temperature bath condi-
tions (temperature, orientation, stirrer speed, and so forth). The
response time of the resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall be the average of at least six readings
taken during at least six consecutive trials where the standard
cylinder was within the values specified in Table S 16. The test
conditions of the resistance thermometers and thern1ocouple
sensors are also those contained in Table S 17. Performance
cO F2362 - 03 (2009)
TABLE S16 Response Time Test Conditions
Low
High Temperature
Test Conditions Temperature
Test
Test
Maximum temperature oc (F) 205 (400) 538, 816 (1000,
1500)
Bath medium Water Salt
Bath temperature oc ("F) 82 (180) 505 (940)
Initial temperature oc (F) 10 (50) 238 (460)
(Start timing) temperature T
1
C 27 (80) 305 (580)
(oF)
(Stop timing) temperature T
2
C 62 (143.2) 431 (808)
(oF)
Standard cylinder response time 6.0 0.2 8.0 0.2
TABLE S17 Conditions for Temperature
Configuration Type Temperature Test
TW NRT Low
BB PRT, KTC High
NRT Low
PRT, KTC High
EM NRT, PRT, KTC Low
S42.3.1 Standard Cylinder-A standard cylinder shall be
used for this test. The information needed to construct a
standard cylinder is provided on Fig. S7 .0. Connecting wires
from the standard cylinder thermocouple shall terminate at an
ice bottle, ice point reference junction or a reference junction
compensated electronic indicator. If an ice bottle or ice point
reference junction is used, the extension wires coming from the
reference junction shall be connected to an indicator such as a
potentiometer or a millivolt recorder. No matter what form of
indicator is used, the indicator shall have a response time not
less than two times faster than the response time of the
temperature rise that the standard cylinder will measure (see
Table ts 16). Response time measurement shall be conducted
using either a stop watch or any method capable of timing to
0.2 s or better.
S42.3.2 Temperature Bath-Two temperature baths are used
in performing this test. The baths shall be sufficiently large or
constructed in such a manner that the temperature bath fluid
will not be cooled by greater than 0.5 % of the span when
either the cylinder or the filled system thermometer is im-
mersed. The "hot" bath shall contain a variable speed stirrer.
Two liquid temperature bath fluids and temperatures are
permissible for use with this test and are specified in Table S 16.
One fluid temperature is referred to as the "cold bath tempera-
ture" while the other is referred to as the "hot bath tempera-
ture."
S42.3.3 Set Up-The conditions in the hot temperature bath
fluid shall be set up such that the standard cylinder response
time will be within the limits specified in S39.3. Hot tempera-
ture bath fluid conditions and, thus, the standard cylinder
response time, will be changed by varying the stirring param-
eters. The standard cylinder shall be immersed in the tempera-
ture bath fluid to the bottom of the standard cylinder collar (see
S7 .0 for location). The standard cylinder shall always be
immersed in the hot temperature bath fluid in the same location
and in the same orientation. The immersion depth of the
standard cylinder thennocouple measuring junction and the
immersion depth of the embedded configuration resistance
thermometer or thermocouple sensor shall be maintained at the
same level.
1672
S42.3.4 Determining Response Time-The resistance ther-
mometer or thermocouple sensor (or standard cylinder) shall be
immersed in the hot temperature bath until there is no further
indication of temperature rise. The resistance thermometer or
thermocouple sensor (or standard cy Iinder) shall then be
immersed in the cold temperature bath until there is no further
indication of temperature decrease. The resistance thermom-
eter or thermocouple sensor (or standard cylinder) shall again
be immersed in the hot temperature bath. Timing shall be
started when the resistance thermometer or thermocouple (or
stand cylinder) indicator reaches temperature T
1
(see Table
S 16) and stopped when temperature T
2
is reached. The time it
takes the resistance thermometer or thermocouple (or standard
cylinder) to indicate the difference between temperatures T
1
and T
2
shall be defined as the response time.
S42.3.5 Conducting Response Time Test-The response
time test shall be conducted by taking alternate response time
measurements between the standard cylinder and the thermom-
eter. Each alternation of the standard cylinder's then the
thermometer's response time measurements shall be defined as
trial.
S42.4 Se(f-heating (Resistance Thermometers)-The self-
heating test shall be conducted in a water bath under the
conditions specified in S42.2. A resistance thermometer shall
be immersed in the water bath to at least the minimum
immersion depth and allowed to stabilize at 82C (180F). A
series of direct currents shall be passed through the resistance
thermometer elements and maintained until steady state is
attained such that the power impact is successively 0.5, 1.0,
3.0, and 5.0 milliwatts. A curve of the indicated temperature
versus power input shall be plotted and extrapolated to zero
power input. The difference between the indicated temperature
at 5 milliwatts input and the extrapolated value at the indicated
temperature at zero power input is the effect due to self heating.
Performance shall conform to S39.4.
S42.5 Thermal Cycling-Resistance thermometers and ther-
mocouple sensors shall be heated and cooled for 1500 cycles in
accordance with Table S 18. Cycle rate shall not exceed two
cycles per minute. The output of the resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors shall be monitored during thermal
cycling. Connection head temperature shall not exceed the
maximum connection head temperature specified in Table S7.
Prior to and following the test, a reference measurement as
specified in S42.2.2 shall be conducted. Performance shall
conform to S39.5.
TABLE S18 Thermal Conditions
Temperature Range, oc (oF) Cycle Temperature, oc (F) 10%
Lower Upper
-51 to 205 (-60 to 400) 182 (360) 205 (400)
-40 to 538 (-40 to 1000) 38 (100) 482 (900)
-40 to 816 (-40 to 1500) 93 (200) 649 (1200)
S42.6 Over-temperature (EM Configuration)-Resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors, while at ambient
temperature, shall be quickly (within 2 s) immersed for a
period of 15 0.5 min in a temperature bath in which the fluid
is stabilized to a temperature of 274 2.8C (525 5F). The
resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor immersion
depth shall be 7.62 em (3J16 in.) if not installed in a fixture. If
the resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor is installed
F2362 - 03 (2009)
CONNECTING WIRE TO COLD JUNCTION
24 GAUGE IRON-CONSTANTAN THERMOCOUPLE
CONNECTING WIRE DUPLEX GLASS COVERED
COPPER
DRILL 3/32" X 4"
FROM TOP OF CYLINDER
8"
TIN (APPROX.
0.025 GRAM)
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
THERMOCOUPLE WIRE
THERMOCOUPLE MEASURING
JUNCTION (TWO LEADS
WELDED TOGETHER)
FIG. S7.0 Standard Cylinder
in a fixture, it shall be immersed to a sufficient depth to provide
an accurate bath temperature measurement. The resistance
thermometers or thermocouple sensors shall then be quickly
immersed in another temperature bath containing the same
fluid stabilized at a temperature of 288 ::!:: 2.8C (550 5F)
to the specified depth for a period of 2 0.05 min. The
resistance thermometers or thermocouple sensors shall then be
1673
quickly immersed in the first temperature bath in which the
fluid is stabilized at a temperature of 274 2.8C (525 5F)
to the specified depth for a period of 15 ::!:: 0.5 min. The output
of the resistance thermometers or thermocouple sensors shall
be monitored during this test. The resistance thermometers or
thermocouple sensors shall reach the bath fluid temperature
within 1 min after immersion into a temperature bath whether
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
or not a text fixture is used. A reference measurement shall be
performed at the conclusion of this test. Performance shall
conform to S39.6.
S42.7 Terminal Strength (TW and EM Configurations)-
With the resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors
firmly held in a holding fixture, a static tensile load of 2.27 kg
(5 lb) shall be applied to each connecting wire simultaneously
for 15 min for the thermowell configuration. For the embedded
configuration, a static tensile load of 2.27 kg (5 lb) shall be
applied to each connecting wire separately. The direction of the
load shall be along the longitudinal axis of the resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors. A reference measure-
ment shall be performed at the conclusion of this test. The
performance shall conform to S39. 7.
S42.8 Connecting Wire End Closure-During this test, the
resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors of the
thermowell configuration shall be removed from the connec-
tion head. No end cap shall be threaded over the connector
receptacle of the resistance thermometers and thermocouple
sensors of the bare bulb configuration. Connecting wire end
closure shall meet the requirements specified in S39.8.
S42.8.1 Vacuum Portion-The desiccator shall be half filled
with water and evacuated of dissolved air. The resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be immersed in
this desiccator. The desiccator shall then be subjected to an
absolute pressure of 27.5 kPa 3.5 kPa (4.0 0.5 lb/in.
2
) for
15 min. The connecting wire end closure shall be observed for
evidence of air leaks.
S42.8.2 Pressure Portion-The resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors shall be placed inside a pressure
chamber and the pressure chamber shall be hydrostatically
pressurized with water to 172.4 3.5 kPa (25 5 lb/in.
2
) for
a period of no less than 15 0.5 min.
S42.8.3 Post Test Measurements-At the conclusion of this
test, an insulation resistance test followed by a reference
measurement shall be performed. Performance shall conform
to S39.8.
S42.9 Enclosures (TW and BB Configurations)-The resis-
tance thermometers and thermocouple sensors of the thermow-
ell configuration shall be tested with the thermowell attached to
the connection head extension and a threaded plug inserted into
the connection head conduit connection. The resistance ther-
mometers and thermocouple sensors of the bare bulb configu-
ration shall be tested with an end cap threaded over the
connector receptacle. The test shall consist of a solid stream of
water from a 2.54 em ( 1 in.) diameter nozzle at a rate of 246
L (65 gal) per minute. The stream shall be directed on all
surfaces of the equipment and its mounting surface from a
maximum distance of 3.048 m (10ft) and for a minimum of 60
min.
S42.10 Salt Spray-Resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall be subjected to the salt spray test in
accordance with ASTM B 117. The salt spray test shall run for
a duration of 96 h. The salt solution shall be 5 1 %
concentration (5 parts by weight of salt in 95 parts by weight
of water). At the conclusion of this test, an insulation resistance
test followed by a reference measurement shall be performed.
S42.1 0.1 Thermowell Configuration-The resistance ther-
mometer or thermocouple sensor shall be removed from the
connection head when the test has reached the 48 h point. A
plug shall be threaded into the connection head conduit
connection (see Fig. S3.0) and a thermowell shall be threaded
onto the connection head extension. The connection head
(including connection head extension, plug, and thermowell)
and the resistance thermometer or thermocouple sensor shall be
separately subjected to the salt spray test.
S42.10.2 Bare Bulb Configuration-The resistance ther-
mometers and thermocouple sensors shall be subjected to the
salt spray test without an end cap threaded over the connector
receptacle.
S42.11 Spring Loading (TW Configuration)-Resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be mounted in a
jig and compressed 7.62 em (3JI6 in.) three successive times.
The compressive force of the spring shall be measured.
S42.12 Vibration-The vibration test shall be in accordance
with MIL-STD-167 -1 except as modified herein and shall
consist of the exploratory test, the variable frequency test, and
the endurance test. These tests shall be conducted in the
sequence listed and shall meet the requirements specified in
S39 .12. Each of the three tests shall be conducted in each ofthe
three mutually perpendicular axes. All three tests shall be
completed in one axis before performing the tests in the other
axis. The resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors
shall be secured to the fixture in the surface mounted configu-
ration.
S42.12.1 Exploratory Test:
( 1) Maintain each discrete frequency from 5 to 100 Hz at 1
Hz intervals for a minimum of 15 s, or a sweep rate that shall
not exceed 4 Hz per minute.
(2) Displacement or acceleration shall be as specified in
Table S19.
TABLE S19 Vibration
Frequency Range,
(Hz) (incl)
5 to20
21 to 50
51 to 100
Table Displacement
Exploratory Test,
1-1m (in.)
508 100
(0.020 0.004)
254 50
(0.01 0 0.002)
127 25
(0.005 0.001)
Criteria
Variable Frequency
Test, 1-1m (in.)
Peak to Peak
1524 300
(0.060 0.012)
1016200
(0.040 0.008)
508 100
(0.020 0.004)
( 3) Frequencies and locations where resonance occurs dur-
ing this test shall be noted.
S42.12.2 Variable Frequency Test:
( 1) Discrete frequency interval of 1 Hz.
(2) Frequency range 5 to 100 Hz.
( 3) Each discrete frequency shall be maintained for a
minimum of 5 min.
(4) Displacements shall be as specified in Table Sl9.
( 5) Frequencies and locations where resonance occurs dur-
ing this test shall be noted.
S42.12.3 Endurance Test:
1674
( 1) The resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors
shall be subjected to a 2-h endurance nm at each resonance.
(2) Displacement or acceleration shall be the variable fre-
quency test values specified in Table S 19.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
( 3) If no resonance is found, a 2-h performance run shall be
performed at 100 Hz. A reference measurement shall be
performed after the conclusion of the vibration test. Perfor-
mance shall conform to S39.12.
S42.13 Shock-Shock tests shall be in accordance with
MIL-S-901 grade A, class I, type C for lightweight equipment.
Resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be
mounted to simulate actual installation. Resistance thermom-
eters and thermocouple sensors shall be mounted no less than
7.62 em (3 in.) from the side and 7.62 em (3 in.) from the rear
of the platform. Output during the test shall be monitored. A
reference measurement shall be performed at the conclusion of
this test. Performance shall conform to S39.13.
S42.14 Pressure (EM Configuration)-The resistance ther-
mometers and thermocouple sensors under test, which will be
used only for this one test, shall be installed in a fixture made
from mild steel. The critical dimensions to which the fixture
shall conform are shown in S7 .0. The entire counterbored
1.9 em (%-in.) diameter surface shall be babbitted over, using
babbitt that conforms to grade 2 of Specification B23, flush
with the top of the test fixture. The insulation resistance
between each connecting wire and the babbitt surface shall
then be measured. The babbitt surface shall then be exposed to
a pressure of 12.4 MPa (1800 10 lb/in.
2
) for 5 0.25 min.
After completion of this test, the insulation resistance shall be
measured in the same manner as before the test. The fixture
shall be unbabbitted and a reference measurement shall be
performed. Performance shall conform to S39.14.
S42.15 Scoring-The resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors under test, which will be used only for this one
test, shall be installed in a fixture made from mild steeL The
critical dimensions to which the fixture shall conform are
shown in S39. The resistance thermometers and thermocouple
sensors under test shall not contain a babbitt topping, and the
connecting wire shall be severed. The entire 1.9 em (% in.)
diameter counterbored surface shall be babbitted over using
babbitt that conforms to Grade 2 of Specification B23 with 3
mm 254 11m (0.12 0.01 in.) of the resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors protruding above the babbitt surface.
The protruding tip of the resistance thermometers and thermo-
couple sensors shall be brought into contact with a 5.08 em
254 11m (2.00 0.01 in.) diameter shaft that is rotating at 3000
30 r/min. The shaft shall be made from carbon steel having
a Brinell hardness between 170 and 180 and a surface finish
between 15 and 25 root mean square (rms). A force of 3.63 kg
454 g (8 1 lb) shall be applied to the resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors to ensure contact with
the circumference of the shaft during the test. The resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall be oriented so
that the axis perpendicular to their sensor tip face shall intersect
and be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the shaft. Prior
to the start of the test, the shaft and the fixture shall be cleaned
with a suitable solvent and wiped dry. A stylus trace of the shaft
surface parallel to the axis of the shaft shall be performed at six
equally spaced intervals around the circumference of the shaft.
No lubrication shall be used between the resistance thermom-
eters and thermocouple sensors and the shaft during the scoring
test. The rotating shaft shall remove 2.54 mm 254 11m (0.] 0
0.10 in.) of material from the protruding tip of the resistance
thermometers or thermocouple sensors. Upon completion of
the test, removal of any babbitt from the surface of the shaft
shall be accomplished by the use of 20 % sodium hydroxide
solution. A stylus trace of the shaft surface parallel to the axis
of the shaft shall be performed at the same six equally spaced
intervals around the circumference of the shaft. Performance
S43. Inspection
( 1) Qualification testing, and
S43.2 Qualification Testing:
S43.2.1 Sample Size--Unless otherwise specified, two resis-
tance thermometers and thermocouple sensors of each
ration and range shall be subjected to qualification testing.
S43.2.2 General Examination and Tests-Qualification in-
spection shall consist of the general examination and tests
specified in Table S20 in the order listed. Any deviation in the
test order shall first be approved by the purchaser.
TABLE S20 Qualification
Examination Test Applica?le Conformance
and Test Reqwrement Method Configurations
Group A Group 8
-------------------------------------
1675
General examination
Accuracy
Response time
Self heating
8
Thermal cyclingc
Over-temperaturec
Terminal strengthc
Connecting wire end
closure
Enclosure
0
c
Salt spray (fog)
0
.c
Spring loading
Vibrationc
Shock
0
c
Pressure
0
c
S39.1
S39.2
S39.6
S39.4
S39.5
S39.6
S39.7
S39.8
S39.9
S39.10
S39.11
S39.12
S39.13
S39.14
S39.15
S43.5
S42.1
S42.2
S42.3
S42.4
S42.5
S42.6
S42.7
S42.8
S42.9
S42.10
S42.11
S42.12
S42.13
S42.14
S42.15
TW, BB, EM
TW, 88, EM
TW, BB, EM
TW, 88, EM
TW, BB, EM
EM
TW, EM
TW,B8
TW, BB
TW, BB, EM
TW
TW, BB, EM
TW, 88, EM
EM
EM
X
X
X
X
X
AA two point accuracy test at ooc (32F) and 1 oooc shall be performed.
8
The self heating test shall be performed only on resistance thermometers.
cA reference measurement (see S42.2.2) shall be performed prior to and at the
conclusion of this test. Performance shall conform to S39.2.2.
0
An insulation resistance test shall be performed at the conclusion of this test.
S43.2.3 Acceptance Criteria-The resistance thermometers
and thermocouple sensors shall meet all the requirements of the
general examination and tests listed in Table S20.
S43.3 Quality Conformance Inspection:
S43.3.1 Inspection Lot-An inspection lot shall consist of
all resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors of the
same classification, produced under essentially the same con-
ditions and offered for delivery at the same time.
S43.3.2 Group A General Examination and Test-
Resistance thermometers and thermocouple sensors in each lot
shall be subjected to the group A general examination and test
specified in Table S20 in the order listed.
0 F2362- 03 (2009)
S43.3.3 Group B General Examination and Test-A sample
resistance thermometer and thermocouple shall be randomly
selected from each lot of 100 or more units, as appropriate, for
the tests specified in Table S20. Group B tests shall be
performed in the order listed on resistance thermometers and
thermocouple sensors that have passed group A tests.
S43.3.4 Acceptance Criteria:
S43.3.4.1 Acceptance Criteria for Group A-The resistance
thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall meet all the
requirements of the group A general examination and tests in
order to receive group A quality conformance inspection
approval.
S43.3.4.2 Acceptance Criteria for Group B-Selected resis-
tance thermometers and thermocouple sensors shall have
passed the group A tests. If any resistance thermometer or
thermocouple sensor fails in any test, no resistance thermom-
eter or thermocouple sensor shall be accepted for quality
conformance inspection until the contractor has determined the
cause of the defect and has taken the necessary action to correct
or eliminate the defects from resistance thermometers or
thermocouple sensors on hand. The failed test and any other
test required shall be repeated to demonstrate that the correc-
tive action will enable the resistance thermometers or thermo-
couple sensors to conform to the requirements of this specifi-
cation.
S43.4 Test Conditions-Except where the following factors
are variables, the tests in this specification shall be conducted
under the following conditions:
( 1) Calibration bath temperature shall be plus or minus
2.8C (5F) from the specified temperature.
(2) Resistance thermometer element excitation current shall
be 1.0 0.1 rnA de.
( 3) Maximum immersion into the temperature bath shall be
as follows:
(a) TW configuration-Immersion shall be to the ther-
mowell insertion length minus 1.27 em (0.5 in.).
(b) BB configuration-Immersion shall be to the "E"
dimension minus the thread length 2.23 em (0.875 in.).
(c) EM configuration-Each resistance thermometer or
thermocouple sensor shall be placed in an individual stainless
steel tube and packed with fine aluminum oxide powder. The
stainless steel tube shall be immersed in the temperature bath
fluid to a depth such that further immersion does not produce
a change in the equivalent indicated temperature of more than
twice the temperature bath fluid gradient.
(4) Unless otherwise specified, the test shall be performed
with a sensor input current of 1 rnA.
S43.5 General Examination:
S43.5.1 Visual Examination-Resistance thermometers and
thermocouple sensors shall be given a thorough examination to
determine that they conform to this specification and applicable
drawings with respect to material, finish, workmanship,
construction, assembly, dimensions, weight, marking of
identification, and information plates. This examination shall
be limited to those examinations that may be performed
without disassembling the resistance thermometers and ther-
mocouple sensors in such a manner that their performance,
durability, or appearance will be affected.
S43.5.2 Radiographic Examination (TW and BB
Configuration)-When required, the radiographic examination
shall ensure that the resistance thermometer element, the
thermocouple sensor's measuring junction, and the connecting
wires meet the requirements of S38.2.
S43.5.3 Sheath Straightness (TW Configuration)-A plain
ring gauge having a 6.53 em 2.541-lm (0.2570 0.0001 in.)
diameter and a length which is at least the thermowell insertion
length shall be used to verify the sheath straightness. The
sheath shall pass through the plain ring gauge until it hits the
first spring stop.
S44. Certification
1676
S45.2 Identification Plate-The identification plate shall
include at a minimum the following:
( 1) Nomenclature,
(2) Contractor's part number,
( 3) National Stock Number (NSN),
( 4) Contract number,
( 5) Detailed specification number,
(6) Contractor's name or CAGE code, and
(7) Temperature range.
S45.3 Sheath (TW and BB Configurations)-Each sheath
shall be clearly and permanently marked, that is, engraved or
electronically etched with the Commercial and Government
Entity (CAGE) number, the classification variables as specified
in B4, and a model number.
S45.4 Metallic Tag (EM Configuration)- A metallic tag
shall be placed at the end of the connecting wires opposite the
sheath and shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
same information as required in S45.3. The following notice
shall be placed on the opposite side of the tag:
NOTICE
Reattach this tag to the connecting wires after bearing
installation and keep affixed to the connecting wires when
the bearing is placed in service.
S45.5 Connecting Metal Link (TW Configuration)-The
connecting metal links on the connection head terminal board
for resistance thermometers shall be marked "R" and "W,"
respectively, for the red and white insulated connecting wires.
The connecting metal links on the connection head terminal
board for thermocouple sensors shall be marked "Y ( + )" and
"R(-)" for the yellow and red insulated connecting wires.
cO F2362 - 03 (2009)
S45.6 Connector Receptacle (BB Configuration)-The con-
nector receptacle pins for resistance thermometers with plati-
num elements shall be marked "B" for the single connecting
wire on one side of the resistance thermometer element and
shall be marked "A" and "C" for the two connecting wires on
either side of the resistance thermometer element. The connec-
tor receptacle pins for resistance thermometers with nickel
elements shall be marked "A" and "B" for the two connecting
wires on each side of the resistance thermometer element. The
connector receptacle pins for thermocouple sensors shall be
marked "( + )" and "(-)" for the positive and negative connecting
wire respectively.
S45.7 Connecting Head Plate (TW Configuration)-An
identification plate shall be affixed to the connecting head cap.
S47 .1 Warranty-Special warranty requirements shall be
SENSORS, TEMPERATURE, FIBER OPTIC (NAVAL SHIPBOARD USE)
The following appendix to supplementary requirements established for U.S. Naval shipboard application shall apply when specified in the
contract or purchase order. When there is conflict between the standard (ASTM F2362) and this supplement's appendix, the requirements of
this supplement's appendix shall take precedence for equipment acquired by this supplement's appendix. This document supercedes MIL-S-
24795, Sensors, Temperature, Fiber Optic (Naval Shipboard Use), for new ship construction.
S48. Scope
S48.1 This supplement covers single-channel, fiber optic
temperature sensors designed to meet the requirements for use
onboard naval ships.
S48.2 This specification covers the requirements for single-
channel, fiber optic temperature sensors for general applica-
tions. The fiber optic temperature sensor usually consists of the
sensor head that is in contact with the measured media,
embedded in babbitt material, or housed inside a thermowell.
Using connectorized fiber optic cable, a separate opto-
electronics module translates the optical input to a continuous
linear proportional analog electrical signal or other output
signal such as optical or digital.
9
B23 Specification for White Metal Bearing Alloys Known
Commercially as "Babbitt Metal"
B 117 Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
D542 Test Method for Index of Refraction of Transparent
Organic Plastics
S49.1.2 Other Commercial Documents:
9
the ASTM website.
1677
ANSI/IS A S37 .1 Electrical Transducer Nomenclature and
Terminology
10
ASME PTC 19.3:1 Thermowells (Power Test Codes, Instru-
ments and Apparatus, Part 3, Temperature Measurernent)
11
RS-422 Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digi-
tal Interface Circuie
2
13
Excited)
MIL-STD-461 Requirements for Control of Electromag-
netic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equip-
ment
MIL-STD-2042 Fiber Optic Topology Installation Standard
Methods for Naval Ships
MIL-S-901 Shock Tests, H.L (High-Impact); Shipboard
Machinery, Equipment Systems, Requirements for
MIL-C-5015 Connector, Electrical, Circular Threaded, AN
Type, General Specification for
MIL-S-19622 Stuffing Tubes, Nylon; and Packing Assem-
blies; General Specification for
MIL-S-19622/1 Stuffing Tubes, Straight, Nylon
MIL-S-19622/17 Stuffing Tube, Nylon, Size 2: Packing
Assemblies for
MIL-E-24142 Enclosures for Electrical Fittings and
Fixtures, General Specification for
10
ll Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
13
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg.
0 F2362 - 03 (2009)
MIL-E-24142/3 Enclosure for Electrical Fittings and
Fixtures, Submersible, Size 6 by 9 (15 Foot)
MIL-M-24794 Material, Index Matching, Fiber Optics
MIL-F-49291 Fiber, Optical, (Metric), General Specifica-
tion for
Plug, Adapter Style, 2.5 Millimeter Bayonet Coupling, Epoxy
Adapter, 2.5 Millimeter Bayonet Coupling, Bulkhead Panel
Mount
Adapter, 2.5 :r-v1illimeter Bayonet Coupling, PC I\.1ount
MIL-C-85045 Cables, Fiber Optic, (Metric), General Speci-
fication for
Rear Release, Crimp Contact, AN Type with
Contact, AN Type
SSO. Terminology
S50.1 Terminology Defined-Terms marked with (ANSI/
ISA S37.1) are taken directly from ANSI/ISA S37.1 (R-1982)
and are included for the convenience of the reader.
S50.2 Definitions-Terminology consistent with ANSI/IS A
S37 .1 shall apply, except as modified by the definitions listed
as follows:
S50.2.1 ambient conditions- conditions such as pressure
and temperature of the medium surrounding the case of a
sensor (ANSIIISA S37.1).
S50.2.2 babbitt-metal material commonly used in bearing
and temperature sensor installations which wears in with
equipment operation providing a wear surface and heat transfer
medium. Babbitt is softer than the base or substrate material
and softer than mating component materials, where applicable.
S50.2.3 bare-bulb type sensor head-sensor head design
where the sensing element is exposed directly to the process
fluid being measured.
S50.2.4 calibration- test during which known values of
measurands are applied to the sensor and corresponding output
readings are recorded under specific conditions (ANSIIISA
S37.1).
S50.2.5 embedded type sensor head-sensor head design
which is embedded in babbitt material which isolates the
sensor element from the process fluid and, in some instances,
moving or rotating components, but still allows the tempera-
ture to be monitored.
S50.2.6 environmental conditions-specified external con-
ditions such as shock, vibration and temperature to which a
sensor may be exposed during shipping, storage, handling, and
operation (ANSIIISA S37.1).
S50.2.7 error-algebraic difference between the indicated
value and the true value of the measurand (ANSI/ISA S37.1).
S50.2.8 fiber optic temperature sensor-a device that con-
verts sensed temperature to a proportional output signal via
changes in fiber optic properties. The fiber optic temperature
sensor normally consists of a sensor head, opto-electronics
module, and connectorized fiber optic cable.
S50.2.9 hysteresis-the difference in sensor output when
compared at the same temperature under the same environmen-
tal conditions with one data point taken with ascending
temperature and another with descending temperature.
S50.2.1 0 operating environmental conditions- environ-
mental conditions during exposure to which a sensor must
perform in some specified manner (ANSIIISA S37.1).
S50.2.11 optical-involving the use of light sensitive de-
vices to acquire information.
S50.2.12 optical fiber-a very thin filament or fiber, made of
S50.2.13 opto-electronics module-a component of the fiber
optic temperature sensor that contains the optical source and
detector, and signal conditioner devices necessary to convert
the sensed temperature to a specified output signal.
S50.2.14 output-electrical or numerical quantity, produced
by a sensor or measurement system, that is a function of the
applied measurand.
S50.2.15 range-measurand values over which a sensor is
intended to measure, specified by their upper and lower limits
(ANSI/ISA S37.1).
S50.2.16 repeatability- ability of a sensor to reproduce
direction (ANSIIISA S37.1).
S50.2.17 response time-the time required for a sensor to
indicate a step change in temperature or the time difference
between an actual step change in temperature applied and the
corresponding change in sensor output.
S50.2.18 sensitivity factor-the ratio of fiber optic tempera-
ture sensor output signal percentage change of span to applied
bath temperature percentage change of span.
S50.2.19 sensor element-that part of the sensor that re-
sponds directly to the measurand (ANSI/ISA S37.1).
S50.2.20 sensor head-the transduction element of a fiber
optic temperature sensor that detects temperature via changes
in optical properties.
S50.2.21 sheath- the protective covering of a sensor ele-
ment.
S50.2.22 Sf (Le Systeme International d'Unites) units-
units of measurement recognized by the CIPM (Comite'
International des Poids et Mesures).
1678
S50.2.23 signal conditioner- an electronic device that
makes the output signal from a transduction element compat-
ible with a readout system.
S50.2.24 span-the algebraic difference between the limits
of the measurement range.
S50.2.25 static error band-the maximum deviation from a
straight line drawn through the coordinates of the lower range
limit at specified sensor output and the upper range limit at
output expressed in percentage of sensor span.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S50.2.26 thermowell-a pressure tight receptacle adapted to
receive a temperature sensing element and provided with the
external threads or other means for pressure tight attachment to
the vessel.
S50.2.27 thermowell type sensor head--sensor head design
which is intended to be used with a thermowell which isolates
the sensor element from the process fluid being measured while
maintaining the pressure boundary.
S50.2.28 warm-up time-the time required for a sensor to
operate within specified requirements after being re-energized
from a cold (ambient) state.
S51. Classification
S51.1 Design 'f:vpe-The fiber optic temperature sensor
shall consist of a series of designations which shall be assigned
and listed in the format below.
Example: ASTM F2362S48-T4-DC-A-VC-2
Specification Type Input Opto- Signal Range
Power Electronics Output
Module
F2362848 T4 DC A vc 2
851.2 851.3 851.4 851.5 851.6
S51.2 1ype-The sensor head type shall be designated as
follows:
Tl-Thermowell (see S8.0 and S9.0)
T2-Thermowell (see S8.0 and S9.0)
EM-Embedded (Bearing Applications, see
SlO.O)
Bl-Bare-bulb (see
B2-Bare-bulb (see
S11.0)
Sll.O)
S8.0 and
S51.3 Input Power-The input power required to operate
the opto-electronics module shall be designated as follows:
DC-28 V direct current (Vdc)
AC--115 V alternating current (Vac)
S51.4 Opto-electronics Module-The opto-electronics mod-
ule type shall be designated as follows:
A-Junction box enclosure
B---Control console module
C-Monitoring and alarm panel module
S51.5 Signal Output-The signal output shall be designated
as follows:
A-4 to 20 rnA de
VA---0 to 5 Vdc
VB--0 to 10 Vdc
VC-0 to 12 Vdc
output
E-Digital electrical output
S51.6 Range-The sensor measurement range shall be des-
as follows:
1 : -40 to 150C ( -40 to 302 F)
2: 0 to 300C (32 to 572F)
3: -40 to 300C (-40 to 572F)
S52.1 The purchaser shall provide the manufacturer with all
described.
(2) Quantity of fiber optic temperature sensors required,
( 3) Fiber optic temperature sensor classification required:
(a) Sensor type,
(b) Input power,
(c) Opto-electronics module,
(d) Signal output, and
(e) Range.
( 4) When qualification inspection is required,
( 5) Final disposition of qualification test C><.uu'-"'"'"
(7) Unique product marking requirements, and
(8) Unique preservation, packaging and marking require-
ments.
S53.1 Sensing Elements-The materials for all wetted parts
shall be selected for long term compatibility with the process
medium. For example, corrosion resistant steel or monel are
compatible with long term exposure to seawater.
S53.2 Metals-Unless otherwise specified herein, all metals
used in the construction of the sensor shall be corrosion
resistant. Dissimilar metals shall not be used in close
contact with each other unless suitably finished to prevent
electrolytic corrosion. Materials used to fabricate the sensor
head for the embedded configuration shall have a Brinell
hardness less than 170 to ensure that shaft scoring does not
occur.
S53.3 Flammable Materials-Materials used in the con-
struction of the sensor shall, in the end configuration, be
tions of atmosphere, pressure and temperature to be expected
in the application. Fire retardant additives may be used
provided they do not adversely affect the specified oerformanc;e
requirements of the basic materials. Fire retardance shall not be
achieved by use of nonpermanent additives to the basic
material.
1679
S53.4 Fungus Resistant Materials-Materials used in the
construction of the sensor shall be fungus inert materials.
S53.5 Solvents, Adhesives, and Cleaning any
chemicals or cements are used in bonding of internal
components, no degradation shall result during in-service use.
S53.6 Refractive Index Matching Gels, Fluids, or
Compounds-Refractive index matching fluids, or com-
pounds shall be in accordance with MIL-M-24794 and shall
not produce toxic, corrosive, or explosive byproducts. The
material is subject to a toxicological data and formulations
review and inspection, for safety of material, by the purchaser.
The index matching material shall be either silicone or ali-
phatic hydrocarbon material and shall be clear and transparent.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
REMOVABLE
CAP
L
CONNECTION
HEAD EXTENSION
LENGTH A
INSERTION LENGTH
INTO THERMOWELL
MIL -C-83522 MATED
CONNECTOR PAIR INSIDE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
3/4"-28 UNS-28
STUFFING TUBE

\i'1 v 1 vVL. )
THERMOWELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
ASME 840.9 SUPPLEMENT 1
(THERMOWELL NOT SUPPLIED
WITH THERMOWELL CONFIGURATION)
FIG. S8.0 Thermowell Type Sensor Head Assembly
The index matching material shall have an index of refraction
of 1.46 :: 0.01 as tested in accordance with Test Method D542
when exposed to operating temperature extremes between
-28C and +85C ( -18.4 and 185F). The index matching
material shall not flow at elevated temperatures. The index
1680
matching material shall remain clear and transparent when
tested for water absorption in accordance with Test Method
D570. The index matching material shall have a shelf life not
less than 36 months at 25 :: soc (77 :: 9F). The 36 month
period commences on the date of adhesive manufacture.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
6.35 0.127 (0.25 0.005) C/J
WASHER SPRING STOP SHEATH
TIG WELD TYP
NOTE: TIP MUST
BE FLAT
FIG. S9.0 Sensor Head Sheath Construction
BABBITI
TOPPING
D (FIBER OPTIC CABLE DIAMETER)
FIG. S10.0 Embedded Type Sensor Head Assembly
3/4-16 UNF-3A THO
L ____ _
r
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
STUFFING TUBE
(MIL -S-19622)
FIG. S11.0 Bare-bulb Type Sensor Head Assembly
Fiber optic temperature sensors convert the thermal energy
surrounding the sensor head to a continuous linear analog de
signal or specified digital output throughout a specified mea-
surement range. The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
consist of a sensor head, opto-electronics module, and fiber
optic cable interconnect. All parts of the fiber optic temperature
sensor shall be interchangeable with the appropriate replace-
ment parts with respect to form, fit, and function, and maintain
the specified accuracy requirements.
S54.1 Sensor Head-The sensor head shall detect the sur-
rounding temperature. The sensor head shall be passive in
nature by detection of temperature through a change in optical
1681
properties. Neither electrical nor electronic components shall
be used in the construction of the sensor head.
S54.1.1 Thermowell Type-The sensor head shall be con-
structed in accordance with Fig. S8.0 and S9.0. The sensox
head dimensions shall be in accordance with SS.O and
S9.0. The sensor head shall have a weight not greater than 1 kg
S54.1.2 Embedded Type-The sensor head shall be con-
structed in accordance with the dimensions shown in
S I 0.0. The babbitt topping material shall be in accordance witt
Specification B23 (grade 2).
S54.1.3 Bare-bulb Type-The bare-bulb type sensor hea(
dimensions shall be in accordance with Fig. S 11.0. The senso
head shall have a weight not greater than 1 kg (2.2 lb ). Th<
F2362 - 03 (2009)
sensor sheath shall be designed to withstand application
conditions of 37.66 Mpa (5500 pounds per square inch), 2l0C
(4l0F), and an open air flow velocity of 12.2 m (40 ft) per
second. Conformance shall be proven by using a mathematical
model approved by the Power Test Code Thermometer Wells,
ASME PTC 19.3:1.
S54.2 Opto-electronics Module:
S54.2.1 Junction Box Enclosure (Type A)-The opto-
electronics shall be housed in a junction box. MIL-E-24142
and MIL-E-24142/3 may be used as guidance for the junction
box. At a minimum, the dimensions, mounting requirements,
and cable entrance shall be in accordance with MIL-E-24142
and MIL-E-24142/3. The opto-electronics module shall have a
weight no greater than 4.5 kg (9.92 lb).
S54.2.2 Control Console Module (Type B)-The opto-
electronics shall be packaged in a circuit card which is a
modular subassembly of a control console. Design and test
requirements for the opto-electronics module shall be as
S54.2.3 Monitoring and Alarm Panel Module (Type C)-
The opto-electronics shall be packaged in a module which is a
subassembly of a bulkhead mounted temperature monitoring
and alarm panel. Design and test requirements for the opto-
electronics module shall be as specified in the acquisition
requirements.
S54.3 Fiber Optic Cable:
S54.3.1 Thermowell and Bare-bulb Sensor Types-The
cable used to interface the sensor head and the opto-electronics
module shall have an outer diameter of a four fiber cable in
accordance with MIL-C 85045. In the cable, there shall be no
less than two times the number of fibers required for operation
of the sensor. The cable shall be supplied with a stuffing tube
s i z ~ 2, military part number M1962211-002 in accordance
with MIL-S-19662/1 ), and packing assembly (military part
number M 19622-17-0001 in accordance with MIL-S-19662/
17) in accordance with MIL-S-19622, and an o-ring installed
on each end of the cable to accomplish watertight penetration
into the sensor head and opto-electronic module. The o-rings
used shall be petroleum hydraulic fluid resistant and shall be
rated to perform in high temperature applications 135C
(275F). Exposed fiber optical fiber cable component
shall not be used over distances greater than one meter. The
cable length shall be as specified in the acquisition require-
ments.
S54.3.2 Embedded Sensor Type-The cable used to inter-
face the sensor head and a local interconnection box shall be in
accordance with MIL-C-85045. The cable length shall be as
S54.3.3 Optical Fiber- Optical fiber used to transmit light
between the opto-electronics module and the sensor head shall
be in accordance with MIL-F-49291.
S54.3.4 Fiber Optic Connectors, Receptacles, and Bulk-
head Adapters-All fiber optic connectors, receptacles, and
bulkhead adapters shall be in accordance with MIL-C-83522
and MIL-C-83522/16, 17 ,and 18, respectively. The fiber optic
cable for the thermowell sensor type shall be terminated at both
ends with connectors. The fiber optic cable for the embedded
and bare-bulb sensor configurations shall be terminated with a
connector at the end which interfaces with the opto-electronic
module. MIL-STD-2042 method 5B1 may be used as guid-
ance. The connectors and receptacles shall be mounted inside
the sensor head (thermowell sensor type only) and the opto-
electronic module.
S54.3.5 Electrical Input Power-Nominal steady-state
power supply requirements for ac shall be 115 8 Vac, 60
Hertz, single phase. Nominal steady-state power supply re-
quirements for de shall be 28 4.5 V de. The sensor shall
operate with power supply variations as specified (see S58.8.1
through S58.8.6).
S54.3.6 Output Signal:
S54.3.6.1 Current Output-When a current output is
required, the output signal shall be directly proportional to the
temperature being measured. The 4 rnA output shall corre-
spond to the lower temperature range value and the 20 rnA
output shall correspond to the upper temperature range value.
The current output shall remain accurate regardless of external
load resistance variations over a range of 0 to 250 n.
S54.3.6.2 Voltage Output-When a voltage output is
required, the output signal shall be directly proportional to the
temperature being measured. The lower de voltage output shall
correspond to the lower temperature range value and the higher
de voltage output shall correspond to the upper temperature
range value. The voltage output shall remain accurate regard-
less of external load resistance greater than 1000 n. Typical
voltage outputs include 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc and 0-12 Vdc.
S54.3.6.3 Digital Optical Output-When a digital optica]
output is required, the output signal specifications shall be
S54.3.6.4 Digital Electrical Output-When a digital electri-
cal output is required, the electrical characteristics shall be
those specified in EIA standards RS-422 for balanced voltage
digital interface circuitry or as specified in the acquisition
requirements. The data format shall also be specified in the
acquisition requirements.
S54.3.7 Electrical Connectors-A single electrical recep-
tacle in accordance with MIL-C-5015 shall be used to interface
with the input power and linear output signal to the opto-
electronics module. When a digital optical or digital electrical
output signal is specified, connectors shall be as specified in the
acquisition requirements. The appropriate connector assembly
and pin designations for each of the possible fiber optic
temperature configurations shall be as specified as follows.
S54.3.7.1 DC Input Power-The receptacle mounted to the
opto-electronics module shall be classification MS3452W14S-
5PX in accordance with MS3452. Receptacle pin "A" shall be
positive 28Vdc input power, pin "B" shall be negative 28Vdc
input power, pin "C" shall be the case ground, pin "D" shall be
positive rnA or high V de output signal, and pin "E" shall be the
negative rnA or low V de output signal. The mating plug
supplied with the fiber optic temperature sensor shall be
classification MS3456W14S-5SX in accordance with MS3456.
1682
S54.3.7.2 AC Input Power-The receptacle mounted to the
opto-electronics module shall be classification MS3452W14S-
5PX in accordance with MS3452. Receptacle pin "A" shall be
positive 115 Vac input power, pin "B" shall be input power
return, pin "C" shall be the case ground, pin "D" shall be
F2362 - 03 (2009)
positive rnA or high V de output signal, and pin "E" shall be the
negative rnA or low V de output signal. The mating plug
supplied with the fiber optic temperature sensor shall be
classification MS3456Wl4S-5SX in accordance with MS3456.
S54.3.8 Adjustments-A means may be provided for adjust-
ing the output signal of the opto-electronics module for
calibration purposes. If provided, the adjustments shall be
situated in the opto-electronics module so that calibrations can
be performed with the fiber optic temperature sensor energized.
S54.3.9 Fuses-The opto-electronics module shall not be
fused.
S55.1 Accuracy-The fiber optic temperature sensor output
signal accuracy shall be within :: 1 % of span (see S58.1 ).
S55.2 Repeatability- The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal repeatability at each temperature shall not
change in value more than 0.5 % of span (see S58.2).
S55.3 Reference Measurement-The fiber optic temperature
sensor output signal accuracy shall be within :: 1 % of span
(see S58.3).
S55.4 Sensitivity Factor-The ratio of the fiber optic tem-
perature sensor output signal percentage change of span to
applied bath temperature percentage change of span shall not
be less than 0.75 nor greater than 1.25 (see S58.4).
S55.5 Response Time-Response time of the fiber optic
temperature sensor output signal accuracy shall be not greater
than 8 s for the thermowell sensor type, not greater than 5 s for
the embedded sensor type, and not greater than 15 s for the
bare-bulb sensor type (see S58.5).
S55.6 Warm-up Time--The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal accuracy at the bath temperature shall be within
:: 1 % of span within 1 min after the sensor is energized (see
S58.6).
S55.7 Steady-state Supply Voltage and Frequency (AC) or
Supply Voltage (DC)-The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal shall be within :: 1 % of span throughout the
limits of supply voltage and frequency (see S58.7).
S55.8 Transient Voltage and Frequency (AC) or Voltage
(DC)-The fiber optic temperature sensor output signal accu-
racy shall be within :: 1 % of span when subjected to transient
voltage and frequency (see S58.8).
the fiber optic temperature sensor between circuits and between
circuits and ground shall not be less than 10 megohms (see
S58.9).
S55.10 Power Interruption-The fiber optic temperature
sensor output signal accuracy shall be :: % of span during
short duration power interruptions (see S58. 1 0).
S55.11 Short Circuit-The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal accuracy shall be within :: 1 % of span after short
circuit of the output lines (see S58.11).
S55.12 Line Voltage Reversal (DC)-The fiber optic tem-
perature sensor output signal accuracy shall be within :: 1 % of
span after reversal of the input de power lines (see S58.12).
S55.13 Temperature-The fiber temperature sensor
output signal accuracy shall be within :: 1 % of span over the
ambient temperature range of 0 to 65C (32 to 149F) (see
S58.13).
S55.14 Enclosure-The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal accuracy shall be within 1 % of span after
exposure to a coarse stream of water (see S58.14).
S55.15 Salt Spray-No corrosion or other damage shall be
evident when exposed to salt spray and the fiber optic
temperature sensor output signal accuracy shall be within :: 1
% of span (see S58.15).
S55.16 Over-temperature-The sensor head shall show no
evidence of physical damage when exposed to the limits of
over-temperature and the reference measurement results shall
conform to S55.3 (see S58.16).
S55.17 Accelerated Life-The sensor head shall show no
evidence of physical damage when exposed to operating
conditions which simulate accelerated life and the reference
measurement results shall conform to S55 .3 (see S58.17).
S5 5.18 Vibration-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
operate without interruption and show no evidence of physical
damage when exposed to vibration in accordance with MIL
STD-167-1. The reference measurement results shall conform
to S55.3 (see S58.18).
S55 .19 Shock-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
operate without interruption and show no evidence of physical
damage when exposed to shock in accordance with MIL-S-
901. The reference measurement results shall conform to S55.3
(see S58.19).
S55.20 Electromagnetic Inteiference (EMf) Emission and
Susceptibility-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall be in
accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-461 revision E,
or later: CElOl (Submarine application only), CE102, CS101,
CS114, CS116, RE101, RE102, RS101, and RS103 (see
S58.20).
S55.21 Pressure-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
operate without interruption when exposed to a babbitt surface
pressure of 12.4 MPa (1800 psi). The reference measurement
shall conform to S55.3 (see S58.21).
1683
S56.1 Cleaning and Suiface Finishes-Surfaces of castings,
from welding.
S57 .1 The number of tests and retests, if any, shall be
S58. Test Methods
S58.1 Accuracy-The sensitive portion of the sensor head
shall be immersed in a temperature bath and the fiber optic
temperature sensor output signal shall be measured at 5, 25, 50,
75 and 95 % of the fiber optic temperature sensor span.
Accuracy shall conform to S55.1.
F2362 - 03 (2009)
S58.2 Repeatability-The procedure specified in S58.1 shall
be repeated three successive times while maintaining tempera-
ture bath conditions. The fiber optic temperature sensor head
shall be removed from the bath for not less than 2 min and
re-immersed at a repeatable depth for consecutive measure-
ments at each of the five temperature points. The fiber optic
temperature sensor output signal shall conform to S55.2.
S58.3 Reference Measurement-The sensitive portion of the
sensor head shall be immersed in a temperature bath and the
fiber optic temperature sensor output signal shall be measured
at 5, 50, and 95 % of the fiber optic temperature sensor span.
System accuracy shall conform to S55.1.
S58.4 Sensitivity Factor-The sensitivity factor shall be
determined using the following procedure. Immerse the sensi-
tive portion of the sensor head in a temperature bath and allow
ample time to stabilize at a temperature of 80 : 5 % of span.
Measure both the bath temperature and the fiber optic tempera-
ture sensor output signal. Increase the bath temperature by an
amount not greater than 1 % of the fiber optic temperature
sensor span. Measure both the new bath temperature and the
fiber optic temperature sensor out put signal. Calculate the
change in both bath temperature and fiber optic temperature
sensor output signal as a percentage of the fiber optic tempera-
ture sensor span. Determine the ratio of the output signal
percentage change to applied bath temperature percentage
change in terms of fiber optic temperature sensor span. Repeat
this procedure for a bath temperature decrease not greater than
1 % of span. Performance shall conform to S55.4.
S58.5 Response Time-The response of the fiber optic
temperature sensor shall be determined using the following
procedure:
(1) Bath medium: water
(2) Origin bath temperature: 10C (50F)
(3) Destination bath temperature: 82C (180F)
(4) Initial temperature (T1): 26C (79F)
(5) Final temperature (T2): 62C (144F)
The response time shall be determined as the time required
for the fiber optic temperature sensor output signal to track
from T1 to T2 after the sensor head in transferred from the
origin bath to the destination bath. The response time of the
fiber optic temperature sensor shall be the average of not less
than six readings taken during not less than six consecutive
trials. Performance shall conform to S55.5.
S58.6 Warm-up Time-Warm-up time shall be determined
using the following procedure. Allow the sensitive portion of
the sensor head to stabilize at a bath temperature of 80 : 5 %
of the fiber optic temperature sensor span. De-energize the fiber
optic temperature sensor for no less than 2 h. Energize the fiber
optic temperature sensor and monitor the output signal as
necessary to ensure conformance to S55.6.
S58.7 Steady-state Supply Voltage and Frequency (AC) or
Supply Voltage (DC)- The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal shall be monitored for no less than 15 min at
normal, maximum, and minimum steady-state voltage and
frequency conditions as specified in S58.8. The fiber optic
temperature sensor shall be subjected to each of the applicable
power supply conditions for no less than 1 h at ambient
temperatures of 0, 25, and 65C (32, 77, and 149F). The fiber
1684
optic temperature sensor signal output shall be measured after
not less than 1 h at each test condition. This test may be
S58.13). Performance shall conform to S55.7.
S58.8 Transient Supply Voltage and Frequency (AC) or
Supply Voltage (DC)-The fiber optic temperature sensor
output signal shall be monitored at ambient temperature during
each test procedure defined below. Performance shall conform
to S55.8.
S58.8.1 Transient Voltage Upper Limit (AC)-With the fiber
optic temperature sensor operating at a voltage of 123 Vac, the
voltage shall be increased to 138 Vac, and then decreased back
to the steady-state voltage of 123 Vac in a 2 s period.
S58.8.2 Transient Voltage Lower Limit (AC)-With the fiber
optic temperature sensor operating at a voltage of 107 Vac, the
voltage shall be decreased to 92 Vac, and then increased back
to the steady-state voltage of 107 Vac in a 2 s period.
S58.8.3 Transient Frequency Upper Limit (AC)-With the
fiber optic temperature sensor operating at a frequency of 62
Hz, the frequency shall be increased to 63.5 Hz, and then
decreased back to the steady-state frequency of 62 Hz in a 2 s
period.
S58.8.4 Transient frequency lower limit (AC)-With the
fiber optic temperature sensor operating at a frequency of 58
Hz, the frequency shall be decreased to 56.5 Hz, and then
increased back to the steady-state frequency of 58 Hz in a 2 s
period.
S58.8.5 Transient Voltage Upper Limit (DC)-With the
fiber optic temperature sensor operating at a voltage of 32.5
V de, the voltage shall be increased to 34.5 V de, and then
decreased back to the steady-state voltage of 32.5 V de in a 2 s
period.
S58.8.6 Transient Voltage Lower Limit (DC)-With the
fiber optic temperature sensor operating at a voltage of 23.5
V de, the voltage shall be decreased to 21.5 V de, and then
increased back to the steady-state voltage of 23.5 Vdc in a 2 s
period.
the opto-electronics module circuits shall be determined by
applying 50 V de between electrical input and output circuits
and between these circuits and the ground. The insulation
resistance measurement shall be made immediately after a 2
min period of uninterrupted test voltage application. If the
indication of insulation resistance meets the specified limit (see
S55.9) and is steady or increasing, the test may be terminated
before the end of the 2 min period. Performance shall conform
to S55.9.
S58.10 Power Interruption-The fiber optic temperature
sensor shall be energized and the output signal monitored at
ambient temperature throughout the test. The external power
supply shall be suddenly interrupted, and after an interval not
less than 4 s, the power supply shall be reapplied to the fiber
optic temperature sensor. Performance shall conform to
S55.10.
S58.11 Short Circuit-The fiber optic temperature sensor
shall be de-energized and the positive and negative electrical
output terminals of opto-electronics module shall be connected
directly together, with no load resistance. The fiber optic
F2362 - 03 (2009)
temperature sensor shall be energized for 5 min, then deener-
gized and the short circuit removed. The fiber optic tempera-
ture sensor shall be energized and the output signal measured
at ambient temperature. Performance shall conform to S55.11.
S58.12 Line Voltage Reversal (DC)-The positive 28 Vdc
power input shall be applied to connector pin "B" and the
reference shall be applied to connector pin "A." The power
supply shall be energized for a period of no less than 10 min.
The fiber optic temperature sensor output signal shall be
measured at ambient temperature. The fiber optic temperature
sensor shall be de-energized and the power supply connections
shall be reversed to normal polarity. The fiber optic tempera-
ture sensor shall then be energized for no less than 5 min before
the output signal is measured at ambient temperature. Perfor-
mance shaH conform to S55.12.
S58.13 Temperature-The fiber optic temperature sensor
shall be positioned in an environmental chamber in an ener-
gized state, and shall be subjected to the following conditions
consecutively:
( 1) Hold temperature at 0 2oe (32 3.6F) for 24 h,
(2) Increase temperature in steps of woe (18F) at 30 min
per step until 65 2oe (149 3.6F) is achieved,
(3) Hold temperature at 65 2oe (149 3.6F) for 24 h,
and
(4) Reduce temperature in steps of woe (18F) at 30 min
per step until 25 2oe (77 3.6F) is achieved.
Measure the fiber optic temperature sensor output signal at
one point during the last hour of operation at each temperature
plateau, that is 0, 25, and 65e (32, 77, and 149F). Perfor-
mance shall conform to S55.13.
S58.14 Enclosure-The fiber optic temperature sensor head
and no less than a two meter section of the attached cable
interconnect shall be mounted to a surface which extends no
less than 1 m (3.28 ft) beyond the sensor head on all sides so
that splashing shall be produced by directing the water stream
on that surface. The fiber optic temperature sensor shall be
de-energized throughout the test. The water stream shall be a
coarse spray with a flow rate of no less than 57 L (15 gal) per
second and a head pressure of no less than 3m (9.84 ft). Ahead
pressure of 3m (9.84 ft) is defined as sufficient water pressure
so that if directed straight up, the stream of water shall rise to
a height of no less than 3 m (9.84 ft). The distance from the
nozzle to the enclosure under test shall be approximately 2 m
(6.56 ft). The time of the test shall be no less than 5 min with
approximately equal portions of time for spray on each surface,
including joints of the enclosure and at the surface at which the
enclosed equipment is mounted. The fiber optic temperature
sensor components shall be examined at the immediate con-
clusion of the test for moisture penetration. The fiber optic
temperature sensor shall be energized and the output signal
monitored at ambient temperature at the conclusion the test.
S58.15 Salt Spray (Fog)-The fiber optic temperature sen-
sor head and no less than a 1 m (3.28 ft) section of the attached
cable interconnect shall be subjected to salt spray in accor-
dance with Test Method B 117. This test is not applicable to the
embedded sensor configuration since it will be secured in a
bearing. The fiber optic temperature sensor shall be de-
1685
energized throughout the test. Duration of the test shall be 96
h. The fiber optic temperature sensor components shall be
examined at the immediate conclusion of the test for corrosion
and moisture penetration. The fiber optic temperature sensor
shall be energized and the output signal monitored at ambient
temperature at the conclusion of the test. Performance shall
conform to S55.15.
S58.16 Over-temperature-The sensitive portion of the fi-
ber optic temperature sensor head shall be rapidly transferred
from ambient conditions to a temperature bath stabilized at 125
% of the fiber optic temperature sensor full scale temperature.
The sensor head shall remain immersed in the bath for 15 min
and then returned to ambient conditions. A reference measure-
ment (see S55.3) shall be performed at the conclusion of the
over-temperature test. Performance shall conform to S55.16.
S58.17 Accelerated Life-The sensitive portion of the sen-
sor head shall be thermally cycled between the following
temperatures for 1500 cycles at a rate not greater than 2 cycles
per minute:
Sensor Range Temperature Cycling Points
-40 to 150
2
C (-40 to 302
2
F) Ambient to -30 2C (-22 3.6F)
0 to 300
2
C (32 to 572
2
F) Ambient to 285 2oc (545 3.6F)
The fiber optic temperature sensor output signal shall be
monitored during thermal cycling and observed for operation
without interruption. A reference measurement (see S55.3)
shall be performed at the conclusion of the thermal cycling test.
S58.18 Vibration-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
be tested in accordance with MIL-STD-167-1, type 1. Test
fixtures shall be designed to simulate the shipboard installation
of the sensor type. The fiber optic temperature sensor output
signal shall be monitored throughout the test and visually
examined for operation without interruption, especially at
resonant frequencies. The fiber optic temperature sensor shall
be visually examined for physical damage during and at the
conclusion of the test. A reference measurement in accordance
with S55.3 shall be performed at the conclusion of the test.
S58.19 Shock-The fiber optic temperature sensor shall be
fully assembled, energized, and tested in accordance with
grade A, class 1, type A of MIL-S-901. Test fixtures shall be
designed to simulate the shipboard installation of the sensor
type. The fiber optic temperature sensor shall be visually
examined for physical damage after each hammer blow and at
the conclusion of the test. A reference measurement in accor-
dance with S55.3 shall be performed at the conclusion of the
test. Performance shall conform to S55.19.
S58.20 EM! Emission and Susceptibility-EM! tests shall
be in accordance with the test methods specified in MIL-STD-
461 revision E, or later. Performance shall conform to S55.20,
S58.21 Pressure- A reference measurement (see S55.3)
shall be performed prior to the test to ensure the sensor head is
not defective. The sensor head under test shall be installed in
fixture made from mild steel. The critical dimensions to which
the fixture shall conform are shown on Fig. Sl2.0. The 19.05
mm (0.75 in.) diameter counterbore shall contain Specification
B23 (grade 2) babbitt flush with the test fixture surface. The
babbitt surface shall then be exposed to a gauge pressure of
c4@f F2362 - 03 (2009)
~ - - A - - - ' i
FIG. S12.0 Pressure Test Fixture
12.411 :: 0.07 MPa (1800 :: 10 pounds per square inch) for
not less than 5 min. The fiber optic temperature sensor output
signal shall be monitored during the test and examined for
operation without interruption. The babbitt shall be removed
from the 19.05 mm (0.75 in.) counterbore and a reference
measurement (see S55.3) shall be performed. Performance
S59. Inspection
S59 .1 Classification of Inspections-The inspection require-
(a) Qualification testing, and
(b) Quality conformance testing.
S59.2 Qualification Testing-Qualification testing shall be
performed prior to production. Qualification testing shall be
performed on samples which have been produced with equip-
ment and procedures normally used in production. Qualifica-
tion testing shall consist of the examinations and tests in the
order specified in Table S21. Failure of any sensor to meet the
requirements of this specification shall be cause for rejection.
TABLE S21 Qualification
Examination and Tests Procedure
Group l: One sample required
General examination S59.4
Accuracy S55.1 S58.1
Repeatability S55.2 S58.2
Sensitivity S55.4 S58.4
Response time S55.5 S58.5
Warm-up time S55.6 S58.6
Steady-state voltage and S55.7 858.7
frequency
Transient voltage and S55.8 S58.8
frequency
Insulation resistance S55.9 S58.9
Power interruption 855.10 S58.10
Short circuit S55.11 S58.i1
Line voltage reversal (de) S55.12 S58.12
Temperature 855.13 S58.13
Enclosure S55.14 S58.14
Salt spray S55.15 S58.15
Over-temperature S55.16 S58.16
Accelerated life S55.17 S58.i7
Vibration S55.18 S58.18
Shock S55.19 S58.19
EMI S55.20 S58.20
Group II: One sample required
Pressure S55.21 S58.21
S59.2.1 Sample Size-Two fiber optic temperature sensors
of each lot shall be subjected to the qualification inspection. An
inspection lot shall consist of all sensors of the same classifi-
cation (see C4), produced under essentially the same
conditions, in the same facility from the same materials and
offered for delivery at the same time. One sample shall be
subjected to the tests of Group I. The two samples shall be
supplied with the length of cable required for the intended
application, but shall not be. less than 30.5 m (100 ft). The
Group II test requires an additional embedded sensor due to the
destructive nature of the test and shall only be accomplished
for acquisitions for embedded designs.
S59.3 Quality Conformance Testing-Each sensor in each
lot offered for delivery shall be subjected to the inspection
listed in Table S22 and shall be conducted in the order listed.
Failure of any sensor to meet the requirements of this specifi-
cation shall be cause for rejection.
TABLE S22 Quality Conformance Testing
Examination and Tests
General examination
Accuracy
Repeatability
Requirement
S55.1
855.2
855.9
Procedure
S59.4
S58.1
S58.2
S58.9
S59.4 General Examination-Each sensor shall be given a
thorough examination to determine conformance to the re-
quirements of this specification with respect to material, finish,
workmanship, construction, assembly, dimensions, weight and
marking of identification. Examination shall be limited to the
examinations that may be performed without disassembling the
units. Examination shall also include a check of all adjust-
ments. The manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that
materials used are manufactured, examined and tested in
accordance with the specifications and standards as applicable.
S59 .4.1 Cleaning and Surface Finishes-Surfaces of
castings, forgings, molded parts, stampings, machined and
welded parts shall be free of defects such as cracks, porosity,
undercuts, voids and gaps as well as sand, dirt, fins, sharp
edges, scale, flux, and other harmful or extraneous materials.
External surfaces shall be smooth and edges shall be either
rounded or beveled. There shall be no bum-through. There
shall be no warpage or dimensional change due to heat from
1686
F2362 - 03 (2009)
resulting from welding.
S59.5 Test Conditions-Unless otherwise specified herein,
the fiber optic temperature sensor(s) shall be fully assembled
and energized throughout the duration of each test procedure.
Except where the following factors are the variables, the tests
shall be conducted with the equipment under the following
operating environmental conditions:
(I) Ambient temperature shall be 25 : soc (77 : 9F), and
(2) Relative humidity shall be ambient.
S60. Certification
S61.1 Opto-electronics Module-Each opto-electronics
module shall be permanently and legibly marked in accordance
with the acquisition requirements. The following minimum
information shall be provided:
(I) Nomenclature,
Manufacturer's name and model number,
( 5) Temperature range,
( 6) Contract number, and
S61.2 Sensor Head-Each sensor head shall be permanently
and legibly marked in accordance with the acquisition require-
ments. The following minimum information shall be provided:
(1) Nomenclature,
( 3) National Stock Number (NSN) if available,
(4) Manufacturer's name and model number, and
S61.2.1 Embedded Sensor Head-In addition to the above,
the embedded sensor type shall use a removable metal tag
which attaches to the cable interface for identification marking.
The following notice shall be marked on the opposite side of
the tag:
NOTICE
Reattach this tag to the cable interface after bearing
insulation and keep affixed after the bearing is placed
in service.
S61.3 Warning Labels-A visible label shall be affixed to
the outside of the opto-electronics module cover and shall
contain the following:
WARNING
UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY
EMIT LASER RADIATION. DO NOT VIEW BEAM
WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS AND AVOID
DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
A visible label shall be affixed to the sensor head and the
inside of the opto-electronics module and shall contain the
following:
WARNING
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION. AVOID EXPOSURE
TO THE BEAM.
The labels shall be yellow lettering on a black background.
S62.1 Fiber optic temperature sensors shall be individually
packaged and marked in accordance with Section
S63.1 Warranty-Special warranty requirements shall be
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astrn.org/
COPYRIGHT/).
1687
a Designation: F2363/F2363M -12
'4ull7
INTERNATIONAL
Sewage and Graywater Flow Through Treatment Systems
1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation F2363/F2363M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
INTRODUCTION
Shipboard treatment of wastewater has evolved over the years from systems using maceration and
chlorination techniques to more advanced biological systems that are designed to treat a single
wastestream of sewage followed more recently by complex bio-reactor systems employing advanced
oxidation and high-powered UV systems that are designed to remove organic and inorganic materials
from a combined wastestream of sewage and graywater.
Advancements in treatment technologies have been fueled, in part, by shipping companies wanting
to adopt more environmentally friendly practices as well as by regulatory bodies imposing more
stringent standards on wastewater discharges from ships.
This standard is a consolidated source of sewage and graywater treatment system requirements that
combines international requirements in MARPOL Annex IV with requirements of other regulatory
bodies and overlays industry best practices.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture,
performance, operation, and testing of flow through treatment
systems intended to process sewage or graywater, or both,
generated during a ship's normal service. This specification is
intended for use by designers, manufacturers, purchasers, and
operators of shipboard environmental pollution control equip-
ment to determine the requirements for equipment design,
manufacture, purchase, and in-service operation.
1.2 The treatment system shall be capable of meeting the
effluent requirements detailed in Section 4 with respect to a
ship's operational area.
1.3 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard.
1
approved in 2004. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as F2363 - 06.
DOI:10.1520/F2363_F2363M-12.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength
A563 Specificati.on for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
B 165 Specification for Nickel-Copper AHoy (UNS N04400)
Seamless Pipe and Tube
D 1253 Test Method for Residua] Chlorine in Water
Ell Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test
Sieves
F906 Specification for Letters and Numerals for Ships
F993 Specification for Valve Locking Devices
F998 Specification for Centrifugal Pump, Shipboard Use
F1030 Practice for Selection of Valve Operators
Fl098 Specification for Envelope Dimensions for Butterfly
Va1ves-NPS 2 to 24
F1122 Specification for Quick Disconnect Couplings (6 in.
NPS and Smaller)
Fll55 Practice for Selection and Application of Piping
System Materials
Systems, Equipment, and Facilities
Fl298 Specification for Flexible, Expansion-Type Ball
2
the ASTM website.
1688
F2363/F2363M - 12
Joints for Marine Applications
F1323 Specification for Shipboard Incinerators
F1387 Specification for Performance of Piping and Tubing
Mechanically Attached Fittings
FlS 1() Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement
Pumps, Ships Use
F1511 Specification for Mechanical Seals for Shipboard
Pump Applications
F2044 Specification for Liquid Level Indicating Equipment,
Electrical
2.2 ASME Standards:
3
B 16.1 Gray iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings: Classes
25, 125, and 250
Bl6.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings: NPS
1
/2 through NPS
24 metric/inch standard
B 16.11 Forged fittings, socket-welding and threaded
Bl6.24 Cast copper alloy pipe flanges and flanged fittings:
Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
B 16.34 Valves flanged, threaded, and welding end
2.3 IMO Regulations:
4
MARPOL Annex IV Regulations for the prevention of
pollution by sewage from ships
MEPC.159(55) Guidelines on implementation of efiluent
standards and performance tests for sewage treatment
plants
2.4 ISO Standards:
5
ISO 5815-1 Water quality-Determination of biochemical
oxygen demand after n clays (BOD
11
)-Part 1: Dilution and
seeding method with allylthiourea addition
ISO 15705 Water quality-Determination of the chemical
oxygen demand index (ST-COD)-Small-scale sealed-tube
method
2.5 US Laws and Regulations:
6
33 CFR Part 159 Marine sanitation devices
33 CFR 159.301 Subpart E-Discharge of eft1uents in certain
Alaskan waters by cruise vessel operations
40 CFR Patt 136 Guidelines establishing test procedures for
the analysis of pollutants
2.6 Other Standards:
ANSI/ASSE 1001 Performance requirements for atmo-
spheric type vacuum breakers
5
ANSI/ ASSE 1013 Performance requirements for reduced
pressure principle backfiow preventers and reduced pres-
sure principle fire protection backflow preventers
5
ANSI/ISA 60079-1 Explosive atmospheres-Part 1: Equip-
ment protection by flameproof enclosures d
5
ANSI/ISA 60079-11 Explosive atmospheres-Part 1 1 :
ment protection by intrinsic safety i
5
3
www.asme.org.
4
Available from the International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embankment,
London SE1 7SR, United Kingdom, http://www.imo.org.
5
6
www.access.gpo.gov.
1689
ANSI/NEMA 250 Enclosures for electrical equipment ( 1000
Volts Maximum)
5
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 Motors and generators
5
DoD 4715.6-Rl Regulations on vessels owned or operated
by the Department of Defense
7
IEC 60079-1 Explosive atmospheres-Part 1: Equipment
protection by flameproof enclosures d
8
IEC 60079-11 Explosive atmospheres-Part 11: Equipment
protection by intrinsic safety /
8
lEC 60085 Electrical insulation-Thermal evaluation and
designation
8
IEC 60092-350 Electrical installations in ships-Part 350:
General construction and test methods of power, control,
and instrumentation cables for shipbomcl and offshore
" . R
appllcanons-
IEC 60092-353 Electrical installations in ships-Part 353:
Single and multicore non-radial field power cables with
extruded solid insulation for rated voltages 1 kV and 3
kV
8
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Cocle)
8
IEEE 1580 Recommended practice for marine cable for use
on shipboard and fixed or floating platforms
9
MIL-S-167 -1 Test method standard for mechanical vibra-
tions of shipboard equipment
10
MIL-S-901 Requirements for shock tests: High-impact ship-
board machinery, equipment, and systems
10
11
SNAME T &R Bulletin 3-37 Design guide for shipboard
airborne noise control
12
SM 4600-Cl Chlorine (residual)-Standarcl methods for the
examination of water and wastewater
13
UL 9131ntrinsically safe apparatus and associated apparatus
for use in class I, II, and III, division 1, hazardous
( classifi.ed) locations
14
UL 1203 Explosion-proof and dust-ignition-proof electrical
equipment for use in hazardous (classified) locations
14
UL 1309 Marine shipboard cables
14
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 blackwater-see sewage.
7
Available from the Under Secretary of Defense (AT&L), Department of
Defense, 3400 Defense Pentagon, Washington, DC 20301-3400, USA, http://
www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/corres/pub l.html.
8
Varembe, PO Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland, http://www.iec.ch.
9
445 Hoes Ln., Piscataway, NJ 08854, http://www.ieee.org.
10
Available from the Document Automation and Production Service, Depart-
ment of Defense, Bldg 4/D, 700 Robbins Ave, Philadelphia, PA 19111, USA,
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/
11
12
Available from the Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers, 601
Pavonia Ave, Jersey City, NJ 07306, USA, www.sname.org.
13
Available from American Public Health Association, 800 I St N.W.
Washington, DC 20001-3710, USA, www.standardmethods.org.
14
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 2600 N.W. Lake Rd., Camas
WA 98607-8542, http://www.ul.com.
0 F2363/F2363M - 12
3.1.2 chlorine, n-residual disinfectant or byproducts asso-
ciated with the use of chlorine or its compounds.
3.1.3 coliform, n-thermotolerant coliform bacteria which
produce gas from lactose in 48 hat 44.5C [112.1F].
3.1.4 cruise ship, n-ship, including submersible craft, car-
rying at least one passenger for hire for whom consideration is
contributed as a condition of carriage, whether directly or
indirectly flowing to the owner, charterer, operator, agent, or
any other person having an interest.
3.1.5 deleterious effect, n-cracking, softening,
deterioration, displacement, breakage, leakage, or damage of
components or materials that affects the operation or safety of
a treatment system.
3.1.6 dilution, n-process water added to the treatment
system.
3.1.7 discharge, n-spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring,
emitting, emptying, or dumping, however caused.
3.1.8 ejjluent, n-liquid containing sewage, graywater, or
other wastes, whether treated or untreated, flowing out of the
treatment system or holding tank usually to be discharged.
3.1.9 fiushwater, n-transport medium used to carry sewage
or other wastes from toilets or urinals to the treatment system.
3.1.10 geometric mean, n-the nth root of the product of n
numbers.
3.1.11 graywater, n-(1 ) drainage from galley sink and
dishwater drains; (2) drainage from laundry facilities; or (3)
drainage from bath, shower, and washbasin drains.
3 .1.12 holding tank, n-tank for collecting or storing of
sewage or graywater, whether treated or untreated, having
suitable design, construction, fittings, and coatings for the
intended purpose as designated by the certifying body.
3 .1.12.1 Discussion-The terms sludge tank, bioreactor
tank, collection tank, receiving tank, and flow equalization tank
are synonymous with holding tank, but for a different purpose.
3 .1.13 influent, n-liquid containing sewage, graywater, or
other wastes, whether treated or untreated, flowing into the
treatment system or holding tank.
3.1.14 international voyage, n-voyage from a port or place
in one country to a port or place outside such country, or
conversely.
3.1.15 operational, adj-(1) quality of performance or qual-
ity of effluent, a treatment system that continually processes,
treats, and discharges wastewater to the applicable treatment
standard, or is ready to do so following an individual use; (2)
functional area, a description of the ship's route, duration of
voyage, and distance from nearest land; (3) daily routine, a
schedule of events, meal times, and work hours for the ship's
crew.
3.1.16 passenger ship-see cruise ship.
3.1.17 process water, n-seawater or other liquid added to
the treatment process.
3.1.18 residual chlorine-see chlorine.
3 .1.19 retention tank, n-auxiliary tank, pressure vessel,
container, reservoir, or similar component for storing liquids,
solids, or gasses used or capable of being used during the
treatment process.
3.1.20 sewage, n-(1) drainage and other wastes from any
form of toilets and urinals; (2) drainage from medical premises
(for example, dispensary, sick bay, etc.) by means of wash
basins, wash tubs, and scuppers located in such premises; (3)
drainage from spaces containing living animals; or ( 4) other
wastewater when mixed with the drainages defined above.
3.1.21 ship, n-every description of watercraft, other than a
seaplane on the water, used or capable of being used as a means
of transportation in water.
3.1.21.1 Discussion-The terms ship and vessel are inter=
changeable and synonymous.
3.1.22 thermotolerant coliform-see coliform.
3.1.23 tonnage, n-a function of the moulded volume of
enclosed spaces on the ship, gross or net, as indicated on the
ship's international tonnage certificate.
3 .1.24 wastestream-see wastewater.
3.1.25 wastewater, n-liquid containing sewage, graywater,
or other similar wastes, including flushwater.
3.1.25.1 Discussion-Wastes do not include industrial
wastes, such as from fixed or floating platforms engaged in
exploration, exploitation, and associated offshore processing of
seabed mineral resources.
3.1.26 vessel-see ship.
4. Classification
NoTE 1-Concentration limit for solids is :::;10% of calculated TSS.
See J 1.14.1.
4.1 Type I marine sanitation device is a flow-through
sewage treatment system certified by the U.S. Coast Guard for
installation on a U.S. flagged vessel :Sl9.7 m [65 ft] in length
and designed to meet the requirements in 33 CFR Part 159.
This treatment system is typically a small device that is
designed to be used for processing, treating, and discharging
sewage "on demand" following each individual use. In the
United States, vessels are able to discharge through this device
while operating within three nautical miles (nm) of land,
except where otherwise prohibited.
4.2 Type II-A marine sanitation device is a flow-through
sewage treatment system certified by the U.S. Coast Guard for
installation on a U.S. flagged vessel of any length to meet the
Type Coliform, pH
CFU/100 mg/L
1)
II-A :S200 :S150
11-B siOO :S35 :S25 :S125 <500 6-8.5
11-C :S20 :S30 :S30 :S10 6-9
Ill
AAmounts presented in this table are for comparison purposes only. For detailed
requirements, consult the regulatory standard cited in 4.1 through 4.6, as
appropriate.
1690
F2363/F2363M - 12
requirements in 33 CFR Part 159. For U.S. flagged vessels that
engage in international voyages, Type II-A devices fitted with
holding tank for the temporary storage of treated sewage meet
the requirements of regulation 9 .1.2 of MARPOL Annex IV as
a sewage comminuting and disinfecting system. This treatment
system is typically a large device that is designed to be used for
processing, treating, and discharging sewage continuously
between individual uses. In the United States, vessels are able
to discharge through this device while operating within 3 nm of
land, except where otherwise prohibited. However, while
operating on an international voyage, such discharges are at a
distance of >3 nm from nearest land.
4.3 ll-B sewage treatment plant is a flow-through
treatment system of a type approved by the flag Administration
for installation on a ship engaged in international voyages of
400 gross tonnage (GT) and above, and ships of <400 GT
which are certified to carry >15 persons, to meet the require-
ments of regulation 9 .1.1 of MARPOL Annex IV as amended
by MEPC.159(55). This treatment system is typically a large
device that is designed to be used for processing, treating, and
discharging sewage or graywater, or both, continuously be-
tween individual uses. While on an international voyage,
vessels are able to discharge through this treatment system
while operating within 3 nm of land, except where otherwise
prohibited.
4.4 Type II-C advanced wastewater treatment system are
Type II-B sewage treatment plants that are designed to treat a
combined sewage and graywater influent to a more stringent
standard for installation on a cruise ship authorized to carry
2':500 passengers operating in certain Alaskan waters to meet
the requirements Subpart E to 33 CFR 159.301 et seq. Cruise
ships are able to discharge through this treatment system while
operating in certain Alaskan waters.
4.5 Type Ill-A marine sanitation device certified by the U.S.
Coast Guard for installation on a U.S. flagged vessel of any
length designed to prevent the overboard discharge of treated
or untreated sewage to meet the requirements in 33 CFR Part
159. Typically this holding tank is used solely for the storage
of wastewater (for example, sewage, graywater, flushwater) at
ambient air pressure and temperatures. In the United States,
vessels are able to discharge from a holding tank while
operating outside of 3 nm of land, except where otherwise
prohibited. However, while operating on an international
voyage, such discharges occur at a distance of > 12 nm from
nearest land and while the vessel is en route proceeding at 2':4
kts.
4.6 Type I/1-B sewage holding tank constructed to the
satisfaction of the flag Administration and having capacity for
the retention of all sewage, with visual means to indicate the
amount of its contents, taking into account the operation of the
ship, the number of persons on board, and other relevant
factors, to meet the requirements of regulation 9.1.3 of MAR-
POL Annex IV. Discharges are similar to Type III-A.
5.1 General:
1691
5 .1.1 Purchaser shall provide treatment system manufac-
turer with all pertinent acquisition requirements, including
items shown in 5.2.
5.2 Acquisition Requirements:
5.2.2 Type of treatment system (for example, Type II-B)
from Section 4.
5.2.3 Whether treatment system is designed to process or
retain sewage or graywater, or combined sewage and graywa-
ter.
5.2.4 Maximum number of persons, including non-crew
members.
5.2.5 Design Sizing Requirements:
5.2.5.1 Hydraulic loading for both graywater and sewage in
accordance with Table 2, including method of collection,
whether gravity or vacuum feed.
5.2.5.2 When specifying growth margin, it is important to
consider the potential for increases in the number of crew and
passengers over the life of the ship.
NoTE 2-If vacuum collection is used for graywater, then
generation rate is expected to be the same as for gravity
graywater.
5 .2.6 Organic loading for both graywater and sewage in
accordance with Table 3.
5.2.7 Thermal loading for both graywater and sewage influ-
ent temperature taking into account management of variations
in influent temperature.
5.2.7.1 Consideration should include the addition of a tem-
perature or flow equalization tank, or other means to adjust
temperature.
5.2.8 Treatment system start-up and stabilization periods.
5.2.9 Space, weight, and service restrictions, if any.
5.2.10 Doorway, hatch, and compartment dimensions, in-
cluding clearance restrictions for access to parts for service.
5.2.11 Operational profile of ship.
5.2.12 Additional control requirements.
5.2.13 Any additional requirements as required pur-
chaser to meet special needs.
5.2.14 Level of operator interfacing as determined by pur-
chaser consistent with ship operational and maintenance pro-
cedures.
5.2.15 Supplementary requirements, if any, from Section
17.
6.1 Material Deterioration, Prevention, and Control:
TABlE 2 Hydraulic loading Design Flow per Capita by Collection
Method
Collection Sewage, Graywater,
Method Uday Uday
[gal/day] [gal/day]
Gravity 23- 125 34- 189
[6- 33] [9- 50)
Vacuum,
with urinals 2.3-13 (see Note 2)
[0.6- 3.3)
without urinals 4.2-23 (see Note 2)
F2363/F2363M - 12
TABLE 3 Organic Loading Design Rate per Capita by Influent
Influent
Sewage
Graywater
TSS,
kg/day
[lb/day]
0.044 - 0.073
[0.096- 0.161]
0.033 - 0.061
[0.072- 0.134]
800
5
,
kg/day
[lb/day]
0.016-0.035
[0.036 - 0.078]
0.118-0.156
[0.259 - 0.343]
6.1.1 Treatment system shall be fabricated from compatible
materials, inherently corrosion resistant or treated to provide
protection against corrosion and deterioration for the service
life of the treatment system from the following:
6.1.1.1 Internal exposure to wastestreams, chemicals, and
other substances commonly found in treatment systems or as
part of the treatment process; and
6.1.1.2 External exposure to petroleum products, cleaning
compounds, and other substances commonly used on ships in
the compartment where a treatment system will be installed.
6.1.2 A listing of common substances that a treatment
system may be exposed to is provided in Table 4.
6.1.3 Manufacturer should develop a list of specific sub-
stances considered in the design of a particular treatment
system.
6.1.4 Dissimilar metals shall not be used in intimate contact
with each other unless protected against galvanic corrosion.
6.1.5 Treatment system shall not be damaged nor shall
subsequent operational performance be degraded:
6.1.5 .1 As a result of exposure to salt fog in accordance with
ASTM Practice B 117; and
6.1.5.2 When in a non-operating state, such as when secured
for winter layup.
6.1.6 Components, such as valves, fittings, pumps, and
motors shall be of corrosion resistant material suitable for the
intended service and shall be standard items such as those
complying with ASME B 16.34, Practice F 1030 and Specifica-
tions A307, A563, F992, F993, F998, F1098, Fll22, F1298,
F1387, F1510, and FJ511, which are easy to maintain and
replace.
6.1.7 Component design shall be compatible with treatment
system materials.
TABLE 4 Common Substances by Exposure TypeA
Substance
Sewage, graywater, flushwater
incl intermediate process fluids, vapors
Toilet bowl cleaners, pipe scale
prevention chemicals
incl bleach, citric acid tablets, acid-
based & biological substances
Disinfectants
incl solid, liquid or gas, in quantity
specified by manufacturer
Fuel oils or other fuels
incl diesel fuel, marine fuel oil
Lubricating oils
incl synthetic & petroleum-based oils
Cleaning agents
incl mineral spirits, methyl alcohol,
petroleum-based solvents
lnternal
8
X
X
X
ASubstance list may vary by treatment system type, ship type, etc.
s.'X" indicates the listed substance is common.
External
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
6.1.8 Metallic holding and retention tanks shall be provided
with cathodic protection, or by insulation of the galvanic
coupling, to minimize corrosion due to galvanic reactions.
6.1.9 Fasteners shall be of corrosion resistant material.
6.2 Design for Human Interface and Safety:
6.2.1 Practice FJ 166 shall be used for the design,
construction, and layout of the treatment system, controls,
displays, equipment, and labels.
6.2.1.1 Warning and operating labels shall be affixed to
treatment system where necessary in accordance with Practice
F1166.
6.2.2 All rotating or moving parts with the potential to cause
injury shall be guarded to avoid accidental contact.
6.2.3 Equipment requiring routine maintenance shall be
easily accessible.
6.3 Features:
6.3.1 Vents-Vents shall be designed and constructed to
minimize clogging by either contents of holding and retention
tanks or climatic conditions such as snow or ice.
6.3.2 Ba.ffles-Baffles in holding and retention tanks, if any,
shaH have openings to allow contents to flow freely across the
top and bottom of the tank.
6.3.3 Level Indicator-Holding and retention tanks, if any,
shall have a means of indicating tank level that complies with
Specification F2044.
6.3.4 Chemical Level Indicator-If the treatment system
uses one or more chemicals for its effective operation, then the
system shall be fitted with one of the following:
6.3.4.1 means of indicating the amount of the chemical in
the retention and holding tanks; or
6.3.4.2 Means of indicating when chemicals need to be
added to the retention and holding tanks for the proper
continued operation of the treatment system.
6.3.5 Independent Support-Treatment system shall have
provisions for support that are independent from connecting
pipes.
6.3.5.1 Piping shall not be used to support the treatment
system or its major components.
6.3.6 Backjlow Prevention-Treatment system shall be pro-
tected from backflow of wastewater through supply and
discharge piping.
6.3.6.1 Manufacturer may specify in the installation instruc-
tions backflow prevention requirements as part of ship's
piping.
6.3.6.2 Where pressurized backftow is not possible, atmo-
spheric type vacuum breaker conforming to ANSI/ ASSE 1001
shall be used.
6.3.6.3 Treatment system using ship supplied potable water
shall be fitted with a reduced pressure principle sanitary
backftow preventer conforming to ANSI/ASSE 1013 in order
to protect the ship's potable water from cross-contamination.
6.3.7 Sampling ports-Treatment system shall provide for
manually collecting representative samples of influent and
effluent without opening tanks, voids, or vents.
1692
6.3.7.1 Ports shall be located in: (1) influent line, or receiv-
ing and collection tank, for sampling influent; and (2) effluent
line immediately downstream of treatment system for sampling
effluent.
cO F2363/F2363M - 12
6.3.7.2 Manufacturer may specify in installation instruc-
tions additional sampling port requirements as part of ship
piping.
6.3.7.3 If a sludge collection tank or discharge line is
included in the treatment system design, then a sampling port
is required.
6.3.7.4 For biological treatment systems, provisions shall be
made on the bioreactor tank for assessing the condition of the
biomass.
6.3.8 Removal Fittings-Standard discharge fittings, if pro-
vided with treatment system, shall be in accordance with Table
5.
6.3.8.1 Flange in Table 5 is designed to accept pipes up to a
maximum internal diameter of 100 mm [3.9 in] and shall be of
steel or other equivalent material having a flat face. This flange,
together with a gasket, shall be suitable for a service pressure
of 6 kg/cm
2
[85.3 psi].
6.3.8.2 For ships having a molded depths 5 m [16.4 ft], the
inner diameter of the discharge connection may be 38 mm [ 1.5
in.].
6.3.8.3 For ships in dedicated trades, that is, passenger
ferries, alternatively the ship discharge pipeline may be fitted
with a discharge connection which can be accepted by the flag
Administration, such as quick connection couplings.
6.4 Piping:
6.4.1 Piping shall be compatible with treatment system
materials.
6.4.2 Piping selection and application shall be in accordance
with Practice F1155.
6.4.3 Pipe bends, if any, shall have minimum 3:1 bend
radius to diameter.
6.4.4 Inlet and outlet connections shall be in accordance
with ASME Bl6.1, B16.5, or B16.11, or ASME B16.24 or
equivalent ISO or DIN standards.
6.4.5 Piping shall be clamped to prevent damage or unin-
tended discharge due to stress or vibration.
6.4.6 If copper-nickel alloy piping is used, then it shall meet
the requirements in Specification B 165.
6.4.7 If alternate materials are used other than those listed in
Practice F1155, then the manufacturer shall obtain buyer
approval for use.
6.5 Electrical:
6.5.1 Components and installation:
TABLE 5 Standard Dimensions for Flanges for Discharge
Connections
Description
Outside diameter
Inner diameter
Bolt circle diameter
Slots in flange
Flange thickness
Bolts and nuts,
quantity and diameter
Dimension
210 mm [8.3 in.]
According to pipe outside diameter
170 mm [6.7 in.]
4 holes 18 mm [0.7 in.] in diameter
equidistantly placed;
on a bolt circle of the above diameter, slotted
to the flange
periphery. The slot width to be 18 mm [0.7
in.]
16 mm [0.6 in.]
4, each of 16 mm [0.6 in.] in diameter and of
suitable length
1693
6.5.1.1 Interior electrical equipment and enclosures for
treatment system used in a machinery space, a location
normally exposed to splashing, or another space with similar
moisture levels shall be at least IEC 60529 IP 44 or an
appropriate ANSIINEMA 250 Type for the intended service.
6.5.1.2 Exterior electrical equipment and enclosures for
treatment system exposed to weather, water washdown, or
similar moisture conditions shall be at least IEC 60529 IP 65 or
ANSI/NEMA 250 Type 4 or Type 4X.
6.5.1.3 Electrical equipment and installations shall be suit-
able for roll, pitch, and vibration of a ship while underway.
6.5.1.4 Electrical equipment for treatment system, including
switches, fuses, lamp holders, etc., shall be suitable for the
voltage and current utilized.
6.5.1.5 Electrical equipment and circuits for treatment sys--
tem shall be clearly marked and identified on wiring diagram in
15.3.1.4 and 15.5.1.14.
6.5.1.6 Any cabinet, panel, box, or other enclosure contain-
ing more than one source of power shall be fitted with a sign
warning persons of this condition and identifying the circuits to
be disconnected.
6.5.1.7 Electrical equipment exposed to corrosive environ-
ments shall be corrosion resistant and of suitable construction.
equipment.
6.5.2 Control systems and conductors:
6.5.2.1 Wiring for treatment system shall be rated for the
maximum operating temperature to which it has the potential to
be exposed.
6.5.2.2 All control wiring between components shall have
stranded copper conductors of ?:No. 18 AWG or shall have
stranded copper conductors with a current-carrying capacity of
?::125% of the expected current. Communications and radio
frequency (RF) cables, such as USB, ribbon, coaxial, telephone
twisted-pairs, Ethernet, or similar cables do not have to meet
this requirement.
6.5.2.3 Internal wiring of cabinets or enclosures shall be of
NEC or equivalent type insulated wires suitable for at least dry
and damp locations.
6.5 .2.4 Internal wiring within enclosure or cabinet shall
terminate on terminal blocks when connection to external
wiring is necessary.
6.5.2.5 When individual insulated wires are used, rather
than cable, outside cabinets or enclosures on systems of >50 V,
wires shall be in conduit.
6.5.2.6 Cables shall be secured with metallic band strappin11
such that they remain tight without damage to armor
insulation.
6.5.2.7 Metallic band strapping used for cable support shal
be fabricated from steel and corrosion treated if not of
corrosion-resistant material.
6.5.2.8 Cable supports for all horizontal runs shall preven
undue sag.
6.5.2.9 Cable retention devices shall be installed on vertica
and horizontal runs, as applicable.
F2363/F2363M -12
6.5 .2.1 0 Power cables and external control cables shall meet
construction and testing standards of IEEE 1580, UL 1309,
IEC 60092-350, or IEC 60092-353 with amendment 1.
6.5.2.11 When a Type metal-clad (MC) cable is used it shall
be a continuous corrugated metal-clad cable.
6.5.2.12 Portable cables or flexible cords may be used for
external connections of moving parts or where frequent inter-
change or disconnection is necessary due to calibration or
maintenance of field connected devices.
6.5.2.13 Overcurrent protection shall be in accordance with
6.5.2.14 Electlical equipment in spaces containing machin-
ery powered by, or fuel tanks containing, gasoline or other
fuels having a flashpoint of ~ 4 3 3 C [ll0F] shall be
explosion-proof or ignition-protected or be part of an intrinsi-
cally safe system.
6.5.3 Motors:
6.5.3.1 Motors shall be rated to operate at 50.0C [122F]
ambient air temperature, unless it can be shown that a 40.0C
[104F] or 45.0C [l13F] ambient temperature will not be
exceeded.
6.5.3.2 Motors shall be constructed with a minimum of
Class F insulation in accordance with IEC 60085 or ANSI/
NEMAMG 1.
6.5.3.3 Motors exposed to splashing or spraying oil or water
shall be at least IEC 60529 IP 44 or an equivalent ANSI/
NEMA 250 type for the service intended.
6.5.3.4 Motors shall be provided with a corrosion resistant
nameplate specifying: (1) manufacture's name; (2) rated horse-
power; (3 ) rated voltage and full-load current; ( 4) rated
frequency and number of phases; (5) rated RPM; (6) rated
temperature; (7) the Code letter; and (8) thermal protection, if
used. For IEC motors, manufacturer shall certify the rated
temperature by signed letter or other equivalent means.
6.5.3.5 Motor branch circuits, motor feeder conductors and
their protection, motor overload protection, motor control
circuits, motor controllers, and motor control centers shall be in
accordance with Article 430 of NFPA 70 or equivalent standard
as determined by the certifying body.
6.5.3.6 Motor controllers shall have a power rating in
accordance with Part IV of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or
6.5.3.7 Motors shall be provided with motor running pro-
tection in accordance with Part IV of Article 430 of NFPA 70
or equivalent standard as determined by the certifying body.
6.5.3.8 Thermal protection of the motor shall be in accor-
dance with Part III of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or equivalent
6.5.3.9 Conductors of a motor remote control, interlock, and
indicator circuits shall be protected against overcuiTent in
accordance with Part VI of Article 430 of NFPA 70 or
6.5.3.10 Motors shall be provided with terminal leads or
terminal screws in terminal boxes integral with or secured to
the motor frame.
6.5.3.11 Motor terminal housing shall be in accordance with
6.5.4 Pumps:
6.5.4.1 Pumps, if fitted to a treatment system, shall be in
accordance with Specifications F998 or F 1510 or equivalent
6.5.4.2 Positive displacement pumps, if any, shall have a
relief valve to direct flow back to the tank from which the
pump takes suction. Piping to pump inlet is prohibited.
6.5.4.3 Positive displacement pumps having rubber stators
shall be fitted with run dry protection.
6.6 Hazardous locations:
6.6.1 Components to be installed in hazardous location shall
be certified as being:
6.6.1.1 Intrinsically safe in accordance with UL 913, ANSI/
ISA 60079-11, or IEC 60079-11;
6.6.1.2 Explosion proof in accordance with UL 1203, ANSI/
ISA 60079-1, or IEC 60079-1 for Class I, Group D hazardous
locations; or
6.6.1.3 Other equivalent standards as determined by the
certifying body.
6.7 Power Interruption:
6.7.1 Treatment system control and motor control circuit
shall provide low voltage release (LVR) feature to ensure
automatic restarting of the system and system motor occurs
after a momentary loss of power duling operation.
6.8 Accessibility:
6.8.1 Treatment system shall be constructed and arranged so
that major system assemblies, attachments, and any non-hull
integrated holding or retention tanks are accessible for
maintenance, repair, or replacement without requiling removal
of major assemblies or attachments.
6.8.2 Access to any filter membranes, electrodes, or other
treatment system components that require scheduled
maintenance, repair, or replacement shall be provided without
the need to remove major system components.
6.9 Dilution:
6.9.1 Dilution shall not be a substitute for the treatment
process.
7.1 General:
7 .1. J Treatment system shall process or retain sewage or
graywater, or combined sewage and graywater, in the manner
for which it is designed and shall be tested in accordance with
the procedures in Section 1 J to verify it meets the perfonnance
requirements in this section and the required treatment stan-
dards in Section 4.
7.1.2 Exceptions-Type III-A and Type III-B holding tanks
only retain and do not process wastewater therefore are not
subject to wastewater processing or operational tilt
mance requirements in this section or test procedures in
Section 11.
7.2 Temperature and Humidity:
1694
0 F2363/F2363M - 12
7 .2.1 Treatment system, while empty and in a non-operating
state, shall be capable of withstanding without any deleterious
effect conditions of:
7. 2.1.1 Ambient air pressure;
7.2.1.2 Ambient temperature from 5,0 to 50.0C [41 to
122F]; and
7 .2.1.3 Relative humidity from 5 to 95 % non-condensing.
7 .2.2 Treatment system shall be capable of operating and
processing water under conditions of:
7 .2.2.1 Ambient air pressure;
7.2.2.2 Ambient temperature from 5.0 to 50.0C [41 to
122F];
7 .2.2.3 Relative humidity from 5 to 95 % non-condensing;
and
7 .2.2.4 Either: (1) a controlled range of influent temperature
as specified by manufacturer and accepted by the certifying
body; or for systems that do not control for potential
variations in influent temperature, an influent temperature
range varying from 2 to 40C [35.6 to 104.0F].
7.2.3 Refer to test procedures in 11.2 and 11.9.
7.3 Salt Fog:
7.3.1 Treatment system shall withstand without any delete-
rious effect exposure to salt fog mist for 48 h in accordance
with 1 1.3.
7.4 Vibration:
7 .4.1 Treatment system shall withstand without any delete-
rious effect sinusoidal vibration for a period of 2 h at the
resonant frequency of the system or at 30 Hz with an
acceleration of 0.7 g [22.5 ft/s
2
] in accordance with 11.4.
7.5 Shock:
rious effect vertical shocks ten times the force of gravity ( 10 g)
[98.07 m/s
2
, 321.7 ft/s
2
] in accordance with 11
7.6 Rolling:
rious effect rolling to 15 on any side of the vertical plane
during 80 % of the test in 11.6 and to 22.5 or the maximum
angle specified by the manufacturer, whichever is greater, for
20% of the test in l 1.6.
7 .6.2 Treatment system shall be fabricated to prevent unin-
tentional escape of gases and liquids under rolling conditions.
7.7 Hydrostatic Integrity:
7. 7.1 Holding and retention tanks, if any, designed to
operate under pressure shall be capable of withstanding a
pressure head of 2.13 m [7 ft] or 150% of the maximum
pressure by the manufacturer, whichever is greater, in
accordance with 11.7.
7.8 Chemical Resistance:
7 .8.1 Materials used in fabrication of treatment system shall
be compatible, with no evidence of deleterious effect, for both
internal and external exposure over the service life of the
treatment system, to common substances listed in Table 4, or to
specific substances identified by treatment system manufac-
turer.
7 .8.2 Test facility shall examine the bill of materials pro-
vided by treatment system manufacturer for compatibility in
accordance with 7 .8.1. Any material that, in the view of the test
facility, may not be compatible shall be tested in accordance
with 11.8.
7.9 Wastewater Processing:
7.9.1 Treatment system, except Type III holding tank, shall
be capable of processing sewage or graywater, or both, in
accordance with 11.10 through 11.18.
7.10 Tilt or List:
7.10.1 Treatment system, except Type III holding tank, shall
be capable of processing sewage or graywater, or both while
operating under conditions of tilt or list at an angle 22.SO or the
maximum angle specified by the manufacturer, whichever is
greater, in accordance with 11.19.
7.11 Discharged Vapor and Gas:
7.11. 1 Treatment system shall be capable of vented to
the atmosphere or provided with a means to prevent an
explosion or over-pressurization as a result of an accumulation
of gases.
7 .11.2 Treatment system vents shall be designed and con-
structed to minimize clogging caused by tank contents,
seawater, or other similar conditions.
7.12 Control and Operation:
7 .12.1 Treatment system shall be fully automatic and shall
be fitted with a control system that automatically performs the
following functions:
7 .12.1.1 Monitors and controls operation;
7.12.1.2 Activates alarms;
7 .12.1.3 Acquires system data;
7.12.1.4 Provides visual display of system data; and
7 .12.1.5 Precludes operation that are harmful to the crew.
7.12.2 Control system shall interface with ship control
system to provide remote monitoring and condition assess-
ment.
7 .12.3 Treatment system shall have visual and audible
alarms to alert the crew of escaping vapors, gases, or liquids.
7 .12.4 In the event of failure, treatment system machinery,
sub-systems, equipment, and fixtures shall automatically fail to
a safe mode.
7.13 Accessibility:
7 .13.1 Treatment system shall be accessible for
maintenance, repair, or replacement, without requiring removal
of major assemblies or attachments, including for access to any
filter membranes, electrodes, or other treatment system com-
ponents.
1695
8.1 General:
8.1.1 For each discrete model number of treatment system
to be tested, manufacturer shall provide test facility:
8.1.1.1 one production-quality treatment system; and
8.1.1.2 samples of each material from which the treatment
system is constructed, as required by
8.2 Equivalency:
8.2.1 Alternative testing procedures equivalent to the re-
quirements in Section 12 may be considered for approval on a
case-by-case basis by the certifying body when a treatment
F2363/F2363M -12
system is not able to be tested due to size (for example, very
large or very small) or other unique design factors.
8.2.2 See 11.1.3 for alternatives to temperature, humidity,
salt fog, vibration, shock, and rolling.
8.2.3 Approved alternative procedures, if any, shall be
clearly documented in the treatment system certification.
8.3 Scaling:
8.3.1 Only full-scale treatment systems should be accepted
for testing purposes.
8.3.2 Certifying body may certify a defined range of manu-
facturer's equipment sizes based on results from actual testing
performed on a production-quality treatment system employ-
ing the same marine engineering design principles and treat-
ment technology, but due consideration shall be given to
limitations on performance which might arise from scaling up
or scaling down.
8.4 Retesting:
8.4.1 Testing facility may retest in cases where a material or
treatment system fails to pass a specification, provided any
such retest is performed in accordance with Section 11 and in
the prescribed order of the test procedures.
8.4.2 Retesting shall be performed in accordance with
Section 11 following any changes or improvements to a
material or treatment system.
8.4.3 Test report shall include failed test results and
subsequent changes made to the treatment system or test
conditions, if any.
TEST METHODS
9. Scope
9.1 This test method uses performance-based quantitative
procedures for evaluation, inspection, and testing of sewage or
graywater flow through treatment systems.
9.2 After being evaluated for design and loading in Section
5, and then inspected for materials and manufacture in Section
6, treatment system is then subjected to series of performance
tests in Sections 7 and 11 that are designed to simulate
installation on board a ship.
9.3 Environmental tests (for example, shock, vibration, etc.)
are followed by wastewater processing tests for treatment
systems that process sewage or graywater, or both, where
samples of effluent are collected and analyzed to determine the
composition and quality meets the requirements in Section 4.
10. Hazards
10.1 Safety:
1 0.1.1 Treatment system shall present no uncontrolled
safety or health hazard to operating or maintenance personnel
during operation or when secured.
10.1.2 Treatment system shall safely hold and transfer all
malodors, gases, smoke, and toxic substances, including col-
lected wastewater, minimizing risk of contamination or expo-
sure to operating or maintenance personnel.
10.1.3 Leaks shall be minimized using overflow alarms
intra-system, drain funnels under sampling points, and self-
closing valves at the sampling points.
10.1.4 Any fluid transfer subsystem shall prevent splatter,
spillage, or other loss of liquids from any treatment system
component during operation or when secured.
1 0.1.5 Treatment system shall remain safe and sanitary, and
shall not create dangerous or unsanitary conditions during
normal operation.
10.1.6 There shall be no sewage, graywater, or treatment
chemicals remaining on surfaces or in crevices that could come
in contact with a person using or servicing the treatment system
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10.2 Safety Concerns:
1 0.2.1 Design of treatment system shall minimize potential
for human error during operation and maintenance under
routine, non-routine; and emergency conditions.
10.2.2 Each treatment system shall:
10.2.2.1 Be free of design defects: (1) having rough or sharp
edges with potential to cause bodily injuries; or (2) that will
allow toxic substances to escape into the interior of the ship
with the potential to be a hazard to humans;
10.2.2.2 Be vented to the atmosphere or provided with a
means to prevent an explosion or over pressurization as a result
of an accumulation of gases;
10.2.2.3 Include warnings for: (1) toxic, hazardous,
flammable, explosive, or malodorous vapors produced by the
treatment system to not be vented or allowed to escape into any
shipboard space; (2) any vapors that are produced to be
removed, diluted with air, or otherwise rendered safe before
being discharged to the vent; (3) hazardous vapors produced by
any loss of aeration to a bioreactor; and ( 4) any vapor or
gaseous discharges from the treatment system to be compatible
with ventilation exhaust system to prevent deleterious effect;
and
10.2.2.4 Meet all other safety requirements applicable to the
type of vessel for which it will be installed.
1696
10.3 Chemical Hazards:
10.3.1 Manual handling of hazardous materials by users
shall be limited as far as possible.
10.3.2 Chemicals designated as hazardous materials pro-
vided by the manufacturer for use in operation of the treatment
system shall be labeled as required by applicable regulations
and shall have corresponding material safety data sheets
provided to the purchaser.
10.3.3 If chlorine is used to disinfect the wastestream, a
means to detect chlorine gas shall be provided in the operating
space for safety of crew and other persons.
10.3.4 Warning labels shall be affixed to the treatment
system indicating that wastewater and biosludge are infectious
and may be harmful to human health.
11. Procedure
11.1 General:
11.1.1 Initial Setup-Treatment system shall be:
11.1.1.1 The same treatment system used for all tests of this
section;
11.1.1.2 Set up in a manner simulating installation on a ship
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in particular
with respect to mounting, water supply, and discharge fittings;
and
cO F2363/F2363M - 12
11.1.1.3 Tested in the order given below for each test
procedure.
11.1.2 Objectives-Treatment system shall:
11.1.2.1 Meet performance requirements in Section 7 as
well as materials and manufacture in Section 6;
11.1.2.2 Meet operational constraints and environmental
requirements of this section, without deleterious effect; and
11.1.2.3 Remain operational following temperature and hu-
midity operating test in 11.9.
11.1.3 Alternatives-Treatment systems of large size or
mass, which exceed capacity of the test equipment used for
11.2 through 11.6 (temperature, humidity, salt fog, vibration,
shock, rolling) shall instead undergo the following:
11.1.3.1 Control and sensor components shall be discretely
tested in accordance with 12.2 through 12.5; and
11.1.3.2 Structural analysis shall be performed on holding
and retention tanks, pressure vessels, and other similar
components, which are part of the treatment system, using deep
tank design criteria and assuming: (1) loads imposed on the
treatment system by a roll with a 4 s period; (2 ) axis of rotation
in the plane of the base of the treatment system offset 121.9 em
[4ft] from centerline; and (3) variables listed in 11.2 through
11.6.
11.2 Temperature and Humidity Non-operating Test:
11.2.1 Treatment system shall be empty, in a non-operating
state, for a period of 2:2 h each under conditions of:
11.2.1.1 Low temperature held at 5.0 : 2C [41 : 3.6F] in
an atmosphere with a relative humidity of 5 %; and
11.2.1.2 high temperature held at 50.0 : 2C [122 : 3.6F]
in an atmosphere with a relative humidity of 95 %.
11.3 Salt Fog Test:
11.3.1 Treatment system shall be empty, in a non-operating
state, and continuously exposed to salt spray in accordance
with Practice B 117 for 48 hat a temperature of 35.0C [95.0F]
followed by drying period of 48 h.
11.3.2 At the end of the test period, treatment system shall
be switched on and operate using water for 1 h with no
evidence of deleterious effect.
11.4 Vibration Test:
11.4.1 Search shall be made for resonance over the follow-
ing range of frequencies and amplitudes of acceleration:
11.4.1.1 From 2 to 13.2 Hz with an amplitude of : 1 mm
[0.04 in.]; and
11.4.1.2 From 13.2 to 80Hz with an acceleration of 0.7 g
[22.5 ft/s
2
].
11.4.2 This search shall be made in each of the 3 planes at
a rate sufficiently low to permit detection of resonance.
11.4.3 Treatment system shall be vibrated in the planes at
each major resonant frequency for a period of 2 hours.
11.4.4 For treatment systems fitted with holding or retention
tanks, vibration test shall be performed at 50 % volume using
water.
11.4.5 If there is no resonant frequency, treatment system
shall be vibrated in each of the planes at 30 Hz with an
acceleration of 0.7 g [22.5 ft/s
2
] for a period of 2 hours.
1697
11.4.6 After completion of the test, a search shall again be
made for resonance and there should be no significant change
in the vibration pattern.
11.5 Shock Test:
11.5.1 Treatment system shall be subjected to 1000 vertical
shocks:
11.5.1.1 That are 98.07 m/s
2
[10 g, 321.7 ft/s
2
]; and
11.5.1.2 Have a duration of 20 to 25 ms measured at the
base of the half-sine shock envelope.
tanks, shock test shall be performed at 50 % volume using
water.
11.6 Rolling Test:
11.6.1 Treatment system shall be subjected to 100 cycles of
motion with axis of rotation 121.92 em [4ft] from centerline of
treatment system, :S15.24 em [6 in.] below the plane of the
bottom of the treatment system, and parallel to any tank baffles
as follows:
11.6.1.1 80% of cycles shall be 15 on either side of the
vertical at a cyclic rate of 3 to 4 seconds.
11.6.1.2 20 % of cycles shall be 22.5, or the maximum
angle specified by the manufacturer, whichever is greater, on
either side of the vertical at a cyclic rate of 6 to 8 seconds.
11.6.2 Treatment system shall then be rotated 90 on its
vertical axis and subjected to another 100 cycles of motion as
above.
tanks, rolling test shall be performed at 50 % volume and
repeated at 100 % volume using water.
11.7 Hydrostatic Test:
11.7 .1 Any holding or retention tanks designed to operate
under pressure shall be capable of holding hydrostatic pressure
for 1 h with no evidence of leaking at the greater of:
11.7 .1.1 Pressure head of 2.13 m [7 ft]; or
11.7.1.2 150% of maximum pressure specified by manufac-
turer for operation of tanks.
11.8 Chemical Resistance Test:
11.8.1 To test for compatibility in accordance with 7.8.2,
sample of material shall be partially submerged in the sub-
stance for 100 h at temperature of 22C [71.6F] and then
visually examined for any signs of deleterious effects.
11.9 Temperature and Humidity Operating Test:
11.9.1 Treatment system shall operate and process water at
median flow rates for a period of 2::2 h each at:
11.9.1.1 Ambient temperature of 5.0 : 2C [41 : 3.6F),
relative humidity of 5 %, and inlet operating fluid temperature
varying at a rate of :S3C/min [5F/min] from either: (1)
lowest to highest temperature as specified by manufacturer; or
(2) from 2 to 40C [35.6 to 104.0F]; and
11.9 .1.2 Ambient temperature of 50.0 : 2C [ 122 : 3.6F].
relative humidity of 95 %, and inlet operating fluid temperature
varying at a rate of :S3C/min [5F/min] from either: (1)
lowest to highest temperature as specified by manufacturer; 01
(2) from 2 to 40C [35.6 to 104.0F].
11.10 Raw Influent Quality:
F2363/F2363M -12
11.10.1 Raw influent quality during wastewater processing
tests for treatment systems that process sewage and graywater
shall be composed of:
11.10.1.1 Fresh, domestic sewage, and graywater;
11.1 0.1.2 Primary sludge added, as necessary, for the num-
ber of persons and hydraulic loading in Table 2 for which
treatment system will be certified, having a TSS concentration
2:500 mg/L for each sample collected.
11.11 Sampling Test Plan:
11.11.1 Sampling test period for treatment systems that
process sewage and graywater shall be carried out in accor-
dance with Table 6.
11.11.2 Influent and effluent samples of wastewater shall be
taken on each test day during the test period.
11.11.2.1 A minimum of 40 influent and effluent samples
shall be collected to allow a statistical analysis of the testing
data (for example, geometric mean, maximum, minimum, and
variance).
11.11.2.2 Influent and effluent samples shall be collected at
the same time and in sufficient quantity to perform all required
tests (that is, coliform, total suspended solids, biochemical
oxygen demand, chemical oxygen demand, and pH).
11.11.2.3 Sampling frequency shall be in accordance with
Fig. 1.
11.11.2.4 Minimum loading represents that generated by a
minimum number of persons on a ship (for example, when
alongside, in port) and average and maximum loadings repre-
sents those generated by an average and maximum number of
persons, respectively, on a ship (for example, underway, at sea)
taking into account meal times and watch rotations.
11.12 Wastewater Processing Test:
11.12.1 Operations and Maintenance During Testing-
Treatment systems that process sewage or graywater, or both,
shall be operated and maintained during the wastewater pro-
cessing test period in accordance with the manufacturer's
operations and maintenance manuals in 17.5.
11.12.2 Stabilization Period-After any initial start-up time
specified by the manufacturer, treatment system shall be
stabilized before the test period begins as follows:
11.12.2.1 Biological systems 2:14 days.
11.12.2.2 Physical/chemical systems 2:7 days.
11.12.2.3 Advanced oxidation systems 2:3 days.
11.12.3 During the stabilization period in 11.12.2, raw
influent shall be used having a quality specified in 11.10 under
average loading conditions in Fig. l.
11.13 Coliform Test:
11.13.1 Type I Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
coliform in samples of effluent taken during the test period
shall be ::;1000 coliform/100 mL using standard methods in 40
CFR Part 136.
TABLE 6 Sampling Period by Process Method
Treatment System
Process Method
On demand,
following each individual use
Continuously
Test Period
2:10 days, in
a 20-day period
2:10 consecutive days
11.13.2 Type II-A Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
shall be ::;200 coliform/100 mL using standard methods in 40
CFR Part 136.
11.13.3 Type li-B Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
shall be ::;100 coliform/100 mL using:
11.13. 3.1 Membrane filter;
11.13.3.2 Multiple tube fermentation; or
11.13.3.3 Equivalent analytical procedure as accepted by
the certifying body.
11.13.4 Type II-C Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
shall be ::;20 coliform/100 mL using one of the methods
specified for Type II-B treatment systems in 11.13.3.
11.14 Total Suspended Solids Test:
11.14.1 Type I Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
concentration of solids in samples of effluent taken during test
period shall be ::;10% of the calculated TSS for the same
period, as follows:
11.14.1.1 By expeditiously passing 1 L of effluent through
sieve No. 12, as specified by ASTM Specification Ell, and
then drying the retained material in an oven at 103 oc [217 .4 F]
to a constant weight in order to determine concentration of
solids, in terms of mg/L; and
11.14.1.2 By using a standard method in 40 CFR Part 136 to
determine concentration of TSS.
11.14.2 Type II-A Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
total suspended solids in samples of effluent taken during test
period shall be :::; 150 mg/L using a standard method in 40 CFR
Part 136.
11.14.3 Type JI-B Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
period shall be ::;35 mg/L using:
11.14.3.1 Filtration of representative sample through 0.45
!lffi filter membrane, drying at 105C [221.0F] and weighing;
11.14.3.2 Centrifuging of a representative sample for 2:5
min with mean acceleration of 2800 to 3200 g [90 087.3 to 102
957 ft/s
2
], drying at 105C [221.0F] and weighing; or
11.14.3.3 Other equivalent test standard as accepted by the
certifying body.
11.14.4 Type II-C Treatment Systems-Geometric mean of
period shall be ::;30 mg/L using one of the methods specified
for Type li-B treatment systems in 11.14.3.
11.15 Biochemical Oxygen Demand Test:
11.15.1 Type li-B or ll-C Treatment Systems-Geometric
mean of five-day biochemical oxygen demand (BOD5) in
samples of effluent taken during the test period shall be ::;25
mg/L using:
1698
11.15.1.1 ISO 5815-1; or
11.15.1.2 Other equivalent test standards as accepted by the
certifying body.
11.16 Chemical Oxygen Demand Test:
11.16.1 Type li-B or ll-C Treatment Systems-Geometric
mean of chemical oxygen demand (COD) in samples of
effluent taken during the test period systems, shall be :::;125
mg/L using:
0 F2363/F2363M - 12
Hours
FIG. 1 Sampling Frequency for Testing Treatment Systems
11.16.1.1 ISO 15705; or
11.16.1.2 Other equivalent test standards as accepted by the
certifying body.
11.17 test:
11.17.1 Type li-B or ll-C Treatment Systems-pH in
samples of effluent taken during the test period shall be
between 6 and 8.5.
11.18 Residual Chlorine Test:
11.18.1 Type li-B Treatment Systems-Concentration of to-
tal residual chlorine in samples of effluent taken during test
period shall be :S500 j.lg!L using:
11.18 .1. 1 Direct amperometric titration in Test Method
Dl253;
11.18.1.2 DPD colorimetric method in SM4600-Cl (G); or
11.18.1.3 Other equivalent test standard as accepted by the
certifying body.
11.18.2 ll-C Treatment Systems-Concentration of to-
tal residual chlorine in samples of effluent taken during test
shall be :S 10 IJ.g!L by one of the methods specified
for Type II-B treatment systems in 11.18.1.
11.19 Tilt Operating Test:
11.19.1 Type I, II-A, JI-B or II-C Treatment Systems-
During wastewater processing test, treatment system shall
operate for 2:1 h each test day at an of 22.5 or the
maximum angle specified by manufacturer, whichever is
greater. Over the course of the multi-day test period, treatment
system shall be tilted at least twice in each of the cardinal
directions in the vertical plane.
11.20 Vapor and Gas Test:
11.20.1 Treatment system shall be visually examined for
compliance with the performance requirement in 7.11 for
venting and over-pressurization.
11.21 Control and Operation Test:
11.21.1 During wastewater processing test, treatment sys-
tem control system should be tested to demonstrate control and
automation alarms in 7 .12.
11.21.2 If not demonstrated during wastewater processing,
then treatment system shall be filled with water and conditions
simulated to demonstrate control and automation alarms.
11.22 Accessibility Test:
11.22.1 Treatment system shall be visually examined for
accessibility in 7.13.
1699
11.23 Zero or Non-detected Values:
11.23.1 For coliforms, zero values should be replaced with
a value of 1 coliform/100 mL to allow for calculation of
geometric mean.
11.23.2 For total suspended solids, biochemical oxygen
demand, and chemical oxygen demand, values below the limit
of detection should be replaced with one half the limit of
detection to allow for calculation of geometric mean.
12. Inspection
12.1 Manufacturer shall afford purchaser's inspector all
reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him that the material
is being furnished in accordance with this specification.
cO F2363/F2363M - 12
12.2 Inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnec-
essarily with manufacturer's operations.
12.3 All examinations and inspections shall be made at
place of manufacture, unless otherwise agreed upon.
12.4 Treatment system manufacturer shall allow represen-
tatives from the certifying body and testing facility access to
manufacturer's facilities and to all records required for treat-
ment system certification.
13.1 Manufacturer shall maintain production quality of
treatment systems that are designed, tested, and marked in
accordance with this specification.
13.2 Treatment systems that fail to conform to the require-
ments of this specification may be rejected.
13.2.1 Rejection should be reported to the producer or
supplier promptly and in writing.
13.2.2 In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test,
producer or supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
13.3 At no time shall a treatment system be sold with this
standard specification designation that does not meet the
requirements herein. See Section 14.
14. Certification
14.1 Application for certification of treatment system shall
be submitted in writing, signed by an authorized representative
of the treatment system manufacturer, to a certifying body in
Annex A l and include the following:
14.1.1 Design-Drawings, specifications, and other design
information that describes the materials, construction, and
operation of the treatment system;
14.1.2 Quality Assurance-Description of manufacturer's
production quality control and inspection methods, record
keeping systems pertaining to the manufacture of treatment
system, and testing procedures;
14.1.3 Instructions-Installation, operation, and mainte-
nance instructions for the treatment system;
14.1.4 Manufacturer-Name and address of applicant and
manufacturing facility;
14.1.5 Prior Approvals-Authorized deviations, exceptions,
or equivalencies, if any, approved by the certifying body; and
14.1.6 Test Rport-Test report, prepared and signed by a
representative of the independent laboratory, detailing the
performance requirements in Section 7 and the results for each
test in Section I l, including specific test methods, procedures,
and standards used and any failed tests, as well as the
following:
14.1.6.1 Name and address of independent laboratory that
evaluated, inspected, and tested the treatment system for
compliance with this standard;
14.1.6.2 Evaluation of treatment system design, materials,
and manufacture for compliance with Section 6; and
14.1.6.3 Evaluation of manufacturer's quality control pro-
gram and equipment instructions as described in 14.1.2 and
14.1.3.
14.2 Changes:
14.2.1 Changes to a certified treatment system shall be
approved by the certifying body.
14.2.2 Manufacturer shall notify the certifying body in
writing of any proposed change in design, materials, or
manufacturer of a treatment system certified to this standard,
including:
14.2.2. 1 Description of the proposed change;
14.2.2.2 Reason for the proposed change, including advan-
tages; and
14.2.2.3 Recommendation from the test facility as to
whether the treatment system will remain in all material
respects substantially the same as the original test unit.
14.2.3 Additional testing, in whole or in part, may be
required by the certifying body.
15. Product Marking
15.1 General:
15.1.1 Markings and instructions shall withstand loss of
legibility from normal wear and tear, exposure to water, salt
spray, direct sunlight, heat, cold, and substances listed in Table
4.
15.1.2 Alteration, removal, or replacement of markings
shall be obvious.
15 .1.3 Typeface shall use alphabet of letters, numerals, and
symbols of at least 3 mm [
1
/s in.] in height in accordance with
Specification F906 Type 1.
15.1.4 Language shall be at least in English, French, or
Spanish.
15.2 Nameplate:
15.2.1 Treatment system shall be marked using fixed
nameplate, stamped lettering, or other permanent marking
containing the following information:
15.2.1.1 Name of manufacturer;
15.2.1.2 Name and model number;
15.2.1.3 Month and year of completion of manufacture;
15 .2.1.4 Serial number;
15.2.1.5 Type, as described in Section 4;
15.2.1.6 Designed hydraulic loading, in m
3
/day [gal/day];
15.2.1.7 Designed organic loading, in kg/day [lb/day] BOD;
15.2.1.8 ASTM F2363/F2363M-12 designation; and
15.2.1.9 Other internationally recognized standards, if ap-
plicable.
15.3 Placards:
15.3.1 Treatment system shall be marked using fixed
placard, stamped lettering, or other permanent marking con-
taining the following information:
15.3 .1.1 Operating instructions;
15.3.1.2 Safety precautions;
15.3.1.3 Warnings; and
15.3.1.4 Wiring diagram inside control panel, cabinet door,
or other suitable location.
15.4 Piping:
15.4.1 Treatment system piping shall be marked with ser-
vice (for example, graywater, sewage, water, etc.) and direc-
tion.
15.4.2 Pressure and size of piping shall be provided to the
purchaser.
1700
0 F2363/F2363M - 12
15.5 Instructions:
15.5.1 Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions
for treatment system shall be provided and shall include at least
the following information:
15.5.1.1 Manufacturer name, address, telephone number,
and other contact information;
15.5.1.2 Name and model number;
15.5.1.3 Type, as described in Section 4;
15.5.1.4 Designed hydraulic loading, in m
3
/day [gal/day];
15.5.1.5 Designed organic loading, in kg/day [lb/day] BOD;
15.5.1.6 Designed thermal loading, in terms of minimum
and maximum influent temperature in oc [F];
15.5.1.7 Designed flow rate of flushwater, in L/h [gallh];
15.5.1.8 Designed flow rate of process water and other
added liquids, in L/h [gallh];
15.5.1.9 ASTM F2363/F2363M-12 designation;
15.5.1.10 Other internationally recognized standards, if ap-
plicable;
15.5.1.11 Statement in 33 CPR 159.57(a)(17), if required;
15.5.1.12 Parts list;
15.5 .1.13 Schematic, showing the relative location of each
part;
15.5.1.14 Wiring diagram;
15.5.1.15 Power requirements, including voltage and cur-
rent;
15.5 .1.16 Electrical disconnect switch requirements;
15.5.1.17 Electrical lock out and tag out procedures;
15.5.1.18 Supply circuit overcurrent protection;
15.5.1.19 Piping and electrical connections;
15.5.1.20 Backflow prevention, including any additional
requirements for backflow protection devices to be installed in
ship's piping;
15.5.1.21 Sampling ports, including any additional require-
ments for sampling ports to be installed in ship's piping;
15.5.1.22 Clearance for safety and access to parts for
service;
15.5.1.23 Ventilation requirements for treatment system,
including installation of dedicated vent fan to manage ventila-
tion pressure and fumes;
15.5.1.24 Ventilation requirements for compartment where
treatment system will be installed, including: (1 ) number of air
exchanges per hour of ambient air; and (2) installation of
sensors and alarms for high level hydrogen sulfide and low
level oxygen concentrations;
15.5.1.25 Whether treatment system is designed to operate
using saltwater, freshwater, or both;
15.5.1.26 Chemicals required to operate treatment system,
type and quantity;
15.5.1.27 Precautions for required chemicals, including
handling, storage, and use;
15.5.1.28 Personnel protective equipment, including emer-
gency eye wash station or bottle and hand cleaning basin with
means for disinfection;
15.5.1.29 Description of maintenance for the user to per-
form without coming into contact with sewage, graywater, or
chemicals;
1701
15.5.1.30 Testing frequency of relief valves, if any, includ-
ing a copy of the original testing certificate by pump manu-
facturer;
15.5.1.31 Cleaning procedures;
15.5.1.32 List of cleaning materials that will: (1) disrupt
operations or damage treatment system; and (2) not disrupt
operations or damage treatment system;
15.5.1.33 Sludge removal procedures;
15.5.1.34 Winter lay-up procedures;
15.5.1.35 Maximum angle of tilt during operation, in de-
grees;
15.5.1.36 Maximum hydrostatic pressure of holding and
retention tanks, if any, that are designed to operate under
pressure, in kPa [psig];
15.5.1.37 Maximum operating level of holding and reten-
tion tanks, if any; and
15.5.1.38 Minimum and maximum operating, layup, and
storage temperatures, in oc [F].
16. Keywords
16.1 sewage; graywater; flow-through treatment; marine
sanitation device; MSD
17. Supplementary Requirements
17.1 General:
17 .1.1 Supplementary requirements shall apply only when
specified by the purchaser in the purchase order or contract.
17 .1.2 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
treatment system shall be certified in accordance with Section
14 and shall meet the additional supplementary requirements in
this section.
17.2 Human Engineering Design:
17 .2.1 Treatment system shall be designed and installed to
conform to human engineering principles in accordance with
Practice F1166 to the degree that it will be operated and
maintained by a 152.4 em [5 ft, 0 in.] tall male or female as
well as 185.4 em [6 ft, 1 in.] tall male or female.
17 .2.2 Design shall also reflect personnel safety factors,
including the elimination or minimization of the potential for
human error during operation and maintenance of treatment
system under routine, non-routine, or emergency conditions.
18. Special Government Requirements
18.1 For U.S. government procurement only:
18.1.1 General-Treatment system procured by the U.S.
government (for example, for installation on US government
vessels) shall be certified by the United States in accordance
with Section 14 and shall meet the additional special govern-
ment requirements in this section.
18.1.2 Except as otherwise specified in the contract:
18.1.2.1 Contractor is responsible for the performance of all
inspection and test requirements specified herein; and
18.1.2.2 Contractor shall be permitted to use his own or any
other suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection
and test requirements specified herein, unless disapproved by
the purchaser at time of purchase.
18.1.3 Purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the
inspections and tests at the same frequency as set forth in this
0 F2363/F2363M - 12
Specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to
assure that material conforms to prescribed requirements.
18.1.4 Certification Testing:
18.1.4.1 Treatment system shall be capable of passing
one-time certification testing, either during construction of new
surface ships, crafts, or boats, or during backfit, as provided for
in DoD 4715.6-R1 for marine sanitation devices in public
vessels owned or operated by the United States Department of
Defense.
18.1.4.2 Recertification may be required when significant
design changes occur to existing certified treatment systems,
such as modification to piping or pumping systems, changes to
the influent stream (for example, from sewage only to com-
bined sewage and graywater) or other ship changes. Consult
the relevant DoD component for details to determine recerti-
fication applicability.
18.1.5 Design Considerations:
18.1.5.1 Electrical power services available for the treat-
ment system are: (1) 440 V, 60Hz, 3 phase; and (2) 110 V, 60
Hz, 1 phase.
18.1.5.2 Seawater at 690 to 1207 kPa [100 to 175 psig].
Actual value will vary over time and depending on shipboard
location.
18.1.5.3 Fresh water at 414 kPa [60 psig] up to 37.9 L/min
[10 gpm] at 21.1 oc [70F].
18.1.5.4 Ship service compressed air at 862 kPa [125 psig].
18.1.5.5 Air supply to the space at a maximum 32.2C
[90F] with a wet bulb of 27.2C [81 F].
18.1.5.6 Compartment ventilation, as required.
18.1.5.7 Airborne noise shall meet SNAME T&R Bulletin
3-37.
18.1.5.8 Treatment systems that utilize incineration as a
means of treatment technology shall comply with Specification
F1323.
18.1.5.9 Chlorinated plastics shall not be used in the con-
struction of the treatment system or any subsystem.
18.1.5.10 Hydrogen sulfide alarms and monitors shall be
installed in the treatment system operating space to ensure
crew safety.
18.1.6 Human Engineering and Training:
18.1.6.1 Human-machine interfaces shall minimize both the
potential for and the consequence of human error.
18.1.6.2 Level of training required shall be: (1) :::;2 h for
operating personnel; and (2) :::;5 h for maintenance personnel.
18.1.7 Process Monitoring:
18.1.7.1 Treatment system operation, performance
monitoring, and operator intervention shall be through the use
of a programmable logic controller (PLC), or equivalent,
having automated controls necessary to maintain set point
operating conditions. Set points to control treatment processes
are to be determined by the manufacturer.
18.1.7.2 Operating (that is, logic) program for PLC, or
equivalent, shall be tested for safety and reliability of the
process monitoring system.
18.1.7.3 Operating program used for: (1) vital control, (2)
alarm, or (3) monitoring systems shall be stored in non-volatile
memory. In the event of power loss, PLC shall automatically
operate after power is restored without the need for reloading
the operating program.
18.1.7.4 PLC or equivalent shall provide for fail-safe con-
trol of all machinery, electric motors, drives, solenoids valves,
and other devices that could cause personnel injury or equip-
ment damage.
18.1.7.5 Low voltage electronics, including PLCs, shall be
designed with due consideration for static discharge, electro-
magnetic interference, voltage transients, fungal growth, and
contact corrosion.
18.1.7.6 Control interface shall clearly communicate all
information to the operator that is required to ensure efficient
and safe operation of the treatment system process.
18.1.8 Treatment System Supportability:
18.1.8.1 Reliability and maintainability characteristics of
the treatment system shall be such to ensure that the crew of a
ship can, with a high degree of confidence, consistently dispose
of the waste stream as defined by purchaser.
18.1.8.2 Treatment system shall be designed for an opera-
tional life of 2::10 years, taking into account minimization of
failures as well as scheduled maintenance and replacement of
parts.
18.1.8.3 Treatment system shall be designed to allow for
ease of routine cleaning and preventative maintenance.
18.1.8.4 Design of all components shall be consistent with
an at sea working environment.
18.1.8.5 Treatment system shall have an operational avail-
ability ao of 2::0.90 over a six month operating profile.
18.1.8.6 For organizational level corrective maintenance,
treatment system shall have a geometric mean time to repair
(MTTRg) of <4 h for 95 % of the time and a maximum repair
time (Mmax ) of <12 h for 95 % of the time. Repair times do not
include the time required to start up treatment system and
produce satisfactory effluent. Organizational maintenance shall
include any maintenance required during ship deployments,
which are up to six months in duration.
18.1.8.7 Treatment system shall meet MIL-S-167-1 and
shall be free from vibration that could result in damage or the
potential of damage to the ship structure, machinery,
equipment, and systems, or interfere with the operation of the
ship, its cargo systems, or any ship component.
18.1.8.8 Treatment system shall have no resonant frequen-
cies of its parts or structure below 40 Hz.
18.1.8.9 Treatment system shall meet Grade B, Class 1 for
MIL-S-901, or as specified by ship requirements.
18.1.9 Unacceptable Failures:
18.1.9.1 Catastrophic failures that result in death or system
loss and are of remote likelihood to occur.
18.1.9.2 Critical failures that cause severe injury, illness, or
major system damage and are of probable likelihood to occur.
18.1.9.3 Marginal failures that cause minor injury or illness
or system damage and are expected to occur frequently.
18.1.10 Minimizing Failures-The following failures shall
be minimized to the greatest possible extent:
1702
18.1.10.1 Catastrophic failures that are of improbable like-
lihood to occur.
18.1.10.2 Critical failures that are of occasional likelihood
to occur.
0 F2363/F2363M -12
18.1.1 0.3 Marginal failures that are of probable likelihood
to occur.
ANNEX
Al. CERTIFYING BODIES
Al.l Certifying bodies listed below have adopted this
Specification for approval of treatment systems to be installed
on ships flying the country's flag.
Al.l.l United States-Application for certification of treat-
ment systems this standard are to be sent to the U.S.
Coast Guard Marine Safety Center, 2100 2nd Street SW, Stop
7102, Washington DC, 20593-7102. For certification of equip-
ment that will be installed on U.S. vessels, treatment system
manufacturer shall use an independent laboratory accepted
the U.S. Coast Guard to perform the required evaluation,
inspection, and testing listed in this standard. For U.S. vessels
that engage in international voyages, use a qualified
accepted by the U.S. Coast Guard instead. For a list of both
recognized and qualified facilities, see http://cgmix.uscg.mil
under approval series 159.015 for sewage pollution prevention
equipment.
COPYRIGHT/).
1703
c.dRDf Designation: F2446 - 04 (Reapproved 201 0)
~ u l l

INTERNATIONAL
Standard Classification for
Hierarchy of Equipment Identifiers and Boundaries for
Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability (RAM)
Performance Data Exchange
1
1. Scope
1.1 This classification is to serve as an international stan-
dard for marine equipment nomenclature, taxonomy, hierarchi-
cal data structure, unique identifiers, and boundary definition
for the consistent acquisition and exchange of equipment RAM
performance data. The standard addresses the classification of
mechanical and software products.
1.2 RAM in an acronym for Reliability, Availability, &
Maintainability where:
1.2.1 Reliability is the probability that an item can perform
a required function under given conditions for a given time
interval (tl, t2). It is generally assumed that the item is in a
state to perform this required function at the beginning of the
time interval.
1.2.2 Availability is the probability that an item is in a state
to perform a required function under given conditions at a
given instant of time, assuming that the required external
resources are provided.
1.2.3 Maintainability is the probability that a given active
maintenance action, for an item under given conditions of use
can be carried out within a stated time interval, when the
maintenance is performed under stated conditions and using
stated procedures and resources.
1
This classification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee F25 on Ships
Cunent edition approved May l, 2010. Published June 2010. Originally
10.1520/F2446-04R10.
2.1 ISO Standards:
2
ISO 3166-1 :1997, Codes for the Representation of Names
of Countries and Their Subdivisions-Part l: Country
Codes, 1997
ISO 10303 , Industrial Automation Systems and
Integration--Product Data Representation and Exchange
ISO 13584 , Industrial Automation Systems and
Integration---Parts Library
ISO/IEC TR 12182 , Information Technology-
Categorization of Software, Technical Repott, 1998
ISO/TC 67/WG 4, ISO/FDIS 14224:1998(E), Petroleum
and Natural Gas Industries-Collection and Exchange of
Reliability and Maintenance Data for Equipment, 1998
2.2 Other Standards:
Center for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute
of Chemical Engineers, Guidelines for Improving Plant
Reliability through Data Collection and Analysis, 1998
3
IEC 60050-191 , International Electrotechnical Vocabulary,
Chapter 191, Dependability and Quality of Service
4
International Maritime Organization (IMO) Circular letter
No. 1886/Rev. 2, Implementation of Resolution
A.600(15)-IMO Ship Identification Number Scheme,
2002
5
Naval Sea Command, Expanded Ship Work Break-
down Structure (ESWBS) for All Ships and Ship/Combat
2
Available from International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de
Ia Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland, http://
www.iso.ch.
3
Available from American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 3 Park Ave, New
York, N.Y. 10016-5991.
4
Available from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 3 rue de
5
Available from International Maritime Organization (IMO), 4 Albert
Embankment, London, SEl 7SR, U.K.
1704
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Volumes 1 and 2,
3.
hiYnn.do:"" definition to ensure a common understan!cllrtg
of which components to be included within
concept to group similar
characteristics, with purpose of descr'lbing common prop-
ertics.
class.
characteti.stics, with the
of the class
least one class. A class
the main Pfi)PlllSJton
of vessel XYZ is an instance of the .. -
A
in.!IIY,UH'H'! com-
bination: Manufacturer Code--Manufacturer National
Tax H)-Manufacturer Model Number-Manufacturer Model
The manufacturer country code must be the ISO 3166-l
code for the manufacturer's country of
3.1.6 property-an attribute whose value character-
class instance. The process of initializing a set of
for a specific instance is called instantiation.
3. 7 string--any list of ACSII characters with variable
3.1.8 string array-a dimensionless array of string values.
3.1.9 component identification-this classification
proposes that components be uniquely identified using the
combination: Site ID--Generic ID--Location ID.
of the various identifiers is as follows:
vessel identifier. In some cases,
itnrc>ntnru at the fleet level
to associate a
a vessel ID. The following two
alternatives the ID of the first vessel
on which it was installed the entire
life time, and (2) a warehouse ID to components that
can be installed on vessels.
3.1.9.2 generic ID-the name or code of the class to
which the component Standard are free
6
Available from Naval Sea Systems Command. !333 Isaac Hull Avenue, S. E.
Washington Navy Yard. Washington D.C. 20376.
1705
to use either the class name or code. depending on data storage
preferences given that class names are values whereas
class codes are numeric values.
3.1.9.3 location JD--when multiple identical components
are located on the same site, the location ID identifies a
of equipment within the site ..
include bolt hole location and
forward sequencing. The method used for up location
IDs is irrelevant for the standard. It is useful to the standard
only and thus it is left to the standard ll111Plement
discretion.
3.1.1 0 unique vessel id(mtl1Ic:atii011'--Ul1!Citte euuiorneJJt
tification requires a unique site or vessel identifier. This
classification proposes that cornrr1ercial vessels be
their International Maritime (IMO) number. Hv10
a unique number to every commercial
world to be used for the vessel
IMO number
numeric number ]s maintained
a number to a at any time the initiation
of its construction. This classification also proposes
vessels be identified by Identification
Number preceded by the country code. The structure '''"nn,,-,"p
of two parts: a variable country code
by five to seven digit hull number (for ex::uTtPl'e ..
USA LPD 17). The five hui!
numbers are maintained
4.1 Capturing high quality
Maintainability (RAM) peJtoJrm;mc:e
consistent collection of
operating hours, and
equipment boundaries has
among the stakeholders
classification. and
4.2 Industry
mance.
4.3 Agreed boundaries
possible to share eqUlflilli:mt
mark equipment
tion of current and
to
4.4 RAM is based on
individual components among which identical itemc, ronh'h'"'',
to the same data This classiiication is
used for the identification of individual
such a way that identical components can
a data
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
5. Basis of Classification
5.1 The class library constitutes a generic list of objects to
be used as a toolbox for the development of specific ship
breakdown structures as shown in 1. Instances of object
classes will be created by assigning specific properties, includ-
ing custom-designed properties serving organization specific
functions and required properties aimed at facilitating global
identification and RAM assessment.
5.1.1 The class library includes systems, pieces of
equipment, elementary items (with some exceptions, elemen-
tary items can be seen as parts), and software products. It is that
standard implementers use the class library to build specific
ship breakdown structures by using a parent/child relationship
linking object class instances.
5.1.2 Each item has a parent to which it belongs. The parent
of any item can be any other type of items. For example, the
parent of a system is likely to be the ship, although in some
instances it is another system. The ship is an item of the class
library because it is the primary ancestor of all items and the
direct parent of most systems. As a primary ancestor, a ship has
no parent.
5.1.3 The parent of an elementary item is a system, a piece
of equipment or another elementary item. Elementary items do
not have children. An item is always defined with respect to its
parent. As a result, the identification of the parent is a required
property for all items. Within a given ship structure, the
combination of an item identifier and its parent identifier is not
unique. Indeed, several identical items with identical functions
are commonly found on board a specific ship. A location ID
(such as the bolt hole location, for example) is thus required to
uniquely identify each item. Consequently, an item of a specific
Object Toolbox
Fuel_pump
ship breakdown structure is fully identified by its own ID, the
ID of its parent, and a location ID.
5.2 Equipment RAM data exchange will take place through
the exchange of object class instances, that is, objects with
populated properties, including the list of required properties
for RAM data exchange. Class names are meant to be
transparent to end-users once a specific hierarchy is estab-
lished. They will only facilitate the data exchange. End-users
are expected to be presented with customized label names that
are dependent on business logic, culture, and language. Label
names are optional object properties populated by the standard
implementer.
5.3 Existing ship breakdown structures and identification
systems will be made compatible by adding a reference to the
object class for each component. Standard implementers will
be required to collect and store a minimum set of properties,
identified as "required properties." The storage structure of the
object class properties (for example, manufacturer, model
number, Mean Time Between Failures, and so forth) is not
imposed by this classification . Standard implementers are free
to use their own storage structure. Implementers are also able
to create private data exchange for data that is to stay within the
organization (see ).
5.4 This classification provides a list of generic criteria to be
used for the definition of equipment boundaries. Each bound-
ary criterion specifies whether a particular item is included in
the definition of pieces of equipment. Excluded items must not
be used when compiling the identification and RAM properties
to be exchanged.
Diesel_ engine property list
Item ID
Cargo _winch
Object Selection
Parent ID
Diesel_engine
Shaft
. . .
Instantiation
~ o c >
Manufacturer
MTBF
...
Diesel engine Instance
Item l D = 564879
Parent I D = 698741
Manufacturer= HV Diesels, Inc.
MTBF = 12,500 hours
Populated Breakdown
Structure
Data Exchange
FIG. 1 Object Instantiation Process for Population and Data Exchange
1706
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
6. Keywords
6.1 availability; boundary; equipment; hierarchy; maintain-
ability; maintenance; reliability; ship; shipboard; shipboard
equipment; ship reliability; vessel
ANNEX
Al. MECHANICAL AND SOFTWARE PRODUCT CLASS LIBRARY
Al.l See ~ t b l e A 1.1, Table A 1.2, Table A 1.3, Table A 1.4,
and rable A 1 .5.
Code
b_00001
b_00002
b_00003
b __00004
b_00005
b __00006
b_00007
b __OOOOB
b_00009
b_00010
b_00011
b_00012
b_00013
b_00014
b_00015
b_00016
b_00017
b_00018
b_00019
b_00020
b_00021
b_00022
b_00023
b_00024
b_00025
b_00026
b_00027
b_00028
b_00029
b_00030
b_00031
b_00032
b_00033
Boundary Element
associated valves
attached indicating
instruments
built-in tanks
coils
cooling device
electric motors
electrical hull fittings
electronic signal cabling
filters
flex connections
handwheels
hull fasteners
hull structural foundations
hydraulic control valves
hydraulic cylinders
hydraulic pumps and
motors
inserts into structural
members
integrated foundations
label plates
mechanical hull fittings
motor controllers
motor foundations
TABLE A 1.1 Boundary Criteria
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Included in Parent?
dedicated branch circuit
only
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Element Description
a valve that is required for the proper operation of the product
an integrated part of the product used for measuring and displaying a variable
an integrated part of the product that is a container used for holding a liquid or gas
one or more turns of wire through which an electric current travels
a device used to lower or maintain the temperature of the product or one of its components
a motor that is powered by electricity
any hull-attached element that is electrical in nature and used for the product (for example, a
plug)
a set of cables used to transport an electronic signal
a device through which a gas or liquid is passed in order to remove solids or impurities
a bendable device that joins two internal components of the product or the product with its
environment
a circular object that is turned to control a quantity
a structural connection between the product and the hull
a hull structure that is used as the product's foundation
a valve that controls the flow of a fluid within an hydraulic device
the cylindrical chamber of a device that produces hydraulic energy
a pump and motor assembly used to provide a source of hydraulic energy
an integrated part of the product that is inserted into the ship's structural elements
the foundation elements that come with the product (for example, support legs)
a piece of paper, metal, or other material that is attached to the product to provide information
it
yes any hull-attached element that is mechanical in nature and used for the product (for example, a
hinge)
yes when not mounted on a device that governs an electric motor in some predetermined manner
a group control
switchboard
yes the foundation elements of a motor
non-built in tanks no a liquid or gas container that is required by the product and that is not an integrated part of the
product
penetrations into structural yes
members
pipe hangers
pipe markings
piping
power supply
remote indicating
instruments
yes
yes
up to the flanged integral
part of the unit only
only
no
resilient and sound mounts yes
strainers yes
valve actuators
wiring
yes
an integrated part of the product that penetrates the ship's structural elements
a device which lends support to a pipe
a mark or series of marks on the surface of a pipe
a system of pipes used to carry a fluid
a source of electrical energy
a separate device remotely connected to the product used for measuring and displaying a
variable
a device which lends flexible support to a product in order to reduce vibration and minimize nois<
a porous or screen medium used ahead of the product to filter out harmful solid objects and
particles from a fluid stream
a device used to control the rate of a fluid flow by opening or closing a valve
a system of wires used to carry electricity
1707
Class
Code
2
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
2li
212
21201
21202
21203
21204
21205
213
214
21401
21402
21403
21404
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
22201
22202
22203
22204
22205
22206
22207
22208
22209
22210
22211
22212
22213
22214
22215
22216
cO F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE A 1.2 Mechanical and Software Product Class Library
ship
system
Class Name
accommodation __system
alarm_system
anchoring_and __mooring __system
azimuth_thruster
ballast_ system
brake_system
cargo_system
condition_and __monitoring __system
control_and_monitoring_system
data_logging_system
electric_power _distribution __system
electric_power __generation __system
combined_cycle_plant
diesel_electric_plant
gas_turbine_plant
shaft_generator_system
steam _ _power ___ plant
electrical __system
fire _ _fighting_system
carbon ___dioxide_system
halon_system
nitrogen_ system
sprinkling_system
garbage_and_solid_waste_system
gland_seal_systern
hydrau!ic_system
lifting __system
maneuvering __system
rnechanical_transrnission_system
oil __mist_detection_system
piping __system
air_ system
bilge _ _water __system
bleed __air_system
compressed __air _system
drainage __system
exhaust__ system
teed_water ___system
flush_system
fresh __water __system
fuel __injection_system
fueling_ system
fuel_ supply_ system
inert _gas __systern
lubrication __systern
potable __water._systern
Class Description
a large vessel which travels over the seas, rivers, or lakes
an assembly of one or more items, with functional and physical relationships
between them, which performs or can perform a clearly identified function as
a whole. A system has both physical and functional properties.
a group of interacting components designed for the crew and passen9er living
quarters
a means of warning to the operator if abnormal operating conditions are
detected in the equipment
a system designed for securing a ship by attaching it to a fixed object or a
mooring buoy with chains or lines, or with anchors or other devices.
a propulsor consisting of a propeller driven from a vertical shaft, which rotates
about its vertical axis
a system designed to ensure stability by adjusting the list, trim, and draft of
ship
a system that applies friction to a moving surface to slow it down or bring it to
rest
a system designed to process cargo
a system that records and processes salient
that trends in its periormance characteristics can
action to avoid .failures
a device for controlling a process or activity
data from equipment
assessed for appropriate
a system used to measure and record a set of data over time
a system used to provide a black box representation of all ship machinery
electrical transmission systems with limited internal details of such systems
a group of interacting components that generate electric power
a plant comprised ot a mix of diesel engines, gas turbines, and steam turbines
an electric power plant which uses only a diesel engine as a prime mover
an electric power plant that uses only gas turbine engines as prime movers
a marine electric generator that uses part of the ship main engines as its prime
mover
a power plant that uses a steam turbine tor generating electrical energy
a group of interacting electrical components
a system designed for extinguishing fires
a fire extinguishing system in which the extinguishing agent is carbon dioxide
a fire extinguishing system in which the extinguishing agent is halon
a fire extinguishing system in which the extinguishing agent is nitrogen
a system in which water flows through a nozzle that transforms water into a
spray pattern of fine droplets
a system designed to process garbage and solid waste material
a system that provides steam to the labyrinth packing glands located at turbine
casing penetrations
a system composed of machinery and auxiliary components which function to
generate, transmit, control, and utilize hydraulic energy
a system designed to carry objects from a lower position to a higher position
a system used to perform planned movement or change from the straight
steady course and speed of a ship
a system used to transmit torque at fixed or variable speed between prime
movers and energy absorbers
a system used in the diesel engines to prevent crankcase explosions
a group of interacting piping components
a system designed to process air
a system used to drain liquid from machinery-space bilges, tank tops, shaft
alleys, and watertight compartments located throughout a vessel
a system designed to let air escape under controlled conditions from a pipe,
tank, or the like througl1 a valve or outlet
a system used to supply compressed air to locations throughout a vessel
a piping system designed to remove water from surfaces or structures via
gravity or pumps
a system designed for the escape of gases, fumes, combustion products, and
odors from a mechanical device or an enclosure
a system used to regulate the flow of water into the steam drum of a boiler
a system designed to remove lodged deposits of rock fragments and other
debris by water flow at high velocity
a group of interacting mechanical and electrical components that control fresh
water
a group ot interacting
a group of
a system used to
auxiliary machinery
components that control fuel injection
components tl1at control fuel oil
store, and deliver fuel to ship prime movers and
a system used to handle inert gas
a system used to provide a film of lubricant in order to control friction and wear
a group of interacting rnechanical and electrical components that produces,
distributes, and control potable water
a that sea water to another
1708
Class
Code
22217
22218
22219
223
22301
22303
22304
22305
22306
2230601
2230602
22307
22308
22309
22310
22311
22312
224
225
22501
22502
226
227
228
229
22901
22902
22903
230
231
232
233
234
301
30101
3010101
3010102
3010103
3010104
30103
30104
30105
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE A1.2 Continued
Class Name
sewage _treatmenl _system
vacuum_ system
ventilation_system
process_system
air_conditioning_system
chemicaUreatment_system
combustion_air_system
condensate_system
cooling_system
air __cooling_ system
water __ cooling ___system
demineralizer_system
distilling_ system
exhaust_gas_treatment_system
filtration __system
propeller_ system
propulsion_system
electricaLpropulsion_system
mechanical_propulsion_system
pumpjet_propulsor
rudder _system
safety_ system
starting_ system
electric_starting__system
manual_starting __system
pneumatic_ starling_system
steam_generation_system
steering_control_mechanism
steering_ system
water_jet__propulsor
workshop_ system
equipment
control_ equipment
actuator
electric_actuator
hydraulic_actuator
manual_ actuator
pneumatic_actuator
analyzer
flame __controller
regulator
signal_ conditioner
Class Description
a system used to separate, modify, remove, and destroy objectionable,
hazardous, and pathogenic substances carried by wastewater in solution or
suspension
a system used to remove air or gas from an enclosed space
a system that provides movement, circulation, and quality control of air in an
enclosed space
a system that is involved in part of a process
designed for the maintenance of certain aspects of the environment
a defined space to facilitate the function of that space; aspects
controlled include air temperature and motion, radiant heat level, moisture,
and concentration of pollutants such as dust, microorganisms, and gases
system used to treat a fluid by the addition of chemicals
a system used to provide air to a combustion process
system designed to transform a gas to a liquid
a heat transfer system that is used for cooling processed fluids
a heat transfer system that is used for processing cooled air
heat transfer that is used for reducing the water temperature
to remove mineral constituents from water
system fresh water from sea water
system used to treat exhaust gas by capturing or reducing undesirable
or liquid in order to remove solids or other
to increase the temperature of a fluid
for the cooling of a space substance below the
"""'irrmn1c>rt<ll temperature
the required thrust for ship movements using a screw
that produces the required thrust for ship movement using fuel as the
energy source
system where the propulsor driven by an electric motor via a mechanical
transmission
a system where propulsor is driven by prime mover via a mechanical
transmissions system
a that accelerates a large volume of water, drawn in from beneath the
a
and expels it as speed horizontal jet, setting up a sufficient
reaction force to vessel
the rudder, shaft, bearings, and associated components
maneuvering system
aultorr1aticallv altering the operating conditions of piece of
damage to it
of machinery into motion, until it can sustain its
set the machinery into motion, until it can sustain
motion via its internal processes
system used to manually set the machinery into motion, until it can sustain its
motion via its internal processes
system that uses pneumatic to set the machinery into motion, until it
sustain its motion via its processes
of interacting components that steam
rne,ch.anisrn used to control the of a ship
means for altering the direction of propulsor t:1rust to control sl1ip direction of
movement
machine which takes in water by means of a suitable inlet and ducting system
accelerates the mass ol water using an and nozzle
of components used tor and repairing using
mechanical product that carries out a generally self contained function and to
extent is treated as a mechanical for the purpose of
acquisition, or operation. piece of has both physical and
properties
that directs a function of tbe mechanical product
me>ch<anical control device used to move or control another mechanical device
operated
operated
pnE3Unlatical'ly operated
electronic measurements
the condition a flame in some predetermined manner
control designed to maintain the value of some quantity at a relatively
in control and measurement systems to improve or transform measured
signals for later use
a of that is
1709
Class
Code
302Qi
30202
30203
303
30301
30302
30303
30304
30305
30306
30307
30308
30309
30310
30311
30312
303i3
303i4
30315
30316
30317
30318
3 0 ~ l 1 9
30320
3032i
30322
30323
30324
30325
30326
30327
30328
30329
30330
30331
30332
30333
30334
30335
30336
30337
304
30401
30402
30403
30404
30405
30406
30407
30408
305
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE A 1.2 Continued
Class Name
motor_starter
switch __board
transtormer
galley_ equipment
batter _breader _machine
beverage_and_food_disptmser
blender
broiler
can_ opener
cofie& __maker
tood ___cutter
food_processor
food __warmer
treezer
trench_ fry ___ extruder
galley_saw
griddle
grili
hotplate
ice_making_machine
kettle
microwave
m1xer
oven
peeler
pressure_ cooker
prooter
refrigerator
salad __bar
slicer
tenderizm
vaccum_cieaning_equipment
ventilator
waffle_iron
laundry _and_dry _cleaning_ equipment
ironer
laundry _dispenser
laundry _press
sleever
washer
washer _and_ dryer
a
eiectnciiy c while
a piece of Bquiprnent the galley
distribution of food and beverages
rnachtne designed to coating to tooo
device that d:spenses Jood and
an electric machine used brea!qng down
sutJst;:mc:es !rom toads and liquids
an open metal container. often with frame
heating process
a device
heat source
food
cubes us1ng wate1
boiilng water
process1ng and
smooth liquid
on which food
a covered contamer used
a dev1ce used to heat tood
a dev1ce that mixes food
means of electromagneiic waves
an enclosed space with a door wh1ch is used to cook tood heat other
substances
a device used to remove the skin ot fruit and vegetables
a cooking pan with a tightly fittmg lid which allows tood to cook qu1ckly in steam
under pressure
a device for the proofing (raising)
an insulated unit or in wh1ch
cool lem'memJirnn1"
a of equipment suckmg dirt
device that causes fresh air to and
device used to cook
equipment in the process ot washing and dry
a machine used for
a machine used tor
a device used for
clothes smooth by pressing them between
a machine used to finish shirt sleeves
a machine used washing clothes
a machine used for and
a higher position
Class
Code
30503
3050301
30504
30505
30506
306
:30601
30602
30603
30604
30605
30606
30607
30608
30609
30610
30611
30612
30613
30614
30615
30616
30617
30618
30619
30620
30621
30622
30623
307
30701
3070101
307010101
3070i0102
3070102
307010201
307010202
30702
3070201
3070202
3070203
307020301
3070204
307020401
307020402
307020403
307020404
307020405
307020406
307020407
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
crane
deck_ crane
elevator
hoist
Class Name
lift_.machinery
machine_shop_equipment
bending_machine
cutting._machine
drill __machine
electric_hammer
electrode_oven
forming_machine
grinding_machine
hydraulic_intensifier
hydraulic_press
lathe
milling_machine
painting_machine
pneumatic_hammer
power._ saw
press_machine
reeling_machine
sanding_machine
sewing_machine
shearing_machine
sheet_metal_working_machine
thermal_ drying_ oven
threading_machine
welding_machine
machinery
electrical_machinery
electric_generator
electric __generator._AC
electric_generator _DC
electric_motor
electric __motor_AC
electric_motor _DC
mechanical_machinery
inboard_ motor
outboard_motor
reciprocating_machinery
diesel __engine
rotating_machinery
air_charger
anchor_windlass
compressor
garbage_grinder
gas_turbine_engine
gear_assembly
gear_box
Class Description
a power-oriented hoisting machine with lifting and pivoted boom that allows
movement of loads horizontally as well as vertically
a crane that is located on the deck of a ship
a platform or enclosure that is raised and lowered in a vertical hoistway to
transport freight or people
a device designed to lift from a position directly above the load
a unit assembly used to operate a lift
a machine used in workshops for manufacturing and repairing items
a machine used to bend metals
a machine designed to cut pieces of material
a machine which makes holes
a hammer in which electricity is utilized for producing the impacting blow
a machine designed to dry and store electrodes
a machine used to form or shape pieces of metal
a machine used to make something into small pieces or a powder by pressing
betvveen hard surfaces
a device which increases the power of a signal in a hydraulic servomechanism
or other system through the use of fixed and variable orifices
a combination of a large and a small cylinder connected by a pipe and filled
with a fluid so that the fluid pressure created by a small force acting on the
small-cylinder piston will result in a large force on the large piston
a machine for shaping a workpiece by turning it while a sharp tool is pressed
against it
a machine used for the removal of metal by feeding a workpiece through the
periphery of a rotating circular cutter
a machine used to paint
a hammer in which compressed air is utilized for producing the impacting blow
a power-operated saw
a machine used to make something firm and flat or to put weight on something
to push it down
a machine used to pull in, take or give out by turning something round and
round
a machine that uses a moving sheet or disc of rough paper to abrade other
surfaces in order to maker them smoother
a mechanism that stitches cloth, leather, or other material by means of a
double-pointed or eye-pointed needle
a machine for cutting cloth or bars, sheets, or plates of metal or other material
a machine used to process sheet metal
a closed chamber for drying an object by heating at relatively low temperatures
a machine used to cut or form threads inside or outside a cylinder or cone
a machine used to join two pieces of metal together permanently by melting the
parts that are in contact with one another
a reciprocating or rotating equipment that performs some sort of energy
conversion as its underlying function
a working electrical part of a machine
a machine that generates electricity by transforming mechanical energy
an electric generator that produces alternating current
an electric generator that produces direct current
a motor that is powered by electricity
an electric motor that uses alternating current
an electric motor that uses direct current
a piece of machinery that is primarily used in mechanical systems
a unit assembly of engine, propeller, and vertical drive shaft used to propel a
boat and located inside the hull perimeter
a unit assembly of engine, propeller, and vertical drive shaft used to propel a
boat and usually clamped to the boat transom
a working part of a machine that works complementary to the machine
an internal combustion engine operating on the compression ignition
a non-electrical working part of a machine that moves in a circular
a device in the intake system of an internal combustion used to increase
the weight and therefore boost the amount that can be
burned in the cylinder
a machine designed to raise or lower an anchor and generally consisted of a
horizontal barrel that is fitted with gearlike projections that engage the links of
the anchor chain
a device used to increase the pressure of a gas
a machine designed for grinding garbage material
a device that compressed gas through nozzlflS thereby its
pressure to and directing the gas into the turbine blades in
convert the energy to rotational work
an assembly of toothed cylinders that are used to transmit torque from one
shaft to another
a housing for gears that are used to transmit power between shafts rotating at
different
1711
Class
Code
307020408
307020409
30702040901
30702040902
30702040903
30702040904
30702040905
30702040906
30702040907
30702040908
30702040909
30702040910
30702040911
30702040912
30702040913
30702040914
30702040915
30702040916
30702040917
30702040918
30702040919
30702040920
30702040921
30702040922
30702040923
30702040924
30702040925
30702040926
30702040927
30702040928
30702040929
30702040930
30702040931
30702040932
30702040933
30702040934
30702040935
30702040936
30702040937
30702040938
30702040939
30702040940
30702040941
307020410
307020411
307020412
307020413
307020414
30702041401
30702041402
30702041403
30702041404
30702041 405
30702041406
30702041407
30702041408
30702041409
3070204141 0
30702041411
30702041412
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
propulsion_ shafting
pump
ballast_pump
bilge/ballast_pump
bilge_pump
booster_pump
brine_ pump
cargo_pump
circulating_pump
cleaning_pump
condensate_ pump
cooling_pump
discharge_pump
distillate_pump
distilled_ water _pump
dosage_pump
drinking_ water _pump
ejector_pump
engine_fuel_pump
feed_pump
fire_pump
fire/bilge/ballast_pump
fire/general_service_pump
fresh_ water _pump
fuel_oil_pump
fuel_ oil_transfer _pump
gear_oil_pump
general_service_pump
generic_pump
hydraulic_oil_pump
lube_oil_pump
lube_oil_transfer _pump
priming_pump
process_pump
return_pump
sea_ water _pump
scavenging_air_pump
sewage_pump
sludge_pump
stripping_pump
supply_pump
trimming_pump
vacuum_pump
screw _propeller
turbine
steam_turbine_engine
steering_ unit
winch
anchor_winch
cargo_ winch
crane_winch
hoisting_ winch
lifeboat_ winch
mooring_ winch
portable_winch
slewing_ winch
topping __winch
topping/slewing_ winch
towing_ winch
windlass_winch
Class Description
a group of interacting shafts and shaft components that are used for the
propulsion of a ship
a device used to add energy to liquids to produce flow or increase pressure
a pump used to transfer seawater into and out of a vessel's ballast tanks in
order to adjust list, trim, and draft
a pump which is used to discharge water ballast and remove water that collects
in the bottom of a ship
a pump used to drain liquid from machinery-space bilges, tank tops, shaft
alleys, and other watertight compartments
a pump used to increase pressure in a water or compressed-air pipe
a pump used for a ship brine system
a pump used to load and discharge liquid cargo
a pump used to circulate a fluid
a pump used to move a cleaning fluid
a pump used to move condensate
a pump used to move a cooling fluid
a pump used to discharge a fluid
a pump used to move distillate
a pump used to move distilled water
a pump used to move a specified dosage of fluid
a pump used to circulate drinking water
a pump with no internal moving parts that moves a fluid
a pump used to supply fuel to an engine
a pump used to supply water to a steam boiler
a pump used to supply water to shipboard fire-fighting systems
a pump used to supply fire-fighting water, to remove water from bilges, and to
discharge water ballast
a pump used to supply fire-fighting water and general service water
a pump used to circulate fresh water
a pump used to circulate fuel oil
a pump user to transfer fuel oil
an oil pump that uses gears to move oil
a pump used for general service
a pump that is not specific to any area
a pump used to circulate hydraulic oil
a pump used to circulate lube oil
a pump user to transfer lube oil
a pump used to provide priming to a system
a pump involved in a specific process
a pump used to return a fluid
a pump used to circulate sea water
a pump used to supply scavenging air to a diesel engine
a pump used for a sewage system
a pump capable of handling sand- and gravel-laden liquids without clogging or
wearing unduly used to extract mud and cuttings from a borehole
a pump used to perform stripping operations on tanks
a pump used to supply a fluid
a pump involved in a trimming process
a pump used to remove air or gas from an enclosed space
a device that creates the required thrust for ship movements while rotating in
the water
a device for generating rotary mechanical power from the energy in a stream of
fluid.
a machine used to convert the energy of high-pressure steam into the
mechanical energy of a rotating shaft that performs work
a unit used tor directional control
a device having a drum on which to coil a rope, cable, or chain for hauling,
pulling, or hoisting
a winch designed to raise or lower an anchor
a winch designed to move cargo
a winch utilized as part of a crane machinery
a winch that is part of a hoisting machine for raising and lowering material with
intermittent motion while holding the material freely suspended. Hoisting
machines are capable of picking up loads at one location and depositing
them at another anywhere within a limited area
a winch designed to raise or lower a lifeboat
a winch used for the mooring system of a ship
a winch capable of being easily and conveniently transported
a winch which permits rapid traverse or change in elevation
a winch with a topping mechanism
a winch that performs the functions of both a topping winch and a slewing
winch
a winch used by a towing system
a winch used by a windlass system
1712
Class
Code
30702041413
30703
3070301
3070302
3070303
3070304
3070305
3070306
308
30801
30802
3080201
3080202
3080203
30803
30804
3080401
3080402
30805
30806
30807
30809
30810
30811
3081101
3081102
30812
30813
3081301
3081302
3081303
308130301
308130302
30814
30815
30816
308708
309
30901
30902
30903
30904
30905
3090501
3090502
3090503
3090504
3090505
3090506
3090507
3090508
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
windlass/mooring_ winch
process_machinery
agitator
centrifuge
clarifier
homogenizer
purifier
separator
mechanical_ equipment
blower
clutch
electro_magnetic_clutch
hydraulic_clutch
pneumatic_clutch
damper
dryer
air_dryer
gas_ dryer
hydraulic_accumulator
hydraulic_power_unit
lifeboat_launching_equipment
mechanical_ transmission
pneumatic_positioner
reducer
reduction_gear
speed_reducer
scrubber
shaft_ coupling
flexible_coupling
fluid_ coupling
solid_ coupling
flanged_ solid_ coupling
muff_solid_coupling
silencer
thruster_unit
trash_compactor
mechanical_governor
piping_ equipment
drainage_unit
pressure_ vessel
sprinkler
tank
valve
ball_ valve
butterfly_ valve
check_ valve
diaphragm _ _valve
gate_valve
globe_valve
plug_ valve
solenoid_ valve
Class Description
a winch used by a windlass/mooring system
a machinery that is involved in part of a process
a mechanical device used to maintain fluidity, plasticity, and prevent segregation
of liquids and liquid solutions
a rotating device that uses centrifugal force to separate substances of different
densities
a device that clears liquid from suspended particles through filtration or
centrifugation
a device in which substances are emulsified by being forced through an
energetic shear field
a device that clears an area or object of all undesirable matter
a pressure vessel used to separate the gaseous and liquid components of
reservoir fluids into gas, oil, and water
a non-machinery equipment that is primarily used in mechanical systems
a device used to supply a relatively large volume of a gas at a low pressure
a device for engagement and disengagement of mechanical power
a clutch that uses electromagnetic forces to engage and disengage
a clutch that uses hydraulic power to engage and disengage
a clutch that uses pneumatic pressure to engage and disengage
a device used to lessen torsional or axial vibrations in a shaft line
a device whose primary function is to accomplish drying
a device for drying an air flow
a device for drying a gas flow
a pressure vessel which operates as a fluid source device or shock absorber
a power transmission unit comprising machinery and auxiliary components
which function to generate, transmit, control, and utilize hydraulic energy
a unit assembly used to launch a lifeboat
a device by which motive power from a prime mover is made available at a
load
a pneumatic servomechanism used to improve operating characteristics of
valves by reducing hysteresis
a device designed to reduce a quantity
a train of gears designed to reduce the speed with which power is transmitted
a train of gears placed between a motor and the machinery which it will drive,
to reduce the speed with which power is transmitted
a device for the removal, or washing out, of entrained liquid droplets or dust, or
for the removal of an undesired gas component from process gas streams
a device used to connect coaxial shafts for power transmission from one to the
other
a coupling used to connect two shafts with a certain amount of flexibility and
allowance in their axial or radial alignment. It usually contains a resilient
member such as a metal spring or rubber disk
a device in which a fluid transmits torque from input shaft to output shaft
a rigid connection between two shafts
a coupling in which two flanged ends are connected directly together by bolting
a coupling in which there is a sleeve type connection without any flange
a device used to reduce or eliminate the sound made by exhaust gas that is
discharged from the engine, by reducing the exhaust gas pressure waves
a unit that produces a driving force
a machine that compresses solid waste material for convenience in disposal
a device that automatically regulates the speed of an engine or machine by
varying the supply of fuel or steam according to the power demand
a piping supply that is needed to complete a certain function
a unit designed to remove water from surfaces or structures by gravity or
pumping
a container for fluids that can withstand pressure above or below atmospheric
pressure
a device used for delivering a fire extinguishing liquid or gas
a large vessel used for holding a fluid such as water, low pressure gas,
gasoline, or other fuel
a device used to start, stop, divert, or regulate the flow rate of a fluid
a valve that uses a spherically shaped plug, or ball, with a round hole passing
through it that can be moved from fully open to fully closed position by
rotating the valve stem 90 degrees
a valve that uses an internal disk is rotated from a fully closed position to a fully
open position with a quarter turn of the attached stem
a valve used to prevent reverse flow
a valve that uses a flexible diaphragm to form the upper pressure boundary of
the valve's body
a valve that uses a flat or wedge-shaped gate that is lowered or raised to
control the straight-through flow of a fluid
a valve that uses a disk that is mounted on the end of a threaded stem
a valve that uses a stem-mounted plug resembling a cylinder
a valve that is actuated by a magnetic field that is produced in a solenoid
1713
Class
Code
310
31001
31002
31003
31004
31005
31006
31007
31008
31009
31010
31011
31012
31013
31014
31015
31016
31017
31018
3101801
3101802
3101803
3101804
3101805
3101806
3101807
3101808
3101809
3101810
3101811
31019
3101901
310190101
310190102
310190103
310190104
310190105
310190106
310190107
3101902
3101903
310190301
310190302
310190303
310190304
310190305
cO F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
process_equipment
afterburner
air_ conditioning_ unit
boiler
burner
chemical_treatment_equipment
cleaner
condenser
deaerating_feed_tank
defroster
dehumidifier
dehydrator
deoiler
distilling_plant
eductor
ejector
evaporator
exhaust_gas_boiler
filter
air_Jilter
catalytic_filter
chlorine_filter
drying_filter
fueUilter
galley _ventilation_filter
ion_exchange_filter
lube_oil_filter
magnetic_filter
softening_Jilter
suction_filter
heat_ exchanger
cooler
after_cooler
air_cooler
brine_ cooler
fuel_ cooler
inter _cooler
oil_ cooler
water_cooler
economizer
heater
air_heater
brine_heater
fuel_heater
oil_heater
preheater
Class Description
a piece of equipment that is used in a part of a process
a device used for burning additional fuel
a unit designed for the maintenance of certain aspects of the environment
within a defined space to facilitate the function of that space; aspects
controlled include air temperature and motion, radiant heat level, moisture,
and concentration of pollutants such as dust, microorganisms, and gases
a pressurized device in which water is vaporized to steam by heat transferred
from a source of higher temperature
the part of a fluid- burning device at which the flame is produced
a device that uses chemicals to treat a fluid
a device designed to remove particles and aerosols from air
a heat transfer equipment consisting of an array of tubes into which the exhaust
steam from a steam engine is distributed and condensed by the circulation of
cooling water through the tubes
a pressure vessel in high-pressure steam systems that removes dissolved
gases, particulary oxygen, from boiler feed water in order to prevent boiler
tube corrosion
a device designed to keep free of ice or to remove ice
a device designed to reduce the amount of water vapor in the ambient
atmosphere
a vessel or process device for the removal of liquids from gases or solids by
the use of heat, absorbents, or adsorbents
a device used to separate mixed oil from water
a machine that distills fresh water from sea water
a jet pump that uses water as a motive force
a jet pump that uses steam or air as a motive force
a device in which liquid is changed to the vapor state by the addition of heat
a boiler that uses exhaust gas as a heating medium
a device through which a gas or liquid is passed in order to remove solids or
impurities
a filter that removes impurities from the air
a device that contains a catalyst capable of converting pollutants into harmless
or less harmful products
a filter that removes impurities using chlorine
a filter that removes impurities while accomplishing a drying process
a filter through which fuel is passed in order to remove solids or impurities
a filter that removes impurities from galley exhaust lurnes
a filter that removes impurities using the ion exchange principle
a filter through which lubrication oil is passed in order to remove solids
impurities
a filter that removes impurities using a magnetic field
a filter that removes impurities from water while softening it by removing or
trapping calcium and magnesium ions
a filter that removes impurities using a process involving suction
a device where two moving fluid streams exchange heat without mixing
a device, where two moving fluid streams exchange heat without mixing, used
to reduce the temperature of a fluid
a heat exchanger which cools air that has been compressed
to reduce the temperature of air
to reduce the temperature of brine
to reduce the temperature of fuel
a t1eat exchanger for cooling fluid between stages of a multistage compressor
to reduce temperature of lubricating oil
to reduce the temperature of the water
to warm flux gases to preheat feedwater
to increase the temperature of a fluid
to increase the temperature of air
to increase the temperature of brine
to increase the temperature of fuel
to increase temperature of lubricating oil
a device for preliminary heating of a material, substance, or fluid :11at will
further use or treatment
1714
Class
Code
31019030501
310190306
3101904
3101905
31020
31023
31024
31025
31026
31027
3i028
31029
a1oso
401
40101
40102
40103
40104
40105
40106
40107
40108
40109
40110
402
40201
4020101
4020102
4020103
4020104
40202
4020201
4020202
4020203
402020301
402020302
402020303
4020204
4020205
40203
4020301
4020302
4020303
4020304
402030401
402030402
402030403
402030404
4020305
4020306
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
fuel_preheater
water __heater
recuperator
regenerator
lubricator
precipitator
radiator
reheater
refrigeration_ unit
reverse __osmosis __equipment
sewage_treatment_unit
sterilizer
elementary _ _item
connecting __elementary __itern
bolt
bracket
chock
coupling
nut
pin
rod
screw
seal
structural_item
connector_elementary_item
electrical_ connector
electrical_ connector _cable_end
electrical_connector_plug
electrica!_connector_socket
electrical_ connector_ welded_ end
mechanical __connector
shaft_bearing_interlace
shaft_elementary_item_connection
shaft_ end
shaftjoumal
shaft_connection
piping_ connector
butt_piping_connector
flanged_piping_connector
flared __piping_connector
piping_item_encl
piping_item_flanged_end
piping_item_flared_end
piping_item_socketed_end
piping_item_welded_end
screwed_piping_ connector
socketed_piping_connector
Class Description
to increase the temperature of the fuel
to increase the water temperature
to transfer heat from combustion products to cool air
a device, where two moving fluid streams exchange heat without mixing, that is
using cool expanded gases to cool incoming compressed air
a furnace or other container in which materials are burned
a device used to apply lubricant
a unit designed for maintaining or restoring the quality of oil
a device that converts oxygen, 02, into ozone, 03, by subjecting the oxygen to
an electric-brush discharge
a device used to remove liquid droplets or solid particles from a gas in which
they are suspended
a device, unit, or surface that emits heat, primarily by radiation, to objects in the
space in which they are installed
a device in which heat is added to a fluid which has given up some of its
energy through a previous process
a unit designed for the cooling of a space or substance below the
environmental temperature
a piece of equipment that is used to convert sea water into fresh water via a
reverse-osmosic process
a unit used to separate, modify, remove, and destroy unwanted substances
carried by wastewater in solution or suspension
a device for sterilizing by dry heat, steam, or water
an elementary part of a mechanical or electrical complex
a part of a mechanical or electrical complex that is used for connecting
separate parts
a fastener having a threaded pin or rod with a head at one end, designed to be
inserted through holes in assembled parts and secured by a mated nut
a device, usually L-shaped, that is fastened to a structure and used to support
a component
a heavy metal or wood fitting with two inward curving jaws through which a
rope or cable can be run
a mechanical fastening device for connecting the ends of two shafts together
a small block of wood or metal that is designed to fit around or secure a bolt or
screw
a cylindrical piece of metal that is used in the fastening of two parts
a component used as a structural part that is usually subject to tensile stress
only
a fastener with continuous ribs on a cylindrical or conical shank and a slotted,
recessed, flat, or rounded head.
a component used to prevent leakage in fluid systems
a part of a ship structure or equipment casing
a part of a mechanical or electrical complex which is a connector
an electrical component used to connect mechanical products
an end part of an electrical cable that is used for connecting the cable to a
device
a male connector that is inserted into an electric socket
a female connector into which an electric plug is inserted
a connection that is made by applying heat to two metal components
a mechanical component used to unite mechanical products
a mechanical connection that is an interface between a shaft and a bearing
a mechanical connection that is between a shaft and another elementary item
a part of the shaft that is used for connecting the shaft to another device
a protruding rim used to attach one mechanical product to another
a specially cut end used to attach one mechanical product to another
the portion of a shaft that is machined in order to contact the bearing that
allows it to rotate
a mechanical connection that is between two shafts
a piping component used to connect two sections of piping together
a type of piping connection
an end part of the pipe that is used for connecting the pipe to another device
a protruding rim used to attach one mechanical product to another
a skirt shaped end used to attach one mechanical product to another
an opening to which a part is designed to attach one mechanical product to
another
1715
Class
Code
4020307
4020308
40204
4020401
4020402
4020403
4020404
4020405
4020406
4020407
4020408
403
40301
4030101
4030102
4030103
40302
40303
40304
40305
40306
4030601
4030602
4030603
4030604
4030605
4030606
4030607
4030608
4030609
4030610
40307
4030701
4030702
4030703
4030704
4030705
4030706
4030707
404
40401
40402
40403
40404
40405
40406
40407
40408
40409
40410
40411
40412
40413
F2446 - 04 {201 0)
Class Name
union_piping_connector
welded_piping_connector
structural_ connector
bed plate
elementary _item_ mounting
equipment_mounting
equipment_ support
hinge
insulation_attachment
locking_ device
pipe_support
control_elementary_item
control_ instrument
humistat
pressurestat
thermostat
detector
gauge
glass
indicator
meter
content_meter
flowrate_meter
power_meter
pressure_meter
purity_meter
salinity _meter
speed_ meter
temperature_meter
torsion_meter
viscosity _meter
sensor
flowrate_sensor
pressure_sensor
salinity_sensor
speed_ sensor
temperature_sensor
torque_sensor
viscosity_sensor
mechanical_ elementary _item
anti __slack_ device
balance._ weight
bearing_ element
brake_disc
brake_pad
combustion_ chamber
connecting_rod
crane jib
crankcase
crankshaft_ web
crosshead_pin
crutch
cylinder
Class Description
a device used to connect structural components
a platform functioning as a base or support for a machine
a type of structural connection
a joining device on which an attached part swings
a device which prevents something from being opened
a part of a mechanical or electrical complex that controls the functions of a
mechanical product
an instrument which measures changes and directly or indirectly controls the
sources affecting these changes
an instrument which measures changes in humidity and directly or indirectly
controls the sources affecting humidity to maintain a desired value
an instrument which measures changes in pressure and directly or indirectly
controls the sources affecting this pressure to maintain a desired value
an instrument which measures changes in temperature and directly or indirectly
controls sources of heating and cooling to maintain a desired temperature
a device used to detect the presence of an object, radiation, chemical
compound, or such
control used in control and instrumentation systems for observing
a
a shapes for product parts, such as a gauge glass
an used to provide a measurement
a device for measuring the value of a quantity under observation
a device for measuring content
a device for measuring flowrate
a device for measuring power
a device for measuring pressure
a device for measuring purity
a device for measuring salinity
a device for measuring speed
a device for measuring temperature
a device for measuring torsion
a device for measuring viscosity
a device that detects and responds to a signal or stimulus
a device that detects and responds to a signal or stimulus for measuring the
flow of a fluid
device that detects and responds to a signal or stimulus for measuring fluid
pressure
a device that detects and responds to a signal or stimulus for measuring salinity
rate of motion
degree of hot and cold
a device that detects and responds to a signal or stimulus for measuring torque
viscosity of a fluid
a type of elementary item that is mechanical
a device designed to control looseness or play in a mechanism
lumped mass of material added to a rotating shaft or component to counteract
forces that cause disproportion and vibration
a surface within a bearing that supports a rotating load
a disc attached to a rotating axle or against the inner surfaces of a rotating
housing and pressed against another disk or a pad attached to the fixed
frame of a braking device
a component that provides lining on its outside surface that comes into frictional
contact with a brake disk
a chamber in which a fuel is burned to release energy
a cylindrical bar that connects a piston or crosshead to the crankshaft in
rAr.inrrlr.::.tinn pump or engine
an extension is hinged to the upper end of a crane boom
a box-like casing enclosing the crankshaft and connecting rods of reciprocating
such as diesel engines and reciprocating pumps
an area a web, usually a flat, rectangular section, connecting the crankshaft
to a shaft
a supported in the crosshead for the small end bearing of a connecting
rod
a forked support
a cylindrical chamber in which the combustion energy of the fuel is converted to
increased fluid pressure
1716
Class
Code
40414
40415
40416
40417
40418
4041801
4041802
4041803
4041804
40419
40420
40421
40422
40423
40424
40425
40426
40427
40428
405
40501
40502
40503
40504
40505
40506
40507
40508
40509
4050901
4050902
40510
40511
40512
40513
40514
4051401
4051402
4051403
4051404
40515
40516
406
40601
4060101
4060102
40602
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
cylinder _liner
diffuser
equipment_ casing
inducer
injector
air_injector
fuel_injector
steam_injector
water _injector
nozzle
piston
ring
rocker_ arm
rudder
shaft_brake
spring
stabilizer
tension_rod
valve_cage
piping_ elementary _item
air_cowl
bypass
diaphragm
drain
duct
expansion_chamber
expansion joint
fitting
manifold
exhaust_manifold
intake_manifold
overflow
pipe
receiver
trap
tube
boiler_tube
condenser_tube
heat_ exchanger _tube
stern_tube
tunnel
vent
process_elementary _item
arrester
flame_arrester
spark_arrester
coil
Class Description
a hollow cylindrical casting made of special material that is fixed to internal
walls of a cylinder to provide resistance against friction
a duct, chamber, or section in which a high-velocity, low-pressure stream of fluid
is converted into a high-velocity, high-pressure flow
a protective covering that encloses equipment, separating its internal
components from a surrounding environment
a device that induces the pre-determined motion of a fluid
a device containing a nozzle in an actuating fluid which is accelerated and thus
entrains a second fluid, so delivering the mixture against a pressure in
excess of the actuating fluid
a device that sprays air into a volume
a device that sprays fuel into an engine cylinder
a device that sprays steam into a volume
a device that sprays water into a volume
a conduit with a variable cross-sectional area in which a fluid accelerates into a
high-velocity stream
a circular section component that acts as the working part of reciprocating
machinery such as diesel engines and reciprocating pumps
a sealing ring fitted around a piston and extending to the cylinder wall to
prevent leakage
a lever that is pivoted near its center and operated by a pushrod at one end
a flat piece of wood or metal that is attached vertically to the stern of a ship and
controls a ship's direction
a device designed to slow or stop the rotation of a shaft by the use of friction
an elastic, stressed, stored-energy element that, when released, will recover its
basic form or position.
a device which is designed to prevent imbalances
a structural component that is subjected to only tensile stress
an enclosing structure within a reciprocating engine that houses all the
components of a valve
a part primarily made of piping elements which is used with other mechanical
products to create a whole system
a chimney covering designed to improve the draft
an alternating, diversionary flow path in a fluid system
an opening, sometimes adjustable in size, which is used to control the flow of a
fluid
a device which carries off a fluid
a pipe used to allow for passage of a fluid
a volume designed for the expansion of a fluid
a joint that expands the use and connection of one or more pipes in a piping
system
a small part that is used to join or adapt to other parts
a branch pipe arrangement that collects a fluid
a pipe or chamber that has multiple openings to allow passage of exhaust
gases from the exhaust valves of a reciprocating engine to the atmosphere
a pipe or chamber that has multiple openings to allow passage of air from the
atmosphere to the cylinder of an engine
a device that conducts excess fluid from a conduit or container
a hollow cylinder for conveying a fluid or gas
a vessel, container, or tank used to receive and collect a fluid from a process
unit
a sealed passage in a pipe or pump that prevents the return flow of liquid or
gas
a long cylindrical body with a hollow center used especially to convey fluid
a tube in a boiler that carries water to be heated by the high-temperature
gaseous products of combustion or that carries combustion products to heat
the boiler water that surrounds them
a tube in a condenser that carries one of the two fluids involved in condensing
process
a tube in a heat exchanger that carries one of the two fluids involved in the
heat exchange process
a long, circular device which supports the propeller shaft where it emerges from
the stern of a ship
a tubal passage through a barrier
a piping component for providing airflow to or from a drainage system or for
circulating air within the system to protect trap seals from siphonage and
back pressure
an elementary item that is used in a part of a process
a device which prevents sparks or burning material from escaping
an assembly of screens, perforated plates, or metal-gauze packing attached to
the breather vent on a flammable-product storage tank.
a device that prevents the escape of sparks from an area
a device in a container which brings a fluid to a suitable viscosity
1717
Class
Code
4060201
4060202
40603
40604
407
40701
4070101
4070102
4070103
4070104
4070105
40702
40703
40704
40705
40706
40707
40708
40709
40710
40711
40712
40713
40714
40715
40716
40717
40718
40719
6
601
60101
60102
60103
60104
60105
602
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
cooling_ coil
heating_ coil
membrane
strainer
rotating_elementary_item
bearing
big_end_bearing
crank_pin_bearing
cross __head_bearing
journal_bearing
small_end_bearing
belt
blade
camshaft
capstan
chain
crank_ shaft
drum
fan
flywheel
gear_stage
gear_wheel
impeller
laundry _tumbler
rotor
shaft
tensioner
turning_gear
wheel
software
software_suite
business __solutions_software
entertainment_ software
industry _specific __software
system_and_infrastructure_software
web_and_application_development software
software_application
Class Description
a device in a container which brings a fluid to a suitable viscosity through a
cooling process
a device in a container which brings a fluid to a suitable viscosity through a
heating process
a medium through which a fluid stream is passed for purposes of filtration
a porous or screen medium used ahead of equipment to filter out harmful solid
objects and particles from a fluid stream
a type of mechanical elementary item that moves in a circular motion
a mechanical device for supporting a rotating load
a journal bearing by which the connecting rod is attached to the crank pin on
the crankshaft
a crank pin bearing of a diesel engine
a cross head of a diesel engine
a type of journal bearing
a journal bearing by which the connecting rod is attached to the crosshead pin
or the gudgeon pin
a flexible band used to connect pulleys or to convey materials by transmitting
motion and power
a broad, flat arm of a fan, turbine, or propeller
a rotating shaft to which a number of cams are fastened and used to actuate
the fuel pump or cylinder valves
a rotating vertical spindle-mounted drum on which cable is wound for raising an
anchor or other heavy weight
a flexible series of metal links or rings fitted into one another; used for
supporting, restraining, dragging, or lifting objects or transmitting power
a structure composed of a series of throws offset at angles from each other
around the central axis
a cylindrical machine or mechanical device
a device for producing currents in order to circulate, exhaust, or deliver large
volumes of air or gas
a heavy wheel for opposing and moderating by its inertia any fluctuation of
speed in the machinery with which it revolves
a pair of toothed wheels mounted on different shafts
a disc with external or internal teeth, which forms one half of a gear stag(3
a shaft-mounted component that rotates within a stationary casing and transfers
energy to a fluid
a device or mechanism in which clothes are tumbled as part of a washing or
drying process
the rotating member of an electrical machine or device
a circular section beam transmitting rotary motion between its driven end and
load
a device that controls the tension of a rotating element
a gear driven unit used to rotate the propulsion system for inspection,
maintenance, star-up and shutdown procedures
a circular frame with a hub at the center for attachment to an axle, about which
it revolves and bear a load
a program or series of programs, procedures, and documents usable on
particular kind of computer.
a suite of programs, procedures, and documents usable on a particular kind of
computer. A software suite includes multiple program executables packaged
together tor distribution under a global name and sometimes a unique version
identifier.
a software suite that is used for the operation and management of a business
and that is not specifically designed for a branch of the industry. Examples
include human resources software, accounting and finance software,
business intelligence, customer service, engineering, logistics and
procurement, manufacturing and process management, project management,
sales and marketing, and so forth.
a suite of software applications designed for amusement and enjoyment.
a software suite that is specifically used a particular branch of the
and defense, automotive, banking,
and government, healthcare, insurance,
malnutactur1ng industry, pharmaceutical industry, real estate,
transportation and utilities, and so forth.
a suite of software applications whose is to and
coordinate the operation and resources a computer as well as data
storage, transmission and interconnectivity with other computers and
hardware devices. Examples include operating systems, database software,
networking and communications software, web services, middleware, security
software, servers, and so forth.
a suite of software applications used to create other software applications.
a program usable on a particular kind of computer and its associated
procedures and documentations. When distributed as part of a suite, a
software application is the lowest component of a software package with its
own marketable name and version identifiers.
1718
Class
Code
60201
60202
60203
6020E:i
60206
60211
602.110'!
602110202
602110203
602110204
602110205
6021104
602'12
60213
60214
60217
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Class Name
application __server
artificial __intelligence __and __expert__system
compiler_and_development_software
harbour _moni!orin!J .. soHware
digital._charting
gps_software
passage __planninq __soltware
route_plotter
tide ___and_current_software
weather __ software
hardware_driver
industry __specific __software_application
infrastructure _application
manufacturinn_software_application
middleware
modeling_and __simulation_software
office __too!
Class Description
a middle-tier software product within a server architecture providing middleware
services for security and state maintenance, along with data access and
persistence.
a computerized software application that performs specialized tasks that would
normally require or exceed human intelligence.
a software application used to support operations, management, and decision-
making functions within a business organization. Examples include
maintenance and life cycle management, facilities management, financial
tools, human resources applications, marketing and sales management,
contract, order and procurement applications, project management and
planning, accounting, and so forth.
a software application that is responsible for the management of external and
internal communication channels. Examples include communication servers,
telephony servers, email servers, network servers, and so forth.
a software application used to create other software applications. Examples
include language compilers, application development toois, \Neb authoring
and applications, and so forth.
a software application used to produce detailed engineering
and instructions through the creation of geometric models to
communicate design or manufacturing information, or both. Examples include
;:mclinf;Arina. design, and drafting applications.
application that orders, limits, instructs or rules a process.
of interrelated data items along with a set ol software applications used
store, disseminate, and manage the data, also called database system, or
database.
software application used for the process of learning skills.
a software application designed for amusement and enjoyment.
a software application used to capture, store, retrieve, analyze, and
spatial data, localization, and geographical information. Examples
navigation, tide and current applications.
a software application that provides a visual representation of port facilities and
traffic.
a software application used to manage all or certain aspects of vessel
navigation.
a software application used to display or plot charts, or both.
a software application used to receive, display, transmit, or process data, or any
combination thereof from the Global Positioning System (GPS).
a software application used to plan the route of a vessel including position,
course, distance and timing calculations.
a software application used to visualize the route of a vesseL
a software application used to visualize or predict, or both tides and tidal
currents.
a software application whose primary function is to process radar data.
a software application used to visualize or forecast, or both weather conditions.
a software application used as an interface for communication with a piece of
hardware.
a software application that is specifically used by a particular branch of the
industry.
a software application used for the interconnection of users, computers, and
other hardware tools including telephone lines, cable television lines,
satellites, antennas, routers, aggregators, repeaters, and other devices that
control data transmission. Infrastructure software are concerned with sending,
receiving, and managing the signals that are transmitted.
a software application used as part of a process resulting in the production of
goods.
a software application used to mediate between two separate programs.
a software application used for numerical representation or schematization.
a generic, usually non specialized, software application used for regular office
tasks. Examples include spreadsheet applications, word processing, imaging,
internet browsers, presentation tools, email and newsgroup processing tools,
conferencing and live communication tools, and so forth.
a software application that is responsible for the management and coordination
of activities and the sharing of the resources of a computer.
an operating system that is not installed on top of another operating system.
system that is installed on top of another operating system.
a application whose primary function is to perform computerized
mathematical calculations.
a software application that protects access to data, software, middleware and
hardware. Examples include scripting tools, anti virus applications, firewall
and so forth.
1719
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE A1.3 List of Properties for Identification and RAM Data
Property Name Property Description Data Type Required
p_00001 acquisition_ code the item acquisition code String No
p __00002 availability the probability that an item is in a state to perform a required function under Numeric No
given conditions at a given instant of time, assuming that the required
external resources are provided
p_00003 availabi lily _definition the description of the method used to calculate availability String No
p_00004 call_ sign the unique lifecycle identifier assigned to the ship by the flag state for radio String No
communication
p __00005 date_ship_placed_in_service the date when the ship first went into service Date No
p_00006 dependability the collective term used to describe the availability performance and its Numeric No
influencing factors: reliability performance, maintainability performance and
maintenance support performance
p_00007 dependability _definition the description of the method used to calculate dependability String No
p_OOOOS failure_rate the limit if the ratio of the conditional probability that the instant of time of a Numeric No
failure of an item falls within a given time interval and the length of this
interval given that the item is in an up state at the beginning of the time
interval
p_00009 failure_rate_definition the description of the method used to calculate failure_rate String No
p_00010 flag_ state the national authority with whom the ship is registered String No
p __00011 generic_identifier the item generic identifier String Yes
p_00012 generic_purnp_type the kind of generic pump String No
p_00013 maintainability the probability that a given active maintenance action, for an item under Numeric No
conditions of use can be carried out within a stated time interval, when
maintenance is performed under stated conditions and using stated
procedures and resources
p __00014 maintainability _definition the description of the method used to calculate maintainability String No
p_00015 manufacturer _country _code the international country code of the manufacturer String Yes
p_00016 manufacturer _name the name of the manufacturer String No
p_00017 manufacturer_national_identifier the national business ID of the manufacturer String Yes
p_00018 mean_logistic_delay the expectation of the logistic delay Numeric No
p_00019 mean_logistic_delay_definition the description of the method used to calculate mean_logistic_delay String No
p_00020 mean_maintenance_man_hour the expectation of the maintenance man-hours Numeric No
p_0002i mean_maintenance_man_hour_ the description of the method used to calculate mean_maintenance_man_hour String No
definition
p_00022 mean_time_between_failures the expectation of the time between failures Numeric No
p_00023 mean_time_between_failures_ the description of the method used to calculate mean_time_between_failures String No
definition
p_00024 mean_time_between_predictive_ the expectation of the time between predictive maintenance actions Numeric No
maintenance
p_00025 mean_time_between_predictive_ the description of the method used to calculate mean_lime_between_predictive String No
maintenance_definition
-
maintenance
p_00026 mean_time_to_repair the expectation of the time to restoration Numeric No
p_00027 mean_time_to_repair_definition the description of the method used to calculate mean_time_to_repair String No
p_00028 model __ number the manufacturer model number String Yes
p_00029 modeUype the manufacturer model type String Yes
p_00030 parent_identifers the complete sequence of the generic identifiers of the item's parents String Array Yes
p_00031 parent_unique_identifier the unique identifier of the parent item (equipment or system) String Yes
p __00032 port_of_registration the national home port of the ship String No
p_00033 reliability the probability that an item can perform a required function under given Numeric No
conditions for a given time interval (t1, t2). It is generally assumed that the
item is in a state to perform this required function at the beginning of the time
interval.
p_00034 reliability _definition the description of the method used to calculate reliability String No
p_00035 serial_number the manufacturer serial number String No
p_00036 ship_classifier the details of the classification society under which the ship is currently placed String No
p_00037 ship_IMO_number the ship lMO number or unique identifier Numeric Yes
p_00038 ship_location the type of ship spaces/locations, within which the product is positioned String No
p_00039 ship_name the owner assigned identifier of the ship String No
p_00040 ship_operator the details of the current operator of the ship String
p_00041 ship_owner the details of the current owner of the ship String No
p_00042 ship_type the kind of ship String Yes
p_00043 unique_identifier the item unique identifier String Yes
p_00044 version_number the primary identification number in the life cycle of a software product String
p_00045 release_number the identification number of a software product used to distinguish a minor String No
variant of a version with specific features and functionality
p_00046 build_number the number that identifies a specific executable version of a software product String No
p_00047 associated_ system the list of unique identifiers of all that use the software product String Array
p __00048 associated_ equipment the list of unique identifiers of all of equipment that use the software String Array No
product
the identification number of a software used for its No
1720
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
Property Name Property Description
p_00050 original_equipment_manufacturer An OEM part is a part that is designed specified and physical
Product Type
Ship
System
Equipment
Elementary Item
Software
prvperties) and manufactured by the OEM. It includes a repair kit or
overhaul kit (which is all the parts needed to perform a repair or overhaul of a
machine or piece of equipment) which includes OEM parts and purchased
finished parts. All of the parts in the kit are specified by the OEM, but not all
the parts are manufactured by the OEM. Examples of purchased finished
parts in a kit include ball bearings, seals, o-rings. The part could be designed
and specified by the OEM, and be manufactured by a sub contractor to the
OEM, and still be an OEM part.
TABLE A1.4 Identification Requirements for RAM Data Exchange
ship_IMO_number
ship_type
generic_identifier
parent_identifers
parent_unique_identifier
unique _identifier
generic_identifier
manufacturer _country _code
manufacturer _national_identifier
model_number
model_ type
parent_identifers
unique_identifier
generic_identifier
manufacturer _country_ code
manufacturer_national_identifier
model_number
model_ type
parent_identifers
unique_identifier
gt>neric_identifier
manufacturer _national_identifier
parent_identifers
unique_identifier
version_number
1721
Required Properties
Data Type Required
String No
Ship
Systems
Equipment
0 F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE A1.5 list of Properties by Product Type
call_sign
date_ship_placed_in_service
flag_ state
port_ of _registration
ship_classifier
ship_IMO_number
ship_name
ship_ operator
ship_owner
ship_type
acquisition_ code
availability
availability _definition
dependability
dependability_ definition
failure_rate
failure_rate_definition
generic_identifier
maintainability
maintainability __definition
mean_logistic_delay
mean_ logistic_ delay_ definition
mean_maintenance_man_hour
mean_maintenance_man_hour _definition
mean_time_between_failures
mean_time_between_failures __definition
mean_time_between_predictive_maintenance
mean_time_between_predictive_maintenance_definition
mean __time_to_repair
mean_time_to_repair_definition
parent_identifers
reliability
reliability __definition
serial_number
ship_location
unique_identifier
acquisition_code
availability
availability_ definition
dependability
dependability __ definition
failure_rate
failure _rate_ definition
generic_identifier
maintainability
maintainability __definition
manufacturer_country __code
manufacturer _name
manufacturer _national_ identifier
mean_logistic_delay
mean_logistic __delay _definition
rnean_maintenance __man_ hour _definition
mean_time_between_failures
rnean_time_between_failures_definition
mean_time __between_predictive_maintenance
mean_time_between_predictive_maintenance_definition
mean_time_to_repair
mean_time_to_repair_definition
model_number
model_type
parent_identifers
reliability
reliability_ definition
serial __nurnber
1722
Elementary Items
Software
F2446 - 04 (201 0)
acquisition_ code
availability
dependability
dependability _definition
failure_rate
failure_rate __definition
generic_identifier
maintainability
maintainability _definition
manufacturer __country _code
manufacturer_name
manufacturer__national_identifier
mean_logistic_delay
mean_logistic __delay _definition
mean_maintenance_man_hour_definition
mean_ time _between_failures
mean __time_between_failures_definition
mean ___time __between_predictive_maintenance
mean _ _time_between_predictive_maintenance_definition
mean _ _time _ _to_repair
mean_Jime _ _to_repair_definition
model ___number
modeUype
reliability
reliability _definition
serial_number
ship_location
unique_identifier
acquisition_code
associated_ equipment
associated_system
availability
build ___number
dependability
dependability_ definition
failure __rate
failure_rate_definition
generic_identitier
maintainability
maintainability_ definition
manufacturer_name
manufacturer_national_identifier
mean_logistic_delay
mean_iogistic_delay_ definition
mean __ maintenance_man_hour_definition
mean_time_between _ _faiiures
rnean _ _time_between_failures_definition
mean_time_between_predictive_maintenance
mean _ _time __between_predictive_maintenance_definition
mean_time_to _ _repair
mean_time_to_repair _definition
parent_identifers
parent_ unique __identifier
product_registration __id
release __number
reliability
reliability _definition
seriai_number
1723
F2446 - 04 {201 0)
APPENDIX
Xl. MECHANISM FOR PRIVATE DATA EXCHANGE
Xl.l Definitions
X 1.1. 1 Private data exchange will be based on the definition
of custom classes to be used by organizations willing to extend
the standard class library for the exchange of data within a
group of standard implementers. This process will be based on
the definition of extended properties as shown in Table X 1.1.
X1.1.2 The data to be exchanged will include the above
information in addition to the standard list of properties. The
extended class definitions will only be required for new custom
classes. It will not be necessary to include the complete set of
extended class definitions in each data exchange, although
standard implementers will be free to choose this option. New
members joining a private data exchange group will need to be
sent all extended class definitions.
X1.1.3 The following rules are to be used for the definition
of custom codes:
Xl.1.3.1 All custom class codes must start with 5.
Xl.1.3.2 The next digits must correspond to the custom
class code of the parent in the class hierarchy.
X1.1.3.3 The last digits must uniquely identify the custom
class within the entire extended hierarchy. If there are less than
100 items on a specific level, two digits are used to uniquely
identify each item, starting with 01. If there are more than 100
items on a specific level, four digits are used to uniquely
identify each item, starting with 0001. When the unique
identifiers below a particular custom class include at least one
item whose first two digits are 00, it means that the level below
this particular custom class uses 4 digits for unique identifica-
tion. Another two digits can be added for the unique identifiers
of a particular level if this level includes more than 10 000
items and so on.
X1.2 Sample Case
X1.2.1 It is assumed that a private group wishes to exchange
RAM data for the following items:
X1.2.1.1 Helicopter landing lights,
Xl.2.1.2 Helicopter signal lights, and
X1.2.1.3 Steam propulsion plant.
X1.2.2 and helicopter signal lights
of equipment of the type "signal
lights" that belong to a system named "helicopter landing
system." The steam propulsion plant is to be added under an
existing item of the standard class library, the propulsion_
system whose class code is 225.
Xl.2.3 Tables Xl.2-Xl.6 provide examples of the proper-
ties required for the definition of extended classes. It is
provided for illustration purpose only and is not an attempt at
defining an actual class extension.
X1.3 Summary
Xl.3.1 The data shown in Table Xl.7 must be exchanged to
define all custom classes.
TABLE X1.1 Extended Properties for the Definition of Custom Classes
Property Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_definition
p_custom_level
p_custom __parent
Property Value Property Description
Unique code of the extended class item All custom class codes must start with 5. The next
digits must correspond to the custom class code
of the parent in the class hierarchy. The last
digits uniquely identify the custom class within
the class hierarchy.
Unique name of the extended class item All custom class names must start with "custom_."
The remaining portion of the name must be
unique.
Definition of the extended class item A narrative description of the custom class.
The product type of the extended class item This property can only .take the following 4 values:
2 (for systems)
3 (for equipment)
4 (for elementary items)
6 (for software)
The extended class level will be used to define the
standard properties to be exchanged, which
depend on the product type.
The class code or class name of the parent in The parent in the class hierarchy in some
the class hierarchy instances is another custom class or an existing
standard class. It can be identified with either its
code or its name, since both of them are unique.
1724
Required
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_
definition
p_custom_level
p_custom_parent
Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_
definition
p_custom_level
p_custom_parent
Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_
definition
p_custom_level
p_custom_parent
0 F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE X1.2 Definition of Helicopter Landing System
Value
5235
custom_helicopter_landing_system
a system that includes all equipment used in landing
helicopters aboard ship
2
system OR 2
Comment
the custom class codes must start with 5. The first digits
must correspond to the custom class code of the parent
in the class hierarchy. In this example, helicopter landing
system is added directly under system, whose code is 2.
The last two digits uniquely identify the custom class
within the class hierarchy. The standard hierarchy under
2 ends with 234, so the last two digits can be any
number between 35 and 99 (35 was chosen in this
example)
all custom class names must start with "custom_."
custom level must be 2 because a system is being defined.
This indicates that the properties to be exchanged are
the standard properties defined for systems.
the parent in the class hierarchy is the standard system
class whose code is 2.
TABLE X1.3 Definition of Signal lights
Value
5311
custom_signaUights
equipment used to provide visual information to other
personnel on the condition of a piece of equipment or
process/procedure
3
equipment OR 3
Comment
in the class hierarchy. In this example, signal lights are
added directly under equipment, whose code is 3. The
last two digits uniquely identify the custom class within
the class hierarchy. The standard hierarchy under 3 ends
with 310, so the last two digits can be any number
between 11 and 99 (11 was chosen in this example)
custom level must be 3 because a piece of equipment is
being defined. This indicates that the properties to be
exchanged are the standard properties defined for pieces
of equipment.
the parent in the class hierarchy is the standard equipment
TABLE X1.4 Definition of Helicopter Landing lights
Value
531101
custom_helicopter_landing_lights
lighting that marks the specific outline of the landing
surface
3
signal lights OR 5311
1725
Comment
in the class hierarchy. In this example, helicopter landing
lights are added under signal lights, whose code is 5311.
within the class hierarchy, it can be any number between
01 and 99 (01 was chosen in this example)
of equipment.
the parent in the class hierarchy is the extended signal
lights class whose code is 5311.
Property Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_
definition
p_custom_level
p_custom_parent
Code
p_custom_code
p_custom_name
p_custom_
definition
p_custom _ _level
p __custom_parent
5235
5311
531101
531102
522503
0 F2446 - 04 (201 0)
TABLE X1.5 Definition of Helicopter Signal lights
Property Value
531102
custom_helicopter_signal_lights
lighting that is used to signal the helicopter pilot on the
condition of approach to the landing surface
3
signal lights OR 5311
Comment
in the class hierarchy. In this example, helicopter signal
lights are added under signal lights, whose code is 5311.
within the class hierarchy. 01 is reserved for torpedoes. It
can be any number between 02 and 99 (02 was chosen
in this example)
of equipment.
the in the class hierarchy is the extended signal
class whose code is 5311 .
TABLE X1.6 Definition of Steam Propulsion Plant
Value
522503
custom_steam_propulsion_plant
a propulsion plant driven by steam generated by a
combustion boiler
2
propulsion_system OR 225
Comment
in the class hierarchy. In this example, weapon system is
added under propulsion_system, whose code is 225. The
last two digits uniquely identify the custom class within
the class hierarchy. The standard hierarchy under 225
ends with 22502, so the last two digits can be any
number between 03 and 99 (03 was chosen in this
example)
custom level must be 2 because a system is being defined.
This indicates that the properties to be exchanged are
the standard properties defined for systems.
the parent in the class hierarchy is the standard propulsion
TABLE X1.7 Custom Classes Data
custom_helicopter _landing a system that includes all equipment used in landing 2 2
_system helicopters aboard ship
custom_signaUights equipment used to provide visual information to other 3 3
personnel on the condition of a piece of equipment or
process/procedure
custom_helicopter _landing lighting that marks the specific outline of the landing 3 5311
_lights surface
custom __ helicopter _signal_ lighting that is used to signal the helicopter pilot on the 3 5311
lights condition of approach to the landing surface
custom_steam_propulsion_ a propulsion plant driven by steam generated by a 2 225
combustion boiler
COPYRIGHT!).
1726
& Designation: F2798- 09
.. ual
7
INTERNATIONAL
Sealless Lube Oil Pump with Oil Through Motor for Marine
Applications
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification defines the requirements applicable to
design, construction and testing of sealless, positive
displacement pumps with oil-through motors for lubricat-
ing oil service. The complete pump and motor assembly is
referred to as canned lube oil pump (CLP). This specification
CLPs oil a of 20-50.
1.2 This standard does not purport
safety concerns, if any, associated use. It is the
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
A27 I A27M Specification for Steel Carbon, for
General Application
A 159 Specification for Automotive Gray Iron
A 193/ A 193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
A 194/ A 194M Specification for Carbon and AHoy Stee 1 Nuts
for Bolts for Pressure or Temperature Service,
or Both
A216/A216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon. Suit-
A395/A395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron
..._, ... ,,,1"fS' for Use at Elevated Tempera-
tures
A449 :Specinc:ltlcm for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,
SteeL Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
:Spec1it1catlon for Ductile Iron '-'"''""''""'o
:SpecJihcatton for Carbon and
and Marine 'lf>.r:hm,lncv
junisdictlcon of ASTM Committee on Ships
responsibility of Subcommittee F25.ll on
Current edition Oct. 1, 2009. Published November 2009.
2
For referenced standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at serviee@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
the ASTM website.
A564/ A564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Finished /
1
.gc-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
A574 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Screws
A582/A582M Specification for Free-Machining Stainless
Steel Bars
B23 Specification for White Metal Bearing Alloys (Known
Commercially as "Babbitt Metal")
B148 Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand '1../U><HlF,c'
B 152/B 152M Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate,
and Rolled Bar
B187M Specification for Copper Bar, Bus Bar, Rod and
[Metric] (Withdrawn 2002?
B27l Specif1cation for Copper-Base Alloy Centrifugal Cast-
ings
B505/B505M Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous
Castings
motive Applications
F912 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket Set Screws
F1510 Specification for Rotary Positive
Pumps, Ships Use
2.2 ASMEIANSI Standard:
4
ASME/ ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged
2.3 Hydraulic Institute Standard:
5
ANSI/HI 3.6 Rotary Pump Tests
2.4 AISI Standards:
6
1018 Carbon Steel
1 045 Carbon Steel
1141 Carbon Steel
1144 Carbon Steel
4140 Chromium-molybdenum steel
3
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASMI::
www.asme.org.
5
Available from Hydraulic Institute, 6 Campus Drive, First Floor North,
Parsippany NJ 07054-4406
6
Available from American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), 1140 Connecticu;
Ave., NW, Suite 705, Washington, DC 20036, http://www.steel.org.
1727
F2798-09
4150 Chromium-molybdenum steel
4340 Nickel-chromium-molybdenum steel
2.5 AlA Standard:
7
NASM 17829
2.6 API Standard:
8
API Standard 676 Positive Displacement Pumps-Rolary
3. Terminology
3.2 canned lube oil pump unit-a unit, which when as-
sembled as a pump and motor, is completely sealed from
leakage to the environment. Lubrication and cooling of motor
bearings and primary cooling of motor windings and insulation
are achieved by circulating a portion of the fluid being pumped
(oil) through the motor.
3.3 capacity-the quantity of fluid actually delivered per
unit of time at the rated speed, including both the liquid and
In the absence of any gas or vapor entering or forming within
the pump, the capacity is equal to the volume displaced per unit
of time, less slip, motor bearing lubrication and motor cooling
flows.
3.4 displacement-the volume of fluid displaced per revo-
lution of the rotor(s).
3.5 rated condition point-the required capacity at speed,
pressure, viscosity and power as specified by the purchaser.
3.6 slip-the quantity of fluid that leaks through internal
clearances of a pump per unit of time.
4. Classification
4.1 Pumps will be classified as follows:
4.1.1 Type li-Screws with timing gears
4.1.2 Type Ill-Screws without timing gears
4 .1. 3 Type X-Vane (sliding)
4.1.4 Type XI-Sliding shoe
4.2 Motor Types: Oil-through type that uses the oil to cool
the motor and lubricate the bearings.
5.1 The ordering activity shall provide manufacturers with
the following information:
5.1.1 Title, name and date of specification
5.1.2 Type and size (see Section 4)
5.1.3 Oil to be pumped (for example, 2190 TEP SAE 40)
5.1.4 Operating Conditions: Single speed, two-speed, or
variable speed. (See 9.1.)
5.1.5 Capacity in gallons per minute or litres per minute at
rated discharge pressure at specified operating condition.
5.1.6 Discharge pressure in pound-force per square inch
gauge (psig) or kilopascal (kPa) gauge at specified operating
condition.
5.1.7 Inlet pressure conditions (NPIPA)
7
Available from Aerospace Industries Association of America, Inc. (AIA), 1000
Wilson Blvd., Suite 1700, Arlington, VA 22209-3928, http://www.aia-aerospace.org.
8
Available from American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L. St., NW,
Washington, DC 20005-4070, http://www.api.org.
1728
5.1.8 Oil Viscosity and temperature for minimum and maxi-
mum operating conditions.
5.1.9 External motor cooling oil supply, if required. (See
9.4.)
5.1.10 Mounting configuration (vertical, horizontal).
5.1.11 Relief valve cracking pressure. (See 9.1.)
5.1.12 Airborne noise level (if different than 7.4).
5.1.13 Packaging and boxing requirements (immediate use,
domestic; storage, domestic; or overseas)
5.1.14 Quantity of pumps.
5.1.15 Quantity of drawings.
5.1.16 Quantity of technical manuals.
5.1.17 Quantity of test reports, if required. (See Section 10.)
5.1.18 Certified test data, if required. (See 10.3.)
5.1.19 lACS (International Association of Classification
Societies) classification with applicable notions, if required.
5.1.20 Motor Characteristics:
5.1.20.1 Voltage/phase/frequency
5.1.20.2 Duty-Continuous
5.1.20.3 Ambient Temperature-50C
5.1.20.4 enclosed, oil through.
5.1.20.5 Insulation-Class F, (vacuum pressure impregna-
tion (VPI))
5.1.20.6 Conduit box orientation. (See 7.6.)
6. Material
6.1 Materials of principal pump components shall be in
6.1.1 Materials other than shown in Table 1 are considered
usage
6.2 Materials of principal motor components shall be in
6.2.1 Materials other than shown in Table 2 are considered
usage.
7.1 CLPs shall be capable of sustained operation during
7.2 CLPs shall be capable of withstanding external vibration
in the frequency range of 4 to 25 Hz.
7.3 The internally excited vibration levels (displacement,
peak to peak) of the CLP shall not exceed the following:
RPM (SYN)
1800
1200
900
600
Displacement, Peak to Peak,
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.6
7.4 At normal operating conditions, the airborne noise level
of the pump shall not exceed 85 dBA.
7.5 CLPs shall be designed such that no damage will result
from reverse rotations of at least a one-minute duration with no
restriction in flow of oil to or from the CLP.
7.6 Unless otherwise specified, vertical CLPs shall be as-
sembled with the conduit box mounted over the pump outlet
F2798-09
TABLE 1 Materials of Principal Pump Components
Application
Casings, Covers (Pressure Boundary)
Rotor(s), Shaft(s)
Rotor Housings or Cylinder Liners, Bushings, Thrust Elements, Discs
Hex Head Cap Screws
Hex Socket Head Cap Screws
Hex Nuts
Hex Nuts, Sit Lkg
Socket Set Screws
Studs
0-Rings
Material
Nodular Iron
Bronze
Cast Steel
Aluminum Bronze
Alloy Steel
Gray Iron
Nodular Iron
Carbon Steel
Bronze
Stainless Steel
Bronze
Gray Iron
Steel/Babbitt
Aluminum Bronze
Steel
Alloy Steel
Steel
Alloy Steel
Steel, Zn Plated
Alloy Steel
Alloy Steel
Fluorocarbon
Specification
ASTM A395/A395M, GR. 60-40-18 or
ASTM A536, GR. 65-45-12
ASTM 8505/8505M, 8271, or 8584,
UNS C93200 or C93700
ASTM A27/A27M, GR. 65-35 or
ASTM A216/A216M, GR. WCB
ASTM 8148, UNS C95400
AISI 4150 RS or
AISI 4140-4150
ASTM A159, GR. G3500 or
continuous cast equivalents
ASTM A536, GR. 80-55-06 or
continuous cast equivalents
AISI 1045, 1141 or 1144
ASTM 8505/8505M, 8271 or 8584
UNS C93200 or C93700
ASTM A564/A564M, UNS S17400
ASTM A582/A582M, UNS S41600
ASTM 8505/8505M, 8271 or 8584, UNS C93200 or
C93700
ASTM Ai59, GR. G3500 or continuous cast equivalents
AISI C1018-12L15/ASTM 823, ALLOY 2
ASTM 8148, UNS C95400
ASTM A449, TYPE I or SAE J429, GR. 5
ASTM A574
ASTM A194/A194M, GR. 2H
ASTM A563, GR. DH or SAE GR. 8
NASM 17829 I MS17829
ASTM F912
ASTM A193/Ai93M, GR. B7
ASTM 02000, TV. HK
TABLE 2 Materials of Principal Motor Components
Application
Frame
Housings
Shaft
Ball Bearings
Bearing Caps
Shrink Ring
Rotor Bar
Material
Nodular Iron
Nodular Iron
Alloy Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Copper
Copper Rotor End Ring
Rotor Core Plate
Stator End Plate
Stator Core Plate
Elec. Sheet Steel
Steel
Hex Head Cap Screws
Elec. Sheet Steel
Steel
Hex Socket Head Cap Screws
Lock Washers
Alloy Steel
Steel
flange. Conduit box cable entrance shall be oriented
downward, unless otherwise specified. Horizontal pumps shall
specify orientation of conduit box.
7.7 The connection between the motor shaft and the pump
rotor shall be splined or consist of a rigid connection.
7.8 To facilitate and maintain alignment, the motor bracket
to pump joint shall be rabbetted.
7.9 Motor bracket to pump joint shall be o-ring sealed.
7.10 Direction of rotation shall be indicated by an arrow
cast into the pump or by a label plate attached to the CLP.
7.11 An internal or separate relief valve is not required to be
provided with the CLP.
1729
8. Pump Design
Specification
ASTM A395/A395M, GR. 60-40-18 or
ASTM A536, GR. 65-45-12
ASTM A395/A395M, GR. 60-40-18 or
ASTM A536, GR. 65-45-12
AISI 4340
CID A-A-59585
CID A-A-59584
Commercial
Commercial
ASTM 8187M
ASTM 8152/8 152M
Commercial
Commercial
Commercial
ASTM A449, TYPE I or
SAE J429, GR. 5
ASTM A574
Commercial
8.1 Pump inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged.
Pump flanges shall mate to ASME/ANSI B16.5 pipe flanges.
Cast iron and non-ferrous material case flanges shall be flat
face, unless otherwise stated in the ordering data. Flanged
connections shall meet the external forces and moments
requirements in API Standard 676. Spool piece adapters
(threaded and seal-welded, or 0-ring sealed to the pump case
on one end and flanged on the other end) may be furnished to
meet the flanged inlet and outlet requirement.
8.2 Pumps of capacity 100 gpm and greater shall be
equipped with vent, drain, inlet, and outlet gage connections.
Where threaded connections are used they shall be straight
F2798-09
thread with 0-ring seal. Tapered pipe thread connections are
prohibited. Small capacity pumps (under 100 gpm) do not
require vent, drain, and gage connections.
8.3 Pumps shall be designed to counteract radial and axial
thrust loads encountered during operation.
8.4 Pumps shall be self-priming and capable of removing air
from the suction lines.
8.5 Pumps shall be designed to handle up to 8% entrained
air.
9. Motor Design
9.1 Motors may be single speed, two-speed or single speed
with a variable speed drive to support pump operation at
various temperatures and viscosities. Single speed motors shall
be sized for the maximum flow at the system relief valve
cracking pressure at maximum viscosity. If a two speed motor
is specified, rating of the low speed winding shall be based on
power required at the low speed with maximum viscosity oil
during cold startup. The high speed winding rating shall be
based on power required at pump rated conditions. Motors
driven by variable speed drive units should be sized so that the
motor can support pump cold start-up operation and normal
rated condition operation without overloading the motor.
9.2 Motors shall be rated for continuous duty for all ratings.
9.3 Motors shall be equipped with a high fill connec-
tion for filling the CLP unit with oil at initial start--up and a low
point drain connection. Where threaded connections are used
they shall be straight thread with 0-ring seal. Tapered pipe
thread connections are prohibited.
9.4 A method to supply cooling and oil to the
motor and motor bearings must be provided. The cooling oil
shall be supplied either internal pump passages or an
external system connection. When an external cooling method
is chosen, supplier shall provide motor cooling oil pressure,
temperature and flow to the purchaser. Where
threaded connections are used they shall be thread with
seal. Tapered pipe thread connections are prohibited.
9.5 Motors shall be equipped with an cover,
sealed, for verification of direction of shaft rotation.
9.6 The motor enclosure shall contain the
lubricating oil pressure. Where external flow is
provided, the cooling oil shall be at a maximum of 20
psi g.
10. Test
10.1 General--All eq11ipment
dance with 1 0.2.
shall be tested in accor-
10.1.1 for tests shall be nrr"Tit"iPrl
the manufacturer.
10.2 Test:
10.2.1 Each pump
minimum of 150 percent of
hydrostatic test shall be considered satist:act,ory
are observed for a minimum of 5 min . .:"'e,eue:t!!e
closures required for segmented casing testing and operating of
the hydrostatic test pump to maintain pressure will be accepted.
10.2.2 Each motor shall be tested hydrostatically at 50
PSIG. This test may be accomplished by testing the complete
CLP.
10.3 Certification Data and Testing-Certified performance
test data shall be supplied when required. (See 5.1.18.)
10.3.1 Mechanical Running Test-The manufacturer shall
conduct a test on each CLP to ensure that rated capacity is
achieved at the rated condition. Such tests may be performed
with other than the specified liquid and with viscosity up to 50
SSU greater than the minimum specified viscosity. Differential
pressure may be measured in place of specified inlet and
discharge pressures.
10.3.2 Peiformance Test-When required and as specified
by the ordering document, the manufacturer shall operate a
CLP at the manufacturing facility or approved test facility to
obtain complete mechanical, hydraulic and electrical test data.
The pump shall meet rated capacity at this condition and shall
meet the airborne noise levels in 7 .4.
11. Technical Documentation
1 Ll Unless otherwise specified, each pump shall include an
instruction book that shall be composed of the following:
11.1.1 CLP description;
11.1.2 Installation instructions;
11.1.3 Operating instructions;
11.1.4 Maintenance procedures (including complete pump
disassembly and "'"""'mhh,\
11.1.5 Outline dimension drawing, including weight;
11.1.6 cross-sectional assembly drawing and list of
materials;
11.1. 7 Motor outline drawing.
11.2 Submittal documents shall
consist of the

11.2.1 Outline dimension drawing with estimated, calcu-
and center of
cross-sectional drawing and list of materials.
11.2.3 Performance curve which differential pressure,
"'"''"""''"r"""'r as a function of
11.2.4 spare parts.
YacR:agJ:ng and Preservation
pump units, and accessories shall be
in accordance with Practice
12.1 .1 Presen1ation-Items ;:,uc>"-''-'IJL!IUlv
from environmental elements
Non-coated ferrous surfaces shall be "'''''""'r"''rl
1730
.2 and Bracing-Items sw;ceptible
uan.uu;:, shall be cushioned or
braced or blocked, or within the shiPPmg
shall be
order number,
nomenclature.
boxes, or
to address, contract
address, and item
F2798-09
there is a conflict between the specifications and this section, requirements of this section shall take
precedence.
S 1. Referenced Documents:
Sl.l ASTM Standard: D2519 Standard Test Method for
Bond Strength of Electrical Insulating Varnishes the Helical
Coil Test
S 1.2 Underwriters Laboratories 984 Hermetic Refrigerant
Motor-Compressors
S 1.3 Military Standards:
Mil-STD-167 -1 Mechanical Vibrations of Equip--
ment (Type !-Environmental and Type Excited
MIL-STD-740 Airborne and Structure borne Noise Mea-
Shilpboar'd Equipment
Shipboard
Machinery, and for
MIL-DTL-2212 Contactors and Controllers, Electric Motor
AC or DC and Associated Switching Devices
MIL-M-17060 Motors, 60-Hertz, Alternating Cunent, Inte-
gral Horsepower, Shipboard Use
MIL-PRF-32168 Variable Speed Drive System for Induction
and Synchronous Machines
NAVSEA Technical Publication T9074-AS-GIB-010/271
Requirements for Nondestructive Testing Methods
S2. Apf,lllCCUJU!ty
S2.1 This CLP is part of the US Navy lube oil system
and must meet all system requirements for cleanliness, pres-
sure and temperature.
S3.
S3.1 Requirements-All CLPs in accordance with this
Supplement shall have the purchasing
S4.
S4.1 Motor shall be Service A in accordance with MIL-M-
17060 and the toHoWJlne::
S4. L 1 A motor master per MIL-M-17060 shall be
S4.1.2 The motor shall have a means of
unit direction of rotation for each
S4.1.3 Tbe method of cmme1ctmtg
that no
internal
document
strains shall
verifying
motor
S4.1.6 Motor insulation shall the i"AiirnuororT
to prove the of the insulation system with oil.
Test results shall be noted on the motor master These tests
1731
S4.1.6.1 Perform an Electrical Insulation Varnish Bond
Strength test in accordance with ASTM D 2519. Twelve
specimens shall be tested; six specimens in oil and six
specimens in air. Specimens shall be tested at 150C. The
reduction in bond strength bet\.veen the oil specimens and air
specimens shall not exceed 50 percent
S4.1.6.2 Perform a compatibility test in accordance with
paragraph 41 of UL 984. The test shall be modified to include
oil only. A test plan shall be submitted to US Navy for approval
prior to start of testing.
S4.1.7 The CLPs shall have non-overloading power
characteristics, and the driver-rated horsepower shall at least
equal the maximum power requirements of the pump at the
maximum rated speed without allowances for a service factor.
S4.1.8 If required by Fig. S Ll, motor thermal protection
shall be in accordance with MIL-M-17060 and the following:
S4.1.8.1 Bearing temperature sensors, thermistor or
otherwise, are not required.
S4.1.8.2 All winding sensor leads shall be bought into the
terminal box and shall be coiled and restrained to prevent lead
damage.
S4.1.8.3 Sensor leads shall be marked. The marking shaH
visible in the terminal box. Sensors located in the same
winding phase group shall have a common identification.
S4.1.8.4 Thermal protection systems shall meet EMI
quirements of MIL-STD-461 after installation in the motor.
S4.1.8.5 Sensors shall be installed so that at least one
group with sensors is located in an expected or possible
spot.
S4.1.8.6 If a sensor monitor is required, only one monitor
shall be used per motor. The monitor shall be mounted on the
motor near the terminal box. The monitor shall provide an
output to a visual or audible alarm or ship control system when
sensors get within plus or minus 5 degrees centigrade of the
maximum allowable winding temperature.
S4.1.8.7 The motor master drawing shall show the thermal
prc)te<;tlcm system monitor and the approximate locations of the
sensors. The parts lists shall identify the monitor and sensors
manufacturer part number or similar description to allow
procurement. Notes identifying monitor input
ments and electrical out put characteristics
the master drawing.
S4.1.9 Motor will be controlled with motor controller
manufactured in accordance with MIL-DTL-2212.
S4.2 Materials: Materials for the pumps shall be in accor-
dance with Tables 1 of the basic specification. Materials for the
motors shall be in accordance with MIL-M-17060. J.Jrr"""""'rl
alternate materials shall be subject to approval by the
0 F2798-09
US NAVY SUPPLEMENT ORDERING DATA
PUMP TYPE:
Pump Classification (Para 4.1 ):
Mounting Type: o Horizontal o Vertical
Pumping Fluid:
Fluid Temperature (Min/Max) (F):
Viscosity at Minimum Temp:
Viscosity at Maximum Temp:
Operating Conditions (Rotational): oSingle Speed oTwo-speed oVariable Speed
Capacity at Rated Discharge Pressure (GPM):
.Rated Discharge Pressure (PSIG):
Minimum Suction Pressure (PSI G, or Inches
Special Efficiency Requirements (Para 84.1.5)
Thermal Protection (Para S4.1.8):
TEST SPECIFICATION
o Motor Test o Witness
o Shock Test o Witness
o Vibration Test o Witness
o Performance Test o Witness
o Endurance Test o Witness
o Inclined Operation Test o Witness
o Hot Insulation Resistance Test o Witness
o Production Test o Witness
o Hydrostatic Pressure Test o Witness
o Assembled CLP Pressure Test o Witness
o Mechanical Soundness and Capacity Test o Witness
o Noise Test o Witness
as applicable):
PARA
S5
S6.1
S6.2
S7.1.1
S7.1.2
S7.1.3
S7.1.4
S7.2
S7.2.1
S7.2.2
S7.2.3
87.2.4
CONNECTIONS: TYPE (0-RING, ETC)
o Drain!V ent
o Inlet Pressure Gage
o Discharge Pressure Gage
MOTOR:
Volts/Phase/Hertz Type End
COMMENTS: (volume/weight requirements, special storage instructions, etc.):
FIG. S1.1 US Navy Supplement Ordering Data
1732
F2798-09
review agency. Components of the CLP for which the specific
materials are not specified shall use materials best suited for the
intended service. Cadmium plating is prohibited. Zinc plating
is prohibited in contact with oil.
S.5 Motor Testing
S5.1 Motor Testing: Prior to being connected to the pump,
the motor shall undergo the following tests for each winding
configuration in accordance with MIL-M-17060. Sealed bear-
ings may be used in place of the motor's normal bearings
during these tests.
S5.1.1 No-load input test
S5.1.2 Pull-up, breakdown and locked rotor torque and
current test
S5.1.3 EMI testing in accordance with MIL-STD 461 after
assembly of thermal protection system
S5.2 Heat run test at full load with a CLP. For heat run
testing, thermocouples are required in the motor as follows:
S5 .2.1 Three per coilhead spaced 120 degrees apart. Loca-
tions should be chosen in expected hot spots.
S5.2.2 One per bearing located no further than Vs inch from
outer ring.
S5.2.3 The heat run test is a first article test that does not
need to be repeated unless there is a change to the pump or
motor that will affect the temperature rises in the motor.
S6. Shock and Vibration Testing
S6.1 Shock Test:
S6.1.1 The CLP shall undergo a shock test to ascertain that
the CLP has the necessary shock resistance. The shock test
shall be performed in accordance with MIL-S-901, Grade A,
and the specific shock test requirements specified in the
contract or purchase order. Only one CLP of each type, design,
and size complete with the driver and all appurtenances and
controls shall successfully undergo the shock and vibration
qualification at a laboratory or testing facility, which is
acceptable to the purchaser. Approvals for shock extensions of
similar designs already tested and approved are to be obtained
from NAVSEA Philadelphia.
S6.1.2 After shock test, the pump and driver and other
components susceptible to internal distortion shall be disas-
sembled to the extent necessary and the critical dimensions and
running clearances measured, calculated, and recorded. During
this disassembly, the critical components and assemblies sub-
ject to shock damage and distortion shall be identified and
listed in the inspection record and after completion of the test.
The condition of each component and assembly shall be
determined and recorded and compared to the same data
recorded prior to the shock test.
S6.1.3 Before and after the shock test, tests in accordance
with the Mechanical Soundness and Capacity Test Supplement
(S7 .2.3) shall be performed to determine the changes in
performance characteristics of the pump. Vibration measure-
ments shall be taken at the bearing caps or housings of the
pump and driver at the same speeds during the initial and final
capacity test to determine the changes in mechanical operation.
S6.1.4 The CLP shall be mounted on the shock machine or
barge using standard fixtures essentially identical to the actual
shipboard characteristics, unless non-standard fixtures are oth-
erwise approved. The purchasing activity will furnish the
contractor a drawing of the shipboard mounting arrangement
and foundation's stiffness. Horizontal pumps, when tested in
the inclined position on the medium weight shock machine,
shall be oriented so that the direction of shock is perpendicular
to the axis of the pump rotation. The pump shall be in operation
during the first, third, and fifth blows of the shock test. Pumps
shall be operated at as close to the rated condition as possible
within the capability of the test facility.
S6.1.5 The pump shall be carefully observed during each
shock blow and thoroughly visually examined after each blow.
After each blow, the CLP shall be operated at as close to the
rated condition as possible and checked for abnormal noises
and vibrations and proper functioning of controls. Tightening
of bolts (except for pump/motor hold-down bolts) during shock
tests wiH not be permitted. If any bolt loosens during the test,
the equipment manufacturer shall provide a corrective
procedure, which must be approved by the purchaser.
S6.1.6 Shock test acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
S6.1.6.1 There shall be no breaking of parts, including
mounting bolts.
S6.1.6.2 There shall be no distortion or derangement of any
part, which would render the CLP incapable of performing as
specified.
S6.1.6.3 The amplitude of vibration after a test measured as
close to the rated condition as possible shall be less than twice
the amplitude measured at the same speed before the test. The
baseline amplitude of vibration shall be taken on the test stand
in which the shock test is being performed.
S6.1.6.4 Adequate lubrication to all bearings shall be main-
tained.
1733
S6.1.6.5 Critical dimensions and running clearances shall be
maintained.
S6.1.6.6 There shall be no significant change in the perfor-
mance curve.
S6.1.6.7 The post shock analysis and the Failure to Perform
Principal Functions analysis for the motor shall be in accor-
dance with MIL-M-17060.
S6.1.7 Postshock Test Procedure-The shock-tested CLP, if
it is to be supplied under a contract or order, shall be restored
to the as-new condition by replacement of all parts damaged or
distorted beyond the as-new design tolerances. Rolling element
bearings shall be replaced regardless of condition. The shock
tested rolling contact bearings shall be rendered unusable. The
restored CLP shall successfully pass the Hydrostatic Pressure
Test Supplement (S7.2.1), the Mechanical Soundness and
Capacity Test Supplement (S7 .2.3), and the Noise Test Supple-
ment (S7.2.4), if applicable. Quality conformance test docu-
mentation shall certify that the CLP was subjected to the shock
test and subsequently restored, tested, and inspected in accor-
dance with contract requirements. A completed parts examina-
tion check list shall be supplied and shall identify the parts
which were replaced (such as the bearings) and shall certify
that the CLP fully conforms to the specifications for unre-
stricted service.
S6.2 Vibration Test:
S6.2.1 The pump shall successfully undergo a vibration test
in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-167 -1, Type
I, and as supplemented in the contract or order. The vibration
F2798-09
test need not be repeated on subsequent contracts or orders for
pumps of identical design to those previously tested, provided
the previous tests included the frequencies specified.
S6.2.2 The CLP shall be mounted on typical shipboard
foundations during the vibration test or the shipboard mounting
arrangement shall be simulated in spring mass characteristics
except where this mounting arrangement causes the largest test
table capacity to be exceeded. Inability to vibration test the
CLP because of excessive weight or size shall not release the
contractor from furnishing equipment which can withstand the
specified vibration inputs. Vibration test acceptance criteria
shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-167 -1, Type I.
S6.2.3 Vibration Type I qualification may be performed by
analysis and/or extension based on a previously tested CLP
with NAVSEA approval.
S7. First Article and Production Testing Requirements
S7 .1 First Article Qualification-One CLP of each type,
design, and size complete with the driver and all appurtenances
and controls shall successfully undergo the specified First
Article Qualification at a laboratory or testing facility, which is
acceptable to the purchaser. The various first article tests on
one pump design may be conducted concurrently, if practical.
The tests shall fully establish that the product is reliable and is
capable of meeting the specified performance. Design changes
which, in the opinion of the purchaser, may adversely affect the
applicability of a previously tested and accepted pump design
shall be cause to require new design evaluation tests in part or
in full. The proposed first article qualification procedures shall
be submitted for approval to the purchaser before performing
the tests. The design evaluation tests shall consist of the
following and are detailed in separate paragraphs: S7.1.1,
Performance Test; S7 .1.2, Endurance Test; and S7 .1.3, Inclined
Ut:,enltlcm Test. Test reports documenting first article qualifi-
cation shall be prepared in accordance with accepted engineer-
The test reports shall document test setup,
nrrlce1:1nre_ significant events, test instruments used including
calibration data and accuracy, and measured data. The reports
shall be accurate and and shall present test results in
a manner to the for The report
shall include certification of conformance to the
acceptance criteria that the pump is suitable for its intended
apJJlic:ation. After test reports shall be distributed as
in the contract.
S7.1.1 Test:
tests shall be
recorded
for
submittal. The test shall include pe1rform:anc:e
to possible to the lowest oil
temperature shown on the on:lering sheet.
S7 .1.1.2 Acceptance Criteria-The acceptance criteria
specified in the Mechanical Soundness and Capacity Test
Supplement (S7.2.4) shall be met. The performance map shall
exhibit the specified pump performance characteristics.
S7 .1.2 Endurance Test:
S7 .1.2.1 The pump shall be operated for a period of not less
than 500 hours of actual running time with a minimum of 60
starts to ascertain reliability of performance and operation.
S7 .1.2.2 Before commencement of the endurance test and
immediately after completion of the 500-hour operating run,
the pump shall be disassembled to the extent necessary and the
critical dimensions and running clearance of parts subject to
wear, erosion, and derangement shall be measured, calculated,
and recorded. Components such as pump rotors and casings
subject to erosion, corrosion, cavitation, and wear, the effects
of which are not subject to routine measurement, shall be listed
in the inspection record and after completion of the test the
condition of each component determined and recorded.
S7 .1.2.3 During the initial and final hours of the endurance
test run, noise, and performance tests (see appropriate para-
graphs) shall be performed to determine the changes in pump
performance characteristics and noise signature. Vibration
measurements shall be taken at the bearing caps or housings of
the pump and driver at the same speeds during the initial and
final capacity test to determine the changes in mechanical
operation.
S7 .1.2.4 The endurance test shall not be continuous but
shall be interrupted by at least three rest periods of a minimum
of 8 h each. The number of starts specified shall be performed
at full--line voltage during the course of the test During an
early part of the endurance test, the pump shall be op1erated
continuously for 24 h at a capacity as near free delivery as
possible at maximum rated speed and normal
temperature, submergence, and suction conditions. The re-
mainder of the endurance tests shall be run at maximum rated
and within 20 0F of maximum specified
temperature.
S7.1.2.5 The pump shall be monitored during the endurance
test to record the conditions of the
. ...,,,., . t" delivered, the total head the at which
and the performance observed. Data shall
collected and the pump inspected at least twice per
For each in addition to aU
measured data, the record shall indicate the
(1) The conditions of the
and
surface pyrometer on a
curve at maximum rated of
shall conform to the spe:cifitcat:ion
1734
F2798-09
and shall show no abnormal deviations from the curve before
the 500-h test.
(2 ) CLP performance and operation after 500 h of operation
shall be unchanged and normal and meet all specification
requirements.
( 3) CLP operation at the end of the endurance test shall be
smooth and shall exhibit noise and vibration levels that . are
normal and in conformance with the specification. (See 11.6 or
MIL-STD-167-1. if S4.2 is invoked.)
( 4) Lubrication shall have remained satisfactory throughout the
test period. Bearing temperatures shall have remained normal.
(5) Running clearances shall be normal.
( 6) Components subject to attack from corrosion, erosion,
cavitation, and so forth shall be in a condition commensurate
with 500 h of service.
( 7) Wear rates for wearing parts, critical for proper operation,
shall show a rate of wear for the test period that shall be
consistent with the specified design life requirements.
(8) No relevant failures shall have occurred throughout the
500-h test.
S7.1.2.7 Postendurance Test Procedures-The CLP sub-
jected to the 500-h test, if it is to be supplied under an order or
contract, shall be restored to the as-new condition by replace-
ment of all parts worn beyond the as-new design tolerances.
The restored CLP shall successfully pass the Hydrostatic
Pressure Test Supplement, Mechanical Soundness, and Capac-
Test Supplement, (S7.2.4.1 (1)), and Noise Tests Supple-
ment (S7 .2.5), if applicable. The quality conformance test
documentation shall indicate that the CLP was to the
endurance test and subsequently restored and tested, and that it
shall be certified as to the for
unrestricted service.
S7 .1.2.8 Approvals for 500 hour endurance of
similar already tested may be extended based on a
previously tested CLP with NAVSEA
S7.1.3 Inclined Operation Test-One pump of each design
shall an inclined operation test to prove CLP can
operate under all operating scenarios. the pump
at a 45 inclination in each of and
A mechanical soundness test shall be per-
formed under each of these conditions. The pump shall meet its
at each of the inclined conditions.
S7.1.4 Hot Insulation Resistance Test-The CLP shall be
op1eratea for four hours at full load in order to determine hot
insulation resistance. Resistance re:;tdn1gs shall be corrected for
temperature.
S7 .2 Production Tests-The
or both, shall
contract to the
in the r.rriPrinn
discre:paJi1Ciles revealed
tests and the conective measures taken should be recorded and
documented in the test records and test reports.
After correction of any tests shall be to the
full extent necessary to determine ac<::er,tal)lllt)
fied pump. Failures indicative of
distinguished from shop error or faulty workmanship) shall be
reported to the purchaser before a correction is made.
S7 .2.1 Hydrostatic Pressure Test-All pump pressure
boundary parts shall be tested hydrostatically to a pressure one
and one half times the maximum design working pressure at
maximum submergence, but in no case less than 50 psig. The
hydrostatic test pressure shall be maintained for at least 30 min
or longer as necessary for examination of entire casing.
S7 .2.1.1 Acceptance Criteria-The pump shall exhibit no
leakage through the pressure boundary material or joints.
S7 .2.2 Assembled CLP Pressure Test-The assembled CLP
shall be tested at a pressure equal to the maximum design
pressure of the CLP but in no case less than 50 psig.
S7 .2.2.1 Acceptance Criteria-The CLP shall exhibit no
leakage from the joint and the pressure boundary.
S7 .2.3 Mechanical Soundness and Capacity Test
S7 .2.3.1 This test shall be conducted, recorded, and reported
in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standard ANSI/HI
3.6 Rotary Pump Tests, to the extent that these standards are
applicable and are not in conflict with the contract require-
ments. The test record for each pump shall include the
following as a minimum:
(J) Certification of the major pump components (pump, gear
assembly, driver) by the manufacturer's drawing number and
serial number that were tested;
( 2) A sketch of the test loop showing location of the pump and
all instrumentation.
(3) A list of the test instruments including date of last
calibration, advertised accuracy, size, (for example, 0.25 lb/
in?) of the smallest graduation on the readout scale, range of
the readout scale (for example, from 0 to 100 lb!in?), and unit
(for example, lb/in.
2
) of measurement including the water
temperature the gauges are calibrated for if a gauge JS
calibrated in feet of water rather than in lb/in.
2
;
( 4) The data sheets of all recorded data, with the unit of
measurement identified for all data;
S7.2.3.2 The test shall be performed as follows:
(1) Operate the CLP at the rated speed and capacity, with the
pumped fluid at ambient temperature. The pump
shall be monitored for proper functioning of
bearing lubrication, and for smooth running.
1735
(a ) Acceptance Criteria-CLP operation shaH be free
abnormal vibrations and noises.
(2) Operate the CLP at the each of the design rated speeds with
the pumped fluid at maximum normal temperature specified
and with the minimum specified suction pressure (see
S 1.1 ). The test should be run at rated capacity.
(a) Criteria-The pump shall deliver the rated
at the rated discharge pressure. The characteristic
curve at maximum rated shall the
the electric motor-driven CLP for a minimum of
min in reverse rotation at maximum rated
(a) Acceptance Criteria-The CLP shall not be damaged
the reverse rotation test.
S7 .2.4 Noise 1ests-Airbome and structure-borne noise
tests when specified shaH be conducted and
accordance with MIL-STD-740. Noise test details,
31.5
91
63
88
0 F2798-09
TABLE S1.1 Acceptable Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (in dB re 20 IJPa)
125
85
250
82
Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz
500 1000
79 76
2000
73
4000
70
8000
67
instrumentation, and testing techniques identified in MIL-STD-
740 shall be submitted to the purchaser before testing for
approval. Noise tests shall be performed with the driver
furnished with pump, and tests shall be conducted on all CLPs.
S7 .2.4.1 Acceptance Criteria-The CLP shall meet the
airborne noise level limits of Table S 1.1 or as specified in the
contract. Structure-borne limits shall be specified by the
contract.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical comrnittee and must be ;eviewed eve;y five yea;s and
COPYRIGHT!).
1736
~ 11
7
INTERNATIONAL
Thermal Rating and Installation of Internal Combustion
Engine Packages for use in Hazardous Locations in Marine
Applications
1
1. Scope
1.1 This practice covers the method of testing, rating and
installation of internal combustion engine packages for use in
hazardous areas in marine applications. The thermal rating of
the engine is determined by the actual readings of engine and
exhaust system temperatures within hazardous areas, as de-
fined by references in 2.2 and 2.3of this practice, or as
designated by the authority having jurisdiction, or both. The
goal of this practice is to thermally rate engine packages, and
provide additional installation recommendations, in order to
reduce the risk of igniting the ignitable mixtures that may be
present within the hazardous areas of marine vessels.
1.2 Only a marine engine suitable for the service, designed
and constructed in conformance with the requirements of 3.1.2,
is considered.
1.3 The system of units in this practice shall be SI (metric)
form, along with the standard (English) system equivalent
placed in parentheses, for example, 20C (68F).
2.1 ASTM Standards:
2
F683 Practice for Selection and Application of Thermal
Insulation for Piping and Machinery
2.2 NFPA Standards:
3
NFPA 70 The National Electric Code (NEC), 2008
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee i'<25 on Ships and
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2010. Published January 2011. DOI:l0.1520/
F2876-10.
2
the ASTM website.
3
2.3 IEC Standards:
4
IEC 60092 Electrical installations in ships-Part 502:
Tankers-Special features
2.4 CFR:
5
CFR 46 United States Code of Federal Regulations, Title 46,
Shipping
2.5 EN Standards:
4
EN 1834-1 Reciprocating internal combustion engines.
Safety requirements for design and construction of en-
gines for use in potentially explosive atmospheres.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 hazardous location-area in which an explosive gas
atmosphere is or may be expected to be present, in quantities
such as to require special precautions for the construction,
installation and use of electrical apparatus and other potential
heat sources. These areas are defined by the authority having
jurisdiction, or in accordance with NFPA 70 (NEC) Articles
500, 501 and 504; or NEC Articles 500 and 505; or IEC
60092-502, or a combination thereof.
3 .1.2 marine engine-a compression-ignition engine de-
signed and constructed for operation in the marine environ-
ment, regardless of horsepower, to the applicable standards or
rules of a recognized classification society in Title 46, Code of
Federal Regulations, Part 8, or a comparable engine design and
construction standard.
3.1.3 ignitable mixture -a mixture of gas, such as natural
gas, or similar volatile hydrocarbon gas with normal air, that
will propagate flame or explode when exposed to an ignition
source.
3.1.4 ignition temperature-(explosive atmosphere)-the
lowest temperature at which an ignitable mixture may be
ignited.
4
5
www.access.gpo.gov.
1737
F2876-10
3.1.5 maximum swface temperature-the highest tempera-
ture attained under the most severe operating conditions by any
equipment part or surface capable of igniting an ignitable
mixture.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 While there have been great improvements made in the
safety of electrical and electronic equipment utilized in haz-
ardous locations, there has been little development concerning
reducing the hazards associated with high temperature surfaces
of internal combustion engines operating in the same hazard-
ous locations. Several factors have significantly increased the
temperature of hot surfaces and exhaust gases of internal
combustion engines. Some of these factors are performance
related, while others have resulted from compliance with new
environmental standards.
4.2 This practice provides guidance for the temperature
rating of marine internal combustion engines based on the
surface temperature exposures within a hazardous location in
the marine environment.
5.1 The application of this practice will help reduce the risk
of fire, or explosions, caused by ignitable gas mixtures coming
in contact with the heated surfaces and hot exhaust gases
generated by compression ignition (diesel) engines used in, or
near, hazardous locations.
5.2 Marine Engine Design and Construction Requirements:
5.2.1 Special consideration should be given to engine ac-
cessories such as pumps, fans, and starter motors such that they
are constructed of suitable materials and installed in ways that
will minimize friction, heat and sparking.
5.2.2 pressure fuel piping (greater than 100 bar, or
1450 installed between fuel pumps and injectors, shall be
double jacketed in order to reduce the risk of fuel spray coming
in contact with hot surfaces.
5 .2.3 Marine Engines and engine components shall be
properly bonded and grounded to the hull.
5.2.4 The use of materials known to create, or store, static
electricity shall be avoided.
5.2.5 Fans and fans blades shall be constructed of conduc-
tive, non-sparking materials.
5.2.6 Drive belts shall be conductive and the
and driving equipment shall be grounded.
5.2.7 For sealed, or
considerations should be
that will prevent the
shafts
insulated covers, or other attachments necessary to
maintain temperature control, are removed.
5.2.8 Sealed, enclosures shall
be
5.2.9 Air ducts and exhaust gas piping to and from non-
hazardous locations shall be gas within the hazardous
location. EN 1834-1 should be consulted.
5.2.10 Air ducts within the hazardous location shall be fitted
with flame arrestors, or other equipment designed and tested to
perform the functions of a flame arrestor. EN 1834-1 should be
consulted.
5.2.11 Exhaust systems shall be fitted with a spark arrestor,
or other equipment designed and tested to perform the func-
tions of a spark arrestor. EN 1834-1 should be consulted.
5.2.12 To help prevent unsafe operation, warning signs and
labels shall be used to indicate when necessary equipment
guards, or protective covers, are removed from the engine.
5.2.13 The procedures outlined in EN 1834-1 should be
consulted for additional hazard and risk reduction.
5.2.14 The procedures outlined in Practice F683 may be
applied if necessary in order to limit the exposed surface
temperatures of piping and machinery.
5.2.15 All electrical or electronic equipment associated with
engine installations in hazardous locations shall be tested or
approved and listed or certified by an independent laboratory
for the Class and Group of the cargo carried or the hazardous
location to the standards and protection techniques specified
under NFPA 70 (NEC) Articles 500, 501 and 504; or NEC
Articles 500 and 505; or IEC 60092-502 and acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction.
6. Procedure for Rating
6.1 The testing required in Section 7 shall be used to
determine the highest temperature exposure of the engine
application package. The highest temperature obtained, based
on the most severe test operating and environmental (including
high ambient air temperature) conditions, will be the tempera-
ture used for determining the rating of the engine.
6.2 The determination of an appropriate marine
temperature rating for installation in a hazardous location is
based upon the lowest ignition temperature of the cargo the
vessel is authorized to carry, or the lowest ignition temperature
of the engine fuel being used, whichever is lower, and the
highest temperature exposure within the hazardous location
any part of the marine engine package as determined in 6. l.
The temperature of engine surfaces, auxiliary components and
exhaust system gases that may contact the cargo vapor must be
maintained below the temperature and,
cally, more than l0C (18F) below the lowest ignition
temperature of any cargo that the vessel is certified to transport.
6.3 Engines for hazardous locations shall be given a
nated temperature from Tl through T6 based on
For example: a marine engine T3 shall have
surfaces, components or exhaust piping with a tem-
perature greater than 200C (392F) that may contact any
lgillitable mixture of gas and air within the hazardous area.
1738
d O T ~ F2876 - 1 0
C!1Mf1
7. Testing and Certification
7.1 Manufacturers and modifiers of marine engines for use
in hazardous locations shall certify, through testing, the ability
of the engine and protective systems to maintain exposed
temperatures below the marine certified temperature (T) rating.
7.2 Certification testing of the engine package and hazard-
ous location protective systems shall be conducted for a
minimum of two hours at 90 % of rated power. This test may
be conducted as part of or in conjunction with other required
operational tests or certifications.
7.3 Temperature measurements shall be taken using a reli-
able, calibrated means of measurement such as thennal imag-
ing, or standard laboratory temperature measuring equipment.
7.4 Prior to taking measurements of the marine engine
surface temperatures, the engine will be brought first to nonnal
coolant operating temperature and then to a steady state load as
specified
7.5 Temperature measurement be taken at a minimum
of different locations on the or enclosure,
at the load 7 .2. enclosure is not utilized,
at least half of the readings shall be taken from the turbo-
charger and compressor discharge (if installed) and different
points along the exhaust system. Readings shall be taken from
the exhaust gas outlet if it is designed to into the
hazardous area. The location of other temperature reading
locations shall be based on the engine design.
7.6 Temperature readings shall be recorded every 15 min-
utes in each location.
7.7 modification to the package that could result
in an increase of temperature exposure within the hazardous
area will re-certification of the modified engine pack-
7.8 Upon installation each engine package will be tested to
assure the newly installed engine is in with the
marine engine's certified temperature
8. Hazards
8.1 Compliance with company-defined laboratory safety
practices and applicable standards shall be
maintained.
9. Documentation
9.1 Marine engines manufactured, or modified, for installa-
tion in hazardous locations must be labeled with a nameplate or
pennanent marking to indicate their temperature rating in
degrees as follows:
Meets ASTM F2876
Engine temperature rating
__ degrees (C or F).
Maximum surface temperature
9.2 An operations and maintenance manual shall be pro-
vided with each engine package manufactured, or modified, for
installation in hazardous locations. The operations and main-
tenance manual shall include, but is not limited to the follow-
ing:
9.2.1 Documentation that describes the tests used for deter-
mining the engine's temperature rating in accordance with this
Practice.
9.2.2 A periodic maintenance plan that includes the key
maintenance and testing requirements for maintaining the
engine's temperature rating during and following routine
maintenance.
9.2.3 The required configuration to ensure the engine pack-
age meets the installation requirements as defined by the
manufacturer, or modifier.
10. Post-Installation and Maintenance Testing
Requirements
10.1 The engine shall be installed and maintained in the
same configuration as it was tested and rated.
10.2 Each hazardous location engine package installation
shall be checked periodically, in accordance with the opera-
tions and maintenance manual, but no less than annually, to
ensure that temperatures are being maintained at or below
limits. In particular, careful checks shall be made tr.lk""
111
'"
significant maintenance or repair where critical insulation may
have been removed or damaged.
U. Keywords
11.1 diesel engine; hazardous location; ships
if not revised, Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
Cornmittee on Standards, at the address shown below.
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
1739
~ Designation: F2877 -11'
1
~ u
7
INTERNATIONAL
Shock Testing of Structural Insulation of A-Class Divisions
Constructed of Steel or Aluminum
1
corrected the title in 2012.
Passive fire protection materials have been required and used on commercial ships for decades. The
passive systems include the non-combustible insulation material and its means of attachment to steel
or aluminum divisions. The passive system has been evaluated in a standard fire test using a standard
steel or aluminum structural core. No impact loading has been prior to testing for fire
resistance.
The United States Navy requires shock testing of passive fire protection prior to fire resistance
testing; this test is defined in MIL-STD-3020, Fire Resistance of U.S. Naval Surface Ships, 7
November, 2007. The technology to economically shock test the passive fire protection systems was
developed 50 years ago, and equipment in commercial laboratories is available.
After the terrorist attack on September 11, 2001 it is our responsibility that we add a level of shock
protection to our passive fire protection systems on commercial ships where appropriate? Many of the
passive fire protection systems used today are mechanically fastened and will perform the intended
function after a shock event.
Passive fire protection insulation may have thermal or acoustic treatments added to the insulated
division. These treatments add mass to the fire protection system and their effect on shock is not
included in this specification.
Section i
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Section 7
Section 8
Section 9
Section
10
Section
11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
Scope
Terminology
Significance and Use
Shock Test Prior to Fire Resistance
Test
Criteria to Evaluate Shock Test
Specimen
Post Shock Fire Resistance Test
Criteria to Evaluate the Fire
Resistance of the Shock Test
Specimen
Test Report
Precision and Bias
Key Words
1
Current edition approved Jan. 1, 2011. Published March 2011. DOI:l0.1520/
F2877-ll.
2
JOM, 53(12), 2001 pp 8-12 and www.nist.gov/public.affairs/releases/wtc-
briefing-april0505.htm
1. Scope
1.1 The purpose of the specification is to evaluate insulation
installed on steel or aluminum structural division as defined in
IMO resolution A.754 (18) to ensure the insulation is not
degraded in the event of a shock.
1.2 The non-combustible passive fire protection insulation
shall be installed, which will meet the highest level of
commercial fire resistance expected. Lower levels of fire
resistance will be allowed without additional shock testing.
1.3 This test method is used to measure and describe the
response of materials, products, or assemblies to heat and flame
under controlled conditions, but does not by itself incorporate
all factors required for fire-hazard or fire-risk assessment of the
materials, products or assemblies under actual fire conditions.
1.4 Fire testing is inherently hazardous. Adequate safe-
guards for personnel and property shall be employed in
conducting these tests.
1.5 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
1740
0 F2877 -11e
1
system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the standard.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
3
El76 Terminology of Fire Standards
2.2 International Maritime Code: International Code for
Application of Fire Test Procedures, ISBN 92-801-1452-2
4
:
A.754 Recommendation on Fire Resistance Tests for
"A," "B," and '"F" Class Divisions
2.3 United States Military Documents:
MIL-S-901D Requirements for Shock Tests H.I. (High Im-
pact) Shipboard Machinery, Equipment, and Systems
5
NAVSEAINST 949l.ID Approved Class HI Shock Testing
Machines
6
MIL-STD-3020 Fire Resistance of U.S. Navy Smface
Ships
7
3. Terminology
3.1 Refer to Terminology E176 for general terms associated
with fire issues.
3.2 Definitions:
3.2.1 A-Class division-"A" class divisions in accordance
with Part 3 of IMO FTP Code are those divisions formed by
bulkheads and decks which comply with the following criteria:
(a) They are constructed of steel or other equivalent mate-
rial;
(b) They are suitably stiffened;
(c) They are insulated with approved non-combustible ma-
terials such that the average temperature of the unexposed side
will not rise more than 140C above the original temperature,
nor will the temperature, at any one point, including any joint,
rise more than 180C above the original temperature, with the
time listed below:
class "A-60"
class "A-30"
class "A-15"
class "A-0"
60 min
30 min
15 min
0 min
(d) They are so constructed as to be capable of preventing
the passage of smoke and flame to the end of the one-hour
standard fire test; and
(e) The Administration required a test of a prototype bulk-
head or deck in accordance with the Fire Test Procedures
3
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book ~ f ASTM
the ASTM website.
4
Available from IMO Publishing Service, 4 Albert Embankment, London SEl
7SR, United Kingdom, email: publication-sales@imo.org
5
Available on the internet at www.dtbtest.com/PDFS/MIL-S-901D.pdf 5 6
6
Available on the internet at nsdb.navsses.navy.mil/Approved %20Class%
20HI%20Shock%20Testing% 20Machines.pdf
7
Available on the internet at www.dtbtest.com/PDFS/MIL-S-901D.pdf
1741
Code to ensure that it meets the above requirements for in-
tegrity and temperature rise.
3.2.2 fire resistance, n-the ability of a material, product, or
assembly to withstand fire or give protection from it for a
period of time.
3.2.2.1 Discussion-Fire resistance is the ability of a divi-
sion or boundary (typically a bulkhead or overhead) to with-
stand fire, give protection from it, prevent fire spread to
adjoining compartments, and retain structural integrity under
fire. Structural integrity is the ability to continue to carry a
structural load. Fire resistance does not address reaction to fire
properties such as ignitability, surface flame spread, heat
release rates, smoke density, fire gas toxicity, or other material
fire performance limits.
3.2.2.1 fire resistance rating-a measure of the elapsed time
during which a material, product, or assembly continues to
exhibit fire resistance under specified exposure conditions.
3.2.2.2 restricted application-when a division will only
protect against a fire threat with the insulation installed on the
fire side only, the division is designated as fire resistant with
restricted application.
3.2.2.3 un-restricted application-when a division is pro-
tected against a fire threat from both sides, the division is
designated as fire resistant with unrestricted application.
3.2.3 non-combustible insulation-an insulation material
when tested in accordance with the FTP Code, Annex 1, Part 1,
and meet the acceptance criteria are non-combustible.
3.2.4 standard steel or aluminum structural core-a struc-
tural core used to construct the test specimen. It is constructed
of either steel or aluminum with the dimensions and stiffeners
shown in Figs. 1-4.
4.1 This test method evaluates the ability of a non-
combustible passive fire protection system installed on struc-
tural divisions on commercial ships to function after shock
loading.
4.2 The shock loading is accomplished by conducting im-
pact testing of a test specimen consisting of insulation on a
standard steel or aluminum structural core installed on a
medium weight shock test machine.
4.3 Following the shock testing the shocked test specimen
and an unshocked test specimen are tested for fire resistance.
Both shocked and unshocked test specimens are installed
side-by-side in a fixture and fire tested at the same time.
4.4 The fire resistance for both specimens is measured and
recorded.
4.5 Other passive fire protection systems using the same
insulation materials and attachment methods and having lower
fire resistance ratings will be accepted without additional shock
testing.
5. Shock Test Prior to Fire Resistance Test
5.1 Fire resistant divisions, bulkheads and decks, with
passive fire protection and associated attachments, shall be
shock tested in accordance with MIL-S-901D, Section 3.1.2 (b)
F2877 -11E
1
PANEL, 3/16"

L L
2.5" x 2S x
I.
48"
I
OR EQUIVAlENT
3X
zfi"
A..,
'II'
1'--(6) 17/32" HOLES,
8" O.C. BOTH SIDES
A.J

ELEVATION Of
INSULATION SIDE
SECTION A-A
FIG. 1 Steel Test Specimen Construction Details for A-Class
Bulkhead
PANEL, 1/4"=:.. /ANGLE,
'L---"---.,L..------.1' 4 p X 3" )( 3/8
I
..II OR EQUIVAlENT
, 48" ,.. 3X
A
-(S) HOLES,
8" O.C. BOTH SIDES
SECTION A-A
FIG. 2 Aluminum Test Specimen Construction Details for A-Class
Bulkhead
Medium Weight Shock Test. The test
orientations, fixture and details
guidance in 1-8. shall be
1742
PANEL, J/ 1 6"
/ANGLE,
[ [
4w l( J" ){ 5/16"
I.
I OR EQUIVALENT
48"
,. 3X

A...,
'II"
f'-(6) ifi 17/32 HOLES,
O.C. 8011-l SIDES
FIG. 3 Steel Test Specimen Construction Details for A-Class Deck

SECTION A-A
FIG. Aluminum Test Specimen Construction Details
Deck
and bulkhead orientations. Test shall be
orientations evaluated, that is bulkhead, or deck, or
5.2 The test to be insulated are 1220 3050 mm
[ 48 120 in.]. Two shall be constructed for
F2877 -11E
1
TYPICAL
1/2" -13 BOLTS & Fl..AT WASHER
8" O.C. T'r"PICAL
(6 REQD @ EA END)
2"
120"
PANEL
116" X 46"
!NSUlATED AREA
FlAT WPSHER & LOCKING
HEX-NUT AT EACH ENO
FIG. 5 Typical Deck Mounting Data!!
1/2:"-13 BOLTS & FlAT WASHER
e" O.C. Tl'PJCAL
FIG. 6 Cross Section Bulkhead Mounting Detail
CHANNa
configuration to be tested. Both specimens will be insulated
with passive fire one will be shock tested.
5.2.1 The steel bulkhead test shown in 1.
5.2.1.1 is shown
5.2.2 steel deck
The aluJmmum
The bulkhead the
stiffened side with a system
desired fire resistance The most severe test for the
bulkhead is A-60 unrestricted, and for the deck A-60.
5.2.4 The deck shall be insulated on the stiffened side with
fire system of an A-60
VERTICAL PHASE
FIG. 7 Bulkhead Orientations
5.2.5 The insulated test specimen shall be mounted into
test fixture as shown:
1743
5.2.5.1 In 5, Typical Deck Mounting Detail.
5.2.5.2 In 6, Cross Section of Bulkhead
DetaiL
5.2.6 Each test specimen shall be exposed to three hammer
blows per each of the three orientations as shown:
5.2.6.1 In 7, Bulkhead Orientations.
5.2.6.2 In 8, Deck Orientations.
5.2.7 The shocked test specimen shall be evaluated to the
criteria in Section If it is deemed to meet the criteria, the
shocked and unshocked specimens shall be sent to the fire
testing laboratory for the testing as stated in Section
6. Criteria to Evaluate Shock Test Specimens
6.1 If or mechanical fasteners are used to install the
insulation, the performance of insulation or other
materials shall be based on visual observations. The
factors would the of the
insulation. If anyone of the is evident, the test
spe;cm11en is deemed to have failed the shock test.
6.1.1 More than 1 0 % of the or fasteners used to hold
the insulation become loose from the test A loose
or fastener is one which is no
core.
6.1.2 Three or more
test
attached to the structural
become loose from the
0 F2877 -11E
1
HORIZONTAL PHASE
INCLINE 30
fACING DOWN INCLINE
INCLINE PHASE .3cr'
EACING ACROSS
FIG. 8 Deck Orientations
6.1.3 The insulation develops a noticeable crack or void
which exposes the test specimen to direct heat transfer path
from the fire exposure.
6.2 If adhesives are used to attach the insulation to the
standard structural core, any of the following observations
would deem the insulation system has failed the shock test.
6.2.1 The insulation cracks exposing the test specimen.
6.2.2 The insulation comes adrift forming a direct heat
transfer path to the test specimen.
6.2.3 The insulation becomes loose and forms a noticeable
void within the insulation itself or between the insulation and
the test specimen.
7. Post Shock Fire Resistance Test
7.1 The test specimens having met the shock criteria in
Section 6 shall be tested by a flag state approved fire testing
laboratory.
8
7.2 For bulkhead tests, the unshocked test specimen shall be
fire tested, side-by-side in the same vertical furnace, with the
shock tested specimen. For deck tests, an unshocked test
specimen shall be fire tested, side-by-side in the same horizon-
tal furnace, with a shock tested specimen. The fire test shall be
conducted for one hour.
8
See http://cqmix.uscg.mil/eqlabs
1744
7.3 The furnace control shall be the same as stated in IMO
Resolution A.754(18) paragraph 8.3 of reference 2.1.
7.4 The unexposed-face temperature thermocouples shall be
designed and fixed to the unexposed face of the test specimens
as stated in IMO Resolution A.754(18) paragraph 7.4 of
reference 2.1.
7.5 For testing of bulkhead and deck assemblies with
insulation only on one side, six thermocouples shall be
symmetrically located on the unexposed face to determine the
average and maximum unexposed temperatures. The thermo-
couples shall be located on the centerline of the frame bays as
shown in 9.
7.5.1 Additional thermocouples shall be added at the dis-
cretion of the laboratory engineer.
8. Criteria to Evaluate the Fire Resistance of the Shock
Tested Specimen
8.1 The average temperature rise of the shocked specimen,
as determined by the average temperature rise of all six
thermocouples, shall not be greater than 10 % of the average
temperature rise of the unshocked specimen at the end of the
fire resistance test.
8.2 The maximum temperature rise of any thermocouple on
the shocked fire test specimen shall not exceed 180C.
9. Test Report
9.1 A test report shall be written by the shock test laboratory
for the shock test, irrespective of the outcome of the test.
9.1.1 The shock test report shall be written by the shock test
laboratory personnel and shall include:
,-
,_
A...J
ELEVATION OF SECTION A-A
INSULATION SIDE
FIG. 9 Thermocouple Locations on Unexposed Side of Shock
Test Specimen for A-Class Bulkhead and Decks
F2877 -11
1
9 .1.1.1 Description of the insulation to include weights of
each piece of material installed on the test specimen.
9.1.1.2 Description and photographs of the attachment to
include location of all attachments and method of installing
components on the test specimen.
9.1.1.3 Data log describing the observations made after each
of the hammer blows.
9 .1.1.4 Video of each hammer blow and photographs of the
test specimen after each hammer blow.
9.1.1.5 A statement on whether the passive fire protection
system meets the criteria as stated in Section 6.
9 .1.1.6 List of all witnesses present during the test.
9.2 Electronic copies of the test report shall be sent to the
client and or their designee. A copy of the videos and
photographs shall be sent to the client on a CD.
9.3 The fire test report shall be written by the fire test
laboratory personnel. The fire test report shall be written
irrespective of the outcome of the fire test.
9.3.1 The fire test report shall include all information
relevant to the details of the test as specified in Reference 2.1.
10.1 Committee F25 is actively pursuing the development
of data regarding the precision and bias of this test method.
Data will be included in a future revision of these test methods.
11. Keywords
11.1 A-Class division; shock test; structural insulation;
structural fire protection
COPYRIGHT/).
1745
Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joint for HVAC
Piping Applications
1
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval A
1. Scope
1.1 This specification establishes the mm1mum require-
ments for the mechanical design, manufacture, inspection and
testing of circular metallic be1lows-type expansion joints used
to absorb the dimensional changes resulting from piping
thermal expansion or contraction, as well as the movements of
terminal equipment and supporting structures.
1.2 Additional or better features, over and above the mini-
mum requirements set by this specification, are not prohibited
by this specification.
1.3 The layout of many piping systems provides inherent
flexibility through natural changes in direction so that any
displacements produce primarily bending or torsional strains,
within acceptable limits. Where the system lacks this inherent
flexibility the designer should then consider adding flexibility
through the use of metallic joints.
1.4 The values stated in mc:n-IJOUlna
as the standard. The values are for
information
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
resvm1slinlltv of the user this standard to establish appro-
and health practices and determine the applica-
1
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee I on
Current edition approved Jan. 1, 2012. Published February DOl: !0.1520/
F2934-12.
2
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), W. 43rd St.,
2.2 ASME Standard:
Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
3
2.3 EJMA Standard:
Standards of the Joint Manufacturers Associa-
tion
4
2.4 Pipe Fabrication Institute Standard:
ES-3 Fabrication Tolerances
5
3. Terminology
3.1 Expansion joint definitions shall be in accordance with
those in the EJMA standards.
3.2 externally pressurized expansion joint-typically used
for straight runs of pipe accommodating axial movement, and
incorporate an all stainless steel flexible bellows, an internal
guide ring/sleeve, an enclosure with end plates at each end.
3.2.1
are with a service pipe ex1tendmtg
the bellows, and the bellows to the end of the service
and the end The external side of the bellows is
to the pressure of the medium being conveyed by the
service pipe and the inside of the bellows is to
3.3 expansion incor-
porates an all stainless steel flexible bellows containing the
pressure on the internal side.
3.3.1
can be
ments.
two bellows common connector.
of
3.4.1 Discussion--The common connector is anchored
some part of the installation means of an anchor base.
The anchor base may be attached to the common connector
either at installation or at time of manufacture. This anchor
3
www.asme.org.
Available from Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA), 25 North
Broadway Tan)'town, NY 1.0591, http://www.ejma.org.
5
Available from Fabrication Institute (PFI), 5 J 1 Ave. of Americas, #60 l,
New York, NY 1001 l, http://www.pJi-institute.org.
1746
F2934-12
withstand the full thrust load of the piping run. The dual
expansion joint is installed in the middle of the piping run and
the thrust is directed to the middle . Each bellows acts as a
single expansion joint and absorbs the movement of the pipe
section in which it is installed independently of the other
bellows.
3.5 gimbal expansion joint-expansion joint designed to
permit angular rotation in any plane by the use of two pairs of
hinges affixed to a common floating gimbal ring.
3.5.1 Discussion-The gimbal ring, hinges, and pins are
designed to restrain the thrust of the expansion joint as a result
of internal pressure and extraneous forces, where applicable.
3.6 hinged expansion joint-expansion joint containing one
bellow designed to permit angular rotation in one plane only by
the use of a pair of pins through hinge plates attached to the
expansion joint ends.
3.6.1 Discussion-The hinges and hinge pins are designed
to restrain the thrust of the expansion joint as a result of
internal pressure and extraneous forces. Hinged expansion
joints should be used in sets of two or three to function
properly.
3.7 pressure balanced expansion joint-expansion joint de-
signed to absorb axial movement or lateral deflection, or both,
while restraining the pressure thrust by means of tie devices
interconnecting the flow bellows with an opposed bellows also
subjected to line pressure.
3.7.1 Discussion-This type of expansion joint is usually
intended for use where a change of direction occurs in a run of
piping. The flow end of a pressure balanced expansion joint
sometimes contains two bellows separated a common
connector, in which case it is called a universal pressure
balanced expansion joint. Inline pressure balanced expansion
joints do not require a change in direction of the piping.
3.8 single expansion joint-simplest form of expansion
joint, consisting of single bellows construction, designed to
absorb all movement of the pipe section in which it is installed.
3.9 swing expansion joint-expansion designed to
absorb lateral deflection or rotation, or both, in one
plane.
3.9.1 Discussion-Pressure thrust and extraneous forces are
restrained by the use of a pair of swing bars, each of which is
pinned to the expansion ends.
3.10 universal expansion contammg
two bellows a common connector for the purpose of
any combination of axial movement, lateral defiec-
tion, and rotation.
3.10.1 Discussion-Universal are
furnished with control rods to distribute the movement between
two bellows of the and stabilize the
common connector when a universal is used
for lateral movement and installed at a in direction
of the and is intended to absorb the thermal growth of
that section of the it must be with tie rods
suitable to absorb the full pressure thmst
4.1 An expansion joint is a unique product and must be
specifically designed for the intended service. It is the respon-
sibility of the piping system designer to supply sufficient
engineering data necessary for the complete design. The
information compiled by the piping system designer must be
complete and contain all pertinent data detailing the conditions
under which the expansion joint is expected to operate.
4.2 Orders for each expansion joint shall include the fol-
lowing information:
4.2.1 Title, designation number, and latest revision of this
specification.
4.2.2 Size-The nominal pipe diameter or specific ducting
diameter.
4.2.3 Type of Expansion Joint-Single, double, universal,
guided, hinged, gimbal, swing, or pressure balanced.
4.2.4 Flow Characteristics:
4.2.4.1 Flow Medium-Indicate whether the medium is gas
or liquid.
4.2.4.2 Flow velocity, medium density, or viscosity, or
combination thereof.
4.2.4.3 Flow direction.
4.2.5 Pressure in psig (Nimm
2
)-Design, operating, and test
pressures.
4.2.6 Temperate in op (C)-Design, operating, and instal-
lation temperatures.
4.2.7 Movement-Axial (extension, compression); lateral
(single plane, multiplane); angular; torsional (to be avoided).
Differentiate between start-up, operational, or field installation
tolerance movements.
4.2.8 Materials-Material types (including that for the bel-
lows shall be specified by the purchaser (see 5.1 for material
restrictions).
4.2.9 Internal Liner-Liner shall be specified when needed
because of flow velocity or other flow conditions. Specific
criteria for liners is shown in Section C-3 of the EJMA
Standards (see 6.6).
4.2.10 External Cover-To protect personnel having close
access to the bellows, when thermal insulation is to be added
the field, or when external mechanical damage is possible (see
6.5).
4.2.11 End Fittings-The type of end connections such as
flanged, threaded, or others to match the mating or
terminal equipment.
4.2.12 Accessories-Specify what accessories are required
and the conditions under which they operate. Consider items
such as insulation lugs, tie, limit, or control rods, patltograLphlc
illlJ"-"F'"'"' trunions, gimbals, drains, purge connections, anchor
bases, and interplay monitoring devices.
1747
4.2.13 Dimensional Limitations-If space limitations exist
the maximum overall length, maximum outside diam-
eter, minimum inside diameter, and installation tolerances.
4.2.14 Operating calculated bellows
forces and pressure thrust forces if are
subsequent anchor design or other piping systems
there are maximum allowable values, these must also be
F2934-12
4.2.15 Installation Position-horizontal, vertical (flow up or
down). Specify if liner drainage holes are required.
4.2.16 Cycle Life Requirements-Specify an anticipated
number of thermal cycles over the intended life of the
expansion joint.
4.2.17 Testing Requirements-Specify testing requirements
in addition to the hydrostatic test required by 9.4 (for example,
vacuum testing, testing at operating temperature).
4.2.18 Inspection Requirements-Specify inspection re-
quirements in addition to the inspection required by Section 9
(that is, radiographic, fluorescent penetrant, or mass spectrom-
eter).
4.2.19 Piping Code Requirements-Specify any piping or
design code that must be used as the basis for design in
addition to those specified in 5.2.
4.2.20 Special Requirements-Specify the magnitude of
special system conditions such as vibration, shock, or hydraulic
surge. When vibration is present the customer shall provide the
natural frequency of the equipment. The design engineer shall
design the bellows natural frequency to be less than '3 of the
system frequency or two times greater than the system fre-
quency.
4.2.21 Shipping Requirements-Specify whether special
packing is required including protection for extended outside
storage, export handling, or special lifting considerations for
heavy or large assemblies.
4.2.22 Piping Drawing-In addition to specifying the above
information it would be beneficial to provide a drawing of the
proposed piping system.
4.2.23 Supplementary Requirements-Specify any addi-
tional requirements not identified herein.
4.3 Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 should be used as a guide in ordering
expansion joints to this specification.
5.1 Materials:
5 .1.1 Pressure-containing parts shall be manufactured from
material specifications and grades listed in ANSI B31.1. End
connection materials shall have in service properties similar to
the bellows material. Flanges shall meet ANSI Bl6.5.
5 .1.2 All other materials of construction shall be of the type
specified by the user and shall conform to an ASTM or ASME
material specification. Materials not identified by the ordering
data shall be of the manufacturer's standard and of the same
quality used for the intended purpose in commercial practice.
5.1.3 Materials used shall be free from defects that would
adversely affect the performance of the expansion joint.
5.1.4 All material incorporated in the work covered by this
specification shall be new. The use of rebuilt or used products
is not allowed under this specification.
5.1.5 Materials for hinge or gimbal hardware, or other
sliding parts, shall be chosen to minimize galling of the
contacting parts.
5.2 Manufacture:
5.2.1 Expansion joints shall be designed and fabricated in
accordance with requirements set forth in the ordering data and
the EJMA Standards.
1748
5.2.2 Nonstandard flanges shall be designed and fabricated
in accordance with Appendix 2 of Section VIII, Division 1, of
the ASME Code. Flanges machined from plate shall not be
used at pressures exceeding 150 psi (1034 kPa) and tempera-
tures exceeding 450F (232C). Hubbed flanges machined
from plate or bar stock shall meet the requirements of
Appendix 2, Paragraph 2-2(d) of Section VIII, Division 1, of
the ASME Code.
5.2.3 All welding shall be accomplished in accordance with
ANSI B31.1.
5.2.4 Welding personnel and welding procedures shall be
qualified in accordance with the applicable sections of Section
IX of the ASME Code.
5.2.5 All fabrication details not covered by the referenced
codes and standards shall be taken from the appropriate ANSI
standard. If no standard applies, accepted industry practice
shall govern.
5.2.6 The bellows shall be of tested and proven convolution
geometry
6. Other
6.1 The details of design, material supply, fabrication, and
testing of the complete product are the responsibility of the
manufacturer unless specific details are requested by the
purchaser.
6.2 The specified normal operating movements (axial, lat-
eral, and angular) shall be available concurrently. The specified
lateral and angular movements shall be available on either side
of the expansion joint centerline.
6.3 Internal sleeves, external covers, and all attached hard-
ware shall be constructed so as not to interfere with adjacent
parts when the joint is in the fully deflected position.
6.4 Universal expansion joints shall be designed and fabri-
cated to be self-supporting and not require any external
structure for the support of the center pipe spool piece and its
contents.
6.5 Internally pressurized expansion joints to be installed in
systems above 150F (66C) shall have an external cover.
When external mechanical damage is possible, a cover shall be
fabricated to protect the joint and personnel.
6.6 Internal sleeves shall be installed in internally pressur-
ized expansion joints when the fluid velocity of the system,
where the expansion joint is to be installed, is greater than the
values listed in Section C-3.1 of the EJMA Standards and
where the flow velocity exceeds 75 % of the velocity calcu-
lated using Section C-3.1.4 of the EJMA Standards.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
7.1 Dimensional tolerances on completed expansion joint
assemblies shall be in accordance with Section D-2.9 of the
EJMA Standards and Standard ES-3 of the Pipe Fabricating
Institute.
8.1 The quality of workmanship shall be such as to produce
a product that is in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and ensures the proper functioning of all parts of
the unit.
0 F2934-12
8.2 The bellows shall be manufactured and carefully
handled to prevent surface flaws or deep scratches from being
generated. The surface condition of the completed joint assem-
bly shall be free from injurious surface discontinuities and any
contaminants that would affect the operation of the assembly.
8.3 On completion of fabrication, and before shipment, the
manufacturer shall clean the inside and outside of the com-
pleted assembly of all loose scale, grease, dirt, sand, rust, weld
spatter, cutting chips, and any other foreign matter by any
suitable means. The inside of the assembly shall then be
inspected for cleanliness. All openings where practicable shall
be suitably closed to prevent the entrance of foreign matter
after cleaning and during shipment. The use of chlorinated
solvents is prohibited.
9. Inspection
9.1 The responsibility for quality control rests with the
manufacturer. However, all phases of fabrication may be
subject to review by a representative of the purchaser.
9.2 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
access at all times, while work on the contract of the purchaser
is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's plant that
concern the manufacture of the product ordered. The manufac-
turer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy
the inspector that the product is being furnished in accordance
with this specification. Inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture before shipment, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be scheduled not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operations of the manufacturer. This requirement applies to all
subcontractors.
9.2.1 Acceptance of a particular phase of manufacturer of an
assembly by a purchaser's representative shall not be consid-
ered a waiver of any of the requirements of this specification
and shall not relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility of
furnishing a satisfactory product.
9.3 When the bellows is formed from a longitudinally
butt-welded cylinder, the longitudinal weld(s) shall be visually
inspected.
9.4 All pressure retaining components shall be hydrostati-
cally tested to 1.5 times their design pressure as outlined in
Section D-3.1.6 of the EJMA Standards. Moment restraint,
simulating piping rigidity, shall be used if necessary. The
expansion joint shall be vented before hydrotest. Test pressure
shall be held for ten minutes.
9.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, potable water is accept-
able for hydrotesting.
9.4.2 All piping and bellows shall be thoroughly drained
after hydrotesting.
9.4.3 Pneumatic testing may be substituted for hydrostatic
testing at the manufacturer's option. When substituted, pneu-
matic testing shall be accomplished in accordance with Section
137.5 of ANSI B31.1.
9.5 A dimensional inspection of the completed expansion
joint assemblies shall be performed in accordance with Section
D-2.9 of the EJMA Standards and Standard ES-3 of the Pipe
Fabricating Institute.
1749
9.6 A visual examination of the completed expansion joint
shall be made.
10.1 Expansion joint assemblies or parts thereof indicating
fabrication not in accordance with the manufacturing drawings
and procedures, or this specification, shall be subject to
rejection and shall be resolved in accordance with the manu-
facturer's quality assurance program (see Section 13.1 ).
10.2 All repairs shall be in accordance with the specified
code and other applicable specifications.
10.3 Expansion joint assemblies or parts thereof accepted
by the purchaser's representative at the place of manufacture
that subsequently reveal imperfections not previousiy detected
or which by subsequent tests or analysis show nonconformance
with this specification are subject to rejection.
11. Certification
manufacturer's certification shall be furnished to the purchaser.
It shall state that each expansion joint has been manufactured,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and
the requirements have been complied with. When specified, a
report of any test results shall be furnished.
11.2 When specified, certification of the conformance to the
requirements of this specification may be made by a third party.
11.3 When specified, ASTM/ ASME mill test reports are
required for pressure retaining and containing components.
11.4 No records are required for pipe fittings or flanges
provided they are made and marked in accordance with an
acceptable standard (such as ANSI). Certificates of confor-
mance are required when the markings are missing or are
removed during fabrication.
12. Packaging
12.1 The expansion joint shall be containerized or shipped
on pallets with all materials strapped down and prepared for
shipment in such a manner that the quality, cleanliness, and
finish shall be maintained during shipment.
12.2 Yellow painted shipping bars shall be furnished to
maintain proper shipping length and alignment, and designed
not to interfere with the installation of the assembly. The
shipping bars shall be removed after installation and before
piping system test. Expansion joints with tie rods can be
provided with tie rod spacers instead of shipping bars.
12.3 Installation instructions shall be supplied in a weath-
erproof envelope with each expansion joint assembly.
12.4 When the expansion joint is to be transported to the jot
site by ship, it should preferably be sent as below deck cargo
12.5 All external surfaces shall be treated and painted
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practices, unles:
otherwise specified. Paint shall be suitable for services tern
peratures.
dOlt.; F2934 - 12
<llilW
13.1 Nothing in this specification shall relieve the manufac-
turer of the responsibility for performing, in addition to the
requirements of this specification, such analyses, tests, inspec-
tions, or other activities that the manufacturer nec-
essary to ensure that the design, material, and workmanship are
satisfactory for the service intended, or as may be required by
common usage or good practice. M
14. Keywords
14.1 expansion joint; HVAC systems; metallic bellows-type
expansion joints; piping systems; piping thermal contraction;
piping thermal expansion
The following supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the purchaser. Other
requirements not identified in this specification may be included by agreement between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
S 1.1 drawings.
S 1.2 Welding procedures and qualifications.
S 1.3 Applicable nondestructive examination procedures.
S 1.4 Heat treatment procedures or temperature charts, or
both.
S 1.5 Complete engineering design analysis calculations for
the metallic bellows or hardware, or both.
S 1.6 ASME partial data forms.
S2.
S2.1 When spe:cltlled, the manufacturer shall furnish a first
article test assembly to determine conformance with this
specification. The test shall consist of the bellows
and end connections. Liners, covers, tie, limit or
and other similar devices
nrrHT1liPfi on the first article test unit, unless
are necessary for the of the test( s)
verification.
S2.2 When endurance testing (fatigue test-
ing) shall be for the number of cornpl.ete
cycles. The test shall be performed under pressure at ambient
temperature and the need be in axial move-
ment only.
S2.2.1 During the test, the pressure in the assembly shall be
adjusted to simulate, as closely as possible, the maximum
design pressure of the unit being qualified. The pressure may
vary from this value during each cycle.
S2.2.2 A single test bellows can be used instead of a mtlltliPle
bellows assembly qualified.
S2.2.3 In determining the qualifying extension or compres-
sion, or both, the equivalent axial movement caused by lateral
deflection and angular rotation shall be included. The
lent axial movement shall be computed in accordance with the
EJMA Standards and shall be algebraically added to the
specified values of axial movement.
S2.3 The may require that the expansion joint be
certified as passing shock requirements. The shock
ments shall be by the purchaser.
S2.3.1 The may require that the expansion joint be
certified as vibration requirements. The vibration
req1uiterr1ents shall be specified by the purchaser.
S2.3.2 When other qualifying tests shall be per-
formed on a first article test unit under the requirements of the
contract.
respor1sible technical committee, which you may attend. feel have not received a fair hearing you should
your views known to the ASTM Committee on at the shown below.
United States. Individual reprints {single or of this standard may be obtained by ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), or the ASTM website
Permission rights to photocopy the ASTM website (vvww.astm.org/
1750
Designation: F2935 -12

INTERNATIONAL
Chocks, Panama, Mooring Cast Steel
1
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the principal dimensions and
materials of chocks installed in ships to comply with the
regulations of the Panama Canal.
1.2 Chocks can be used with either wire rope or fiber and
deck, seat
1.5 The values stated in SI units are be as the
standard.
General f\j:)pL!tcano,n
2.2 ANSI 2Jta1utma:
B
Steel Carbon, for
to This Standard
3.1 bulwark-a structural enclosure along the
to serve as a
of the
3.2 closed chock-a metal flared ring-like mounted
on a ship through which lines pass to tow or moor a
ship.
3.3 mooring ring or pipe-a chock mounted in the bulwark
and to Type II or IV.
3.4 rope contact area-that part of the in contact with
the line in normal mc>orJmg
1
Structures.
Current edition approved Jan. l, 2012. Published February 2012. DOI:l0.1520/
ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.tc'tw.'vg,
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book
volume infoJmation, refer to the standard's Document
the ASTM website.
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), W. 43rd St.,
4. Classification
4.1 The size of the chock shall be identified by the nominal
size "L" and "H'' of the opening as shown in 'l'abie l and
1, and Table 2 and 2. Sizes larger than 360 mm by 260 mm
may be considered as double chocks.
4.2 Chocks are furnished in types as follows:
4 .. 2.1 Type /-Deck mounted, as shown in l, and
conforms to all dimensions in Table l.
4.2.2 Type /l-Bulwark mounted, as shown in 2, and
conforms to all dimensions in Table
4.2.3 Type Ill-Deck mounted conforming only to dimen-
sions "L", "H", and 180 mm radius at entrance, as shown
1 and Table 1 and the requirements of Sections 6-10.
4.2.4 Type /V-Bulwark mounted conforming only to di-
mensions "L", "H", and 180 mm radius at entrance, as shown
in 2 and Table 2 and the requirements of Sections to l 0.
4.3 Chocks shall be furnished in either of the
4.3.1 Grade ]-Surface fl.nish shall be in the as cast
condition.
4.3.2 Grade 2-Surface finish in way of rope contact shall
be in accordance with 7.2.
5.1 Orders for chocks under this specification shall include
this standard date, and the following:
5.1.1 Quantity (number) of chocks required,
5.1.2 Size (opening, L x H),
5 .1.3 and grade,
5.1.4 Primer and coating, if any (see 7.3), and
5.1.5 Marking.
6.1 Material shall be cast steel in accordance with
cation A27/ A27M, Grade 60-30.
For
chock is in compliance with Panama Canal recmrrenner1ts.
that
shall be smooth, fine and free of cracks,
hot tears, and blow holes, detrimental to end use.
an area than 25 25 and of more
than 10% of the thickness in way thereof will be cause for
Small defects in way of rope contact shall be welded
1751
0 F2935-12
TABLE 1 Dimension Requirements (see Fig. 1)
(Unit: mm)
Nominal size L H
310 310 260
360 360 260
R
130
130
R
329
330
R
233
235
Nominal size R3 R4 Rs T D
Welding leg length
Calculated weight (kg)
310 142 140 195 32 38
360 140 138 192 34 40
NoTE 1-All fillet radii to be equal to "T'.
NoTE 2-All final products must have a thickness no less than "T".
z
8 471
8.5 687
tonnes
48
70
257
286
FIG. 1 Configuration of Deck Mounted Chocks
TABLE 2 Dimension Requirements (see Fig. 2}
(Unit: mm)
Nominal size L H
310 310 260
360 360 260
Nominal size Rs T 01
310 205 25 31 44
360 203 27 33 43
and finished smooth. Where applicable, welding shall be in
accordance with code requirements, such as ABS, A WS and so
on, and may require post weld heat treatment (PWHT).
6.4 All excess material, vents, and gates shall be removed
and finished smooth to match the surrounding surface.
6.5 Limber or drain holes shall be 25 mm in diameter and
provided in webs and brackets to prevent water entrapment.
6.6 Type I shall be in accordance with 1 and Table 1.
6. 7 Type II shall be in accordance with and Table 2.
1752
R R
130 147
130 145
kN tonnes
Calculated weight (kg)
726 70 228
814 79 248
7.1 Casting shall be sand, grit, or shot blasted to a gray
metal finish to remove all loose scale. All mold flashing shall
be removed and radii shall be fair so as to present an even
surface.
7.2 Surface of Grade 2 chocks shall have a rope contact
surface of average surface roughness of 3 11m or less, in
accordance with ANSI standard B 46.1 so as to reduce abrasive
damage to fiber and synthetic ropes.
F2935 -12
NoTE 1-All fillet radii to be equal to "t".
FIG. 2 Configuration of Bulwark Mounted Chocks
7.3 The manufacturer shall provide additional surface
preparation and coating as specified by the ordering informa-
tion. In the absence of such requirements, surface preparation
shall remain as required by 7 .1.
least 12 mm high designating the ASTM standard number,
type, and grade. Other marking may be in paint or a waterproof
tag.
8. Inspection
8.1 The manufacturer shall visually inspect the chock for
dimensions, workmanship, finish, and appearance after the
preparation required by 7.1 to ascertain that it meets the intent
of this specification.
10.1 If shipment is required, chocks shall be crated or
attached to a pallet in a manner acceptable for shipment by a
common canier.
9. Product Marking
9.1 Each chock shall be marked with purchase order, item
number, and stamped on the top exposed web using letters at
COPYRIGHT/).
1753

INTERNATIONAL
--------
Chocks, Ship Mooring, Cast Steel
1
1.
.1 This covers the principal dimensions and
materials of closed chocks for installation on used for
1.2 Chocks can be used with either wire rope or fiber and
synthetic ropes.
1.3 Chocks are for directly on a deck, seat
(foundation), or for mounting in a bulwark.
1.4 The values stated in Sl units are to be regarded as
standard.
2, Referenced Documents
for Steel Carbon, for
2.2 ANSI Standard:
46.1 Surface
Terms to This Standard:
bulwark-a structural enclosure along the edge of the
ship to serve as a rail.
3.1.2 closed chock--a metal flared ring-like fitting mounted
on a through which lines pass to moor a ship.
3.1.3 mooring ring or pipe-a chock mounted in the bul-
wark and to Il and IV.
3.1 rope contact area-that part of the in contact
with the line in normal operaltio>ns.
4. Classification
4.1 The size of the chocks will be identified
size and "H" of the as shown in
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee
and Marine Technology and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee on
Structures.
Current edition approved Jan. I, 2012. Published February 2012.
2
referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
the ASTM website.
3
4th Floor, New York, NY J 0036, http://www.ansi.org.
4.2 Chocks are furnished in types as follows:
4.2.1 Type /-Deck mounted as shown in
conforming to all dimensions in Table J
4.2.2 Type /l-Bulwark mounted as shown in
conforming to all dimensions in 'fable
4.2.3 Type Ill-Deck mounted, conforming
sions "L" and "H" of 1 and is of aaequa:re
least meet requirement and the re<wiretnents
to 10.
4.2.4 Type /V-Bulwark mounted, conforming only to
mensions "L" and "H" of Table and is of adequate
to at least meet requirement and the
Sections 6 to 10.
4.3 Chocks shall be furnished in either of the
grades:
4.3.1 Grade J-Surface finish shall be in the as
condition.
4.3.2 Grade 2-Surface finish in way of rope contact
be in accordance with
this standard, date, and the
5.1.1 information (size, material, etc.) of
lines,
5.1.2 Quantity (number) of chocks """""""'"'rl
5.1.3 Size L x H),
5.1.4
1.5 if any (see 8.3), and
5.1.6 HHUI>.JlH"-
6. I Material shall be cast steel in accordance with
cation /\27 I A27M, Grade 60-30.
6.2 For
of the chock will at least meet
is suitable for the lines
information.
6.3
hot tears, and blow holes, detrimental to
an area than 25 25 and a
than 10 % of the thickness in way thereof cause
Smaller defects in way of rope contact
Copyright ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C/00, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
1754
and
and
F2936-12
TABLE 1 Dimension Requirements (see Fig. 1)
300x250x286 614 565 89 330 551 481 144 125 282 212 144
350x250x333 716 660 114 403 601 525 168 125 308 232 168
400x250x381 820 754 139 475 652 553 192 125 335 236 192
450x250x381 870 804 164 524 652 553 192 125 335 236 192
500x250x381 920 854 189 574 652 553 192 125 335 236 192
400x250x428 870 796 139 500 701 609 216 125 360 268 216
450x250x428 920 846 164 550 701 609 216 125 360 268 216
500x250x428 970 896 189 600 701 609 216 125 360 268 216
500x400x428 970 896 1"16 600 851 759 216 200 435 343 216
500x250x525A 1068 1000 190 652 798 675 264 125 409 286 264
500x400x525A 1068 1000 193 652 948 825 264 200 484 361 264
500x250x525
8
1074 1000 176 652 801 680 264 125 412 291 264
300x250x286 118 180 154 144 26 6.5 422 40 24 142
350x250x333 138 200 170 168 30 7.5 549 56 28 222
400x250x38i 156 250 214 192 36 9 687 70 32 310
450x250x381 156 250 214 192 36 9 706 72 32 322
500x250x38i 156 250 214 192 36 9 765 78 32 337
400x250x428 178 250 212 216 38 9.5 883 90 36 434
450x250x428 178 250 212 216 38 9.5 912 93 36 452
500x250x428 178 250 212 216 38 9.5 932 95 36 472
500x400x428 178 250 212 216 38 9.5 893 91 36 528
500x250x525A 224 320 280 264 40 10 1148 117 44 657
500x400x525A 224 320 280 264 40 10 1158 118 44 724
500x250x525
8
218 320 274 264 46 11.5 1413 144 44 753
500x400x525
8
218 320 274 264 46 11.5 1383 141 44 825
ASWLs shown in the Table are tor reference only. "SWL" may be adjusted depending on the actual loading conditions, and the actual marking is to be per the agreement
the user and the manufacturer.
for reference based on bending ratio of rope through the chock is i 2 times.
shall
be in accordance with code such ABS, AWS,
and so on, and may post weld heat treatment (PWHT).
6.4 All excess material, vents, and gates shall be removed
and finished smooth to match the surface.
6.5 Limber or drain holes shall be 25 mm in diameter and
nrrUH,Ar! in webs and brackets to prevent water entrapment
6.6 I shall be in accordance with and l.
6.7 shall be accordance with and 2.
7.
withstand the
surface.
8.2 The surface of Grade chocks shall have a line contact
surface of average surface of 3 !Jill or m
accordance with ANSI standard B 46.1 so as to reduce abrasive
to fiber and synthetic ropes.
SUfface
orclenmg information. In the absence
shall remain
9.1 The manufacturer shall the chock
finish, and appearance after the
''"''-'u"'"''" in B.l to ascertain that it the
10. Product
Each chock shall be marked with pmch:ase
tag.
attached to a
common carrier.
shall be crated
accept<lble for shlTHnent
F2936-12
TABLE 2 Dimensions Requirement (see Fig. 2)
(Units: mm)
Nominal size
I, 12 H, H2
R R, R2 R3 R4 As
LxHxD
250x200x214 516 441 466 306 100 233 153 108 96 150
300x250x286 638 554 588 410 125 294 205 144 128 180
350x250x333 736 646 636 449 125 318 224.5 168 150 200
400x250x381 834 736 684 450 125 342 225 192 172 250
450x250x381 884 786 684 450 125 342 225 192 172 250
500x250x381 934 836 684 450 125 342 225 192 172 250
400x250x428 882 778 732 515 125 366 257.5 216 194 250
450x250x428 932 828 732 515 125 366 257.5 216 194 250
500x250x428 982 878 732 515 125 366 257.5 216 194 250
500x400x428 982 878 882 665 200 441 332.5 216 194 250
500x250x525 1078 976 828 551 125 414 275.5 264 240 320
500x400x525 1078 978 978 701 200 489 350.6 264 240 320
500x250x525 1078 976 828 554 125 414 277 264 238 320
500x400x525 1078 978 978 704 200 489 352 264 238 320
Nominal size
Welding leg length SWL
Calculated
LxHxD
RB d, d2 T Rope diameter (Recommend) weight
z, z2 kN ton k A
250x200x214 138 108 80 12 44 6 5 226 23 18 49
300x250x286 164 144 100 16 44 8 6.5 422 40 24 100
350x250x333 182 168 120 18 55 9 7 549 56 28 141
400x250x381 230 192 120 20 4r 10 8 687 70 32 184
450x250x381 230 192 120 20 47 10 8 706 72 32 194
500x250x381 230 192 120 20 47 10 8 765 78 32 202
400x250x428 228 216 120 22 56 11 9 883 90 36 264
450x250x428 228 216 120 22 56 11 9 912 93 36 276
500x250x428 228 216 120 22 56 11 9 932 95 36 288
500x400x428 228 216 120 22 56 11 9 893 91 36 311
500x250x525
8
296 264 120 24 53 12 9.5 1148 117 44 379
500x400x525c 296 264 120 24 53 12 9.5 1158 118 44 408
ACalculated weight is for reference only.
8
SWLs shown in the Table are for reference only. "SWL" may be adjusted depending on the actual loading conditions, and the actual marking is to be per the agreement
between the user and the manufacturer.
cRope diameter (Recommend) is only for reference based on bending ratio of rope through the chock is 12 times.
Section a-a"

NoTE 1-All fillet radii to be equal to "t/'.
NoTE 2--All final products must have a thickness no less than "T".
FIG. 1 Configuration of Deck Mounted Chocks
1756
F2936-12
NoTE 1-All fillet radii to be equal to "tt.
NoTE 2--All final products must have a thickness no less than "T".
J
J
NoTE 1-The loads were considered for a mooring or towing line
deflected 180 (El :::: 0) through the closed chock.
NoTE 2-P means mooring force or towing force.
FIG. 3 Horizontal Loading
1757
(P)
deflected as above figures through the closed chock.
Vertical down side: Outboard down 90, Inboard down 30
Vertical up side: Outboard up 30, Inboard up 15
FIG. 4 Vertical loading for Type A-Deck-mounted closed chocks
F2936-12
lf----
11
u
NoTE 1-The loads were considered for a mooring or towing line deflected as above figures through the closed chock.
FIG. 5 Vertical loading for Type B-Bulwark-mounted closed chocks without bulwark inclination
NOTE 1-The loads were considered for a mooring or towing line deflected as above figures through the closed chock.
Vertical down side: Outboard down 90, Inboard down eo is not to over the figures in T..1hlc
(a
0
: Refer to the examples below for instance, at the design bulwark angle of p = 60)
Nominal size (L x H x D)
250 X 200 X 214
300 X 250 X 286
350 X 250 X 333
400 X 250 X 381
450 X 250 X 381
500 X 250 X 381
400 X 250 X 428
450 X 250 X 428
500 X 250 X 428
500 X 400 X 428
500 X 250 X 525
500 X 400 X 525
500 X 250 X 525
500 X 400 X 525
ao (Maximum available
14
14
25
17
17
17
26
26
26
26
23
23
23
23
FIG. 6 Vertical Loading for Type B- Bulwark-mo!.mted Closed Chocks with Bulwark Inclination
!758
F2936-12
NoTE 1-All fillet radii to be equal to "tt.
]
J
deflected 180 (6 = 0) through the closed chock.
FIG. 3 Horizontal Loading
1757
(P)
deflected as above figures through the closed chock.
NOTE 2-P means mooring force or towing force.
FIG. 4 Vertical loading for Type A-Deck-mounted closed chocks
F2936 -12
FIG. 5 Vertical loading for Type 8-Bulwark-mounted closed chocks without bulwark inclination
Vertical down side: Outboard down 900, Inboard down eo is not to over the figures in Table
(a
0
: Refer to the examples below for instance, at the design bulwark angle o f ~ = 60)
Nominal size (L x H x D)
250 X 200 X 214
300 X 250 X 286
350 X 250 X 333
400 X 250 X 381
450 X 250 X 381
500 X 250 X 381
400 X 250 X 428
450 X 250 X 428
500 X 250 X 428
500 X 400 X 428
500 X 250 X 525
500 X 400 X 525
500 X 250 X 525
500 X 400 X 525
ao (Maximum available
14
14
25
17
17
17
26
26
26
26
23
23
2 ~ l
23
FIG. 6 Vertical loading for Type B- Bulwark-mounted Closed Chocks with Bulwark Inclination
!758
0 F2936-12
This standard is subject to revisior. at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
COPYRIGHT/).
1759
RELATED MATERIAL
Sl QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE:
International System of Units (SI)
The Modern Metric System*
UNITS
The International System of Units (SI) is based on seven base units:
Quantity
length
mass
time
electric current
thermodynamic temperature
amount of substance
luminous intensity
Name
metre
kilogram
second
ampere
kelvin
moie
candela
Base Units
Symbol
m
kg
s
A
K
moi
cd
and a number of derived units which are combinations of base units and which may have special
names and symbols:
Examples of Derived Units
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name
acceleration
angular rad/s
2
linear m/s
2
angle
plane dimensionless radian rad
solid dimensionless steradian sr
area
m2
Celsius temperature K degree Celsius oc
density
heat flux W/m
2
mass kg/m
3
current
A/m2
energy, enthalpy
work, heat Nm joule J
specific J/kg
entropy
heat capacity J/K
specific J/(kgK)
flow, mass kg/s
flow, volume m
3
/s
force kgm/s
2
newton N
frequency
periodic 1/s hertz Hz
rotating rev/s
inductance Wb/A henry H
magnetic flux Vs weber Wb
mass flow kg/s
moment of a force Nm
potential, electric W/A volt v
power, radiant flux J/s watt w
pressure, stress N/m
2
pascal Pa
resistance, electric VIA ohm
Q
thermal conductivity W/(mK)
velocity
angular rad/s
linear m/s
viscosity
dynamic (absolute)(!!) Pas
kinematic (v) m
2
/s
volume
m3
volume, specific m
3
/kg
1763
Sl QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
SYMBOLS
Symbol Name
A ampere
Bq becquerel
c coulomb
oc
degree Celsius
cd candela
F farad
Gy gray
g gram
H henry
Hz hertz
ha hectare*
J joule
K kelvin
kg kiloaram
L
litre-
lm lumen
IX lux
m metre
mol mole
N newton
Q
ohm
Pa pascal
rad radian
s siemens
Sv sievert
s second
sr steradian
T tesla
t tonne, metric ton
v volt
w watt
Wb weber
*allowed with Sl
Use of Symbols
The correct use of symbols is important because an incorrect symbol
may change the meaning of a quantity. Some SI symbols are listed in
the Symbol table.
SI has no abbreviations-only symbols. Therefore, no periods follow
a symbol except at the end of a sentence.
Examples: A, not amp; s, not sec; SI, not S.l.
Symbols appear in lower case unless the unit name has been taken
from a proper name. In this case the first letter of the symbol is capi-
talized.
Examples: m, metre; Pa, pascal; W, watt
Exception: L, litre
Symbols and prefixes are printed in upright (roman) type regard-
less of the type style in surrounding text.
Example: ... a distance of 73 km between ...
Unit symbols are the same whether singular or plural.
Examples: 1 mm, 100 mm; 1 kg, 65 kg
Leave a space between the value and the symbol.
Examples: 115 W, not 115W; 0.75 L, not 0.75L
88 C, not 88C or 88 C
Quantity
electric current
activity (of a radio nuclide)
electric charge
temperature interval
luminous intensity
electric capacitance
absorbed dose
mass
inductance
frequency
area
energy, work, heat
temperature
mass
volume
luminous flux
illuminance
length
amount of substance
force
electric resistance
pressure, stress
plane angle
electric conductance
dose equivalent
time
solid angle
magnetic flux density
mass
electric potential
power, radiant flux
magnetic flux
Formula
base unit
1/s
As
oc = K
base unit
CN
J/kg
kg/1000
Wb/A
1/s
10 000 m2
Nm
base unit
base unit
m3/1000
cdsr
lm/m2
base unit
base unit
kgm/s2
VIA
N/m2
m/m (dimensionless)
AN
J/kg
base unit
m2/m2 (dimensionless)
Wb/m2
1000 kg; Mg
W/A
J/s
Vs
Exception: No space is left between the numerical
value and symbol for degree of plane
angle.
Examples: 73 o, not 73 o
Note: Symbol for for coulomb is C; for degree Celsius it is C
Do not mix symbols and names in the same expression.
Examples: radians per second or rad/s
not radians/second; not radians/s
mls or metres per second,
not metres/second; not metres/s
J!kg or joules per kilogram,
not joules/kilogram; not joules/kg
Symbol for product-use the raised dot ( )
Examples: Nm; mPas; W/(m2K)
Symbol for quotient-use one of the following forms:
Examples: mls or W. or use negative exponent
Note: Use only one solidus (I ) per expression and parentheses to
avoid any ambiguity.
1764
PREFIXES
Most prefixes indicate orders of magnitude in steps of 1000 and pro-
vide a convenient way to express large and small numbers and to
eliminate nonsignificant digits and leading zeros in decimal fractions.
Examples: 64 000 watts is the same as 64 kilowatts*
0.057 metre is the same as 57 millimetres
16 000 metres is the same as 16 kilometres*
*except for intended accuracy
Prefix Symbol Represents
yotta
y 1024
zetta z
1021
exa E 1018
peta
p 1015
tera T 1012
gig a G 109
mega M 106
kilo k 103
hecto h* 102
deka da*
1Q1
deci d* 10-1
centi c* 10-2
milli m 10-3
micro m 10-6
nano n 10-9
pi co p
10-12
femto f
10-15
atto a
10-18
zepto z
10-21
yocto y
10-24
To realize the full benefit of the prefixes when expressing a quantity
by numerical value, choose a prefix so that the number lies between
0.1 and 1000. For simplicity, give preference to prefixes representing
1000 raised to an integral power (i.e., mm, !liD, km).
*Exceptions:
In expressing area and volume, the prefixes hecto,
deka, deci, and centi may by required; for
example, cubic decimetre (L), square hectometre
(hectare), cubic centimetre.
Tables of values of the same quantity.
Comparison of values.
For certain quantities in particular applications. For example, the
millimetre is used for linear dimensions in architectural and
engineering drawings even when the values lie faroutside the
range of 0.1 mrn to 1000 mm; the centimetre is usually used for
anatomical measurements and clothing sizes.
Compound units. A compound unit is a derived unit expressed with
two or more units. The prefix is attached to a unit in the numerator.
Examples: VIm not mV/mm
MJ/kg not kJ/g
Compound prefixes formed by a combination of two or more prefix-
es are not used. Use only one prefix.
Examples: 2 nm not 2 ID!!m
6m3 not 6 kL
6 MPa not 6 kkPa
Exponential Powers. An exponent attached to a symbol containing a
prefix indicates that the multiple (of the unit with its prefix) is raised
to the power of l 0 expressed by the exponent.
Examples: 1 mm3 = (10-3 m)3 = 10-9m3
1 ns-1 = (10-9 s)-1 109 s-1
l mm2/s (10-3 m)2/s = 10-6 m2/s
NUMBERS
International practice separates the digits of large numbers into
groups of three, counting from the decimal to the left and to the right,
and inserts a space to separate the groups. In numbers of four digits,
the space is not necessary except for uniformity in tables.
Examples: 6.358 568; 85 365; 51 845 953; 88 000;
0.246 113 562; 7 258
Small Numbers. When writing a number between one and minus one,
put a zero before the decimal marker.
Note: This applies to large numbers which have an exponent: as -0.1 x
10"6. This rule is given colloquially as "never use a naked decimal
point."
Decimal Marker. The recommended decimal marker is a dot on the
line (period). (In some countries, a comma is used as the decimal
marker.)
Because billion means a million million in most countries but a thou-
sand million in the United States, avoid using billion in technical writ-
ing.
DO'S AND DON'TS
The units in the international system of units are called SI units-not
Metric Units and not SI Metric Units.
Non-SI units include inch-pound units, old metric units and many
other units. Inch=pound units (IP) refers to sets of units which contain
inches and pounds. These include so-called customary units, US cus-
tomary units, conventional units, imperial units, and English units.
Treat all spelled out names as nouns. Therefore, do not capitalize the
first l'e!ter of a unit except at the beginning of a sentence or in capital-
ized material such as a title.
Examples: watt; pascal; ampere; volt; newton; kelvin
Exception: Always capitalize the first letter of Celsius.
Do not begin a sentence with a unit symbol-either rearrange the unit
names or write the unit name in full.
Use plurals for spelled out unit names when required by the rules of
grammar.
Examples:
Irregular:
metre-metres; henry-henries;
kilogram-kilograms; kelvin-kelvins
hertz-hertz; lux-lux; siemens-siemens
Do not put a space or hyphen between the prefix and unit name.
Examples: kilometre not kilo metre or kilo-metre;
milliwatt not milli watt or milli-watt
1765
When a prefix ends with a vowel and the unit name begins with a
vowel, retain and pronounce both vowels.
Example: kiloampere
Exceptions: hectare; kilohm; megohm
When a derived unit name is formed by multiplication, leave a space
between units that are multiplied.
Examples: newton metre, not newton-metre;
volt ampere, not volt-ampere
Use the modifier squared or cubed after the unit name.
Example: metre per second squared
Exception: For area or volume the modifier may be
placed before the units.
Example: square millimetre; cubic metre
When derived units are formed by division, use the word per, not a
solidus (().
xamples: metre per second, not metre/second; watt
per square metre, not watt/square meter
SELECTED CONVERSION FACTORS
CAUTION: These conversion values are rounded to three or four sig-
nificant figures, which is sufficiently accurate for most applications.
When making conversions, remember that a converted value is no
more precise than the original value. Round off the final value to the
same number of significant figures as those in the original value. See
ANSI SI I 0 for additional conversions with more significant figures.
To Obtain
acre 0.4047 ha
atmosphere, standard *101.325 kPa
bar *100 kPa
barrel (42 US gal, petroleum) 159 L
Btu, (International Table) 1.055 kJ
Btu/lb oF (specific heat, CP) 4.184 kJ/(kgK)
bushel 0.03524
m3
calorie, kilogram (kilocalorie) 4.187 kJ
candle, candlepower *1.0 cd
centipoise, dynamic vicosity, !-.1. *1.00 mPas
centistokes, kinematic viscosity, v '1.00 mm
2
/s
ft *0.3048 m
ft *304.8 mm
ft/min, fpm *0.00508 m/s
ft/s, fps *0.3048 m/s
ft of water 2.99 kPa
tt2
0.09290
m2
tt
2
/s, kinematic viscosity, v 92 900 mm
2
/s
tt3
28.32 L
tt3
0.02832
m3
ft
3
/h, cfh 7.866 mUs
ft
3
/min, cfm 0.4719 Us
ft
3
/s, cfs 28.32 Us
foot candle 10.76 lx
ftlb
1
(torque or moment) 1.36 Nm
ftlb
1
(work) 1.36 J
ftlb
1
/lb (specific energy) 2.99 J/kg
ftlb
1
/min (power) 0.0226 w
gallon, US (*231 in
3
) 3.785 L
Multiply By To Obtain
gph 1.05 mUs
gpm 0.0631 Us
gpm/tt2 0.6791 U(sm
2
)
gr/gal 17.1 g/m3
horsepower (550 ftlb
1
/s) 0.746 kW
inch *25.4 mm
in of mercury (60F) 3.377 kPa
in of water (60 oF) 248.8 Pa
inlb, (torque or moment) 113 mNm
in
2
645 mm
2
in
3
(volume) 16.4 ml
in
3
(section modulus) 16 400 mm
3
in
4
(section moment) 416 200 mm
4
km/h 0.278 m/s
kWh *3.60 MJ
kip/in
2
(ksi) 6.895 MPa
litre *0.001
m3
micron ~ - t m ) of mercury (60F) 133 mPa
mil (0.001 in.) *25.4 mm
mile 1.61 km
mile, nautical 1.85 km
mph 1.61 km/h
mph 0.447 m/s
millibar *0.100 kPa
mm of mercury (60 oF) 0.133 kPa
mm of water (60 oF) 9.80 Pa
ounce (mass, avoirdupois) 28.35 g
ounce (force of thrust) 0.278 N
ounce (liquid, US) 29.6 mL
ounce (avoirdupois) per gallon 7.49 kg/m
3
pint (liquid, US) 473 ml
pound
Ibm (mass) 0.4536 kg
Ibm (mass) 453.6 g
lbf (force or thrust) 4.45 N
lbm/ft (uniform load) 1.49 kg/m
lbm/(fth) (dynamic viscosity, ~ t ) 0.413 mPas
lbm/(fts) (dynamic viscosity, ~ t ) 1490 mPas
lbts/ft
2
(dynamic viscosity, ~ t ) 47 880 mPas
Ibm/min 0.00756 kg/s
lbm/h 0.126 g/s
lbf/ft
2
47.9 Pa
lbm/ft
2
4.88 kg/m
2
Ibm /ft
3
(density, p) 16.0 kg/m
3
Ibm/gallon 120 kg/m
3
ppm (by mass) *1.00 mg/kg
psi 6.895 kPa
quad (1 0
15
Btu) 1.06 EJ
quart (liquid, US) 0.946 L
rpm 0.105 rad/s
tablespoon (approx.) 15 ml
teaspoon (approx.) 5 mL
therm (1 00,000 Btu) 105.5 MJ
ton, short (2000 lb) 0.907 Mg; t (tonne)
yd *0.9144 m
yd2
0.836
m2
yd3 0.7646
m3
*Conversion factor is exact.
Note: In this list the kelvin (K) expresses temperature intervals.
The degree Celsius symbol (C) may be used for this purpose as well.
1766

INTERNATIONAL
ANNUAL BOOK of ASTM STANDARDS
Index
Section 1
This index covers the standards and related material appea..ring in this volume(s) or section only. The boldface
references represent the ASTM designations. For multiple volume or section indexes, the volume in which the standard
appears is included in parentheses. A Combined Index, covering the standards appearing in all volumes of the 2013
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, is issued as Volume 00.01.
Alphabetization in the index is letter-for-letter, with no consideration to punctuation or word division. Initial
prepositions of (indented) subentries are ignored for alphabetization.
In the preparation of indexes, every attempt has been made to index standards on three levels: (1) by main subject,
using general and specific search terms; (2) by tests or other significant sections of ASTM standards; and (3) by
cross-references to locate main subject entry terms. (See also references are abbreviated as Sa and appear under main
entry terms.) The following examples illustrate ASTM's method of indexing.
INDEX TERMS FOR SPECIFICATIONS
Steel pipe-carbon steel
Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service,
Specification for, A333/A333M (01.01)
Steel tube-ferritic stainless steel
Seamless and Welded Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service, Specification for,
A789/A789M (01.01)
INDEX TERMS FOR TESTS
Gold-electrodeposited coating
Installing Corrugated Aluminum Structural Plate Pipe for
Culverts and Sewers, Practice for, B789/B789M (02.02)
Effective elastic parameter (Eetr)
Determining the Effective Elastic Parameter for X-Ray
Diffraction Measurements of Residual Stress,
Test Method for, E1426 (03.01)
CROSS-REFERENCES
Water-drinking
See Drinking water
PDB (pressure design basis)
See Pressure design basis (PDB)
Sa Pressure testing
1767
Index of ASTM Standards, Section 1
A
Abbreviated ratio tables
Tin Mill Products, General Requirements, Specification for,
A623 (01.06)
Tin Mill Products, General Requirements Metric, Specification
for, A623M (01.06)
Aboveground drain/waste/vent pipe/fittings
Shielded Transition Couplings for Use With Dissimilar DWV
Pipe and Fittings Above Ground, Specification for,
C1460 (01.02)
Aboveground storage tanks (AST)
See Storage containers/tanks-specifications
Abrasion resistance
Comparing the Abrasion Resistance of Coating Materials for Cor-
rugated Metal Pipe, Test Method for, A926 (01.06)
Abrasion resistant iron castings
Abrasion-Resistant Cast Irons, Specification for,
A532/A532M (01.02)
Abrasion resistant roll shell
Centrifugally Cast White Iron/Gray Iron Dual Metal Abrasion-
Resistant Roll Shells, Specification for, A942 (01.02)
Abrasive blasting
Metallic Abrasive Blasting to Descale the Interior of Pipe, Guide
for, F1330 (01.07)
Abrasive conditions
Structural Design of Corrugated Steel Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and
Arches for Storm and Sanitary Sewers and Other Buried
Applications, Practice for, A796/A796M (01.06)
Absolute luminance
See Luminance
A-C (alternating-current) magnetic properties
Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings Using Alternat-
ing Current, Practice for, A966/A966M (01.05)
A-C (alternating-current) permeabilities
See Magnetic properties
Accelerated weathering
See Weathering
Acceptance criteria/testing--castings
Steel Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Magnetic Particle
and Liquid Penetrant Inspection, Specification for,
A903/A903M (01.02)
Acceptance criteria/testing-metals/alloys
Magnetic Particle Examination of Large Crankshaft, Specification
for, A456/A456M (01.05)
Accessability
Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment, and
Facilities, Practice for, F1166 (01.07)
Human Systems Integration Program Requirements for Ships and
Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities, Practice for,
F1337 (01.07)
Accordian-style gates
See Fences/fencing materials
Accountability
See Quality control (QC)
Acid cleaning
See Cleaning agents/processes
Acoustic emission (AE) testing
See Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)
Acoustic velocity
See Velocity
AC power
Surge Suppressors for Shipboard Use, Specification for,
F1507 (01.07)
Acronyms
Implementation of a Fleet Management System Network, Guide
for, F1756 (01.07)
Active humidification systems
See Humidity
Active sampler methodology
See Sampling
Adapters (marine couplings)
Quick Disconnect Couplings (6 in. NPS and Smaller), Specifica-
tion for, F1122 (01.07)
Additives-lubricating oils
See Lubricating oils
Adhesion-paints/related coatings/materials
Performance of Enameling System, Baking, Metal Joiner Work
and Furniture, Specification for, F1178 (01.07)
Advanced ceramics
See Ceramic materials/applications-specifications
Aerated media polarization (AMP) test
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Aerospace applications-specifications
Premium Quality Alloy Steel Blooms and Billets for Aircraft and
Aerospace Forgings, Specification for,
A646/A646M (01.05)
Age-hardening alloys-specifications
Age-Hardening Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Compo-
nents, Specification for, A859/ A859M (01.05)
Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings, Specification for,
A 705/ A 705M (01.03)
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel
Bars and Shapes, Specification for, A564/A564M (01.03)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-
Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-
Copper-Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel,
Aging
See Weathering
1768
Agricultural materials/applications-specifications
Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Exterior Profiles Used for
Fencing and Railing, Specification for, F964 (01.06)
Air conditioning materials/applications
Mechanical Symbols, Shipboard-Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC), Practice for, F856 (01.07)
Air conditioning materials/applications-specifications
Dehumidifier, Shipboard, Mechanically Refrigerated, Self-
Contained, Specification for, F1075 (01.07)
Mechanically Refrigerated Shipboard Air Conditioner, Specifica-
tion for, F1433 (01.07)
Aircraft materials/applications-specifications
A646/A646M (01.05)
Stranded Carbon Steel Wire Ropes for General Purposes, Specifi-
cation for, A1023/A1023M (01.03)
Aircraft-quality steel balls
Balls, Bearings, Ferrous and Nonferrous for Use in Bearings,
Valves, and Bearing Applications, Specification for,
F2215 (01.08)
Air discharge plenus
tion for, F1433 (01.07)
Air dry touch-up enamel
Airfoils
Steel Forgings, Stainless, for Compressor and Turbine Airfoils,
Air bose
Pneumatic Rotary Descaling Machines, Specification for,
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Air motor
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Airport pavement-specifications
See Pavement surfaces-specifications
Air systems
Automatic Shut-Off Valves (Also Known as Excess Flow Valves,
EFV) for Air or Nitrogen Service, Specification for,
F1793 (01.07)
Filters Used in Air or Nitrogen Systems, Specification for,
F1791 (01.07)
Pressure-Reducing Manifolds for Air or Nitrogen Systems, Speci-
fication for, F1685 (01.07)
Pressure-Reducing Valves for Air or Nitrogen Systems, Specifica-
tion for, F1795 (01.07)
Airtight doors-specifications
Sa Shipbuilding steel materials-specifications
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Gas tight I Airtight, Weathertight,
and Non-Tight Doors, for Marine Use, Specification for,
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastight/Airtight, Individually Dogged, forMa-
rine Use, Specification for, F1068 (01.07)
Doors, Watertight, Gastight/ Airtight and Weathertight, Individu-
ally Dogged, for Marine Use, Specification for,
F1069 (01.07)
Alarm signalling device/alarms
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, F1198 (01.07)
Albino rats
See Rats
Aliphatic ester lubricants
See Lubricants (fluid)
Alkali-ion diode halogen leak testing
See Leak testing
Allowable properties
See Mechanical properties
Alloy coating
See Hot-dip (galvanized) coatings
Alloying additives
See Stainless steel alloying additives
Alloy steel
Sa Carbon steel bolting materials-specifications
Selection of Committee Fl6 Fastener Specifications, Guide for,
F1077 (01.08)
Specifying Harmonized Standard Grade Compositions for
Wrought Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steels, Guide for,
A1040 (01.05)
Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys, Terminol-
ogy Relating to, A941 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon
and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
Threaded Fasteners, Specification for, F2329 (01.08)
Alloy steel-tool steel
See Tool steel-specifications
Alloy steel bars
Comparing Bond Strength of Steel Reinforcing Bars to Concrete
Using Beam-End Specimens, Test Method for,
A944 (01.04)
Macroetch Testing of Consumable Electrode Remelted Steel Bars
and Billets, Practice for, A604/A604M (01.05)
Alloy steel bars-specifications
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Ser-
vice, Specification for, A320/A320M (01.01)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars Subject to End-Quench Hardenabil-
ity Requirements, Specification for, A304 (01.05)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars for Springs, Specification for,
A689 (01.05)
Common Requirements for Bolting Intended for Use at Any
Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range, Specifica-
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
Alloy steel castings
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel,
Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Rein-
forcement, Specification for, A 706/ A 706M (01.04)
Stainless and Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially Heat
Treated for High-Temperature Service, Specification for,
A437/A437M (01.01)
Steel Bars Subject to Restricted End-Quench Hardenability Re-
quirements, Specification for, A914/A914M (01.05)
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Quenched and
Tempered, Specification for, A434 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or
Pressure-Containing Parts, or Both, Specification for,
A 739 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades, Specification for,
A322 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Alloys, for Nitriding, Specification for, A355 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought, General Require-
ments for, Specification for, A29/A29M (01.05)
Structural Steel for Bridges, Specification for,
A709/A709M (01.04)
Alloy steel blooms/billets-specifications
A646/ A646M (01.05) .
Alloy steel bolting materials-specifications
Alloy Steel Eyebolts, Specification for, F541 (01.08)
Alloy-Steel Bolting for Special Applications, Specification for,
A540/A540M (01.01)
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or
High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applica-
tions, Specification for, A193/A193M (01.01)
1769
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts, Specification for, A563 (01.08)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric), Specification for,
A563M (01.08)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High
Temperature Service, or Both, Specification for,
A194/A194M (01.01)
Forged Grade 80 and Grade 100 Steel Lifting Components and
Welded Attachment Links, Specification for,
A952/A952M (01.05)
High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural
Steel Joints (Metric), Specification for, A490M (01.08)
Quality Assurance Requirements for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Wire, Rods, and Bars for Mechanical Fasteners, Specifica-
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Ex-
ternally Threaded Fasteners, Specification for, A354 (01.08)
A437/A437M (01.01)
Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, Specification for, A490 (01.08)
Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel,
Ultrasonic Examination h e r e o f ~ Practice for,
A609/ A609M (01.02)
Castings, Investment, Carbon and Low Alloy Steel for General
Application, and Cobalt Alloy for High Strength at Elevated
Temperatures, Specification for, A 732/ A 732M (01.02)
Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General
Industrial Use, Specification for, A781/A781M (01.02)
Hot Isostatic Pressing of Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloy
Castings, Practice for, A1080 (01.02)
Investment Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for
General Industrial Use, Specification for,
A957/A957M (01.02)
Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service, Specification for,
A487/A487M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Alloy, Specially Heat-Treated, for Pressure-
Containing Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service,
Steel Castings, Carbon and Alloy, with Tensile Requirementr:,
Chemical Requirements Similar to Standard Wrought
Grades, Specification for, A958/A958M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Carbon, Low Alloy, and Stainless Steel, Heavy-
Walled for Steam Turbines, Specification for,
A356/A356M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Carbon, and Alloy, Chemical Requirements Simi-
lar to Standard Wrought Grades, Specification for,
A915/A915M (01.02)
Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes, Specifica-
tion for, A148/A148M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-
Steel Forging Stock, Specification for, A711/A711M (01.05)
Alloy steel chain-specifications
Sa Steel chain-specifications
Grade 100 Alloy Steel Chain, Specification for,
A973/A973M (01.05)
A391/A391M (01.05)
Grade 80 and Grade 100 Alloy Steel Chain Slings for Overhead
Lifting, Specification for, A906/A906M (01.05)
Alloy steel crankshafts-specifications
Continuous Grain Flow Forged Carbon and Alloy Steel Crank-
shafts for Medium Speed Diesel Engines, Specification for,
A983/A983M (01.05)
Alloy steel fittings-specifications
Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Low-Temperature Service, Specification for,
A420/A420M (01.01)
Moderate and High Temperature Service, Specification for,
A234/A234M (01.01)
Alloy steel flanges-specifications
Sa Steel ftanges-specifications
Carbon and Alloy Steel Flanges for Low-Temperature
Specification for, A 707/ A 707M (01.01)
Hot Isostatically-Pressed Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves,
and Parts for High Temperature Service, Specification for,
A989/A989M (OUH)
Alloy steel forgings-specifications
nents, Specification for, A859/ A859M (01.05)
Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component Ap-
plication, Specification for, A 723/ A 723M (01.05)
AHoy Steel Forgings for Nonmagnetic Retaining Rings for Gen-
erators, Specification for, A289/A289M (01.05)
Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts,
Specification for, A336/ A336M (01.05)
Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component
with Toughness Requirements, Specifi-
r'>./\J'.Jir-'A/U..J.lv..o. (01.05)
Carbon and for Magnetic Ket:ammg
for Turbine Generatc>rs, for, A288
Carbon and Alloy Steel for Pipe Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Transmission St>rvice,
Specification for, (01.01)
Carbon and Alloy Steel for Reduction Gears,
Specification for, R-",::vut ft . .:.::v\n'n.
Carbon and Alloy Steel
sels, Specification for, (01.05)
Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-
Temperature Service, Specification for,
A369/A369M (01.01)
Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Tough-
ness Testing for Piping Components, Specification for,
A350/A350M (01.01)
Forged Grade 80 and Grade 100 Steel Lifting Components and
A952/A952M (01.05)
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Forgings for Tur-
bine Rotor Disks and Wheels, Specification for,
A891/A891M (01.05)
A646/A646M (01.05)
Pressure Vessel Forgings, Alloy Steel, Higher Strength
Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten for Elevated Temperature
Service, Specification for, A1048/A1048M (01.05)
Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for
Pressure Vessel Components, Specification for,
A541/A541M (01.05)
Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Pressure Vessels, Specification for,
A508/A508M (01.05)
Steel Forgings, Alloy, for Carburizing Applications, Specification
for, A837/A837M (01.05)
Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use,
Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for Pinions, Gears and Shafts
for Reduction Gears, Specification for,
A291/A291M (01.05)
Superstrength Alloy Steel Forgings, Specification for,
A579/A579M (01.05)
Vacuum Treated Steel Forgings, Alloy, Differentially Heat
Treated, for Turbine Rotors, Specification for,
A940/A940M (01.05)
Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Turbine
Rotors and Shafts, Specification for, A470/A470M (01.05)
AHoy steel pipe-specifications
1770
Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for High-
Pressure Service at High Temperatures, Specification for,
A691/A691M (01.01)
A369/A369M (01.01)
A350/A350M (01.01)
General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe, Specifi-
cation for, A999/A999M (01.01) '
General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel
Pipe, Specification for, A530/A530M (01.01)
High-Strength Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe,
Seamless Ferri tic for High-Temperature Service,
r"-'"""lr"-JJJln. (OUH)
Pro-
Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and
Steel Floor Plates, Specification for,
(01.04)
Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate with
Improved Formability, Specification for,
A656/A656M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, 5 % and 5, Specification for,
A645/ A645M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy
Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered, Specification for,
A734/A734M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum,
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-
Tungsten, Specification for, A1017/A1017M (01.04)
Vanadium, Specification for, A832/ A832M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Double-Normalized and Tem-
pered 9 % Nickel, Specification for, A353/A353M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and
Tempered, Specification for, A517/A517M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel, Specification for,
A302/A302M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel,
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum, Specification
for, A204/A204M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel, Specification for,
A203/A203M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8
and 9 % Nickel, Specification for, A553/A553M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum, Specification for,
A543/A543M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-
Nickel, Specification for, A533/A533M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered,
Chromium-Molybdenum, and Chromium-Molybdenum-
Vanadium, Specification for, A542/A542M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel, Specifi-
cation for, A737/A737M (01.04)
Specification for, A736/A736M (0U)4)
Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate, Specification for,
A264 (01.04)
Steel Plates, 9% Nickel Alloy, for Pressure Vessels, Produced by
the Direct-Quenching Process, Specification for,
A844/A844M (01.04)
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for
Special Applications, Specification for,
A578/ A578M (01.04)
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates, Specifica-
tion for, A435/ A435M (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
Alloy steel screws-specifications
Alloy Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap
Screws, Specification for, F835 (01.08)
Screws (Metric), Specification for, F835M (01.08)
Alloy Steel Socket Set Screws, Specification for, F912 (01.08)
Alloy Steel Socket Set Screws (Metric), Specification for,
F912M (01.08)
Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws, Specification for,
A574 (01.08)
Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws (Metric), Specification for,
A574M (01.08)
1771
Alloy steel wire-specifications
Alloy steel sheet/strip-specifications
Sa Steel sheet/strip
Alloy and Structural Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, Specification for, A506 (01.03)
Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Rolled, Specification for, A507 (01.03)
Martensitic Stainless Steel Bars for High-Temperature Service,
Screws, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 1170 MPa Minimum Tensile
Strength Metric, Specification for, F2882M (01.08)
Screws, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 170 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, Specification for, F2882 (01.08)
Steel Forgings, General Requirements, Specification for,
A788/A788M (01.05)
Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process, Specification for, A792/A792M (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by tJ'le Hot-Dip Process, Specifi-
Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated and Polymer Precoated for Corru-
gated Steel Pipe, Specification for, A742/A742M (01.06)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, Gen-
eral Requirements for, Specification for, A505 (01.03)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resis-
tance, Specification for, A606/A606M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for,
Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled,
General Requirements for, Specification for,
A749/A749M (01.03)
Tin Mill Products, Electrolytic Tin-Coated, Cold-Rolled Sheet,
Weight Mass of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Ar-
ticles, Test Method for, A428/A428M (01.06)
Alloy steel tube-specifications
Sa Steel tube
Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low-Alloy
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance, Specification for, A847/A847M (01.01)
Commercial Steel (CS), Sheet, Carbon (0.16 % Maximum to 0.25
% Maximum), Cold-Rolled, Specification for,
A794/A794M (01.03)
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical
Tubing, Specification for, A513/A513M (01.01)
General Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Tubes,
General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy
Steel, and Stainless Steel Tubes, Specification for,
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Tubing, Specification for, A618/A618M (01.01)
Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing, Specifica-
tion for, A519 (01.01)
Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Super-
heater Tubes, Specification for, A209/A209M (01.01)
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater,
and Heat-Exchanger Tubes, Specification for,
A213/A213M (01.01)
Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes, Specifica-
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger Tubes with
Integral Fins, Specification for, A498 (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-
A334/A334M (01.01)
Sa Steel springs-specifications
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Steel Wire, Carbon and Alloy Specialty Spring Quality, Specifica-
tion for, A1000/A1000M (01.03)
Alloy-tin couple (ATC) test
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Alternate core bonding tests
Anodes, Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, F1182 (01.07)
Alternating-current measurement
See A-C (alternating-current) magnetic properties
Alternating-current permeability
Aiuminum .
Corrosion Protective Fastener Coatings with Zinc Rich Base Coat
and Aluminum Organic/Inorganic Type, Specification for,
F2833 (01.08)
Aluminum-specifications
Aluminum Transmission Tower Bolts and Nuts, Specification for,
F901 (01.08)
Construction of Fire and Foam Station Cabinets, Specification
for, F1333 (01.07)
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Chain-Link
Fence Fabric, Specification for, F1345 (01.06)
Aluminum alloying additives
Aluminum alloys-metallography
See Metallographic analysis/inspection
Aluminum alloys-specifications
Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric, Specification for,
F1183 (01.06)
Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, Socket Head Cap Screws,
and Studs for General Use, Specification for, F468 (01.08)
Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use
(Metric), Specification for, F468M (01.08)
Selection of Committee F16 Fastener Specifications, Guide for,
F1077 (01.08)
Aluminum alloys (wire )-specifications
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Carbon Steel
Wire, Specification for, A856/ A856M (01.06)
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Wire Strand,
Aluminum alloy (UNS) numbering system
Numbering Metals and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System
(UNS), Practice for, E527 (01.01)
Aluminum bronze balls
F2215 (01.08)
Aluminum-coated steel chain-link fence-specifications
Sa Chain-link fence/fencing systems-specifications
Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric, Specification
for, A491 (01.06)
Fence Fittings, Specification for, F626 (01.06)
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain-Link Fence Fabric and
Marcelled Tension Wire, Specification for, A817 (01.06)
Aluminum-coated steel sheet-specifications
General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated hy the
Hot-Dip Process, Specification for, A924/A924M (01.06)
A 788/ A 788M (01.05)
Process, Specification for, A 792/ A 792M (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process, Specifi-
Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corru-
Steel Sheet, Zinc-5 %Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Aluminum-coated steel tube-specifications
Electric-Resistance-Welded Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Me-
chanical Tubing, Specification for, A787/A787M (01.01)
Aluminum-coated steel wire
Aluminum-coated steel wire-specifications
Fl183 (01.06)
Aluminum-Coated (Aluminized) Carbon Steel Wire, Specification
for, A809 (01.06)
for, A491 (01.06)
Aluminum-Coated Steel Wire Strand, Specification for,
A474 (01.06)
Aluminum coatings
Coating Weight (Mass) of Metallic Coatings on Steel by X-Ray
Fluorescence, Test Method for, A754/A754M (01.06)
Zinc-5 %-Aluminum (Hot-Dip) Coatings on Iron and Steel Prod-
ucts, Specification for, A1072/A1072M (01.06)
Aluminum coatings-specifications
Aluminum Particle-Filled Basecoat/Organic or Inorganic Topcoat,
Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners, Specification
for, F1428 (01.08)
Zinc-5 %Aluminum (Hot-Dip) Coatings on Iron and Steel Prod-
Aluminum (metallography)
See Metallographic analysis/inspection
Aluminum nitride
High Strength Steel Castings in Heavy Sections, Specification
for, A1001 (01.02)
Aluminum-silicon alloy
Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel-specifications
General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the
A 788/ A 788M (01.05)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards
See ASTM voluntary consensus standards
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe [American National
Standard], ASMEB36.10M-1996 (Related Material) (01.01)
Standard], ANSI/ASMEB36.19M-1985 (Related Mate-
rial) (01.01)
American wire gage (AWG)
1772
Selection of Wire and Cable Size in AWG or Metric Units, Prac-
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
Amplifier calibration
Ultrasonic Examination of Turbine and Generator Steel Rotor
Forgings, Practice for, A418/A418M (01.05)
Amplifier electronics
Installation Procedures of Vinyl Deck Coverings on Portable
Plates in Electrical and Electronic Spaces, Practice for,
F1331 (01.07)
Anaerobic thread locking compounds
Inspection Procedure for Use of Anaerobic Thread Locking Com-
pounds with Studs, Practice for, F1179 (01.07)
Anchor bolts
Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength, Specifi-
cation for, F1554 (01.08)
Anchors-ships
Wildcats, Ship Anchor Chain, Specification for, F765 (01.07)
Anchors/anchorage systems
Evaluating Bond Strength for 0.600-in. 15.24-mm Diameter Steel
Prestressing Strand, Grade 270 1860, Uncoated, Used in
Prestressed Ground Anchors, Test Method for,
A981/A981M (01.04)
Angle beam ultrasonic testing
See Ultrasonic testing
Angle of inclination
Conducting a Stability Test (Lightweight Survey and inclining
Experiment) to Determine the Light Ship Displacement and
Centers of Gravity of a Vessel, Guide for, F1321 (01.07)
Angle of twist
See Twist
Angle style valves
Angle Style, Pressure Relief Valves for Steam, Gas, and Liquid
Services, Specification for, F1508 (01.07)
Annealed steel-specifications
Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar, Specification for, A666 (01.03)
Steel Wire, Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Specification for,
A401/A401M (01.03)
Announcing-systems amplifiers/control panels
:F1331 (01.07)
Anthropometric data
F1337 (01.07)
Anti-friction bearings--specifications
Sa Ball/roller bearings
Carburizing Steels for Anti-Friction Bearings, Specification for,
A534 (01.05)
High Hardenability Antifriction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A485 (01.05)
High-Carbon Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A295/A295M (01.05)
Medium Carbon Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A866 (01.05)
Stainless Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A756 (01.05)
AOD (argon-oxygen-decarburization)
for, A1001 (01.02)
Apparent shear strength
See Shear testing
Appearance
Textured Stainless Steel Sheet Metric, Specification for,
A947M (01.03)
Appearance of materials
See Optical materials/properties/tests
Appliances
See Cooking/food service equipment-specifications
Application
Aqueous corrosion testing
See Corrosion
Aquifers
See Marine environments
Atmospheric steel pipe
Arches
Conugated Steel Stmctural Plate, Zinc-Coated, for Field-Bolted
Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches, Specification for,
A761/A761M (01.06)
Expanded-Metal Doors, Specification for, F1072 (01.07)
Architectural materials/applications-specifications
See Building materials/applications-specifications
Architectural steel
Higher-Strength Martensitic Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip, Specification for, A1010/A1010M (01.03)
Arc resistance/resistivity
See Electrical resistance/resistivity
Arc-welded steel pipe/tube
Sa Electric-fusion-welded steel pipe
Sa Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel tube-
specifications
Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service and General Appli-
cations, Specification for, A358/A358M (01.01)
Argon-oxygen decarburization (AOD) refined
Cast Tool Steel, Specification for, A597 (01.05)
Armoring tape-specifications
Zinc-Coated Flat Steel Armoring Tape, Specification for,
A459 (01.06)
Armos wire--specifications
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Low-Carbon Steel Armor Wire, Speci-
fication for, A411 (01.06)
Aromatic hydrocarbons (AHs)
See Hydrocarbons
1773
Asphalt coatings
Application of Asphalt Coatings to Corrugated Steel Sewer and
Drainage Pipe, Practice for, A862/A862M (01.06)
As-rolled structural steel plate
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with Low Carbon
and Restricted Sulfur for Improved Weldability, Formability,
and Toughness, Specification for, A945/A945M (01.04)
Assemblies
Main Propulsion Medium Speed Marine Diesel Engines Covering
Performance and Minimum Scope of Assembly, Guide for,
F1338 (01.07)
Relevant Standards and Publications for Commercial Shipbuild-
ing, Guide Listing, F1547 (01.07)
ASTM Committee }'-16 on Fasteners
Fl6 Mechanical Fasteners, Terminology for, F1789 (01.08)
F1077 (01.08)
ASTM voluntary consensus standards
Atmospheric corrosion materials/applications-specifications
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Conosion
High-Strength Low-Alloy Stmctural Steel Plate With Atmo-
spheric Conosion Resistance, Specification for,
A871/A871M (01.04)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Conosion Resis-
tance, Specification for, A588/ A588M (01.04)
Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Conosion Resis-
A709/A709M (01.04)
Atmospheric steel pipe
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures, Specification for, A671/A671M (01.01)
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Tem-
peratures, Specification for, A524 (01.01)
Attribute data/sampling
Attribute data/sampling
See Sampling
Audio displays
F1337 (01.07)
Austempered ductile iron castings-specifications
Austempered Ductile Iron Castings, Specification for,
A897/A897M (01.02)
Austenitic iron castings-specifications
Austenitic Ductile Iron Castings, Specification for, A439 (01.02)
Austenitic Ductile Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts
Suitable for Low-Temperature Service, Specification for,
A571/A571M (01.02)
i\.ustenitic Gray Iron Castings, Specification for, A436 (01.02)
Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Equipment, and Systems, Practice for, A380 (01.03)
Detecting Detrimental Intermetallic Phase in Duplex
Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels, Test Methods for,
A923 (01.03)
Wrought Stainless Steels, Guide for, A959 (01.03)
Austenitic stainless steel-specifications
from Cryogenic to the Creep Range, Specifica-
A962/A962M (01.01)
Stainless Steel Bars, Specification for,
(01.03)
Austenitic stainless steel castings
._,""'""''"'}; Susceptibility to lntergranular Attack in Austenitic
Steels, Practices for, A262
Austenitic Content
Practice for, n-<nJ'-''' ncnnnn
Austenitic stainless steel castings--specifications
Sa Steel castings
Suitable for Service, Specification for,
A571/A571M
.:>ti:JlHHit:t>:-;, Instrument Calibration, for Estimating
Ferrite Practice for, A799/A799M (01.02)
Sa Steel tiU.ing:s--sptecHicatimrns
As-Welded Stainless Steel Fittings for Gen-
eral Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures,
Specification for, A774/A'774M (01.01)
Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Forgings, Practice for,
A745/A745M (01.05)
Austenitic stainless steel forgings-specifications
Sa Steel
Steel Parts,
Austenitic stainless steel pipe-specifications
Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service, Specification for, A451/A451M (01.01, 01.02)
Centrifugally Cast Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe for Cor-
rosive Environments, Specification for,
A872/A872M (01.02)
Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Specifica-
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings, Speci-
fication for, A960/A960M (01.01)
Ferritic/Austenitic (Duplex) Stainless Steel Pipe Electric Fusion
Welded with Addition of Filler Metal, Specification for,
A928/A928M (01.01)
Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges,
-Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
Hot Isostatically--Pressed Stainless Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves,
A988/A988M (01.01)
Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-
Station Service, Specification for, A376/A376M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe,
Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipes, Specification for, A312/A312M (01.01)
or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Speci-
for, A813/A813M (01.01)
Spray-Formed Seamless Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes, Specifi-
Spray-Formed Seamless Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe,
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or
High-Temperature Service, Specification for,
A409/A409M (01.01)
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipe Nipples, for, A733 (01.01)
Wrought Austenitic Steel Piping Fittings, Specification
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless
for,
Austenitic stainless steel sheet/strip,/pltat(e-speciifications
Annealed or Cold-Worked Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Austenitic stainless steel tube-specifications
1774
Steel tube
Requirennentts for Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Tubes,
Spe:cifi,cati,on for, A450/A450M (01.01)
Requirements for Ferritic Steel, Austenitic Alloy
and Stainless Steel Tubes, for,
(01.01)
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic AliOV-:'lt:eet Boiler, Superheater,
and Tubes, for,
A213/A213M
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Steel Feedwater
Tubes, for, A688/A688M (01.01)
Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing (Small-
Service, Specification for,
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
eral Service, for, A269 (01.01)
Seamless and Austenitic and Fen-itic/ Austenitic Stainless
Specification for,
Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel Tubes with
Integral Fins, for,
Seamless and Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service, Specification for, A789/A789M (01.01)
Stainless Steel Needle Tubing, Specification for, A908 (01.01)
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and
Condenser Tubes, Specification for, A249/A249M (01.01)
Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing, Specification for,
A554 (01.01)
Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products,
Specification for, A778 (OUH)
1-<re:e-rVla<chlnirtg Stainless Steel and Wire Rods, Specifica-
tion for, (01.03)
Stainless Steel Wire, Specification for, A580/A580M (01.)3)
Austenitic steel
Sa F'erritic steel
Sa Martensitic stainless castings-specHicaHons
AusteJmtlc, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Specification
(01.02)
Austenitic
Alloy-Steel and Steel
vice, Specification for, (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic, Austenitic and
Condenser and Heat
Specification for,
Automated vehicular
Automated Vehicular
F2200 (01.06)
Construction, Specification
Automatic marine (si11ipbo:an:l) e1quiip11nei1t
Shipboard Fire Systems, for,
Automatic self-cleaning strainers
Cast Ur,.,w,,wa" I
Steel Tubes, Carbon and Carbon Manganese, Fusion
(01.07)
SuJoerlJeater, Heat and Condenser
(01.01)
Automotive
Sa
Metallic Coated Carbon
Mechanical Springs, ;sp,ecrtlC[ttlo>n
(01.06)
AutoiJrmtive steel materials-structural
to
Automotive Specification for, A159 (01.02)
Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-AHoy with
Ball/roller bearings-specifications
Autopassivation
Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts, Speci-
Auxiliary machinery spaces
Axially swaged fitttings
Pe1formance of Piping and Tubing Mechanically Attached Fit-
tings, Specification for, Fl387 (01.07)
Axial tension testing
See Tensile properties/testing
Axles
Alloy Steel Axles, Heat-Treated, for Mass Transit and Electric
Railway Service, Specification for, A 729/ A 729M (01.05)
Axle steel bars
Sa Alloy steel bars-specifications
Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforce-
ment, Specification for, A996/A996l',.,1 (01.04)
Back connected
Sa
Piping S]pecl11c:atlcm
Gauge Boards, Specification for,
lnstaHmg Factory-Made ('<>r"""''"'ri
Applications,
primer/enamel
Perfornoaw:e of bmunelmg
and Furniture, Sp.ecitic;:tticm
Balances
See Weight
bearing grease
Metal Joiner Work
(01.07)
Instrument and Precision Bearing Lubricants-Part 2 Greases,
F2489 (01.08)
Ban
Annular for Instruments and Precision Rotating
Components, Spc:c1ttcat1on for, F2332 (01.08)
Ban fields
Fences for Baseball and Softball Fields, Guide for,
F2000 (01.06)
BaH joints
Sa Shipb11ildling
Flexible, EX]JansiOJ1- Applications,
1775
Specification for,
hardness
Hardness tests
Ball/roller bearings
JLIC!LCIA.lVH Of by the
High Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A485
High-Carbon Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A295/A295M (01.05)
Medium Carbon Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification
A866 (01.05)
Bearing, Inner: for Needle Roller
Ring, Specification for, F2163
Ball/roller bearings-specifications
Silicon Nitride Bearing Balls, Specification for,
F2094/F2094M (01.08)
Stainless Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A756 (01.05)
Ball valve
F2215 (01.08)
Banded-weld stud-type hanger (for shipboard piping)
Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers, Practice for,
F708 (01.07)
Barbed tape
Barbed Tape, Terminology Relating to, F1379 (01.06)
Installation of Barbed Tape, Practice for, F1911 (01.06)
Barbed tape-specifications
Long Barbed Tape Obstacles, Specification for, F1910 (01.06)
Steel Chain-Link Fencing Materials Used for High Security Ap-
plications, Specification for, F1712 (01.06)
Barbed wire-specifications
Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire, Specification for,
A121 (01.06)
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming Organic
Polymer-Coated Steel Barbed Wire Used With Chain-Link
Fence, Specification for, F1665 (01.06)
Barge and boat spikes
Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples, Specification for,
F1667 (01.08)
Barges
Selection of Valve Operators, Practice for, F1030 (01.07)
Bargraph meters
Solid State Bargraph Meters for Shipboard Use Metric, Specifica-
tion for, F1755M (01.07)
Barrel nails
F1667 (01.08)
Barrier materials/systems
Design and Construction of Expanded Metal Security Fences and
Barriers, Guide for, F2780 (01.06)
Bars/forging/forging stock-specifications
Bars (stainless steel)
See Stainless steel bars/billets-specifications
Baseball equipment/applications
F2000 (01.06)
Basecoat
for, F1428 (01.08)
Basic dynamic load rating
Bearing, Roller, Needle: Drawn Outer Ring, Full Complement,
Without Inner Ring, Open and Closed End, Standard Type,
Specification for, F2162 (01.08)
Basic end face seals
Mechanical Seals for Shipboard Pump Applications, Specification
for, F1511 (01.07)
Basic-oxygen steel
Carbon and High-Strength Electric Resistance Forge-Welded
Steel Structural Shapes, Specification for,
A769/A769M (01.04)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel, Copper, Phosphorus Steel
H-Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resis-
1776
tance for Use in Marine Environments, Specification for,
A690/A690M (01.04)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, Specification for,
A242/A242M (01.04)
High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
Suitable for Welding, Specification for,
A514/A514M (01.04)
A645/A645M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-
Columbium Alloy Steel, for Moderate and Lower Tempera-
ture Service, Specification for, A735/A735M (01.04)
Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Em-
brittlement, Practice for, A143/A143M (01.06)
Structural Carbon Steel Plates of Improved Toughness, Specifica-
tion for, A573/A573M (01.04)
Basic static load rating
Basket cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Batter piles
See Piles
Beam deflection
See Deflection
Beam-end test
A944 (01.04)
Bearing
Bearing, Roller, Tapered, Single Row of Rollers (Metric Series),
Bearing, Roller, Thrust, Two Channeled Race Surface, Rigid or
Flat Seat Type, Specification for, F2590 (01.08)
Damage Prevention of Bearings, and Bearing Components
Through Proper Handling Techniques, Practice for,
F2444 (01.08)
Phenolic Raw Materials for the Use in Bearing Cages, Specifica-
tion for, F2953 (01.08)
Rollers, Bearing, Needle, Ferrous, Solid, Specification for,
F2511 (01.08)
Rolling Element Bearings, Terminology for, F2488 (01.08)
Bearing balls
See Ball/roller bearings-specifications
Bearing components
Damage Prevention of Bearings, and Bearing Components
Through Proper Handling Techniques, Practice for,
F2444 (01.08)
Bearing lubricants
Instrument and Precision Bearing Lubricants-Part 1 Oils, Guide
for, F2161 (01.08)
Guide for, F2489 (01.08)
Bearing materials
Bearing materials-specifications
F2215 (01.08)
Beds
Mattress and Box Springs for Use in Berths in Marine Vessels,
Bellows type expansion joints
Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping Ap-
Bells
Bell, Cast, Sound Signalling, Specification for, F956 (01.07)
Gong, Sound Signaling, Specification for, F957 (01.07)
Bending moment
Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Pip-
ing Applications, Specification for, F1476 (01.07)
Bending yield moment
Determining Bending Yield Moment of Nails, Test Method for,
F1575 (01.08)
Bendix method
Determination of Tin Coating Weights for Electrolytic Tin Plate,
Test Methods for, A630 (01.06)
Bend testing
Nails, Test Methods for, F680 (01.08)
Bend testing-metallic materials
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products, Test Methods and Defini-
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Berths/berthing
Berths, Marine, Specification for, F1244 (01.07)
Determining and Reporting the Berthing Energy and Reaction of
Marine Fenders, Test Method for, F2192 (01.07)
Specification for, FlOSS (01.07)
Beryllium copper balls
F2215 (01.08)
Bibliography
Bilges
Shipboard Oil Pollution Abatement System, Specification for,
F2283 (01.07)
Suction Strainer Boxes, Specification for, F986 (01.07)
Billet steel bars
See Steel bars and billets-specifications
Bituminous coatings
Bituminous coatings-specifications
Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings, and Linings for Corrugated Steel
Sewer and Drainage Pipe, Specification for, A849 (01.06)
Black light inspection
Black plate
See Tin mill products-specifications
Black steel couplings
Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints, Specifica-
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
Black steel pipe-specifications
Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use, Specification
for, A795/A795M (01.01)
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless, Specification for, A53/A53M (01.01)
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain End, Laser Beam Welded, Specifi-
cation for, A1006/A1006M (01.01)
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain End, Longitudinal and Helical
Seam, Double Submerged-Arc Welded, Specification for,
A1005/A1005M (01.01)
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End, Electric-Resistance-Welded,
1777
Bolted construction materials/applications-specifications
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End, Seamless, Specification for,
A1024/A1024M (01.01)
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
Blasting abrasives
See Abrasive blasting
Blind anchors
See Anchors/anchorage systems
Blistering
Inspecting the Coating System of a Ship, Practice for,
F1130 (01.07)
Block and board thermal insulation
Selection and Application of Thermal Insulation for Piping and
Machinery, Practice for, F683 (01.07)
Boat nails
F1667 (01.08)
Boiler furnaces
Mortar, Refractory (High-Temperature, Air-Setting), Specification
for, F1097 (01.07)
Boilers
Brick, Insulating, High Temperature, Fire Clay, Specification for,
F1312 (01.07)
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels, Specification for, A479/A479M (01.03)
Boiler/superheater tubes-specifications
Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components, Specifi-
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese
Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes, Specification for,
A178/A178M (01.01)
Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Super-
Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service,
A213/A213M (01.01)
Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes,
Steel Tubes, Carbon and Carbon Manganese, Fusion Welded, for
Boiler, Superheater, Heat Exchanger and Condenser Applica-
Bolted construction materials/applications
Selecting Bolting Lengths for Piping System Flanged Joints,
Practice for, F704 (01.07)
Carbon Structural Steel, Specification for, A36/A36M (01.04)
High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality,
Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resis-
Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates,
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile
Strength (Metric), Specification for, A325M (01.08)
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi Minimum Ten-
sile Strength, Specification for, A325 (01.08)
Bolted manhole cover assembly
See Manhole materials/applications-specifications
materials
:Fasteners
Sa Nonferrous
Sa Steel bolting materials
Sa Steel bolting materials-specifications
"Twist Off'' Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
As:sen1bl1tes, Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi Minimum Ten-
sile Strength, Specification for, F1852 (01.08)
Alloy--Steel Bolting for Special Applications, Specification for,
A540/A540M (01.01)
F90l (01.08) .
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength,
Specification for, A307 (01.08)
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts, Specification for,
A183 (01.04)
Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use,
SpecltH;atHm for, A449 (01.08)
Llnle-tslnla Valves for Marine Applications, Specification for,
Fl020 (01.07)
Quenched and Studs, and Other Ex-
Specth(;atHm for, A354 (01.08)
Ac,:;es:sor'tes, Specification for,
Stainless Steel Hex Cap Screws, and Studs, Specification
for, F593
Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Specification for,
F738M (01.08)
Steel Transmission Tower Bolts, Zinc-Coated and Bare, Specifi-
cation for, A394 (01.08)
Surface Discontinuities of Bolts,
Metric Series, Specification for,
Bolt/nut/washer assembly
and Studs, Inch and
(01.08)
"Twist Off" Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
As:sen1bltes, Steel, Heat 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten-
sile Strength, Specification for, (01.08)
Off'' Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
Assenabltes, Steel, Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile
See adhesion
Bond strength--metals/alloys
Co1rnp:arir1g Bond of Steel Bars to Concrete
Beam-End Test for,
(01.04)
for 15.24-mm Diameter Steel
Grade 1860, Uncoated, Used in
Anchors, Test Method for,
A981/ A981M (01.04)
Borated stainless plate/sheet/strip
Borated Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Nuclear Appli-
cation, Specification for, A887 (01.03)
Bore inspection
Ultrasonic Examination from Bored Surfaces of Cylindrical Forg-
ings, Practice for, A939 (01.05)
Boron alloying additives
Sa Stainless steel alloying additives
Ferroboron, Specification for, A323 (01.02)
Boss assemblies
Docking/Drain Plug and Boss Assemblies Metric, Specification
for, F991M (01.07)
Bottom connected gages (for ships)
Sa Shipbuilding piping materials-specifications
Gage Piping Assemblies, Specification for, F721 (01.07)
Modular Gauge Boards, Specification for, F707/F707M (01.07)
Box culverts
Corrugated Steel Box Culverts, Specification for,
A964/A964M (01.06)
Boxes (for ships)
See Shipping containers/materials/applications-
specifications
Box nails
F1667 (01.08)
Box springs
Brads
F1667 (01.08)
Braiding materials/applications-specifications
Packing, Fiberglass, Braided, Rope, and Wick, Specification for,
F2087 (01.07)
Brake horsepower (of engines)
F1338 (01.07)
Brass balls
:F2215 (01.08)
(silver)
brazing alloys
Temperature, Fire Clay, Specification for,
HrJidge/s1tructurai materials
1778
Co,nd1ucting Case Studies on Galvanized Structures, Practice for,
(01.06)
Structural Steel Shapes, Specification for, A992/ A992M (01.04)
;:,c;umc:s:s Low-Alloy
lm11roved At1rnospl1eritc CoiTosion
(OUH)
Culverts, Specification for,
"'-"'"""'r"'-"""""H-' (01,06)
General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates,
and Sheet Piling, Specification for,
(01.04)
Hcrn-.,nprHYirn LOW-1-\Jtuv Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel,
(01,04)
to 50 ksi 345 MPa
Corrosion Resis-
.nl.._,,_.._,,,-,h''-''"""" (01.04)
'lernpered Alloy Steel
Specifi(;aticm for, A328/ A328M (01.04)
Specification for,
Brinell hardness
Sa Hardness tests
Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials by Comparison Hard-
ness Testers, Practice for, A833 (01.05)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products-Metric, Test Methods for,
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 0U}5)
Broad-band filter retllec1tonletJry
See Reflectance and r<>tiiPPfivijfv
Bronze balls
F2215 (01.08)
Bronze globe valves
Envelope Dimensions for Bronze Globe Valves NPS, Specifica-
tion for, F885 (01.07)
Broom nails
F1667 (01.08)
constructions/materials--anchors
Anchors/anchorage systems
constructions/materials--decks
Doors/door assemblies-specifications
constructions/materials-gaskets

constructions/materials-thermal insulating materials
Block and board thermal insulation
Building
Structural
Building
Structural Specification for, A992/A992M (01.04)
Structural Steel Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in
Buildings, Specification for, A1043/A1043M (01.04)
Building matterialls/aJ[>plicatioJns
Conducting Case on Galvanized Structures, Practice for,
A896/A896M (01.06)
Building
Carbon Steel Chain,
Carbon Structural
Driven Fasteners: Nails,
F1667
Structural Shapes, Specification for, A992/ A992M (01.04)
.. A materials performance
Pert'o:rmance--building materials/applications (speci-
fications)
steel materials-st:ructu:ral
Bridge/structural materials
See Generator materials
See Pressure ve<Jsel steel
See Steel
See Structural
See Structural steel
roofs
Roofing
Bulkheads
Sa
Calcium-silicon
Doors, Watertight, Gas tight/ Airtight and Weathertight, Individu-
F1069 (01.07)
Expanded-Metal Bulkhead Panels, Specification for,
F1071 (01.07)
A690/A690M (01.04)
Metal, Expanded, Steel, Specification for, F1267 (01.03)
Sliding Watertight Door Assemblies, Specification for,
F1196 (01.07)
Sliding Watertight Door Control Systems, Specification for,
F1197 (01.07)
Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light Gage, Specification for,
A857/A857M (OU>4)
Buried applications
Applications, Practice for, A 796/ A 796M (01.06)
Structural Design of Reinforcements for Fittings in FactoryMade
Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications,
Practice for, A998/A998M (01.06)
Burned refractory brick
See Refractories (bricks and shapes)
R .. tt .. ,..tt" valves
Shipbuilding steel materials-specifications
Envelope Dimensions for Butterfly Valves--NPS 2 to 24, Specifi-
Butt-welded materials/applications
Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing, Specifi-
cation for, A512 (OUH)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe,
Specification for, A 714 (01.01)
Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applica-
tions, Specification for, F2014 (01.07)

fittings
Sa fittings-specifications
Wrought High-Strength Ferritic Steel Butt-Welding Fittings,
Specification A860/A860M
Wrought-Carbon with 1m-
Notch lot!ghnes:s,
Cabinets
1779
for, F1333
Tops, Furniture, Steel, Specification for, F826 (01.07)
Cable circuits
Plain End Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
Cable
for Pipe-Type Cable Circuits, Specification
for, (01.01)
Seals (Metric), Specification for,
installations
Installations, Guide for, F1835 (01.07)
Roller, Needle: Assembly (Thick Outer Race), Specifica-
for, F2430 (01.08)
Roller, Needle: Thick Outer Ring With Rollers and
Raw Materials for the Use in Bearing Cages, Specifica-
tion for, F2953 (01.08)

Calcium-Silicon Alloys, for, A495 (01.02)
Calibration-metals/alloys analysis instrumentation
Calibration-metals/alloys analysis instrumentation
Steel Castings, Stainless, Instrument Calibration, for Estimating
Ferrite Content, Practice for, A799/A799M (01.02)
Calibration-ultrasonic analysis instrumentation
Detection of Large Inclusions in Bearing Quality Steel by the
Ultrasonic Method, Practice for, E588 (01.05)
Calibration/standardization
Annular Ball Bearings for Instruments and Precision Rotating
Components, Specification for, F2332 (01.08)
Calorimeter
Sa Thermal analysis (TA)
Detem1ining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Insu-
lated Marine Bulkheads and Decks, Constructed of Steel,
Test Methods for, F2133 (01.07)
Cam handles
tion for, F1122 (01.07)
Canals
Panama Canal Pilot Platform, Specification for, F985 (01.07)
a n n ~ d lube oil pump (CLP)
Sealless Lube Oil Pump with Oil Through Motor for Marine Ap-
Capped steel .
Shapes, and Sheet Piling, Specification for,
A6/ A6M (01.04)
Capstan head drive units
Warping Heads, Rope Handling (Gypsy Head, Capstan Head),
Capstock
Carbides
Defining and Rating the Microstructure of High Carbon Bearing
Steels, Guide for, A892 (01.05)
Carbon
Carbon and graphite manufactured products
See Graphite
Carbon-boron steel
Carbon-manganese steel-specifications
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel,
Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Pressure Vessels,
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for
Moderate and Lower Temperature Service, Specification for,
A662/A662M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon
Steel, Specification for, A537/A537M (01.04)
Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service, Specifi-
Carbon-molybdenum alloy steel-specifications
1780
Carbon steel
Inch Series Machine Screws, Carbon Steel, 60 000 psi Tensile
Quantitative Measurement and Reporting of Hypoeutectoid Car-
bon and Low-Alloy Steel Phase Transformations, Practice
for, A1033 (01.03)
ogy Relating to, A941 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Carbon steel-specifications
Design and Installation of Overboard Discharge Hull Penetration
Connections, Specification for, F994 (01.07)
A485 (01.05)
Medium Carbon Anti-Friction Bearing Steel, Specification for,
A866 (01.05)
Tool Steel, Carbon, Specification for, A686 (01.05)
Carbon steel alloys
F1077 (01.08)
Carbon steel bars/shapes-specifications
A689 (01.05)
Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Me-
chanical Property Requirements, Specification for,
A311/A311M (01.05)
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars, Microalloyed Joint Bars,
and Forged Carbon Steel Compromise Joint Bars, Specifica-
tion for, A49 (01.04)
Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished, Specification for,
A108 (01.05)
Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from "T" Rails, Specifica-
tion for, A499 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Qual-
ity, for Pressure Piping Components, Specification for,
A696 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Specification
for, A576 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
Properties, Specification for, A675/A675M (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades, Specification
for, A575 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties,
Steel Bars, Microalloy, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
Steel Bars, Microalloy, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Subse-
quent Hot Forging, Specification for, A921/A921M (01.05)
Steel Joint Bars, Low, Medium, and High Carbon (Non-Heat-
Treated), Specification for, A3 (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
Carbon steel bolting materials
F1077 (01.08)
Carbon steel bolting materials-specifications
Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes, Specification for, A489 (01.08)
A183 (01.04)
A563M (01.08)
A194/A194M (01.01)
Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use,
Carbon steel castings
Ultrasonic Examination Thereof, Practice for,
A609/A609M (01.02)
Carbon steel castings-specifications
Steel Castings, Carbon and Alloy, with Tensile Requirements,
A356/A356M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-
A216/A216M (01.02)
A915/A915M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application, Specification for,
A27/A27M (01.02)
tion for, A148/A148M (01.02)
Carbon steel chain-specifications
Carbon Steel Chain, Specification for, A413/A413M (01.05)
Machine and Coil Chain, Specification for,
A467/A467M (01.05)
Weldless Chain, Specification for, A466/A466M (01.05)
Carbon steel crankshafts-specifications
A983/A983M (01.05)
Carbon steel flanges/fittings/valves/parts-specifications
Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications, Specification for,
A105/A105M (01.01)
Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Components with Inherent
Notch Toughness, Specification for, A727/A727M (01.01)
Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping, Specification
for, A181/A181M (01.01)
A194/A194M (01.01)
Forged Carbon and Alloy Steel Flanges for Low-Temperature
Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Fittings for Low-Temperature and
Conosive Service, Specification for, A858/A858M (01.01)
Large-Diameter Fabricated Carbon Steel Flanges, Specification
for, F1311 (01.07)
Carbon steel forgings-specifications
A105/A105M (01.01)
1781
Carbon steel pipe-specifications
for, A181/A181M (01.01)
Forgings with Mandatory Toughness Requirements, Specifi-
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Magnetic Retaining Rings
for Turbine Generators, Specification for, A288 (01.05)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pipe Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for High-Pressure Transmission Service,
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Rings for Reduction Gears,
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Ves-
sels, Specification for, A372/A372M (01.05)
A350/A350M (01.01)
High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged
Parts for Pressure Vessels, Specification for,
A592/A592M (01.05)
A541/A541M (01.05)
A508/ A508M (01.05)
for, A576 (01.05)
for, A837/A837M (01.05)
A291/A291M (01.05)
Steel Forgings, Microalloy, for General Industrial Use, Specifica-
tion for, A909/A909M (01.05)
Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel Forgings for Glass-Lined Piping
and Pressure Vessel Service, Specification for,
A836/A836M (01.01)
Vacuum-Treated 12% Chromium Alloy Steel Forgings for Tur-
bine Rotors and Shafts, Specification for,
A768/A768M (01.05)
Carbon steel pipe
for, F1330 (01.07)
Use of Branch Connections, Practice for, F681 (01.07)
A105/A105M (01.01)
for, A181/A181M (01.01)
A691/A691M (01.01)
A369/A369M (01.01)
A350/A350M (01.01)
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Ser-
Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the
Chemical Industry, Specification for, A587 (01.01)
for, F1311 (01.07)
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service, Speci-
Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel Water-Well Pipe, Specifica-
tion for, A589/A589M (01.01)
Pipe Nipples, Specification for, A 733 (01.01)
Wrought Carbon Steel Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings, Specification
for, F682 (01.07)
Carbon steel pipe fittings-specifications
Corrosive Service, Specification for, A858/A858M (01.01)
A420/A420M (01.01)
A234/A234M (01.01)
Wrought-Carbon Steel Butt-Welding Piping Fittings with Im-
proved Notch Toughness, Specification for,
A758/A758M (01.01)
Carbon steel plate-specifications
Specification for, A529/ AS 29M (01.04)
Alloy Steel Floor Plates, Specification for,
A786/A786M (01.04)
Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates,
Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality, Furnished to Chemical
Composition Requirements, Specification for,
A830/A830M (01.04)
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and Similar Applications, Speci-
Precipitation--Strengthened Low-Carbon Nickel-Copper-
Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Structural Steel
Plates, Specification for, A710/A710M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate
and Lower Temperature Service, Specification for,
A612/A612M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese,
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-
Tensile Strength, Specification for, A285/A285M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon, Specifi-
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for
Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings, Specification for,
A562/A562M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and
TcY>'"'''r"t"r"' Service, Specification for,
. .JHA (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-
Service, for.
Quenched and for Welded Pressure Vessels,
A662/A662M (01.04)
Steel Tie Plates, Low-Carbon and High-Carbon-Hot-Worked,
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
tion for, A573/A573M (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
Carbon steel nost
Flanged U-Channel Posts, Specification for, A1075 (01.05)
Carbon steel railroad materials-specifications
Carbon Steel Girder Rails of Plain, Grooved, and Guard Types,
Carbon Steel Tee Rails, Specification for, A1 (01.04)
Carbon steel sheet-specifications
% Maximum), Cold-Rolled, Specification for,
A794/A794M (01.03)
Steel Sheet Piling, Specification for, A328/A328M (01.04)
Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-
Formed Framing Members, Specification for,
A1003/A1003M (01.06)
Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Ultra High Strength Cold Rolled, Specifica-
tion for, A980/A980M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy for Pressure
Vessels, Specification for, A414/A414M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Form-
ability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable, Specifica-
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Stmctural, and
High-Strength Low-Alloy, Produced by Twin-Roll Casting
Carbon steel sheet/strip-specifications
l782
Commercial Steel (CS), Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.16 Maximum
to 0.25 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled, Specification for,
A659/A659M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, General
Requirements for, Specification for, A635/A635M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Struc1:un1l,
Low-Alloy, '-'"vv-runJv
Steel,
Steel,
Carbon steel tube
Carbon steel tube-specifications
Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tub-
ing in Rounds and Shapes, Specification for,
ASOO/A500M (01.01)
%Maximum), Cold-Rolled, Specification for,
A794/A794M (01.03)
A178/A178M (01.01)
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tub-
ing, Specification for, ASOl (01.01)
tion for, A519 (01.01)
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes,
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Tubing for Hydraulic System
Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and
A334/A334M (01.01)
Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or High-Strength Low-Alloy, Tapered
for Structural Use, Specification for, A595/A595M (01.01)
Carbon steel valves-specifications
Steel Wire, Oil-Tempered Carbon Valve Spring Quality, Specifi-
Carbon steel wiJre--SJlecific:ations
Aluminum-Coated Carbon Steel Wire, Specification
for, A809
Carbon Steel Wire for Wire Rope, Specification for,
A1007 (01.03)
Coppered Carbon Steel Wire, Specification for, A818 (01.06)
General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,
Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel, Specification for,
A510/A510M (01.03)
Metallic Coated Carbon Steel Wire, Coated at Size and Drawn to
Size for Mechanical Springs, Specification for,
A764 (01.06)
Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With
Chain Link Fence, Specification for, A824 (01.06)
tion for, AlOOO/AlOOOM (01.03)
Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use, Specification for,
A853 (01.03)
1783
Castings-permanent mold
Steel, Flat Wire, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Specification for,
A805/ ASOSM (01.03)
cation for, A1023/Al023M (01.03)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire, Specification for,
A641/A641M (01.06)
Wire, Specification for, A856/A856M (01.06)
Zinc-5% Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Wire Strand,
Carbon steel wire/rod/bars-specifications
V/ire, Rods, and Bars for f'..,1.echanical Fasteners, Specifica-
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Carburization
Determining Decarburization and Carburization in Hardened and
Tempered Threaded Steel Bolts, Screws and Studs, Test
Method for, F2328 (01.08)
Tempered Threaded Steel Bolts, Screws and Studs (Metric),
Test Method for, F2328M (01.08)
Carburizing applications
Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Inter-
nally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct Tension Indica-
tors, and Rivets, Test Methods for, F606 (01.08)
nally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets (Metric), Test
Methods for, F606M (01.08)
Carburizing applications-specifications
Sa BalJ/roller bearings
Carburizing Steels for Anti-Friction Bearings, Specification for,
A534 (01.05)
for, A837/A837M (01.05)
Cargo environments/processing
Cargo residue/waste
Selection of Shipboard Incinerators, Guide for, F1322 (01.07)
Shipboard Incinerators, Specification for, F1323 (01.07)
Cargo tanks
Platforms in Cargo Tanks, Practice for, F1385 (01.07)
Cartridge seals
for, Fl511 (01.07)
Casing nails
F1667 (01.08)
Castings
Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line
Strainers (150 psig and 150F Maximum), Specification for,
F1199 (01.07)
Steel Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Visual Exarnina-
tion, Practice for, A802/A802M (01.02)
Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged, Specification for,
F1145 (01.07)
Castings-austenitic alloy castings
See Austenitic stainless steel castings-specifications
Castings-investment
See Investment castings
Castings-iron-chromium
See Iron-chromium castings-specifications
Castings-nickel alloy
See Nickel alloy castings-specifications
Castings-permanent mold
See Permanent mold castings-specifications
Castings-steel
Castings-steel
See Steel castings
Cast-in-place concrete piles
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles, Specification for,
A252 (01.01)
Cast iron
Evaluating the Microstructure of Graphite in Iron Castings, Test
Method for, A247 (01.02)
Iron Castings, Terminology Relating to, A644 (01.02)
Leeb Hardness Testing of Steel Products, Test Method for,
A956 (01.05)
Cast iron-specifications
Abrasion-Resistant Cast Irons, Specification for,
A532/ A532M (01.02)
Cast Iron Couplings Used for Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings, Specification for, A1056 (01.02)
Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Re-
sistant, for General Application, Specification for,
A743/A743M (01.02)
Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylin-
ders, Specification for, A667/A667M (01.02)
Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial
Use, Specification for, A834 (01.02)
Compacted Graphite Iron Castings, Specification for,
A842 (01.02)
Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings, Specification for,
A518/A518M (01.02)
Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls
for Pressure Vessel Use, Specification for,
A748/A748M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Iron-Chromium and Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Heat
Resistant, for General Application, Specification for,
A297/A297M (01.02)
Cast iron (ductile)
See Ductile iron castings-specifications
Cast iron (gray)
See Gray iron castings-specifications
Cast iron (malleable)
See Malleable iron castings-specifications
Cast iron soil pipe/fittings-specifications
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings, Specification for, A74 (01.02)
Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings, Specification for, C1540 (01.02)
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm
Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications, Specification
for, A888 (01.02)
Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings, Specification
for, C564 (01.02)
Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fit-
tings, Specification for, C1277 (01.02)
Cast iron (testing)
Chill Testing of Cast Iron, Test Methods of, A367 (01.02)
Impact Testing of Cast Irons, Test Methods for,
A327/A327M (01.02)
Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc (Galvanized) Coating on
Iron or Steel Articles, Practice for, A239 (01.06)
Sampling and Testing Ferroalloys for Determination of Size, Test
Methods for, A610 (01.02)
Cast iron (UNS) numbering system
Cast nonferrous metals/alloys
See Nonferrous metals/alloys
Cast tool steel
Sa Tool steel-specifications
Cathode coatings
See Electrodeposited coatings
Cathode emitters
See Electronic materials/applications
Cathodic protection
Caustic pots
Gray Iron Castings for Elevated Temperatures for Non-Pressure
Containing Parts, Specification for, A319 (01.02)
Cellulose and cellulose derivatives
See Wood products
Center of gravity
Conducting a Stability Test (Lightweight Survey and Inclining
Centers of Gravity of a Vessel, Guide for, Fl321 (01.07)
Central station service-specifications
Centrifugal castings-specifications
Centrifugally Cast Iron-Chromium-Nickel High-Alloy Tubing for
Pressure Application at High Temperatures, Specification for,
A608/A608M (01.02)
Centrifugal drum traps
High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings, Specification for,
A861 (01.02)
Centrifugally cast steel pipe-specifications
Sa Steel pipe
1784
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Ser-
Centrifugally Cast Ferri tic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Centrifugally Cast Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe for Cor-
A872/A872M (01.02)
Centrifugal pumps-specifications
Centrifugal Pump, Shipboard Use, Specification for,
F998 (01.07)
for, F1511 (01.07)
Ceramic coatings
See Porcelain enamel products
Ceramic-glazed materials
See Brick-specifications
Ceramic-insulated (sheathed) thermocouples
See Thermocouples
Ceramic materials/applications-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
Chain
A973/A973M (01.05)
A391/A391M (01.05)
A467/A467M (01.05)
Chain-link fence/fencing systems
Sa Fences/fencing materials
Chain Link Fencing, Terminology Relating to, F552 (01.06)
Construction of Chain-Link Tennis Court Fence, Practice for,
F969 (01.06)
Installation of Chain-Link Fence, Practice for, 1<'567 (01.06)
Installation of Chain-Link Fence for Outdoor Sports Fields,
Sports Courts and Other Recreation Facilities, Practice for,
F2631 (01.06)
Specifying Chain Link Fence, Guide for, F1553 (01.06)
Chain-link fence/fencing systems-specifications
Fl183 (01.06)
for, A491 (01.06)
Industrial and Commercial Steel Swing Gates, Specification for,
F900 (01.06)
Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain-Link
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Polyolefin and Other Polymer-Coated
Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric, Specification for,
F668 (01.06)
Residential Chain Link Fence Gates, Specification for,
F654 (01.06)
Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated Chain Link Fence Materials,
Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence
Framework, Specification for, F1043 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric, Specification for,
A392 (01.06)
Chain slings
Chain (steel)
See Steel chain-specifications
Charpy impact test
A923 (01.03)
Impact Testing of Cast Irons, Test Methods for,
A327/A327M {01.02)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel, Speci-
Check valves
Balls, Bearings, Ferrous and Nonfenous for Use in Bearings,
F2215 (01.08)
Chelate cleaning
1785
Chromium
Chemical analysis-chemicals
Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for
Shipment, Practices for, A 700 (01.05)
Chemical analysis-metals/alloys
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products, Test Methods, Practices,
and Terminology for, A 751 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04,
01.05)
Chemical analysis-steel
01.05)
Chemical descaling
See Descaling
Chemical industry
Chemical passivation treatment
Chemicai Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts, Speci-
Chemical requirements
Chemical resistance classification
See Classification (standards)
Chemicals-specifications
Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used forMa-
rine Applications, Specification for, F1173 (01.07)
Chests
Chest of Drawers (Chiffonier), Steel, Marine, Specification for,
F822 (01.07)
Chiffoniers
F822 (01.07)
Children's equipment/safety
Fences/Barriers for Public, Commercial, and Multi-Family Resi-
dential Use Outdoor Play Areas, Safety Performance Specifi-
Chilled iron castings
See Cast iron-specifications
Chill testing
Chill Testing of Cast Iron, Test Methods of, A367 (01.02)
Steel Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Visual Examina-
Chlorinated poly( vinyl chloride)( CPV C) pipe-specifications
See Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)-specifications
Chocks
Chocks, Panama, Mooring Cast Steel, Specification for,
F2935 (01.07)
Chocks, Ship Mooring, Cast Steel, Specification for,
F2936 (01.07)
Installation Procedures for Fitting Chocks to Marine Machinery
Foundations, Practice for, F1309 (01.07)
Chromaticity
See Color
Chromium
Chromium Metal, Specification for, A481 (01.02)
F2833 (01.08)
Deformed and Plain, Low-carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement, Specification for,
A1035/A1035M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Higher Strength Chromium-
Molybdenum-Tungsten, Specification for,
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
A768/A768M (01.05)
Chromium alloying additives
Chromium alloying additives
Sa Stainless steel alloying additives (chromium)
Ferrochrome-Silicon, Specification for, A482/ A482M (01.02)
Fenochromium, Specification for, A101 (01.02)
Chromium alloy steel-specifications
Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications,
Chromium, Chromium-Nickel, and Silicon Alloy Steel Bars and
for Corrosion and Heat-Resisting Service, Specifica-
A968/A968M (01.03)
Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Super-
for, A250/A250M
or Rolled and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges,
and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
for, A182/Al82M (01.01)
Jso>sta.tlc::J.H)r-Pressed Alloy Steel Flanges, Valves,
and Parts High Temperature Service, for,
A989/A989M (OUH)
n.'"'v-._,,.._,.._,1 Turbine-Type Bolting Specially Heat
HiJgh-Temrler:1ture Service, Specification for,
A768/A768M (01.05)
Chromium alloy steel castings-specifications
Chromium-Nickel Alloy, Specification for,
(01.02)
Chrornimn-Nickel-lron Alloy Class), for
Service, Specification
(01.02)
ture Service,
Chromium-carbon bearing
Stainless Anti-Friction Bearing
A756 (01.05)
Chromium-dad steel--specifications
Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Specification for,
A263 (01.04)
A264 (01.04)
Chromium
Tin Mill Products, Plate HIFrhnh.rtie Chromium-Coated,
and Double Reduced, for,
(01.06)
General Requirements, Specification for,
General Requirements Metric, Specification
Copper-nickel
Use of Branch ConwxtJtons, Practice for, F'681 (01.07)
Chromium electropllatiing
Zinc/ Aluminum Protective for Fasteners,
Specification for, :F1136/FH36M
Chromium-molybdenum alloy steel plate
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum,
Tungsten, Specification for, A1017/A1017M (01.04)
Chromium-molybdenum steel
Chromium-molybdenum steel-specifications
heater for, A250/A250M
Forged or Rolled and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges,
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
Specification for, Al82/A182M (01.01)
Hot Isostatically-Pressed Alloy Steel Flanges, Valves,
and Parts for Service, Sp,ecilic<lticm for,
A989/A989M
A541/A541M (01.05)
Quenched and Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Vessels, Specification for,
A508/A508M (01.05)
and Strip for Nuclear Appli-
A887 (01.03)
and SiliconAlloy Steel Bars and
for Corrosion Heat-Resisting Service, Specifica-
tion A968/A968M (01.03)
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Weaving and Knitting
Speciti,;ati(m for, A478 (01.03)
.. t<lli>IOJtl- vve1aea Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless
TeJmpenttme Service and General Appli
cations, Spt::cifjication for, A358/A358M (01.01)
A264 (01.04)
Welded Diameter Austenitic Steel for Conosive or
for,
L-a.'"'lll!-'' ChronJimrn-r'-l"icikel-lrcm Alloy (25-12 Class), for
Te1mper2ttme Service, Specification for,
(01.02)
Chromium-silicon alloy
Steel Wire, Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Specification
A40l/ A401M (01.03)
Chromium steel plate-specifications
Low-Carbon Nickel-Copper-
1786
Structural
Plates,
Stainless and and
Strip, Specification for,
Chromium-vanadium
Chromium-Vanadium
for,
Quality Wire,
Steel Chromium Vanadium Valve Spring Quality,
A878/A878M (01.03) Specification
Chronic health hazards
See Health hazards
Index ASTM Standards, Section 1
Circuits
F1507 (01.07)
Circular joints
Circular Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping Ap-
Circular
See particle inspection
hanger (for shipboard
and Installation of for,
(01.07)
Clarity !cleanness
'--'H-'-"""1',' L''-'"'"1!11):;, and Passivation of Stainless Parts,
Systems, Practice A380
Class codes (for
Abrasion-Resistant Cast Specification for,
A532/ A532M (01.02)
AusteJmnc, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Specification
(01.4)2)
lron-t:hrorrlimn, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Re-
Specification
'pnltrit''"'''lhr Cast Iron-Chromium-Nickel Tubing
Pressure at High Temperatures, Specification for,
fiU'UO/fi'UUOf\'1_ (01.02)
for General Application, Specification for,
(01.02)
Steel Hardening, Specification
for,
Classification
-'--''-'l'-''-Uli.J', Susceptibility to Attack in Aurnenn1c
Steels, Practices A262 (01.03)
W2tterti!tht Door Control Systems, Specification for,
Classification (standards)
1:-'al)fl(;atlon, and Installation of Fences Constructed of
and Materials, Specification for,
1'537 (01.06)
Ev;alu:atint!! the Microstructure of Graphite in Iron Castings, Test
for, A247 (01.02)
Classification ( )--mtet!llsJ'all,oys
Ev;alu:1titll2' the Microstructure of in Iron Castings, Test
A247 (01.)2)
Fe>rro.all11vs and Alloy Additives, Specification for,
(01.02)
Surface Accet,tat1Ce
for,
Cleaning agents/processes
Clay, Specification for,
'-'""""'Hi};, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Parts,
EqllllpJmei1t, and Systems, Practice for, A380 (01.03)
1787
Coatings
Cleaning agents/processes-specifications
Clear wood evaluation/testing
See Wood products (structural)
Cleats
Cleats, Welded Horn Type, Specification for, F1074 (01.07)
Cold-formed steel sheet
Establishing Conformance to the Minimum Expected Corrosion
Characteristics of Metallic, Painted-Metallic, and
Nonmetallic-Coated Steel Sheet Intended for Use as Cold
Formed Framing Members, Practice for,
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
.._,.,.,.,.,, .. testing
Tensile properties/testing
Closed-impression die forgings
Sa Die forgings-specifications
Steel, Closed-Impression Die Forgings for General Industrial Use,
Clout cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Coarse austenitic steel
Alloy Structural Plates, Specification for,
A829/ A829M (01.04)
Coarse round steel wire
A510/A510M (01.03)
Coated fasteners
Process Control Verification to Prevent Embrittlement
in Plated or Coated Fasteners, Test for,
F1940 (01.08)
Coated sheet products
Sa Zinc-coated steel
Measuring Flatness Characteristics Steel Sheet Products, Prac-
tice for, A1030/A1030M (01.06)
Measuring Shape Characteristics of Tin Mill Products, Practice
for, A987/A987M (01.06)
Coated steel wire (aluminum)
See Aluminum-coated steel wire-specifications
Coated steel wire (zinc)
See Zinc-coated steel wire-specifications
Coating adhesion
Coating application
F1130 (01.07)
Inspection of Marine Surface Preparation and Coating Applica-
tion, Practice for, F941 (01.07)
Quality Control Receipt Inspection Procedures for Protective
Coatings (Paint), Used in Marine Construction and Ship-
building, Practice for, F940 (01.07)
Coating bend test
Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for
tions Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on
Surface, Specification for, A879/A879M (01.06)
Process, Specification for, A875/A875M (0U)6)
Coating cornpc)sition
Weight Comr,ositi<:m of Coating on Terne Sheet by the
Triple-Spot Test Method for, A309 (01.06)
Coatings
A944 (01.04)
Comparing the Abrasion Resistance of Coating Materials f(Jr Cor-
Coatings
F2833 (01.08)
Qualifying Coatings for Use on A490 Structural Bolts Relative to
Hydrogen Embrittlement, Test Method for, F2660 (01.08)
Zinc Alloy Thermo-Diffusion Coatings (TDC) on Steel Fasteners,
Hardware, and Other Products, Specification for,
A1059/A1059M (01.06)
Coatings (electrodeposited)
Coatings (hot-dip)
Coatings (industrial)
Coatings (metal)-specifications
Steel Sheet, Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications
Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface
(General Requirements), Specification for, A917 (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applica-
tions Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Threaded Fasteners Metric, Specification for, F2674 (01.08)
Coatings (polymeric)
See Polymer coatings
Coatings (protective)
See Protective coatings
Coatings (shipbuilding applications)
See Marine coatings systems/applications
Coating thickness
Conducting Case Studies on Galvanized Structures, Practice for,
A896/A896M (01.06)
Coating weight
Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for
Fence Structures, Specification for, F1083 (01.06)
Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or
Zinc-Alloy Coatings, Test Method for, A90/A90M (01.06)
Weight and Composition of Coating on Teme Sheet by the
Triple-Spot Test, Test Method for, A309 (01.06)
Cobalt alloys-specifications
Cobblers cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Codification
Coextruded poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)
See Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)-specifications
Coextrusion capstock
Cofferdams
Sa Structural steel (SS) piles-specifications
1788
A690/A690M (01.04)
Coil chain
A467/A467M (01.05)
Coil coatings
Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Pre-
painted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed
Building Products, Specification for, A755/A755M (01.06)
Coil springs
A689 (01.05)
Cold-applied roofing/waterproofing
See Roofing membranes-specifications
Cold cleaning operations
See Cleaning agents/processes
Cold-drawn steel bars
A311/A311M (01.05)
for, A576 (01.05)
Cold-drawn steel tube-specifications
Sa Steel tube
Cold-drawn steel wire-specifications
Sa Steel wire
Steel Wire, Cold-Drawn for Mechanical Springs, Specification
for, A227/A227M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Cold-Drawn, for Coiled-Type Springs, Specification
for, A407 (01.03)
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete,
Cold-finished steel bars-specifications
Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished, Specification for,
A108 (01.05)
A696 (01.05)
Cold forging steel
Sa Steel forgings
Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods for Cold Heading and Cold
Forging, Specification for, A493 (01.03)
Cold-formed steel sheet-specifications
A857/A857M (01.04)
A1003/A1003M (01.06)
Cold-formed steel tube-specifications
Cold-Formed Electric-Fusion (Arc) Welded High-Strength Low-
-Alloy Structural Tubing in Shapes, with 50 ksi 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point, Specification for,
A1065/A1065M (01.01)
ASOO/ASOOM (01.01)
Steel, Structural Tubing, Cold Formed, Welded, Carbon, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Specification
for, A1057/A1057M (01.06)
Cold-rolled steel sheet/strip-specifications
Sa Steel sheet
%Maximum). Cold-Rolled. Soecification for,
A 794tA794M (01.03) .
Steel Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Pro-
cess, Specification for, A308/A308M (01.06)
tion for, A980/A980M (01.03)
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled,
Steel, Strip, High-Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Specification for,
A684/A684M (01.03)
Cold-rolled steel wire-specifications
A805/A805M (01.03)
Cold water supply/distribution systems-specifications
See Water supply/distribution systems-specifications
Cold-worked steel-specifications
Sa Austenitic stainless steel
Alloy Steel Forgings for Nonmagnetic Retaining Rings for Gen-
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
Collaborative testing
See Interlaboratory testing
Collated/cohered fasteners
Collated and Cohered Fasteners and Their Application Tools, Ter-
minology of, F592 (01.08)
Colloidal graphite
See Graphite
Color
Color coating of fittings
Columbium alloying additives
Ferrocolumbium, Specification for, A550 (01.02)
Communications (marine (shipboard) applications
Columbium alloy steel-specifications
Precipitation-Strengthened Low-Carbon Nickel-Copper-
Plates, Specification for, A 710/ A 110M (01.04)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Car-
bon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
and Ultra-High Strength, Specification for,
A1018/A1018M (01.03)
Command and control system equipment
F1337 (01.07)
Commercial chain-link fence
See Chain-link fence/fencing systems
Commercial fencing
Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates, Specification
for, F1184 (01.06)
Specifying Chain Link Fence, Guide for, F1553 (01.06)
Commercial food service equipment
Commercial outdoor play areas
Commercial steel (CS) sheet/strip-specifications
Sa Steel sheet
1789
A659/A659M (01.03)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Im-
proved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength, Specification
for, A1011/A1011M (01.03)
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
Common nails/spikes
F1667 (01.08)
Common requirements (steel)
See General delivery requirements-steel
Communications-specifications
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) "Iron" Telephone and Telegraph Line
Wire, Specification for, A111 (01.06)
Communications (marine (shipboard) applications
Digital Communication Protocols for Computerized Systems,
Guide for, F1757 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
Compacted graphite iron castings
Compacted graphite iron castings
A842 (01.02)
Comparison techniques
Compendium
Composite gasket materials
See Gaskets
Composites-building applications (specifications)
Composite Ribbed Steel Pipe, Precoated and Polyethylene Lined
for Gravity Flow Sanitary Sewers, Storm Sewers, and Other
A978/A978M (01.06)
Structural Design of Corrugated Steel Pipe, Pipe-,A.rches, and
Composition analysis-metals/alloys
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AHoy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process, Specification for,
A653/A653M (01.06)
Composition analysis-steel materials/applications
Determining Hardenability of Steel, Test Methods for,
A255 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Selection Guide, Composition, and Mechanical Prop-
erties, Practice for, A400 (01.05)
A915/A915M (01.02)
Weight and Composition of Coating on Terne Sheet by the
CotmJlre:ssible washer-type indicators
and Alloy Steel Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Ten-
sion Indicators for Use with Cap Screws, Bolts, Anchors,
and Studs, Specification for, F2437 (01.08)
Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use
With Structural (Metric), Specification for,
F959M (01.08)
with Stmctural Fasteners, Specification for, F959 (01.08)
CotmJ:>ressible .. m.v.,., .. _,.,"'""' indicators-Carbon and alloy steel
and Alloy
sion Indicators for Use
and Studs, Specification for,

Direct Ten-
Anchors,
Graphitic or Carbon Braided Yarn, Specifica-
(01.07)
Comoressor and Turbine Airfoils, Specifi-
Contained, Sp1cci !ric<:ttio>n for,
Mechanically Shipboard Air Conditioner, Specifica-
tion for, (01.07)
systems
Communication Protocols for Computerized Systems,
Guide for, _F1757 (0U)7)
Hardware for Computerized Systems, Guide for,
F2218
Transition and Petformance of Marine Software Systems Mainte-
nance, Guide for, F1716 (01.07)
Concentric lay steel wire strand
See Steel wire strand-specifications
Concrete
Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed,
for Concrete, Specification for, A1064/A1064M (01.04)
Concrete anchors/anchorage systems
Concrete bonding
A944 (01.04)
Concrete linings-corrugated steel pipe
Concrete Pavements and Linings Installed in Corrugated Steel
Structures in the Field, Specification for,
A979/A979M (01.06)
Concrete nails
F1667 (01.08)
Concrete pavements
Epoxy-Coated Steel Dowels for Concrete Pavement, Specification
for, A1078/A1078M (01.04)
Concrete pavements-specifications
Sa Pavement surfaces-specifications
Stmctures in the Field, Specification for,
A979/A979M (01.06)
Concrete pipe-specifications
Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems,
Specification for, C1173 (01.02)
Concrete
See concrete
Concrete railroad ties
Steel Wire, Indented, Low-Relaxation for Prestressed Concrete
Railroad Ties, Specification for, A881/A881M (01.04)
Concrete reinforcement
Co>mr,aring Bond Strength of Steel Reinforcing Bars to Concrete
Beam-End Specimens, Test Method for,
(01.04)
Packaging, and Loading Methods for Steel Products for
Shipment, for, A 700 (01.05)
Concrete reinforcement-specifications
1790
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforce-
ment, for, A615/A615M (01.04)
Deformed Plain Stainless Steel Wire and Welded Wire for
Specification for,
Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforce-
ment, for, A955/A955M (01.04)
Defmmed Low-carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars
Concrete Specification for,
A1035/A1035M
Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specification for,
(01.04)
, :.uvAv-'-"'a.cvu Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Specifi<:atHm for, A884/A884M (01.04)
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Specification for,
A970/A970M (01.04)
Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
forcement, for, A706/A706M (01.04)
Rail-Steel and Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforce-
ment, A996/ A.996M (01.04)
Steel Fibers Fiber-Reinforced Concrete, Specification
A820/A820M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Indented, Seven-Wire Stress-Relieved for
stressed Concrete, for, A886/A886M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Seven-Wire, Compacted, Stress-Relieved
for Prestressed Concrete, for,
A.779/A779M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete,
Steel Stud Assemblies for Shear Reinforcement of Concrete,
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete,
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete, Specifica-
tion for, Al85/A185M (01.04)
Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement, Specification
A496/A496M
Steel Hard-Drawn Prestressed Concrete Pipe, Specifica--
tion A648 (01.04)
Steel Wire, Hard-Drawn for Prestressed Concrete Specifi-
A821/A821M
Reinforc:en1enlt, Specification for,
Uncoated Steel V/ire for Prestressed Concrete,
Uncoated, Stress-Relieved Steel Bars for Prestressed Concrete
Railroad Ties, Specification for, A911/A911M
Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Sped-
for, A933/ A933M
Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement,
Soeciti<;ati<m for, A184/A184M (01.04)
Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement,
for, A 704/ A 704M (01.04)
and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles, Specification
A252 (01.01)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,
SpecJti1:;at11Jn for, A767/A767M (01.04)
;,u,...,-,..A,anA ... :;..,"'r1' Steel Pipe Winding Mesh, Specifica-
tion for,
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain and Deformed, for Concrete, Specification for,
A1060/A1060M (01.04)
Concrete tanks
Steel Wire, Hard-Drawn for Prestressed Concrete Tanks, Specifi-
Condensation
See Humidity
Condenser and heat exchanger systems
Condenser and heat ex,ch:ilnl:?;er sv:'ltems:-steel
Steel and
Condenser Tubes, Specification for, (01.01)
Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel and
Condenser Tubes, Specification for, (01.01)
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Altov-:"\t.ee!
and Tubes, So,ecitic<lticm
A213/A213M
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater
Tubes, Specification for, A688/A688M (01.01)
Integral Fins, for, A498 (01.01)
Seamless and Ferritic, Austenitic and Duplex
Cone
Condenser and Heat Tubes With Integral
for, A1012
Carbon and Carbon Manganese,
SUJJerl1eater, Heat nx<;narlgtr
Ke:rn:gerate:a Shipboard Air Conditioner, Specifica-
(01.07)
1791
Confined waters
Escort Vessel Evaluation and Selection, Guide for,
F1878 (01.07)
Conformance/conformity assessment
Contraction
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Constant-current electrolytic method
Constant temperature cycle test
See Temperature tests
Construction
F969 (01.06)
Construction of Sounding Tube and Striker Plate for Tank Sound-
ing, Guide for, F1386 (01.07)
Contact
Annular Bearings for Instruments and Precision Rotating
Contact resistance
Containerboard
Containers-shipping specifications
specifications
Contamination-coatings
Continuous coating transformation data
for, A1033 (01.03)
Continuous filament carbon/graphite materials
Packing Material, Graphitic or Carbon Braided Yarn, Specifica-
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
Continuous grain flow (CGF) crankshafts
A983/A983M (01.05)
Magnetic Particle Examination of Continuous Grain Flow Crank
shaft Forgings, Specification for, A986/ A986M (01.05)
Continuous magnetization technique
See Magnetic particle inspection
Continuous measurementlmonitoring
See Monitoring
Continuous self-cleaning automatic strainers
Fabricated or Cast Automatic Self-Cleaning, Fuel Oil and Lubri-
cating Oil Strainers, Specification for, F1567 (01.07)
Continuous welding ( CW)
Sa Welded steel materials/applications-specifications
Contract administration
Database Structure of Electronic Data Interchange Between Ship
Owner and Shipyard for Contract Administration, Guide for,
F2017 (01.07)
Contraction
Pipeline Expansion Joints of the Packed Slip Type for Marine
Application, Specification for, F1007 (01.07)
Control/display integration
Control/display integration
Facilities, Practice for, Fl166 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
Control spaces
Control valves
Pneumatic-Operated, Globe-Style, Control Valves, Specification
for, F1985 (01.07)
Conversion units/factors
Use of SI (Metric) Units in Maritime Applications (Committee
F25 Supplement to IEEE/ ASTM SI 10), Practice for,
F1332 (01.07)
Cooking/food service equipment-specifications
Seamless and Welded Austenitic and Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless
Steel Sanitary Tubing, Specification for,
A270/A270M (01.01)
Cooler nails
F1667 (01.08)
Copper
Copper alloy-specifications
F1077 (01.08)
Copper alloy numbering system (UNS)
(UNS), Practice for, :1!:527 (01.01)
Copper alloy pipe
Sa Condenser and heat exchanger systems
Expanded Welded and Silver Brazed Socket Joints for Pipe and
Tube, Practice for, F1076 (01.07)
Copper alloy pipe-specifications
Fluid Conditioner Fittings in Piping Applications Above 0F,
Lap Joint Flange Pipe End Applications, Specification for,
F2015 (01.07)
Copper alloy tube-specifications
Sa Seamless Cu/Cu alloy tube-specifications
F2015 (01.07)
Copper-brazed steel tubing
Copper-Brazed Steel Tubing, Specification for, A254 (01.01)
Copper-clad materials-specifications
Copper-Clad Steel Wire Strand, Specification for, A460 (01.06)
Copper-copper sulfate-sulfuric acid test
Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic
Stainless Steels, Practices for, A262 (01.03)
Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic Stain-
less Steels, Practices for, A 763 (01.03)
Coppered steel wire
Copper-nickel pipe and tube
F2015 (01.07)
1792
Copper structural materials/applications-specifications
Copper sulfate dip
Copper tube-specifications
Copper tube (seamless)
See Seamless Cu/Cu alloy tube-specifications
Core bonding
Corker nails
F1667 (01.08)
Correctional facility
Corrosion
Accelerated Corrosion Testing for Mechanical Fasteners, Guide
for, F2832 (01.08)
F2833 (01.08)
Corrosion-intergranular
See Intergranular attack (IGA)
Corrosion-marine (shipbuilding) materials
F1130 (01.07)
Performance of Piping and Tubing Mechanically Attached Fit-
tings, Specification for, F1387 (01.07)
Corrosion-metals/alloys
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Corrosion indoor/outdoor environment
A947M (01.03)
Corrosion protection
Life-Cycle Cost Analysis of Corrosion Protection Systems on
Iron and Steel Products, Practice for, A1068 (01.06)
Corrosion-resistant coatings-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
Phosphate/Oil Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners, Speci-
Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners,
Specification for, F1136/Fl136M (01.08)
Corrosion-resistant iron castings
Corrosion-resistant stainless steel products
Sa Stainless steel
Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel Wire and Welded Wire for
A1022/A1022M (01.04)
Corrosion-resistant steel-specifications
F2215 (01.08)
ment, Specification for, A955/A955M (01.04)
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy-Coated Structural Steel H-Piles and Sheet
Piling, Specification for, A950/A950M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
Corrosion-resistant steel castings
See Steel castings
Corrosion-resistant zinc anodes
Corrosive service applications
A896/A896M (01.06)
Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
A690/A690M (01.04)
Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs, Specification
for, F593 (01.08)
Stainless Steel Nuts, Specification for, F594 (01.08)
Corrosive service applications-bars/rods/shapes
Shapes for Corrosion and Heat-Resisting Service, Specifica-
tion for, A968/A968M (01.03)
Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specification for,
A775/A775M (01.04)
Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars, Specification for,
A582/ A582M (01.03)
A242/A242M (01.04)
Corrosive service applications-bolting/fastening applications
for, F1428 (01.08)
Corrosive service applications-castings
Castings, Chromium-Nickel Alloy, Specification for,
A560/A560M (01.02)
A743/A743M (01.02)
Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe
Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel-Molybdenum Corrosion-
Resistant, Duplex (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Applica-
1793
Corrosive service applications-tube (steel)
tion, Specification for, A890/A890M (01.02)
Castings, Iron-Nickel-Chromium and Nickel Alloys, Specially
Controlled for Pressure Retaining Parts for Corrosive Ser-
vice, Specification for, A990 (01.02)
Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy, Specification for,
A494/A494M (01.02)
A518/ AS 18M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening, Specification
for, A747/A747M (01.02)
Corrosive service applications-pipe
A861 (01.02)
Corrosive service applications-pipe (steel)
Sa Steel pipe
As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for Gen-
A872/A872M (01.02)
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
A928/A928M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe,
Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Speci-
fication for, A813/A813M (01.01}
A409/A409M (01.01)
Corrosive service applications-plate/sheet/strip
Free-Machining Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip, Specifica-
tion for, A895 (01.03)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate With Atmo-
spheric Corrosion Resistance, Specification for,
A871/A871M (01.04)
A947M (01.03)
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric CmTosion
Seamless Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing, Specification for,
A511/ A511M (01.01)
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing (Small-
Diameter) for General Service, Specification for,
A632 (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for Gen-
eral Service, Specification for, A269 (01.01)
A554 (01.01)
Corrosive service applications-wire
Corrosivity-water
'.r. .. ,,.,..,,,t.,.il plastic panels
Panels
r ....... shilpJJiin:wp,ac"kirtg materials
containers/materials/applications-
'<>rlrnt!lr!>til steel sewer/drain pipe
Aprplication of Asphalt to Corrugated Steel Sewer and
Practice A862/A862M (01.06)
Comparing Resistance of Coating Materials for Cor-
Composite Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and Drains, Specifi-
cation for, A1042/A1042M (01.06)
Installing Corrugated Steel Structural Plate Pipe for Sewers and
Other Applications, Practice for, A807/A807M (01.06)
' ,. Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and
Applic:aticms, Practice for, A 798/ A 798M (01.06)
Life-Cycle Analysis of Corrugated Metal Pipe Used for Cui-
Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits, Practice
for, (01.06)
Stmctura1 Design of Corrugated Steel Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and
Applications, Practice for, A796/A796M (01.06)
Structural Design of Reinforcements for
Corrugated Steel for Sewers and
Practice for, (01.06)
Corrugated steel sewer/drain
Concrete Pavements and
Structures in the
A979/A979M
Con-uga1ted Steel Box Specification for,
(01.06)
Co>rrutgated Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains,
A760/A760M (01.06)
Precoated for Sewers and Drains,
Countersunk head cap SCH'CVIvs--s]pe<:ifi,cat:imis
Sa Steel
Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap
Specifh;aticm for, F835 (01.08)
Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap
Stainless Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap
Couplings-specifications
Mechanical Couplings Using Thermoplastic Elastomeric
Gaskets for Joining Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV),
Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing Systems for Above and Be-
low Ground Use, Specification for, C1461 (01.02)
Performance of Fittings for Use with Gasketed Mechanical Cou-
plings Used in Piping Applications, Specification for,
1<'1548 (01.07)
Performance of Gasketed Mechanical for Use in Pip-
Ap]phcahcms, Specification for, (01.07)
Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fit-
for, C1277 (01.02)
Flexible Poly Chlo-
Dis.similar DWV and
Fittings, Specification for, C1541 (01.02)

for Use With Dissimilar DWV

Ground, Specification for,
Gasket Materials for Drain,
Sanitary and Storm Plumb-
for, (01.02)
Black or Zinc-Coated Galvanized)
Use in Steel Pipe
tion for, (01.01)
Carbon Steel Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings, Specification
F682 (01.07)
Coupons
Test
Cover assembly
Manhole Cover ftsst:t!IDIY,
Specification
Cover Assembly,
Specification for,
Specification for,
Raised, Oiltight and Water-
(01.07)
Semi-Flush, Oiltight and Wa-
(0UJ7)
Manhole Assembly, Bolted, SP.TmT-1-<111.-:h Oiltight and Wa-
tertight, Hinged, Specification for, (01.07)
Cover coat enamels
Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling, Specification for,
A424/A424M (01.03)
1794
Cracking
uu"rl..-""'"" Embrittlement Resistance for Steel Wire Hard Drawn
for Prestressing Concrete Pipe, Test Method for,
A1032 (01.04)
Cracking-coatings
Jm;perctirlg the Coating System of a Ship, Practice for,
(01.07)
Crane rails
Carbon Steel Crane Rails, Specification for, A759 (01.04)
materials-specifications
Carbon and Steel Crank-
Sp(:cification for,
Magnetic Particle Examination of Continuous Grain Flow Crank-
Forgings, Specification for, A986/A986M (01.05)
M::tgn,etic Particle Examination of Large Crankshaft, Specification
A456/A456M (01.05)
Ultrasonic Examination of Forged Crankshafts, Specification for,
A503/A503M (01.05)
Crew sleeping quarters
Crib sheet & pillowcase fabrics
See Beds
Critical current measurement
See Current measurement
Crushed aggregah;
Cryogenic service environments
Plate, and Flat Bar, Specification for, A666
Crystallization ternp1erattu1res
See tests
Culvert
Box Culverts, Specification
n.;nJJ"''I 1:17U"'I'HA (01.06)
Cupola malleable iron
A 716 (01.02)
Sa Malleable iron castings--specifications
Cupola Malleable Iron, Specification for, A197/A197M (01.02)
Cured reinforced
See (RTP)-
specifications
characteristics
PerJ:-omlan<;e of EnalmeLing
and Furniture,
Current measurement
Sa Electrical resistance/resistivity
Thern1osettilng Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used forMa-
ApJJ1lcat1cms, Specification for, F1173 (01.07)
and White Cast Iron) Cylin-
Specih<;atH)n for, (0U)2)
Carbon, Low Alloy, and Stainless Steel, Heavy-
Steam Turbines, Specification for,
A356/ A356M (01.02)
Exarninaticm from Bored Surfaces of Cylindrical
assessment
Defects
fication
amdysis---cormsion
See Corrosion
Data Interchange Between Ship
for Contract Administration, Guide for,
Deformation-metals/alloys
Data encryption
for, F1756 (01.07)
Data exchange/transfer
Hierarchy of Equipment Identifiers and Boundaries for Reliabil-
ity, Availability, and Maintainability (RAM) Performance
Data Exchange, Classification for, F2446 (01.07)
Data processing equipment
A947M (0U)3)
Daylight
See Reflectance and reflectivity
DDS (deep drawing steel) sheet
See Steel sheet
Decarburization
Sa Carburizing applications
Test Method for, F2328M (Ot.mn
De:terminintg the Mechanical of h'v,l-,.,.,,,ntu and Inter-
nally Fasteners, Direct Indica--
Determining the Mechanical of and Inter-
nally Threaded Fasteners, Test
Methods for, Jr606M (01.08)
Deck Gear Stowage Box Metric, Specification for,
F10l9M (01.07)
Deck handrails
Fiberglass (GRP) Pultruded Open-Weather Storm and Guard,
Square Railing Systems, Specification for, Fl092 (01.07)
Decks
Determining Effects of Large Pool Fires on Insu-
lated Marine Bulkheads Decks, Constructed of Steel,
Decks-specifications
Portable Intermediate Flush Deck Stanchion, Specification for,
F987 (01.07)
Deep drawing steel
Steel, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
Luw--,""l.uuv. High-Strength with lmJ)ro-ved
ability, Hardened, and Bake H<>rriPnlllh!P-
tion for, A1008/A1008M (OL03)
Deep foundation units
See Piles
Defects
Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings, Practice for,
A275/A275M (01.05)
Marine Test
Deflection-building constructions/materials
1795
Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fit--
Deformed and Plain Steel Wire and Welded Wire for
A1022/A1022M (01.04)
Deformed steel bars-specifications
Deformed steel bars-specifications
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforce-
Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specification
for, A934/A934M (01.04)
Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Specification for,
A970/A970M (01.04)
forcement, Specification for, A706/A706M (01.04)
Vinyl-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Speci-
Deformed steel wire-specifications
Sa Steel wire (concrete reinforcement applications)-
specifications
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete,
Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement, Specification
for, A496/A496M (01.04)
Degreasing
Sa Vapor degreasing
Degree of cure
See Curing characteristics
Degree of fusion
See Fusion
Dehumidifier
Delamination
F1130 (01.07)
Delayed failure
Process Control Verification to Prevent Hydrogen Embrittlement
in Plated or Coated Fasteners, Test Method for,
F1940 (01.08)
Densichron reflectometer
Depth of color
See Color
Depth of decarburization
See Carburizing applications
Descaling
for, F1330 (01.07)
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Design-piping systems
Design-ship construction
Fire Hose Nozzles, Specification for, F1546/F1546M (01.07)
Fuel Oil Meters of the Volumetric Positive Displacement Type,
HVAC Duct Shapes; Identification and Description of Design
Configuration, Practice for, F1005 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
Line-Blind Valves for Marine Applications, Specification for,
F1020 (01.07)
Selection and Application of Piping System Materials, Practice
for, F1155 (01.07)
Selection of Structural Details for Ship Construction, Guide for,
F1455 (01.07)
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07)
Desks
Desk, Marine, Steel, with Cabinet, Specification for,
(01.07)
Detention facility/security
See Correctional facility
Deterioration
See Corrosion
See Weathering
Detrimental intermetallic phase detection
A923 (01.03)
DHW systems (domestic hot water)
Diagonal warpage
See Warpage
Diamond point fasteners
F1667 (01.08)
Diatomaceous earth block/pipe thermal insulation
See Pipe thermal insulation
Die forgings-specifications
Die-formed ring
Tape, and Die-Formed Ring, Specification for,
F2168 (01.07)
Diesel engines
A983/A983M (01.05)
shaft Forgings, Specification for, A986/A986M (01.05)
F1338 (01.07)
1796
Diesel exhaust
Water Trap for Diesel Exhaust, Specification for, F1431 (01.07)
Diesel lubricating oils
See Lubricating oils-specifications
Differential pressure transducer/transmitter
Transducers, Pressure and Differential, Pressure, Electrical and
Fiber-Optic, Specification for, F2070 (01.07)
Differential thermal analysis (DTA)
See Thermal analysis (TA)
Diffuse reflectance
Digital communication protocols
Guide for, F1757 (01.07)
Dilatometer method
for, A1033 (01.03)
Dimensional change
for, A1033 (01.03)
Dimensional limitations (for pipe/tube)
F2015 (01.07)
Dining room tables (on ships)
Sa Shipboard materials/applications-specifications
Tables, Mess, Marine, Steel, Specification for, F824 (01.07)
Diphenylcarbazide method
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Directional reflectance
Direct oxygen service
See Oxygen service/systems
Direct-quenching process
A844/A844M (01.04)
Direct-reading indicators
Indicators, Sight, Liquid Level, Direct and Indirect Reading, Tu-
bular Glass/Plastic, Specification for, F2045 (01.07)
Direct-reversible engine
F1338 (01.07)
Direct shear test
See Shear testing
Direct tension indicators (DTI)
With Structural Fasteners (Metric), Specification for,
F959M (01.08)
with Structural Fasteners, Specification for, F959 (01.08)
Dirt accumulation/analysis
Discharge measurement
Discontinuities
See Penetrant inspection
Discontinuities-fasteners
F1077 (01.08)
Surface Discontinuities of Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and
Metric Series, Specification for, F788 (01.08)
Surface Discontinuities of Nuts, Inch and Metric Series, Specifi-
Discontinuities-steel
Detecting Susceptibility to lntergranular Attack in Ferritic Stain-
less Steels, Practices for, A763 (01.03)
1797
Domestic shipping
Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural
Shapes, Specification for, A898/ A898M (01.04)
A578/A578M (01.04)
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates, Specification
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Discount rate
Life-Cycle Cost Analysis of Corrugated Metal Pipe Used for Cul-
verts, Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits, Practice
for, A930 (01.06)
Displacement
Displacement-metals/alloys
F1940 (01.08)
Displacement meters
Displacement pumps
for, F1511 (01.07)
Rotary Positive Displacement Distillate Fuel Pumps, Specification
for, F1718 (01.07)
Rotary Positive Displacement Pumps, Ships Use, Specification
for, F1510 (01.07)
Displays
F1337 (01.07)
Dissolution rate
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Distillate fuels-specifications
for, F1718 (01.07)
Distortion
Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip
Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies, Practice for,
A384/A384M (01.06)
Ditch structure
Docking assemblies
for, F991M (01.07)
Dock walls
A690/A690M (01.04)
Domestic shipping
Domestic use doors/frames
Domestic use doors/frames
Domestic Use Doors and Frames, Steel, Interior, Marine, Specifi-
cation for, li'821/F821M (01.07)
Domestic water heating (DHW)
Doors/door assemblies-specifications
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Gastight I Airtight, Weathertight,
F1073 (01.07)
Expanded--Metal Doors, Specification for, :F1072 (01.07)
Doors/door assemblies
See Shipbuilding materials (doors)
Dosage rate/level
Double branch bend
High-Silicon Pipe and Specification for,
A861 (01.02)
See
Double-headed nails
F1667 (01.08)
Steel
Weldless Chain, for, A466/A466M (01.05)
Double-reduced tin mill black plate-specifications
Sa Tin min products-specifications
Tin Mill Products, Black Plate Electrolytic Chromium-Coated,
and Double Reduced, Specification for,
(01.06)
Black Plate, Double Reduced, Specification
for, (01.06)
Tin Mill Products, Electrolytic Tin Plate, Double Reduced, Speci-
fication for, A626/ A626M (01.06)
Double seals
for, F1511 (01.07)
Double submerged-arc welded. piJ>e--s]pe(:ifi,cat:im"l.s
Steel Line Pipe, Plain
Double
Gabions and Revet Mattresses
Wire or Metallic-Coated Steel Wire
Chloride) (PVC) Coating), Specification
feedback
Valves for Steam Service, Specification for,
Draft
D.rairaaQ'e materials/systems
Sewer
Life-Cycle Cost Corrugated Metal Used for Cui-
Storm Sewers, and Other Buried '--''""'"'u""' Practice
(01.06)
Spe:cth,cati::m for, A716 (01.02)
'-,vupJlHll"-"' for Underground Piping Systems,
(01.02)
""'-!-\'""''"'" Pavings, and Linings for
Pipe, Specification for,
Drain
pipe (steel)-specifications
Drain plug assemblies
for, F991M (01.07)
Drains
cation for, A1042/A1042M (01.06)
Steam Traps and Drains, Specification for, F1139 (01.07)
Drain/waste/vent (DWV)
and Vent Piping Applications, Specification
for Use With Dissimilar DWV
Ground, Specification for,
Steel Sheet, MetaHic Coated and Polymer Precoated for Corru-
gated Steel Pipe, for, A742/A742M (OL06)
Thermoplastic Gasket Materials for Drain,
Waste, and Vent Sewer, Sanitary and Storm Plumb-
ing Systems, for, C1440 (01.02)
Drain/waste/vent (DWV)-poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)
Shielded Transition Couplings Using Flexible Poly Chlo-
ride (PVC) Gaskets to Connect Dissimilar DWV and
Drain/waste/vent (DWV)-thermoplastics
Mechanical Couplings Thermoplastic Elastomeric
Gaskets for Joining Waste, and Vent
Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing for and Be-
low Ground Use, Specification C1461 (01.02)
Drawers
Marine, Steel, Specification for,
sheet/strip-specifications
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Coils, Alloy, Drawing
Steel and Structural Hot-Rolled, Specification for,
A1031/A1031M (01.03)
Hot-Rolled,
,uw-r ... nv .. High-Strength .11w-'""'"'"'
and Ultra-High Strength,
(01.03)
Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
Low-.Ailov. High-Strength with Iillloroved
tion
outer ring
Roller, Needle: Drawn Outer
Inner and
Drinking water
Inner: for Needle Roller
Specification for, F2163
screws-specifications
'I'ype,
supply/distribution
1798
Driven fasteners
Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples, SpecJhc:'l.tHm for,
F1667 (0U)8)
Specification for, Al (01.04)
cargo
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, FU98 (OUm
Drycleanable bedcoverings
See Beds
Dryer roils (for paper mills)
Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls, Specification
for, A476/A476M (01.02)
Dry film thickness
See Thickness
Dry heat tests
See Weathering
Dry magnetic particle
See Magnetic inspection
Dual metal abrasion resistant ron
Centrifugally Cast White
Resistant Roll Shells, Sp,ecitic<ttictn
Ductile iron ca!>tiltgs:--spHecitic:!lti4:Pns
Austenitic Ductile Iron '-'UMutlo!:-.. Sp,ecitic<ttlcm
Austenitic Ductile Iron Castings for Pre:sstlre--Ccmtllinilng
Suitable for Service, Specification for,
A571/A571M
Use at El-
Polve:th,rle11e E:nc::tseJmeJGt for Ductile Iron for Water or
Liquids, Practice for, A674
Ductile iron
Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe, Specification for, A 746 (01.02)
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe, Index of Specifications for,
A377 (01.02)
Shear testing
Ultrasonic
Ductwork
HVAC Duct Shapes; Identification and of Design
Configuration, Practice for, F1005
alloy steel tube
and Welded Ferritic, Austenitic and
Condenser Heat Tubes With
Specification for, Al012
Duplex base-metal thermocouple wire
See Thermocouples
stainless steel
vco,Lcl,;t.ul!! Detrimental Intermetallic Phase
Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels, Test
A923
Stainless Pressure
Vessels and
A1049/A1049M
Corrosion-
for General Applica-
Sr)e:citilcatH)n (01.02)
Stainless Steel Pipe Electric Fusion
Welded with of Filler Metal, Specification for,
A928/A928M (01.01)
Electrical motors
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe,
Seamless and Welded Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
strainers
(All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line
F1199 (01.07)
Fabricated (Welded) Pipe Line Strainers (Above 150 psig and
150F), Specification for, (01.07)
Durability
A242/A242M (01.04)
Dutch doors (ships)
See Shipbuilding steel materials (doors)
DWV nh11Pit111he
Dynamic
See
Earth embankments
See Embankments
EC test
Edge nm,vnc.aa
See
Editorial procedures
Editorial Procedures and Form of Product Specifications for
Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys, Guide for,
(01.01)
ttlgn-<':liJllC(m Iron Pipe and Fittings, Specification for,
A861 (01.02)
Elastic strain preload (ESP)
Elnstomeric materials/applications-specifications
Elastomeric roofing membranes
See Roofing membranes-specifications
Electrical automatic fire detection/alarm
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide
Electrical condnctors (semiconductors)-specifications
See Electronic materials/applications-specifications
Electrical equipment-specifications
Sa Electronic materials/applications-specifications
F1197 (01.07)
1799
Electrical field strength
See Electrostatic charge/discharge
Electrical insulating
Electrical Insulation Monitors Monitoring Ground Resistance
in Active Electrical Systems Metric, Specification for,
F1207M (01.07)
Insulation Resistance Monitor for Shipboard Electrical Motors
and Generators, Specification for, F1134 (01.07)
Electrical measurements
Electrical Insulation Monitors for Monitoring Ground Resistance
F1207M (01.07)
Electrical motors
Electrical performance
Electrical performance
See Performance-electrical/electronic
systems/applications
Electrical power systems
Electrical power systems-specifications
Railway Service, Specification for, A729/A729M (01.05)
Heat-Shrink Cable Entry Seals (Metric), Specification for,
F1837M (01.07)
Insulation Monitors for Shipboard Electrical Systems Metric,
Specification for, F1669M (01.07)
Liquid Level Indicating Equipment, Electrical, Specification for,
F2044 (01.07)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Overhead Ground Wire Strand,
Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand, Specification for, A475 (01.06)
Electrical resistance/resistivity
F1207M (01.07)
Electrical valve operators
Electric-arc furnace
Electric food service equipment-specifications
Electric-furnace steel
A769/A769M (01.04)
A690/A690M (01.04)
A514/A514M (01.04)
Electric-fusion-welded steel pipe
A691/A691M (01.01)
Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over),
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at
Moderate Temperatures, Specification for,
A672/A672M (01.01)
A928/A928M (01.01)
Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and
Over), Specification for, A134 (01.01)
A409/A409M (01.01)
A252 (01.01)
Electric-fusion-welded steel pipe-specifications
-Alloy Structural Tubing in Shapes, with 50 ksi 345 MPa
A1065/A1065M (01.01)
Electric railway
Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel pipe-specifications
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe, Specification for,
A135/A135M (01.01)
HHm-;)tnm!!m Low-Alloy Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe,
for, A714 (01.01)
Plain Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
for High-Pressure Pipe-Type Cable Circuits, Specification
for, A523 (01.01)
A252 (01.01)
Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel shapes-specifications
A769/A769M (01.04)
Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel tube-specifications
A178/A178M (01.01)
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
Electrochemical measurements/testing
Electrodeposited coatings
Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners (Metric), Speci-
fication for, F1941M (01.08)
1800
Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch
Screw Threads (UN/UNR)), Specification for,
F1941 (01.08)
Electrodeposited coatings-specifications
Electrodeposited Cr coatings-specifications
Specification for, F1136/F1136M (01.08)
Electrodeposited Zn coatings-specifications
See Zinc electrodeposited coatings-specifications
Electrode remelted steel
Electro-hydraulic door control systems
F1197 (01.07)
Electrolytic coatings-specifications
Electrolytic Manganese Metal, Specification for,
A601/ A601M (01.02)
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Nickel Alloy Coated by the Electrolytic Process
for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass
on Each Surface, Specification for, A918 (01.06)
Electrolytic stripping
Electrolytic tin plate
Tin Mill Products, Electrolytic Tin Plate, Single Reduced, Speci-
Electromotive force (EMF)
Electron emitters
See Current measurement
Electronic data
F2017 (01.07)
Vessel-Related Technical Information for Use in Developing an
Electronic Database and Ship Safety Record, Guide for,
F2001 (01.07)
Electronic hydrogen embrittlement test
See Hydrogen embrittlement (HE)
Electronic materials/applications
F1331 (01.07)
Electronic materials/applications-specifications
Switch, Position Proximity (Noncontact) or Limit (Mechanical
Contact), Fiber-Optic, Specification for, F2071 (01.07)
Electroplated Cr coatings
See Chromium electroplating
Electroplating
F1940 (01.08)
Electroslag remelt (ESR) process
Electrostatic charge/discharge
Electrostripping
Elevated temperature service applications
1801
Enamel coatings
Castings, Nickel-Aluminum Ordered Alloy, Specification for,
A1002 (01.02)
Elevated temperature service applications-steel
A560/ A560M (01.02)
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire, Specification for,
A231/A231M (01.03)
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire,
Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at El-
evated Temperatures, Specification for,
A395/A395M (01.02)
A989/A989M (01.01)
Hot Isostatically-Pressed Stainless Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves,
A988/A988M (01.01)
for, F1311 (01.07)
A234/A234M (01.01)
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
A 739 (01.05)
Elevated temperature tests
Elongation
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Elongation-metallic materials
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Embankments
Embrittlement-hydrogen
See Hydrogen embrittlement (HE)
Emergency gear stowage locker
Steel Emergency Gear Stowage Locker, Specification for,
F1018 (01.07)
Emergency muster lists
Preparing and Locating Emergency Muster Lists, Practice for,
F1270 (01.07)
EMI (electromagnetic interference)
for, F1756 (01.07)
Enamel coatings
Encasement
Encasement
Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or
Other Liquids, Practice for, A674 (01.02)
Enclosures
A947M (01.03)
End grain pitting
End-grain wood materials
End-quench hardness
A255 (01.05)
:End-rings
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
Energy absorption
Engineering applications .
Sa Computerized systems
F1575 (01.08)
Engineering applications-specifications
Copper-Brazed Steel Specification A254 (01.01)
Ferritic Malleable Iron Specification
A47/A47M (01.02)
l<:ntgilleerilllg economics
Cost Analysis of Corrugated Metal Pipe Used for Cul-
for, A930 (01.06)
specification requirements
Study Procedure, Practice for,
Prc,pulsicm Medium Speed Marine Diesel Engines Covering
Pertormance and Minimum Scope of Assembly, Guide for,
F1338 (01.07)
Thermal analysis (TA)
Entrainment SC!Jaiat,ors
Entrainment for Use in Marine Piping Applications,
:Spe:cHI,cat1,cm for, Fl006 (01.07)
Environmental contro!/fate-ma.rine (sbiotloard)
Human for
F1166
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, FU98 (0U)7)
Environmental hydrogen embritt.lement
See Hydrogen embritUement
piles--specifications
"'"A v-''"''c" Pipe Piles, Specification for,
Epoxy-coated steel wire-specifications
Filled Epoxy-Coated Seven-Wire Prestressing Steel Strand, Speci-
Steel Wire, Epoxy-Coated, Specification for, A899 (01.03)
Epoxy resin pipe fittings-specifications
Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used for Ma-
Equilibrium heel angle
Experiment) to Detennine the Light Ship Displacement and
Equipment
Human Engineering for Marine Systems, Equipment, and
Facilities, Practice F1166 (01.07)
Human Systems Tnt,,nr,tirm Program Requirements for and
Marine Systems, and Facilities, Practice
F1337 (01.07)
Location and Instruction Symbols for Evacuation and Lifesaving
Equipment, Guide for, F1297 (01.07)
Equivalent
See
Equotip hardness
A956 (01.05)
ERW line pipe
See (ERW) steel pipe-
specifications
Escape routes
Escort vessels
F1878 (01.07)
Escutcheon nails
F1667 (01.08)
Esters
for, F2161 (01.08)
Etch structures
Detecting Detrimental Interrnetallic Phase in Duplex
A923
Susc:ep1tibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic
for, A262 (01.03)
lnterg:rarml<lr Attack in Ferritic Stain-
(01.03)
Evacuation
Evaporation calorimetry
See Calorimeter
Seamless and Carbon Steel Tubes with
Integral Fins, Specification for,
Condenser and Heat hxch<mgei
Specification for, A1012
Excavation site
High-Strength 'J"vv-'-""'"
H-Piles and Sheet
1802
Exfoliation corrosion
See Corrosion
Exogenous inclusion
See Inclusions-metals/alloys
Expanded-metal shipbuilding materials
F1071 (01.07)
Expanded-Metal Doors, Specification for, r1012 (01.07)
Metal, Expanded, Steel, Specification for, F1267 (0U)3)
Expansion
F1071 (01.07)
ExpaJude:d-IVletal Doors, Specification for, F1072 (0U}7)
Castings, Surface Acceptance Visual Examina-
tion, Practice for, A802/ A802M
Pipeline Expartsicm
Application, Specil:ic:ati(Jll
Exposure
Conducting Case on n,,Ju,,,...;,,,{j Practice for,
A896/A896M (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Process and Pre-
painted by the Coil-Coating Process Exterior Exposed
Building Products, Specification for, A 755/ A 755M (01.06)
Exterior doon;--specific:ati,ons
Door Fittings, for /Gas tight I Airtight, Weathertight,
F1073 (01.07)
Exterior exJrosure
See
Exterior profile
Exterior
w,-,1rPrt11 crht /Gastight I Airtight,
H"'" Doors, for Marine Use, Specification
External nv,dr)i!C:n
See embrittlement
External threaded fasteners
See Fasteners (metal)
steel
tion
clinching cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Extruded tee connections
Eyebolts
bolting materials
Alloy Steel Eyebolts, Specification for, (Ol.mO
Fabricated materials
(01.07)
Fasteners (metal)
Fabricated materials-specifications
Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc-Coated, for Field-Bolted
A761/A761M (01.06)
Spray Shields for Mechanical Joints, Specification for,
F1138 (01.07)
brick
Brick-specifications
Failure end point-marine applica1tio1ns
Human Engineering Design Marine Equipment, and
Facilities, Practice for, F1166
Human Systems Integration Program Requirements for
Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities, Practice
F1337 (01.07)
Falling steel baU test
and
Thermosetting Resin Pipe Systems to Be Used forMa
rine Applications, for, F1173 (01.07)
Farm-field fencing
Metallic-Coated, Steel-Woven Wire Fence Fabric, Specification
for, A116 (01.06)
Fastener locking effectiveness
pounds with Studs, Practice for, :Fl179 (01.07)
Fasteners
1803
for, F2832 (01.08)
F2833 (01.08)
Double-Twisted Hexagonal Mesh Gabions and Revet Mattresses
(Metallic-Coated Steel Wire or Metallic-Coated Steel Wire
With Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coating), Specification
for, A975 (01.06)
Load-Indicating Externally Threaded Fasteners, Specification for,
F2482 (01.08)
F1940 (01.08)
System-Based, Customer-Centered
ers, Guide for, F2688
Plan for Manufactur-
Zinc Thermo-Diffusion on Steel Fasteners,
and Other Products, Specificati(JrJ for,
(01.06)
Zinc Hot-Dip, Requirements for Ap,plication
Steel Bolts, Screws,
Specification for,
Fasteners
Sa
Sa Steel materials
Collated and Fasteners and Their Application Tools, Ter-
Determining the Mechanical P .. ,,,.., .,,t;""' of !e-xternallY
nally Threaded Fasteners, Direct Indica-
Deterrnining the Mechanical of and Inter-
and Rivets Test
for, F606M
Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties and Per-
formance Inspection, Practice for, F1470 (01.08)
pounds with Studs, Practice for, Fl179 (01.07)
Selection of Committee Fl6 Fastener Specifications, Guide
F1077 (01.08)
Fasteners (metal}-specifications
Fasteners (metal)-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
A183 (01.04)
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
F959M (01.08)
A761/A761M (01.06)
F1667 (01.08)
Hardened Steel Washers, Specification for, F436 (01.08)
Hardened Steel Washers (Metric), Specification for,
F436M (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts for General Use, Specification for,
F467 (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts for General Use (Metric), Specification for,
F467M (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
Specification for, F1136/F1136M (01.08)
Fatality/injury/illness/incident investigation
Basic Elements of Shipboard Occupational Health and Safety
Program, Guide for, F2039 (01.07)
Fatigue
Faucets
Faucets, Single and Double, Compression and Self-Closing Type,
Shipboard, Specification for, F1245 (01.07)
Feedwater heater tubes-specifications
A213/A213M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater
1804
Fences/fencing materials
Design and Construction of Chain Link Security Fencing, Guide
for, F2611 (01.06)
Fences for Above-Ground and In-ground Skate Park Facilities,
Guide for, F2698 (01.06)
F2000 (01.06)
Fences for Commercial and Public Outdoor Water Spray/Play
Areas, Guide for, F2699 (01.06)
Fences for Non-Residential Outdoor Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs,
and Spas, Guide for, F2409 (01.06)
Fences for Residential Outdoor Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs, and
Spas, Guide for, F1908 (01.06)
for Public, Con1Inercial, and Resi-
Installation of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Fence Systems,
Self-Closing/Self-Latching General-Purpose Gates, Guide for,
F2630 (01.06)
Forced Entry, Ballistic and Low Impact Resistance of
Fence Systems, Practice for, F2781 (01.06)
Welded Wire Mesh Fence Fabric (Metallic-Coated or Polymer
Coated) for Meshes of 6 in., Specification for,
F2453/F2453M (01.06)
Fences/fencing materials-specifications
Design, Fabrication, and Installation of Fences Constructed of
Wood and Related Materials, Specification for,
F537 (01.06)
for, A975 (01.06)
F1667 (01.08)
Expanded Metal Fence Systems for Security Purposes, Specifica-
tion for, F2548 (01.06)
for, F1184 (01.06)
F900 (01.06)
Metallic-Coated Steel Smooth High-Tensile Fence and Trellis
for, A116 (01.06)
Ornamental Fences Employing Steel Tubular Pickets, Specifica-
tion for, F2589 (01.06)
(01.06)
F654 (01.06)
Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought, Specification
for, A 702 (01.05)
Welded Wire Fabric Gabions and Gabion Mattresses (Metallic-
Coated or Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated), Specification
for, A974 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Poultry Fence Fabric (Hexagonal
and Straight Line), Specification for, A390 (01.06)
Fences/fencing materials (chain-link)
Sa Chain-link fence/fencing systems
Design and Construction of Chain Link Security Fencing, Guide
for, F2611 (01.06)
Fences/fencing materials (mesh)
F2453/F2453M (01.06)
Coated) with Variable Mesh Patterns or Meshes Greater than
6 in., Specification for, F2919/F2919M (01.06)
Ferric chloride corrosion test
A923 (01.03)
Ferric sulfate-sulfuric acid test
Ferrite content
Steel Casting, Austenitic Alloy, Estimating Ferrite Content
Thereof, Practice for, A800/A800M (01.02)
Ferritic iron castings
Ferri tic Ductile Iron Castings Suitable for Low-Temperature Ser-
Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings, Specification for,
A47/A47M (01.02)
Ferritic stainless steel
Sa Austenitic stainless steel
Sa Martensitic stainless steel
A923 (01.03)
Ferritic stainless steel-specifications
Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,
A582/A582M (01.03)
Free-Machining Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods, Specifica-
tion for, A581/A581M (01.03)
A988/A988M (01.01)
Stainless Steel Wire, Specification for, A580/A580M (01.03)
Ferritic steel
See Austenitic steel
Ferritic steel castings-specifications
Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Specification
for, A351/A351M (01.02)
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for
1805
Ferritic steel tube-specifications
Pressure-Containing Parts, Specification for,
A995/A995M (01.02)
Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings Suitable for Low-Temperature Ser-
A47/A47M (01.02)
A356/A356M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for Low-Temperature Service, Specification
for, A352/A352M (01.02)
and Other Applications, for Low-Temperature Service,
Ferritic steel forgings-specifications
Ferritic steel pipe-specifications
A369/A369M (01.01)
Centrifugally Cast Ferri tic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Centrifugally Cast Ferri tic/ Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe for Cor-
A872/ A872M (01.02)
A928/A928M (01.01)
Seamless Ferri tic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service,
Welded Ferritic-Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Specification for,
A1053/A1053M (01.01)
Wrought Ferri tic, Ferri tic/ Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings, Specification for,
A815/A815M (01.01)
Ferritic steel tube-specifications
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
A213/A213M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel
A268/A268M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic, Austenitic and Duplex Alloy Steel
Condenser and Heat Exchanger Tubes With Integral Fins,
Ferroalloys
Ferroalloys
Ferroalloys and Other Alloying Materials, General Requirements,
Sizes of Ferroalloys and Alloy Additives, Specification for,
A835/A835M (01.02)
ogy Relating to, A941 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Ferro boron
Ferrochrome-silicon
Ferrochrome-Silicon, Specification for, A482/A482M (01.02)
.Ferrochromium
Ferrochromium, Specification for, A101 (01.02)
Ferrocoiumbium
for, A99 (01.02)
Ferron1angan1ese:-Sthccm, Specification for, A 701/ A 701M (01.02)
Ferromolybdenum
Fenomolybdenum, Specification for, A132 (01.02)
Ferrosilicon
Ferrosilicon, Specification for, AlOO (01.02)
Ferro titanium
Ferrotitanium, Specification for, A324 (01.02)
Ferrotungsten
Ferrotungsten, Specification for, A144 (01.02)
Ferrous alloys (UNS) numbering system
Nmmb1enr1g Metals and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System
Practice for, E527 (01.01)
castings
Ferrous inch balls
Balls, Fenous and Nonferrous for Use in Bearings,
Bearing Applications, Specification for,
(01.08)
Evaluating M::tchjlflJrtg p,erf<)mtan<;e of Fenous Metals Using an
Automatic Machine, Test Method for,
E618 (01.05)
Hot Tin and Hot Tin/Lead Dip on Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Met-
als, for, A1074 (01.06)
Selection Committee Fl6 Fastener Specifications, Guide for,
F1077 (01.08)
for, A323 (01.02)
Ferrocl1rmne-Slhcon. Speciti1:::ati(Jn for, A482/A482M (01.02)
for, A101
for, A550
for, A99
Ferrornolvbcienum. Specification for, A132 (01.02)
for, AlOO (01.02)
Specifit;ati<Jn for, A324 (01.02)
for, A102 (01.02)
and Alloy Additives, Specification for,
(01.02)
Ferrovanadium
A102 (01.02)
'-"'aw"'"'' and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Systems, Practice for, A380 (01.03)
Fiberboard thermal insulation
See Block and board thermal insulation
Fiberglass-specifications
F2087 (01.07)
Fiberglass-reinforced plastics (FRP)
Fiber optic position switch
Fiber optic pressure transducer
Fiber-Optic, Specification for, F2070 (0U)7)
Fiber-reinforced concrete
See Concrete reinforcement-specifications
Fibre rope
Warping Heads, Rope Handling (Gypsy .Head, Capstan Head),
Fibrous glass (specifications)
Sound-Absorbing Glass, Perforated Fibrous Glass
Cloth Faced, for, F2154 (01.07)
Field fabrication
See Fabricated materials-specifications
communication/electrical cables
.._,.,.L.-, Steel Strand for Messenger Support of Figure 8
Cable, Specification for, A640 (01.06)
Filiform corrosion resistance
See Corrosion
Filled epoxy-coated steel wire
Sa Epoxy-coated steel wire--specifications
Filler metals
Ferri tic/ Austenitic (Duplex) Stainless Steel Pipe Electric Fusion
A928/A928M (01.01)
Filters/filter applications
Filters in Air or Nitrogen Systems, Specification for,
F1791 (01.07)
Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate
lm,nrovecl Fojrffi<lbility, Specification for,
:Fine nails
F1667 (01.08)
li'ine wire
See Steel wire
Driven Nails, Spikes, and Staples, Specification for,
1806
li'1667 (01.08)
nails
F1667 (Ot.mn
systems-marine applications
for Elevated for Non-Pressure
Specification A319 (01.02)
Fireclay brid'
F1312 (01.07)
Fire fighting systems-marine applications
F1333 (01.07)
De1terrnining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Insu-
lated Bulkheads and Decks, Constructed of Steel,
Test Methods for, F2133
Fire Hose Nozzles, Specification for,
Installation Procedures of Vinyl Deck
Plates in Electrical and Electronic Spaces,
1?1331
Tank Vent Flame Arresters, Specification for,
Fire
(01.07)
''"-._, ... ,.,...,._. (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless for Fire Protection Use, Specitkation
for, (01.01)
Fireman's outfit locker
Steel Gear Stowage Locker, Specification for,
Fire-test response
De:terrnining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Insu-
lated Bulkheads and Decks, Constructed of Steel,
.Flanges/fittings/valves/parts
Sa Steel fittings--specifications
Steel Fittings for and
Corrosive Service, Specification for, (01.01)
Fixed foam systems
Shipboard Foam Firefighting Systems, Test Method for,
F1994 (01.07)
Flame arresters
Tank Vent Flame Arresters, Specification for, (01.07)
:Flame detectors
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, FU98 (01.07)
and
Speci-
for,
High-Temperature
rable to Austenitic
A453/ A453M (01.01)
F1020 (01.07)
Non-Metallic Expansion Joints, Specification for, F1123 (01.07)
Flush hinged door
Valve Label Plates, Specification for, F992 (01.07)
Valve Locking Devices, Specification for, F993 (01.07)
Flashlights
Flashlights on Vessels, Specification for, F1014 (01.07)
Flat bar steel
See AHoy steel bars-specifications
Flat-link chain
Flat plate calorimeter
See Calorimeter
Flat-rolled electrical steel
Fiat-rolled steel
Fiat steel wire
A805/ A805M (01.03)
.Flattening test
A135/A135M (01.01)
Flat top crown staples
F1667 (01.08)
Flatness-metallic materials/applications
Me:astirin:g Flatness Characteristics of Steel Sheet Products, Prac-
tice A1030/A1030M (01.06)
Fleet management system (FMS) network
for; 1;'1756 (01.07)
Flexibility
Flexible mechanical couplings
F1548 (01.07)
Flexible transition couplings
Specification for, Cl173 (01.02)
Expanded, Steel, Specification for, F1267 (01.03)
J-i'l(mrimU'ti.Eoor covering systems-specifications
Expanded, Steel, Specification for, F1267 (01.03)
Flooring nails
:F1667 (01.08)
Floor
Rolled steel-specifications
1807
"Fluid conditioner
Fluid Conditioner
Specification for,
Fluid lubricants
in Piping Applications Above O"F,
(01.07)
Sa Lubricants (fluid)
Determimn1g the Tribological Behavior and the Relative Lifetime
of a Lubricant using the Spiral Orbit Tribometer, Test
Fluorescent liquid penetrant testing
Flush decks
F987 (01.07)
Flush hinged door
Sa Shipbuilding steel materials (doors)
Doors, Furniture, Marine, Specification for, F782 (01.07)
Flux leak testing
Flux leak testing
See Leak testing
Flux voltage
See Voltage
FMS architecture
for, F1756 (01.07)
Foam-filled fenders
Foam firefighting systems
Shipboard Fixed Foam Firefighting Systems, Test Method for,
F1994 (01.07)
Foam station cabinets
for, F1333 (01.07)
Food service equipment
Forced entry
Testing Forced Entry, Ballistic and Low Impact Resistance of
Security Fence Systems, Practice for, F2781 (01.06)
Forced entry resistance
Forgings
A275/A275M (01.05)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Stainless Steel Forgings, Ferri tic/ Austenitic (Duplex), for Pressure
Vessels and Related Components, Specification for,
A1049/A1049M (01.05)
A388/A388M (01.05)
Forgings-specifications
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and Similar Applications, Speci-
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and
Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service, Specification
for, A638/A638M (01.03)
A891/A891M (01.05)
F1145 (01.07)
Forgings (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel forgings-specifications
Forgings (ball/roller bearings)
A295/A295M (01.05)
Forgings (carbon steel)
See Carbon steel forgings-specifications
Forgings (corrugating paper machinery)
Forged Steel Rolls Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery, Speci-
Forgings (stainless steel)
See Stainless steel forgings-specifications
Forgings (turbine rotors/disks/shafts)
A891/A891M (01.05)
Vacuum-Treated Steel Forgings for Generator Rotors, Specifica-
tion for, A469/A469M (01.05)
Forgings (zinc-coated (galvanized))
Formability (in steel specifications)
See Improved formability steel
Formability testing
Formboard-structural insulating
Form of product specifications
Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys, Guide for,
A994 (01.01)
l<'oundation piles
See Piles
Ji,racture appearance transition temperature (FATT)
Sa Temperature tests
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
"Framework
Free-machining steel-specifications
A582/ A582M (01.03)
tion for, A581/ A581M (01.03)
Fueling hose reels
1808
Manually Operated Fueling Hose Reels, Specification for,
F1347 (01.07)
Fuel oils (marine applications)
F1338 (01.07)
Fuel oils (marine applications)-specifications
for, F1718 (01.07)
Full complement bearing
Full-scale testing
See Interlaboratory testing
Furnace butt-welded steel pipe
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Furnace-Butt-Welded, Specification for,
A1037/A1037M (01.01)
Furnace calibration
Determining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Insu-
Furnaces
Conducting Temperature Uniformity Surveys of Furnaces Used to
Heat Treat Steel Products, Test Method for,
A991/A991M (01.03)
Furnaces-specifications
F1312 (01.07)
for, F1097 (01.07)
Furniture-marine applications
F822 (01.07)
Desk, Log, Marine, Steel, with Cabinet, Specification for,
F823 (01.07)
Drawers, Furniture, Marine, Steel, Specification for,
F825 (01.07)
Tops, Furniture, Marine, Steel, Specification for, F826 (01.07)
Fusion
Fusion-bonded epoxy-coated steel materials
Fusion Bonded Epoxy-Coated Pipe Piles, Specification for,
A972/A972M (01.01)
Piling, Specification for, A950/ A950M (01.04)
Fusion-hydrochloric acid dehydration method
A518/A518M (01.02)
Fusion-welded materials/applications-specifications
A739 (01.05)
tion for, A573/ A573M (01.04)
G
Gabion structures-specifications
for, A975 (01.06)
for, A974 (01.06)
Gages-ships
Galvanized materials/structures/surfaces
Sa Hot-dip (galvanized) coatings
A896/A896M (01.06)
A1060/A1060M (01.04)
Galvanized materials/structures/surfaces-specifications
Sa Hot-dip (galvanized) coatings
A964/A964M (01.06)
Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fab-
ric), Specification for, A740 (01.06)
Gaskets-specifications
Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products,
A641/A641M (01.06)
Galvanized steel bolts
See Steel bolting materials-specifications
Galvanized steel tubular pickets
Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets,
Galvannealed steel sheet-specifications
Sa Steel sheet-specifications
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
A653/A653M (01.06)
Garbage
Gas atomized powder
1809
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
Gas delivery/distribution systems-specifications
for, F1985 (01.07)
Gaseous environments
Hand-Operated, Globe-Style Valves for Gas (Except Oxygen Gas)
and Hydraulic Systems, Specification for, F1794 (01.07)
Gaseous oxygen systems/service
Sa Oxygen service/systems
Special Requirements for Valves Used in Gaseous Oxygen Ser-
vice, Specification for, F1792 (01.07)
Gases
Gas-filled pressure vessels
See Pressure vessel steel
Gasketed mechanical couplings (GMC)
F1548 (01.07)
Gaskets
Gaskets for Use in Connection with Hub and Spigot Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary Drain, Waste, Vent, and
Storm Piping Applications, Test Method for, C1563 (01.02)
Gaskets-specifications
F1020 (01.07)
Mechanical Couplings Using Thermoplastic Elastomeric (TPE)
Gaskets for Joining Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer,
for, C564 (01.02)
Thermoplastic Elastomeric (TPE) Gasket Materials for Drain,
Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary and Storm Plumb-
ing Systems, Specification for, C1440 (01.02)
Gasoline engines
Gasoline engines
A983/A983M (01.05)
Gas pressure systems/applications-specifications
A135/A135M (01.01)
for, F15H (01.07)
Ferritic Steel Butt-Welding Fittings,
Specth,:atHJn for, A860/ A860M (01.01)
Gas seals
JV!echanical Seals for Shipboard Putnp Specification
for, F1511 (01.07)
doors
Shipbuilding steel
Door Fittings, for Watertight We:athtertight,
and Non-Tight Doors, for
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastight/ Airtight, Individually Dogged, for Ma-
rine Use, Speciflcation for, F1068 (01.07)
Doors, Watertight, Gastight/Airtight and Weathertight, Individu-
(01.07)
Gas tightness
Contained, Speciflcation for, F1075 (01.07)
Gas turbine
See tTeneraJ:or materials-turbine
Gates
Automated Vehicular Gate Construction, Specification for,
F2200
Gear actuator butterfly valves
Envelope Dimensions for Butterfly Valves-NPS 2 to 24, Specifi-
cation for, Fl098 (01.07)
Gear lubricants
Gear oils
See oils
for Reduction Gears,
for Pinions, Gears and Shafts
for,
General requirements-iron
Common for Iron
Use, Specification for, A834
General
Ke,qmrernerlts, for General
(01.02)
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-
Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip, Specification for,
A480/A480M (01.03)
A6/A6M (01.04)
Pipe, Specification for, A530/A530M (OUH)
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forg-
ings, Specification for, A484/ A484M (01.03)
Generai Requirements for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods,
General for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels,
Speciti(;ati(m for, A20/A20M (01.04)
Require1ments for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,
and Steel, Specification for,
A957/A957M (01.02)
Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Specification for, A703/A703M (01.02)
A788/A788M (01.05)
Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for Pressure-
Containing Parts, Specification for, A985/ A985M (01.02)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy.
Strength with Formability, General
Requirements for, for, A635/A635M (01.03)
Hot-Rolled and General Requirements for,
Steel, Strip, Carbon and Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled,
General for,
Generator materials
Alloy Steel for Gen-
era tors, for, n., ..
and Generators, Specification for, :F1134 (01.07)
Mechanical of Steel Products, Test Methods and Defini-
tions for. (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Generator materials-turbine
Carbon and Steel
for Turbine Ue.nerators
Hardening Iron Base SUJJen1Jlo,v
Rotor Disks and Wheels,
A891/A891M (01.05)
Steel Carbon, Low
Steam Turbines,
Apflllczttlorts, SjJecti1cat1on for, A356/A356M (01.02)
fication
HPtrr,,llrnr" and Other
for, nlo.ll"""'"'' n.A"'"'-".''"-
Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe, Specifi-
1810
Steel Compressor and Turbine Airfoils,
(01.05)
Ultrasonic Examination of Turbine-Generator Steel Retaining
Rings, Practice for, A531/A531M (01.05)
Vacuum-Treated Steel for Turbine Rotor Disks
and Wheels, (01.05)
Generator materials-turbine rotors and shafts
Heat Stability of Steam Turbine Shafts and Rotor Forgings,
Forgings, Practice for, A418/A418M
Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Rotors and Shafts, Specification for, (01.05)
tion for, A469/A469M (01.05)
Gimball ,joint
Circular Bellows
plications, Specification
Expansion Joints for Piping Ap-
Fl120 (01.07)
Girder
Carbon Steel Girder Rails of
Carbon Steel Tee Rails, Sp,ecitic:ati<)n for,
Glass ceramics
Types,
(01.04)
See Ceramic materials/applications-specifications
Glass-fiber-reinforced (GRP) plastics
Installation Procedures of Deck
Plates in Electrical and
F1331 (01.07)
Glass-fiber-reinforced ( G RP) phltsti,cs--s>ecUications
Pultruded Guard,
(01.07)
vessels
Pressure Plates, Carbon Steel, Titm1ium
Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings, Specific:ati<m
A562/A562M (01.04)
Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel
and Pressure Vessel Service, Sp1ecific;1ti<m
A836/A836M (OUH)
Glass molds
for Elevated Temperatures for Non-Pressure
Specification for, A319 {01.02)
Glass transition
See
Globe style control valves
Pnemnauc-.Ur,er:ate,d. Globe-Style, Control Valves, Specification
for,
valves
Sa Valves
Valves for Water Systems, Shipboard, Specifi-
(0U)7)
Gloss
Performance of
and
Glued laminated timber 1 ouna.,,,.. 1
Driven Fasteners: Nails,
F1667 (01.08)
and Staples, Specification for,
Gold alloy-electrical contact materials
See resistance/resistivity
Gongs
Gong, F957 (01.07)
100
At1tacl1ment Links, Specification
(01.05)
Steel Chain, Specification
(01.05)
Attachment Links, Specification
A952/A952M (01.05)
Grade 80 Steel Specification for,
Components and
Components and
1811
Grooved-type mechanical couplings
Grain pits
Grain size
Graphite
Graphite-specifications
A842 (01.02)
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
Packing Material, Graphitic, Cormgated Ribbon or Textured
F2168 (01.07)
iron castings
Co,mt>acted Graphite Iron Castings, Specification for,
(01.02)
Grate bars
Gravity flow applications
sewer pipe-specifications
Sewer pipe (thermoplastic )-specifications
for, A888 (01.02)
Shielded Transition Couplings Using Flexible Poly Vinyl Chlo-
ride (PVC) Gaskets to Connect Dissimilar DWV Pipe and
Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary and Storn1 Plumb-
Gray iron castings-specifications
Austenitic Gray Iron Castings, Specification for, A436 (01.02)
Automotive Gray Iron Castings, Specification for, Al59 (01.02)
Gray Iron Castings, Specification for, A48/ A48M (01.02)
Iron Castings for Elevated Temperatures for Non-Pressure
ContainiiU! Parts, Specification for, A319 (01.02)
for Pressure-Containing Parts for Tempera-
Specification for,
Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Speci-
l;;;t<>;t; .. ,,Jh, Cast Permanent Mold Gray Iron Castings, Specification
for, (01.02)
Grease
Sa Lubricating grease
'-'"''Ul'llll",, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Eq1uipJmeJ1t, and Systems, Practice for, A380 (01.03)
Guide for, F2489 (01.08)
Grooved-type mechanical couplings
Sa Couplings--specifications
F1548 (01.07)
Performance of Gasketed Mechanical for Use in Pip-
ing Applications, Specification for, (01.07)
Gross decarburization
Gross decarburization
nally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets (Metric',, Test
Ground anchors
Sa Anchors/anchorage systems
A981/A981M (01.04)
Ground coat enamels
A424/A424M (01.03)
Grounding
Ground resistance
F1207M (01.07)
Ground wire strand
Groupings
A6/A6M (01.04)
Guardrails/guardrail systems-specifications
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire Rope and Fittings for Highway
Guardrail, Specification for, A 741 (01.06)
Gutter spikes
F1667 (01.08)
Guys (steel wire strand for)
Gypsum wallboard nails
F1667 (01.08)
Gypsy head drive units
H
Hadfield austenitic manganese steel castings
Steel Castings, Austenitic Manganese, Specification for,
A128/A128M (01.02)
Hand grab
Staple, Handgrab, Handle, and Stirrup Rung, Specification for,
F783 (01.07)
Handles
F783 (01.07)
Hand-operated valves
Handrail systems
Sa Guardrails/guardrail systems-specifications
Square Railing Systems, Specification for, F1092 (01.07)
Hangers (for ship piping)
F708 (01.07)
Hardboard
Hardenability (steel)
A255 (01.05)
Hardenability (steel)-specifications
A311/A311M (01.05)
A485 (01.05)
Hardened steel washers
F436M (01.08)
Hardness (indentation)-metallic materials
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Hardness tests
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Portable Hardness Testing by the Ultrasonic Contact Impedance
Method, Test Method for, A1038 (01.05)
Hardness tests-Brinell
See Brinell hardness
Hardness tests-metals
See Metallic hardness
Hardness tests-Rockwell
1812
See Rockwell hardness
Hardware
Hardware Implementation for Computerized Systems, Guide for,
F2218 (01.07)
Hardware cloth
Hardware (iron/steel)
See Iron products (general)
Harmonized stainless steel compositions
A1040 (01.05)
Hatch covers
F783 (01.07)
Hazard assessment/potential-health
See Health hazards
Hazard assessment/potential-marine systems
F1337 (01.07)
Hazardous materials (environmental)
Thermal Rating and Installation of Internal Combustion Engine
Packages for use in Hazardous Locations in Marine Applica-
tions, Practice for, F2876 (01.07)
Hazardous waste materials
Shipboard Generated Waste Management Audits, Guide for,
F1799 (01.07)
Head cap screws
Sa Screws-specifications
A574 (01.08)
A57 4M (01.08)
Stainless Steel Socket Head Cap Screws, Specification for,
F837 (01.08)
Stainless Steel Socket Head Cap Screws Metric, Specification for,
F837M (01.08)
Headed steel reinforcing bars
A970/A970M (01.04)
Health hazards
F1071 (01.07)
Health knowledge/information systems
Heat detectors
Heat exchanger materials/applications-steel tubes
See Condenser and heat exchanger systems-steel
Heat flux
Heating systems
Heating tests-metals
Heat resisting alloys
Sa Chromium-nickel-iron alloys
A1002 (01.02)
Heat-resisting castings
A1002 (01.02)
Heat-resisting stainless steel alloys
Sa Stainless steel
A582/ A582M (01.03)
Heat-shrinkable cable entry seals
:F1837M (01.07)
Heat stability
Heat transfer systems
See Condenser and heat exchanger systems
1813
Hexagonal poultry fence fabric
Heat-treated carbon steel fittings
See Steel fittings-specifications
Heat-treated steel
A991/A991M (01.03)
Heat-treated steel-specifications
Specification for, A5211 AS 21M (01.05)
Heat-treated steel bolts
See Steel bolting materials
Heat-treated steel sheet and strip
Screws, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 1 1 70 MPa Minimum Tensile
Heavy-duty shielded couplings-specifications
Heavy steel materials/applications
for, A1001 (01.02)
A388/A388M (01.05)
Heavy-thickness steel coils-specifications
A632 (01.01)
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Alloy, Drawing
Steel and Structural Steel, Hot-Rolled, Specification for,
A1031/A1031M (01.03)
A1018/A1018M (01.03)
Heavy-walled steel castings
A356/A356M (01.02)
Helical compression springs
Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated, Specification for,
A125 (01.05)
Helical-seam double submerged-arc welded pipe
A1005/A1005M (01.01)
Helical security coils
Installation of Barbed Tape, Practice for, < ~ 9 (01.06)
Helical steel wire strand
Sa Steel wire strand-specifications
Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel Wire Structural Strand,
Hermetic-type motor compressor
Hexagonal poultry fence fabric
Hexagon-head bolts
Hexagon-head bolts
Hexagon socket screw
Sa Steel screws-specifications
A574 (01.08)
A574M (01.08)
Hex cap screws/studs
for, F593 (01.08)
Stainless Steel and Nickel Alloy Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs, for Heat Resistance and High Temperature Applica-
Hierarchy
Availability, and Maintainability (RAM) Performance
Exchange, Classification for, F2446 (01.07)
High-carbon steel -.:m>dutcts
Sa Carbon
A295/A295M (01.05)
High-grade zinc
See Zinc-specifications
High-humidity exposure tests
See Humidity
High magnetic saturation alloys
See Magnetic materials/applications-specifications
High pressure service applications-specifications
Metal-Arc-Welded Steel Pipe for Use With High-Pressure Trans-
mission Systems, Specification for, A381 (01.01)
Steel Forgings, for Pressure and High Temperature
Parts, Specification A965/A965M (01.05)
High security areas
High-silicon cast iron
Corrosion-Resistant Iron Castings, Specification for,
A518/A518M
High-silicon iron piJ>e/lfittin$!S
Sa Iron
A86ll (01.02)
High speed dilatometry techniques
Quantitative Measurement and Re:portir1g of Hypoeutectoid Car-
High
bon and Steel Transformations, Practice
for, A1033
A600 (01.05)
1 HlWauov 1 steel-specifications
l_,uw-J-\.tHJv Structural Steel Plate Produced
hermo>-Mectmmtcal Process (TMCP),
tion for, A1066/Al066M (01.04)
Sheet, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Structural, and
High-Strength Low-Alloy, Produced Casting
Process, Specification for, (01.03)
High-strength steel castings--specifications
High Steel Castings in Heavy Sections, Specification
for, (01.02)
High-strength structural steel-specifications
A769/A769M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and
Requirements for, Specification for, A635/A635M
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum
StrcngL, (Metric), Specification for, A325lVl (01.08)
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten-
sile Strength, Specification for, (01.08)
Structural Steel for Ships, Specification for,
A131/A131M (01.04)
Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for Prestressing Concrete,
High-temperature brick
F1312 (01.07)
High-temperature service applications
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
High-temperature service applications-nickel (specifications)
High-temperature service applications-steel bars
Common Requirements for Bolting Intended for Use at
Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep Range, ;)DecJnc,a-
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
A582/A582M (01.03)
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-1-ian1enmg
Bars and
Martensitic Stainless
Specification for,
Stainless Steel Bars and in and Other
Pressure Vessels, for, A479/A479M (01.03)
High-temJ)eratuue service applications-steel bolting applications
1814
High
High-Temperature
rable to Austenitic
with Expansion Coefficients Compa-
Steels, Specification for,
(01.01)
service applications--steel
L"''""'""- Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Pa1ts,
A351/ A351M (01.02)
A216/A216M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Chromium-Nickel-Iron Alloy (25-12 Class), for
A447/A447M (01.02)
Containing Parts, Suitable for Service,
Specification for, A217/A217M
Stock High-
Steel Forgings, Temperature
Parts, Specification
Hi:gh-ternp,er2thrre service applications-steel pipe
and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for High-
A691/A691M (OUH)
A369/A369M (01.01)
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for Ser-
vice, Specification for, A660/ A660M
Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe
Service, Specification for, A426/ A426M
Common Requirements for Wrought Steel
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Service, Speci-
fication for, A106/A106M
Seamless Ferritic Service,
for, rt..J'J;:li'rt..J..J..JJ.'I'Jl
:-.n1mv-t<r)nrteo Seamless Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes, Specifi-
Welded Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or
Temp,ercttm:e Service, Specification for,
(01.01)
Welded and Seamless I F1JIHvlUv<UJ. National
Standard], Material) (01.01)
Welded
, "''H'-''"""' National
r'l .:')JJ PJ"' lV.tl''>'ll>.::l (Related Mate
service appHcaltimrns--steel
Stainless
tion for, (01.03)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
lron-<.-:ht"OIIliUJm-1\lic:kel Tubing for
Aj:tphcation at High Temperatures, for,
(01.02)
Horizontal shear
heater"Tubes, Specification for, A209/A209M (01.01)
A511/A511M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel Tubes with
Integral Fins, for, A498
Seamless and Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Su]Jerlheater,
Condenser Tubes, Specification for,
fence wire
Hi:gin111a:v construction-specifications
Pavement surfaces-specifications
for, A116 (01.06)
Hot-dip processed coatings
Steel Sheet, Complex Phase (CP), Dual Phase (DP) and Transfor-
mation Induced Plasticity (TRIP), Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process, Specification for, A1079 (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Twin-Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated

Hot-Dip Process, Specification for,
for, A1057/A1057M (01.06)
Weight and Composition of Coating on Terne Sheet
Triple-Spot Test, Test Method for, A309
Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application
and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers,
Threaded Fasteners, Specification for,
High-yield-strength steel plate
Sa Alloy steel plate-specifications
High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Alloy Steel Plate,
Suitable for Welding, Specification
A514/A514M (01.04)
Hinged doors (for ships)
Sa Shipbuilding steel materials (doors)
expansion joint
Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping Ap-
plications, Specification for, FU20 (01.07)
1815
Hinged manhole cover assembly
Sa Manhole materials/applications-specifications
Manhole Cover Assembly, Bolted, Semi-Flush, and Wa-
tertight, Hinged, Specification for, F1144
cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Horizontal impact testing
See Impact testing
Horizontal shear
See Shear testing
Horizontal sliding doors
Horizontal sliding doors
Fl196 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07) .
Horizontal turbines
See Generator materials-turbine
Horn cleats
Hose (air)
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Hose reels
F1347 (01.07)
Hose shank end (marine use)
tion for, F1122 (01.07)
Hot-dip (galvanized) coatings
A896/A896M (01.06)
Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip), Practice for,
A385/A385M (01.06)
Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings, Practice for, A 780/ A 780M (01.06)
A384/A384M (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Aluminum--Magnesium Alloy-Coated by the
Hot-dip (galvanized) coatings-specifications
A653/A653M (01.06)
Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, Specifica-
tion for, A153/A153M (01.06)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,
A392 (01.06)
Hot-dip processed coatings-specifications
A788/A788M (01.05)
cation for, A463/ A463M (01.06)
1816
A653/A653M (01.06)
Hotels
Hot forging
See Forgings
See Steel forgings
Hot-formed seamless/welded steel tubing-specifications
ing, Specification for, A501 (01.01)
Hot melts
See Wax coatings-specifications
Hot-rolled carbon steel
Steel, Sheet, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Structural, and
Hot-rolled stainless steel bars-specifications
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes, Specification for, A276 (01.03)
Hot-rolled steel sheet/strip-specifications
A659/A659M (01.03)
A632 (01.01)
A1031/A1031M (01.03)
for, A1011/A1011M (01.03)
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
General Requirements for, Specificatim for,
A749/A749M (01.03)
Hot tubs
Hot wrought steel-specifications
Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought, Specification
for, A 702 (01.05)
Hot wrought steel bars-specifications
ings, Specification for, A484/A484M (01.03)
A 739 (01.05)
A322 (01.05)
A696 (01.05)
for, A576 (01.05)
for, A575 (01.05)
Steel Bars, Microalloy, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
quent Hot Forging, Specification for, A921/A921M (01.05)
A125 (01.05)
Household hazardous waste (HHW) programs
See Hazardous waste materials
H-piles
A690/ A690M (01.04)
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel-specifications
Sa Structural steel (SS) plate-specifications
A690/A690M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
A871/A871M (01.04)
A656/ A656M (01.04)
1817
Hubless cast iron soil pipe/fittings-specifications
A653/A653M (01.06)
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel bars-specifications
A 709/ A 709M (01.04)
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel pipe-specifications
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel plate-specifications
High-Strength Low-Alloy Stmctural Steel Plate with Low Carbon
High-Strength Low-Alloy Stmctural Steel, up to 50 ksi 345 MPa
Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Stmctural Steel Plates,
A 734/ A 734M (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel sheet/strip-specifications
A1018/A1018M (01.03)
for, A1011/A1011M (01.03)
tion for, A980/A980M (01.03)
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
A749/A749M (01.03)
HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel sheet/tube-specifications
Hub
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Sa Cast iron soil pipe/fittings-specifications
for, A888 (01.02)
Hulls
Anodes, Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, .F1182 (01.07)
Determining and Reporting the Betthing Energy and Reaction of
Establishing Shipbuilding Quality Requirements for Hull Struc-
ture, Outfitting, and Coatings, Practice for, F'2016 (01.07)
1<'1455 (01.07)
Hulls-specifications
Humidity
Sa Weathering
HVAC (heating/ventilation/air conditioning) systems
Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joint for HVAC Pip-
Applications, Specification for, F2934 (01.07)
Shapes; Identification and Description of Design
R'[].rlr,,. .. lir door control
Systems, Specification for,
Hydraulic fluids/oils
Hydraulic systems
Hand-Operated, Globe-Style Valves for Gas Oxygen Gas)
and Hydraulic Systems, (01.07)
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Hydraulic System
Service, Specification for, f'li).t..tao..t.rn (01.01)
Hydraulic turbines
Hydr:mlic valve operators
of Valve Operators, Practice for, F1030 (01.07)
Hydrobromic acid-bromine stripping
and of Coating on Terne Sheet by the
Test Method for, A309 (01.06)
Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Insu-
Hulkhea<is and Decks, Constructed of Steel,
F2133 (01.07)
(01.08)
for Use on A490 Structural Bolts Relative to
1-tu,,lrr.ne>n Em,brittletnerlt, Test Method for, F2660 (01.08)
Embrittlement of Galvanized
Products and Procedure Detecting Em-
Hydrogen gas
for, AlOOl (01.02)
Hydrostatic pressure test
Hydrostatic testing
A135/A135M (01.01)
Entrainment Separators for Use in Marine Piping Applications,
Specification for, Fl006 (01.07)
Applications, Specification for, F1476 (01.07)
Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service,
Steam Traps and Drains, Specification for, Fl139 (01.07)
steel phase transformations
Measurement and Reporting of Hypoeutectoid Car-
for, A1033 (01.03)
Ice-p6int reference baths
See Thermocouples
IHE (internal hydrogen embrittlement)
Sa Hydrogen embrittlement (HE)
F1940 (01.08)
Illumination-marine systems/applications
Human Systems Integration Program Requirements for and
Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities, Practice
F1337 (01.07)
Immersion-ultrasonic
1818
Detection of Inclusions in Bearing Quality Steel by the
Ultrasonic Practice for, E588 (01.05)
resistance
Testing of Steel Products, Test Methods and Defini--
tions for, A370 (OUH, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Therr:om;etting Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used forMa-
Appuc:atH)ns, Specification for, F1173 (01.07)
Test Methods for,
Test Methods for,
Ma-
A656/A656M (01.04)
A1018/A1018M (01.03)
proved and Ultra-High Strength, Specification
for, (01.03)
Steel, and l-tJ!['I1-:'luenllm. Low-Alloy,
LOiiO-KCI!!ea. General for,
Specification for,
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
Impulse
Performance of Piping and
tings, Specification for,
Inch series
Mechanically Attached Fit-
(01.07)
Incinerationlincinerators
Inclination test
Contained, Specification for, (01.07)
Inclined impact tester
See Impact testing
Inclining experiment
Inclusions
Sa Ultrasonic testing
lndusions-metals/aUoys
Detection of Large Inclusions in
Ultrasonic Method, Practice for,
Incremental step load
F1940 (01.08)
Indentation
Steel Strand, Indented, Seven-Wire Stress-Relieved for Pre-
stressed Concrete, Specification for, A886/A886M (01.04)
Indentation hardness (of metallic materials)
See Hardness (indentation)-metaUk materials
Indexing
A377 (01.02)
Cc,myJressilole-Wasl1er-'l)'pe Direct Tension Indicators for Use
Indirect
See
Induction furnace
Cast Tool Steel, Specification for, A597 (0Ul5)
Industrial chemicals-specifications
See Chemicals-specifications
Industrial fencing
Inspection
Specifying Chain Link Fence, Guide for, F'1553 (01.06)
Industrial fencing-specifications
for, F1184 (01.06)
Industrial forgings-specifications
Sa Carbon steel forgings-specifications
Industrial metals/alloys
A896/A896M (01.06)
Industrial metals/alloys-specifications
tion for, A909/A909M (01.05)
Industrial shipping containers
specifications
Information storage and retrieval
F1337 (01.07)
Informationlsystems
See Health knowledge/information systems
Infrared (IR) analysis
Ingot molds
Inhibited mineral oils
See Mineral oils
Inner ring
Annular Ball Bearings for Instruments and Precision Rotating
Bearing, Roller, Needle: Assembly (Thick Outer Race), Specifica-
tion for, F2430 (01.08)
Bearing, Inner: For Needle Roller Bearing with Thick Outer
Ring, Bearing, Inner: for Needle Roller Bearing With Drawn
Outer Ring, Specification for, F2163 (01.08)
Inorganic coatings-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
Zinc/ Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners,
In-plane shear properties/testing
See Shear testing
lln-pn>cei'iS inspection
Insert
1819
Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties and Per-
See pipe/tubing/fittings-specifications
Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties and Per-
Inspection
A903/A903M (01.02)
Inspection-marine vessels
F1130 (01.07)
Installation-fences
F969 (01.06)
F537 (01.06)
Installation of Chain-Link Fence, Practice for, F567 (01.06)
Installation-marine applications
F1331 (01.07)
F987 (01.07)
Installation-security materials/applications
Installation-underground (water supply systems)
See Underground installation-water supply/distribution
systems
Installed exterior doors
See Exterior doors-specifications
Installed exterior windows
See Exterior windows-specifications
Institutional supplies (food service equipment)
Instrumental measurement
Instrumental measurement-corrosion
See Corrosion
Instrumental measurement-metals/alloys
Insulated deck covering
F1331 (01.07)
Insulated marine steel bulkheads/decks
Insulating brick
F1312 (01.07)
1820
Insulating firebrick
Insulation shipboard monitors-specifications
Fl207M (01.07)
Interdendritic ditcbes
Intergranular attack (IGA)
switchboards
F1331 (01.07)
Interior steel doors (for ships)
Interlaboratory testing
A518/A518M (01.02)
Intermediate hardness carbon spring steel
A684/A684M (01.03)
Intermediate sheathing (thermal insulation)
Intermediate-temperature service applications-steel plate
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and
Higher-Temperature Service, Specification for,
A515/A515M (01.04)
Intermediate-tensile strength carbon steel plate
Intermetallic phase detection
A923 (01.03)
Internal combustion engines
Internal discontinuities
Shapes, Specification for, A898/A898M (01.04)
Internally-operated valves
Pressure-Reducing Valves for Steam Service, Specification for,
F1565 (01.07)
Internal threaded fasteners
See Steel bolting materials
International shore connections
International Shore Connections for Marine Fire Applications,
Intrinsic thermocouples
See Thermocouples
Investigation
Investment castings
Investment Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Visual Ex-
amination, Practice for, A997 (01.02)
Investment castings-specifications
Temperatures, Specification for, A 732/ A732M (01.02)
A957/A957M (01.02)
Containing Parts, Specification for, A985/A985M (01.02)
Ionization smoke detectors
Iron
Iron-specifications
A377 (01.02)
tion for, A153/ A 153M (01.06)
Iron alloys
Iron alloys-specifications
for, A638/A638M (01.03)
A891/A891M (01.05)
Iron-base superalloy forgings
for, A638/A638M (01.03)
A891/ A891M (01.05)
Iron bolting materials
Roof and Rock Bolts and Accessories, Specification for,
F432 (01.08)
F1077 (01.08)
Iron castings (malleable)
Sa Malleable iron castings-specifications
Flexible Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets used in Connec-
tion of Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures to Sanitary Drain-
age Systems, Specification for, A1045 (01.02)
Iron-chromium castings
Iron-chromium castings-specifications
A743/A743M (01.02)
Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe
A608/A608M (01.02)
1821
Isostatically pressed steel
A297/A297M (01.02)
Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening, Specification
for, A747/A747M (01.02)
Iron-nickel-chromium alloys-specifications
Iron pipe/fittings
Iron pipe/fittings-specifications
Sa Steel pipe
Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe, Specification for, A 746 (01.02)
A377 (01.02)
A861 (01.02)
Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe Fittings, and Valve Parts for Rail-
road, Marine, and Other Heavy Duty Service at Tempera-
tures Up to 650F (345C), Specification for, A338 (01.02)
for, C564 (01.02)
Iron products (general)
Wrought Alloy Steel Rolls for Cold and Hot Reduction, Specifi-
Iron products (general)-zinc-coated (hot-dip galvanized)
A385/A385M (01.06)
tion for, A153/A153M (01.06)
Wire, Specification for, Al11 (01.06)
Iron sheets
Iron sheets-zinc-coated (galvanized)
Iron solution value
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Irrigation piping-specifications
A978/A978M (01.06)
ISO (International Standards Organization)
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
Isothermal conditions/testing
for, A1033 (01.03)
J
J-band hanger (for shipboard piping)
Sa Shipbuilding steel pipe materials-specifications
F708 (01.07)
Joint assembly inspection
Joints (pipe/tube applications)
Joints (pipe/tube applications )-specifications
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
Joint steel bars-specifications
tion for, A49 (01.04)
Jominy test
Sa End-quench hardness
A255 (01.05)
Journal bearings
See Ball/roller bearings
K
Killed steel
A6/A6M (01.04)
Knowledge (health)
See Health knowledge/information systems
Labels/labeling-specifications
Lacing wire
With Chloride) (PVC) Coating), Specification
for,
Lamellar structures
the Microstructure of High Carbon Bearing
A892 (01.05)
End Applications, Specification for,
Laser beam-welded steel pipe
cation for, A1006/A1006M (01.01)
Laser technology
Laser-Fused Stainless Steel Bars, Plates, and Shapes, Specifica-
tion for, A1069/A1069M (01.03)
Lashings
F783 (01.07)
Latches
Self-Closing/Self-Latching General-Purpose Gates, Guide for,
F2630 (01.06)
l.aterally-loaded nailed connections
F1575 (01.08)
Lath nails
F1667 (01.08)
Lead-tin all!()ys:/co,ating1i-SpE3cifications
Steel Sheet, Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Pro-
Leaf springs
A689 (01.05)
Leak testing
Least cost analysis (LCA)
for, A930 (01.06)
Left hand doors (for ships)
Length of inclusions
See Inclusions
Letters
Letters and Numerals for Ships, Specification for, F906 (01.07)
Lever butterfly valves
Lifeboatslliferafts
Searchlights on Motor Lifeboats, Specification for,
F1003 (01.07)
Life-cycle cost (LCC) analysis
for, A930 (01.06)
Lifesaving aid/equipment
Equipment, Guide for, .F1297 (01.07)
Lifting eyes
Lifting slings
F783 (01.07)
Light-gaged steel sheet piling
See Structural steel (SS) piles-specifications
Light steel sheet
Structural
Cold Formed, Light Specification
(01.04)
Light industrial fence
( Ll:l!ht'Wel!:!:ht Survey and Inclining
Uetenmu1e Ship Displacement and
1822
Limit switch
Contact), Fiber-Optic, Specification for, F2071 (O:L07)
Linear changes/linearity
Marine Fenders, Test Method for, F2l92 (01.07)
Linear changes/Hnearity-metals/aUoys
tion, Practice for, A802/A802M (01J)2)
Line blind valves
F1020 (01.07)
Plain-End, Seamless, Specification for,
(01.01)
Line wire
Zinc-Coated Galvanized) "Iron" Telephone and Telegraph Line
A111 (01.06)
(Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over),
Liquid distribution systems
for, F1985 (01.07)
Liquid environments
A135/A135M (01.01)
Liquid level-indicating electrical equipment
F2044 (01.07)
Surface Acceptance Standards, .tnu.
5
u,.u-., Pmiicle
Penetrant Inspection, Specification
L1JV' .... UAJV .... L.U (01.02)
environments
Pressure Relief Valves for Steam, Gas, and Liquid
tion for, F1433 (01.07)
Tank Vent Flame Arresters, Specification for, F1273 (01.07)
LITP (land based information platform)
Implementation of a Fleet Management Network, Guide
for, F1756 (01.07)
Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, F'1182 (01.07)
Low-alloy steel-specifications
Locations
Locks
Loci\: strip gaskets--specifications
See Gaskets
Locomotive engines
See Railroad locomotive engines
Log buildings
desks (for ships)
Log, Marine, Steel, with Cabinet, Specification for,
F823 (01.07)
Long barbed tape obstacles
Long Barbed Tape Obstacles, Specification for, F19l0 (01.06)
Long bar steel
See Alloy steel bars-specifications
Longitudinally welded pipe
A1005/A1005M (01.01)
Longitudinal magnetization
Longitudinal waves
Long-term hydrostatic strength/pressure
See Hydrostatic testing
Long-terne steel sheet
Sa Steel sheet
cess, Specification for, A308/ A308M (01.06)
Loose flange joint
F2015 (01.07)
Low-alloy/carbon steel plate
Sa Carbon steel plate-specifications
and Toughness, Specification for, A945/ A945M (01.04)
Low-alloy high-strength steel
See HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel-specifications
Low-alloy steel
A592/ A592M (01.05)
for, A1033 (01.03)
A1040 (01.05)
1823
Application, and Cobalt for High Strength at Elevated
Temperatures, Specification A 732/ A 732M (01.02)
--Alloy Structural Tubing in Shapes, with 50 ksi 345 MPa
A1065/A1065M (01.01)
A970/A970M (01.04)
forcement, Specification for, A 706/ A 706M (01.04)
Low-carbon nickel alloys-specifications
See Nickel-molybdenum-chromium alloys-specifications
Low-carbon steel
Deformed and Plain, Low-carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars for
A1035/A1035M (01.04)
Low-carbon steel plate-specifications
Sa Carbon steel plate-specifications
Low cover/profile structure
A964/A964M (01.06)
Low-density mineral fiber insulation
See Mineral fiber insulation
Low-head pressure pipe
See Reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP)-
specifications
Low insulating resistance values
Low-relaxation steel wire strand
Low-stress elongation (LSE) test
See Elongation
Low-temperature service applications-steel
Alloy Steel Eyebolts, Specification for, F541 (01.08)
A350/A350M (01.01)
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
Ferri tic Ductile Iron Castings Suitable for Low-Temperature Ser-
Forged Carbon and Alloy Steel Flanges for Low-Temperature
A420/A420M (01.01)
A334/A334M (01.01)
for, A352/A352M (01.02)
rial) (01.01)
Low-temperature service applications-steel plate
A516/A516M (01.04)
A662/A662M (01.04)
cation for, A 738/A 738M (01.04)
Low-tensile strength carbon steel plate
l.ow yield to tensile ratio
Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in
Lubricants (fluid)
Sa Lubricating oils
Determining the Tribological Behavior and the Relative Lifetime
of a Fluid Lubricant using the Spiral Orbit Tribometer, Test
Lubricating grease
Guide for, F2489 (01.08)
1824
Lubricating oils
for, F2161 (01.08)
Lubricating oils-specifications
Tanks, 5 and 10-Gal (20 and 40-L) Lube Oil Dispensing, Specifi-
Lug-type butterfly valves
Lumber
Luminance
F1337 (01.07)
Luminous reflectance factor
M
Macadam pavements
Machine chain
A467/A467M (01.05)
Machine-made reinforced thermosetting resin pipe
specifications
Machine/process potential study procedure
Machine/Process Capability Study Procedure, Practice for,
F1503 (01.08)
Machinery (for ships)
Machine screws
Machine washable bedcoverings
See Beds
Machining performance/testing
Evaluating Machining Performance of Ferrous Metals Using an
Automatic Screw/Bar Machine, Test Method for,
E618 (01.05)
Macroetching
Macroetch Testing of Tool Steel Bars, Practice for, A561 (01.05)
Magnetic materials/applications-specifications
Magnetic particle inspection
Sa Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)
for, A456/A456M (01.05)
A275/A275M (01.05)
A903/A903M (01.02)
Magnetic properties
Sa A-C (alternating-current) magnetic properties
ing Current, Practice for, A966/ A966M (01.05)
Magnetic retaining rings
Main propulsion engine
F1338 (01.07)
Maintainability
F1337 (01.07)
Maintenance
F1455 (01.07)
Maintenance waste
Malleable iron castings-specifications
Automotive Malleable Iron Castings, Specification for,
A602 (01.02)
Cupola Malleable Iron, Specification for, Al97/A197M (01.02)
A47/A47M (01.02)
1825
Manual actuated valve operators
Pearlitic Malleable Iron, Specification for, A220/A220M (01.02)
Management of operations
Manganese alloying additives-specifications
A601/A60lM (01.02)
Ferromanganese, Specification for, A99 (01.02)
Ferromanganese-Silicon, Specification for, A 701/ A 101M (01.02)
Silicomanganese, Specification for, A483/A483M (01.02)
Manganese alloys-specifications
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Specifi-
A562/A562M (01.04)
Steel Castings, Austenitic Manganese, Specification for,
A128/A128M (01.02)
Manganese alloy steel plate-specifications
A302/A302M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese,
Specification for, A455/A455M. (01.04)
cation for, A299/ A299M (01.04)
A562/A562M (01.04)
tion for, A573/A573M (01.04)
Manganese-molybdenum-columbium alloy
Manganese-molybdenum-nickel alloy-specifications
A302/A302M (01.04)
Manhole materials/applications-specifications
Manhole Cover Assembly, Bolted, Raised, Oiltight and Water-
tight, Specification for, F1143 (01.07)
Manhole Cover Assembly, Bolted, Semi-Flush, Oiltight and Wa-
tertight, Specification for, Fl142 (01.07)
tertight, Hinged, Specification for, F1144 (01.07)
F783 (01.07)
Manifolds
Manual actuated valve operators
Sa Steel valves-specifications
Manual door control systems
Manual door control systems
Sa Watertight doors
F1197 (01.07)
Manual (lever/gear actuator) butterfly valves
Manually operated fueling hose reels
F1347 (01.07)
Maraging alloys
See Chromium-nickel-iron alloys
Marcelled wire
Marcelled Tension Wire, Specification for, A81 i (01.06)
Marine applicaJtim11s
Sealless Oil Pump with Oil Through Motor for Marine Ap-
Marine bulkhead applications
Sa Bulkheads
Marine coatings systems/applications
ture, Outfitting, and Coatings, Practice for, F2016 (01.07)
F1130 (01.07)
Marine environments
Sewage and Graywater Flow Through Treatment Systems, Speci-
fication for, F2363/F2363M (01.07)
Marine fenders
Marine fire fighting systems
Marine piping
See Shipbuilding piping materials-specifications
Marine sleeping quarters
See Sleeping materials/applications (marine)-
spedfications
Marine software systems
Transition and Performance of Marine Software Systems Mainte-
Marine systems/subsystems/equipment
Guide for, F2039 (01.07)
Installations, Guide for, F1835 (01.07)
Test
Centers of
Escort Vessel Evaluaticm
F1878 (01.07)
Human Engineering for Marine Systems, Equipment, and
Facilities, Practice .F1166 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
F1338 (01.07)
F1270 (01.07)
Sealless Lube Oil Pump with Oil Through Motor for Marine Ap-
Temperature Monitoring Equipment, Specification for,
F2362 (01.07)
F1332 (01.07)
F2001 (01.07)
Weight Control Technical Requirements for Surface Ships, Guide
for, F1808 (01.07)
Marine systems/subsystems/equipment-specifications
cation for, F821/F821M (01.07)
F1071 (01.07)
Flexible, Expansion-Type Ball Joints for Marine Applications,
F2044 (01.07)
Pressure-Reducing Valves for Water Systems, Shipboard, Specifi-
F2283 (01.07)
F1196 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07)
Solid State Bargraph Meters for Shipboard Use Metric, Specifica-
tion for, F1755M (01.07)
Spill Valves for Use in Marine Tank Liquid Overpressure Protec-
tions Applications, Specification for, F1271 (01.07)
Tachometers, Various, Specification for, F2046 (01.07)
Marine systems/subsystems/equipment (steel}-specifications
General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates.
and Sheet Piling, Specification for,
(01.04)
1826
tance for Use in Marine r.:;,.,.,;,..,.,n..-noc
A690/A690M (01.04)
Marking
Martensitic stainless steel
Specifying Harmonized Standard Grade for
Wrought Stainless Steels, Guide for, (01.03)
Martensitic stainless steel bars-specifications
A582/A582M (01.03)
Stainless Steel Bars for and Turbine Airfoils, Specifi-
cation for, A1028
Martensitk stainless steel
Castings, Carbon, .o_,vvv-,,-.,,vv.
Ultrasonic Examination
A609/A609M (01.02)
Steel Carbon, Low
Steam Turbines,
A356/A356M (01.02)
for, A352/A352M (01.02)
and Other Applications, for Service,
Martensitic stainless steel flanges/valves-specifications
A988/A988M (01.01)
Martensitic stainless steel forgings-specifications
Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Service,
Martensitic Stainless Steel Forgings and Forging Stock for High-
A1021/A1021M (01.05)
Stainless Steel Forgings, Specification for, A473 (0U)3)
Martensitic stainless steel
Welded Pipe, Specification
A1053/A1053M (01.01)
Steel Fittings, Specification
(01.01)
Martensitic stainless steel plate/sheet/strip-specifications
Martensitic stainless steel tube-specifications
for General Service, Specification for,
(OUH)
Ma:rtensitic stainless steel
Stainless Steel and Wire Rods, Specifica-
tion for, (01.03)
Joint Reinforcement, Specification for,
Masonry
F1667 (01.08)
Mechanical fasteners
Masonry units-specifications
Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement, Specification for,
A951/ A951M (01.04)
Mass
Mass transit
Sa Railroad steel materials
Master heat process
A957/ A957M (01.02)
Material fabrication
Material service life
for, A930 (01.06)
Maximum continuous rating (MCR)
F1338 (01.07)
Maximum experimental safe gap (MESG)
Mechanical analysis/testing
Sa Impact testing
Sa Shear testing
Sa Tensile properties/testing
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Mechanical cleaning
Sa Descaling
Mechanical contact switch
Mechanical couplings
Mechanical damage
F1130 (01.07)
Mechanical door control systems
1827
Mechanical efficiency (of engines)
Main Propulsion Medium Speed Marine Diesel
Performance and Minimum Scope of A<.oQPr'nn'"
F1338 (01.07)
for, F2832 (01.08)
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Mechanical forming process
F2015 (01.07)
Mechanical joints
F1138 (01.07)
Mechanically assembled chain slings
Mechanically attached fittings (MAF)
Mechanically deposited coatings
Sa Coatings
Mechanically refrigerated air conditioner
tion for, F1433 (01.07)
Mechanically refrigerated dehumidifier
Mechanical piping
Mechanical properties
Testing Multi-Wire Steel Strand, Test Methods for,
A1061/A1061M (01.04)
Mechanical restraint couplings
F1548 (01.07)
Mechanical sampling systems
See Sampling
Mechanical seals
for, F1511 (01.07)
Mechanical springs
A 764 (01.06)
tion for, A1000/A1000M (01.03)
for, A227/A227M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Quenched and Tempered for Mechanical Springs,
Mechanical symbols
Mechanical tubing-specifications
tion for, A519 (01.01)
A511/A511M (01.01)
A554 (01.01)
Medium speed diesel engine
A983/A983M (01.05)
Fl338 (01.07)
Melt-extracted steel fibers
Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete, Specification for,
A820/A820M (01.04)
Melting/crystallization temperatures
Melting process steel
A645/A645M (01.04)
Mercaptan snlfur content
See Sulfur
Merchant quality steel bars
for, A575 (01.05)
Mercurous nitrate test
Mesh (for steel pipe)
1828
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Pipe Winding Mesh, Specifica-
tion for, A810 (01.06)
Messengers (steel wire strand for)
Messenger support
Zinc-Coated Steel Strand for Messenger Support of Figure 8
Metacenter
Metal-arc-welded steel pipe
Sa Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel pipe-
specifications
Metal buildings
Metal chips
Metal doors-specifications
Sa Doors/door assemblies-specifications
Metal fasteners
See Fasteners (metal)-specifications
Metal fences
Design and Construction of Ornamental Steel Picket Fence Sys-
tems for Security Purposes, Guide for, F2814 (01.06)
tion for, F2548 (01.06)
Metal industry
Metallic abrasive blasting
Sa Abrasive blasting
for, F1330 (01.07)
Metallic bellows expansion joints
Metallic-coated steel materials
Relating to Metallic Coated Steel Products, Terminology,
A902 (01.06)
Using Hand Micrometers to Measure the Thickness of Nonmetal-
lic and Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet, Practice for,
A1073/A1073M (01.06)
Metallic-coated steel materials-specifications
Copper-Clad Steel Wire Strand, Specification for, A460 (01.06)
for, A975 (01.06)
F1077 (01.08)
A788/A788M (01.05)
Single and Double Reduced, Specification for,
A657/A657M (01.06)
for, A974 (01.06)
Metallic coated steel pipe
Metallic-coated steel pipe--specifications
Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains,
Specification for, A 760/A 760M (01.06)
Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer Precoated for Sewers and Drains,
Metallic-coated steel wire--specifications
for, A975 (01.06)
A 764 (01.06)
for, A116 (01.06)
for, A974 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope, Specification for,
A603 (01.06)
1829
Metallographic analysis/inspection
Metallic coatings
F1077 (01.08)
F2453/F2453M (01.06)
Metallic coatings-specifications
F1077 (01.08)
A657/A657M (01.06)
Tin Mi}l ... ~ o d ~ ~ t ~ General Requirements, Specification for,
f'Ul-"J (u.1.u6)
for, A623M (01.06)
Metallic hardness
A956 (01.05)
Metallic steel sheet
Metallic steel sheet-specifications
Steel Sheet, 55 %Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip
A1003/A1003M (01.06)
gated Steel Pipe, Specification for, A929/ A929M (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Zinc-5 % Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Metallographic analysis/inspection
Metallurgical requirements
Metallurgical requirements
A957/A957M (01.02)
Metallurgical structure
A6/A6M (01.04)
Metal melting pots
Metal
Primers-specifications
Metals and alloys numbering system
Metals and metallic materials
E618 (01.05)
A902 (01.06)
F1077 (01.08)
Silicon Metal, Specification for, A922 (01.02)
Metals and metallic materjals-chemical analysis
See Chemical analysis-metals/alloys
Metals and metamc materials-corrosion
See Corrosion
Metals and metamc materials-ultrasound
Metric dimensions
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
Metric practice-SI (International System of Units)
Sa SI (International System of Units)
F25 Supplement to IEEE/ ASTM SI 1 0), Practice for,
:F1332 (01.07)
Metric units for maritime applications
F1332 (01.07)
M-grade steel bars
Steel Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades, Specification
for, (01.05)
Mica paper
See Electronic materials/applications
Miicn)al!lov steel-specifications
Sa forgings
Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars, Microalloyed JoiPt Bars,
tion for, A49 (01.04)
Steel Bars, l'HI.I..-HJ<UJ.vy, ,_,.,,r_.,vrr.nrrnr
Properties, for, nL, ...... ,ro..-'""'nu
Steel Bars, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Subse-
quent Hot Specification for, A921/A921M (01.05)
Steel Forgings, for General Industrial Use, Specifica-
tion for, (01.05)
Micrometer measurement
A1073/A1073M (01.06)
Microscopic examination-metals/alloys
Microstructures
for, A1033 (01.03)
Mill edge
A6/ A6M (01.04)
Mill scale
Sa Descaling
for, F1330 (01.07)
Mineral fiber insulation
Sa Block and board thermal insulation
Mineral oils
for, F2161 (01.08)
Minimized spangle coating
A653/A653M (01.06)
Minimum corrosion characteristics
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Minimum scope of assembly
Perfom1ance and Minimum Scope of Assembly, Guide for,
F1338 (01.07)
Mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire-specifications
1830
Steel Sheet, Zinc-5 %Aluminum Alloy-Coated the Hot-Dip
Process, Specification for, A875/A875M
Zinc-5 %. Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Carbon Steel
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Steel Chain-Link
Fence Fabric, Specification for, (01.06)
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Overhead
Ground Wire Strand, Specification for, A925 (01.06)
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Steel Wire Strand,
Mist lubrication systems
Moderate-temperature service applications--steel plate
A516/A516M (01.04)
Modified chromium-vanadium alloy steel wire
See Steel wire (chromium alloy)-spedfications
Modified wood
See Wood products
Modular gage boards
See Shipbuilding steel materials (gages)
Modulus of elasticity
Moisture
Dehumidifier, Self-
Contained, :Splc:crnc<lticm
Molded nylon
See plastics (PA)
Molding/extrusion materials (PP) plastics)
See Nylon plastics
Molding/extrusion materials
See Poly( vinyl _._, __ , ... '' ..
Molybdenum
Molybdenum-Tungsten, Specification
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
Molybdenum-specifications
Molybdenum Oxide Products, Specification for, A146 (01.02)
Tool Steel High Speed, Specification for, A600 (01.05)
Molybdenum alloying additives
Ferromolybdenum, Specification for, A132 (01.02)
Molybdenum Oxide Products, Specification for, Al46 (01.02)
Molybdenum alloys-specifications
for, A204/A204M (01.04)
A543/A543M (01.04)
Columbium Alloy Steel, for Moderate and Lower 1empera-
Molybdenum high-speed tool steel
Molybdenum oxide products
Monitoring
:F1940 (01.08)
M<milcoritng--truuine (shipping) applications
Insulation Monitors for Monitoring Ground Resistance
F1207M (01.07)
Cast Steel, Specification for,
1831
Mortar (refractory)
See Refractory mortar
Motels
Needle bearing
Motor compressors
Multi-family outdoor play areas
Multiplex strainers
FU99 (01.07)
150F), Specification for, F1200 (01.07)
Mlllltiipurpi[)Se automotive grease
Lubricating grease
Multi-stand (roll) forming mill
A857/A857M (01.04)
Music spring wire
Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality, Specification for,
A228/A228M (01.03)
Muster lists
F1270 (01.07)
Muster stations
Equipment, Guide for, {1'1297 (01.07)
N
Nail-base fiberboard sheathing thermal insulation
Nails
F1575 (01.08)
Fl667 (01.08)
Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials, Terminology
of, F547 (01.08)
Naval architects
Naval brass
F467 (01.08)
NBC survivability
Facilities, Practice for, FU66 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
NDT laboratories
Needle bearing
Needle bearing
Roller, Bearing, Needle, Ferrous, Solid, Spherical End, Specifica-
tion for, F2443 (01.08)
F2511 (01.08)
Needle roller bearing
tion for, F2430 (01.08)
Bearing, Roller, Needle: Thick Outer Ring With Rollers and
Cage, Specification for, F2246 (01.08)
Ring Bearing, Inner: For Needle Roller Bearing with Thick Outer
Ring, Specification for, F2431 (01.08)
tion for, F2443 (01.08)
Needle tubing
Negative buoyancy pipe
Sa Steel pipe
tion for, A810 (01.06)
Nelson hanger (for shipboard piping)
F708 (01.07)
Network
for, F1756 (01.07)
Nickel
Nickel-specifications
A494/A494M (01.02)
Nickel alloy additives
Nickel Oxide Sinter, Specification for, A636 (01.02)
Nickel alloy bolting materials-specifications
Precipitation-Hardening Bolting (UNS N07718) for High Tem-
perature Service, Specification for, A1014/A1014M (01.01)
Nickel alloy castings-specifications
A494/A494M (01.02)
A1002 (01.02)
Nickel alloy coatings-specifications
Nickel alloy flanges/fittings/valves/parts-specifications
Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service, Specifica-
tion for, A522/A522M (01.01)
Nickel alloy forgings-specifications
nents, Specification for, A859/A859M (01.05)
Nickel alloys-specifications
F1077 (01.08)
Nickel alloy steel plate-specifications
Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate, Specification for,
A265 (01.04)
A645/A645M (01.04)
A543/A543M (01.04)
A844/A844M (01.04)
Nickel alloy steel plate (for welded pressure vessels)
A265 (01.04)
A645/A645M (01.04)
1832
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel, Specification for,
A203/A203M (01.04)
A844/A844M (01.04)
Nickel alloy tube
Videoborescoping of Tubular Products for Sanitary Applications,
Guide for, A1015 (01.01)
Nickel alloy (UNS) numbering system
Nickel aluminum castings
A1002 (01.02)
Nickel-chromium-iron alloys-specifications
A494/A494M (01.02)
Nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloys-specifications
A543/ A543M (01.04)
A541/A541M (01.05)
A508/A508M (01.05)
Nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloys-specifications
Nickel-clad steel
A265 (01.04)
Nickel coatings-specifications
Nickel-copper alloy-specifications
Nonfenous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, Socket Head Cap Screws,
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
Nickel-copper alloy steel-specifications
F2215 (01.08)
A494/ A494M (01.02)
Nickel-copper-aluminum alloys
Nonfenous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use
F467 (01.08)
Nonfenous Nuts for General Use (Metric), Specification for,
F467M (01.08)
Nickel-copper-silicon
A494/A494M (01.02)
Nickel-iron-chromium alloys-specifications
Nickel-molybdenum alloys-specifications
A494/A494M (01.02)
Nonfenous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use
Nonfenous Nuts for General Use, Specification for,
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
Nickel-molybdenum-chromium alloys-specifications
A494/A494M (01.02)
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
Nickel oxide sinter
NICROSIL-NISIL thermocouple system
See Thermocouples
Nil-ductility transition (NDT) temperature
1833
Nipples for steel pipe
Sa Steel pipe
Nonferrous inch balls
Pipe Nipples, Specification for, A733 (01.01)
Nitric acid/hydrofluoric acid test
Nitriding
Nitrogen atmospheres
F1793 (01.07)
Filters Used in Air or Nitrogen Systems, Specification for,
F1791 (01.07)
tion for, F1795 (01.07)
Nitrogen gas
for, A1001 (01.02)
Nomenclature
See Terminology
Nominal resistance
F1575 (01.08)
Nonaromatic hydrocarbons
See Hydrocarbons
Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)
Conducting a Repeatability and Reproducibility Study on Test
Equipment for Nondestructive Testing, Guide for,
F1469 (01.08)
Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)-magnetic particle inspection
Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)-metallic materials
A135/A135M (01.01)
Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)-penetrant inspection
Nondestructive testing
Nonelectrified wire
Nonferrous bolting materials
Sa Fasteners (metal)
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
F1077 (01.08)
Nonferrous inch balls
F2215 (01.08)
Nonferrous metals/alloys
Nonferrous metals/alloys
Sa Metals and metallic materials
Hot Tin and Hot Tin/Lead Dip on Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Met-
als, Specification for, A1074 (01.06)
Nonferrous metals/alloys-specifications
Nonmagnetic retaining rings
Nonmetallic-coated steel sheet
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Using Hand l\1icrometers to the Thickness of Nonmetal-
A1073/A1073M (01.06)
Nonmetallic coatings-specifications
A1003/A1003M (01.06)
Nonmetallic expansion joints
Nonmetallic inclusions
tion, Practice for, A802/ A802M (01.02)
Nonmetallic magnetic materials
Nonmetallic materials
Nonnuclear applications
Nonoxidizing chemicals
Packing Material, Graphitic or Carbon Braided Yam, Specifica-
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
Nonpressure piping-specifications
Sa Pressure vessel steel
for, A888 (01.02)
Nonreinforced extruded tee connections
Nonshielded mechanical couplings
Nonskid deck covering
Pneumatic Descaling Machines, Specification for,
(01.07)
Nontight (ship) doors
Normalized steel
and Specification for, A945/A945M (01.04)
Normalized Structural Steel Plates,
for, AO.:'I:JJ'ACJ,:J.:'I,lVI
impact
See Impact testing
Notch toughness
Carbon and ,,.,w-''-''"'" Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Tough-
ness Testing for Components, Specification for,
A350/A350M
A758/A758M (01.01)
Nuclear applications/materials-steel (specifications)
Alloy-Steel Bolting for Special Applications, Specification for,
A540/A540M (01.01)
A508/A508M (01.05)
Numbering system (UNS)
Numerals
Nuts-specifications
Sa Nonferrous bolting materials
"Twist Off'' Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi Minimum Ten-
F901 (01.08)
A563M (01.08)
A194/A194M (01.01)
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Stainless Steel Nuts, Specification for, F594 (01.08)
Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric Nuts (Metric), Specification for,
F836M (01.08)
Nylon plastics (PA)
Stuffing Tubes, Nylon, and Packing Assemblies (Metric), Specifi-
cation for, F1836M (01.07)
0
specimens
See Color
Oceans
Oersted conversion units
See Conversion units/factors
Officer sleeping quarters
1834
Offset
properties/testing
Oft'shore marine environments
Ohmic insulation faults
Fl207M (01.07)
on films
and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Systems, Practice for, A380 (01.03)
Oil groove
Oils (lubricating)
Oil still furnace parts
steel wire-specifications
Carbon and Alloy Specialty Spring Quality, Specifica-
A1000/A1000M (01.03)
Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Specification for,
(01.03)
Steel W!re, Oil-Tempered Carbon Valve Spring Quality, Specifi-
cation for, A230/ A230M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Quenched and for Mechanical Springs,
Oiltight manhole cover assembly
tertight, Specification for, F1142 (01.07)
Oily penetrants
Oily waste
F2283 (01.07)
One-sided exposure
for, A1057/A1057M (01.06)
Open-hearth steel
Open-hearth steel-specifications
A769/A769M (01.04)
A690/A690M (01.04)
lil2:h-Strenlrrth Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with Low Carbon
and Sulfur for Improved Formability,
and Toughness, Specification for, (01.04)
High- Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
Smtable for Welding, Specification for,
A514/A514M (01.04)
cation for,
Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-
Columbium Steel, for Moderate and Lower Tempera-
ture Service, for, A735/A735M (0:1.04)
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)
Hardware for Computerized Svstems, Guide for
F2218 " '
Open-weather deck handrails
Pultruded Storm and Guard,
Systems, for, F1092 (01.07)
Overpressurization
Operational conditions/objectives/principals
Operational conditions/objectives/principals-shipboard
F1337 (01.07)
Optical materials/properties/tests
Opto-electronics module
Transducers, Pressure and Diflerential, Pressure, Electrical and
Ordinary-strength steel
A131/AJ31M (01.04)
Organic coatings-specifications
Aluminum Basecoat/Organic or Inorganic Topcoat,
CorrosiOn Protective Coatings for Fasteners, Specification
for, F1428 (01.08)
Organic liquid hazardous waste (OLHW)
See Hazardous waste materials
Ornamental fences
Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets,
tion for, F2589 (01.06)
Outdoor play areas
dential Use Outdoor Play Areas, Safety Perfonnance Specifi-
Outer ring
tion for, F2430 (01.08)
1835
Outfitting
Overboard discharge
Design and Installation of Overboard
Connections, Specification for, F994
Overhead
Carbon Steel
Grade 80 and 1 00
Lifting, Specification for, 1"'>.>'"""
Overhead strand-specifications
Ground Wire Strand, for, A925 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Overhead Ground Wire Strand,
Overload test
Dehumidifier, Self-
Contained, Specific:::tti(m
Valves for Use in Marine Tank Liquid Protec-
tions Applications, Specification for,
Oxalic acid etch test
Oxalic acid etch test
less Steels, Practices for, A763 (01.03)
Oxide removal
for, F1330 (01.07)
Oxide scale
Oxygen gas
for, A1001 (01.02)
Oxygen service/systems
p
Packed slip expansion joints
Packing/packaging materials/systems-specifications
F2168 (01.07)
Packing/packaging materials/systems (hazardous materials)
See Hazardous materials (environmental)
Packing/packaging materials/systems (metals/alloys)
Paint curing
Paintability
Painted steel materials/applications
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Paint lockers
Paint testing
Fl348/F1348M (01.07)
Palladium (titanium plus palladium)-specifications
Sa Titanium plus palladium-specifications
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
Pallet nails
F1667 (01.08)
Panama Canal
Panel doors (for ships)
Panel fences
Panel hinged door
Panels
F1071 (01.07)
Paper-based gasket materials
See Gaskets
Paper mill machinery
for, A476/A476M (01.02)
Paraffin-type hydrocarbons content
See Hydrocarbons
Partial decarburization
Particleboard
See Wood products
Partitions-specifications
Passageways
Passivating solutions
Passivation treatments
Passive fire protection
Shock Testing of Stmctural Insulation of A-Class Divisions Con-
structed of Steel or Aluminum, Test Method for,
F2877 (01.07)
1836
Pavement marking materials-specifications
Pavement surfaces-specifications
A979/A979M (01.06)
Peak shear strength
See Shear testing
Pearlitic malleable iron castings
Sa Malleable iron castings-specifications
Pedestrian materials/applications-specifications
A761/A761M (01.06)
Plastic shipping materials/applications-specifications
Shipboard Incinerators, Specitkation for, F1323 (01.07)
Pendulum test
Penetrameters
Penetrant inspection
Sa Nondestructive evaluation (NDE)
A903/A903M (01.02)
Perftuorinated aliphatic ethers (PFAE)
for, F2161 (01.08)
Perftuorolpolyethers (PFPE)
Instrument and Precision Bearing Lubricants.:..__Part 1 Oils, Guide
for, F2161 (01.08)
Guide for, F2489 (01.08)
Perforated fibrous glass cloth facing
Sound-Absorbing Board, Fibrous Glass, Perforated Fibrous Glass
Cloth Faced, Specification for, F2154 (01.07)
Performance-building materials/applications
F1575 (01.08)
Performance-building materials/applications (specifications)
Performance-electrical/electronic systems/applications
Performance-food service equipment
Performance-marine (shipboard) materials/applications
Fl338 (01.07)
Performance-metals/alloys materials/applications
Permanent mold castings-specifications
Statically Cast Permanent Mold Gray Iron Castings, Specification
for, A823 (01.02)
Permeability
1837
Pile yarn floor coverings
Permeability (alternating-current)
See Alternating-current permeability
Permissible variations
A947M (01.03)
Personnel-safety
F1071 (01.07)
Petrographic analysis
See Rock materials/properties/analysis
Petroleum products (transmission/distribution systems)
Wrought High-Strength Ferri tic Steel Butt-Welding Fittings,
Phase analysis
for, A1033 (01.03)
Phosphate coatings
Photoelectric smoke detectors
Photomicrography
Physical requirements
Picket fences
tion for, F2589 (01.06)
Pickle lag test
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Pickling
Piezoelectric acoustic emission contact sensors
Piles
A972/A972M (01.01)
A6/A6M (01.04)
A690/A690M (01.04)
A857/A857M (01.04)
A252 (01.01)
Pile yarn floor coverings
See Flooring/floor covering systems-specifications
Pillows
Pillows
See Beds
Pilot platforms
Pinions
A291/A291M (01.05)
Pin-point corrosion
F1130 (01.07)
Pipe-arches
A761/A761M (01.06)
Pipe fittings
Pipe fittings-carbon steel
See Carbon steel pipe fittings-specifications
Pipe fittings-steel
Pipeline coatings-specifications
Pipeline operations-specifications
F1199 (01.07)
Pipe nipples
Pipe piles
A972/A972M (01.01)
A252 (01.01)
Pipe thermal insulation
Pipe-type cable circuits
for, A523 (01.01)
Piping systems
Piping systems-maritime (shipboard)
Plain/deformed steel wire
Plain-end mechanical
Performance of Fittings with Gasketed Mechanical Cou-
F1548 (01.07)
Plain end steel pipe-specifications
Sa Black steel pipe-specifications
A135/A135M (01.01)
for, A523 (01.01)
cation for, A1006/A1006M (01.01)
A1024/Al024M (01.01)
Planning/purchasing
Plastic glass-fiber-reinforced pultruded rod
See Glass-fiber-reinforced (GRP) plastics
Plastic pipe/tubing/fittings-specifications
Plastics-glass-fiber reinforced products
See Glass-fiber-reinforced (GRP) plastics-specifications
Plastic sheet and film-poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)
See Poly( vinyl chloride )(PV C)-specifications
Plastic shipping materials/applications
F1331 (01.07)
Plastics-nylon (PA)
See Nylon plastics (PA)
Plastics-thermoplastic
See Thermoplastics-specifications
Plastic waste materials
Plated fasteners
F1940 (01.08)
Plate pipe (steel)
See Steel plate pipe-specifications
Plate shape characteristics
for, A987/A987M (01.06)
Platforms
Plating
F1940 (01.08)
Play yards
1838
Plumbers' (safety) chain
Plumbing applications
Plywood.
Pneumatic (air-filled) fenders
Pneumatic fire detection systems
for, F1985 (01.07)
Pneumatic leak testing
Pneumatic Leak Testing of Tubing, Test Method for,
A1047/A1047M (01.01)
Pneumatic proof test
Pneumatic rotary descaling machines
Fl348/F1348M (01.07)
Pneumatic valve operators
Seiection of Valve Operators, Practice for, F1030 (01.07)
lnstrmmf';'nt and Precision Bearing Lubricants--Pa1t Oils, Guide
for, F2161 (01.08)
Polyethylene (P"E) liner applications
A978/ A978M (01.06)
Polyethylene (PE) pipe
Polyimide insulation
Polymer coatings
for, F1428 (01.08)
F2453/F2453M (01.06)
Polymer coatings-steel
A978/ A978M (01.06)
and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence
iJollvt.Jinui chloride )(PV C)-specifications
Practice for,
(PVC) Exterior Profiles Used for
SpecJh<:att<)n for, }1'964 (01.06)
materials-
v,n,rr.,;:..,.,J chloride)(PVC) fence material1>-sp:cifiica1timts
ne;utg.un<cu Mesh Gabions Mattresses
Wire or Metallic-Coated Steel Wire
Chloride) (PVC) Coating), Specification
Posts/assemblies (for chain link fence)
F668 (01.06)
Coated or Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC:) Coated), Specification
for, A974 (01.06)
Poly( vinyl chloride )(PVC) gas:ke1:s--sp1ediicatim1s
Flexible Poly (Vinyl Chloride) used in Connec-
age Systems, Specification for, A1045 (01.02)
Shielded Transition Couplings Using flexible Poly Vinyl Chlo-
ride (PVC) Gaskets to Connect Dissimilar DWY Pipe and
Pools (swimming)
Sa Swimming pools
Porcelain enamel products
A424/ A424M (01.03)
Porosity
Porous concrete pipe
See Concrete pipe-specifications
Porous rock
Portable deck plates
Installation Procedures of Vinyl Deck
Plates in Electrical and Electronic Spaces,
Fl331 (01.07)
Portable flush deck stanchion
F987 (01.07)
Portland cement concrete (PCC)
See Concrete
Positive displacement
for, Fl511 (01.07)
1839
Positive Dii;pl<tceJmeJnt Pumps, Ships Use, Specification
~ F 1 5 1
Positive displacement pump
Positive Distillate Fuel Pumps, Specification
F1718
and line caps
Fence Fittings, Specification for, 1<'626 (01.06)
Post-applied coatings/pavings/linings
Post-Applied Pavings, and Linings for
Sewer and Pipe, Specification for,
J.llosts/assemblies chain link fence)
Sa fence/fencing systems
and Protective on Steel Industrial Fence
1<'1043 (01.06)
Poultry materials/applications-specifications
Poultry materials/applications-specifications
F1667 (01.08)
Power actuated valve operators
Power door control systems
F1197 (01.07)
Power generating facilities
Power generating facilities-specifications
Power switchboards
F1331 (01.07)
Pozzolans
See Concrete
Precipitation-hardening cobalt alloy
See Cobalt alloys-specifications
Precipitation-hardening metals/alloys-specifications
A705/A705M (01.03)
for, A638/ A638M (01.03)
A891/A891M (01.05)
Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip, Specification for, A693 (01.03)
Precipitation-hardening nickel alloy-specifications
Precipitation-Hardening Bolting (UNS N07718) for High Tem-
perature Service, Specification for, A1014/A1014M (01.01)
Precision balls
for, F2161 (01.08)
F2094/F2094M (01.08)
Precision rolling element bearings (PREB)
for, F2161 (01.08)
Guide for, F2489 (01.08)
Precoat capacity/precoating (on steel)
See Polymer coatings-steel
Preece test
Pre-engineered buildings
See Engineering applications
Prefabricated building materials/applications-specifications
Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specification
for, A934/ A934M (01.04)
Preformed stiffeners
for, A975 (01.06)
Present value (PV) analysis
for, A930 (01.06)
Pressure and heat stability
See Heat stability
Pressure balanced expansion joint
Pressure-containing parts
Austenitic Ductiie Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts
A571/A571M (01.02)
for, A351/ A351M (01.02)
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for
Pressure-Containing Parts, Specification for,
A995/A995M (01.02)
Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Tempera-
tures Up to 650F (350C), Specification for,
A278/A278M (01.02)
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
Pressure pipelines/piping systems-specifications
Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Piping Applications, Specification for,
A961/A961M (01.01)
1840
A395/A395M (01.02)
A696 (01.05)
A1024/A1024M (01.01)
A758/A758M (01.01)
Pressure rating
Pressure-reducing manifolds
Pressure-reducing valves
Services, Specification for, :F1508 (01.07)
tion for, F1795 (01.07)
F1565 (01.07)
Pressure-retaining parts
A395/A395M (01.02)
Pressure temperature rating
Pressure testing-marine (shipbuilding) applications
Specification for, F1201 (01.07) &
Pressure transducers
Pressure vessel iron
A571/A571M (01.02)
for, A476/A476M (01.02)
A377 (01.02)
A395/A395M (01.02)
A47/A47M (01.02)
Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Tempera-
tures Up to 650F (350C), Specification for,
A278/A278M (01.02)
Pressure vessels
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
Stainless Steel Forgings, Ferritic/ Austenitic (Duplex), for Pressure
A1049/A1049M (01.05)
Pressure vessel steel
tion for, A522/A522M (01.01)
for, F1311 (01.07)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
pered 9 %Nickel, Specification for, A353/A353M (01.04)
Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding, Specification for,
A905 (01.03)
Pressure vessel steel bars-specifications
High-Temperature Bolting, with Expansion Coefficients Compa-
1841
Pressure vessel steel plate-specifications
rable to Austenitic Stainless Steels, Specification for,
A453/ A453M (01.01)
Pressure Vessels, Specification for, A479/ A479M (01.03)
A 739 (01.05)
Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels, Specification
for, A31 (01.08)
Pressure vessel steel castings-specifications
A487/A487M (01.02)
Pressure vessel steel forgings-specifications
plication, Specification for, A723/A723M (01.05)
A105/A105M (01.01)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Ves-
sels, Specification for, A372/A372M (01.05)
A592/ A592M (01.05)
A541/A541M (01.05)
A508/ A508M (01.05)
Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High Temperature
A836/A836M (01.01)
Pressure vessel steel pipe-specifications
A691/A691M (01.01)
General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels,
A302/A302M (01.04)
for, A204/ A204M (01.04)
cation for, A299/ A299M (01.04)
Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by Thermo-
Mechanical Control Process (TMCP), Specification for,
A841/A841M (01.04)
A844/A844M (01.04)
A578/A578M (01.04)
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Pressure vessel steel sheet-specifications
Chromium and Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,
Pressure vessel steel tube-specifications
A608/A608M (01.02)
A178/A178M (01.01)
tion for, A423/ A423M (01.01)
Pressure vessel steel wire-specifications
A905 (01.03)
Pressurized valves
F1020 (01.07)
Prestressed concrete
Hydrogen Embrittlement Resistance for Steel Wire Hard Drawn
Used for Prestressing Concrete Pipe, Test Method for,
A1032 (01.04)
Steel Strand, Seven-Wire, Uncoated, Compacted, Stress-Relieved
for Prestressed Concrete, Specification for,
A779/A779M (01.04)
Steel Wire, Hard-Drawn for Prestressed Concrete Pipe, Specifica-
tion for, A648 (01.04)
Railroad Ties, Specification for, A881/ A881M (01.04)
Prestressing steel
A981/A981M (01.04)
tion for, A648 (01.04)
Pretreatment
Prevention (of hydrogen embrittlement)
F1940 (01.08)
Primary medical oxygen delivery systems
See Oxygen service/systems
Primers-specifications
Prisons
Procedure data sheet
Shipbuilders and Marine Paints and Coatings Product/Procedure
Data Sheet, Specification for, F718 (01.07)
Process control
Machine/Process Capability Study Procedure, Practice for,
F1503 (01.08)
F1940 (01.08)
Process lines
Product analysis specifications/tolerances
A994 (01.01)
A6/A6M (01.04)
Project design life
for, A930 (01.06)
Proof load
Propellers
Thrusters, Tunnel, Permanently Installed in Marine Vessels,
Propulsion
F1338 (01.07)
Protection (cathodic)
See Cathodic protection
Protective coatings
1842
Protective coatings-specifications
Protective equipment-specifications
F987 (01.07)
Proximity switch
Public outdoor play areas
Pulse-echo ultrasonic testing
Sa Ultrasonic testing
Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural
Pultrusion process
Pultruded Open-Weather Storm and Guard,
Systems, Specification for, F1092 (01.07)
Pumps
Ce11tntugal Pump, Shipboard Use, Specification for,
(01.07)
for, F1511 (01.07)
for, F1718 (01.07)
for, F1510 (01.07)
Purity analysis
See Defects
PVC fence materials
See I>oly(vinyl
specifications
QST process
chloride )(PVC) fence materials-
a
High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Pro-
duced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST),
Quality assurance (QA)
System-Based, Customer-Centered Quality Plan for Manufactur-
ers, Guide for, F2688 (01.08)
Quality assurance (QA)-metals
A385/A385M (01.06)
building,
Requirements for Hull Struc-
'-..-vaul'"'"' Practice for, F2016 (01.07)
Preparaticm and Coating Applica-
Quantitative analysis.lm1eas;uremtent
Determining
Marine Fenders, for,
bon and Steel Phase Transformations, Practice
for, A1033
Quarter bends
A861 (01.02)
Railroad steel materials
Quenched and tempered steels (specifications)
A592/ A592M (01.05)
A5l4/A514M (01.04)
A 734/ A 734M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, ,AJloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and
and 9% Nickel, Specification for, A553/A553M (01.04)
A543/A543M (01.04)
A541/A541M (01.05)
A508/A508M (01.05)
A844/ A844M (01.04)
A 709/ A 709M (01.04)
Quick-change valves
Quick disconnect couplings
1843
tion for, F1122 (01.07)
R
Radial crushing force
Radial rings
Radiographic examination
Rail and brace ends
Railcar loading
Packaging, Marking, and
Shipment, Practices for,
Railroad locomotive engines
Methods for Steel Products for
(01.05)
Continuous Grain Flow Forged Carbon and
shafts for Medium Speed Diesel Engines, SpieClhC<itlcm
A983/ A983M (01.05)
Carbon Steel Chain, Specification for,
Carbon Steel Crane Rails, Specification for, A 759
Carbon Steel Girder Rails of Plain, Grooved, and Guard Types,
A183 (01.04)
Carbon Structural Steel, Specification for, A36/ A36M (01.04)
A656/ A656M (01.04)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
for, A116 (01.06)
Steel Screw Spikes, Specification for, A66 (01.04)
Steel Track Spikes, Specification for, A65 (01.04)
Railroad steel materials-axles
Railroad steel materials-forgings
for, A456/A456M (01.05)
A503/A503M (01.05)
Railroad steel materials-wheels
Carbon Steel Tires for Railway and Rapid Transit Applications,
Specification for, A551/ASS1M (01.05)
Wrought Carbon Steel Wheels, Specification for,
A504/A504M (01.05)
Rail steel bars
tion for, A49 (01.04)
Raised manhole cover assembly
Rapid indentation hardness testing
See Hardness (indentation)-metallic materials
Rate of evaporation
See Evaporators/evaporation
Rate-of-rise heat/compensation detector
Rating system
Rats
Rat Guards, Ship's [Metric], Specification for, F1099M (01.07)
Ravenfield shear rate
See Shear testing
Raw materials
Phenolic Raw Materials for the Use in Bearing Cages, Specifica-
tion for, F2953 (01.08)
Reaction force analysis
Reactive metals/alloys (UNS) numbering system
Reactive sulfur compounds
See Sulfur
1844
Recalibration
See Calibration-metals/alloys analysis instrumentation
Recreational equipment
F2631 (01.06)
Rectangular brick/shapes
Redrawing
cation for, A821/ A821M (01.04)
Reduction gears-specifications
A291/A291M (01.05)
Reel
F1347 (01.07)
Referee methods
A518/A518M (01.02)
Reference photographs
Reflectance and reflectivity
F1337 (01.07)
Refractories (bricks and shapes)
for, F1097 (01.07)
Refractories (mortar)
See Refractory mortar
Refractory brick
Refractory furnace linings
F1312 (01.07)
Refractory metals/alloys (UNS) numbering system
Refractory metal thermocouples
See Thermocouples
Refractory mortar
for, F1097 (01.07)
Refrigeration systems-specifications
Register chain
Rehabilitation-steel structures/applications
A978/A978M (01.06)
A979/A979M (01.06)
Reinforced embankments/soil retaining walls
See Embankments
Reinforced thermosetting plastics (RTP)-specifications
Fiberglass (GRP) Pultmded Open-Weather Storm and Guard,
Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe y s t e m ~ to Be Used forMa-
Reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP)-specifications
Reinforcement (concrete)
Sa Concrete reinforcement-specifications
Reinforcing steeVconcrete
A944 (01.04)
A1060/A1060M (01.04)
Reinforcing steeVconcrete--specifications
Relative humidity (RH)
See Humidity
Reliability, availability, and maintainability (RAM)
ity, Availability, and Maintainability (RAM) Performance
Data Exchange, Classification for, F2446 (01.07)
Repairing
Coatings, Practice for, A780/A780M (01.06)
Repeatability/reproducibility (RR)
F1469 (01.08)
Replaceable airconditioning filter units
See Air conditioning materials/applications-
specifications
Reporting data
Residential fencing
Sa Chain-link fence/fencing systems
Residential fencing-specifications
F668 (01.06)
F654 (01.06)
Residual chemical films
Residual shear strength
See Shear testing
Resins-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
1845
Riveted construction-specifications
Resins (thermosetting)
See Thermosetting resins
Resistance
Sa Abrasion resistance
and Aluminum Organic/lnorganic Type, Specification for,
F2833 (01.08)
Resistance-shear
See Shear testing
Resistance-weathering
See Weathering
Resistance monitor (RM)
Resistance-welded steel tube
A178/A178M (01.01)
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
Restricted sulfur
Retaining rings
Return bends
A861 (01.02)
Reverberation room method
Revet mattresses
for, A975 (01.06)
Rigidity test
Rigid plastics
Rimmed structural steel bars
A6/A6M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
A131/Al31M (01.04)
Rivets
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Rivets-specifications
Rivets, Steel, Structural, Specification for, A502 (01.08)
Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels, Specification
for, A31 (01.08)
Rock bolts/accessories
F432 (01.08)
Rock materials/properties/analysis
F432 (01.08)
Rockwell hardness
Sa Hardness tests
A255 (01.05)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Rod (steel)
See Steel wire rod-specifications
Rolled ferrous/nonferrous products
Rolled nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloys
See Nickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium alloys-
specifications
Rolled steel-specifications
A6/A6M (01.04)
A786/A786M (01.04)
Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel, Specification for,
A 793 (01.03)
Structural Steel Shapes, Specification for, A992/A992M (01.04)
Roller bearings
tion for, F2430 (01.08)
Bearing, Roller, Tapered, Single Row of Rollers (Metric Series),
Bearing, Roller, Thrust, Two Channeled Race Surface, Rigid or
Flat Seat Type, Specification for, F2590 (01.08)
tion for, F2443 (01.08)
Silicon Nitride Cylindrical Bearing Rollers, Specification for,
F2730/F2730M (01.08)
Rollers
F2511 (01.08)
F2730/F2730M (01.08)
Rolls
Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls
for Pressure Vessel Use, Specification for,
A748/A748M (01.02)
Roll shells
Roofing materials/applications-bridges
See Bridge/structural materials
Roofing membranes-specifications
F432 (01.08) -
Roofing nails
F1667 (01.08)
Roof insulation-specifications
Room temperature resistivity
Rope
Rope packing material
F2087 (01.07)
Ro/Ro cargo space
Rotary descaling machines
Sa Descaling
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Rotary flex test
Rotary platform abrader
See Abrasion resistance
Rotary positive displacement pump
for, F1511 (01.07)
for, F1718 (01.07)
for, F1510 (01.07)
Rotor forgings
Roughness
Round bar steel
See Alloy steel bars-specifications
Round-robin
See testing
Round spikes
F1667 (01.08)
1846
Round tube
Desk, Steel, with Cabinet, Specification for,
Rubber gaskets
for, C564 (01.02)
Rubber heel nails
F1667 (01.08)
Rubber-/plastic-coated fabric-specifications
F668 (01.06)
Rubber seals
5'ee Gaskets
Rudder
Docking/Drain
for,
Rust
Sa Corrosion
and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Practice for, A380
Coatings with Zinc Rich Base Coat
and Aluminum Organic/inorganic Type, Specification for,
F2833
the System of a Ship, Practice for,
(01.07)
Pneumatic Rotary Machines, Specification for,
Fl348/F1348M
Rust scale
Sa Descaling
for, F1330 (01.07)
Sacrificial zinc alloy
chain (steel)
Steel chain-specifications
(shipboard) applications
of Shipboard Occupational Health and Safety
Guide for, F2039 (01.07)
lnterrtatlon:al Shore Connections for Marine Fire Applications,
for, FU21 (01.07)
PrP.nl'lrtna and Locating Emergency Muster Lists, Practice for,
(01.07)
Safety standards
F2001 (01.07)
extraction smoke detection systems
Sh!lpbomd Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, F1198 (01.07)
Sampling
Fastener :sarnplmg for Specified Mechanical and Per-
1nspec:tion, Practice for, :F1470
of Structural Steel, Speci-
of Stainless Steel Parts,
Practice for, A380 (01.03)
"-"""'>'!'-''"'(PVC) Gaskets used in Connec-
Pinmh,ina Fixtures to Sanitary Drain-
;-,pec1111:::an1Jll for, (01.02)
Products for Sanitary Applications,
(01.01)
Screws-specifications
Sanitary drainage materials/applications-specifications
Sa Sewer pipe (steel)-specifications
A978/A978M (01.06)
A861 (01.02)
for, A888 (01.02)
low Ground Use, Specification for, Cl46l (01.02)
Seamless and Welded Austenitic and Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless
A270/A270M (01.01)
Sash chain
Scale
Pneumatic Rotary Descaling Machines, Specification for.
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Scale indicators
Fl337 (01.07)
Screw/bar machine
E618 (01.05)
Screws-specifications
1847
F912M (01.08)
A574 (01.08)
A574M (01.08)
Quality Assurance Requirements for Carbon and
Wire, Rods, and Bars for Mechanical Fasteners,
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Screws, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 1170 MPa Minimum Tensile
F738M (01.08)
Screws (Metric), for, F879M (01.08)
Stainless Steel Socket Cap Screws, Specification for,
F837 (01.08)
F837M (01.08)
Stainless Steel Socket Set Screws (Metric), Specification for,
F880M (01.08)
Stainless Steel Socket, Square Head, and Slotted Headless-Set
Screw spikes
Screw spikes
Screw thread
F1941 (01.08)
Sealers
F2833 (01.08)
Seals-shipboard applications
F1837M (01.07)
for, F1511 (01.07)
Seamless austenitic steel pipe-specifications
Seamless Cu/Cu alloy pipe-specifications
See Copper alloy pipe
Seamless Cu/Cu alloy tube-specifications
Seamless drums/heads
Seamless steel pipe-specifications
Seamless Ferri tic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service,
tion for, A589/A589M (01.01)
A1024/A1024M (01.01)
Seamless steel tube-specifications
tion for, A519 (01.01)
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes
Specification for, A556/ A556M (01.01) '
1848
A213/A213M (01.01)
A511/A511M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Austenitic and Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless
A270/A270M (01.01)
Tubes, Specification for, A803/ A803M (01.01)
A268/A268M (01.01)
Specification for, Al012 (01.01)
Seams
Searchlights
Flashlights on Vessels, Specification for, F1014 (01.07)
F1003 (01.07)
Search units (for inclusions)
Seated-body work positions
F1337 (01.07)
Sea walls
A690/A690M (01.04)
Security barriers
tion for, F2548 (01.06)
Security fencing
tion for, F2548 (01.06)
Security systems and equipment
Security systems and equipment-specifications
Selected conversion factors
F1332 (01.07)
Selection guides-materials
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
Self-cleaning strainers
Self-contained valves
F1565 (01.07)
Sellar's method
Selvedge edge wire
for, A975 (01.06)
Semi-finished steel products
Semi-flush manhole cover assembly
Semi-killed steel
A6/A6M (01.04)
Semi-rigid thermal insulation
Sensor head
Service environments
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, Fl198 (01.07)
Setting time
Seven-wire strand (tendon)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
stressed Concrete, Specification for, A886/ A886M (01.04)
Sewage effiuents
Sewer fittings
systems
Sewer pipe
Flexible Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets used in Connec-
age Systems, Specification for, Al045 (01.02)
1849
Shear testing-building materials
Sewer pipe (steel)
Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and
Practice for, A998/ A998M (01.06)
Sewer pipe (steel)-specifications
A978/A978M (01.06)
A761/A761M (01.06)
for, A888 (01.02)
Sewer pipe (thermoplastic )-specifications
Sa Thermoplastic pipe/tube/fittings-specifications
ing Systems, Specification for, Cl440 (01.02)
Sewers
cation for, A1042/A1042M (01.06)
Shafts
A291/ A291M (01.05)
Shale
Shape characteristics
for, A987/A987M (01.06)
Shape memory alloys (SMA)
Sheared edge
A6/ A6M (01.04)
Shear testing
Shear testing-building materials
Inqex of ASTM Standards, Section 1
Shear testing-concrete
Shear testing-concrete
Shear waves (for ultrasonic testing)
Sheet flooring
See Flooring/floor covering systems-specifications
Sheet gasket material
See Gaskets
Sheet piling
A690iA690M (01.04)
Sheets (for beds)
See Beds
Sheet steel
Sa Steel strip
Cold Formed Carbon Structural Steel Tubing Made from Metallic
Precoated Sheet Steel, Specification for,
A1076/Al076M (01.01)
Shell
for, F991M (01.07)
Shirelded couplings-specifications
Sa Couplings-specifications
C1460 (01.02)
Shielding
nails
Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples, Specification for,
Fl667 (01Jl8)
Shipboard fire management
for, Fl333 (01.07)
Shipboard Fixed Foam Firefighting Systems, Test Method for,
~ 9 9 4 (01.07)
Shipboard generated waste
1?1799 (01.07)
Shipboard generator/motor
Ordering Low Voltage (1000 VAC or Alternating Current
Electric Motors for Shipboard to and Including
Motors of 500 Horsepower, Guide for, (01.07)
Shipboard generator/motor-general
Ordering Low (1000 VAC or
Electric Motors Shipboard
Motors of 500 Horsepower, Guide for,
Shipboard generator/motor-multi-speed
Ordering Low Voltage (1000 VAC or Less) Alternating Current
Electric Motors for Shipboard ServiceUp to and Including
Motors of 500 Horsepower, Guide for, F2361 (01.07)
Shipboard generator/motor-polyphase
Ordering Low Voltage (1000 VAC or Less) Alternating Current
Electric Motors for Shipboard ServiceUp to and Including
Motors of 500 Horsepower, Guide for, F2361 (01.07)
Shipboard information technology platform (SITP)
for, F1756 (01.07)
Shipboard insulating materials
F1312 (01.07)
Shipboard management
Guide for, F1757 (01.07)
for, F1756 (01.07)
Shipboard materials/applications-specifications
Sa Marine systems/subsystems/equipment-specifications
F1793 (01.07)
F822 (01.07)
F823 (01.07)
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Gastight /Airtight, Weathertight,
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Non-Tight, for Marine Use, Specification for,
F1070 (01.07)
Doors, Watertight, GastightiAirtight and Weathertight, Individu-
F1069 (01.07)
F825 (01.07)
Flashlights on Vessels, Specification for, Fl014 (01.07)
and Hydraulic Systems, Specification for, Fl794 (01.07)
Specification for, Fl669M (01.07)
and Furniture, Specification for, Fl178 (01.07)
F1003 (01.07)
Steel Deck Gear Stowage Box Metric, Specification for,
F1019M (01.07)
Shipbuilding
ing, Guide F1547 (01.07)
Selection of for Ship Construction, Guide for,
F1455 (01.07)
Shipbuildint2 materials (aluminum)
Anodes, Zinc Specification for, F1182 (01.07)
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Airtight, Weathertight,
1850
and Non-Tight Doors, for Use, Specification for,
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastighti Airtight, Individually Dogged, for Ma-
F1070 (01.07)
F1069 (01.07)
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Shipbuilding materials (general)
Human Integration Program Requirements for Ships and
Systems, Equipment, and Facilities, Practice for,
F1337 (01.07)
F1130 (01.07)
pounds with Studs, Practice for, Fl179 (01.07)
Fl331 (01.07)
F1270 (01.07)
for, F1155 (01.07)
F1455 (01.07)
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
Shipbuilders and Marine Paints and Coatings Product/Procedure
Data Sheet, Specification for, F718 (01.07)
F25 Supplement to IEEE/ASTM SI 10), Practice for,
F1332 (01.07)
Control Technical Requirements for Surface Ships, Guide
(01.07)
Sh]ipbui!diutg materials (general)-specifications
Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, F1182 (01.07)
Bell, Cast, Sound Specification for, F956 (01.07)
Berths, Marine, for, F1244 (01.07)
Brick, Temperature, Fire Clay, Specification for,
Fl312
Expansion Joints for Piping Ap-
plications, F1120 (01.07)
Cleats, Welded for, :F1074 (01.07)
LJ''-''"'"'""' Insulation Monitoring Ground Resistance
(01.07)
F957 (01.07)
Equipment, and
1851
Shipbuilding piping materials-specifications
for, F1097 (01.07)
and Furniture, Specification for, Fl178 (01.07)
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
Spray Shields for Joints, Specification for,
Ji'1138 (01.07)
Shipbuilding piping materials
F1337 (01.07)
for, F1155 (01.07)
Services, Specification for, F'1508 (01.07)
F1199 (01.07)
150F), Specification for, Fl200 (01.07)
Fluid Conditioner Fittings in Piping Applications Abo;ve 0F,
F2015 (01.07)
Non-Metallic Expansion Joints, Specification for, FU23 (01.07)
tions, Specification for, F'2014 (01.07)
Performance of Fittings for Use with Gasketed Mechanical Con-
Used in Piping Applications, Specification for,
(01.07)
Petformance of Gasketed Mechanical 'L-VUf-"'"<S"
Applications, Specification for,
hxpartsicm Joints of the Packed for Marine
Apj)llcatwn, :S:pecJhcatlCll1 for, F1007
for Air or Nitrogen Systems, Spccifica-
(01.07)
Valves for Steam Service, Specification for,
Valves for Water Systems, Shipboard, Specifi-
cation for, (01.07)
Welded Joints for Shipboard Piping Systems, Specification for,
F722 (01.07)
Shipbuilding steel materials
ing, Guide for, _F1386 (01.07)
Foundations, Practice for, 1:<'1309 (01.07)
for, F1330 (01.07)
F1332 (01.07)
Shipbuilding steel materials-specifications
Anodes, Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, Fll82 (01.07)
Berths, Marine, Specification for, F1244 (01.07)
F998 (01.07)
F822 (01.07)
plications, Specification for, Fl120 (01.07)
for, F1333 (01.07)
F823 (01.07)
F825 (01.07)
F1071 (01.07)
A6/A6M (01.04)
F1020 (01.07)
for, F1511 (01.07)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
tion for, F1433 (01.07)
F1348/F1348M (01.07)
F987 (01.07)
for, F1510 (01.07)
F783 (01.07)
F1019M (01.07)
F1018 (01.07)
F1145 (01.07)
Shipbuilding steel materials (crankshafts)
for, A456/A456M (01.05)
A503/A503M (01.05)
Shipbuilding steel materials (doors)
cation for, F821/F821M (01.07)
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastightl Airtight, Individually Dogged, for Ma-
F1070 (01.07)
F1069 (01.07)
Fll96 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07)
Shipbuilding steel materials (gages)
Shipbuilding steel materials (plate)
Sa Alloy steel plate-specifications
A 793 (01.03)
Shipbuilding steel materials (structural)
1852
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastight!Airtight, Individually Dogged, forMa-
F1070 (01.07)
Doors, Watertight, Gastightl Airtight and Weathertight, Individu-
F1069 (01.07)
F1071 (01.07)
A131/A131M (01.04)
Shipbuilding steel pipe materials
F708 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
for, Fl330 (01.07)
for, F1155 (01.07)
Shipbuilding steel pipe materials-specifications
F1199 (01.07)
F998 (01.07)
for, F991M (01.07)
tion for, F885 (01.07)
F2015 (01.07)
F1020 (01.07)
F1548 (01.07)
for, F1985 (01.07)
tion for, F1795 (01.07)
F1565 (01.07)
1853
Shrinkage
tion for, F1122 (01.07)
Valve Label Plates, Specification for, F'992 (01.07)
Welded Joints for Shipboard Piping Systems, Specification for,
F722 (01.07)
for, F682 (01.07)
Ship construction
Ship dining areas
Ship owners
F2017 (01.07)
Shipping
Shipping containers/materials/applications-specifications
Ships
Chocks, Ship Mooring, Cast Steel, Specification for,
F2936 (01.07)
Hardware Implementation for Computerized Systems, Guide for,
F2218 (01.07)
Ship safety
F2001 (01.07)
Shipyards
F2017 (01.07)
Shock test
Shock Testing of Structural Insulation of A-Class Divisions Con-
F2877 (01.07)
Shock tubes
Shops
F1071 (01.07)
Shoreline cleaning (of marine environments)
Shore walls
A857/A857M (01.04)
Shot peening
A504/A504M (01.05)
Shrinkage
Shut-off valves
Shut-off valves
Sa Valves
F1793 (01.07)
Siding materials
Siding nails
Fl667 (01.08)
Sight indicators
Signal lines
See Communications-specifications
Signals
F1270 (01.07)
SI (International System of Units)
F25 Supplement to IEEE/ASTM SI 10), Practice for,
F1332 (01.07)
Silica brick
Silicomanganese
Silicon
Silicon--corrosion-resistant
A518/A518M (01.02)
A861 (01.02)
Silicon alloying additives
Sa Stainless steel aHoying additives
Sa Stainless steel alloying additives (silicon)
Calcium-Silicon Alloys, Specification for, A495 (01.02)
Ferrosilicon, Specification for, A100 (01.02)
Silicon alloy steel
Shapes for Corrosion and Heat-Resisting Service, Specifica-
tion for, A968/A968M (01.03)
Silicon metal
Silicon molybdenum steel balls
F2215 (01.08)
Silicon nitride (Si
3
N
4
)
F2094/F2094M (01.08)
F2730/F2730M (01.08)
Silicon oil
Instrument and Precision Bearing Lubricants-Pa1t 1 Oils, Guide
for, F216l (01.08)
Silver brazing alloys
Silver nitrate striipping
Weight and Comp1DSlt1on of Coating on Terne Sheet by the
Triple-Spot Test Method for, A309 (01.06)
strainers
(All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line
Strainers (150 psig and 1 50F Maximum), Specification for,
F1199 (01.07)
Single expansion joint
Single helical (security) coils
Single-jack chain
Single mounted seals (inside/outside)
for, Fl511 (01.07)
Single-reduced tin mill black plate
Sa Tin mill products
A657/A657M (01.06)
Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single-Reduced, Specification for,
A625/A625M (01.06)
Single thermoelement materials
See Thermocouples
Sinker nails
F1667 (01.08)
Sinusoidal burst technique
Sixteenth bends
A861 (01.02)
Size/size distribution analysis
A835/A835M (01.02)
Skateboarding
Guide for, F2698 (01.06)
Skates/skating
Guide for, F2698 (01.06)
Slating nails
Fl667 (01.08)
Sleeping materials/applications (marine )-specifications
Sleeping materials/applications (marine)
Sleeves/sleeving-specifications
for, F682 (01.07)
Slide
Fences/fencing materials
Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates, Specificat.ion
for, F1184 (01.06)
1854
Precoated and Polyethylene Lined
Sewers, Storm Sewers, and Other
Appllc:atHms, for,
End Applications, Specification for,
Slurries-specifications
for, F1428 (01.08)
Slush castings
See Castings
Smoke detectors
Shipboard Fire Detection Systems, Guide for, Fl198 (01.07)
Soak testing
tings, Specification for, li'1387 (01.07)
Socket
of Wire Ropes and Strand, Test Method for,
Socket button screws
Specification F835 (01.08)
Steel Socket Button Flat Countersunk Head Cap
Ex1panded Welded and Silver Brazed Socket Joints for Pipe and
Socket set screws (SSS)
Sa Screws-specifications
F912M (01.08)
F880M (01.08)
Socket-welded applications
Sodium hydroxide etch test
Detecting Detrimental Tntermetallic Phase in
Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels, Test for,
A923 (01.03)
Software
Sa Computerized systems
Softwoods
See Wood products
SOHSP (shipboard occupational health/safety program)
Soil
'--'"'"'"'")o:,, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Practice for, A380 (0:1.03)
"'"'CUHH1fS Conugated Steel for Sewers and
Ap,ph,cattons, Practice for, (01.06)
Soil accumulation
See Dirt accumulation/analysis
Soil iron)
iron soil
Soil
alloys
Solid aromatic hydrocarbons
See Hydrocarbons
Solid rubber fenders
Specifications-gaskets
Solid state equipment
Solid State Bmgraph Meters for Shipboard Use Metric, Specifica-
tion for, F1755M (01.07)
Solvent-bonded seams
See ,Seams
Solvent removable penetrants
Solvent ring test
Sound absorbing/insulating materials/applications-
specifications
Sound field parameters
Space conditioning
See Air conditioning materials/applications-
specifications
Spangle
A653/ A653M (01.06)
Span wires
Spas
Special requirements
Specialty spring-quality wire
Specifications-ball/roller bearings
See Ball/roller bearings-specifications
Specifications-brick
Specifications-bridge/structural materials
See Bridge/structural materials-specifications
Specifications-chain-link fence materials/applications
See Chain-link fence/fencing systems-specifications
Specifications-chemicals
See Chemicals-specifications
Specifications-cleaning mJrmt.r;./n,rnti'PSsPs
See Cleaning
Specifications-concrete pipe
See Concrete pipe-specifications
Spleciticatimls---co,ppter alloy
Spteciticatim1s--co,pp1er alloy pipe
See Copper pipe-specifications
1855
Specifications-couplings
See Couplings-specifications
Specifications--doors/door assemblies
See Doors/door assemblies-specifications
coatings
l!:hcctrocleposited coatings-specifications
Specifications-electronic applicaltiOJrns
See Electronic
Specifications-fabricated materials
See Fabricated materials-specifications
Speciti.c:iWms-Jren.ciiJag materials
See materials-specifications
Spedfications-ftooring/ftoor
See :Flooring/floor covering
Specifications--gaskets
See Gaskets-specifications
Specifications-glass-fiber-reinforced plastics (GRP)
Specifications-glass-fiber-reinforced plastics (GRP)
See Glass-fiber-reinforced (GRP) plastics-specifications
Specifications-iron materials/applications
See Iron-specifications
Specifications-magnetic materials/applications
Specifications-marine (shipibuilding) materials/applications
See Marine systems/subsystems/equipment-
specifications
See Shipboard materials/applications-specifications
Specifications-masonry units
See Masonry units-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (aluminum)
See Aluminum-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (cobalt)
See Cobalt alloys-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (copper)
See Copper structural materials/applications-
specifications
(iron-nickel-chromium alloys)
See Iron-nickel-chromium alloys-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (molybdenum)
See Molybdenum-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (nickel-copper)
See Nickel-copper alloy-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (nickel-molybdenum)
See Nickel-molybdenum alloys-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (titanium)
See Titanium (Ti)/alloys-specifications
Specifications-metals/alloys (zinc)
See Zinc-specifications
Specifications-mortar
See Mortar-specifications
Specifications-nonpressure piping
See Nonpressure piping-specifications
Specifications-pavement surfaces
Specifications-protective coatings
See Protective coatings-specifications
Specifications-quenched and tempered steels
See Quenched and tempered steels (specifications)
Specifications-reinforced thermosetting plastic (RTP)
See Reinforced thermosetting plastics (RTP)-
specifications
Specifications-reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP)
specifications
Specifications-seamless Cu/Cu alloy tube
Specifications-security equipment
See Security systems and equipment-specifications
Specifications-sewer pipe (thermoplastic)
See Sewer pipe (thermoplastic)-specifications
Specifications-shipbuilding materials/applications
See Shipbuilding materials (general)-specifications
See Shipbuilding steel materials-specifications
Specifications-shipbuilding pipe materials
See Shipbuilding steel pipe materials-specifications
Specifications-shipping containers
specifications
Specifications-storm/sewer drainage pipe
See Storm sewer/drainage pipe-specifications
Specifications-thermoplastic pipe/tube/fittings
See Thermoplastic pipe/tube/fittings-specifications
1856
Specimen preparation (for testing)-corrosion testing
Specimen preparation (for testing)-metals/alloys
Spectacle plate
F1020 (01.07)
Spectroscopy-X-ray fluorescence (XRF)
Fluorescence, Test Method for, A 754/A 754M (01.06)
Specular reflectance
Spherical bearings
tion for, F2443 (01.08)
Spheroidized carbon spring steel
A684/A684M (01.03)
Spikes
F1667 (01.08)
Steel Track Spikes, Specification for, A65 (01.04)
Spill valves
Splices/splicing
Testing Mechanical Splices for Steel Reinforcing Bars, Test
Methods for, A1034/A1034M (01.04)
Split cap hanger (for ships)
F708 (01.07)
Split seals
for, Fl511 (01.07)
Splitting tensile strength
Sports facilities
F2631 (01.06)
Sports facilities playing surfaces
F2000 (01.06)
Spray applications/testing
F1138 (01.07)
Spray-formed steel pipe
Spring-loaded valves
Springs
See Steel springs-specifications
Square barbed nails
F1667 (01.08)
Square-formed upholstery springs
See Steel springs-specifications
Square-head bolts
Stability
Centers of Gravity of a Vessel, Guide for, Fl321 (01.07)
Stability-metals/alloys
Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Sta:nless Steel Parts,
Stainless chromium-nickel-iron alloys
See Chromium-nickel-iron alloys
Stainless steel
A923 (01.03)
A994 (01.01)
tion for, A1069/A1069M (01.03)
Stainless and AHoy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially Heat
A437/A437M (01.01)
ogy Relating to, A941 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Stainless steel-austenitic steel
Sa Austenitic steel
A1049/A1049M (01.05)
Stainless steel-chemical analysis
See Chemical analysis-steel
Stainless steel-ferritic steel
Sa Ferritic stainless steel
A1049/A1049M (01.05)
Stainless steel-specifications
Stainless steel-structural
See Structural steel (SS)
Stainless steel-tool steel
See Tool steel-specifications
Stainless steel alloying additives
Ferrovanadium, Specification for, A102 (01.02)
A835/ A835M (0Ul2)
Stainless steel alloying additives (boron/columbium)
Stainless steel alloying additives (chromium)
Ferrochrome-Silicon, Specification for, A482/A482M (01.02)
Ferrochromium, Specification for, A101 (01.02)
Stainless steel alloying additives (manganese)
A601/A601M (01.02)
Ferromanganese, Specification for, A99 (01.02)
Ferromanganese-Silicon, Specification for, A 701/ A 701M (01.02)
1857
Stainless steel castings-specifications
Stainless steel alloying additives (molybdenum/nickel)
Ferromolybdenum, Specification for, A132 (01.02)
Stainless steel alloying additives (silicon)
Calcium-Silicon Alloys, Specification for, A495 (01.02)
Ferrosilicon, Specification for, A100 (01.02)
Stainless steel alloy (UNS) numbering system
Stainless steel bars/billets
tion for, A1069/A1069M (01.03)
Stainless steel bars/billets-specifications
A582/ A582M (01.03)
ings, Specification for, A484/ A484M (01.03)
A1021/A1021M (01.05)
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes, Specification for, A276 (01.03)
Pressure Vessels, Specification for, A479/A479M (01.03)
Stainless Steel Bars for Compressor and Turbine Airfoils, Specifi-
Stainless steel bolting materials-specifications
Ji;ligh Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applica-
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
for, F593 (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
Stainless Steel Nuts, Specification for, F594 0 1 ~ 0 8 )
F 8 ~ (01.08)
Stainless steel castings
A609/A609M (01.02)
Ferrite Content, Practice for, A 799/ A 799M (01.02)
A487/A487M (01.02)
A356/ A356M (01.02)
for, A352/A352M (01.02)
Stainless steel cladding
A265 (01.04)
A263 (01.04)
A264 (01.04)
Stainless steel (corrosion testing)
Stainless steel fittings-specifications
A988/A988M (01.01)
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings, Specification
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
A815/A815M (01.01)
Stainless steel forgings-specifications
Sa Steel bars/forgings/forging stock-specifications
A705/A705M (01.03)
A1021/A1021M (01.05)
Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for Forging, Specification for,
A314
Stainless Specification for, A473 (01.03)
Stainless Steel Wire Wire Rods for Cold Heading and Cold
Stainless steel needle tubing
Stainless Steel Needle Tubing, Specification for, A908 (OUH)
Stainless steel pipe
Expanded Welded and Silver Brazed Socket Joints for P1pe and
Stainless steel pipe-specifications
Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel for High-Temperature
Service, Specification for, (01.01, 01.02)
A872/A872M (01.02)
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
A928/A928M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
F2015 (01.07)
Single- or Double--Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Speci-
rial) (01.01)
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless
A815/A815M (01.01)
Stainless steel plate/sheet/strip--specifications
1858
tion for, A895 (01.03)
A480/A480M (01.03)
tion for, A1069/A1069M (01.03)
A 793 (01.03)
A264 (01.04)
A947M (01.03)
Stainless steel screws-specifications
for, F593 (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
F837 (01.08)
F837M (01.08)
F880M (01.08)
Stainless steel tube
Guide for, A1015 (01.01)
Stainless steel tube-specifications
Electric-Resistance-\x/elded Carbon Steell\1e-
chanica! Tubing, Specification for, A787/A787M (01.01)
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
F2015 (01.07)
A511/A511M (01.01)
A632 (01.01)
A270/A270M (01.01)
A268/A268M (01.01)
A554 (01.01)
Stainless steel wire-specifications
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Weaving and Knitting Wire,
A1022/A1022M (01.04)
tion for, A581/A581M (01.03)
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods,
Stainless Steel Rope Wire, Specification for, A492 (01.03)
Stainless Steel Spring Wire, Specification for,
A313/A313M (01.03)
Stainless Steel Wire Strand, Specification for, A368 (01.03)
Stairways
1859
Steam surface condenser tubes
Stanchions
F987 (01.07)
Standard colors
Standards
Standards development/review
Standard weight apparatus
See Weight
Standing-body work positions
F1337 (01.07)
Standpipes
for, A795/A795M (01.01)
Staples
F1667 (01.08)
Staples (for ships)
F783 (01.07)
Staterooms
F822 (01.07)
Statically-cast materials/applications
Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal E;olls
for Pressure Vessel Use, Specification for, i
A748/A748M (01.02)
Statically Cast Permanent Mold Gray Iron Castings, Specification
for, A823 (01.02)
Static charge
Station cabinets
for, F1333 (01.07)
Statistical methods-metals/alloys
F1469 (01.08)
Stauff twin clamp hanger (for shipboard piping)
F708 (01.07)
Steam
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
for, F1985 (01.()7)
Steam cooker
Steam service
F1565 (01.07)
Steam surface condenser tubes
See Condenser and heat exchanger systems
Steel flanges-specifications
A989/A989M (01.01)
Steel forgings
A255 (01.05)
A275/A275M (01.05)
A385/A385M (01.06)
brittlement, Practice for, A143/A143M (01.06) -
A384/A384M (01.06)
A388/A388M (01.05)
Steel forgings-specifications
Sa Stainless steel forgings-specifications
A 705/ A 705M (01.03)
A961/A961M (OUH)
for, A456/A456M (01.05)
A314 (01.03)
Stainless Steel Forgings, Specification for, A473 (01.03)
quent Hot Forging, Specification for, A921/ A921M (01.05)
A 788/ A 788M (01.05)
tion for, A909/A909M (01.05)
A503/A503M (01.05)
Steel forgings (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel forgings-specifications
Steel forgings (austenitic steel)
See Austenitic stainless steel forgings-specifications
Steel steel)
steel forgings-specifications
Steel (martensitic stainless steel)
See stainless steel forgings-specifications
Steel forgings (tool steel)
Steel forgings (turbine)
Steel forgings (turbine )-specifications
A768/A768M (01.05)
Vacuum-Treated Alloy Steel Forgings for Turbine Rotor Disks
and Wheels, Specification for, A471/A471M (01.05)
tion for, A469/ A469M (01.05)
Steel furniture (marine)
See Shipboard materials/applications-specifications
Steel gears
A291/A291M (01.05)
Steel hardware-zinc coatings
A385/A385M (01.06)
A384/A384M (01.06)
tion for, A153/A153M (01.06)
Steel hull
Sa Shipbuilding steel materials (structural)
F1071 (01.07)
Steel ingots
Steel line pipe
Sa Black steel pipe-specifications
Steel Line Pipe, Black, Furnace-Butt-Welded, Specification for,
A1037/A1037M (01.01)
Steel line pipe (black)-specifications
Steel needle roller bearings
Steel pipe
1864
Sa Carbon steel pipe-specifications
Sa Steel fittings-specifications
tions for, (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Packaging, Marking, and Methods for Steel Products for
Shipment, Practices for, (01.05)
to Metallic Coated Steel Products, Terminology,
(01.()6)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe [American National
Standard], (Related Material) (01.01)
Index
tance,
Steel Bars, and
ments for, Specification
Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot
for, A702
Specification for,
for
Standards, Section 1
1861
Steel bolting materials-specifications
Steel bars 1 er.1o:x,v
and
Ket:Jmren1ents for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and
ings, for, A484/ A484M
Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for
A314 (01.03)
for and
(01.05)
Flanged Joints,
for,
Tensile
Specification for,
Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts, Specification for,
A183 (01.04)
Hex Bolts and Studs, Steel, Treated,
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use,
for, A352/A352M (01.02)
Stainless steel cladding
A265 (01.04)
A263 (01.04)
A264 (01.04)
Stainless steel (corrosion testing)
Stainless steel fittings-specifications
A988/A988M (01.01)
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
A815/A815M (01.01)
Stainless steel forgings-specifications
Sa Steel bars/forgings/forging stock-specifications
A 705/ A 705M (01.03)
A1021/A1021M (01.05)
A314 (01.03)
Stainless Steel Forgings, Specification for, A473 (01.03)
Stainless steel needle tubing
Stainless steel pipe
Stainless steel pipe-specifications
1858
A872/A872M (01.02)
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
A928/A928M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
F2015 (01.07)
Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Speci-
Standard], ANSI/ASMEB36.19Mm1985 (Related Mate-
rial) (01.01)
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless
A815/A815M (01.01)
Stainless steel plate/sheet/strip--specifications
tion for, A895 (01.03)
A480/A480M (01.03)
tion for, A1069/A1069M (01.03)
A 793 (01.03)
A264 (01.04)
A947M (01.03)
Stainless steel screws-specifications
for, F593 (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Steel couplings
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
Steel deck gear stowage boxes
F1019M (01.07)
Steel doors
See Doors/door assemblies-specifications
Steel fasteners
F1940 (01.08)
Steel fasteners-specifications
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
A761/A761M (01.06)
Steel fences
tion for, F2548 (01.06)
tion for, F2589 (01.06)
Steel fiber-reinforced concrete/shotcrete
Steel fibers
Sa Steel bars (concrete reinforcement- specifications)
Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete, Specification for,
A820/A820M (01.04)
Steel fittings-specifications
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-1emperature Ser-
A350/A350M (01.01)
1863
for, A351/A351M (01.02)
A961/A961M (01.01)
tion for, A522/A522M (01.01)
A592/A592M (01.05)
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
A420/A420M (01.01)
A234/A234M (01.01)
Structural Design of Reinforcements for Fittings in Factory Made
Practice for, A998/ A998M (01.06)
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
for, F682 (01.07)
A815/A815M (01.01)
A758/A758M (01.01)
A350/A350M (01.01)
Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure--Containing Parts, Specification
for, A351/ A351M (01.02)
A96l/A961M (01.01)
Steel strip-zinc coatings
Steel structural shapes
See Structural steel (SS)
Steel structural strand
Steel structural wire rope
See Steel wire rope-specifications
Steel studs
Steel tape
A459 (01.06)
Steel tie plate
Steel tube
tions for, (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Ornamental Fences Employing Steel Tubular Pickets, Specifica
tion for, F2589 (01.06)
A902 (01.06)
for, A1057/A1057M (01.06)
Steel tube-specifications
A608/A608M (01.02)
F2015 (01.07)
Steel tube (alloy steel)
See AHoy steel tube-specifications
Steel tube (electric-resistance-welded)
See Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel tube-
specifications
Steel tube (martensitic stainless steel)
See Martensitic stainless steel
Steel tube (mechanical tubing)
See Mechanical tubing-specifications
Steel tube (structural)
See Structural steel (SS) tube-specifications
Steel valves
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Steel valves-specifications
tions, Specification for, A193/Al93M (01.01)
Specification for, A694/A694M (OUH)
A350/A350M (01.01)
for, A351/A351M (01.02)
A961/A961M (01.01)
tion for, F885 (01.07)
A989/A989M (01.01)
A988/A988M (01.01)
F1020 (01.07)
Steel washers
F436M (01.08)
Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use, Speci-
Steel wheels (for railroads/locomotives)
See Railroad steel materials-wheels
Steel wire
Hydrogen Embrittlement Resistance for Steel Wire Hard Drawn
Used for Prestressing Concrete Pipe, Test Method for,
A1032 (01.04)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Steel wire-specifications
1868
F1667 (01.08)
tion for, A581/A581M (01.03)
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods,
Stainless Steel Rope Wire, Specification for, A492 (01.03)
A313/A313M (01.03)
Stainless Steel Wire, Specification for, A580/ A580M (01.03)
for, A407 (01.03)
Steel Wire, Indented, Low--Relaxation for Prestressed Concrete
Steel Pressure Vessel Winding, Specification for,
(01.03)
for, A974 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Steel Pipe Winding Mesh, Specifica-
tion for,
Steel wire (chromium
Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel pipe-specifications
A961/A961M (01.01)
A972/A972M (01.01)
F2015 (01.07)
Specification A984/A984M (01.01)
Steel Sheet, Metallic and Polymer Precoated for Corm-
Steel Pipe, Specification for, A742/A742M (01.06)
Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
tion for, A865/ A865M (01.01)
Al053/A1053M (01.01)
and Steel Pipe Piles, Specification for,
A252 (01.01)
Zinc--Coated (Galvanized) Steel Pipe Winding Mesh, Specifica-
tion for, A810 (01,06)
Steel pipe arches
See Pipe-arches
Steel pipe (black)
See Black steel pipe-specifications
Steel pipe (electric-fusion-welded)
See Electric-fusion-welded steel pipe
Steel pipe (electric-resistance-welded (ERW))
See Electric-resistance-welded (ERW) steel pipe-
specifications
Steel pipe (ferritic alloy)
See Ferritic steel pipe-specifications
Steel pipe fittings
Steel pipe (high-temperature/pressure service)
See High-temperature service applications-steel pipe
Steel pipe Joints
Steel
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
nipples)
nipples
Steel pipe (sewers and drainage systems)
See Sewer pipe (steel)-specifications
r.orL "''r""'r".-. Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
:Spe:cth,catlon for, A666 (01.03)
Chromium and Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,
Steel plate (zinc-coated (galvanized))
A761/A761M (01.06)
A480/ A480M (01.03)
A6/ A6M (01.04)
General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels,
Strip, Specification for, Al010/A1010M (01.03)
A786/A786M (01.04)
A 793 (01.03)
Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Speciftcation for,
A263 (01.04)
Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced Thermo-
Mechanical Control Process (TMCP), for,
A841/A841M (01.04)
Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for
Applications, Specification for, A 770/ A 770M
Tool Steel High Speed, Specification for, A600
Steel plate (ultrasonic examination)
A578/ A578M (01.04)
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Steel plate (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel plate-specifications
Steel plate (carbon steel)
See Carbon steel plate-specifications
Steel plate (chromium alloy)
1865
See Chromium alloy steel plate-specifications
Steel plate (high-strength/low alloy (HSLA))
See HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel-specifications
Steel plate (manganese alloy)
See Manganese alloy steel plate-specifications
Steel plate (nickel alloy)
See Nickel alloy steel plate-specifications
Steel plate pipe-specifications
Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and
Over), Specification for, A134 (OUH)
Steel plate (pressure vessels)
See Pressure vessel steel plate-specifications
Steel plates/shapes/bars-specifications
A6/ A6M (01.04)
Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Pro-
Steel
Quenching and Self-Tempering Process
Specification for, A913/A9l3M (01.04)
Struc1tur:al steel (SS) plate-specifications
A896/A896M (01.06)
Index of ASTM Standards,
Steel bolting materials-specifications
Section 1
A453/A453M (01.01)
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
F432 (01.08)
for, F593 (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten-
Steel bolting materials (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel bolting materials-specifications
Steel bolting materials (eyebolts)
See Eyebolts (steel)
Steel bolting materials (nuts)
See Nuts-specifications
Steel bolting materials (rivets)
See Rivets
Steel bolting materials (screws)
See Steel screws-specifications
Steel bolting materials (studs)
See Studs (materials/applications)-specifications
Steel bolting materials (washers)
See Steel washers
Steel bulkhead panels
F1071 (01.07)
Steel cable
cation for, A1023/A1023M (01.03)
Steel castings
A956 (01.05)
Steel Castings Sampling, Specification for, A1062 (01.02)
Steel Castings, Welding, Qualifications of Procedures and Person-
nel, Practice for, A488/A488M (01.02)
Test Coupons for Steel Castings, Specification for,
A1067/A1067M (01.02)
Steel castings-specifications
A560/A560M (01.02)
1862
for, A1001 (01.02)
F1020 (01.07)
A487/A487M (01.02)
A216/A216M (01.02)
A915/A915M (01.02)
A27/A27M (01.02)
A447/A447M (01.02)
A297/A297M (01.02)
A903/A903M (01.02)
Steel castings (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (austenitic alloy)
See Austenitic stainless steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (carbon steel)
See Carbon steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (ferritic alloy)
See Ferritic steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (investment)
See Investment castings-specifications
Steel castings (iron-chromium alloy)
Steel castings (martensitic alloy)
See Martensitic stainless steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (stainless steel)
See Stainless steel castings-specifications
Steel castings (zinc-coated (galvanized))
See Zinc-coated steel castings-specifications
Steel chain
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Steel chain-specifications
A973/A973M (01.05)
A391/A391M (01.05)
A467/A467M (01.05)
Steel chain-link fence fabric
Steel corrosion
Sa Corrosion-metals/alloys
A857/A857M (01.04)
Steel sheet (porcelain enameling)
See Porcelain enamel products
Steel sheet/strip
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Steel sheet/strip-alloy steel
See Alloy steel sheet/strip-specifications
Steel sheet/strip-carbon (cold-rolled)
See Carbon steel sheet/strip-specifications
Steel sheet/strip-carbon steel
Sa Carbon steel sheet/strip-specifications
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness CoiJs, Hot-Rolled, Car-
A1018/ A1018M (01.03)
Steel sheet/strip-structural
Sa Structural steel (SS) sheet/strip-specifications
A1031/A1031M (01.03)
Steel sheet/strip/plate
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Steel sheet/strip/plate--specifications
tion for, A895 (01.03)
A480/A480M (01.03)
A263 (01.04)
A264 (01.04)
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip, Specification for, A176 (01.03)
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip, Specification for, A167 (01.03)
Steel sheet (terne-coated)
See Terne-coated steel sheet-specifications
Steel sheet (zinc/zinc alloy-coated)
Sa Zinc-coated steel sheet-specifications
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Aluminum-Magnesium Alloy-Coated by the
Steel springs-specifications
A689 (01.05)
A231/A231M (01.03)
A 764 (01.06)
1867
Steel strip--zinc coatings
A313/A313M (01.03)
A125 (01.05)
tion for, A1000/A1000M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Specification for,
A401/ A401M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Chrome-Silicon-Vanadium
Alloy Valve Spring Quality, Specification for,
A877/A877M (01.03)
for, A227/A227M (01.03)
for, A407 (01.03)
Steel Wire, High Tensile Strength, Cold Drawn, Specification for,
A679/A679M (01.03)
Steel Wire, High-Carbon Spring, for Heat-Treated Components,
Steel Wire, Modified Chromium Vanadium Valve Spring Quality,
Steel Wire, Quenched and Tempered for Mechanical Springs,
A684/A684M (01.03)
Steel springs (musical instruments)-specifications
Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality, Specification for,
A228/A228M (01.03)
Steel springs (upholstery )-specifications
for, A407 (01.03)
Steel springs (valve)-specifications
Steel Wire, Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Chrome-Silicon-Vanadium
Alloy Valve Spring Quality, Specification for,
A877/A877M (01.03)
Steel Wire, Modified Chromium Vanadium Valve Spring Quality,
Steel stowage lockers
F1019M (01.07)
F1018 (01.07)
Steel strand
Testing Multi-Wire Steel Strand, Test Methods for,
A1061/A1061M (01.04)
Steel strip
A480/A480M (01.03}
A749/A749M (01.03)
Steel strip-carbon steel
See Carbon steel sheet/strip-specifications
Steel strip-zinc coatings
A385/A385M (01.06)
Structural steel (SS) castings-specifications
Structural steel (SS) castings-specifications
Sa Alloy steel castings-specifications
Sa Austenitic stainless steel castings-specifications
Sa Carbon steel castings-specifications
Sa Steel castings-specifications
A447/A447M (01.02)
tion for, A148/A148M (01.02)
Structural steel (SS) forgings-specifications
A579/A579M (01.05)
Structural steel (SS) piles-specifications
A6/A6M (01.04)
A690/A690M (01.04)
A857/A857M (01.04)
A252 (01.01)
Structural steel (SS) pipe
Structural steel (SS) pipe-specifications
A761/A761M (01.06)
Structural steel (SS) plate
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by
Thermo-Mechanical Controlled Process (TMCP), Specifica-
tion for, A1066/A1066M (01.04)
Structural steel (SS) plate-specifications
Alloy Structural Steel Plates, Specification for,
A829/ A829M (01.04)
A979/A979M (01.06)
A 761/ A 761M (01.06)
A6/ A6M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
A87l/A871M (01.04)
A514/A514M (01.04)
A786/A786M (01.04)
A656/A656M (01.04)
Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality, Furnished to Chemical
Composition Requirements, Specification for,
A830/A830M (01.04)
A841/A841M (01.04)
tion for, A573/A573M (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
A13l/A131M (01.04)
Structural steel (SS) shapes-specifications
1872
A769/A769M (01.04)
General Requirements for Rolled Stmctural Steel Bars, Plates,
A6/A6M (01.04)
Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality,
Speciii<;aticm for, A529/A529M (01.04)
,uw-14clllllv Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel,
for, (01.04)
Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Pro-
()uenc:hlrtg and Self-Tempering Process
SpecltH;atHm (01.04)
uuvv-rl.l.l\.IV Structural Steel, Specification for,
A231/A231M (01.03)
A313/A313M (01.03)
Steel Chromium-Silicon Alloy, Specification for,
(01.03)
Steel Chromium-Silicon Chrome-Silicon-Vanadiu:n
for,
Steel Modified Chromium Vanadium Valve
'-'1-''-''-'ll"'"u''u for, A878/A878M (01.03)
Quality,
Steel wire (coated)
Weight (Mass) of Metallic
Test Method for, Lea, .., ... 'U .. , ... - ... n ...
Conto,rming Organic
Chain-Link
Zinc-Coated
A392 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope, Specitication for,
A603 (01.06)
Deformed and Plain Stainless Steel and Welded Wire for
Reintorc:en1ertt, Specification for,
.uuvAv-'-,v"'<"'-' Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
SpecHH;atH)n for, A884/A884M (01.04)
for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete, Specification for,
A820/A820M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Seven-Wire, ,_,u.vv'"''""'"' Compacted, Stress-Relieved
A779/A779M (01.04)
Welded Wire Kemtorc:en1entt, Deformed, for Concrete,
SpecrtH;atH)n for, (01.04)
Steel Wire Plain, for Concrete, Specifica-
tion for, A185/A185M
Steel for Concrete Reinforcement, Specification
for, (01.04)
Steel Wire,
Specification
Steel wire strand-specifications
Steel wire (prestressed concrete)
1869
stressed Concrete, Specification for, A886/ A886M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Seven-Wire, Uncoated, Compacted, Stress-Relieved
for Prestressed Concrete, Specification for,
A 779/ A 779M (01.04)
for, A416/A416M (01.04)
Steel Hard-Drawn for Prestressed Concrete Pipe, Specifica-
tion for, A648 (01.04)
cation for, A821/A821M
Uncoated Stress-Relieved
Uncoated, Stress-Relieved Steel Bars Prestressed Concrete
wire rod
Ke1qUJren1en.ts for Wire and Wire Rods,
SpecltH:atHJn for, A555/A555M (01.03)
Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,
A510/A510M (01.03)
Steel wire
Steel wire roJ>e---SJ>eciticati,ons
Metallic-Coated Wire Rope and
Guardrail, Specification for, A741
Stainless Steel Rope Wire, Specification (01.03)
A603 (01.06)
wire strand
A981/A981M (01.04)
Wire Strand, Specification for,
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel for,
Strand, Indented, Stress-Relieved for Pre-
stressed Concrete, for, A886/ A886M (01.04)
Steel Strand, Seven-Wire, Compacted, Stress-Relieved
A779/A779M (01.04)
l.Jncoated, Weldless, and 3-Wire Steel Strand for Prestressed
Concrete, for, A910/A910M (01.04)
Alloy-Coated Steel Overhead
for, A925 (01.06)
Galvaniz,ed) Steel Overhead Ground Wire Strand,
for, (01.06)
Parallel and Helical Steel Wire Structural Strand,
Specttic:atlcm for, A586 (01.06)
Steel Strand for of Figure 8
Cable, Specification for, A640
A385/A385M (01.06)
Steel posts/rails (for chain link fence)
Steel rails
Carbon Steel Tee Rails, Specification for, Al (01.04)
Steel reduction
cation for, A427 I A427M (01.05)
Steel reinforcing bars
Sa Structural steel (SS) bars-specifications
Testing Mechanical Splices for Steel Reinforcing Bars, Test
Methods for, A1034/A1034M (01.04)
Zinc and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specifica-
tion for, A1055/A1055M (01.04)
Steel rod
Steel rolls
Steel sampling
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel, Speci-
Steel screws-specifications
F912M (01.08)
A574 (01.08)
A574M (01.08)
F738M (01.08)
F837 (01.08)
F837M (01.08)
F880M (01.08)
Steel shapes
See Structural steel (SS) shapes-specifications
Steel sheet
A1004/A1004M (01.06)
Measuring Flatness Characteristics of Steel Sheet Products, Prac-
tice for, A1030/A1030M (01.06)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
A902 (01.06)
Steel Sheet, Twin-Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
A1073/A1073M (01.06)
Steel sheet-specifications
tion for, A895 (01.03)
A480/A480M (01.03)
A263 (01.04)
A264 (01.04)
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip, Specification for, A176 (01.03)
1866
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip, Specification for, A167 (01.03)
Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated and Polymer Precoated for CoiTu-
Steel Sheet, Teme (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Pro-
A424/A424M (01.03)
A947M (01.03)
Steel sheet (Al-coated)
See Aluminum-coated steel sheet-specifications
Steel sheet (alloy steel)
See Alloy steel sheet/strip-specifications
Steel sheet (carbon steel)
See Carbon steel sheet-specifications
Steel sheet (high-strength/low-alloy)
See HSLA (high-strength low-alloy) steel sheet/strip-
specifications
Steel sheet piling-specifications
A690/A690M (01.04)
Structural building materials/applications-specifications
F959M (01.08)
Structural building materials/applications (wood)
See Wood products
Structural deck
See Decks
Structural fasteners
Sa Fasteners (metal)
F959M (01.08)
Structural insulation
F2877 (01.07)
Structural performance (of building materials)
See Performance--building materials/applications
Structural rivets
See Rivets
Structural rock
Structural shipbuilding materials/applications
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Gastight /Airtight, Weathertight,
F1073 (01.07)
Doors, Double, Gastightl Airtight, Individually Dogged, for Ma-
F1070 (01.07)
F1069 (01.07)
F1071 (01.07)
FU30 (01.07)
F1455 (01.07)
F2877 (01.07)
A131/A131M (01.04)
Strucutural steel rivets-specifications
Rivets, Steel, Structural, Specification for, A502 (01.08)
Structural steel (SS)
Sa Bridge/structural materials
Sa Generator materials
Sa Structural steel (SS) bars-specifications
A896/A896M (01.06)
A385/A385M (01.06)
A902 (01.06)
1871
Structural steel (SS) bolting materials-specifications
brittlement, Practice for, A143/Al43M (01.06)
A384/A384M (01.06)
Structural Steel with Improved Yield Strength at High Tempera-
ture for Use in Buildings, Specification for,
A1077/A1077M (01.04)
Structural steel (SS)-specifications
A769/A769M (01.04)
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel, Speci
Structural steel (SS) bars-specifications
A311/A311M (01.05)
A6/A6M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
A322 (01.05)
for, A576 (01.05)
for, A575 (01.05)
A 709/ A 709M (01.04)
A131/A131M (01.04)
Structural steel (SS) bolting materials-specifications
"Twist Off" Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten-
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten
Terminology
Terminology
Fl6 Mechanical Fasteners, Tenninology for, F1789 (01.08)
Terminology-building materials/applications
of, F547 (01.08)
Terminology-metals/alloys materials/applications
01.05)
Iron Castings, Terminology Relating to, A644 (01.02)
A902 (01.06)
ogy Relating to, A941 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Terminology-shipboard applications
for, F1511 (01.07)
Terne-coated steel sheet
Teme-coated steel sheet-specifications
Steel Sheet, Teme (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Pro-
Textured stainless steel sheet
A947M (01.03)
Textured tape
F2168 (01.07)
Thermal
Thermal analysis (TA)
Thermal insulating fitting covers
See Pipe thermal insulation
Thermal insulating materials (block/board)
Thermal insulating materials (mineral fiber)
Thermal insulating materials (pipe)
Sa Pipe thermal insulation
Thermistor sensors
F2362 (01.07)
Thermocouples
F2362 (01.07)
Thermomechanical control process (TMCP)
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by
Thermo-Mechanical Controlled Process (TMCP), Specifica-
tion for, A1066/A1066M (01.04)
and Restricted Sulfur for Improved. Weldability, Formability,
A841/A841M (01.04)
Thermoplastic elastomers (TPE)-specifications
Thermoplastic pipe/tube/fittings
specifications
Thermoplastic pipe/tube/fittings-specifications
Sa Sewer pipe (thermoplastic)-spedfications
Thermoplastics-specifications
Thermosetting plastic pipe/tubing/fittings
spedfications
Thermosetting resins
Tension Testing of Wire Ropes and Strand, Test Method for,
A931 (01.03)
Thickness
Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications, Specification for, A770/A770M (01.04)
Thinnest spot test
Thin-walled irrigation pipe
See Irrigation piping-specifications
Thin-walled pressure vessels
1876
Carbon and Steel
sels, for,
Threaded couplings
Threaded Couplings,
Welded or .:;e<nmess.
tion for, fHI,O::!J.&{j,o;,J.VJ
Threaded fasteners
Black or Zinc-Coated
Use in Steel Pipe
(01.01)
on Threaded Fasteners (Metric), Speci-
(01.08)
on Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch
Specification for,
Load-Indicating Externally Threaded Fasteners, Specification for,
F2482 (01.08)
A709/A709M (01.04)
A131/A131M (01.04)
Structural steel (SS) sheetlstrip-specifications
A6/A6M (01.04)
A632 (01.01)
Steel Metallic Coated
J:iOit-l<.<)Hea. Alloy,
,_,v.,ru"" and High-
Fm"In<tbility, General
for, Specification for, (01.03)
Steel, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
L,uw-,'-'\cuuv. High-Strength Low-Alloy with Im-
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength, Specification
A1011/A1011M (01.03)
tion for, A1008/A1008M (01.03)
Structural steel (SS) tube
A1076/A1076M (01.01)
Structural steel (SS) tube-specifications
A500/A500M (01.01)
Structural steel
See
Structural strand
Studs
Inspection for Use of Anaerobic Thread Locking Com-
pounds with Studs, Practice for, Fll79 (01.07)
Selecting Bolting for Piping System Flanged Joints,
Practice for, (01.07)
PSI Tensile Strength,
Stainless
for, F593
F738M (01.08)
Superheater tubes-specifications
Smface Discontinuities of Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and
Stuffing tubes
Style 1 stainless steel metric nuts
F836M (01.08)
Sub-heat process
A957/A957M (01.02)
Containing Parts, Specification for, A 985/ A985M (01.02)
Submarine hulls
Anodes, Sacrificial Zinc Alloy, Specification for, F1182 (0Ui7)
Substations
F901 (01.08)
Subsurface abrasion
Subsurface installation
systems
Suction strainer boxes
Sulfide removal
Sulfur
Sulfuric add stripping
Sunlight/monochromatic light exposure
Superalloy steels-specifications
for, A638/ A638M (01.03)
A891/ A891M (01.05)
Superficial Rockwell hardness
See Rockwell hardness
1873
Sa Condenser and heat exchanger systems
cation for, A266/ A266M (01.05)
A213/A213M (01.01)
Steel wire strand-specifications
Steel wire (tendon)
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete
Specification for, A421/A421M (01.04) '
Step structure
Stirrup rung
F783 (01.07)
Stockade picket fences
F537 (01.06)
Stockholm invariant convention
See Corrosion
Stoker links
Stone
Stone anchors
Storage containers/tanks-specifications
Storerooms
F1071 (01.07)
Storm sewer/drainage pipe
Storm sewer/drainage pipe-specifications
A978/A978M (01.06)
for, A888 (01.02)
Storm sewer/drainage structures-specifications
A964/A964M (01.06)
Storm sewer/drainage tube
Stoves
Stowage
F1019M (01.07)
F1018 (01.07)
Straight-beam ultrasonic testing
Sa Ultrasonic testing-steel
A578/A578M (01.04)
Straight line poultry fence fabric
Strainers
F1199 (01.07)
Stranded carbon steel wire rope
cation for, A1023/A1023M (01.03)
Strand (tendons)
Strap hanger (for ships)
F708 (01.07)
Strength--construction materials/applications
Stress
Stress corrosion cracking (SCC)
See Corrosion
Stress grading-lumber
See Wood products
Stress-relieved steel bars
A311/A311M (01.05)
Stress-relieved steel strand (for prestressed concrete)
See Steel wire (prestressed concrete)
Stress-relieved steel wire
Striker plate
1870
Structural analysis/applications-steel
Structural backfill
Tank bottoms
for, F991M (01.07)
Tanks
Tanks-specifications
Tank vent :flame arresters
Tapered refractory brick/shapes
Tapered structural steel tube
Sa Structural steel (SS) tube-specifications
TCR (temperature coefficient of resistance)
Telecommunications-specifications
A947M (01.03)
Telephone systems
Temperature instrumentation
See Thermocouples
Temperature monitoring equipment
F2362 (01.07)
Temperature service applications (high)
See High-temperature service applications
Temperature service applications (high-steel)
See High-temperature service applications-steel bolting
applications
Temperature service applications (elevated)
See Elevated temperature service applications
Temperature service applications (elevated)-steel
See Elevated temperature service applications-steel
Temperature tests
A991/A991M (01.03)
Temperature tests-metals/alloys
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Temperature uniformity
A991/A991M (01.03)
Tempered structural steel-specifications
Sa Quenched and tempered steels (specifications)
A871/ A871M (01.04)
A709/A709M (01.04)
1875
Tension wire
Tennis courts
F969 (01.06)
Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Inter--
Tensile properties/testing-metallic materials
F959M (01.08)
A6/A6M (01.04)
Tensile properties/testing-steel
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
A931 (01.03)
Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications, Specification for, A 770/ A 770M (01.04)
Tensile property classification
A6/A6M (01.04)
Tensile requirements
Tensile strength
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Tensile strength requirements
A27/ A27M (01.02)
Tension bars and brace bands
Tension control structural bolt/nut/washer assembly
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten
Tension indicators
Sa Direct tension indicators (DTI)
Carbon and Alloy Steel Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Ten-
sion Indicators for Use with Cap Screws, Bolts, Anchors,
and Studs, Specification for, F2437 (01.08)
Tension testing
A1058 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Tension wire
Fence, Specification for, .11'1664 (01.06)
Ultrasonic testing-steel
Unannealed austenitic stainless steel tube
Uncoated areas (of galvanized coatings)
Coatings, Practice for, A780/A780M (01.06)
Uncoated steel
A981/A981M (01.04)
Railroad Ties, Specification for, A911/A91lM (01.04)
Underground installation
Underground installation-pipe materials/applications
Underground installation-water supply/distribution systems
Sa Water supply/distribution systems-specifications
Underground storage tanks (USTs)
See Tanks
Underlayment products/applications-specifications
F1667 (01.08)
Underwater pressure test
Unfaced thermal insulation
Unfinned end diameters
Unhardened steel washers
Uniaxial tensile test
Unified inch screw threads (UN!UNR)
F1941 (01.08)
NuJmberiJlg System (UNS)
and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System
Practice for, E527 (01.01)
Cond11cting Temperature Uniformity Surveys of Furnaces Used to
Heat Steel Products, Test Method for,
A991/ A991M (01.03)
United States Coast Guard (USCG)
Unit weight
See Weight
Universal expansion joint
Universal mill edge
A6/A6M (01.04)
Unreinforced nylon plastics
See Nylon plastics (PA)
Unsaturated hydrocarbons
See Hydrocarbons
Unseasoned/untreated lumber
See Wood products
Untreated die forgings
Upholstery steel spring wire
for, A407 (01.03)
Used lubricating oils
User requirements
F1667 (01.08)
Utility cable
cation for, A1023/A1023M (01.03)
UNS C46400 (naval brass, uninhibited)
F2215 (01.08)
UNS G10080 (carbon steel)
F2215 (01.08)
UNS Gl0220 (carbon steel)
F2215 (01.08)
UNS G51986 (Cr alloy steel)
F2215 (01.08)
UNS G52986 (Cr aHoy steel)
F2215 (01.08)
UNS J93371 (duplex alloy steel casting, 3A)
Resistant, (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Applica-
1880
tion, for, A890/ A890M (01.02)
UNS J93372 (cast duplex Cr-Ni-Cu-Mo-N stainless steel)
Iron--Chromium-Nickel-Molybdenum Corrosion-
'"""''H"''"" Duplex (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Applica-
UNS N04400 (Ni-Cu Monel 400)
Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Screws, Socket Head Cap
and Studs for Specification for, F468
(Metric), Specification for, F468M (Ol.mn
F467 (01.08)
Threaded pipe
A135/A135M (01.01)
Threaded steel/bolts/screws/studs
Method for, F2328 (01.mn
Test Method for, F2328M (01.08)
Thread locking fasteners
pounds with Studs, Practice for, .F1179 (01.07)
Threshold temperature
Throttle valves
Steel Carbon, Low Alloy, and Stainless Steel, Heavy-
Steam Turbines, Specification for,
A356/A356M (01.02)
Thrm:tgh-thickne1>S testing
"'v"""'"' Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applicaticms, Specification for, A 770/ A 770M (01.04)
Thrusters
Thrust test
Tbyssen grade 45653
Tie plates
Ties
Railroad Ties, Specification for, A881/ A881M (01.04)
Tie wires/dips/fasteners
Timber
Tin and Hot Tin/Lead Dip on Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Met-
als, Specification for, A1074 (01.06)
Tin-coated steel sheet
Sa Steel sheet
Tin coating weights
Tin crystal size test
A623
Requirements Metric, Specification
De:termi,nation of Tin Coating Weights for Electrolytic Tin Plate,
Characteristics of Tin Mill Products, Practice
for, (01.06)
Mechanical 1esting of Steel Products, Test Methods and Defini-
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
Tool steel-specifications
Tin mill products-specifications
tion for, A648 (01.04)
A657/A657M (01.06)
Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Double Reduced, Specification
for, A650/A650M (01.06)
Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single-Reduced, Specification for,
A625/ A625M (01.06)
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Tin min (coating thickness)
Coating (Mass) of Metallic
Fluorescence, Test Method for,
Tinplate
for, A987/A987M (01.06)
Titanium alloying additives
Titanium alloy pipe/tube-specifications
F2015 (01.07)
Titanium alloys
F1077 (01.08)
Titanium plus palladium-specifications
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
Titanium (Ti)/alloys-specifications
1877
and Studs for General Use, Specification for, .F468 (01.08)
F467 (01.08)
F467M (01.08)
A836/A836M (01.01)
Titration
TMCP
See Thermomechanical control process (TMCP)
Tolerances-metals/alloys
A835/A835M (01.02)
Tool steel-specifications
Tool Steels Alloy, Specification for, A681 (01.05)
Superstrength alloy steel forgings
A579/A579M (01.05)
Superstructures-ships
F1130 (01.07)
Surface abrasion resistance
Surface acceptance standards
Steel Castings, Surface Acceptance Standards, Magnetic Pruticle
A903/A903M (01.02)
Surface analysis-metals/alloys
A275/A275M (01.05)
Selection of Committee Fl 6 Fastener Specifications, Guide for,
F1077 (01.08)
A578/A578M (01.04)
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used for Ma-
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Surface-beam Rayleigh waves
Surface condensers
Surface descalinglcleaning
Surface hardening/hardness
Sa Hardness tests
Surface preparation
Surface resistivity
Surface ships-materials/applications
for, F1808 (01.07)
1874
Surge current
F1507 (01.07)
Surge line turbocharger
F1338 (01.07)
Surge suppressors
F1507 (01.07)
Survival craft
Susceptibility
Swaged welded/cast/forged turnbuckles
F1145 (01.07)
Swimming pools
Swing expansion joint
Swing-type fence gates
Automated Vehicular Gate Construction, Specification for,
F2200 (01.06)
F900 (01.06)
Switchboards
F1331 (01.07)
Switches
F1337 (01.07)
Switch position proximity
Swivel traps
A861 (01.02)
Symbols
Systems
F'1337 (01.07)
T
Tables
Sa Shipboard materials/applications-specifications
Tachometers
Tachometers, Various, Specification for, F2046 (01.07)
Tandem seals
for, F1511 (01.07)
Tubular products
Guide for, A1015 (01.01)
Tubular sleeving
See Sleeves/sleeving-specifications
Tungsten
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
Tungsten-specifications
Ferrotungsten, Specification for, A144 (01.02)
Tungsten alloying additives
Thngsten alloys
Thngsten carbide
F2215 (01.08)
Tungsten high-speed tool steel
Tungsten-rhenium thermocouple systems
See Thermocouples
Turbine airfoiVbladelbucket applications
Stainless Steel Bars for Compressor and Turbine Airfoils, Specifi-
Turbine generators
Turbine rotors/shafts
A891/ A891M (01.05)
A940/A940M (01.05)
A 768/ A 768M (01.05)
Thrbines
tion for, A962/A962M (01.01)
Turbines-steel forgings
See Steel forgings (turbine)
Turbine-type bolting material
A437/A437M (01.01)
Turbocharger
F1338 (01.07)
Thrnbuckles
F1145 (01.07)
1879
Twin-roll casting
Twist
Torsion Testing of Wire, Test Method for, A938 (01.03)
"Twist off" type bolt/nut/washer assembly
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi Minimum Ten-
Type K (sheathed) thermocouple
See Thermocouples
Type "Mu" pipe
A861 (01.02)
u
U-bolt hangers/joints (for shipboard piping)
F708 (01.07)
U-channel
Flanged Steel U-Channel Posts, Specification for, A1075 (01.05)
Udimet alloy
A453/A453M (01.01)
Bars and Shapes, Specification for, A564/ A564M (01.03)
Ultimate shear strength
See Shear testing
Ultra-high strength cold-rolled steel
tion for, A980/A980M (01.03)
Ultrasonic contact impedance method
Portable Hardness Testing by the Ultrasonic Contact Impedance
Method, Test Method for, A1038 (01.05)
Ultrasonic testing
A609/ A609M (01.02)
Shapes, Specification for, A898/A898M (01.04)
A578/ A578M (01.04)
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates, Specificatior
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings, Practice foe
A745/A745M (01.05)
A503/ A503M (01.05)
A388/A388M (01.05)
Wax coatings-specifications
Wax coatings-specifications
tion for, A153/A153M (01.06)
Weathering
F1073 (01.07)
F1069 (01.07)
.F1077 (01.08)
Weathering steels
A563M (01.08)
Weaving wire
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Weaving and Knitting Wire,
Webster hardness
See Hardness tests
Wedge tension testing
Sa Tensile properties/testing
Weight
Weight control requirements
for, F1808 (01.07)
Weight saving steel
A242/A242M (01.04)
Welded attachment links
Forged Grade 80 and Grade 1 00 Steel Lifting Components and
A952/A952M (01.05)
Welded construction
A1077/A1077M (01.04)
Welded layered pressure vessels
Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Pressure Vessels,
Welded/seamless wrought steel pipe
rial) (01.01)
Welded steel bars/shapes-specifications
A769/A769M (01.04)
A970/A970M (01.04)
A242/A242M (01.04)
Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement,
Welded steel castings-specifications
Sa Steel castings
A216/A216M (01.02)
Welded steel forgings
A275/A275M (01.05)
Welded steel forgings-specifications
Sa Steel forgings-specifications
for, A837/A837M (01.05)
Welded steel materials/applications
A384/A384M (01.06)
Welded steel materials/applications-specifications
Sa Structural steel (SS)
A769/A769M (01.04)
A467/A467M (01.05)
A543/A543M (01.04)
Welded steel pipe--specifications
1884
Black and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless for Fire Protection Use, Specification
for, (01.01)
A691/A691M (01.01)
tion for, A814/A814M (01.01)
Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel 4 and Over),
:Speclh<;atH)Il for, A139/A139M
Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Service and General Appli-
cations, for, A358/A358M (01.01)
F467M (01.08)
UNS N04405
Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications,
::>pecll1t:atHm for, A240/A240M (01.03)
Austenitic Chromium-Nickel. Stainless
Temr1en1tu:re Service and General Appli-
A358/A358M (01.01)
UNS N08810 800H)
Chromium and Steel Plate, Sheet,
::;peclh<:atHm for, A240/ A240M (01.03)
Elc:ctr1c-Jt<mam1 vve11Jea Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless
lernpe:rature Service and General Appli-
Speclh<:atl<)n A358/A358M (01.01)
Chrornitnn--Nilckel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,
Vessels and for General Applications,
A240/ A240M (01.03)
1881
UNS T11350 (bearing steel)
Nonferrous Nuts General Usc (Metric), Specification
F467M (01.08)
Specification for,
( cl.JtroJtnhJm metal)
Chromium Metal, Specitlcation for,
UNS R50250
Nonfenous
and Studs for
Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap
Spt:cifiication for,
(01.02)
General lJ se,
Nonferrous for General lJse (Metric), :specinc:ClWm for.,
F467M (01.08)
UNS R50400
Nonferrous Nuts General Use (Metric), Specification for,
F467M (01.08)
UNS
Screws, Socket Head
Specification for,
(Metric), for, F468M (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts General Use, Specification for,
F467 (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts for General
F467M (01.08)
UNS R50700
(Metric), Specification for,
Screws, Socket
Specification for,
Nonfenous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General
(Metric), for, (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts General Use, Specification for,
F467 (01.08)
Nonferrous Nuts for General Use (Metric), Specification
F467M (01.08)
stainless
Bearings, Ferrous and Nonferrous for in V\AA' "''F''
(01.08)
Ferrous and Nonferrous for Use
Applications, Specification for,
Balls, Bearings, Ferrous and Nonferrous for Use in D'"'-""'"''''
Valves, and Bearing Applications, Specif-ication for,
F2215 (01.08)
Tool steel bars
Tool steel bars
Macroetch Testing of Tool Steel Bars, Practice for, A561 (01.05)
Topcoatings
for, F1428 (01.08)
Top rails
Top rail sleeves
Tops
Topside (ships)
F1130 (01.07)
Top side stowage baskets
Torsion springs
A689 (01.05)
Torsion testing
Total energy impact test
See Impact testing
Total hydrocarbons (THC)
See Hydrocarbons
Total luminous reflectance
Total/normal reflectance/transmittance
Total surface oil
A623 (01.06)
for, A623M (01.06)
Track bolts and nuts-specifications
A183 (01.04)
Tractors
Automotive Gray Iron Castings, Specification for, A159 (01.02)
"T" rails
Sa Rail steel bars
Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from "T" Rails, Specifica-
tion for, A499 (01.05)
Transducers
Transilluminated displays
F1337 (01.07)
Transition
Transition couplings
Sa Couplings-specifications
1878
C1460 (01.02)
Transmission fluids
Transmission lines (electric)
Transmission systems
F901 (01.08)
Traps
A861 (01.02)
Trellis wire
Trenches
Applications, Practice for, A 796/A 796M (01.06)
Tribological systems
Tribometer
Triple spot test
Trucks
A656/A656M (01.04)
True continuous magnetization technique
True shear strength
See Shear testing
Trunk cut nails
F1667 (01.08)
Trusses
Truss rod assembly
Tubing
A1076/A1076M (01.01)
Pneumatic Leak Testing of Tubing, Test Method for,
A1047/A1047M (01.01)
Tubular glass/plastic reading indicators
A275/A275M (01.05)
Thereof, Practice for, A800/ A800M (01.02)
A578/ A578M (01.04)
tion for, A435/A435M (01.04)
for, A577/A577M (01.04)
Vitreous glass enamels
See Enamel coatings
Volatility
See Evaporators/evaporation
Voltage
F1207M (01.07)
Voltage transients
F1507 (01.07)
Volumetric measurement-petroleum products
Vulcanization characteristics
w
WaiDe board
Warpage
A384/A384M (01.06)
Warping heads
Washers/washer assemblies-specifications
"Twist Off' Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Ten-
Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Inter
1883
Wax coatings
F436M (01.08)
tion for, F2282 (01.08)
Waste materials/processing-shipboard
F1799 (01.07)
Water corrosivity
Water jetting
Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Part.s,
Water supply/distribution systems-marine vessels
See Marine systems/subsystems/equipment-
specifications
Water supply/distribution systems-specifications
A978/A978M (01.06)
tion for, A589/A589M (01.01)
Watertight doors
Door Fittings, for Watertight /Gas tight I Airtight, Weathertight,
F1073 (01.07)
F1069 (01.07)
Fll96 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07)
Watertight manhole cover assembly
Water trap
Water tube (copper/copper alloy)
Water washable penetrants
Waterways
F1878 (01.07)
Water well pipe
Sa Carbon steel pipe-specifications
tion for, A589/A589M (01.01)
Wax coatings
A385/A385M (01.06)
Coatings, Practice for, A 780/ A 780M (01.06)
Zinc alloys-specifications
Zinc-aluminum-magnesium alloy
Zinc-aluminum-mischmetal alloy (Zn-Al-MM)
Wire, Specification for, (01.06)
Specification for, A855/A85SM (01.06)
Zinc-aluminum (ZA) coatings
Zinc-S %Aluminum (Hot-Dip) Coatings on Iron and Steel Prod-
Zinc-coated fence fabric
Installation of Chain-Link Fence, Practice for, F567 (01.06)
A392 (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel castings
A38S/A385M (01.06)
A384/A384M (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel castings-specifications
Zinc-coated steel pipe-specifications
for, A795/A795M (01.01)
Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains,
Speciti1:.:atl1Jn for, A 760/A 760M (01.06)
Black and Zinc-Coated, Welded and
c)I;;(JIHW::1>1>, Specification (01.01)
Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for
Structures, Specification for, F1083 (01.06)
Threaded Couplings, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded or Seamless, Use in Steel Pipe Joints, Specifica-
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
tion for, A810 (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel plate-specifications
A761/A761M (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel products
A1076/A1076M (01.01)
A385/A385M (01.06)
A459 (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel products-specifications
tion for, Al53/A153M (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel sheet
Zinc-coated steel sheet-specifications
A788/A788M (01.05)
1888
Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corm-
Steel Pipe, Specification for, A929/A929M (01.06)
Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applica-
ialvan:ne<lle<i) by the Hot-Dip Process, Specification for,
1-J.U;;:J'J/ftUI.;JJJl'I'A (01.06)
for Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass
on Surface, Specification for, A918 (01.06)
Zinc-coated steel wi.Jre--sr.leciitlcaticrms
Metallic-Coated Carbon
A121 (01.06)
Metallic-Coated Steel Smooth Fence and Trellis
Wire, Specification for, (01.06)
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire Rope and Fittings for Highway
Guardrail, Specification for, A741 (01.06)
1ncotal.w ..,-'-'uatc;u, Steel-Woven Wire Fence Fabric, Specification
Metal--Arc-Welded Steel Pipe for Use With High-Pressure Trans-
Pipe, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and
for, A134 (01.01)
Pipe, Zinc-Coated
Fence Specification
tion for, A589/A589M (01.01)
for, A790/A790M (01.01)
and Welded Steel for Low-Temperature Service,
SpecllH:atH:m for, (01.01)
and Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless
A312/A312M (01.01)
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe, Sped-
for, A813/A813M (01.01)
cation for, A1006/A1006M (01.01)
A1005/A1005M (01.01)
tion for, A865/A865M (01.01)
A1053/A1053M (01.01)
Pipe Specification for, A 733 (01.01)
Welded and Steel Pipe Piles, Specification for,
A252 (01.01)
Welded steel plate/sheet/strip-specifications
A242/A242M (01.04)
A514/A514M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Alloy Steel, Double-Normalized and Tem-
pered 9 % Specification for, A353/A353M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-
Tensile for, A285/A285M (01.04)
Pressure Vessel Steel, Manganese-Titanium for
A562/A562M
for Moderate- and Lower-
for,
Cleats, Hom for,
Tube, Practice for, F1076 (0U)7)
Fabricated Line Strainers (Above 150 psig and
Spe:c1h1:at11Cm for, F1200 (01.07)
Pipe,
Fence
1885
Welded steel tube-specifications
F1455 (01.07)
F1145 (01.07)
Welded steel shipbuilding materials-specifications
F1199 (01.07)
A500/A500M (01.01)
Structural with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
for, A847/A847M (01.01)
Carbon Steel and
Speciti,:atil)D for, (01.01)
Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese
Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes, Specification for.,
A178/A178M (01.01)
A1016/A1016M (01.01)
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength
Structural Tubing, Specification for, A618/A618M
tion for, A423/A423M (01.01)
A632 (01.01)
A270/A270M (01.01)
A334/A334M (01.01)
A268/ A268M (01.01)
Seamless and Welded Ferritic, Austenitic and
Condenser and Heat Exchanger Tubes With
Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel
for General Service, Specification for, A789/A789M
Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or High-Strength 1 ,n,N-FUHl,v.
for Structural Use, Specification for, 1\.:J":::JJ.l\.::l"::;:)J.n
UNS Tl1350 (bearing steel)
v
Vacuum-arc remelt (VAR) process
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Low
and Restricted Sulfur for Improved Weldabthty, Formab1hty,
Vacuum seals/sealing
for, F1511 (01.07)
Vacuum testing
Vacuum treated steel forgings-specifications
Sa Alloy steel forgings-specifications
A508/A508M (01.05)
A940/A940M (01.05)
tion for, A469/A469M (01.05)
Valve chests
A356/A356M (01.02)
Valves
Sa Steel valves-specifications
Valves-marine vessels
F1793 (01.07)
F1337 (01.07)
for, F1985 (01.07)
F1565 (01.07)
Valve springs
See Steel springs (valve)-specifications
Valve stem
tion for, F2191 (01.07)
Vanadium alloying additives
Ferrovanadium, Specification for, A102 (01.02)
1882
Vanadium alloy steel
A1018/A1018M (01.03)
Vapor degreasing
Vapor phase analysis/processing-atmospheric
Vapor transmission
A135/A135M (01.01)
Vehicular underpasses
A761/A761M (01.06)
. .
Determining and Reporting the Berthmg Energy and ReactiOn of
Veneer
See Wood products
Ventilation materials/applications (shipboard)
Vertical sliding watertight door assemblies
F1196 (01.07)
F1197 (01.07)
Vessel (systems/subsystems/equipment)
See Marine systems/subsystems/equipment
Vibration test
Videoborescoping . . .
Videoborescoping of Tubular Products for Samtary ApplicatiOns,
Guide for, A1015 (01.01)
Video displays .
Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Eqmpment, and
F1337 (01.07)
Vinyl chloride polymers
F1331 (01.07)
Vinyl-PVC-coated steel wire fabric . .
Vinyl-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Remforcement, Speci-
Visible liquid penetrant testing
See Liquid penetration
Visual classification
Visual displays .
Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Eqmpment, and
F1337 (01.07)
Visual examination-steel
A896/A896M (01.06)
A641/A641M (01.06)
Zinc-5% Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Carbon Steel
Ground Wire Strand, Specification for, A925 (01.06)
tion for, A810 (01.06)
A1060/A1060M (01.04)
Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel Wire Structural Strand,
A392 (01.06)
Zinc-Coated Steel Strand for Messenger Support of Figure 8
A603 (01.06)
Zinc coatings-specifications
1889
Zoned fire detection systems
Zinc coatings
Zinc Alloy Thermo-Diffusion Coatings (TDC) on Steel Fasteners,
A1059/A1059M (01.06)
Zinc electrodeposited coatings-specifications
fication for, Fl137 (01.08)
A653/ A653M (01.06)
Specification for, Fl136/Fl136M (01.08)
Zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coatings
Zinc phosphate (ZnP) coatings
Zinc removal
for, F1330 (01.07)
Zoned fire detection systems
A554 (01.01)
Welded steel wire--specifications
Sa Steel wire (concrete reinforcement applications)-
specifications
A1022/A1022M (01.04)
A510/A510M (01.03)
ric), Specification for, A 740 (01.06)
Steel \Velded Wire Reinforcemenl, Deformed, for Concrete,
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete, Specifica-
tion for, A185/A185M (01.04)
for, A974 (01.06)
A1060/A1060M (01.04)
Welded wire
Weld filler metal (UNS) numbering system
Welding electrode (UNS) numbering system
Welding/welds (pressure vessels)
A1041/A1041M (01.04)
Weldless steel chain
Weldless steel wire strand
Uncoated, Weldless, 2- and 3-Wire Steel Strand for Prestressed
Concrete, Specification for, A910/A910M (01.04)
Wet abrasion resistance
Wet magnetic particle examination
Wheel bearing grease
See Lubricating grease
Whelps
White iron castings
White mineral oil
See Mineral oils
Wick packing material
F2087 (01.07)
Wide area network (WAN)
for, F1756 (01.07)
Wildcats (for ship anchor chains)
Winch
Winding mesh (for steel pipe)
tion for, A810 (01.06)
Winding steel wire.
Sa Steel wire
A905 (01.03)
Windlass
Windows/window assemblies-specifications
See Doorsidoor assembiies-specifications
Wingwalls
A857/A857M (01.04)
Wire
Wire and cable
tice for, F1883 (01.07)
Wire coating
Wire rod (steel)
Wire rope
A931 (01.03)
Wire rope-specifications
Carbon Steel Wire for Wire Rope, Specification for,
A1007 (01.03)
cation for, A1023/A1023M (01.03)
A603 (01.06)
Wooden fencing materials
1886
F537 (01.06)
Wood products
of, F547 (01.08)
Wood products (structural)
F1575 (01.08)
of, F547 (01.08)
Wood screws
See Steel screws-specifications
Working zone
A991/A991M (01.03)
Workmanship
ture, Outfitting, and Coatings, Pl'actice for, F2016 (01.07)
Workplace health and safety training
See Health hazards
Workspace design/layout
Sa Design-ship construction
F1337 (01.07)
Woven steel wire fabric
Wrought austenitic stainless steel pipe
See Austenitic stainless steel pipe-specifications
Wrought carbon steel
A1040 (01.05)
Wrought duplex stainless steel
A923 (01.03)
Wrought nonferrous metals and alloys
See Nonferrous metals/alloys
Wrought steel-specifications
A915/A915M (01.02)
A504/A504M (01.05)
Wrought steel fittings-specifications
Sa Steel fittings-specifications
A420/A420M (01.01)
A234/A234M (01.01)
for, A403/A403M (01.01)
Wrought High-Strength Ferri tic Steel Butt-Welding Fittings,
Wrought steel forgings
Sa Carbon steel forgings-specifications
tion for, A909/A909M (01.05)
Wrought steel pipe
rial) (01.01)
"W" shapes
1887
X
X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS)
See Spectroscopy-X-ray fluorescence (XRF)
XRF (X-ray fluorescence)-metals/alloys
y
Yellow brass
F467 (01.08)
Yield
F1575 (01.08)
Yield strength and yield point
Flanged Steel U-Channel Posts, Specification for, A1075 (01.05)
tions for, A370 (01.01, 01.02, 01.03, 01.04, 01.05)
A1077/A1077M (01.04)
z
Zig-zag upholstery springs
See Steel springs---specifications
Zinc
F2833 (01.08)
for, F1330 (01.07)
Zinc and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars, Specifica-
tion for, A1055/A1055M (01.04)
Zinc-specifications
Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applica
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Nickel Alloy Coated by the Electrolytic Proces
for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mas:
Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel
Zinc alloys
Hot-Dip Process, Specification for, A1046/A1046M (01.0
Zinc Alloy Thermo-Diffusion Coatings (TDC) on Steel Fastener
A1059/A1059M (01.06)
Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surfa
Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applic

01 07-2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

01 07-2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

01 07-2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNUAL BOOK OF

for Use With Dissimilar DWV

You might also like